This material was created by the Text Creation Partnership in partnership with ProQuest's Early English Books Online, Gale Cengage's Eighteenth Century Collections Online, and Readex's Evans Early American Imprints.
CONTAINING A DESCRIPTION OF THE Places next the North-Pole; AS ALSO OF Muscovy, Poland, Sweden, Denmark, And their several Dependances.
WITH A General Introduction to Geography, and a Large Index, containing the Longitudes and Latitudes of all the particular Places, thereby directing the Reader to find them readily in the several Maps.
[printer's or publisher's device]
OXFORD, Printed at the
THEATER, for
MOSES PITT at the
Angel in St.
Pauls-Church-Yard,
London. MDCLXXX.
THE Reasons why I presume to prefix Your Majesty's Name to this Work, tho perhaps not sufficient to justifie my boldness, yet I hope may be so considerable as to obtain my pardon. This seems, in many respects, to be a new Undertaking, and the greatest for Charge and Hazard that hath ever in this nature been adventur'd upon by any of Your Subjects, and therefore stands in need of more then ordinary Patronage and Encouragement; which I cannot rationally hope from any other; For Your Majesty doth not only understand and delight in these Knowledges, but have been also at great Expences to promote, direct, and assist further Discoveries. And except care be
[Page]taken to preserve what is already found out, all the Advantage that should arise from the Dangers of the Seaman, and the Bounty of the Prince, will determine with the Expedition; and the next Age is to begin again, as if no advance had bin acquir'd. I add also, That if other Princes had bin as industrious as Your Majesty, and Your Subjects (who, to omit smaller particulars, first Discover'd the greatest part of all the Northern Regions of Europe, Asia, and America, and first Compass'd the World), this Atlas would have bin more satisfactory, and the Science better completed. The reproch also of the sloth, negligence, or what worse, of Mankind (that in so many thousand years know not, as yet, the few Leagues of their own habitation) would have bin avoided. However, as there is in this Work care taken to reduce into one body all that is hitherto known of the habitable Earth, and secure it from Oblivion: So I hope it may perpetuate the memory of Your Majesty's Patronage, and testifie the Duty of
Your Majesty's most Obedient and Loyal Subject,
MOSES PITT.
THAT whereas
Moses Pitt (of
London, Bookseller) being Encouraged by His Most Sacred Majesty, his Royal Highness the Duke of
York, his Higness Prince
Rupert, both the Universities, the Royal Society, and divers others, the Nobility, Gentry, and Learned men of this Nation, to undertake the Printing of an Accurate Description of the World; and resolving to proceed with all convenient diligence, for the more effectual carrying on thereof, makes these following Offers:
I. He the said
Moses Pitt having the advantage of making use of divers Plates already Grav'd, but more especially of those of
Janssons Atlas, doth design by renewing and regulating divers of them, and by adding many new Plates, together with new Descriptions throughout, to Print a compleat Collection of Maps, Tables, or Delineations of the Heavens, Earth, and Seas, with their several parts, divisions, and names, ancient and modern, in such manner, that all the Maps shall have the same situation of North and South; and all things shall be as exactly and particularly describ'd, as can be done by the help of all the Maps and Delineations already extant in Print, and of as many others as can be procured, of several things and places formerly but imperfectly described; as also of divers late and new discoveries of parts heretofore unknown, or not taken notice of as yet in any Maps.
II. To every Map shall be adjoined an explanation of the most observable matters and histories of the places therein contained; wherein is intended that this Work shall exceed all that have preceded; as also an Alphabetical Index to be added at the end of each Volume, with directions for the speedy finding them in their respective Maps.
III. He will Print the whole Work in as good Paper and Character as any of those already Printed by
Bleau, Jansson, Sanson, or any other.
IV. Whereas the Atlas's of
Bleau and
Jansson are usually comprehended in Eleven Volumes in Folio, in all the Languages hitherto; It is intended that this Atlas in the
English Tongue, shall be printed in Eleven Volumes likewise, each Volume to be sold to the Subscribers at the rate of Forty shillings in Quires. But if those Gentlemen that are concerned in the management of it, shall think fit to contrive it in fewer Volumes, it shall still be at the rate of Forty shillings a Volume; and each Volume both in number of Maps and Descriptions, shall not consist of less then fifty-five sheet Maps and fifty-five printed sheets of Tables and Descriptions, one with the other according to the judgment of the Directors.
V. He doth also promise to deliver to the Subscribers the several Volumes as they shall be compleated and finished, they paying their Forty shillings at the time of their subscribing, which is to be before the four and twentieth day of
July, 1678; Forty shillings more at the delivery of the First Volume, Forty shillings at the delivery of the Second Volume, and the same sum to be paid upon delivery of each of the other Volumes successively, only the two last to be deliver'd at twenty shillings a Volume; for which several sums aforesaid, the said
Moses Pitt will give his Receipt under his own Hand and Seal, with two Witnesses thereunto, with an engagement to deliver to the Subscribers or their Assigns, at his Shop in St.
Pauls Church-yard, they making good their Subscriptions, the several Volumes as they shall be printed, according to the plain meaning of these Proposals.
VI. No Volume shall be sold singly to any Gentleman whatever, except the Subscribers (by the Bookseller
Moses Pitt) under Five and fifty shillings in Quires; neither shall any Volume be deliver'd to any person whatsoever, before all the Subscribers have theirs, provided they send for them within one month after notice given in the
Gazette of the finishing of every Volume.
VII. The first Volume begins with the North-Pole, and the places and Countries next unto it, before which is to be added an Introduction to Geography, such as shall be advised by the persons after-named, together with a Map of the Terrestrial Globe, and Maps of the greater Divisions or Parts of the Earth. This Volume is intended to be compleated before the four and twentieth day of the next ensuing
March. The next Volume designed, is that which contains the
Low Countries and West part of
Germany, where hath lately been, and still is the scene of the greatest actions now on foot, intended to be compleated within six months after the said four and twentieth day of
March. The said time proportionably allow'd for the compleating of all the rest; unless it be judged necessary by the Directors, that a longer time be allow'd for some of the Volumes.
VIII. Whosoever shall subscribe for ten compleat Books, shall for the same price have eleven compleat Books in Quires deliver'd to him.
IX. Because several Gentlemen do complain that they have been deceived by several Proposers in this nature, therefore for the punctual performance of what is here undertaken, the Bookseller
Moses Pitt, has already given sufficient Security to Sir
Joseph Williamson, one of his Majesties Principal Secretaries of State, and President of the
Royal Society, for performance of his Engagement and Proposals.
X. It is requested, that every Subscriber to this great Undertaking, would be pleased to set down the County and place of his Habitation, together with directions how to send to him, to the end that notice may be given him according as the Work goes forwaad.
WHereas his most Sacred Majesty has been Graciously pleased, for the promoting of this Design, to permit that his Collections of Maps and Descriptions of Countries may be perused, that such of them as have not yet been published, and are thought proper for this work, may be taken into it; and whereas his Royal Highness, and his Highness Prince
Rupert, have been also pleased to promise the same favour; and the like has been done by the Right Honorable
[Page]Sir
Joseph Williamson, one of his Majesties Principal Secretaries of State, and President of the Royal Society; and also by the most learned Dr.
Isaac Vossius, who is pleased to communicate his most copious and exquisite Collections; and it is hoped that the same will be done by several other persons of Honour and Quality; therefore it is humbly desired, that all Gentlemen, who have any particular Maps or Relations of new Discoveries, or any more perfect descriptions of places already known, would be pleased to send the same to the said
Moses Pitt, who will give sufficient security for the safe return of the same unprejudiced, and if they shall be thought proper (by the persons hereafter mentioned) to be inserted, he will take care that it shall be done, and that the obligation shall be thankfully acknowledged in such manner as shall be to their own best satisfaction.
May 3, 1678.
WE whose names are here subscribed, not doubting but that this Work will be of great Use, and for the Honour of the Nation, and being desired by
Moses Pitt, to give him our Assistance, that he may be the better enabled to perform it, do promise that we will from time to time, at spare hours, both give our Advice for the carrying on of the Work; and further, since he offers to refer himself to us in divers of his Proposals, we will observe how he makes them good, and give an account thereof to Sir
Joseph Williamson, President of the
Royal Society, or to the President of the said Society for the time being:
Chr. Wren
Isaac Vossius.
John Pell.
W. Lloyd.
Tho. Gale.
Rob. Hook.
UPon perusing these preceding Proposals, we whose Names are underwritten, well approving and highly commending this Design of the said
Moses Pitt, do for his encouragement not only subscribe our selves for one or more Copies of the said Book, but also do recommend so Noble and Useful a Design to the rest of the Nobility and Gentry throughout his Majesties Dominions.
The
KING'S most Excellent Majesty.
The
QUEEN'S Majesty.
His Royal Highness the Duke of
YORK.
Her Royal Highness the Dutchess of
YORK.
Her Highness the Lady
ANN.
His Highness
CHARLES-LEWIS Elector Palatine of the
RHINE.
His Highness Prince RUPERT.
JAMES late Lord Archbishop of St. Andrews.
ALEXANDER Ld. Archbishop of St. Andrews.
ARTHUR Earl of Anglesey, Lord Privy Seal.
CHARLES Duke of Albemarlc, Captain of the King's Guards.
HENRY Earl of Arlington, Lord Chamberlain of His Majesty's Houshold.
HENRY HOWARD Earl of Arundel.
ROBERT Earl of Ailesbury.
ARCH. Earl of Argyll.
HENRY Lord Arundel, Baron of Warder, Count of the Sacred Empire.
Robert Abbot.
John Adams of the Inner Temple.
Richard Adams M. A.
William Addams
Esq of Logdon in Shropsh.
Henry Aldrich, Student of Ch. Ch. Oxon.
William Aldworrh
Esq
Will. Allen, of Much-Hadham in Hertfordsh.
Richard Allestree D. D. Provost of Eaton.
William Allestree
Esq of Walton in Darbysh.
Jo. Alport
Esq
Alexander Andersone
Esq
Tho. Andrew
Esq of Harlestone in North.
Sir Peter Apsley.
Thomas Archer
Esq
Thomas Arundel, Merchant of London.
Elias Ashmole
Esq
Sir Ralph Ashton Bar. of Middleton in Lanc.
William Ashurst
Esq London.
Sir Jac. Astley Bar. of Melton Norfolk.
John Ayde
Esq
Philip Ayres
Esq
JOHN Earl of Bridgwater, High Steward of the University of Oxon.
JOHN Earl of Bath, Grome of the Stole to His Majesty.
RICHARD Earl of Burlington.
CHARLES Beauclair Earl of Burford.
GEORGE Earl of Berkley.
COLIN Earl of Balcares.
VVILLIAM Viconnt Brouncker.
PETER Lord Bishop of Bath and Wells.
JOHN Lord Bellasyse, Baron of Worlaby.
CHARLES Lord Berkley of Straton.
JOHN Lord Brackley.
ROBERT Boyle
Esq
Francis Baber
Esq
Edward Backwell
Esq of London.
Robert Baird
Esq
Henry Baker
Esq
Henry Ball
Esq
William Ball
Esq of Grays-Inn.
Robert Band
Esq
Caleb Banks
Esq of Aylesford in Kent.
Thomas Barrow, Citizen of London.
Edward Bartlet Jun. of Oxford.
Sir William Basset, of Somersetshire.
Ralph Bathurst M. D. Dean of Wells, and President of Trinity Coll. Oxon.
Benjamin Bathurst
Esq Deputy-Governor of the African Company, under his R. Highness.
Edw. Bathurst, Fellow of Trinity Coll. Camb.
Bartholomew Beal
Esq of Buckinghamshire.
Richard Beal, Merchant in Hamburg.
John Bende
Esq
John Bennet
Esq
George Benson D. D. Dean of Hereford.
Francis Bernard, M. D. of London.
Sir Tho. Berney Bar. of Bark-Hall in Norf.
Hen. Beeston L. L. D. VVarden of New C. Ox.
Sir John Berry, Capt. of the Leopard.
Thomas Beverly
Esq
Stewart Bickerstaff
Esq of Wilderness in Kent.
Leon. Bilson
Esq of Mapledurham in Hansh.
Sir John Blande Bar. of Yorkshire.
William Blathwait
Esq
John Bleau of Amsterdam, (whose Father published a Latin Atlas).
Thomas Blofeld of Norfolk.
Thomas Blomer, D. D.
Charles Blount
Esq
Christopher Boon, Merchant.
John Boon
Esq of Mount Boon in Devonsh.
Sir Wil. Boreman, Clerk of the Green Cloth.
Sir Oliver Boteler Bar. of Kent.
Tho. Boteler, Fellow of Trinity Col. Camb.
Edward Bouuerie, Merchant in Durham.
Will. Bowes
Esq of Stratelam.
Robert Brady M. D. Master of Gonvil and Caius Coll. Cambridg.
John Breedon
Esq of Pangbourn in Barksh.
William Bridgman
Esq
Robert Briscoe, Citizen of London.
Edward Browne M. D. London.
Peter Brown, of Langley Kent.
Thomas Brown, Bookseller of Edinborough, in Scotland.
Rich. Bulkeley
Esq of Old Bawne in the County of Dublin in Ireland.
John Bullingham, of Ketton in Rutland.
Gilb. Burnet P. D. of the Rolles in London.
William Burnet M. D.
Nath. Burr, Merchant of Amsterdam.
Arthur Bury D. D. Rector of Exeter Coll. Oxon.
WILLIAM Lord Archbishop of Canterbury.
HENRY Earl of Clarendon.
JOHN Earl of Caithness.
ROGER Earl of Castlemain.
ROBERT Lord Vicount Cholmondely.
JOHN Lord Bishop of Chester.
GEORGE Lord Coventry.
CHARLES Lord Cornwallis.
Sir HENRY Capell, Knight of the Bath.
Sir GEORGE Carteret, late Vice-Chamberlain of His Majesty's Houshold.
Sir ROBERT Clayton Lord Mayor of Lond.
Jacob Callaber, Merchant of Amsterdam.
Sir Henry Calverley.
Colleges and Halls in Cambridg
which have Subscribed, are
Christ. Coll. Dr. R. Cudworth Mr.
Clare Hall Dr. Sam. Blith Mr.
Corpus Xti. Coll. Dr. J. Spencer Mr.
Emanuel Coll. Dr. Tho. Holbech Mr.
Gonville and Caius Coll. Dr. R. Brady Mr.
Jesus Coll. Dr Saiwel Mr.
St. Johns Coll. Dr. Gower Mr.
Katherine Hall Dr. J. Eachard Mr. and Vice-Chancellor.
Kings Coll. Sr. Tho. Page Provost.
Magdalen Coll. Dr. Peachel Mr.
Pembrok Hall Dr. Nath. Coga Mr.
St. Peters Coll. Dr. Beaumont Mr.
Queens Coll. Dr. Henry James Mr.
Sidney-Sussex Coll. Dr. Minshul Mr.
Trinity Coll. Dr. North Mr.
Dean and Chapter of Canterbury.
John Castillion D. D. Dean of Rochester.
Sir John Castleton Bar.
Thomas Chalmers
Esq
Thomas Chambers
Esq
John Chase
Esq Apothecary to His Majesty.
Robert Chase.
Thomas Cheek
Esq Lieutenant of the Tower.
Knightley Chetwodd, Fellow of Kings Coll. Cambridg.
Walter Chetwynd
Esq of Ingeste.
Sir John Chichly, Commiss. of the Ordinance.
Francis Cholmondeley
Esq of Cheshire.
Sir Hugh Cholmeley, alias Cholmondeley, Bar.
Chaloner Chute
Esq
Sir Thomas Clargis.
Samuel Clarke
Esq of Snaylwel in the County of Cambridg.
Lawrence Clayton
Esq
Sir Thomas Clayton, Warden of Merton Coll. Oxon.
George Clifford Merchant in Amsterdam.
Chr. Clitherow
Esq of Rislip in Middlesex.
Tho. Clitherow
Esq of Pinner in Middlesex.
Sir Thomas Clutterbuck.
Duthlerus Cluverius Slesvicensis.
Mark Cocky Merchant in Amsterdam.
Rich. Coffin
Esq of Portledge in Devonsh.
Thomas Cole.
Sir John Coell, Master of Chancery.
Richard Colinge
Esq
Charles-Dutton Colt
Esq
Harry-Dutton Colt
Esq
William-Dutton Colt
Esq
Daniel Colwall
Esq of London.
Ja. Compton
Esq
John Cony
Esq of Rochester.
Tho. Cook
Esq of Hadly in Suffolk.
Sir John Corbet Bar. of Longnor in Shropsh.
Sir Vincent Corbet Bar. of Acton-Reynold in Shropsh.
John Corrance
Esq of Suffolk.
Mark Cottle
Esq Register of the Prerogative Court.
Sir Ch. Cotterel, Master of the Ceremonies.
Sir Robert Cotton Kt. Bar. of Cheshire.
Sir John Covert Kt Bar.
Joseph Cox, for the Library of Winton.
Richard Cox
Esq
Edward Cranfeild
Esq
Sir Cesar Cranmer.
Henry Crispe
Esq Comon Serjeant of London.
John Cudworth, Citizen of London.
Sir Thomas Cullum, of Horsted-place in Suffolk.
HENEAGE Finch, Baron of Daventry, Lord High Chancellor of England.
COSMOGRAPHY is a general description of the whole World,
The Intention of the whole Work. consisting of Heaven and Earth: of both which an account is intended to be given in this Atlas; that of the Heavens is reserv'd to a peculiar Volume. It being (as we conceive) of greater necessity, that we begin with that of the Earth. And first of this great Globe in general; the description whereof belongs to
Geography; as that of particular Regions and Countries is called
Chorography, which is contained in their peculiar Maps. Nor shall we omit, such
Topographical descriptions, or the knowledg of lesser places, as Cities, Rivers, Mountains,
&c. where advantage may be to the Reader. Now this Globe, which we call of the Earth, consisteth of Land and Water, or Seas; the description of those is properly nam'd
Hydrography, which sets forth the superficies of the Seas, and mouths of greater Rivers, the Havens, Rocks, Shallows, Creeks, and such other considerations as concern Navigation; to this also an entire Volume in this Edition of an Atlas, is designed. And because that of ancient times, the divisions and boundaries of Kingdoms and Countries were very much divers from those at present; to avoid confusion, which must needs happen by treating in the same place of things so different, it is thought necessary to reserve the ancient Geography to a particular Tome, to be put forth, with the rest, in its due time. Thus you have an account of what is intended in the Edition of this Great Work.
But it is first necessary to explain such terms, and lay such general grounds as are of use thro all the Volumes; which is the subject of this Preface, or Introduction.
First then it is to be noted,
Of the Globe of the Earth. that the Earth and Water make but one body, the figure whereof is round, and therefore is best and most naturally represented by those we call Globes; tho Maps also, or plain Figures, if carefully drawn, are sufficiently exact. This proposition, tho it might be supposed rationally enough, as now granted by all learned men; yet may it be evidently proved, both from Celestial and Terrestrial appearances; whereof an account and reason may easily be given by this figure, and not by any other. The Sun and the Stars rise sooner to them who live Eastwardly, then they do to us; which could not be if the whole face of the Earth were plain. 2. To those who live more or less Northward, the Pole is more or less elevated; for those inhabitants of
Iseland, Lapland, &c. who live about a thousand miles more Northward then we do, see the Pole-star fifteen degrees higher then we can. And those, who travel hence towards those Countries, do find that this variation is made gradually, altering about a degree and a half at the end of every hundred miles; which could not be, except the body on which they moved were Spherical. 3. The Shadow which the Earth casteth upon the Moon, when she is partially eclipsed, is seen to be circular; and therefore the body which causes it must be so too. To these we may add, that many Propositions in Astronomy, Geography, and Navigation are founded on this supposition, and when they are applyed to use they prove true, and succeed according to expectation; which certainly they would not always do, if the very foundation upon which they are built, were unsound. The same also is proved by plain sense and experiment, as well as by reason and consequence; for we perceive, that Ships which loose from their Harbours in calm weather, disappear gradually, first their Hulks, then their Sails, and after a few miles their highest Masts; the natural convexity of the water interposing betwixt them and our sight. Several also of our Countrymen and Neighbours have sailed round about this Globe, loosing hence Westwardly, and returning again fromwards the East. From which, and other Navigations, we may conclude, not only that naturally no part of the Ocean is higher then another; but also that we may sail from any part to any part of the superficies of the Ocean; and that every Continent hath Sea about it, and is indeed but a greater Island.
The controversie about the situation of this Globe, whether it stand still in the midst,
Of the situation of the Earth. and as it were center, of the world, as the ancients generally opined; or whether it move upon its own axis, and about the Sun as the center; besides that it is not so much to our purpose in this as in the Volume of the Heavens, the Maps and Descriptions being the same in both ways, and that the learned are not come to any issue in it, nor have we any thing to add to the common and vulgar probable arguments only, we shall omit.
The parts of this Globe are naturally separated one from another by Seas, ledges of Mountains, Rivers, Desarts, and the like. Which are very opportune for the distinction of Nations, Kingdoms, and Governments.
In the beginning of the Creation,
Of the Waters in this Globe. the Waters being lighter then the Earth, accordingly overspread and compassed it to some considerable
[Page 2]height; but whether there was in the beginning a greater quantity of Earth or Water created is an undeterminable curiosity. On the third day the Almighty Creator separated them, by causing the Waters to sink into the deep and open cavities of the Earth; where by the height and strength of the shores they are restrained (as in a Vessel) from returning to overflow and drown the dry land. But if the shores be weak (as many times it happeneth) the water breaketh thro, and overwhelmeth so much of the dry land, till it meet with an obstacle strong enough to coerce it. From hence some do imagine, that the Mountains and Valleys were then also formed, the Earth being before equal and smooth, (which is very probable, in as much as the Scripture saith, that
the dry land then first appeared). Others also imagine, that the height of the highest Mountains equals the depth of the deepest Seas. Which indeed may be so, but is not evidently deduced from what hath been hitherto observed. It is more considerable what
Olearius mentions, that examining with an instrument the height of the waters of the
Caspian Sea, he found them level with the top of the bordering Mountains (p. 142, of his Travels) where he makes no doubt but that the Sea is higher then the Land. His experiment, supposing it truly made, if not to be solved by the greatness of the refraction, I know not what to say to it, as neither can I resolve,
Whether the Earth be in the center or middle of the whole world;
The place of the Earth. and that all heavy bodies descend to it as their proper place; which is the reason of its stability and unmoveableness, tho it seem to hang in the air. Or as others think, that heavy things descend to the Earth as by a magnetical virtue drawn to it from such a distance. But this opinion declares not how the Earth keeps its place in the Air. Or as others say, that the Earth is but a shell of no great thickness, (perhaps of three or four miles), and within it is quite hollow; by which means the weight is so inconsiderable, that it is susteined in the Air, as lighter bodies are in the Water; and that this cavity is the place of punishment for wicked Angels and men.
The parts of the Ocean receive different names,
The parts of the Ocean. according to their greatness, or their shoes.
Fretum (a Strait) is a narrow Sea contain'd between two opposite, but not much distant, shores; and giving opportunity of passing from one Sea to another, as the Straits of
Gibralter, of
Magellan, Davis, the
Sound in
Denmark, &c. Sinus (a Bay) is a part of the Sea running up into the Land, and almost encompassed by the shore. If but a little one, 'tis called a Creek; if large, a Gulf. And in these are Havens, or stations for Ships, as Roads are in the open Sea, but defended from some winds. The vast body of the Sea is called the Ocean; and the Sea is ordinarily called some lesser part of it let into the Land by a Strait, as the
Mediterranean, Baltick Sea,
&c. A Lake is a large collection of waters enclosed within land; some of which have no known or visible communication with any Sea, as the
Mare Caspium, Lacus Asphaltites, or Dead Sea. Others have Rivers running from them, or thro them, as the
Lacus Lemanus, Benacus, &c. Rivers are made up by Brooks, these by Springs.
Of Springs and Fountains. So that their originals are from these Springs; but whence that water comes which supplies so many Springs, is somewhat dubious. 1. Some imagine great caverns in the Earth, which being very cold, condense the air into drops of water, and those being collected make a Spring. It is true indeed, that all, or most of the famous Caves, as
Ooky-hole, &c. in this Country, have Rivers in them of considerable bigness; but those seem not to be there generated, but to cross only the passage. And in others, such as that famous Cave, sometimes serving for the quartering of an Army, call'd
Cavola de Custoza, near
Vicenza, there are in many places continual droppings; but whether from coagulated air, or vapours, or from water draining thro the Earth, I know not. There are also little Pools made by such droppings; and some also that have fish in them; but very many such must go to the making up one small Spring. 2. Others attribute it to the great abysse mentioned in the Holy Scriptures; and doubtless he that made the world, best knows the frame and constitution of it; if that be his meaning, as that very learned man Mr.
Lydyat thinks he hath proved. There seems indeed to be water in all or most places within the Earth; but not in every place at an equal depth. Which water runs along in that bed, or vein of gravel, which lies sometimes higher and sometimes lower. Below this I never heard that any one hath digged; nor do I think it hardly possible to dig under it. Whence this water proceeds,
i. e. whether from the Sea or Rain, or concreated in it, is hard to affirm; only the Well-diggers do observe, that in this gravel also there is a current or stream of the water. Why this gravel lies unequally high, and how the water ascends in it, is a difficult question; which some solve, by saying that 'tis contained in the gravel, as the blood in the veins of an humane body, and moves with the like vital motion; others imagine, that because the gravel is an opener mass of bodies, not closely contiguous together, the water runs in them; and is forced into higher places, by some other causes, as by the motion of the Sea, violently impelling it in those narrow and crooked passages; but these being only conjectures, we must not enlarge too much upon them. 3. Most men think, that all Springs proceed from the Sea-water, dulcified by percolation thro the gravel or other convenient passages of the Earth. The difficulty that oppresseth this is, that it is not easie to imagine, how the Sea-water should rise to the tops of mountains; yet even there are often found Sea-plants naturally growing, which perswade many men of the truth of that opinion, tho they cannot justifie the manner. And there are also divers Lakes upon the highest hills amongst the
Alps (as particularly upon
Splugen) which notwithstanding the top of the water be frozen in winter, yet do Trouts and other fish live very well in them; which perswade the inhabitants that there is communication betwixt those Lakes and other fresh waters. 4. Others are of opinion, that the water that furnishes Springs is that of Rain or Snow, which comes from the clouds, and consists either of drops of Rains or of smaller Dew-drops, whereof many together make Rain. And these Clouds hanging commonly upon the hills, furnish them chiefly with moisture, which being reserved in Cisterns, or sometimes in mosses, break or spring forth where they find the easiest passage. Sometimes the summity of the hill is either a Lake or a Bog, and keeps the water, as in a Pond lined with Clay, till it come to such a height as it overflows. And this is the reason both of the continuance of Springs, and why there are so few in Plains, because the Rain-water that falleth there, goes down by the seams of the Earth, so deep that it cannot spring up again; nor are there mountains so near, as to supply them from their Caverns.
Whether any, or all of these opinions are false, I shall not determine; but it seems to me, that such
[Page 3]a quantity of water issueth by these Springs, that perhaps all these causes, and many more, will hardly be sufficient; considering that some particular Rivers,
v. g. Volga, vents (saith
Varenius) as much water in one year as the magnitude of the whole Earth amounts to. Or if not one (as some think they demonstrate), yet three or four, or as many as flow into the
Caspian Sea, discharge so much water as cannot well be imagined, except we acknowledge a circulation of water, not only by being rarified into vapours, and condensed again, but also in the bowels of the earth. To the conceiving whereof, perhaps it may somewhat conduce to be informed of the contents of this great Globe; at least so much of it, as is already discovered by the Miners and Well-diggers, tho not to any considerable depth,
i. e. of a very few fathoms. As the Air is the place of the generation of those we call Meteors, and the Water of Fowls, especially Fishes; so is this Earthly Globe, of Stones, Minerals, Salts, Bitumens, Petroleums, and divers sorts of earths. And they say, that as far as they have digged, they find it to consist of several sorts (or measures) of earth, stones,
&c. many times thinly spread one over another; yet none of them perfectly circular; but from the superficies of the Earth (whither in some place or other they reach) they
dip, or slope, the further they go, still descending deeper, as if a line drawn down upon their superfices, were part of a Spiral line. And this for the great benefit of mankind, that the same place may be supplied with variety of soils. Thro which measures, descend from the superficies of the Earth seams, like veins in an animal body, which convey the Rain-water that falls upon the Earth; and therefore in our Quarries of stone, these seams are fill'd with a very thin fine earth, for the easier descent of the water; neither is this descent in a streight line, but one line begins at some small distance from the ending of the upper; that more parts of the Earth may be water'd and fertilized by it, not only to the production of Plants,
&c. but also of Minerals, Stones, Coals,
&c. in the very Earth it self. And why may not also in great Rains part of this water descend lower to the gravel, as well as into the Coal-pits, Lead-Mines,
&c. Methinks therefore we may probably say, 1. That all those Springs which arise near the bottoms of hills, and all such as diminish much in dry weather, come from Rain-water, or melted Snow. 2. Such as arise in plains (of which there are not many) are furnished with the water in the gravel, which is supplied either out of the great Abysse (if it be not the Abysse it self, not unknown as it seems to
Seneca, Nimis (saith he)
ille oculis permittit, qui non credit esse in abscondito terrae, sinus maris vasti) or out of the Sea, discharging it self by this means into the bowels of the Earth. 3. From this water also are supplied the Wells and Pits, which in some Countries afford all the water they use; many of which also approach nearer the surface of the Earth in summer then winter, the greater heat of the Sun forcing them higher. 4. That it is not necessary that Salt-springs should bring that tincture from the Sea in wider channels, or pipes; because that there are great Mines of Salts of divers kinds, generated in the Earth, the solution of which may very well impregnate the water. But these are not so much to our purpose, but must be left to their particular Countries where they arise. It is most certain, that the most wise Creator made all things in number, weight, and measure; which proportions, tho we do not understand, yet we must needs admire him, who in the beginning established such a never-failing harmony.
Whether this Globe of Earth grow or not,
Of the growing of the Earth. is not much material to our purpose; for neither the growth or diminishing of it can be so great as to alter the usual measures or distances. Yet it may be rationally said, that in low, soft, and boggy places it doth grow; not only by the winds and rain, carrying down somewhat still into those parts, but also by the grass, weeds, and fog, which by the rain being flatted and beaten down in winter, do the next Spring send forth new shoots from the old roots, which in tract of time do raise the ground. And this seems to be the reason why in such earths we oftentimes find trees, which being cut down in those places where they formerly grew, and not carried away in good time, are at length grown over and cover'd with those weeds and herbs. In the bottom of a turff-pit (for this matter is not earth, but turff) they found not long ago, a small parcel of Coins upon an heap (perhaps they had been tied up in some matter that was putrified) of
Edward IV. as I judg by the face; and this was about eighteen foot deep. Which gives us some conjecture, how long at most that turff was a growing,
i. e. eighteen foot in two hundred years, [by the way also, there were a few years ago in the Forest of
Dean, after the Miners had wrought over a great cinder-heap, found divers Coins of Brass, fresh as when first minted, of
Tetricus, and some other of those Tyrants about the year 260, which gives some hint by whom, and at what time those Iron-mines were wrought]. Neither doth the dust, or small parts of Earth washed or blown from higher places, considerably diminish them, or fill up the Valleys, for then would they also thicken and in time fill up also the Sea, which seems to have been the opinion of
Polybius, who conceived, that because he saw the Black or
Euxin-Sea in his time to be so muddy and thick, it would in time, by still thickning, become firm land. But the Lord of
Busbeque, in his Ambassy to the Grand Seignior, about eighteen hundred years after
Polybius, found it exactly in the same condition as
Polybius had described it.
The superficies of the Earth is not equally nor perfectly round;
The figure of the Earth. yet are not the extuberances so great or considerable, as to hinder the whole Globe to be accounted round; the greatest height of the highest mountain making an insensible difference in the computation of the Diameter of the whole Earth. Now there is a rising or swelling of the Earth, which commonly begins by the Sea-shore, and encreaseth the further it reacheth in the Continent (besides that of the particular mountains) which seems to have been so order'd, to make room for the Sea and waters. Yet were not all mountains made at, or near, the birth of the world. Some have been even in our memory cast up by Earthquakes, as
Monte Novo in the Kingdom of
Naples, near
Pozzuolo. Others by the winds, heaping up the Sands together, which they say happens frequently in the great and sandy Desarts. But these are very few, and I suppose as easily blown asunder as brought together. However these deserve here no particular consideration. This rising of the Earth in large Continents, is doubtless very great, tho none either have, or will ever be at the trouble and charge to measure it; yet some estimation may be made by the length and swiftness of Rivers. It is commonly said, that a Ship is not able to sail against that stream whose declivity is one pace in an hundred; yet some declivity there must be, and (as they say) seldom is it
[Page 4]less then one in five hundred. Suppose then the
Nile, which runs in the greatest Continent (
Africk) which we know in the world; it disembogues into the
Mediterranean Sea, in 31 deg. of Northerly Latitude, and ariseth out of the Lake
Zaire, which is in 10 deg. (or as some say 14) of Southerly Latitude, in all 41 deg. which comes to about 2460 miles
English, if running streight, but because of its bendings, it may be well estimated 3000 miles, which (allowing two foot to a mile) comes to six thousand feet, if it move with as slow a motion as can be, but considering that it is a swift River (the mud not setling till it come to the Sea), and hath in it divers great Cataracts, the Lake of
Zaire must needs be much higher then the mouth of
Nilus. But the height of mountains is more certainly and easily known, and divers of them have been measured; as one of the highest hills betwixt
Yorkshire and
Lancashire (Pendle-hill) if I be not mis-informed, was not found to exceed half a mile in perpendicular height;
Olympus somewhat above a mile; and some others, as
El Pico in the Isle of
Teneriffe yet higher. But the certainty we know not. The manner of measuring and calculating is thus, which is much easier in such a mountain as
Teneriff or
Pendle-hill, being one peak or top standing in a plain, then in those
Juga or ledges of mountains which run thro and divide most of the great Continents of the world; whereof the highest may be still higher then the other.
[geometrical illustration to determine the height of a mountain]
Let b c d represent a mountain, whose height a c is thus found. Take two stations in a straight line from it; the first at b, not far from the foot, the other at e, a considerable distance from it; from each of these stations take the angles at the top b c a, e c a; then out of 90 subduct b c a, the remainder is the angle c b a, which also being subducted from 90, the remainder is the angle c b e. Therefore in the triangle c b e, we have one side e b (
viz. the distance of the two stations, which must be exactly measured) and all the angles, for c e b is the complement of the other two, to 180; then say,
As the sine of the angle e c b is to the side e b
So is the sine of the angle c e b to b c.
Having then in the rectangular triangle b c a one side b c, and all the angles, for a b c is the complement of b c a to 90, say then,
As the Radius is to the sine of b c a,
So is b c to c a the height.
By the Quadrat,
Divide 10000 by the number of parts cut at each station; then say, As the difference of the Quotients, is to the distance betwixt the statitions: So is 100 to the height.
This great Globe is not only divided into Land and Water;
Divisions of the Earth. but many other ways in respect to them. As some are Continents, which are great parts of Land without any Sea. Islands are small parts encompassed by water. Peninsula or Chersonesus, is a part of Land which would be called an Island, were it not for an Isthmus, or neck of land, which joins it to the Continent. A Mountain or Rock jutting out into the Sea, is called a Promontory, Cape, or Headland.
Again, the Ancients divided all they knew of the Earth into three parts,
Europe, Asia, and
Africa, of each of these in their several places; but another Hemisphere having been lately discovered, there is commonly added to these
America, as the fourth part. Others also name two more, the Lands under the North and South Poles; which indeed were not comprehended in the former division: yet because we know not whether there be Land, or only Sea (as under the North Pole seems to be) it is not expedient to account them distinct parts till better discovered. Our Mariners that went with design to pass under or near the North Pole, in their search of a passage to
China, and arrived as far as 82 deg. of Latitude, found nothing but some few Islands; the rest as they could see being, in the midst of Summer, nothing but Ice. Some do imagine, that the three parts of the habitable world received their division from the three Sons of
Noah; and
Cham indeed obtained
Africa, but
Japhet dwelt in the Tents or habitations of
Shem; tho in process of time his posterity seems to have peopled the greatest part of
Europe. The reason of the names we despair of knowing, they having been forgotten even in
Herodotus's time, there is no hopes now of retrieving them. See the discourse concerning the Map of
Europe.
Lastly, the parts of the Land before-mentioned,
The particular observations in the descriptions. are very opportune for the separating and distinguishing Countries, Nations, and Governments. The knowledge and consideration whereof is the chiefest and most useful design of this whole Work, and all others of the like nature. For it little conduceth, to know places, unless we be also informed, of what is contained, what actions performed, and what concerns our selves may have, in them. In those therefore we shall consider the names, situation, bounds of each Country, as also what Cities, Havens, Towns, Forts; likewise what Mountains, Valleys, Caves, Fountains, and other such remarkable and to us and our Country unusual things, as nature it self hath formed. To which shall be added, the condition and quality of the soil, and its productions, in order to the discovering what in every place abounds, and what therein may be communicated to other Countries, or what may probably be carried to them in order to trade. In every Nation also account shall be given of their original Language, Manners, Religion, Employments,
&c. that if any art or science useful to society be there eminent, it may be transferred into our own Country. Much more considerable are their Governments, Civil and Military, their Magistrates, Laws, Assemblies, Courts, Rewards and Punishments, and such like. Neither must we omit the manner of educating their youth in arts liberal and mechanick, taught in their Schools. Universities, Monasteries, Shops also, and the like. Their manner of providing for their poor of all sorts, either in Hospitals or Workhouses. Lastly, it will be expected, that we give an account of the History or actions and successes of each Nation, of their Princes, remarkable actions,
&c. And these heads take in the sum of what is endeavoured as the principal intention in this Work.
Of the Artificial Division of the Earth, and what
[...] depends hereupon.
THE Supreme Celestial Sphere (tho it has really no lines at all described upon it, yet)
[...] the benefit of our conceptions and expressi
[...], is supposed to be divided into several parts,
[...] imaginary Circles, which Artists have given
[...]gs and names unto. The Planes of these
[...]cles, being continued down to the inferior
[...]s and Earth, are conceived to divide them
[...] into the like parts. The chiefest of these
[...] eight; four great ones, which divide the
[...]vens and Earth into two equal parts; and
[...]nany lesser which divide them unequally. The
[...]at ones are the Horizon, Meridian, Equator, and
[...] Zodiac: The two former of which are va
[...]le, differing according to places; the two
[...]er are fixt, and the same in all places. The
[...]r ones are, the two Tropics, one of Cancer,
[...] other of Capricorn; with the two Polar
[...]les, one the Arctic or Northern, the other the
[...]rctic or Southern. These, and all Circles,
[...] divided into 360 parts, or Degrees; each of which Degrees is again subdivided into 60 Minutes; these again into 60 Seconds,
&c.
The Horizon (so call'd because it terminates our sight) is that great Circle in the Heavens,
Horizon. which divides the superior and visible, from the inferior and invisible Hemisphere, as in the Scheme hh. The two points, every way 90 Degrees distant from it, are its Poles; Z. N. The superior of which, being exactly over our heads, is our Zenith, or Vertical point; the inferior, which is diametrically opposite to it, our Nadir. So that our Horizon varieth (tho not sensibly) every step that we move. The Circles drawn from one of its Poles to the other, and cutting it at right angles, are Azimuths: Those lesser ones, parallel to it, are Almicanters. It is usually distinguish'd into Rational, which exactly divides the Heavens into two equal parts, because its center is the same with that of the Earth; and Sensible, which divides them unequally, because its center is at our eye. But the Earth having no sensible magnitude in respect of the superior Orbs, the distinction, in respect of them, is useless and impertinent.
[the divisions of the celestial sphere]
[...]he Meridian is a great Circle, passing thro
[...] the Poles of the World, and of the Hori
[...] PZ PN, it is so called, because when the
[...] is under it in the day time, it is noon; in
[...]ight time, it is midnight. Any two East
[...] West points have different Meridians; tho
[...]lobes and Maps they are generally described
[...] 10 degrees only, P 10 P, P 20 P,
&c.
[...]his Line, intersecting the Horizon at right
[...]es, is the foundation of its partition into
[...] oasts, call'd the Points of the Compass; from
[...]nce the Winds receive their denomination. For
[...] Line extended between the two intersections,
[...] the Meridian Line, points North and South;
[...] her intersecting it at right angles, points East
[...] West, which four are the Cardinal Winds.
[...] distance betwixt each of these being equally
[...]ded, gives four more; each of these 8 being
[...]n divided, gives 16; these again, so divided,
[...] which are distant from one another 11 deg.
[...]min. and thus named,
North.
North and by East
North North East
North East & by North
North East
North East and by East
East North East
East and by North
South.
South and by West
South South West
South West & by South
South West
South West and by West
West South West
West and by South
East
East and by South
East South East
South East and by East
South East
South East & by South
South South East
South and by East
West
West and by North
West North West
North West & by West
North West
North West & by North
North North West
North and by West
Some have subdivided each of these into two parts, and reckon'd 64; but that division is generally rejected, as being too nice for use. The
[Page 6]Line extended betwixt each of these, and its opposite, is that which Mariners call a Rumb, described by the Ship, following the direction of the Needle; so that if it sail towards any of the Cardinal points, it describes an are of a circle; if towards any other, a spiral line.
The Equator is a great Circle,
Equator. drawn at an equal distance from both Poles of the World EE. It is so called, because when the Sun enters into it (as it doth about the tenth of
March, and thirteenth of
September) it makes the days and nights equal, in all places of the world.
The Zodiac is a great Circle,
Zodiac. which cutteth the Equator obliquely, into two equal parts EcE; its greatest declination, or distance from it, is about 23 deg. 30 min. 'Tis so call'd from the 12 Signs that are in it,
Aries, Taurus, &c. each of which contains 30 deg. because that is the twelfth part of 360. The beginning of
Aries and
Libra are the Equinoctial points, and the Meridian drawn thro them is the Equinoctial Colure, PEP; as that thro the beginning of
Cancer and
Capricorn, is the Solstitial, PcP.
The Tropic of Cancer is a lesser Circle,
Tropics. described by that point of the Zodiac which is most distant from the Equator bcb. In this the Sun moveth, when it it has obtain'd its utmost Northern declination, which is about
June 11.
The Tropic of Capricorn, is that answerable to it, on the other side of the Equator; wherein the Sun moveth, when it has attain'd to its utmost Southern declination, dd; which is about
Dec. 12.
The Arctic and Antarctic Circles,
Polar Circles. are those little ones so far distant from the Poles of the World, as the Tropics are from the Equator, aa and ee; because they are described by the Poles of the Zodiac, which are distant from those of the World 23 deg. 30 min. Besides these four, we may imagine innumerable other little Circles, parallel to the Equator; such as in Globes and Maps are drawn every 10 deg. for the more ready observation of the Latitude of places, as in the Scheme 10 10, 20 20,
&c.
These 4 less Circles divide the Earth into 5 parts,
Zones. which are call'd Zones. But this partition was of more note amongst the Ancients then now it is; tho it could never be of any considerable use; for to describe the situation of a Country only by saying that it was in such or such a Zone, is too wide a direction to find it out. The two Frigid ones, comprehended within the Polar Circles, they thought unhabitable, by reason of their extreme cold and darkness; as also they did the Torrid one, betwixt the Tropics, by reason of its excevssie heat: So that the two Temperate ones, betwixt the Polar Circles and the Tropics, are only left to be inhabited. But these mistakes have long since, by the improvement of Navigation and Merchandizing, been discovered; for even in the midst of the Torrid Zone, under the Equator, are now well known to lye
Ethiopia, Sumatra, and many Islands, as populous and fruitful as any in the Temperate ones. Nor are they so much hotter then we, as they are nearer the Sun; because the length of their nights (being always about twelve hours), the frequency of their rain, and the briskness and constancy of their wind, doth extraordinarily temperate the heat, which else would extremely infest them. And tho nothing of the Southern Frigid Zone be yet discover'd, yet much which lyeth within the Northern is, as
Greenland, Lapland, and divers other places, which are spoken of in the beginning of this Volume. Which shews, that tho the other be unknown to us, yet it may, notwithstanding its cold, be inhabited as well as this. The inhabitants of these Frigid Zones are call'd
Periscii, because when the Sun by its annual motion is risen to them, it moves round about them without setting; and so casts their shadow towards every part of the Horizon. Those of the Temperate ones, are
Heteroscii, because their Noon shadows are always cast only one way, ours Northward, the others Southward. Those of the Torrid one, are
Amphiscii, because their Meridional Shadows are sometimes North, sometimes South.
Nor is the division of the Earth into Climes,
Climates. by lesser Circles parallel to the Equator, of much more use then the former; for by saying, that a Country lyeth somewhere within 8 deg. 25 min. of the Equator, where the longest day is above twelve hours, and less then twelve and an half (which is the first Clime), its situation is but little better described, then if we should say it was in the Torrid Zone. The like may be said of the rest of the 24 Climes, which are nothing else but a subdivision of the Zones into such unequal spaces, that the longest day in that part of it, which is next to the Equator, is shorter by half an hour then it is in the other part which is towards the Pole. So that look how many hours the longest day in any Country doth exceed twelve, the double of that is the number of the Clime where it lyeth; as, because in
England the longest day is about sixteen hours and an half, therefore it is in the ninth Clime, or eighteenth Parallel, for one of the other makes two of these. And thus we may reckon in the Southern, as well as our Northern Hemisphere, till we come to the beginning of the Frigid Zones, where the Climes end; for here the longest days being twenty-four hours,
i. e. the entire revolution of the Sun, they encrease so fast that they must be distinguished by the difference of weeks and months; as a degree and an half within the Polar Circles, the longest day is a month; three degrees and an half two months; six deg. 50 min. three months; 11 deg. 50 min. four months; 17 deg. 30. min. five months; 90 deg. six months. Those who inhabit the opposite points of the same Clime, have summer and winter together, but not day and night, and are called
Perioeci. Those who inhabit the same points of Climes equally distant from the Equator, have day and night, but not summer and winter together, and are called
Antoeci. The
Perioeci and
Antoeci therefore agree in neither, but are
Antipodes to each other, living under points diametrically opposite.
But the most exact, and now most usual description, of the situation of places, is by their Longitude and Latitude. The Latitude of any point, is its nearest distance from the Equator, as E 10, E 20,
&c. towards P. It is measured by the Arc of the Meridian intercepted betwixt them. This directs to the very Circle, under some part of which the place lies, and so gives a better account of its sitethen Zones and Climes do; therefore some formerly describ'd the situations of Countries by this only. But to render the direction compleat, 'tis necessary that the Longitude also be added unto it. This is the distance of the Meridian of the place from the first Meridian, to be numbred in the Equator, from 1 to 360, as in the Scheme E 10, 20,
&c. towards E. But where to fix this first, or great Meridian, Geographers could never yet well agree; from whence many confusions have been occasioned, and are still continued in this science, and will not be thorowly redress'd, till they concur in the determination of this point; which tho it may be fixt indifferently in any noted place, yet they have all thus far agreed, as to place it in some of the most Western parts of the Earth; because the Sun,
[Page 7]and the rest of the Planets, move by their proper motion, fromward the West towards the East.
Ptolemy, and other ancient Geographers, fixt it in
Hera, or
Junonia, which is one of the
Fortunate or
Canary Islands, and (as 'tis probable) that which now is called
Teneriff. Hence the
Arabians translated it about ten degrees Eastwardly. Some of our later Geographers transferr'd it to the
Azores, or
Insulae Flandricae; thinking that a Meridian drawn over these, did pass thorow the Poles towards which the Loadstone pointeth, as well as thorow those of the World; because here they observ'd no variation of the Needle. But they differ in assigning thorow which of these Isles it ought to be described. Some place it in St.
Michael, which is about 9 deg. more West then
Teneriff; because here they say the Compass varyeth least. Others say, that the variation is less in
Corvo, which lies about 6 deg. Weft of this,
i. e. 15 of
Teneriff, and therefore fix it here. But some of the latest, finding the great inconvenience that there is in having different Longitudes applied to the same place; and also experimenting a far greater variation in the
Azores then was pretended, have reduced it again to
Teneriffe, and suppose it describ'd over the top of
El Pico, or the
Peak; which being the most noted and accuminate mountain in the Western parts of the World, is better fitted for such a purpose, then any shore, or whole Island, can be; because it is not likely to be at all removed, as shores sometimes (by the encroachments of the Sea) for a good space are; and the top of it, being but of a very small compass, and as it were a point, hence Longitudes may be computed even to a minute, which from the forenamed Terms can scarce be done to a degree. From hence all the Longitudes in the Maps of this Atlas are reckon'd. And we wish, that in all the new ones, which shall be drawn henceforward, it may be so to; or at lest, that it may particularly be express'd in them, from what Meridian it is that they compute; that so the account of Longitudes may become more intelligible and useful then, for want of such direction, it commonly is in most of our Maps.
Having the Longitude and Latitude of any place given, to find it in the Map, reckon the Longitude among the Meridians, which commonly are described from the upper to the lower side thereof; and the Latitude among the Parallels, which are always drawn the contrary way, and where you see, or guess, that these two Lines intersect each other, is the place sought for.
The Latitude may be found out either in the day by the Sun,
How to find the Latitude. or in the night by the Stars. The elevation of the Equator above the Horizon, is the complement of the Latitude to 90 degrees, as may be collected from what has been said before. If therefore the height of the Sun be taken at noon, about the tenth day of
March, or twelfth of
September, and subducted from 90, the remainder is the Latitude. The same may be found at any other time of the year, if the distance of the Parallel, wherein the Sun moveth, from the Equator be first known; for this being added to, or subtracted from the Meridional altitude, according as the Sun that day is below, or above the Equinoctial, makes the case all one with the former. In the night the elevation of the Pole may easily be taken by the Pole-Star; and this is always equal to the Latitude of the place: for because under the Equator, where the Latitudes begin, both the Poles of the World are in the Horizon, therefore so far as we remove from thence towards either Pole, so much it must be elevated, that the distance between the Zenith and the Horizon may be 90 degrees. Or else, the Meridional altitude of any other Star, whose declination is known, may be observed, and the Latitude hence collected, after the same manner as from that of the Sun's.
But no such certain and easie method for the finding out the Longitudes hath yet been invented;
How to find the Longitude. tho very many Mathematicians, have long employed their wits in the search after it; being encouraged hereunto, not only by the apprehension of that great advantage and perfection which this Science, and Navigation, would receive from such a discovery; but also by several other great rewards which have been proposed to it. The principal means whereby it has been hitherto attempted, and whereby it seems most likely to be effected, is the observation of some one Celestial Appearance, at divers places. Such as are Eclipses, the entrances of the Moon into the Ecliptic, its Latitude or distance from the Ecliptic, its approximation to, or distance from, some fixt Star. The conjunction and opposition of
Jupiters Satellites, &c. for if the moment of time when any of these do happen, were exactly observed in any two distant places, the Longitude of the one from the other will be found out, by resolving the difference of time, that the appearance happens in one place sooner then the other, into degrees; allowing fifteen degrees for an hour, and fifteen minutes of a degree for a minute of an hour.
From the observation of the beginnings, middles, and ends of Eclipses (of the Moon especially) the Longitudes of places have hitherto for the most part been determined; as because the same Eclipse, which at
London was observed at twelve a Clock, began not at
Brandenburgh till one, hence 'twas collected, that this later City had fifteen degrees Longitude more then the other. This is one of the best methods that has yet been found out; and if all Artists, who are able, would be constant, and diligent in their observation of it, in such Countries where they are; and then free in publishing these their observations, we should after a while hereby know the exact situation, at lest, of all great Cities, and other such noted parts of the Earth, which lovers of Science usually visit. But this indeed gives but very little direction to Mariners, when they are in any unknown part of the Sea, for whose sakes principally an easie method of finding out Longitudes is so earnestly sought after. For 'tis difficult to observe the beginning or end of an Eclipse exactly at Sea, by reason of the fluctuation of the Ship; and tho it were not, yet they happen so seldom in the whole year, that they cannot be of any considerable use to them, who must sometimes examine whereabouts they are, several times in a day.
Other appearances therefore, which happen more frequently, must be proposed to their observation; the usual ones are: 1. The Moons entrance into the Ecliptic (for the Line of her proper motion intersects it, as the Equator doth, only its greatest distance from it is but about five degrees) If the hour when this happens in any unknown place, be compared with the hour set down in the Ephemerides, which are calculated for any known Meridian, the difference of time (being resolved, as before) gives their differece of Longitude. But besides the difficulty that there is of observing this appearance exactly, it happens but once in a fortnight, and so is not frequent enough to serve the present turn. Therefore to this is added, 2. The Moons place in the Zodiac, especially when she is in the Meridian; the time of night when this happens in any unknown place, being by any of the fixt Stars found
[Page 8]out; and then compared with the time when the same point is in the Meridian for which the present Ephemerides are calculated, the difference betwixt them doth likewise discover their distance in Longitude. But because the Moon for some days before and after the change cannot be seen at all, and for several more cannot be seen in the Meridian; therefore this method hath almost the same inconveniences attending it as the former; which some think are fully redress'd in this other, which is, 3. The Conjunctions, Eclipses, or any such appearance of
Jupiters four
Satellites. The time when they will happen in any known place, being first computed, and then compared with the time when they are observ'd in an unknown one, will also as before discover its Longitude. These Planets are so far distant from the Earth, that they have no considerable Parallax, and so their appearances are more easie to be observed then those of the Moon commonly are. And they move so swiftly about the body of
Jupiter, that in a very little time a sensible alteration of their places is made; and so the moment of their conjunctions, and other appearances, may be the more accurately observed, and Longitudes hence more exactly determined. But because these
Satellites are every year, for many weeks together, so near the Sun, that by reason of its rays they cannot be seen; and at other times cannot be discerned without the assistance of a very good prospective, and a very clear air; therefore neither can this be a constant direction. 4. The appulse of the Moon to any of the fixt Stars, is by some thought an appearance of the most universal use in this concern, because it may be observed at all times, but about the new Moon. And indeed did not the double Parallax, and the refraction of the Moon, render the calculation of its true place somewhat nice, and subject to mistakes; this method would be better liked, and more serviceable then any of the precedent.
Since therefore each of these Celestial appearances has some difficulty or other attending it, which hinders it from being observed constantly, or without greater skill and care then Mariners usually adhibit; the fittest method, I think, is not to chuse one of them from the rest, and always to make use of that alone; but to observe any two or more of them in the same place, and with as much exactness as the present circumstances can well afford. For when some cannot, others may, be seen; and errors committed in the observations and calculations of one, may be found out, and corrected when compared with anothers. By such different observations frequently made, and compared with one another, which most Pilots can in some measure do, they will not only promote their own art and safety; but very signally contribute to the perfection of Geography. In order to which, it would be highly advantageous, if any true lover of Arts would take care, that these following particulars may be put into practise: 1. That the Longitude of some great merchandizing City (suppose
London) be exactly computed, by diligent and skilful Astronomers, from the observations of the same Eclipse there, and at the Peak of
Teneriff, or by what other methods they shall judge most accurate. 2. That Ephemerides be carefully calculated for the Meridian of that City, shewing the moment of time when all the forementioned Celestial appearances happen there. 3. That the Merchants, and other Mariners, be prevailed with (especially when they go any unusual voyage) to take with them these Ephemerides, and to note continually when they are in foreign parts, what difference they observe betwixt any of the appearances there, and in their Tables. And at their return, that they communicate them to such promoters of Learning who shall be ready to receive and improve them.
The reason why the appearances of no other of the Planets, besides the Moon and
Jupiters Satellites, can be serviceable to discover Longitudes, is because the proper motions of all the rest are so slow, that the quickest of them seems to continue in the very same point above half an hour, and so how exact soever the observation be, it may occasion the mistake of seven or eight degrees; whereas every Longitude should, if it were possible, be computed within as few minutes.
Many other methods have been invented to solve this difficulty, whereof some are too erroneous to be mentioned, others too nice to be practised. Some Artists have undertaken to make Clocks to go so exactly, that being set to the just time of day at any known place, they shall go true to a minute for many days, and so being carried to an unknown one, will shew the hour at the place where it was set, which being compared with the hour, taken by the Sun or Stars, at the present place, will (as before) give the difference of their Longitudes. But such Clocks as these have never yet been made, that we have heard of; tho of late, the Art is arrived to so great a perfection, that it seems scarce capable of any farther improvement. Others also have observed, that the spots in some of the Planets, and consequently their bodies themselves move regularly round their own axis, as
Jupiter doth in less then ten hours; hence they collect, that if the time and manner of these spots appearance were calculated for any known Meridian, and then observed at another, their difference in Longitude may hereby be found out, as well as by any of the foregoing methods. But, besides many other difficulties which attend this observation, it cannot be made without the assistance of better Telescopes then are ordinarily to be had.
To reduce the degrees of Longitude and Latitude, and of all other Circles described on the Earth to
English miles, or any other known measures, 'tis necessary that we first know how many of them answer to one degree; which being agreed upon, it will be easie to compute, not only the distance in miles, betwixt two particular places, whose Longitude and Latitude is given, but also all the dimensions of the whole Earth. Our
English miles are derived originally from the length of Barly-corns, 3 of which are an inch, 12 inches a foot, sixteen feet and an half a perch, 40 perch a furlong, 8 furlongs (that is 1760 yards) a mile by statute. And the opinion most commonly received is, that about 60 of these are answerable to a degree in any great Circle on the Earth, and one of them to a minute. If so, then 60 multiplied by 360, or 21600 miles is the greatest Circuit. Its Diameter is 6872. The superficies is 148435200 square miles. The solid content is 169921796242 cubic miles. When two places differ only in Latitude, the degrees of the Meridian intercepted betwixt them, multiplied by 60, gives their distance in miles. If they differ in Longitude only, and are both under the Equator, their difference in degrees is likewise to be multiplied by 60. But when they are distant from the Equator, the Parallel under which they are is less, and so fewer miles equal a degree in it. The number of them in any degree of Latitude betwixt the Equator and the Poles is found out by this proportion.
As the Radius is to the sine complement of the Latitude: So is 60 to a fourth; which is the number of miles, answering to a degree of Longitude,
[Page 9]under that Parallel. By this rule the following table is calculated to each degree of Latitude, shewing the number of miles, and sixtieth parts answering to a degree in their several Parallels.
English.
Lat.
Mil.
Min.
Equator
60
00
1
59
56
2
59
55
3
59
52
4
59
50
5
59
46
6
59
40
7
59
37
8
59
24
9
59
10
10
59
4
11
58
52
12
58
40
13
58
28
14
58
12
15
58
00
16
57
40
17
57
20
18
57
4
19
56
44
20
56
24
21
56
00
22
55
36
23
55
12
24
54
48
25
54
24
26
54
00
27
53
28
28
53
00
29
52
28
30
51
56
31
51
24
32
50
52
33
50
20
34
49
44
35
49
8
36
48
32
37
47
56
38
47
16
39
46
36
40
46
00
41
45
16
42
44
36
43
43
52
44
43
8
45
42
24
46
41
40
47
41
0
48
40
8
49
39
20
50
38
32
51
37
44
52
37
00
53
36
8
54
35
26
55
34
24
56
33
32
57
32
40
58
31
48
59
31
00
60
30
00
61
29
4
62
28
8
63
27
12
64
26
16
65
25
20
66
24
24
67
23
28
68
22
32
69
21
32
70
20
32
71
19
32
72
18
32
73
17
32
74
16
32
75
15
32
76
14
32
77
13
32
78
12
32
79
11
28
80
10
24
81
9
20
82
8
20
83
7
20
84
6
12
85
5
12
86
4
12
87
3
12
88
2
4
89
1
4
90
0
When places differ both in Longitude and Latitude, the distance betwixt them is also found out by two operations in Trigonometry, whereby an oblique angl'd spherical Triangle is resolv'd, having two sides, and the angle intercepted, given, to find out the other side; for in the present case, the complements of the Latitudes are the two sides; the angle made by them at the Pole is the difference of the Longitudes; and the nearest distance betwixt the two places, measured by the arc of a great Circle, is the other side. But this case hath so many varieties and intricacies, that it will be too tedious to set down the whole operation, especially because it is in effect the same problem with that in Navigation. Having the difference of Longitude and Latitude betwixt two places, to find out the degrees of the Rumb leading to them; which may be more properly demonstrated in another Volume, to be set forth concerning such matters.
An easie method, and sufficiently accurate for ordinary use, is to extend your Compasses from one place to the other, and then to apply them to the Equator, and mark how many degrees they set off there, which being multiplied by 60, gives their distance in miles.
But indeed the most accurate observers find, that about 66 miles and a quarter, answer to a degree in the Equator; so that 60 is used only for the roundness of the number, and readiness of computation, every mile according to this rate answering to a minute; which would be a very strange and happy chance, if it were exactly so. This may be discovered by several ways, but the most practicable and certain is, by taking the height of the Pole at two places, distant Northward one from the other about an hundred miles, or as much more as may be; and then taking the true distance and situation of one place from the other by a large surveying Instrument and Scale (made by an accurate workman), not going always along the High-ways, but from bystations, observing Churches, and such remarkable places.
The miles, and other measures are so much different in one Nation, from what they are in another, yea in one part of the same Nation from what they are in another, that they cannot without a great deal of difficulty and uncertainty, be reduced to one common standard; hence it is, that often in the same Map, we have a triple scale of miles, the longest, shortest, and mean ones. The
Italian mile is commonly reckon'd equal to the
English. Two of these make a
French League; somewhat more then three of them a
Spanish League; four of them a
German mile; five, and somewhat more, a
Swedish or
Danish mile. What hath been farther attempted for the reduction of shorter foreign measures to our
English foot, may be seen in the following table.
PAge 7.
col. 2.
l. 29. in the Transactions of the
Royal Society, ann. 1674,
n. 101, it is mentioned, that the Grand
Tzaar sent to discover
Nova Zembla, and found it a Peninsula join'd to
Tartary, as in the Map; which if true, we cannot well imagine, how
Barents should winter upon it; nor how divers other relations agree to it, as concerning
Waygatz, and the like; tho the
French Surgeon seems to make it also continued to the main land. In sum, it is most probable, that very little of those parts is discovered; they who sail thither not tracing from Port to Port, but because of the ill weather, harbouring where they first approach, and departing as soon as they can. In the year 1676, the industrious and ingenious Seaman Capt.
Wood, was again sent out by his Majesty King
Charles II. to make a more perfect discovery of that North-East passage; perswaded unto it by divers relations of our own and
Dutch Mariners; who reported many things concerning it, which Capt.
Wood upon his own experience conceives to be false; as that they were either under or near the Pole; that it was there all thaw'd water, and the weather as warm as at
Amsterdam, &c. He saith further, that himself could pass no further then 76 deg. where he found the Sea, as far as he could discern, entirely frozen without intermission. That it is most likely, that
Nova Zembla and
Greenland are the same Continent, at least that there is no passage between them; for that he found scarce any current, and that little which was, ran E. S. E. along the ice; and seemed only to be a small tide, rising not above eight foot. That whilst he was in that degree there was nothing but Fogs, Frost, Snow, and all imaginable ill weather; tho at the same time the heat seemed to be as great as at any time in
England. That the land, where not cover'd with Snow, was so boggy that they could not walk upon it; being grown over with a deep moss, under which they dug in less then two foot to a firm body of ice; so that it was impossible to make any Cave for their winter-lodging, had they been forced to it. There were great store of rills of very good waters, and some veins of black Marble. The point he landed at, he call'd
Speedill point in 76 deg. 30 min. the Sea-water was extraordinary salt, and so clear that he could see the shells at 80 fathoms deep.
The like opinion also Capt.
James hath deliver'd concerning the North-West passage, which is, That there is no passing that way to
China, Japan, &c. because there is a constant tide, ebb and flood setting into
Hudsons Straits, the flood still coming from the Eastward; which, as it procedes (correspondent to the distance) it alters its time of full Sea; which also entring into Bays, and broken ground, becomes distracted, and reverseth with half tides. 2. Because he found there no small fish, as Cods,
&c. and few great ones; nor any bones of Whales, Morsses, or the like found upon the shore; nor any drift wood. 3. Because in 65 deg. 30 min. the ice lay all in rands, which he believes to be produc'd as in the shoal'd Bays. For had there been any Ocean beyond it, it would have been broken to pieces; as they found it coming thro the Strait into the Sea Eastward. 4. Because the ice seeks its way out to the Eastward, driving out at
Hudsons Straits. But if there be any passage, it is very narrow, and the voyoge very long; nor can any large Vessels fit to merchandise, be able to endure the ice and other incommodities, as the long nights, cold, snows, frosts,
&c.
P. 24. col. 2. l. 36. till
Vasile Ivanowitz about the year 1509. P. 36. col. 2. l. 63. as 5509
[...] 1679.
ibid. l. 66 7188-5509. P. 36. col. 1. l. 41.
Hungary. About the year 1188
Bela was King of
Hungary, perhaps the original of the Imperial Family of the
Russes, the time corresponding very well. P. 39. col. 2. l. 1.
del. whose name seems to have been
Zac. Litspenow. l. 67. He died in the forty-ninth year of his age, and two and thirtieth of his reign, in the year 1677, and left his son
Feodor Alexowich, a young Prince of about ninteen years of age, who reigns this present year, 1680.
In the Description of Sweden.
The times of the Kings supply thus, the 6th began his reign
A. M. 2014, the 25th (the times of the rest being uncertain) began
A. M. 2637, the 26th
A. M. 2712, the 27th
A. M. 2831, the 31th (the intermediate being also uncertain)
A. M. 3031, the 32th
A. M. 3060, the 33th
A. M. 3125, the 34th
A. M. 3174, the 35th 3252, the 36th
A. M. 3551, the 46th
A. D. 3916, the 47th (
Ericus III.)
A. M. 3929, in whose time according to
Loccenius, whose computation we have here follow'd, conceives our Saviour to have been born.
A MAP of the NORTH-POLE and the PARTS ADIONING.[depiction of the Sheldonian Theater]
OXON At the THEATER
MDCLXXX▪
NOVA ZEMBLA
In the Philosophicll Transactions of a:
o 1674 n:101, there is set down a Description of a Nova Zembla as it was sent to the Royall Society from a Russia Merchant, and discovered by order of the Grand Czaar▪ but there being not joyned to it either Longitude Latitude or other measure, we though it better to follow the two newest Maps, one printed at Amsterdam a:o 1678, the other at Nuremberg 1679▪ and to place this by itselfe▪ which shews it not an Iland, but joyned with the Continent at the letter K.
K.
To the Right Hon
ble: Charles Fitz Charles Earle of Plymouth, Viscount Totnes, and Baron Dartmouth▪ This Map is Humbly Dedicated by M: Pitt.
GREENLAND,
[...]e Si
[...]ation of
Greenland. call'd by the
Dutch Spitsbergen, because of its sharppointed Rocks and Mountains, lies from 76 Degrees of Northerly Latitude to 82; but how much farther, as also whether Island or Continent, is not yet discover'd; for as much as no man hitherto is known to have passed beyond that. Our Mariners generally conceive it an Island; the
Dutch only say, that they believe the Land to reach more North, because the Ice they found was not broken and floating as in the Sea, but firm and stable, as continued to the shoar. The South part of it looks towards the Promontories of
Finland and
Lapland, North-Cape, North-Kin, &c. The next Land on the West, is the large Country of
Groenland, and
Nova Zembla on the East; but these at so vast a distance, that they cannot be reckon'd as its confines or neighbours.
The
Dutch attribute the first discovery of it to three of their own Pilots,
The Discovery of
Greenland. and have given most of the names to the Creeks and Promontories according to their own fancy. Which diligence had our men used from time to time, as also been careful to make Charts, as our industrious Neighbours oblige their Shipmasters to do; divers discoveries had been asserted to this Nation, which are now almost disputed from us.
L. 4.
c. 17. The
Dutch gave names (saith
Purchas upon this very occasion)
to places long before discovered by the English, as if themselves had been the finders. I shall instance only in these discoveries, which strangers (as you may see in
Hackluit) attribute to us:
Vol.
1. [...].
512, 513, &c. But the
Dutch, tho following our steps, endeavour to assert them to three of their own Pilots,
ann. 1596, who searching for a passage to the
East-Indies, light upon
Greenland; these were
Jacob Heemskerck, William Barents, and
John Cornelis Ryp; what these men effected, will be best known by their own Journal, recorded by
Purchas. June 7, 1696, they were in 74 Degrees, the water as green as grass, [by the way, it were worth enquiry, whether this be not the cause of the blue Ice, which is by every one noted as peculiar to these Coasts].
June 9, they were upon
Cherry- or
Bear-Island, in 74 Degrees and 13 Minutes, the variation of the needle was 13 Degrees.
June 13, they departed thence North and by East 16
Dutch miles.
June 14, 15, they continued their course 20 miles.
June 16, 17, 18, they continued 30 miles.
June 19, they saw land, at 80 Degrees and 11 Minutes, and sailed Southward upon the Western Coast till 79 deg. 30 m. where they found a good road, but could not land because of Ice.
June 20, they kill'd a mighty Bear, whose skin was 13 foot long; they found also a very good Haven, and good anchorage; on the East were two Islands; on the West a great Creek or a River, where they found many Geese (sitting upon their Eggs) of a perfect red colour, such as come once a year into some parts of
Holland, (as it should seem) from this place. This land they supposed to be
Greenland, the Compass varied 16 deg.
June 23, they weighed Anchor, but were forced back with Ice. 25, They weighed Anchor again, and sailed Southward, coasting till they entred into a River, whence they got not to Sea again till the
27th. 28, They kept on their course Southward, where there were so many Fowls that they flew against their Sails and Masts. 30, They were in 75 deg.
July 1, they saw
Cherry- or
Bear-Island. This is all that I can find concerning their voyage. To this I shall oppose two voyages, the first of Sir
Hugh Willoughby 1553, the other of
Steven Burrows 1556. The
Dutch do not allow Sir
Hugh Willoughby to have passed
Seynam,Blaeu's Maps. which is in 70 deg. and that also in 1571. Yet in their Maps they call a small Island by the name of
Willoughby's Land; of which our men know nothing, except it be the same with
Hope Island, a part of
Greenland, as it is most likely; for the land he discover'd was a large Country, by the West-side whereof he sailed some days together with a good wind, and therefore could not be a small Island; as they describe this, which
H. Hudson could not find when he sought for it; see a discourse of this in
Purchas's Pilgrim,
l. 3.
c. 1, & 15. We have nothing of this voyage, but those imperfect or short notes which were found lying upon his table after his death; wherein it is contain'd; that they parted from
Seynam Aug. 2.
Aug. 14, they were 160 leagues North and Easterly from
Seynam; they continued sailing till
Sept. 14, when they landed on a country high, rocky, and uninhabited, from whence the cold and Ice forced them to return more South; which they did, till they reach'd
Arzina a River in
Lapland, where the next Spring they were all found frozen to death in their Ship. A few years after this, about 1556, we read of
Steven Burrows, who searching a passage by the North-East unto the
Indies, arrived in 112 deg. 25 min. of Longitude, and 76 of Latitude, and so sailed to 80 deg. 11 min. and thence to
Nova Zembla. Now this cannot be any known place but
Greenland; which is also confirm'd, because the Land was desolate, the Ice of a blew colour, and great store of Fowls. All signs of
Greenland. But from this time began a great and familiar trade from
England to all those Northern Regions; and many trials made to discover the North-East passage; so that no question but that they landed many times upon
Greenland, but took no notice of it, as neither did the
Dutch,[Page 2]till many years after, when a gainful fishing was there found out. Before which, none either gave it a name, took possession of it, or pretended to the discovery. This trade was managed for divers years by the
Russia company of
English Merchants, as will appear by the story of it, which is this. In 1553, the King and Queen (
Philip and
Mary) gave a commission to certain Merchants to trade into
Russia, and made them a corporation; who presently not only began a very brisk and profitable negotiation into those Northern Countries; but employed divers Ships for finding out a passage that way into the
Indies. Particularly
Arthur Pet, and
Charles Jackman about the year 1580, rambled over all those Seas, and it is very probable they also were upon
Greenland; but there is nothing particularly known concerning them. No nation but the
English frequented those Northern Seas till 1578, that a
Dutch Ship came to
Cola, and a year or two after, another to St.
Nicholas by the solicitation of an
English man that set himself against the company. Afterwards they crept in more and more, and in 1594 they employed
Barents and others, to find out a passage to the
Indies, and in 1596 the three
Dutch Pilots aforenamed upon the same design; who first light upon
Bear-Island and thence to
Greenland. Barents separating from his company, sayled to the Northeast of
Nova-Zembla, where he lost his Ship, and himself died. In 1603
Steven Benet was employed, who went no farther then
Cherry-Island, whence he brought some Lead Oar. In 1608
Henry Hudson, was sent forth to discover the
North-pole, who went to 82 deg. (as did also
Thomas Marmaduke of
Hull, 1612), but saw divers Islands beyond that, and gave names to divers places upon
Greenland formerly discovered; as
Whale-bay, Hackluits-Headland, &c.
The company having been informed of the great number of Sea-horses, Morsses, and Whales, that frequented
Cherry-Island and
Greenland, first applyed themselves with one or two Ships to the killing of Morsses; which in a short time made Morsses grow scarce. In the year therefore 1610, they set out the Ship
Amity, Jonas Pool commander, for Whale-fishing; who fell upon the land formerly discovered though not regarded, and called it
Greenland: whether because of the green Moss, wherewith it was covered, or mistaking it for
Groenland, a Northern Countrey formerly discovered, or for some other reason I know not. He called it also King
James New-land, but that name is grown obsolete. He also gave names to many of the most eminent places upon the west side of the Country; as to
Horn-Sound, because there they found an Unicorns-horn;
Ice-Point, Bell-Point, Lowness-Island, Black-Point, Cape-cold, Ice-Sound, Knotty-Point, Fowl-Sound, Deer-Sound. And in
Cross-Road, 79 deg. 15 min. variation 18 deg. 16 min. northwest, he seized upon the Country to the use of his Masters, by setting up a red Cross, and fastning a writing to it. There also he made some quantity of Oyl, and brought an Unicorns-horn (as they called it) from thence. And this was the first time that any benefit was made by the fishing of that place. In 1611 the company hired six Basques, expert Fishermen, and sent them with two Ships to fish for Whales in
Greenland, where the first Whale they killed, yielded them twelve tuns of Oyl. Some of his company looking about the Harbours for Whales discovered in Sir
Thomas Smiths Bay a great number of Morsses. The Master of one of the Ships taking with him some of his men, went thither and killed of them 500, and kept 1000 alive on Shoar, which afterwards they let go. In 1612 two Ships more were sent, when they killed seventeen Whales and some Morsses and made 180 tuns of oyl. This year the
Hollanders came thither with one Ship, conducted by
Andrew Sallows an
Englishman. Another
English Pilot brought thither also a
Spanish Ship; the
English Ships met with, and threatned them; but notwithstanding they made a good voyage. In 1613 the company sent thither seven Ships, who had a Patent to prohibit all strangers, except the
Muscovia company, from frequenting those coasts. Yet they met with fifteen Sail of
Dutch, French, Flemish, and some interlopers of our own Nation. To some the General gave liberty to fish; with others he made composition to have half (or part) of what they caught; others he drave away from the Country, after he had taken out the
English that were in their Ships; though themselves also by that means were not so well laden as they might have been: this year they discovered
Hope-Island, and other Islands to the West.
In 1614 they set out thirteen great Ships (besides two Pinnaces) well armed; and the
Dutch eighteen; whereof four men of war, who being stronger, stayed and fished there, as did our men also; but both parties made a poor voyage. This land they fully discovered to 80 deg. by
Tho. Sherwin, and
Will. Baffin; and by others, divers Islands toward the East. They also took possession of several parts of the Country for the King, setting up a Cross and the Kings Arms in Lead: (the
Dutch afterwards did the like in the same places for the Prince of
Orange). In 1615, they set out two great Ships, and two Pinaces, which by reason of fourteen Sail sent by the
Hollanders, came home not fully laden. This year the King of
Denmark sent three Ships, men of war, with an
English Pilot
James Vaden, to demand Custom of the Ships for fishing upon his Island as he pretended; the which was denied, and the Island affirmed to belong to the King of
England. In 1616 the company sent eight Sail of great Ships and two Pinaces, which being all appointed to several harbours returned with full lading, besides an overplus they left on Shore. This year they discovered
Edges-Island, where they killed 1000 Morsses, and other Islands North-eastward; The
Hollanders sent four Ships, who made a bad voyage.
In 1617 the
English sent out fourteen Ships, and two pinaces; they departed from
Gravesend April 24, and arrived at
Greenland, May 28 where they met with eleven Sail of
Dutch fishing in
Horn-sound, whom they forced away, and took from them what they had caught; as also the Kings Subjects, which were found in their Ships; this year they made 1900 tuns of Oyl. They sent also a small Ship north-eastward, which discovered
Wyches-Island in 79 deg. and some other places; where they killed store of Morsses. This year the
Hull-men sent a Ship or two to
Greenland, and pretended that it was their discovery; which was by oath in the Admiralty proved to be false. The
Dutch also did the same. In 1518 an
Hull-man meeting with some
Zelanders animated them to go to
Greenland, and in
Horn-sound to make a voyage perforce; but the
English chaced them from thence, took some of their goods, besides some ordinance and ammunition, which was afterwards restored. A new company also of some
English, Scots, and
Zelanders procured a grant for setting forth Ships to those parts; which caused the former adventurers to joyn to them the
East-India company; who set out that year thirteen Ships and two Pinaces, but were disappointed: and some of them fought with, robbed and worsted by a fleet of twenty-three Sail of
Zealanders, who came thither on
[Page 3]purpose: so that proved a very unfortunate voyage.
In 1619 nine Ships were sent, which by reason of the
Hollanders being there before them, and driving away the Whales from the fishing places, made also a losing voyage. Besides another misfortune, for as one of their best Ships lay at anchor under a mountain, a great piece of a rock of Ice, broke off, and fell upon the Ship, killed divers, and wounded more, and so broke the Ship, that she was very difficultly fitted up to serve home; and when they came home, the
Dutch, who had fully laded, so much undersold them, that they were very much discouraged, and gave over their trading thither; But Mr.
Ralph Freeman with a few more of the companions still continued, and in 1620 set out seven Sail; which by reason of so many
Hollanders and
Danes, returned half laden. And in 1621 eight Ships went out, which, notwithstanding all the harm the
Dutch did them, brought a reasonable good adventure of 1100 tuns of Oyl.
In 1622, nine Ships were sent, one whereof was wrackt upon the Ice, the other brought home 1300 tuns of Oyl.
We find nothing worth relating till 1630, when the Company set out a Ship,
[...]ut of the Relation Publisht by Dr.
W. Wats. commanded by
William Goodler; who landed in
Bell-sound, and quickly made up his lading, sending for the Ship to come to take it in: the wind proved to be contrary, so the Master set on shoar eight of his men to kill them some Deer; who took with them two Dogs, a Gun, two Lances, and a Tinder-box. The first day they killed fourteen Deer, but being weary, and the night coming on, they laid them down to sleep in the convenientest place they could find. The next day proved very foggy, and so much Ice was got betwixt the shoar and the Ship, that the Ship was forced to stand so far off into the Sea, that they lost the sight of her. So they resolved to hunt till they came to
Green-harbour, where they would stay for their ship. In this passage they killed eight Deer more, with which they laded their Shallop, and came to
Green-harbour; where when they arrived they found that the Ships were gone thence: they resolved therefore to hasten to
Bell-sound to their Captain, and for the more speed they cast their Venison over-board into the Sea: so they sailed all that night and the next day, but having no compass, they wandred to and again so long till the Ships were departed thence also. These eight persons seeing themselves in almost a desperate condition, resolved however not to be wanting to their own preservation; and therefore they presently went about to get provision for the long Winter. The first day they killed seven Deer and four Bears, the next six Deer; but the night coming upon them, and leaving their provision in their Shallop, there arose a very high wind, which sunk their Shallop, and in the morning they found a considerable part of their stores swimming by the shore, which with great labour and some danger they recovered, as also their Shallop; which by main force they haled upon the Shore. The next thing was to provide their habitation, for which purpose they made use of the tent wherein the Cooper used to work, which was made of Timber and boards covered with Flemish tile, which being unable to resist the cold, they built another tent or house within it twenty foot long and sixteen broad, and stowed the distance with earth, bones of fish, fritture of Whales, and such old timber as they could gather up of broken Shallops and the like; of which they made the best provision they could, laying it upon the beams that were under the tiles. They made also four Cabins, two to a Cabin, and furnished them with the skins of Bears, Deer, and Foxes they had caught, besides pieces of old Sails they found there. Having accommodated these things, they went out again to search for more provision; and upon the Ice they found two Morsses sleeping, they killed them both, and rosted them in their tent, and eat them at leisure. Reviewing their provision, they found it unsufficient to serve half the winter, and therefore they first limited themselves to one meal a day, and afterwards cut off one meal in a week more; and so many meals they fed upon the fritture of the Whales, reserving their Venison for sickness and Holidays; this they preserved by roasting and stowing it in their empty casks which they found there. Before they were well provided, they began to want light; for from
October the fourteenth, till
February the third, they had not the sight of the Sun; but in clear weather they wanted not the light of the Moon, which was a great advantage and consolation unto them. For looking out on a bright moon-shining day, they espied a great she-Bear with her Cubs coming towards the Tent; they fought with and killed her, but the Cubs escaped; they haled her into their Tent, and fed upon her twenty days: her flesh was tolerably pleasant and wholesome, but the Liver made their skins to peel off: which was also observed by the
Dutch that wintered in
Nova-Zembla. Many Bears afterwards came to visit them, at least forty, but they could kill no more then seven, one of which was at least six foot high. As the Sun and day began to appear, the Fowls, and Foxes began to come abroad, for which they set traps and springes. Of Fowls they took a vast number; and at several times they got about fifty Foxes, which they roasted, and found to be pleasant and wholesome food. The
Dutch relation of their men that wintred in
Nova-Zembla saith, that though they did not relish Bears flesh, yet Foxes they liked well, for by their Flesh they were much relieved in their Scurvies.
May the first, it being somewhat warm, they went abroad to seek provision, where they light of great quantities of Willocks-eggs, which was a great refreshment to them: that day also came two English Ships into the Sound, which sent forth to seek them, and took them in, and brought them safe and sound into
England.
The effects of the cold upon them (the like also being testified by those of
William Barents company that wintred in
Nova-Zembla) are wonderful;
The wonderful cold. as that it raised blisters on their flesh, as if they had been burnt with fire: if they touched Iron it stuck to their fingers; whilst they sate by a great fire, their stockings burnt, yet their feet not sensible of heat, and their backs were frozen. Yet our men either had not such reason or will to complain as the
Dutch in
Nova-Zembla, whose Shoos froze as hard as horn to their feet; whose Sack was quite frozen; as likewise a Barrel of Water became perfect Ice in one night; that their Carpenter taking a nail out of his mouth, the skin and flesh followed glued to it with Ice. That they heated Stones at the fire to apply to their feet and other parts of their bodies in their Cabines, to hinder them from freezing; with many like miseries which I omit.
The last who hath brought us any news from this country, is
Frederick Martens an
Hamburger,Freder. Martens
Voyage. who set out from the
Elb, April the fifth, 1671. He hath printed a very large and accurate description both of the land and all things therein; as Fowls, Plants, Beasts, Mountains,
&c. Which he did, as may be supposed, in great part to satisfy the curiosity of several Gentlemen of the
Royal Society, who intreated his diligence in answering such queries as they sent him. We shall omit such
[Page 4]things as we think not so useful, and abridg the rest for fear of cloying the Reader. He first arrived upon
Charles-Isle of seventy Miles in length,
Harbours and Havens. not above ten broad, separated from
Greenland by a narrow strait called
Forelands-ford, betwixt this
Foreland and
Muscle-haven are the highest mountains, and though the greatest part of the mountains and rocks of
Greenland are of a red soil, and communicate that colour to the Snow upon them, which makes them look like fire; yet there are seven that are of a blew colour, and betwixt them many sharp pointed rocks. In
South-haven they commonly repair their faulty Ships, being a very large and commodious harbour; wherein thirty and sometimes forty Ships have conveniently anchored at the same time. Here also they take in fresh water, which runs plentifully from the mountains upon the melting of the Ice and Snow; for the Rivers (at least as far as they can go,) are too brackish, and there are not any Springs or Wells as yet discovered. This Haven hath high Mountains on either side, but especially on the left, particularly one called the
Bee-hive, another the
Devilshuck, which is commonly covered with a thick mist; and which, when the wind drives it that way, darkens the Haven. Within this Haven also is the Island called of
Dead-men, whom they ordinarily bury here in Coffins, heaping Stones upon them: where the bodies (if they escape the Bears) are preserved entire a long time: some say they have seen them so after having been dead thirty years. Here are also several Islands called
Fowl-Islands; because of the vast number of Fowls that breed there. Next follows a Bay called by the Dutch
Mauritius-Bay, where some have wintred; the relation whereof, because it contains nothing considerable besides what is before expressed, I shall omit. Near to this stand the only houses in the whole Countrey, which are a few Cottages built by the
Dutch for the making their Oyl, with a great Gun to defend them, and those they call
Smearbourg, and the
Harlingish-Cookery. All other nations burn their houses at their departure. In the
Northern-bay is an Island the
Dutch call
Vogel-sang for the great noise that the Fowls make when they take their flight. Next is
Monyers-Bay, the furthest North of the Western part of
Greenland; then
Roe-field, so called for its abundance of Deer, the Soil here seems to be all Slats set up edgwise.
Muscle-haven lieth at the mouth of the
Way-gate, North of which
Martens sailed to 81 deg. he saw seven Islands more, farther North, but the Ice permitted him not to approach them.
Walter Thymens Ford is by us called
Alderman Freemans Inlet, and is a large mouth of a River, which is undiscovered.
The Soil,
Soil. as much as has been discovered, of
Greenland, is in most places nothing but Rocks or heaps of vast stones, many of them so high, that the upper half seems to be above the clouds; and so steep that they seem as if they would tumble down, as many times great pieces do break from the whole with a terrible noise. The little valley between them is seldom any thing but broken stones, and Ice heaped up from many generations. About
Roefield and
Muscle-haven is the greatest quantity of low land; yet is that also full of Rocks, stony, and for the most part cover'd with Snow and Ice; which being melted, as in some places it is in Summer, discovers nothing but a barren ground, producing heath, moss, and some very few plants. These Mountains, which are exposed to the warm air and Sun-beams, are in some places clothed with the same; and in these places, and the holes of the Rocks, nest infinite quantity of Fowls, whose dung, with the moss washed down by the melted Snow, makes a mould in the valleys, or rather clefts, which if open to the Sun-beams, when the Ice is dissolved, produceth some few plants; as a kind of Cabbage-Lettuce of a Cress-taste, Scurvy-grass, Sorrel, Snakeweed, Mousear, Hearts-ease, a kind of Strawberry, divers sorts of Ranunculus, and of Sempervives, one like an Aloes, another like our Prickmadam, a third like our Wall-Pepper; and some few others, unknown to our Climate.
The Sea seems not so salt here as in other places.
The Sea. It is generally so clear, that one may see at least twelve fathoms under water; and commonly of the colour of the air. The course of it at
Musclebay, and some other places, is observed to be Northward. There hath been no particular notice taken of the Tydes; and
Martens thinks, that it ebbeth and floweth not regularly, according to the Moon (for then it would drown the nests of the birds that build nigh the surface of the water in the Islands) but rather that the high-water is caused by the winds.
The whole land is so encompassed with Ice,
The Ice and cold. that it is difficult to be approach'd; and 1613, about the middle of
June the Ice was so much and so strong, that the Ships which went from
Holland to the Whale-fishing, were not able to come to the shore; nor was the Snow thawed from the Land. The Rain-Deer also, and other Beasts, were many of them starv'd for want of food. Though ordinarily the Ice breaks in
May, yet if the Northerly or Easterly winds continue long (for those are the coldest) the Frost endures the longer. For though the Sun stay half the year, yet never arising above 33 deg. 40 min. above the Horizon, its beams are so few and scatter'd, that they are most-times insufficient to dissolve the Ice, much less to dispel the cold. From the weakness of the heat also it proceeds, that the vapours from the earth are neither hot enough to warm the air, nor thin enough to rise to any considerable height, but they hang continually in thick dark mists upon the mountains, and sometimes upon the earth it self, insomuch that he which is at one end of his Ship cannot discern his companion at the other.
Concerning the Cold and Ice it is further remarkable, that the Ice is oftentimes raised above the water many (16) fathoms, and this is much fresher than the other; many-times also it is thirty-five fathoms underwater, which is more salt, and easilier melted. It is frozen sometimes to the bottom of the Sea. Freezing makes a great, and to them who have not heard it before, a terrible sound, as the Ice doth also at the breaking. Sometimes it breaks only into great pieces, which is very dangerous to the Ships, for then many times the Sea, beaten from one Ice to another, is turn'd into a whirlpool, which overturns the Ships. Sometimes it shatters at once into small pieces, with more noise, but less danger. The Seamen defended their vessels at first with Ropes, Mats, and such like soft and loose materials hung down by the sides of the Ships, whereby they thought to break the force of the Ice; but they quickly found this too weak a defence. Now they use Poles, Hooks, and the like, to keep it at a distance, and that the Ship may drive along before it; which serves well in a calm, but an high wind often dashing the Ice against the Ship breaks it to pieces. Sometimes it is crushed between two pieces of Ice; sometimes thrust up upon other pieces;
William Barents found upon a great Ice 10 fathoms above water, much earth, and Fowls-Eggs lying upon it.
The Beasts of this Country, are only these:
The beasts. 1.
Foxes, white, gray, tawny, and black. 2.
Rain-Deer,[Page 5]which by feeding upon the yellow Moss in three months grow to a prodigious fatness, above four inches upon the ribs; which seems to be the reason, why they are able to endure so long a winter; though sometimes also they dye for want of food. At the first discovery they did not fear or avoid our people; but when one of them found himself wounded with a bullet, he assaulted the shooter, threw him down, and had not his companions rescued him, the poor man was in danger to have lost his life; they are now as wild as other Deer. 3,
Bears, chiefly white ones, which are of a wonderful largeness, 6 foot high, their skins 14 foot long, above an 100 weight of fat has been taken out of one of them; and they have strength proportionable. When our men had killed so large a Bear that they were not able to bring him off; and went to call for more help: another Bear coming by accident, took him up in his mouth, and run away with him, and at a distance began to eat him. Our men coming when he had eaten near half of him, found the other half as much as four of them could tug to their tent. The
Hollanders in
Nova Zembla observed, that when the Sun disappeared, the Bears left them till the Sun returned: and in their stead the Foxes grew more bold. The largest sort of Bears are those they call Water-Bears, that live by what they catch in the Sea, where they have been seen swimming twelve miles from any shore. The
Dutch Relation saith, that skins have been seen fourteen ells long, but they meant feet. Our men say, that the story of their bringing forth their young deformed, and that they reduce them into shape by licking, is a fable: for that they have seen very young ones, and some also taken out of their Dams bellies, perfectly formed.
In this Country there doth not breed any great quantity of Land-fowls:
[...]. there is one of the bigness of a Lark, with a square bill, that feeds upon worms, and tasts not fishy. Another they call
Snow-Fowl, of the bigness and colour of a Sparrow, with a white belly; being almost starved they flew into a Ship in great abundance, and were so tame that the Mariners took as many of them as they pleased; but as soon as they were fed with Hasty-pudding flew away, and would no more come near them. Of Water-fowl there is great variety, as Cuthbert-Ducks, Willocks, Stints, Sea-Pigeons, Sea-Parrets, Guls, Noddies, and in so great abundance, that with their flights they darken the Sun; and at their rising make such a noise, that persons talking together cannot hear one another speak. Particularly there is one called by the
Dutch Raadtsheer, all white as Snow except his Bill, (which is thin, small and sharp) his feet and eyes; he lives upon what he can get in the water. 2. A
Diver or
Didapper (called by the Mariners a Pigeon, because of the noise he makes) almost as big as a Duck, with a thin, crooked, sharp-pointed bill, two inches long, feathers black, legs and feet red: these swim very swift, endure long under water, and are tolerable good meat. 3. Like to this, but somewhat bigger, is the
Lumb, only his belly is white, and his noise like the croaking of a frog; these build in the Mountains, and carry their young ones in their beaks to the Sea to teach them to swim and dive; their flesh is not good. 4. The
Mew (called
Kutle-gehf, from the noise he makes) hath a crooked bill with a bunch under it, his belly is all white, his wings and back gray, with black pinions, legs and feet; and a red ring about his eyes; the Fishermen baiting their hooks with Whales-flesh, catch store of these Mews as if they were Fish. He is pursued by another fowl for his dung, which as soon as he hath dropt, the other eats and leaves him. 5. The
Allen pursues and beats the other Birds till they vomit their prey, for him to devour, which when done he goes his way from them.
There are also great quantities of Fishes in these Seas, as Seals, Dog-fishes, Lobsters, Gernels,
Fishes. or Shrimp-gurnets, Star-fish, Mackrel, Dragon-fish, Dolphins, Buts-head, Unicorns, and the like. But the chiefest profit, and that which draws men to those desolate and comfortless places, is the Whale-fishing. Of Whales there are several sorts: some unprofitable to the Fishers,
Whales. as the
Jubarta of a black colour, sixty foot long, with a fin upon his back: his fins are nothing worth, his back yeilds some, not much, Oyl: his belly none at all.
Sedeva is of a white colour, bigger then the rest, his fins not above a foot long, scarce any Oyl.
Sedeva Negra is of a black colour, with a great tumor upon his back, yields neither Oyl, Fins, nor Teeth.
Sewria white as Snow, of the bigness of a Wherry, yeilds little Oyl, no fins, but is good to eat. Those which are more sought after, and profitable, are the
Bearded or
Grand-Bay, because first killed in
Grand-bay in
Newfoundland, black, with a smooth skin, and a thin shining membrane over it, white under the chaps; this is the best for Oyl and Fins, yielding an hundred Hogsheads of Oyl, and five hundred Fins; he is commonly about eighty foot long.
Sarda is like the other, but lesser; so yeilds lesser Oyl, and Fins, hath growing things like Barnacles upon his back.
Trumpa, as long, but thicker, then the former, of a grey colour, with one spout in his head, (the others have two) and teeth about a span long, but no Fins, in his mouth. In his head he hath a hole like a Well, wherein lies that they call
Spermaceti; they also sometimes find Amber-grise in his guts like Cow-dung: his Oyl coagulates, and will be solid and white as Tallow: he will yeild forty Hogsheads of Oyl.
Otta-Sotta gray, having white fins in his mouth, not above a yard long; he yeilds the best Oil, but not above thirty Hogsheads.
These Fins are that we call the Whale-bone, and groweth in the upper jaw, on either side of his mouth, about three hundred of a side, but the short ones are not regarded. The Ancients thought that he lived upon the froth of the Sea, which he raised, and as it were, churned by violent beating upon the water with these Fins, and afterwards sucked it up; and that because many times they found his stomach quite empty. Others say, that he feeds upon such plants and weeds as he finds in the Sea, for they have found great quantity of such in his stomack; but it is most likely that his chiefest meat are a certain sort of small Crabs, some call them Sea-Beetles, and Sea-Spiders, (whereof the Bays of that Sea are so cover'd that they seem black with them) of which sometimes his Fins hang full, which afterwards he sucks in. These he pursues continually, for they have both found the Crabs themselves, and also sometimes great quantities (in some a Bushel) of those little Stones called
Oculi-Cancrorum, in his stomach. That they devour not great Fishes it is manifest, because their throat is so very strait, not above half a foot wide. The Female hath her natural part seven or eight foot wide, (the young one being bigger than an Hogshead when first brought forth) and the Male's is equal to a little Pillar seven or eight foot long; she brings forth her Foetus alive, and nourisheth it with Milk, which is white and sweet, but tasting somewhat fishy: her Teats, two in number, are as it were sheath'd in her breasts, that they appear not till the young one comes to suck. Their skins the ancients used instead of Ropes, as also for covering their Houses, and defence against the cold; under the skin is that they call the
Blubber, or
Adeps, out of which
[Page 6]being cut into thin slices, and put into hot Coppers, the Oyl is melted, the flesh is thrown away; the ribs are employ'd to make the houses of the Laps, Fins, Samoieds and the like; the other bones they burn. The Tail serves for a chopping block, whereupon to cut their blubber. For the manner of catching and ordering the Whale,
Whale-fishing. it is this.
When they have discovered him, which is by his spouting water, which they can discern at a great distance (though where they see plenty of those small Crabs, they have good hopes of finding the Whales) seldom fewer then two Shallops well man'd make towards him; and row to him so near, that the Harponer hath opportunity to lance out his Harping-iron, which he doth with all his force; but strikes not at adventure, (for some parts of him, his head particularly, are not vulnerable), but either upon a soft piece of flesh, which he hath near his spout, or under a Fin. The Beast as soon as wounded hasts down to the bottom of the Sea, they still giving him more Rope, whereof one end is fastened to the Harping-iron, then they diligently watch his rising again, when with their lances they wound him in the belly and such places as are softest, and deep as they can; taking heed always that he strike not them or their boat with his tail. When they see him spout up blood, they know he draws towards his death, and that shortly after he turns up his white belly; which as soon as they spy, they hale him close to the Ship, and with great Knives slice his sides, raising the blubber from the flesh; which they do by fixing in it strong Iron Hooks made fast to a Ship rope, which by a pully they lift up still as they cut and loosen the blubber; many of these great flakes they put upon a rope, and so drag them to the Shore; where they are heaved up by a Crane, and laid upon the Tail of the Fish, chopt into small pieces, afterwards sliced thin like Trenchers, so put into the Cauldrons or Coppers, which becoming brown with the fire are called
Frittures, are taken out and cast away as having yeilded their Oyl. The Liquor then is laded out into a Boat half full of water, both to cool and cleanse it (by suffering all the filth to sink to the bottom) and thence by long Troughs, that it may be more cooled, conveyed into the Hogsheads or other like vessels.
The Whalebone.
The head which is at least one third of the whole Fish, is cut off, and tug'd as near the Shore as they can bring it, then hoised up by a crane, and the Fins (
Bronchiae, Pinnae, or whatever you please to call them, their substance is like horn, but we call them Whale-bone), are cut out, dressed, and bound up by fifties; and the rest of the head, which yeilds Oyl, cut as the rest of the body. The tongue particularly; which being very great of the figure of a Wool-sack, is also fastened at both ends, and lifted up only in the midst, (with which he spouteth up the water) and about eight tuns weight, veildeth from six to eleven Hogsheads. One
Housson a
Diep-man in 1634 got twenty six Hogsheads
(Cados) out of one tongue, and a hundred and twenty out of the body of one Whale.
The Whale hath many enemies;
The Whales enemies. 1. A kind of lowse or insect that eats through his skin to devour the fat; he hath on each side four feet, an head like an Acorn with four horns. 2. The
Sawfish, which hath a long Snout, on either side set with teeth like a Saw; he seldome gives over the Whale till he hath killed him; he eats up his tongue and nothing else. 3. The
Hay, from two to three fathoms long, round and small; a sharp snout and three rows of teeth in his mouth, with which he will bite great pieces out of the Whale, and sometimes eat up all the fat; the Fishermen have found Whales half devoured by them; they are taken with a bait fastened to an Hook, with an Iron Chain, for a Rope they will presently sheer asunder.
The Whales, when the Sea begins to freez, go Southward, dispersing themselves; some unto the coast of
America, some few this way, and many keep in the deep and wide Ocean, where the
Basques, who say that the Whales follow the light, used to fish for them, before
Greenland was discovered. And I have heard that the
Dutch caught a Whale near
Japan, that had sticking in her an Harping Iron lost at
Greenland.
WILLOƲGHBIES-ISLAND.
THe
Dutch had no way to take from Sir
Hugh Willoughby the honour of first adventuring upon these Northern Coasts (which he did by the commission, and at the charges of King
Edward the sixth, but at the advice and direction of the great Sea-man
Sebastian Cabot Grand Pilot of
England) but by bestowing on him an imaginary Title of an Island, which they call
Willoughbies-Island, and which they place near
Nova-Zembla. Besides what we have spoken to this matter in the description of
Greenland; it may further be noted, that neither Captain
Edge, who travelled those Seas so many times; nor Mr.
Seller, nor any other
English man that we know of, name any such Islands in their Maps, nor do any of the Journals of our Mariners, nor
H. Hudson, who expresly went to seek for it, mention any such place; and the latest
Dutch Map of
Nova Zembla (which is the nearest Country to that imaginary Island) set out 1678, makes not any mention of it; nor does Sir
H. Willoughby seem to have sayled that way, which is East and by North from
Sainam; but set his course towards North-east: nor doth the description he made of the Countrey agree to a small Island. All which being considered, Mr.
Purchas with good reason several times affirmeth that
Willoughbies-Island is no other then a conceit of the Cart-makers; and for such we shall let it pass till better informed.
NOVA-ZEMBLA.
NOva-Zembla is separated from the
Samoieds Countrey by the Streits of
Waygates, (or as the new Map calleth them,
Straet van Nassau), it was first discovered by the
English in 1556: and since visited by several both
English and
Dutch, who have attempted to find out a passage that way into the
Tartarian-Sea, and so farther to
Cathay, China, Japan, &c. Yet notwithstanding all their endeavours, very little progress hath been made in that discovery; except you will say, that they discovered by sad experience, that though perhaps the Sea might be continued through those Streits, yet by reason of the very great hinderance, as well as danger, of the Ice, it is unpassable; or if in some warm Summers perhaps it might be sailed, yet is the danger and trouble so great, that it is not worth the hazard and charges of the adventure. Especially since the miscarriage of that worthy Pilot
William Barents, who out of confidence of the feasibility of the enterprise, adventured so far that his Ship was first hem'd in, and afterwards frozen and broken in the Ice: so that they were forced to winter upon the land, where the good man lost his life; of whose sufferings by cold I have before spoken. Only give me leave here to take notice of their particular observations of the setting and rising of the Sun, comparing them with others
[Page 7]made in
Greenland by the
English.
Our men that winter'd in
Greenland 1630,
The length of their nights. lost the light of the Sun intirely,
Oct. 14, and saw him not again till
Feb. 3. Those that stayed there in 1633, say, that
Oct. 5, was the last day they saw the Sun, though they had a twilight, by which they could read, till the 17; on the 22 the Stars were plain to be seen all the 24 hours, and so continued all Winter.
Jan. 15, they perceived for six or seven hours about noon, so much light as they could make shift to read by it.
Feb. 12, they saw the light of the Sun upon the tops of the Mountains, and the next day his whole body. Those in
Greenland in 1634, (who all perished there) left in writing, that the Sun disappear'd
Oct. 10, and was seen again,
Feb. 14. Those that winter'd in
Nova-Zembla in 1596, in 76 deg. on
Nov. 2. (new stile, saith
Purchas, i. e. Oct. 23,) saw the Sun not fully above the earth, it rose South-South-East, and set South-South-West; after
Nov. 4, (
Oct. 25,) they saw the Sun no more; but the Moon continued as long as she was in highest degrees to be seen day and night.
Jan. 24, they saw the edge of the Sun above the Horizon; and 27, he totally appear'd and he then was in 5 deg. 25 min. of
Aquarius. They farther observed, that by an
Ephemerides, which they carried with them, at
Venice would be a conjunction of the Moon and
Jupiter that very day at one a Clock in the morning, which they in
Nova-Zembla saw at 6, in
Taurus. So that the difference of Longitude of these two places, is 5 hours, which answers to 75 deg.
Venice therefore being accounted in the Longitude of 37 deg. 25. min.
Nova-Zembla must be 112 deg. 25 min. And from thence it is no more than 60 deg. to
Cape Tabin, the uttermost point of
Tartary.
What to say to these observations, so contrary to all Astronomers, I know not: had
Barents made them, they would have staggered us more; but since the Observer hath so grosly mistaken in the Latitude of the place, which he always places in 76 deg. insomuch that
Hudson saith, that that place is by them laid
too far North much out of its place, to what end he knows not, we have the less reason to assent to him in the rest; besides to place
Nova-Zembla in 76, is to make it in the same Latitude as
Horn-Sound in
Greenland, which no man ever affirmed. Nor can any one imagine that the refraction of the Sun-beams can cause such a difference; for Mr.
Baffins observation, which he made in
Greenland, from the Air whereof that in
Nova-Zembla cannot much differ, will not admit any thing like that difference; which take in his own words:
Beholding it about a north-north-east Sun, by the common Compass, at which time the Sun was at the lowest, one fifth of his body was above the Horizon, and four fifths below; his declination for that instant was 10
deg. 35
min. north, being at noon in 2
deg. 7
min. of Virgo, his daily motion was 38
min. whose half being 19,
to be added to the former, (because it was at twelve hours before noon) his place at that instant was 2
deg. 26
min. of Virgo, whose declination is (as before) 10
deg. 35
min. The Latitude of the place was 78
deg. 47
min. whose complement was 11
deg. 13
min. the declination being subducted from the complement of of the elevation of the Pole leaveth 38
min. four fifths of which is 12
min. being substracted from 38,
leaveth 26
min. for the refraction, which is more or less according to the thickness or thinness of the air.
But to return to
Nova-Zembla:Situation of
Nova-Zembla. There is lately a new Chart of
Nova-Zembla put out in
Holland, which separates it from
Samoiedia by the Streights of
Nassau, or
Fretum Waygats, but makes the North of it (wherein
Barents in 1595 wintered) in the same parallel with part of
Greenland; and that
Nova-Zembla is inhabited with people like in clothing, stature, and manner of life to the
Samoieds; that they are Idolaters, as many of the others, Barbarous
&c. Another Map joyned with the former also continues
Groenland to
Greenland on the South-west corner, which also is contrary to all other Relations; but the Map of
Nova-Zembla is manifestly calculated out of the observations of them that wintered there with
W. Barents; and therefore I shall neither disparage nor approve it: further trial may determine it.
A late Traveller a
French-man, Chyrurgeon in a
Danish Ship, saith, That
Nova-Zembla is a Continent joyned on the South to
Samoiedia by a ledg of Mountains called by him the
Pater-Noster-Mountains, and on the North to
Greenland; which is contrary both to this new Chart, and to the observations of all Marriners both
English and
Dutch. He saith also that he, with others, went ashore upon
Nova-Zembla, and brought away some of the inhabitants into
Denmark; that they were more barbarous then any other nation he had ever seen. A
Groenland-Monk (in the Chron. of
Iseland) saith, that the
Pigmies inhabited
Nova-Zembla; this Traveller indeed saith, they were but short, truss'd persons, but not so little as to deserve the name of
Pigmies, nor indeed much lesser then his Countreymen the
Gronelanders are described.
The
Dutch, who wintered there,
Beasts. mention no other beasts then Bears, Foxes, and such other as live upon prey; for that, say they, there is neither Leaves nor Grass, for other Beasts to feed upon; but Mr.
Hudson saith, that all the land they had seen of
Nova-Zembla seemed pleasant; much high-land, and without Snow; in some places also green, and Deer feeding upon it, nor were all the high hills covered with Snow. But Mr.
Hudson was there in Summer; and it is probable that, assoon as winter begins, the Deer betake themselves to
Samoieda, or some other place.
Our Merchants, that have lived in
Russia, say,
Fowls. that upon
Nova-Zembla is a great lake wherein a wonderful number of Swans and Geese do breed, which moult their feathers about St.
Peters day; and at that time the
Russes go thither to gather their feathers, and to kill the Fowls, which they dry, and bring into their own Countrey for winter provision.
Both
English and
Dutch in their frequenting this coast have given names to several places. And it is a remarkable inconvenience that the
Dutch very rarely make use of a name given by another nation; but had rather give new ones themselves; that the world may take them to be the great discoverers, and diligent observers.
In 73d. was a land discovered by
H. Hudson, and called
Hold-with-hope, unknown, as he conceived, to any Christian till that time, and (as our late Navigators say) to any since.
CHERRY- and other ISLANDS.
OUr men conceive
Greenland to be broken land,
Northern Islands. or a great number of Islands at least, very near to one another. On the West-side, they discovered as far as 82 deg. the most Northerly point they called
Point Purchas, there they found very many Islands, which they thought not worthy to give names to, being careful only to take notice of those six or eight Harbours which were commodious for their fishing. On the East-side, they went no farther then 78 deg. because the
Dutch disturbed their trading on that side. There are also many Islands, some of which are named,
Hope-Island. as
Hope-Island, discovered in 1613; which may
[Page 8]be that the
Dutch call
Willoughbies-land, or
John Mayens-Island, though indeed it corresponds well to neither; but rather to the later. It belongeth to
Greenland, and is but a small Island, and lies North-east and South-west; whereas the Countrey Sir
H. Willoughby landed upon, was a large Countrey, (in as much as he sayled many days by the side of it,) and lies North and South, which must be
Greenland. Edges-Island was discovered 1616,
Edges-Island. Wyches-Island. by Capt.
T. Edge, who had made that voyage ten times.
Wyches-Island (so call'd from a Gentleman of that name) was found out 1617, but there being nothing remarkable come to our knowledg concerning these, we pass them over. Only it is worth noting, that both the Whale and Morss-fishing was known and practised 800 years ago, as appears by the Relation which
Octher the
Norwegian made to his Lord
Alfred King of
England; where he also saith, that the
Morsses were hunted for their teeth, which were mightily esteemed.
Cherry-Island,Cherry-Island. when first discovered I know not, but it received not its name, nor was known to be of any profit till 1603, when a Ship set out at the charges of Sir
Francis Cherry touched upon it, and found there some Lead, and a Morsses tooth; but stayed not to fish, because the year was too far spent. However they called it (in honour of Sir
Francis Cherry, for whose use they took possession of it,)
Cherry-Island.
In 1604,
Morss-fishing. a Ship set sail (Mr.
Welden the Merchant, and
Steven Bennet the Master) from
London, April 15, and arrived at
Cola in
Lapland May 1; they stayed in
Lapland till
July 1, and
July 8 they came in sight of
Cherry; and they came to an Anchor on the South-south-east side, but, because of the stream, could not land: so that they sailed round about the Isle, and at length anchored two miles from the Shore. Going on land one of them with his Gun killed as many Fowl as almost laded their Boat.
July 9, they found on Shore nothing but store of Foxes; that part of the Island was in 74 deg. 45 min.
July 10, they weighed Anchor and stood into another
Bay, and came to anchor in eight fathoms, where they saw an incredible number of Morsses swimming in the Sea. Coming to Shore, they espied a vast company of them lying on the ground, they shot at them with three Guns they carried with them, but with all their weapons they could kill but fifteen of above 1000 that lay there like Hogs hudling together on heaps, but they found as many teeth as filled an Hogshead. Before the
13th, they killed near 100 more, making use only of their teeth.
In 1605, the same persons went again, arriving there
July 2, they went on Shore, and
July 6, slew abundance of Morsses, and not only with Shot, as they did the year before, but with Lances dextrously used directing them to certain places of their bodies; they began also to boil their Blubber, and made 11 Tuns of Oyl, (5 of their bellies will yeild one Hogshead,) and abundance of Teeth. Here also they found a Lead-mine under
Mount-misery, and brought away about 30 Tun of the Oar.
In 1606, the same Ship with the same persons was sent again, and landed
July 3, in 74 deg. 55 min. where they stayed till the Ice was all cleared; for the Morsses will not come to Shore till the Ice be all vanished, where at one time in six hours, they slew betwixt 7 and 800 Morsses, and 2 great Bears; they made 22 Tuns of Oyl, and 3 Hogsheads of Teeth.
In 1608,
June 21, was so hot that the melted Pitch run down the sides of their Ship: in 7 hours time they slew above 900 Morsses, making 31 Tuns of Oyl and above 2 Hogsheads of Teeth, besides 40 more. They took alive into their Ship, 2 young Morsses a Male and Female, the Female died, the Male lived 10 weeks in
England; where they taught it many things.
In 1610, at another voyage with two Ships they killed many Bears, and saw divers young ones, no bigger than young Lambs, very gamesome and lusty; they brought two of them into
England. Much Fowl also they slew, and many Seals; and
June 15, set up an Ensign in token of possession of the Island for the
Muscovia Company: in
Gull-Island they found three Lead-mines, and a Coal-mine on the North side of the Island. Three Ships more also came to fish at
Cherry-Island, they killed 500 Morsses at one time, at other times near 300 more, one man killing forty with his lance at one days hunting.
The Morss, Walrush, Horse-whale, Rosmarus,
Morsses. or Sea-horse, (for so he is by the Ancients often called, though of late they have discovered another Fish not unlike him, with straight teeth, which they call the Sea-horse) hath a Skin like a Sea-calf, (with short and sad yellow fur) a mouth like a Lion: if any, hardly discernable, ears, yet they hear well, and are frighted with noise; (which also is said of the Whale, that he is driven away with the sound of a Trumpet,) large breast, short thighs, four feet, and upon each foot 5 Toes with short sharp Nails, with which they climb the Ice; and as large as a great Ox, having a great semicircular Tusk growing on each side of their upper jaw; which are very much valued, especially by the Northern people, partly for their uses in medicines, as to make cramp-rings, (which they make also of the bristles upon his cheeks) to resist poison, and other malignant diseases, wherein they are at least equal to that called the Unicorns-horn; but more for their beauty, which is equal to, if not surpassing, Ivory. The heaviness of it, makes it much sought after for handles of Swords. Their skins being dressed are thicker then two Ox-hides, yet light and excellent to make Targets against Darts and Arrows of the Savages. They feed upon Fish and Herbs, and sleep, if there be Ice, upon that; where if surprised, the female casts her young ones (of which she hath commonly two at a time) into the Sea, and her self after them, swimming away with them in her arms; and if provoked, after she hath secured them, returning many times to set upon the Boat, into which if she can fasten her teeth, she will easily sink it. But if they be farther from the Water they all rise up together and with their weight and force falling upon the Ice endeavour to break it: as they did when surprised by
Jonas Pool in 1610, where himself and divers of his men escaped drowning very narrowly; one of them being in the Sea, the Morsses set upon him with their teeth, but with very great labour and hazzard of his company he escaped death, though sore wounded. Frequently also they sleep on the Shore, and if they have convenience, upon an high and steep place; they always go in great companies, and set one to keep watch; which if surprised a sleep, 'tis an easy matter to kill all the rest; but if he give warning by grunting, they clap their hinder feet under their two tusks, and so roll into the Sea. But if they be caught on plain ground, yet are they hardly slain, being both strong and fierce, and all hasting one way to the water. The
Dutch at first were very much troubled to kill them, their Shot the beast valued not much, their Hatchets and Half-pikes would not pierce them, nor did they think they could be killed, except struck with great force in the midst of the forehead. The first time they set upon them, of 200 they could not kill one, but went for their Ordinance to shoot them. Our men after a little experience found the way to dispatch them
[Page 9]with Javelins, as is before rehearsed.
Some imagine this to be
John-Mayens-Island, but it seems rather that it is not; for the northmost point of that is in 71 d. 23 m. whereas this is 74 d. 55 m. except the
Dutch be not so accurate in their observations and calculations as were to be wisht, which I much suspect,
v. Nova-Zembla. Besides
Cherry-Island is round, not frequented with Whales but Morsses. Our men also have travelled it on foot from North to South, which on
Mayens-Island, cannot be done; and though they tell many particulars of the place, yet they never mention the great
Beeren-berg. Hope-Island indeed is a long Island, lies much what as they say of
Mayens, and hath been visited by the Whale-fishers, but it is more North then they place their Island. The itch of ascribing discoveries to themselves hath brought (as I fear) confusion both in this and many other matters of this nature.
JOHN MAYENS-ISLAND.
JOhn Mayens-Island, so called from the name of the first Discoverer, (as the
Dutch pretend) seems by the
English to be called
Hope-Island, or if not, I know not whether the
English have been upon it. It seems not to be of any great consequence, all that is spoken of it, being that it extends in length from South-west to North-east. The farther it shoots out in length, the more contracted and narrower it grows in breadth; so that in the middle the distance is very small between both Shores. Before the Whale-fishing was removed to
Greenland, in the Summer time this Island was much frequented by the Sea-men whom trade invited thither; and the Island was well known to most of the Northern adventurers of
Europe; but since the Whales have deserted those Shores, and have removed their Sea-quarters farther to the North, the Sea-men and Fisher-men have been forced to follow their Prey to
Greenland. For it seems the Whales, either weary of the place, or sensible of their own danger, do often change their Harbours. In the Spring time the western side of the Island is not so much enclosed with Ice, as that which lies in the North; where it runs out into the Sea, with a sharp point behind the
Mountain of Bears; for on this side, all the year long, the Ice never removes from the Shore, above ten miles; and in the Spring time so besieges it, that there is no passage through it. For which reason the Mariners, who are bound for this Island, use all the care they can to avoid the Eastern, and to make directly to the Western Shore, there to lie while the fishing season continues; if by miscarriage they come upon the East-side, they are then forced to fetch a compass about the North part of the Island, whereby they are not only exposed to the terrible winds that blow off from
Bears-Mountain, but also to the dangers of the Floating Ice: for here the Sea flows from South to North, and ebbs from North to South. At the Northern end of the Island appears the
Bears-Mountain of a prodigious height, and so perpendicularly steep, that it is impossible to climb to the top of it. This Mountain from the Bears there frequently seen, called
Beerenberg or the
Bears-Mountain, at the bottom takes up the whole space between the Eastern and the Western Shore; on the North-side it leaves a little room for leveller ground to the Ocean; and being of prodigious height, may be descryed 30 miles off at Sea.
The Sea-coast lies thus, 1,
Noords-hoeck or the
Northern Angle, is the extream point shooting out to the North. 2,
Oosthoeck is the most Eastern point
Ysbergh mark'd 1. 2. 3. are three Mountains of Ice, or rather vast heaps of congealed Snow, which dissolved by the heat of the Sun, falls from the top of
Bears-Mountain, but upon the Sun's retiring freezes again. 3,
Zuydoost-hoeck, is the Southeast Angle. From this point the Shore extends it self from East to West to a little Island, and then winds again to the West and South; in some places not passable by reason of its steepness, in others smooth enough. 4,
Cleyn Sand-bay or
Little Sand-bay, Eyerland, or
Eggland, being certain Rocks full of Birds; here about a Musket shot from the Shore, the Sea is 60 fathom deep, and a little farther, the sounding line will not reach to the bottom. 5,
Groote Hoot-bay or great wood-bay, by reason of the great pieces of rotten timber, that are there found. In this, which is the narrowest part of the Island, are certain Mountains not very steep, from the top whereof any person calling them that stand upon either Shore may be heard by both. 6,
Cleyn Hoot-bay, or
Little Wood-bay. 7,
English Bay and several others, to which the
Dutch have given such names as they thought fit.
GRONELAND,
CAlled also
Groenland, Groinland,The name and situation. and more anciently
Engroenland, lies (as the Islanders say) like an Half-moon about the North of their Countrey, at the distance of four days sailing. But it seems not to lye so much East, but rather on the North of
America. From
Cape Farewell in 60 deg. 30 min. on the South, it is unknown to how many degrees in the North. The East and West are encompass'd by two great Oceans, but at what degrees of Longitude is not yet discovered. Only Mr.
Fotherby found it near the Coast of
Groneland, in 71 deg. and the South of
Greenland to be above two hundred leagues.
It is said to have been discover'd first by a
Norwegian Gentleman,
Ancient discoveries. whose name was
Eric Rotcop, or
Red Head; who having committed a murther in
Iseland, to save his life, resolved to adventure to another Country, whereof he had heard some obscure, flying reports. He succeeded so well, that he arrived in a safe Harbour called
Sandstasm, lying between two Mountainous Promontories; the one upon an Island over against
Groneland, which he called
Huidserken, or White Shirt, because of the Snow upon it: the other on the Continent, called
Huarf Eric. He winter'd in the Island; but when the season suffer'd, pass'd into the Continent: which because of its greenness and flourishing he called
Groneland. Thence he sent his Son to
Olaus Trugger King of
Norway to get his pardon, which was easily granted, when he was inform'd by him of this new discovery. Whereupon divers Gentlemen adventured to plant there; who multiplying not long after, divided the whole Country into the Eastern and Western; and built two Cities,
Garde and
Albe. In
Albe was a Bishops See, and a Cathedral Church dedicated to St.
Anthony. The Seat also of the Vice-Roy, sent thither from time to time by the
Norwegian. They write also of a great Monastery called of St.
Thomas; wherein was a Spring, whose water was so hot, that it dressed all their meat; and being conveyed into the Cells, and other Rooms, in pipes, heated all the Monastery as if it had been so many Stoves. They say also, that this Monastery is built all of Pumice-stones, and that this hot water falling upon them, mixeth with the outer parts, and produces a sort of clammy matter, which serves instead of Lime.
[Page 10] But what the
Norwegians conquered,
By the Norwegians. or possessed in this Country, was an inconsiderable corner of that large Continent. Themselves mention a Nation, whom they call
Skrelingers, to have inhabited in the middle of the Land, but what they were we know not. But whether their paucity exposed them to the mercilesness of the Natives: or whether it were an Epidemical disease, which they called the
black Plague; which swept away, not only most of that Nation in
Groneland, but also the Merchants and Mariners in
Norway that maintained that traffique: or whether it were some other reason, which is now forgotten; so it is, that since 1349, little intelligence hath descended to us concerning
Groneland, till seeking the North-west passage to
China, occasioned more knowledg of it. In 1389, they say, that the King of
Denmark sent a Fleet thither, with intention to re-establish his dominion in those parts; but that being cast away, discouraged him from any further enterprise; till now of late
Christian IV, renewed somewhat again of that navigation, of which by and by. In 1406, the Bishop of
Drontheim sent a Priest (called
Andreas) to succeed
Henry Bishop of
Garda, if dead; if alive, to return and bring notice of the state of the Church there. But
Andreas never came back; nor hath there been since any further care taken to supply Bishops, or maintain Christianity there. There is a relation in
Purchas's Pilgrim, part 3, of one
Ivor Boty a
Gronelander, translated 1560 out of the
Norweighish Language; which gives a sufficiently particular account of all the places in that Country inhabited by Christians; but nothing besides.
Afterwards another part of it is said to be discovered by
Antonio Zani;A. Zani. the relation of whose adventures is at large in
Hackluits third Volume. I shall not insert them, because not useful to our present purpose. And tho there be grounds sufficient to make us doubt of some of these relations, yet not to reject them.
Gudbrandus. Thorlacius, an Islandish Bishop, and discreet person saith, that the Islandish Chronicles affirm, that they used formerly to trade to
Engroneland, and that in the days of Popery that Country had Bishops. Now our men in all the places where they have landed, find none but Savages, and those also Idolaters, speaking a language different from all that ever they heard; though the Natives in their customs most resemble the
Laplanders, of whom more in due place.
The occasion of our voyages to those Coasts,
Later discoveries, by the English. Sir Martin Frobisher. was to find out a way to
China, &c. by the Northwest; which had been fruitlesly sought toward the North-east.
The first whom we read to have searched the North-west for a passage, was
Martyn Frobisher, who in 1576, with two Barks coming to the height of 62 deg. found a great Inlet, called by him
Frobishers Straits, whereinto having sailed 60 leagues, with main land on either side, returned. He found there a certain Oar, which he conceived to be of Gold; and the next year he made a second voyage to fetch a quantity of it, but it proving to be nothing but black Lead, answer'd not expectation; yet they found a Silver Mine, which lay so deep and fast in the Rocks, that they could not dig it. They melted Gold also, but in very small quantities, out of several stones they found there upon
Smiths Isle. They found also a dead fish, of about twelve foot long, not unlike in shape to a Porcpoise, having an horn six foot long (such as is commonly called Unicorns-horn) growing out of his snout, which is still kept at
Windsor. In 1578, he went out again upon a discovery; wherein passing as far as he thought good, he took possession of the Land in the name of Queen
Elizabeth, calling it
Meta incognita.
In 1583,
Sir Hum. Gilbert. Sir
Humphrey Gilbert upon the same design went to the great River of St.
Laurence in
Canada, took possession of the Country, and setled a fishing trade there. This voyage I suppose was made upon suggestion of a
Greek Mariner, who assured some of our Nation, that himself had passed a great Strait, North of
Virginia, from the West or South Ocean, and offer'd to be Pilot for the discovery, but dyed before he came into
England.
In 1585,
Mr. Davis. Mr.
John Davis was employed with two Barks to the same search. The first Land he came to, he named the
Land of Desolation, and is one part of
Groneland; then he arrived in 64 deg. 15 min. in
Gilberts Sound, where they found a great quantity of that Oar which
Frobisher brought into
England, and also
Lapis Specularis. Thence they went to 66 deg. 40 min. to
Mount Raleigh, Totness Sound,
&c. where they saw some few low shrubs, but nothing else worth noting.
In 1586, he made a second voyage to the same place, where he found amongst the Natives Copper Oar, as also black and red Copper. Thence they searched many places Westward, and returned with good hopes of discovering the desired passage.
In 1587, he made a third voyage, to 72 deg. 12 min. the compass varying to 82 deg. Westward, the Land they called
London-Coast; and there they found an open Sea, and forty leagues between Land and Land, thinking this to be the most likely place to find the passage; and it was from him called
Fretum Davis.
Thus from time to time proceeded the discovery of these Countries;
Mr. Hudson. but now not upon hopes of a passage to the
Indies, but for the profit of trading; till Mr.
Hudson in 1610, after he was satisfied that there was no passage Northeasterly, was sent to make a trial here also. He proceeded an hundred leagues further than any before had done; and gave names to certain places, as
Desire-provokes, Isles of Gods mercies, Prince Henry's-Cape, King James's Cape, Queen Ann's-Cape, and the like; but the Ice hindred him from going further, and the sedition of his men from returning home.
In 1612,
James Hall returning into
England,James Hall. and with him
William Baffin, who discovered
Cockins Sound, in the height of 65 deg. 20 min. which differed in Longitude from
London 60 deg. 30 min. Westward. They saw also the footing of a great Beast, they supposed an Elk, or the like.
James Hall was killed in the Boat by a Native, pretending to trade with them. They tried the Mine at
Cunninghams River, which the
Danes had digged before, and found it to be nothing worth. There were Rocks of very pure stone, finer and whiter than Alabaster; and Angelica growing plentifully in many places, which the Savages use to eat.
In 1615, Mr.
Baffin was sent again;
Mr. Baffin. he found
Fair-Point to differ in Longitude from
London 74 deg. and 5 min. Westward. But the chief thing they discover'd was, that there was no passage in the North of
Davis Straits, it being no other than a great Bay; but that profit might be made by fishing for Whales, Morsses, and Unicorns, of which there are good store.
In 1616, Mr.
Baffin went again. In Sir
Tho. Smiths Sound, 78 deg. Lat. their Compass varied 56 deg. Westward, the greatest variation that is any where known. Despairing to discover their desired North-west passage, they returned home, and since that we hear of no more voyages made from
England upon that design.
The King of
Denmark also,
By the Danes. partly to advance
[Page 11]the trading of his own, and partly to renew his ancient pretence to that country, if any thing should be discovered worth the claiming, whilst the
English were busie in these discoveries, set out two Ships and a Pinnace 1605, the Admiral was Capt.
John Cunningham a
Scot, Godske Lindenaw a noble
Dane, was Vice-Admiral, the chief Pilots were
James Hall and
John Knight, English men.
Gotske arrived on some part of the country, where he traffick'd some small matters with the natives, took two of them, and returned into
Denmark. The other two Ships arrived at
Cape Farewell, thence went to
Frobishers Straits, gave
Danish names to divers places, traded with the natives, of whom they brought away three, and found certain stones, in a place call'd
Cunninghams Ford, out of an hundred pound of which, were extracted twenty-six ounces of fine silver.
In 1606, He sent again four Ships and a Pinnace,
Godske Lindenaw Admiral, and
James Hall Pilot-General; they brought away five of the natives.
In 1607,
James Hall was sent again, but the Seamen mutining as soon as he came to the coast, brought the Ship back again into
Denmark, without any thing done.
The King of
Denmark set out two Ships more, under
Christian Richardson an
Holsteiner, with
Norwegian and
Iselandish Mariners, who returned before they saw shore. More of their expeditions we know not, till 1619, when he sent out
John Munck with two Ships. They arrived safe at
Cape Farewell, 60 deg. 30 min. where their tackle was so frozen, and full of isicles, that they could not handle them; the next day was so hot, that they could not endure their clothes, but wrought in their shirts. The south part of
Hudsons Bay he call'd
Mare Novum; that part towards
Groneland, Mare Christianum. He arriv'd in 63 deg. 20 min. where he winter'd, and call'd it
Muncks Winterharbour, and the country
New Denmark, (it seems to be near
Diggs Island). In that long winter he there endured, little of note happen'd, but that in
April it rained, and then came thither vast quantities of fowls, of divers sorts, to breed in those quiet, undisturbed places. Of all his company, which was forty-six in one Ship, and sixteen in the Pinnace, scarce so many were left alive, as were able to bring the Pinnace thorow very horrid dangers to their own country.
In 1636, The
Gronelandish Society at
Copenhagen, sent two Ships; which arrived at
Fretum Davis, near to which the Pilot found a black sand, which he conceived to contain considerable quantity of Gold, wherewith he freighted his Ship, neglecting further discovery. Returning to
Denmark, and his Sand, after examination being found to contain no Gold at all, he was so severely blamed by the President of the Society, and so ashamed to be mistaken, that he dyed with grief. And since that nothing more known of any adventures that way from
Denmark.
If any one desire to know what became of the eight
Gronelanders,Gronelanders
[...] Denmark. brought at several times into
Denmark; the account is this: The King commanded great care should be taken of them, appointed certain persons to attend them, to give them liberty enough, so as they prevented their escape. No necessary or convenience was wanting; their food such as they could eat, milk, butter, cheese, flesh, and fish, but raw. They could eat no bread, nor boil'd meat, but nothing so much abhorr'd by them as wine, or brandy. Their pleasantest beuvrage was trainoyl. But whatever was done to, or for them, could never take away that melancholy and chagrin, which they continually lived in for the want of their beloved country. They could never be brought to learn much of the
Danish language, or to apprehend any thing of Christian Religion. Three of them were sent back towards their own country 1606, the most towardly and hopeful, who might serve for interpreters and brokers to the
Danes; but two of them,
Oxo and
Omeg died in the Ship, and the third (because the
Danes durst not land, or trade, by reason of the great numbers of natives that appear'd in arms on the coast, ready to revenge them that had been before carried away) was brought back into
Denmark, to his former treatment. An Ambassador arriving there from
Spain, the King was pleased to shew him those Savages, and their dexterity in rowing, which was by all the spectators admired. The Ambassador sending them money, one of them had the courage to buy him clothes after the
Danish fashion, got a feather in his cap, boots and spurs, and all things
ala cavaliere; he came also to the King, and desired to serve him: but this fervor was quickly decay'd, and the poor man returned to his sadness and complaints. Some of them endeavoured to get to Sea in their little boats, but being retrieved, dyed of melancholy. Two lived divers years at
Koldingen in
Jutland, where they were employed in diving for Pearl-Muscles; in which, their skill and dexterity was such, that every one that saw them, believed they had practised the same employment in their own country. Such success they had, that the Governor promised himself great profit thereby; and that in a short time he should sell Pearls by the quart, if they continued. But his covetousness destroyed his gain; for not content with what they fished in summer, he also compelled them under the ice in winter time; where one of them fell into such a disease, from the cold so contracted, that he dyed. After whose death the other never enjoyed himself; but finding an opportunity, he got his little Boat, and before he was overtaken, got to the main Sea. But being brought back, they represented to him, the impossibility of his ever getting home to
Groneland; but he sleighted their advice, and told them, that he intended to go northward so far, and when he was there the stars would direct him into his own country.
The country is mostly all high-land and mountains, cover'd with snow all the year,
The Soil, &c. but the southern parts more than the northern. They have very little or no wood growing there, except some few bushes, and not many plants or herbs; consequently, not many beasts there nourished; but their chief subsistence is upon fishing. There are divers mountains, which promise rich mines of mettal: and some have been found to contain it actually, others only to make a shew. The inhabitants know neither sowing nor planting; tho the soil seem'd to be fertil and pleasant, especially between the mountains. The northern parts, by reason of the terrible ice and cold, are wholly undiscovered; the southern consist of many Islands, different in shapes and bigness: which seems to be the reason, that in these Seas are many and various strong currents, and (as
Ivor Boty saith) very many dangerous whirlpools towards the west and north; none of which however have been found by our Mariners. The country seems much subject to earthquakes, else very healthful; only it was observed, that those who went thither infected with any Venereal disease, grew worse immediately, and could not there be cured. Which they attributed to the purity of the air, perhaps they might have done it more rationally to the cold.
[Page 12]Ivor Boty speaks much also of their great numbers of Cows and Sheep;
Beasts. but our men found no beasts there, but Bears, Foxes (very many of which are black), Rain-Deer, and Dogs, whereof are two sorts, a bigger, which they use to draw their Sleds; and a lesser, which they feed for their tables. Our men observed this peculiarity both in their Foxes and Dogs, that their pizzles were of bone. Tho it is very likely, that there are the same sorts which are in
Lapland and
Samoieda; but our men have not searched any more than the shoars, both because of their short stay, and the treachery of the inhabitants.
Of Fishes there is great both plenty and variety, Whales,
Fishes. Seals, Dog-fish; but in these are caught the greatest quantity of
Sea-Ʋnicorns, whose horns are so much esteemed, and kept as rarities in the Cabinets of Princes. The natives here are so well stored with it, that they have sufficient both for truck, and their own use. They make of them (besides other utensils) swords, and heads for their darts and arrows; which they work and grind with stones, till they make them as sharppiercing as ours. This horn grows in the snout of the fish, and is his weapon, wherewith he fears not to fight the Whale; and to assault, and sometimes endanger a Ship. The fish it self is as large as an Ox, very strong, swift, and hard to be caught, except left on the shore by the tide, or entangled by the weeds.
Fowls are here in great abundance and variety.
Fowls. Our men have seen those they call
Bassgeese, or such as once a year come to breed in the
Bass, a famous rock or Island near
Edinburgh. The natives also have a very great art and dexterity in making and setting snares and springes to catch them; which they do chiefly for their skins and feathers. Two or three of our men, with their guns, killed in one day fifteen hundred, and found them worse tasted, but better clothed than those of the same kind in these countries; they could not eat them till flayed, their skins being very thick, tough, and more cover'd with feathers; which also were not easily plucked off; which is the reason that the natives dress their skins as they do those of beasts, and Seals, and make garments of them; using them to all purposes like other furrs; with the feathers outward in summer, inward in winter: which is also observed in all other cold countries, as well as
Groneland.
All persons,
Of the Northlight. that have been there, give a wonderful and strange account of a certain
northlight, as they call it, not easily conceived by them who have not seen it. It appears usually about the time of the new Moon, and tho only in the north, yet doth it enlighten the whole country; sometimes also
Norway, Iseland, and even these regions of ours, as
Gassendus (vita Piresk, & exercit. In Doctorem Flud) saith, himself observed, and at large describes. Nor should I much doubt to affirm, that it is that which is sometimes seen in
England, and especially in the northern parts, call'd
Streaming. It is said to be like a great pillar (or beam) of fire, yet darting out rays and streams every way, moving also from place to place, and leaving behind it a mist or cloud; continuing also till the Sun-beams hide it.
The country seems to be inhabited by divers nations,
Division of the Country. differing in habit, manners, and language. Those whom
James Hall found and brought with him, differed much from those with whom
Gotske Lindenaw had to do. That part which the
Norwegians are said to have anciently possessed, was an inconsiderable part of that whole country, and they found several nations there besides themselves; govern'd by several Kings; tho they write not, that they had wars one with another, but only against them. Our late discoverers in 66 deg. 50 min. found a country which the natives (as they could understand them) called
Secanunga; who also said, that they had a great King, carried upon mens shoulders, and they called him
Cachico. But more particulars than these, I find not.
The inhabitants are generally of a low stature,
Inhabitants. black hair, flat nos'd, broad fac'd, lips turned up, and of a ripe Olive colour, some of them also quite black. Their women (for their greater ornament doubtless) stain their faces in blew, and sometimes in black streaks, which colour they let into the skin, by pricking it with a sharp bone, that it will never be taken nor worn out. In all things they resemble the
Samoieds and
Laplanders. They are very active and strong, yet could some of our
English run swifter, and leap farther than any of them; but they were hard enough for any of ours at wrastling. They are also very couragious, and sometimes desperate, for rather than be taken by our men, they would throw themselves down the rocks and mountains. Extreamly thievish, treacherous, and revengeful they proved; nor could any kindness or fair dealing win them; but, as true Barbarians, never omitted any opportunity of fulfilling their desires; they would steal when they saw the Mariners look upon them. After they had been well used and treated at their tables, they would shoot at, sling stones, wound, and kill our men, if they could. Yet are they apprehensive enough, and quickly conceive yours, and express their own meaning. If they had not seen what was asked them, they winked, or cover'd their eyes; if they understood not, stopt their ears, and the like. They delight exceedingly in musick, to which they would keep time both with their voice, hands, and feet: wonderful also affectionate one to another, and to their country. In one voyage there went a
Danish Mariner, with black hair, flat nos'd, and other, tho not very exact, resemblances of a
Gronelander; as soon as they saw him, they came about him, kissed him, hung upon him, and shewed to him all possible demonstrations of kindness and affection. And those who were in
Denmark, never enjoy'd themselves, nor had any content, but continually pined away, and languish'd with discontent for their condition, and love of their country. Their religion, such as it is, seems to be unto the Sun; for when our people invited them to conversation, bartering,
&c. they held up their hands towards the Sun, and cried
Yotan, nor would they come near us, till our men had done the like. But
John Munck, and divers others, having gone farther into the country, found images, such as we make of Devils, with horns, beaks, claws, cloven feet,
&c. very ill made; Altars also, and quantities of bones of beasts, as of Deer, Foxes, Dogs, and the like, near unto them. They seem also, as all Idolaters, given to inchantments and sorceries. Our men have seen them lying flat upon the earth, and muttering their prayers, or charms, into the ground, worshipping the Devil, whose proper habitation they conceive to be under them. In some diseases they tye a stick to a great stone, to which they pay their devotions; and if they can lift it up easily and lightly, they think their prayers are heard, and recovery granted. In winter they retire from the Sea-side, unto the warmer valleys, where they have their houses and towns; which are commonly caves at the foot of an hill,
[Page][Page][Page 13]round like an oven, close to one another; and passages in the inner parts from one to another; their doors, which are low and round, open to the south; and they dig trenches also to draw away the water that falls, or drains, from the hill. The entrance, and some part of their house stands without the cave, which they frame very handsomly and commodiously of the ribs of Whales join'd artificially at the top, and cover'd with Seals-skins. They raise also one part of their floor higher than another, which they strow with moss to sleep upon. But in their fishing time they have tents, which they remove from place to place in their larger Boats. They set up four poles, and cover them with skins; which serves very well in summer: when fishing is done, they return with them to their houses. Their manner of bartering, is to make two heaps, one of such things as they desire, the other of what they would part with; and they cease not to take away from the one or other, till the trade is ballanced. The chiefest things of ours which they valued, were knives, needles, little pieces of iron, looking-glasses,
&c. for these they would sell their bows and arrows, their boats, and strip themselves of their clothes, but never, like some other Barbarians, sell their wives and children.
Their clothing is either of birds skins,
Their Clothing. with the feathers and down upon them, or Seals, Dogfish, or the like. Seals they use most in their fishing, because that fish there abounds, and are easily deceived, by seeing one clad in their own Livery: besides, that these kind of furs are not so apt to be wet, tho dip'd in water. They wear the hair sides outward in summer, inward in winter, and in great colds carry two or more suits one upon another. They dress their skins very well, making them dry, soft, and durable, and sow them also very strong with sinews of beasts, and needles made of fish-bones.
But in nothing do they shew so much art,
Their Boats. as in their Boats or Canoes. They are made of that we call Whalebone, about an inch thick and broad, and these not set like ribs, but all along from prow to poop, fast sowed to one another with strong sinews, and cover'd over with Seals-skin. They are from ten to twenty foot long, and about two foot broad, made like a Weavers shuttle, sharp at both ends, so that he can row either way; and in making this pointedness they are of all things most curious, for therein consists the strength of their Vessel. In the middle of it are the ribs, both to keep the sides asunder, and to make the hole in the covering, wherein the rower sits. They have a deck made of the same materials, which is closely fasten'd to the sides, in the midst whereof is a round hole, as big as the middle of a man; so that when he goes to Sea, he sets himself in that hole, stretching out his feet forward into the hollow of the Boat; he stops up the hole so close with his frock, or loose upper garment, that no water can enter, tho it were in the bottom of the Sea. His frock is strait tyed at the handwrists, and to his neck, and his capouch sowed also close to it; so that if the Boat be overturned or overwhelmed in the Sea, he rises up again without any wet either upon his skin or in his Boat. They have but one oar, which is about six foot long, with a paddle six inches broad at either end, this serves him both to ballance his Boat, and move it; which he doth with that incredible celerity, that one of our Boats with ten oars is not able to keep company with them; the
Danish relation saith, that they rowed so swift, that they even dazled the eyes of the spectators; and tho they crossed frequently, yet never interfered or hit one another.
Their fishing ordinarily is darting;
Their Fishing. their darts are long, strongly barbed, and at the other end have bladders fastned to them, that when they have struck the fish, he may spend himself with strugling to get under water, which yet he cannot do, and so is easily taken.
Besides these, they have greater Boats for the removing their tents and other utensils, as also to carry their fish they have caught to their houses; these are thirty and forty foot long, and have sometimes ten, and sometimes more seats for rowers. Cardinal
Bembus (in his
Venetian History) saith, that in his time one of these, with seven persons in it, was by storm cast upon the coast of
Britany. I know not whether it be worth mentioning, that they have Kettles and Pans made of stone (some say of Loadstone) that endures the fire wonderfully, but not having tools fit to hollow them sufficiently, they make up the edges of Whalebone.
FREESLAND,
or FRISELAND,
LIeth in 60 deg. more westerly than any part of
Europe: distant from
Iseland [...] leagues. It is reported in bigness not to be much lesser than
England; a ragged and high land, the mountains cover'd with snow, and the coast so full of drift Ice, that it is almost inaccessible.
It was first discovered to us by
Nicolao and
Antonio Zani,Its Discovery. two
Venetian Gentlemen that were here shipwrack'd. They describe the inhabitants to be good Christians, very civil, and to be govern'd by a great Lord, whose name was
Zichmay, whose mighty conquests, and strange accidents, may be read in
Hackluit. It is not our business to write or repeat romances. Those men whom our Seamen (touching there accidently) saw, were like in all things to the
Gronelanders, both in features of body, and manner of living, as much as they could judge; so like, that many of them thought it continued to
Groneland; in which opinion also they were confirm'd by the multitudes of the Islands of ice, which coming from the north, argued land to be that way: for many of our Mariners hold, that salt water doth not freeze, but that all the ice they find in the Sea comes from the Bays and mouths of fresh water Rivers; for the ice it self is sweet and fresh being dissolved, and serves to all purposes as well as spring or river water. Besides, the salt Sea (they say) is always in motion, and so cannot freeze. But the
Dutch, who wintred in
Nova Zembla, took notice that the salt water freez'd, and that two inches thick in one night.
There seems to be good fishing every where upon the coast. In their soundings they brought up a sort of pale Coral, and little stones clear as Chrystal. They call'd it
West England, and one of the highest mountains they called
Charing-Cross.
EUROPA delineata et recens edita per NICOLAUM VISSCHER
Nobilissimo Prudent. Domino[?] D. SIMONI VAN HOORN, Consulo et Senatori Vrbis
Amstelodamensis,[?] [...], Ordinum Belgicae Feoderatae
nomine[?] ad Magnae Britanniae Regem nuper Legato extraordinario.
THE Holy Scripture (a Monument ancienter,
The peopling of the world after the Flood. and of greater authority then any among the Heathens) declares the whole earth after the Flood to have been overspread by the sons of
Noah. Cham's posterity seems to have peopled
Africa, and some parts of the adjoining Continent; yet not so universally, but that divers Colonies were there planted, both of the sons of
Sem and
Japhet. The posterities of
Sem and
Japhet were so intermingled, that even anciently, much less in these later times, there could not be any exact distinguishing of their limits. Tho the common opinion is, that
Japhet's sons inhabited the greatest part of
Europe. We must therefore omit this division, for want of evidence, and content our selves with that of the Ancients, dividing the then known world into
Europe, Asia, and
Africa; the modern discoverers have added
America.The ancient division of the world. Now when this division of the Earth into
Europe, Asia, and
Africa, was first instituted, as also the reasons of it, and of the impositions of the names, is to us utterly unknown. That it is very ancient, appears by
Herodotus, the first credible Historian that we have of the Heathens; and from what he says in his fourth Book, it may be easily collected, that even in his time, tho the names were universally receiv'd, yet the reasons of them were not known. It should seem however, that the division was made by the
Grecians, or by some neighbours to those Seas; because to them, and as far as their knowledge reach'd, it seems very proper and useful. The bounds of
Europe are conveniently stated, as to them, but in other respects the division seems not so rational; for
Asia is much bigger than both the other; nor is
Europe an equal balance for
Africa: but
Europe being least known to them, and seeming a vast territory, perhaps they might think that the whole Earth was not large enough to contain more than three such proportions. Besides the Regions within both the Polar Circles, seem not to be comprehended under any of these parts; and tho the limits betwixt
Europe and
Asia seem to be well determined as far as
Palus Meotis, yet are they beyond that (which is the greater part) not so distinctly constituted by any natural limits, nor any other certainty. However tho perhaps the division of the Astronomers into Zones, Climates,
&c. may seem more accurate, yet is this, to us especially (who consider not the spaces of ground only, but the differences of Nations also and habitations) much more commodious, and therefore we shall follow it in these discourses, beginning first with
Europe.
Europe,Europe. tho acknowledged the least of the four parts of the world, yet in many respects is by learned men preferred before the rest.
Strabo, and after him many other Geographers, have recommended it for the mildness of the air, the fertility of the soil, the multitude of navigable rivers, and the abundance of cattel, and all other things necessary or convenient for humane life: but more especially for the valour, ingenuity, and beauty of the inhabitants. To which may be added, the magnificence of their Governments, the freedom of their Subjects, the equality of their Laws, the arts and industry of the people, and above all the sanctity of their Religion: which is accompanied with a greater proportion and variety of learning and knowledge than all the world besides could ever pretend to. Yet I do not perceive one part to have much advantage over another, except from the industry and skill of the inhabitants, which in one place is greater in one kind, in others more signal in another, and is able to convert a natural inconvenience to a greater pleasure and profit. All the advantages we know
Europe to have above other parts of the world, are from its embracing Christianity so generally as it doth. For if we reflect upon the ancient Inhabitants before they were Christians, they were as barbarous, wild, faithless, bruitish, as any the most inhumane Nations of
America. Tho it cannot be denied, but that the civility of the
Romans, possessors of the greatest part of
Europe, was a great disposition to their receiving of Christianity; and that the extream barbarousness of some, as well as the voluptuousness of other Nations, renders them less prepared to embrace it.
It is in vain for us to search into the origine of the Name, either from ancient fables,
Its Name. or modern conjectures, our first Historian, as we already touched, ingenuously confesseth, he could neither discover who was the first imposer of the name, nor for what reason it was given. Notwithstanding, if it may be lawful to adventure a conjecture grounded upon an observation of that excellent and ancient Historian
Thucydides, in his first Book, it may probably have had its name from a Province called
Europa, near the
Bosphorus Thracius; to which place was the shortest and most usual passage out of
Asia, and where new Colonies arriving thrust forward the ancient Inhabitants: who from
Europa peopling the rest of the Regions westward, might perhaps carry with them the name of the Country they quitted to make room for new plantations.
First Inhabitants. Howbeit we must not conceal, that the learned are of divers judgments in this matter: For all those who hold
Europe to be peopled by the posterity of
Japhet, do as we now mention'd, maintain that the first planters came by Sea out of
Asia: but those who rather imagine them the offspring of
Shem, conceive that they came by land betwixt the
Caspian Sea, and
Palus Meotis, thence thro
Tartary, and ancient
Scythia, into the Northern parts as far as
Scandia, where their inundation being stopt by the vast Ocean, they overflow'd into the Southern parts, as
Britany, France, Germany, Thrace, &c. And this opinion seems to be confirm'd by the tradition of the Northern Nations in their
Edda, as the other pretension seems to be grounded upon
Scripture: but as this makes not much use of any arguments but what are drawn from the similitude of names, so that tradition of
Edda seems to suppose those places inhabited before
Thor or
Wodens migration, which indeed seem to be but of later times, even after the
Trojan war. Tho we suppose two
Wodens, Princes of Colonies, the later being about our Saviour. Methinks it is not improbable, that
Scandia, Sarmatia, and thence as far as
Thrace, were peopled from the North, the
Getae being originally
[Page 15]Goths, and the
Daci Danes, the
Sarmatae Scythians; nor is there any memorial of Nations ancienter than these in those places. Besides, their languages betray their original. But the same reasons seem not to hold concerning
Greece, Italy, and all the South-part of
Europe; nor is it likely, that they who lived in a continual prospect of
Europe, even so near that they could swim over without the help of bladders, should so long forbear to seize upon a plentiful and rich Country, till they were prevented by those who successively peopled the Countries of the North, and round about the
Euxine Sea. Wherefore it appears more probable, that the Southern
Europe was first planted from the Maritime Coasts of
Asia; which seem also to be inhabited by the posterity of
Japhet.
It is bounded on the north by the
Frozen Sea,Bounds. on the west by the vast
Western Ocean, on the south from
Afric by the
Mediterranean, and on the east from
Asia by the
Archipelago, and so on by the
Black Sea, and
Palus Meotis, or the
Sea of
Zabache, and thence by the River
Tanais to the most eastern winding thereof at the City
Tuja, and thence by an imaginary line to the River
Oby, and by that to the
Frozen Sea.
Europe,Situation and ex
[...]ent. as describ'd on the Globe, lies toward the Artic Pole, mostly in the northern temperate Zone, under the fourth and the ninth Climats, and between the seventh and seventeenth Parallels, which fall about ten degrees on this side the
Tropic of
Cancer, and three within the
Polar Circle. It is extended in length from
Cape St. Vincent, to the mouth of the River
Oby, 71 deg. on the Equator, which reckoning 60 miles to a degree, come to 4260
English miles. The breadth of
Europe from
Cape Matagan in the
Morea, to the most northern Country at the
Polar Circle, contains about 44 deg. on the Meridian, which make about 2640
English miles.
Europe conteins in it several Kingdoms,
Division. the greatest of which is the Empire of
Muscovy or
Russia on the north-east, comprehending several Nations more to the north-east, scarce known to us; and on the east
Cazan, and other Countries by the River
Volga; and part of
Lapland on the north-west. Next to
Muscovy on the west lies the Kingdom of
Sweden, containing great part of
Finland on the east, and all to the mountains of
Norway on the west. Again, to the east of
Europe, by the
Caspian Sea, lies the Country of the
Circassi, and the Kingdom of the
Lesser Tartary, and some other lesser Provinces. Thence south-west lies the Kingdom of
Poland, extending it self thro the midst of
Europe from the
Baltic to the
Euxin Sea, comprehending on the north
Prussia, Litvania, Lifland; on the east
Volinia, Podolia; and southward
Moldavia, Walachia. Northwest of
Poland, lies
Germany, under several Princes, the Emperor being the chief. North of
Germany lies the Kingdom of
Denmark; to the west
Flanders, or the
Low Countries, under divers Governments; and north-west of them, the Kingdom of
Great Brittain, comprehending several Islands. South-west of
Germany lies the Kingdom of
France; more south, the Kingdom of
Spain; full south
Italy, under several Princes. South-east of
Germany lies the greatest part of
European Turky, as
Hungary, Transylvania, and more south
Croatia, Dalmatia, and all
Greece.
There are in
Europe,Empires, &c. three Empires, that of
Muscovy, the
Roman Empire, and the Empire of the
Turks. Ten Kingdoms,
Sweden, Denmark, Poland, Hungary, Bohemia, England, France, Spain, Portugal, and the
Lesser Tartary. Nine Commonwealths, and about forty Principalities; of which when we come to particular Countries.
[...]riginal Languages.
The principal Languages spoken in the northern and western parts of
Europe, may be reckon'd these three, the ancient
Gothic, the
Anglo-Saxonic, and the
Francic, which also seem to be near akin, or to have great affinity one with another, and the later to be made up of the two former.
From the
Gothic, which differs little from the old
Greek, are derived the ancient
Cimbric, and the modern languages now spoken in
Sweden, Denmark, Norway, Iseland.
The
Anglo-Saxonic may seem to have given birth to the
Belgic, or
Low Dutch, especially the ancient
Frisic, and in great part to the
English and
Scotch,
The
Francic is compounded of the other two, and seems to be the same with the
Alamannic or
Theotisc, whence the upper
German language takes its original.
The ancient
British, which seems also to be the
Celtish or
Gaulish, the dialects whereof are still spoken in some parts of
Great Britain, and in
Britannia in
France. The
Cantabric also, or the language of
the Biscainers in the northern mountains in Spain, is not much different. And likewise the
Irish, if not it self a dialect of the old
Cimbric, as it seems to be, must be accounted an original language.
The
Turkish language is generally spoken in
European Turky, and also
Arabic is well understood by their learned men, as being the language of the
Alkoran; and is spoken in some of the Mountains of
Granada.
The Inhabitants of the
Lesser Tartary, that live between
Tanais and the
Neiper, speak the
Tartarian language; as also the
Cossacs, with some small difference.
The
Fins and
Laplanders seem to have divers languages, both from one another, and from all the rest.
The
Paisan-Liflanders likewise have a different language to themselves.
The
Sclavonic language, whether originally one or many, is still continued in divers Regions of
Europe, as in the dominions of the Emperor of
Russia, divers countries subject to the King of
Poland, in some parts of
Hungary (but the
Hungarian tongue properly so call'd, is by the learned accounted an original language),
Bohemia, and
Sclavonia, but with greater difference than dialects of the same language use to be.
The ancient
Greek seems to have been the mother of the old
Hetruscan, Oscan, Menapian, and such others as were spoken anciently in
Italy, as may appear by those few remainders still extant of them; and therefore also of the
Latin, in the opinion of many learned, as the
Latin is of the present
Italian, French, Spanish, Grison, and some other languages. The
Greek it self, tho with great alteration, is still continued in the Continent and Islands of
Greece, and some places near thereunto.
The glory of
Europe is its Religion,
Religion. which in most parts of it is but one, tho diversly professed.
Greece, with its Islands in the
Egean Sea, and others as far as
Corfu, as also some parts of
Croatia, Dalmatia, together with
Muscovia, Walachia, Moldavia, Podolia, Volinia, and some other parts of the dominions of
Poland, with other neighbouring Countries, follow the
Greek Church.
The
Latin Church conteins, 1, Those of the
Reform'd Religion, and 2, Those of the
Roman.
1. The
Reformed Religion is embraced in
Great Brittain and
Ireland, and the lesser Islands belonging to the Crown of
England. And with some diversity in
Sweden, Denmark, Holland, and the rest of the
Ʋnited Provinces, and several parts of
Germany, Transylvania, and some parts of the Kingdom of
Poland.
[Page 16] 2. The
Roman Religion prevails in
Italy, Spain, Portugal, France, Poland, and the greatest part of the
German Empire, and other Countries.
Mahumetanism is professed in
European Turky, by the
Great Turk and his
Musselmen.
The great ledg of Mountains that has its beginning at the great Western Ocean,
Mountains. first divides
France and
Spain by the name of the
Pirenean Hills, and is thence continued thro the south parts of
France, till it cover
Italy, and is there call'd the
Alps; a branch of which running thro the whole length of
Italy, has the name of the
Apennine Mountains; another branch is continued under divers names, as the
Rhetian-Hills, thro the country, now called, of the
Grisons. Alpes, Graiae, Noricae, Juliae, &c. all which have now divers names according to the several countries thro which they pass. From
Italy they continue thro
Stiria, Carinthia, Hungary, Transylvania, Moldavia to the
Black Sea; and branch out into divers other countries; of all which we shall treat more exactly in the particular descriptions.
The Mountains of the north are not much discover'd; one ledg of them is continued from the
Baltic to the northern Ocean, dividing
Norway from the neighbouring Nations. Those in the utmost north, anciently call'd
Riphaei and
Hyperborei, have at this day lost those names, consequently they are unknown, except they be those which are by the inhabitants call'd
Welikicamenopoias, i. e. Cingulum mundi, or the
great Rocky Girdle; of which, as also of other Mountains not here mentioned, in their proper and particular places.
The Seas that coast
Europe,Seas. are the
Northern and
Western Ocean, the
Mediterranean Sea, and the
Euxin or
Black Sea, which also contein in them several lesser
Seas, Bays, Streights, &c. and have different names from the different shoars they wash, as
Mare Britannicum or
Brittish Sea, Mare Germanicum or
German Sea, &c. and are therefore to be look'd upon by us as belonging to those Countries whence they derive their names.
We defer to speak of the Rives that are comprehended in one Country,
Rivers. till we come to treat of that Country. The most noted which run thro divers Countries, are these: First, the
Danubius, or
Danow, which arising in the
Alps, runs thro
Germany, Hungary, by
Transylvania and
Walachia, into the
Euxine Sea.
Next, the
Rhine, which arising also in the
Alps, not far from the head of the
Danow, runs along by
Germany and the
Low Countries into the
Brittish Ocean.
The next is
Boristhenes or
Nieper, which has its rise in the Confines of
Muscovy, and runs thro
Litvania, Volinia, &c. into the
Euxine Sea.
And lastly,
Don or
Tanais, arising likewise in
Muscovy, and running thro the lesser
Tartary, and other adjoining Countries, falls into
Palus Meotis.
We omit to speak of the
Volga, till we come to
Asia, to which it more properly belongs.
The dispositions of the Inhabitants cannot be easily reduc'd to one general character,
Dispositions. varying according to the Religions, the Governments, the customary employments, and the divers temperature of the air and soil in which they live.
The Arts peculiar to,
Arts. and most practis'd in
Europe, and there invented, may be reckon'd Printing, Painting, Statuary, divers particulars in the Art of War and Navigation, and most especially in the learned and scholastic Sciences, in which the
Europeans have advanced to a much greater perfection than either the
Asiatics or the
Africans.
Doctrina et humanitate praedito D. Isaaco Bernart, rerum quae per Moscoviam maxime trahuntur mercator
[...] peritissimo hanc Moscoviae tabula dedicat affinis finis.
Hen. Hon
[...]ius
Wirst.
[...]
[...] Germanica quorum
[...]
RVSSIAE, vulgo MOSCOVIA dictae, Partes Septentrionalis et Orientalis.Auctore Isaaco Massa▪[blazon or coat of arms]
MEsech or
Mosoc, [...] the son of
Japhet, is generally supposed to have peopled this Country; the chief reason I conceive to be the similitude of the name. We find also in
Strabo, frequent mention of the
Moschi, tho it be uncertain from him where their Country was.
Mela placeth them near the
Caspian Sea;
Pliny near
Iberia, which is now called
Georgia; Lucan, and since him
Sidonius, near the
Sarmatae; and it seems, that
Sarmatia was a name better known than
Russia. So that the
Moschi seem to be some of those many Nations at this time under, and that toward the south of the
Muscovitish Empire. But the Annals of the Country acknowledg no other name they had anciently then
Russes, tho some modern Latin-writers call them
Roxalano's, quasi Russo-Alanos, but more
Ruthenos, and their Nation
Rossia; which signifies dispersion or scattering, because they (tho very great and populous) yet lived dispersed, without certain government, in continual quarrels and dissentions one with another, till
Genareta Daniel, or
Ivan his son, surnamed
Caleta or
Scrip (because he always carried such an one at his girdle, with money to relieve such as were in necessity) gather'd and bound them together in one government and body. And for their better union, built amongst, and almost in the middle of them, the City
Mosco, upon a River of that name; making it thenceforward the Metropolis of the Empire: from whence they begun to be call'd
Muscovites, and by little and little have advanced themselves into a very great and famous Nation.
It is true,
[...]. that the name of
Russes was anciently further extended than now it ordinarily is, for the
Russes were said to inhabit from the
Weisel to
Volga, and from the Black Sea to the Northern Ocean. And even yet the
Polonians call a part of the Kingdom of
Poland Red Russia; part also of the dominions belonging to
Lithvania, Black Russia; and that under the Grand
Tzaar, White Russia; as they say, because that people ordinarily woar white garments, but more universally white caps upon their heads. Of these alone in this place we are to treat.
The dominion of the Grand
Tzaar lies between 46 and 66 deg. of Latitude, that is, from
Astracan to
Fretum Waygatz, (tho part of his Empire lies some more South, and some more North) which allowing 60 miles to a degree, comes to 1260
English miles. And in Longitude from
Boristhenes about 55 deg. to the
Volga 80 deg. after the same rate about 1500 of the same miles, according to our best and newest Maps. The borders toward the North are the Frozen Sea, and some part of
Lapland; on the South are the
Crim and
Precop-Tartars; on the East we may account the
Volga and the
Ob to be his borders; and on the west, the dominions of the King of
Poland, Sueden, and some part of
Lapland. Tho these are not exactly set down, yet they may serve for a general direction; more preciseness must be expected in the description of the several parts. But from this general notion, every one perceives that there must necessarily be a vast difference, as between the length of days (some being not sixteen hours, others six months long) so to heat and cold, betwixt the several parts of this countrey; and consequently as great variety of seasons, soils, fruits, and productions of the Earth; likewise also of habits, customs, diet, and even of the very dispositions and manners, as well as the figures of the inhabitants, upon which heat and cold have no small influence. So that we shall omit these general descriptions, and reserve what we find concerning the particulars to their proper places. And of the Government and Empire in general, it will be best treated of when we come to the Seat, or Metropolitical City of the Empire. Mean while we shall proceed to speak of the several Provinces, as they lye in order, beginning at the North-East part. But we must bespeak the Readers first, not to expect any exact description of the bounds and limits of each Province, for besides that no Author hath so narrowly look'd into those things; it should seem, that the Emperor observes not always the same Commissions, but enlarges or diminishes his Governments as himself pleaseth. But for the same reason neither have we an exact enumeration of the Provinces, some reckoning more, some fewer. Those who number them according to the titles of the Grand
Tzaar, cannot find their count; for those places mentioned in his title, are some of them small places and inconsiderable, some again contain more Provinces then one, and some such Governments as are not at this time under the Grand
Tzaar; but as they subdued any dominion, they united all the titles to their former. But of this only by the by. In this we shall follow the tract of ground, proceeding from North-East to North-West, and make use of the best information we can find.
And before we enter upon
Russia, we shall take notice of a certain people, that take up a great share of these northern parts, not as inhabitants, nor as strangers, but as a wandering people, living upon hunting and prey, wherever they can find it. In this tract of ground we find the names, but nothing else, of divers Nations, as
Ʋgolici, Hugritsci, Voluhisci, Calami, and the like; all whom the
Russes (who till of late had not any distinct knowledg of them) called by the name of
Samoieds, or
self-eaters; and since that, they have also called a great tract of land both of the West and East side of the River
Ob, Samoiedia; I think erroneously, the
Samoieds (as I said) not being a nation. But however it be,
We shall begin with these
Samoieds,Of the Samoieds. tho not named amongst the Emperors Subjects, (except they be included in the title of Great Commander of
Siberia, or
Obdoria, neither of which is likely), partly because the
Muscovites retain their ancient form in their title, partly because these people are only in part, and by their own free submission
[Page 18]under the
Tzar. Part continue still in their ancient fierceness, barbarism, and heathenishness. Nor is their Country reduc'd into Towns and Governments, as
Russia is.
They seem to be a Nation altogether distinct from the
Muscovites, both in the make of their bodies, manner of living, language,
&c. and to be rather akin to the
Tartars, as are also the rest of those most Northern Nations,
Laplanders, Gronelanders, &c. because of their low stature, fullchestedness, broad and flat faces, long black hair, little hollow eyes, short legs, and knees bowing outward.
They inhabit the confines of
Europe and
Asia,Their habitations. and take up a considerable portion of the northern tract of both those parts. They live on both sides of the River
Ob (Obba, Oby); the
Russians call them
Sam-ieda, i. e. self-eaters, which is not improbable, both because at present they eat all manner of raw flesh, even the very carion that lies in the ditch. And those who live upon
Waygates, even till these times will not suffer the
Russes to land upon their Country, but if they catch will kill any of them, and eat them. Of those also, who live beyond the
Ob, the
Russians report, that they, in hard times, do not make any difficulty to devour one another; that if a Merchant come amongst them to trade, they will, to make him an high entertainment, not stick to kill a child for his sake; and that if any one dye amongst them, they make the best of him, and eat him. But themselves give another reason even of the name
Samoied, as if it signified
of themselves; that they were
ab origines, and born in that place. However, as I said, this is not a name of a Nation, but an accidental difference from most other people, yet such an one as hath quite obliterated the true name. How far they extend beyond the
Ob, is not yet discovered. On this side the River they reach as far as
Petzora; or at least the inhabitants of the Country betwixt those two Rivers, seem to be of the same original with the
Saimoieds. Waygate and
Nova Zembla in appearance are inhabited by the same Nation; as are
Siberia, Borandia, Jugoria, and so was the greatest part of Northern
Russia, till civiliz'd.
The Reader must not expect any exact relation of their affairs and actions.
Their discovery. They have not any thing of learning or records, nor so much as oral tradition of what hath been done amongst them in the very last ages. Nor do strangers mention any thing of them, save that they frequented, with their Furs and other commodities, the free Fairs and publick Marts held in several Towns of
Russia, till their submission to the
Muscovite. And the first that gave any notice of them to this part of the world, were our own Countrymen, who endeavouring the discovery of a passage that way to
Cathay and
China, happen'd upon their Country; who notwithstanding could not give any exact relation of them, because of their ignorance of the language, and the extream shyness and jealousie they have of all strangers and their conversation. The first that we find to have light upon them, was
Stephen Burroughs an
English man, 1556, in his voyage to discover the North-East passage. Before him also I find not any of our Geographers to have mentioned
Waygats (which he saith are Islands lying North-East of
Pechora) and
Nova Zembla; his relation (as also that of
Rich. Johnson, who went the same voyage, are extant in
Hackluit. Afterwards 1596,
Will. Barents gave some small account of them; since that, divers others. What we can find concerning them,
Their language and manner of life. we shall set down.
They have not all one language, but how many, or how differing, and in what places which language, we know not. Their manner of living seems to be much according to nature. They have no Cities, but some of them have houses, whither they sometimes (when not convenient to travel) retire; which are (as the
Groenlanders) in the foot of an hill, with passages to one another; the part that is not dug out of the ground, is of wood, meeting together at the top, and cover'd with bark and turf; with a hole in the top, which serves them for a chimney to vent their smoak, and door to creep out when the snow stops up their entrance. But the greatest part of them travel from place to place, where they can find best pasturage for their Rain-Deer, and best game or prey for themselves, and they would reckon it a curse to be confin'd to one place. Those next the Sea side abide upon the Sea commonly a month together, when it is seasonable fishing. When they wander, they carry wives, children, and all their wealth along with them; pretending no propriety in any place. They travel upon Sleds, drawn by their Rain-Deer, with so great speed, that they are able to post two hundred
Italian miles in one day. They bait and rest where is best provision for their beasts; and they travel commonly in company, ten Sleds fasten'd one to another, and to every of them one Rain-Deer at least, in which they carry their stuff and wealth, and call it
Argish: but when thus laden, they make shorter days journeys, and travel not above thirty miles in twelve hours. At night they pitch their Tents, which are the largest Skins and Furs set and extended upon short poles or stakes (of which the Country is very plentifully stored), so covering the whole frame, except a hole at the top, which lets out the smoak, and they heap snow upon the outside; the fire they make in the middle, and round about it spread their Bears-skins and Furs, whereupon they sleep. It is the wives office to set up the Cabbans, and guide the
Argish, or Convoy of Sleds; whilst the men bring in firing, and such provision as can be got for their Supper. From this their continual changing places, it comes, that these
Samoieds are the only guides for Merchants in winter time to all the great Towns near those Countries; who rarely mistake their way, tho the weather be never so misty. They are very nimble, and excellent archers; so that at
Moscow, to shew their skill, they set a small round piece of Tin, from which retiring as far as they could discern it, they never missed to hit with their arrow. Their garments are all of Fur; that next their bodies (called by them
Mallek, or a shirt) of young Fawns, Hares, or Swans-skins, very soft and well-dressed; the outward (called
Parka) of stronger and thicker Fur. And they take care to have them very fit, and not too loose or big for their body, which I suppose they do for warmth; for which cause they are very careful of their caps, and coverings for their heads. The women also have the same garments as the men, and therefore are not easily distinguished from them; save that they suffer on either side a lock of hair to hang down below their ears, and make blew lines in their faces, by drawing a thred dip'd in blew paint, lightly under the skin. The fashion of their habits is not the same in all places. They have no Bread, Rice, or any thing like it; their food is flesh of beasts, of all sorts, (which they eat raw, if they have not the convenience of drying it in the Sun, or wind, or scorching it with the fire), fish also, and fish-oyl, and honey.
Of body they are very strong, active, swift,
Dispositions. and healthful; hardy, and able to endure very great labour, thirst, and cold. And the women not less then the men; for at their child-bearing
[Page 19]the husband only is the midwife, and the goodwoman, as soon as deliver'd, washeth her child in snow, and the next morning is able to conduct her
Argish. They seem also to be stout and bold spirited, tho wars seldom happen amongst them; but their weapons, besides bows and arrows, are long spears and short swords. They are of a very quiet and not-quarrelsom disposition amongst themselves, but suspitious and jealous of all strangers, but this is because of their want of conversation. They seem not to have any government amongst them (those I mean who are not subjects to the
Muscovite) every one follows his own fancy and employment; but when they want any directions, or are in difficulties, they apply themselves to the most ancient person in that company or hoard, and he also is their Priest, and his directions they follow. Their frequentest consultations are concerning the future, which way they shall remove, and to what place, what success in their hunting, whether take such a journey, and the like. Controversies amongst them are not
[...] frequent, but are determined by a certain oath
[...]: They make an image of a man in snow, and lay before it a Wolves snout; he that is to swear, takes a sword, and rehearsing the names of his wives, children, and friends, desires that if he be not in the right, they may all be cut in pieces, even as himself doth cut that snow-image with that sword, which immediately he doth. Then he wishes that the Wolf may destroy his Rain-Deer, and that henceforward he may never kill any beast, if he speak not the truth; then he cuts the Wolves snout to pieces, and there is no more to be said to that controversie.
The
Samoieds buy their Wives for Deer, and may have as many as they can purchase;
[...]. the better sort have four or five. He is the richest man that hath most Deer and Daughters; selling them to such as will give most for them. Their marriages are not celebrated with any great ceremonies. The Bridegroom makes a feast to his friends, which (according to his ability) continues perhaps seven days. The feasting being ended, the Bride adorned with many iron rings, brazen bells, fish-bones,
&c. is deliver'd up to her husband, and all others depart the Tent till the next morning. If they like not their wives after half a year or a year, they return them back to their friends, and receive their Deer. When a rich man dies amongst them, that he may not be unattended in the next world, they strangle one of his slaves (whom they bury with him) and three of his Deer, with which they feast themselves. If a young child dies, under seven years old, they hang it by the neck on some tree, saying, that it must fly to heaven.
It hath been reported by divers Authors,
[...]. that these
Samoieds and the Northern
Russes exhibited great worship to an Idol they called
Slata-baba, or the
golden-old-wife, which was a great image of stone, representing a woman with a child in her arms. But our men say that is a fable; that there is indeed in one of the Islands in the mouth of the River
Ob, a great Rock, which with the help of fancy, may seem to be somewhat like such a woman; and that the Fishermen do many times in storms shelter themselves under that Rock, and practise their sacrifices and sorceries there, but not to the Rock. They seem to acknowledg a God, but to apprehend and represent him by such things by which they receive most benefit. They have been frequently observed every morning, as soon as they go forth, to fall on their knees, and hold up their hands toward the Sun. They have also many images, made as like men as their rudeness could work them; to which it is supposed that they use sacrificing, for they have found them set upright, besmear'd with blood, and many bones and ashes before them, and sometimes a chopping-block, whereupon it is supposed the beast to be offered was killed and divided. But tho our men never saw them sacrifice, yet
Richard Johnson (in
Hackluit p. 283.) gives us a strange relation of their divinations and sorceries, whereof he was an eyewitness; and it was to be informed which way, and to what place they were next to remove. He saith in short, that the ancientest of the family or kindred is always the Priest, that he had on his head a garland, and a piece of a coat of mail, whereto were fastened fish-bones, and many other trinkets; that he first beat upon an instrument like half a drum, with a little mawl, afterwards he begins to whoop and hollow as our hunters do, and the people answer'd him, but he with so great violence that he became sensless, and so fell down, and lay for some space. Coming to himself, he rose up and commanded three Ollens (or the largest Deer) to be killed; then he took a sword of near a yard long, and thrust it several times into his belly, but without any wound; afterwards he heated it in the fire, and thrust it in at his navel and out at his fundament, when (saith
Johnson) I laid my finger upon it, but no wound follow'd. The Priest being wearied, reposed whilst they heated a kettle of water, which being hot, they sang again, and brought in like the frame of a Sedan, into which the Priest, having put off his matters and his shirt, sat down, and put about his neck and under his left arm a small cord with a slip-knot, and gave one end to one lusty young man, and the other end to another; then they set the seething water before him, and cover'd both the frame wherein he sat and the kettle, that no man could see those dreadful mysteries. The people began to sing furiously, and the young men drew the cord close, whereupon hearing somewhat to fall into the water, I asked (saith
Johnson) what it was, they told me, it was his head and left shoulder which the cord had cut off, but they would not suffer me to go see that it was so. After more vehement singing, he came from behind the curtain safe and well. I demanded what their God had said, and whither they were to go; but was answer'd, that it was not for them to know what their God said, but that they were to obey what their Priest commanded. This was before their submission to the
Muscovite, for since that time the Emperor hath caused Christianity to be preached amongst them; and tho he forceth none of them to embrace it, yet many of them are baptized, and the worship of the Devil decreaseth and groweth out of reputation amongst them.
God of his mercy grant, that these ends of the earth also may be reduced under the laws and government of his Son, our dear Lord. Amen.
Their submission to the
Grand Tzaar I shall relate somewhat more copiously,
Their submission to the Grand Tzar. to shew all the world, that the
Russes are neither so barbarous, nor tyrannical as too many Authors (who measuring all men by themselves, account whatever is different from those notions wherein themselves have been educated, as barbarous and unreasonable) represent them. In the time of
Ivan Basilowich there lived upon the River
Wichida, or
Witsogda, an husbandman of a poor and vile descent, called
Oneeko, or
Onyka, who by his industry in tilling the ground, came to very great riches, which he vastly encreased afterwards by trading. Amongst many children he had three sons,
Jacove, Gregory, and
Simon, who traded in common. These men, with their father, dealt
[Page 20]chiefly with the
Samoieds, that came yearly to the Fairs of
Osel and
Ʋstiug. Oneeka was not content with the gain he reaped by his trade, but had also a great curiosity to know what countrymen, and whence they came, that brought such rich Furs to these markets; conceiving that great wealth was there to be obtained. He began therefore to insinuate into the conversation of these
Samoied traders; by his inviting and cajoling them, he obtained that twelve of his servants might go with them into their country; to whom he gave strict and particular orders how to behave themselves, and what to observe; which they did very carefully and faithfully. At their return with the
Samoieds, he courted them much more friendly, and commanded also his own servants not to speak of what they had seen or discover'd. The next year he sent more of his servants, and some of the most trusty of his kindred, with such low priz'd Merchandize as he conceived most proper for that place. These went to the River
Ob, where making acquaintance with the
Samoieds, they found Furs there to be of small price; that the people lived barbarously and incommodiously, in companies, without cities, without houses, or bread; govern'd only by some of the ancientest among them, without laws, without propriety; yet peaceably amongst themselves, and without envy to their neighbours, of whom they knew little. The
Onykaes driving this trade awhile became very rich, built many Churches, and some Towns; and grew so rich, that they were esteemed worth in money, besides lands, cattel,
&c. three hundred thousand Rubbles, or Marks. They set yearly at work ten thousand persons, besides five thousand slaves they had of their own; and paid to the Emperor yearly three and twenty thousand Rubbles for Custom, besides their maintaining several Garrisons on the confines of
Siberia. But whether they were afraid, that their riches might breed them enemies and accusers at the Court, where they were sure to be worsted; or whether they thought this trade thus managed was too great for Subjects, and prejudicial to their Prince, they resolved to declare it to the Emperor, and to make the advantage publick, and to the behoof of the Prince. Some of them therefore go to
Moscow, and by rich presents insinuate into the favour of
Boris Godenow, the Emperors Brother-in-law (and himself afterwards also Emperor), who at that time govern'd under a weak Prince the whole Empire. After some time they discover'd to him the situation of the countries of
Samoiedia and
Siberia, what they had seen, and observed therein, and what great wealth and advantage might thereby arrive to his
Tzaaric Majesty. This notice was received of
Boris with all the affection imaginable, as also by the Emperor himself
Pheodor Ivanowich. And first of all, they confirmed to the
Oneekaes so great priviledges and honours as a subject was capable of; then they sent certain Gentlemen and Soldiers in company of, and to be at the direction and discretion of the
Oneekaes; they order'd them to be richly clothed, and to carry the garb of Ambassadors; and gave them presents of small value to be bestowed among the natives, according to discretion; enjoining them to observe all rivers, woods, passages, very diligently, and especially such places as might be most convenient for building Castles and Towns; as also to use the people with all gentleness and kindness, and if it were possible, to bring some of the people along with them. These messengers, with those whom the
Oneekaes joined to them, behaved themselves so discreetly, and were so liberal of their trifles, that in a short time they had obtained the affections of the natives; whom, by frequently insinuating the great power and majesty of the Grand
Tzaar, making him almost a God upon earth, and the happy living of his subjects, they before their return perswaded them to submit themselves to his government, and to pay him as tribute for every head that was able to shoot, a pair of Sables every year; a thing not valued by the
Samoieds, but arising to a prodigious advantage to the
Muscovite. And because the
Samoieds desired to see these great wonders with their own eyes, which these messengers had declared to them concerning
Muscovy and the Emperor; they offer'd to take divers of them unto
Moscow, and to leave divers of their own people, who might live and learn the language against the time the others returned. When these poor Barbarians arrived at
Moscow, and saw all the gallantry of the Court, the majesty and pomp of the Prince, the greatness of his Armies, the conveniency also of their houses and household-stuff, the regularity of their obedience; in sum, when they had tasted the
Russes meats, and found them much better then their own, and perceived the civil life of the
Muscovites to be in all respects preferred to their own barbarism, they intreated that they might be accepted into the number of his subjects; and have persons sent to instruct and govern them according to those excellent rules which themselves there saw. Which things were accordingly granted, and Governors sent, and Castles and Towns order'd to be built, and the people to be instructed, as they still continue to do.
Besides others, these Towns are of most note,
Soil-Camscoy upon the river
Wisera, built for the refreshing and convenience of travellers, who from hence proceed on their journey into
Samoiedia, and those places by land. The inhabitants are
Russes and
Tartars; there is also great store of cattel, especially horses, upon which they travel over the great mountains
Coosvinscoy-, Cirginscoy-, and
Paduinscoy-Camen; places desert, and only frequented by
Tartars and
Samoieds in their hunting.
Vergateria, the first Town in
Siberia, begun to be built about 1590, where is resident a Governor and a Garrison for the
Muscovite, who every spring by the several rivers distribute their proportions of corn and provisions to the further Garrisons, who live where the ground is not tilled.
Japhanis, upon the river
Toera, begun since
Vergateria. Tinna, twelve days journey distant from
Japhanis, where are in winter-time great markets for Furs, between
Muscovites, Samoieds, and
Tartars. Tobolsca, the chief City of
Siberia, whither are brought all the tributes of of the Countries beyond, which thence are convey'd to
Moscow. Here is also the seat of justice for all
Samoiedia and
Siberia, and all the Governors are bound to obey this; it is situated between the rivers
Yrtis and
Tobol. Pohemy, upon the river
Tassa, in a very fruitful soil; most of the inhabitants are
Siberians. Olscoygorod, which was afterwards razed down by command of the Governor of
Tobolsca, because too near the Sea, and instead of it they built
Zergolta, upon an Island in the
Ob, and above that
Noxinscoy, at first a Castle, now grown into a great City; from whence by the command of the Grand
Tzaar Boris Godanove, they have discovered, and built divers Towns beyond the
Ob, which more properly belong to the discourse of
Asia. They also built
Tara, Jorgochum, Besobia, and
Mangansoiscoigorod, with many others, of which besides the names we know nothing; and in truth, all these northern parts are as yet undiscover'd, and nothing comes to our hands but imperfect relations
[Page][Page]MOSCOVIAE PARS AVSTRALIS.Isaaco Massa[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page][Page 21]of particular persons, to whom we cannot tell what credit ought to be given; yet they say, that the
Muscovites (the Emperor and his Council) are most exactly and particularly informed, and keep perfect registers from time to time, of all these both discoveries and buildings. One thing I shall add for their commendation, that wherever they come, they build Churches and Chappels, and take great care to set up the exercise of their Religion; to which they by divers artifices, as well as by example, (but not by force) endeavour to draw in and instruct the
Samoieds, Siberians, and other heathens under their dominion. It is also to be noted, that it is no wonder that the Straits of
Waygats and
Nova Zembla are so stopped up with ice, that no passage at any time, or very rarely, for great Ships, and only in some years for smaller Barks, can be hoped for thro those places; for so many huge Rivers discharging themselves into those Straits, in the spring when the ice begins to thaw, carry along with them vast mountains of ice, which is all gather'd into those narrow places, till the wind drives it into the open Seas. In 1612, Capt.
Isa. Samer was sent to this discovery, who could not perform his design, but in the end of
July measured ice there sixty fathoms thick; this ice melting first at the sides of the Rivers, and driven down with mighty violence by the great quantities of melted snow forcing it from above, carries down trees, and sometimes even whole woods fastened in it; which is the reason that they find so much floating wood in those Straits, and upon all the northern coast of
Muscovy, and the Islands adjoining; I dare not say so far as the north of
Ireland, where is often taken up Pines and Firs, which grow not in any place neer them, and have given cause for some men to suspect, that there are some other Islands near the
Hebrides, as yet undiscover'd.
The several Provinces of
Russia.
THE first Province of
Russia toward the North-East is
Obdoria, situate betwixt
Ob and
Pechora or
Petzora Rivers.
[...]. A large country, but thinly inhabited, which may be the reason that it is in our Maps call'd
Samoiedia, more frequently than
Obdoria, as if it were only the country of the
Samoieds. Concerning the great River
Ob, or
Oby, we have but little of certainty; for I cannot find that any of our Merchants have been there. An
English Factor, before
ann. 1600, employ'd one
Englishman, with others his servants, to discover the way unto, and the trade of it by land; but they were imprison'd, by order of the
Russ-Governors, who seem unwilling that any one should understand that profit, but themselves. Some conceive, that these people are mention'd in
Curtius, and other ancient Authors, by the name of
Scythae Abii (from the River
Aby, or
Oby) but it is uncertain. The River it self is said to arise from a Lake call'd
Cataisko; as if the
Catayans (whom most men conceive to be the
Chineses) lived upon, or near it. It is said also, that it receives many great Rivers, whereof we know little besides the names; that it is navigable two hundred leagues from the Sea; that it disembogues into the Sea beyond the Straits of
Waygats; that the mouth is eighty
Versts or
Italian miles broad, yet many shallows and flats in it; and that it is plentifully stored with Fish. The
Samoieds seem to say, that an
English Ship did many years ago arrive there, but being there wracked, the men were all killed by the
Samoieds.
Betwixt
Oby and
Petzora, [...] is a very large Country, like a Promontory, running very far into the North or Frozen Ocean; in which, as I said, are the Provinces of
Obdora and
Condora, how separated we know not; nor any thing else of them, more then that they receiv'd the faith of Christ in 1618, and they were not in the titles of the Grand
Tzar before
Ivan Vasilowich. From
Medemskoy Zavorot in the mouth of
Pechora, to
Ob are sixteen days sailing with a good wind. Six days to
Breit-Vinnose in the Straits of
Waygats; leaving the Rock
Sacolia Lowdia on the Starboard-side.
Waygats was at first mention'd by
Steph. Burroughs, but not known whether to be a distinct Island, or part of
Nova Zembla; and in some of our late Maps it is quite omitted, and instead of it is put
Fretum Nassauvianum, according to the fancy of our neighbours. The inhabitants they say are
Samoieds, very barbarous, men-eaters,
&c. Over against these Straits, a new Map (printed at
Nurenburgh this year 1679) in the Continent where we conceive
Obdora and
Condora, hath plac'd (by what authority, and whether with the good liking of the Grand
Tzar, let them consider who are concern'd)
New Walckeren, New Holland, and
New West-Frieseland, besides divers other names of the
Low Countries. I suppose it proceeds only from an itch they have of attributing all discoveries to, and giving names by themselves. The Bay of
Petzora is called
Yongorsky-shar; and there fall in divers great Rivers, as
Cara-reca (or the black River),
Moetnaia-reca (the muddy River),
Zolena-reca (the green River), betwixt it and
Ob.
Petzora also is named both in the Grand
Tzars title, and by Authors also, as a Province,
Petzora. which they say is bounded by the River of that name, and the great mountains called
Ziemni-poias, or
Cingulum mundi. In 1611, a Ship was sent to settle a Factory at
Pechora; they found the Bar very shallow, nine or ten foot water; afterwards they came into the
Suchoi-more, or dry Sea, because of the shallowness of the water. The inhabitants say, that
Pechora flows into the Sea with seventy-two mouths, others say six only; the Channel that trendeth South-West is the deepest and best. The Town is called
Pustozera, because on a Lake which the
Russes call'd
Osera, and it lies in 68 deg. 30 min. of Latitude. In the Town are three Churches, and the people poor, speak a language of their own, and are Christians ever since 1518; they live chiefly upon the Geese, and other fowl which they catch in the Spring and Summer, whose feathers they sell to Merchants, and the flesh they powder and dry for Winter. The River is plentifully stored with fish, especially Salmons, (whereof in one year they took above fifteen thousand) which they salt, sell and convey to
Mezen by land. They live commonly upon fresh fish boil'd and dry'd. Hither use to come every year two thousand
Samoieds with their commodities. The
Pechora runs thro great
Permia, and the head of it is five weeks journey above
Pustozera. Divers great Rivers fall into it, as
Shapkina, Nougorotka, Habeaga, and
Ouse, of which besides the names we know nothing. East of the
Pechora lies the Promontory of
Borandey, scarce mention'd in any Author, the chief Town whereof is
Vetzora; the inhabitants are originally
Samoieds, but somewhat civiliz'd by the
Muscovites. Three days journey above
Pustozera, lies upon the same River
Oust-zilma, a Town of about threescore houses, in 66 deg. and 30 min. where they have Ry and Barley growing very good, and where is a very good trade for Furs.
Siberia, call'd by the
Russes Sibior,Siberia. is much of the same nature, tho more South then
Obdoria and
Petzora; from which it is divided by those high and terrible mountains called
Ziemni-poias, which by reason of the cold winds to which they are exposed, and continual snow, are very barren,
[Page 22]and hardly passable in many places. Here and there are trees (some say Cedars, and about them the blackest Sables), and the best white Falcons.
Herberstein reports, that there were some persons, that after seventeen days travel to go over them, return'd back, as thinking them unpassable. They were heretofore all
Samoieds, (and in
Bar. Herbersteins time had neither Castle nor City) situated upon the River
Cama; out out of it ariseth the
Jaycks, a large River, that passing thro the plains of
Tartary enters into the
Caspian Sea. The Country was then also full of Woods and Lakes, and almost desart till they submitted to the
Muscovite, together with the other
Samoieds. The Country is so call'd from
Sibier, or
Sibior, the first built City amongst them; tho
Tobolsca be the chiefest; which is a City of great trade, to which the
Teseeks, Boughars, and
Tartars bring very rich commodities from
Persia, of all sorts.
Papinougorod also is a good trading Town, so call'd from the Nation of the
Papini, amongst whom it is built, who were a sort of
Samoieds, and had a peculiar language. But
Siberia is now for nothing more famous, then that it is the place of banishment for such either offenders as deserve that punishment, or as have by any way faln under the
Tzars displeasure; for these also he sends thither, with their wives and children, and sometimes gives them there some small government. To poor people it is now not terrible to be sent into
Siberia, as formerly it was, because they find tolerable livelihood there, but to the rich and noble it is look'd upon, as sending to the Galleys in
France and other places; only they are obliged to bring in a certain number of Sables, upon pain of severe bodily chastisement; nor is it an easie matter for any of them to escape. One thing more is to be observed, that many learned men (and amongst them
Olearius) confounds this
Siberia with another Province, near that name, under the Grand
Tzars dominion, in the South, bordering upon the dominions of
Poland; which is almost as great an error as that of those who think
Samoiedia and
Samogitia to be the same. This Country is said to have yeilded in 1589, a tribute of four hundred sixty-six timber of Sables (every timber containing forty skins), five timber of Martrons, an hundred and eighty cases of black Fox (every case containing also forty skins) besides other commodities. To
Tobolsca (which is almost in the midst of
Siberia) are brought all the tributes, and thence sent by convoy to
Mosko; but the chief Governor of all these northern Countries resides at
Vergateria.
Permia, situate upon the River
Vischora or
Vistorna, which is ten miles from
Weliki Perme (or great
Permia) the chief City of this Province,
Permia. and falls into the River
Cama. Permski upon the East borders upon
Tumen, which is under the
Tartars; where is a great trade from
Boghar and
Persia. From
Tumen to
Tobolsca they travel in fourteen days; from
Tobolsca to
Beresova (another great trading Town upon the
Ob) in nine days; from
Beresova into the River
Ouse, and down that into the
Petzora, and so to
Pustozera, in three weeks. The
Permians pretend to be an ancient Nation, I suppose, because they have a peculiar language and characters. Yet till they submitted to the
Muscovites, they lived no otherwise than the
Samoieds; neither as yet have they much use or knowledg of bread, nor do they plant or sow, but live upon hunting, and have their Sleds drawn with Deer, or great Dogs, which they bring up for that purpose; and when the snow is hard frozen, they have their
Nartes (which the
Laps and
Fins call
Saksit, other Nations
Artach) or long
Skeits, made of thin wood, or bark, wherewith they glide over the snow with incredible swiftness; but these are used in all northern Countries, where they are accustom'd to much snow. They were very zealous Idolaters; insomuch that the first Bishop, who was sent to convert them, they flay'd alive; yet did not this discourage his successor
Stephen, who happily setled Christianity, and civility in a great part, amongst them; he also invented characters for their peculiar language, and is reckon'd amongst the Saints in the
Russ-Calendar. Yet amongst them (as amongst the
Siberians, Samoieds, and most of these northern Countries) are secretly still many Idolaters, who frequent not their Cities, but live in Woods, and amongst the Marshes. They seem to be a rich people; for when
Ivan Vasilowich sought for an aveny or pretence to fleece them, he sent to them for so much Cedar to build him a Palace; they returning answer, that they had no such thing in their Country, nor did they know what it was; he punish'd their obstinacy at twelve thousand and sixty Rubbles, or Marks. Whence we may gather, that they were united to the dominion of the
Muscovite before that time, and some say under
Vasilie his father. This demand of the Emperors, might either take its reason from the report of Cedars upon the mountains of
Siberia, or that report from this message.
Jugoria, Jugria, Hugria, Juhar, Juhria, Juharia,Jug
[...]Jugra, where it is situated I know not; for some place it on the East, others on the West-side of
Ob. H. Smith, who lived in
Petzora 1580, saith, that it lies over against
Waygatz. If it be true, which the Baron of
Herberstein saith, that this was the Country whence
Attila with his
Huns over-run so much of
Europe, and afterwards setled in
Pannonia, which from the name of their own Country
Jugaria, they called
Hungaria, they should seem to be West of
Ob; for
Dubravius (who writes the story) saith, that they were a very barbarous and deformed Nation, living amongst great Lakes and Forrests; which agrees well enough to the
Jugorsky; and that some of them hunting a Stag, the beast took thro the Marshes, and by that means shewed them a way into a better Country then their own, which knowing no other, till then contented them very well. But the hunters returning, and declaring the pleasures and riches they had discover'd, perswaded them to leave that uncomfortable place, and by their valor seek better habitations; which they presently put in execution. The difficulties in this opinion are, that the present
Juhria is not stored with horses; that the inhabitants are a very poor, miserable, and but few people, much undisposed for such high and generous thoughts of conquering their neighbours. Yet is not the argument which the diligent and learned Baron useth, to be despised, which is, that both the remainder of the ancient
Hungarians (who live between the
Danow and
Tibiscus) and these
Jugarians use the same language, which is not known to be any where else spoken. But reserving this dispute to a properer place, we have nothing more to say of them, but that they live much-what after the manner of the
Samoieds, the same diet, clothing, tribute,
&c.
West of
Petzora, along the North Sea,
Dwina. lies the Province of
Dwina, continued unto a River of that name; which is so call'd (
Dwina signifying
Twain or
two) because it is the confluence of two Rivers,
Jugh and
Sachona, or
Suchana; (
Jug ariseth in the Country of the
Cheremise-Tartars, Suchana from a Lake near
Vologda); after the conjuncture, it runs an hundred leagues before its falls into the North or White Sea. This heretofore belonged to the Duke of
Novogorod, but is
[Page][Page]DWINAE FLUVII.nova descriptioSumptibus Janssanio-Waesbergiorum, et Mosis Pitt.
[Page][Page 23]now a Province of it self. The Country is very barren, and therefore hath very few Cities or great Towns, and even the Villages stand very thin, tho it contain an hundred leagues in length. The chiefest and only Town heretofore was
Dwina, situate in the midst of the Province, where the River begins to take its name. But since the trade of the
English and
Dutch, &c. is transported this way, which formerly was to
Narva, it is very much augmented and enriched. The greatest place of commerce is
Archangel (by the
Russes called
Archania) at the mouth of the
Dwina, on the left hand of the entrance. It is but a small Town, but very populous,
[...] because of the trade. And here it will be most proper to take notice, that the first trading that was to this place,
[...] or in a manner to
Muscovy (by which that Country is so mightily enriched, and by which also we come to have some more distinct and particular knowledge of the Country) was 1553, when by the advice of
Sebastian Cabot (grand Pilot of
England) divers Ships were furnish'd for discoveries toward the North. It was the fortune of
Rich. Chanceller to fall into the Bay of St.
Nicolas, where he was very well receiv'd, and sent for thence to the Emperor
Ivan Vasilowich, who entertain'd him with all imaginable kindness, and began to establish a considerable trade, under such priviledges as were agreed upon 1555; which were from time to time renew'd and augmented, or sometimes ebb'd and flow'd, according to the interest of the Grand
Tzar. Some of our neighbours indeed, that first interloped into our trade, have from time to time made their advantages; and tho they came in at first under our wings, yet have they since endeavoured to pluck our feathers; but it had been in vain, had not the late rebellion in our Country, and especially the martyrdom of our late blessed Soveraign, made us to be abhorr'd of God and man. I mean not only of all Christian Princes, but even of all those who pretend to humanity. Tho I know not whether any resented it so vively as this Emperor, who immediately revoked all his priviledges and freedoms granted to our Merchants, and till this day (I know not by whose fault, but certainly some gain more by it than others) they cannot be retrieved. But to return to
Dwina; this Province is very barren, and the Villages are but few and scatter'd. The inhabitants live upon dry'd fish and Venison, the cold not allowing any corn or grain; but their chiefest commodity is Salt, which they make here in great plenty. Besides, the trade at
Archangel hath also made divers of their haven Towns to be considerable, and set up fishing and carriage; as
Lampas, a great Mart for the
Samoieds, and all the North.
Colmogro, Pinega, Mezen, all which ly neer to, or upon the Gulf of
Mezen, and trade with many Barks (great Ships they have none) to
Petzora, Ob, Nova Zembla, and those Eastern parts. But the impositions are continually so much augmented upon the foreign commodities that arrive at
Archangel, that our Merchants fear to be forced to withdraw their trade, and then the greatest part of these inferior Towns, and the whole Province, will also diminish, and return to be what they formerly were. St.
Nicolas is in 64 deg.
Colmogro in 64 deg. 25 min. from
Mezen to
Candinos fifty Leagues, thence to
Colgoie fifty leagues, thence to
Pechorskoy-Zavorot, or the Bay of
Pechora, forty leagues, thence to
Pustoiozera fifty leagues. There are divers Islands upon this Coast, but not of any consequence.
Colgoieve is the largest, in 69 deg. 20 min. thirty leagues from the Bay of
Petzora; it is high clay-ground, in it breed many Geese, besides other Fowls, Hawks also; and hither the
Russes repair in the Summer-time.
To this of
Dwina,Ʋstiug. we will subjoin
Ʋstiug (Ostium Jugh Fl.) that gives name to a Provice, tho but a poor one. The natives formerly had a language proper to themselves, as well as divers other Provinces before mention'd; but the care of the Emperor is such, that he abolishes them by degrees, and introduceth the
Muscovitish; which the people willingly do, finding it much better for their commerce. Here (and in
Dwina) Sables are not of so great reputation, but they have the best black Foxes. Here are also very great and famous Fairs and Marts.
West of
Dwina is
Corella (Carelia, Carelen),Corella. and betwixt them both the Island
Solowski, famous for the Abby of St.
Nicolas, whereinto they permit not any woman to enter. It is in 63 deg. 50 min. The banks of the Sea hereabouts are white and shining with Alabaster. In this Province is much Salt boiled. The people live much-what like the
Laplanders, tho not altogether so barbarous, for they have some Towns, as
Corelnburg, Nordenburg upon the mouth of a Lake, which by the River
Warfuga emptieth it self into the Bay of
St. Nicolas. Kexholm, in the hands of the
Suedes; and the greatest part of all this Province pays tribute both to the
Russes and
Suedes. At the Treaty 1616 of
Stolbow, the Grand
Tzar quitted the title of this Country to the King of
Sweden.
Vodska, or
Votska, thirty leagues North of
Novogorod,Vodska. upon its left hand is the strong Castle of
Ivanogorod, surrender'd to the
Swedes by the same Treaty, as well as the Towns
Jamagrod and
Augdow, and the Castles
Coporia, Noteburg, and
Kexholm. They say, that all the beasts that are brought into this Province turn white. The inhabitants have a language proper to themselves.
Woskopitin is by some Authors placed between
Kexholm and
Noteburg,Woskopitin. a large and fruitful Province both for Corn and Cattle, but so pester'd with Lakes and Marshes, that it is very little frequented, and the name scarce known.
Bieleiezioro,Bieleiozioro. situated upon a Lake of the same name and signification,
i.e. the
White Lake; which Lake is thirteen Leagues long, and as many broad, and furnishes only one River, call'd
Sosna, which falls into the
Wolga. In this Lake is a Castle both for natural and artisicial strength accounted impregnable; whither in times of danger the Princes have sent their treasure, and themselves also retired. The whole Province is full of Woods and Lakes, that (except when they are hard frozen) it is not easily passable. Near this Lake is another small Lake that produceth Sulphur (I rather suppose Naphtha or Petroleum), swimming like froth or oyl upon the water. This is said to be first possessed by
Sinaus Varegus, whose brother
Truvor setled in
Pskouvia, and
Runiz in
Novogardia. These three are by the
Russes look'd upon as the Founders of their Nation.
Vologda is the only City in all the Grand
Tzars dominions that is fortified with a stone-wall,
Vologda. and for its strength the Emperor is wont, in times of danger, to secure here part of his treasure. It is, as the rest of those Westerly and Northerly Provinces, much encumbred with Woods and Marshes, many of which are (except in Winter) utterly unpassable. It is situated upon the River
Waga, which falls into the
Dwina; and it (together with all the Provinces mention'd since
Dwina) belonged to the Dutchy of
Novogorod.
Novogorod, call'd
Weliki, or the Great,
Novogorod. to distinguish it from others of that name. The
Dutch call it
Nieugarten; in 58 deg. 23 min. situated upon the River
Volgda (not
Volga) or
Volchou, famous for its Bremes, a little below the Lake
[Page 24]Ilmin. Whilst it was governed by its own Prince, it was in so great power, fame, and wealth, by reason of the vast commerce of several Nations there established, that it was proverbially spoken,
Who can do any thing against God and Great Novogorod? The reason of this trading, was the convenience of the River, which being navigable from the very Spring, and the Country abounding in Wheat, Flax, Hemp, Honey, Wax, and Leather (which is better dressed here than in any other place), invited hither so many Merchants from all the Northern Countries, and those upon the
Baltick Sea, that it was the greatest City of all the North for trade and wealth. The first diminution of it, was from
Vitold Duke of
Lithvania, who 1427 obliged the City to compound for their peace at a great rate. But
Ivan Vasili Grotsdin 1477, forced them to receive a Governour from him; but that not satisfying of him, he went thither in person, pretending I know not what devotion, and (by the help of the Bishop) being admitted into the City with his Army, he pillag'd it, carrying away three hundred Carts loaden with Jewels, Gold, and Silver; besides many more filled with rich stuffs and sumptuous moveables; all which he sent to
Moscow, and transported many of the inhabitants into other places, and sent
Muscovites to inhabit in their steads. But their greatest calamity was from
Ivan Vasilowich in 1569, who upon a suspition of their endeavouring to revolt, came hither with his army, slew, drowned, and trampled to death a vast number of people; presently after this follow'd a great plague, which brought so great a famine, that they eat one another; the
Tzar on this occasion, pretending to punish their inhumanity, cut to pieces the greatest part of the remaining inhabitants. His barbarous cruelties here acted are not sitting to be repeated. It was in 1611 taken by the
Swedes by storm, but at the great Treaty between the two Crowns of
Russia and
Sweden, it was agreed to be redeliver'd to the
Russes, and in their hands it hath continued ever since. On the other side the water is a strong Castle built of stone, join'd to the City by a large Bridge, wherein lives the Weywod or Governor, and the Metropolitan; by which two, all the affairs Ecclesiastical, Civil, and Military, in all that Province are governed. The Town is encompass'd with a Rampart of timber and earth, and hath a Castle in the midst, reasonably well fortified. There are about an hundred Monasteries (whereof that of St.
Antony is the chiefest), Churches, and Chappels; which have their Steeples and Towers cover'd with Copper gilded; the Cathedral Church is that of St.
Sophia.
In the territory belonging to this City,
Brunitza, Sedrowa,
and Stara-Russa. are
Brunitza, Sedrowa, and
Stara-Russa, which the Baron of
Herberstein calls
Russ, and saith it gave name to all the
Russes. Near that Town is a salt River, which the inhabitants have formed into a Lake, and with Conduits draw the salt-water to their houses, where they boil the Salt; with which, and other commodities, they drive a great trade into
Polotskow, a Province of
Poland.
The
Russes say, that near to
Novogorod was the famous battel of Whips (mention'd by
Justin, l. 2. and many other Authors) wherewith the Masters returning victorious, after some years wars, conquer'd their Slaves, who in the long time of their absence, had seized upon their estates and wives; which is the reason why the
Novogorod-money had formerly on one side an Horse-man shaking his whip.
Bielski is a Province between
Novogorod and
Smolensko,Bielski. having its principal City and Castle called
Biela, Bielha, or
Bielow, situated on the River
Osca. This had heretofore a Prince of its own, subject to the descendents of
Jagellan Duke of
Litvania, till
Basilius Prince of
Bielski fell off to the Grand
Tzar, and agreed to pay him tribute; it now augments the number of his Titles,
As doth also that of
Rischow,Rischow. which hath also a Castle and City of that name; it had also formerly a Prince of its own, but now is a member of the
Russ-Empire. The Country is full of Forrests and Lakes; particularly, here is that great Forrest of
Wolchonisky; wherein arise the
Volga, the
Dnieper, the
Dwina, and the
Lowat, all great Rivers. Near to this are
Woloizk, famous for its white Hares, and the Princes frequent hunting there.
Wyelikyeluki, a large City, with a good Castle. And
Toropyecz, a large Town also, and a Castle; all which came to the Crown of
Russia, by surrender of their proper Lords.
Twer is near to the foresaid,
[...] North-West from
Moskow. The capital Town is
Twere, situate on the River
Twertza, which falls into the
Volga near this Town. This is a large Town, and hath in it about sixty Churches, the chiefest that of our Saviour. Upon the same River is placed
Torsoch, Tersack, or
Torsiock, a large Town also. The Province is rich both in Corn and Merchandise; very populous also, being ready to furnish their Prince with forty thousand good Horse, and twice as many foot. Here is also a Mint and a Bishops See.
Near to these is
Plescow, [...] which the
Russes call
Pscow; the chief City hath a strong Castle, situate upon a Rock, whence springs the River
Pskow, which after six leagues dischargeth it self into the Lake of
Peipis, which
Herberstein calls
Czuezko or
Czudzin. It was govern'd by its own Princes till
Ivan Vasilowitz 1509 united it to his Crown. The Citizens till then were famous for their valour, civility, and honest dealing in their trade; but the Grand Duke transported them, and put
Muscovites in their stead. It is one of the strongest wall'd Cities in all
Russia; 'tis of so great extent, that when besieged by
Stephen King of
Poland, there were said to be in it seventy thousand foot, and seven thousand horse (besides the inhabitants) in garison. Were it not for one ledg of Rocks, the Navigation from hence to the
Baltic Sea would be very convenient and easie. There were in this Province divers places of strength, which gave the Grand
Tzar Vasilie great trouble to reduce them to his command.
South and by West of this Province of
Novogorod (that we dispatch all these Territories that ly together) lies the great City of
Smolensko,Smolensko. belonging anciently to
Litvania, recover'd to that Province by
Vitold their Duke, in 1413.
Basilius the Grand
Tzar made several attempts to recover it, but in vain, till his beloved General
Michael Glinski, a valiant
Polish General, that ran over to the
Russes, recover'd it more easily with his money, then he could with his arms. The
Poles have endeavour'd several times to recover this City, and in one battel near unto it, slew eighty thousand
Russes, but could not reduce the City till
Sigismund King of
Poland took it in 1611; and in 1633,
Michael Federowitz besieged it in vain, yet his son
Alexie Michaelowitz had it surrendred to him by composition in 1654, and the
Russes still keep it. The River
Nieper, commonly thought to be
Boristhenes (tho
Beresine comes nearer that name) runs thro it. The City is very well fortified, both with good walls, well palisado'd, and as they say, above ten yards high, and also with a very strong Castle upon the bank of the River.
To this jurisdiction belong
Drohobus, Wyesma, and
Mozaizko, where the Emperor commonly once a year diverts himself and the Ambassadors in hunting. This
Mozaisko hath many times a
[Page 25]Governour of its own, and a Territory belonging to it. The Town was taken from
Alexander King of
Poland by the Grand
Tzar Ivan, predecessor of
Vasilie; and the Grand Duke often repairs thither in devotion to St.
Nicolas, the great Saint of the
Russes, who is said to be buried in the Chappel of the Castle.
There remains one Province or Dukedom,
[...]. which anciently belonged to
Litvania, the South-West border of
Muscovy, called
Sewera, Severia, Siberia. Which hath given occasion to some to confound it with that Province which the
Russes call
Sibior, upon the River
Ob. This is a large and fruitful Principality, reaching from the
Dnieper to the Castle of
Mscenek, which is now demolished. This Country had at first Dukes of its own, afterwards it acknowledg'd the superiority of the Dukes of
Litvania, together with which (
Jagello becoming Christian) it submitted to the Kings of
Poland; afterwards they fell from
Casimire unto the Grand
Tzar; at length, in the Reign of
Vasilie, father of
Ivan Vasilowich, the Duke was accused of treason, and lost his Principality, which was united to the Crown of
Muscovy.
The chief City,
Novogrod Siviersky. and sometimes residence of the Dukes is called
Novogrod Siviersky, a City and Castle, well fortified after the manner of
Russia; from whence to the City
Moskow is an hundred and fifty leagues; the way lies thro
Bransko, Serensko, Worotin (a small Principality, the City
Worotin is upon the River
Occa) and
Coluga, a Town also upon the
Occa, and dependant upon the Abbey of
Troitza. Other great Towns in this Province are
Starodub, Posiwol, Czernigow, Kilski, Krom, Arol, and
Osippow. They that from hence travel towards
Tartary, pass the Rivers
Sna, Samara, Ariel, Koinschwada, and
Molosca. They pass the Rivers on branches of trees fasten'd together, instead of Boats. This Country, by reason of its neighbourhood to the
Tartars (upon whom it borders toward the East) is much of it Desert and Forrest, for want of culture; but those few inhabitants there are, are very warlike, being kept in continual exercise by the
Tartars.
Thus much for the Western parts of this Empire, let us proceed to those that ly in the in-land Country.
[...]. South of
Vologda, North of
Jeroslaw, lies the Town and Castle of
Castrom, upon a River of the same name, which looses it self in the
Volga. And East of
Castrom is the little Town of
Galitz, near the Lake
Galitz; here the Grand
Tzar hath a manufacture of Salt.
Jaroslaw,Jaroslaw. fifty leagues North of
Moskow, a Province rich in Corn, Cattel, and Honey. The City lies upon the
Volga, containing about forty thousand inhabitants, strongly fortified, and of a great trade, as having a very easie passage to
Archangel. They make here much Linnen Cloth. This used formerly to be the Title and subsistence of the younger Sons of the Emperors family, till
Ivan Vasilowich took it from them to himself, 1565. Yet he permitted some of them to keep the Title, being till of late called
Knest Jaroslawski.
Of the same condition and propriety is
Rostow, [...]. the City is twelve leagues South of
Jeroslaw, upon a Lake of the same name.
Ivan Vasilowich put to death the last Heir to this Province, of the family of the Grand
Tzar. [...]. In this Province is
Ʋglitz, a Town famous for its bread.
Chlopigrod was a great Mart for all the Northern Nations (yet more bartering than buying and selling),
[...]. because of the River
Mologa, by which it communicateth with
Weliki Novogrod. It is now ruined. The name signifies, the Castle of Slaves; for they say, that when their Masters had subdued their Slaves with their Whips, the Slaves retired hither.
Susdal is between
Rostow and
Wolodomir.Susdal. The City is famous for a stately Monastery of Nuns, whither
Ivan Vasilowitz confined his Wife; and it was formerly the Metropolis of
Russia. This Province also belonged to the younger Sons of the Emperor; and since ruin'd by the
Tartars ann. it hath never recover'd it self.
Castrom and
Galitz belonged formerly to this Government.
Pereaslaw belonged formerly to
Rostow,Pereaslaw famous now for its salt Lake and fruitful Soil. At the end of harvest the Grand
Tzar commonly retires thither to hunt. In the Town are reckon'd near thirty thousand inhabitants.
East of this is the City and Principality of
Wolodomir;Wolodomir. which was anciently the Metropolis of all the
Russes, till
Ivan or
Danislow built
Moskow, and translated the seat of the Empire thither, more out of danger of the invasion of the
Tartars. The soil so fruitful, that it renders frequently thirty for one. The City is the second in the Empire for greatness, and was built by
Wolodomir, one of the chief Founders of the Empire, in 928. Some say, that he married
Helena the daughter of
Niceph. Phocas; but the Chronology will hardly permit it.
East of
Wolodomir is the City and Province of
Nisi-Novogrod (in
Dutch Nisen Nieugarten) or little
Novogrod;Nisi-Novogrod. some call it
Novogrod the lower, or in the low Countries; a Country very fruitful and pleasant. This Province also is the utmost limits of Christianity; for tho the Grand
Tzar have some dominions East of it, even as far as the River and Castle
Sura; yet are most of the inhabitants there
Czremiss and
Mordwitz Tartars, and follow
Mahomet. The City is in 56 deg. 28 min. it is situated at the confluence of the Rivers
Occa and
Volga; which being join'd, make a River of four hundred Geometrical feet broad. It is inhabited by
Russes and
Germans, who had here the exercise of the Reformed Religion. There is also a famous Church, built above six hundred years ago, in imitation of that of St.
Sophia in
Constantinople. All provisions are exceedingly cheap. Here is a very strong Castle cut out of the main Rock, with very great charge and trouble by the Grand
Tzar Vasilie Ivanowich.
Near to this is
Vasiligrod,Vasiligrod. at 55 deg. 51 min. where the
Sura falls into the
Volga, between
Novogrod and
Cazan. Bezvodna, Kadniza, Rubotka, Tzetschina, Targinits, Jurkin, Masa, Kremonki, Parmino, besides others, are large Villages in this Province.
Spessabelka, Stoba, Welikopat, Tsimonskoy, and
Dioploy, are considerable Islands in the Rivers.
The Principality of
Casinow is also near to this.
Casinow. The inhabitants speak the
Tartar language. All their women go with their heads uncover'd, and dy the nails of their fingers black.
Wiatka, or
Viathka, a Province, City,
Wiatka. and River of the same name, lies North of
Nisi-Novogrod; it is a barren, marish Country.
Vasilie took it from the
Tartars, and annexed it to his Crown and Titles; yet the
Tartars still lurk and steal what they can about and amongst the
Russes. In this Province are the Towns of
Chilinova, Orlo, Cotenicz, and
Sloboda.
Amongst those Countries live the
Czremisses and
Mordwa-Tartars.Czremisses and Mordwa-Tartars. Their Customs are not much different, save that the
Mordwitz have some few more houses. Those on the right hand of the
Wolga, they call
Nagorni, Mountainiers; those on the other
Lugowi, or inhabitants of the plain and grassy Countries. There are amongst them some
Mahumetans, but the greatest part are Heathen; who believe that there is one eternal God, and evil Angels also, which they endeavour to pacifie, lest they should do them harm; and this is a
[Page 26]great part of their Religion. Not far from
Casan is a River called
Nemda, to which they go in pilgrimage, where (as also in a Brook hard by the
Nemda, called
Schokshem) they think the Devil dwells. This Brook hath not above four foot water, but never freezeth; whence they conceive such fancies, that they dare not approach at too near a distance, and then also with presents, lest the Devil should be angry with, and kill them; tho they see the
Russes have not the least apprehensions of any such danger. When they sacrifice, they kill an Horse, Cow, or Sheep, and hang the skin upon a pole between two trees; they rost, or boil the flesh, part of which they take in one hand, and Mead (or some other beverage) in the other, and throw it into the fire before the skin, praying the skin to take care of presenting their prayers and requests to God; which are only for conveniencies of this life. They worship also the Sun and Moon, and what they dream of in the night; but have neither Temple, Priest, nor Service. Their language is peculiar to themselves, tho (being under the Grand
Tzar) many of them now speak the
Russ. If a rich man dy, they kill his best Horse to serve him in the next world; but his nearest friends eat him. Polygamy is frequent amongst them; but if a wife be without children three years, they dismiss her and take another, and often the sister of a former wife. Their women are wrapp'd rather then habited in white Cloth, which leaves nothing of them seen but their faces; those who are betrothed, have on their heads a Coif with a point half an ell long, whereat hangs a bell. The men shave their heads. All of them, men and women, are very swift, and excellent Archers. The
Mordwitz have a kind of a Governor or Captain of their own; but they are all subject to the Grand
Tzar, whom they are obliged to assist in all his wars; but pay him no tribute, except what presents they voluntarily send him.
Resan is situated betwixt
Occa and
Don,Resan. or
Tanais, which riseth in this Country; near to it is the City of
Colunna, Columna, or
Colon; but the chiefest City of
Resan is also called
Resan, upon the
Occa, near the Isle of
Strub, which heretofore was a Government of it self. This Province is the most fruitful in all
Russia, if not in the world; if they romance not too much, who say, that one grain produceth many stalks, each stalk many ears; that it grows so thick and strong, that an Horse can very difficultly pass thro it, or a Quail fly out of it; they till every year, but never manure their land. The fruits also here are very good; the people also very couragious, civil, and liberal towards strangers. The Province is able to send fifteen thousand Cavaliers to the wars, and forty thousand foot. In this Province are great Towns,
Corsira or
Cassier, formerly head of a Province of its own name.
Tulla, on the edge of the great Desart, it hath a strong stone Castle, built by the Grand
Tzar Basilius, who took it by force from the Prince that had the right and dominion of it.
Odoiow, where
Tulla and
Ʋppa flow into the
Occa. Near to this was
Msczeneck, a strong Fort, but now ruined. Thereabouts live a few poor people in their Huts, who refuge themselves in the great Marshes (which take up all that Country) upon the invasion of the
Tartars. Colluga, famous for its wooden Ware.
Czirpac, near to which are Iron-Mines, the only sort of Mines in all
Muscovy. And
Worotin, a small Province, all upon the
Occa; as also the Towns of
Cazigorod and
Murina. This River breeds the best fish, and watereth the richest meadows in all
Russia.
We have not yet spoken of
Leucomoria, Loppia, and some other Countries upon the
Ob and the North Sea, because part of what is said of them is certainly fabulous, and all the rest uncertain; we shall however respit them till we come to
Asia: Nor of
Casan and
Astracan; but we shall defer them also till we come to speak of
Volga, and the
Tartars; their Countries and affairs being mingled together.
There remains therefore only
Moscua,Moscua. the Metropolis of this great Empire, which we purposely reserved to this place, that what we have to say concerning the Empire it self, and the whole Nation, might be more easily apprehended. The Province and City of
Mosko are almost in the center of all the Grand
Tzars dominions, but nearer the West and South; for which reasons, as also because the soil is none of the fruitfullest, it was very prudently chose for the Seat of the Empire. For toward the West and South is the greatest danger of invasion, and the fiercest enemies; and the barrenness of the soil makes the air so very good and healthful, that it is accounted a wonderful thing to hear of a plague, or any epidemical disease in that Province; tho they are sometimes afflicted with a violent burning Feaver, which they call
Ognyo, whereof few recover, yet I do not hear that it is malignant. Nor is the sterility any inconvenience in any part of
Muscovy, because the Country is generally very fruitful, and carriage from place to place very easie and cheap, in Summer time, because of the great number of navigable Rivers; and in Winter by reason of the convenience of their Sleds, whether drawn by Deer (whose nourishment costs nothing, a little moss, which useth not to be very scarce in bogs and woods, sufficing them), or Horses, which are very hardy, and used to travel forty or fifty of our miles without baiting; so that a Country-man will for four Crowns conduct you eleven or twelve hundred miles. Besides, the inland trade amongst themselves is very great; for having very many fasting days, they must be supplied with fish from the Sea. The North sends them Furs and Skins for their clothing; the South sends Corn, Cloth, Linnen and Woollen, and almost all manufactures. Besides, the frequent passings and repassings of so many Governors, both renders travelling very commodious, and frequently cheap also, and makes a great circulation of trade and commodities in the whole Nation.
The City of
Moskow is in 55 deg. 36 min. Latitude, and about 66 deg. Longitude. Of the vastness of it, before its great desolation by fire 1571, strange things are related; as that it was more than double as large as it was afterwards; that there was in it many hundred thousand inhabitants; and that there were slain, burnt, drowned, and troden to death, above eighty thousand persons.
Possevinus, who was there Ambassador 1582, saith, that in his time it was not above five
Italian miles in compass, and not more then thirty thousand inhabitants. But I am afraid that Author doth much depress the power and number of inhabitants everywhere in
Russia. In 1611, forty-one thousand and five hundred houses were again reduced to ashes by the
Poles, and two hundred thousand persons slain.
Olearius saith, that in his time its circumference was about three leagues. Our relators in 1662, allow it four leagues (sixteen miles) in compass, and the figure round; and is said to contain above forty thousand houses. It consisteth of four parts, or quarters. The first is
Cataigorod, or mid-City, divided from the rest by a brick-wall; the River
Moskwa runs on the South-side, as the
Neglina doth on the North of it. In this part is the Castle fortified with three strong walls, and a good
[Page 27]ditch; wherein are two Palaces of the Grand Dukes, one of stone, another of timber. In this Castle are two Steeples, in one of which is a bell weighing 33600 pound. The Exchequer and Magazine of powder are also in the Castle. Two fair Monasteries, five Churches and Chappels, all of stone, and in St.
Michaels Church the Sepulchers of the Grand
Tzars. At the Castle-gate is the Church called
Jerusalem, which
Ivan Vasilowitz thought so magnificent that he put out the Architects eyes, that he might never make the like. And before the Castle, is the great Market place; where every trade hath a station by it self.
The second quarter is
Tzar-gorod, encompassing the other, like a semicircle; walled about with stone, wherein is the Arsenal, and the workmen in mettal, as Bell-founders, Casters of Cannon,
&c.
The third is
Skoradom on the North-West side of the other; the River
Jagusa passes thro it, and here is the market for houses, timber,
&c.
The fourth is
Strelitza Slavoda, being the quarters of the
Strelitz, or Guard of the Grand Duke, fortified with wooden Ramparts, and built for strangers and mercenary Soldiers.
There are in this City above two thousand Churches and Chappels, built (saith
Possevin) more for ornament to the City, then use; but this Author (as I observed before) seems to be partial against the
Muscovites.
The Houses in
Moskow, and generally in all
Muscovia, are after the same fashion; made of Firtimber squared, and dove-tail'd one into another (not with mortise and tenant) at the end; two, or at the most three stories high; their windows short and narrow; the chinks between the timber calk'd as I may say, or stop'd up with moss; stairs on the outside; instead of chimnies, stoves; the covering, or tiling, of bark, and upon that sometimes turfs of earth. Nor is their houshold-stuff much richer; no beds, chairs, wainscot, hangings, or the like unnecessary implements. The walls cover'd with mats, benches to sleep and sit upon; a pot or two, as many wooden dishes; a spoon to hang at the girdle. If a fire happen in the City, as it doth very frequently, they go not about to quench it with water, but only to stop the course of the flame by pulling down the neighbouring-houses; to which purpose, the Soldiers that keep their night-guards, carry each of them an hatchet, to cut down an house presently. Nor are the people very much concern'd for their small and cheap furniture. But the Merchants, and persons of quality, have for their magazines Vaults of stone, with little windows, and those also have shutters, as well as their doors, of white iron.
There dwell in the City a great number of
Greeks, Persians, but especially
Tartars; yet the
Greeks are most welcom, as most sympathizing with the
Russes in their Religion. The
Lutherans also and Reform'd, are well received, and have liberty publickly to exercise their Religion, which they of the
Roman Communion cannot. No
Jews are admitted amongst them.
Moskow being near the center of the whole Empire, it is very convenient to take our measures by it of the rest of the Country, allowing proportionably for the nearness to, or remoteness from it. As first, for the temper of the air. The cold is here sometimes so excessive, that water will freeze as it is falling, that the earth will chop, as with us in the violent drought of Summer, even to above twenty fathoms long, and a foot broad; and people are found dead in their Sleds. The cold also endures a long time; the frost ordinarily begins with
November, but breaks not up till
April, i.e. till the Sun hath been some considerable time above their Horizon; whence it comes to pass, that all their plants, and whatsoever is under-ground in winter, is ready to thrust it self into the air as soon as it hath liberty; their Rye (for this reason) they sow in the beginning of winter, that as soon as the snow and ice is melted, it may spring, and have time to ripen; but all their other corn, which requires not so much maturation, they sow not till
May. And it is by strangers much taken notice of, that even almost as soon as the snow is gone, the fields are all green; and plants spring much faster then in another place, where their natural force and vigor hath not been so much restrained and kept back by the cold and the snow; so that what they sow in
May and
June they reap in
July and
August; and indeed the shortness of their summer allows them not much time for tillage. It is also observed, that their Rye is in its kind their best grain. And for their fruits, tho they have of most sorts, as Apples, Pears, Plums, Cherries,
&c. yet they are not so good, nor do not ripen so kindly, nor can be so long preserved, as in those places where they grow and ripen slower. But those things which are of hasty and speedy growth, are very good; as all sorts of Berries, Herbs, Gourds, and Melons, which are here both exceedingly great (some weighing forty pound) and very well tasted; but they breed them in hot beds, as we do here, and never remove them. All Authors almost speak of a certain Melon, or Gourd, called
Boranetz, or a Lamb that grows upon a stalk, and when it hath eaten all the grass within its reach, it dies. It is possible, that there may be a fruit, which with the help of imagination may somewhat resemble a Lamb, and it may also be downy and woolly; also it may be either of so hot a temper, or so great a depredator of moisture, that it may cause the neighbouring-plants to wither and dy; but that there is any animal growing upon a root, and eating,
&c. they that have seen it, must believe it, but other persons may have their liberty. It is not long ago since they began to cultivate garden-herbs, but they prosper very well, as Asparagus for the purpose, grows as thick as a mans thumb. And edible roots must needs become both large and pleasant. From this multitude of melted snow it comes to pass, that the ground is very soft and mellow; which tho it be an inconvenience in their high ways, (insomuch that even the streets of
Moskow would be unpassable, were it not that they pave them with round Fir-trees, laid close to one another), yet in their tilling their ground it is very useful; for neither do they use any manuring, even in the barrenest places, nor is their ground difficult to belaboured (no small convenience to a lazy people), that even stirring it with a stick is in some places sufficient for their Corn. Nor is their Corn (being so short a time betwixt the sowing and harvest) subject to so many accidents (droughts, rains, blastings,
&c.) as ours is; whence it is noted, that it is exceeding rare to hear of a dearth in
Muscovy (except by the wickedness of them that buy up the Corn to sell it dearer), tho they sow little more than for their own spending. But sowing for plenty, they have much to spare; as the
Dutch know very well, who bring thence great quantities to supply their own necessities.
It is also observed in their weather, that the Summers are violently hot, both because their days are so long, and the soil (for the most part) sandy, which easily receives, and retains strongly the heat of the Sun so long upon it. This heat
[Page 28]coming upon proportionable moisture, produces prodigious quantities of Gnats, and other Insects; which, tho not so dangerous as Toads and Vipers, yet are much more troublesom, and a much greater annoyance. Indeed an extraordinary heat is requisite to force up such a quantity of materials as must serve to make so much snow, that it covers the ground some yards thick. But it is hard to believe what some Authors say, that it sometimes sets on fire their Corn-fields and their woods. But this heat is augmented or conserved (as was said before) by the nature of the soil; for in
Livonia, in the same degrees of Latitude, yea divided only from
Russia by the River
Narva, their Corn seldom comes to be so ripe and hard that they can thresh or grind it; but they are forced to help themselves with stoves, built in their Barns for drying their Corn; which tho it be easier to thresh, yet it neither yeilds so much flower, nor is so good to sow, as that which ripens by the heat of the Sun, as it always doth in
Muscovy.
The Country is generally overgrown with Woods (and their Forrests consist most of Firs and Birch, which loveth a light sandy soil) and Lakes; both I believe from the same cause, want of tillage. For the Natives husband not much more then they are sure will serve themselves; for should they have greater plenty, they could not find markets for it; and they are not careful of encreasing their stock of men.
Albertus Campensis tells very great stories (whom in some things we have followed) of the great abundance of people in
Russia; Possevine again as much disparages them. But our own Authors affirm, that it is not so well peopled as it might be; partly because of their wars, which devour always great quantities of them; and partly because they are lazy, and take more care themselves to live in ease and plenty, then to multiply their Nation, or employ more hands then of needs they must.
These Forrests must needs be very well stored with Beasts and Fowls. Their Beasts are Elks, which the
Germans call Elans and Olans, and the
Russes Lozzi, not much unlike to the Rain-Deer. Wild Bulls (which seem to be the
Bisontes of the Ancients), Boars, Bears of a prodigious magnitude, strength, and cruelty, both white and black. Wolves also too many; for in an hard winter, both the Bears (who sleep not when hunger pinches them) and Wolves are very pernicious to their cattle, and their persons also, when they meet them unarmed. There are also Horses plenty; small, but strong, couragious, and very serviceable. Cows, Goats, and Sheep; Fallow Deer also, and Roe-Bucks in great plenty. Besides these, are many others who are hunted only for their Furs, as the Wolverine or Wood-Dog, Beavor, Once, Lysern, Sable, Martron, black, dun, red, and white Foxes, the Gurnstal, the Laset or Minever, Hares, which in winter change their colour into white, as the Squirrel doth into gray, whereof comes the Fur they call Calaber. There is one sort of Squirrel, that hath upon the point of its shoulder a tuft of hair, much like unto feathers, with a broad tail, with which they aid themselves so much in their leaping, that they seem to fly. The Furs of these are the great riches of this Country, and the greatest traffick, since they sell to strangers (besides what is paid to the Grand
Tzar for tribute) for a million of Rubbles
per ann. the chief are black Foxes, Sables, Beavors, white Bears, Ermins or Gurnstals, and Squirrels; Wolverin also, and white Fox are much esteemed, as also that of a Water-Rat, which smelleth like Musk.
There is so great abundance of Fowls and Birds, that they will not take the pains to catch the smaller sorts, as Thrushes, Fieldfares, and the like. Birds of prey here are very excellent of divers sorts, Gerfalcons are accounted the best; and divers of them white, which are (for their rarity) of great price, and presents for Princes.
Of their Fish we shall speak when come to their Lakes.
The other products of the earth are Mines, and of these we have but a very slender account. It is reported, that not long ago there hath been discover'd near
Tula, upon the frontiers of
Tartary, a Silver Mine; which is wrought by
German work-men, sent thither by the Duke of
Saxony at the entreaty of the Grand
Tzar. A league and a half from this Mine, (in a delightful Valley between two high Mountains) is an Iron-work upon a small, but convenient River. This was, and I believe still is govern'd by a Commissary from the King of
Denmark, who is obliged to furnish into the Grand Dukes Arsenal yearly, a considerable quantity of bars of Iron, of Canons, and fifty thousand poods (or twenty thousand quintals) of ball, by a contract made with the Emperor.
Peter Marcelis, the first that set up this Work, grew to be very considerable at the Court, and obtained the priviledge to trade alone in Iron, Corn, and Fish-oyl; as also to make Gold and Silver-wire; which is a very great profit, considering the great use of Embroideries in
Muscovy. There are in several other places, especially toward the North-West parts, Iron-mines also, but not so good as this last mentioned. However, in all of them the Iron is observed to be brittle; yet is it very serviceable for many uses, to which they understand very well how to apply it.
The commodities of the Country, which draw Merchants thither, are 1. Their Furs. 2. Wax, whereof they have shipped in one year heretofore fifty thousand pood, every pood being forty pound; but now not above ten thousand pood. 3. Honey, whereof they spend great quantities in their own country, in their drinks, yet is much also transported. 4. Tallow, heretofore much more, now about thirty thousand pood yearly sent out of the Country; the reason of the plenty of it is, because the great men generally burn Wax-lights, the ordinary people slivers of Fir or Birch, dip'd in Fish-oyl. 5. Hides of Losh (Lozzi) and Buff, of which are bought by forreign Merchants about thirty thousand
per ann. besides Goats and other skins. 6. Train-oyl of Seals. 7.
Caviare, the greatest part of it is made at
Astracan, of the Roes of Sturgeon and Belluga. This is a large fish, twelve or fifteen foot long, without scales, else not unlike a Sturgeon. Of these fishes they take great quantities for the roes, which they salt and press, and put up into casks. That which is made of the Sturgeon, is black, small grain'd, and waxy; that of the Belluga, is darkish gray, and the grain as large as a Pepper-corn. In one fish they find sometimes an hundred and fifty or two hundred weight of spawn. This fish is said to ly in the bottom of the River, and to swallow many large pebbles of an incredible weight, to ballast him against the violence of the River, encreased by the melted snow; and when the waters are asswaged, he disgorgeth himself. This spawn they cleanse from its strings, salt it, drain away the oyly part, by laying it on shelving boards, then put it into casks, and press it till it become hard. Isinglass
(ichthyocolla) is made of the sounds of this fish. This trade is reserved to the Emperor himself. 8. Hemp and Flax; which is a great trade with the
French, who carry thither Brandy, and bring back Hemp and Flax, which
[Page 29]they work up in
Normandy. 9. Salt likewise is a great profit to them. 10. So is Tar also. Many other commodities of lesser value and quantity, are hence carried away, as Morsses-teeth into
Turky and
Persia. Slude, it is a soft rock in
Corellia, which they cut out into lumps, and afterwards tear it into small pieces; we call it
Muscovy-glass, it is the
lapis specularis, and is used for Lanthorns, Windows,
&c. Salt-peter, Pot-ashes, Corn, Isinglass, and Iron are likewise hence transported. They have also divers manufactures, as Utensils of wood, Clothes, Saddles, and Harness for Horses, Arms, and the like; which they vend to several neighbouring countries, which want such conveniencies. To which the ignorance and unskilfulfulness of the
Tartars, and lazy slothfulness of the Gentleman-like
Polanders, give them no small opportunity.
Of the Government and Manners of the
Russes.
THus much of the Soil, their Forrests, and their Commodities; concerning their Lakes we shall discourse when we come to their Rivers. It follows we should next treat of their Government, and the manners of the people, which depend upon it.
The chief axiom in their politicks is,
[...] That above all things they should agree one with another, and join together against all the world. For the Empire being very large, and exposed on three sides to very dangerous enemies,
Tartars, Turks, Polonians, and
Swedes; their country also not being well peopled, the fortified places at great distances, they have no security but a strict union amongst themselves. Which causeth them all to concenter in absolute Monarchy, as the greatest conjunction of interests, or rather but one interest in the whole. The Prince therefore, for his part, complies with them as much as he can, marries rarely with any stranger, suffers not strangers to advance to any considerable honours, fills all the places of trust, profit, and honour, with his
Russes; the greatest preferment a foreigner can expect, is to be Colonel of a Regiment, or to command a Fort or Army, and this but seldom, and for one expedition only. He labours to breed in his people an admiration of themselves, and that their own customs, laws, and manners are better and more rational then in any other country whatsoever; wherefore he hinders his people from travelling abroad (tho for merchandise), from conversing with strangers, even Ambassadors, and from entertaining any forreigner, except for trade. Neither will he suffer them to build any large Ships to transport merchandise in quantities to other countries: But they want not small vessels for fishing, or carrying goods from one of their own ports to another. Nor is he willing that any forreigner, who hath lived long in
Russia, should leave them, and return to his own Nation. Nor that his
Russes should be interpreters to other Nations. It is very rare if any of them understand
Greek, tho they have most affection unto, and receiv'd their Religion from, that Church. There was at
Slaboda a school set up for the Latin tongue (which now few or none understand), but it was quickly pull'd down again: A Printing-press also for their own books, but if not forbidden, 'tis used only for their Offices, and such books as the Grand
Tzar commands. Nor are there many (tho there want not men of parts) that desire any further knowledg then to read and write in their own tongue, to understand their Service, and such homelies of the fathers (especially St.
Chrysostom) as are translated into the
Russ language. Now tho this seems to be good policy, yet is it indeed but forcing of nature; for the conversing with civiler and more knowing people cannot but work in them a despising of their own manners and ignorance, and a great desire of reforming that inconvenience; which how far it may be heightned, I know not. Besides, wanting learning they are very easily led by a good tongue and fair pretences. And therefore we have seen, that notwithsstanding their education in the veneration, I had almost said adoration, to their Prince; yet are they subject to follow any pretences, if they think to amend their condition by it; and the oppressions of the
Moussacks, or common people, and of their great men them to affect alterations. How greedily did they embrace the
(Wor) impostor
Demetrius, tho their Grand
Tzar Boris Godonove was a worthy, and not cruel Prince? how easily did they deliver up to his enemies
Vasili Zuiski, a prudent and valiant (but only as they conceived unfortunate) Emperor? what a number of impudent cheats found followers? nay I know not whether ever any pretender, except cropt in the bud, that was not able to raise an army against the government. In the time of the reign of the Princes of this present family, who have behaved themselves with great prudence, courage, and moderation, being far from the tyranny of others; yet did one
Timoska Anchedina feign himself heir of the
Zuiskies; and had he not been diligently pursued in his very beginning, might have raised very great troubles; as did
Stepan Radzin, who only pretended reformation; and that insurrection against corrupt Judges in 1636, which was difficultly quieted, even by the Grand
Tzar himself with his cap in his hand, and tears running down his cheeks. Both the stories of
Timoska, and of this sedition are at large set down by
Olearius.
The Grand
Tzar labours to nourish in the people an opinion of his own wisdom, good government, and care of all his dominions; so that they in common discourse attribute all their propriety, all their happiness and prosperity to God and the Grand Duke. And it is very remarkable, that they had this very opinion of
Ivan Vasilowich, then whom a greater tyrant was never represented in any story; yet hear what a writer of our own saith (
Purch. l. 4.
c. 9.)
If I found not an universal conspiracy against him, I should speak in his defence. I honour his good parts, his wit, his learning (
perhaps more then any Russ
in his time),
his exemplary severity upon unjust Magistrates, his martial skill, industry, &c.
Tea, his memory is still savoury to the Russes,
who hold him in little less reputation then a Saint. And to the same purpose also
Herberstein, Whether he was incited to those murders and cruelties by his own natural disposition, or the malice and treachery of his subjects, (as himself said) I dare not determine; especially since he had not any truculent aspect, or sign of fierceness in his countenance. And tho these policies help very well, yet are they not sufficient to conserve the power of the Prince, nor peace of the Nation. He knows that he cannot trust to the affections or the judgment of the common people (who the more learned they are, are the more intractable and dangerous); but useth other more effectual and certain means of well governing: As that he bestows all places of honour and gain, even of the very
Diacks or Clerks, immediately by himself. Whereby he is able to reward all that serve him; and all is acknowledged to be his bounty. Which is so much the more acceptable, because it carries the testimony of his good opinion of the person; and this breeds a great dependance upon him, and emulation amongst the Nobility; who incessantly by
[Page 30]their observance strive to out-merit one another for his favour. But lest all these should fail, he hath force to coerce them, who will not be obedient either for duties sake or reward. And besides the garrisons which are dispersed in the Castles up and down the country, wherein are great numbers of soldiers, he hath the guards of his person, which ordinarily amount to 16000 foot, besides horse; many of which also are foreigners, who have no dependance upon any person but himself. That he may engage more of his Nobility and Gentry, he never continues a Governor longer then three years; nor is there any hereditary; nor doth he frequently chuse the same person again into the same employment, but advanceth him according to his merit. He disposeth of all the lands in his Empire, whereof some belong to respective governments and employments; the rest tho he seldom takes from the children of the last possessor, especially of the common people, except for crime.
The Commons pass over their lands by descent of inheritance to which of their sons they please; which commonly they do after our Gavel-kind;
and dispose of their goods by gift or testament, without any controul, saith Dr.
Fletcher. Yet they pay an acknowledgment after the nature of an Heriot, or Relief.
They have few laws, but many customs in their government,
Their Laws. according to which they judg; yet no case special, extraordinary, or of consequence, is determined without the knowledg and approbation of the Grand
Tzar. There being a Chief Justice, who is also a chief Councellor, that receives all appeals and informations from all places, and acquaints his Majesty with them. But in 1647, the Grand
Tzar by a memorable example called together the wisest men in his dominion, and caused to be set down and published a
Code, containing the laws and ordinances whereby the Judges were to regulate their judgments. Which are printed in fol. under the title of
Solorna Ʋlosienia, or Universal Right. The Grand
Tzar also makes peace and war, sends all Ambassadors, whom he commonly chuseth out of the richest of the Nobility, who may bear the expences at his own charge; the Emperor taking to himself what he pleaseth of the presents made to his Ambassador, and rewarding him according to his merit, with a government, or other beneficial employment. The more solemn laws are thus made: The Emperor calleth to him such of the
Boiars, or Nobility, as he thinks most fit for wisdom and authority, and orders also the Patriarch to send for such of the Clergy as he thinks most prudent, to be present at a day appointed, (which commonly is a Friday, being their strict fasting-day), where the Clergy sitting in an honourable place by themselves, one of the Secretaries proposeth the points to be deliberated upon, asking first of all the advice of the Clergy; his Majesty requires their godly opinions and advice, and if they approve of what is proposed, the proposals pass to a full conclusion, and are made into an Act; else they are relinquished. After all the consents given, the
Diacks or Secretaries, draw them up into the form of a Proclamation, and send them to the great Cities, with charge to the Governors to see them observed. This care is taken for the Laws of greater consequence: there are besides them very many, which tho made upon particular occasions, yet for want of better, they are in force as precedents. The great prime Minister
Afanase Nashockin was endeavouring a reformation and methodizing of these, which without some such diligence must of necessity grow to be too numerous, and not very consistent one with another.
Next to the Prince,
The Nobility. are the Nobility; which are of divers degrees. Formerly there were younger branches of the Royal Family, who had the government and revenues of several Cities and Provinces in the middle of the Kingdom, as is before mentioned; but these were extinguished by
Ivan Vasilowich, and the succeeding Princes have not had occasion to renew those powers and titles.
There were also
Ʋdelney Knazey,Ʋdelney Knazey exempt or priviledged Dukes; who enjoyed a very great jurisdiction, and absolute authority in their own precincts. When the house of
Beala grew too powerful for the rest, they submitted upon certain terms, the chief whereof was to assist in the wars with such a number of men. But
Ivan Vasilowich by degrees so clipped and restrained their authority, that at length he reduced them into the same condition with the rest of his subjects. And to effect this, he first set one against another; but afterwards divided the whole Nobility into two factions; the one was of confiding men, such as he conceived to be firm to his interest; the other were malignants, or ill affected. If any one of these were oppressed, spoil'd, or kill'd by one of the other party, there was no remedy nor justice to be expected. All men knew also, who was of which party, and a register was kept of them. By which barbarous and tyrannical means, in seven years (for so long that continued) he took out of the way all such as himself suspected, encouraged his own party, and enriched his treasures exceedingly by the confiscations. If any remained, he took away their estates, and gave them in exchange others of lesser value in some remote Province; or by some other means wasted and consumed them. And whom
Ivan left,
Boris Federowich made a shift to dispatch, that himself, a stranger to the Throne, might the more securely enjoy it.
Now therefore the chiefest degree of Nobility is that of the
Boiars or
Boiarens.Boiar
[...]s. These are such as the Emperor, besides their Nobility, honours with being of his Council. These are the great body of Nobles, out of whom he raiseth his servants, governors, soldiers,
&c. Many of them are rich, both in lands (which they receive from, and continue by, the favour of the Emperor), salaries for their services, especially the Court-offices and governments, and their own acquisition. Many also have annual pensions from the Emperor, especially if they have either merited well, or by abilities give hopes that they will be able to do him service.
They also who have born any great office in war, as a General, Governor,
&c. do leave something of title to their posterity; so as they take place of all under the
Boiars. They also, as well as the
Boiars, may add
wich to the name of their ancestors,
Federowich, Ivanowich, &c. i.e. the son of
Theodore, of
John, &c. which is accounted a great honour amongst them, and they may have reparations upon those who do not give it them. Yet themselves do not use that priviledg when they write to their Lord; but on the contrary, diminish their own true name, calling themselves,
v.g. Timoska for
Timothy, Ivoska for
Ivan, and the like diminutives for humilities sake. They also carry a little Kettle-drum at the pummel of their saddles, upon which they beat with the end of their whip, to make way for them in crouds in the streets; and in wars, to give notice of marching, staying, or the like. The first that receives the command beating, all the rest answer him.
Next to these are the
Knazey,Knazey. which our people call
Dukes. This title anciently was of great honour, insomuch that the Grand
Tzar call'd himself
Weliki Knez, or Great Duke. But the
Knazey communicating their titles to all their posterity,
[Page 31]have so multiplied, that now there are
Knazey, who are glad to serve persons of mean quality for a small salary. Tho at the same time they will not fail to boast of their nobility, and trouble any one that shall affront them.
The
Sin-boiars, or
Sina-boiarskey, are the sons of such as enjoy lands and revenues for serving the Emperor in his wars; and are the same with those that with us hold in Knights-service, and the lands holden in this tenure are commonly divided amongst the sons; except the sons are so numerous that there is not a competency for each of them; in which case they petition the Emperor for maintenance, and he commonly gives them inferior offices in the Court, or makes them spies and informers, allowing them a small annual pension; till a war come, which entertains them all.
The Grand
Tzar hath also his Council.
[...]. He gives indeed the honorary title of Counsellors to very many who never come to consult; but those who are actually employed, and called to advise, are called
Dumnoy Boiaren; and their number is as the Prince pleases. This Council consisteth of all the great Officers of State, and such others as himself pleaseth to call to this honour. Yet neither are all these continually present; but he (as most other Princes) for more secrecy in some, and more easie dispatch in other businesses, hath a few select persons (a Cabinet Council) with whom he adviseth first, and prepareth matters for the great Council; who for the most part meet together rather to consent, and to give weight and reputation to the resolves, then to argue, or give their opinion, and determine affairs. The Patriarch is not named amongst them, as being supposed to be continually employed in the duties of Religion; but in matters of consequence, his advice is commonly asked and followed. This Council receiveth appeals; and all other great matters are remitted to them.
Besides this, there are many other Chambers, Courts,
[...] or Councils, (as they are called in some Kingdoms); but the principal are six, which have every one their several businesses. The first is for Ambassadors, and foreign affairs. The second for businesses of war. The third for the demeasne and revenue of the Prince. The fourth for trade and merchandise. The fifth for determination of civil causes amongst themselves. The sixth for criminal matters. Every Council hath its President, Counsellors, Secretaries,
&c. who write all things at large in rolls, after the ancient manner, sometimes thirty or forty ells long; whereof they have vast quantities orderly laid up in their respective offices. To these also are referred all the affairs of the whole Nation; every Province being assign'd to one of these; to send their appeals, make their relations, receive orders, and the like. Every Council knowing the Provinces that belong to it, and the Province knowing its own Council and office where to make their applications. In their judgments they give sentence according to witnesses, if there be any; if none, they give liberty for trial by combat, wherein it is lawful for the Appellant or the Apellee to substitute another in his stead. Sometimes they put them to the question or torment, wherein they are very ingeniously cruel; sometimes also to their oath; tho no man be compelled to swear; but if any voluntarily offers it, it is commonly accepted, and solemnly performed in the Church, by kissing a cross. But he that swears in this manner twice or thrice, becomes infamous, he is prohibited entrance into the Church, nor will persons of condition willingly converse with him. For there being amongst them no more abhorr'd crime then false-swearing, they startle at every solemn oath; tho in their conversation they are not scrupulous of swearing. They refer also some doubtful matters to lots, of which see a story in
Hackluit, p. 309.
Their usual punishments are severe.
Their Punishments. A robber is broke upon the wheel. A sacrilegious person impaled. A traitor, and a servant that murthers his master, beheaded. An Adulterer compoundeth with the abused husband; and besides, is whipped from the Court to the house of the Adulteress; and she (if her husband pleases) is repudiated, and put into a Monastery; and himself after six weeks, hath liberty to marry another. But none suffer more severity, then those that are in debt; who are kept prisoners till a day appointed, when they engage to pay; if they keep not their day, and be able to pay, they are every day brought into the Court, and there beaten for an hour together upon their shins and the calves of their legs, and back to prison at night, and so till the debt be paid. But if they be unable to pay it, they are made slaves to the creditor.
The chief Officers of State and the Court for secular businesses under the Emperor are much-what the same as in all other Monarchies.
Officers of State. The Chancellor, who is also the chief Secretary, and to him belongs, and he presides in the office of Ambassadors; his charge also is to present petitions to the
Tzar, and to return his answer, which he doth in the Princes own words. The Treasurer, that looks to, and takes account of all the revenue. The Constable, who looks after the soldiery. The Master of the Horse, who besides the Prince's horses, minds also the Guards, their discipline and quartering. The
Ocolnick, or Chief Justice, whom they call the
Great Counsellor, always present with the Princes person: under whom is the
Neddesnick, who commands all the Serjeants, Prisons,
&c. And divers of these are sometimes bestowed upon the same person.
Ilias Danielowitz Miloslawsky was Generalissimo, an employment very befitting him, for he was a man of great courage, and strength both of body and mind; he had such a vast memory, that he knew all the Commission-officers of an Army of eighty thousand, what their abilities, and where their quarters. He was also Treasurer, and had divers offices besides.
Afanase Nashockin succeeded him in his Princes favour, and was Chancellor, Treasurer, Lord of
Russia minor, and had several other employments; a man not corrupted by bribes, very sober and abstemious, indefatigable in business, and who seriously set about a reformation of the evil customs of his country.
But such a vast dominion as
Russia cannot be governed without very many Magistrates;
Inferior Magistrates. and such indeed there are. There is a Court, or Council for the government of
Moskow, who have many officers under them. In all the great frontier Cities are
Weywods, or Governors of great quality and experience; and in every City two, if not three, besides the officers of Justice,
&c. In lesser Cities are also Governors, but of lesser quality; whom the Grand
Tzar appoints by delivering them a staff, which at their return they restore him again, and this is the ensign of their power. Besides these, there are divers other Magistrates, as the
Gubnoy-starust, which is like an Alderman or Mayor of a Town.
Sotskoy-starust, like a Baily of an Hundred. And divers others, who can judg in small cases, and from whom there ly appeals; a great catalogue of them is in
Olearius, an. 1636. But
Afanase Nasbockin had a design, that to save the subjects trouble, and the Princes charge, the Governors should in many
[Page 32]cases, and even in some capital matters, have power of judging without appeal, and executing also their judgments. One thing seems very faulty in their government, that having so many Magistrates salaried by the Prince, their stipends must necessarily be very small and inconsiderable, yet are they by these to make their fortunes, and many of them to receive rewards of former services and expences. Consequently they must oppress the people, and so much the more, as will not only satisfie themselves, but also buy their peace and impunity at their return from their employment.
Thus much for their government,
The revenues of the Emperor. let us see what means there is to maintain it, the Emperors revenues I mean, which are very great, and arise thus:
1. There is the office of the
Steward, which receives all the Emperors revenue of his inheritance, or Crown-lands; which contain thirty-six Towns with their territories; whereof some pay their rents in money, others in corn, or other provision. This provision for the Emperors houshold is more then is spent, and the surplus is sold by the Steward, and the money brought into the Treasury, which according to the bounty and hospitality of the Emperor is more or less. In
Ivan Vasilowich's time, it was accounted 60000 Rubbles
per ann. but in his sons time 230000. And this commonly is employed in paying the wages of his houshold-servants.
2. The office that receiveth the
Tagla and
Podat, (
Tagla is an imposition upon every measure of grain that groweth in the Kingdom; the
Podat is a tax of money upon every Town and Precinct), bringeth in
communibus annis about 400000 Rubbles.
3. The Court of the
great income (bulsha precod) receiveth all the customs upon commodities in all the principal Towns, and this is farmed out to the respective places; and is therefore (as trading riseth and falleth) sometimes more, sometimes less;
communibus annis it may be reckon'd 340000 Rubbles. The customs of the Town of
Archangel, have (as some say) amounted to 600000 Rubbles
per ann. This office also gives account of all the Bath-stoves, and Cabacks, or drinking-houses; the greatness of which revenue may be conjectur'd by those of
Novogorod, where are three houses that pay each 4000 Rubbles
per ann. As also of the mulcts of sentences that pass in any Court, which is ten
per cent. paid by him that is convict by Law. He hath also an impost for every name contained in the Writs that pass out of the Courts. This amounteth commonly to 3000 Rubbles. He hath also the half of Felons goods (a fourth going to the Judg and Officers, the other fourth to the informer). There being moreover divers rents of lands allowed for the maintaining so many horse; others for so many foot; others for the mercenary or foreign soldiers. There is somewhat spared out of these rents, and in times of peace above the one half, which is also brought into this office. What it amounts unto, is uncertain. But in the year 1590, these three offices were reckon'd to bring in yearly 1400000 Rubbles.
4. But besides these, he hath other very great revenues by merchandizing, as 1. By
Caviare and
Isinglass, which all belongs to him; he either hiring men to fish for him, or lending them money to set up fishing, and the account being made of what they have caught, he allows them for their pains, and takes all the rest. He hireth out also the greatest part of the fishery of the Lakes and Rivers. 2. By Furs; for
Siberia, and those northern countries, do all pay their tribute in Furs, which he selleth by his Merchants, or else saveth money, by paying with it Ambassadors, soldiers, and the like. His merchandizing is very remarkable, for (1) he hath the liberty of preemption of whatever merchandise comes into his country; which he buys also at low prizes, so that many times he engrosseth a whole commodity, and raises its price as he pleaseth. (2) The price of what he buys is paid in commodities of his own; for he never, or very rarely suffers any gold or silver to be carried out of his dominions. (3) He hath also the prevendition; none must sell his commodities,
v. g. Furs, till the
Tzar hath sold all that he intends; whereby he sets what price upon commodities he pleaseth. (4) He frequently monopolizeth one, or more of the commodities of his own country. And all Sables (the best trade of the Nation) are his own as tribute, or at a small set-rate. All this is managed either by the Governors of his Towns, many of whom are no other then his Factors, or stewards for his interest; or by
Goses or Merchants of his own, who have salaries to look after these matters. Besides, the presents brought him by foreign Ambassadors, and what his own bring him (for he takes what pleaseth him of what is given them), are very considerable.
But neither are his expences small.
His
[...] His family consists of at least a thousand persons, nourished and salaried by him, besides his Guards at
Moskow, 16000 musqueteers and about 5000 horse. His garrisons upon the frontiers (the greatest towards
Tartaria) a hundred thousand men. Compounding for peace with the
Tartar is very chargeable. His own table consists ordinarily of fifty dishes of meat, which are all brought up; he chuseth what he liketh, and sends the rest to whom he pleases. The salaries of his officers and magistrates, tho to each of them but a small matter, yet being many, ariseth to a very vast sum. The receiving of Ambassadors is chargeable; for he defrayeth all their expence from their entrance into his Country till their going out. His posts, messengers, horses, carriages have a large account; so have his works, buildings, making arms, canons, and the like.
Concerning their dispositions, manners,
The
[...] the
[...] and customs, we have very many (and most of them impertinent) discourses. They are generally men of strong, vigorous, healthful bodies. 'Tis but of late that they have entertained Physitians; but in Fevers (and other diseases) garlick and strong-water were their only remedies; tho they had some few that pretended to understand the virtues of plants, yet they were not much believed. This healthfulness may perhaps be attributed to their frequent fastings, and generally slender diet; tho themselves rather conceive it to be from their much use of sweating in stoves, which repairs the damages that the colds bring upon them; confirming those parts which the cold weakeneth. All strangers admire their sudden changing from heat to cold, that from sweating in an hot stove, they will naked leap and wallow in snow, and immediately return to the heat again. So much has custom harden'd and familiariz'd their bodies to these extreams, if yet custom can do it, and that they have not a peculiar contexture and temperature of their parts from their nativity. But it seems out of doubt, that the exercises of their young men, which are boxing, cudgels, and wrastling, do much contribute to their patient enduring of beatings, whipings, and the like. Nor is the familiar recreation of the Ladies to be discommended, which is swinging, or that which the
Romans called
petaurus. They seem to affect corpulency, especially
[Page 33]their Nobility; who perhaps imagine, that a prominent belly is an evident difference betwixt one that lives at ease and plenty, and a man of labour.
Authors are very liberal in the censure of their manners,
[...]es un
[...]y cen
[...]d by
[...]. not excusing them from any vice; and interpreting all their customs and actions (I am afraid) too sinisterly. Few, that have written, conversed with persons of better quality (their
Boiars being prohibited all company with strangers, and even Ambassadors) then such as serve them for gain, or trades-men, who seldom in any country are commended for their justice and good dealing by strangers. But Dr.
Fletcher, and those few of our own country that have written, confess that there are amongst the Nobility very many, and amongst the populace some, of very excellent parts, courage, and discretion. But it is not rational, to pass censure upon any Nation or Country, from the customs of the meanest people, whose manners are everywhere licentious, turbulent, and bestial enough. It seems indeed, that the education and oppressions amongst them, suggest such customs as render them sufficiently infamous. But good
indoles, experience of good and bad, examples, and instruction of vertuous persons, and especially our holy Religion, in many conquers those evil motions and temptations, which others, not looking into themselves, do swallow and embrace. Being therefore educated only to write, read, and cast accounts (which yet they do not so artificially and conveniently as the rest of the world, for they count by forties and nineties, not hundreds, or sixties, which is the usual; nor by eighties, which perhaps is the best) and those who are ordained for the Clergy, to sing; they must misspend a great part of their youth. Nor do they attain to the mortifying their passions, and the exercise of virtues practis'd even in trivial schools. Nor do they by books learn the examples and prudence of other nations and times. Nor are they able to serve themselves of other useful arts and sciences, as not that of well-speaking, not mathematicks, and what depends upon them, as architecture, measuring, fortification,
&c. wherein they are forced to make use of foreigners when they have necessity. Besides, that all learning hath this use, that it replenishes the memory with good notions, and elevates the mind to some degree of contemplation. Yet in this also they have some that seeing their defect, labour to amend it; as
Ivan Borissovits Cirkassi got divers histories, and foreign books of arts and sciences, translated into the
Russ tongue; he was esteemed the wisest and justest person of their nation, by them who yet did not imitate him. But in sum, they have just so much learning as to account whatever they know not to be vanity, and them fools that study it; and yet to make them jealous and afraid to be over-reach'd and couzen'd by strangers, whom they always suspect to know more than themselves. Their oppression by their superiors drives them to fortifie themselves by cunning and deceit, ready also and willing to help themselves by any safe, tho unlawful, means. They are also hereby render'd very timorous and cowardly, and as far from valour as generosity. From hence proceeds also, that they are haughty and insolent towards their inferiors, mistaking that for grandeur and greatness of spirit; cruel also when they have advantage. The coldness of their country invites them to strong drinks; and the pleasure of these provokes to excess and drunkenness; and this to all bestiality and quarrelsomness.
Michael Federowitz, a very wise, moderate, and sober Prince, did what he could to hinder this vice; punishing with slitting the nose, the use of Tobacco (which the
Russes took brutishly, only to cause drunkenness and sleep), and also regulating the number of drinking-houses. He also made severe laws against injuring superiors. And his diligence and severity had some, but not the desired, effect; for he reformed in a great part those excesses in the Nobility, but the lowest sort were not much amended.
But there being no Nation so good,
Their Militia and Wars. wherein are not many (should I say the major part, I should not be disbeliev'd) bad; and none so bad, wherein are not many good: we ought to be wary how we censure them. Let us therefore proceed rather, to shew their publick actions, and by them take a truer or better estimate. As, that we may judg of their valour, let us consider their soldiery, and manner of warring; that we may know their piety, let us look upon the exercise of their Religion, and the like. To begin with the soldiery. They have four very potent and warlike neighbours; some whereof are always enemies (the
Tartars and
Turks), and the rest no very good friends (the
Polanders and
Suedes). And such is the situation of the country, that they cannot have neer hand any friends or assistants. So that their defence must rest upon themselves; for the foreign soldiers and officers that straggle to them for pay, are not considerable as to a great war. His standing Militia then consists partly in his Garrisons, which in the frontier Towns, especially toward the
Tartars and
Turks, (for the
Polonians and
Suedes being Christians, when he hath made an accord with them, he hath peace), who keep no articles longer then it is for their advantage, are very strong, numerous, and well furnish'd with good officers. In the inland places the guards are few and weak, sufficient only to countenance the government, and to be nurseries for a serious war. His garrisons, besides his ordinary guards (which are above twenty thousand) amount to an hundred thousand men, in actual service, and upon continual duty; and therefore in time of war must be augmented. Besides therefore he hath a Militia to be ready upon summons to rendezvous and march as he shall please; which is thus. He letteth out a great part of the land of the whole Nation, to those called
Sinaboiarskey, upon condition that themselves, their sons, and retainers, or farmers, to such a number as he thinks fitting, shall serve him with horse and arms, and at their own charge, in the wars. Such are the present
Spahi amongst the
Turks, and Knights-service amongst us. Now every son of any of these is a
Sin-boiar, or Gentleman; and as soon as he is able to bear arms, enters himself in the
Roserade (or Office of Great Constable), and petitions for means to maintain him. If his fathers Farm be not sufficient, nor any other void, they are either put into some low and mean employment, or else deferred till there happen something fit for him; till when he must shift as well as he can. When the Emperor goes in person to the wars, he hath a select guard of fifteen thousand horse, who are all paid; the best sort have not under seventy Rubbles, the second not under forty, and the third not under twelve Rubbles
per ann. besides their lands, which are also allow'd them. Besides these, the chiefest Nobles, and men of employment, are also obliged to maintain considerable numbers of horse, amounting to sixty thousand, at their own charges; yet receiving a sufficient allowance also for them from the Grand
Tzar. And these are muster'd and employed every year, at least to shew themselves upon the borders of
Tartary. The foreign soldiers are mostly mingled amongst his guards, and are sometimes more, sometimes fewer; the greatest part are
Polonians, Circassians, or
Cossacks (who
[Page 34]amount sometimes to four thousand, and are dispers'd in garrisons furthest from their own country),
Dutch, and some few
Scots, Suedes, and
Danes; many of which are for their skill taken to be officers. All these (besides the hundred thousand before mention'd) are esteemed to make up three hundred thousand horse, which are ready to march upon all occasions.
Their arms for their foot,
Arms and discipline of their Soldiers. are a gun, a sword, and an axe behind them; of their horse, are bows, arrows, iron masses, scimiters, targets, lances; some few have helmets, corslets of iron, or quilted cloth. But now they have great quantity of firearms, and abundance of canon. And in all their arming and discipline, they conform to the
European manner, which was introduced amongst them by the great number of officers,
Poles, Swedes, Scots, &c. that have been thither invited by the goodness of the pay. Every one of the
Sinboiars carries his own provisions for so long time, which are biscuit, oats, pulse, pepper and salt together, vinegar, and brandy. Their Commanders are the same that we have; a General, Lieutenant-General, four field-Marshals, each of whom takes care of the fourth part of the army; and each hath two under-Marshals, who twice every week (whilst in the field) muster and exercise their men. They have also a General of the Ordnance, and other officers under him. They made use of (in their wars with the
Tartars) a General they call'd the
Walking Captain, or the Commander of the walking Castle, which is nothing else but a double wall of thick pales, so contrived that it might be in ashort time set up in length, and then it would reach seven miles; and the two walls about ten foot distance. The pales were higher then a man, and in them loop-holes, to lay out the noses of their musequets. And this is sufficient for the defence of their shot, where the enemy hath no canon, as the
Tartars have not; else it is of little use or esteem. They had also one great Drum carried upon four horses fastened together, and eight men to beat it; but these customs are laid aside, and they follow the modes of the
Germans, and other
Europeans.
They are acknowledg'd to be better at keeping Forts and Cities then in a field battel;
Their Valour. to which also their frequent fastings, slender diet, education to hardship, do much dispose them. Their women have many times supplied the defect of soldiers, kept guards, fought stoutly upon the works, and even defended breaches. In some of the Castles of
Livonia, when the
Poles took them, they found almost all the men consumed; in one but two were left, and yet those two refused to yeild up the Fort, lest they should seem not to have performed their trust to their Prince. When the
Polonians upbraid them with their loss of so many battels when they had sufficient advantages, they answer, But who hath
Smolensko, Novogorod, &c. Their Forts are very well victual'd and man'd; fortified commonly with turf, kept up with bavins, hurdles, or timber, which resist battery the better, tho the frost have too much power upon them. They now also face them with brick and stone. Their
Sinboiars are educated and inur'd to war in those Forts; but they stay not above a year or two in one garrison, as neither do the Governours. There are generally two, and sometimes three Governors in one garrison; the chiefest hath care of the munition, and never stirs forth; the other upon occasion go abroad, sally, fetch in contribution,
&c. many of them are very valiant, expert, and careful soldiers. Of all their borderers, they most apprehend the
Swedes. The
Polonians are more valiant, and will not fear with twenty thousand to fight sixty thousand
Russes; but they are not so expert in taking Towns, nor are they so easily kept together, their obedience being too voluntary. The
Tartars do the
Russes most mischief, for in sudden and violent inrodes, they sweep a whole country, carrying away all that are able to march, and children that can endure to be carried in baskets, which they bring with them for that purpose. If the
Russes meet with them, they never refuse to fight with them; but the
Tartars seldom come to a battel, but if they apprehend themselves weaker, they will all disperse, and rendezvous again at night, or after one day or two. In their last invasion he is said to have carried away four hundred thousand captives; which is enough to depopulate a country. The best defence against them is a great barren desart of twenty days march, being the confines between them and the
Russes. But in general all wars are prejudicial to the
Russ; for they raise great armies for the most part of married men, and are not very careful of preserving their men; all the time therefore that war lasts, the women are unfruitful, and by that means the old stock decays, and the new doth not advance. The remedy they have is by working the
Czremiss and other moderater
Tartars mingled amongst them, to a coalition with them into the same Religion and Government; which the
Russes sedulously endeavour, and have in good part effected.
Next for their Religion, and religious ceremonies.
Religin
[...] of the
[...]. Themselves say, that St.
Andrew planted Christianity amongst them, which was by invasion of the
Tartars afterwards either abolished or very much defaced, till after the year 900 (some say 960, other 989) it was again restored by
Volodomir. I find in
Can. 28.
Conc. Chalced. that it is order'd, That the Churches of the Barbarians should receive their Ordinations from
Constantinople. Both
Balsamon and
Zonaras interpret this of the
Russes. So that these two learned persons were of this opinion, that the
Russes were Christians before that Council, which began 451. And their Metropolitan being consecrated by the
Constantinopolitan Patriarch, may seem to argue so much. But neither of these arguments are convincing; let us therefore follow the common opinion. It is acknowledged by all, that they were Christians in
Volodomir's time, and that they follow'd, or consented with the
Greek Church, as they do still in most of their opinions and practices. The greatest difference seems to be their rebaptization, whereof more by and by. Their Ecclesiastical Government was the same with that of all the Churches, till now of late,
i. e. by Bishops, Priests, and Deacons; whether they retain the lesser Orders (as they are called) I cannot find. Till of late the supreme Officer in their Church was the Metropolitan of
Moskow; who being elected by his Clergy, was ordained or consecrated by a commission from the Patriarch of
Constantinople. But about the year 1588, there came to
Moskow one
Hieronymus, who pretended to be Patriarch of
Constantinople, and to have been banished for I know not what reason by the
Turk. Others said, that he was deposed by his own Clergy, for complying too much with the Western Church. And
de facto he did endeavour to reconcile the
Russes to the Church of
Rome; to which purpose
Ant. Possevine was at that time also sent by the
Pope, the King of
Poland, and other Christian Princes, who interessed themselves seriously in this affair; which not succeeding,
Hieronymus began to treat about resigning his Patriarchship, and translating of the See from
Constantinople to
Moskow; which motion was greedily embraced by the
Russes. And
Jan. 25, 1588, in a very great solemnity, (the Prince, and all the Nobility and
[Page 35]Clergy going in procession thro a great part of the City) at length in our Lady's Church, he made an oration to the foresaid purpose, deliver'd up his Resignation authenticated, and his Patriarchal Staff, into the hands of the Metropolitan of
Moskow; who presently with divers ceremonies was inaugurated Patriarch. And his successors do all use that title, and are consecrated by their own Bishops. Whether this action was valid I dispute not; 'tis sufficient that the Patriarch of
Constantinople, who is most concern'd, doth not question it; and to stop his mouth, as I suppose, there is every year, besides upon divers other occasions, a very considerable present of five hundred crowns sent to him. Besides, the
Greeks want not other artifices, as sending things hallow'd, reliques,
&c. for which they receive very great presents. Yet
Filaretes Nikitys, the late Patriarch and Father to the Emperor
Michael Federowitz, was consecrated by the Patriarch of
Constantinople, but since him none.
Till this time there was no other Metropolitan in all
Russia but this of
Moskow; [...] but that Church being become
[...], they immediately made two new Metropolitans, the one of
Novogrod velica, the other of
Rostove, these were the only Archbishopricks before. But since that they have added two more, one of
Casanskoi and
Swiatskoi, who resideth at
Casan; the other of
Sarskoi and
Pondoskoi, who lives commonly in the Castle of
Moskow, and is the Patriarch's Substitute or Coadjutor, when upon any good cause, as age, sickness, or the like, he is hindred from officiating. They had also (as
Possevine complains) but eleven Bishops for all that large Empire; but since that time they have added two (I suppose because of their conquests), and advanced all except one, that is the Bishop of
Comenskoi and
Cassieskoi, who lives at
Columna, into Archbishopricks. The Patriarch hath absolute power in what concerns Religion, with such authority, that even in things relating to the Civil government, he reforms what he thinks prejudicial to Religion, without giving the Grand
Tzar any account of it; who, without any contestation, commands the orders made by the Patriarch to be executed. As the late Patriarch
Nicon being an enemy to musick, forbad all musick in their merry meetings, and search'd the houses in
Moskow for such instruments, and burnt five wagon-load of them.
Leo, [...] Ju
[...]tion. their first Metropolitan, had his See at
Chiow, afterwards when
Wolodomiria was the Metropolis of the Empire, the Metropolitan also removed thither, accompanying still the Prince; and now is at
Moskow. The jurisdiction of the Bishops is the same as in other Churches; for besides their authority over the Clergy, and ordering Ecclesiastical matters, they take cognisance also of causes Testamentary, Matrimonial, some pleas of injury,
&c. They never visit their Dioceses, but have certain Lay-men, in whose judgments they can confide, to give them account of the lives and demeanors of the Clergy. They have also Officials or Commissaries, (called
Boiaren Ʋladitskey) Lay-men (they have both Archdeacons and Protodeacons, but not employed in those offices) that keep their Courts, and exercise their jurisdiction. And these are not appointed by the Bishop, but by the Emperor, tho he seldom denies the Bishop to nominate, if he request it. But every Bishop hath for Ecclesiastical matters, and for the more solemn service of God, a Council of twenty-four Priests of his Diocess, who are as it were Prebends or Canons of his Cathedral Church, where they continually reside. The revenues of the Bishops have been (as they say) greater then now they are. The Patriarch hath about three thousand Rubbles
per an. The Metropolitans and Archbishops about two thousand five hundred. But all this revenue is not for their own use, but they are obliged to furnish at their own charges, such a number of soldiers.
The nomination of Bishops belongs to the Emperor,
Election of their Bishops. who always takes them from amongst the Monks, which obligeth them all to live unmarried, not to eat flesh, wear no rings, or linen shirts or drawers; besides other the like Monastick observances. The Patriarch is chosen by all the Bishops, Clergy, and Abbots, who give notice of their election to the Prince; if he disapprove it, they chuse another. Lately, at the election of
Nicon, the Clergy named two, and could not agree, the Emperor caused them to cast lots, and the lot fell three times upon the person of
Nicon.
Of inferior Clergy they have a very great number;
Inferior Clergy. there being many Parishes in their Cities, tho unequally divided (some much bigger then others), and every Church many Priests belonging to it. They have no particular care of educating persons for this office; but any one that thinks himself fitly qualified, presents himself to the Patriarch, or the next Metropolitan, who examining his ability (which consists chiefly in reading, writing, and singing well) ordains him; which is chiefly by cutting of the hair on the top of his head, covering it with a Callot, and putting on a Surpless, a little cross of white silk upon his breast, and then gives him his benediction, and authority to officiate in the Church, and to administer the Sacraments. He must be the husband of one wife, and if his wife dy, he can neither officiate as a Priest, nor marry another; so that they do not conceive the character to be indelible. Yet a widower may sing, read,
&c. and may serve as a Deacon, but he must not officiate at the Altar. And some of them get leave to keep their Benefices, and yet enter into a Monastery; such they call
Churnapapaes.
Their revenues are not from tythes,
Their Revenues. tho it be said, that
Volodomir at his introducing of Christianity, setled tythes also upon the Clergy; nor have they any setled salary, but they are content with what they receive from the people for baptizing, marrying, burying, offerings, prayers for the dead,
&c. besides, every private person upon any occasion of business, desires the Priest to say a prayer for him, for which he gives him something. They also solemnize the Sains-day of the Parish, when all the neighbourhood come in to be prayed for, and make an offering. Once a quarter also he blesseth his Parishioners houses and families. By these and many other such like ways, they make up a competent livelihood for themselves, and to give the tenth also of it to the Bishop. Protopapaes, or Archpriests and Archdeacons are only in Cathedral Churches.
They have service thrice a day;
Their Service. about break of day Mattens, at noon Mass, Vespers in the evening. And it consists of Psalms, certain portions of Scripture, the Creeds, prayers, and sometimes an homily of some of the Fathers, or the life of the Saint of the day in their own language. Never other preaching, except once in a year, when the Patriarch with very great solemnity, makes a short exhortation to the people, to serve God, obey their Prince, and live in unity and charity with their neighbours. They never kneel at their devotions, but stand up, and sometimes bow, knocking their forehead to the ground.
Ivan Vasilowich was frequent in the Church, sung the prayers with the Clergy, and sometimes had his forehead swell'd with knocking the floor. They
[Page 36]communicate children at seven years old,
Communion. and before in case of sickness; when they communicate, they have an hoste in the middle of a barley cake; the communicants partake of the hoste, the rest of the people have the barley-cake broke amongst them, as a
pain-benist. They communicate ordinarily but once a year, which is about Easter, and then only three at a time, and always after some extraordinary fasting, mortification, or confession, which they make standing in the middle of the Church, and before some picture of a Saint. The Priest appoints him pennance, gives him absolution, and admits him to the Sacrament. They are very severe in their fastings, having more of those then of flesh-days; tho every day be the memorial of one Saint at least, yet are there but thirteen great and solemn holidays, besides the Sundays; nor do the ordinary people observe many of these, and those they do observe, they do it more with debauchery and drinking then devotion. But in their fasts they are so severe, that they will not taste any thing that comes of flesh, not so much as a medicine, if it have
cornu cervi, or
ungula Alcis in it. All authors take notice of the veneration they have to their images.
Their Images.Possevine saith, they do only not adore them. Others say, that they look upon the Saints as causes and coworkers of their salvation. Yet divers amongst them are of another opinion. A Protopope of
Casansky speaking too liberally against this worship, was degraded, and thrust into a Monastery. And their late Patriarch
Nicon seeing he could not remedy it, retir'd from his charge to a private life. Others excuse this worship, attributing it to the great ceremoniousness the
Russes use both in their devotions and ordinary conversation.
All men take notice and make long discourses of their marriages and burials.
Their marriages, But there is scarce any Nation that hath not some particularities about these; many men also take delight in their own fancies. That which is most peculiar to the
Russes is, that they keeping up their women, especially their virgins, very close and private, rarely suffering them to come abroad, so much as to Church, or to make visits, but never to Balls or merry meetings; it happens frequently that a man comes to marry one whom he never saw before, or is not acquainted with her conditions. Parents commonly make up the matches, only the young man may employ his mother, or some other friend, to see and give information of her; as the maid doth of the bridegroom. But in recompence of the inconveniencies which may follow, they dissolve marriages upon very slight occasions; and the man, after a short forbearance, hath liberty to marry again. They go to Church, and receive the Priests benediction; who having ask'd their consents, and read some prayers, gives them his blessing, and drinks to them, and they also drink to one another. All their friends present them, and the gifts that please are prized, that the value may be returned in a competent time; those which are unuseful or superfluous, they return again, nor is it ill taken. A woman is not worse esteemed for marrying a second husband, but a third is scandalous.
What is particular in their burials is,
and burials. that they carry out their dead (even the Emperor himself) the same day he dyes, and accompany him with great howlings and lamentations of women. They leave the body unburied for eight days, praying for him every day; then they return, kiss him, the Priest puts a billet into his mouth, to testifie of his godly life, and that he receiv'd absolution; and then after some prayers they inter him, and keep his anniversary with prayers and devotions. They bury none in their Churches.
They think their baptism to be most solemn,
Their baptism. and most effectual of any other celebrated amongst Christians. Children they baptize in the Church, adult persons in Rivers; the Font stands in the midst of the Church, and they consecrate new water for every one that is baptized, imagining that the impurity of the childs original sin (cleansed by baptism) remains still in the water. They have a solemn procession about the Font, the Clerk (who is always their Deacon) carrying before the image of St.
John Baptist. As soon as the child is baptized, he puts a grain of salt into his mouth, anoints him, making the sign of the cross upon the forehead, hands, breast, and back, with consecrated oyl, puts him on a white shirt, and hangs about his neck a little cross; which he is obliged to wear as long as he lives; which if it should not be found upon him at his death, he would not receive Christian burial. He assigns him also a particular Saint to be his Patron, ordering the godfathers to put him in mind (when he comes of age) to have a particular devotion towards him. Conceiving baptism to be the entrance into the Church, they baptize all (except the
Greeks) that come into their Church, tho they have been before baptized in the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost. Those also who are excommunicated, or are conceived to be out of the Church by any prophane or wicked action (as those they call
Chaldaeans) they receive into the Church again by baptism. So that there are those amongst them who have been baptized ten or twelve times.
In the rest of their ceremonies and doctrines,
Other
[...] remains of the
[...] ses. they differ little from the
Greek Church; only they superadd divers things, as the hallowing of their Rivers, which they do twice every year; the greatest pomp is on Palm-sunday, when the Emperor leads the Patriarchs horse. They account many things and persons unclean, as Christians of another profession; insomuch that the Emperor washeth his hands after any Christian Ambassador hath kissed them. They will not permit such to enter into their Churches, and if they do enter, they sweep after them. Divers sorts of meats also are accounted unclean, nor do they willingly eat of any fowl, or such thing killed by a woman. After they have accompanied their wives, they enter not the Church till they have washed; and many other such observances they have. After any one hath received Extreme Unction, they will hardly give him meat, but no medicine upon any terms, so that he must dy in his own defence. They begin the year on the first of
September, that day being, as they suppose, the first day, and they keep their account from the creation. They account our Lord to have been incarnate in 5509 of the world (reckoning according to the
Septuagint), to which adding the year of our Lord (as 5509 1679) gives their account of this present year 7188: and subtracting from the present year of the epocha at our Lords birth (as 7188 + 5509) gives the present year of our Lord 1679. Their Offices are all in their own language, which is the
Sclavonian; and hath so great affinity with the
Polonian, Lithvanian, Cassubian, Vandalian, those also of
Bochemia, Dalmatia, Bulgaria, and
Croatia, that they can make ashift to converse one with another.
It remains that we speak something of their Religious. They have many Monasteries,
Their
[...] ligious. and some very rich; but all of one order, which is St.
Basil. Few of their Governors are
Archimandritae or Abbots, but most Priors or
Igumeni. Tho
[Page 37]many of them have great revenues, yet do they difficultly admit any one, except he bring a stock with him, which is seldom under three hundred Rubbles; the rest of his estate he must dispose of at his admission. The ceremonies of their reception are changing his cloths, which are to be all of woollen, clipping his crown very bare, unction, and the like. They vow perpetual chastity, and abstinence from flesh. Nor hath he that is once enter'd, ever any hopes to get out again. The Monastery of
Troitza is said to have had near an hundred thousand Rubbles
per ann. in revenue. It is built like a Castle, having walls of stone regularly fortified, and stored with Cannon; and the ordinary number of Religious (besides their officers and servants) were about seven hundred.
They have also Nunneries of several orders. Some admit only noble widows and maids, others promiscuously; but this is universally observed, that none that are once enter'd do ever return to their secular condition. The Emperor having continued with his wife twenty years without having issue by her, thrust her into a Nunnery, where after two months she was brought-a-bed, but could not for all that go out of the Nunnery.
The History of the Princes of
Russia.
THE
Russes have the same vanity that the
Romans (and most other Nations) have had, to deduce their original either from Gods, or the most famous of men. Whereby how much honour soever themselves think to have obtained, so much do other Nations think they have lost of truth. Some Authors derive them from
Augustus Cesar. Ivan Vasilowich, the learnedst of all the
Russes, and who had reason to be best informed, told an
English Goldsmith smiling, (because the Emperor had said, that all
Russes were theeves), that he was not a
Russ, but a
German, and that their family came from
Beala, a famous King of
Hungary. More particulars of this we know not; as neither who, when, or upon what occasion they came; nor who were their successors. But it is certain the Imperial Family was commonly called the House of
Beala. Others say, that the first Governors were three brethren (
Rurich, Sinaux, and
Truvor) of the
Varegi. But who those
Varegi were, or what Country they inhabited, 'tis uncertain, as is also the time of their coming, which some say was
ann. 752, others 861. And of these
Rurich setled at
Novogrod, Truvor at
Plescow, and
Sinaux at
Bielioser; these two last dying without issue,
Rurich succeeded, and left the whole dominion to his son
Igor. Igor married
Olga, and fighting with the
Drewlians, was taken by them and beheaded.
Olga afterwards defeated and destroyed these
Drewlians, went to
Constantinople, was baptized, and took the name of
Helena about the year 876, brought Christianity into
Russia, and died with the opinion of sanctity, and her anniversary day is
July 11.
Suetoslaw when he came to age succeeded his father, and
Jeropolick him.
Next after him was
Wolodomir, concerning whom we have something of certainty.
Zonaras saith, that in the time of
Basilius the Emperor, there was a Bishop sent from
Constantinople to convert the
Russes, (I think his name was
Leo). The
Russes would not believe except they saw a miracle; whereupon the Bishop threw the book of the Gospels into the fire, and after a long time took it out unblemish'd; and this was the beginning of the conversion of the
Russes, but their solemn receiving it was not till 988, when their Prince
Wolodomir marrying
Anna Sister of
Basilius and
Constantine, was converted, baptized, and changed his name into
Basilius. He is by them look'd upon as their Apostle, and they celebrate his Festival
July 15. he died in 1015. This man removed the Metropolis of the Nation from
Kiow to
Wolodomir. He had many children, who fought and slew one another; two (
Borissus and
Chlebus) are for their holy lives and unjust deaths accounted holy Martyrs, and their day is
July 24.
Sewoldus Coras, some call him
Jeroslaws, after many wars subdued his brethren, and obtained the government.
He was follow'd by his son
Wolodomir, surnamed
Monomachus, but others say he was called
Jeroslaw (or
fair bank) because he built that City.
Saxo Grammaticus saith, that he married the daughter of
Harold King of
England. He was a potent Prince, and kept very good correspondence with the Emperors of
Constantinople. But it is to be noted, that the actions of this, are confounded with those of the other
Wolodomir. They say he died
ann. 1146, which is not probable, if he was the husband of that Lady who followed, and is not set down till 1237, when reigned
George, by some called
Gregory, call'd by some
Szeveloditz; others make
Wszevolod to be the father, and
George his son.
George was
ann. 1237 slain by
Batus a
Tartarian Prince, who subjected the whole country to the
Tartars; ordering that the
Tartars should from time to time chuse the Princes of
Moskow; that when they sent their Ambassador, the Prince should go to meet and wait upon him on foot, offering a platter of Mares-milk; that if the
Tartar let any of it fall upon the main of his horse, the Prince should lick it up; and that he should bare-headed and on foot give the
Tartars horse his provender out of his cap; but the most grievous was, that the
Tartar had a house and a guard in the Castle of
Moskow. Michael succeeded his brother, and was also slain by the same
Tartar. Next was
Alexander his son; and then his son
Danielou or
Daniel, surnamed
Caleta. He transferred the Imperial Seat to
Moskow, and called himself
Great Duke of Muscovia, &c. some say by the authority of
Inocent IV, about
ann. 1246. Some place after him
George Danielowitz Caleta, who (they say) was slain by
Demetri Michaelowitz, who was kill'd by the
Tartars. Other place next to
Daniel his son
Ivan, chosen by
Zanabeck the
Crim-Tartar; who favoured him so much, that he abated some part of the slavery imposed upon the
Tzars. His son
Ivan Ivanowitz succeeded, and was wholly subject to the
Tartars. Demetri Ivanowitz was his son, who refused to pay tribute to the
Tartars, making a fierce war upon
Mamai Kan, and gained a very bloody victory, the earth for thirteen miles together being cover'd with carcases. But
Tachtanisk Kan in another battel slew
Demetri, and renewed the power of the
Tartars over the
Russes. Vasili Demetriwitz follow'd
ann. 1357, who chased the
Tartars out of
Russia, and conquer'd
Bulgaria beyond the
Wolga. Being jealous of his wife
Anastasia, he disinherited his son
Vasili, and gave the Empire to his brother
George, who at his death restor'd it from his own sons to the right heir. But those sons making war upon
Vasili, took him prisoner, and put out his eyes, therefore was he call'd
Vasili Ciemnox, or
dark. But the
Boiars being faithful to him, he reigned peaceably till his death; and left the Empire to his son
Ivan Vasilowich surnamed
Grotzdyn, who was the first that gave lustre and fame to the obscure name of the
Russes. For taking away the Dukedoms and Governments from his Uncles, who accounted themselves
[Page 38]absolute in their dominions; he united the whole Nation in his own person, and call'd himself
Tzaar, or as they pronounce it
Tzar, that is King. He married
Mary daughter to
Michael Duke of
Tweria, some say
Severia, or
Severski, and presently after chaced him out of his Dukedom, and united it to his Crown. He conquer'd also the Duke of
Novogrod about
ann. 1488, and united that City, with all its dominions, to his own estate, and carried from thence three hundred Carts laden with gold, silver, jewels, and other rich commodities, to his Treasury at
Moskow. He warred also with
Poland and
Livonia, with various success. By his first wife he had
Ivan, who died before him, and left one son called
Demetri. Afterwards
Ivan married
Sophia daughter to
Thomas Paleologus, who reigned in
Morea, by whom he had divers children. This being a woman of great spirit and understanding, so continually upbraided her husband with his slavery to the
Tartars, that at length she forced him to free himself, her self contributing a beginning unto it. For whereas the
Tartars had an house within the Castle, where lived a Governor, and others that were as continual spies upon the Emperor and his
Russes; she pretended a vow, when with-child, to build a Church there when she was safely deliver'd. Having therefore brought forth a son, she invited the
Tartar Governor to the Christning, and cajoling him with great kindness and magnificence, begged that house of him for fulfilling her vow; which he granted. Afterwards her husband and the
Muscovites took courage, and never ceased till they had shaken off the
Tartar slavery. Tho the
Tartar continues to this day to call them his
Golops, or slaves. She wrought also much upon her husband (now very ancient, for he was sixty-six years of age when he died, which was in 1492, after he had reigned forty-two years and seven months), that passing by
Demetri the son of
John, whom he had by a former wife, he declared her son
Gabriel (whose name he changed to
Vasilie) his successor.
Vasilie proved a very great Tyrant over the people, and his own brothers and family; but he recover'd a great part of the country which had been conquer'd by
Vitoldus Great Duke of
Litvania. In 1514, he took
Plescow and
Smolensko; but was unfortunate in his designs against the
Tartars. He married
Helena daughter of
Glinski, by whom he had
Ivan called
Vasilowich, who was born
Aug. 26, 1528.
Vasilie died 1532, and made
Michael Glinski Tutor to his son.
Ivan Vasilowich began his reign
ann. 1540, whose very great victories over his enemies, his most barbarous cruelties and tyrannies towards his subjects, and pretended sanctity, have given large subjects to all historians of those times, and amongst others to
Paulus Oderborn who hath writ a peculiar book of him. However he behaved himself in other respects, he raised the Empire of
Muscovy to its height. He subdued the Kingdoms of
Casan and
Astracan; which are signified by the two Crowns over the Eagles heads in his Arms. And
Astracan being the capital City of the
Circass-Tartars, having conquer'd that, he reduc'd them also to terms,
i. e. to accept of his government, pay him some small tribute, and to assist him with so many horse and arms in his wars. This Nation reacheth as far as
Persia, and being set upon by the
Turk, when he went to invade
Persia, they sent to the
Tzar for Engineers to fortifie their Towns,
&c. which he presently sent, and with them also Governors and soldiers for their defence, and his securing their obedience to himself for the future. The subduing of the
Tartars alarm'd his neighbours, but none more then
Selimus the
Turkish Emperor, who
ann. 1569, sent an Army of three hundred thousand, besides forty thousand
Crim-Tartars, to recover
Astracan and other places from the
Muscovite. Serebrine, a very faithful and valiant General, commanded in
Astracan; who at first much wonder'd from whence such an Army should come, having scarce ever heard of the
Turks, but notwithstanding was not wanting to his duty, but hasten'd to strengthen his garrison with men and provisions; and gave order to all the country, especially those upon the
Caspian Sea, to hinder the
Turks as much as they could from provision. The
Turks, whether by mistake or malice of the
Tartars, got into great woods, where their slow marches made them consume much of their store, and the contrary winds hinder'd their ships upon the
Caspian Sea, from coming up the river, and cast some upon the shore, which were all pillaged by the inhabitants, who were very active in obedience to the Governor of
Astracan. However to the banks of
Volga they came, whither
Serebrine went, and made many successful skirmishes with them. In one he slew divers of their best Officers, and divers thousands of their men. Mean-while victuals grew scarce in the
Turkish Army; and those few Ships that escaped the winds and the
Russes, brought refreshment, but no such quantity as could serve them any considerable time. So that they began to retreat. But their ill diet, and the bad air of these marishes, especially in the end of
Autumn, brought the plague amongst them. Their magazine of powder also at
Azoph was by lightning blown up. And to compleat their misery, the remainder of the Army being shipt upon the black Sea, were cast away. So that very few of that vast Army returned to
Constantinople. And the
Russ had by that means established himself more firmly in the conquest of all those countries.
Ivan Vasilowich conquer'd also a great part of
Livonia, and many other places. By his first wife he had two sons,
Ivan (whom himself killed with his staff) and
Pheodor, who succeeded him. He had many wives, and one he put into a Monastery for her sterility, who there within two months brought forth a son, called
Demetri; but notwithstanding that, she was forc'd into the Nunnery, and had a son there, yet could she never get out. Some say, that this was the act of his father; it may be that both concurred in this, as in many other acts of injustice and tyranny. He dyed
March 28. 1584, leaving two sons,
Pheodor and
Demetri.
Pheodor was a very weak Prince, and having married the sister of
Boris Feodorowich Godanove, left the managing of all affairs to him; who having caused
Demetrius to be murther'd (as was said), and made his party amongst the Nobility and people, (
Pheodor also after awhile (
ann. 1597, having reigned twelve years) dying, the last of the house of
Beala) after much dissembled tergiversation was chosen Grand
Tzar; and reigned seven years peaceably, till an Impostor (
Griski, or
Gregory Otrapeion) flying into
Poland, and there declaring himself to be
Demetri, the son of
Ivan Vasilowich, who (as he said) was not murther'd, but another in his stead, was furnished by divers Noblemen of
Poland, with an Army to recover his right.
Boris in the time of
Pheodor, tho he had obliged some of the
Boiars, yet had he made away divers even of the best Nobility, who were most likely to contest his power, following herein the steps of
Ivan Vasilowich. He also incurr'd their hatred the more, by his engrossing to himself and family all the gainful employments, before he was chosen Emperor; for he had then no less then ninety-three thousand and seven hundred
[Page 39]Rubbles
per ann. And for these and the like reasons many of them at first secretly favoured, afterwards openly join'd themselves and their power to
Demetri. Particularly
Peter Basmaneuf, entrusted with an Army by
Boris to fight against him, went and carryed with him all his Army to
Demetri, and brought him to
Moskow in a manner without any bloodshed. At which time
Boris first on
April 13, 1605, and shortly after his wife and son died, either by poison, as most say, or murther'd by some sent from
Demetri to that purpose, and left the Throne void to that Impostor, which he enjoyed not nine months before he was suspected, as not sleeping after dinner, nor using stoves, and in divers other matters not conforming to the custom of the
Muscovites. And when the
Russes saw moreover, that he had engaged to marry the daughter of the Palatine of
Sandomiria, and to bring in the
Roman Religion, they formed a conspiracy against him; chiefly by the practice of
Vasilie Zuisky. They chose for the execution of their design the seventeenth day of
May 1606, nine days after his marriage; when
Zuisky, with other
Boiars and the people, after dinner finding the Guards asleep, forc'd their way into his chamber; he affrighted with the noise, leapt out of a window and broke his leg; the
Boiars follow'd and there slew him, and hurried his carcass into the market-place, where they also laid by him his great fautor
Basmaneuf, exposing them three days. Afterwards they chose
Vasilie Ivanowich Zuisky Grand
Tzar in his stead, who was crown'd
June 1, 1606. He had not reigned long before another
Demetri appear'd in
Poland, and being by them assisted, raised very great troubles in
Muscovy. After him also started up another
Demetri in
Moskow it self; who also found followers and abettors, people who in the times of trouble and licentiousness, take even a sorry pretence to rob and plunder. Mean-while divers of the Nobility bandied together against their Lord
Zuisky, pretending that he was unfortunate; that victory seem'd to shun, and troubles to follow him; that as long as he govern'd there could be no hopes of peace,
&c. Which silly stories prevail'd so much upon an amazed people, that they seized upon
Zuisky, and shaving him, put him into a Monastery. Mean-while the
Poles were not idle in defending and asserting their
Demetri, but came with their army before
Moskow. The
Russes to heal all their wounds, and soder up their differences, chose
Ʋladislaus, son to the King of
Poland, to be their Grand Duke, upon certain conditions; whereof one was, that
Zuisky and his family should be put into the hands of the King of
Poland, which was accordingly done, and he imprisoned till death, and buried in the high-way. The
Polish army before
Moskow, understanding the election of their Prince, behaved themselves very peaceably for a while; and the General with part of his army was admitted into the Castle, the rest of the army was quarter'd in the Villages without; but they by little and little got into the City, where they had not long continued e're there happen'd a quarrel (which amongst men used to drunkenness is not hard to find) of the
Poles against the
Russes; whereupon they fell upon the City, and in despight of their General plunder'd and burnt it. They say, that at that time perished two hundred thousand persons. The treasury also was pillaged, and all the wealth of the Emperor scatter'd amongst the
Polish soldiers; some of whom are said to have charg'd their pistols with pearl.
The
Russes being in this almost desperate condition, and upon the very brink of ruine, at length a Butcher (whose name seems to have been
Zachary Listpenow) began not to despair, and to give out amongst the people, that if there could be found an honest Treasurer, there would not want good officers and soldiers of the
Russ Nation to deliver them from their miseries, and settle peace and glory again in their country. The people destitute of other hopes, catch'd hold upon this straw, and bid him name whom he thought fit to be General; which he did, and proposed to them a very worthy, but poor and neglected Gentleman, called
Pozarskey. The people approved his choice, took him for Commander, and the Butcher they made Treasurer; bringing readily unto him all the money they ow'd unto the Emperor, and what they could spare of their own. Wherewith he presently raised an army, and joining it with a body of
Cossacks then in service of the
Muscovites. They marched to
Moskow, besieged the
Poles in the Castle, and forc'd them to surrender, and to march out of the Empire, which they immediately performed. Hereupon the
Russ Nobility convened at
Moskow, and seeing their country free from strangers, and an obedient army of their own, they resolved upon electing of a new Emperor; which they put in execution
ann. 1613, and made choice of a young man, called
Michael Federowitz, and sware allegiance unto him. His father had forsaken his wife for Gods sake (as they say)
i. e. quitted her, and betaken himself to his devotions in a Monastery; he was of the house of
Romanove, and when his son was chosen
Tzar, he also was elected Patriarch; and being a very wise and moderate person, he put his son (who was always obedient unto him) upon secure and prudent counsels. His name was changed to
Philaretes Nikiditz, and he died
ann. 1633. The first thing he did, was to recover
Smolensko; and by the mediation of Christian Princes (especially King
James) he made peace with the
Poles. He also made a peace with the
Swedes, who had been the sorest and heaviest enemy to the
Russes. And by the assistance also of King
James an accord was made, and all differences reconciled. The
Swede was to render
Novogrod, Stara Russa, Porkow, Lagda, Aydow, with all their Territories to the
Muscovites. And the
Muscovites surrendred
Ivanogrod, Jama, Coporia, Noteburg, with their precincts, to the
Swede, and renounce all title to
Livonia; which was no small prejudice to the
Russ, who thereby lost the salt trade, which had brought in no small revenue. He died
July 12, 1645, in the forty-seventh year of his age, and thirty-third of his reign. He was a prudent, pious, and valiant person, endeavouring by all means to banish the memory of former tyrannies, and to make up the breaches of his own people, which he did very successfully.
To him succeeded his son
Alexes Michaelowitz, a more martial, but yet as mild a Governor; whose actions are so fresh in all mens memories, that I think it superfluous to write them; but such have been these of the house
Romanove, that if their successors continue to tread in the steps of these their ancestors, they need not doubt of both a lasting reign, and glory to all posterity. He died about the year 1676, and left his son, a young Prince of about sixteen years of age, to succeed him.
The Lakes and Rivers of Muscovy.
COncerning the Lakes and Rivers of
Muscovy, 'tis to be observed, (1.) That almost all their Rivers take their original from Lakes; or
[Page 40]else they could hardly be perpetual. (2.) That the Rivers of
Muscovy are (except where they be straitned by mountains, which are not very frequent) for the most part broad and shallow; full of islands, flats, and deep holes; because all their Rivers in a manner chiefly consist of melted snow, and when the snow dissolves, it causeth great floods and violent deluges, but withall carry so much sludge that it fills up streams; which remains so till a new deluge cleanseth that place and fills up another, so that the channel is very uncertain, and now are depths which were shallows before. (3.) That they are not very full of fish; and were it not for the Lakes and deep holes (which are not frozen to the bottom) there would be no fresh-water fish at all; for fish cannot live in ice. Therefore they observe, that there are no Carps at all, nor much other fish, except what comes from the Sea to spawn as soon as the Rivers are thawed, such are Salmons, Belluga, Cods, Haddocks, Omelies, and the like. And of these there are great store, because store of feeding. Some Lakes also are well stored, because not frozen to the bottom. (4.) That there are no Maps extant, except of
Wolga, Dwina, and
Dnieper, because the course of the others are not so well discover'd.
One of the greatest Lakes of this country is
Ivanosera, i. e. Johns-Lake (
Osera signifying a Lake), in the great Forest of
Epiphanow, called also
Jepiphanoulies, and
Okonitzkilies, in the Province of
Resan, eight leagues from
Tula. This Lake is near five hundred Versts or
Italian miles long. And in the said Forest arise also the Rivers
Schaet and
Don, or
Tanais. The
Schaet running Eastward receives the River
Ʋppa or
Oppa, and emptieth it self into the
Occa. But
Tanais (
Tana and
Don) cometh out of the Lake at the Town
Donco, and entreth into the marshes of
Meotis, or Sea of
Zabaque. From the spring to its ending is directly about eighty leagues, but by water 'tis twenty days journey.
Donets Sewersky falls into
Tanais three days journey above
Azoph.
Bieleiosora, sixteen leagues long, twelve broad, scarce of fish, receiveth thirty-six smaller Rivers, and sendeth out only the
Schotsma, which falls into the
Volga four leagues below
Mologa.
Ilmin, Ilmen, Ilmer, Limido, is twelve leagues long, and as many broad; and ends about two miles above
Weliki Novogrod. It receives the Rivers of
Lowat, arising in the Forest of
Wolkowsky from a Lake called
Fornow, and
Scholona, and passeth away by the
Wolkowa, which after running thirty-six leagues, dischargeth it self into the Lake
Ladoga or
Laduga.
Ladoga, about an hundred leagues long, and sixty broad, is full of Isles, and is the mother of the
Neva, which enters into the
German Ocean. It is stored with fish, and hath many Towns and Villages upon its banks.
From the same Lake of
Fornow ariseth also the
Wolga, of which by and by. In the same Forest also, about ten leagues from
Fornow, ariseth
Boristhenes, near the Town of
Dnieperche, and therefore called
Dnieper. And ten leagues from the
Dnieper also the
Dwina or
Duna, by some imagined to be
Rubus, by others
Turuntus of
Ptolomy, taketh its original from a Lake of the same name. It passeth by
Vitepsko, Polotsko, Dunenburg, &c. to
Riga in
Livonia, and ends in that part of the
Baltick called the East-Sea, and by the
Russes Waretzcoie-morie.
Besides this, there is another
Dwina whereof we have spoken in the Province of that name.
Weza beginneth in a marsh between
Bieleiosora and the
Volga, passeth by
Suetzogorod, and so into the
Dwina.
Mosqui, or
Mosqua, springeth near to
Twere, thence six leagues below
Moscow it enters into
Occa, after it hath received the
Jagusa or
Jausa.
Weglin hath its spring a little above
Moskow, and joins with
Occa.
Ʋgra ariseth near
Drohobus, passeth thro a great desert between
Worotin and
Coluga, thence falls into
Occa. This was sometimes the boundary betwixt
Russia and
Lithvania.
Occa comes out of a great Lake in the Province of
Rezan, passeth by many great Towns near
Nisi-Novogrod.
From the same Lake flows
Sem, and
Schosna, both fall into the
Dnieper.
Narva is navigable from the Lake
Czutzho, or
Czudin, called in Latin
Picis or
Polas, and by the
Dutch Peifves.
The
Volga ariseth out of the foresaid Lake of
Forenow, in the Forest of
Volkonski; two miles after it hath left this mother-Lake, it falls into another called
Volga, whence it taketh that name; it being anciently called
Rha, and by the
Tartars Edel. This River till it come to
Nisi-Novogrod, is not visited by strangers, or Merchants, who passing from
Moskow down the River
Moscua, and then at
Kolutin Serge Monastir down to
Occa, upon which stands the City of
Rezan, heretofore a noble City, but being destroyed by the
Tartars ann. 1568, it was by the Grand Duke transferr'd to another place eight leagues distant, and is called
Peresla Resanski, southward from
Moskow. And thence near an hundred and twenty Versts
Cassinogorod, the chief Town of the
Tartarian Province called
Cassinow, subject to the
Russ. About an hundred leagues from thence is
Moruma, the chief seat of the
Mordwiz Tartars, and is inhabited by them and
Muscovites, but is under the Grand Duke. Below which falls into the
Occa, the Rivers of
Morsna-reca and
Clesna, which comes from
Wolodomir. And all these fall into the
Volga at
Nisi-Novogrod, in 56 deg. 28 min. and the needle declines more then nine degrees westward; an hundred leagues by land (by water many more) from
Moskow, and 550 to
Astracan. The inhabitants are
Tartars, Muscovites, and
Hollanders, who have there a Church, and a congregation of above an hundred persons, the most part soldiers and sutlers, and some Merchants. The
Volga is here about a mile broad, and in
May and
June, when the snow-waters come down, is very passable, else by reason of the frequent sand-banks and shallows, the passage is very troublesome. The next Town of note is
Vasiligrod, in 55 deg. 51 min. built by the Emperor
Vasilie, to hinder the incursions of the
Tartars of
Casan, which are those called the
Czremisses, of whom we have spoken before. Thence to
Casan, in 55 deg. 28 min. upon the
Casanka, a little above where it falls into the
Volga, reacheth East and Southward to the great desarts; their next neighbours are the
Tartars, Schibansky, Nagas, and
Casatks. The Town it self is large, and fortified after their manner, but the Castle hath very strong and well contrived works faced with stone, much canon, and a strong garrison of
Muscovites; tho in the Town the
Tartars live mingled amongst them. This Province was formerly under the
Cham of
Tartary, and was able to bring sixty thousand men into the field, till conquer'd by
Ivan Vasilowich. The whole story whereof was thus;
Vasilie Ivanowich having given the
Tartars a great overthrow, forced them to submit, and receive a Governor from him, who was one
Scheale, a
Tartar indeed, but otherwise so contemptible for his person, that his subjects joining with the
Crim Tartar, surprized and ejected him. Which success gave the
Tartars so much courage, that under
[Page][Page]TRACTUS BORYSTHENIS vulgo
DNIEPR et
NIEPR dicti, à
KIOVIA ad Urbum
OCZAKOW ubi in
PONTUM EUXINUM se exonerat.
[Page][Page]NOVA ET ACCURATA WOLGAE FLUMINIS, olim RHA dicti DELINEATIOAuctore Adamo Oleario.
Illustrissimo Domino,
D.noBENEDICTO BAGGE de
BERGA, Sueco, haec Geographica fluminis
WOLGAE descriptio humillimè offertur
Apud Janssonio-Waesbergias: et Mosim Pitt:
[Page][Page 41]the command of two brothers
Mendligeri and
Sapgeri, they invaded
Russia, and stopped not till they had taken and pillaged
Moskow, burnt all, except the Castle, the guards whereof were forced to buy their safety with considerable presents; and the
Muscovites also to sue for a peace, which was granted upon very bad terms; as that the Grand Duke, and all his subjects, should for ever be tributary to the
Tartars; and the Duke, when he came to pay his tribute, should smite the ground with his forehead (a great expression of submission) before the statue of
Mendligeri, which he caused to be erected in the middle of the City of
Moskow. After this victory
Mendligeri returned to
Chrim, and
Sapgeri setled himself King of
Cazan. But
Mendligeri having a great mind also to
Rezan, besieged that, and summoning the Castle, sent word, that it was in vain to resist, since that now they had taken
Moskow, and the Duke and all his subjects were become tributaries to them. The Governor
(Ivan Kower) replied, that he knew no such thing, neither could he believe it, except he saw some authentick testimony: whereupon the
Tartar sent him (by certain Officers) the very original instrument of submission; which as soon as the Governor saw, he sent away the Officers with this message, that he would keep that writing as faithfully as the Castle of
Rezan, nor would he part with either of them so long as he had a drop of blood in his body. He had in the Castle an
Italian, an excellent Canonier
(Giovanni Giordano) who did great service, and slew great numbers of the
Tartars, and with a shot took away part of
Mendligeri's garment; who being thereby affrighted, offered to raise the siege, if the Governor would return him his writing; which he refusing to do,
Mendligeri was forced immediately to rise and be gone. The Governor (as soon as the
Tartar was departed) sent the Instrument to
Moskow; where it was received with an extraordinary joy of the Prince and people, who presently brake to pieces the statue of
Mendligeri, raised an army of twenty-five thousand men, and proclaimed open war against
Sapgeri, and sent a defiance unto him; withall set down before
Casan, but was forced to retire, after having lost many men before it.
Ivan Vasilowitz succeeded his father, and began his reign with the siege of
Casan; which having batter'd in vain for two months together, at last he began to mine the walls; the mines took their effect, blew up the works, slew great numbers of
Tartars, and gave the opportunity of an assault, which (
July 9, 1552.) was carried on with that vigor, that the Castle was taken; and being well repaired by the
Muscovite, is still kept by them.
Sixty versts below
Casan, falls the great river
Cama into the
Volga, on the left hand, by several mouths, some thirty versts distant from others. The water of it is blackish, and riseth out of
Permia. Upon this river should seem to be (if it be at all) the great forrest
Step, which is six or seven hundred versts long; wherein you may ride a days journey amongst cherry-trees, yet not above two foot high; being so frequently burn'd down by travellers, who careless of their fires at night, set fire on the dry grass and burn down three or four hundred furlongs at a time. They say also, that here grows spontaneously Tulips, Roses, Asparagus, Onions, Marjoram, and what not? which I impose not upon any mans faith, because I find somewhat like this, but more probably mentioned in the
Ʋkrain. Thirty versts lower
Zerdick (another branch of
Cama) enters the
Volga, over against which, on the right-hand bank, is the City of
Tetus, an hundred and twenty versts from
Casan. Twenty-five versts below
Tetus, but on the left bank of the river, is the river
Ʋtka, which rises near the City
Bulgara. Below that is the Island
Staritza, in 54 deg. 31 min. where they find Pyrites of several colours, so round and oval that they very well serve for shot. Sixty-five versts below
Tetus is
Ʋneroskora, a ruined City of the
Tartars. Hereabouts is very good fishing, by a particular invention of the
Russes; they bait an hook, and fasten it to a strong line, which they tye about a little board of four or five inches cover'd over with tin, and drag it after the boat; the motion of the water, continually turning up the bright tin towards the Sun, intices the greater sort of fishes, who are thereby easily caught. Upon and near the banks of the river, are the ruines of divers Cities, which the people say were destroyed by
Tamerlain; the names of some of them are
Simbeyska-gora, Arbuchim, but of the greatest part the names are unknown. The river
Adrobe enters
Volga in 53 deg. 48 min. as doth the river
Ʋssa not much lower. A little beyond in a great plain is a sandy hill, call'd
Sariol-Kurgan, which they say, was the burial of a
Tartar Emperor and seven Kings there slain, and made by the Soldiers carrying sand and earth in their helmets. Three hundred and fifty versts below
Casan is
Samara, a large City upon a river so called, three versts from the banks of
Volga; tho it do not wholly join with the great stream till fifteen versts lower; and over against it on the right hand fall in also the rivers
Ascula and
Lisran. Below
Samara an hundred and fifteen leagues is the mountain of the
Donski Cosacks, who from hence usually robbed the boats that came down the
Volga. below this the river
Zagra joins the
Volga; and not far thence the river is so shallow that the
Cosacks ford it, and lurking in the sledgy and bushy Islands of the river, rob and spoil securely. These people do very much mischief to the
Russes, and the Emperor to repress the inrodes of them and the
Tartars, hath built divers Cities and Forts, giving them to be inhabited only by soldiers; one is
Soratof in 52 deg. 12 min. chiefly against the
Kolmuck-Tartars, whose country begins here, and reaches to the
Caspian Sea; a very deformed, barbarous, and cruel sort of people, great man-stealers, and enemies both to
Russes, Cosacks, and chiefly the
Nagai-Tartars. Czaritza, Tsornojar, and divers others, were built for the same reason. An hundred and fifty versts below
Saratof on the left hand of
Volga, is the river
Ruslana, and over against that the mountain of
Ʋrakufs-Karul, where they say a
Tartarian Prince called
Ʋrak was killed by the
Cosacks: near to which is the river and mountain called
Camaschinka, near whereto
Stenko Radzin was born; the river rises out of the torrent of
Iloba, and falls into the
Don. The
Cosacks bring over land their boats upon four wheels thence into the
Volga, where they exercise their piracies and plunderings. The river
Bolloclea is ninety versts below
Camuschinka; and near that (about 48 deg. 51 min.) is the shortest distance betwixt the
Volga and
Don, which is about seven leagues. In 49 deg. 42 min. is
Tzaritza, three hundred and fifty versts from
Soratof. From thence to
Astracan is only heaths and barren grounds; below lies the Isle of
Zerpinske, over against which a little river rises out of the
Don, but so little that it will hardly bear a small boat (
Massa in his Map (for in others it is not to be found) calls it
Kamous) falls into the
Volga. Near to this place also was begun a trench large enough to convey Vessels from
Don to the
Volga, and it is expressd in divers Maps; but it was given over; for the
Nagai, and the other
Tartars, fearing (not without reason) that it would be a means to bring the
Turk upon them, as the
[Page 42]Muscovite also did, they joined all together, and not only disturbed the work, but also beat the army of the
Crim-Tartar consisting of 80000, together with 20000
Turks, and 3000
Janisaries. Below that on the same side, the river
Wesowi, and thirty versts from that
Wolodinerski Ʋtsga empty themselves into the
Volga. The country all hereabouts, and down as far as
Astracan, is very plentiful in Liquorice. Thence the river descends to
Tzormegar, a little City inhabited only by a garrison against the
Cosacks, who there used to rob; and particularly defeated a great convoy of fifteen hundred
Muscovites; for the river being there very swift, they suffer'd the soldiers to go first, and then setting upon the Merchants killed seven or eight hundred of them, and carried away all the goods before the convoy could come up to help them. The next considerable place is
Astracan, a great City in an Island made by two branches of the
Volga, and called
Dolgoi. It was anciently the Metropolis of the
Nagai-Tartars, and built by one of their Kings called
Astra-chan; it lies in 46 deg. 22 min. and the needle varies westward 13 deg. 40 min. others say that it lies in 47 deg. 9 min. yet is the winter (which lasts but two months) so cold, that the river is frozen hard enough to bear sleds. The Island is sandy and barren, except some gardens cultivated by the richer Citizens. The country also thereabout is marshy and desart; yet do the inhabitants make a great profit by their salt, which the Sun bakes upon the top of the water about a finger thick; the inhabitants cast it up into great heaps, and transport it to other countries. The river also is mightily stored with fish; and there is great plenty of fowls of all sorts. They have great store of most excellent fruits, and particularly grapes. This City was
ann. 1554 taken from the
Tartars by
Ivan Vasilowich, who sending his army in small parties, and several ways, arrived at the Town before he was expected, or the enemies provided to receive him; presently encouraging his men, by promising them the plunder of the Town,
Aug. 1. he took it by storm, where he spared none that would not be baptized. Having re-peopled it with
Muscovites, he encompassed it with a stone-wall, and other fortifications.
Michael Federowitz afterwards added another part to it; so that the circuit of it at present is 8000 Geometrical feet, defended by 500 pieces of Ordnance, nine Regiments, each containing 500 Musqueteers, two Weywods,
&c. The situation of it invites Merchants thither from all parts, even from the
Indies; so that the customs (tho very low) amount to 25000 crowns
per ann. The inhabitants of the country (
Tartars of
Crim and
Nagaia) are not permitted to live in the City, as neither to build Cities, or fortifie Towns. But for the most part they live in huts of reed or cane, like to our hen-coops, which in cold weather they cover with a course cloth; the summer they spend in rambling up and down to find pasture for their cattel; in winter time retireing under
Astracan, for their security against the
Calmuk and
Jaick Tartars. The Grand
Tzar lends them arms, which they restore at such a time; they pay no tribute, but are obliged to serve him in his wars, which they do very willingly, in hope of prey. They have their own Princes, Commanders, and Judges; but some of their chief
Murza's are always kept as hostages at
Moskow.
If any one desire to know what these
Cosacks be,
Of the Cosacks. that have caused all this noise and trouble in the world; tho we shall treat more largely of them when we come to the
Ʋkrain, yet it will not be amiss to give here some general account of them. Authors differ much concerning the reason of their name; some say, that they are so called from
Cosa, which in the
Polish language signifies a Goat. But I find that in the
Circassian, and other
Tartar languages,
Cosac signifies a Soldier; perhaps as
Cimber in old time amongst the
Germans; which name most properly agrees to them, for they are no other then a collection of theeves and robbers, out of all nations and countries, living chiefly upon spoil, pillaging and piracy. They are of two sorts, according to the places of their habitations; which they chuse in fastnesses, desart and unknown places, more for their security then other conveniences. Those that live upon the
Boristhenes in the
Ʋkrain, are called
Zaporousky; but besides them there are another sort like those, who (because they live upon and about the
Don or
Tanais) are called
Donsky, and these are they of whom we speak at this time. They are in some degree subjects to the Grand
Tzar (as the other were to the
Polanders), but they obey not much more then themselves please; tribute or acknowledgment they pay none; laws and government, such as it is, they have of their own; only when the Grand
Tzar commands, they assist him with what number of soldiers he pleaseth, but he pays and protects them against their enemies,
i.e. all the world, but chiefly the
Crim-Tartars their neighbours. One of these was
Stenko (or
Stepan)
Radzin, who, to revenge his brothers death, that was hanged for heading a sedition of the
Cosacks in the army of the Grand
Tzar against the
Poles ann. 1665, by
Jurie Alexowitz Dolgarowsky the
Russ General,
ann. 1667, after he had got so much into the favour of the
Cosacks as to be acknowledged their General, he began to pillage upon the
Volga and the
Caspian Sea, as far as
Jaick, which he plunder'd and burnt; he destroyed all their fisheries, their villages, and whatever he could light upon, bringing a very great calamity upon all those nations. Thence he went to the other side of the
Caspian Sea to
Terki, &c. and so into
Persia; where in a certain City finding great quantity of excellent wine, himself and soldiers (of whom he had five or six thousand) were so drunk, that the
Persians fell upon them and slew them;
Stenko (with about five hundred of his
Cosacks) with great difficulty escaped to their boats, which they call
Stroogs. Thence he came again to
Volga, to recruit his losses both of men and spoils, which he did in short time; and one day entertaining his Officers upon the river with his Mistress (a very beautiful
Persian Lady, whom he had taken prisoner) he drowned her with his own hands; and presently upon that set up Reformer against drinking, whoring,
&c. and got so much into the favour of the people, that
Astracan was by the Citizens and Soldiers surrendred unto him: where his cruelties upon the Governor and the Officers, are not easily express'd, besides other great mischiefs he did to the Grand
Tzar. But amongst his own
Cosacks he was very humble, and of easie address. Nor could any one know him from an ordinary
Cosack by his garb, or outward appearance, but only by the very great observance they gave him, bowing to the ground when they came to him, and by the compellation they used towards him, which was
Batskie, Father. Which partly also shews the manner of the
Cosacks government; which is, that their General hath no more power then the Soldiers give him voluntarily, which is commonly according to the advantage and success they get by him. But (as I said) more of these when we come to the
Ʋkrain.
BEfore we treat particularly of this country, it is necessary that we speak of the
Tartars in general; and shew the reason of their name, and how they came into these places. And because this discourse doth more naturally belong to
Asia, we shall here only give a brief account of them, reserving a larger treatise to its proper place. We must also premise, that since Historians do so much disagree, especially the Western from the Eastern, in their relations concerning these people, the Reader must not here expect either the reconciling, or setting down, all their differences, much less the confutation of any; but we shall briefly, and with the best judgment we have, deliver that which seems to us most probable; and that also chiefly out of the Eastern writers, who seem to have more exact knowledg of these matters then our own people.
Martinius saith, that in the
Chinese Histories mention is made of the
Tartars four thousand years ago; but I cannot find them nam'd in our Historians till about twelve hundred years after Christ. That the
Scythians anciently inhabited all the northern Regions, I think is out of doubt; as also, that these
Tartars were a tribe of them, which subduing all the rest, abolished the former, and introduced their own name. They are by all the ancientest Historians called
Tatars; and this seems to have been the general name of those Nations that inhabit beyond
Imaus, the north-east parts of
Scythia, and north of the wall of
China; built (as some say) a few years before our Saviours time, tho our Historians make no mention of it till the greatness of these
Tatars suggested to the
Chinois to secure themselves by this defence from their fury. There are divers conjectures concerning the reason of the name; some derive it from a
Syriack word, that signifies
abundance, because of the populousness of that Nation; some from a word signifying
remainder, i. e. of the twelve Tribes; others say, that it is the name of the Province they inhabit, or of the river upon which they are seated, and is the greatest river in all that tract. They are divided into many Tribes, and that which dwels upon this river, is particularly called
Mogul, i. e. watery or
fenny Tatars. Others say, that
Mogul or
Mongul is the name of the Nation, and
Tatar of the Tribe; and that Tribe which lives on that river are called
Su-Mogul, or
Mohall; which is the
Arabians opinion,
Su-Mogul in their language signifying
watry Mogul.
The great fame, and the first knowledg that we have of the
Tartars, was from the victories of
Gingis- (Jinjis-) Chan, whom our Historians call
Chinchis, Changius, Cinguys, &c. Gingis, they say, signifies the sound of iron, and they gave him this name because he was a Blacksmith.
Can is a title of the greatest honour in their Language, as Emperor in ours.
In the year of the
Hegira 559, which is of our Saviour 1202, reigned over these eastern Tribes of
Scythia, call'd
Tatars, one
Ʋng-Chan: in whose service was entertain'd (or as some say brought up with him) a young man call'd
Tamugin, who became a person of very great prudence, valour, and good fortune, and arrived at so great esteem for his military services, that by the malicious suggestions of those who envied him,
Ʋng-Chan conceived a very great jealousie against him, and resolved to apprehend, imprison, and proceed against him as there should be reason. The night appointed for this exploit was discover'd to
Tamugin, by two of
Ʋng-Chans servants. Who providing against it, left his Tents standing as they were before, wherein were their wives, children,
&c. but all the men of war he took with him, and placed himself and them in ambush; who rising up at the approach of
Ʋng-Chan, slew him and all his followers; and presently seizing upon the Kingdom, caused himself to be called
Gingis-Chan. and from the very beginning of his reign, either incited or encouraged (as all Authors agree, and himself always pretended) by some divine, or at least supernatural apparition, he designed wars upon all his neighbours, and the enlargement of the dominion and name of
Tatars. He also set up a new Religion (if it was not the same which was begun by
Sagomorbar-Chan, who was taken for a great Prophet, of whom we know very little), but wherein it consisted I find not any satisfactory account. He believed a Providence; and set up
Mesquitas to comply with
Mahometanism; but, as an
Arabick Author saith, it was like a branch broken off the great tree of the
Musselmans law, and is extremely detested by them. He compelled none to his Law, and gave greater indulgence, then they, to the Christians; and some of his successors (either
Manga or
Kublai) were actually baptized, with his whole family, and many of his chief Officers, who obtained great victories against the
Saracens; but afterwards they returned to their former impiety, which is continued by them to this day.
The first thing
Gingis-Chan did,
His Victories. was subjecting to himself all the neighbouring
Scythians, which he easily did, partly by force, partly promise; and subdued to the
Tatar Government, all
Cathay eastward to the great Ocean, and as far as the
Volga or
Edil westward. He also extended his dominion very far into
India and
Persia. Yet lived he not many years; but at his death divided his conquests amongst his sons; and (after he had shewed them by a bundle of arrows, which as long as bound fast together none of them could break, but the youngest broke them all when severed) exhorting them to unity amongst themselves, and obedience to his eldest son, he gave him the ancient kingdom, and of his conquests as far as
Bactria or
Chowaresme, and made him supreme over all.
His successor was
Ogtai,His Successors. or as we call him
Hoccota-Chan, whose life also was short; besides him he had many sons, particularly one called
Tuschai, (whom some call
Ken, others
Cuine) the Father of
Batuu or
Baydo, of whom more by and by.
Hoccota had also
Cuina-Chan who succeeded him.
The next Emperor to
Gina or
China-Chan was
Mango-Chan, who conquered
China.
To him succeeded
Cobila- (or
Kublai)
Chan, of whom
M. Paulus Venetus, Haytho, and others write largely; he is said to have been baptized, and embraced Christianity by the perswasions of a King of
Armenia.
The eleventh (or as some say the thirteenth) of this race, not in order of succession to the
Chan, but to one of the brothers, was
Timurlangh, whom we commonly call
Tamerlan; who
[Page 44]attributed all his victories to his observance of the Religion of
Gingis-Chan,Of Tamerlan. for which he was by the
Mahometan-Doctors declared an Infidel, and by their writers call'd Devil, Plague, Calamity, Traitor, and
Aldighall (which we corruptly call
Degnal)
i.e. Antichrist to the
Turks; and indeed he persecuted them with very great violence, and mightily encouraged the Sect of
Gingis-Chan.
Concerning these,
Of Batuu. account must be given in due place; it is necessary for our purpose to speak only of
Batuu or
Baatu, or
Bayto, whom our authors call
Batus, son of
Hoccota. He enjoyed the country upon the eastern banks of
Volga or
Edil; and to give a specimen of his disposition, when
Ban (either his brother or brothers son) complained, that he saw no reason why
Baatu should enjoy the fruitful pastures upon
Edil, and himself as near akin to
Gingis-Chan, should be driven into the dry and sandy wilderness;
Batu sent for him, and tho the words were spoken in his drunkenness (which the
Tartars are used to pardon), he cut off his head.
This
Batu therefore (his son
Sartach also possesing northwards all betwixt
Don and
Volga) fell upon the Nations called
Comani,His Wars.Alani, and
Gazani, living between the
Euxin and
Caspian Sea, and wholly wasted their country; destroying all, except some few who fled into
Hungary, and there got for awhile secure habitations. Afterwards he fell upon the
Polowczi, seated upon the
Tanais, and all along upon the north of
Palus Maeotis. They are commonly said to have been
Gothic Nations; but
Polotwski are called by the
Russes, such as live without houses, in waggons, wandring from place to place, as they can find pasture for their cattel. Whatever they were, they sent Ambassadors to the
Russes, their ancient enemies, for assistance against the
Tatars; as did also the
Tatars, to advise them to be quiet. But the
Russes put to death the
Tatar messengers, and joined with the
Polowczi. Some say, that
Cottian their Prince had married his daughter to
Miecislaus Duke of
Kiow, and that this
Miecislaus Romanowitz, Miecislaus Mscislawitz, with the Militia of
Halicks, the Dukes of
Czirnovia, Smolensko, and most of the
Russes, joined all their forces to the
Polowczi, and having march'd twelve days together, arrived at the river
Kalcza. A. C. 1224,
July 17, the
Tatars (who were there encamped) perceiving them wearied with so long a march, immediately gave them battel, and made a very great slaughter; many of the
Russians were slain and taken, and the rest flying homewards, were murder'd by the
Polowczi, whom they came to assist. The
Tatars pursuing their victory, absolutely destroyed the
Polowczi, and seized upon their country, which is that which we call
Tartaria Precopensis. About thirteen years after,
A.C. 1238, they fell upon
Russia, part of which they absolutely wasted, as all the country about
Kiow; part of it being full of woods and lakes, and not fit for the
Tatars pasturage, they conquer'd, but gave them conditions, whereof we have given before a short account
p. 37. thinking it more advantagious to have tribute and dominion over the country, then to lay it waste. Not long after
Batu divided his army; himself with one part fell upon
Hungary, the other he gave to one
Peta to march into
Poland, &c. who the first year destroyed all as far as
Sendomiria. The next year he entred again, and forced
Boleslaus the Chast Duke of
Poland, out of the country; who retired to the Monastery of
Willehrad in
Moravia. Peta then also burn'd
Cracovia, all except St.
Andrews Church, which was fortified and well defended against them. Thence they came to
Breslaw in
Silesia, which they found burnt to their hands by the soldiers and inhabitants, despairing to keep it. Thence they came to
Lignitz, where
Henry Duke of
Silesia had got together a considerable army, besides those brought to him from
Poland, Prussia, and many other places; and gave battel to the
Tatars, who there obtained a very great victory.
Henry, the Grand Master of the
Dutch Knights, and many other persons of quality, were slain; and so many in all, as the
Tatars, to shew the greatness of the slaughter, filled nine great sacks with their right ears; and the
Arabian authors say, they amounted to 270000, which is manifestly false, if spoke of this battel; if of all the war, may have some probability. This battel was fought
V. Id. Apr. 1241, at a place thence called
Walstad, a mile from
Lignitz. The
Tatars also were so weakened, that they stirred not out of their camp for fifteen days space, to cure their men, and to deliberate whither they should march next; and they resolved upon
Moravia, to be nearer to their General. The King of
Bohemia raising what men he could, sent them under the command of a very valiant and expert soldier
Jaroslaus a Sternberg, to defend such places as were most considerable. He with much labour and difficulty got into
Olmutz, when the scouts of the
Tatars appear'd before the Town. Trusting to the strength of his works, he forbore to fight the enemies so long, that they conceiving him a coward, began to despise him, and to keep their own guards more negligently; which
Jaroslaus perceiving, after they had recommended their cause to God by fasting and prayer, chusing a dark night, march'd out of a postern, and with great silence fell into the
Tatars camp, of whom they slew a great number;
Peta was slain by
Jaroslaus himself; the rest drew off, and marched to
Batu, into
Hungary.
Batu had ravaged for two years together, not only
Hungary, but
Slavonia, Bosnia, Rascia, Bulgaria, and the countries on both sides the
Danube. Some say, that after this, making an attempt upon
Austria, and endeavouring to swim a great river, he was drowned; others, that going against the
Greek Emperor he was overthrown; however it was, it is agreed, that his army returned back, and seizing upon all the country between the
Boristhenes and
Volga, and the
Taurica Chersonesus, which before they very much wasted, there setled unto this day, being called
Crim-Tartars, from the chief City of the
Chersonesus, called
Crim; and
Precopenses from
Precop, which in their language signifies a ditch; such a one being drawn cross the
Isthmus, to cut of that
Peninsula from the continent. The
Tartars at first were Lords, yet not absolute, for they acknowledged the superiority of the Great
Cham, the chief heir of
Gingis-Chan, till
Lochtan-Chan, one of the descendants from
Batu, refused obedience to him, and took upon himself the absolute dominion over all those places, except some few cities in
Taurica: which notwithstanding their conquests, remained in the hands of the
Genoueses, their inhabitants: till about the year 1574, when
Mahomet II. Emperor of the
Turks, took them. A little before that, they had forsaken their old religion of
Gingis-Chan, by the practices of
Hedegh, and
Sida-hameth-Chan their Emperors, and embraced the
Mahometan; yet the common people are not very zealous in it to this day; but make use of their little puppet-idols of felt,
&c. and continue many other pagan customs of their former religion.
Mahomet the Great fearing they should grow too powerful for him, under colour of taking in the City of
Caffa, possessed by the
Genoueses, made himself Master of the best part of the
Chersonesus, and of the
[Page 45]City of
Azoph or
Azek, a strong place at the mouth of
Tanais. Afterwards the
Crim-Tartar aided
Selimus I. (who married his daughter) with an army of 150000 men against his father; and then the two Nations made a league, that the
Tartars should assist the
Turk when required with 50000 horse; that they should not make war, except against the
Muscovite, without leave of the
Turk; that they should yearly pay to the
Turk a tribute of three hundred Christians, some furs, butter, and such other things: And the
Turk should pay them 5500 ducats; and the
Cham should succeed to the
Turkish Empire, if the males of the
Ottoman line should fail. But this lasted not long, for
Amurath III. in the year 1584, quarelling
Mahomet the
Crim-Tartar, as if he designed to intercept
Osman Basha in his return from
Persia to
Constantinople, authorized
Osman to invade him; who taking him and his two sons, strangled them, and set up
Islan the brother of
Mahomet, under such conditions as the Grand Signior pleased. The
Tartars did enjoy also all the country of
Budziak, which lies between the
Niester and
Boristhenes, as we shall shew hereafter, but the
Turk hath seized upon that; so that now their dominion reacheth only between
Dnieper or
Boristhenes and the
Don or
Tanais; and of this, that
Peninsula called
Taurica Chersonesus is the chiefest part.
That
Peninsula, [...] or
Chersonesus, was called
Taurica, becaused inhabited by a sort of
Scythians called
Tauri and
Tauro-Scythae. Afterwards the
Greeks mingled amongst them, and brought the country into great beauty and fame. But their names and actions belongs to the ancient Geography. The
Genoueses taking advantage of the great feuds of the
Greeks amongst themselves, in the year 1266 (or about the time of the Holywar) took
Caffa, and planted a considerable interest in the country, the
Tartars either permiting them because of the gain they made by their traffick, principally of slaves (which they furnished to a great part of the world, but especially to
Egypt, who generally had all their Mamalukes, as long as that government lasted, from this place): or not being skilled in besieging of Towns, especially such as could be perpetually relieved. And indeed it was very convenient for the
Genoueses, for having besides this a great plantation at
Pera near
Constantinople, they thereby enjoyed the whole trade of the Black-Sea, till (as we said) they were ruin'd by the
Turks; since which time I cannot find that it hath suffer'd any considerable alterations. We shall therefore describe it (being by Christians an unfrequented country) out of
Mart. Broniovius, who was sent Ambassador twice thither, from
Stephanes Battori King of
Poland; from which such little informations as we meet with since do not considerably differ.
This
Chersonesus then is about fifty leagues long, and thirty where broadest. The first Town at the entrance upon the east is
Przecop, called by the
Tartars Or, situate upon the Dyke, in the narrowest part of the
Isthmus, where it is not above a mile wide, anciently called
Eupatoria, Pompeiopolis, besides other names. 'Tis now a small Town of about four hundred fires; it hath a stone Castle, but not strong, wherein the
Cham hath continually his Beg or Palatine, who commands the guard upon the rivers of
Boristhenes and
Tanais, as also the
Tartars in the plains betwixt; he also examines all strangers, suffering none to pass without the
Chams letters.
Sachingeri the Great
Cham here overthrew the
Nagay-Tartars, and raised seventeen forts upon the Dyke, some of them of the skuls and bones of the slain.
Coslow, situate near unto the Black Sea, is a Town of traffick, having near two thousand houses, and is in the power of the
Cham. Ingermen is now only a Castle, but hath been a great Town, as appears by the ruines, amongst which are many caves cut out of the rock, wells, and old buildings of the
Greeks, witnessed by their inscriptions, there very frequent; it is now an inconsiderable place, inhabited by a few
Turks. Sari-germen by the
Turks, by the
Tartars Topetarkan (anciently
Chersonesus and
Corsuna, the noblest and most ancient City of all the
Peninsula) is still compassed with a strong stone-wall, and divers aquaeducts, and other noble buildings entire, but without inhabitants; the
Turks every day fetch away the marble and stones for other buildings.
Volodomir, the Grand
Tzar took this Town from
Joannes Zimisces, and amongst other rich plunder, carried away two large royal brazen gates to
Kiow; from whence
Boleslaus II. King of
Poland transferred them to
Gnesna, where they still remain. They say also, that
Volodomir was here baptized.
Balachey, or
Balaclawa (by the
Genoueses called
Jamboli) or the tower of fishes, the Sea there being very well stored, situate under the mountain
Baba. The
Genoueses took it without any loss from the
Greeks, and made it a very commodious, beautiful, and strong haven. The
Turks at this day build here their gallyes and ships; tho it be but a poor Town, at most but of an hundred and twenty fires, the inhabitants
Turks, Jews, and
Greeks. Mangut, or
Mancus, was a very magnificent City, tho not by the Sea-shore; but first by the
Turks, and afterwards by a great fire, it was so wasted that nothing now remains of it except one high tower, and a strong stone-house, whereinto the
Cham thrusts the
Russ-Ambassador as often as he hath a mind to quarrel his master. There are some few
Turks, Jews, and
Greeks that inhabit there, in all about sixty fires. There remains still upon the ruines of the walls of some of the Churches, the pictures of divers of the
Greek Emperors, and other famous men.
Cercessigermen is a small
Turkish Fort, not far from
Mancop. The Palaces of the
Cham are situated in the middle of the country.
Baciasaray (Baccasaray) is a Town of about two thousand houses, wherein is a Meschite, and divers sepulchers of the
Chams, very magnificent, as is their Palace, built with great charges by their former Princes; besides that it is seated in a country very proper for hunting and fowling, and is nobly adorned with gardens, orchards, bathes,
&c. Almasaray is another house whither he sometimes retires, in a Town of about seventy fires. There are also divers little Castles, where his own brethren, children, and their wives are kept.
Sortasse is a Town where the Ambassadors of foreign Princes have many times liberty to divert themselves. At
Creme, or
Crim, anciently
Taphros and
Taphrae (from whence they are called
Crim-Tartars) is his Mint, and a very strong Castle in possession of the
Tartars, but the Town is most inhabited by
Turks, in all about an hundred houses.
Sidagios or
Sudacum, was a very noble and strong City, situated in the mountains, taken by the
Genoueses from the
Greeks, so set one family against another, that they would not come to the same Church; the
Turks by a long and difficult siege took it from the
Genoueses; 'tis famous for the wine growing thereabouts.
Caffa, or
Theodosia, still the chief City of the
Peninsula, hath betwixt five and six thousand houses, inhabited most part by Christians, who have about forty-five Churches,
Greeks, Armenians, and remainders of the
Italians, some
Turks, and few
Tartars, all under a
Turkish Sangiac. Slaves they reckon there about thirty thousand, a Town of great traffick,
[Page 46]about two days sailing from
Constantinople; yet is it nothing to what it was under the
Genoueses. Kerky is a little Town of the
Tartars, of about an hundred families, upon the Strait called anciently
Bosphoras Cimmerius, which is here about three leagues broad. This Town is open, for the Grand Signior will not allow the
Tartars to have any fortified Town besides
Przecop. Over against this is
Taman, a Town and Castle upon the continent, in the country called anciently
Colchis, now the
Circassians, or
Petigor-Tartars. Karasu belongs to the
Cham, and hath above a thousand houses.
Tusla is amongst the Salt-works, and hath about eighty houses.
Arabet, or
Orbotec, is a double Castle, near to which the
Cham keeps his Stud or breed of horses, which are reckon'd to be about seventy thousand. The country towards the south is mountainous, and consequently well water'd; the rest plain, and good pastures, but wants water; for that near at hand is brackish, and their good water is drawn out of very deep wells, of which there is no want, dug by the former inhabitants.
Thus much of the
Chersonesus,The country of Przecop. without this the
Crim-Tartars enjoy all betwixt
Boristhenes (Nieper) and
Tanais (Don); which from
Ossove upon the
Don to the
Nieper, in a strait line is accounted about four hundred
English miles; but the
Nieper fetching a great compass eastward, in some places it is not so much. This is for the most part plain and even ground, and rich pasturage, without any Town, or constant habitation, or propriety. Only it seems that the
Cham by his officers appoints what parts shall be tilled; and in
February proclamation is made amongst all the
Tartars, that if any have a mind to till any ground, they should get all their matters ready by such a day, when they will go to such a place, commodious for that purpose; and accordingly some do go, and the rest attend upon them, that they be not disturbed. Betwixt this plain and
Russia lies waste a great country, (as they say) requiring twenty days to cross it; full of woods and lakes, and sometimes under-water, which is the greatest security of the rest of that Empire.
The government is wholly in the hands of the
Cham.The Government of the Crim-Tartars. The
Cadi's determine lesser causes, but capital and matters of greater importance are judged by the
Cham himself, with his Council. He is of easie access, and reasonably just. He always chuseth a
Galga, who is next to him alive, and succeeds after death; this is commonly his son or brother, according to merit. If any one have better pretensions, he flies to the Grand Signior, who judges the cause. His younger sons are Soldans, and are brought up by such as have the custody of their wives, with whom they are educated, till of sufficient strength; and according to their fitness, they are furnished with commands, either in his own country, or are recommended to the neighbouring
Tartars, who willingly receive them. Part also are hostages with the
Turks. When the family of
Gingis-Chan was numerous and potent, they chused always the
Chan, but
Sachibgerei and
Deuletigerei Chans made away with most of them, and setled the dominion in their own posterity.
The
Chan hath many Officers and Counsellors.
Hamiat are those who take care of the affairs of foreign Princes. Captains also,
Coracei, Ʋlans, and the best of the
Murses are called to Council. The
Ʋlans are those of an ancient family of
Chans, but were deprived of it by the
Giereys, the name of the present Royal family; but if this be extinct, the
Ʋlans have a right to return again to that honour. The most promising of the
Tartar youth attend upon the
Chams person. Most of the Courtiers and great persons are very rich, with the booties got chiefly from the Christians; are splendidly clothed, keep good houses, and live as well as the noblest
Turks. They wear no sort of arms in the Court. They live in houses also, and upon their lands, which they husband by their slaves, and their herds in the country, which are govern'd by other
Tartars their reteiners. The
Tartars rarely merchandise, or exercise any manual art; rather chusing to live miserably and poorly, then not idly.
The revenues of the
Cham, are 1. The Donatives and Presents sent him yearly from all the neighbour-Princes by their own Ambassadors. 2. Tribute of Christians, Jews,
Tartars, and in sum, all except the
Turks under his dominion. 3. The
Turk pays every day to the
Cham twenty-five dollars, to the
Galga twelve and a half, to the Sultan-hostage two and a half, besides lands. All the great persons also have salaries, but uncertain. 4. He hath the tenth of all the slaves taken, and for every one besides of better quality three crowns, and for others each one dollar. 5. Every well pays him an horse. 6. The richer and better sort of
Tartars furnish him with provision, and in case of necessity all the Nation contribute. 7. He hath vast herds and flocks, kept by his factors. 8. He coins copper-money, which is only current in his dominions, and once in four or five years he calls it all in, and coins a new sort.
The forces of the
Chan are esteemed in all (such as they be) to amount to three hundred thousand horse; foot he hath none, but what he borrows from the
Turk, as he doth commonly a few
Janizaries for the guard of his person when he goes to war.
The ordinary
Tartars live miserably. It is by most authors reported, that it is some days after their birth that they first open their eyes. Their mothers or nurses wash them every day in saltwater, to harden and thicken their skins against cold (which some in
Poland use also), and 'tis no more then necessary, for from seven years old, that they leave their Cantares (their walking habitations) they never sleep in an house, but in the open air, tho frost and snow; nor eat they any thing but what they shoot down with their arrows; and at twelve or fifteen years old they go to wars with their fathers. Their clothing at best is a short shirt, with a pair of course drawers, and a sheeps-skin with the wool upon it over their shoulders; garments very insufficient against cold. Their walking Cabans or houses, are made of reeds, osiers, or the like, woven like baskets, twelve or fifteen foot wide, cover'd either with a course hairy felt, or cloth, incommodious enough in every respect. Their ordinary diet is flesh almost raw (tho dead of sickness, or putrified), without bread or salt, and sauc'd with the sweat and fome of their horses; only garlick they eat in abundance, which they think helps to digest their undress'd meat. A life certainly not desirable, nor to be embraced by any, but such as know no better. Which is the reason that many of them amongst the
Muscovites, leave their barbarism, and apply themselves to the civility and religion of the
Russes. All of them intermarrying into their own Nation, renders them all like to one another; that is, they are of mean stature, yet square and big-limm'd, thick shoulders, short neck, great head, broad face, large forehead, large and black eyes, which they open but half, short nose (which some of them break when they are children), narrow mouth, tann'd colour, black and stiff hair. Each one when he goes to the wars, carries with him two or three
[Page 47]horses at least, a sword, a bow and quiver with about twenty arrows, a knife, tinder-box, an awl to mend his bridle,
&c. a dial with a needle, and a striag to bind his prisoners.
Their horses also, which they call
Baquemates, are long, raw-bon'd, low, and very ugly, their mains and tails long and tufty; yet incomparable for service, usually marching twenty or thirty leagues without drawing bit. But the
Cham, Myrza's, and great persons among them, have
Turkish, Persian, and
Arabian horses (which they buy at very great rates), as also good armour, coats of mail, excellent fire-arms,
&c.
The chiefest thing for which they are remarkable, and what is least understood concerning them, is their manner of warring; which is not, as most suppose, by violence and open force, but by cunning and artifice, in this manner:
Suppose they would invade
Poland; if the
Cham go in person, he marcheth seldom fewer then eighty-thousand strong; if a
Mirza command, seldom more than fifty thousand. And they always chuse the winter, when the rivers are frozen; and the rather in a snow, the hard slippery ways beating their horses feet, which are not shod, except some few, which have pieces of oxes hoofs sowed to them. They make very short marches (ten or twelve miles a day), and they contrive that their return may be before the rivers be thawed, which they seldom are till
March. They march as much as is possible thro valleys, low and unfrequented places, to conceal themselves from the scouts of the
Cossacks; nor do they at nights make any fires; they continually send out scouts to catch some of the inhabitants, and get notice of the enemy. They march commonly an hundred (
i.e. three hundred horses, each man having three horses) in front, which takes up near a thousand paces, and in file, when most close, they reach three large leagues; but when they march loosely, ten leagues; an army of eighty thousand having above two hundred thousand horses. They make an halt every hour at a whistle, and alight, that themselves and horses may urine. They divide their army into three tierces; two whereof march in a body, the other third is again divided into two, which make the two wings. The body marcheth slowly, but without giving any more rest then an hour at a time, till they arrive at the utmost whither they design to go; nor do they much harm till they come thither. But when they return, which is by another way, the wings divide themselves into small troops, and ravage every way ten or twelve leagues, and then pillage, burn and kill all that resist; those that yeild they bind and carry away prisoners; all their cattel also they carry away, only the hogs they gather into an house, and set fire into the four corners, and so burn them as unclean creatures. As soon as these wings have ravaged so far, they return to the body, which is easily found by their track, and as many more are sent out in like manner; and after their return as many more. So that they all plunder, and the body never diminisheth; nor ever marcheth more then a foot-pace, in very good order, to be always ready to defend themselves, (for they fight not willingly if the enemy should charge them). To prevent their mischief, the inhabitants have always either their own dwellings fortified, or have a Town, or the Landlords Mannor-house, or a thick wood, to which they retire in such hazards. The
Cossacks, where they live, fill their grounds full of trenches and hedges, to hinder their march. They also keep very diligent watches, both beyond and upon the river, that they may have timely notice of their invasion. Then, if they cannot overtake them, they repair to the known passages (of which there are not many) thro the
Nieper, and there (as well as they can) ambush themselves, to surprize them at their return; as they do many times, and recover much of the prey. After they are return'd into a safe place of their own deserts; they put themselves in order, and divide the prey. And first, consideration is had of them who have lost their horses in the service, as also of the kinred of them who are slain; next the
Cham, after him the Officers take their share; the rest is divided amongst the soldiers. The richest of their prey, are the persons they take; and of all them the most esteem'd are the
Polish women, especially virgins, who are sold at very great rates, even into
Persia and
India, to be put into their
Seraglio's.
But the
Tartars of
Budziack have another maneer of stealing.
The Tartars of Budziack. They are less civil, but more valiant then other
Tartars. The country betwixt
Danubius and
Boristhenes, was sometimes under the
Crim-Tartar; till the
Turk planted Towns upon the convenient places of the Sea-coast, and along the rivers. Yet is the country still possessed by
Tartars, yet not subjects either to the
Turk or
Crim; but (as the
Cossacks amongst the Christians) a Nation of theeves, and
banditi, libertines; that in their lives acknowledg no superior, either God or man. These many times invade their neighbours in summer, but with lesser numbers (twenty thousand at most), lest they should be discovered; because the
Cosacks are continually upon the guard, even in these places; they march to their rendezvous (which they appoint in some valley, or obscure places upon the confines) in very small parties, lest they should be descried by treading down the grass. They observe the the same manner in the enemies country, appointing certain places for their meetings, and separating again presently. So that it is very difficult to meet with a track, but if the
Cosacks do happen upon such a one as will lead them to the place of rendezvous, yet except they surprize them eating, or sleeping (which is very difficult, because they keep such diligent sentinels), they know not afterwards which track to follow to overtake them again. The
Tartars first divide into four bodies, which march east, west, north, and south. After they have gone a little way, each troop subdivides again into three, and after that each troop into three again; so that at length they have not above ten or twelve together; and tho some take further compass then others, yet all know the time and place of meeting, which according to the occasion is after three, four, or more days. If they chance to be rencountred with the enemy, except they have very great advantage, they fight him not, but divide after their manner, and run away fullspeed, yet shooting still if pursued; nor are the horses of
Poland, or any other, able to overtake them. After they have thus dispersed for some leagues, they join again, and follow their design. All Authors take notice also of a great advantage they have over other Nations, that they can see better and farther, insomuch that a
Tartar will discern a single
Russ further then a
Russ can a troop of
Tartars; which they attribute partly to their natural constitutions, that they have little hollow eyes; partly to their custom, that they use continually to half-close their eye-lids. When they would swim a river, each gets him a bundle of reeds, sedges, bulrushes, or the like, about three foot long, upon which
[Page 48]they tye three or four sticks across, and two or three long-ways; upon these they make fast their saddle, clothes, arms, and such baggage as they have; the bundle they make fast to their horses tail; so that from a convenient low bank they go into the river, holding in one hand the bridle of their horse, with the other swimming themselves. Sometimes the
Cosacks seek them in their own country, and then they march always in their
Tabor, that is, in the middle of their chariots, and send out sentinels on every side at a good distance. If they first espy the
Tartars, they leave their
Tabor and fall upon them, and commonly have the advantage; but if the
Tartars first see the
Cosacks, they assault them in their
Tabor, but at a distance with their arrows, which tho they reach further then the
Cosacks guns, yet is their
Tabor so good a defence, that fifty
Cosacks will not fly from five hundred
Tartars.
Typus Generalis UKRAINAE sive PALATINATUUM PODOLIAE, KIOVIENSIS et Braczlaviensis terras nova declinatione exhibens.
•
[...] Vrbs Antiqu
[...]m Christian
[...]m , •
[...] Oppidum Turcae. , •
[...] Pagus. , •
[...] Ruinae. , •
[...] Fons , •
[...] Fl
[...]ia , •
[...] Signum quo Fl
[...]ia decurrit. , •
[...] Pagi Tartarum Homaijbiorum , • G. Mons , •
[...] M
[...]lendi
[...] ,
and •
[...] [...] Transitus. OF THE BORISTHENES, AND THE Cosacks of Ukrain.
WE have spoken before in general of the
Boristhenes, as far as it continues in the Grand
Tzars dominions; wherein is nothing observable, but what Cities and Towns are upon it; which appear sufficiently by the Map. But now we come to speak of the remainder, which is betwixt the dominions of
Poland and the
Tartars; which affordeth us greater variety of matter. We have also treated in general of the
Cosacks, and of those who live upon the
Tanais, and are under the
Muscovite; but we now come to the great body of them, who first assumed that name, and inhabit upon or near the
Boristhenes, and are or were lately under the
Polanders. We begin with
Kiow, the place of the original of these valiant people the
Cosacks.
Kiow, Kisovia, of
Kijovia, was an ancient, beautiful, and strong City, even before it was the Metropolis of the
Russes. Mieceslaus their Duke having married the daughter of the Prince of the
Polowtzi, and assisting them, was himself slain in the battel, and the Town afterwards quite ruin'd, which was the reason why
Volodomir (deeply engaged in that war, but escaping) made
Volodomir the seat of the
Russ-Empire.
Kiow was situated upon an hill, near the
Nieper, where still remain the ruines of many Arcades, high walls, Churches, and Sepultures of divers Kings (ancienter then those of the
Russ-Princes) with
Greek inscriptions. There remain in reasonable good condition two Churches,
S. Sophia, (whose walls are lined with excellent
Mosaick work, and the vault is earthen pots cemented, and filled with good plaister): And
S. Michael, most conspicuous for its guilded roof. Betwixt this and the
Nieper, is
New Kiow, along the bank of the river about three
English miles, containing not above six thousand inhabitants, and encompassed with a silly trench of twenty-five foot broad. The
Roman Communion hath four Churches, the
Greek ten, which they call
Cerkuils, and a kind of University, called
Bracha Cerkuils. It hath a reasonable trading for corn, furs, wax, honey, tallow, and salt-fish. They have four jurisdictions, that of the Bishop, of the Palatine or
Starost, of the
Wovit, and of the Consuls of the City.
Half a league below
Kiow, [...] is a large Village called
Piecharre, where is a noble Monastery, the habitation of the Metropolitan or Patriarch. And under the mountain, close by it, are divers grots, dug like mines, wherein are conserved many bodies, buried very many years ago; amongst others there are (saith
Beauplan) three heads in dishes, which every day distill an oyl soveraign for several diseases; the bodies are neither so black nor hard as Mummies; the place is a sandy-stone, but very dry; it seems to be of the same nature of that called
Roma subterranea.
Below
Piecharre is
Stayky,Stayky. an ancient Town on the top of a mountain, as all those ancient Towns are, even in
Italy, built so for strength and security. There is also a Ferry to pass men over the river. After that is
Richow, where is an easie passage over the river. Lower is
Tretemirof, a Monastery amongst inaccessible rocks. Here the
Cosacks conserved the choicest of their wealth. A league below that is
Pereaslaw, a strong Town of six thousand families. Here the
Cosacks have a Regiment; as they have another and a Ferry at
Kaniow, a little lower, but on the east bank of the
Nieper. On the same side is
Cirkacse, the center of all their retreats, burnt by the
Polanders ann. 1637. On the same side is
Krilow; and below that
Kremierczow, the lowest Town upon the river, all below it being desart. A league from thence the river
Pseczoll, and a little lower on
Russia side,
Omelnik fall into the
Nieper; as also on the
Poland bank
Worsko and
Orel, two rivers very full of fish. Here are divers dwarf-Cherry and Almond-trees; which one of our country-men (I doubt mistakeingly) hath placed far on the north of
Volga. Continuing down the river are many Isles, most of them uninhabited, because overflowed in the spring, but much frequented by fishers. Divers rivers also encrease the
Niester at
Romanow, but chiefly
Samar, which supplies not only much fish, but other commodities, as honey, wax, venison, and especially timber. The
Cosacks call it the holy river, and in the spring here are said to be caught sturgeons and herrings. A little below that the
Polonians built a fort in the year 1635 at
Kudac, which is the first of the
Porohi.
Poroui, or
Porohi, called anciently
Catadupae,Porouhi. in the
Russ-language signifies a rock of stone; and of these there are thirteen chains, or as it were causeys, that cross the
Boristhenes, and render the navigation from the
Ʋkrain to the Black Sea impossible; so that tho the
Ʋkrain be a very fruitful country in corn, and all other commodity; yet the inhabitants, not being able to vend them, suffer much of it to lye unhusbanded, or at least not so well as it might be. Of these rocks, some are under, some above water ten foot, as big as houses, and very near to one another, so that stopping the course of the river, they make very great falls, some to fifteen foot, when the water is low; for in the spring, when the river is swelled with the melted snow, they are all (except the seventh, called
Nienashtes, which only there hindreth navigation) covered with water. Betwixt
Budelou and
Tawolzany (which are the tenth and eleventh) the
Tartars do often swim the river, the banks being shallow. A little below the lowest
Porouhi, is an Island they call
Kaczawanicze (or
boil-millet) because here they make good cheer, when they have passed the
Porouhi. Below that is a river, a Promontory, and the best passage for the
Tartars (the river not being above an hundred and fifty paces broad), called
Kuczkosow. Below that is the Isle
Tomahowka, whither the
Cosacks often resort and rendezvous. But their chiefest retreat is below the river
Czertomelik, upon an Island
[Page 50]where are some old ruines, but which is compassed about with a vast number of small Islands, some dry, some overflowed in the spring, some marshes, but all cover'd with canes as big as pikes; which hide the passages between the Islands, and render it all a great labyrinth, known only to the
Cosacks, who call it
Scarbniza Woyskowa, or the
treasure of the army. Here they lay up all their ordnance, their money, and whatever will not spoil by the water. The
Turks have lost many gallies so engaged amongst these Isles that they could neither go backward nor forward, and were seized by the
Cosacks. Here also they make their
Cholna, of which more by and by.
From these
Porouhi the
Cosacks take their name of
Zaporouski; which are the great body, in imitation whereof the
Donski are lately set up. None can be a
Zaporouski Cosack, who hath not passed in his little boat all the
Porouhi's, i.e. who hath not made a course or voyage upon the Black Sea; no more then he can be a Knight of
Malta that hath not made a
Caravane. We shall first shew the original and actions of the
Cosacks, and afterwards finish what concerns the
Boristhenes, and the countries adjacent.
The
Cosacks,Of the Cosacks. so called (saith a late author) from
Cosa, which in the
Slavonian language signifies a sythe, their ordinary weapon; began in the time of
Sigismund I. King of
Poland, and were certain volontiers upon the frontiers of
Russia, Volhinia, and
Podolia, that troop'd togegether, partly to defend themselves from the
Tartars, which they did by fighting them at the passages over the
Nieper, as they returned with their prey; partly to rob upon the Black Sea, where they getting very rich booty, drew more into their association. At first they were about six thousand, under
Eustachius Daskovicius their General. But their numbers quickly encreased, their neighbours seeing the rich booties got by their pyracies, part whereof they laid in their
Skarbniza Woskowa, the rest they brought home to their own houses; agreeing upon a time of rendezvousing the next spring upon the Isles and Rocks of
Nieper, whence they again return to their pyracy.
Stephen Batory King of
Poland considering the service which might be made of these thieves in defending the frontiers of his country from the inrodes of the
Tartars,Their Establishment. (to which they were too much exposed), owned them, and formed them into an orderly Militia, giving them the Town and territory of
Trethimirow, about eighty miles in length, in the Palatinate of
Kiow, upon the
Boristhenes; appointing them a General, to whom he gave power to chuse his under-officers, giving them many priviledges, besides some pay; he joined to them also two thousand horse; to the maintainance of whom he assigned the fourth part of his demesne, whence they were called
Quartani. These forces had such effect against the
Tartars, that the country beyond
Breclaw, Bar, and
Kiow began to be peopled, Towns and Fortresses to be builded, and colonies brought from the neighbouring places. But as their establishment and union was very proper to make head against the
Tartars, so in short time it proved of great danger to
Poland it self; for the
Cosacks knowing their own strength, and of what importance they were, began to set up for themselves; they would not obey the orders of their superiors, nor acknowledg the power of the
Polonians over them. Their first rebellion was in the year 1587, under
John Podkowa their General, who was foiled, taken, and his head struck off. In the year 1596,
Sigismund III. upon the complaints and threats of the Grand Seignior, forbad them to pillage any more upon the Black Sea; from which they indeed for awhile abstained, but it was that they might fall upon
Russia and
Lithvania, under the conduct of
Nalevaiko their General. The
Polanders, to secure their country, were forced to raise an army against them, commanded by
Zolkiewski; whom the
Cosacks fought at
Bialacerkiew and worsted; but he returning, and forcing them into places of disadvantage, compelled them to give up their General, who in like manner lost his head. In the year 1637, certain
Polish Noblemen having obtained the lands upon these frontiers, in the places appointed for the quarters of the
Cosacks, began to force these their new subjects to the same services as in other parts of the Kingdom; which are, to work three days of the week, man and horse, for their Lord; to pay also, according to their Farms, so much corn, poultry, fowl,
&c. at Easter, Whitsontide, and Christmas; to cart home his Lords wood; besides other duties, as paying so much money, the tenth of their cattel, honey, fruits, and every third year the third oxe; and these ordinarily, besides what the Lord pleaseth to impose upon them; for indeed the Lords are absolute, nor are they punished if they kill their paysants, who are little better then their slaves. These Noblemen also applied themselves to the King and Senators; shewing them, that the
Cosacks only could frustrate their plantations; (for the paysants, when they found themselves to be oppress'd, listed themselves amongst the
Cosacks), that they were a thievish, libertine sort of people, and hinder'd both by example and protection the obedience of their Farmers. It was therefore resolved, to build a Fort at
Kudac, a place near their
Porouhi, and therefore very convenient to bridle the
Cosacks; who well understanding to what this tended, first cut in pieces two hundred men that were set to guard the building of it; afterwards, when it was finished, resolving to take it, they fell into jealousie of their General
Sawakonowicz, and having murder'd him, chused one
Paulucus, a man of little conduct and experience; and before they were got into their
Tabor, being met by the General
Potoski, they were routed at
Korsun, and forced to deliver up their General and four more of their chief Officers, who were put to death at
Warsaw; notwithstanding that the General had promised them their lives. Presently followed the loss of their priviledges, and their Town
Trethymirow, and the suppression of their Militia, which was new modelled into a more obedient form. This more irritated the
Cosacks, who again tried their fortune with
Potoski, but were worsted; and then fortified themselves upon the river
Starcza, beyond
Boristhenes. After this, the
Polonians, having lost so many in trying to suppress them, were forced to compound, and promise that their Militia (of six thousand) should be re-established under a General appointed by the King. But these articles were not observed; for the
Cosacks (as they returned every man to his house) were killed or plunder'd by the
Polish soldiers; and another Militia set up, excluding the ancient and true
Cosacks.
But the
Tartars a little after ruining a great part of the
Ʋkrain, shewed the necessity of the former establishment. For
Ʋladislaus IV. pretending to make war upon the
Tartars, was very careful to set them up again, giving them for their General
Bogdan (or
Theodore)
Chmielniski, son of a
Polish Gentleman, enrolled young into the Militia of the
Cosacks, and by the degrees of Captain, Commissary,
&c. brought to be General. This man was the spark that kindled that terrible war which endangered all
Poland. Chmielniski in the
[Page 51]year 1647, having received some injuries from a
Polish Officer, whereof he could get no redress, began to complain to his
Cosacks, who unanimously resolved to stand by him, as did also a vast number of the Rusticks, oppressed by their Landlords, who had farm'd out much of their lands to the
Jews, who had also monopolized all the advantages of the country, as brewing of Beer, distilling Aqua-vitae, nay even the keys of the Churchdoors, insomuch that a native could not be married, or Christen a child, without paying so much to a
Jew; which so irritated the Rusticks, that they came in to
Chmielniski, and made him an army of two hundred thousand. The King, who pretended to fight the
Tartars, and endeavour the conquest of
Crim, underhand favoured them; but the Commonwealth growing jealous, as if he intended to make himself absolute, because he had got together a considerable army of foreigners, caused him to disband that army, and disown the
Cosacks. And sent against them an army, part of which turned to the
Cosacks, the rest was wholly destroyed. Upon which, divers overtures of peace unsuccessfully proposed,
Chmielniski called in the
Crim-Tartar with an hundred thousand horse, and march'd into
Poland; but were there so valiantly resisted by the
Polanders both at
Zbaras and
Zborow (where the new King
John Casimire was in person with an army) that the
Tartar weary of the war, was very willing to hearken to a peace, as
Chmielniski also pretended, and accepted of moderate propositions; this was in the year 1649. But
Chmielniski fearing that the
Poles would not faithfully observe that treaty, began more and more to fortifie himself by leaguing with the Grand Seignior, and forcing the Prince of
Moldavia to a conjunction and alliance with him. And at a Diet proposing such terms as intimated, that he intended to make himself an absolute Prince under the patronage of the
Turks, by the
Poles a new war was generally agreed upon; which broke out very fiercely in the year 1651, when was fought a very cruel and decisive battel, wherein the
Cosacks and
Tartars were overthrown; yet not so but that
Chmielniski found means to raise another army, and to make peace upon articles to him not very disadvantageous.
What became of him and his
Cosacks since that, we have little account, only that part of them have submitted themselves to the
Muscovite; part also, under
Dorosensko their General, called in the
Turks and
Tartars against the
Polanders; and that by the agreement in the year 1677 betwixt the Grand Seignior and the King of
Poland, Ʋkrain and the
Cosacks were to be under the
Turk.
Thus much of their Militia by Land, 'tis fit to give some small account of their exploits by Sea. Having assembled (commonly about six thousand) upon the Islands of
Skarbniza Waskowa, the first thing they do is to chuse their General for that expedition; and to make their Boats which they call
Colna, which are about sixty foot long, twelve deep, and as many wide; built very slight, pinning one plank upon the edge of the lower, and so widening as it heightens; they have at each end a stern, and about twelve or fifteen oars of a side; they have no deck, but (that it may not sink, tho full of water) they encompass it round about with a rowl of reeds as big as a barrel, tyed together and to their Boat with ropes. They have a sorry mast and sail, but seldom use them, except in fair weather. Their provision is a tun of biscuit, which they take out of the bung as they use it; a barrel of boil'd millet, and another of paste made with water, which they eat with their millet, and serves them instead of beverage. Every Boat carries about sixty persons, every man having two guns, with powder and ball necessary, and in each Boat five or six falconets. They wait for a dark night (about the beginning of
June, so that they may return about the first of
August) that they may pass undiscover'd by the
Turks galleys, which ly at
Oczacow to intercept them. With these Boats they course over all the Black Sea, and the coasts upon it, even to the very suburbs of
Constantinople, pillaging and spoiling whereever they come. If they spy a galley, they keep at a distance till night, and observing well the course of the vessel, when it is dark they immediately row up to it, and all together board it, and commonly carry it; they take out all the money, cannon, and merchandise that they please, and sink it, not having the skill or opportunity to use it. If a galley spy them in the day-time, they avoid fighting by rowing swifter then they, or retiring to shallows, or amongst reeds, where the galleys cannot follow them.
As long as they used this trade, they abstained from using violence against their Lords, living upon what they got from the
Turks; till the Grand Seignior threatned
Sigismund to make war upon him, except he redress'd the robberies and pyracies of the
Cosacks; and then, wanting subsistence, they turned their arms against their own country. The permitting them to chuse their General and Officers, was taking the bridle out of their mouths; for he, having no power but precarious, and being many times displaced or murder'd without any reason, is forced to comply with all their violences. He is chose either by clamor, or throwing their caps at him. He hath four Counsellors (whom they call
Assaul), a Lieutenant, General of the Ordonance, and all the same Officers that other Christian armies have. They are arm'd with guns, which they manage very dextrously; besides, they have many sythes set long-ways upon poles, with which they fight both fiercely and skilfully. Being all of them Farmers, they understand all trades necessary for humane life, and are very capable to learn or perform any employment. But their greatest excellency is in preparing Salt-peter, and making Gun-powder, which they do in great perfection.
Their Religion is the very same with the
Russ;Religion. (they also call themselves
Russes, their country being nam'd sometimes Black, sometimes Red
Russia), and delight to imitate them in manner of living. They have their Metropolitan of
Kiow, who is consecrated by the Patriarch of
Costantinople, and is subject to him immediately. Their chief observances consist in fasts and holidays. But the Nobility (of which there are some few amongst them) imitate the
Polanders, and are most of them
Roman-Catholicks.
Their manners are like those of soldiers;
Manners. not careful of what's to come, spending freely what they have at present amongst their companions, and permitting the future to shift for it self; very inconstant, mutinous, and following their present advantage rather then their faith or promise. Potent drinkers, yet having by reason of their labour and hardship so great health, that Physitians are not esteem'd amongst them.
The chiefest thing wherein the inhabitants differ from the
Polonians, is their marriages;
Marriages. That the maids in this country frequently woo the men; for if a virgin have an affection to a young man, she is not asham'd to go to the house where he lives with his parents; declaring her affection to him, and promising all love and obedience
[Page 52]if he pleaseth to accept of her in marriage. If she be rejected by the young man, as being too young, not disposed to marry, or the like; she tells them, that she is resolved never to part out of the house till he consent; and there she takes up her quarters. To force her out of the house would be to provoke all her kinred; nor would the Church suffer them to use any violence unto her without inflicting heavy penances, and noting the house of infamy; so that after two or three weeks, the parents, or the young man himself, moved with the constancy of the woman, accommodate matters as well as they can, and make up a marriage.
Thus much for the
Cosacks;Of the Ʋkrain. let us now return to the place of their habitation, the
Ʋkrain. The word signifies a frontier-place; which lying beyond
Volhinia and
Podolia, containeth part of the Palatinates of
Chiow and
Braclaw, between 48 and 51 deg. of Latitude. A country water'd with so many rivers, that it must needs be fruitful both for corn, pasturage, as also for fish, honey, timber,
&c. Being a frontier, all the Towns and habitations are fortified either with a ditch, or have some thick wood, where they make recesses with their goods in time of an invasion by the
Tartars. The inhabitants glory much to be called
Cosacks; and indeed many of them in these late insurrections, by the tyranny of their Landlords have been compelled to join with, and take arms amongst them. It is terminated on the East with the great river
Nieper or
Boristhenes, of the greatest part whereof (so much as concern'd the
Cosacks) we have already given an account.
Below
Kaczawanicze is
Kuczkosow, where is the best passage of the
Tartars, the river not being more then an hundred and fifty paces broad, the banks easie, and the country all about plain, so that they fear not the ambushes of the
Cosacks. Below that is the cape of
Chortizca, an Island very proper to inhabit, and easily fortified against the
Tartars. Next to that is
Wielsky Ostro, and below that
Tomahowka, an Island easily fortified, which
Chmielniski chose for a retreat, and where the
Cosacks first rendezvous'd when they began their insurrection in the year 1648.
Kair and
Wieleskiwoda, Nosokowka, are three Islands very commodious for the
Tartars passage into the
Ʋkrain; the stream next
Tartary they call
Kosmaka, and there the
Cosacks disguise themselves when they go into the Black Sea, for fear of the guard which is always kept by the
Turks in the ancient ruines, which they call
Aslan-Korodick. Tawan is the greatest and easiest passage of the
Tartars, the river not being above five hundred paces broad, being all in one channel. The last pass, and at the mouth of the
Nieper is
Oczacow, where the river is three miles broad; yet both the
Tartars and others pass it frequently in this manner; they furnish themselves with flat-bottom'd boats, at the stern whereof they fasten across poles of a good length, upon which they tye the heads of their horses, as many on the one side as the other, to balance them; they put their baggage in the boat, and row it over, and with it the horses. The
Turks pass'd over in this manner forty thousand horse, when the Grand Seignior sent to besiege
Azak or
Azow, at the mouth of
Don in the year 1643, which the
Donski Cosacks had taken from him the year before.
Oucze Sauram or
Nowe Koniecpolsky is the lowest habitation the
Polacks have towards
Oczacow, which was begun to be built in the year 1634.
Oczacow call'd by the
Turks Dziancrimenda, is the place where the
Turkish galleys lye, to keep the entrance into the Black Sea; there is no port, but good anchorage, the Castle is well fortified, the Town not so well, there are in it about two thousand inhabitants. Below that is a platform with good ordnance, to guard the mouth of the river. About three miles below
Oczacow is an haven called
Berezan, upon a river called
Anczakrick; it is sufficiently deep for galleys. Southward of that are two Lakes
Jesero Teligol and
Kuialik, both of them so abundant in fish, that the water (having no
exit) stinks of them, yet they come above an hundred and fifty miles to fish there.
Bielogrod is about three miles from the Sea, upon the river
Niester, anciently called
Tyras, by the
Turks Kierman. This Town is under the
Turk; as is also
Killa, well fortified with a counterscarp; the Castle is above the Town upon the
Danow; opposite to it, on the other bank of the
Danow, is
Kiha, where are seen divers ancient ruines. Betwixt
Bielogrod and
Killa are the plains of
Budziack, where the rebel or
banditi Tartars refuge themselves, who acknowledg no superior, either
Turk or
Cham; they are always watching upon the confines of
Poland, to catch what Christians they can, and sell them to the
Turks; of these we have spoken before. There are also many
Turkish villages along the south-bank of the
Niester; but all the country betwixt that and the
Danow, as also betwixt that and the
Nieper, are desarts, and are inhabitated by those
Tartars who there pasture their flocks, of whom we have spoken already. Such also was the
Ʋkrain till of late, that the industry of the late Kings of
Poland, and the valour of the
Cosacks has render'd it as fruitful as it was before desart. We may judg of it by what Monsieur
Beauplan saith, that in seventeen years that he lived in that country, himself laid the foundations of above fifty colonies, which in a few year sprouted into above a thousand villages. But being so lately planted, the Reader cannot expect we should have much to inform him. Yet it is not amiss to give some account of animals which are almost proper to this country.
They have a beast which they call
Bobac,Anim. not much unlike a Guiny-pig; they make holes in the earth, whereinto they enter in
October, and come not abroad till
April; within they have many little apartments, disposing severally their provision, their dead, their lodging,
&c. eight or nine families live together as in a City; each having his particular habitation. They are easily tamed, and are very gamesome in an house. When they go to make their provision, they set a sentinel, who as soon as he spies any one, gives a signal by making a noise, and they all haste to their caves; many more things are spoken of these little creatures, as that they have slaves and punishments,
&c.
Sounaky, a kind of goat, is desired for his beautiful sattin-like fur, and white, shining, smooth, delicate horns. He hath no bone in his nose, and cannot feed except he go backward.
Thy have many wild horses, but of no value, only for their flesh, which they sell in the markets, and think it better then Beef or Veal. When these horses come to be old, their hoofs so straiten their feet (being never pared) that they can hardly go; as if that beast was so made for mans use, that without his care he was unprofitable.
Nobiliss: & tam dignitate
[...]ueris quan Meritis ac Patriam Honoratiis Viro▪
D.
no NICOLAO PAHL▪ in celeberrimo Maris Balthici emporio. Vrbe GEDANENSI▪ Praeconsuli & vicepraesidi▪ bonarum artium Patrono ac fautori observantiae ergò D. D. D. IOANNES IANSSONIVS.
POLONIA, or
Poland, call'd by the Natives
Polska, takes its name, as some conjecture, from
Pole, which in the
Slavonian language (here commonly spoken) signifies a
plain and
champain Country, such as this Kingdom for the most part consists of. Others suppose, that the inhabitants, from their first Captain
Lechus or
Lachus, being called
Po-lachi, that is, the posterity of
Lachus; and by corruption
Polani and
Poloni, imparted their name to their country. And in favour of this opinion it may be urged, that they call themselves
Polacci, the
Italians Polacchi; the
Russians, Greeks, and
Tartars call them
Lachi, and
Lechitae; the
Hungarians Lengel, probably for
Lechel, the same with
Po-lachi. But
Hartknoch finding the
Bulanes placed by
Ptolomy among the ancient inhabitants of
Sarmatia, and observing the
Poloni to be call'd
Bolani and
Bolanii by the
German writers, thinks he hath made the fairest discovery of the original of the word. Nevertheless
Cromerus affirms, that the present name either of the country or people, hath not been in use above nine hundred years. Certainly in the time of
Alfred King of
England, about the year 880, this Country was called
Weonodland, and before that by the
Romans generally
Sarmatia, as being the best known part of that great Country. Only that branch of
Poland which lies on the west-side of the
Weissel, belonged to old
Germany, and (as
Ptolomy acquaints us) was inhabited by the
Aelvaeones, the
Luti, Omanni, Longi, Diduni, and
Luti Buri, with other
German Colonies. By some writers the same is assigned to
Vandalia (and the
Vistula called
Vandalus) having been for a time in the possession of the
Vandals.
The people of
Poland are the undoubted offspring of the
Slavi, Slavini, or
Slavonians, seated in
Justinians time, as
Jornandes relates, on the north-side of the
Carpathian mountains, from the fountain of the
Weisel to the
Niester, and thence extending themselves westward to the
Danube, and eastward to the
Euxin Sea; from which parts they then made innundations into the
Roman Empire. In their first expeditions they were joined with the
Antae and
Vinidae or
Venedi; or rather, in the opinion of the foresaid Author, were but the same Nation differently called. The
Venedi we find mentioned by
Ptolomy, as a great people long before, seated in
Sarmatia, upon the coast of the
Sinus Venedicus (now
Baltick Sea), which from them probably took its name, as did likewise the
Venedic mountains, scituate in their territories. And
Hartknoch supposes the
Bulanes, Gythones, Phinni, &c. placed also by
Ptolomy over against these
Venedi, in the inland countries of
Poland, to be of their colonies. Perhaps this people, after they had made themselves considerable by their conquests, took the name of
Slavi from
Slava, in their language signifying
fame or
glory; which their descendents (saith
Cromerus) still retain in their compounded names, as
Stani-slauus, Wenceslauus, &c. tho now writ commonly
Stanislaus, Wenceslaus. Some writers would have the
Venedi to be originally a
German Nation, yet they are by
Cromerus and others sufficiently proved to be of the old
Sarmatae or
Sauromatae, which were of
Scythian extraction, and probably brought forth in the neighbourhood of the Lake
Maeotis, the fruitful womb of so many puissant Nations.
The name of
Poland belongs properly to two Provinces alone,
Situation. the
Greater and the
Lesser Poland; from which, as the principal parts, the whole Kingdom hath taken its denomination. It lies, saith
Starovolscius, between the 38th and 54th degrees of Longitude, counting from the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh to the
Nieper or
Boristhenes, which amounts to 250
Polish leagues, every league containing about four
English miles; but the
Podolian and
Russian are somewhat longer. The highest elevation of the
Pole in the most northern parts of
Livonia subject to this Crown, is about 58 deg. The lowest in the Palatinate of
Poccuce in
Red Russia, 48 deg. So that the whole Country being situated between the seventh and thirteenth Climats, hath to its longest day from 16 to near 18 hours.
This Kingdom is bounded on the North by the
Baltick Sea, and the
Swedish Livonia.Bounds. On the East by the
Muscovian Russia, and the Desarts of
Tartary. On the South by
Moldavia, Transilvania, and
Hungary, from which the
Niester and the high and woody
Carpathian mountains divide it. On the West by
Silesia, the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh, and the further
Pomerane.
Poland is an even champain country. Tho the
Lesser Poland, the nearer it approaches to the confines of
Hungary, the more hilly and woody it is; but the farther it lies from thence, the more open and level. In the very middle also of the Kingdom, the Palatinate of
Sandomir is mountainous and rocky. Formerly the country was all overgrown with woods, but by the care of
Sigismund the elder, and
Sigismund Augustus his son, and the advantage of the long peace they both enjoyed, husbandry was cherished, and the Provinces improved in tillage and pasturage; so that it is now accounted the
Egypt of
Europe, as having supplied the wants of most parts thereof with corn; whilst the
Vistula (being navigable) serves to conveigh all the commodities of the country to
Dantzick. Yet this good husbandry doth not hinder but that it is well stored with Trees, as Oaks, Beech, Fir,
&c. not only profitable for the common advantages of Woods, but also for the vast quantities of Honey and Wax which they yearly afford; the hollow trees supplying hives, and the leaves and wild flowers nourishment to innumerable swarms of Bees.
The air is cold, even to that extremity,
Air. that trees are oftentimes parch'd to the very roots, and water pour'd down freezes ere it fall to the ground. The Lakes and Rivers are often frozen five or six months together, and are passable by Coaches and Carts laden, at the end of
March. This vehement sharpness of the air we may rationally impute to the largeness of the continent, and the opacousness of the over-spreading woods. Yet notwithstanding, Orchards and Gardens are very frequent, and plentifully stored with Fruits and Flowers, as excellent in their kinds, as in any other part of
Europe.
This country being for the most part plain,
Mines. abounds not in Minerals; yet some Mines there are, as of Lead and Iron in divers places; of
[Page 2]Quicksilver at
Tustan in red
Russia; of
Vitriol near
Biecz in
Cracovia. But the most considerable of all are the Salt-Mines at
Bochnia and
Velisca, in the
Lesser Poland, which are the great enrichment not only of the country, but of the Kings Exchequer also. They descend into the Mine with long Ropes (as we into our Coal-pits), and there dig out great masses of Salt in streets, leaving so much
interstitium as is sufficient to sustain the earth. 'Tis generally of a blewish colour, yet some is white and transparent like crystal; when it is newly got it hath a bitterish taste, but being exposed to the air becomes sweeter, as also more heavy and brittle. In these Mines are small fountains of salt water, which boil'd with pieces of the Rock, yeild great quantities of excellent Salt. They have also some veins of
Sal Gemmae, and of another mineral resembling hard Pitch, call'd by them
Carbunculus, as
Cromerus saith, which taken in powder purgeth. In the deep caverns of the Mines, the workmen are said sometimes to hear voices like those of Cocks, Dogs, and other animals, which they esteem a bad omen.
The chief rivers of
Poland are 1.
Rivers. The
Weissel, mentioned in authors under the different names of
Vistula, Visula, Visla, Justilla, Istula and Vandalus: it rises in the
Dutchie of
Teschen in
Silesia out of the mountain
Carpathus (now
Crapack) in the confines of
Hungary; whence running to
Cracow, the chief City of the Lesser
Poland, and there becoming navigable, by the accession of other streams, it continues its course Eastward to
Sandomiria, and thence Northward to
Warzaw in
Masovia, afterwards winding for some leagues westward to
Thorn in
Prussia, it turns again to the North, and at the Island
Grosswerder is divided into two streams, emptying it self by the one into the Bay
Frisch-Haff, and by the other into the
Baltick Sea. The head of this river lies in 49 deg. 20 min. of Latitude, and its mouth in 54, but both in 41 deg. of Longitude: its course is above 100
Polish miles. It divided antiently the
European Sarmatia from
Germany. 2. The
Warta; rising near
Cromolow in the Palatinate of
Cracovia, under 40 deg. 50 min. of Longitude, and 50 deg. 30 min. of Latitude: and from thence taking a winding course to the North-west, washes the Towns of
Olstin, Warta, Posna, &c. in the Greater
Poland; and near
Costrin, falls into the
Oder. 3.
Notez, which flows out of the Lake
Goblo in the Greater
Poland; and after a long course to the Southwestward, near
Dresen discharges it self into the
Warta. 4. The
Niester, or
Tyras of the ancients; which takes its rise out of the
Sarmatian mountains, near the head of
San, running at first to the North, then winding Eastward, and enlarged with many lesser Rivers, waters the Province of
Pocutia, separates both the upper and lower
Podolia from
Moldavia, and in the Province of
Bessarabia, empties it self into the
Euxine Sea. 5.
Bug or
Bugus, rising in
Red Russia, near the Town
Olesco, at
Stroczacz enters the
Narva; nor is it long after that, ere the
Narva it self rowls into the
Weissel. This
Narva is said to have this peculiar quality, that no venemous creature will live in its streams; insomuch that Serpents sticking to the sides of the Boats that come out of the
Bug, as soon as they enter
Narva will give a hiss, and scud away with all the speed they can. 6.
San, rising out of the
Sarmatian mountains and falling into the
Weissel near
Sandomiria. 7.
Niemen, call'd by the
Germans Memel, by the ancients
Chronos, it rises in the Dutchy of
Sluczko in
Black Russia, runs also thro
Litvania, and
Prussia, at length flows into the lake
Kurisch-Haff, and so into the
Baltick (call'd perhaps from hence the
Chronian) Sea. 8. The
Dzwina or
Dwina, named of old
Rubon, and since by the
Latins Duna, which springs in the
Muscovian Russia, and after a course of an hundred and thirty leagues thro
Russia, Litvania, and
Livonia, throws it self into the same Sea two leagues from
Riga, the Metropolis of
Livonia. Besides these, we may reckon the river
Bog, or
Boh (the
Hypanis of the
Greeks), which takes its origine from a Lake in the confines of
Podolia, and falls into the
Nieper.
The
bigger Poland, Cujavia,Laker. and the territory of
Lublin, have several great and remarkable Lakes, abounding with fresh fish of all sorts. The chief of them are
Goplo, five miles in length, and half a mile in breadth; and
Briale, or the
white Lake, so call'd by an
Antiphrasis, because that in the months of
April and
May it dyes the skins of those that wash in it of a swarthy colour.
The Woods in
Poland are well stored in most places with Hares, Conies, Squirrels,
Beast. Dear and Foxes: and in many parts with Bears, Wolves, and Bores. Of amphibious beasts they have Castors, Otters, and as some of that countrey affirm, a sort of white Bears, which live very frequently in the water. The
Masovian Forests are stored with
Elks, Wild Asses, Ʋri, which Dr.
Charleton interprets
Owres, and the
Bisontes Jubati by some rendred
Buffs. These
Bisontes, according to
Aldrovandus, in their shape and horns resemble an Ox, but have mains like a horse, beards on their lower jaws, tongues rough like a File, and very hard, a bunch upon their backs, and their hair smells like musk. They are of incredible strength, some affirm that they will toss a man and horse into the air. The
Polish Nobility hunt them, and esteem their flesh powdred a great dainty. The
Ʋrus or
Owre called by the
Polanders Thur, is a kind of wild Ox, much bigger, swifter and stronger then the tame; hath a short black beard, a bush of hair upon his forehead, and horns excessive large and wide, of which
Pliny saith the
Romans made Lanthorns. Girdles of his skin are said to be helpful to women in travail. The
Elk called by the
Poles Loss, by the
Germans Ellend, that is,
miserable, because of the falling-sickness with which it is troubled; is about the bigness of a large Horse, bodied like a Stag, but broader, its legs longer, feet large and cloven; the hoofs whereof are accounted a great medicine against the falling-sickness. In the deserts near
Boristhenes, Sig. Herberstein saith, there is a wild Sheep called by the
Polanders Solhac, shaped like a Goat, but with shorter legs, and horns growing streight up. It is exceeding swift, and leaps very high. They have also a sort of wild Horses in the
Ʋkrain called by them
Dzikie-Konie, which the Nobles eat for a great rarity. In
Lithvania and
Muscovy is a voracious unserviceable beast, not seen in any other Countrey, as
Mat. a Michovia tells us, called
Rossomaka, which hath the body and tail of a Wolf, the face of a Cat, and feeds on dead carcasses. When it hath found one, it never leaves eating till its belly is swelled to the utmost stretch; then seeks out some narrow passage between two trees, and by squeezing its body thro, forces out the load of its stomach; afterwards returns to its prey, devouring and disgorging successively till all is consumed. The Hart-like-Wolf, or
European Lynx, call'd by the
Latins Lupus Cervarius, and by the Natives
Ris, with spots on its belly and legs, affords the best Furs in
Poland, tho the country be well stock'd with Martrons. They have neither Camels, tame Asses, nor Mules; which beasts thrive not in cold countries: but are compensated with great plenty of excellent Horses; which are very fair and large, pace almost
[Page 3]naturally, and surpass the
German Horses in swiftness, tho they come short of the
Turkish. Those of
Lithvania are inferior to the
Polish in bigness, strength, and beauty.
Fowl, both tame and wild, is no-where more plentiful then in this Kingdom. 'Twere needless to reckon up their several kinds, since I find none peculiar to this Nation, save only the Quails of
Podolia, which have green legs, whose flesh is very unwholsome, and if immoderately eaten, breeds the cramp.
The
Polanders are generally of a good complexion, flaxen-hair'd,
[...] and tall of stature. The men, for the most part, corpulent and personable. The women, slender and beautiful, disdaining the help of art and
fucus's to set them off. They are naturally open-hearted and candid; more apt to be deceived, then to deceive; not so easily provoked as appeas'd; neither arrogant, nor obstinate; but very tractable if they be gently and prudently managed. They are chiefly led by example; are dutiful to their Princes and Magistrates; and very much inclined to civility and hospitality, especially to strangers; whose customs and manners they are forward to imitate. The Gentlemen (who are all noble) take delight in keeping great sore of Horses and Arms. They entertain a multitude of servants, many of which are only obliged to follow them, but disdain any mean office, and sit with their Masters at Table. The principal Senators march, whether on foot or horseback, in the middle of their retinue, putting the best clad before them. The Daughters always walk before their Mothers, as in
Italy; and the unmarried Sisters before the married. The education of their youth is more loose and negligent then in other their neighbouring countries; but for the most part good nature, and vertuous inclination supplies that defect. Tho they hate the Greek tongue, and will not suffer their children to learn it, lest they should imbibe also the Religion of the Greeks; yet they covet nothing more then to have them well instructed in the Latine; so that in no part of
Italy, not in
Rome it self, shall a man meet with so many that are able to converse in
Latin as here. Even the Daughters of the Nobility and wealthy Citizens, at home or in Monasteries, are taught to write and read as well the Latine as their Native Language. When they grow to years of maturity, and not before, they are put to learn good huswifery, and to look after their dairies; or else imployed in spinning, weaving or sowing: whilst the men, according to their several qualities, follow their Husbandry, Merchandiseing, or the more weighty concerns of Church and State. The Pesantry live in great servitude to their Lords, whose dominions they may not quit without their permission, if they were born, or have inhabited three years therein; those that do so, are certainly hanged if taken. The Nobles are very much addicted to travel, as admiring forreign Countries more then their own: which is the reason that they greedily, and easily, learn the languages of those Nations they affect. And they esteem it no small commendation of their ingenuity to introduce something of the new habits and customs of the people with whom they have convers'd. For tho they are very docible and easily attain what they give their minds to; yet they rather set themselves to learn the inventions of others, then to invent any thing new of their own. Neither indeed are they so fit for Mechanic as for learned Arts; to which they therefore more apply themselves, as appears by the many eminent Divines, Historians, Mathematicians and Philosophers that have flourished in
Poland; witness
Stanislaus Hosius, Cardinal and Legat at the Council of
Trent; Matthias a Michovia, Johannes Dglugossus, and
Martinus Cromerus, their excellent Historians.
Johannes Zamoscius their great General, and Chancelor of the Kingdom, excelling no less in most parts of learning then he did in military conduct.
Nicolaus Copernicus the famous Astronomer,
Martinus Smiglecius the Logician,
Abr. Bzovius, who hath continued
Baronius's Annals; with many others, whose works are much esteemed in forreign countreys. And doubtless the Learned would have been obliged to more of their nation, had not their writings perisht for want of Printing, but lately received amongst them. Physick also begins to come in request; since, even in these parts, the modern luxury in diet is attended with more diseases then the homely fare of former Ages.
Their language is a dialect of the
Slavonian,Language. and not so copious as many others. It is difficult to write and read because of the multitude of Consonants joined with one Vowel; yet the harshness is much corrected in speaking, for they pronounce them as if mixt with Vowels. They have borrowed most of their terms of art, for trades and instruments, from the
Germans; of which nation there are many Artisans and Merchant, among them, and some Towns and Villages chiefly speak the
German language.
Hot Baths are very much used in this Country,
Baths. especially in Winter; and are frequented by both sexes, though in places apart from one another.
Their Habit differs according to the condition,
Habits. age, and quality of the person; and of late, they much affect new fashions, which are often brought in by the Soldiery, in imitation of those Nations against whom they have been victorious. The women also have the same variety; only they come nearer the dress of men, then in most other Nations.
The antient diet of the Rusticks, was Milk,
Diet. Cheese, Fish and Herbs; now Beef, Veal and Mutton. The Tables of the Nobility and Citizens are furnished with all sorts of dainties, wherein they use great store of Spice and Sugar. And indeed luxury in diet and apparel prevails more and more amongst them every day.
The common drinks of the country are Beer,
Drinks. and Mead boil'd with Hops. Besides which they use great quantities of
Aqua-vitae, made by infusing wheat in water for some days, and then distilling off the Spirit, and mixing it with Sugar and hot Spices. The Nobility and Merchants here drink wine as plentifully as in other places, imported from
Hungary, Moravia, the
Rhine, and
Gascogny.
The money peculiar to
Poland is coined in such small pieces, that 'tis very troublesome receiving,
Money. or paying out any round sum in it. The
Gross is a little piece of copper mix'd with silver, valued at three half-pence
English. The
Attine at four pence half-penny. Their
Trigross and
Segross, both of pure silver, the one three times, the other six times the value of a
Gross. But the most currant money in
Poland at this time is forreign coin; brought in chiefly, tho not in great plenty, by the
Hungarian, German and
Italian Merchants, for the Commodities of the Countrey: which are Rie, Wheat, Barley, Oats and other Pulse, Flax, Hops, Hides, Tallow, tann'd Leather, divers sorts of Furrs brought first out of
Muscovy, but dress'd and vended here. Honey, Wax, Amber, Pitch, Pot-ashes, Masts and Planks. The Horses also of
Poland, for their swiftness, hardiness and easy pace, are much coveted by Foreigners. Besides all these, it supplies the neighbouring countreys with vast
[Page 4]numbers of Oxen and Sheep. To which must be added the Salt-pits; whence springs the greatest revenue the King of
Poland has.
The riches of
Poland consist in the commodities of the countrey already mention'd;
Traffick. which (though they are of several sorts and general use, yet) bring but little money into the kingdom, being counterpoised by the incredible quantity, and richer variety of foreign merchandize; so that they hardly suffice to pay for the Cloth, Silk, Jewels, Tapistry, the Fruit, Spice, Salt-fish, Wine, Tin and Steel brought in from
England, Flanders, Portugal and
Spain, &c. But to say the truth the people are neither industrious nor addicted to trade; the Nobility being forbid it by their own constitutions upon the forfeiture of their Honor: and the Commonalty for the most part wanting estates sufficient to promote it. Besides, those of better fortunes spend too much of their revenues in costly apparel and furnishing their tables; by which means, instead of saving and laying up, they become very poor, or at least always in a wanting condition. To which we may add that their Countrey lyes not commodiously for traffick, not having the advantage of any considerable Port Town,
Dantzick only excepted.
The chief strength of
Poland consists in their Cavalry which is very numerous and readily raised;
Military Strength. the Nobility being bound by the Laws of the Land, to attend the King in all expeditions for the security of the Kingdom. In such cases the King sends his summons-into all the Palatinates, which are proclamed three times, and at a months distance from one another. Upon the third Proclamation, the Nobility are obliged to repair to the paricular rendezvous of their own Palatine who leads them to the general rendezvous; and, in regard they are exempted from all other burthens, they bear their own charges all the time of the war. If there be any that refuse to appear, their goods are presently confiscated to the use of the Kings table. They all serve on Horseback, and are enrolled above 200000, yet in as much as they have very few fortified places on any side, for the security of their frontiers, they can hardly draw together above 100000, without leaving their provinces too naked. But these forces, when assembled, serve only for the defence of their countrey, and march not beyond its limits above five leagues: wherefore when they have occasion to lead an Army further, it is decreed in the Senate (which is convoked before every war) to levy stipendiary Souldiers: and as they are composed principally of the Nobles, they frequently signalize themselves by their valour, and successes against the much greater numbers of their enemies. Thus
Zamoschius in the time of
Sigismund the third with 3000 men worsted
Carigereius the
Scythian who with 70000, was making an inroad into
Poland, and forced him with the loss of many thousands of his
Tartars to return into his own countrey
Taurica Chersonesus. And
Zolkievi with 3000 horse, setting upon 80000
Muscovites unawares, put themselves all to flight: and brought away prisoners three
German Regiments that served amongst them. The
Polish foot is of little esteem; and therefore although each City is bound to set forth a certain number, yet the King rather chuses such a sum of money as may be equal to the charges, and so makes provision of Foreigners taken chiefly out of
Hungary and
Germany. The
Zeporensian Cossacks formerly served the
Polish Kings in their wars, either as Volontiers or for very small pay. They came in sometimes 30000 strong, arm'd with Lances or Scimiters, and long Guns: each had his Horse, and as occasion required fought either mounted or on foot. They used their own discipline, and chose all their Officers out of their body: even their cheif Commander, whom they would depose without any fault, if he were not successful. Now although the strength of the
Polanders may be said to equal, both in number and quality, most of the Kingdoms of
Europe; yet it often falls out that they are unsuccesful in their undertakings, partly because of the slowness as well of their councils, (which consisting of all the principal Officers in the Kingdom, are not readily convened, nor without much ado kept together) as of their Nobles in their rendezvousing, who seldome come in before the last summons: partly also because the generality of the Souldiers depending more upon their particular Patrons then the King, are apt to follow their inclinations tho to the prejudice of the publick. Besides it being a difficult thing to furnish necessaries for so many persons any long time, having no publick Magazins provided towards the Seat of the war, they are inclined to mutiny and disband before they have done their work. Fortified Towns they have but few, as we said before, believing their own courage fortification enough to defend their countrey; and unwilling by means of Garrisons, to give their Kings opportunity of assuming an absolute power and arbitrary rule over them.
The government of
Poland partakes more of Aristocracy then Monarchy;
[...] and is shared amongst the King, the Senate and Nobility. Some would reckon in the Citizens and
Kmetones (for so in old Charters are the Husbandmen called) who live dispersed in Villages: but they being never admitted to publick offices and employments, ought not to be numbred among the orders and estates of the Kingdom.
At first the Kings of
Poland were successive,
[...] of the
[...] as appears from the testimony of all their Historians: and it was the custom that the reigning Prince appointed his successour. So
Lescus the Third appointed
Popielus: so also
Boleslaus the Chast, did
Lescus the Black. Nay oftentimes the Kings of
Poland divided the Kingdom amongst their sons, which is not usual in elective governments. This is evident from the example of
Boleslaus Crivoustus; and is further confirm'd, in the
Polonian Histories, by the precedent of
Boleslaus the Curld. But in the reign of
Sigismund Augustus, a Law was made that no King of
Poland should presume to nominate, or impose on the Kingdom a successor: which law was not only renew'd in the
interregnum after his death, but several times afterwards: the custom of Elections having encroached upon the Scepter for some while before, for want of issue of the true
Polish Royal Family. From this Electiveness it now comes to pass, that from the death of one, till the Election of another King, there are frequently too long
Interregna; during which the
Arch-Bishop of
Gnesna performs all Kingly offices, acting in all things like their Soveraign; without any distinction, save that he is not crown'd with the Royal Diadem. And such an
Interregnum may happen (not only by the death, but) by the Deposition or Resignation of the King. Deposition of Kings was formerly more frequent in
Poland, then now.
Henry Valois is the last precedent in that kind, who being elected King of
Poland, when he heard of the death of his Brother
Charles the Ninth, withdrew himself privately out of
Poland by night, that he might not loose his right in
France. Whereupon the
Poles, after they had often besought his return, finding him not in the least inclin'd to forsake a successive
[Page 5]for an elective Kingdom, in a general assembly of the Estates discharg'd him from being King of
Poland, and renounced their allegiance. The most memorable example of Resignation is that of
John Casimir in the year 1669: of which a large narrative is given by
Nicolas Chwalkowski (in his Treatise
de Jure Publico Polonico) who was an eye witness of the whole Ceremony. The
Interrex, or person who performs the Regal offices during the
Interregnum as was said, is the Arch-Bishop of
Gnesna, a
Legate born, the Primate and first Prince of the Kingdom, not suspected, as being a spiritual person, of affecting the Crown. Which dignity is not conferr'd upon him by Election, but is annexed to his Archbishoprick, least any delay in his nomination should endammage the publick. This office he takes upon him not only upon the death, but also in the Kings absence, or residence in another Countrey: as when
Henry withdrew into
France, and
Sigismund the Third went into
Swedeland. If there be no Archbishop of
Gnesna, then this dignity belongs to the Bishop of
Cujavia; or in his absence also or vacancy of the See, to the Bishop of
Posnania. At the beginning of the
Interregnum the Archbishop betakes himself to
Warsaw, whither all the neigbouring Nobility repair to him; by whose advice Proclamations are issued forth out of the Archbishops Chancery under his hand, with all his Titles annexed, whereby the
Interregnum is proclamed by the publick Ministers in all the Palatinates and Districts of the Kingdom; and in the mean while all necessary orders are taken for the security of the people. The
Interrex also receives, opens and answers all the letters from Foreign Princes; gives audience to all foreign Ambassadours; and indeed all the publick affairs of the Kingdom pass through his hands. As for the Candidates, this is certainly agreed, that no
Piasti or Native, is excluded from the hopes of Election. The Electors in the first place, are the prime Senators of the Kingdom, as well Ecclesiastick as Secular: next to them the Nobility, who have liberty to act either in their proper persons or by Deputies; and lastly, the Deputies of
Cracow, Posnania, Leopolis and
Vilna. For the
Polonians believe that it very much avails both to the security of the Governour, and to confirm the allegiance of them that obey, that the King should be chosen by the Generality, who can then have no pretence to complain of their own Act. The place of Election is in an open field not far from
Warsaw, near the Village
Wola, by reason of the multitude of them who have voices in the Election; it is mark'd out by the Marshals of
Poland and
Lithuania. When the day of Election is come, and the Senators all met, the
Interrex asks the Question three times,
Whether it be their pleasure to command that such a one shall be declared King? If by consent of voices, they return for an answer;
It pleases us, Let him live; then the Archbishop declares him King in these words:
In the name of God, I declare such a one King and great Duke of Lithuania,
and beseech the King of Heaven to enable him for so great a charge, and through his mercy so to order that the Election may be prosperous for the Nation and happy for the Catholick Religion. After which the Marshals proclaim the Election in the following manner:
King N. is unanimously elected, and so declared by the Interrex; him therefore all ye acknowledg your lawfully elected and declared King. If the King, so elected, be absent, his Ambassadours are obliged to confirm by oath the conditions, and receive the decree of the Election. After which the Marshalls make a second Proclamation in these words;
The Polanders have a lawful King. On the other side, before the King is admitted, he is obliged by oath
to preserve the Laws and priviledges of the Kingdom and the Covenants agreed upon by the Estates, in all their clauses, points and conditions, and to renew the said oath at his Coronation. But though he be now elected, the
Interregnum does not cease till after his Coronation: for till then he assumes no other Title then that of
King Elect; neither are his Letters to Foreign Princes seal'd with any other seal then that of the
Chamber. So that though the present King was permitted to make use of the Seal of great Duke of
Lithuania before his Coronation; that was only done upon the necessity of the
Muscovitick Expedition. The usual place of Coronation is
Cracow: where the Crown is kept in the cheif treasury, under the charge of the high Treasurer: and the person performing the ceremony is always the Archbishop of
Gnesna, if not prevented by sickness. The chief Ceremonies at the Coronation are the Questions propounded to the King,
Wilt thou profess the Catholick faith delivered by Catholick men? Answ.
I will. Wilt thou defend and maintain the Church and its Ministers? Wilt thou uphold, defend and govern the Kingdom by God committed to thy care according to Justice? Ans.
I will. All which he confirms by the usual form of words and laying his hand upon the Evangelists. The Ceremony of anointing is perform'd with saying these words:
I anoint thee King with the sanctified oil, in the name of the Father, Son and holy Ghost. The words of Confirmation are;
Sit and possess the Throne appointed thee by God. Let thy hand be strengthned and thy right hand exalted. The solemnity being ended, the King repairs to the grand Assembly for the Coronation; where the
Interrex resigns his Authority, and the Senatours, together with the Nobility and Deputies of the Cities, take their oaths of allegiance to the new King.
The present power and authority of the Kings of
Poland will more plainly appear by a recital of the articles to the observance whereof they bind themselves, as well before as at their Coronation: for they contain all the essential properties of Regal Dominion under the name of
Pacta Conventa. As to their power in Ecclesiastical affairs, the Roman-Catholick Kings of
Poland have been so kind as to part with their chiefest prerogatives in that particular, reserving only to themselves the collation of benefices. The King swears to maintain peace between the dissenters in Religion, of which there are many in
Poland, and to compose the causes and differences among persons professing the
Greek religion, as appears by the
Pacta Conventa sworn to by
John the Third, now reigning. As for foundations of Churches and Monasteries, whatsoever liberty the King may have to erect, they are to be confirm'd by all the orders at the general assembly of Estates: and thus the immunities and priviledges granted by the Kings of
Poland to the Academy of
Vilna were also confirm'd. The next prerogative is the legislative power: concerning which we find, that in the time of
Lechus, the Kings of
Poland had an absolute authority of making Laws themselves, as necessity required. But afterwards, when they had received the Christian faith, they began to make Laws with the consent of the Peers. Insomuch that
Sigismund the Third, in the year 1570, enacted, That no Law should be of publick force till reviewed and subscribed by such a number of Deputies of the Nobility and Senators, whose consent was to be required before-hand whether the Law should pass: which Law remains to this day. The determination of Controversies was likewise formerly
[Page 6]in the breast of the King as supreme Judg; till
Ʋladislaus Jagello granted this priviledge to the Nobility,
That they should not be punished or imprison'd till convicted by Law. After him
Bathor threw off the burthen of hearing causes from his own shoulders, and erected several courts of Judicature in
Poland and
Lithuania: reserving only to himself the judgment of such causes as concerned his Chequer and such Cities as were immediately under his jurisdiction. But now the Nobility create the chief Judg or Marshal, with his assistants in those tribunals; nor does the King sit alone upon causes that come before him by way of appeal: besides, the King swears to determine all Court causes according to the advice and opinion of the Senators and Officers residing at Court; as also to call the causes in order as they are set down in the Register, and neither to retard nor further any cause for favour or interest. The power of making war did formerly without doubt absolutely belong to the King. But
Casimir the third (in the year 1454) made a promise that he would undertake no war without the consent of the Senate. At this day the Kings of
Poland, by the
Pacta Conventa, promise not to admit or call in any foreign assistance without the especial consent of the Estates; not to encrease the number of the standing Militia, nor raise forces privately; not to send aid to any other Prince, without consent as aforesaid; nor to commit the trust of Forts or Castles to strangers or plebeians, but to men of worth and landed Nobility. Besides all these engagements, there is a Council of War, elected out of the Senate and Nobility, to attend and advise him in the field, according to the late Constitutions in the year 1676, and several others before. He is also expresly forbid to undertake any offensive war; as an affair wholly belonging to the General Assembly. Again, his power of making peace, and entring into new leagues, is so far limited, that neither shall be valid, unless approved and confirm'd by the General Estates. Only ancient Alliances may be renewed by the King, with the consent of the Senators resident at Court. What his power is in raising Tribute and Taxes, may be easily gather'd from the words of
Konarscius in
Fredo, p. 98.
The Estates of the Kingdom, saith he,
have exempted thee, speaking to the King,
from all charges and expences. It is their business to pay the Soldiery, and to furnish the Magazines; thine, with their joint and mutual consent, to proclaim war, overcome and triumph. The coinage of money is a Royal prerogative, and as soon as
Poland knew money, was in the sole power of the Kings; but
Ʋladislaus Jagello, in the year 1422, made a promise not to coin any money without the consent of his Counsellors: which law was renewed by
Sigismund the third, in the year 1632; and inserted into the
Pacta Conventa, sworn to by the present King. Nor was it without the consent of the Senate, that
Casimir Jagello granted to the Cities of
Dantzick, Elbing, and
Thorn, the priviledg of coining money, which they keep to this day. The prerogative of conferring employments and honours still remains in the sole power of the King. He is supreme judg and arbiter of merit and reward; and disposes of all, as well Ecclesiastical as Civil, dignities. Yet this illustrious prerogative suffers some eclipses too; for first, the King can advance no foreigner, nor any person who has no lands in the Province where the preferment lies. Next, he can neither diminish nor increase the number of the Offices either of the Court or Kingdom. Thirdly, he is obliged to supply such as are vacant by a time limited. Fourthly, he engages himself not to bestow the Office of Bishop, nor the Commands of Palatine, Castellane or Captain, upon any of his Sons, Grandchildren, or other relations of the Royal Blood. Fifthly, he is restrained from conferring a plurality of high dignities upon one person. Lastly, he is bound not to seek any private advantage by the advancement of any man: and 'tis provided, that all promises of preferment made in order to his advancement to the Crown, shall be invalid. But (granting his power to be considerable in conferring of Honours, yet) he is not able to deprive the same persons, tho ill deserving, of the honours once conferred upon them, without the consent of the Estates: and with their approbation he may remove from their employments, not only
Seculars, but
Ecclesiasticks. By the same permission he has also power to create Dukes, Earls, and Barons: but the reason why he makes so few is, because the
Polish Nobility will not admit of any other superiority one amongst another, then what comes by birthright. And because they are very cautious of admitting strangers, he is not permitted to advance any foreigner into the number of the Nobility, by way of Naturalization, without the consent of the Estates first obtained, and the particular recommendation of the General of the Army. It is in the Kings power to give Audience to the Ambassadors of foreign Princes, and to elect his own; but he cannot send them abroad, upon the concerns of Peace, War, or entring into new Leagues, without the consent of the resident Senators. Formerly the priviledg of hunting belonged solely to the King; but now every one of the Nobility hath power to use that sport in his own grounds. The King cannot contract a marriage for himself, without the consent of the Senate. He is not permitted to enjoy or possess any lands of inheritance in his own Kingdom; nor is he suffer'd to stir beyond its confines, except the Senate agree thereto. He may not have any foreigners employed about him at Court: for all the Court-Officers are sworn to be true and faithful (not only to the King, but also) to the Senate, and are under the jurisdiction of the Marshal of the Kingdom. He is also obliged, by the
Pacta Conventa, to take care that the Queen do not meddle with State affairs. To all these Articles the Kings of
Poland most religiously swear observance. Nay, to keep their Kings the more in awe, the Nobility of
Poland published the following Declaration in the year 1609,
If any Nobleman, or Senator, observe that the King has acted contrary to the Laws and Priviledges of the Kingdom, he is to give notice thereof to the Primate and the Senators, who are to admonish the King thereof. If he slight the admonition, it shall be lawful publickly to declare the Kings neglect to the Senate; to the end, that the Deputies may be enjoin'd, in the name of the whole Nobility, to advise him to desist from acting so contrary to the established Laws of the Land. If the King take no notice of this second admonition, they are then to acquaint the General Assembly of Estates. If the third admonition prevail not, then all the Orders are to proceed according to the Article of withdrawing their Allegiance.
The Revenues of the Kings Houshold, arising out of his Lands and Salt-pits, are computed to above three millions of
Florens yearly. Of which
Piasecius gives this account: That the allowance of the Kings of
Poland is such, as is (not only sufficient to maintain the splendor of a Court equal to any Prince in Christendom, but also) large enough for all occasions of Royal munificence. The truth of which many of the Nobility experience, by the large possessions which the
[Page 7]King often grants them during his or their lives. The publick Revenues of the Kingdom, are either ordinary or extraordinary. The ordinary Revenues are, the fourth part of the Rents of the Kings Lands, granted by him towards the payment of the Soldiery; Impost upon Wines; Custom upon goods exported and imported; the fourth
Gross out of
Great and
Little Poland, &c. The extraordinary Revenues are, 1. The
Agraria, or a certain sum of money tax'd upon Lands and Farms. 2. Excise upon Beer; from which the Tenants of Noblemen, that keep publick-houses, are not free. 3.
Capitatio Judaica, or the
Jews Pole-money; which in the year 1671 was tax'd at 150000
Florens. The
Jews in
Lithvania, upon extremity, are tax'd at 40000
Florens. Sometimes they pay two
Florens a head for themselves, their wives and children. 4. The Merchants Donatives; which in the year 1650 was raised to 40000
Florens. 5. The Chimney-money; which is doubled and trebled, as necessity requires. Sometimes a general Pole is laid upon the whole Kingdom; where every man, the Archbishop not excepted, pays according to his estate, and the Offices he holds. Nothing of all this belongs to the King, but 'tis all reserv'd for public uses; of which the Treasurers give an account to the General Estates, who have the only power to levy these new assessments and extraordinary impositions, as the necessity of affairs requires.
The Kings of
Poland, and its Dukes, may be distinguish'd into four Classes, or Orders of Succession. The first contains a Catalogue of the Dukes of
Poland, as follows.
A. D. 700]
Lechus the First. Who built the City
Gnesna, in the place where he found an Eagles Nest; and therefore gave it this name from
Gniazdo, which in the
Polish language signifies a Nest: hence also the Arms of
Poland are an Eagle. Their own Historians are not agreed about his extraction, whether he was a Native or
Croatian; nor about the time in which he reigned, some affirming, that it was about the year of our Lord 550, others almost an hundred years later; and both parties speaking only by conjecture. Nor lastly, are they agreed about the children he left behind him; but they generally acknowledg, that upon the faileur of his offspring, the people made choice of twelve Palatines for their Rulers, calling them
Woiewodes, i. e. Captains of War; and the Country being divided into twelve parts, each had his peculiar Province. But when they began to cherish private feuds, to the embroilment of the Commonwealth, and thereby also invited their illaffected neighbours to fall upon them, the people were constrained to seek their peace and safety in a Monarchy. And with much solicitation perswaded
Cracus, a person of great fortune and interest amongst them, to take upon him the entire Government; which he managed with singular prudence and success. He (or his Subjects after his decease, in remembrance of his vertues) built a new City upon the side of the
Weissel, which from his name was called
Cracow or
Cracovia, and made the Metropolis of the Kingdom.
His younger son
Lechus II, succeeded him, having first slain his elder brother to make way for himself; but the murther being detected, he was deposed and banish'd.
750] After him reigned his sister
Wenda, who chose rather to rule alone, then to be wife to a King. After she had repulsed
Ridigerus, a
German Prince (who not being able either by intreaty or force to obtain her in marriage, killed himself for shame and grief), lest any adverse chance should sully her honour, she leapt from the bridge at
Cracow into the
Weissel.
Twelve Palatines again.
760]
Premislaus, or
Lescus the First. He was a Goldsmith, and created King, because he had by an unusual stratagem, overthrown the
Hungarians and
Moravians: he died without issue.
804]
Lescus II. The
Polish Nobility having agreed to ride a Race for the Government, one of the Competitors strowed galltraps
(tribulos) in the way, and thereby so disabled all the horses save his own, which he had shod for the purpose, that he won the prize. The cheat being discover'd, he was torn in pieces by them; and this
Lescus, a poor obscure man, who out-ran the rest on foot, from being the scorn of the multitude, was by the popular applause saluted Prince. He always after kept by him the course clothes he had formerly worn, to mind him of his original.
810]
Lescus III.
815]
Popielus I.
830]
Popielus II. He is reported to have been eaten up by Mice, thro Gods judgment, as is conceiv'd, for the murders committed by him. For he is said to have poyson'd all his kindred, that he might unite the
Slavonian Principalities to his own Dukedom.
The second Classis, of which there is much more certainty then of the former, contains the following Princes.
843]
Piastus Rusticus, a Citizen of
Cruswic, of noted hospitality and charity.
861]
Ziemovitus.
892]
Lescus IV.
913]
Ziemomyslus.
964]
Mieceslaus. The first Christian King. He was born blind, and in the seventh year of his age, when at a publick banquet his name was to be given him, received his sight. He founded the two Archbishopricks of
Gnesna and
Cracovia, with divers Bishopricks; and gave the tythes of the whole Kingdom by a perpetual Edict to the Clergy.
999]
Boleslaus I. He received the Title of King from
Otho III. Emperor of
Germany; his predecessors being no more than Dukes of
Poland.
1025]
Mieceslaus II.
Casimirus I. Driven out of
Poland in his minority, by factions occasioned from his mothers ill government. He travel'd thro
Hungary, Germany, Italy, and at last in
France was made Religious, and Deacon in the Benedictine Convent at
Cluny; was invited thence to the Crown by the
Poles, who to procure the
Popes dispensation for his Vow, condscended to a perpetual tribute of an obolus
per head upon all the Commonalty, for the maintaining Lamps to burn in St.
Peters Church at
Rome, called hence
Peter-pence.
1059]
Boleslaus II. surnamed the Bold; he murther'd
Stanislaus Archbishop of
Cracow as he was officiating at the Altar, for which he was excommunicated and deposed by Pope
Gregory VII. His successors too were deprived of the Title of King, the Bishops being forbid to anoint any of them; which continued for 213 years, till the time of
Premislaus.
1082]
Ʋladislaus I.
1103]
Boleslaus Krzywousci, or the wry-mouthed. He is recorded to have been a victor in forty Battels; but being forced to retreat out of the field at his last battel against the
Russians, he dyed for grief.
1174]
Miecislaus the Old. So called for his prudence, tho but a young man. He was deposed, by reason of his evil Counsellors, and twice by his cunning regain'd the Kingdom.
1178]
Casimirus II. This Prince having receiv'd a box on the ear from one of his Pages, whose money he had won at play, acquitted the boy, saying,
That the Lad was transported with the loss of his money, and that he himself had been justly punished for prostituting his Dignity.
1195]
Lescus the White.
1199]
Miecislaus the Old, again.
Lescus the White, again.
1202]
Mieceslaus the Old, a third time.
1203]
Ʋadislaus Lasconogus, or small-shank'd.
1206]
Lescus the White, a third time. In his reign the
Teutonick Knights, or Knights of the Cross, took footing in
Prussia, being call'd in by his brother
Conradus, Duke of
Masovia and
Cujavia, to assist him against the
Prussians.
1226]
Boleslaus IV. surnamed the Chast, because he never knew his wife all the while he was married to her. In his time the
Polanders received so great an overthrow from the
Tartars, that the right ears only of the slain fill'd nine large sacks.
1279]
Lescus the Black. During his reign the
Tartars made another inundation into
Poland, and carried away so many captives, that 'tis said above 21000 virgins were counted amongst them, at the division of their booty; the men they generally murder'd, and poisoning their hearts, cast them into the waters, from whence sundry new diseases were occasioned, amongst others, some say, the
Plica Polonica.
1295]
Premislaus. He reigned seven months, and in that time re-assumed the title of King, being crown'd by the Archbishop of
Gnesna.
1296]
Ʋladislaus Lochius. So called from the shortness of his stature;
Lokiek signifying an Ell.
1300]
Wenceslaus the
Bohemian.
1305]
Ʋladislaus Lochius, again.
1333]
Casimirus, surnamed the Great, and the last of the family of
Piasti, to whom
Poland owes all its beauty, grandeur, and riches.
1370]
Lodowick, King of
Hungary, and Nephew of
Casimir the Great.
Hitherto the Crown of
Poland was successive, except when the King dyed without issue. In the third Class it began to be elective,
Ʋladislaus Jagello being obliged to swear (as
Hartknoch acquaints us) that he received it by election, and not succession. This Class contains the Kings of the
Jagellonian family, in the following order.
1386]
Ʋladislaus Jagello, chosen Husband to
Heduiges second daughter to
Lodowic, and therewith King of
Poland, upon condition that he should unite to the Crown his dominions of
Litvania, Samogitia, and part of
Prussia; become Christian himself, and endeavour the conversion of those Nations; and lastly, pay two hundred thousand Florens to
William Duke of
Austria, forfeited by
Heduiges, who was before contracted to the said Duke. He was a pious Prince, and founder of the University at
Cracow.
1434]
Ʋladislaus III.
1447]
Casimirus IV. 'Tis very memorable what
Loccenius reports of this King, how that meeting with
Charles King of
Swedeland at
Dantzick, he was forced to get a Monk to talk Latin with the said King, who understood no
Polish, but talked Latin accurately. Hereupon
Casimir being ashamed of the ignorance of himself and his followers, returning home caused publick proclamations to be made,
That from thence-forward no man should be advanced to any dignity, except he were able to speak Latin. Whence, saith the same Author, it came to pass, that the
Polanders have ever since excelled in the Latin tongue.
1492]
Johannes Albertus. In whose reign the
Tartars laid waste
Rusia, Podolia, and several other parts of the Kingdom.
1501]
Alexander. This King is reported to have been such a prodigal, that had he ruled long he would have begger'd the Nation. His Queen
Helena was not suffer'd to be crowned, because (being a
Greek) she refused to conform to the
Roman Church.
1507]
Sigismund I. Reckon'd (by
Paulus Jovius) one of the three Worthies (
Charles V. Emperor, and
Francis I. King of
France, being the other) who, had they not been contemporary Princes, deserv'd singly to have ruled the whole world. Besides the large endowments of his mind, he was a person of such vast strength of body, that 'twas ordinary for him (in his youth) to break asunder horse-shoes and strong ropes.
1548]
Sigismundus Augustus. In his time the
Lutheran Religion began first to take footing in
Poland.
The fourth and last Class contains a Register of Kings elected out of divers families; which occasioned several
Interregna. The order of these Princes is as follows:
1574]
Henry Valois, Duke of
Anjou. He fled from
Poland into
France upon news of his brother
Charles's death; and was thereupon deposed by the Estates. He reigned five months.
1576]
Stephen Bathor, Palatine of
Transylvania.
1587]
Sigismund III. Prince of
Sweden, who after the death of his father
John III. was crown'd also King of
Sweden; but deposed again by his subjects, chiefly for attempting to introduce the
Roman Religion amongst them (in which he had been educated by his mother). His Uncle
Charles IX. Duke of
Sudermannia was chose in his place.
1632]
Ʋladislaus IV. Famous for his many conquests over the
Turks, and subduing
Muscovy, of which he was elected
Tzar in his Fathers lifetime.
1648]
John Casimir, designed for a Religious, and had lived two years of probation amongst the
Jesuits, but (as
Hartknoch writes) nominated Cardinal by
Innocent X. before he took the vow of that order. Being elected King, he married his brother
Sigismund's widow. He laid down his Diadem, and retired into
France.
1669]
Michael Koributh, Duke of
Wisniowiec. An unfortunate Prince, who lost
Caminiec to the
Turks.
1674]
John Sobieski, formerly General against the
Turks; now reigning,
A. D. 1679.
The Queen of
Poland, except she be a
Roman Catholick, is never crown'd; nor then, unless the King himself request it, who is always present at her Coronation. During his life, the charges of her Court are defrayed out of his Exchequer; but after his death she maintains her self out of the revenues of such lands as the King, with the consent of the Estates, made over to her upon marriage.
The Senate of
Poland is famous as well for the Nobility, as number of persons. Among whom he that precedes all the rest (both in dignity and place) is,
The Archbishop of
Gnesna; who always sits next the King, upon his right hand. He has, belonging to his Court, a Marshal, who is also a
[Page 9]Senator of the Kingdom, in the rank of the Castellanes. This Marshal rides before the Archbishops Coach; and when he goes to Court, carries a staff before him upright, till he comes into the Kings Chamber, where he turns it downwards. His authority is so great, that in the absence of other Marshals, he bears the staff of authority before the King, when he goes to the General Assemblies. The Archbishop has also a Cross born before him, which the bearer holds upright behind his chair whilst he sits in the Senate. Next to the Marshal is the Chancellor, for the dispatch of publick affairs both in Church and State. The other Officers of the Archbishops Court, are the Chamberlain, Master of Requests, Steward of his Table, Treasurer, Chaplain, Library-keeper, Master of the Horse, and Clerk of the Kitchin. As he is a Prince, while his meat is going up to table, whether at home or abroad, the drums beat. When he comes to Court, he goes directly to the King; never waiting his Majesties leisure, or any prefixt time. And upon notice of his coming, he is met at the bottom of the stairs by the sub-Chamberlain; at the top by the Marshal of the Court. When he approaches the Royal presence, the King himself goes some paces to meet him. The title which the King gives him is,
To the most Reverend Father in Christ. By others he is styled,
Most High and most Reverend Lord, Lord N.
by the grace of God and the Apostolick See, Archbishop of Gnesna, Legate born, Primate, and chief Prince of the Polonian Nobility. His prerogatives are so great, that he gives not place to any Cardinal; for which reason no Cardinal is ambitious of being sent into
Poland.
Next to him the Archbishop of
Leopol, takes place.
After these two Archbishops, the Bishops are seated in the Senate, according to their dignity, in the following order:
1.
Cracow. 2.
Cujavia, who is also Bishop of
Ʋladislow and
Pomerania. 3.
Vilna, and 4.
Posnania, by turns. 5.
Polockzo. 6.
Varmia, and 7.
Luceorea, by turns. 8.
Praemislia. 9.
Samogitia or
Mednic. 10.
Culmo. 11.
Chelmo. 12.
Kiovia and
Zernichovia. 13.
Kamienieck. 14.
Smolensko.
These Bishops sit on the right and left hand of the King, next the two Archbishops. Concerning the revenues and splendor of the Bishops of
Poland, see
Cromer. l. 2.
descript. Pol. pag. 177. and
Stanislaus Lubienski in vita Angelotti, fol. 310. Bishops by the Law are forbidden to hold Abbeys
in commendam with their Bishopricks; only the Bishops of
Kiovia and
Kamienieck, having lost their revenues are now permitted that liberty, for their subsistence.
Next to the Bishops sit the Palatines or Woiwodes, and Castellanes. The Palatines are Governors of Dutchies or Counties, Commanders of their Militia in the general Expeditions of the Kingdom, appoint Conventions of the Nobles within their own Palatinate, and preside in them, and in Courts of Judicature, and have the patronage of the
Jews, who are very numerous in
Poland. They are the first order of the secular Senators. The Castellanes are, as it were, the Lieutenants of the Palatines, commanding in time of war the Nobility under them; there are divers of them belonging to one Palatine, each of them having his District or Castellanate, and from hence his title, and generally some revenue, but no jurisdiction in time of peace, only as he is a Senator. The Castellane of
Cracow was preferr'd before the Palatine upon the rebellion of
Scarbimirus the Palatine against
Boleslaus III. The Castellanes of
Vilna and
Troco, together with the Captain of
Samogitia (the only Captain in the Senate) had pre-eminence in consideration of their antiquity. The Palatines are seated thus:
1. The Castellane of
Cracow. The Palatines of 2.
Cracow, and 3.
Posnania, by turns. 4.
Vilna. 5.
Sandomiria. 6. Castellane of
Vilna. The Palatines of 7.
Calistia. 8.
Troco. 9.
Sirad. 10. Castellane of
Troco. 11. Palatine of
Lenschet. 11. Captain of
Samogitia. Palatines of 13.
Bressic. 14.
Kiovia. 15.
Inouladislow. 16.
Russia, formerly of
Leopol. 17.
Volhinia. 18.
Podolia, formerly
Caminiecz. 19
Smolensko. 20.
Lublin. 21.
Plockzow. 22.
Belze. 23.
Novogrod. 24.
Ploco. 25.
Vitepz. 26.
Masovia, formerly
Culmo. 27.
Podlachia. 28.
Rava. 29.
Brzecienski. 30.
Culmo. 31.
Mscislauia. 32.
Mariaeburgh. 33.
Breslow. 34.
Pomerania. 35.
Minsco. 36.
Czernichow.
After these Palatines sit the Castellanes; distinguished into Greater and Lesser. The Greater are these:
These are called the Lesser, as being more lately admitted into the Senate. To greater Castellanes they give the title of
Wielmozni or
Magnifici; to the Lesser that of
Ʋrodzeni or
Generosi: but by private persons all Castellanes are called
Jasnie Wielmozni, or
Illustrissimi. It is established by Law, that none may be either Palatine or Castellane in that Province in which he hath no lands.
The lowest in degree among the Senators are the Officers of the Kingdom and Great Dukedom of
Lithvania, in the following order:
1. The supreme Marshal of the Kingdom.
2. The Marshal of the Great Dukedom of
Lithvania.
3. The high Chancellor of the Kingdom.
4. The Chancellor of
Lithvania.
5. The Pro-Chancellor of the Kingdom.
6. The Pro-Chancellor of
Lithvania.
7. The Treasurer of the Kingdom.
8. The Treasurer of
Lithvania.
9. The Marshal of the Court for the Kingdom.
10. The Marshal of the Court of the Great Duke of
Lithvania.
The office of the supreme Marshal is, to call the Senate upon command of the King or
Interrex; to command silence, and give leave of speaking therein; to promulgate their acts to the people; and to pronounce and put in execution the Kings decrees in all causes of infamy and death. He prepares the place of the Diets, and hath the chief management of matters in those Assemblies; receives foreign Princes, and
[Page 10]Ambassadors at their arrival, providing them with lodgings; performs also most of the functions belonging to the Lord Steward of the Kings Houshold. In the publick assemblies, or when he goes before the King, he carries a staff upright. While the King resides in
Lithvania, the Marshal of
Lithvania has the same power there. The Chancellors are both secular persons; and the office of Chancellor and Pro-Chancellor is the same, only the Chancellor keeps the great, and the Pro-Chancellor the lesser Seal. In short, these two are the mouth and hands of the King in the dispatch of all business. The Treasurers are the Stewards of the publick Treasury, and masters of the Mint. When the King bestows this office upon any one, four Senators are appointed to deliver the Treasury to him by an inventory, of which there are three copies, one with the King, another with the Treasurer, and the third they keep themselves. This, by the way, take notice of in reference to all the Senators, that none of them are permitted to stir out of the Kingdom without particular licence of the Grand Estates; and upon some pressing occasion.
The rest of the Officers about the Court which are not of the Senatorian Order, as the Principal Secretary, Master of Requests, Captain General,
&c. I spare to mention, being much-what the same as in other Nations; only it is to be observed, that there are two of every sort, one for the Kingdom of
Poland, the other for the Great Dukedom of
Lithvania.
The Masters of Requests are always present when the King sits to determine controversies and differences among his Subjects; at which time it is their duty to lay open the nature and grounds of the controversie to the King. They stand fair, upon a vacancy, to be admitted Senators. The Magistrates for the several Districts are of two sorts, that is, Land; or Camp-Magistrates. The Land Magistrates are:
1. The Vice-Chamberlain, or Judg of bounds and limits.
2. The Standard-bearer.
3. The Land-Judg.
4. The Tribune.
5. The Land-Register.
6. The Keeper of the Treasury. Besides some other inferior Officers.
The Camp or Military Officers are:
1. The Captain with Jurisdiction, who is Governor of some Town or Castle.
2. The Captain without Jurisdiction.
3. The Burggrave; who is Governor of some Castle, and takes care of the out-guards.
4. The Vice-Captain.
5. The Judg-Advocate.
6. The Field-Register.
The Councils,
Councils. or Parliaments of
Poland, are of two sorts: 1. Civil, to which the Counsellors come in their Gowns. 2. Military, to which they come in Military habit. The latter are only held in the time of an
Interregnum. The former are frequently called: and are 1. Ordinary; which by the Laws are summon'd once in two years. 2. Extraordinary; which are assembled as the necessity of affairs requires. When either Ordinary or Extraordinary Councils are to be convened, the King by his Letters summons the lesser Councils or
Conventions, in the several Palatinates, larger Provinces, and certain Districts. These
Conventions precede the general Assemblies of the Kingdom six weeks, unless upon some extraordinary accident: and are held in the proper Cities of the Palatinates and Provinces, appointed for that purpose. Here, after they have chosen a Marshal (who seems to be much like our Speaker, as being the Director of the Convention) they first consider of such things as are propounded to them by the Kings Deputies, dispatched away to every Convention, and of what other business is to be motioned at the General Session. After that they choose the Land Deputies, or provincial Delegates, for the general Assembly. Every Province sends so many (almost in the same manner as our Shires, save only that they are not chosen by the people) till the whole number amount to about 300. These Deputies are generally elected out of such Magistrates as are not of the Senatorian order: excluding all Judges and their Assistants, Collectors, and all Officers of the Exchequer, unless they have exact and full acquittances from the Treasurer. The Delegates, like our Burgesses, have a certain allowance from their respective Provinces, during the sitting of the general Assembly. The particular Conventions being broken up (which by the Law are not to sit above four days) three weeks before the Senators and Delegates repair to the Grand Session, they meet at the general Committees for the several Provinces; where they again read over the Kings commands, the instructions given to the Delegates, and what was thought needful to be propounded for the publick good. The grand Assembly being met, the Deputies repair to their Chamber and choose their Marshal or Director; which done, they are all conducted to kiss the Kings hand: and after that ceremony perform'd, the Chancellours of the Kingdom and Dukedome, in order, declare to them the substance of those affairs which are to be the subject of their Debates. Before they depart, they put the King in mind of supplying such employments as are vacant with deserving persons; and desire an account of such Laws or Ordinances as have been made by the resident Senators since the sitting of the last grand Convention. Having so done, they return to their Chamber. The power of these
Nuncii, or Deputies, is very great: for when they send any of their number to the King, they are presently admitted, let the King be never so busy, and have an immediate dispatch. If they clash in their debates, the King is careful to send some of the Senators to reconcile them; who then give them the Title of
Mosci Panovoie Bracia or
Gracious Lords Brothers. They have also power to impeach any great Officer of Misdemeanours, and to put the King himself in mind of his promises touching the Laws and priviledges of the Kingdom; neither is any constitution valid, that has not its Original from the Chamber of the Deputies. And, which is yet more, if any one of the whole number of the
Nuncii dissent, nothing can be legally concluded. So that upon the protestation and departure of one Deputy, the whole Convention is
ipso facto dissolv'd. Whilst the Deputies are thus consulting, the King and Senators have little to do, but to hear certain criminal causes appointed before hand for the first week, and some other civil controversies the second; till the return of the Deputies embodies the whole Senate together. Then every man has liberty to deliver his mind, with the leave and direction of the Marshal. The King suspends his own opinion, till the Senators and Deputies, or the major part of them agree. Then he endeavours to reconcile their different votes; or if he cannot prevail, concurs with that party which has voted most conformably to the Laws and priviledges of the Realm. These consultations by the Law, ought not to be continued
[Page 11]above fifteen days after the joyning of both Houses: though sometimes urgency of affairs causes farther prolongation. When the Session breaks up, the Deputies returning home, give notice of their return to the
Captains with Jurisdiction, and the Palatines or Vice-Palatines give the same notice of the return to the Deputies to the Nobility, inviting them withal to the
Post-Comitial Assemblies or
Conventions of Relation; the meeting whereof the King appoints. In these Conventions, the Deputies produce the constitutions made in the last general Assembly of Estates, delivered to them under seal by the Chancellours, and take care that they be fairly transcribed into the
Land and military Registers; not omitting, after this, to give a full account of what they have acted in discharge of their Trusts. If the grand Session break up in confusion, not having effected any thing to purpose; then certain
Post-Comitial Councils are called, wherein the King prefixes a time for another grand Session. Nor is it a wonder that much disturbance should rise in the General Assemblies; considering the multitude of the Deputies, and the liberty of each member: for which reason, Cardinal
Johannes Franciscus Commendonus, facetiously said, That
Morbus Comitialis was the Epidemical distemper of
Poland. Now, that the King may not want a Council in the interval of general Conventions, they, before they break up, appoint 24 Senators (8 Palatines, 8 Major, and as many Minor Castellanes) and four Bishops to wait quarterly (four at a time, one Bishop and three Senators) till other 28 are chosen. And these are bound so close to their duty, that they accompany the King to the Wars: for which they have a Stipend allowed and payed out of the Treasury.
The Courts of Judicature in respect of their division are the same as in other countreys,
[...] that is, either Ecclesiastic or Secular; either for civil or criminal causes: but in respect of the Judges and manner of proceeding therein, not easily to be understood without a particular survey. The Nobles have a Court peculiar to themselves, called the
Court of Land-judicature, wherein all actions relating to estates in Land are tryed. Where also the Captains, and, by their permission, the Kings Tenants may sue the Nobles themselves for wast done upon the Lands belonging to the Kings table. To this Court likewise belong all actions of debt upon Contract. The Judges of this Court are, a chief Judg, a Judg, and a Secondary. Upon the death of any of these, the Nobility propose four landed men, whom they recommend to the King; who chuses one out of them into the dead place. All the Judges are bound to be resident at the Session of the Court; which is twice, thrice, and sometimes four times, a year. The next remarkable Court is that of the several
Captains jurisdiction, called
Sudy Grodskie or
Courtmilitary. The chief Judg of this Court is a Captain, he sits alone, takes cognisance of Rapes, Burglary, Setting Houses on fire, Robberies upon the High-way.
&c. Noblemen not Landed are here also tryed; and forreign Merchants coming to Faires. He has also power, without any noise of Law to condemn and punish idle Vagabonds, Thieves, Proscribed persons, Fugitives, and people of infamous conversation. The writ of the Court runs
Nos Capitaneus &c. Tibi &c. Mandamus vigore Regio, & nostra, qua hac parte fungimur, Authoritate, &c. In Criminal causes it is to be served a fortnight, in Civil a week, before the Court sits. To the
Judicia Campestria may be referred the Vice-Captains Court: which takes cognizance of the division of Estates between brothers; forcible ejections; servants entertained without testimonial; exaction of customs; non-payment of publick duties;
&c. The
Sub-Chamberlains Court is for settling the bounds of Noblemens Estates. The
Commissorial Courts are erected for the same purpose, when the controversy happens between a Noble-man and one of the Kings tenants. For then the King sends down Commissioners to settle the limits of his own lands: who therefore issue out their writ after this form.
Nos &c. Commissarii per Majestatem Regiam specialiter deputati vobis Generosis &c. innotescimus, &c. The
Tribunal-Courts are superiour Courts, which take cognizance of all causes removed thither by way of appeal from the Courts of Land-judicature, the Captains Courts, the Vice-Chamberlain and the Commissorial Courts. The Judges of these Courts are as well spiritual as secular. The spiritual Judges are elected by the several Chapters of the Provinces; the temporal Judges, by the most voices of the Nobility. These Courts are held only in two places for
Poland, Petricow and
Lublin. The Causes are heard in order: for three days are allowed to enter all causes that come; and whatever is not enter'd in those three days cannot be medled with that sitting. Here are tried all causes that concern Ecclesiastical persons, and the revenues of Churches and religious houses. The writs issued hence run all in the Kings name, under the Seal of the Province where the Defendant lives. The Decrees of the Court are seal'd with the Seal of the province where the Court is held. From hence there lyes no appeal either to the King, or the General Session; unless where the Court is equally divided, or that the case in Controversy be not decided by the
Constitutions. The Courts of the
General Conventions are either
Criminal, or
Civil. The
Criminal either for publick crimes, as High Treason, Treason, Robbing the Exchequer, Violation of the priviledges of the General Parliament, and adulterating or falsifying the publick Coin; or else for private crimes, as Murder, Poysoning, Incest, Adultery, and such like hainous offences. To the civil
Conventional Courts belong all causes concerning the Estate of the Kings table; goods unlawfully received; extortion of custome; negligence of Magistrates;
&c. all causes concerning the tenths of Noblemens Estates; profanation of Churches; Land-offices and Honours;
&c. The Judges of this Court are the King and the Senatours. Whilst the Senatours and Deputies give their votes, the King absents himself; afterwards, when the decree is confirm'd by plurality of votes, he returns; and the Marshal having proclaimed the Sentence in the Kings presence, commands the person condemn'd to be clapt into irons, and takes care that execution be done. For causes that relate to the public Revenues there is the Court of the Exchequer usually held at
Radom: and therefore called
Tribunal Radomiense. The Judges of this Court, besides the Treasurer, are certain Senators, elected for this purpose in the general Parliaments of the Kingdom. Before this Court are examined and tryed all Sub-treasurers and Collectors of contributions and Captains which have not brought into the Treasury what collections were paid into their hands; as also all Merchants and others by whom the Treasury has suffer'd any dammage. This Court seldome sits above a fortnight or three weeks, and always adjourns before the meeting of the general Conventions. Nearly relating to this Court is that which they call
The Commission for
[Page 12]payment of Souldiers wages. Here are tryed such Souldiers as have not appeared after they have received their pay, or that have committed any Acts of violence towards the Kings Subjects. The Judges of this Court are the chief Commission-officers of the Army, with certain selected Senators and Deputies to assist them. To omit the Military Courts which are the same in all well disciplined armies, the Marshal of the Kings house has also his Court; whose jurisdiction extends not only over the Kings servants, but also over the Senators themselves that live in the Court. The
Captural Court is two-fold; either General, which sits during the
Interregnum to prevent disorders, having absolute power of life and death; whose Judges are chosen out of the prime Nobility: Or, Particular; in the several Palatinates of the Kingdom, the Judges whereof are chosen out of the Nobility at the several particular Conventions in the beginning of the
Interregnum. They take cognizance of all causes tryable in the Captains Court, and of all injuries and batteries (but meddle not with civil matters) being like a Court constituted to keep the peace during the
Interregnum. All
Captural Courts cease three weeks before the Assemblies for Election meet. After the Election is over, they sit again till the Coronation of the King. The
Jews are every where tried and judged by the Palatines, from whom there lyes no appeal except the sum exceed an hundred Florens. They that live in Towns or Villages belonging to Noblemen are under the jurisdiction of the Lord of the Royalty. In the
Assessorial Court the Chancellour sits as supreme Judge, assisted by the Masters of requests, and the principal Secretaries of the Kingdom. Here are heard all causes removed from the City Courts, as also from the Palatines when the controversy lies between a Christian and a Jew. Of the
Court of Relations the King himself is Judg, and hears all causes removed by way of appeal out of the
Assessorial Court. Hence there lies no appeal, but only to the Parliament it self: and that but in two or three cases. As when the action relates to an Estate which the possessour affirms that he holds by inheritance; or that it concern the publick revenue of the kingdom. I do not find any Ecclesiatical Courts particularly named; however most certain it is, that the Bishops have their several Courts, where either they, or their officials, take cognizance of all ceremonies and institutions Ecclesiastical, and are Judges of Heresy, Schism, Magick, Incantations, Usury, Simony, as also controversies about Tithes and Church-lands, of murder or violence offer'd to a religious person, or upon holy ground. Moreover, they determine the rights of Patronage, Matrimonial differences and contests touching birthright. As for Wills and Testaments, the differences about them are decided in the secular Courts as well as in these; unless in case of some Legacies left to the Church. From the Bishop's Court there lies an appeal to the Arch-bishop of
Leopol; from him to the Arch-bishop of
Gnesna; and thence to the Apostolick See. To the Spiritual Courts belong the
Court of Nunciature under the jurisdiction of the Popes
Nuncio, for that purpose always residing in
Poland. However before he enters into his office, he is obliged to present to the King and the principal Ministers of State the Apostolick brief of his Nunciature, wherein he acknowledges the King as supreme. To conclude, it has been often controverted among which of Aristotle's five sorts of government, the government of
Poland may be reckon'd: which when the most learned have not been able to determine, they have all betaken themselves to the common Proverb, frequently in the mouthes of the
Polonians themselves,
Polonia confusione regitur: yet such a confusion, saith
Coricinius, which has preserved the Virgin honour of the Nation safe and undefiled in the midst of so many cruel and bloody Wars.
At this day there is no less confusion in the religion then government of
Poland. [...] In the year 965
Miecislaus King of
Poland, (
John the 13th. being then Pope,) received and entertained the Christian faith according to the ceremonies of the Church of
Rome; which though it be still the most profest and reigning religion to this day, yet have other Religions and Sects got no small footing in the Realm. For in the year 1264 the
Jews flock'd into
Poland, planting themselves whole Colonies together, in this Kingdom. To whom
Boleslaus Duke of Great
Poland, granted several priviledges and immunities, which
Casimir the great (at the suit of another Jewish
Esther, who was his
Mistress) very much enlarged: by which means their number is now so encreased over all the Cities and Villages of
Poland, that is now called the
Jews paradise. In the year 1397,
Vitoldus, grand Duke of
Lithuania, having overthrown the
Nagayan Tartars, translated whole Herds of them into his own Territories; who to this day obstinately maintain the follies of
Mahomet. Much about the same time, in the reign of
Ʋladislaus Jagello, the opinions of
John Huss brake forth, and (by the pains of
Procopius Holy, Brederick Straznicz and
William Kotska) prevailed so far in
Poland, even among the Nobility, that though several severe Edicts were made against them, yet could they never be wholly extirpated. At length the Lutherans and Calvinists invaded the Roman-Catholick Religion with more danger to the Papacy; their party being encreased by the Students of
Cracow, through the neglect of the Magistrates in not revenging the murder of one of their Collegiates. For they, thereupon dispersing into
Bohemia and
Germany, upon their return so largely propagated the doctrine of
Luther, that
Sigismund Augustus himself, the Archbishop of
Gnesna, with the Bishops of
Culmo and
Camieniek, lean'd very much to their party. Among these the
Arrians intermixed themselves, and although so severely prosecuted by
John Casimir and others that
Alexander the seventh, for their sakes, gave the Kings of
Poland the Title of
Orthodox, yet they still shelter themselves under the name of
Dissenters. As for the
Calvinists, how far they have strengthened themselves may appear by the late disturbances in
Dantzick. The
Russians, though a great part of them, in the year 1596, joyned themselves to the Roman Church; yet the more numerous party, which go by the name of
Not-united, still retain the ceremonies of the
Greeks, under Arch-bishops and Priests of the same profession. And their priviledges were confirmed by the agreement made in the year 1658. The
Armenians, who are very numerous in
Poland upon the account of Trade, profess the Roman Catholick religion, being wrought thereto by the zealous industry of
John Casimir. Lately, for the better support of the Roman-Catholick Religion, there was an Article inserted into the
Pacta Conventa, to which this present King swore,
That no Person should be elected to the Kingdom of Poland that was not of the Roman Catholick religion; and that the Queen should be either a Roman Catholick born, or by conversion.
It is considerable that there was not any congregation of the
Antitrinitarians continued from the ancient
Arrians and
Photinians; but the beginning
[Page][Page]PALATINATVS POSNANIENSIS▪ IN MAIOTI POLONIA PRIMARII NOVA DELINATIOPer G. F. M.[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page][Page 13]of them was since the reformation: and they began to appear in
Poland about the year 1560, by the suggestions of certain runnagate
Italians, refuging themselves in Countries where the Nobility have the liberty to set up and maintain what religion they please. These were
Paulus Alciatus a Milanese, a fanatick and very unlearned person,
Valentinus Gentilis, Bernardinus Ochinus, Paulus Orsacius, Franc. Lismaninus, &c. who at first, all of them, professed the reformed Religion; but afterwards fell, some to Arrianism, Photinianism, Anabaptism, Judaism, Mahometanism, and some set up new sects of their own. The first person of quality that appear'd in their defence was
Georgius Blandrata, (a Physitian, sustained first by
Nic. Adzeo surnamed the
Black, afterwards by the
Battori)
Petrus Statorius, and some others. These men having long lurked up and down these Countries, sowing their Tares where they found opportunity, at last were discovered and cited to a Synod of the Reformed: where they answered so ambiguously and cunningly, that they deceived the Synod, and were embraced as Orthodox. In 1565, the King of
Poland permitted a disputation between the Reformed and them; the sum of which is set down by
Possevinus (
De Atheismo haereticorum hujus seculi c. 13.) the success was, that both parties departed with the same opinions they brought thither. But the Reformed in divers Synods drew up out of their several Confessions,
Augustan, Bohemian, and
Helvetian, Articles of their belief concerning the Trinity; which being approv'd by King
Stephen, he allowed them a Church publickly in
Cracow. But the
Antitrinitarians lurked and sheltered themselves here and there under such Nobility as they could perswade to befriend them; nor were they ever established, for when any of their Patrons died, there succeeded most times one of another perswasion; so that they were forced to remove; till they settled at
Racovia under the protection of
Sienjenius: there they set up a School, Press,
&c. But not this till after the coming of
Socinus; who being known by the divers books he had printed, was sent for by
Blandrata about 1579. He learned his opinions from his Uncle
Lelius Socinus, who was the first in that age that revived those doctrines concerning our Saviours mediatorship.
Socinus at his first arrival was taken up with disputes against the dissenters, such as
Franc. Davidis, Christ. Francken, Farnesius, Greg. Pauli, and others, particularly with
Petr. Stoinsky, a very eloquent man; who openly yeilded the cause, and went over to
Socinus; and afterwards assisted him very much in reducing all those that held either Arrianism, or wilder opinions concerning our Saviour. It should seem that
Socinus was most of all favoured by
Morstinius, Blonscius and other Noble-men; and that they were not yet setled in
Racovia; till,
Greg. Pauli who had got in there with his Anabaptists, and called it
New Jerusalem, was by the Magistrates thence dispossess'd. There succeeded
Socinus some persons of more eminent learning, such as
Crellius, Schlitingius &c. whose authority kept the party united till the year 1638; when certain of their Scholars thinking themselves strong enough to exert and defend their zeal, put off their modesty, and threw down a cross near unto their Schools in
Raconia. Of which complaint being made to the Diet, it was commanded, that their Temple, School, and Printing-house should be taken from them, and their Pastors and School-masters banished, which being executed, their Patron
Sienjenius died for grief.
What has been hitherto said, has related to
Poland in general; which, according to the opinion of the best modern Geographers, may be divided into the following Provinces. 1. The
Greater Poland; which contains the Palatinates of
Posnania, Calissia, Lancicia, Bresta, Inouladislavia, Sirad and
Rava, and the Territories of
Vielun and
Dobrin. 2. The
Lesser Poland; in which are contain'd the Palatinates of
Cracow, Sendomir and
Lublin; the Dukedomes of
Oswiec, Tabor and
Aever, and the County of
Scepus. 3.
Lithuania; which consists of three Palatinates of
Vilna, Troco and
Brescia. 4.
Masovia; to which belong the Palatinates of
Masovia, Ploco, and
Podlachia. 5.
Prussia Regia; which is divided into the Palatinates of
Culmo, Mariaeburg and
Pomerania, and the Bishoprick of
Varma. 6.
Samogitia; in which are no Palatinates: but the whole Province is subject to one Governour or Captain. 7.
White Russia; which borders upon the great Dukedome of
Moscovy, and contains the Palatinates of
Novogrod, Micislavia, Viteps, Poloco, Smolensco, Czernichovia and
Kiovia: of which at present a great part is in the hands of the great Duke of
Moscovy. 8.
Red Russia; in which lay the Palatines of
Russia, Podolia, Volhinia, Belze, and
Braclavia. Lastly, the Southern tract of
Livonia is also reckoned among the Provinces of
Poland. But of all these we shall treat more fully in the following Order.
GREAT POLAND.
THe
Greater Poland (containing the Counties of
Posnania and
Calissia,Great Poland. and the Palatines of
Sirad, Rava, Vielun, and
Cujavia; which last is subdivided into the Baronies of
Breste and
Junuvladislavia), is bounded on the South with
Silesia; on the West with the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh, and the upper
Pomeren; on the North with
Masovia, and part of
Prussia; on the East with the
Lesser Poland. 'Tis generally a level champain country, abounding with pleasant Rivers, Lakes, and Ponds, and well furnish'd with all manner of Fish and Fowl. Some parts of
Cujavia indeed are more mountainous; but what those want in pleasure, they repay with profit; the hills every-where affording good store of Wool, and the valleys plenty of Corn.
The Metropolis of the whole Province is
Posnania (called by the
Poles Posnan,Posnania; by the Germans
Posen) seated in 39 degrees of Longitude, and 52 and about 10 minutes of Latitude, on the river
Warta. The City is not large; but well stockt with Merchants from all parts of
Germany. John Lubranski, formerly Bishop of this place, founded here a
Gymnasium (or petty-University) in the suburbs, ordering the Professours to be called from
Cracow, where himself had been Doctor of Laws.
Though this structure has since that time been very much beautifyed by
Adam Canar, one of
Lubranski's successours in the Bishoprick; yet tis still outdone by the Jesuits Colledge and Monastery in
Posen. The people here are civil and gentile; orderly and cleanly in their houses, and go more rich in apparel then is ordinary in any other place in
Poland: Cracow onely excepted; with which notwithstanding
Posen may vie for beauty, trade, and riches. The greatest part of the inhabitants are Roman-Catholicks. However, there are many large swarms of Jews, who live among them, and enjoy more priviledges and immunities then the Citizens themselves. The Town is governed by a Court of
Schipins or Aldermen; who themselves are subject to a Burgo-master, chosen
[Page 14]yearly (as a Mayor in our Cities) out of them: who, during his government has the title of
General of Great Poland conferred on him. The Bishop and Clergy are in the Province of the Archbishop of
Gnesna.
Seven miles from this city you have
Gnesna (called by the Dutch
Gnisen) formerly the Metropolis of
Poland,Gnesna. built by
Lechus the first Duke of
Poland; by whom it had its name given from the Polish word
Gniasao, which signifies a nest: because in this place
Lechus found an Eagles nest. Whence to this day, the Princes of
Poland bear a spread Eagle for their Arms. This is the seat of the chief Metropolitan Archbishop in the whole Kingdome: of whose state and grandeur we have given you a relation before. In the Cathedrall is kept an inestimable treasure of Gold, Silver, and curious enamel'd vessels, left by several Princes of
Poland and Archbishops of this See: which was much encreased by the legacies of
Henry Firley, late Archbishop, who, besides many vessels and vestments of great worth, gave them his own mitre, valued at 24000
Polish guilders; which, being reduced to our English money, will amount to about 2300 pounds sterling. The gates leading into the Cathedral are of
Corinthian brass and rarely wrought. These at first were taken out of the Monastery of
Corsuna in the
Tauric Chersonese; whence they were removed to
Kiow: and from thence brought hither by
Boleslaus the second. In the year 1613 this city was miserably laid wast by fire; and does yet daily loose something of its antient glory.
The rest of the Towns of
Posnania are meanly built, and without any considerable fortifications. Their buildings (excepting onely the Churches, Monasteries, and other religious houses) are most commonly of wood.
The County of
Calissia has its name from the chief City in it,
Calissia. by the
Polanders called
Kalisk; seated on
Przoen and fortifyed with a strong brick wall.
Stanislaus Karncow, Archbishop of
Gnesna, founded here a stately Colledge of Jesuits; and endowed it with a considerable revenue. The countrey round this City is generally, like the rest of the greater
Poland, pleasant, fruitfull and very well cultivated and inhabited; every where abounding with great Towns and villages. Among which
Borek and
Goluchow are the most considerable; the former, for a famous picture of the
Virgin Mary resorted to with a great opinion of devotion by most of the zealous Romanists in these parts; the latter for an extraordinary peice of modern Architecture, in the Palace of the Counts of
Lesno.
The City of
Sirad,Sirad. which gives name to the Palatinate of
Siradia, is seated on the south of
Calissia upon the river
Warta. 'Tis fortifyed with a strong brick wall. Most of the houses are of wood, and very mean and low. This City, and the territories about it, made formerly a Dukedome, usually given to the second son of the Polish King.
Seven German,
Petricow. or twenty nine English miles from
Sirad, lyes
Petricow, a neat and well built City; where sits yearly the Parliament of
Poland.
Vielun,Vielun. or
Wielun, is somewhat differing in beauty from the rest of the Cities of these parts: most of its houses being brick.
Rava is as populous a City as
Vielun,Rava. but short of it in the splendor of its buildings; which are commonly wood: except the castle which is brick. In this is reposited a fourth part of the revenues of the Crown: and all captives, if persons of any considerable quality, are here kept prisoners. Instances whereof we have in the natural son of
Charles King of
Sweden, who (with other officers of the
Swedish army) was taken prisoner in the
Lifland wars; and
Baldise General of
Gustaphus Adolphus's forces, who (with
Streffe, Taiste, and other Colonels) was taken in the wars of
Prussia.
Five German,
Lowicz. or twenty English miles from
Rava lies
Lowicz; the residence of the Archbishop of
Gnesna. 'Tis a place much more populous then
Rava, and yearly (in the Fair-time) throng'd with great numbers of merchants, who flock thither from all quarters. The Archbishop's Palace is seated in a low and marshy ground; nevertheless its fabrick is magnificent, and well becoming the state of so great a Prince.
Lancicia (or
Lanschet) giving denomination to a Palatinate of the same name,
Lancicia. is situate in a low and fenny ground; encompassed with a ditch and brick wall. Not far from the City is a Monastery; which might easily (if as well provided for by art as nature) be made impregnable. There is besides little in the City worth taking notice of; except the great fairs kept once a year; and the sessions of the Deputies of this Palatinate, which are here holden.
Cujavia is bounded on the East with
Masovia and the Palatinate of
Rava:Cujavia. on the south with the Palatinates of
Lanschet and
Calissia: on the north with
Prussia. It contains in it two Baronies,
Breste, which lies to the east and south; and
Juniuladislavia. This Countrey is rich in corn and cattel, and well stored with Fish.
In the Palatinate of
Bresty lies the City of
Ʋ ladislaw:Bresty. the seat of the Bishop of
Cujavia and
Pomeren. The Cathedral here is a pitiful old-fashioned peice of building; but well furnished with plate and rich ornaments and reliques within. The houses are generally of brick.
Matthias Golanciew (who was forty two years Bishop of this See) beautifyed this City very much; by building that stately Palace which is seen at this day in
Ʋladislaw, instead of an old ruinous castle, and founding the Church of St.
Vital the Martyr. The next considerable place is
Bresty; built of brick and wood interlayd. The other Towns of note are,
Nisaw, a wall'd Town;
Rasienski, guarded with a fair Castle;
Radschow, seated on the lake
Goplo; and
Kowale, upon the
Vistula.
Cruswick belongs properly to the Palatinate of
Bresty, though situated upon the confines of
Inouladislavia.Cruswick. In the suburbs of this City stands a Church dedicated to St.
Peter, built of square stone; with a Colledge of twenty four Canons. In the adjoyning Island stands a Brick Castle, built by
Popielus the elder, who chose this place to live in, rather then
Cracow or
Gnesna (whither he had once removed his Court) as being of too timorous a nature to trust himself in the confines of the
Russians or
Hungarians. Here (as the
Polonian Chronicles report)
Papielus, son of
Papielus the elder, was devoured by mice: heaven, by this punishment, revenging the blood of several of his relations, whom his greedy ambition of swaying the scepter had prompted him to poyson at a banquet.
Cromer advances the story by telling us, That his father, in his ordinary revels, used to wish himself and his children this kind of death; and, That the mice were miraculously generated out of the carcases of his poyson'd kindred.
The Palatinate of
Inouladislavia (or
Inoulocz) comprehends the territories of
Bydgost, Bebro,Inouladislavia. and
Inoulocz: reaching fron
Cruswick and the lake
Goplo as far as the
Vistula and confines of
Pomeren.
[Page][Page]PRUSSIA ACCURATE INSCRIPTAa Gasparo Henneberg Erlichensi[blazon or coat of arms]
Nobiliss.
o & tam prosapia generis quam Meritis in Patriam Honoratiss.
o Viro D.
o NICOLAO VON BODECK. Consuli et Primario Iudici in celeberrion totius Maris Baltici Emporio. Vrbe Gedanensi▪ artium literarumque
[...]autori benevolentiss.
o
D. D. D.
Ioannes Ianssonius.
[Page][Page 15]There are in it several Towns, of note and villalages, all of them built of wood. It sends to the Parliament of
Poland, besides the Palatine, four
Castellanes, of
Inoulocz, Bydgost and
Conarow. Bydgost is a walled-Town, seated on the river
Barde (by which all sorts of merchandize are brought from the
Vistula) and trades much in Sammon. The rest, worth taking notice of are,
Gnieucow, Vartislaw, Solete, Dibow and
Strelec; in which last stands the richest Nunnery in the greater
Poland.
MASOVIA.
Masovia (called by the
Polanders Mazowsze, by the
Germans Die Masaw), lies in the very middle of
Poland, bounded on the north with
Prussia; on the east with
Lithuania and
Polessia, on the west with some part of the lesser
Poland; on the south, with the Palatinate of
Rava. 'Tis usually divided into these four parts: The Palatinates of
Podlachia, Plockzo, Masovia, strictly so called, and the territories of
Dobrin; which last ought rather to be reckoned a part of the Palatinate of
Plockzo. There are different conjectures touching the original of its name. The most commonly received is; That, upon the death of
Mieceslaus the second, the Nobility of
Poland (not enduring the impotent and effeminate government of his surviving Queen
Rixo) layd hands upon what every man could catch. Among these
Masos (or, as others call him,
Maslaus) formerly Cupbearer to the deceased King, siezed upon that large tract of land which he, after his own name, called
Masovia. This
Masos was afterwards overcome by
Casimir the first; by whom he was taken and put to death. By this means it was again restor'd to the Crown of
Poland: though it still retained the name of
Masovia. But
Stanislaus Serictius (rejecting, in part, this story), derives more probably the
Massovii from the
Massagetes. I know, saith he,
what our Historians have written touching the original of the Massovians. But it seems incredible to me, that so famous and couragious a people should stoop to borrow their denomination from so mean a person. In the year 1220
Lescus the white, in the Parliament of
Sandomir, granted the Dukedomes of
Masovia, Cujavia, and
Dobrinia to his brother
Conrade: from which time it was governed by Dukes of its own (doing homage however to the Kings of
Poland) till the the year 1495, but then the race of the Dukes of
Masovia began to fail. For that year
John Duke of
Masovia dyed a Batchelour; upon which
John Albert reunited
Plockzo to the Crown, leaving the rest of
Masovia to his brother
Conrade. Which (after his decease in the year 1503) was granted to his children, upon condition, that for default of male issue, it should return to the Crown: which was effected in the reign of
Sigismund the first. In the same manner the Palatinate of
Podlachia (formerly belonging to
Masovia, and joyned by
Casimir Jagellon to
Lithuania) return'd to the Kingdom of
Poland in the year 1567. There are no peculiar Bishops in
Masovia: but the whole Province is divided under the jurisdiction of
Posnan, Plockzo, and
Luceoria.
The Metropolis of
Masovia is
Warsaw (by the
Polanders called
Warfrawa) seated in the very centre of the
Polish dominions, upon the
Vistula: encompassed with a double wall and deep ditch: distant 40 German, or 160 English miles from
Posen and
Cracow. Here the King of
Poland keeps his Court, in a large four squared Palace, built by
Sigismund the third; but much beautifyed by his successours. Over against this, on the other side of the river (which is passable by a stately wooden bridge) sits the great Parliament of
Poland in another of the Kings Palaces called
Viasdow, seated in the midst of many and delicate Groves and Gardens. In the City are publique buildings of good note; the most remarkable of which is St.
John Baptists Church: where divine service is performed by secular Canons. Not far from
Viasdow (in the suburbs called
Cracow) stands, as a trophie of the victory obtained by the
Poles over the
Moscovite, a small Chappel, built (by the Kings command) for the burial of
Demetrius Suiscius, great Duke of
Moscovie, who dyed a captive in the Castle of
Gostenin.
The Nobility of
Masovia (which are more numerous then in any other part of
Poland; being reckoned to amount to near forty thousand, whereof fifteen thousand appear'd in a body at the Coronation of
Sigismund the third) are all Roman-Catholicks: never suffering any of other religions or opinions to reside among them. Out of these are sent yearly, to the general Assembly of the Estates, one Palatine and six Castellanes.
The Palatinate of
Plockzo lyes eastward from
Masovia: between the
Vistula and
Prussia.Plockzo. 'Tis divided into the territories of
Plockzo, Zavera, Mlava and
Srensco; and sends out, to the great Parliament, four Senators: that is, The Bishop, The Palatine and Castellanes of
Plockzo, Radzyagas, and
Sieprez. It has its name from
Plockzo, its chief City, seated on a high bank of the
Vistula; whence you have a fair prospect of a pleasant and fruitful Countrey. The City is an Episcopal See; and very populous. There are in it several religious houses and Churches, besides the Cathedral, very well endowed: especially the Abby of
Benedictines in the suburbs; where, among other reliques, is kept the head of St.
Sigismund (to whom the Church is dedicated) enchased in gold, given by
Sigismund the third.
The territory of
Dobrizin is properly a part of the Palatinate of
Plockzo; though Mr.
Blaeu,Dobrzin. and some others, have made it a distinct part of
Masovia. It has its name from the City
Dobrzin, situate, between
Cujavia and
Plockzo, on a rock near the banks of the
Vistula. The houses in it are generally of wood; and the whole City is environed with wooden fortifications. The Countrey affords great store of fruit and fish.
PRƲSSIA.
Whence
Prussia or
Borussia (called by the
Germans Preussen) should fetch its name,
Prussia. is not easily determined. Certain it is, That it is not to be met with amongst antient authors.
Cluverius thinks
Helmoldus, who flourished in the twelfth Century, is the oldest writer that gives any account of the Countrey under this name. But both
Dithmarus (who lived in the beginning of the eleventh Century, in the days of the Emperour
Henry the second) and, before him, an
Anonymous writer of the life of St.
Adalbert (the Apostle of the
Prussians) about the year 990 mentions it;
Marianus Scotus will have the word derided from
Aprutis; a City, saith he, in these parts, where St.
Adalbert suffered martyrdome in the year 995. But this conjecture is vain and precarious: for where any City of this name formerly stood, or its ruins can at this day be found, only he himself can tell us.
Johannes Annius Viterbiensis tells us, the
Prussians were at first called
Pruti; and that from one
Prutus a
Scythian King, grandchild to
Noah. That this nation
[Page 16]is an offspring of the antient
Scythians is indeed allowable: but to the rest of the story we can say no more then, That 'tis well known how nimble this author and his feign'd
Berosus are at counterfeiting of names in the Etymologies of Countries. Others (of the same authority with
Viterbiensis) bring the
Prussians out of
Asia, under the command of
Prussia a King of
Bithynia. Some will have the word
Prussi, or
Prutheni, corrupted from
Bructeri; an antient people of
Germany, who (say they) conquered and peopled these parts. The most probable opinion is, that the
Prussians are the same with the
Borusci, a people formerly inhabiting some parts of
Russia, about the
Raphaean mountains; whence they were driven out by excessive snows and cold. For (to omit the affinity there is among the three words
Borusci, Borussi, and
Prussi) the antient language of the
Prussians is onely a dialect of the
Russian; as we shall have occasion to shew by and by.
Who were the first inhabitants of
Prussia is harder to find out then the etymology of the word. Many, as well ancient as modern Geographers, think
Eridanus and the
Insulae Electrides (so famous for the
Electrum, or Amber, carryed all
Greece and
Italy over) were in this country. But who in those days peopled the land, they dare not determine. The most likely story is, that the
Venedi or
Venedae (a large branch of the
Slavonian Nation) were here seated. This seems plain from the words of
Ptolomy, who tells us, the
Venedi, upon the
Vistula, had on the South the
Phinni and
Gythones. And
Cluverius confirms the assertion from several places in
Liefland, which to this day retain the names of
Wenden, Windaw, Ʋschewende, &c. Hence came the mistake of the
Latin Poets; who, having read that
Electrum was brought from the
Venedi, confounded these people with the
Venetians of
Italy, and fancied
Padus was the ancient
Eridanus. Besides the
Venedi, the
Galindae and
Sudini are here placed by
Ptolomy; and
Hartknoch proves, from the idolatrous worship used formerly in
Prussia, that the
Goths were sometime masters of the country. The
Aelii and
Aelvaeones (reckon'd by some writers as the ancient inhabitants of
Prussia) were
Goths.
At this day the
Prussians are a kind of heterogeneous people, made up of
Swedes, Polanders, Germans, and others of the neighbouring Nations.
The whole country is bounded on the North with the
Baltick Sea for fifty
German, or two hundred
English, miles together; on the East, with
Lithvania and
Podlachia; on the South, with
Masovia; on the West with the
Vistula; which separates it from
Cassubia and part of
Pomeren.
The chief Rivers in it are, the
Vistula, Nemeni, Cronon, (called by the Natives at this day
Mimel, and near the mouth of it
Russ),
Nogat, Elbing, Vuser, Passar, Alla, Pregol, Ossa, Ʋrebnicz, Lice, and
Lave. By the help of these, and the convenient havens which are every-where found upon the
Baltick shore, all the commodities of the country are easily exported, and foreign wares brought in.
The inhabitants are generally strong-body'd and long liv'd.
Adam Brememsis (in his description of
Denmark, and the Northern parts of
Europe) tells us, the
Prussians were grey-ey'd and yellow-hair'd. The same opinion the ancients had of all the Northern Nations; whence
Sidonius Apollinaris speaking of the
Heruli, who doubtless came out of this country, saith:
Hic glaucis Herulus genis vagatur,
Imos Oceani colens recessus;
Algoso prope concolor profundo.
And
Ausonius, speaking of
Bissula, a
Swabish Virgin taken captive by the
Romans, says of her:
Sic Latiis mutata bonis, Germana maneret,
Ʋt facies, oculos caerula, flava comis.
But since the
Prussians have mix'd themselves with other Nations, and admitted of the modish luxury of the rest of the
European countries, they are neither so healthy, nor of the same complexion, as formerly.
The apparel of the
Prussian-Gentry is not much different from, tho not altogether so gaudy as, that of the more Southern Nations. The Rusticks wear, after the fashion of their forefathers, long and strait coats of course wool or leather. 'Tis reckon'd an argument of more then ordinary riches, if a Yeoman be able to purchase an holiday Suit of course
English cloth.
Tho the
Venedi, as
Tacitus witnesses, were the first of the
Scythian race that forsook their waggons (which their ancestors were wont to live in), and begun to build houses; yet their successors are not yet arrived at any great curiosity in Architecture. Near the
Vistula indeed, which is the ancient seat of the
Venedi, the houses are magnificent, in comparison of the wooden huts which you meet with towards the wild confines of
Lithvania. Tacitus tells us, the
Phenni, who dwelt in these parts, had no other shelter from the injuries of the weather and wild beasts, then the boughs of trees twisted together. And to this day the invention is not much improved; for the rude commonalty have yet no other habitation then hovels made of stakes interwoven with rods, and cover'd with earth, at best a little fern. The many incursions which have been made into this country, upon the several late quarrels of the Dukes of
Brandenburgh with the
Polander and
Swede, have forced them to raise some Castles and Fortifications of stone; but otherwise a stone-house is as rare as a coat of
English Freeze. Nor is there any greater advancement made in their lodgings; for the ancient
Prussians lay on the ground, or sometimes on the skins of beasts, and these sleep on straw.
They are naturally content with spare diet, and more given to sloth then gluttony or drunkenness. The most ordinary food they have is fish; their land abounding with great store of Rivers and Lakes, to the number (as they have been formerly reckon'd by some of their Monks) of two thousand thirty and seven. They never used to eat herbs, or any manner of roots, before the
Teutonick order came among them. So that, it seems not so natural to man (if we may judge of mans nature, by the actions of these men, who had never yet studyed luxury in variety of meat and drink) to feed upon the fruits of the earth; as
Aristotle, in his Oeconomicks would perswade us.
The drinks used heretofore in
Prussia, as well as the neighbouring Countries, were water, Mares-milk mixed (sometimes) with blood, and Mead. This last is still much in use among them; and made in such quantities, that they can afford to send it into other Nations. From the
Germans they have learned the art of brewing beer. They have been alwaies (and are still, both men and women) much given to drunkenness; seldome, or never, keeping holiday without a fit of it; and judging they have not made a friend welcome enough except the whole family be drunk in the entertainment.
Though the
Prussians had little use of mony among them, before the arrival of the
Teutonick order, in the thirteenth Century; yet they traded
[Page][Page]TRACTUUM BORUSSIA circum Gedanum et Elbingam▪ ab incolis WERDER appellati▪ cum adiuncta NERINGIA▪ nova et elaboratissima delineatioAuthore Olao Ioannis Gotho
[...]
To the
[...]orp. WILLIAM PEACHEY
Esq of New Grov
[...] in SUssex This Mapp is Hum-
bly Dedicated.
[Page][Page 17]with the
Germans and other people long before that time, giveing furrs and hides in exchange for linen, and such other commodities as they needed. The chief trade they had, lay in the
Electrum, or Amber, so famous among the antients; though that was at last laid aside; the idle nation contenting it self with the bare provision of necessaries. What this
Electrum should be, all Historians, that write of
Prussia, have busied themselves to find out. The Poets feigned it to be the tears of the
Heliades, deploring the harsh fate of their brother
Phaeton. Some Philosophers have fancied, 'tis nothing else but the fat sweat of the Sea. Others tell us, 'tis the gum of a tree; but cannot agree what kind they should pitch upon; whether Poplar, Cedar, or Elm.
Kircher is of opinion, that 'tis only a bituminous substance, which, rising from the bottome of the Sea, is toss'd to and fro by the waves, till brought to a consistency. But no man ever that liv'd upon the
Baltick, could yet observe any such
Bitumen on those Seas. Besides the veins of Amber, which are found under ground, in places far distant from the Sea, do sufficiently evince the contrary. It is confessed that now and then 'tis met with in the Baltic Sea, and in the adjoyning Lakes and Rivers; but when this happens, we must suppose those fragments broke off from some vein under water by the violence of a flood or tempest. Mr.
Hartman (a late
German author, who has printed a large treatise
de succino Prussico) gives this final determination of the nature of it;
since, saith he,
it can neither be melted nor is malleable, 'tis impossible it should be metal; and because 'tis too solid a body to come under the species of Sulphur or Bitumen, it must needs be ranked among the kinds of precious stones. Amber or Succinum is a coagulation of Petroleum; which being of divers colours, white, yellow, red, black,
&c. accordingly grows into divers substances. Whilst very liquid, like Oyl, it is called Petroleum; if somewhat thicker and clammier, 'tis
Naphtha; if still more, it is Bitumen; but if into a hard and stony substance; if of such colours it becomes white, yellow, red, black Amber; if very black, it is Gagates or Jet. In breaking the Rocks near
Tangier for the Mole, they frequently find Amber growing in the clefts of the stones.
Pliny tell us, 'twas called heretofore, by the
Germans, Glessum, or Glass, because of its transparency; and that thence the
Romans called the Island where it was gathered
Glessaria, which by the
Barbarians was, before
Cesar Germanicus came into these Seas with his fleet, named
Austrania (I had rather read
Austania; for the ordinary
German name for Amber is
Augsteyn, because 'tis good for the eyes.)
The
Prussians, as we have said, had little or no knowledge of the use of mony before the arrival of the
Teutonick order among them, in the year 1230. These men, coming out of
Germany, brought with them the coin of their Country. Among the rest of their peices of mony, the broad
Bohemian Gross was long currant both in
Prussia and
Poland. But, not judging that small stock they had brought with them sufficient to furnish the Country with mony, they presently begun to set up Mints and Coin peices of their own: which they did so accurately, that most Nations have granted, that the art of coining was here first brought to perfection. Whence the Learned Sr.
Henry Spelman thinks, our
English word
Sterling came from the
Easterlings, who coming out of
Prussia, first taught the art of refining and coining purer silver in
England, then before their coming had been made use of. The species of mony currant at this day in
Prussia, are these:
1. A
Schilling; which contains six pence (or
Pfennings) none of which are now in use in single peices.
2. A
Gross; which consists of three
Schillings. Twenty of these
Grosses make
3. A
Mark.
4. A
Gulder is made of thirty
Grosses.
5. A
Dollar (or
Thaler) is worth three
Gulders. Two
Dollars make
6. A
Ducate; valued at nine shillings
English.
These are the most ordinary and proper Coins of
Prussia: though
Swedish and
Danish mony is currant too. Some of the late
Prussian writers will have the word
Schilling fetch its name from one
Bernhard Schilling, who first stamp'd this kind of Coin. But this fancy is confuted by
Schottelius; who nevertheless is himself baffel'd in the Etymology of the word. The
Gross had its name given it, because 'twas the greatest peice of mony made use of in the infancy of coinage. The lower
Saxons (changing, according to their manner, the high
Dutch s into
t) call it a
Grott; whence we have our word
Great. A
Mark was formerly no peculiar piece of Coin; but a certain weight of mony, worth thirty six of the
Marks now used in
Prussia. So that it had not this name, as
Loccenius guesses, from the
German word
Mark, because 'twas marked or stamped with some particular Coin; but was only used in that Country in reckoning of mony, as we count by pounds (and marks) and the
French by
Livres; though neither of us have any piece of mony of that value.
Gulder signifies no more then a peice of Gold Coin. A
Dollar (or
Thaler, as the
Dutch write it) has its name from the
German Thal, a valley or dale; because first coined at the Mines in
Joachim's-dale, in the year 1517; whence for a while, instead of the word
Thalerus, they used
Joachimicus for a
Dollar. The worth and value of every one of these are almost yearly changed, by the continual allays of brass and copper mixt with silver; and other intrigues of state.
That the
Venedi (the first inhabitants of some parts of
Prussia) spoke the
Slavonian tongue,
Language. is beyond all controversy. After them, the
Goths brought in a dialect of the
Celtick, little differing from the
German, tongue: but this wrought little change among the
Prussians, who (till the arrival of the
Teutonick order) spoke, as they do still in many places, a language fundamentally the same with what the
Russians, Polonians and
Lithuanians now use.
Grunovius indeed, a
Prussian born, is of another opinion; because the
Polanders do not at all understand a
Preusner, and the
Lithuanians very little. But how invalid this argument is, any one may perceive, who shall consider with what difficulty an
Austrian, Lunenburger and
Fleming (and how much more a
Dane, German and
Englishman) would discourse together. A mixture of the
Slavonian and
German tongues, and a revolution of (perhaps) two thousand years, must needs alter the
Prussian language considerably from what it was at first.
What time
Prussia,Religion. with the adjoyning Countries, began to leave off their Idolatrous worship, and to be converted to Christianity is hard to discover.
Stanislaus Lubienscius, Bishop of
Plockzo, thinks
Andrew the Apostle first planted the Gospel in these Northern Climates. Others, more punctual in the story, tell us, That the same Apostle sayl'd out of
Greece by the
Euxine Sea, and (coming up the
Boristhenes or
Dnieper) landed at
Kiow, then the Metropolis of
Russia; whence he went forward, baptizing and converting the Heathens, as far as the
Baltick Sea. Some, upon
[Page 18]as shallow ground as the former, will have St.
Bartholomew and
St. Thaddaeus first preachers in
Prussia. However, all agree in this; That, towards the latter end of the tenth Century, St.
Adalbert or
Albert (Bishop of
Prague in
Bohemia and (say the
Polish writers) afterwards Archbishop of
Gnesna) came through
Poland into
Prussia; where he either first planted, or restor'd, Christianity. But, the Heathenish Priests (perceiving innovation of religion inconsistent with their interest) made the people so incensed against
St. Adalbert, that they slew him barbarously at
Fischhausen in
Sambland, in the year 997. Upon this,
Boleslaus the first (King of
Poland) enters
Prussia with a great army, and brought the inhabitants to these conditions of peace; That they should pay tribute to
Poland, and embrace the Christian religion. And, to prevent for the future all relapse into Idolatry and superstition, he burnt up the great Oak at
Romanove; the temple of three of their superior Gods. But no sooner had he left them, then they forsook Christianity, and return'd to their Idols. After him, three of his successours (of the same name) did several times reduce them to Christianity and homage to the Crown of
Poland. But all in vain; For, at the first opportunity, they were sure to throw of both yokes. In the beginning of the thirteenth Century, the
Polish Nobility (having rent that Kingdome in pieces) neglected the conversion of the
Prussians for a while. However, about the year 1215,
Christianus, a
Cistertian Monk, was very busy in confirming them in the principles they had received; and to that end, by the Pope's command, took upon him the authority of a Bishop. But finding his own power insignificant, he was quickly forced to beg the assistance of
Conrade Duke of
Masovia. This expedient also proved unsuccessful. For the Knights of
Dobrin, whom the Duke had opposed to the fury of the
Prussians, making incursions into
Masovia, were all vanquished and slain by the Idolaters. When all these expedients prov'd unsucccessful, the Christians begun to consider of some other means of converting the
Prussians: since no fair usage would work upon such a stubborn people as they found these were, they pitcht upon the Knights of the
Teutonick Order (famous at that time all Christendom over) as most likely, either to perswade or force them into Christianity.
Conrade, Duke of
Masovia, pleased with these proposals, immediately dispatches letters to the Master of the Order; profering him the land of
Culm, and auxiliary forces, in case he should meet with any opposition. Upon this, in the year 1226,
Herman de Salza (fourth Master of the
Teutonic Order) forthwith sends
Herman de Balke, one of his Knights, among the
Prussians, with the title of
Superintendent (afterwards changed into
Provincial) of
Prussia. But so vigorously did the Heathens oppose these undertakings, that it was fifty three years before they could be brought to renounce their Idolatry. After Christianity began to take root among them, several Bishopricks and Monasteries were founded. Notwithstanding all which, many Heathenish Cities were winked at: for the barbarous commonalty could not, but by degrees, be weaned from their antient folly. Besides, the Masters of the Order minded the enlargement of their own power and dominion more then the preaching of the Gospel; being grown to that height of insolence, that they despised the Canons and Constitutions of the Church of
Rome, and sleighted the Popes threats and excommunication. This neglect gave way to many Schisms and divisions in the
Prussian Church; insomuch, that the
Waldenses, Wiclesians, and
Hussites, had almost overrun the Land. However, the
Teutonic Order still professed the Roman-catholic religion, till the days of
Alhert Marquess of
Brandenburgh, last Master of that order, and first Duke of
Prussia; who having (not without a great deal of blood-shed) rejected the
Polish yoke, about the year 1520, began to embrace
Martin Luther's opinions, and (by his own example and authority) first perswaded the greatest part of the
Teutonic order to marry; and by degrees won over the whole Country to
Lutheranism. The present Elector of
Brandenburgh (being himself a
Calvinist) has countenanced of late
Calvinism in
Konigsberg, and other chief Cities of
Ducal Prussia, but in
Dantzick, and the other Towns upon the
Vistula, which are subject to the Crown of
Poland, the people are
Lutherans.
The same Laws and Judicature are not observed all
Prussia over. For some parts of it only, (known by the name of
Prussia Regalis) are subject to the Kings of
Poland, and those too enjoy several peculiar privileges and immunities: the rest (which usually goes under the name of
Ducal Prussia) is immediately subject to the Elector of
Brandenburgh.
The three Islands called commonly by the High Dutch
Die Werder.
The chief part of the
Regal Prussia lyes in the three Islands between
Elbing and
Dantzick; which the
Germans call
Die Werder, which signifies properly so many solid pieces of ground in the middle of fenns and bogs.
The first and least of these,
Dantzick. is
der Dantzicher Werder, or Island of
Dantzick, which is seated on the North-West end of it, upon the
Vistula. When, and by whom, this City was built at first, is not certainly known.
Becanus thinks, twas built by the
Danes; and from them called
Danswick i. e. the City of the
Danes. But this derivation of the word has too much Dutch in it. 'Tis more probable that to the word
Dan (
Codan, Cdan or
Gdan) was added only the
Slavonian termination
Scke which made
Danscke or
Gdanscke, changed afterwards into
Dantzig. The chief part of the City
(Die rechte Stadt) was built by
Conrad Wallenrodt Master of the
Teutonic order about the year 1390. St.
Maries Church in
Dantzick is the stateliest Fabrick in
Prussia: having in it forty eight altars and 3722 windows. The font in it was made at
Antwerp, and cost 24000 Rixdollars, or 5400 pound
Sterling. The City is exceeding populous, and a place of the greatest trade in these parts.
The next Island is
Der Marienbursche Werder,Marienburg. the greatest of the three: which takes its name from
Marienburg a pleasant City on the banks of the
Negat. The Castle of
Marienburg was built in the year 1281. It was reckoned the strongest hold the King of
Poland has, and by the
Preusners set in competition with the best forts in Christendom; according to their hobbelling verse:
Margenburg ex luto, Offen ex Saxo, ex Marmore Meiland.
And
Faelix Pidelarus has given this bold character of it.
Fundamenta latent domibus camerata profundis,
Firmior Arctoo nulla sub axe jacet.
This old Castle was burnt down in the late
German wars, and a new one built in its place; short
[Page][Page 19]of the former, if that deserv'd the
Elogium they give it. The town it self is but meanly built; most of its houses being wood. The Inhabitants are poor and beggarly. For, though the Island be rich ground, yet it costs near its worth to preserve it from the overflowing of the
Vistula; which is done by great banks cast up on each arm of the River. The best mead in
Prussia is made here.
The third Island is
Der Elbingscher Werder, [...] so called from the City of
Elbing seated in it.
Ptolomey seems to place his
Aelveones and
Tacitus his
Helvecones near this place: whence
Fridericus Zamelius takes the liberty to call this City
Augusta Aelvaeonum and
Aelveopolis, not doubting but it had its name from these antient people.
Hennebergerus more probably brings the name from
Oehlsing, Oelfang or
Eelfang, that is, a place where Eels are caught. But
Conringius (a very learned professor of Physick in the University of
Helmstad) with most judgment brings the word from
Elff which was a common name given by the
Goths almost to all Rivers: For 'tis certain the
Gothes lived here for some considerable while: though it be but a meer guess to affirm that this was the seat of
Ptolomey's Aelveones or
Tacitus's Helvecones. Elbing, as it now stands, was built about the middle of the thirteenth Century by the Burgers of
Lubeck; who prevailed with the Master of the
Teutonic Order to suffer it to enjoy the same Laws and Priviledges which the Emperour
Friderick the second had granted to
Lubeck. The Master gave them also for their arms (which the City still bears) two Crosses, and a net out of the arms of
Lubeck: but in the year 1454 they delivered their laws, libertyes, City and themselves into the dominion of the King of
Poland. The City is well built and very clean. There is in it great store of
English who trade here in cloth: though their number has of late been something abated by the greater concourse of Merchants to
Dantzig. The Country
Rusticks in the neighbourhood of
Elbing have as well built houses and as rich clothes as most Noblemen in
Pomeren; and you can scarce here discern a Bore from a Burger by his habit. The whole Island is a level champagn Country like
Holland; and as fruitful too and well peopled as any part of that Province,
Amsterdam excepted.
Prussia Regia.
THe other parts of
Prussia, [...] more immediately subject to the Crown of
Poland, are the following Cities, all seated on the banks of the
Vistula.
1.
Dersavia, or
Dirschau; called formerly
Zuder-Sau, because seated on the bank of a small river of that name, which runs into the
Vistula. It was built in the year 1209; burnt 1433; and utterly destroyed 1577. So that now there is little of it to be found, but ruins.
2.
Marienwerder, or the City of
St. Mary in the Island, was built by
Burehard Burgrave of
Magdeburg (about the year 1233), who fenced it with walls and a strong Castle. This City has been often in the hands of the Electors of
Brandenburgh; whence, commanding all the Ships that came up and down the
Vistula, they could easily spoil the whole trade of
Poland.
3.
Culm; an antient and famous City, giving name to that great tract of Land which from it is called
Culmigeria, or
the Land of Culm. Most of the
Prussian writers will have
Culmigeria to fetch its name from the
Hulmigeri; antient inhabitants of these parts. And 'tis as probable the
Hulmigeri might have their name fr
[...]Holm (easily turned, according to the idiom of the Northern languages, into
Culm) which signifies a piece of firm ground among boggs, such as
Culm is at this day seated upon. The City was built (or rebuilt rather) by
Herman de Balk, first provincial of
Prussia in the year 1232. As soon as it was finished
Herman de Salza, Master of the
Teutonic Order, gave Laws and Constitutions
(Die Kulmsche Handveste) for its government: a specimen of which antient Canons is given by
Lambecius, out of an old
Dutch Manuscript in the Emperor's Library at
Vienna. The City at present looks old and ruinous; but is still a Bishop's Sec. The
Lutherans were permitted the exercise of their religion in private houses, by a publick edict signed and published in this City by
John Malachowski, Bishop of the Diocess, the thirteenth of March 1678.
4.
Thoorn; built at the same time with
Culm, by the Knights of the
Teutonic Order, for a post against the Heathen
Prussians; but not in the place where it now stands. Old
Thoorn was seated a mile West-ward from the new; where to this day are found the ruins of an old Castle and City. By whom, and when,
new Thoorn was first founded, is not easily determined: for when in the year 1454 this part of
Prussia delivered it self up into the hands of the King of
Poland, the
old and
new Thoorn joyned interests, and made up one entire Corporation betwixt them. Whence it hapned, that the records of the new City were neglected and lost.
Thoorn seems to have had its name from the
German word
Thor, a gate; because built by the
Teutonic Order, as a gate to let in such forces into
Prussia as they should have occasion for. Hence, the arms of
Thoorn are a Castle and Gate half open. At present this City is the neatest and best built in
Regal Prussia. The streets are much broader, and the houses statelier then at
Dantzig. It owes much of its beauty to
Henry Stroband, Burgo-master of the Town, who died in the year 1609. He built the
Gymnasium here, and endowed it with a considerable revenue, for the maintenance of several Lecturers, and poor scholars. He founded also the Hospital and public Library; and built a-new the Town-hall, which (were it not of late out-done by the
Stadthuis at
Amsterdam) might be reckoned the stateliest in
Europe of its kind.
The rest of this Country (comprchended under the general name of
Ducal Prussia) is subject to the Elector of
Brandenburgh; and therefore, as a part of the Empire, shall be treated of in the description of
Germany.
The Great Dukedom of
Lithvania.
WHence this large and noble Country should have its name, is utterly unknown.
Lithvania. 'Tis ridiculous to bring the word from the Latine
Lituus, a hunting-horn; because forsooth the inhabitants are much addicted to hunting.
Erasmus Stella, an Historian of good credit, tells us, some
Prussians under the command of
Litwo, one of their Kings sons, came into these parts about the year 573; and called the land, after their Captains name,
Litwania, or
Litvania. The
Polish Historians agree generally in this story; That
Palaemon, flying the fury of
Attyla, left
Rome, and came with several
Italians into this Country, who gave it the name of
La Italia; which was afterwards corrupted into
Lithvania. The
Lithvanians themselves glory in this derivation of the name of their Country; and prove this story of
Palaemon true by the
Roman names of their Nobles;
Ʋrsin, Column, Julian, &c. But this etymology seems too far fetch'd.
Stella aims fairest, tho he miss the mark a little. For 'tis
[Page 20]certain, the
Prussians did conquer this land, and seat themselves in it; tho the additional story of Prince
Litwo seems feign'd. More likely it is, that the
Prussians not satisfied with their change, call'd the Country
Lithvania from
Litwo, which (in the ancient
Prussian language) signifies a
vagabond or
wanderer.
The ancient inhabitants are thought to have been the
Alani;Antient inhabitants. since the
Lithvanians do still retain some footsteps of the name of these people, in their
Lithalani and
Roxalani. But he that shall compare the account which
Ammianus Marcellinus gives of the manners of the ancient
Alani, with what the best Authors say of the old
Lithvanians, will easily perceive that they are not both one Nation. Their language sufficiently proves them to be of the same original with the
Prussians; and what that is, we told you before.
About the year 1235
Ringeld (son of
Gimbut,Alteration of Government. of the posterity of
Palaemon) is said to have first taken upon him the title of
Great Duke of Lithvania. In the year 1319,
Gedimin (who first built
Vilna) refused to pay homage to the
Russian; and entring
Novogrod with an army, took
Volodimir, and made all
Volhinia swear fealty to the Magistracy of
Lithvania. How large the Dukedom is, may appear from the vast territories he left to each of his seven sons at his death. To
Montvid he gave
Kiernova and
Slomin; To
Narimund, Pinsko, Mozyr and part of the Province of
Volodimir; To
Olgierd, Creve and the Country beyond as far as
Beresine; To
Kieystut, Samogitia and the territories of
Troce, Lida, Ʋpide and
Subsylvania; To
Coriat, Novogrod and
Ʋolkowiski; To
Lubart Ʋolodomir and
Ʋolhinia; To his youngest son
Javnut, Vilna, Osmia, and
Braslaw; designing him for
Great Duke. But soon after, when the
Tartars begun to infest
Volhinia and
Kiow, Javnut was deposed, and his brother
Olgierd made
Great Duke in his place. He in the year 1331, falls upon the
Tartars, and in a short time makes himself Master of
Podolia, which they had kept for some years. About the same time
Demetrius, Duke of
Moscovy, sent an Ambassador into
Lithuania, to demand a restitution of all those Provinces which formerly belong'd to the Dukedom of
Russia. The
Great Duke immediately upon his arrival commits him to close custody; and marching forthwith in the head of his army towards
Moscovy surprised the Duke in his Palace, and forced him to accept of a peace upon this condition; That for the future, the bounds of
Lithuania should reach as far as
Mosco and the river
Ʋgra. When
Ʋladislaus Jagello was chosen King of
Poland, in the year 1386, he promised, that from thence forward the Great Dukedom of
Lithuania should be annexed to that Crown. At the same time the
Lithvanian and
Russian Nobility took an oath of allegiance to the King and Queen of
Poland: which was repeated in the years 1401 and 1414. But this obligation they afterwards shook off. For, when the
Polanders desired to joyn
Volhinia, Podolia, and some other Provinces of
Russia, to their own Kingdom; the
Lithuanians (loath to part with so fair possessions) opposed them with that vehemence, That for several years there was nothing but continuall skirmishes between the two Nations. At last, in the year 1566, differences begun to be composed; which were finally determined A. D. 1569 by articles drawn up, and subscribed to by both parties, in the presence of several Ambassadors of other Nations. The principle Articles agreed upon were these:
That the Lithuanians should for the future disclaim all right and title to the Provinces of Podlachia and Volhinia, and the Palatinate of Kiow; That they should never by themselves elect a Great Duke, but upon a vacancy repair to the place whither they should be summon'd by the Archbishop of Gnesna as Interrex of Poland; That in every such election the Lithuanian and Polish Nobility should have equal power in giving of voices; That whoever by a majority of voices of both Nations should be elected King of Poland, should at the same time be pronounced Great Duke of Lithuania; That the election should always be had in some place near the confines of both Countries; That the Parliament should sit in Poland and Lithuania by turns, &c. In the year 1654, the
Moscovite made many and terrible incursions into Lithuania; which were carried on with that success, that A. D. 1655, he took
Vilna. This hold he kept till the King of
Poland (having made peace with the
Swede, who oppressed him on the other hand) drave him out, and made him retreat as far as the confines of
Moscovy. However, the war ceased not till, in
January 1667, a truce for thirteen years was agreed on upon these conditions:
That Polockz, Vitepski, Duneburg and the hither Liefland should return to the Polander: Provided, that Nevel, Vieliss and Sebisch be excepted from the Palatinates of Polockz and Vitepski; That the Moscovite should retain Smolensko, Sevir and all the Ʋkrain beyond Boristhenes; That Kiow after two years should be restored to the Crown of Poland; &c.
The Country is full of woods and Lakes;
Soil. which yeild good store of Venison and fish. The Forrests also afford them great quantities of honey and pitch. The land is tolerably fruitful; but the extreme cold too often spoils their harvest.
The greatest trade of
Lithvania lies in Pitch,
Commodities. Tar, and Timber: which is transported into
Holland, and other foreign Nations. For these they receive in salt and Wines. For all other necessaries they are well enough provided; being well stockt with great herds of Cattel (though they are not so large as in
Germany and other their neighbouring Countries) and considerable flocks of sheep. Besides, the woods furnish them with Ermins, Sables, and all manner of furs, to defend them from the (otherwise intolerable) sharpness of the air.
The
Lithvanians seem to have natures proportionate to their quality:
Temper
[...] the peop
[...] for the Nobles are as proud and domineering, and the Commonalty as sneaking and mean spirited, here as in any part of
Europe. The reason of such inequality of tempers, proceeds from the unreasonable slavery that Landlords force their Tenants to undergo. If you have but a good train of attendance, you may uncontrolably plunder any peasant's house in the Land: and, if you please, give him a kicking into the bargain. He dares not open his mouth; except to give you thanks for giving over when you are weary. They are bound to serve the Lord of the Mannor five or six days in the week; and if he spares them (as is usually) munday, they must work on sunday for themselves. If any ask them a reason why they labour that day; they will readily reply,
Ought we not to eat on Sundays, as well as other days? In their wars with
Poland, they gave a sad testimony of their barbarous cruelty (the usual attendant of a low spirit), by denying quarter to all Captives, ripping up women with child, murdering of infants,
&c. They are perfidious to their Prince, and regardless of oaths and promises.
Before
Ʋladislaus Jagello brought great numbers of them into
Poland,Appae
[...] and there clad them with woollen, and put shoes on their feet, the
Lithvanians knew no other clothing, then the raw hides of beasts, linnen, and the inner bark of the Linden-
[...]. The Nobles indeed wore
[Page][Page]NOVA TOTIVS LIVONIAE accurata Descriptio.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios et Mosem Pitt.
[Page][Page 21]cloth; but their clothes were brought to them ready made out of other Nations. The common people are not yet so much civilized, but that they wear still in many places their antient apparel.
The
Rusticks eat bread made of the ears of wheat, not winnowed, nor thresh'd. This they call
Duonos, a gift: (for the same reason that the
Polanders call bread
Bozydar, and the
Germans Gottes-gab, the gift of God) and no proverb is more ordinary in the mouthes of the
Lithvanians then,
Dieva dave dantes, Dosi duonos.
i. e.
God that gave teeth, will give bread.
The rest of their diet is flesh, herbs, and roots; of which they have plenty.
The most general drink of the Country, is a kind of Brandy, made of Corn. Besides this, they have some beer, and a sort of mead, boyl'd with Hops; which is kept sometimes an hundred years together in Noblemen's houses. Of late there has been brought hither great quantities of
Spanish and
French wines, from
Konigsberg, and other places near the
Baltick Sea.
The
Lithvanians generally (as well in Cities as Villages) speak the
Russian language: and write all pleadings and proceedings of Courts-judicature in that tongue. However there is a great mixture of
Latin words in their talk; which seems to confirm the story of
Palaemon. So for
Ignis they say
ugnis; unda, wanda; aer, oras; sol, saule; mensis, menuo; dies, diena; ros, rasa, Deus, Diewas, vir, viras, &c. Besides, they have many
Polish words; though these two languages are not originally the same. The
Latin tongue is as common here as in
Poland; and you shall not meet a
Lithvanian (from a Duke to a plowman) that cannot give you an answer in that language. 'Tis probable the
Greeks first taught them how to write; for they call letters
Goomata, [...]: unless perhaps they had them more immediately from the
Russians, who use the same word.
No Nation in
Europe has been more besotted with Idolatry then
Lithvania. Among the rest of their false Gods they (as well as the antient
Egyptians, Greeks, Romans and
Indians) were great worshippers of serpents: and many of them continued so till within these few years. Of which
Signismund, Baron of
Herberstein (
in Comment. rer. Muscovit. P. 84) tells us this memorable story:
‘Returning (says he) lately from
Masovia, at
Troki (a small Town about eight
English miles from
Vilna) mine host acquainted me that that year he had chanced to buy a hive of bees of one of these serpent-worshippers, whom he with much ado had perswaded to betake himself to the worship of the true God, and to kill his adder. Within a while after coming that way he found the poor fellow miserably tortur'd and deformed, his face wrinkled, his mouth awry,
&c. demanding the cause of his misery, he received this answer from him:
That this judgment was inflicted on him for killing his God, and that he was like to suffer heavier torments if he did not return to his former worship.’ Nay to this day here are too great footsteps of this Idolatry: for in many Villages (both in
Lithvania and
Prussia) you shall meet with poor Bores that keep Adders in their houses, to which they (though professed Christians) pay a more then ordinary superstitious respect, and fancy some great misfortune will befall them if these
Laria take any harm. Besides, the antient
Lithvanians had an Idol called by them
Percune, to whom they kept a continual fire burning, with as much caution and diligence as ever the Vestal fire was kept at
Rome. For, if the
Waidelot (or Priest that was to attend the Altar) should happen to let the fire out, he was sure to dy for't. The like ceremonies were performed in remembrance of
Kiern, one of their Princes, on the top of a high hill near
Dziewaltow. These and many other superstitions they seem to have borrowed from the
Romans, who came into this country under the conduct of
Palaemon. Hence they used to burn their dead; expecting (saith
Cajalowicz, part. I. Hist. Lithv. lib. 5.
p. 140.) a resurrection out of the ashes at the coming of a strange God to judge the whole earth from the top of one of their mountains. From these Idolatrous practises they were first converted to Christianity by
Ʋladislaus Jagello, their Great Duke; who
A. D. 1386 upon his marriage with
Hedvig Queen of
Poland turned Christian, and was baptized at
Cracow by
John Bishop of that See. He is said to have been a very pious and zealous Prince, and exceeding diligent in bringing over the whole Dukedom of
Lithvania to the Christian religion. At the first he met with no small opposition: but when the King had cut down their tall trees (the Temples of their Heathenish Gods) and no mischief befell him, the people begun to think their Idols would never take this affront, if able to revenge themselves; and therefore they were resolved to listen to their Princes advice. Whereupon, the King immediately built a Cathedral, and founded a Bishoprick, at
Vilna; and the Queen furnished seven parish Churches in the neighbourhood with Chalices, vestments, and all other necessaries for divine service. The
Russians at that time (as most of them are still) were members of the
Greek Church: so that the King thought good to forbid marriage with a
Russ that would not conform to the Church of
Rome. At this day many
Lithvanians are of the
Greek Church, tho more of the
Roman. In
Vilna, and several other great Towns, vast numbers of the Inhabitants are
Lutherans.
The whole Dukedom is divided into ten Palatinates; the Metropolis and chief of which is
Vilna. The next is the Palatinate of
Troki; 3.
Minsko; 4.
Novogrod; 5.
Breste; 6.
Volhinia; 7.
Kiow; 8.
Miecislaw; 9.
Vitebsk; 10.
Poloxko.
Vilna (called by the Inhabitants
Vilensski, by the
Germans die Wilde) has its name from the river upon which 'tis seated. The houses are generally low and mean; all of wood, excepting only in some streets where Merchants of other nations, that resort hither for trade, have built themselves more then ordinary gentile ones of stone. Most of the Churches are of stone; some of wood. The suburbs are not built here as at other Cities in
Europe, but round the walls in a confused and disorderly manner; every man placing his house (which is nothing else but a wooden booth) where he pleases. The citizens are exceeding poor and idle, slaves to their Nobles and their belly. They are taken notice of for great lovers of onions and garlick; which kind of diet (help'd by their smoaky houses) blinds half of them before they arrive at any considerable age. Their excessive intemperance in drinking, breeds continual quarrels among them. If a stranger be kill'd in any such broil, the murderer pays only sixteen dollars as a mulct. If a
Lithvanian be slain, and the murderer fly; 'tis usual to preserve the dead corps embalmed till they can apprehend the fugitive, whom they cannot condemn without shewing him the carcase of him he slew. There is not one public hospital in the whole City; though it stands in more need of such a provision then any place in
Europe; if we might
[Page 22]judge by the swarms of beggars every street affords. The only peice of neat building is the Monastery of
Bernardine Monks, all of hewn stone. The
Moscovian company of Merchants have also a considerably handsome structure built for a repository of Furrs, Ermines, and other rich merchandise brought from
Mosco. The great Dukes Palace has nothing of note in it, but the armory, which is admirably furnished with all sorts of arms and armour; considering that
Lithvania it self affords no mines of brass or iron. About two
English miles from
Vilna the great Duke has another Palace (called from its situation
Wersupa that is,
near the water) built by
Sigismund King of
Poland, all of wood, and beautifyed with a Park, and pleasant orchards, and gardens.
The rest of the Cities of
Lithvania have little in them observable, save that they give titles to Palatines and Dukes. What numbers there are of these last may be easily guess'd by what is reported of
Vitoldus once Great Duke,
That he had no less then fifty Dukes at once in his army.
Samogitia
THis country has its name from its situation, which is low and wet;
Samogitz, in the language of the inhabitants, signifying a
marshy ground: Whence the
Moscovite calls it
Samotzkasemla.
It is bounded on the North with
Liefland; on the East and South with the great Dukedom of
Lithvania; on the West with the
Baltic sea and some parts of
Prussia.
A great part of the country is continually overflown with rivers and Lakes, unpassable but in a frost. The rest of it is full of woods, which afford good store of hony, purer and better then any in
Lithvania or
Liefland.
The inhabitants differ little from the
Lithvanians either in manners, habit, or language. They are sottishly ignorant, grosly superstitious and easy to be imposed upon. They use no plough in tilling their ground, but dig it up with spades or sticks, as it is usual in some parts of
Moscovy. When one of their governours, having observed how far his countrymen were outdone in their husbandry by other nations, endeavoured to teach them the art of plowing, it chanced that for two years after their crop was not so rich as formerly it had been; whereupon the people attributing the miscarriage to the new device, grew so enraged, that the governour was glad to decry the experiment for fear of an insurrection.
When
Ʋladislaus Jagello had converted the greatest part of
Lithvania, he endeavoured to bring the
Samogitians to the Christian faith. In pursuance of this resolution he goes himself into this country and (burning up their hallowed groves, and destroying the serpents and other creatures they worshipped) with threats and promises made them vow to abandon their former Idolatry, and worship the true God. And for fear that when his back was turn'd they might relapse into their former heathenism, he founded a Bishoprick at
Mzdniki: endowing it with a revenue sufficient for the maintenance of a Bishop and twelve Prebends, who were to officiate at so many parish Churches in and about the City. Howbeit, the good King was not so successful in his undertaking, nor his successours so vigilant in the prosecution of his designs, but that to this day many poor ignorant Idolaters may be found in the desart parts of this country. These (like the
Lithvanians spoken of before) worship a four footed serpent, about three hands long, called in their tongue
Givosit. Without one of these houshold gods you shall scarce find a family. If any mischief befalls them, they think 'tis because the little deity has not been well attended. Another piece of heathenish superstition is still retain'd by the
Rusticks, in the following manner: About the latter end of October they have a general rendezvous of men, women, and children, who bring with them to the place appointed, loaves of bread and vessels full of beer. These they set on a table spread with hay. That done, they bring out a young heifer, a boar and a sow, a cock and hen, with other such cattle and poultry as the house affords, in pairs male and female. When things are thus in readiness, out comes an old Priest or Wizard, who, mumbling over a few hard words, gives the sacrifice a blow with a stick, which stroke is seconded by the whole company till the heifer be dead and beat to pieces. Whilst this ceremony lasts, they cry;
This oblation of thanksgiving we make thee O Ziemiennik (so they call the feigned god)
for that it hath pleased thee to preserve us from all the evils of the year past; and we beseech thee to protect and defend us for the future from fire, sword, pestilence, and all our enemies. After this, they take a little of every dish they have provided and put it in four corners of the house, and in the ground, crying aloud,
Accept O Ziemiennik our offerings, eat with us and be merry. The solemnity thus over, they spend the rest of that day in feasting and drunkenness.
There is no City or great Town in
Samogitia of any consequence.
Mzdniki is a poor and despicable City: all the rest scarce merit the name of villages.
Lithvania and this Province have all along been sharers in the same fortune and change. They were both at once subject to the
Russians; at once overrun by the
Teutonic Order; and at once converted from Idolatry and subjected to the Crown of
Poland by
Ʋladislaus Jagello.
Livonia
LIvonia, or
Liefland, is bounded on the East with
Russia; on the West, with the
Baltic sea; on the North, with the
Finland-bay; on the south, with
Samogitia and some part of
Lithvania. The length of it is about 500
English miles and the breadth near 160.
The country is generally plain and fruitful, abounding with corn and hony: some parts of it are fenny, full of Lakes and rivers.
The many conquests this Land has suffered have made its inhabitants a medly of
Moscovites, Swedes, Danes, Polanders and
Germans. But the last have the greatest share in the country; whence the generality speak
High-Dutch.
The common people are used as hardly here as in
Poland or
Lithvania: and the Nobility lord it as much. Drunkenness and gluttony are vices the
Lieflanders are generally addicted to, from the greatest Lord to the meanest peasant. The Bores would be hard put to't to get a living, considering the untolerable drudgery they undergo, if they had not the priviledge of hunting hares (of which they have great plenty in these parts, white in winter, and brown in summer), foxes, bears, and other kinds of venison.
'Tis agreed upon by all Authors, that
Liefland was first annexed to the Crown of
Poland by
Sigismund Augustus; though the story is told different ways.
Kojalowicz tells us,
‘That
William Furstenburg, Master of the
Liefland Order of Knighthood, upon his turning
Lutheran had frequent quarrels with
William Archbishop of
Riga; whom he accused, at a session of the
[Page 23]Nobility at
Winden, of a conspiracy of betraying
Curland into the hands of
Albert Duke of
Prussia, and the rest of
Liefland to
Sigismund King of
Poland, his kinsman. Upon this pretence, he immediately enters the Archbishop's territories with an army, and takes him prisoner. King
Sigismund, hearing this, wages war with
Liefland, and
A.D. 1557 conquers it.’ But the reasons of this war seem to be grounded upon better pretensions then these. For (though it be true that there arose many skirmishes between the Archbishop and the Master of the Order, touching points of religion, yet) during
Furstenburg's government
Ivan Duke of
Moscovy, and not
Sigismund King of
Poland, overrun and lay wast the greatest part of
Liefland. Against whom
Gothard Ketler, Furstenburg's successour, requested the aid of King
Sigismund; who quickly beat the
Moscovian out of his holds, and created
Gothard Duke of
Curland, annexing the rest of
Liefland to his own dominions. But he found this country was easilier conquer'd then kept. For the
Revalians, finding themselves unable to withstand the dayly incursions of the
Moscovians, committed their land to the protection of
Eric King of
Sweden. Whereupon, this King thought his title to
Liefland was as good as the
Polanders: especially, since
Ferdinand the Emperour had given him the sole charge of defending it. Upon these pretensions he presently routed the
Poles out of
Habsal, Lehale, Parnow, and other places, and put into them garrisons of his own. Besides the
Polish interest received at the same time another fatal blow upon this occasion:
John Duke of
Finland married
Katherine sister to the King of
Poland, to whom he lent 80000 (some say 124000) dollars, upon a mortgage of the castles of
Wittenstein, Karchise, Frichate, Helmult, Ermise, Ruja and
Bortwic; all in
Liefland. Returning into
Sweden he was accused by King
Eric his brother of high treason in offering to make a confederacy (as he call'd it) with
Sigismund Augustus King of
Poland without his consent. In this rage the King robs his brother of all the castles, and takes them into his own hand: not without the pretence of being more able to defend them from the fury of the
Moscovite. Not long after, upon the death of
Eric King of
Sweden and
Sigismund King of
Poland, the Duke of
Moscovy with irresistable force created the great Duke of
Holstein King of
Liefland. When the Kings of
Sweden and
Poland perceived matters brought to this pass, they thought it high time to lay aside all petit animosities between their two Kingdoms and to joyn forces against their common enemy the
Moscovite: fearing lest otherwise whilst they two stood quarrelling for each a shell, he should snatch away the fish. And indeed this confederacy prov'd very successful to the
Swede; who, in the year 1580, retook many strong holds from the
Moscovite: as,
Lode, Lehale, Habsal, Narwe, the Province of
Wicki, Wittenstein, Carelogrod, &c. Steven King of
Poland fearing lest, if the
Swede went on with the same success and vigour he begun with, he would bring all
Liefland to his own beck, claps up a peace with the
Moscovite, unknown to the King of
Sweden, upon these conditions:
That the Moscovite should restore all the places he had taken in Lithvania; That, on the other hand, King Stephen should restore to the Duke of Moscovy Vielikoluk and some other forts he had taken in these wars. After this, when
Sigismund son of
John the third King of
Sweden, was, upon the death of
Stephen, elected King of
Poland, the
Poles admitted him upon this condition,
That he should annex all that part of Liefland which was under his goverment to the Crown of Poland. But
Sigismund the third coming to he Crown of
Sweden could not by any means be perswaded to grant this request. When he was deposed from his Kingdom there arose bloody wars between the King of
Poland and
Charles IX. whom the
Swedes had set up King in his place. These
Gustavus Adolphus continued, and in them overrun almost all
Liefland; till in the year 1629, a truce was made for six years upon these terms:
That in the mean time the King of Sweden should enjoy all he had won. This truce was again renewed for 26 years more,
A.D. 1635. by the mediation of Ambassadours from the Kings of
England and
France, and the States of the
Ʋnited Provinces. In the year 1654, whilst a great part of
Lithvania was laid wast by the
Moscovite, Charles Gustavus King of
Sweden, before the 26 years were expir'd, proclaimed war against the King of
Poland, alledging, among other things, as a reason for his proceedings, That the
Polish Ambassadour at
Stockholm had protested against his succession to the Crown of
Sweden. At the beginning the fortune of the war went much on his side; but within a short while the
Danes making incursions into
Sweden, forced him to quit
Poland, and be more concern'd to defend what he had at home, then to seek for new conquests abroad. However the war still continued till
A.D. 1660. when, upon the death of
Charles Gustavus, peace was established between the two Kingdoms at
Oliva, a Monastery near
Dantzic, of which these are some of the Articles:
That John Casimir King of Poland should for ever renounce all pretensions to the Kingdom of Sweden and Principality of Finland; That he should only challenge the title of King of Sweden for his life, but not make use of it in any of his letters to the Swedish King; That he should deliver up to the Swedes all that part of Liefland which lyes beyond the river Duna, and disclaim all right and title to Esten and Oesel and whatever on this side the Duna was in the hands of the Swedes during the truce; That the King of Poland should still keep the southern Liefland, in which are reckoned Duneburg, Rositen, Luzen, Marienhusen, &c.
This country was long subject to Paganism and Idolatry; until about the year 1158 it begun to be frequented by Merchants from
Lubeck, who got leave of the inhabitants to build a small Chappel in an Island upon the
Duna (thence called
Kircholm) for the exercise of Christian worship. Afterwards
Menard a Monk of
Segeberg was consecrated Bishop of
Liefland by the Archbishop of
Bremen, and sent over by the Merchants to propagate Christianity in these parts. His seat was at
Ʋxkel a small village upon the
Duna, not far from
Riga. Bertholdus, a Monk of
Bremen, of the order of
St. Paul, succeeded him in his Bishoprick. He was the first founder of
Riga, whither he removed his See: but lived not long to enjoy it there. For endeavouring to promote Christianity more by the sword then spirit, he was overcome and slain by the
Pagans. Albertus, Bertholdus's immediate successour, fortifyed
Riga, and made it a City. That done, he joyned himself to the order of the
sword bearers (an order of Knighthood confirmed by Pope
Innocent the third about the year 1204) hoping thereby to be better able, then his predecessor had been, to oppose the rage of the
Heathen. Not long after, when this order was changed into the
Teutonic order, the Bishop of
Riga, and the rest of his society subjected themselves to the
Teutonic Order of
Prussia; The master of which had power given him to appoint a Provincial of
Liefland. On the other hand, the
Prussian Bishops of
Culm, Pomesen, and
Sambland, did (though not at the same time, as some would have it) advance the power of the Bishop of
Riga, making him an Archbishop
[Page 24]and themselves his Suffragans. Only the Bishop of
Warme, as having never been subject to the
Teutonic Order, would not yield to be reckoned a member of the Province of
Riga. In this state the Church of
Liefland continued for a long time, till (in the year 1513)
William Plettenberg, the XLI Provincial of
Liefland, bought off all homage to the
Teutonic Order in
Prussia, and was himself made absolute Prince of
Liefland. His successors lived and injoyed their dominions in peace till the days of
Sigismund Augustus King of
Poland: but afterwards (what with foreign and domestic wars, and the continual incursions of the
Moscovite, Polander, Swede, and
Dane) the Country was brought to be a meer medly of men and religions. At this day those parts that are subject to the
Danes and
Swedes do generally profess the
Lutheran religion. Most of the subjects of the King of
Poland adhere to the Church of
Rome, though some are
Lutherans. In some parts of
Esten the poor ignorant
Rusticks are half
Pagans.
Liefland was formerly divided into two parts only,
Letten and
Esten: to which the order of the
sword bearers added
Curland. Some have divided the whole Country into six parts,
Curland, Semigal, Esten, Letten, Harland, and
Virland: but
Semigal is no more then a Province of
Curland, and
Harland and
Virland parts of
Esten. Of these,
Curland is immediately subject to its own Duke: who nevertheless pays homage to the King of
Poland. Some parts also of
Letten (which go under the name of
South Liefland) are, since the treaty at
Oliva, in that Kings possession.
The
Curoni, antient inhabitants of
Curland and
Semigal, are thought by some to be the same with the
Caryones mentioned by
Ptolomey. There is, not far from
Windaw, a small village which still bears their memory in its name: being by the inhabitants to this day called
Curon. The most notable places in it are: 1.
Mitaw, the seat of the Dukes of
Curland, upon the bank of the river
Mauss; taken by
Gustavus Adolphus in the year 1621, but restored
A.D. 1629. The Town is but mean and inconsiderable, but the Castle magnificently rebuilt by some of the late Dukes. 2.
Windaw, or
Winden, (as the
Germans write it, though the inhabitants call it
Kies) seated on the mouth of the river
Windaw; whence it has its name. Here formerly was the residence of the Provincials of
Liefland, afterwards the general Parliament, or great Council, of
Curland had their sessions in this City; which made it exceeding populous. At this day there is little appearance of its antient splendor: nor is it frequented by any but a few
Dutch Merchants, who are here laden with Tar, Pitch, and Wax. 'Tis a mistake very ordinary among the historians that write of this Country, to confound this City with
Wenden in
Letten: telling us, that this too is called by the
Polanders Kies. And the old
Dutch sea-carts mention a kind of Castle with three towers upon the mouth of the
Windaw; but never take notice of of any sea-port-Town in this place. 3.
Pilten or
Piltyn; the seat of the Bishop of
Curland, built by
Waldemar King of
Denmark A.D. 1219.
The southern, or
Polish Liefland contains only a few small Towns or villages; among which there is nothing worth taking notice of but
Duneburg, a Castle (as its name intimates) seated on the river
Duna.
Volhinia, Podolia, &c.
THough the
Polish dominion reached formerly a considerable way beyond the
Nieper or
Boristhenes, taking within its precincts the territories of
Kiow and
Braclaw (which go under the general name of the
Ʋkrain, spoken of before;) yet, since the treaty ratifyed between the Grand Seignior and the King of
Poland in the year 1677, the whole Country of the
Cosacks was delivered into the hands of the
Turks: and the hither
Volhinia is at this day the outmost bounds of the Kingdom of
Poland.
Walachia too and
Moldavia were by
Ʋladislaus Jagello annexed to the Crown of
Poland; but, soon after his death, his son
Casimir lost them both back again to the
Turks. For, when by reason of the continual trouble he had in defending
Prussia against the
Teutonic Order he could not possibly succour those parts, the Palatine of
Walachia struck up a peace with
Mahomet upon condition of paying a yearly tribute of 2000 Crowns. Since that time the Palatines of
Walachia have sometimes sworn fealty to the
Turks, sometimes to the
Polanders; but kept their word with neither. Several of the Kings of
Poland have been in a condition of repossessing themselves of these parts; but, fearing to engage in a war with so potent an Enemy as the Grand Seignior for so mean a stake, they have rather chose to resign them quietly and suffer him still to enjoy them upon condition:
That the Turk should constitute no Vicegerent in these their neighbouring Provinces but such as was lineally descended from the Dukes of Moldavia, and consequently of a Polish stock: nor should demand any arbitrary, but a certain fix'd and determin'd tribute. But these priviledges the
Poles have now lost; insomuch that the
Turk is grown absolute Lord of the Country, and governs it by whom, and how he pleases.
But these two Countryes could not satisfy the the Great
Turk; who found an occasion to pick a quarrel with the King of
Poland, whom he knew himself able to conquer. Wherefore, in the year 1672, advancing further into this Kings dominions with a vast army, he took
Camienec the best fortress in the Kingdom; and had marched further into the very heart of the Nation, had he not been stopt with proposals of peace from King
Michael upon these terms:
That the Polanders should quit all title to Podolia, and resign it wholly to the Turk; That with Podolia they should also surrender all pretensions to the Ʋkrain; That they should pay yearly to the Grand Seignior a tribute of 22000
ducates; &c. These conditions (proposed and ratifyed by the King alone, without the approbation of the Parliament) were looked upon by the whole Nation as too dishonourable to be observed. Wherefore, 'twas resolved, they should endeavour to the outmost to recover bravely what their King had so cowardly parted with. Accordingly, towards the latter end of the year 1673, they proclaimed war against the
Turk, which was carried on with good success under the conduct of
John Sobieski (the present King of
Poland) their then valorous General: who on the 11 of
November, discomfited the
Turkish army, and retook the Castle of
Chotim. After many more bloody engagements, in a war of several years continuance, the peace was at last concluded in
November 1676 upon these, and some other conditions:
That the Lipec-Tartars should be permitted to remove their goods and families into Podolia, and there live subject to the Turk; That the Ʋkrain should remain in the hands of the Grand Seignior;
That Polish
Garrisons should be put into Niemierow
and Kallik,
and the Bassaw of Camieniec
have nothing to do there till matters were adjusted at the convention of Ambassadours at Porte;
That Pawolocz
and Bialocerkiew
should remain entire in the possession of the Polander;
That the resignation of Podolia
should be debated by the Ambassadours at[Page 25]Porte;
That in all places taken by the Turks the Christians should enjoy the free exercise of their religion; &c. These articles were read and ratifyed in the Parliament of
Poland the 22 day of
February A.D. 1677. Since which time the Great
Turk has not answered the expectation of the King of
Poland in resigning the Countries he had taken.
Podolia is doubtless worth seeking after (and too good to be parted with upon sleight terms by those who, having made themselves Masters of it by a fair conquest, are able to keep their hold) if what
Maginus reports of it be true:
That 'tis so fruitful, that in one night the grass will hide a rod, and in a few days a plough.
Volhinia is as well worth defending as
Podolia regaining; being a fruitful and plenteous Country, exceedingly well stock'd with corn, sheep, Timber, fish, Hony,
&c. Places of greatest note in it, are: 1.
Luceoria or
Lusuc, a Bishop's See, first founded by
Ludowic King of
Poland and
Hungary, about the year 1374. 2.
Olyka, a seat of some of the
Lithvanian Dukes: among whom
John formerly Duke of this place and
Nieswiesc (with his brother
Nicolas Radziwil, Marshal of the great Dukedom of
Lithvania) was made a Prince of the Empire of
Germany in the
Diet at
Augspurg A.D. 1547. 3.
Ostrog, once the seat of Dukes, to whom a great part of this Country was immediately subject: but that line is of late utterly extinct.
The Lesser
Poland.
THe Lesser
Poland lyes on the south of the Greater, from some part of which it is separated by the
Warta, from others by the
Pilcza. It is divided in the middle by the
Vistula (upon which are seated most of its great Towns) and contains in it three Palatinates, of
Cracow, Sendomir, and
Lublin.
This Province (as all
Poland has formerly been) is very woody;
[...] of
[...]. which heretofore occasioned so many barbarous robberies as were usually committed under the shelter of their Forests. Insomuch that, in the year 1450,
Casimir called an assembly of the Nobles of the Lesser
Poland only to consult of some means to suppress the intolerable thieveries practised among the generality of them, the Nobility not excepted. But, because many of the Grandees of
Poland were not at that time satisfyed with this King's title to the Crown, nothing could be effectually enacted by his Authority: so that, for a long time Rapines and Murders were encreased rather then diminished. For by these delays of justice the Robbers were come to that strength at last, that (under the conduct of two Noblemen,
Cauca Sweborowski and
John his brother) they had fortifyed the mountain
Zebrace near
Oswenskim, and several other places; whither such armies of
Ruffians continually flocked, as could not afterwards be suppressed without a deal of bloodshed and hazard of the whole Country.
Cracow (the Metropolis of this Province and the whole Kingdom of
Poland) is seated on a rocky bank of the
Vistula. 'Tis said to have had its name from one
Cracus, Gracus, or
Gracchus, whom the
Polanders (so they themselves say, though the
Bohemian writers will needs make him one of their Princes) set over them as soon as they grew weary of the twelve Palatines, who took the government into their hands upon the death of
Lechus the first. Others think it the same with
Ptolomey's Carodunum, corrupted into
Cracow. This City (as 'tis the largest, so it) is the best built of any one in
Poland. Cromer sets it in competition with the best built Cities of
Germany or
Italy: but we must allow him to stretch a little more then ordinary in commendation of his own Country. The houses are for the most part of free-stone, and four or five stories high; but covered with boards instead of slat. There are in it a considerable company of
Italian and
German Merchants, who bring in such foreign wares as the Country stands in need of. It consists (like
London and
Paris) of three parts: 1.
Cracow, properly so called, or the antient City: 2.
Cazimiria, joyned to the rest by a wooden bridge cross the
Vistula: 3.
Stradomia, which lyes between
Cracow and the bridge. The King's Palace is seated on the top of an high hill; whence it overlooks both City and Country. 'Twas rebuilt in the magnificent posture it now stands by
Sigismund the Elder; who added the gallery on the north side, from whence you have one of the best prospects in
Europe. The University of
Cracow was first begun by
Casimir the Great, finished by
Ʋladislaus Jagello, in performance of the last will and testament of his Queen
Hedwig, and had its priviledges confirmed to it by Pope
Ʋrban. In the year 1549; the scholars of
Cracow by a general consent left the University (upon an affront put on them by the Magistrates of the City, who refused to execute justice upon the servants of
Andrew Czarnkowski, when in a quarrel they had slain a great number of students), and dispersed themselves into several parts of
Germany; whence returning
Lutherans, they spread the reform'd opinions all
Poland over, and got great numbers of proselytes. Upon the first planting of Christianity in this Kingdom (
Miecislaus the first, who begun his reign in the year 964)
Cracow was made an Archbishoprick. But, within a hundred years after,
Lampert Zula refusing to receive his Pall from the Pope of
Rome as his predecessors had done before him, it degenerated into a Bishoprick. Afterwards (in the reign of
Boleslaus the chast, which begun
A.D. 1226) a contest arising between
Jvo Bishop of this Diocess and the Bishop of
Vratislaw, about precedency, the Bishop of
Cracow, upon his submissive appeal to the See of
Rome, was again restored to the dignity of an Archbishop: which only lasted during his life. At this day the Bishops of
Cracow wear an Archbishop's Pall, set richly with jewels; which is the only relique they have of their antient honour.
The next Palatinate of the Lesser
Poland,Sendomir. is that of
Sendomir. The City is seated on the bank of the
Vistula; and fortifyed with walls and a Castle, both built by
Casimir the Great: who afterwards dyed of a surfet, by eating too freely of the fruits of this Country, which are reckoned the fairest and best in
Poland. Here is nothing else worth the taking notice of, save the Monastery of Dominican Friars founded by
Jvo Archbishop of
Cracow.
The Palatinate of
Lublin was taken out of that of
Sendomir (as being too big for the jurisdiction of one Palatine) by
Casimir Jagellonides.Lublin. The City is not very large, but well built and much frequented (especially in the Fairs kept three times a year) by Christian, Jewish, and
Turkish Merchants. 'Tis much better fortifved by the marshes which environ it, then its walls: and more beholden to nature for its defence then either
Casimir the Great, who walled it round, or the
Russians, who built the adjoyning Castle. The great Church in it was built by
Lescus the black, upon a great conquest obtain'd against the
Lithvanians near this City, and dedicated to St.
Michael, who in a vision the night before the battel had promised him good success. St.
Bridgets Monastery, among many other magnificent ones, was founded by
Ʋladislaus Jagello. One of
[Page 26]the two chief Courts of Judicature (from which no appeal lies, save to the Parliament of
Poland) is kept at
Lublin. Hither, for judgment in controversies of any great moment, repair the Palatinates of
Cracow, Sendomir, Russia, Podolia, Lublin, Belze, Podlassia, Volhinia, Braclaw, Kiow, and
Czernichow: or, at least, so many of them as are still subject to the Crown of
Poland.
Of other Countries and Provinces to which the Kings of
Poland have formerly pretended a title by conquest, contract, or otherwise.
BEsides the places mentioned, and at present subject to the Crown of
Poland, the Kings of that Nation have from time to time lay'd claim to many and large Territories now in the hands of other Princes. Omitting
Bohemia, Moravia, Wagria, Misnia, and the Dukedomes of
Rugen, Mecklenburg and
Lunenburg (which, whatever some of the
Polish writers assert and endeavour to make good, were very little, or not at all subject to
Boleslaus Chrobri, who was the only King that ever could plausibly pretend a title to any part of them) we shall confine our discourse to those Countries to which the
Polonian Princes may seem to have had a more just and legal title.
That all (or most of)
Silesia was part of the Dukedome of
Poland,Silesia. in the days of
Lechus the first, and several of his successours, is highly probable, from the writings of
Adam Bremensis and
Helmoldus; who both of them make the river
Oder the bounds of
Poland. Besides, the
German Chronologers tell us, that
Charles the Great,
Ludovicus Pius, and other Emperors conquer'd the
Silesians, and made them tributary to the Empire. But the
Polish Historians (upon what grounds I know not) are generally positive in asserting,
That Silesia
was always, without any such intermission or conquest as the Germans
strive to make out, a part of the Polish
dominions. Only
Vincentius Kadlubko agrees with the
Germans, affirming,
That Boleslaus Chrobri
(amongst his many other conquests) regain'd Selucia, as he calls it,
and left it annexed to the Crown of Poland. After his time we find that
Casimir the first translated the Bishoprick of
Bicine to
Vratislaw: whence 'tis manifest, that in his days
Silesia was part of the Realm of
Poland. Not long after,
Henry the IV, Emperour of
Germany (in the Diet at
Munster A.D. 1086) made over
Silesia, Lusatia, and indeed all
Poland, to
Vratislaus King of
Bohemia: though, as
Cromer says, he had no right to a foot of land in any of them. Whereupon ensued a bloody war betwixt the
Bohemians and
Poles: wherein it is to be conjectured, the latter had the better, since all Historians agree, that
Silesia was under the King of
Polands goverment during the whole reign of
Boleslaus the third. His son
Ʋladislaus the second, being deposed by his brethren, who were left Co-heirs with him in the Kingdom, fled first to the Emperor
Frederick the first, who brought
Boleslaus Crispus (Duke of
Poland and brother to
Ʋladislaus) to such straits, that he was forced to resign all
Silesia into the hands of his brother's children: but upon condition they should still pay homage to the Princes of
Poland. From that time the
Polanders begun to sleight and hate the
Silesians, seldom calling any of the
Silesian Nobility to Councils of Parliament, and balking the right succession, if any of this Province had a just title to the Crown. These jealousies and quarrels were fomented and increased by
John King of
Bohemia (son to the Emperor
Henry the seventh) who by this means whedled the Dukes of
Silesia into his yoke; and afterwards forced
Casimir the Great to resign the supreme government of that Province into his hands. After this the
Poles (though they had frequent skirmishes with the
Bohemians, yet) never regain'd any considerable footing in
Silesia. For, excepting the small territory of
Wschovia (retaken by
Casimir the Great
A.D. 1343) and some other parcels of ground annexed to the estates of several Bishopricks and Abbeys in
Poland, Silesia is at present wholly subject to the King of
Bohemia.
Lusatia was once conquer'd by
Boleslaus Chrobri; but soon after lost again.
Lus
[...] For (though when
John King of
Bohemia subdued
Silesia, Lusatia was reckoned a part of that Country, and has ever since so continued, yet) the
Polanders claim'd no more of it, as Lords of
Silesia, then a few frontier Towns: the rest was under the Marquesses of
Misnia and
Lusatia, Princes of the Empire, as
Goldastus proves.
'Tis without all authority of Annals, what some of the
Polish writers have endeavoured to make out by Etymologies,
Ne
[...] Ma
[...] that the greatest part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh was formerly subject to the Princes of
Poland. That
New Marck indeed (or, at least, a good share of it) was theirs, is beyond all controversy: since, as the best Historians witness,
Miecislaus or
Miscio (the first Christian Duke of
Poland, towards the latter end of the tenth Century) first founded the Bishoprick of
Lubuss. This City was taken from the
Polanders by the Emperour
Henry the second; but recovered by
Boleslaus the first, King of
Poland. His successours kept it till the year 1109, when it was again taken by the Emperour
Henry V, who gave it to
Adelgot Archbishop of
Magdeburg. But soon after it return'd into the hands of the
Poles. When
Silesia was, as we have said, divided among the sons of
Ʋladislaus the second, the territories of
Lubuss devolved into the hands of the
Silesian Dukes, whence it happened within a short while after to be made a part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh. Cromer says, 'twas mortgaged by
Boleslaus the bald; and never redeemed. But
Dlugossus (
ad ann. 1198.) tells us, 'twas sold by
Boleslaus, son to
Henry Duke of
Vratislavia. From that time the Kings of
Poland have had very little to do in
New Marck; and, at present, have not one foot of land in it.
Ʋladislaus Jagello brought it wholly under his power; but his son found it too hot service for him to keep it, and was therefore fain to resign it up to the Marquess.
John Casimir (their late King) parted with the last stake, by delivering up the Town and Castle of
Drahim to the present Elector of
Brandenburgh in the treaty at
Bydgost in the year 1657.
That the
Slavonians were antient inhabitants of
Pomeren is undeniably true.
Pom
[...]Pomorska (in the
Slavonian language) signifies
near the sea: whence
Vincentius Kadlubko, an antient and judicious
Polish writer, uses frequently the word
Maritima for
Pomeren; and, speaking of this Country, these phrases are ordinary with him:
Maritimae Praeses; Maritimae Dux; Ingressus est Maritimam; &c. But whether or no the
Polanders were masters of
Pomeren, immediately upon the entrance of the
Slavoniaus, is a grand question: which the
Poles affirm, but the
Pomeranians deny; and 'tis hard to decide the controversy between them.
Helmoldus, agreeing (as it should seem) with the latter, places
Pomeren amongst the free
Slavonian Provinces, lying without the bounds of the
Polish dominions. And, before his days,
Adam Bremensis gives us the same account.
Micraelius (an Historian of good credit,
lib. 2.
Chron. Pomer. num. 46.
p. 191.) is of opinion, that the first entrance which the
Polanders made upon
Pomeren[Page 27]was in the tenth Century; when the Emperor
Otto III. authorized
Boleslaus Chrobri, King of
Poland, to make war upon, and bring into his subjection, the
Prussians, Pomeranians, Wendi, and
Russians. Which done, the Emperor (at a visit given King
Boleslaus) made the Bishop of
Colberg a Suffragan to the Archbishop of
Gnesna. In the beginning of the eleventh Century,
Miecislaus II. spread his dominions all over
Casubia and the Eastern
Pomeren; putting Garrisons into all the Forts and Castles between the
Persandt and the
Vistula, and committed the government of them to
Bela, the King of
Hungary's brother. But, upon
Bela's return into
Hungary, Pomeren shook off the
Polish yoke, and only was subject to Dukes of its own, till
Svantibor surrendred it again to
Boleslaus III. Duke of
Poland, upon condition he would free him from prison; to which his own subjects had committed him. After
Svantibors death, the Dukedom of
Pomeren was divided amongst his four sons; whereof two (who were Dukes of the Western
Pomeren, from
Colberg as far as the
Marck and the Dukedom of
Mecklenburgh) were admitted Princes of the Empire by
Frederick Barbarossa: the other two were forced to yeild themselves subjects to the Crown of
Poland. But the
Pomeranians, soon weary of bondage, revolted once more from the King of
Poland: and perhaps had for ever rejected his government, had not
Mestwin their Duke (wanting issue) endeavour'd to subject them to the Dukes of West
Pomeren. For, looking upon the people of that Country as meer strangers (being indeed three parts of them
Germans) they chose rather to give themselves up into the hands of their acquaintance, then to be slaves to an upstart and foreign Nation. Whereupon, they unanimously swore fealty to
Praemislaus II. King of
Poland; who took upon him the title of Duke of
Pomeren, and quarter'd his Coat with (the Arms of
Pomeren) the Gryphins. By this means the Kings of
Poland became sole Lords of the Eastern
Pomeren.
In the year 1460,
Casimir Jagellonides (straitned in the wars he was engaged in against the
Teutonick Order in
Prussia) committed the Cities and Castles of
Lavenburgh and
Bouta, to the trust of
Eric II. Duke of West
Pomeren; whose successor
George (son of
Bugislaus X. and Nephew to
Sigismund I. King of
Poland) had these Cities confirmed to him and his posterity, upon condition of paying some sleight acknowledgment to the Crown of
Poland. Upon these terms the present Elector of
Brandenburgh renewed his title to these places (after the usual fashion) by his Ambassador, in the year 1670.
What right the
Polanders have at this day in
Prussia, we have shew'd before: but formerly their pretensions were much greater then now. Sometimes the Duke of
Masovia Lorded it over the
Prussians, and made the Master of the
Teutonick Order his Vicegerent. But in the treaty made between
Sigismund I. King of
Poland, and
Albert Marquess of
Brandenburgh (whom the Knights of the
Teutonick Order had made their Master) in the year 1525, it was agreed upon,
‘That the
Teutonick Order should be wholly extirpated, and that part of
Prussia which (to this day) is called
Ducal Prussia, should be govern'd by the said Marquess, with the title of Duke of
Prussia; and the rest (or
Regal Prussia) remain still subject to the King of
Poland. But with this proviso, That the Duke should always pay homage to the Crown of
Poland, and (as a member of that Kingdom) be President of the Kings Council.’ Lastly,
John Casimir (the late King of
Poland) granted, first in the year 1657, and again 1663, full and absolute power and dominion over
Ducal Prussia, to the present Elector of
Brandenburgh, on this condition, That the Dukedome, upon defect of male issue, should return to the Kings of
Poland as supreme Landlords, and be conferred on the Dukes of
Onoldsbach and
Culmbach, as Feudataries.
Muscovy.
How affairs stand at present between the Great Duke of
Muscovy and the King of
Poland; may appear by the Treaty of Peace signed by both parties
A.D. 1667, spoken of before. But formerly the Kings of
Poland have laid claim, and made good their title either by justice or the sword, to several large Territories now in the hands of the Great Duke. For first,
Jorislaus Duke of
Russia was forced to pay tribute to
Boleslaus Chrobri, A.D. 1018. Afterwards,
A.D. 1069,
Boleslaus II. possessed himself of
Kiow, and indeed the whole Dukedom of
Russia; over which he set
Jesaslaus a tributary Duke. After his death, continual wars were between the two Nations, till
Casimir the Great, in the year 1340, reduced the Southern
Russia into the form of a Province. But how little of that remains at this day in the hands of the present King of
Poland, we have shew'd before.
Several of the Kings of
Poland have stiled themselves Kings of
Sweden;Sweden upon no other pretence then having made themselves masters of a great part of
Liefland. But this title ceased upon the death of
John Casimir, their late King; as hath already been observed in the description of
Liefland.
Of the Pretensions of Foreign Princes to the Kingdom of
Poland.
WE have seen to what Kingdoms and Countries the Kings of
Poland have in former ages claimed a right and title; and we may perhaps find as many Kings and Princes of other Nations who have challenged the Crown of
Poland upon as good grounds.
But (to omit the many conquests obtain'd by the
Russians, Bohemians, Hungarians, and others, over the
Poles, enough to entitle any potent Prince to their Kingdom) the strongest pretensions to this Crown, are those of the Emperor. For the most of the
Polish Historians tell us,
That Boleslaus I.
was created King of Poland
by the Emperor Otto III.
before which time the Princes of that Nation were only Dukes. This story is confirmed by (besides the testimony of the most considerable writers of
Poland) an ancient Epitaph found in the Cathedral at
Posen, in which (among other commendations of
Boleslaus I.) are the following rithmes:
Tu possedisti, velut Athleta Christi
Regnum Slavorum, Gothorum seu Polonorum.
Caesar praecellens a te Ducalia pellens.
And again:
Ob famam bonam tibi contulit Otto Coronam
Propter luctamen, sit tibi salus. Amen.
However (tho the Historians of
Poland grant, that
Boleslaus received the title of King at the hands of the Emperor, yet) they deny stubbornly that this Kingdom was ever subject or tributary to the
Roman Empire. But
Conringius (an ingenious and learned
German Physitian, in his book entituled,
De finibus Germanici Imperii, c. 18.) has demonstrated the contrary. For (not to take notice of
Charles the Great, who, 'tis more than
[Page 28]probable, conquer'd
Poland as well as
Silesia) 'tis certain, that
Miecislaus, the first Christian Prince of
Poland, paid tribute to the Imperial Crown. And the
Polish writers are forced to confess, That
Otto III. remitted all homage (due otherwise) to
Boleslaus Chrobri, when he created him King. After
Boleslaus's death,
Miecislaus II. his successor, was compelled to pay the usual tribute to the Emperor
Conrad II. After this, several of the Kings of
Poland very willingly submitted themselves to the Emperors; and others were forced out of their obstinate refusal. At last (in the long vacancy of the Imperial Throne, soon after the middle of the thirteenth Century, during which
Richard Earl of
Cornwal was one of the four elected Emperors) whilst the Empire of
Germany was in a confused distraction, the
Polanders took occasion to shake off the
German yoke, to which they could never since be reduced.
This is part of the relation which
Conringius gives us of the ancient state of
Poland, in reference to the
German Empire, founded chiefly upon the testimonies of
Dithmarus Mersburgensis and
Helmoldus, men of unquestionable veracity in their Histories.
Hartknoch endeavours to evade the force of his argument by saying:
‘That (tho it be true, that the
Polanders have formerly paid some certain sum of money to the Emperors, by whom it was demanded under the notion of a tribute, yet) this does not necessarily suppose any dependance of the Crown of
Poland upon the Empire of
Germany. For 'tis ordinary even with the Emperors themselves to buy peace with money. And thus the
English bought their peace of the
Danes, and made
Lewis XI. King of
France, pay for his.’ But let him consider: First, whether the words of
Helmoldus (
Chron. Slav. lib. 1.
c. 1.
num. 9.) can be properly understood of any such sum of money as is usually paid by any Nation upon the ratification of a Treaty of Peace, when he says,
servit & ipsa (speaking of
Poland)
sicut Bohemia sub tributo Imperatoriae Majestati. Here the Historian tells us plainly, the Kingdom of
Poland was in his time as much tributary to the Emperor as
Bohemia; and how truly that was under his subjection, every Historian will shew. Again, 'twas not very considerately done to instance in the tribute paid by the
English to the
Danes, or by
Lewis XI. to the King of
England. For both these were doubtless acknowledgements of subjection and homage. The
Danes, all know, were absolute Lords of our Land for 26, and made almost continual incursions into it for the space of 250, years.
Dane-gelt (which perhaps
Hartknoch, as some of our own Historians have done, mistakes for a tribute, or composition-money, paid the
Danes upon any invasion) was at first only a Subsidy, gather'd for the maintenance of a standing army to oppose the
Danish fury. Afterwards indeed the word was used to denote a tribute (sometimes amounting to 72000 pounds) levyed yearly in
England, and paid to the King of
Denmark; upon the refusal of which payment, the
English were sure to feel the weight of that Kings displeasure. This tribute was certainly a sign of a true and real subjection to the Crown of
Denmark; which might have lasted longer, had not the
Saxon and
Danish lines been peaceably united in the pious King
Edward the Confessor. As to the tribute paid by
Lewis XI. of
France to the King of
England, I shall say no more then, That 'tis well known upon what grounds our Kings (especially
Henry V. and
Henry VI; the latter of which was Crowned King of
France in
Paris) pretended a title to the Crown of
France before his days; and what reason they had to demand a tribute. So that
Hartknoch's argument drawn from these two examples, amounts to no more than this, That the Emperors of
Germany had never any more title to the Crown of
Poland, then the
Danish Kings have had to the Throne of
England, or the
English to the Scepter of
France: And what kind of pretensions those were, Historians can inform us.
SCANDIA, or
Scandinavia, (probably so nam'd from the ancient Inhabitants, who call'd themselves
Schaanau or
Shane; tho
Junius thinks it may be very well so called from the ancient word
Schans, signifying a Fortification, the situation of the Country being well fenced), by the
Greeks Baltia or
Basilia, [...]an
[...]d its
[...]tion. is a large Peninsula, lying betwixt 55 and 72 degrees of Northerly Latitude, and about 25 and 65 of Longitude. It is bounded on the West and North by the vast Ocean, on the East by part of
Muscovy and the
Sinus Finnicus, and on the South by the
Baltick Sea; which Peninsula was inhabited by divers Nations, as the
Suiones or
Sueci, Queni, Northmanni, &c. and was accounted the store-house of men, and original of thirty potent Nations, dispers'd into most parts of the habitable world. But we shall now at this time speak only of the principallest part of it, situated toward the most Easterly point, wherein is the seat of a great and powerful Empire, which has of late spread it self very largely out of this Peninsula; commanded by the King of
Sweden. His dominion comprehends all from the Frozen Sea on the North; the
Dofrine Hills or Scars on the West; the Lakes
Ladoga and
Onega, and part of
Russia, on the East; and the
Sund or
Oresund, and the
Baltick Sea, on the South. Omitting for the present the new Accessions in
Livonia, &c. of which in due place.
That we may speak distinctly of this great Empire,
[...]p
[...]nd
[...]vi
[...] we will begin first of all with the North; which is inhabited by a sort of people call'd
Laps or
Laplanders. All which notwithstanding are not subjects of the
Swede; the Easterly parts being under the
Muscovite, and the Westerly under the
Dane; however we shall speak of them indistinctly, their manners, language, and customs being the same in all.
1.
Muscovitick Lapland.Muscovitick Lapland, called by the ancient Geographers
Biarmia, at present by the
Swedes Trennis, by the
Russes Tarchanavoloch, and by the Natives
Pyhinienni, takes in all the maritime tract of ground which lies from about
Kola to the White Sea. It is divided into three parts, or Provinces: 1.
Mourmanskoy, or
maritime Leporie. 2.
Tersa, or
Terskoy Leporie. And 3.
Bellamoreskoy Leporie. The exact description whereof is not accurately known to us.
2.
Norwegian Lapland.Norwegian Lapland, formerly called
Scrickfinnia, by
Jornandes Scretfennia, now
Finmark, or the Province of
Wardhuus; runs all along the
Norwegian shore from the Lake
Tornetresk, near the
Dofrine Hills, to the Castle of
Wardhuus; but how much more Easterly is not exactly discover'd to us. All this Province, or Lieutenancy, belongs to the Crown of
Denmark.
3.
Swedish Lapland; or, as the
Swedes call it,
Swedish Lapland.Lapmark. It contains all that most Southern and inland part of
Lappia, from the Province of
Hel-Singia in
Sweden, to the Lieutenancy of
Wardhuus, or quite to the North Sea. It is counted by some to be of equal extent with almost all
Sweden properly so called.
Andr. Buraeus says, it contains in length above four hundred
English miles, and in breadth three hundred and sixty. This
Lapland is divided into six lesser parts, or Provinces, called
Markar, i. e. Lands; all which have their names from the most remarkable Rivers that run thro each of them.
1. The first and most Northerly of all is
Tornelapmark,The Provinces of Swedish Lapland. extending it self from the furthest corner of the Bay of
Bothnia, all along or near to the North Sea, call'd by our Sea-men
North-Cape.
2. Next to this, lies
Kimilapmark, winding from the North toward the East, and bounded on one side by the Eastern
Bothnia, on another by that part of
Lapland which belongs to
Russia, and on a third side by
Cajania and
Carelia.
3. West of
Tornelapmark lies
Lulalapmark, which has on the West-side the
Dofrine Hills, and also on the South.
4.
Pithalapmark, a Province very mountanous and barren.
5. Next to this
Ʋmalapmark, bounding (as the former) upon the West
Bothnia and the
Dofrine Hills.
6. South of which lies
Angermandlandslapmark, bordering upon
Angermannia and
Temptia; tho
Angermandlandslapmark and
Ʋmalapmark are by many Authors reckon'd for one, because they are both govern'd by one Lieutenant, yet are they distinct Provinces.
Each of these Provinces are (according to the ancient manner of the Country) subdivided into lesser parts, call'd by the
Swedes Byar,Their lesser Divisions. and are equivalent to our Shires, and the
Pagi [...] or
[...] of the Ancients, which were not Villages or Country Towns, but large parts of a Country. There are several of these Shires or
Pagi in each Province, except
Angermandlandslapmark, which makes but one
Pagus, vulgarly called
Aosahla. Ʋmalapmark hath four;
Ʋma, Lais or
Raanby, Granby, and
Vapsteen. Pithalapmark hath seven;
Graotreskby, Arfwejerfsby, Lochteby, Arrieplogsby, Wisierfby, Norvesterby, Westerby. Lulalapmark hath five;
Jochmoch, Sochjoch, Torpinjaur, Zerkislocht, and
Rautomjaur. Tornelapmark hath nine;
Tingewaara, Siggewaara, Sondewara, Ronolaby, Pellejerf, Kiedkajerf, Mansialka, Saodankyla,[Page 2]and
Kithilaby. So that all the territories are divided into thirty-three
Byars. In each of these there are several
Clans, or Families, which the
Swedes call
Rakar. In the
Byar called
Aosahla there are about thirty, in others more or less according as they are in bigness and fertility, distinguish'd by several names, each of which have a certain alotment of ground assigned them for the maintenance of themselves and their Cattel; not in the nature of a country Farm, but of a very great length and breadth, so as sometimes to contain Rivers, Lakes, Woods, and the like, which all belong to one
Clan or Family, who enjoy it all in common, without appropriating it to several persons.
And thus much for the division of
Lapland, not lately made (except that under
Charles IX. some
Clans had certain allotments assigned them) but derived from very ancient time, as appears from hence, that neither the
Laplanders have known, nor the
Swedes given them any other since the country has been under their subjection; and it may not seem improbable, that this manner of possessing was begun immediately after the Flood; propriety being the effect of populousness.
The inhabitants of this
Lapland (supposing the
Norwegian and
Muscovitic Laps to be of the same original and extract) are said to have descended from the race of the
Finlanders and
Samoieds;The Inhabitants, and their Original. as may probably be gather'd from the likeness of their customs, language, and manner of worship; and also from the very name of
Laplanders, i. e. banish'd men, or
Runnagado's; for they are said to have been driven out of
Finland once by the
Tartars, when they extended their dominions as far as the Lake
Ladoga; and afterwards by the
Swedes. And because such deserting of their Country was thought a disgrace to the whole Nation, none of the
Laplanders of any quality to this day will endure to be called by that name, but give themselves some other compellation, as
Sabmienladti, Sameednan, &c.
And this opinion, that they took their original from the
Finlanders, or rather were always of the same Nation with them, seems to be confirm'd by those descriptions ancient Geographers give of
Finland and the
Finlandish people, agreeing exactly to the modern
Lapland and its inhabitants.
Saxo says, that the
Finlanders are the farthest people toward the North, living in a Clime almost unhabitable, good archers and hunters, wanderers and of an uncertain habitation; wheresoever they kill a beast making that their mansion; and they slide upon the snow in broad wooden shoes; all which holds true of the
Laplanders; as also do those descriptions of
Finland set down by
Tacitus. and
Jo. Magnus Besides all this, the
Norwegians and
Danes call the
Laplanders Finni, or
Finlanders in general; and divide the whole Nation into
Sioefinnar, i. e. maritime Finlanders, and
Lappesinnar, the same with the
Laplanders. The
Russes also call them
Kajienski, as coming from
Cajania, a Province in
Finland.
And as we may hence probably conclude the
Laplanders at first to have come out of
Finland, so we may believe that the
Finlanders more then once march'd out into
Lapland; which is evident from the several names of their Leaders, whom some call
Thinns-Rogre, others
Mieschogiesche. The first and most ancient transmigration was that of the
Biarmi, whom some miscall
Seridfinni, so called from their going to dwell upon the mountains
Varama, signifying in their language a hilly country. Which people was by
Harald Harfager King of
Norway, almost all destroyed in battel, and the Nation so scatter'd, that for ever after both the name and credit of the
Biarmi was quite abolished and forgot.
The second time of their deserting their Countrey, was when the
Russians enlarged their Empire as far as the Lake
Ladoga, which was about the sixth age after Christ. For fearing the cruelty of these people they retired into
Lapland, and were called by the
Russians Kajienski, for the reason aforesaid. To confirm what has been said, give me leave to insert here a Testimony greater then all exceptions, that is of the worthiest of all Princes
Aelfred the Great, who having himself represented
Orosius, or an antient Geographer and Historian in his own
Saxon Language, so as to add supplies where he is defective, gives an account of these Northern Shores out of the Relation of a
Norwegian Nobleman imployed by himself for the discovery of these Countreys. The Testimony being more authentick then any one that hath written upon this subject so long ago, we shall here set it down almost
verbatim. Otherus said to his Lord
Aelfred, that himself lived in the very Northerlyest part of
Norway in the Country called
Halgoland, that Northwards of this Countrey was desert; except some few places wherein a few
Finns lived in Winter upon hunting, and in Summer upon fishing; that having sail'd Northward and Easterly with a good gale for seven days, he arrived at a great River, on the right hand whereof was the Country of the
Ferfinni, which was thinly inhabited by a few Fowlers, Fishers and Hunters; on the other side were the
Biarmi, a populous Nation, so that he durst not land amongst them; that they discours'd with him many things concerning their Countrey, whether true or false he knew not, but supposed that they speak the same language with the
Finni. That near this Countrey was the great fishing for Whales and Sea-horses; (which we call Morses) whose teeth were then accounted of great value.
But there seems to have been another more general migration of these
Finns into
Lapland, about the year 1150; and till this time we never find them called
Lappi or
Loppi: and the occasion of this name seems to be about that time
Ericus Sanctus King of
Sweden subdu'd the
Finlanders and brought them under the
Swedish Government, and also planted amongst them the Christian Religion; whereupon they being subjected to Strangers, and forc'd to be of a Religion different from that of their Ancestors, many of them retired from their own Country, and sought out a place where they might live more free, and according to their own manner: and those that stayed, and submitted to the
Swedes, and embraced Christianity, looked upon the departers as deserters of their Countrey; whom fear of a good Government, and better Religion had made Exiles; especially when the King had put forth an Edict that all should be accounted banish'd that would not renounce Pagan superstition.
Being thus forc't out of their Native Countrey,
Their
[...] mann
[...] of livi
[...] at fir
[...]. they liv'd for an age or more upon the
Bothnic Coasts, and in the Woods of
Tavastia, as a stragling and miserable people, neither having Laws nor Governours, till the year 1272; at which time they were made tributary to the Crown of
Sweden; under
Magn. Ladulaos then King; who to bring them under his subjection, promised any one that could effect it, the Government of them; which the
Birkarli i. e. those that lived in the allotment or division of
Birkala, undertook; and having for a great while cunningly insinuated themselves into their conversation under a pretence of friendship, at last set
[Page 3]upon them unawares, and quite subdued them; and for their pains (according to
Ladulaos's promise) they alone had the priviledge to traffique with them and receive Tribute from them; which they constantly did till about
Ann. 1554, when they were entirely united to the Crown of
Sweden; and in 1600 better discovered and more certainly known to the
Swedes, then formerly they had been; and this was effected by the care of
Charles the ninth then King, who sent two famous Mathematicians
M. Aron. Forsius a
Swedish professor, and
Hieron. Birckholten a
German, with Instruments and all necessaries to make what discoveries they could of this
Lapland.
This Countrey,
[...]em
[...] the
[...] the
[...]. lying under divers Climes, has the Temperature of the Air, and likewise the nature of the soyl very different. In those parts that are most Northerly, and within the Artick-circle the air is extream cold and the ground barren; but without the Circle the heavens are somewhat more mild and benigne, and the earth more liberal in her productions, affording in those places near
Bothnia some few sorts of Pot-herbs, as Coleworts, Rape-roots, Parsnips,
&c. so that in those parts only they make Gardens and till their ground. Through the whole Countrey the air though very cold and piercing, yet is not inferiour to any of other Regions in healthfulness and pureness, either because the vapours coagulated and so made heavier by the cold fall down, or from the frequent winds; which sometimes are so strong that they hinder all passengers from travelling, and likewise root up all trees and Bushes that stand in their way, so that on several of the
Laplandish as well as
Dofrine mountains there are no trees or shrubs to be met with, therefore the Inhabitants make use of fish-bones for fuel; but most terrible are those Tempests and Whirlewinds, says
J. Magn. which arise from the North, sometimes taking away the waters of the Sea from under the Ships, and carrying the Ships up into the air, let them fall down again at far distant places; sometimes also sweeping away with them both Stones and living Creatures, and now and then meeting with great quantities of fish, which the Inhabitants use to dry in the cold, they hoise them up into the air, and let them fall, which the poor people gather as a gift sent from God. In those parts nearest the Pole, the Sun for some months never sets, and on the contrary for so long time never rises; and although in Summer it never sets and goes below the Earth, yet neither does it rise more above it, but as it were glides along the edg of the Horison for the most part; and likewise in winter when lowest it is not much beneath it, which is the reason, that though they have one continued night for some months, yet the Sun comes so near that it makes a kind of twilight. Snows are frequent, which last all the year long upon the mountains, and many months upon the plains, by the brightness whereof they travel with greater security and speed then otherwise they could do.
Springs and Rivers are so numerous in this Country,
[...]. that together with the melted Snows and Frosts they make the ground all summer time generally loose and boggy. The most noted Rivers are those whence the particular Marches and Regions have their names, as
Ʋ meao, Pitheao, Luhleao, Torneao and
Kimeao; these all spring from the
Dofrine mountains, and being increas'd by several lesser rivers, do at last unburthen themselves into the
Bothnick sea. In their course they run through many hilly and uneven parts of the Countrey, and are stopt by several dams and weares, and so violently forceing their way over precipices are not navigable. Such are the sluces
Muscaumokke, Sao and
Niometsaski i. e. Hares-leap, so called, because the River
Lughla runs between two mountains so near, that a Hare may leap over.
Besides these,
Lakes; and other less remarkable rivers there are abundance of Pools or Lakes, as
Lulafraesk. Lugga, Sabbaig, &c. well stored with Salmons and such like Fish; one there is named
Stoorafvan, in which there are as many little Islands as there are days in the year; but the most remarkable is
Enaresraesk near
Kimus, wherein the hills and islands are by some said to be innumerable, and
Torneus affirms, that never any Inhabitant lived long enough to survey them all. Some of these are small, but fishy; they call them
Suino i. e.
Holy, and account it a sin to foul them. Some of them have two Channels, and when the Fish forsake the upper, they account it an ill omen, and use ridiculous sacrifices to the Demon of that March.
Here are Mountains most of them small and inconsiderable,
Mountains; some also very high and almost unpassable, especially towards
Norway, which the
Swedes call
Fiael, or, as the Northern English,
Fells, and the
Laplanders Tudderi, they arise about
Zemptland, whence with continued ascent toward the North, they reach a 100 miles in length, till they come to
Titus-fiord, which is a bay of the frozen Sea.
Till of late no Mines of any Mettal were known to be in the Country,
Mines; but in the reign of Queen
Christina in the year 1643 there were veines found both of Silver and Lead by the Inhabitants of
Pithalappia amongst Rocks so hard that they were forced to tear them in pieces with Gunpowder; but in the wars 'twixt
Sweden and
Denmark in the year 1656 one
Van Anen a
Danish Governour so spoiled them, that it is not thought worth the charge to open them again; and since that also in the year 1668 another Silver mine (but mingled with Iron) was discover'd by a Native. There are also known to be some Iron and Copper mines in
Torne and
Lulalapmark, but not digged.
Scheffer mentions a report of the discovery of a Golden Mine in the year 1671, but nothing of certainty concerning it comes to our hands; what further concerns them will fall more properly under the discourse of
Sweden.
The Stones of this Country generally are extreamly hard, of an ash colour, and unworkable;
Stones; some there are found on the shores, which represent the shape of some animals, which the Inhabitants esteem much, and adore for Gods, under the name of
Storjunkare. Some Authors speak of considerable quantities of Diamonds, Amethysts and Topaz; the Diamonds, which are reported to be of an incredible bigness, seem to be nothing but either Chrystals or Fluores, and
Scheffer gives the same sentence of the other. Here are found in some few Rivers a sort of Pearl, but neither so oriental, nor so well shap'd as those that come out of the
Indies;
In the whole Country there are none of those we call either Fruit or Timber-Trees,
Trees; but store of Pine, Firr, Birch, Willows and Alder. Plants most frequent among them are divers sorts of Berries, Angelica, highly valued by them for diet and medicine, Sorrel,
&c. Proper to the Country are
Calceolus Lapponicus. so call'd from the shape of its flower, a beautiful plant but of no use; great varieties also of Mosses, the food of their Rain-deer.
This Country by reason of the many Lakes,
Fish and Fowl. Rivers and Woods abounds much with Fish and
[Page 4]Fowl of all sorts; there is one sort of Bird called
Loom or
Lame (because their feet are so short and plac'd so far behind, that they cannot go upon land, but always either swim or flie) very numerous in and peculiar to this Country: but no Bird abounds more than the
White Partridge, not only in the Woods, but on the high Mountains, even when cover'd with the deepest Snows; they have a kind of hair instead of feathers, which in the winter is white; but when the spring comes they turn to their proper color; which seems to be usual in all cold Countries; they have hares feet, whence they are call'd by some
Lagopodes. Fish are here in great abundance, not only sufficient to supply the Inhabitants, but frequently transported into other Nations, although their constant victuals be nothing but dryed Fish; such as abound most are Salmon and Pikes whereof some are found eight foot long.
Of all the Beasts of
Lapland the Bear is chief,
Beasts. stil'd by the Inhabitants the King of the woods; next to the Bear the Elk is remarkable, call'd by the Swedes
Aelg or
Aelgar, and by the
Germans Ellend. It differs much from the Rain-deer; both in height, being as high as any horse; and in the make of it horns, they being shorter then those of the Rain-deer, above two handfuls in breadth upon the Palm, shooting out not many lesser branches; (see a discription of this Creature among the beasts of
Poland.) There is no great breed of them in
Lapland, but they have them from other places, especially
Lithvania and
Russia, whence twice a year they swim in great herds over the river
Niva, in the spring to go into
Carelia and those parts, and in Autumn to return into
Russia. Here are likewise besides these and the Rain-deer great plenty of Stags, Wolves, Gluttons, Beavers, and more sorts of Furs. As for the Stags, there are but few and little, such as are call'd
Damicervi or
[...], which since they have nothing peculiar from those of other Nations, let it suffice that they are named. Wolves are here in great number, distinguished from those of other Countries only by their colour, which is commonly white; a great enemy to the Rain-deer, but are observ'd never to assault them if bound to a stake, the Wolf being a jealous Creature, and suspects every rope he sees to be a snare to catch him. The next are the Gluttons (so named from their rapaciousness) an amphilbious Creature, with a round head, strong and sharp teeth, like a Wolf; a plump body, and feet shorter then the Otters; their skin is of a very dark colour, some of them resemble Sables, only they have a softer and finer hair. Beavers also are very numerous here, and generally by reason of the quietness of the waters (which are never, or seldomer troubled with Ships and Boats then the
Rhine and
Danow are) all creatures that live in Rivers and feed upon Fish abound in this Country.
Beasts also that live wholly upon Land, are in great number and variety; as Foxes of several sorts and colours, as the black, brown, ashcolour'd, white, and those that are mark'd with a cross all along the back, and down the shoulders, call'd
Crucigerae. Martrons or Martins (a little beast not unlike a Ferret, feeding upon Mice, Birds, and such like;) Ermins (which are white Weesels, with black tails, feeding also upon Mice, and the like little Animals,) Sables, (a kind of Martron, the white are very rare and of extraordinary price, of the rest the black are the better) with some others, whose skins are highly priz'd and reckon'd the chief commodity of
Lapland. There are also on the mountains of
Lapland vast numbers of Mice, which because they appear commonly after rain, have I suppose, given occasion to some Authors to think them generated in the Clouds, and so rain'd down: of these Mice are reported several incredible things, as their waging war, and drawing themseves in bodies like armies, their oeconomy also, and such like stories; they are meat for their Foxes, Rain-deer, and their Dogs, which eat only the fore part of them.
Cattel common to other Nations, as Horses, Oxen, Sheep,
&c. are not to be met with in
Lapland; the beasts proper to this and the Northern Countries are the Rain-deer, an ancient name call'd by King
Aelfred in his Saxon
Periplus, Hynas, and the Latine name
Rangifer seems to be derived from it; they differ much from the
Tarandus of
Pliny, and also from our common Stags; they have three horns, two branching out backward like our Stags horns, sometimes five cubits in length, and adorn'd with five and twenty branches; the third spouting down their forehead, by which they defend themselves against wild beasts. The Doe has but two horns, somewhat shorter, one whereof is fix'd in her forehead. Their feet are thick like Bulls feet; of an ashcolour, except under their belly and haunches, which is white, resembling more an Ass then a Stag. This beast when it walks or runs makes a noise with its joints like the clashing of Flints, which is peculiar to these creatures. Though their hoofs be cleft, they do not chew the cud; they are naturally wild, but not difficultly tamed, and made serviceable to men. The males they imploy in drawing their Sleds, and the Does they keep for their milk, of which they make Cheese, but not any Butter, for they have none in the whole Country, but make use of a kind of Tallow instead of it.
The Inhabitants both in figure and manners are not unlike the
Samoieds of
Muscovy,The
[...] ture
[...] inhabitants. and the Description there given of that people, may in several respects be said to agree to them. They are generally short of stature, and for the most part very lean, and perhaps both by reason of the extream coldness of the Country. They are observ'd to be very light of body, which some, perhaps not without reason, attribute to their not eating any salt. They have great heads, prominent foreheads, hollow and blear eyes, short flat noses, and wide mouths; their hair is generally flaggy, their breast broad, slender wastes, and though their legs be small, yet are they nimble, strong and swift of foot; their usual exercises being running races, and climbing high Rocks and Trees. Though they are thus nimble and strong, yet they never go upright but stooping, which habit they get by frequent sitting in their Cottages on the ground, or by bending their bodies as they slide along the snow in their scaits. By reason of their living in woods among wild beasts, and want of correspondence, as well among themselves as with other Nations, they are very superstitious, fearful and mean spirited, and above all things dreading war; so that the
Swedes seldom or never imploy any of them in their armies, though it be falsly reported that
Gustavus Adolphus made use of both them and their magick in his expeditions upon
Germany; but of late they begin to be more couragious, and considerable, and we are inform'd that this present King
Charles the XIth, in his wars with the King of
Denmark, had some Regiments of
Lapps in his Army, who for the good service they did him, has given them better Lodgings then they had before, and caus'd them to change quarters
[Page 5]with some of the Inhabitants of
Schonen who by reason of their treacherousness, were not so deserving as they. If they chance to be removed out of their own, into a more Southern Country, they frequently fall into deseases and dye; being less able to endure a milder air, and to feed upon Salt, Bread and boil'd meat, then other Nations are to live upon their raw Flesh and dryed Fish. Formerly they were accounted plaindealers, and in bartering very honest; but having been deceiv'd by strangers they took up cheating and cousening as well as others, and are so far from being behind hand with them in it, that they are notorious and infamous for deceiving and over-reaching one another in bargaining. They (especially the women) are jealous of all strangers whatsoever, and being conscious how much their simplicity exposes them to the craft of others, they are revengeful and desperate, endeavouring to prevent any mischief that may seem to threaten them, by the destruction of the person that caused the suspition. And this they do frequently by the assistance of Magick and the help of the Devil; as is said of one, who attempting often to mischieve his Enemy, who was secur'd by his Countercharms, after long lying in wait for him, at last watched his opportunity, and finding him asleep under a great Rock, by his Spel split it upon him, and so buried him under it. They are also noted to be of a censorious and detracting humour, covetous and yet lazy withal, so that where the soyl might be improv'd, they often through idleness let it lye barren and uncultivated. They seldom take pains so much as to hunt or fish, till pinch'd by want and necessity. Consequent to these qualities they are stubborn, undutiful to Parents when old, lustful (all, except the married people, lying promiscuously together in one Hut, without any difference of age, sex, or condition), and subject to whatever vices attend an idle and unthinking life. Yet in the midst of these enormities and depravations of manners, some good qualities are to be found amongst them, as their great veneration and respect for marriage, which they seldom or never violate; their abhorrence of theft, which is remarkable in that they do keep their hands from pilfering, having so good opportunity to the contrary, there being no secured Magazines, nor Locks and Keys in the whole Country, but Merchants leave their goods oftentimes in the open fields, defended by some covering from the weather, not at all from the treachery of any dispos'd to be theevish. Their hospitality to Strangers and those in distress is very remarkable, they receiving them into their Huts, liberally affording them the best chear they have, and often charitably supplying them with stock to traffick, lending money
gratis, without any usury, and such like good deeds; which seem to be happy fruits sprung up in some of them since the plantation of our holy Religion amongst them; the ignorance and gross superstition among the natives very much disappearing since the light of the Gospel was known to them.
Concerning the Religion of the
Laplanders, we may observe what progress they have made in Christianity since it was planted amongst them; as also what was the antient manner of worship proper to these Northern Nations, for the reliques of heathenish superstition amongst some of them to this day seem to be only rak'd up under the embers, ready to flame out, were it not for the strict Government of the
Swedes, They worshiped they knew not what, but they call'd him
Jumala or
Jomala a word which they use now for the true God, as they did before for the supream Entity. Another God also they worship'd under the name of
Turrisas or
Turris-As the prince of the
Ases or
Asiaticks [whence it does appear that they conserved some knowledg of their migration, together with the rest of the
Scandians out of
Asia, under
Woden]. Several other distinct Gods they had on different occasions, as to preside over Ry, Barley, Oates and all sorts of fruits (whom they worshiped in
Finland, but had not any occasion for after their banishment); one also for Tempests, one to protect their Cattel, another to command Wolves, Squirrels, and such like ridiculous Deities.
Jumala was represented under the image of a man, sitting upon an
Altar, with a Crown upon his head, adorn'd with twelve Gems, and a golden Chain about his neck, to which was fastned a large Jewel called from its figure
Mens or
Mene i. e.
a Moon; upon his knees stood a large golden dish, into which they cast their offerings; and this dish they are supposed to have brought out of
Finland, for when they lost it they could never procure another. His Temple was in the woods, not built with any roof, but only a piece of ground fenc'd as the old Roman Temples were; this God being in time found useless, was at last casheard; and the Deities in greatest reputation amongst them at this day, are those things from which they think they receive the greatest benefits, as the sun, fire, and such like, of which more by and by.
All the Heathenish Religion the
Laplanders retain to this day, may be reduc'd to two heads,
Their Heathenish Gods. Magical and Paganish, or Superstitious and Diabolical. (Those superstitions they intermix with Christianity, we shall speak of under Religion as 'tis Christian). Of their Gods some are publick and common to the whole Country, other private and belonging only to a Division, neighbourhood, or some one particular Family; all which have their several names. Those of
Lapponia Pithensis and
Luhlensis have their greater and lesser Gods; the greater to whom they pay especial worship, are
Thor, Storejunkare, the Sun, and some add
Fire, which may seem not a distinct Deity, but only an emblem of the Sun; The lesser, common also to the
Tornenses, are worshipp'd under one name, except only that which they call
Wira Accha, signifying a
Livonian old woman, which at first was only an old stump of a tree, but now its Godship is quite rotten and moulder'd away. They worship also the Ghosts of men, their friends especially, departed, and think some Divinity to be in them, as the
Romans fancied to be in their
Manes; Spectres also and Demons are ador'd by them, which they say wander amongst Rocks, Woods, Rivers and Lakes, as the
Roman Fauni, Sylvani and
Tritones are said to have done; The
Genii also, good and bad; which they suppose to fly in the air about Christmas, and they call them
Juhly from
Juhl (a word still in use among the Northern
English) denoting at present Christmas, but formerly the New-year.
Some Gods also there are common to the whole Country, the chief of which is
Thor, or as the
Swedes call him
Thordoen, and the
Lapps themselves sometimes
Tiermes, i. e. Thunderer, or noise-maker. His proper place is thought to be in the clouds; and winds, rain, thunder, good as well as bad weather to be at his disposal. The
Romans could not have greater thoughts of their
Jupiter, then the
Laplanders have of their
Thor; whereupon they give him many great and honourable titles, as
Aijeke, great-grand-father,
&c. To him belongs the arbitrement of life and death,
[Page 6]health and sickness; he can also restrain whatsoever is injurious, and give whatever is beneficial or advantageous to men. So as the thred of mans life was supposed by the Ancients to be tyed to
Jove's chair; they fancy it to be in the power of this God to lengthen and shorten it as he pleases; that they cannot dye except he give leave, nor could have had a being but by his permission; that 'tis he that drives away those Daemons from the rocks and mountains that are enemies to them in hunting, fowling, and fishing; that he never suffers them to be hurt or dye, but when it is either for their good, or for the punishment of their offences. His image is always made of Beech-tree (therefore he is by some call'd
Muora-Jubmel, i. e. the
Wooden God), and the stumps that shoot out from the root of this tree, are easily by the help of fancy and a little art, made like a mans head, arms,
&c. by him lies a bow and arrows, and sometimes a hammer, to kill the mischievous Daemons. Into his head there is driven a piece of iron or steel, and a small flint laid by him, by which is signified fire, the chief commodity of life. The place where this God is commonly worship'd, is a piece of ground not far from their huts, set apart for that service; where, upon some boards set together like a table, they place their images; this table they make use of instead of an Altar, and boughs of Birch and Pine, with which they surround it, serve them for a Temple. When they offer sacrifice to him, they exclude all women, esteeming it a great crime if any of that sex be present. The first thing they do, is to enquire of the God, whether he will accept their sacrifice or not; and this they do by a certain instrument they call
Kannus, not unlike an old fashion'd Drum, commonly call'd by the
Swedes Laplandish Drums, on which are pictur'd several of their Gods (of which more hereafter); to this Drum they fasten a ring, whereto is tyed some of the hair of the beast designed for slaughter; then one of them beats the Drum, and the rest sing to this purpose,
What sayest thou, O great and sacred God, dost thou accept this sacrifice which we design to offer unto thee? And while some thus chant, others repeat the name of the place where they are (of the mountain if they do sacrifice to
Storjunkare); this done, they observe upon what part of the Drum the ring rests; if upon that part where the Idol is pictur'd, they take it for granted that he is pleased, and so go on with their business; if not, then they carry their sacrifice to another of their Gods, repeating the same ceremonies; and so from one to another, till at last some of them vouchsafe to accept it. If they find by the resting of the ring, that
Thor or
Tiermes is pleased with it, then they proceed in their superstitious fooleries in this manner. First they bind the sacrifice (which is for the most part a Rain-Deer), behind their house or hut, and with a sharp knife running him thro the heart, gather the hearts-blood into a vessel; then reverently approaching the table on which the Idol is placed, they therewith anoint his head and back all over, and upon his breast draw only some small strokes or crosses; behind him they place the skull, feet, and horns of the beast given in sacrifice; before him, a coffer made of the bark of Birch-tree, into which they put a bit of every member of the said beast, with some of the fat; and the rest of the flesh they keep for their private use, and so depart very well satisfied. Lest this wooden God should corrupt and moulder away, or by reason of his ugliness grow out of repute amongst them, they once every year (about the latter end of Autumn) provide themselves a neat, new, and fashionable Image, which they with a great deal of solemnity consecrate, anointing it with the blood and fat of the sacrifice, whose flesh they do not carry away with them, but bury it under ground, and so end their devotions. After which solemnity about the Idol, they count it as good a Deity as any of the rest, and give it place accordingly.
The next of their principal Gods is
Storjunkare, i. e Great Commander; a
Norwegian name (
Junkare signifying in that language a Governour), yet now in use amongst the
Laplanders. He is sometimes call'd
Stourra-Passe, i. e. Great Saint, and seems to be the same with
Seita, which those of
Kimi- and
Torne-Lapmark worship. To this
Storjunkare they pay their devotion next after
Thor or
Tiermes, whose Lieutenant they suppose him to be. He is said to preside peculiarly over all beasts and cattel; and as
Thiermes affords life and being, so all things requir'd to the sustenance of man are supposed to be at the disposal of this God, and all blessings to come thro his hands. 'Tis believed by them, that he has often appeared to fowlers and fishers in the shape of a tall personable man, habited like a person of quality, with a bow in his hand, and to have had bird-like feet; and if any happen thus to see him when they are fishing or hunting, they certainly promise to themselves good success at that time, and think the place to be holy where he vouchsafes to shew himself. His chiefest place of worship is where they suppose he most of all frequents, mountains and rocks; some of which are so high and craggy that they are unpassable to any but
Storjunkare himself, who they think by the advantage of his birds-feet, can climb to the top of them; which the
Lapps not being able to do, they consecrate any small stone they find, anointing it with the blood of a Rain-Deer, and so throw it up to the top of the rock, as a sacrifice to this inaccessible God. In
Luhla-Lapmark are said to be thirty mountains or hills, (which we omit to name), wholly set apart for the worship of this God, and the number is proportionable in other parts of the country. He is represented by a stone, which sometimes is like a bird, sometimes a man, and now and then resembling other creatures, as they can find them, for they never use any art to polish any of them, but think that their shape comes by the immediate procurement of
Storejunkare. In the Isle
Dama, which is made by a Cataract of the river
Torna-traesh, are said to be found several of these
Seitas in the exact shape of a man, one of which is very tall, and hard by him four others of a somewhat shorter size, with a kind of caps on their heads. Here formerly was the chief place of worship; but because the passage into the Island by reason of the Cataract is very dangerous, they are now forc'd from their Idolatry in that place place. These stones they do not set singly, but always three or four together, or more, according as they find them; to the first they give the title of
Storejunkare himself, the second they call
Acte, or
Storjunkare's wife, the third they place as his eldest son, and the rest they dispose of as his servants and attendants. The manner of worship which is used to this God, is much-what the same with that of
Thor or
Tiermes. In the first place they try if any one be able with all his strength to move the stone which represents their Deity; if they cannot lift it up, or find it heavier then usual, they desist from their worship at that time; but if it seem lighter then ordinary, they then think him well pleased, and so proceed in their ceremonies. They bind their sacrifice (which is always a male Deer) before their stone Idol, and after having run a thred thro his right ear,
[Page 7]kill him, and reserve the hearts-blood in a bason; this done, the Priest takes the horns and bones of the head and neck, with the shanks and hoofs of the Rain-Deer, and carries them to the consecrated mountain, where their God dwells; at the first approach he uncovers his head, bows or prostrates his body, and pays all ceremonies of honour and respect; then he anoints the stone with the blood and fat of the sacrificed beast, and places the horns behind it; to the right horn he tyes the Rain-Deer's yard, and to the left some red thred wrought upon tin with a little piece of silver. All the flesh that remains, the Votaries take a way with them, and depart with a mighty deal of satisfaction. This is the ordinary way of sacrificing to
Storjunkare, tho in some places of the country the ceremonies alter a little, but not much.
The last of the principal Idols is the Sun, whom they call
Baiwe, common to them with all other Heathens; worship'd especially for his light and heat, both extreamly grateful to these poor people. They fancy all things, especially their Rain-Deer, to be made by this God; and that he is an universal principal of being. They sacrifice to him in the same manner as to
Storjunkare, only the string which they run thro the beasts ear is white, the Victim a Rain-Doe, and there are neither tables, images, nor horns erected, as in those ceremonies.
Nor is their Idolatry more notorious then their Witchcraft; it being generally believ'd by all that have heard the name of
Laplanders, that they are strangely addicted to Magick, and all arts of Sorcery. The ancient
Biarmi are said to have been so skilful at the trade, that by only speaking to, they could ensnare and bewitch one another; and by their very looks not only stare men out of countenance, but their reason too: nor are the
Laplanders at present much degenerated from them, but rather seem to have attain'd to greater proficiency in it. They have professors of this black Art, not inferior to
Zoroaster himself, from whom some say they receiv'd their knowledge; Masters also and Tutors to bring up their children in the way of their forefathers, and never count a son worthy the inheritance of his father, till he is able to manage a spell; which is commonly his best portion. Their familiar Spirits are peculiar to each distinct family; and more or less in number, according as they are resolved to be upon their guard, or inclined to be mischievous. If the Devil have a mind to make especial use of any one of them, he seizes them whilst young with some distemper or other, and all the time lies close siege to them, filling their imaginations with all sorts of dreadful apparitions; and this he does sometimes three or four times to the same person, making him fitter for his councils, by giving him a nearer prospect of Hell. Those that are thus seized by the Devil, are the ablest Sorcerers of any, and can effect their Magical designs without the usual assistance of a Drum; as Mr.
Scheffer tells a story of a
Laplander, who upon complaint made against him for keeping a Drum, brought it and deliver'd it up to him, and with tears confest, that tho he did thus willingly part with it, and never intended to provide another, yet he should still be tormented with the same fearful and troublesome visions about future events, which (tho his eyes were shut) were always present to his imagination. Yet such inspired Wizzards as these are rarely to be met with; most commonly they make an art of it; which according to the diversity of instruments made use of, may be divided into two parts; the former employ'd about their Drum, the latter about knots, darts, spells,
&c. The Drum is peculiar to the
Laplanders, call'd
Kannus or
Quobdas, made of a hollow piece of wood, which is always the root either of Pine, Fir, or Birch, growing in a peculiar place, and having the grain of the tree following the course of the Sun,
i. e. winding from the right hand to the left. It is made hollow on one side, upon which they stretch a skin, fastening it with wooden pegs; on the other they make two holes to hold it by; the shape of the upper part is oval, about half an ell in diameter; upon the skin they paint several pictures in red, stain'd with the bark of an Aldertree; and thro the middle they draw some crosslines, in every quarter of which they place their chiefest Gods, with their attendants; neither do they observe always the same Gods, nor the same method, as appears by the picture of them in
Scheffer; only it is remarkable, 1. That ordinarily they paint the Sun in the middle, their Gods above, and the earthly things under him. 2. That since Christianity came amongst them, many of them do place upon their Drums our Saviour and his Apostles, acknowledging him to be, or have the power of one of their Gods. 3. And that they alter their figures according to the occasion of their inquiry; retaining the general notion all Heathens had of the Deity, that divers of them had particular charges and employments; and hence,
i. e. from this general consent of Idolaters, it may not improbably be gather'd, that their was but one original of all mankind, in as much as all acknowledg sacrifices and ceremonies, whereby they might consult of things future, of their good success in their affairs, and the aversion of their calamities; only this may be noted, that all Nations as they grew to be more civilized, became less addicted to Magick; the unpunish'd practice of which became so exceedingly harmful, and destructive to mankind; so that the poor Northern Nations were left in a manner abandon'd to the power of the Devil, their great enemy, till Christianity was brought in, in a manner forcibly by the rigorous commands of the Kings of
Sweden. Notwithstanding which, tho they have in many places given over their Drum, yet do they practice still their knots; have their Familiars in the shape of Flies, Bees,
&c. but chiefly their black Cats (whom they not only consult at home about their houshold affairs, but take with them also in their huntings, tho in the depths of snow), and their diabolical extasies, if I may so call them; which are exercised sometimes with, sometimes without a Drum; if with a Drum, the Sorcerer kneels down, and having a bunch of rings, or other pieces of brass, laid in the middle of the Drum, he beats with a consecrated hammer, so strongly that the rings dance upon it, by the resting of which upon such a figure, they draw forth an answer to what they would desire to know; but if this be not satisfactory, then the Drummer puts himself, by dancing and howling, into a violent motion, till he falls down, which he chuses to do upon his Drum; and there he lies without motion or disturbance, and without sense, till he voluntarily rise agian, and gives answer to what is desired. This kind of divination is chiefly used when something at a great distance is desired to be known. The stories are so frequent, and from persons not credulous, that it is very hard to disbelieve what they speak concerning these Sorceries. Take this from a person of worth and understanding, (as an example of the rest), who said that being one time at dinner with his Father, Mother, Brother, Sisters,
&c. his Fathers knife was missing upon a sudden, nor could be found,
[Page 8]till two years after, when a Cosin of his returning from being Factor in or near
Lapland, brought it with him, telling them, that out of curiosity he had employed a
Laplander (a pretender to great skill in this art), to bring him notice of the health and condition of that family, who after he had lain some time in this now describ'd manner, brought him news, that they were all well, that he found them at dinner, and that to confirm his relation, he brought away that knife, which he deliver'd to the Merchant, and the Merchant brought home now to his Uncle.
Sometimes also they practise their Sorceries without the Drum, using instead of it commonly strings or darts, by which they advantage their friends, or injure their enemies at their pleasure. The strings they make use of to raise or quell the winds, which they sell to Mariners for that purpose. They consist commonly of three knots, the first of which being untyed, affords a favourable wind; the second a brisk gale; and the third a violent storm; as has been approved to the great danger and loss of several Mariners, that have given account of it in publick. By their darts, which are short Cylinders of Lead, they wound any one who hath offer'd them an injury, or their malice puts them upon to assault. These are said to be the most powerful charms of any, and upon occasion to have split rocks, level'd mountains, and such like incredible exploits.
Besides these,
Christian Religion planted amongst them. they have some other remains of Idolatry; as a ball, which they work up of Cowshair, and so send it of mischievous errands; with several such like heathenish fooleries, all which are at this day in most parts left off among them; the Natives themselves informing one against another, and causing such delinquents to be brought to condign punishment, which is most frequently done in those parts that are under the
Swedish Government; for Christianity, which was first planted in
Finland by
Ericus the Saint, and so made known to the
Laplanders, has in these latter times made considerable advances amongst them, under the Reigns of their late Princes. In the year 1600
Charles IX. built some publick Schools in
Lapland; and in the year 1619, or about that time,
Gustavus Adolphus, who took especial care of the
Laplandish Countries, and having united them more closely to the Kingdom of
Sweden then his predecessors had done (they having been in former times rather tributary to the
Birkirli, then subjects to that Crown) erected more publick Schools, and caused divers Christian Churches to be built amongst them, all which by the charity and piety of
Christina were augmented both in number and endowments, for the promoting of Religion and Learning amongst them; and many Pastors were considerably stipended for that purpose. So that whereas formerly those that had a mind to have their children baptized, used to carry them (as
Olaus Magnus relates) sometimes above two hundred
English miles to Church, they now are eased of that trouble, and have Churches built at very inconsiderable distance one from another; and whereas they had opportunity of hearing only one Sermon a year, (
viz. when they came to a general Market which was held in
February, or to pay their taxes to the King of
Sweden), they now have Ministers provided which are always resident amongst them, whom they very much respect, and whose Sermons they constantly frequent; so that now the light of the Gospel has very much expell'd all heathenish superstitions out of these remoter Regions of the world, and a pious and godly life, with the Lords Prayer repeated with sincerity, are experienced to be the most effectual countercharm against all Sorceries whatsoever; it being constantly observed, that neither their Drum, nor any of their Magical instruments have any power against them that call upon the name of our Lord, nor are able to defend them from the power of his Ministers; insomuch that it has lately been reported upon very credible authority, that the Devil foreseeing the danger of his Kingdom, appear'd visibly to his servants, encouraging them by all means to continue in their obedience to him. The truth of this I cannot assert, but all Authors affirm, that as Christian Religion got more ground amongst them, so Government, Civility, Arts, and Ingenuity have also proportionably advanc'd.
We meet not with any thing concerning their Government before they came under the
Birkarli,The
[...] ve
[...]. but what was of the chief of the Family; which toward their wives was very rigid, and toward their children very indulgent, or rather negligent; neither did the
Birkarli exercise any greater power over them, then to fright them them into paying of tribute, part to themselves, part to the King of
Sweden, and some other such subjection, as was for their own, not the peoples profit. But
Gustavus Adolphus took even this power also from them, and the country was by him wholly and entirely subjected to the
Swedish Government; which is at present managed by three chief Governours (called by the
Swedes Lagmen), and as many Provincial Judges, so nam'd from the Provinces where they are plac'd. Under these there are particular Governours,
Ʋnder-Lagmen, which have power to determine Suits at Law, or pass sentence upon Malefactors, even unto death; but never without the assistance of a Judg and a Priest. Anciently their Courts were called only twice a year, at their publick Fairs, in winter and summer; but now for the more effectual restraining of vice, they are more frequently used amongst them; and if any controversie arise, which is of lesser concern, they put an end to it by these Courts; but if any happen of greater moment or difficulty, they appeal to the supreme Courts of Judicature in
Sweden.
Tribute, which formerly in the reign of
Ladulaus was granted to the
Birkarli,The
[...] but
[...]. is now by the
Laplanders paid only to the Crown of
Sweden, (save that those of
Torna, for their priviledg of fishing upon the coasts of
Norway, pay some Acknowledgment to the King of
Denmark). It is commonly paid in kind, as furs, skins, or dryed fish. By a contract made betwixt
Gustavus I. and these
Laplanders, the inhabitants of
Luhla and
Pitha were engaged to pay yearly eight timber of furs (forty to every timber), and those of
Torna were tax'd with the same number; and shortly after by another agreement in the year 1528, this number was doubled. In the year 1602, under
Charles IX. they paid instead of skins, every tenth Rain-deer, and one tenth of all their dryed fish. And in the year 1606, it was order'd by the same King, that over and above this certain Tax, every one when they came to the age of seventeen years, should pay either two Bucks or three Does out of their Rain-deer, and eight pound of dryed fish; but this was found very burthensome to the people; and the more, because the Magistrates took several occasions and pretences to encrease their burthens; wherefore
Gustavus Adolphus about the year 1611, order'd them less, more certain, and equal payments; either of money, Rain-deer, or furs; more or less according to the largeness or smallness of the Provinces or allotments wherein they dwell. If the allotment be somewhat large, such as they call
een heel skat, i. e. of whole Tribute, they pay yearly to the King two Patacoons;
[Page 9]but if lesser,
een half skat, i. e. of half Tribute, they pay but one Patacoon, or in lieu of it fifty Squirrels and two Foxes skins, with one pair of
Laplandish shoes. If any one has no mind to part with his Rein-deer, then he is to pay three Patacoons, which is the set price of it, and cannot be refused by the Tax-masters. Besides these greater Contributions of Rain-deer,
&c. which are only imposed on every hundred, each particular Family pays a lesser sort of Tax, which is constantly levied upon it,
viz. one white Foxes skin, and one pair of shoes; or instead of these, half a pound of dry'd Pike. These are all the Tributes which the King of
Sweden at this day receives out of
Lapland; which, notwithstanding they might be a very considerable addition to the Crown-revenues, have been by the singular piety of their late Princes, either wholly or in the greatest part allow'd for the maintenance of Ministers, and endowment of publick Schools in the
Laplandish countries.
And because the
Laplanders are thus obliged to pay Tribute of money and furs to the King of
Sweden,Markets
[...] Fairs. which every Native cannot provide himself with, but must procure by bargaining and trade, they have several Markets and Fairs appointed amongst them, whither Merchants of other countries, as
Muscovy, Norway, and
Sweden especially, resort, and bringing with them those commodities the Natives think most valuable, exchange them for furs, or what else this country affords, frequently to the
Laplanders small, but the buyers great, gain. These Fairs they practis'd even by the little light of reason from their beginning, as all other Nations do; for when one abounds, and another wants, it necessarily follows, that they must have a meeting-place to supply one another. But these
Laps, fearing or abhorring the face of a stranger, were put to some difficulties in their bartering: so that they had no other way but to leave their commodities at a certain place, and after a while returning, accept what the buyer was pleased to leave in exchange for them. Therefore
Charles IX. encouraged them to a more confident and profitable way of traffick, appointing two or more publick Fairs in every Province, and setting certain different rates upon all their commodities; so that at this time they not only barter, but have no small dexterity in overreaching and couzening stranger chapmen. Of late also they have some quantities of money brought in amongst them, and they understand the use of it; but even yet are either so stupid or unaccustom'd to Arithmetick, that they have but very few species current amongst them, which are the Patacoon, and half Patacoon, besides some very few Brass pieces of smaller value; but all their commodities are estimated according to the Patacoon, as the best Bear or Fox skin at one Patacoon, forty Squirrels or one Martron at half a Patacoon, and so all the rest; which manner of trading would be very disadvantagious to the buyer, if there were not customarily a price also tacitly set upon what they import, as a Suit of Clothes is by them estimated at three Patacoons, and one pair of Shoes, or four pair of Mittons, at half a Patacoon, and the like. But tho they use trading, yet not all of them, nor any of them out of necessity, for they can, and many do, make a shift with their natural conveniences, using themselves to as much hardship as nature can endure.
Fixt habitations they haue none,
[...]er
[...]ving. but remove their dwellings according to the season for hunting,
&c. tho in the time of
Charles IX. this their wandring was restrain'd, by his confining every one of them to his own Province. Those that like Herdsmen live upon their stocks of Rain-deer, in summer frequent the mountains: which being too cold in winter, they retire to the valleys, carrying with them their houses and stuff, either upon the backs of the Rain-deer, or (if of greater quantity) upon sleddes in baskets, the artificial making of which, is the greatest part of their employment.
Their dwelling-houses are built after the most natural and homely fashion,
Their dwelling-Houses; made only to secure them against the injury of the weather, and the assaults of wild beasts, after this manner; first, they erect four posts, in the figure of a square; which they bind together with cross-girders, and rear to them smaller pieces, fastening all with wyths; these, except the door-places, the poorer sort wholly cover with boughs of trees, or such like stuff; the richer, with a course woollen cloth, or an ordinary sort of Canvas. In these Houses or Tents they have two doors; the fore-door, which is of common use and entrance for the whole family; and the back-door, thro which the men pass, and that only when they go a hunting, fishing,
&c. but all women are forbid it; either because that sex is thought to be very inauspicious to those exercises [for if any, when he is going to hunt, do but meet a woman, he presently returns back, and leaves his design for that day]; or because the image of their God
Thor was commonly placed near their back-door, from whose sacrifices and presence all women-kind (as was said before) are wholly excluded. These houses are distinguish'd into several partitions, not by any wall, but only by great posts, or logs of wood laid upon the ground. Their fire-place is in the middle, about which the whole family lies, either upon the bare earth, or upon the skins of Rain-deer, Bears,
&c. When they have a mind to change their habitation, (which they do constantly twice a year), they unty this their Tent; take it away with them, and pitch it in a more convenient place. Another sort of houses amongst them are the Granaries or storehouses; which, that they may the better secure their provision from wild beasts and vermin, they do not build upon the ground, but at some small distance from it, upon the bole or stump of a large tree.
Their garments are very course and mean,
Their Garments; made either of the skins of wild beasts (frequently in use amongst them), or the worst of our
English cloth, which they wear only on Holidays and at their publick Fairs: they alter them according to the season of the year; yet each sex, for distinction sake, has a different mode or fashion. The men use a long garment, reaching down from their middle to their ankles, which serves them for breeches and stockings; above this they have a sort of wide coat, call'd
Mudd, which they tye about them with a leathern thong. Their shoes, as the rest of their ordinary garments, are made of the skins of Rain-deer, Elks,
&c. with the hair outward; the toe bending somewhat upward, and according to the ancient fashion, ending with a sharp point. On their heads they have a cap, made of the skin of some fowl, as Geese, Ducks,
&c. but especially of the
Loom, having the feathers, head, and wings along with it, after the manner of the ancient
Germans. The habit proper to women, is a large wide Gown, of cloth or skins, according to their ability; gather'd close in the middle, and adorn'd with divers figures of birds, beasts,
&c. which they themselves work very artificially. Linnen they use none; and in colder weather they only gird their ordinary clothes closer about them, and cover themselves entirely, except one little hole to look thro; for which reason
Adam Bremensis reports
[Page 10]them upon his own knowledge to be Cyclopes.
Their ordinary diet is either of fish,
Their Diet. or the flesh of their Rain-deer,
&c. which they eat sometimes raw, sometimes (amongst the more civilized sort) boil'd, but for the most part dryed in the air. Bread and salt are unknown to them. Instead of Bread, they make use of their dryed fish, ground small like meal; and for salt, they take the inward bark of the Pine-tree, which they dry at the Sun, and putting it into boxes, bury it a small depth in the ground; then, after it hath lain there a competent time, they kindle a fire upon the place, and so dry it; whereby it becomes of a reddish colour, pleasant taste, and gives a good relish to their courser victuals. Tho they are very greedy of flesh, yet under the
Swedish Government they constantly abstain from it on Fridays, keeping fast that day with great observance.
Their ordinary drink is pure water,
Their Drinks. which in the winter time they keep in their houses continually hot, and so drink it. Of late some quantities of Brandy, and such like hot liquors, are known amongst them, which they highly value, and drink only on Holidays and at their marriages. Tobacco they frequently take, and count it a very great delicacy. The place where they commonly eat their victuals, is in the middle of their Tent, about the fire, without table, dishes, spoons, trenchers, or any such thing which is a sign of neatness and handsomness. Their potage they drink; And their commons each one lays upon his mittons; and when he has eat it, says Grace, shakes his fellows by the right hand (which is their charity-cup), and so depart every one to his business.
Their chief employment is hunting;
Their Emploiments. in which they make use of divers sorts of instruments, as Spears headed with fish-bones, Nets, and of late Guns. In the snow time they make use of a kind of shoes call'd
Skider, or
Skidh, with which they will run down the strongest Deer. They are made commonly of Fir, or the bark of trees, about three or four,
Olaus Magnus says, five or six ells long, and four or five inches broad; turn'd up at the forepart, after the manner of their shoes; for better convenience in sliding, they are cover'd with the skin of a Rain-Deer with the hair on; they fasten them to their feet with a piece of wythe, which is tyed to the middle of the Skait and to their ankles. In these the men are able to travel an hundred and fifty
English miles a day; and the women are no less expert at it, tho never permitted to go a hunting. If they kill a Bear, they use very great solemnity and triumph about it, inviting their friends, and distributing its flesh (which they count a great dainty) amongst them; honouring him that did the exploit, with several titles, and the best portion of the beast. They never bring home their prey by the fore-door, or after them; but always observe this as a special rule, that they throw it into the Hut before them.
Marriage they hold in great veneration;
Marriages. it being seldom known that Adultery is committed, never if known, that it goes unpunished. When any one has a mind to marry, he enquires out a Maid who has a good share of Rain-deer (for the Parents give portions to their Children not equally, but with respect to primogeniture); then he, not being permitted to woe for himself, acquaints his nearest Kinsmen with his intentions, who manage the business for him, sollicite her Father, Mother, and Friends, presenting them with Brandy and Tobacco, or what is most esteemed, and so gain their consent. This done, the young man is invited to the Hut where his bride lives, where he accepts some conditions propos'd by her Friends, and lists himself as her Fathers hired servant for one whole year; after which time expir'd he takes his Wife to him, and proceeds to the solemnizing the Marriage, which is always done with great ceremony and pomp, according to their abilities. The bride they deck with the choisest ornaments they can get, as pieces of Tin and Alchymy, with several Rings of fish-bones and Brass,
&c. and being thus attired, her nearest Friends, (much, as seems, against her mind) rather dragg, then conduct, her to Church, where she is married to her Husband, according to the form, prescrib'd in their Liturgy. Formerly (says
Olaus Mag:) Wedlock was solemniz'd by the Parents and Friends (the Father supplying the place of the Priest) by the striking of Flint and steel; the fittest Emblem as they thought, of a married life. And here it may be observ'd, That no one man is permitted to have many wives at once, but is constantly limited to one only; Polygamy not being so much as heard of amongst them; That they never marry without the consent of their Friends, but referr themselves wholly to their advice, insomuch that clandestine Marriages are never practis'd by them; and that after they are contracted, they are not presently free to trade for themselves, but must serve their Father in Law as an hireling for a certain time, that he may be witness of their good husbandry, which seems to be a Custom from ancient times and Nations.
Their Children, assoon as born,
[...] are put to the greatest hardships, that they may be able afterwards to endure the severity of the air the better. They take two Vessels one of hot, the other of cold water, and dip the Infant first into one, and then into the other: and if it be strong enough to endure so sudden a change of heat and cold, they think it will make a hardy Fellow, and fit for their business; whereupon they endeavour to have it baptiz'd, as soon as they can possibly, wrapping it in moss, and so carrying it to Church, though at a very great distance, either upon their backs or in a Pannier upon their Rain-deer, as they anciently us'd to do to their publick Fairs, whither Priests were sent twice a year out of
Sweden. While their Children are young, they use them to bow and arrows, by which they are to get their future livelihood, and to make them the more expert, always place their victuals upon a post, as their mark to shoot at, which they hit down, or fast.
Diseases, especially infectious,
[...] are seldom or never known in this Country; but if it happen that any pestilential distempers be brought in, (as the Plague was lately amongst Hemp) the malignity of them is corrected by the pureness of the Air; so that they never do any great mischief. The disease they are commonly troubled with, is the soreness of eyes, (whether caus'd by their smoaky Huts, or ill dress'd food, or any other reason, I know not) but it usually ends in blindness. Pleurisies also, and inflammations (perhaps by reason of their constant feeding upon flesh) are sometimes incident to them; which they cure by drinking the decoction of the root of Moss, or the stalks of Angelica, in the whey of the milk of their Rain-deer. If a member be benumm'd with cold, they apply Cheese made of the milk of their Rain-deer, which is a present remedy: and when any pains or aches in their joynts or body, as the Gout, Cramp, Sciatica,
&c. seize them, they apply a Caustick of the flame of any chips to the affected place, much after the same manner as the
East Indians are said to cure such like Distempers, by a kind of moss
[Page][Page]The Manner of the Laplanders Liuing in Summer
The Manner of the Laplanders Liuing in WinterF. H. Van. Houe. Sculp:R.
t Hon
ble ANTONY : EARLE of
SHAFTSBVRY
[Page][Page 11]call'd
Moxa; and the
West Indians by an excrescence of black Birch tree, call'd by them
Spunk, and applyed after the same manner; from all which it seems, that the cure is to be attributed rather to the fire, then the fuel.
If any one be dangerously sick, they either send for the Priest, if near, to prepare him for death; or to the Magician, to resolve them by his Drum, if he shall recover; parting their respects 'twixt Gods Ministers and the Devils Servants. If he dye, they imagine that his Soul is not at rest till the body be in the grave, and for that reason use all haste possible to convey it to some Burying-place, which is frequently the nearest Cave or Wood; (Church-yards by reason of their remoteness, they seldom make use of) The dead body they carry upon a sledd, and when they come to the Cave, cast it in, and the sledd after it; or else cover it with great Logs of Wood, to secure it from wild Beasts; always laying besides it a Flint and steel, and sometimes a Hatchet, which they suppose may be serviceable to them in the other world. At their return, they provide a Funeral Banquet, or rather a sacrifice to the Ghost of the deceased person; which is thus, They take those Rain-deer that dragg'd the dead body to the grave, and offer them in sacrifice to the
Manes; feasting upon their flesh, and making merry with Brandy and Tobacco, and the best chear they have; at last they drink a health round to the person departed; this done, they carefully gather the bones of the Rain-deer, put them into a box, with a rude image of their friend, and so bury them together. These Ceremonies, observ'd also in their Heathenism, shew'd, that even then, as it were by the dictates of Nature, they conceived themselves to consist of an Immortal part also; and that they expected another life after this, wherein they imagine every one to follow their former imployments, and consequently to be again united to their bodies.
The Lives and Manners of the
Laplanders, as it is express'd in the Plate here annex'd. The upper-part is their Summer-living: The under-part their way of living in Winter.
In the Ʋpper-part you have, (1) A Church for those who are converted to the
Lutheran Religion; At the entrance of which, in lieu of a (2) Bason of Holywater, there stands one full of Brandy-wine, with a spoon in it, of which every one who comes to Church takes a sup, to encourage and warm his zeal. The first man you see represents the (3) Priest; the next the best (4) man of the Parish. Then follows a (5) Bride, attended upon by two (6) Bride-maids, after whom comes the (7) Bridegroom, and other friends. (8) Their manner of making Baskets, which is their greatest trade. (9) Their way of carrying, and of rocking their children. (10) The manner how the young children grown up, suck the Rain-Deer. (11) The man and wife's way of lying in bed. (12) Their Houses for keeping their provisions; themselves, in the coldest part of Winter, lying in Tents. (13) Their manner of eating. (14) The Priests way of Baptizing, and the Clarks bringing water. (15) Their way of Wire-drawing, which is much used amongst them, for adorning of their Boots and Coats. (16) Amongst those who are not yet converted to the Christian Religion, you have their way of sacrificing. (17) Their three Gods standing uppermost, and under each of them upon the Altars lye three pieces of the sacrificed Rain-deer. (18) Their way of praying to them. (19) Their way of Burial. (20) Their way of praying to Death, that it would be pleased to spare them awhile.
In the Ʋnder-part you have, (1) Their manner of bringing their Taxes (consisting of several sorts of Skins and dry'd Fish) to the Kings Commissioners, which being paid, each one takes a large spoonful of Brandy-wine, which stands at the end of the Table, and so away. Above which you see the (2) Commissioners Tent. (3) Their, way of travelling in Sledds, drawn by Rain-Deer, (which, by the by, do agree so well with those barren Countries, that if you do but bring them into
Sweden, (which yet is none of the most fertile), they dye in a short time). (4) Their way of carrying their goods. (5) Their manner of ruling their Rain-Deer with a whip or line. (6) Their way of shooting them. (7) Their taking Tobacco, which they prize above meat. (8) Their speaking in the ear of the Rain-Deer, telling them what they should do, or whither they should go, (which, as I am credibly inform'd, they will observe exactly). (9) Their manner of gelding them. (10) Their way of laying their heads under a Drum; which the Devil beats, and from thence the man learns what success he shall have in his affairs. (11) His giving the man the Hammer, and letting him beat.
NExt to be spoken to, is
Suecia or
Sweden, strictly so call'd; of which, because it has been honour'd always by the Residence of their Kings, and been the chief Scene of
Swedish Affairs, we shall in the first place treat; and afterwards speak of
Gothia, or
Gothland, with all its Provinces, rather as an Accession to the Crown of
Sweden, then a distinct Kingdom from it: though anciently
Gothia and
Suecia had their distinct successions of Kings. Of
Finland, Ingria, and
Aesthonia, with the late Conquests in
Livonia, Pomeren, &c. we shall in the last place discourse; reserving the Laws and Government, as also the manner and customs of the People, till we come to
Stockholm, the present Metropolis of this great Empire.
Suecia then,
Suecia. or
Suetia, call'd by the
English Sweden, or
Swedland, is bounded on the North with
Lapland, on the West with the
Dofrine Hills, on the East with the
Bothnick and
Finnick Bays, and on the south with
Gothland and
Sconen. A fruitful, but in some parts mountainous and woody, Country; abounding with several rich Mines, and affording very great conveniencies of water and fuel for working them. It is divided into two General parts,
viz. Suecia strictly so taken, and the
Northlands, or
Northlandish Provinces.
I. The
Northlands contain in them two distinct Countries or Provinces,
Helsingia and
Gestricia; parted one from the other by the great wood
Oedemord.
1.
Gestricia.
Gestricia, which affords some Iron-mines and indifferent good store of corn. It has but one City in it, call'd
Gevalia commodiously situated upon the Bay of
Bothnia, half a days Journey from
Kupferberg.
2.
Helsingia.
Helsingia, which was anciently a general name for all the Northern Provinces, from the North-sea to the River
Ʋla, and the Lake
Ʋlatresk in the North of
Cajania, as appears from some records of a Parliament held at
Telgis, A. 1328, and a distinct Kingdom of it self; govern'd by its own Kings, till the time of
Ingellus the second, King of
Ʋpsal (so were the Kings of
Sweden anciently styl'd) who at his Coronation invited the King of
Helsingia, and several other Princes, to the solemnity; and after having made them drunk with strong liquors, set fire on the Palace, and so destroyed them all, and seized their possessions; which ever after were united to the Crown of
Sweden. The inhabitants of this Country had anciently a peculiar language of their own, and also an Alphabet altogether distinct from the
Runick, as appears by several old monuments found amongst them. They are recorded to have fought many famous battels, with their neighbours of
Finland, Carelia, and
Cajania; and after having driven some of their Enemies as far as the
Sund, in memory of their conquest, and to eternize their name, to have built the City
Helsingburg. From them are said to have come the
Nylanders, who border upon
Carelia; and use the same manner of speech to this day. The Natives are generally very hospitable and courteous to strangers, of a docile and ingenious disposition, and above all things endeavouring to be neat and handsom within doors. The whole Country of
Helsingia is divided into four Provinces.
1.
Helsingia, properly so call'd,
Helsingia.
heretofore known by the name of
Sundhede; which has in it three lesser divisions:
Alora, thro which runs the river
Liusna: Sundhede, in the midst whereof is the Lake
Dil: and
Nordstigh, not far from the wood
Arskog. The soil is indifferently fruitful for Corn, but chiefly for Pasture; the inhabitants mostly imploying themselves in feeding and managing their stock of Cattel. Here is but one City in the whole Country, call'd
Hudingsvaldia, remarkable for the great quantities of Corn, Butter, Hydes, Pitch, Rosin, Masts of Ships, and Deal-boards, that are convey'd hence into other Countries.
2.
Medelpadia,
Medelpadia.
much of the same nature with
Helsingia; but only it is narrower, and abounds more with woods and mountains; in it are two rivers very full of fish. Some say the Kings of
Helsingia anciently resided here.
3.
Angermannia, a fruitful and pleasant,
Angermannia.
yet in some places mountainous, Country. The soil is so good and certain, that tho it bear Corn plentifully, it needs not be manur'd above once in ten years. It is divided in the middle into two parts, the northern and southern, by a great wood, which runs all along from the ragged mountain
Scula, and thence takes its name; water'd it is by only one river, well stored with Salmon and other fish; secur'd by one City, nam'd
Hernosandia, yeilding the same commodities as
Hudingsvaldia, only it affords no Copper.
4.
Bothnia,
Bothnia.
not so full of mountains as
Angermannia; of a sandy and barren turf, but well supplied with fish and other commodities. It has in it several rivers of considerable bigness, which empty themselves into the
Bothnick-Bay. Cities here are none, but this defect is supplied by a frequency of Market-Towns, which are almost as numerous as the Parishes. The advantage of this Country is chiefly by the trade from the nearer parts of
Lapland, which is managed chiefly by the
Birkarli, and all comes to the Seaside this way.
II.
Sueonia, or
Sweden, strictly so taken,
Sueonia. which contains in it these five Provinces,
Ʋplandia, Westmannia, Dalecarlia, Nericia, and
Sudermannia.
1. That which lies most North,
Dalecarlia. or Northwest, is
Dalecarlia, i. e. the Dale or Valley of men (
Carle signifying a man); a woody and barren Country; yet very considerable for its abundance of Copper, Allum, and Vitriol; all which are said to be dug out of one and the same Mine, which is very large, and no less remarkable for its Mettals, then for the vertue of the water that is found in it; for if they steep a piece of Iron in it, it will in a short time (as they say) turn it into very good Copper, wanting a fourth part of the weight of the Iron. Which seems to confirm the opinion of some Philosophers, that all these three are of the same nature; and that Allum is the matter of Vitriol, as likewise Vitriol is of Copper. This Province is in the Diocess of the Bishop of
Westeras, and has never a City in it.
[Page][Page]DALECARLIAE et WESTMANNIAE. Nova et Accurata descriptio.
VIRO ILLVST.
mo D.
no PETRO JULIO COYET, Equite Aurato, S. R. M. Sueciae Cosiliario Aulico, Scretario Status, et nunc ad Confoederatos Belgas extra ordinem Ablegato.
2.
[...] On the South or South-east of
Dalecarlia, lies
West- or
Wester-mannia, or
Westmannerland, bordering upon
Ʋpland and
Gestricia. It is, according to the several Dales or divisions that are in it, divided into three parts,
viz. Oster- Wester- and
Sun-Dalia. The soil is very fruitful, and the Mines very considerable, affording Steel, Iron; Copper, Lead, and some veins of Sulphur, in greater quantity then those of any other Province of the whole Country. There is also a Silver Mine discover'd, and made use of at
Salberg. The Cities here are three,
Arosia, Arbogia and
Koping; the chief of these is
Arosia or
Westeras, a Bishops seat; where, in the Cathedral Church, are several great stones with
Gothick inscriptions, as there are likewise at
Stregnesia. In this City the agreement, by which the State of the Kingdom was changed from an Elective to an Hereditary Monarchy, was concluded
ann. 1540, in the time of
Gustavus I. and thence call'd
Pactum Arosiense. The history was thus: The
Swedes not being able to endure the tyranny and oppression of
Christiern II. then King both of
Sweden and
Denmark, forsook their Allegiance to him; and under the conduct of Prince
Gustavus, (who had wonderfully escaped from his imprisonment in
Denmark), took up arms against him, expell'd him their Country, and at last gain'd their former liberty and priviledges; whereupon, to requite their General for this signal good he had done the publick, they (at the instance of one
Canutus President of the Council, and
Johannes Gothus the Popes Legat,
ann. 1523) unanimously elected him King; and considering how much it might tend to the happiness of the Kingdom, to have the Succession ascertain'd to his Issue, they, in the year 1540 wholly gave up their power of Electing their Kings for the future, and by Oath and solemn Covenant setled the Crown upon him and his Heirs for ever; which confidence of the people in their Prince, was justified in the event, for the new King was so far from abusing his Absolute power, that in that very year he published many Laws for the benefit of the people.
3.
[...]. South of
Westmannia lies
Nericia; a little, but fruitful, Province; yeilding good store of Sulphur, Allum, and Vitriol. Some Silver Mines there are, but not labour'd. Most of its inhabitants are Smiths who supply the whole Country, especially those that work in the Mines, with Iron instruments of all sorts. Here is one City nam'd
Orebrogia.
4.
[...]. South or South-east of
Nericia, lies
Sudermannia, or
Sudermanland; having on the East the
Baltick Sea,
Ostro-Gothia on the South, and the Lake
Meller on the North. It is famous for several Cities it contains; the chief and most considerable of which is
Nicopia, the ancient seat of the Dukes of
Sudermannia. Here also is the place for building of Ships; the workmen are good, and materials cheap. Next to this is
Stregnesia, a Bishops seat: with
Telga, Torsilia, and
Trosa, all commodious for trade.
5.
[...]. North or North-east of
Sudermannia, lies the Province of
Ʋpland, so call'd from its situation in the Country, or as some say, from King
Ʋbbon, who reigned here. It is bounded on the East side by the
Baltick Sea, on the South by the Lake
Meller, on the West and North by the Rivers
Sawe and
Dalecarle. This Country affords great plenty of Corn, with which it supplies the neighbouring Provinces. Some few Mines it has, of Lead and Iron especially; some also of Silver, tho not digg'd. It is divided into three Lands, or (as the
Swedes call them)
Folk-lands: 1.
Tihundria, which lies most Northerly of any, and takes its name from ten Prefectures, or Hundreds, into which it is shar'd out. 2.
Athundria, lying betwixt
Ʋpsal and
Stockholm; so call'd because it contains eight Prefectures. 3.
Fiedrundria, which takes its name from four Prefectures, into which it is divided; in it is the City
Enkoping, four leagues from
Ʋpsal, and seven from
Stockholm. And here it may be observed, as peculiar to this Province, that it (as the Counties in
England) is shared out into several Prefectures or Hundreds, as
Erling-hundrat, &c. Each of them containing at first one hundred families, all, two thousand two hundred; which is not observed in other Provinces, but their divisions are called
Harodh (
Har signifying an Army, and
Odh a possession), all which at first were supplyed with Inhabitants from this Province of
Ʋpland; for when families increased above their hundreds, some (after the manner of an army) were singled out and listed to go and people, or rather subdue, other parts of the Country; wherefore these men setling in other Provinces, called the place where they first sate down, The possession of such a Colony or Army; as
Daga-Harodh, Lystugn-Harodh, &c.
In this Province are five Cityes; 1.
Encoping, where was formerly a Monastery of
Minorites.
2.
Sigtunia, so called from
Siggo, King of
Sweden, who founded it. Here was anciently a Monastery of
Dominicans, the burying place of some of their Archbishops.
3.
Oregrundia or
Oregrund, a rich & populous City, abounding with corn & several sorts of Merchandise, because of the commodiousness of the Port.
4.
Ʋpsal, the most Antient, and most famous,
Ʋpsal. City in the whole Kingdom. It takes its name, says
Johannes Magnus, from
Ʋbbon King of
Sweden, who founded it, about the year after the Flood 240: but as others, from its situation upon the River
Sala. Here was formerly the chief seat of the
Swedish Kings; for which reason, as well as for the dignity of the City, one of their Titles was
Ʋpsala-Konung, i.e. King of
Ʋpsal. Here were also the supream Courts of Judicature, Civil and Ecclesiastical; and the seat of their only Archbishop, continued to it to this day. Fortified it is, by one onely Castle, built after the modern, not antient
Gothick, fashion; upon a high hill, some small distance from the City, overlooking and commanding the whole Town: begun by
Ericus, continued by King
John, and perfected by
Charles Gustavus the first: in this City is the Metropolitan Church of the whole Kingdom, covered upon the roof, (as are most of the chief buildings), with Copper; adorned with an Artificial Clock, and honoured with the Monuments of several of their Kings:
Ericus the Saint is said to lye buried here in a golden Coffin:
Gustavus Adolphus also has his Tomb in this Church, upon which the whole History of his life is inscribed in large golden Characters. Here is also the only University they have in the whole Kingdom; begun at first, say some,
Ann. 1248, under
Ericus Balbus XI. by a College of only four Professors: or as
Loccenius will have it, about the year 1306, under one
Andreas President of the said College, who kept a free Table for Choristers and poor Scholars to assist in the Quire; but now, by the care of some of their later Kings, advanc't into a famous University. An. 1476, in the Reign of
Steno Sture Senior, Pope
Sixtus IV. gave it the same priviledges with
Bononia: An. 1595,
Charles then King endowed it with several Immunities and Revenues, by his Royal Patent: which, says
Messenius, was in the year 1608 upon some differences 'twixt the
Calvinists and
Lutherans fraudulently got from it; which if so, yet probably that Prince who favoured the Reformers so much, did restore it to the University:
[Page 14]of this See
Loccenius, Hist. Suec. Lib. 8.
Pag. 474. An. 1624 in the time of
Gustavus Adolphus it was most considerably augmented; that King settling upon the University 306 Mannors, 8 Granaries of Tythes, 4 Mills, and 30 Demesnes, out of his own Crown Revenues, free from all Taxes and Impositions, towards the maintenance of more Professors and poor Scholars: commanding, that the chief Rector should be elected by the Professors; that one of these should read a publick Lecture throughout the whole year (continued at present only in the Wintertime); that the Scholars should live peaceably, soberly, and minding their own affairs, not meddle with state matters; that none of them should (as they had formerly done) wear swords, or carry arms. This University in the time of King
John III 1592, was removed hence to
Stockholm; but that place being found, for several reasons, inconvenient, it was in a short time remanded to
Ʋpsal. A Library they have, well stored with books: a considerable part of which was given by
Gustavus Adolphus An. 1631, which he in his expeditions against
Germany took out of the Library of
Wurtzburg and other places. To this City there anciently did belong several Lands and Revenues by the title of
Ʋpsala Oedom or the
Patrimony of Ʋpsal, given by
Freius surnamed
Pacificus, one of their ancient Kings, out of his own hereditary Lands, as a publick stock; which Patrimony being embezel'd by those men that had the managery of it, and for many years no account given, An. 1282, in the Reign of
Magnus I. surnamed
Ladulaus, it was order'd in Council, That these publick Lands should be sought after, and reunited to the Crown, or some other way found, to maintain the Grandeur of the Court. The Lands, by reason of long alienation, could not be regain'd: wherefore it was enacted, that in lieu of them, all the Revenues of fishing in the
Finnick and Bothnick Bays, the Lake
Meller, and all other Lakes and Rivers within the Kings Dominions; as also of all Mines of what Metal soever, should over and above the Land-taxes, wholly and entirely belong to the Crown.
This City was anciently the chief Place of their Heathenish,
Their ancient manner of Worship. as it is at present of their Christian, worship: wherefore it may not be amiss here to treat as well of their ancient superstitions, as of their present true, Religion: The Heathenish Deities, to which they pay'd their devotion were
Thor, Oden, and
Freia; who are said to have come out of
Asia into this Country, and were, though under divers names, worshiped by most of the
Scandians. Thor, so call'd from the Assyrian word
Thur or
Thurra, i.e. powerful, had a Temple dedicated to him, so stately and magnificent, that, by the relation of
Johannes Magnus, who tells prodigious stories of the Golden Roof,
&c. the Temple of the Sun in
Cuzco was but a poorly adorn'd Chappel to it: In the middle of this stupendous Fabrick their God was set, upon a bed or couch, with a Crown upon his head, adorn'd with twelve stars, and a scepter in his hand: Upon his right hand stood
Oden or
Othen, arm'd like a soldier
Cap a-pie, not unlike the
Roman God
Mars: On his left was plac'd the Goddess
Freia, their
Venus, holding a sword in one, and a bow in the other, hand. These three Deities were had in special reverence amongst them; Votaries coming from very remote parts, every ninth year, to visit the Temple, and pay their devotions; offering the most precious gifts they could provide, and sacrifices, for nine days together, (
Pythagorean-like counting nine an auspicious number); and on every day nine sorts of Animals, three of every sort: not sparing their servants, friends, children, nor even their own selves, from being part of such bloody victims: This they did, not by choice, (every votary striving to be presented a sacrifice to his God), but by lots; taking him on whom the lot fell, tying a cord about his middle, and so let him down alive into a large well, dugg close by the Temple for that purpose: if he expir'd quietly, and without any great struggling, or motion of the water, they concluded, that their god was pleas'd, and their Petitions heard: if otherwise, and he seem'd to dye with any reluctancy, they suppos'd their god was angry, and thereupon presently made ready another suchlike sacrifice, to appease the wrath: When the body was drawn up out of the well, (if a pleasing sacrifice), they thought it not fit; to bury it in the ground the ordinary way, but hung it up upon a tree in the consecrated grove; and for ever after suppos'd it to be instated in a place of happiness, and esteem'd it as one of their Demi-gods. In these cruel sacrifices their Kings themselves were not only present, but sometimes, when the lot fell upon them, offer'd up to their Gods: being attended to the place of execution with great joy and acclamations by the greatest part of their subjects, who promised themselves great and lasting happiness by so Noble a victim.
Besides these three principal, they worshiped many other inferior, Deities, upon different occasions; as
Methothim, who presided over their Magical Arts;
Fro, to whom they always offer'd black victims;
Vagnoft, Hading, &c. with all the the Sons and attendants of their principal Gods: Of which see
Johannes and
Olaus Magnus, Adam Bremensis, and
Loccenius. The many foolish superstitions to which their Ignorance and credulity made them subject; as their arming themselves whensoever it chanc'd to thunder, and shooting arrows up into the clouds, to assist these Gods of their Country, who, (as they suppos'd), were waging war against those of other Nations; Their using to sacrifice their horses before they engag'd with their enemies, and setting the heads of them upon pales before the Army, in manner of a Palisado; and such like, frequently met with in Authors, are scarce worth mentioning: only this may be observ'd, that in their customs and ceremonies about their worship, they had some faint notions of an Infinite power, to which they owed their being and happiness; that their soul did not dye with their body, and such like common dictates of natural reason: All which were clearly discover'd to them, and the mists of Idolatry and Irreligion quite dispell'd, by the happy plantation of Christianity amongst them.
In the year of Christ 780,
[...].Bero or
Biorno III. King of
Sweden, desir'd
Charles the Great Emperor of
Germany, to send some able Ministers into the North, to plant Christian religion amongst them; who accordingly sent one
Herebertus surnam'd
Belga, a man of noted piety and learning in those times. He succeeded well in his undertakings, gain'd many proselytes, and built a Church at
Lyncopen in
Ostro-Gothia, where himself was Rector, and afterwards dyed.
Ann. 814,
Ludovicus Pius I. Emperor of
Germany, in the sixth year of his reign, sent hither more Apostles; one of which was nam'd
Ansgarius, a Monk of
Corbey in
France, who brought with him from thence divers of the Monks; and planted in
Saxony a Monastery of the former name, intending it for a Seminary to supply the want of Preachers in the North. But all this Emperors time Christianity was rather privately brought in hither, (Paganism prevailing, and most of these pious men being martyr'd for their Religion) then publickly countenanc'd or established; till about
ann. 955,
[Page 15]when
Olaus Scot-konung, desirous to enjoy the purity of the Gospel, sent to
Ethelred then King of
England, desiring him to furnish him with Ministers to preach Christianity to him and his subjects. [That there hath always been great friendship betwixt those two Crowns, appears by many particulars; one especially not to be forgotten, is that the Kings of
Sweden would never permit any of their subjects to engage with the
Danes and other Northern people, to exercise Piracy against, or invade, the
English Dominions, as 'tis observed by
Jo. Magnus, and other Authors].
Ethelred readily consented to so pious a request, and dispatch'd over one
Sigfrid, then Archbishop of
York, with divers other godly Priests, and worthy labourers; who at their arrival in
Sweden found kind reception, baptiz'd the King himself, with all his Courtiers; and prevail'd so far to have the Gospel propagated amongst his subjects, that Christian Churches were built in every Province of the Kings Dominions. This so happy a plantation was water'd by the blood of three of his Followers,
Ʋnaman, Sumaman, and
Vinaman, murther'd by the contrivance of a wicked woman, and lye buried at
Wexio, a City in
Smalandia. After this, Christianity was nurs'd up by their succeeding Kings;
Ericus especially, who (as was said before) propagated it to the
Finlanders. Exercis'd it was according to the Ceremonies of the Church of
Rome, till about the year 1530, at which time
Gustavus I. then King, (upon what motives Authors do not agree), established the
Lutheran Religion; displacing all those that refus'd to subscribe the Articles he propos'd, amongst whom was that elegant Historian and very learned person
Jo. Magnus, then Archbishop; who refusing to comply with the King, left his Country, fled to
Rome, there wrot his History, with an account of this Metropolis, and dyed 1544. In the year 1537, the said
Gustavus enter'd into a League with
Christianus King of
Denmark, Philip Landsgrave of
Hassia, the Elector of
Saxony, and other
German Princes, to defend this Religion thus reformed, against the Emperor and other Princes of the Communion of the Church of
Rome. In the year 1613, it was publickly consented to by the States of the whole Kingdom.
A. D. 1627,
Gustavus Adolphus gave sactuary in his dominions to all those that were any way persecuted in
Germany, or elsewhere, for this profession. Confirm'd it was, and agreed to, by
Charles Gustavus X.
ann. 1655; and by this present King
Charles XI. in 1663, publickly ratified and subscrib'd to, and ever since by him maintain'd; so that
Lutheranism may seem to have taken deepest root in this Kingdom.
The Clergy of
Sweden is had in great honour and reputation.
[...] And tho the revenues belonging to the Church are since the Reformation very much impaired, (
Gustavus I. annexing, as 'tis said, to the Crown at one time 7500 Farms and Ecclesiastical Livings), yet the respect due to their Ministers does not seem to be much abated. Their Archbishop always performs the Religious Solemnities at the Kings Coronation, and, with as many Bishops as the King pleases to chuse, is admitted Privy-Counsellor to his Majesty. He is reckon'd the chief person in the Kingdom next to the King himself, and accordingly takes place of all Temporal Lords; and anciently when it was granted to a Knight or Lay-Privy-Counsellor to have only twelve, and a Senator eight, it was order'd that he might have forty, and a Bishop thirty, Horses in their Retinue. He has under him seven Suffragans,
viz. the Bishops of
Lyncopen, Scare, Stergnes, Westeras, Wexio, Aboa, and
Riga: And divers Superintendents, who have Episcopal Jurisdiction,
viz. of
Calmare, Gottenburgh, Marienstadt, Revel, &c. All which make up an Ecclesiastical College, call'd the supreme Consistory of the Kingdom, wherein the Archbishop always presides. The Clergy of this Nation, says
Loccenius, according to the manner of the Eastern Churches, us'd to marry; till Pope
Innocent IV. by a Council held at
Sceningia a City of
Ostro-Gothia, ann. 1248, forbad marriage to Priests, and caus'd those that had wives to put them away. What concerns their Religion, or their Church-Government, being the same with that of the
Lutherans, must be elsewhere more largely treated of. The King is the absolute Soveraign in Ecclesiastical matters, which he determines not without the advice of his Archbishop and Bishops. He names all the Bishops, and by his power are summon'd all Ecclesiastical Assemblies. Authors make a difference betwixt their Bishops and Superintendents, but it is not considerable, both equally depending upon the Archbishop; but the Superintendents have not in all things equal power with the Bishops.
5. The fifth and last City of
Ʋpland is
Stockholm,Stockholme. lying in 42 degrees of Longitude, and of Latitude 58 ten minutes. A Town of great Trade, the present seat of the Kings of
Sweden, and the Metropolis of the whole Kingdom. Situate it is in an Island on the side of the Lake
Meller, encompassed on all sides, especially that toward the sea, with high rugged Rocks (called
Scheren) which hinder the prospect of the City, but very much secure the Haven, which is very large and of dangerous entrance; though these Rocks are a defence to the Town, yet by reason of them it is sometime set upon by an enemy unawares, as it was by
Sigismund King of
Poland, Anno 1594. It is said to have been founded by King
Birgerus Anno 1261, and from the great quantity of wood used in the building of it, called
Stockholme, (
Stock signifying wood and
Holme an Island). But
Anno 1552, a fire happening in the City and by reason of the wooden buildings burning down a great part of it, it was by publick command rebuilt, part of stone, part of brick, part also upon Piles, so that the sea flowes under the houses. In it are several large well-built bridges; only two gates, opening to the South and North. Publick Inns or Lodging-houses here are none, but strangers take up their quarters with some of the Burghers, entertainment handsome, and charges not great.
An. 1407, it was consumed by Lightning, and some thousands of people destroyed by the fire. In 1529, King
Gustavus the first, called several principal Burghers and Merchants out of other Cities, to inhabit this; most of the inhabitants being driven hence by the tyranny of
Christiern II. King of
Denmark. There are in it eight Churches in all; one of which is supplied by a
Finlandish, another by a
German, Minister; who constantly preach in their own language. In the Cittadel is the Kings Palace, handsomely built, some part eight or nine stories high, yet of great strength and security; within it is a large and magnificent Church, built by King
John, erected upon Marble pillars, and rooft with Copper; with a private Chappel for the King, very large also, having forty windows on each side; where at the high Altar is said to be a massy Silver Image of our Saviour crucified, in full proportion. This City has been very often besieg'd;
ann. 1434, by the people of
Sweden, who rebelled upon account of Foreign Officers employed in the affairs of the Kingdom, contrary to the Laws of the Land': By King
John 1481: 1522 by
Gustavus I. and at other times; the enemy always taking advantage of a hill called
Bruncaberge, so
[Page 16]near, that from it they can batter the Cittadel. The Arms of this City are the Head of Saint
Ericus Crown'd
Or, taken by the agreement of the States, in remembrance of that Kings Virtue and Piety; and those of the Kingdom are three Crowns
Or, in a Field
Azure, given for the same reason. This being the Metropolis, and lying so conveniently, is the greatest place of trade in the whole Nation; from whence are exported Copper, Iron, Steel, Lead, Dealboard, and very many Manufactures made of those materials: Copper especially, whereof this Kingdom supplies the necessities almost of the whole world.
This City is govern'd by four chief Magistrates or Consuls, who are elected out of the Burghers, and enjoy the dignity for their life. Their Office is to give Laws, and decide controversies arising 'twixt one Citizen and another, if of lesser concern; but if of great moment, they always have the assistance of the Lieutenant of the Castle, who is President of the Court for that time; and either puts an end to the case, or transmits it to the Kings Council. They perform this office by turns, two having precedence, and supplying it one, and the other two the next, year. When any extraordinary affairs happen, they may have the assistance of some of the principal Citizens, who take upon them particular businesses, as the care of Buildings, the decision of some private action, promulgation of Laws,
&c. Besides these, there are twelve Senators or Aldermen, chosen out of the Body of the City, who have the office likewise for their lives. Out of these, four are elected to be Assessors to the Consuls; and in all cases and differences arising, to assist them.
In this City commonly reside a great number of Foreigners,
Germans and
Finlanders especially, who, as all others of the
Lutheran perswasion, are allow'd free exercise of their Religion; which is not granted to any of the
Roman Communion.
The soil of the Country hereabouts,
Soil. as in most parts of
Sweden, is generally fruitful; affording store of Corn, as Wheat, Rye, Barley, Oats,
&c. and pasturage, and in some places no small quantity of Wood. In the South parts of
Westro-gothia, the ground is so rich and fertil, that thirty-six days after they have sown, they reap their Barley.
Beasts of all sorts are here in great plenty,
Beasts. as Horses, Elks, Bears, wild Bulls, Castors or Beavers, Sables, Ermins, Martrons,
&c. Sheep also and Oxen, not only sufficient to supply the whole Country, but also to have great numbers transported out of
Finland, Schonen, &c. into other Nations.
Trees also are here in great abundance,
Trees. as Fir, Pine, Birch, Juniper,
&c. Apple also and Pear, Plumb, and other Fruit-trees; and of late Hops have been planted here. The Pines and Firs which grow upon the Sea-coasts, are said to have in the summer-time a kind of Rosinous Gum distilling from them, which falling into the
Baltick and
Bothnick Seas, and by the waves carryed to the
Prussian shore, has given occasion to some, to ascribe to this the original of their Amber, which seems to be rather a coagulation of Petroleum. Honey abounds very much in this Country, not only preserved in Hives in their Gardens, but ordinarily to be met with in the Woods. Wines have been sometimes in such scarcity here, that they could not be furnished for the Communion, to remedy which, divers Authors report, that P.
Innocent VIII.
ann. '1486, gave leave to the Priests of
Norway, and places under the same parallel, to celebrate in some other Liquors.
The Air is of different temperature,
A
[...] according to the diversity of Climes; for the most part it is cold, pure, free from vapours, and consequently healthful. In those parts near the
Bethnic and
Baltic coasts, it is frequently mudded with sea and marish vapours. Serpents and venemous beasts, whatever some Authors say, are not at all, or very rarely in these Countries; but fowl and fish of all sorts in so great abundance, that even the Peasants, contrary to the custom of other Countries, are permitted to catch and to make profit of them.
Lakes here are many, and very large;
L
[...] the greatest and most considerable are, 1.
Meller in
Ʋpland; well stored with Salmon, Pike, and such like fish; and in winter so hard froze, that 'tis ordinary to have Markets and Fairs kept upon it. 2.
Hielmer in
Nericia. 3.
Sitian in
Dalecarlia. 4.
Vener in
Westro-gothia, an hundred and thirty
English miles in length, and forty in bredth; having many Islands in it, and twenty-four considerable rivers which fall from the
Norwegian mountains, unburthening themselves into it; all which have but one passage out, call'd
Tralhetta, i.e, the Devils Cap, lying towards the South. 5.
Veter, in the same Province, whose waters are so clear and calm, that one may discern the bottom at a great depth. Upon the banks of this Lake were anciently founded the Monasteries of St.
Bridget the chief Saint of this Kingdom, and of St.
Catherine her daughter, with several other noble buildings. 6.
Ʋlatraesch in
Cajania. 7.
Pejenda in
Tavastia; to which may be added, 8.
Ladoga, upon the confines of
Muscovy; the greatest part of which was by a treaty of Peace ceded by the
Muscovite to this Crown. All of them abound with fish, the revenues of which make no small addition to the Kings Exchequer.
From these Lakes arise many Rivers,
R
[...] running so orderly from one to another, that they may seem, like those in
Holland, to have their channels cut and directed by art. The first is
Dalecarle, whose head is in the
Dofrine mountains, whence it falls into
Dalecarlia, takes in several lesser Currents at
Torsang, and so parts the Provinces of
Ʋpland and
Gestricia, and at last falls into the
Bothnick Bay. 2.
Saga or
Sawe, which divides
Ʋpland from
Westmannia. 3.
Angermannie, which waters
Angermannia, and is noted for its abundance of Salmon: with several others of lesser note.
Mines in this Country, are very frequent;
M
[...] as of Silver, Copper, Iron, Lead, Allum, Vitriol, Sulphur,
&c. every Province almost affording some, more or less; where we shall make mention of them. The greatest part belong to the subject; yet some few are wholly in the Kings possession; workmen being maintain'd, and the whole revenues receiv'd, by the Crown. In the year 1264
Magnus Laduslaus then King instituted, or rather re-establisht a society of Miners, to take care of all affairs relating to the Mines, and to determine all controversies arising concerning them. These men in the year 1649, in the reign of Queen
Christina, had many priviledges granted to them, and several new Laws made amongst them; of which we find extant these;
viz. If any subject discover a Mine in his own ground, of what metal soever, the whole profit of it is to belong to him for six years; after which time he is to pay tenths to the King; and, If he maintains a Forge, to fit out for every Hammer he keeps, one man and Waggon in time of war, for the Kings service. From these Mines comes the most considerable part of the Kings Revenues. In the year 1578, two or three Copper Mines are said to have yeilded to the Kings Exchequer above
[Page 17]500 Squipons, every Squipon being valued at 30000 Dollars; and other Mines proportionably every year since.
Of the Government and Manners of the
Swedes.
THe Kings of
Sweden are said at first to have been elected by the Governours of the Provinces, who never assembled but upon this occasion. He whom they commonly made the subject of their choice, was of the Royal Line; or some one of the Nobility of their own Country; and as some say, amongst these
caeteris paribus, the tallest and most personable. The place where the election was perform'd, was
Ʋpsal; where they assembling, and having agreed who should be their Prince, they went forth of the City to a place called
Moresten a small distance from it; here were set in order thirteen large Stones, one in the middle whereon was plac'd their new elected King; the other twelve round it for the twelve Senators: where after some few Ceremonies, a Declaration of the duty of the King
&c. they proposed to him an Oath, that he would protect and administer justice to his people: and the Electors for themselves, the absent Nobility, all the Body of the people; and all their posterity mutually engag'd that they would obey his Laws and bear faithful allegiance to him. These rites perform'd, the new King used to invite all his Electors and Nobles to banquet, where he himself waited on them; and afforded them great and splendid entertainment, all which ended with a solemn Grace-Cup, called by them
Berga-beger.
These customs, since under
Gustavus the first, the Kingdom was made hereditary, are quite left off, and when the Coronation is to be solemniz'd, the Nobles and chief Officers of the Kingdome meet at the Kings Pallace at
Ʋpsal; whence they go to the Metropolitan Church in order. The Senators of the Kingdom carry the Royal Ornaments, the
Drotset or Viceroy the Crown, the Marshal the Sword, the Admiral the Scepter, the Chancellor the golden Globe, the Grand Treasurer the Key, and the King on horseback follows them to the Church; where the Arch-Bishop receiving him, demands of him an account of his faith; then reverently approaching the high Altar he tenders to him an Oath to this effect. That he will fear God and defend his Church; promote love, justice and truth amongst his Subjects; that he will govern his Kingdom by Natives and not admit any Strangers into Council or places of great trust; that he will not alienate any Forts, Lands or Territories within his Dominions, but preserve them whole and entire to his Successours; that he will provide himself and his Court out of his constant Crown Revenues, and never burthen his Subjects with Taxes, but upon these accounts;
viz. Either upon an Invasion, whether by Christians or Infidels; a Domestick Insurrection; upon the marriage of his Sons or Daughters; for the building of some new Forts; or upon diminution of the Exchequer: and that he will introduce no laws or Constitutions without or against the consent of the people. [To
Sigismund the third, King of
Poland, who claim'd this Kingdom, they propos'd that he would not alter any thing in the establish'd Religion, which was the
Lutheran: which Oath he either refusing, or presently breaking, lost the favour of his people and the Kingdom it self before he was well setled in it.] This done, the Arch-bishop puts on him his Crown and other Kingly Ornaments, and one of the Heralds proclaims, such one is crown'd King of
Swedland and
Gothland, and none but he: then all the people answer,
Let the King live.
After this the King calls before him the Governors or Legifers of every Province and chief Cities within his Dominions, who for themselves and their respective Governments take an oath of Allegiance to the King; this done the King gives to every one of them, to the Legifer of
Ʋpsal first, and the rest in order, an Escutcheon with the Arms of that Province or that City where they are to preside, as Badges of their Offices; and returning to his Pallace, his Nobility are by him splendidly entertain'd, and the Ceremony ends. Henceforward he hath power in Ecclesiastical and civil matters, and rules his people as an absolute Monarch.
The next heir to the Crown, is the Kings eldest Son, if he have any, who sometimes is by publick declaration acknowledg'd to be so, before his Fathers death, as
Charles eldest Son to
Gustavus the first is said to have been: and though in that Kings time the right of succession was by the States granted only to his Issue Male, yet in the year 1627,
Gustavus Adolphus procur'd that the Kings Daughters also, might be admitted to the Throne, by which procurement his Daughter
Christina was made capable to succeed him. Upon default of Issue Royal, it is by the
Ʋnio Haereditaria provided, that the nearest in blood to the Kings Family shall suceed: and upon failure of these, the power of electing is to devolve upon the States. The Kings younger sons, he commonly makes Governours over some particular Provinces, giving them Titles fitted to their Commands. His Daughters are provided for at the expence of the whole Kingdom, their Portions being not taken out of the Kings Exchequer, but levied by publick Tax. In the
Interregnum, absence, sickness or minority of the King, the Kingdom is govern'd by the
Drotset or Vice-Roy, the Marshal, Admiral, Chancellour and Treasurer of the Kingdom, who at their admission to the publick management of affairs, take an Oath not to diminish any thing of the Kings Rights, but preserve them whole and entire: and if it happen that any part of them be by these Trustees during the Kings Minority sold or alienated, the King, when he comes to full age, may by law recover it.
Anciently the Kings of
Sweden, shortly after they were elected, used to make a publick Progress through their Dominions, the Legifer or Lievtenant of every Province being bound to provide for his Reception: what the King did, was to assure the people of the great care he had of them, and that charge wherewith they had entrusted him, and to receive of the people Oaths of Allegiance and Fidelity. This custom being found somewhat expensive, and the civil troubles of the Kingdom oftentimes not permitting it, is now quite left of, and the people rest content in the confidence they have of their Prince, without thus seeing his Person.
The Court of the King of
Sweden,The Court of Sweden. like that of
England, consists of Ecclesiastical, Civil and Military persons and government; 1. For the Ecclesiastical, there is the Arch-bishop with as many Suffragans as are by the King thought convenient, who attend the King both at Church, and Council: upon these several of the inferiour Clergy continually wait. 2. For the Civil, officers the
Drotset or Vice-Roy is chief; whose office was anciently to admonish and direct the King, to inform him upon any default whatsoever, and upon non-amendment to declare the same to the Governours of the Kingdom,
[Page 18]in whose power it was when they thought fit to dethrone their Prince. 2. Next is the Chamberlain or Commissary General, who presides over the chief Court of Judicature, the Kings Chamber, commonly held at
Stockholme; and discharges all expences, and orders all the disbursements of the Kingdom. He has under him one Questor, who takes care of what money is brought into the Exchequer and gives account to him. Under these are twelve Masters of accounts, who keep Registers of the Kings Revenues, take care lest any detriment happen to the Crown, and once a year make up their accounts to the Commissary General in the presence of some of the Privy Counsellours. Every one of these has one particular Province of the Kingdom given him in charge, in which he employs divers Tax-Masters who collect the Tributes, Tenths, and other Crown Revenues, and bring them to his hands. 3. In the third place succeeds the Chancellour of the Kingdom, whose Office is much-what the same, as in other Kingdoms. 4. The Treasurer of the whole Kingdom, who has under him several Secretaries and other Officers; his office is to keep the Crown, Globe, Scepter and Sword: he is Master of the Royal Mint, and Pay-master general of the whole Kingdom, accountable to none but the King only. 3. For the Military Officers, the principal is the Grand Marshal or Generalissimo of the Kings Forces. Next is the High Admiral of the Kingdom, with the several other officers not different from those in other States.
Besides these chief Officers of State, each Province of the Kingdom has its peculiar Governour, called
Landshere or
Stathallar, whose power is very great, and office considerable: under him there are in every Province as many
Lands-men and
Nemdaries or
Nempmen, as there are Districts or Praefectures in it; all which have distinct and subordinate offices, appeals lying from the lower to the next immediately above it, and so to the supream Court of Judicature the Kings Chamber: all actions acquiescing in the King as the source and fountain of the laws. By these Governours and Deputies agreeeing together, Tributes are exacted, and Taxes levied. According to an order of the Senate held at
Lyncopen 1599, they were to keep Courts of Justice twice in every year; all of them meeting in the Winter time about
February at
Ʋpsal at the publick Fair called
Disting, and in Summer at
Lyncopen.
States or Orders of men in this Kingdom there are, says
Bureus, six: 1. Princes of the Blood Royal, Nobility, Clergy, Souldiery, Merchantry, and Commonalty.
1.
Princes of the Blood. The Princes of the Blood-Royal are disposed of by the King, according to their age and capacity. The eldest, as was said, is Heir apparent to the Crown. The younger are commonly created Dukes, and made Governours of Provinces; of
Ʋpsal first, and the rest in order of dignity. These after the death of their elder brother, if he dye without issue, have right to succeed in the Throne.
2.
Nobility. The Nobility, which is said to have descended from King
Ingon or
Harold of
Norway, and spred through
Germany, Suitzerland, Spain, &c. when the
Goths invaded the
Roman Empire. It is divided into three ranks or orders: 1. Consists of Earls and Barons or Franck-Barons. The Earls
(Jerl) anciently were created only upon extraordinary accounts, as were also their Dukes, called
Hertog, neither of their titles being then hereditary. A war happening between them and some of their Kings, their Honour and Titles were for some ages quite laid aside, till King
Ericus XIV. about the year 1560, first of all renewed these lost Titles, and restored them to their owners; which gracious favour of his was follow'd by his successors, they not only conferring like honour during life, but at present making it hereditary. The second consists of those whose ancestors have been advanc't to the honour of Senators of the Kingdom. The third sort is made up of those, who are neither Counts nor Barons, and whose ancestors have not been of the Senatorian Order: of these Orders may be either their Knights, for their valour created by the King, whose Titles are not transmitted to their Heirs, tho frequently upon equal desert confer'd on them; or Gentlemen, who are the lowest degree of the Nobility, anciently called
Affwappen, either because they were expert in war, or bore a Coat of Arms. All these Noblemen enjoy great priviledges and immunities: All their estates are free from taxes and impositions, so much only out of the Lands of Earls and Barons excepted, as they at their creation receive of the King, for which they pay some acknowledgment to the Crown; only in time of war, and all exigences whatever, they are obliged to fit out horses and men for the Kings service proportionable to their estates. Out of these are commonly elected the Senators, Judges, and chief Officers of the Kingdom; men of low birth, tho of considerable parts, seldom advancing themselves into places of great trust and employment in Civil affairs, in Ecclesiastical more frequently. The estates of these Noblemen are inherited as well by their daughters as their sons; the son (if one) having half, and a daughter three parts of them; which custom King
Bergerus Jerl is said to have made and brought in about four ages ago.
3. The Clergy,
Clergy. concerning whom what we find, is set down under
Ʋpsal.
4. The Souldiery,
[...]. which enjoys very great priviledges from the King; as soon as any is listed Souldier he has over and above his ordinary pay, all his Lands Tax-free: if in time of war a Souldiers horse be killed under him, the King provides him with another, and if any be taken Captive by the Enemy, the King redeems him at his own charges, and such like; which we shall mention when we speak of the Forces of the Kingdom.
5. The Merchantry,
Merchantry. in whose possession the most considerable part of the riches of the Kingdom is kept, and by whose procurement forreign Commodities are imported. For the good government and benefit of these, every Maritime City and Mart-Town had anciently their particular Municipal Laws, derived from
Berca the ancient seat of their Kings, and about 600 year ago, a Town of the greatest trade in the Kingdom: by these it was ordered how, and in what manner, the Maritime Cities might exercise Trade as well with Inland Towns as Forreigners; what Commodities they might traffick with, not hindring one anothers commerce.
&c. These laws were by the Civil wars in the Kingdom quite neglected, and for a long time out of use; but by the care of some of the late Kings, they or some equivalent to them, begin to be restored and put in Execution.
6 The last and lowest state,
Commonalty. and as it were the Basis of the rest, is the Commonalty, called
Bond or
Beond; of which there are two sorts. 1. Named
Scatbonder, who have Hereditary Lands, priviledges of fishing and fowling,
&c. belonging to them: these in time of war are bound to fit out one Horse and Man for the Kings service. The second sort, are those that labour in the Mines, called
Bergs-men no less profitable to the publick
[Page 19]then the former, and enjoy no less priviledges and immunities; both possessing Estates and Fishery of their own, and like the Commons of
England, having their Representatives in the publick Council of the Kingdom. Of these, some by reason of their freedom and advantage of Education, which is denyed the Pesantry of other Countrys, sometimes arrive at great honours in Church and State; the famous King
Ericus furnamed the
Saint, is said to have been a Country-mans son.
The
Swedes, as all other Nations, were for a long time governed only by the laws of nature, the confus'd edicts of their Kings, Decrees of the States, and Responses of the wise: till about the year 1251,
Bergerus Jerl compiled a body of Laws and Constitutions for the Kingdom, collected out of the former. These, before the invention of Paper, were engraven upon large wooden Posts; thereby, after the manner of the
Romans and
Athenians, to be promulgated to the people. They were commonly very short and general, as designing the decision of particular cases to the publick Magistrates. Besides these they had upon any emergent difficulties, other ancient Laws, which they called
Recessus Regni, and other ancient Statutes of the Kingdom by which only great controversies were decided.
At present the Courts of Justice are more regular; and for the speedier execution of it, there are in the whole Kingdom five supream Courts of Judicature.
1. The Kings Chamber, which is divided into three ranks or degrees; 1. Supream in which all Cases twixt Senator and Senator, brought thither by Appeal, are decided. 2. The Middle in which are determined actions of Treason, and all others betwixt Noblemen, Lagmen and publick Officers. 3. The lowest, where ordinary Trials are decided, whether Civil or Criminal, where it is judged, whether the procedure in Inferiour Courts, in actions brought thence by Appeal, has been Legal or not. From this Court there lies no appeal, but only to the King; who may pardon the crime, or mitigate the punishment, as he pleases. Under this, for dispatch of business, are two other Courts, one for Civil, and one for Criminal matters of inferiour concernment.
2. The Court Marshal, in which all matters relating to War are decided. The Grand Marshal of the Army is always President, having two Assessours, Senatours of the Kingdom, or publick Officers; all men of the sword; with the Master of the Camp, Master of the Artillery, and Captain General of the Kings Guards.
3. The Court of Chancery, for the decision of all cases Civil or Ecclesiastical;
[...].
here the Chancellour of the Kingdom presides with four Senators Assessors, and the two Secretaries of State: here all Mandates, Edicts, Commissions,
&c. are made in the Kings name; all Decrees of Senate and Constitutions of the Kingdom registred; and in a word, cognizance taken of all complaints and Cases 'twixt one Subject and another, whether relating to the Church or State; which are brought hither by Appeal from some Inferiour Courts.
4.
[...]
The Court of Admiralty for the inspection and determining all business relating to the Navy or Sea affairs; here the High Admiral presides, four Senators, four Vice Admirals and several Captains, Assessours.
5. The Court of the Kings Exchequer, in which all business relating to the Kings Revenues, or wherein the Crown is any way concerned are examined and decided; here the Grand Treasurer is Judge, who has four Assessours, two Senators and two Noblemen.
Besides these there are other Inferiour Tribunals,
Inferiour Tribunals. instituted at first by
Gustavus Adolphus in the years 1614 and 1615, in some of the most principal Cities of the Kingdom. 1. At
Stockholme, where the
Drotset presides with sixteen Assessours, four Senators, six Knights and six Lawyers. 2. At
Junecopia in
Gothland, where the President is a Senator of the Kingdom, six Nobles and as many Lawyers Assessours. 3. At
Aboa in
Finland, where a Senator is President, six Nobles and six Lawyers, Assessours. 4. At
Dorpat in
Livonia, a Senator President and twelve Assessours; two other also were by him appointed; one at
Wismar in
Pomeren, and another at
Rugen in the Dukedom of
Breme; but all proceedings there, by reason of the wars 'twixt this Crown and the neighbouring Princes, are quite stopt, and the four former at present only made use of.
In the Cities of lesser note Justice is executed in this manner; the first hearing is before an Inferiour Magistrate called
Cammene Rat; the second before the Consuls and Senate of the Town, which are always four in number, each having his particular charge; the third, if the case be of importance, before one of the supream Tribunals; where upon the first hearing, the Judg or President of the Court is bound to determine the case, or else to give under his hand that it is very intricate and requires longer time, or a higher Court, for its determination; or else he with the twelve Assessours are to be fined each three Marks apiece.
Over and above all these Courts,
The Senate of the Kingdom. and as it were a Compound of them all, is the Senate of the Kingdom, held anciently only for the election of their Kings, and consisting of the Governours of the Provinces; but at present made up of more members, and summon'd for the same reasons and in the same manner as the Parliament in
England. In it there are two Persons elected out of every Consistory, and one Rector of a Country Parish: out of every District one Colonel, with other Lievtenants and Majors: out of every City one Consul, one Senator or some other principal Citizen; and out of every Territory one Inhabitant: every different order of these have a distinct house to sit in, and for every house a Chair-man or Speaker. For the Nobility the grand Marshal: for the Clergy the Arch-bishop; for the Burgesses of Cities one of the Consuls of
Stockholme or the Master of the Artillerie: and for those of the Country some one elected out of their own Body. When they have finisht their Deliberation severally, they confer all the Houses together, and having agreed upon a form, present their resolves to the King; if he is pleased with them and thinks fit to pass them into Acts, he with the Members of the Parliament subscribe and seal them: the Records of which the Marshal of the States (an Officer appointed for that purpose) puts into the Chancery; causes them to be promulgated; and then quits his Charge, and his Staff the mark of his Dignity.
The Laws used in
Sweden,The Laws. as well as those of
Ostro and
Westro-Gothia are very ancient; every Province having formerly had, says
Loccenius, particular Constitutions by which it was governed: the Plantiff and Defendant using to plead their own Causes, or to give the management of them to some of their Kindred, never taking the assistance of any Advocate or Proctour, contrary to their present practice. In cases dubious it was in use here, as in most parts of
[Page 20]Europe, to refer the determination of them, to the trial either of
Fire Ordeal, (sufficiently known to most men), used at first in this Country by
Olaus Scotkonung about the year 986, and quite abrogated by
Bergerus Jerls about 300 years ago: or of scalding water; or of bringing the suspected Person, in cases of murder, to the dead body: (which if upon his approach begun to bleed, they judged him to be the murtherer), or of
Duel, call'd
Wehiding i. e. consecration. This manner of Tryal was first allowed, say some, by
Frotho King of
Denmarck, whence being brought into
Sweden, and for sometime prevailing, it was first of all by
Gustavus the Great under great penalties forbid; but not absolutely extirpated, till the time of this present King
A. 1662, when its punishment was made arbitrary.
At present if a
Legifer be to be elected, it is done by the Bishop, (who gives notice thereof in the Court eight weeks before the electionday), and the people of the Territory; who return three sufficient persons to the King, and he chuses one of them. If a President, the
Legifer and the people of the District chuse him. Who takes an Oath to administer Justice impartially amongst them, and can be Judg in one only District at the same time. When a Plantiff commences an Action against the Defendant, he with two able House-keepers, goes to his house and summons him to the Court: if he appear the first, second, or third Court day, 'tis well: if not, he loses the Action, and distress is made upon his Goods. In cases of Murder, Adultery,
&c. punishable by death; if the guilty persons flie,
Bud kaffla or Hue and Cry is sent out after them, which is to go through the whole Precinct, and to be continued from one place to another, by the delivery of a Staff, the sign of authority. A Woman convicted of adultery by six Witnesses, loses her Dowry, her Estate, and if her husband pleases, her life too. Whoever takes Use for Money loses it, and is punished beside: though privately at
Stockholme and places of Trade, Use-money begins to be taken. If any person have scandalized his Neighbour and be convicted of it, he is besides the Fine, forced to recant and make a publick confession of the injury in writing: [formerly for such offences, the Fine was nine Marks, called
Lopp-gold or
Lip-fine; and the guilty persons were forced to beat their own mouths, to crawl backward out of the Court, and were for ever rendred incapable of giving evidence.] Besides these and many such like Laws, there are published several belonging to the
Goths, which they using in other Countrys, as well as this, are not more fit to be mentioned here, then in any other place.
How powerful the Kings of
Sweden are in Sea,
Land Forces. as well as Land, Forces, is sufficiently manifested by their late, as well as present, wars. How far
Gustavus Adolphus went in his expeditions against
Germany, is sufficiently known to the world; and how this present King has behaved himself between two powerful enemies, is no less manifest. And such is the great strength of the Kingdom, that sometimes it has maintained war with three potent adversaries, the
Dane, the
Pole, and the
Muscovite, all at once. The Land-forces are provided and kept in readiness, after the manner of our Trained-Bands, by the Provinces of the Kingdom, thirty-two Regiments in all, seven hundred souldiers in each Regiment. These are most of them Musqueteers; Pikemen being, by reason of their thick and frequent woods, not so serviceable in this, as other, champain Countries. The body of their Army, to their great advantage, is in time of war composed of Peasants (such soldiers as the ancient
Romans desired to have), people laborious, frugal, hardy, and being us'd at home to make all their clothes themselves, prove when they come to field, as many Taylors, Shoomakers,
&c. as Soldiers. Every Company of Foot has its particular Captain, Lieutenant, and Ensign; who have always, but especially if the seat of war be within the Kingdom, very small pay; the Captain himself not having (besides the abatement of all Taxes for himself, and some of his relations) above one Coat a year, and four Dollars
per mensem; and a common soldier one Dollar and a fourth part
per mensem. Regiments of Horse are in
Suecia and
Gothia twelve, and in
Finland two, one of which is made up by the Commonalty, the other by the Nobility of that Province. Each of these has its Captain, Lieutenant, and Cornet, and much-what the same discipline as in other Countries. Their horses are commonly lesser, but stronger and more accustomed to labour, then those of
Germany. The Horsemen carry with them Carbines or short Guns. The reason why
Finland maintains so few, and
Suecia and
Gothia so many, Regiments; is, because the former is particularly obliged to maintain the Fleet and Sea-soldiers; and the latter abound more with horses and men; the Province of
Dalecarlia being said at one time to have raised thirty-thousand men, well armed. Of these Land-forces there is, according to the Laws of the Kingdom, a general muster once every year at least; all the Courtiers (some few only excepted) being allow'd pay, and bound to accompany the King to the place of Rendezvous.
Next are the Sea-forces,
[...] no less considerable then those of the Land; the King having commonly in readiness above 50 men of war, many of them carrying 50 Guns; all under the command of one High Admiral. In a war against
Denmark, King
John the third, fitted out seventy men of war with several Merchants Ships, in which besides the Seamen, were embarqued 18000 Land-Souldiers. The chief Port in the Kingdom is
Stockholme, where lie at anchor sometimes above 300 Ships: in
Finland, Livonia and other Parts, there are very convenient Harbours, though not so well stored with Ships; by reason that the
Muscovite, the greatest enemy on that side, maintains no Sea-forces.
The Kings Revenues, by which these are maintain'd,
[...] consist chiefly in the Crown-Lands, as Chases, Forrests,
&c. which the King as was said, takes an oath not to embezil; but these being formerly, by the civil Troubles of the Kingdom, in great part alienated from the Crown; and of late, since the Titles of Earls and Barons were renewed amongst them, very much impair'd; (it being the custom that when the King honours any person with either of those Titles, he with it gives him a piece of Land which has formerly belonged to the Crown), other ways are sought out for the maintenance of their Courts and Armies; which are
1. From these Crown-Lands or Kings Patrimony daily regained, for which a Colledg of
Reduction is of late instituted.
2. From the Mines of Copper, Silver, Lead,
&c.
3. From the Sea-customs.
4. From the imposition upon Oxen transported out of
Schonen, Finland, &c. Which being about the value of 5
s. English by the head, amounts to a great sum; especially in times of Peace.
5. From the several Companies of Merchants:
[Page 21]of which there is but one for Exportation,
viz. The Tar-Company; though there be divers for Importation, as the Tobacco-Company, the Sugar-Company,
&c. who each pay yearly considerable summs to the Crown.
6. From Impost on the Exportation of Guns.
7. From the Mulcts payed by those that are cast in Law; a third part of which is paid to the King.
8. From all moneys which the King pays out, from which he deducts to the value of one
per Cent.
Besides these there are many other ways whereby the King raises money, as the Frank-Subsidies or Quit-rents, the revenues from all sorts of Skins and Furrs brought out of
Lapland &c. which not being constant and certain, but more or less according as the Snows fall or the Frosts continue, I omit to mention.
When his Majesty of
Sweden is engaged in a War, he can, and ordinarily doth, make use of these extraordinary means, as
1. All persons whatsoever, none excepted, who received salaries or pensions from the Crown, in the time of war, abate one half, and sometimes the whole, as 'tis said they did in these late wars.
2. The Gentry of
Sweden, Finland, &c. pay a Contribution of about sixteen pence
English, a man; which is called the
Six-Mark Contribution.
3. All Towns pay a Contribution according to their in-comes, some more, some less.
4. Every Town, which is obliged to have constantly in readiness a certain Company of Seamen, (whom the King sends for upon occasion, to serve in the Fleet) is bound in time of war to double the number.
5. When any army is transported over the
Baltick, it goes either to
Pomeren or
Bremen, which Provinces pay so much a month, in money or provision, towards its support.
6. The Gentry of
Liffland and the Neighbouring Provinces, contribute so many thousand measures of Corn for the supplying of their Magazines.
7. Every Peasant plowing so much ground a year, must give one Shirt, one Lamb-skin Coat, one pair of Mittens, one pair of Woollen Stockings, and one pair of Shoes, towards the maintenance of Souldiers.
By these and such-like means, great additions are made to the Kings Exchequer; the ordinary income of which is said to have been in the year 1578 six or seven Tun of Gold of 100000 Dollers apiece, all charges of the Crown being first deducted; though in that year, as also in several following, there were spent in maintaining
Wiburg and
Revalia Cities upon the Borders of
Muscovy, 100000 Dollers extraordinary.
The
Sueci or
Swedes (by some Writers mistaken for the
Suevi or
Schwabs a people of
Germany),
[...] seem to be the same Nation with the
Sueones or
Suiones of
Tacitus, by that description of them which he sets down. An ancient and warlike people, united under distinct Laws (if
Swedish Authors may in this case be credited) not many years after the Flood by one
Suenno or
Sueno eldest son to
Magog, and great grand-child to
Noah, and from him called
Suenons or
Sueons: though others will have them so named from
Suedia or
Suidia i.e. to burn Wood or Forrests that are cut down; they being forc't at their first arrival into this Country, to fell and burn the Woods in order to Tillage: but these opinions as well as that of
Grotius who derives their name from the
Swedish and
English word
Swet, because the
Swedes were always a laborious people, are conjectures scarce worth naming. That this Nation was not only before, but the Parent of, the
Gothi or
Getae, is asserted by many Authors, and, says
Loccenius, apparent, from several
Runick Monuments and ancient
Swedish Laws, which testify that thence proceeded the
Gothish people diffusing themselves into other Countrys, as
Thrace, Spain, Italy, &c. One of these Laws is said to have been made about the time of
Alexander the Great, for calling them back into their own Country
Scandia; every one being commanded presently to return, or forfeit all Title to any Inheritance there which they or their Ancestors had formerly possess'd. That they were not so well known to the world as these
Goths or
Getes (which we take to be the same People) is on the contrary altogether as certain: but the reason of this may be, that there were several Emigrations of the latter, when the former remained in their own Country, either not known by strangers as a distinct People from the
Goths, or passing under the same name with them. The
Norwegian Chronicles reckon five and twenty Kings of
Sweden, before
Haldanus Hwithen the first Founder of their Kingdom, which was afterward by
Harald Harfagher the third King from him, very much enlarg'd and made an absolute Monarchy. That out of this Country a vast number of men went to people
Schonen and the
Cimbrick Islands in the Reign of
Ericus (the first
Swedish King according to
Loccenius his account), is attested by
Johannes Magnus and other Authors; and about the year of Christ 870 one
Otherus in his account of the Northern Regions which he made to King
Aelfred, makes mention of
Swedland or the Land of the
Swedes, and the Isles of
Gotland and
Jutland, giving them much-what the same Limits they have at present. And in all ages so famous have been the warlike Exploits and victorious Arms of this Nation, that one
Nicolaus Ragvaldi Archbishop of
Ʋpsal, making an Oration (extant in
Johannes Magnus) in the Council of
Basil, A. D. 1440 concerning the noble atchievments of the
Sweo-Gothish People, prevailed so far with the Holy Fathers there present, that it was moved in Council that the King of
Swedland should have precedency of all other Christian Kings.
The men of
Sweden, as to their persons are generally of a proper and big body,
Their Manners. a comely presence, and gentile carriage; in their younger years bred up to learning, travelling, and especially languages, (of which 'tis ordinary for a
Swedish Gentleman to be able to speak five or six in perfection); and in their riper, accustomed to affairs of State and War. Honest, free, and plaindealers they are noted for, insomuch that the Granaries in the whole Country had anciently neither Lock nor Key, but only a Hatch, judged sufficient security amongst honest and trusty neighbours: and to steal Corn out of the common fields was a crime so horrid, that it was punishable by death. The women are also of a tall stature, and very personable, generally chast (adultery, which is severely prohibited by their Laws, being seldom committed by them), modest, virtuous, and endowed with those qualities which are commonly the consequents of wholsom Laws and Government. They, the Citizens especially, love to go neat, and provide themselves generally with good clothes and fair houses, counting that ill spent which is superfluously bestowed upon their worst part, their belly. When Marriage, Christenings, Burials,
&c. are to be solemnized, they spare no expences to seem noble and magnificent; sometimes rather then want a splendid Funeral for their Relations, keeping the dead corps for several years, and in the
[Page 22]interim labouring to gather up as much money as will maintain the pomp of it's burial. [Anciently they burnt their bodies; a custom, as they say, brought in by
Wooden; however they make it one of their Epocha's, and call that time
Aetas Cremationis: afterwards they buried them on the tops or some eminent places of hills, and this is call'd by their Writers
Aetas Collium; but Christianity hath reduc'd to the same customs, that are used by the rest of that Religion.] Frugal and laborious they are; inured as well by their exercises, as the Clime of their Country, to all extremity of hardship; it being ordinary for a common Souldier to watch upon the Guard at
Stockholme a whole winter-night full eighteen hours long, without being relieved. To be a Gentleman, and well descended, is highly esteemed amongst them; tho frequently their titles of honour out-swell their estates; for when any one of a competent estate dyes, one half of it is allowed to the surviving widow, and the other half divided among the children; the son having two parts, and a daughter the third; the widows part upon her decease is shared amongst them after the same proportion; so that one great estate is cut out into many little parcels, by many children; which being again subdivided by these childrens children, the family is commonly reduced to a low condition, all inheriting equally the Titles and Priviledges of the Nobility.
The hospitality of this Nation is amongst the rest of their good qualities,
Their Hospitality. the most remarkable; they anciently using to entertain those that were strangers with the like civility as they would treat their friends; affording them victuals, and what necessaries they stood in need of,
gratis; and furnishing them with horses to the place whither they intended to go. The contrary to this,
viz. churlishness and inhospitality, was thought so great a crime, and so unworthy the genius of any
Swedish inhabitant, that in the time of
Charles the second, (who is said to have reigned sometime before our Saviours birth,) if any one denied lodging three times to Strangers, that King sent to set fire on the houses of such Offenders, and burn them down to the ground, This freedom of entertainment sometimes causing dammages and inconveniences to private Persons
A. D. 1285
Magnus Ladulaus then King, put forth a Decree, that no one should think himself obliged, (as they, perhaps by some natural dictate did think themselves to be), to afford Lodging, Victuals and Horses, to Strangers; but might demand Money for what they afforded them: which some of the more Southern People (more accustomed to Strangers) at this day do exact, though among the more Northern, the ancient custom does still prevail.
Their Cloths anciently, as those of the
Laplanders at present,
Their Habit. were (as may be gathered out of
Claudian and
Jornandes) ordinarily made of Skins of Wild-beasts, and called
Mudd; the black being in most request and used by the better sort. At present not only the Gentry, but the Common People, use Habits equal to those of other Countries, but strive to outgo one another in fineness and costliness. In the time of
Gustavus the first, there was such irregularity of Habits among the people, the Courtiers especially, that the
Dalecarli petition'd him that all forreign Modes and Fashions might be left off in his Court, and forbid to be used in his Kingdom: but that King (perhaps seeing as great advantage by it in respect of Trade, as disadvantage any other way) put the Petitioners off with a complement. The Common People have their Apparel made of course woollen-cloth; the Nobility and Gentry have diversity of Garbes according as they are
A-la-mode in
France.
Their Drinks,
Their Drinks. before the use of Wine amongst them, were water mixt with Honey called
Miod or
Mead, and Ale or Beer, which latter was only drunk at their publick Feasts, thence called
Ol, i. e. Feasts where they had the liberty to drink Ale. The Cups which they used to drink in were anciently made of the Horn of a beast called
Ʋrus; but at present are of Copper, Brass, and among the richer sort of the Commonalty, ordinarily of Silver. Healths to their King, their Friends,
&c. they, for the greater Honour, always drink standing, and count it a great disrespect if the whole Company will not pledg them: insomuch that one complained to
Gustavus the
Great of his Companion, who would not drink the Kings Health in as many Cups as he had done; who instead of being rewarded (as he supposed he should have been), was severely reproved, by that King. As an Attendant to their drinking, Tobacco is very much in use amongst them, which within these fifty years was altogether unknown to this Country.
In their Diet they are sparing and abstemious:
Their Diet. the better sort have their bread made of Corn, which though there be sufficient in the Country to serve all the Inhabitants, yet the poorer sort very frequently, and in time of scarcity always, make use of a kind of Bread made of the bark of Firr or Pine Tree, mingled with Chaff and made up with pure water: which is the chief reason why the
Swedish Souldiers can endure a Seige or any Extremities of war, much better then any of other Nations. Anciently at their Banquets they had Poets Laureat maintained by the King, who sung before the Guests some Poems composed in honour of their Kings: as they did also in their Camps and Garrisons amongst the Souldiers, thereby to animate and incourage them to an imitation of their Ancestours; but at present their customs in these matters are very little different from those common to other Nations.
After their Victuals and manner of treating their Guests, follow their Exercises;
Exercises. which were commonly such as might fit them for Warlike Exploits and hazardous Enterprises.
Olaus Magnus reports, that the ancient
Goths used to dip their Children as soon as born in cold water, and as they grew up to riper years to inure them, like as in a house of correction, to constant and severe lashing, and such like severities. Tilts also and Turnaments were in use amongst them, in which and such like Sports
Totila one of the Kings of the
Goths was, says
Procopius, very early and carefully instructed. The ordinary sort of People use to make Fortifications, Bastions,
&c. of the Snow or Ice, and after the manner of Souldiers engage one another; to Climb Rocks also, and like the rest of the
Scandians to slide upon the Snow in Scaits. Chess-play also (perhaps to teach them, or to advantage their conduct in War) was very much in use amongst them, their Kings and chief men delighting in it, and thereby says
Olaus Magnus, prognosticating future events, as of Victories, Marriages, and such like; this people being very much addicted to Magick and prying into secret occurrences.
Marriage, as it anciently was,
Marriage. so at present is esteemed very sacred, and chastly observed. A Maid without the consent of her Parents or Tutors is not permitted to marry, nor can a Guardian betroath his Pupil or Orphan to any one, but in the presence of four Witnesses at least, two in behalf of one party, and two of the other. If after a Virgin is thus contracted to any one, her Guardian do not stand to the Proposals agreed on, but endeavour to hinder the
[Page 23]Marriage, the Husband may demand his Bride, break any Lock to come to her, and if any resist, he may without being questioned for it, kill him: and if he happen to lose his life in the Quest, he that kills him shall be deem'd a Murtherer. If any Husband leave his own, and contract and cohabit with another mans wife; he shall upon sufficient proof, lose his head: and the Woman be stoned to death.
Learning, which thrives best in a peaceable and quiet Country,
[...] has sometimes been under so general a disrepute in this Kingdom, that 'tis said, the eldest son of
Amalaswentha, who was Heir to the Crown, was not suffer'd to be brought up in the knowledg of any Liberal Arts. But such disregard never lasted long; Learning being always, when the heat of war was over, recalled from her banishment; and when men had leasure to think upon their better part, constantly embrac'd and follow'd by them; and that even in their Kings Palaces, they always maintaining Philosophers to instruct them in the secrets of nature; and Poets (which they call'd
Scald from
Scal, i. e. sound, because they repeated their verses aloud) to inform them of the worth of their predecessors; these not only remain'd in their Garrisons (as was said) but some one always accompanied the King in all great expeditions, that they might be eye-witnesses of those actions, of which they were to give an account in publick. One of these is reported to have had so good Lungs, that being commanded by the King to repeat some verses, he spoke them so loud, that he was heard throughout the whole Army. The letters which they made use of, were call'd
Runick from
Ryn, signifying a
furrow, for the same reason that the Latins use
versus, exarare, &c. because that anciently when they had writ from the left hand to the right, they turn'd back again from the right to the left. By whom at first invented, is uncertain; some say by
Odinus or
Wooden, one of their chief Gods. That they came into
Sweden about the year of Christ 380 or 400, is affirmed by many, altho the superstitious use of them generally practis'd by the inhabitants, seems to prove, that they were much sooner known to them. With these the common people used to carve certain sticks or staves (still in use among some of them), setting upon them the names of their Gods, their Months, their Holydays,
&c. which served them for an Almanack, and some Idolatrous purposes. These characters, in the reign of
Olaus Scotkonung, at the desire of Pope
Sylvester II. and
Sigfrid Archbishop of
York, (who was sent thence to preach Christianity in
Sweden,) were quite abolished; and sometime after, by the whole Council at
Toledo, says
Wormius, utterly condemn'd; it being by them thought almost impossible ever to have extirpated Paganism, unless they had first rooted out these letters, in which so much of their idolatry (tho perhaps something of good learning and antiquity) was writ.
The
Swedish language differs only from the
Danish and
High-Dutch in dialect,
Their Language. being rougher and less capable of improvement then either of the other two; whence the
Swedes rarely write any thing in their own tongue. Some of their Authors endeavour to bring the language from another fountain, telling us, That the old
Runick (fragments of which may be seen in the
Danish monuments published by
Wormius) is the mother tongue of
Denmark, and the
Gothick of
Sweden. But these differ only in character, not words; as may be easily perceiv'd by comparing
Ʋlphila's Gothick Version of the Gospels (not long since published by the learned
Franciscus Junius) with
Wormius's Collection of the old
Runick monuments. The Colledge of Antiquaries at
Ʋpsal have lately taken great pains in publishing a new Edition of the
Codex Argenteus with the modern
Swedish, thereby to demonstrate their tongue a dialect of the ancient
Gothick. (Of this see more in
Denmark).
The
Swedish year was anciently divided only into Summer and Winter; but afterwards,
Their Year. according to the custom of other Nations, measured by Months and Nights: this Nation rather using to count by nights then days, as also rather by Winters then Summers, both because they were longer, and (chiefly) because that was the mode of all Northern Nations, perhaps from the beginning of the world. Their Months are called
Monat from
Mona signifying the Moon; the particular names yet in use amongst them, were given in remembrance of some of their Heathenish Gods, as 1.
January they call
Thors-monat from their chief God
Thor. 2.
February Goia-monat, from
Goia or
Freia daughter to
Thor or
Jupiter. 3.
March Thur-monat, from
Thur) which seems to be the same with
Othen or
Oden) an
Asiatick Deity the same with
Mars; and so of the rest.
Their Trading, as of all other Nations,
Their Trading. was anciently bartering, but at present Money is very plentiful among them, as of Gold, Silver and Copper, and these last as well supplied, out of their own Mines, as imported by Merchants.
GOthia or
Gothland,Gothia and its Provinces.i. e. the Land of the
Goths, is parted from
Suecia by the Woods
Kolmord and
Tydhweth: A large and fruitful Country, situate betwixt two potent Nations, and frequently at war one with another, the
Swedes and
Danes; for which reason it became anciently the ordinary seat of their wars, till the inhabitants observing the
Swedes to be their nearest and more dangerous (as being upon the same Continent), and very often victorious, neighbours, they join'd and incorporated with the
Swedes, and their Country has ever since been reckon'd as a chief part of the
Swedish dominions. It is bounded on the East with the
Baltick Sea; on the West with the Mountains called
Lyma Fiell, and the
Sinus Codanus; on the North with the Provinces of
Nericia and
Sudermannia; and on the South with the
Sund or
Oresund, and part of the
Baltick. It is divided in general into
East- and
West-Gothia.
1.
West- or
Westro- or
Wiso-Gothia,Westro-Gothia and its Provinces. which has in it these three Provinces, 1.
Westro-Gothia properly so taken. 2.
Dalia. 3.
Vermlandia, to which may be added
Hallandia.
1.
Westrogothia,Westro-Gothia. a plain and fruitful Province; somewhat inferiour indeed in fertility to
Ʋpland and
Sudermannia, but exceeding both of them in abundance of Cattel and convenience of pasturage; in which the great wealth of this Country does consist. In this Province are several great Rivers, as
Tida, Lida, Nos, &c. which falling into the Lake
Vener, are sent out by two passages at
Elffzburg and
Kongelff, and at last unburthen'd into the
Sinus Codanus; with some others, as
Eda and
Visk; which fall not into the Lake, but empty themselves into the same Bay. Here are several Cities of good note,
viz. 1.
Gothburg or
Gottenburg, a considerable Mart-Town, lying upon the mouth of a small River which runs out of the
Sinus Codanus; between the Towns of
Elsberg and
Goldberg, frequented very much by
Hollanders, and other strangers, and of late endowed by the
Swedish Kings with many notable priviledges. The unsuccessful efforts of a great
Danish Fleet against it
ann. 1644, shews it to be a place of great strength and consideration. 2.
Scare, anciently the residence of the
Gothish Kings, and at present a Bishops seat: so called from
Scarinus a potent King of the
Goths who built it; it was in the time of
Adam Bremensis, the Metropolis of
Westgothia, but now a ruined and fenceless Town. 3.
Mariaestadt, and 4.
Lidecopia, less considerable then the former. Towns of most note are 1.
Falecopia. 2.
Skedvi. 3.
Hio. 4.
Bogesund. 5.
Bretta. 6. Old
Ludosia, taken and fortifyed by
Christianus the I, King of
Denmark, but soon after in the same year regained by the
Swedes. This Town seems to be the same with
Losa, mentioned by
Meursius in his
Danick History.
2.
Dalia,Dalia. lying betwixt the Lake
Vener and some part of
Norway; a Province for the most part mountanous, and consequently barren. It is watered with several Lakes and Rivers well stor'd with Fish of all sorts: Here the pasturage is good, and their Cattel larger then those in any other part of the Country; there is one Town of note called
Daleburg.
3.
Vermlandia, last inhabited, as Authors report,
Vermlandia. amongst all the
Gothick Provinces; one
Olavus Tretelia being said first of all to have brought Colonies hither. It is a Country Mountanous and Woody, having some Mines of Iron, and one vein of Copper indifferently rich. Lakes and Rivers it has many, though but one only City, called
Charlestat from
Charles the IX King of
Sweden who built it, in the place of an ancient City named
Tingvalla.
4.
Hallandia,Hallandia. which has o
[...] the West the
Sinus Codanus, on the South
Schonen, and on the North and North-East
Smalandia and
Westro-Gothia. A pleasant and fruitful Province, reaching in length from
Bahusia to the City
Laaholm upon a small River which falls into the
Sinus Codanus, several miles; but in breadth in some parts not above half a mile, and where broadest not exceeding three miles. It has in it four Cities 1.
Halmstadt. 2.
Falkenburg. 3.
Laaholm. 4.
Waersburg, all lying upon the
Codane Bay, very conveniently for Trade and exporting of those Commodities which come out of the more Northerly Provinces. In the year 1645 by a Ratification of peace held betwixt
Christina Queen of
Swedland and
Christian the IV King of
Denmark, this Province with all its Cities, Towns, Forts and Appurtenances was granted to the Crown of
Sweden, for thirty years as a pledg of security, whereby the
Swedes might be ascertain'd of their free passage through the
Sund or
Oresund; the controversies about which had been the chief occasions of their former war. At the end of thirty years if the
Swedes thought convenient, either this Province was to be retained by them as a pledg for the performing of the covenant on the part of the
Danes, or they to have some other Province, or Cities and Forts equivalent to it, given into their hands, which might be to them sufficient assecuration.
An. 1658, by articles of a peace concluded at
Roschild a City in
Zeland, it, with all its Cities, Towns and Forts, was granted to
Charles the X, then King of
Sweden and to his successours for ever.
II.
Eastern-East- or
Ostro-Gothia,Ostro-Gothia. which has in it these Provinces, 1.
Ostro-Gothia properly so call'd. 2.
Smalandia, and 3.
Oelandia, to which may be added
Gotlandia, Scania and
Bleckingia.
1.
Ostro-gothia divided from
Westro-gothia by the Lake
Veter or
Wetter; for the most part a level and champaigne Country, abounding with Corn and Cattel of all sorts, which are exported hence in very great plenty into other Countries. Here are very great conveniences for Hunting, Fowling and Fishing either for pleasure or profit. Nor are
[Page][Page]GOTHIAApud Janssonio-Waesbergios er Mosem Pitt▪
[Page]SCANIA, Vulgo SCHONENApud Janssonio-Waesbergios▪ Mosem Pitt.
VIROIllustri & Generosissimo,
Dno. OTTHONI KRAGH, Toparchae in Trutzholm. Summo R. M. DAN. Secretario▪ Patrono suo magno. Dedicat & Consecrat Johannes Janssonius.
[Page][Page 25]Mines altogether wanting, but some few are to be met with in the Mountains near
Godegard, Hellestaberg and
Vongaberg. Cities in it are 1.
Vadsten, where was anciently a Fort and a Monastery dedicated to
St. Bridget, and (at present) an Hospital for lame Souldiers. 2.
Schening, anciently a very famous City, but now a ruin'd and very inconsiderable Town. Here 'tis said, that by command of P.
Innocent IV.
an. 1248 a Council was held, in which Marriage was forbid Priests, which they had used from the plantation of Christianity till that time. 3.
Lincopia, Lincoepping, a Bishops seat; not far from the mountain
Kettleberg; a pleasant, though not spacious, City. In the middle of it are Springs bubling out, the like whereof are not to be met with in all
Sweden: here is an ancient and stately Church built by one
Herebertus, who is said to be one of the first planters of Christianity in these Countrys. 4.
Norcopia lying betwixt
Sudercoepping and
Neucoepping upon the banks of a large Lake, and thence very well supplyed with Fish of all sorts. 5.
Sudercoepping or
Sodercoepping, a handsom, but fenceless, City: near this place, says
Olaus Magnus, are found Cubical Crystals, or rather as I conceive
Fluores, of small bigness, but in great plenty.
2.
Smalandia parted from
Ostro-Gothia by the Wood
Holavedh; a very large Province being 95
German miles in compass, indifferently fruitful in those parts where it is not overgrown with wood. It abounds very much with Cattel (whence some say it has its name,
Smala signifying Cattel), which are exported hence in great numbers into
Denmark and from thence into
Germany and
Holland. In it there are very many Lakes, the chief of which are
Bolm, Viostez, Moklen and
Asnan. Rivers likewise not a few, as
Nyssea, Laga, Helga, Marboa, Aem, &c. This Country is cut out into several Divisions or Territories, the principal of which are
Tieherad, Verendia (which is said anciently to have had distinct Laws of its own),
Tiustia, Finheidia and
Mauringia, &c. It abounds with several Mines as of Copper and Lead, and in some parts with great store of Iron; which is said to be found in the bottom of their Lakes and Rivers. Cities here are 1.
Calmar whose name is said to have been given to it by the
Germans, from the coldness of the air which blows from the
Baltick Sea. Here is a very convenient Port frequented by our English Merchants and some of other Nations. In the year 1230
Ericus King of
Denmark, Norway and
Swedland, instituted thirteen Prebendaries in this City: and ordered that the Cathedral Church here, should have the priviledges of an Ecclesiastical Colledg. It is at present governed by one Superintendent, who with the rest of the Bishops has a place in the publick consistory of the Kingdom. This City was sometimes under the power of
John King of
Denmark and
Christiern the second who succeeded him, but not long after regain'd by the
Swedes. In the year 1611
Christianus the fourth King of
Denmark took this City, putting all the Inhabitants to the Sword; but two years after it was by vertue of a ratification of peace made betwixt the Northern Crowns restored to the
Swede. In the year 1647 it was almost quite consumed by fire, not above sixty houses left standing in the whole City; but since that, is very handsomly rebuilt, and at present by reason of its commodious Situation upon the
Baltick, a very considerable Trade-Town. 2.
Jenecoepia or
Jenecoepping, situate in a Vale near the Lake
Veter, built for the most part of Wood: a City quite naked and easy of access. It is reported that anciently the houses of this City were covered on the outside not with Thatch or Stone, but with a sort of courser Cloth or Canvas, which the Inhabitants thought a great piece of handsomness.
M. Heberer in his Itinerary reports, that when he came to this City he found a great number of very large Serpents, which were kept tame by the Citizens, and though they were familiarly admitted into their houses, yet never did them any injury; [whether or no they used to eat them, as the
Indians are said to do at this day, is not by him set down; though 'tis probable they did not feed them in their houses for no other end then to sport with]. 3.
Vexio, a Bishops See; where some of the first Planters of Christianity, as was said, lie buried. 4.
Ekesio, and 5.
Vesterwick.
3.
Oelandia, a pleasant and fruitful Island, lying in the
Baltick Sea, divided from
Smalandia by a very narrow Bay; in it are Cattel, as Oxen, Horses,
&c. Birds also and Wild-beasts, in great plenty: and besides the Fort called
Barkholme or
Bornholme, two and thirty Parishes in all. This Island was by the
Dane yeilded up to
Gustavus Adolphus, an. 1613. See more concerning it amongst the accessional Provinces of the Crown of
Sweden.
4.
Scania or
Schonen, a Province abounding with Corn, Beasts, Birds and all other Commodities of life: here several Mines of Silver, Lead, Iron,
&c. are said to be laboured, and their Mettal to be hence transported into other Countries; but this seems to be a mistake, either from the confounding of the word
Scandia with
Scania (which is frequently done by
Geographers) or from counting that Mettal which is brought hither from the more Northern Provinces, to come immediately from this. This Province
an. 1658 was ceded to the
Swedes, and
an. 1660 confirm'd to them; so that it may seem one of the new accessions to the Kingdom, amongst which see a description of it.
5.
Blekingia, a fruitful Province lying upon the
Baltick coast. It was given up to the
Swedes an. 1658, and (as was
Schonen) confirm'd to them
an. 1660. A larger account of this Province may be expected by and by.
6.
Gothlandia or
Gothland, an Island lying in the
Baltick Sea, over against
Ostro-Gothia, about eighteen
German Miles in length, and five or six in breadth; fourteen miles from the
Gothick Shore, twenty from
Curland, thirty from
Dantzic, fifty from
Bornholme and eighty from
Rostock. It has in it one City named
Wisbuy or
Visburg the residence of the Governour of the Island. When it was under the
Danish Government,
Friderick the second ordered one superintendant to preside here, and subjected all the Churches and Parishes, (about an hundred in all) to his jurisdiction; which authority was shortly after lost, and by
Christian the fourth again restored. Upon the decaying of
Wineta and
Julinum Mart-Towns in
Pomerania, this City became famous for Trade, and may be reckoned among the chief of the whole North. In this City Hydrographical Tables and Sea-mens Cards are said to have been first printed and perfected; and rules for Navigation and Commerce for the whole Ocean, as far as the
Scythian Sea and
Hercules his Pillars, here prescribed and by Sea-men observed. In it were anciently ten Churches and four Monasteries, at present only seven Churches in all. Near this place are several large Rocks with
Gothic Epitaphs and Inscriptions, of which see
Pontanus. This City was formerly under the command of the
Teutonick Order, in which time it was beseiged by
Ericus King of
Swedland, Denmark and
Norway, and after much loss both of men and money on both sides, the difference was referred to the Emperor, who ordered that the
Teutonick Order should yeild up to the King their Title both to the City and the Island; and he in consideration
[Page 26]of it to pay them in hand a 1000
English Nobles. After King
Ericus's death it was sometimes in the possession of the
Swedes, sometimes of the
Danes. See more amongst the
Swedish Islands.
That this Country was first of all inhabited by the
Goths, and from them receiv'd its name, is agreed on by most Authors; but whence they came hither, under whose conduct, or in what age of the world, is very much controverted. That they came out of
Scythia Europa over the
Venedic Bay under
Magog, and from him were call'd
Magogae, Gothi or
Getae, is the opinion of
Jo. Magnus, and
Olaus Magnus his Brother and successor in the Archbishoprick of
Ʋpsal. Tho they seem to have no motive for it, other then the affinity of names, not being able at such great distance of time, to have any certain authority of Historians. Other Authors, and those of very good account, affirm the
Goths or
Getes at first to have been a Colony of the
Messagetae who inhabited
Scythia Europaea in those parts near the
Palus Maeotis or the
Caspian Sea, and thence to have come into
Scandia, there to have setled, and sent out Colonies into
Germany, Italy, and other parts both of
Europe and
Asia; and from the
Messagetae to have been called by an abbreviation
Getae or
Gothi being (as most are of opinion) the same Nation. These
Getae, as soon as come over the
Baltick Sea, erected a Government among themselvs, administred justice by their own Laws, and in a short time (Northern Nations being observ'd to be most prolific) encrea'd to a numerous and potent Nation; and the bounds of the Kingdom not being able to contain, and the Provisions not sufficient to satisfy, so great a number, they were forc'd to seek out for themselves other more large, and more convenient, habitations: which they chose to do in the neighbouring parts beyond the
Venedic Bay, and in other more Southern Countries; where they became to the
Roman and
Greek Empires more known, and more considerable then any other enemies with which they had to deal.
At what time their first emigration out of
Gothia was,
Their Emigration out of Gothia.Crantius and
Jornandes are very positive; It was say they
A. M. 3790, the whole Colony was imbarqued in three Vessels, (too small a number to contain the seeds of so potent a Nation, had not several other people as the
Vandali, Suevi, Heruli, &c. joyned with them, and made them in a short time very potent); the first place they touch'd at was the Isle of
Gothland, (not improbably so called from them), thence they came to
Rugen, and so on to
Pomeren, where two of their Ships arriving before their fellows, those that came first to harbour called the other, when they came up to them, by way of reproach
Gepantae or
Gepidae, i.e. slow or
slothful; whom, as not fit for their company and designs, they left in those parts, and joyning themselves with other Nations advanc'd on by land as far as
Poland and the
Palus Maeotis, where they divided themselves into two Companies. 1. Those that went toward the East, called by the
Romans the
Oriental. 2. Those that march'd into
Transilvania and places near
Germany, Spain, &c. call'd the
Occidental Goths; which branch about the year of Christ 450 possess'd almost all the Kingdom of
France. [This division to be made first of all after their emigration out of their own Country,
Loccenius with some other
Swedish Writers cannot allow, but say, that their Country was divided into
Ostro- and
Westro-Gothia before ever they parted from it; that being the most certain, constant and first distinction, as may be gathered from the ancient
Swedish Laws, which in the very beginning, says the same
Loccenius, testify the same thing.] Those that went into
Spain are said to have driven out the Inhabitants, planted themselves in their room, about the year 369 or 407, and retain'd that Kingdom till
an. 710: the chief families of
Spain counting it an honour to have their pedigree deduced from the ancient
Goths. By those that went towards
Italy under the conduct of
Alaricus or
Allreich, (who
Anno Christi 409, sack'd
Rome it self) and the Government of it retain'd by
Theodoricus Veronensis (Dietrick vonberne) who died
An. 526, and after the Government was for seventy years by them maintain'd, they were quite overcome and utterly expell'd that Country by
Narses; of which see the Catalogue of their Kings. They that travell'd as far as
Thracia and
Maesia and the parts of
Macedonia, were by
Claudius the
Roman General almost all overcome in Battle, he at one time killing 320000 of them, as he himself in a Letter to the Senate declares; for which signal victory a golden Statue was erected for him in the Capitol. At several other times and in several other places, they made head against the
Roman Empire, as in the time of
Constantine, and
Theodosius who overcame 20000 of them, which to mention in this place is not so pertinent, as in that where the Seat of the war was; wherefore at present we shall relate no more of those famous exploits which were performed by the
Goths after their departure out of
Scandia: but leave them to be taken notice of in other more convenient places.
Besides this emigration, which is said to have been under the conduct of
Berico or
Berig, Authors make mention of another egression of the
Gothish or
Getish people, as should seem much ancienter; in the reign of
Ericus one of their first Kings, about the time of
Sarug or
Saruch great Grandfather to
Abraham; when, as was said, were peopled
Denmark, Jutland, Fionia, and the neighbouring Islands then called
Wetalaheedha, i.e. marshy and waterish places. This opinion, tho as to the time of the transmigration it may seem somewhat improbable (the earth then not being so well stored with inhabitants, especially in
Suecia and
Gothia, places so far removed from the Mount
Ararat, which is generally supposed to be
Caucasus, (upon which, as many Authors are of opinion,
Noah's Ark rested) as to be forced by reason of the multitude of them, to send out Colonies into other Countries), yet as to the evincing an emigration into these western and southern parts very anciently to have been, it is by
Jornandes, Crantzius, and all
Swedish writers unanimously approv'd; to whom we refer the Reader for further satisfaction in so difficult and obscure a controversie.
This people, tho at present united under the same Government and Laws with the
Swedes,The
[...] and commonly passing under the same name with them, was anciently different from them as well in their manners as their policy; whereupon it may not be amiss to set down in this place, what occurs amongst Authors as proper to this Nation in relation to their manners and customs, which may probably seem to have been the same, not only in
Scandia, but also in all the other parts of
Europe and
Asia, which they subdued, and whither they extended their dominion: they always ruling by their own Laws and Constitutions, which they suffer'd not to be translated into any other language, but always published in their own; not only making those they overcame, their subjects, but, by instilling their customs and manners into them, as much as possible, the same Nation. [This piece of policy was practised by
William the Conquerer here in
England, who caused all our Laws to be turned into the
French language, that thereby this Nation
[Page 27]might in time forget its own tongue, and be better disposed to endure his yoke]. That the
Goths were always a warlike people, their several swarmings into other neighbouring Countries, and the great victories they obtain'd over them, do fully manifest.
Mela does not only commend them for their courage, but their honesty and plain-dealing, who says,
Of all the Thracians [it seems they had in his time advanc'd into, and been considerable in, the more Southern parts of the world]
the Goths or Getes are the most valiant, and the most just. And this their courage in war was from the belief they had of the immortality of their souls (a doctrine they receiv'd from
Zamolxes their great King and Prophet); according to
Lucan lib. 2.
De bello Pharsal. where speaking of the
Goths, he says:
—certe populi, quos despicit Arctos
Faelices errore suo, quos ille timorum
Maximus haud urget Lethi metus: inde ruendi
In ferrum mens prona viris, animaeque capaces
Mortis, & ignavum rediturae parcere vitae.
Their education and usage whilst young, was such as best fitted them for warlike enterprizes and couragious exploits; for their children as soon as born were dipp'd over head and ears first in cold, then in hot, water; and as the
Spartan children used to be whipp'd at the Altars of their Gods, these were constantly lash'd with scourges till the blood gushed out, thereby to inure them to hardship; nor, when they were grown up, were their exercises or employments any other, then such as agreed best with men of a military constitution. They practis'd Tilts and Turnaments, as did also the
Swedes, riding the great Horse, vaulting,
&c. and for recreation, Chess-play. As any one exceeded another in rank and quality, so more, and more noble, performances were expected from them; their Kings sons being never admitted to sit at table with, or scarce come into the presence of, their fathers, before they had received some signal testimony of their courage from the very chief of their enemies; as is reported of the
Longabards (a people, says
Wolf. Lazius, anciently inhabiting
Scandia), who under the conduct of
Alvinus, son to their King
Odvinus, obtaining a great victory over the
Gepidae, requested that their General who with his own hand had slain the King of the
Gepidae's son, might be admitted to sit with him at the publick or triumphal Banquet: but the King refused their address, and told them, that it was against the custom of theirs, and the
Gothick Nation in general, that their Kings son should be permitted to eat with his father, before he had commendations of his valour from another Prince. This the son hearing took with him forty soldiers, went to
Jurismundus's Camp (so was the King of the
Gepidae named) and telling him he was the man who slew his son in battel, desired of him a testimonial of his courage; the King admiring his boldness, courteously received him, placed him by him in his dead sons room, and giving him the armour which he used to bear, peaceably dismissed him.
Lovers they were, tho no great practisers, of Learning; and (according to the character
Johannes Magnus gives of them) easier drawn by perswasion then command; as always hating and thinking it unworthy themselves to be inferior to any in knowledg or courage. Towards their friends courteous; towards their enemies, if obstinate, cruel and revengeful; if submissive, none more merciful and kind, and no Nation readier then the
Goths to accept a parley, or any overture of peace.
Their wives (of which they, as also the
Scythians, were allow'd plurality) were not less valorous, considering their sex, then their husbands; they accompany'd them in all dangers, and frequently, taking up arms, made a great and considerable part of their army: as they are said to have done in
Thracia and
Maesia when they were set upon by
Claudius the
Roman Commander. [Yet did not the women always, and upon every Colony and Detachment of
Goths sent out of
Scandia (several of which are mentioned by
Wolf. Lazius) follow their husbands: for the Laws commanding the men to return into their own Country, or to forfeit their Estates, (every one that presum'd to be absent after such a time, being thereby adjudged dead in Law, and his next heir to enter upon his inheritance) were chiefly procured by the women, whom the
Goths at their departure had left in
Suecia and
Gothia]. The Virgins were taken in marriage without any other dowry then their own perfections, to commend them to their husbands choice, never having any portions given them. Adultery amongst them was punished by death; with many such-like customs, which may be gather'd out of their Laws publish'd by
Isidore Bishop of
Sevil in
Spain.
Their manner of Government was the best,
Their Government. and (according to
Aristotle's opinion) the most natural of any, the Monarchical; their King (when distinct from the
Swedish) not being bound in any Covenant with his people, nor holding his Estate at the Will of the Subject; whereupon perhaps their Kingdom was more considerable in it self, and more terrible to its enemies; as being more expeditious in its determinations, and united in its designs, then a Democratical State is frequently found to be. Their Kings did not only bear rule over the
Goths their own Nation; but after their uniting with the
Swedes, sometimes commanded that people also: tho at present the King of
Sweden is, and for many years has been, absolute Monarch over both Kingdoms.
A Catalogue of their Kings is given by
Jo. Magnus, Grotius upon
Procopius, Crantzius, Loccenius,Their Kings, Swedish and Gothish.Wolf. Lazius and other Authors, whom we shall follow; setting down what we find most remarkable, and agreed upon, concerning them. They are commonly divided into
foreign and
domestic, or
internal and
external, Kings; who exercised their authority sometimes in
Gothland and
Swedland, sometimes in
Scythia, Italy, Spain, and other places which they subdued. [
Wolfgang. Lazius is of opinion, that those Kings which were made in Forreign Countries, as not only in
Thracia, Maesia, &c. but even in
Scythia before the time of the
Trojan war, did not only rule over their own particular Colonies, but had the whole Kingdom of
Swedland subject to them: which seems to be contrary to what we have alledged out of
Locc. and other approv'd Authors; for if the
Swedes were subject to them in
Thracia &c. upon what authority did they publish Laws for the recalling them thence? and if those were Lords and Masters of
Sweden, upon what account could they be justly disinherited for not returning thither? and it is further said, that when
Theodoricus was King of the
Goths in
Italy, one
Radolphus King of
Swedland with many of his Subjects went to visit him: which shews that even then, when the
Gothish Nation was most potent abroad, the
Swedes had a distinct King of their own and exempt from their Jurisdiction.]
Johannes Magnus by what authority I know not (
Loccenius himself in a matter so obscure not venturing to be positive) deduces the Original both of this Nation and Monarchy of the
Swedes from
1.
Magog, Grand-child to
Noah by
Japhet, whom he makes to be their first King and Founder.
2. After him is said to have succeeded
Swenno his
[Page 28]eldest son, who (as the same Author says) first of all gave name to the
Swedes or
Swenons.
3.
Gether or
Gogus who founded the
Getish or (as afterward named) the
Gothish Nation.
4.
Ʋbbo brother to
Swenno Anno a Dil. 246, who is said to have built
Ʋpsal.
5.
Siggo, who, to defend his Territories against the
Finlanders, built the City
Sigtuna near the Lake
Meller.
6.
Ericus, Anno a Dil. 357, he so prudently managed, and so far extended, his Kingdom, that by many Historians (amongst which
Loccenius is one) he is reckoned as the first King of the
Swedes and
Goths: how descended, is somewhat uncertain; but by some said to have been a poor mans son, and advanced to the Throne by the voices of the people. In his Reign several men (vagabonds), such as would not conform to his Laws and Government, were sent out into
Schonen and the
Cimbrick Islands. He lived to a great age and died peaceably. After the death of
Ericus, (
An. Mundi 2014, according to the
Swedish Chronicles), the state of this Kingdom was much disturb'd by civil commotions, and the succession in the Throne for some time interrupted. The next names are
7.
Ʋddo.
8.
Alo.
9.
Othenus.
10.
Charles I.
11.
Biorno and
Getharus. All which ruled both in
Gothia and (their own Country)
Suecia.
12.
Gylfo, who is said to be descended from one
Ferinoto King of
Finland.
13. After
Gulfo the Kingdom is said to have been govern'd by Judges for sometime, till
Othinus or
Odinus, who came out of
Asia into the Northern parts, and settling at
Ʋpsal, by his Magick and Sorceries gain'd so much favour amongst the people, that they elected him King, and after he was dead esteem'd him as one of their principal Gods. He was, as I may say, the
Numa Pompilius of the
Swedes, being the first that established any set worship, and sacred solemnities amongst them; that gave Laws and ordain'd Officers, both to execute justice in his Kingdom, and take care of all Religious matters; the chief of which were twelve, of a Senatorian order, call'd
Driar or
Drotnar; (whence
Drotset, the name now in use to denote their Viceroy, seems to come). This he did, as he pretended, by the advice, or at the command, of the Gods, with whom he kept great familiarity and correspondence.
14.
Niordus or
Nearchus, a famous Magician.
15.
Freius, Froerus or
Frotho, surnam'd the
Peaceable, the first that took upon him the name of
Drott or King. He is said to have given the patrimony of
Ʋpsal, call'd
Ʋpsala Oedom, which belongs to the Crown, and which the King takes an oath not to alienate or embezle.
16.
Odder, and
Freia or
Frigga his wife, who with her husband rul'd peaceably, and was reputed a Goddess after her death.
17.
Fiolmus, a sottish and negligent Prince, who neither regarded his own, nor the peoples, welfare. Being invited to banquet by
Fretho King of
Denmark, and made drunk with strong Liquors, he was accidently drown'd in a Vessel of Mead.
18.
Sueigder, of whom the
Norwegian Chronicles mention many fabulous Stories and Diabolical Enchantments.
19.
Walander or
Wanlander, who made an inrode into
Schonen and
Hallandia, and conquer'd them, or rather regain'd them out of the hands of one
Ostarus, who had possess'd himself of those parts. In his time the
Russes are said to have imploy'd one
Retho, a famous Pirate, to infest the
Swedes, who lay upon their coasts and did very much injury to them; (hence
Retheran signifies in the
Swedish Language, to commit rapine). Against this Pirat the King levied all the forces he could, but withal distrusting their power, desired assistance of the Devil, promising him his body and soul, upon condition he might obtain a victory over him: which he is said to have done, and the Devil shortly after, according to compact, to have come and fetch'd away his bargain.
20.
Wisbur.
21.
Domalder, who with many of his Nobles, was sacrific'd to their God
Odinus or
Woden.
22.
Domarus.
23.
Vignerus, in the
Norwegian Chronicles call'd
Dygue, the first that took upon him the name
Konung or King.
24.
Ingemarus or
Agnus, as some report, murther'd by his wife.
25.
Humelus or
Humblus, whose eldest son
Dan was the first King of the
Danes, and gve name to that Nation.
26.
Sigtrugus, who defeated
Gramus King of
Denmark in battel.
27.
Suibdagerus, first of all King of
Norway, next of
Denmark, and afterwards of
Sweden: the first Forrainer after
Odinus that obtain'd the
Swedish Kingdom.
28.
Asmundus.
29.
Ʋffo. Both which waged a long and bloody war with
Hadingus King of
Denmark.
30.
Hunningus or
Hundingus who concluded a peace with
Hadingus; and lov'd him so entirely, that hearing a (false) report of his death, he made a funeral Banquet (as was the custom) in honour and remembrance of him; invited his Nobles to it; and, as not willing to survive his friend, before them all drown'd himself in a Vessel of Metheglin; which
Hadingus hearing, and being resolv'd that affection should not seem cold on his part, for very grief hang'd himself.
31.
Regnerus, a good and peaceable King.
32.
Hothebrodus, who took up arms against
Helgo King of
Denmark, because he, in disgrace of the
Swedish Nation, had made a law amongst his subjects, that if any of them kill'd or injur'd a
Swede, he should pay only half the mulct, which was to be pay'd, if he had done the like to any other person whatsoever.
33.
Atislus, a warlike and magnificent King.
34.
Hotherus, who waged war with the
Danes and
Russes, and died of a wound he received in battel.
35.
Rodericus, King of
Denmark and
Swedland at the same time; but either leaving or loosing the former, he retir'd into the latter, and there ended his days.
36.
Attilus, who kill'd
Wermundus King of
Denmark in single Duel, and was himself afterwards slain by
Wermundus's two sons. After this Kings time, the succession for about 600 years was much interrupted; who enjoy'd the Kingdom is uncertain:
Botvildus, Charles II,
Ericus II, and six more are mention'd, but little more known of them, then their names. He whom Historians first pitch upon to have certainly succeeded was
46.
Alricus, who challenging
Gestiblindus King of the
Goths to
Duel, thereby lost both his life and Kingdom.
47.
Ericus III, surnamed the
Wise, and by some
[Page 29]the
Eloquent; a happy and peaceable Prince. He reign'd according to
Johannes Magnus's computation about four and thirty years before our Saviours Birth.
A Catalogue of the
Gothish Kings, who reigned shortly after their Transmigration out of
Scandia, while they dwelt about the
Palus Maeotis near the time of the
Trojan War: collected out of
Wolf. Lazius, upon whose credit you are to take them.
1.
Telephus, well known for his exploits in the
Trojan War.
2.
Bericus or
Beger.
3.
Filimar.
4.
Frogradus.
5.
Aringis.
6.
Eurypilus.
7.
Tamyris.
8.
Antriregus.
After this succession of Kings in
Scythia Europea, the
Goths, either weary of that Country or driven out of it by some of their potent Neighbours, are said by the same Author (though I find not his opinion seconded by any
Swedish writer) to have returned into
Gothia, and particularly to have pitch'd upon the Isle
Gotland, as the fittest seat for their Kings; a long series of whom might seem not very necessary to be set down, being for the most part, the same with the
Swedish Kings before mention'd.
48.
Haldanus, in whose reign the
Hunns overrun
Gothia and the greatest part of the Kings dominions, built
Hunnaberg an ancient City in
Ostro-Gothia, and after some continuance in the Country were, by this King at last utterly expell'd.
49.
Sivardus or
Sigvardus, in whose time commotions arising in the Kingdom, the
Goths elected a separate King of their own nam'd
Carolus, whom some make to be
50.
Charles III.
51.
Ericus IV. slain by
Haldanus King of
Denmark.
52.
Haldanus, who got the Kingdom by his valour. Of this King are reported several prodigious Stories, as of his Gigantick stature, his pulling up Trees by the roots, and such like, not inferiour to those, which Poets relate of
Hercules and the Giants.
53.
Ʋngvinus, who to his own Kingdom united
Gothia, for a long time govern'd by distinct Kings.
54.
Ragvaldus or
Regnaldus.
55.
Amundus.
56.
Haquinus, in whose reign the
Goths elected one
Sivardo King of
Gothia.
57.
Ostenus I. who entertain'd an implacable hatred against the
Norwegians: sent a great Army against them, subdued their Country, made the Inhabitants Tributary to the
Swedish Crown, and as an opprobrium to the Nation, set a Dog to be chief Governour over them, to which they were to pay all subjection and swear allegiance, under the penalty of losing one hand and one foot; this is mention'd both in the
Swedish and
Norwegian Chronicles.
58.
Alverus or
Alaricus, elected, says
Krantzius out of the Nobles; and in the midst of his happy Reign, stabb'd by his Brother
Ericus, who was impatient to obtain the Crown, which he thought he might procure after his death; but vainly, for the Government was conferr'd on
59.
Ingo I. eldest son to
Alverus. He was the first that order'd the election of Kings to be held at
Moresten near
Ʋpsal, (of the manner of which, see what was said in
Suecia.) About this time the Kingdom was governed by Judges: the next King is
60.
Ingellus I. kill'd by his Brother.
378
61.
Germunder, in a war against
Denmark taken Prisoner and hung up upon a Gibbet.
383
62.
Haquinus.387
63.
Egellus, after whose time succeeded several Kings:
Johannes Magnus reckons twenty,
389 concerning whom nothing very remarkable is set down by Historians.
The next great
Epocha is counted from the reign of
84.
Bero or
Biorno III.
780 the first Christian King in
Sweden, converted to Christianity by one
Herebretus, at his request sent to him by
Charles the
Great, Emperor of
Germany.
85.
Brautamundus or
Amundus,824 in some civil commotions in his Kingdom, kill'd by his brother, and Successor
86.
Sivardus II.
827 who in his expeditions against
Norway, was, with the greatest part of his Army, overcome in battel, the enemies Forces mostly consisting of Women.
87.
Herotus or
Haraldus,834 'twixt whom and the King of
Denmark a war broke out concerning the Province of
Schonen; which this King at last freely granted to the King of
Denmark as a reward of his signal prudence and valour.
89.
Charles VI.
856
90.
Biorno IV.
868
91.
Ingellus II. in whose time
Helsingia,883 and several other Provinces in
Suecia, had their distinct Governours: these he under colour of friendship, invited to a Banquet, and when he had made them drunk with strong Liquors, he caus'd a fire to be set on the place where they were, and so destroy'd them all, and seiz'd on their possessions. To revenge this cruelty
Gramus Duke of
Sudermannia, and
Hauno Duke of
Ostro-Gothia rais'd Forces, and came against him, but with no good success at last, for under pretence of a Parley they were taken Prisoners, and at
Ingellus's command burnt to death.
92.
Olaus (from his commanding many thick woods to be cut down) surnam'd
Tratelia or
Tree-Feller. He is said by some,
891 to have embrac'd Christianity, at the perswasion of
Ansgarius a Learned Bishop sent into
Sweden by
Lewis II. Emperor of
Germany. But though he himself (perhaps) did favour Christian Religion, it got small footing amongst his Subjects; for Paganism is said for a long time to have prevail'd in the Reigns of the succeeding Princes.
93.
Ingo II.
900
94.
Ericus VI. surnam'd
Windy-Cap;907 who is said to have had a Cap, by holding up of which he could cause the wind to blow from what Point he pleas'd; for which and such like magical exploits, he, by the consent of the people, was elected King.
95.
Ericus VII. surnam'd
Victorious.917
96.
Ericus VIII. surnam'd
Aarsel, i.e.
Rich in
Corn. He is said to have countenanc'd Christianity,
980 which had been from the time of
Bero 'till his reign, very much suppress'd; and endeavouring by Law to establish it in his Kingdom, to have been by the fury of his Subjects torn in pieces, and martyr'd for his good intentions toward them.
97.
Olaus surnam'd
Scotkonung, i.e.
Infant-King:985 because advanc'd to the Crown when young. He embrac'd Christianity and sent to
Ethelred King of
England to furnish him with able Ministers to teach him and his Subjects in that Religion.
Ethelred accordingly
[Page 30]order'd
Sigfridus Arch-bishop of
York, and with him two Priests
Eschillas and
Davidus, to go into
Sweden; where the King kindly receiv'd them, was by them baptiz'd, and at their intreaty built Christian Churches in most Provinces of his Dominions, and as some say, by reason of his great constancy and zeal in his Religion, had the name of
Christianissimus given him. He among several good Laws and Constitutions, order'd that the chief power of electing the Kings of
Sweden, should not belong to the
Goths in any case, but principally to the
Swedes: and that they (before call'd Kings of
Ʋpsal) should be thenceforth stil'd Kings of
Swedland and
Gothland. This King suppress'd Duelling and the
Runick Characters, introduc'd the trial by
Fire Ordeal, and dyed in a happy old age.
98.
1019Anundus, nick-named
Carbonarius, because he order'd that whosoever offended against the Laws which he had promulgated, should in proportion to the crime, either have all his house, or part of it burnt down. He was educated in the Christian Religion by the care of his father
Olaus, which in his reign he defended, and dyed peaceably.
99.
1035Enundus, base-son to
Olaus, and brother to
Anundus, surnam'd
Gammel, i. e. base, from his contempt of Religion; or, as some are of opinion, because he yeilded up to the Crown of
Denmark, Schonen, Blekingia, and
Hallandia, which belong'd to him, as being part of the Kingdom of
Gothia.
100.
1041Haquinus III. surnam'd
Rufus.
101.
1056Stenchillus II. bred up in the Christian Religion, which he very much encouraged amongst his subjects; making his Palace a sanctuary for any that were persecuted in any parts of his dominions for that profession.
102.
1059Ingo III. Not descended from the Blood-Royal, but, for his singular virtues elected King by the voices of the people. He is said to have been so exact an observer of his own Laws, that he never offended against any of them.
103.
1064Halstanus, a just and peaceable Prince.
104.
1080Philippus.
105.
1110Ingo IV. in his progress through his dominions, by some of his Courtiers, poison'd at a small Village in
Ostro-Gothia.
106.
1129Ragvaldus, surnam'd
Knaphofde, i. e. cockbrain'd; elected by the
Swedes without the consent of the
Goths, which they not enduring, (as thinking it a breach of their priviledges,) rebell'd against him, and in battel slew him. For one to succeed him both Nations pitch'd upon
107.
1143Suercherus II, who as he was going to Church on Christmas day, was, by a
Ruffian (employ'd by one
Scatelerus, who hop'd to obtain the Crown after his death) miserably assassinated.
Gothick Kings out of their own Country, who reign'd over the
Goths while they inhabited about the River
Vistula or
Weissel, and also in
Dacia and
Thracia: near that time when, according to some Authors, they divided themselves into
Ostro- and
Westro-Goths.
1.
Anthinus.
2.
Antheas.
3.
Gothilas, a Famous Queen, whose Daughter
Medumpa was married to
Philip King of
Macedonia.
4.
Sitalcus elected King
An. ante Christum 300. He, with an army of 150000 men lay'd wast all the Country of
Greece.
5.
Dromgethes.
6.
Tanobonta.
7.
Boroista, cotemporary with
Sylla the Roman-
Dictator, who lived
An. ante nat. Christ. 76.
8.
Commositus, both King and Priest.
9.
Corillus, under whose conduct the
Goths (says
Lazius) first of all invaded
Dacia.
10.
Dorpaneus, co-temporary with
Domitian the Roman Emperor,
An. Christ. 83.
11.
Decebalus.
12.
Ostrogotha.
13.
Cinna or
Omba.
14.
Cannabas or
Canabandes.
15.
Hildericus, surnam'd
Ovida, who liv'd in the time of
Constantine the Great.
16.
Gebeticus.
17.
Armanaricus who was, (says
Damasc. suppl.
Eutrop.) overcome by the
Hunns, and made Tributary to them.
18.
Vinnitarius.
19.
Hunimundus.
20.
Totismundus.
21.
Alaricus and
Fridigernus, who, as
Lazius mentions, reign'd at the same time in
Thracia; they defeated the
Roman Forces sent against them, commanded by
Valens the Emperor, whom they put to flight, and apprehending him in a small Cottage, whither he had fled to hide himself, burnt him to death.
23.
Theomarus, who conquer'd
Maesia.
24.
Radagaisus, who to
Maesia added a great part of
Pannonia, An. Christ. 390.
25.
Alvaricus, a Potent King.
26.
Alaricus II. who subdued all
Illyricum, and extended his Arms as far as
Italy (
Arcadius and
Honorius sons to
Theodosius the Emperor, either for some private ends, wishing the success, or not being able to withstand the power of his Forces; and thereupon not timely preventing his designs) he sack'd
Rome, subdued
Naples and overran the greatest part of that Country. But at last the
Goths were by
Stilico General of the
Roman Army, driven out of
Italy; and after their departure thence, they are said to have sate down in
France,
The
Ostro-Gothish Kings who ruled in
Italy according to
Wolf. Lazius.
1.
Alaricus. I.
2.
Theodericus, whom
Leo, or (as
Scalig.)
Zeno the Emperor made his adopted son; he expell'd the
Heruli out of
Italy, and wholly subjected it to the power of the
Goths, he had one daughter nam'd
Amalasuentha.
3.
Theodatus, or (as
Jornandes has it)
Eutharicus, call'd out of
France by the
Italick Goths to be their King,
4.
Alaricus II, though he was the first of that name who setled in
Italy.
5.
Alaricus III.
6.
Athalaricus, who had one only Daughter, whom he married to
Vittigis, who maintain'd a war against
Justinian the Emperor for about fourteen years; and defended himself bravely against the
Roman Power.
7.
Illovadus, he was kill'd in battel by
Narses the
Roman General.
8.
Alaricus IV. who reigned only five months.
9.
Totylas, or
Odilo.
10.
Teias, the last
Gothish King in
Italy, who himself was kill'd by the
Romans, and his people almost all rooted out and destroyed by them; some few only remaining, who mixing and incorporating with the
Italians, at present pass for the same Nation with them.
Westro- or
Wiso-Gothick Kings, who reign'd in
Gallia
[Page 31] Lugdunensis and
Aquitanica.
1.
Alaricus I. who (as was said) conducted the
Gothick people into those parts.
An. Salut. 411.
2.
Austulphus, son to
Alaricus.
3.
Theodericus, kill'd by
Attyla King of the
Hunns.
4.
Turismundus, son to
Theodericus, who, to revenge his fathers death, waged war with the
Hunns, and overcame them.
5.
Dietmarus, in whose time a great part of the
Goths, under the conduct of one
Vallia, went into
Spain.
6.
Gundoccarus, in the time of
Theodosius junior. After his reign the
Goths in these parts grew inconsiderable, as intermixing themselves with other people, and not having a distinct King of their own, but being subjected to (many) other Princes.
Besides these
Gothish Kings which we have mentioned, there were many other, who ruled over the
Wiso-Goths in
Spain, and the adjacent parts; a Catalogue of whom we leave to be set down in
Spain and
Arragon, and the Kingdoms where they reigned: for the
Goths in those parts blending with the
Romani, Alani, Suevi, Mauri, Saraceni, &c. did not so much continue a distinct Nation of themselves, as become a people incorporated with those of other Nations; or these with the
Goths: so that they were ruled by Forreign Princes, and their manners modell'd by different Laws.
The second great
Epocha in the
Swedish Chronicles, is from the reign of
108.
Ericus IX. surnam'd the
Saint, a virtuous and pious Prince. He never lay'd any Taxes or Impositions upon his Subjects, but was content with the Crown-Patrimony, and when Money was offer'd him by his people, he refus'd to accept it. He built the Cathedral Church at
Ʋpsal, and propagated Christianity to the
Finlanders. This King new modell'd all the
Swedish Laws, and expung'd those that any way favour'd Paganism. He was murther'd by a Party of Rebels, and in the very place where they cut off his head, there presently issued out (says
Loccen.) a spring of pure water, famous for curing diseases.
109.
Charles VII. a peaceable and religious King: who founded several Monasteries, and had an Arch-bishops see granted him, in his own Dominions.
110.
Canutus son to
Ericus.
111.
Suercherus II.
112.
Ericus X, a quiet and peaceable King.
113.
John I, surnam'd the
Meek. He propagated the Christian Religion amongst the
Leiflanders.
114.
Ericus XI, surnamed the
Stammerer. He rooted out Paganism in
Tavastia, and brought over the Inhabitants to the Christian Faith.
115.
Waldemarus son to
Bergerus Jerl, who upon the death of
Ericus, in his Fathers absence, was clected King: which his Father being dissatisfied with, at his return declaring his displeasure, that an unexperienc'd youth (his Son) should be advanc'd to the Crown, and himself disregarded, he was thereupon desir'd to take upon him the management of all publick affairs. After his death,
Waldemarus had absolute power in his Kingdom, and ruled by his own (unfortunate) commands. He was depos'd by his people, and his Crown given to
116.
Magnus I, surnam'd
Ladulaus, i. e. the
Lock to
Granaries, because he made such severe Laws against stealing Corn, and breaking up Granaries, that in his reign, the people used neither Lock nor Key; his Laws being sufficien to secure them from Thieves and Robber He built many Churches and made several wholsom Laws; ordering that all Offenders, instead of paying mulcts, should be obliged to assist in building some Tower or Fort.
117.
Birgerus son to
Magnus, in his time and by his means
Carelia received the Gospel.
1291 He manag'd affairs imprudently, and thereupon was depos'd and banish'd by his Subjects, and his Kingdom conferr'd on
118.
Magnus II. surnam'd
Smeek, i. e. the flatter'd or cocker'd Prince.
1319 In the former part of his reign he ruled peaceably, and had the affections of his people, but falling into sottishness, and following strange women, he lost the love of his Subjects, and was in a Senate at
Stockholm publickly arraign'd for his misdemeanors, call'd for to answer for himself, and not appearing in his own defence, by them depos'd. [
Ericus XII. son to
Magnus, sometime during his Fathers reign manag'd all business of State, and therefore he is by some reckon'd amongst the Kings of
Sweden, though without good reason, for he was only an assistant to the King in Council, not a Partner in the Government.]
The fourth
Swedish Epocha is reckon'd from the remarkable alteration of affairs under
119.
Albertus of
Mecklebourg,1363 elected by the Suffrages of the people. For some time he rul'd well, but preferring
Germans to the chief places of trust in his Kingdom, he thereupon lost the love of his Subjects, and his Crown to boot. After he was depos'd he retir'd into a Monastery. The person who succeeded was
120.
Margaretta Queen of
Denmark and
Norway.1395 She vex'd her Subjects with intolerable Taxes, admitted
Danes, English-men and
Italians, into publick Offices, and was thereupon assaulted by the Nobles of the Kingdom; who had certainly slain her, had she not given them fair promises, and propos'd to them one to succeed her,
viz.
121.
Ericus XIII. her Nephew,
1396 son to
Wartislavus Duke of
Pomeren. He was King of
Denmark, Norway and
Sweden at the same time: He marryed
Philippa Daughter to
Henry IV. then King of
England: for some time he reigned happily, but breaking the Laws of the Kingdom, and not observing his Coronation-Oath, he fell into great troubles, and at last, after he had enjoy'd three Crowns for five and forty years, was dethron'd by his Subjects; [this King after he was depos'd is said to have turn'd Pirat, and very much infested the
Brittish Coasts,] his Kingdoms of
Denmark and
Sweden, were given to
122.
Christophorus Duke of
Bavaria.1441 This King revis'd and corrected the municipal Laws of
Sweden, and caus'd them to be promulgated; from him call'd
Christopher's Laws. He dyed suddenly at
Helsinburg, as he was going to consult with his Nobles at
Jenecopia.
After this Kings death, there was an
Interregnum for some small time, during which, all publick business was manag'd by one
Benedictus Bielke and
Nicolaus Baner, two Principal Officers of State in the time of King
Christophorus.
The fifth
Epocha is reckon'd from the ending of the
Interregnum, which was, when the Government was undertaken by
123.
Carolus VIII,
Canuti,1445 Marshal of the Kingdom, who was descended from the Stock of the ancient
Gothish Kings. As soon as he was setled in the Throne, he pretended Title to
Gotlandia which the
Danes then possess'd; and thereupon made war with
Christianus I, King of
Denmark; but
[Page 32]with small success. He lay'd upon his Subjects heavy and grievous Taxes, and attempting to take away Church Lands and pious Donations, lost the favour of his Subjects, and was by them expell'd, or rather by the
Danish forces driven out of his Dominions. His friend whom he in his Banishment trusted himself with, was
Casimirus King of
Poland, who entertain'd him nobly for seven years, during which time
Sweden was govern'd by.
124.
1457Christiernus I. King of
Denmark, call'd hither by the prevailing Faction; but seizing the publick Treasure of the Kingdom, and committing many cruelties, he was shortly after deposed from being King; and
125.
1464Carolus Canuti, recall'd from
Dantzick, and restor'd to the Throne; but being troubled with civil Commotions at home, chiefly manag'd by the Arch-bishop of
Ʋpsal; and endanger'd by the
Danish Forces from abroad, commanded by the depos'd King
Christiernus I. he voluntarily left the Government of the Kingdom, and appointed for his Successor his Nephew
126.
1471Steno Sture Senior, who was receiv'd by the Senate at
Stockholm, rather as a Protector, then an absolute Governour of the Kingdom; he manag'd all publick affairs very happily, and with great satisfaction to the people for a long time, till in the year 1491; at which time he was accus'd by the Senate, for acting in several matters without their knowledg and advice, for making a League with the Inhabitants of
Riga against the
Teutonick Order, (of which the
Russes taking advantage, had made some inrodes into
Livonia and
Finland,) and such-like Crimes; and thereupon by them turn'd out of all office: the Kingdom was conferr'd on
127.
1497John II. son to
Christiern I. King of
Denmark. He took
Steno Sture into favour, and going (as was then the custom) to visit his dominions, left him Vice-roy at
Stockholm, to manage all the affairs of state during his absence.
Steno, got into the Office, endeavours nothing more then to lessen his
Masters, and to advance his own credit and interest with the people; and thereupon calumniates him as a publick Enemy to the Nation, seizes upon those Castles and Forts which the King had Officer'd with
Danes, besieges
Stockholm, gains the City presently, the Castle (in which the Queen had secur'd her self) after two years siege, and not long after, the command of the whole Kingdom. Upon these disorders in
Sweden, the King shelters himself in
Denmark, thence sends a Messenger to
Steno Sture, desiring him to send his Queen
Christina to him, whom he courteously attending to the Borders of
Denmark, dyed suddenly at
Jenecopia a City in
Smalandia, being (as was suppos'd) poison'd by some of the Queens friends. The Kingdom was dispos'd of by the Nobles, and given to, or rather (as
Johannes Magnus relates,) forcibly obtain'd by,
128.
1507Suanto Sture son to one
Nicolaus Grand Marshal of
Sweden. He was Administrator or Protector of the Kingdom, not absolute King. He took
Colmar then possess'd by the
Danes, and maintain'd a bloody war against
John II. of
Denmark, the exil'd King of
Sweden. A Treaty of peace being agreed on to be held at
Colmar, he refus'd to be present, and was thereupon by
Maximilian the Emperor of
Germany and
John of
Denmark declared an Enemy to the publick, and a disturber of the peace, and as such he and all his accomplices, were by all good men to be deem'd, and their possessions to be confiscated.
Suanto not valuing all their protestations against him, declares against their proceedings, and striking a League with the
Lubechers (which they afterwards broke) puts himself in a posture of defence: in the prosecution of the war he dyed at
Arhusia, after he had govern'd very happily for eight years: the next who succeeded him was his son
129.
Steno Sture Junior, Protector of the Kingdom: Upon some grievous quarrels and animosities breaking out 'twixt this King and
Gustavus Trolle (who afterwards enjoy'd the Crown), the Kingdom was miserably shatter'd and opportunity given to
Christiern II. son to
John II. King of
Denmark, to make an Invasion into it.
Steno to defend himself, raises an Army, goes against him, and near the Lake
Wener, loses his life in battel. The Kingdom was by the Nobles under certain conditions, as of having their Laws and Religion protected,
&c. given to
130.
Christiern II. King of
Denmark, who having obtain'd the Diadem, meditated nothing more, then revenge and cruelty, and committed so many Massacres and Acts of hostility upon his Subjects, that he may seem not much inferiour in tyranny to
Nero himself. He under pretence of friendship, and deciding the troubles of the Kingdom, invited all his Nobles to a royal banquet, and after having treated them splendidly for two whole days, at last (pretending the disturb'd state of the Kingdom, requir'd that they should be taken out of the way, and that the
Popes Bull (which he caus'd publickly to be read before them) gave him authority to do it, murther'd them: casting their dead bodies out into the streets, where they lay for three days, to be torn by Dogs, and trod upon by the Souldiers. The body of
Steno Sture, which had layn some time in the ground, he caus'd to be dug up and given to the Dogs to devour; with suchlike unheard of Cruelties, which made him hated amongst his
Swedish Subjects, and not secure while he liv'd among them. Hereupon he retir'd, or rather fled into
Denmark, and the whole management of
Swedish affairs was undertaken by
131.
Gustavus I. Nephew to
Steno Sture by his brother
Ericus, whom
Christiern had put to death. He when young was taken by
Christiern, and carried prisoner into
Denmark, whence miraculously escaping, he came into
Sweden, put himself in the head of the dissenting party, manag'd several engagements against the Tyrant very successfully, and was at last, seemingly much against his will, crown'd King. This King was the first who made the Kingdom of
Sweden Hereditary; the Nobles and Commons in consideration of the great service he had done the Nation, freely giving up their ancient right of electing, and establishing the Crown upon him and his heirs for ever. He was the first that encourag'd and propagated the
Lutheran Confession in
Sweden, and made a League with the Reform'd Princes of
Germany, to defend it against all Opposers. He protested against
Christianus III. King of
Denmark, who alledg'd some pretentions to the Arms (three Crowns
Or) of
Sweden: made a peace with the
Russes, and after he had reign'd happily for nine and thirty years, dyed in a quiet and peaceable old-age: his Diadem (according to the right of inheritance) was conferr'd on the head of
132.
Ericus XIV. his Eldest son. As, soon as or before, he was well settled in the Throne, the first thing he propos'd to the Senate, was to
[Page 33]consult about a marriage with
Elizabeth Queen of
England. He concluded a peace with the
Danes, which they not observing on their part, he made war against them, invaded
Norway, and committing some cruelties upon the
Norwegian Noblemen, thereupon quite lost the favour of his own Subjects, and was by them under the command of his rebellious Brothers (notwithstanding their oath of Allegiance) treacherously betrayed, thrust from his Throne, and shut up in Prison; where, after nine years confinement, he died miserably. During his imprisonment, when he perceiv'd what way affairs would go, and to whom the Kingdom after his death (according to justice) be transferr'd, he is said to have writ under his Escutcheon these words;
Translatum est regnum & factum est fratris mei; a Domino constitutum est ei: which so happen'd, for the Diadem (in right) descended upon
133.
John III. brother to
Ericus. He, as soon as invested with his Royal Robes, endeavours to lay a Foundation for a quiet reign: and thereupon concludes a peace with the
Muscovite, the
Pole, and the
Dane, his three potent Neighbours. This King is said to have endeavour'd to introduce the Religion of the church of
Rome into his Dominions, and labour'd to perswade his Brother
Charles to embrace that Profession; but with small success. In the latter part of his Reign he was victorious in war, and saw his son
Sigismund crown'd King of
Poland. He died, not without suspicion of being poison'd. After his death, his Brother
Charles Duke of
Sudermannia for some time manag'd all publick affairs, 'till his Nephew, to whom according to the right of succession the Crown did belong, could conveniently come out of
Poland, to receive it.
134.
Sigismund son to
John III. He was educated in the Religion of the church of
Rome. Hereupon the States of
Sweden fearing lest he, being admitted King, might reestablish Popery amongst them; before his Coronation, propos'd to him an Oath, not to alter any thing in their Religion reform'd according to
Luther, but to allow his Subjects the free exercise of that profession. This Oath he endeavour'd at first to evade, but (being advised by the Popes
Legat and some
Jesuits, that an Oath taken by him with Heretics was not obligatory; or if he scrupled that, that a Dispensation for the breach of it was easily attainable from the Pope) at last solemnly took it, and promising the States faithfully to observe all the conditions of it, he left
Sweden, and return'd into
Poland. During his absence, all affairs of the Kingdom were managed by Duke
Charles his Uncle; who for some small time executed the Office of Vice-Roy very quietly, and to the great satisfaction of the Kings subjects; but some differences arising about Religion (the Papists,
Jesuits especially, to whom free exercise of their Worship had been granted, growing powerful, and thereupon behaving themselves insolently towards the
Lutherans) the businesses of State became troubled, and the determination of controversies, and removal of jealousies out of the peoples hearts, a very difficult matter. Hereupon
Sigismund is sent for out of
Poland; but both delaying to come into
Sweden, and to send Orders to his Uncle,
An. Ch. that Popish Delinquents (as they were represented to him) should, according to Law, be proceeded against as enemies to the State, and that other (such-like) grievances should be redress'd; he so lost his interest with his
Swedish Subjects, that when (at last) he came amongst them, they opposed him as a public enemy; made war against him, and overcame him in Battel. After he was defeated, he return'd to
Poland, and his Crown of
Sweden was by the States set upon the head of his Uncle
135.
Charles IX. Duke of
Sudermannia,1600 and brother to
John III. He maintain'd the
Augustan Confession during his whole Reign; carryed on a bloody war against his Nephew
Sigismund, and
Christianus IV. King of
Denmark (whom he challeng'd to a Duel): and after he had reigned eleven years, dyed at
Nycopia, in his return from opposing the
Danes. The Government after his death, according to the right of Inheritance descended upon his eldest son
136.
Gustavus Adolphus II. surnamed the
Great.1611 This King, in the beginning of his Reign, prosecuted the war with
Denmark, which his father was engaged in at his death: but, intending to turn the whole forces of his Kingdom against his Cousin
Sigismund K. of
Poland, he, within a short time, concluded a peace both with the
Dane and
Muscovite; this done, he invaded
Livonia, took several places of great importance in that, and other Provinces, which belong'd to the
Pole; and at last, making a Truce with his Cousin for six years, he return'd into
Sweden. During the war with
Poland, Ferdinand II. Emperor of
Germany, had done him (as he alledged) very many injuries; (as, his sending assistance to the
Pole into
Borussia under the command of
Arnhemius: his not admitting the
Swedish Delegates to a Treaty of Peace at
Lubeck, but charging them to depart the Empire,
&c.) whereupon he invaded the Imperial dominions, took several strong Cities, and, after he had over-run a great part of the Empire, was kill'd in battel near
Leipsick. He was succeeded by
137.
Christina his only daughter,
1633 who being then but seven years old, the affairs of the Kingdom were order'd by her Guardians, till she came to the eighteenth year of her age; at which time she took the Government upon her self, made a Peace with the Emperor, and the King of
Denmark; and at last, either weary of ruling so potent a Kingdom, or thinking the care of it too great a burthen for her to undergo, voluntarily laid down the Crown, and commended it to
138.
Charles Gustavus X.
1654 A Noble and Victorious Prince. He maintain'd war against the
Pole, the
Muscovite, and the
Dane. As he was returning from
Gottenburg upon the confines of
Denmark, to
Stockholm, he dyed of a Feaver; and his Kingdom, according to right of succession, descended upon
139.
Charles XI. his son, then four years of age.
1660 During his Minority, the Kingdom was govern'd by his Guardians; but coming to full age, he took upon himself the management of all publick affairs; and is now reigning
A. D. 1680. Aged twenty-four years. A warlike and virtuous Prince.
BEyond the
Bothnic Bay lies the Great Principality of
Finland;Finland. call'd by the Natives
Somi or
Soma, from the great number of Lakes that are in it (
Soma signifying a
Lake); but by the
Swedes first, and after them, by all strangers, call'd
Finland, q. Fine-land, from the pleasantness of the Country; or (as others say)
q. Fiende-land, i.e. the Land of Fiends or Enemies: the
Finlanders using for a long time, before they were under the
Swedish power, to make frequent incursions into that Kingdom, and very much injure and molest its inhabitants.
It is bounded on the East, with the
Sinus Finnicus, and the Lake
Ladoga; on the West, with the
Bothnic Bay; on the North, with part of
Lapland; and on the South, with part of the
Finnic and
Baltic Seas.
It is divided into these seven Provinces:
Its Provinces. 1.
Southern-Finland. 2.
Northern-Finland. 3.
Cajania. 4.
Savolaxia. 5.
Tavastia. 6.
Nylandia. And 7.
Carelia.
1.
Southern Finland. Southern
Finland, parted from the Northern by the River
Aujaroki, which waters the Episcopal City
Abo. It extends it self all along the
Finnic Bay, Eastward; having on the North and North-East, the Provinces of
Tavastia and
Nylandia. In it are, besides several little Towns, two remarkable Forts,
viz. Gusto in the Western, and
Raseberg (to which belongs a Dynasty or Principality) in the Eastern, part of it.
2.
Northern Finland. Northern
Finland, running along the Eastside of the
Bothnic Bay, towards the North. It is indifferently large in circumference, taking in both the
Satagunda's, with
Viemo and
Masco. Water'd it is by one only River, call'd
Cumo-elff (famous for its abundance of Salmon, and other sorts of Fish) which falls into the Sea near the City
Biorneborgh. Towns of note here are
Raumo, Nystadh, and
Nadhendal: to these
Sanson adds
Castelholm, in the Island
Alandia.
3.
Cajania.Cajania, or
Ost-Bothnia, as some call it, in opposition to
West-Bothnia, which lyes over against it, on the West side of the
Bothnic Bay. In it are many large Rivers, the chief of which are,
Kimi-elff, (which emptieth it self into the
Bothnic Bay at the most Northern Cape of it, and parts this Province from
West-Bothnia.)
Iio-elff, and
Vla-elff. Cities here, are 1.
Vlam or
Vlo, 2.
Vasa or
Wassam Cal; to which may be added, the Forts
Cajaneburg and
Vlaburg.
4.
Savolaxia.Savolaxia, which is bounded on the East, with the Lake
Ladoga; on the West, with a a ridge of Mountains, which part it from
Carelia; on the North, with part of
Muscovitic Lapland; and on the South, with
Tavastia and
Carelia. This Province abounds much with Lakes and Rivers, most of which disburthen themselves into the Lake
Ladoga. The Rivers afford Fish (Pike especially) in great abundance; and the Lakes, besides the great quantity of Fish they breed, supply the inhabitants with Sea-Calfs, not met with in any other
Scandian Lakes. Here is one remarkable Fort, call'd
Nystort, or St.
Olaus's Fort; built in the year 1475, by one
Ericus Axelson Governor of
Aboa, in the reign of
Carolus Canuti VIII.
5.
Tavastia, an in-land Province;
Tavastia. having on the West, North
Finland; on the North,
Cajania; on the East,
Savolaxia and
Carelia; and on the South,
Nylandia and the Principality of
Raseborg. In it there is one Fort, call'd the Fort of
Tavastia or
Tavasthus; built by
Berjerus Jerl, A. D. 1250, to keep the
Tavastians in awe; whom he at that time had brought over to the
Swedish Government, and forc'd to profess the Christian Religion. Here is one Lake of a considerable bigness, nam'd
Jende or
Pejende: and towards the Northern parts of the Province, several others, call'd
Kautilambi, i.e. Iron Lakes; not so large as the former, but no less remarkable, by reason of the great quantity of Iron which the inhabitants find in them, and (as is said) daily hook out for their private use.
6.
Nylandia or
Neuland, so call'd
New-land,Nylandia. because its ancient inhabitants (the
Finni and
Carelii) being driven out, new Colonies were sent out of
Helsingia and
Suecia, to go people, or rather defend, this Country. Here are two Cities,
Borgo and
Hesingfors.
7.
Carelia,Carelia. lying upon the East-side of the great Peninsula
Scandia or
Scandinavia: parted from
Russia by the Rivers
Pinsyoki, which runs toward the North Sea; and
Povevetz, which falls into the Lake
Onega. [by the near approaching of these two Rivers toward each other,
Scandia is almost made (as the Ancients suppos'd it to be) a perfect Island; the nick of land call'd
Maanselke, not being above three
German miles in length in that part where the Rivers come nearest together]. This Province anciently contain'd all that large tract of ground which lies between the River
Kymi on the North, the Lakes
Pejende on the West, and
Onega on the East; and the Rivers,
Sueci which falls into the Lake
Ladoga, and
Nieva which empties it self into the
Finnic Bay, on the South and South-East: but at present its bounds are much narrower, taking in only the more Southern part of that large Country which formerly it did (wholly) contain. It affords good store of pasturage, and breeds Cattel, as Oxen, Horses,
&c. in great abundance, whence it has its name
Carelia, (
Caria, in the
Finlandish tongue, signifying Herds or Droves of Cattel).
While the
Finlanders had Kings of their own,
Of
[...] Gov
[...] me
[...] Calia. all
Carelia belong'd to their jurisdiction; but after the
Swedes on the one side, and the
Muscovites on the other, began to infest it by frequent wars and invasions, the title to it became very disputable, and was for a long time very hotly contended for by those two potent enemies. About the year 1319,
Magnus II. surnamed
Smeek,
[Page][Page]MAGNATUS DUCATUS FINLANDIAE Nova et accurata delineatio.
Caiania
Finl: Metz.
Finland
[...]
Finl: Sept.
Savolexia
Tavastia
Nylandia
Caretia
Literis, et morum elegantiâ probatissime Juveni, Magnorum Parentum Filio,
D.
no JACOBO SCHÜTZ, Suece, tunc, pro tempore, vitae excolendae gratiâ per varias terras peregrinanti, tabula haec Geographica submisse offertur.
[Page][Page 35]King of
Sweden, and
George Duke of
Novogardia, divided the whole Province betwixt them, setting certain bounds in
Systerbeg, and other places towards the North; beyond which it was not lawful for either of them, without the others leave, at any time to pass. These limits, tho not punctually observ'd on either side, are said to have continued, as a distinction of the
Swedish Territories in this Province, till the reign of
Charles IX. King of
Sweden A. D. 1609. in which year
Ivan Vasilowitz Tzar of
Muscovy, being engaged in a war with
Sigismund King of
Poland, and in danger to lose his whole Empire; desired of the said
Charles IX. that he would send some forces to his assistance, and promised him upon condition that he would aid him in that extremity, to deliver up into his hands the Principality of
Carelogorodia or
Kexholmia, with the City and Fort, as
a perpetual possession to him and his Successors. But the
Tzar proved not so good as his word, for after he had freed himself from the danger he was in, he not only caused the
Swedish soldiers to be robb'd of all the pay he had given them, but refused to yeild up
Kexholmia to the
Swedes. This very much incens'd
Charles IX. who upon the first advantage (the
Poles rallying their forces against the
Muscovites, and taking their Imperial City
Mosco) invades that part of
Carelia which the
Tzar retain'd from him; takes
Kexholm, and several other Forts upon the confines of
Muscovy; and withall makes an inrode into the Province of
Novogorod Weliki, i. e. Novogorod the great. During the war
Charles dyes, and the prosecution of it was continued by his successor
Gustavus Adolphus King of
Sweden. He takes from the
Russes Noteburg in
Ingria or
Ingermannia; and had such good success in his conquests, that in the year 1616 he obtain'd of them very advantagious conditions of peace,
viz. That (as it is in the eighth Article of the Ratification)
Michael Federowitz Great Duke of
Muscovy should yeild up to the
Swedes Ivanogrod, Jamma, Capories, and
Noteburg, formerly belonging to the Principality of
Novogard; with all Cities, Towns, Prefectures,
&c. appertaining to, or any way depending upon them: And also (according to the eleventh Article of the said Ratification) should deliver to
Gustavus Adolphus and his successors for ever, as a perpetual possession, all that part of
Carelia which the
Russes laid claim to; with all the Cities and Towns contained in it. (See what was said in
Muscovy concerning this Province,
pag. 15.).
The chief Cities in
Finlandish Carelia,Cities are 1.
Wiburg, a noted Mart-Town, well fortified with Trenches, Forts, and a strong Castle, against which the
Muscovites very often have made unsuccessful attempts, with no less then an hundred thousand men. 2.
Kexholm, or (as the
Swedes call it)
Kekisalmi, i.e. the Frith of Gurnardi; from
keki, signifying a kind of Fish call'd a Car, or Gurnardi, (which abounds in the River
Woxen, upon which this City stands;) and
Salmi, a Frith or Bay. The
Russes call it
Carelogorod, i. e. the Fort of
Carelia; gorod in their language denoting a Fort.
In this Province the soil is exceeding rich;
[...] in those places especially which lye near the Lake
Ladoga; for, fifteen or twenty miles Northward from it, the ground is so overflown with Lakes and Rivers, that it bears Corn only on the higher and more mountainous parts; whereupon the inhabitants live mostly upon hunting and fishing; taking more pains for their subsistance where the earth is less bountiful.
The largest and most remarkable amongst the Lakes of this Country, (and, as some are of opinion, of all
Europe) is the Lake
Ladoga, of which four parts in five belongs to the King of
Sweden. It has its name from a kind of Fish about the bigness of a Herring, call'd in the
Russian tongue
Lagdog, (which is peculiar to this Lake, and with which it very much abounds.) The figure of it is oval, about an hundred leagues in length, and sixty in breadth. In it are many small Islands, and upon its banks several Towns of very good note.
Near a place call'd
Kidila in this Province, are dug out of the ground a sort of precious stones, which go under the name of
Kexholmian Rubies; the
Russes call them
Kidelsco Camen.
The ancient inhabitants of
Finland were (says
Jornandes) the most hospitable and least barbarous of any of the
Scandians;The Inhabitants of Finland. but at present they are of all (the
Laps only excepted) the most fierce and unciviliz'd.
Their language, which they make use of,
Their Language. and which is proper to themselves, is of a harsh and uneven dialect; difficultly attainable by any stranger, as having in it some proprieties not common to any
Europaean tongue; as, in the whole language they have no F, nor any word that begins with B, D, or G, or two consonants; so that they pronounce
v. g. for
the, he; for
grant, rant; for
both, poth; for
good, cood, &c. Thro the whole tongue they observe no Genders, and have but one Article
(se) to denote both sexes: their Prepositions they place after the words to which they belong: Their Rythms in Verse they count not from the like ending, but the like beginning, of the last words; and many such-like differences.
The Government of
Finland,Their Government. was anciently administer'd by Kings of its own, who exercis'd their power without controul, and were no ways tributary to, or dependent on, a foreign jurisdiction: till about the year of Christ 1150,
Ericus IX. surnamed the
Saint, King of
Sweden, brought the whole Country into subjection to his Laws, and (at the same time) compell'd them to embrace the Christian Religion. After his days
Tavastia was conquer'd by
Berjerus Jerl; and
Carelia by
Turgillus Kuntesonius, who built
Viburg to defend it against the
Russes, A. D. 1193. At present, the whole Principality belongs to the King of
Sweden, and is reckon'd as a very considerable part of his dominions.
Of Ingria
or Ingermanland.
INgria, Ingermanland,Of Ingria. or (as the
Muscovites call it)
Isera, is a fruitful and pleasant Province; having on the East and South, part of
Muscovy; on the West,
Esthonia and part of the
Finnic Bay; on the North, the Lake
Ladoga, and the River which joins it with the
Finnic Bay. It affords beasts, both wild and tame, of several species, in great plenty: That which abounds most, is the
Aelg, Elk, or (as the
Germans call it)
Ellent, which (as we mentioned in
Lapland) in the spring-time swims over the River
Nieva in numerous herds into
Carelia, and towards the end of Autumn, returns by the same way into
Russia, and the more Southern parts of this Province, and also into
Esthonia, Livonia, &c. here are several Cities, of great importance and strength, which were formerly the chief security to the
Russes on this side, but now are all given up by the forementioned Treaty
A. D. 1616, into the possession of the
Swedes. As, 1.
Notteburg, which the
Russes call
Oresia, i. e. a Nut, from its compactness and strength. It is seated in a small Island at the mouth of the River
Nieva, which by reason of its breadth is a great security to it. About the year 1614,
Gustavus Adolphus[Page 36]besieged this City, and after he had lain before it with his whole Army for a long time, and not by force able to gain it; it was at last by the Burghers voluntarily surrendred up to him: not because they wanted any provision necessary to defend the City, but because (as is reported) a strange distemper of Boils or Warts in the mouth and throat, seized the greatest part of the inhabitants: so that they were not able to eat any victuals, or sufficiently to secure their Bastions against so potent an enemy. 2.
Ivanogorod, built upon a Rock, in a small Isthmus, at the confluence of two Rivers; it lies opposite to
Narva, parted from it only by a large and rapid River, which runs from the Lake
Peipus, and empties it self into the
Finnic Bay. On the East-side of this City there is a small Mount, made hollow, partly by art, and partly by nature; in the side of which many of the poorer sort of people, such as ordinarily live in the suburbs of great Cities, come to inhabit. 3.
Jamagorod, situated upon the River
Laga. 4.
Capurium or
Coporio, a strong Fort, lying upon the
Finnic Bay. All these Cities and Forts, by vertue of the Peace concluded 'twixt
Gustavus Adolphus King of
Sweden, and the
Muscovite, an. 1616 or 1617, were deliver'd up into the hands of the
Swedes, and ever since by them retain'd, (of what was given to the
Tzar by that Treaty, see what was said in
Muscovy, p. 23. concerning the Province of
Novogorod, &c.)
Of the new Accessions in
Livonia.
SOme,
Livonia. tho the lesser, part of
Livonia or
Liefland (as is taken notice of in
Poland, where a description of the whole Province may be seen) belongs at present to the Crown of
Poland: all
Esthonia, with the Island
Oselia, and some Towns in
Lettia and other parts, which lye upon the
Baltic coasts, being in the possession of the
Swedes; and held by them by vertue of a Ratification of Peace concluded at the Monastery of
Oliva near
Dantzic, ann. 1660, between
John Casimir King of
Poland, and
Charles XI. the present King of
Sweden. The Articles which chiefly relate to the
Swedes, and their possessions in
Liefland, we shall (for the Readers satisfaction) here insert: 1.
It was agreed on, That a general and inviolable peace, amnesty, and friendship should thenceforward be maintain'd between the said Crowns of Sweden
and Poland,
the Emperor Leopold,
and Frederic Wilhelm
Marquess of Brandenburg,
and between their subjects of what degree, condition, or Religion soever. 2.
That the King of Poland
for himself and his heirs should renounce all pretensions to the Crown of Sweden
and the Great Principality of Finland,
and to all other possessions which his Grandfather John
III. King of Sweden
had formerly enjoyed: but that the said John Casimir,
during his life, might, when he writ to any Prince or Ally whatsoever, use the Arms and Title of the King of Sweden
as well as those of Poland. Only observing this, that in all transactions 'twixt him and the King of
Sweden, he should stile himself King of
Poland and Great Duke of
Lithvania, without adding any more Titles, but only annexing three
Etcaeterations: thus,
John Casimir King of Poland, Great Duke of Lithvania, &c. &c. &c. (The like was to be done by the King of
Sweden, after the Title of
Great Duke of Finland). 3.
That the King and States of Poland
and Lithvania
should yeild up to the Swedes
all Livonia
beyond Dwina,
with the Island Rune,
and some other places beyond the Dwina,
which the King of Sweden
during the Truce had possession of; and also all Esthonia
and Oselia,
and all Cities, Towns, Forts, &c. that did formerly any way belong or appertain to the Crown of Poland:
the King of Sweden
being hereby obliged vpon the surrender of these places, not to lay any claim to Curland
or Semigallia,
or to any Towns and Forts that belong to those Provinces: That all the inhabitants in the Swedish Livonia
should have free exercise of their Religion, Laws, &c. with undisturb'd intercourse of Trade upon the Dwina: And several such-like Conditions.
The whole Province of
Liefland, [...] in respect of its jurisdiction, may be divided into
Swedish and
Polonian Liefland.
1.
Polonian Liefland,Polonian Liefland which lies beyond the
Dwina, and contains in it the Dukedom or Principality of
Curland, and
Semigallia, with part of
Lettia. (of which see
Poland)
2.
Swedish Liefland, [...] which may be said to contain the Districts of
Esthonia, Odepoa, Oselia, and
Lettia. This Province being frequently subjected to different Princes, has no very certain limits set, nor like names given to the parts of it, by any that have undertaken to describe it. Some Authors adding
Harland and
Verland, as distinct Provinces from the former, which may seem rather parts only of
Esthonia, then different Principalities from the rest.
I.
Esthonia, Estia, or
Esthland, [...] (so call'd from the
Estii its ancient inhabitants) is bounded on the North with the
Finnic Bay; on the West, with the
Baltic Sea, and the Islands
Dagho and
Oselia; on the East, with the Lake
Peipus, and part of
Muscovy; and on the South, with the District of
Lettia and the River
Dwina. It is cut out into five divisions or Dioeceses,
Alentakia, Wiria, Harria, Wicia, and
Jervia.
1.
Alentakia,
Alentakia.
which lies betwixt the Lake
Peipus and the
Finnic Bay; having the River
Narva on the East; and on the West, the District of
Wiria. In it are two Cities of note: 1.
Narva, call'd commonly the
German Narva, to distinguish it from
Muscovitic Narva, which lies opposite to it upon a River of the same name, not far from the famous Fort
Ivanogorod. It is a place of great strength and consideration; and ordinarily well garrison'd with
Swedish soldiers. Behind the Castle there is a small piece of ground, encompass'd with wooden pales, which was given by
Gustavus Adolphus to the
Russes, where they are permitted to live, and enjoy free exercise of their Religion, which is according to the Ceremonies of the
Greek Church. The
German Lutherans (of which there is a vast number,) that reside here, have a particular Church allow'd them, and Sermons preach'd to them in their own language. This City is said to have been built by
Waldemarus II. King of
Denmark, A. D. 1223. It was taken by the
Russes in 1558, and by them lost to the
Swedes A. D. 1581, and in the year 1599, by a Ratification of Peace, confirm'd to the Kings of
Sweden, and ever since by them possess'd. It lies in 60 deg. of Northerly Latitude; forty
German miles from
Pleskow, and as many from
Novogardia. 2.
Nieslot, or
Neuschlos, i. e. new Fort: not far from the Lake
Peipus, upon the River
Narva.
2.
Viria, Wiria, or
Wilandia;
Viria.
which has
Alentakia on the East,
Harria on the West, the
Finnic Bay on the North, and
Jervia on the South. Places remarkable in it are: 1.
Wesenberg, not far from the River
Weissenaa, which
A. D. 1581, was taken by the
Swedes from the
Muscovite. 2.
Tolsburg, twelve miles distant from
Wesenberg. 3.
Borcholm.
3.
Harria or
Harrenland,
[...].
bounded on the South with
Wicia, on the East with
Viria, and on the North and West with the
Finnic Bay. In this division is
Revalia, the Metropolis of
Liefland; a
[Page 37]little, but handsom, pleasant, and well fortified, City; lying in 59 deg. 30 min. of Longitude. In the year 1374, it was sold to the great Master of
Livonia. In 1561, being in danger to fall into the hands of the
Muscovite, it committed it self to the protection of the Kings of
Sweden; and has ever since been subject to them. Here was anciently a Bishops See, but, since
Lutheranism spred it self into these parts, that Title is here discontinued, and all Ecclesiastical affairs manag'd by Superintendents. For the promoting of Learning and good Education, this City has one publick
Gymnasium wherein Professors and Tutors are maintain'd, to read and teach Humanity, and all the Liberal Arts. The chief Church is dedicated to St.
Olaus. Not far from this place, is the Monastery of St.
Bridget, seated upon the
Finnic coast; and the Fort
Pades or
Badis, lying upon the River
Assa.
4.
Vikia, Wicia, or
Wikke, which has in it these three places of note: 1.
Habsalia, Habsel, lying upon the
Bothnic Bay; formerly,
viz. in the time of
Frideric II. King of
Denmark, in the possession of the
Danes: afterwards
A. D. 1575, taken by the
Muscovite; and in the year 1581, gain'd by
John III. King of
Sweden. 2.
Lode. 3.
Leal. 4.
Wickel or
Wyck: all, Forts of good strength and consideration.
5.
Jervia, which lyes landward, almost in the middle of the other Districts: It contains
Wittenstein, Oberpalen, and
Lau or
Lais; places of moment.
II.
Odepoa, bounded on the East, with the Lake
Peipus; on the North, with
Embeck, and the Rivers
Fela and
Pernavia; on the West, with the great Bay of
Livonia; and on the South, with
Lettia. In it are these places of note,
viz. 1.
Derpat, Derbat, Dorpat, or (as the
Russes call it)
Juriogoord, a large City, built most of Stone and Brick, and secured by strong Stone-walls; where was formerly a Bishops seat. It was heretofore under the
Tzar of
Muscovy A. D. 1230. Under the
Poles A. D. 1582. Afterwards taken from them by
Charles Duke of
Sudermannia, But by them regain'd,
A. D. 1603. In the year 1625, when
Gustavus Adolphus sent Forces into
Livonia under the command of
Jacobus de la Gardie, this City was gain'd to the
Swedish Crown, and ever since remains as a part of its possessions. Here, by reason of the great abundance of all sorts of commodities of life, and the healthfulness of the air,
Gustavus Adolphus ann. 1632, at the desire of one
John Skytte Baron in
Ouderof, (who had sometime been Tutor to that King), instituted an University: and appointed and stipended one Rector, and several Professors, for Theology, History, Mathematicks,
&c. 2.
Warbek, upon the mouth of the River
Embeck. 3.
Kanneleks. 4. The Fort
Ringen. 5.
Odepoa, a small Town, whence the whole District has its name. 6.
Nienhausen, a strong Fort upon the borders of
Muscovy. 7.
Marienburg, another Fort, not far from the Lake
Peipus. 8.
Tarnest a place anciently of good importance; but being in the hands of the
Muscovites, it was besieged by the
Polander, and at last by them taken, and when they quitted it, so demolished, that, tho the
Swedes have spent some charges in repairing it, it has not at present attain'd its ancient strength and splendor. 9.
Felinum, Fellin, fifteen
German miles from 10.
Parnavia, Parnow, upon a River of the same name; a Town of great trade for all commodities, Corn especially; first of all added to the
Swedish dominions by
Ericus XIV. King of
Sweden, an. 1562, Afterwards taken by the
Poles and regain'd from them,
an. 1617. 11.
Sales or
Lemsael: with some other less remarkable Towns and Forts.
III.
Lettia, bounded on the East, with part of
Muscovy; on the West, with the
Livonian Bay; on the North, with
Odepoa; and on the South, with the River
Dwina. Its chief City is 1.
Riga, an Arch-Bishops See, lying in 48 deg. of Longitude, and 57 deg. 30 min. of Latitude, upon the
Dwina, at its entrance into the
Bothnic Bay. It is defended with a strong Wall, Bulwarks, Towers, an extraordinary large Trench, and three rows of great Guns; which were put in good order and readiness, (chiefly) by the care of
Gustavus Adolphus King of
Sweden. Here is a noted Harbour for Ships, much frequented by Merchants from
Germany, Holland, England, &c. who come hither in the summer-time, and are laden with Hemp, Flax, Wax, Pitch, Tar; with Planks also, and Wood ready hew'n for building Ships; with skins of all sorts, as of Bears, Elks, Foxes,
&c. and Furs of Castors, Sables, Martrons, Ermins,
&c. all which are brought to this City out of
Muscovy and
Poland in the winter-time over the ice and snow upon sledds; and made ready for sale against the time when the Merchants usually arrive. The Citizens (commonly) speak either
Swedish, German, Curlandish, or
Livonian; and have their Divine Service, (which is reform'd according to the
Augustan Confession,) always celebrated in some one of those languages. In the year 1581, this City was taken by
Stephen King of
Poland from the Emperor; and by his successor
Sigismund III. endow'd with many notable priviledges and immunities, and by him kept in possession till 1605, at what time,
Gustavus Adolphus Prince of
Sweden, brought an Army into
Livonia, and after six weeks close siege, had it surrender'd up to him: since which time it has always been under the
Swedish power. 2.
Dunamund, i. e. the mouth of the
Duna or
Dwina; so call'd from its situation, being plac'd upon the
Dwina, two miles from
Riga, at its very entrance into the
Livonian Bay. It is a Fort of great importance, commanding the whole River so, that without leave had from the Governour here, no Ship can pass into, or come out of, the Harbour of
Riga. And because the
Dwina at this place breaking forcibly into the Sea, and often, (in the spring-time especially), bringing huge flakes of ice along with it, very much alters the Channel, and thereby makes the passage into the River very dangerous, there are waiting here a sort of experienc'd Guides, call'd
Pilosen or Pilots, who for small wages conduct all strangers along the safe way, either up to
Riga, or back again into the
Baltic. 3.
Kakenhusen, Kockehaus, a strong Fort, where was anciently the residence of the Archbishop of
Riga. 4.
Ascherad; with many lesser Towns, Villages, and Forts.
Of the late Accessions in
Pomeren, and the
Empire.
HOw far the victorious Arms of
Gustavus Adolphus spred themselves in the Empire of
Germany; passing over the
Elb, the
Rhine, and the
Danow, in one year; and thereby becoming as well the terror, as wonder, of
Europe; is sufficiently known to all the world: and how, after his death, the
Swedish Conquests in those parts began to lessen, and several places of importance to be either forcibly regain'd by the
Emperor, or by the succeeding Kings of
Sweden freely yielded up to him, is no less manifest. What Cities, Towns, Forts, Titles, Territories,
&c. were by a Ratification of Peace concluded between the Imperial Ministers and the
Swedish Agents, (in lieu of those many and large Dominions which
Gustavus Adolphus had possess'd himself of), given up into the hands of the
Swedes, either absolutely and for
[Page 38]ever, or under some conditions to be by the
Swedes observ'd, we shall in this place only mention: remitting the more large description of them to
Pomeren, Germany, &c. whereunto they did formerly belong, and where an account of them may be expected.
By a Treaty of Peace between the Imperial Plenipotentiaries and
Swedish Ministers held at
Osnabrug and
Munster, A. D. 1649, it was concluded:
That, (
because Christina
Queen of Sweden
had required of the Emperor and the Electoral Princes, that satisfaction should be made her, for delivering up to them several places which had been by her Father in the late Wars brought under the Swedish
power; and likewise upon account, that she earnestly desired as much as in her lay, to restore and promote, the publick peace of the Empire; which the Emperor and their Electoral Highnesses on the other part were very ready by all means to advance and take care of) His Imperial Majesty with the consent of the Electoral Princes, and States of the Empire, should give up to the Queen of Sweden,
and to her Heirs and Successors, these following Dominions, to be held by them in full right of possession, as a perpetual and immediate Feud
of the Empire, viz.
1.
All Nether-Pomeren,
commonly call'd Nor-Pomern,
with the Isle of Rugen
in the Baltic
Sea, in the same manner and extent as the late Dukes of Pomeren
had possess'd and enjoy'd the same. And also in Further-Pomeren, Stetin, Gartz, Dam, Golnau,
the Isle Wollin,
with part of the River Oder
that encompasseth it, the Sea commonly call'd das Frische Haff,
with its three Bays, Peine, Swine,
and Divenow;
and so much land on each side, as shall be agreed on by the Commissioners, to be appointed for assigning the just limits for both Parties: Which said Kingdom of Pomeren
and principality of Rugen,
with all Dominions belonging, or places annex'd, to either of them; and also all Territories, Prefectures, Cities, Forts, Towns, Villages, Feuds, Rivers, Isles, &c.
with all Tributes, Revenues, Titles, Dignities, Preeminences, Immunities, and Praerogatives, Ecclesiastical or Civil; with all other Rights and Priviledges, should from that day (27
of July A. 1648)
for ever belong to, and be freely used, and inviolably possess'd by, the then Queen of Sweden,
her heirs and Successors, in as full and ample manner as the former Dukes of Pomeren
had had, enjoy'd, or govern'd, the same. Moreover, That the King of Sweden,
and the Duke of Brandenburg
should both of them use the Titles and Arms of Pomeren,
after the manner that the former Dukes of Pomeren
used them: The King of Sweden
for ever, and the Dukes of Brandenburgh
so long as any of the Issue Male of that Family remain'd; but, that upon defect of the masculine Line of the house of Brandenburg
none should lay claim to those Titles and Arms of Pomeren,
but, the Kings of Sweden
solely to retain them without any Competitor: and not only so, but then to have all Further Pomeren,
with the Bishoprick and Chapter of Camminen yielded up to them and their successors for ever.
2.
That the Emperor, with the consent of the Electors, should give up to the said Queen and her successors for ever, the City and Port of Wismar,
with the Fort Walfisch,
and the Prefectures of Poel (
the Towns Sehedorff, Wietendorff, Brandenhusen
and Wangern,
which belong to the Hospital of the Holy Ghost in Lubeck,
excepted)
and Newen Closter,
with all Rights and Priviledges belonging to them, in as full and ample manner, as the Dukes of Meklenburg
had before enjoy'd, and possess'd, them.
3.
That the Emperor with &c.
should give up to the Queen of Sweden
and her successors for ever, the Arch-Bishoprick of Breme,
and the Bishoprick of Verden,
with the Town and Prefecture of Wilshausen,
and also all the Right the Arch-Bishops of Breme
had to the Chapter and Dioeces of Hamburg, (
provided that, the house of Holsatia,
and the City and Chapter of Hamburg,
retain'd their respective liberties, possessions, &c.)
with all and singular Rights, Priviledges, &c.
Ecclesiastical or Civil to the said Arch-Bishoprick, Bishoprick and Prefecture in anywise belonging; yet to retain them for ever, as an immediate Fee of the Empire: using the ancient Arms which belong'd to them, but changing the Ecclefiastical Title, into a secular one, viz.
that of Arch-Bishop and Bishops, into Duke of Breme
and Verden:
And likewise the Kings of Sweden
by vertue of this Grant to have priviledge to be present at all Diets of the Empire, under the Titles of Dukes of Breme, Verden
and Pomeren;
Princes of Rugen,
and Lords of Wismar:
and to take place amongst the secular Princes, on the fifth seat in the said Diets: and in all Controversies arising concerning these Territories, to appeal to some of his Imperial Majestie's Courts of Judicature, there to have them determin'd.
4.
That the Queen of Sweden,
or her successors might have power to erect an Ʋniversity where they thought most convenient, in any part of these new Dominions.
Lastly, that her Majesty of Sweden,
and her successors should acknowledge all these Possessions as Feudiatary to the Emperor, and receive all Investitures from, and (as their Predecessors and other Vassals of the Empire formerly used to do, to) take an Oath of Fidelity and Allegiance to him, and his Imperial successors for ever.
By these additional Dominions in
Pomeren and
Germany (which at present, by reason of the wars between the two Northern Crowns, are very much disturb'd, and in great confusion) the Kings of
Sweden had (as was said) several new Titles conferr'd upon them; which, with others that are taken from their late conquests in
Livonia, Carelia, &c. make up the greatest part of the whole Catalogue: The present King styling himself thus;
The most Serene and most &c. Prince Charles XI.
King of the Swedes, Goths,
and Vandals,
and Hereditary Prince, Great Prince of Finland,
Duke of Schonen, Esthonia, Livonia, Carelia, Breme, Verde, Stetin, Pomeren, Cassubie,
and Wenden;
Prince of Rugen,
Lord of Ingria
and Wismar,
Count Palatine of the Rhine,
Duke of Bavaria, Juliers, Cleves, Bergen, &c.
Of the new Accessions in
Denmark within the
Baltic Sea, viz.
Scania, Hallandia, Blekingia, &c.
BY a Ratification of Peace concluded at
Roschild Feb. 26,
ann. 1658, between
Charles X. then King of
Sweden, and
Frederic III. King of
Denmark; the Provinces of
Scania, Hallandia, and the Castle of
Bahus: with all the Forts, Islands,
&c. and also all the Royalties, Jurisdictions, Dominions, Ecclesiastical or Civil; with the Revenues, Tributes, Payments, and all Rights whatsoever, whether by Land or Sea, were by the King of
Denmark (in consideration of having some places restored to him, as
Sialand, Laland, Falstria, &c. which the King of
Sweden had, during the late war, made himself Master of) wholly ceded and given up to the Crown of
Sweden, as a perpetual possession, to be incorporated with that Kingdom for ever, in as full and ample manner as the Kings of
Denmark and
Norway had formerly
[Page 39]possess'd and enjoy'd the same. And, by another Ratification of Peace held at
Copenhagen ann. 1660, between the said
Frideric III. of
Denmark, and this present King of
Sweden, these Provinces in the same manner as they had been granted by the former Treaty, were confirm'd to the
Swedish Crown.
We shall treat of all these Provinces (though by reason of the present Wars 'twixt the
Swedes and
Danes, the possession of them is much disturb'd, and some Cities and Forts in them, seized and Garrison'd by the
Danish Forces) as Accessional parts of this Kingdom: remitting what may be said concerning the ancient Titles the Kings of
Denmark had to them, or what else may concern them, to be spoken to in that Kingdom.
1.
Scania or
Schonen, a Province abounding (as was said in
Gothia), with Corn, Beasts, Birds and all Commodities of life; having on the East,
Blekingia; on the West, the
Sund, along the shore of which it runs for the space of twenty
German Miles; on the North,
Hallandia, and
Westro-Gothia; and on the South, part of the
Baltic or
Ost-Zee. It is in length eighteen, and (where broadest) in bredth, twelve,
German miels. In it are (besides many Towns and Villages) twelve Nomarchies or Principalities.
The chief City is, 1.
Lundia, Lundon or
Lune, formerly (from the year 1109 to 1559) the seat of an Arch-bishop, who was wont to be call'd to the general Diets of the Empire, and have his voice in them; It is said to have two and twenty Churches in it, and amongst the rest a magnificent Cathedral dedicated to St.
Laurence, no less remarkable for its high Steeple (which is a guide to Mariners) and its large vault under the Quire; then for the Dial, which shews the year, month, week, day, and hour of the day, all, at the same time: with all Feasts both moveable and fix'd, as also the motions of the Sun and Moon, and their progress through every degree of the
Zodiack. This Clock is so order'd by artificial Engines, that when ever it strikes, two Horse-men come forth and encounter each other, the one giving the other just so many blows as the hammer is to strike upon the Bell: at what time, a door opening, the Virgin Mary appears, sitting upon a Throne with Christ in her arms, and the
Magi doing him reverence, and two Trumpeters sounding all the while. This is the suppos'd work of
Caspar Bartholine the famous Mathematician. The Altar also of this Church is an excellent piece of work, of black and white Marble, adorn'd on the fore-part with the Sculptures of
Frederic II, and
Sophia his wife; and upon the Table-stone with the Images of our Saviour, and his twelve Apostles, at his last Supper. 2.
Malmoge or (as some call it)
Elbogen, at the very Southern point of
Schonen, just opposite to
Copenhagen in
Zeland, a well traded Port: the birth-place of the said
Caspar Bartholine, or
Malmogius Danus (as some pleas'd to name him) the great
Mathematician. 3.
Trelleberg, North of
Elbogen. 4.
Landscroon, on the Sea side, a place of great consequence and strength; built by
Ericus VIII, An. 1413. It has six Gates in all, three towards the Sea, and three towards the Continent, with a fair Marketplace, and a stately Stadt-house. Here is a large and convenient harbour for Ships, though of somewhat hazardous entrance. This City was fortify'd with a Castle by
Christian III. who remov'd the Fair at
Engelholm to this place, where it is kept at Mid-summer every year, with a great concourse of Merchants. 5.
Helsemburg a mean Town, but fortified with an impregnable Castle, just opposite to
Helsinore, and
Croneberg in
Seland; the other of the two Keys which openeth into the
Sund. In the middle of the Castle rises a high four square Tower, which shews it self to Mariners a great way off from the Castle; and serves them as a mark to steer their course by. In this Town are kept two Fairs every year, one in Mid-Lent, the other upon Palm-sunday, noted for the concourse of people, and great store of Merchandize vended here. 6.
Radneby, a Frontire Town, bordering on
Verendia. 7.
Christiania or
Christendorp built by
Christiern IV. An. 1604, out of the ruins of
Ahusia and
Vaea or
Wa, and fortifyed with eight Bulwarks, and so encompass'd with Fens and Marshes on one side, and with the Sea on the other, that it may seem almost impregnable. To these may be added 8.
Scanore, the most ancient of any.
2.
Hallandia.Hallandia or
Hallandt which lyes to the North East, upon part of
Westro Gothia; its limits begin at the Promontory, call'd by the Natives
Hallands-Ars (by Strangers
Coll), and thence runs along the
Codane Shore to
Elsburg, sixteen
German miles; and may be said to have on the West, the Sea which runs 'twixt it and
Jutland; on the North, part of
Smalandia; and on the South,
Scania or
Schonen. (Of this Province, see what was said in
Westro-Gothia.)
3.
Blescida, Blekingia or
Blecking,Blekingia. a Province somewhat mountanous, woody and barren, and not near so fertil as either of the two former: It is bounded on the East and South, with the
Baltic Sea; on the North, with
Verendia in
Smaland; and on the West, with
Schonen. The whole Province is divided into eight
Nomarchies, and contains these Cities and Towns of note, all lying upon the
Baltic: 1.
Ʋstadium, vulg. Ʋster. 2.
Stanthamera, or
Santhamer. 3.
Ahuiis. 4.
Selsburg. 5.
Elenholm. 6.
Rottenbuy. 7.
Christianopolis Christenberg, rais'd out of the ground by
Christiern IV. King of
Denmark, A. D. 1604, to defend his Kingdom on this side: but not long after by a warlike Stratagem surpris'd by the
Swedes An. 1611, and by them destroy'd and quite dispeopled: since which time, it has been rebuilt, and at present is very well replenished with Inhabitants and much frequented by Merchants. 10.
Bromsebro (famous, for the treaty of peace betwixt
Christina Queen of
Sweden, and
Christianus IV. King of
Denmark concluded at this Town
A. D. 1648): with many smaller Towns and Villages.
To these may be added, 4.
Jemptia.Jemptia or
Jempterland (so called from one
Kietellus Jampte a
Norwegian Nobleman, who escaping from the tyranny of
Harald Harfager, King of
Norway, came and set up a Government for himself in this Province and
Helsingia) which lyes Northward in
Suecia properly so call'd, having on the East, part of the Province of
Medelpadia; on the West, the
Dofrine Mountains; on the North,
Angermannia; and on the South part of
Helsingia and
Medelpadia. This Province did anciently belong to the Kings of
Norway, though in the reign of
Olaus Scotkonung it is said to have revolted from
Olaus Crassus then King of
Norway, and become Tributary to the Crowns of
Sweden. In the year 1613, by a peace concluded between the Northern Crown, it was by
Gustavus Adolphus yielded up to the King of
Denmark; but
A. 1642 repossess'd by the
Swedes. Pontanus in his Map of
Scandia, reckons up some places of note in it,
viz. Alsne, Ron, Aus, Lidh, Hamer-dal, Ʋndersaker, Oviken, &c. In the time of
Olaus Magnus this Province was under the jurisdiction of the Arch-Bishop of
Ʋpsal. Near a small Village in this Country, there are (says
Messenius) several large stones
[Page 40]with
Gothick Inscriptions, which are a prophesy of what for the future would befall the
Scandians.
5.
Herrndalia.Herrndalia, (call'd by
Pontanus, Herdalia, and by most Authors reckon'd as a part of
Helsingia,) contains the Territories of
Nomedal, Hellegeland, Frostena, Indera, Heroa; with some others: all which, belong to the Dioeceses of the Bishop of
Nidrosia; and are in the possession of the King of
Sweden.
Of the Baltic Sea, the Finnic, and Bothnic, Bays; and the Swedish Islands contain'd in them.
THe
Baltic Sea,
The Baltic Sea. (so called (says
Pontanus) from the
Saxon and
English word
(Belt), because it encompasseth the Kingdom of
Sweden, after the manner of a belt or girdle: or (as
Jornandes would have it) from
Baltia or
Basilia (i. e. Queen of Islands) the ancient Greek name of
Scandia or
Scandinavia: or (as
Adam Bremensis is of opinion) from the
Wiso-Goths who inhabited upon the Coasts of it, usually call'd
Balts, i. e. a stout and valiant people) is the largest of any Sea in
Europe, except the
Mediterranean; containing in it five and thirty Islands of considerable bigness, besides an infinite number of lesser note. The whole Bay (as some are of opinion) is call'd by
Mela, Sinus Codanus, (
q. Gothanus or
Gothicus, from
Gothia that borders upon it; or
Caudanus from
Cauda, because it comes from the main Ocean, after the manner of a tail of a beast:) by
Strabo, the
Venedic Bay, from the
Venedae a people of
Germany, who liv'd upon the Coast of it: and, by the
Danes and
Swedes the
Oost-Zee, because (as may be gather'd out of the History of
Eric Eigod King of
Denmark) the
Danes who went pilgrimage to the Holy Land, used to pass into
Russia, and the Eastern parts, by this Sea.
It beginneth at the narrow place call'd the
Sund: and interlacing the Countries of
Denmark, Sweden, Germany, and some part of
Poland, extendeth it self to
Livonia and
Lithvania. It, either by reason of the narrowness of the passage, by which the Ocean flows into it; or, because of its Northerly situation, whereby the Celestial influences have less power over it, never ebbs nor flows. From the several Countries and places that it washes, it has diverse names given it, and is distinguished into different Bays: the most remarkable are
1.
The Bothnic Bay.
The
Bothnic Bay, counted from the Island
Alandia, Northward; to the River
Kimi, which falls into it at the very furthest Cape. It has its name from
Both, signifying in the
Swedish Language, a Fenny Country, or a Land overflown with water.
2.
The Finnic Bay.
The
Finnic Bay, so call'd from the Principality of
Finland, which it waters. Some will have the
Sinus Venedicus of
Strabo, and the
Mare Amalchium of
Pliny, particularly to denote this Bay.
The
Swedish Islands in this Sea [concerning those that are under the
Danish Power, see
Denmark] (to begin with the most Southerly first) are
1.
Rugen, upon the Coasts of
Pomeren: given to the
Swedes, by the great Treaty of peace at
Munster and
Osnaburg. A. D. 1649. (Of which consult the Volume of
Germany).
2.
Bornholm, is situate more Northward then
Rugen, and lyes opposite to
Blekingia: it has one City in it, nam'd
Santwyk, and thirty-two small Villages. This Island was, by a Ratification of Peace held at
Copenhagen A. D. 1660, given up to the
Danes under certain conditions; of which mention is made in
Denmark.
3.
Huena or
Hueen, a very small Island in the
Oresundic Bay, famous for the City
Vraniburg, built by that excellent Mathematician
Tycho Brahe, where the Pole is elevated 55 deg. 54 min. This Isle was yielded up to the
Swedes by vertue of the foremention'd Peace concluded betwixt the two Northern Crowns,
A. D. 1660.
4.
Ʋtklippa,
5.
Ʋtlengia, both, lying over against
Blekingia.
6.
Oelandia, a fruitful and pleasant Island, in which are said to be the best breed of Horses that are in all the
Swedish Dominions. This Island
A. D. 1526, was taken by
Christiern King of
Denmark, and shortly after regain'd by
Gustavus I. King of
Sweden. A. D. 1613, it was put into the hands of
Gustavus Adolphus, and ever since retain'd by the
Swedes. (See more concerning it amongst the Provinces of
Gothia).
7.
Gotland, lying over against
Ostro-Gothia; in length seventy-two miles, and in breadth twenty. For a long time almost torn in pieces by the continual Arms of
Denmark and
Sweden; till 1648, by a Treaty of Peace betwixt
Christina Queen of
Swedeland and
Christiern IV. of
Denmark, it, with the City
Wisbuy (of which see amongst the
Gothic Provinces) was wholly yielded up into the hands of the
Swedes, to be held by them as a perpetual possession.
8.
Oselia, call'd by
Pliny, Oserica, opposite to
Liefland, and reckon'd by some as a District of
Esthonia; fifty-six miles in length, and twenty-eight in breadth. In it is the City
Arnsburg, fortifyed with a strong Castle.
9.
Daghoe, Dachden or
Dagheroort parted from
Oselia by a very narrow Bay.
10.
Alandia, lying in the middle Sea, betwixt it and
Ʋpland, reckon'd by some as a part of
Finland: in it is the Fort
Castleholm.
11.
Hogland, in the
Finnic Bay, with severalothers of less note and importance.
REGNI DANIAE Accuratissima delineato.[blazon or coat of arms]
Nobilissimo Amplissimo, Consultissimoque Viro D. GERARDO SCHAEP, I. V. D. Inclyti et Celeberrimi Ansterodamensium Emporii Consuli ac Senatori: et ad Serenissimos SVECIAE DANIA
(que)Reges Legato Dignissimo, Fidelissimo. D. D. D.
Ioannes Ianssonius
SAxo Grammaticus deduces the name of
Denmark (
Danmark or
Dania) from
Dan, [...] the son of
Humblus, a Prince of these parts many years before the coming of our Saviour. This opinion seems to have been an ancient tradition amongst the
Danes, and is confirmed by one of the old Chronicles of their Kings, published by
Wormius out of a manuscript copy of the
Scanian Laws, writ in
Runick characters; in the beginning of which we read,
Dan heet den forste cunung i Danmurk; der var fore Christus borth. Af hannom call is Danmurk, i. e.
The first King of Denmark
was called Dan;
who reigned before the birth of Christ. From him Denmark
had its name. But the stories they tell us of this King (like all their ancient histories) are so incoherent and incredible, that little trust can be given to this etymology. Others ridiculously derive the names of
Danes and
Danemark from
Dan the son of
Jacob. Some from the
Graecian Danai. Hadrianus Junius, a learned Historian, but not too happy in etymologies, would have the
Danes so called from the abundance of Fir-trees which grow in their Country; not considering that a Fir-tree has not the same name (
Dannen- or
Tannen-baum) in
Denmark as in
Germany; for the
Danes, as well as the
English, call it a
Firtre or
Firtrae. Pontanus, sleghting all the conjectures of other Authors, thinks he gives us a sufficient account of the original of the words
Dani and
Dania, when he tells us, That these people are the
Danciones or
Dansciones (as the learned Mr.
Cambden reads the word, instead of
Dausiones in the vulgar Copies) mentioned by
Ptolomey. But this determination is not at all satisfactory; for the question is not, how long, but whence the
Danes have had their name? For my own part, I dare not assent to any of the derivations yet given; but had rather guess, that the
Danes or
Dansche took their name from the great opinion they had of their own uprightness and integrity. For
Danneman is a word ordinarily used among them to this day to denote
an honest and good man. Thus the
Germans use the phrase,
ein Teutschhertziger mensch, to signifie
a true (Dutch) hearted fellow. And we may observe, that it was the constant custom of all the Northern Nations, to give themselves names from their piety as well as prowess. Thus the people who stiled themselves
Germans (War-men) in the field, were
Teutschen (or Godly) at home; and the
Cimbri (or Camp-fighters) in time of war, were
Gottisch (pious and religious) as soon as they laid down their weapons.
The ancient inhabitants of
Denmark were the
Cimbri and
Getae:Ancient Inhabitants. of both which we shall discourse at large in the description of
Jutland. Concerning the
Goths, something hath been said in the description of
Sweden, and more may be expected in the treatise of the
Cimbric Islands.
The Kingdom consists of, 1.
Jutland,Division and Situation. which is a Peninsula, washed on either side by the
German and
Baltic Seas, and bounded on the South with some parts of the nether
Saxony. 2.
Zeeland, Funen, with some more Islands of less note. To these may be added, 3.
Schonen and
Halland, which formerly did belong to this Kingdom, but in the year 1658, by a Ratification of Peace concluded at
Roschild between
Frederic III. King of
Denmark, and
Charles X. King of
Sweden, were wholly annex'd to the Crown of
Swedeland: and by another Ratification held at
Copenhagen 1660, confirm'd to it.
The Air is not so cold as in some places of
Germany, which ly much more to the South:
Air. nor so hot in Summer. This temperature proceeds chiefly from the adjoining Sea; which, as in
England, fans the inhabitants in Summer, and keeps them warm in Winter. Sometimes indeed the
Baltic Sea is frozen up (as it happ'ned in the year 1659, when the King of
Sweden march'd his army out of
Jutland into
Zeeland over the Ice) and then Charcoal and Turf, which is their only fuel, stand their friends.
The Land (naturally barren,
Soil. and abounding with little but Woods and Mountains) is by the late care and industry of the inhabitants made very fruitful.
Funen furnishes many foreign parts with Barley; and
Zeeland's greatest trade lyes in transporting of Corn and Hay.
Schonen is full of pleasant Meadows; whence some Authors think it had its name: for
Schone signifies
fair.
The rich pastures in
Denmark afford such multitudes of Kine,
Cattel. that (according to
Oldenburgh's relation) some years forty thousand, others an hundred thousand Cows and Oxen are hence transported into the
Low Countries; which must needs exceedingly enrich the Kingdom. They have also good breeds of Horses; but not in such numbers that they can afford to send any into other Nations.
Helmoldus tells us,
Fish. that in his time the great riches of the
Danes consisted in Fish. And
Saxo Grammaticus says, the Sea-coasts round
Zeeland, and other parts of the
Danish Kingdom, are so stock'd with shoals of Herrings and other Fish, that you may not only take them up with your hand without the help of any Net, Line, or Hook;
[Page 42]but that they hinder the passage of Ships and Boats. Certain it is (however strange and incredible
Saxo's story may appear) Herrings swim usually in infinite numbers; and no part of the Seas were anciently better stock'd with this kind of Fish then the coasts of
Denmark. But of late years the Herring-trade has fail'd strangely here; and those they do catch come far short of the
English and
Dutch Herrings in bulk and goodness. I am unwilling to think (with
Oldenburgh) this decay of the Fishing-trade in
Denmark, a judgment inflicted on the inhabitants; since our Fishermen will tell us, that some years the Herrings haunt the
English shore, sometimes the
Dutch or
French. However, tho the Herrings have forsaken them, they have still plenty of other sorts of Fish, as Plaise, Whiting, Cod,
&c. which they dry and send abroad.
Pontanus, to shew how well they are provided in this kind, tells us this memorable story:
‘It happened not many years before the writing of his History of
Denmark, that several Ambassadors from most of the greatest Princes in
Europe being met together at the Emperor of
Germany's Court, had some disputes about precedency. Some of them asserted the dignity and power of their Masters from the riches of their Country in Gold and Silver: others brag'd of the plenty of Corn, Fruits,
&c. when all had done, the
Danish Ambassador told them,
That should the richest Prince in Europe sell his Kingdom, and with the price buy nothing else but wooden Platters, the King his Master was able to fill them all with three sorts of fresh Fish. Whereupon they unanimously declared the King of
Denmark the happiest Prince in Christendom; and placed his Ambassador next the King of
France's, who sat on the Emperors right hand.’
Their Forrests are full of all sorts of Venison;
Forrests. insomuch that every hunting season (which commonly is in
August) there are above sixteen hundred Bucks brought in to the Kings Palaces; besides an infinite number of Hares, Conies, Boars,
&c.
However the ancient
Romans vilified and contemned all the Northern Nations,
Manners. esteeming them a sort of barbarous, dull, and unactive people; yet 'tis manifest from the relations given by
Lucius Florus, and other
Roman Historians (who never cared for speaking too well of their enemies) how stoutly the
Cimbrians encounter'd the
Roman Forces. And 'tis more then probable, that the
Galli Senones came out of this Country, who forced their Infantry to take sanctuary, or rather imprison themselves, in the
Capitol. Besides, most of the Northern Nations have at some time or other stoop'd to the
Danish Arms. For, if we consult the best of their Historians, we shall find, that
Ireland was eight several times conquer'd by the
Danes: The
English were ten times beaten by them; and for many years subject to the Kings of
Denmark: Scotland was for awhile tributary to this Crown; whence some fancy it had its name;
Scotland, in the
Danish tongue, signifying a Country that pays tribute to a foreign Potentate; hence we still retain the word
Scotfree, i. e. one exempt from all payments, dues, and duties:
Saxony paid homage to
Frotho, Siward, and other
Danish Kings: And the
Swedes oftner then once swore fealty to the
Danes; but revolted as soon as they found themselves able to rebel: The Kingdom of
Norway, annex'd to the Crown of
Denmark, in a sufficient testimony of the
Danish valour: Nay,
Saxo Grammaticus gives us many instances of the courage and conduct of several
Danish Viragines, whose exploits (if he say true) may be set in competition with the bravest performances of the
Hectors of other Nations.
Tacitus, speaking of the ancient
Germans, says,
They were a little too much addicted to Gluttony and Drunkenness; but withal so obliging to strangers, that they looked upon it as the height of barbarism and rudeness, to turn any such out of doors, or deny them lodging. Both these characters may still be applyed to the
Danes. For, since they grew so modish as to drink wine, they have exceedingly Ape'd their neighbours, the
Germans, in large draughts, and long meals. Again, they are wonderfully complaisant to all Foreigners; which perhaps may in some part be attributed to their immoderate desire of learning the languages of other countries. But, notwithstanding the civil entertainment usually met with in this Kingdom, it behoves every stranger to carry himself so circumspectly, that he seem neither by his words nor actions to sleight any thing he meets with. For, the
Danes are naturally proud and self-conceited; and quarrelsome upon the least apprehension of an affront. The old
Romans, commonly too peremptory in their censures, looked upon the
Cimbrians as a dull phlegmatick people. And we know, the general vogue still gives the
Italians, French, and
Spaniards a larger share of brains then they allow to any of the Norther Nations. However, this Kingdom has never wanted men remarkable for their wit and learning; who (as we shall have occasion to shew hereafter) have, in spight of the disadvantages of a cold Country, given evident proof, that men do not, like waters, take a tincture from the earth and soil out of which they spring.
'Twas
Julius Caesar's observation of the
Gauls,Sta
[...] and
[...] of
[...] that they look'd down with a scornful eye upon the low stature of the
Romans. And anciently the Northern people (except only the inhabitants of
Iseland and
Groneland, if known to the ancients, whom excessive colds had pinched into as small dimensions as the
Spaniards, and other Southern Nations, were heated into) were generally a sort of Gyants. The
Danes in a more peculiar manner, from their large size (say some) had the name of
Geats; corrupted afterwards into
Getae, Jutae, &c. At this day, the
a-la-mode luxury of the times has so prevailed in
Denmark, as to contract the pristine bulk of its inhabitants: who nevertheless seem still to be more vigorous and long-liv'd then most of their neighbours.
Aristotle long since could tell us, that the Northern people were most commonly yellow-hair'd. And
Lucan, speaking of the inhabitants on the banks of the
Elb, says,
‘Fundit ab extremo flavos Aquilone Suevos Albis.’
Indeed most of the
Danes (those especially that live beyond the
Baltic) are to this day either white or reddish hair'd. Hence it is, that in
England we usually say of a red hair'd man,
He is a Dane. And from the old grudge between this Nation and
Denmark, I fancy arose that ill conceit that most
English have of red hair'd people.
What the ordinary food is, may be easily known from the abundance of Corn, Fish,
Die
[...] and all manner of tame and wild Beasts (fit for food), wherewith, as we have told you, this Kingdom is stock'd. Among the many other sorts of Fowl, no Nation in
Europe has so many Woodcocks (call'd by
Martial Perdices Rusticas, by
Pliny Rusticulas, and accounted by the ancient
Romans a great rarity) as
Denmark.
[Page 43] It was long before Vines spread themselves so far Northward as to reach beyond the
Rhine. In
Julius Caesars days the
Belgic Nervii knew no such drink as wine; or at least, as he says, would not suffer any such lewd liquor to come amongst them. But as soon as the
Germans tasted the juice of the grape, they quickly commended the Glass to their neighbours the
Danes; who, in a short time, grew as intemperate as their teachers. The ancient drink of the Country was
Oel (Ale or Beer) made of Malt and Water; which is still in ordinary use among them. Though in
England we make a distinction between Ale and Beer; yet the
Danes know no such difference: what the
Germans call
Bier, is
Oel in
Denmark. This is that famous drink which animated the Western Nations against the
Romans; which
Tacitus calls
humorem ex hordeo aut frumento in quandam similitudinem vini corruptum, i. e. a liquor made of Corn which rivals Wine.
It is undoubtely true, what
Rodericus Toletanus many years ago observed, that the
High Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Flandrian, and
English Languages, are only so many distinct Dialects of one and the same Mother-tongue. Which may soon be discerned by any man that shall take the pains to compare the Lords Prayer, or any other piece of Scripture, in all these tongues. The Gibb'rish indeed spoken in
Lapland, Finland, and some other Countries to the North-East of
Sweden and
Denmark, is quite another thing, and as unintelligible to the civilized
Danes and
Swedes, as
Hebrew or
Arabic. But the ordinary
Danish (whatever some of their own Writers say to the contrary) is no more then corrupted
Dutch. I know,
Pontanus has taken the pains to collect a great many words out of the
Danish tongue (which he calls
vocabula Danis propria; tho all of them are not so) that are not to be found perhaps in any
German Dictionary. What then? No man shall with this argument perswade me, that the
Dutch and
Danish tongues are fundamentally distinct, and not two branches of the same stock. For, you shall find thousands of words in
Willeramus, Otfrid, and other ancient
German writers, which are at this day wholly out of use: and scarce a County in
England but has some peculiar words not understood in the rest, which nevertheless speak perfect
English. Neither will it avail any thing to say, the ancient
Danish tongue was brought hither out of
Asia, and call'd formerly
Asamal, i. e. the Language of the
Asians: for the
Edda Islandorum (which probably is the oldest piece which mentions the coming of the
Asians into these parts) says,
Odin (or
Woden, the great Captain of the
Asae) spread his language over
Saxony as well as
Denmark, Sweden, and
Norway. Adding further,
That within awhile the Asian
tongue was generally spoken in all the neighbouring Countries. The strongest argument to prove a difference between this tongue and the old
Teutonic, may be had from a diligent enquiry into the various phrases and proprieties of speech used in both of them. But when we consider how much the idioms of the
High and
Low Dutch differ; and how vastly the Syntax of our
English Language is alter'd from the
Danish and
German; we shall have reason to confess, before we pronounce these last two distinct primitive languages, that time is able strangely to alter the physiognomy of tongues as well as men. However, the dispute is like shortly to have an end; and the
Danes will in a little while, if they do not already, speak good
Dutch. For the
German tongue is now ordinarily spoken in
Copenhagen, and most of the chief trading Cities in
Denmark.
To let pass the stories of King
Dan,Government. whom some Historians make to reign in this Kingdom three hundred years before the birth of our Saviour; it is manifest (from the unquestionable testimonies of the best
Roman writers) that
Denmark was a Monarchy in the Consulship of
Catulus and
Marius, near an hundred years before Christ. Afterwards, we have a certain account of
Gothric, King of the
Danes, in the days of the Emperor
Charles the Great, from whom the present Kings of
Denmark are descended in a lineal succession, (except, what
Pontanus seems not to allow of, the line of the ancient Kings failed upon the death of King
Christopher III.
A. D. 1448). The power of the
Danish Nobility in Council is exceeding great: but not so large as to make the supreme Government Aristocratical. Some would argue, That the Nobles are above the King, since 'tis well known they denied to Crown
Frederic II. (in the year 1559) till he had sworn never to pretend to be able, by his own authority to put any Nobleman to death. From this, and some other like instances,
Bodinus endeavours to prove the Kings of
Denmark petty Princes rather then absolute Monarchs: not remembring that (even in
France it self, as well as all other Kingdoms of
Europe) it has always been thought requisite, for the satisfaction of the people, that every King at his Coronation should make some solemn Vow to maintain the ancient Laws and Priviledges of his Country and Subjects. And if, in the case mentioned, the Nobility of
Denmark required their King to lay a stricter obligation on himself then was usual; the performance was arbitrary, and not constrain'd. The Subjects might possibly, upon the Kings refusal to gratifie them, have rebell'd against their lawful Sovereign; but could not justly have compell'd him to a compliance.
Before the year 1660,
King. the Kingdom of
Denmark was not (as
Norway) Hereditary, but Elective: yet so, that the Senators usually chose the eldest son of their King, who thenceforward was styled the
Prince. The rest of the Kings sons had the Titles of
Dukes and
Heirs of Norway. The Election in ancient times was commonly had in this solemn manner: As many of the Nobles as were Senators, and had power to give their voices, agreed upon some convenient place in the fields, where seating themselves in a circle upon so many great stones, they gave their votes. This done, they placed their new elected Monarch in the middle, upon a stone higher then the rest, and saluted him King. In
Seland to this day there is such a company of stones which bear the name of
Kongstolen, or the Kings seat. And
Olaus Magnus tells us the same story of a great stone, call'd by the Vicenage
Morastaen, near
Ʋpsal in
Sweden. Near St.
Buriens in
Cornwall, in a place which the
Cornish-men call
Biscow-Woune, are to be seen nineteen stones set in a round circle, distant every one about twelve foot from the other; and in the very center one pitched far higher and greater then the rest. This
Cambden fancies to have been some Trophee erected by the
Romans under the later Emperors; or else, by
Athelstane the
Saxon, when he had subdued
Cornwal, and brought it under his dominion. But
Wormius, more probably, guesses, that in this place some
Danish or
Saxon King, was elected by his followers. And I conceive the same may be said of
Long Meg and her daughters, near little
Salkeld in
Cumberland. But, to return to
Denmark, of later years the
Danes in their elections have follow'd the customs of other Countries, till
Frederic III. in the year 1660; who was the first that ventur'd to
[Page 44]exercise the authority of an absolute Prince, and to shake off the dependance his Ancestors were wont to have upon the good will of their Subjects; procuring, with fair words and threats, a Law to be established, That for the future the Kingdom of
Denmark should immediately upon the Kings death descend upon his lawful Heir. Whereupon, the present King
Christian V. was the same night his Father dyed (without any previous election, or consent asked of the Nobility) proclaimed King. The Rites of Coronation are usually perform'd at
Copenhagen; where the King is anointed by the Bishop of
Roschild.
The Chronicles of the Kings of
Denmark which have hitherto been publish'd,
Catalogue of their Kings. are so imperfect and contradictory one to another, that 'tis utterly impossible to give an exact Catalogue of their Kings.
Saxo Grammaticus (who liv'd, saith
Stephanus, in the twelfth Century) has made a shift to collect a great many stories out of the scatter'd fragments of old
Runic Inscriptions and ancient Ballads, and to relate them in a better method and stile then could be well expected from the age he liv'd in. But, when we consider, that the best he met with, could not possibly be of more authority then such venerable scraps of Chronicles as are published by
Wormius at the end of his
Monumenta Danica, and see how these two run counter, it is hard to rest satisfied with the relation he gives us; and yet as difficult to provide our selves of a better. The first rational account given us of any of the
Danish Kings, which we may safely rely upon for truth, is in our
English Chronicles: which (as the Learned Sir
Henry Spelman in an Epistle to
Ol. Rosecrantz, formerly
Danish Ambassador in
England) treat more fully and clearly of the affairs of
Denmark, then any of the
Danish Historians. Wherefore (omitting the relations given of
Dan, Humblus, and the rest of their Heathen Kings, as either false or frivolous) we shall content our selves with a short Register of the Kings of
Denmark since the first planting of Christianity in that Kingdom. And
1.
Harald, being beaten out of his Kingdom by his brother
Reinferd's accomplices, fled to the Emperor
Ludowic for help: who assisted him in regaining of his Crown, upon condition he would forsake his Idolatry, and turn Christian. Whereupon he was baptized in the year 826, and immediately restored to his dominions. But soon after he renounced Christianity, and continued Heathen till reclaim'd by St.
Anschar: who, for his good offices in the Northern Kingdoms, was made Archbishop of
Hamburgh, in the year 835.
2.
Eric succeeded his brother
Harald (with whom he had been baptized in
Germany) in his Kingdom and cruelty against the the Christians. In his days (about the year 853) the
Danes first enter'd
France, under the command of their Captain
Rollo, (though others more probably relate him not to have been the first of those Northern Rovers that invaded
France, but to have succeeded to
Gotfrid, and to have entred
France about the year 876, and not to have been peaceably settled in
Normandy, till 889 or 890: see the History of the life of King
Aelfred), and seated themselves in that part which has ever since kept the name of
Normandy.
3.
Eric Barn, or the
Child, being the only male left alive of the Royal Family after the bloody wars between his predecessor and
Guthorm King of
Norway. He begun his reign happily, having married the daughter of King
Guthorm; but within awhile he grew more cruel then any of his Ancestors had been; slaying more Bishops, and destroying more Churches and Religious Houses (both in
Germany and
England) then all the rest of the
Danish Kings put together. In his
German wars he slew
Brunno Duke of
Saxony, and twelve Counts. He dyed about the year 902.
4.
Canutus the
Hairy (or
Lodneknudt) succeeded his father
Eric. In his days, saith King
Eric in his
Chronicon, every third man in
Denmark went by lot to seek his fortune: so that those who marched off, over-run all
Prussia, Semgal, Curland, and several other Countries; whence they never return'd, but there they and their posterity have continued to this day. He dyed a Heathen, about the year 912.
5. After the death of
Canutus, the
Danish Scepter was given to
Frotho his son, (so say the most credible Historians, tho
Lindenbruch reports, that his brother
Sueno reigned nine years). He was twenty years King of
England and
Denmark; in the former of which he was baptized, and dyed a good Christian.
6.
Gormo, Gormund, or
Guthrum (surnam'd
Hartesnute, and
Engelender, because born in
England) succeeded his father. He, together with his followers, was baptized at
Aalre in
Sommersetshire, and had our Learned and Pious King
Aelfred to his Godfather; who at the Font gave him the name of
Athelstane, and afterwards bestowed on him the Kingdom of the
East-Angles. From this
Gormo a Village near
Huntingdon, call'd at this day by the inhabitants corruptly
Godman-Chester, had its name
Gormon-Chester: As
Cambden proves from that old Verse,
‘Gormonis a Castri nomine nomen habet.’
I am very unwilling, I must confess, to confound this
Gormo with King
Aelfred's God-son, who (as far as we can learn from
English writers) never sat in the Throne of
Denmark; neither do the times agree. But the
Danish Historians will have it so; and 'tis in vain to seek for satisfaction in the midst of such confusion as we meet with in their writings.
7.
Harald, surnam'd
Blaatand, succeeded his father
Gormo. In his days the
Danes threw up that famous Trench between
Gottorp and
Sleswic, call'd
Dannewirck: of which we shall have occasion to speak more hereafter.
8.
Sueno (or
Svenotho, surnamed
Tuiskeg, i. e. fork'd-beard) succeeded
Harald. At first he was an Heathen, and a severe persecutor of the Christians: but afterwards he turned Christian himself, and founded three Bishopricks, at
Sleswic, Ripe, and
Arhuse. Some say, he dyed in the year 1012, and was buried at
York: others make him live till the year 1014, and bring him to his grave in
Denmark.
9.
Canutus the Great, son to
Sueno. He was at once King of
England, Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Slavonia, and
Sambland; some make him King, or Duke at least, of
Normandy. And this seems to be the meaning of that old Distich which (not reckoning either
Slavonia or
Sambland a Kingdom) brings him in thus speaking of himself,
‘Facta mihi Magni pepererunt inclyta nomen, Quinque sub imperio regna fuere meo.’
He was buried at
Winchester, in the year 1036, after he had been twenty-seven years King of
Denmark, twenty-four of
England, and seven of
Norway; leaving the Kingdom of
Denmark to his son
10.
Hardi-Cnute; who within four years obtain'd the Kingdom of
England, upon the death of
[Page 45]hs brother
Harald. Here he dyed, in the year 1041, and was buried by his father in the Cathedral at
Winchester.
11.
Magnus, King of
Norway, seized on the Kingdom of
Denmark upon the death of
Hardi-Cnute; pretending a title to it by contract. But he enjoy'd it not long. He dyed in the year 1048, and left the Kingdom to
12.
Sveno Esthret, son on one
Ʋlf an
English Earl. He dyed in the year 1074, and left behind him five sons, who all of them sate successively in their fathers Throne.
13.
Harald, Sveno's eldest son, held the Scepter only two years. He was a soft easie and timorous Prince; afraid to punish offenders, or to look an enemy in the face. So that the
English, making use of the opportunity, shook off the
Danish yoke without any considerable molestation.
14. St.
Canutus, King
Swain's second son, was barbarously murder'd in St.
Alban's Church in
Odensee (a City in the Isle of
Funen) whither he fled for sanctuary from the rage of his own Subjects, in the year 1088, (
Pontanus says 1077). The occasion was this: The pious King commanded that all his Subjects should pay Tythes, according to the custom of other Nations. This Edict was represented to the people (by his brother
Olaf, who long'd for the Crown) as an encroachment upon the priviledges and liberty of the Subject. Whereupon they quickly rose in open rebellion against their Soveraign; who, to appease the rage of the rabble, was martyr'd.
15.
Olaf, Swain's third son, upon the slaughter of his brother
Cnute (which he traiterously had procured), was by his followers unanimously declared King. But his brothers blood went not long unrevenged. For in this Kings days the famine was so great in
Denmark, that even the Kings Houshold wanted bread.
Olaf, at last sensible that this judgment was inflicted on the Kingdom for his sins, pray'd that God would turn the current of his vengeance from the people, upon his head that had offended. His prayers were heard; and the same night (in the year 1096) he dyed hungry and miserable, and the famine immediately abated.
16.
Eric Swain's fourth son, (surnam'd the
Good for his religious zeal and piety), who dyed in his pilgrimage towards
Jerusalem, and was buryed in the Isle of
Cyprus, in the year 1106. In his days
Lunden was made an Archbishops See; before which time all the
Danish Bishops were under the jurisdiction of the Archbishop of
Bremen.
17.
Nicolas, Sveno's youngest son. He was slain by the
Jutes, in revenge of
Cnute Duke of
Flanders (whom he had caused to be killed in the Church), in the year 1135.
18.
Eric Emund, a pious and good King, succeeded his Uncle
Nicolas: and was barbarously murder'd by one
Plag Sorte (a Nobleman of
Jutland) in his own Palace, in the year 1139.
19.
Eric Lamb succeeded his Uncle
Eric Emund. He laid down his scepter, and put himself into a Monastery at
Odensee in
Funen; where he dyed, in the year 1147.
20.
Swain Gratenhede, Eric Emund's son, got the Crown upon the death of his Kinsman
Eric Lamb. In this mans days there were three Kings of
Denmark at the same time: Some running after
Cnute, King
Nicolas's Grandchild; others following
Waldemar, son to
Cnute Duke of
Flanders. After some skirmishes, in which both
Swain and
Cnute were slain, the whole Kingdom was rul'd by
21.
Waldemar, surnam'd the Great. He was Lord of all the Countries on the North of the
Elb, and dyed in the year 1182, leaving the Kingdom to his son
22.
Cnute. He bravely maintain'd a war against the Emperor of
Germany, who would needs demand homage of the Kings of
Denmark. He dyed at
Ringstede in the year 1202.
23.
Waldemar II.
Cnute's brother. He new modell'd the
Danish; conquer'd
Norway, and set over it a Vice-Roy; vanquish'd and put to flight the Emperor
Otto, who thought to have made himself Master of
Holslein; and having reign'd victoriously thirty-nine years, dyed in the year 1241 (
Crantzius says 1242).
24.
Eric Plog-penning, Waldemar's son. He was taken at
Sleswic, and slain by his brother
25.
Abel, who reign'd wickedly two years, and was then murder'd by his rebellious Subjects, in the year 1252.
26.
Christopher I. brother to
Eric and
Abel. He lived in a continual war with his own people; to whom rebellion was now grown natural. Some of the
Danish Chronicles say, he was at last (in the year 1259) poyson'd by
Arnefast Bishop of
Arhuse; as the Emperor
Henry the Seventh was afterwards by
Bernardine the Monk with the Eucharist.
27.
Eric Glipping, King
Christopher's son, who being seated in his fathers Throne, gave himself up to all manner of lewdness and debauchery. His whole life is nothing else but a Catalogue of his oppressions, sacriledges, murders, and whoredoms. After a long uninterrupted course of wickedness, sleeping one night in a Barn at
Findetorp (a small Village in the Bishoprick of
Wiberg) he was murder'd with fifty-six (some say seventy) wounds, given him by seven Ruffians, hired to dispatch him by
Andrew Stigot (Marshal of
Danemark, whose wife he had ravish'd), and some others of the Nobility, in the year 1286.
28.
Eric Menved, Glipping's son. He was as godly a Prince as his father was impious. The murderers of his father had conspired his death; but were prevented by Providence, which protected him both from the lewd life and miserable death of his Ancestors. So that he dyed, as he had lived, peaceably, in the year 1319, and was buryed at
Ringstad; where his Epitaph is still to be seen, as follows:
‘Ego Ericus, quondam Daniae Rex, regnans ann. xxxij. Rectus Justiciarius pauperum & divitum ubi jus habuerunt. Oro omnes, quibus aliquid forefeci, ut mihi per suam gratiam indulgeant, & orent pro anima mea. Qui obii A. D.
1319. die beati Brixij Episcopi & Confessoris.’
29.
Christopher II.
Menved's brother. He trod in his fathers steps, and ended his days like him. He is reported to have been an unfortunate, sluggish, cruel, and perfidious Prince; an hater of the Nobility, and hated by the Commonalty. Had he had any sense of Religion, policy, or common honesty in him, he might have been an happy Prince: for never were the
Danes more unwilling to rebel and take up arms against their King then in his days, tho never more provok'd to it. Having linger'd out a reign of about thirteen years, he dyed at last forsaken of all, neglected and unpity'd, at
Nicoping in the Isle of
Falster, in the year 1333.
After this Kings death the
Danes seem'd to be weary of a supreme Soveraign, and resolv'd
[Page 46]not to set any more over them. They fancy'd, 'twas more eligible to have no King at all, then, such as they had the bad luck to meet with, a Sot or a Tyrant. But, after fifteen years confusion, they found it was better to have an akeing head then none at all. Whereupon, weary of their new Anarchy, they resolv'd to establish in the Throne of his father
30.
Waldemar III. King
Christopher's son; who recollected the scatter'd members of the Kingdom into one body, and dismounted most of the Usurpers, without any great bloodshed. He is represented as a Prince of great subtilty, avarice, and boldness. When Pope
Gregory XI. threatned to excommunicate him for his saucy behaviour, and sleighting of the Apostolic See; he is said to have return'd this answer:
Valdemarus Rex Daniae, &c.
Romano Pontifici salutem;
vitam habemus a Deo, regnum ab incolis, divitias a parentibus, fidem vero a tuis praedecessoribus, quam si nobis non faves, remittimus per praesentes.
Vale.
i. e.
Waldemar King of
Denmark, &c.
To the Bishop of
Rome sendeth greeting.
We hold our life from God, our Kingdom from our Subjects, our Riches from our Parents, and our Faith from thy Predecessors, which, if thou will not grant us any longer, we do by these presents resign.
Farewel.
He dyed in the year 1375, and was buried by his father at
Sora.
31.
Margaret, King
Waldemar's daughter, was upon the death of her father crown'd Queen of
Denmark; and manag'd the Scepter more discreetly then almost any of the Kings her Predecessors had done. A womans government seem'd at first a little uncouth: but her Subjects soon found a great deal of satisfaction in her prudent management of affairs at home, and wise conduct abroad, when in one Campagn she took
Albert King of
Sweden, Rodulph Archbishop of
Scharen, the Duke of
Mecklenburg, and the Earls of
Holstein and
Reppin, prisoners. Her father was wont to say of her,
That Nature intended her for a man, but spoil'd her in the making. She dyed a great friend to Religion, and Patroness of the Clergy, and was buryed at
Roschild in the year 1412, leaving the Kingdom to her Great-Nephew
32.
Eric, son of
Ʋratislaw VII. Duke of
Pomeren. Who, having spent a great many years in tyranny, rapine, perjury, oppression, and whoredom, was at last (in the year 1438) forced to quit his Throne, and fly from the fury of his incens'd Nobles into
Gothland: whither he carried with him a vast treasure, and one
Cecilia his Concubine, who, by her evil counsels and proud humours, brought him to these extremities.
33.
Christopher Duke of
Bavaria and Count Palatine of the
Rhine, another of King
Waldemar's Great-Grandchildren, succeeding
Eric in the Kingdoms of
Denmark, Norway, and
Sweden. His reign was short, but prosperous; especially against the Rebels in
Jutland and the
Hans Towns. He dyed (childless) at
Helsingburgh in the year 1447. The
Danish Chronicles are full of his commendations; but
Johannes Gothus, and other
Swedish Historians, will not by any means allow him so good a character.
34.
Christian I. son of
Theodoric Count of
Oldenburgh, was elected King of
Denmark upon the death of King
Christopher. He was a generous, pious, and valiant Prince; but wholly ignorant of all manner of learning. He reduc'd the
Swedes to their Allegiance, who in the beginning of his reign had revolted from the Crown of
Denmark; annex'd
Holstein to his Dominions; made himself Duke of
Dithmars and
Stormar; and, having ruled three and thirty years, dyed in peace, in the year 1481, and was buryed in a Chappel which he himself had built at
Roschild; leaving his Crown to his son
35.
John; who was a Prince endued with all the Royal qualities of his father. He was devout in exercises of Religion; temperate in diet; grave in apparel; and valiant in exploits of war, which (excepting only the overthrow he receiv'd from the
Dithmarsians in the year 1500) proved exceeding successful. He dyed of the plague at
Olburgh, in the year 1513.
35.
Christian II. King
John's son, who was the bloodiest, cruellest, and most dissolute Prince that
Denmark, or perhaps any other Kingdom, ever saw.
Lindenbruch gives this character of him,
That Nero, Phalaris,
and Sylla,
put in the scales against him, would signifie no more then half an ounce to a pound weight. Meursius reports, that he was born with one hand grasp'd, which when the Midwife opened, she found full of blood. This was look'd upon, by his father, as a certain prognostic of a bloody mind: of which his subjects had afterwards a lamentable experience. The only good he ever did his Country, was the founding a Fair, and establishing a more then ordinary trade, at
Copenhagen. At last, after he had by his wickedness thrown himself out of three Kingdoms, and for six and thirty years undergone the miseries of banishment or imprisonment, he dyed in the Castle of
Kallenborg in
Zeeland, in the year 1559.
36.
Frideric I. King
John's brother, succeeded his Nephew
Christian. As soon as he was Crown'd (in the year 1524) he begun to bring the
Augspur Confession into all the Churches of
Denmark. He ruled almost ten year in quietness, and dyed at
Sleswig in the year 1533.
37.
Christian III.
Frideric's son. He perfected the reformation which his father had begun in the Church. He lived (and dyed in the year 1559) a Prince of singular piety, wisdom, temperance, justice, and all Royal virtues: And left behind a fair pattern of a happy King and good Christian to his son
37.
Frederic II. Who, having exactly imitated his fathers example, after a happy reign of twenty-nine years, dyed in his Palace of
Anderscow in the year 1587. Immediately after his Coronation he was engag'd in a war against the rebels of
Dithmars, whom he quell'd with small trouble. Afterwards he waged war with
Eric XIV. King of
Sweden, which lasted seven years. The rest of his days were spent in peace and quietness.
39.
Christian IV. before his fathers burial was elected, and soon after crown'd, King of
Denmark. In his reign the Emperor of
Germany (
Ferdinand II.) overrun the greatest part of the
Cimbrian Chersonese; and had once well nigh brought the whole Kingdom of
Denmark under his subjection. But King
Christian, contracting as it were all the exspiring Spirits of his Realm, made the Imperialists at last give ground, and brought them to a Treaty upon honourable terms. He dyed in the
[Page 47]year 1648; and was succeeded by his son
40.
Frederic III. Who receiv'd as great a blow from the
Swedes as his father had done from the
Germans. Charles Gustave, the victorious King of
Sweden, had brought him to that extremity as to lay close siege to
Copenhagen, which City, and consequently the whole Kingdom of
Denmark, would doubtless have faln into the hands of the
Swedes, had not the Emperor of
Germany, the King of
Poland, and most of the Northern Princes (jealous of the growing power of the
Swedish King) concern'd themselves in the defence of it. He that desires a further account of the beginning, continuance, and end of these Northern wars, may have recourse to the accurate history of them written by
R. Manley, and printed in the year 1670. King
Frideric got his Nobles perswaded to consent, that the Kingdom of
Denmark, as well as that of
Norway, should be Hereditary: and was himself proclaim'd hereditary King, the twenty-third day of
October in the year 1660. He dyed of a Fever the twenty-fifth day of
February 16 69/70. and that night, (as is before said) the Nobility swore Allegiance to the new King
41.
Christian V. now reigning. A valiant and active Prince.
The Royal Family of
Denmark consists of the Children of the King,
[...] and his near Relations, together with the Princes of
Sunderburg, Norburg, Gluckburg, Arnsbeck, Gottorp, and
Ottingen or
Oytin; who are all descended from King
Christian the third, excepting the Houses of
Oytin and
Gottorp, who are the issue of his brother
Adolph Duke of
Sleswic.
The Nobles (who never pretend to, nor accept of the Titles of, Dukes, Earls, or Barons) are such as have for many ages had a single Coat of Arms belonging to their Family; which they never alter, nor quarter with any other. There are to this day some Families of the Nobility in
Denmark (as
Wren, and others) who are said to have been at the signing of a Treaty of Peace between
Charles the Great and King
Hemming, on the
Eidor. Upon the death of any Nobleman, all his goods (moveable and immoveable) are divided amongst his Children: so, as a son has two moieties and a daughter only one. By the Laws of
Denmark the King is prohibited to purchase any part of a Nobleman's Estate: nor can any of the Nobility buy any of the Crown Lands. A Catalogue of the names of the chief Noblemen at this day in
Denmark, is given us by the Author of
L'Estat des Royaumes de l'Europe, in the following Alphabetical order:
Though none of these are ever made Dukes,
Knights. Marquises, Earls, or Barons; yet 'tis usual for many of them to be dubb'd Knights, upon any considerable piece of service done their King or Country. The
Danes call their Knights
Ridders, i. e. Equites, Riders: and all their offspring have the title of
Riddersmens men.
The most noble Order of Knighthood in
Denmark,Knights of the Elephant. is that
Of the Elephant. Of which we cannot have a better account then is given us by the Learned
Elias Ashmole Esquire,
Windsor Herald at
Arms, in his famous work of
The Institution, Laws, and Ceremonies of the most Noble Order of the Garter, p. 120.
‘Observing, saith he, some difference among writers touching the
Institution, Collar, and
Ensign of this
Order, I was in doubt what to say, till at length I haply met with better satisfaction from a Letter wrote in the year 1537, by
Avo Bilde Bishop of
Arhusen, sometime Chancellor to
John King of
Denmark and
Norway, unto
John Fris Chancellor to King
Christian the third; a copy whereof was communicated to me by
Monsieur Cristoftle Lindenow Envoy from
Christian the fifth, now King of
Denmark, to his sacred Majesty, the present Soveraign of the most Noble Order of the
Garter. This Letter informs him of the Institution, and some other particulars relating to the
Order, to wit, That King
Christian the first being at
Rome (whither he had travel'd upon a religious account) Pope
Sixtus the fourth, among other honours, invested him with this Order, in memory of the Passion of our Lord and Saviour; and withall ordain'd, that the dignity of Chief and Supreme should be continued, as a successive right, to the succeeding Kings of
Denmark. This King founded the magnificent Chappel of the three Kings in the Cathedral Church at
Roschild (four leagues from
Copenhagen) where the Knights were obliged to assemble, upon the death of any of their fraternity. He also admitted thereinto divers Kings, Princes, and Noblemen. The chief Ensign of this Order was the figure of an
Elephant, on whose side (within a rundle) was represented a Crown of Thorns, with three Nails all bloody; in honour and memory of the Passion of our blessed Saviour. The Knights were obliged to the performance of acts of Piety, Alms-deeds, and certain Ceremonies; especially upon those days on which they wore the Ensigns of the Order: But King
John set so high a value upon it, that he wore them on every solemn Festival. He also advanc'd the honour of this Order to so great esteem, that it became accepted by both our King
Henry the eighth, and
James the fifth of
Scotland, his sisters son; with whom the Ensigns thereof remain'd as a pledg and assurance of constant and perpetual friendship; with these he likewise invested divers Ambassadors, Senators, and Noble
Danes. There is one
Ivarus Nicholai Hertholm, a learned
Dane (as I am inform'd) who hath written a particular Treatise of the Elephantine Order, but not yet printed. The scope whereof is to shew, that the before mentioned Epistle of the Bishop of
Arhusen, does not sufficiently make it appear, that it received its first Institution when
Christian the first had those many honours confer'd on him by Pope
Sixtus the fourth. And that
[Page 48]the Badge was an Ensign meerly Military; anciently given as a memorial and incitement to the
Danish Princes, who took upon them the defence of Christianity against the
Moors and
Africans. 'Tis greatly presumed, that this Book (which we hope may shortly be published) will furnish the world with many choice things relating to the antiquity and honour of the Institution, Ensigns, and Ceremonies of the Royal Order. Heretofore the Knights wore a Collar of Gold, compos'd of
Elephants and
Crosses, fashioned something like Crosses ancrees (
Mennenius calls them Spurs) at which hung the picture of the Virgin
Mary to the middle, holding Christ in her arms, and surrounded with a
Glory of Sun-beams. But they have long since laid this Collar aside, and now wear only a blew Ribbon, at which hangs an Elephant enamel'd white, adorn'd with five large Diamonds set in the middle. Those Elephants worn by the Knights in the days of
Christian the fourth, had in the same place within a circle the Letter C, and in the heart thereof the figure of 4, made to signifie
Christianus quartus. This honour hath most commonly been conferr'd by the Kings of
Denmark, on the day of their Coronation, both upon the Nobles and Senators of the Kingdom. It seems
Frederic the third brought into use (in imitation of the most Noble Order of the Garter) an embroider'd
Glory of Silver Purl, wrought upon the left side of their Cloak or Vest, on which was embroider'd two Crowns within a Rundle, bearing this Motto,
Deus Providebit; for such an one did Count
Guldenlow (Ambassador hither from that King) wear at his residing here in
England in the year 1669. But we are to note, that the Motto hath changed with the King, for that of the present King is
Pietate & Justitia; and this the Knights of his election now wear in the middle of the circle. Nevertheless, all the Knights created by his father, are obliged still to continue the former Motto.’
In remembrance of the
Danebroge (or holy
Danish Cross) which was thought miraculously to have preserved King
Waldemar the Second's Army from the fury of the
Lieflanders (as we shall have occasion hereafter to shew when we come to speak of the Arms of this Kingdom) that King instituted the Order of
Knights of the holy Cross.Knights of Danebroge. Which continued till the relique it self was lost in
Ditmarss: but then was, for many years, quite lay'd aside. Of late the present King
Christian the fifth revived this antiquated Order in the year 1672. Ordaining, That Knights of this Order, of which he himself is one, should wear a white enamell'd Cross edged round with red, hung in a string of the same colours reaching from the right shoulder to the left side.
Thomas Bartholinus P. has given us a large account of the first Original, Progress, Restauration,
&c. of this Order. To whom we refer the Reader.
Out of these Knights,
Senators. and the rest of the Nobility, were chosen formerly the Senators; who seldom exceeded the number of eight, but are now a far greater number. As long as they continued in their places, they were maintain'd (as our Parliament may be, if they please, during their sitting) by the Country. The King allow'd them Castles to live in. They pay'd no Taxes: but were obliged to keep a certain number of Light-horse ready for service upon all occasions. They were bound to attend the King, at his call, upon their own charges: provided he stir'd not out of his own dominions. But if he sent them on an Ambassy into other Princes Courts, they had an allowance out of the Treasury.
Besides these, there are others that live as Pensioners;
Pensioners. to whom the King, in requital of some good services done him, assigns certain Livings (for life or a set number of years,
forlaeninger) out of which they are to provide so many Light-horse as the King thinks fit, and pay in yearly such a sum of money into the Treasury. But these are neither so numerous nor large as before the alteration of Government in the year 1660.
Again, out of the Nobility are chosen all the Court-Officers. Of which the chiefest are, 1.
Court-Officers. The Chancellor. 2. The Admiral; who takes care of the building and repairing of all sorts of Ships belonging to the Crown. He has under him a Vice-Admiral, who acts by his Commission. 3. The Marshal, who provides necessaries for all manner of dispatches in the times of war and peace. 4. The Treasurer, who receives in, and gives acquittances for all summs paid into the Kings Exchequer: he has under him two Secretaries of the Nobility, and a great number of inferior Scribes. 5. The Master of the Horse.
There are only seven Bishopricks in
Denmark;Bishopricks. which are all (as in
England) in the Kings gift. 1.
Copenhagen; where the Bishop has Archiepiscopal rights, tho without the title. 2.
Ripen and 3.
Arhusen; both in the Northern
Jutland. 4.
Odensee in
Funen. 5.
Wiburg. 6.
Arhusen. 7.
Sleswic, in the Southern
Jutland.
The Cities are governed by their distinct Corporations.
Cit
[...]. And the Citizens enjoy peculiar Priviledges and Charters as in other parts of
Europe.
The Rustics are either Freeholders
[Frybunder],Rustics. such as have hereditary Estates, paying only some small Quit-rent to their Landlords. Or
Wornede, Villains, absolutely in the power of their Lords.
Whilst the Kingdom of
Denmark lay confused and broken into several incoherent parts,
La
[...]. the Provinces had not all the same Laws; but were governed by peculiar Statutes, established by their petty, but independent, Princes. Whence in
Danish Authors we meet often with mention made of the
Leges Scanicae, Leges Sialandicae, &c. But afterwards, when all these scatter'd members came to be re-united under the same head; they were all subject to the same Government and Laws. The Laws now in use were drawn into one body (which they call the
Jydske Lowbog, or the
Book of the Laws of Jutland) and established by King
Waldemar the first, and revised and confirm'd by
Waldemar the second. To the observation of these, as the only Municipal Laws of the Land, the Kings of
Denmark have formerly bin sworn at their Coronation. Howbeit, some of them have been since changed. As for instance, by the ancient Laws of
Denmark (as well as in
England, as may appear by the frequent mention of
manbot and
wergild in our
English-Saxon Laws) murder was not punished with death, but a pecuniary mulct. This custom was observed till the days of
Christian the third; who, looking upon it as a constitution inconsistent with the Law of God and dictates of humane reason, abrogated it; ordering, that from thenceforward wilful murder should be judged a capital crime. The ancient
Danes were so careful and zealous to transmit their Estates to their right heirs, that (tho they could be so merciful as to suffer murderers to live, yet) they punished Adultery with death. Which Law is still in force in
Saxony (as may be seen in any
Sachsen-Spiegel) and many other parts of
Germany.
The fashion of deciding all manner of causes in our
English Courts by a Jury of twelve men,
Jud
[...] ture. may seem to have bin borrowed from the
Danes; who
[Page 49]used formerly (as they do still in some parts of
Jutland) to assemble every Parish by themselves, once a year in the fields to determine all differences by twelve select men. From whom, if the disagreeing parties were not reconciled, an appeal lay to the Judge of the Province; and thence to the supreme Court of Justice; as is shown before.
The Heathen
Danes had another way of determining Controversies by Duels; in which the Challenger was to demonstrate the justice of his cause by his success. This custom lasted till the first planting of Christianity by
Poppo: who, to confirm the truth of his Doctrine, took up with his bare hands glowing-hot bars of Iron, without the least harm, to the admiration of all beholders. This miracle wrought not only a change in the Religion, but Laws also of the Kingdom. For hereupon King
Sueno, or
Suenotto, ordered, That thence forward all persons accused of any hainous crime, should clear themselves by carrying in their hands a glowing plough-share, or some other piece of hot iron.
This kind of purging is called by some of the
Danish Writers
Jerntegn, i. e. Iron-token: by others
Ordale. Whence this last word should fetch its original is not agreed on by our modern Etymologists.
Verstegan brings it from
Or, an old word for
Law, and
deal, a
part or
portion. And indeed the
German word
Ʋhrteil seems to favour this derivation. Our fore-fathers, the
Saxons, had borrowed from the
Danes several kinds of
Ordale. As, by carrying a bar of hot iron up to the high Altar bare hand; by treading barefoot and blindfold over a certain number of glowing barrs laid on the ground at unequal distances; by thrusting the naked arm into a pot of boiling water; and lastly, as they use to try Witches, by throwing the accused party into a River or deep Vessel of cold water. He that desires to see an exact account of the ceremonies used in the second and third kinds of
Ordale may read them at large in the Ecclesiastical Laws of King
Athelstane, published by the Learned Sr.
Henry Spelman, Concil. Britann. tom. 1.
pag. 404. And in the same Kings Laws, as they are published by Mr.
Lambard, you have the other two sorts described. The first that throughly abolished all kinds of
Ordale in
Denmark was King
Waldemar the Second, about the year 1240, at the request of Pope
Innocent the Third: who thought it an intolerable and hainous impiety thus to tempt God.
Barclay, in his
Icon Animorum, wonders that such innumerable swarms of men should sally out of these parts as were able to overrun the greatest part of
Europe; whereas at this day there is such a scarcity of Inhabitants that the King of
Denmark is hardly able to wage war with any of his Neighbours without a supply of Souldiers out of foreign Countries. But this is no such great miracle, when we consider how the vastest Empires in the World (
Assyria, Egypt, Judaea and
Rome it self, vainly flattered with the name of
Ʋrbs Aeterna) have had their periods. The greatest strength of the King of
Denmark (as of all Princes of Isles) consists chiefly in the number of their Mariners and good Ships. In all Skirmishes and Wars between the
Dane and
Swede, it is obvious to observe how much the latter have usually prevail'd at Land, and the former at Sea.
Christian the second, upon a short warning, fitted out a hundred good men of war to aid
Henry the Second King of
France against the
English; and this present King has a much larger Fleet always ready for action. The
Danish King can afford to build yearly twelve men of war, without impoverishing his Exchequer. And in this Naval force the power of
Denmark chiefly consists. Their Vessels were formerly bulky, large and unwieldy; unfit either for flying or pursuit. But now they build more advantageously; and thereby they are enabled to furnish themselves with many more Ships in proportion then otherwise they could, and those easier man'd and fitter for service.
The yearly revenue of the King of
Denmark ariseing from the rents of Crown-Lands,
Revenues. Customlands, Custom-money, Tithes, and other contingences, is not easily stated. Some measure may be taken from the income brought in by the Customers of
Elsineur, raised from those infinite sholes of Merchant Ships which daily pass the
Sundt. Every Ship that passes that way, pays for each mast a Rose-noble, or four Rixdollars. And it has been observed, that usually 200 Ships, often 400, and sometimes 600, pass by in one day. But reckoning only 200 to pass daily, and each of these to pay two Rosenobles or eight Rixdollars for two masts, for each day in the year, there will be gathered about 400 pound of our money. Nor is the revenue arising from the exportation of Cattle much inferiour; when for every beast the Customers take a Rixdollar.
Coins in use are:
Ducates of Gold,
Money. of the value of two Rixdollars; or
Crowns of Gold, of the value of either eighteen or nineteen
Marks. Or the double of these. The lesser
Danish coins are 1.
Hvide, whereof three make one of their Shillings. 2.
Soslinger, whereof two make one Shilling. 3.
Shilling, whereof sixteen make a
Mark. 4. A
Mark, which is the fourth part of a
Slet-dollar. 5. A
Rixdollar, which is six
Mark or ninety-six Shillings.
Besides the
Bards or
Druids,Learning. we have an account of many other kinds of Poets and Learned men among the antient
Danes. Wormius tells us the several sorts of Verses composed by the
Scialdri and
Runae are innumerable; but may be at least the best of them, reduced to 136 heads. It was formerly the custom of all the Northern Nations to have the Genealogies and famous deeds of their Ancestours put into Doggerell; that, being daily tuned over by parents to their children, they might be the easilier remembred and handed down to posterity. These ballads they called
Viiser, i. e.
Wise-sayings. (And how much the
Wisdom of the Antients consisted in Poetical compositions and fables, is sufficiently shown by the Incomparable Sr.
Francis Bacon.) The Composers of these Songs were reckoned among the Grandees of the Nation, and always attended the Prince as his wisest Counsellours. Nay, so great was the esteem the people had of these men; that
Hiarnus is said to have had the Crown of
Denmark presented him as a reward for an Epitaph made upon the deceased King
Frotho: a story hardly to be parallel'd in any of the Annals of other nations, except we believe (what St.
Augustine cites
Varro for) that there was once a Nation so enamour'd of musick as to make a Trumpeter their King. In
Seland, betwixt
Roschilt and
Slangendorp, there is a small hill, called to this day
Frode-Hoy, where they say King
Frotho was buried. The neigbourhood report, That the Kings Grave-stone, upon which this famous Epitaph was writ, was not many years since broken and carried to mend a bridg at the bottom of the hill. The Copy of these precious Verses (if we may judge of the worth of them by the price) is not to be met with in the Original language.
Saxo Grammaticus, who calls them
barbarum metrum, saw them; and has given
[Page 50] us this
Latine translation of them:
Frothonem Dani quem longum vivere vellent,
Per sua defunctum rura tulere diu.
Principis hoc summi tumulatum cespite corpus,
Aethere sub liquido nuda recondit humus.
I cannot tell whether this instance will prove (if we do grant it to be true) that Learning flourished much in
Denmark about these times. However, from the many ancient
Runic Epitaphes and Inscriptions published by
Wormius, 'tis manifest that the
Danes were of old
Lovers (at least)
of learning. Afterwards as soon as Learning begun to spread its dominions beyond the narrow confines of
Rome or
Athens, Denmark had its share of Scholars.
'Twere an endless task to give a complete Register of all the
Danish Authors:
Learned Men. I shall therefore content my self with a short Catalogue of some few, who have always been esteemed men of great learning and sound judgment, and most of them excellent at some piece of knowledg.
1.
Saxo Grammaticus, who lived in the twelfth Century, has writ the History of
Denmark in so elegant a stile; that
Erasmus was amazed to find so much Rhetoric and clean
Latine in
Denmark; especially in so barbarous an age as
Saxo lived in.
2.
Erasmus Laetus, Professour of Divinity in the University of
Copenhagen, has published many learned works; of which
Gesner has given a large Catalogue.
3.
Nicolaus Hemmingius, famous for his acute Commentaries on several parts of the Scripture. He died at
Roschilt, A. D. 1600.
4. All
Europe, as well as
Denmark, do to this day gratefully acknowledge the vast improvements which
Astronomy (the noblest and most ancient of all the sciences) has received from the admirable observations of
Tycho Brahe, a
Danish Nobleman; to whom King
Frideric the Second gave the Island
Ween, as a place remote from all trouble, and fit for a Students retirement. Here
Tycho, about the year 1575, built his
Ʋraniburg; (an Observatory built like a Castle, and fenced round with regular fortifications) which he adorned with a collection of the most exact Mathematical Instruments that could possibly be made or procured. Among his many Admirers, who daily flock'd from all parts of the Learned world to pay him their respects, our Learned King
James (returning from the celebration of his marriage with Queen
Ann) lodged three nights together in the Island with him; and afterwards honour'd him with a letter from his own hands, dated at Holy-rood House,
August 1, 1593. The learned
Resenius (at the end of his
Inscriptiones Hafnienses) gives us a large account of the life and death of this famous man, and an exact description of the
Ʋraniburg.
5.
Christianus Severini Longomontanus, was bred up in the Science of Astronomy by
Tycho, whom he assisted many years in his Observations. Afterwards, he was made publick Professour of Astronomy at
Copenhagen: where he writ his
Astronomia Danica, (printed at
Amsterdam by
Janssonius) in which he explains the various motions of the Planets according to his Master
Tycho's Hypothesis and some observations by himself in the Isle of
Ween. Had he given over writing as soon as he had finished this work, or medled with no other parts of
Mathematics but Astronomy; he might have ended his days, as he spent his youth, in good repute and credit. But, after he had bestowed above thirty years of his dotage in labouring to demonstrate the square of a circle, (which he fancied he had at last conquered in that peice of his entituled
De vera Circuli mensura 4
o.
Amstelodami A. D. 1644.) he became so ridiculous, as to have the work of so many years confuted in one page by our learned Dr.
Pell; at that time publick Professor of Mathematicks in
Amsterdam.
6.
Arrild Witfield, Lord of
Odersberch, and sometime Chancellour of
Denmark, was the first that reduced
Saxo's History to a Chronological method, annexing the year to every memorable passage. Besides, he composed and published an accurate Chronicle of the Kings of
Denmark and
Norway in the
Danish tongue: of which work
Pontanus, who was once his Clerk, gives a very high Character.
7.
Stephanus Stephanius, Professour of History in the University at
Sor, has illustrated
Saxo Grammaticus with most accurate and learned Notes. Besides, he writ an exact account of the affairs of
Denmark during the reign of
Christian the Third, from the year 1550 to 1559; which, since his death, was printed at
Sor A. D. 1650.
8.
Olaus Wormius, late
Regius Professor of Physick in
Copengagen (besides the rare collection he made of natural Curiosities; of which his
Musaeum Wormianum is nothing else but a Catalogue) has with great diligence and success made discovery of that venerable and mysterious part of learning which before his time, had lain unregarded for many ages in every corner of
Denmark. His Literatura Runica, Monumenta Danica, Fasti Danici, and other writings of this kind, are enough to inform any man how much his own Countrey-men, and all that are well-wishers to learning, are indebted to his indefatigable pains and industry.
9.
Petrus Johannes Resenius, Professor of Moral Philosophy and Counsellour to the present King of
Denmark, has for several years last past applyed himself to an Enquiry after the antiquities of his Country. In order to which he has made a much larger Collection of
Runic Monuments then ever
Wormius met with; which (as I am informed) he designs ere long to publish in a work of some Volumes. The
Edda Islandorum (and other antient pieces, already printed) may give us a tast of his abilities in these severer Studies, and teach us what to expect from so curious an Antiquary.
To these many more (as
Petrus Severinus, the two
Bartholins, Borrichius, and several others which are to found in
Erasmus Vindingii his
Academia Hafniensis) might be added: but those that have been reckoned up, are sufficient to shew us how much
Denmark has contributed to the advancement of Learning.
What kind of Idols and false Gods were worshipped by the antient
Danes,Re
[...]. and in what manner shall be shewn at large in the Description of
Island. Christianity begun to be first planted in these Northern Countries by King
Eric, who had been baptized in
Germany at the request of the Emperor
Ludovicus; but it took no deep root at first. For
Eric, being setled in his Throne, relapsed into his former paganism, and turned a bitter persecutor of St.
Anschar (who was sent to promote the Christian Religion in
Denmark, Norway, &c. by the said Emperor and Pope
Gregory the Fourth,
A. D. 835) and his followers. After this (tho some of them were initiated in Christianity, yet) the Christians had no considerable footing in this Kingdom, before the reign of King
Sueno Tweskeg: who at his Baptism had the Emperor
Otho II, to his God-father, and from him was afterwards called
Suenotho. He (by the assistance of
Poppo, who, as we have said, confirm'd
[Page 51]his doctrine by a miracle which introduced the use of fire-
Ordale) established the Christian reliligion upon a sure foundation, and appointed several Bishops in the Kingdom.
Frideric Duke of
Holstein, being elected King of
Denmark, brought with him the
Augsburg Confession; which has ever since been professed in that Kingdom.
Christian the third gave liberty to the
English, Scots, and
Hollanders to build Churches and have the free exercise of their religion; though no Calvinists are to be found except some few at the present Queens Chappel. Those few Papists that live in this Kingdom, are forbid the publick exercise of Divine service.
Plutarch reports of the antient
Cimbrians, [...]. that they had Shields and Helmets painted with the shapes of several kinds of wild beasts. Others say they used to set a brazen Bull on the top of their Standard as a token of strength and valour. At this day the King of
Denmark's Arms are a complication of fourteen several Coats thus ordered:
In a field
Gules he bears a Cross
Argent (the Arms of the house of
Oldenburg) which quarters the upper part of the Coat into four Cantons. The first of these gives (the Arms of
Denmark)
Or, six half hearts
Gules, three Lions passant Guardant
Azure, with Crowns of the
First. This Coat is parted with (the Arms of
Norway)
Gules, a Lion Crowned
Or, holding in his paws an Hatchet
Argent, with an haft of the
Second, The second Canton carries
Gules, a Leopard in Chef
Or, the field sown with nine hearts of the
Second; which are the Arms of
Gothland. These are parted with
Gules, a Dragon Crown'd
Or, the antient Coat of the
Vandals or
Slavonians; According to the distich;
Hinc rigidos Slavus effert pernicibus alis,
Et loca propugnat sanguinolenta, DRACO.
The third Canton gives
Azure, three Crowns
Or: to denote the union of the three Kingdoms of
Denmark, Norway and
Sweden. This Coat is parted with
Gules, a paschal Lamb
Argent, holding a Cross
Or, at which hangs a Streamer of the
Second, charged with a small cross of the
First. The first original of this Coat is said to have been this: in the year 1218, when King
Waldemar the second engaged the
Lieflanders in sharp and bloody war, the
Danish Army having lost their Standard, began to be so discouraged, that they gave ground, and had almost yielded the victory to their Pagan Enemies: when on a sudden a new Standard fell from heaven, displaying a white Cross in a bloody flag. At the sight of this the
Danes immediately rallied their scattered forces with so much courage and success, as made them in a short time masters of the field. In remembrance of this so miraculous a deliverance, the Kings of
Denmark kept the sacred flag with as much veneration as ever the
Romans did their
Palladium; thinking their future success would very much depend upon the safety of so holy a Relique. This is the account the
Danish Historians give us of this part of their Kings Arms. But 'tis more probable that the Pope gave King
Waldemar this banner when he went against
Liefland; to mind him that the business he now undertook was the Conversion of those poor ignorant Heathens he should there meet with. Thus the Emperor
Constantine the Great, made a Cross be carried before his Army with this Motto,
In hoc signo vinces; and the Knights of the
Teutonic Order bore a white Cross, when they were sent to convert the
Prussians. But, to return: the fourth Canton bears
Or, two Lions passant
Azure; which are the Arms of
Sleswic. These are parted with
Gules, an headless Fish stuck on a stake and crown'd
Argent: which is the coat of
Island. In the Center of these four Cantons, and the middle of the great Cross, hangs a Scutcheon bearing
Azure, a Horseman in compleat armour
Argent, holding a Sword in his right hand of the
same, with the hilt
Or, his Horse covered with a Cloth of the
second: which are the Arms of
Dithmarse. The lower part of the Arms contains four more Coats. Whereof, the first is
Gules, three Pinks (some call them nails of our Saviour's passion) and three leaves of Nettles, which are intermixed and meet in Angles at the heart of the Coat; which is charged with a small Scutcheon
Argent, for
Holstein. The second (which is the Coat of
Stormaria) is
Azure, a Swan
Argent, with a Coronet round her neck
Or. The third (belonging to the Earldom of
Delmenhorst) is
Or, two Barres
Gules. The fourth and last Coat (which belongs to
Jutland) is
Azure, a Cross Patty, at the bottom fetchet,
Or. Below the Arms is usually hung, in a chain
Or, the Scutcheon of the Order of the Elephant.
The Helmet
Or, embroidered and damasked, the sights covered and wanting barrs; above which a Crown
Or, encircled with four Circles, and adorned with precious Stones: on the top of this a Globe
Or, and above all a Cross patty
Argent.
The Crest is a Leopard, passant over the Crown,
Or,; eight Streamers
Azure; a plain Cross
Argent; four spears bending to the Dexter side, and as many to the Sinister
Or.
Supported by two Savages, crowned and girt with Ivy
proper, armed with two pointed Clubs.
The Mantle
Or, sown with hearts
Gules and Lions
Azure, doubled
Ermine.
THO many of our modern Authors make a scoff at the relations the
Danish Historians give of the Gyants anciently bred under the Northern Climates;
Cimbrians, whence so called. yet 'tis certain (both from the testimony of the most credible
Roman writers, and the inscriptions of ancient Graves, and other monuments), that there were formerly in these parts some people of larger sizes then are anywhere to be met with at this day either in this or any other Nation. And what else can be meant of that Law of King
Frotho (mention'd by
Saxo Grammaticus) wherein 'twas order'd, that no ordinary Rustic should be bound to have any quarrel with one of these over-grown
Kempers, determined by Duel (which was then the usual way of deciding all manner of controversies), except the Warriour had fewer and lighter weapons then the Plebeian? Those that endeavour to prove the ancient
Danes men of greater dimensions then the modern, from the bulk of their Grave-stones and Tombs; do not consider, that it was the custom of the
Danish Pagans to burn the dead bodies of their deceased friends, and bury only the ashes; and that the ancients used to worship at the monuments of their Princes and great men, which for this reason were usually considerable heaps of stones and earth cast up by the high-way side. However (to omit these kind of idle conjectures) the Northern people had doubtless in their Armies good store of
Kempers (men of vast bodies and strength) upon whose broad shoulders lay the heavyest and hottest service in every engagement. From these
Kempers the whole Nation were by the
Romans called
Cimbri, by the
Greeks Cimmerii, and their Country
Chersonesus Cimbrica, which name was given to the whole tract of land beyond the
Elb; tho later Historians confine it to that part only which now goes under the name of
Jutland.
Whence the
Juti and
Jutia (which without all doubt is the same with the more modern word
Jutlandia) should come,
Jutland, whence so called. is harder to determine, then to trace the original of
Cimbria. Venerable
Bede, speaking of those Nations who came to aid the
Britains against the oppression of the
Romans, mentions the
Vites as well as the
Angles and
Saxons. Cambden, and some others, would have us read
Jutes instead of
Vites; as (saith that famous Antiquary) one Manuscript Copy hath the word. But the Learned Sir
Henry Spelman, observing in most Copies
Vitae more then once, and never
Jutae, will not admit of this alteration.
Ethelwerd, who writ about the year 950, calls
Bede's
Vitas, Giotos; telling us, that the
Angles were a people that dwelt
inter Saxones & Giotos. Tacitus places the
Huithones (so
Pontanus reads the word, and not as 'tis usually printed,
Nuithones) next to the
Angli. In other Authors we meet with the
Vitungi, Juthungi, Guthungi, Guthas, Juthones, &c. which without question are all of one and the same original; only variously corrupted, either by the inadvertency of transcribers, or unskilfulness of foreign writers in the idiom of the tongue of that Country which they described.
Arngrim Jonas (an
Islandian Author, well skill'd in the Antiquities and Language of his own Country) says,
Jaet, in the
Islandian and
Norwegian dialect, signifies a Giant. Adding further, that there is still a place in
Norway call'd
Risalandt, i. e. the Land of Giants; near which is
Jaetumhaimar, or
The Giants dwelling. Lastly, he tells us,
Jutland is nothing but a corruption of
Jaetumland. So that
Jutia has the same signification with
Cimbria; and the
Guti, Gothi, Gotti, Getae (call'd in the
English-Saxon monuments Geatun),
Vitae, Jutae, &c. are the same men with the
Cimbrians.
Jutland reaches no further then
Sleswic. [...] So that
Holstein, and the rest of the Provinces which lay between the
Eidor and the
Elb (tho formerly a part of the
Cimbrian Chersonese) are not now reckon'd as any portion of this Country.
Northern Jutland.
THE Northern
Jutland is much larger and better peopled then the Southern. It is divided into nine (some reckon fifteen) great Lordships; which (says
Lyscander) being severed one from another by so many arms of the
Sinus Limmericus, Lymfiord, gave occasion to that part of the King of
Denmark's Arms which bears a Lion and nine Hearts in a field
Or. There are in it four Bishopricks,
Ripen, Arhusen, Alburg, and
Wiburg.
In the further corner of the North
Jutland lyes
Wensyssel, which has the names of
Venulia, [...] and
Vandalia in
Latin Authors; and is thought by some to have been the seat of the ancient
Vandals. Its inhabitants are the lustiest and hardiest of any of the King of
Denmark's subjects. The chief Town in this Tract is
Wensyssel, so call'd from the Province.
Schaghen, seated on the Promontory between the
Norwegian and
Baltic Seas, is much more frequented by Merchants, from all parts of
Europe, then any other Town in
Jutland; and would have a far greater trade then now it has, were it not for the dangerous coast it stands on.
Alburg has its name from the multitude of Eels taken in that part of the
Lymfiord on which it is feated. It was anciently call'd
Burgle; [...] whence this Bishoprick is often named
Episcopatus Burglaviensis or
Burglumiensis. In this Diocess there are thirteen High Courts of Judicature; one hundred and eighty Parishes; six Cities; and an hundred Noblemens houses. This Bishoprick was first founded by King
Sueno Esthrith about the year 1065. The Bishops had their residence at
Borlum (a small Village not far from
Alburg) till, upon the introduction of the
Augsburg Confession into
Denmark, Stigot (the last Bishop of the Popish Religion) was commanded to devest himself of all Episcopal Jurisdiction, and to live privately in the Monastery at
Borlum. This happen'd
A. D. 1536; since which time the
Lutheran Bishops have had their Palace at
Alburg. The fruitfullest part of this Diocess is
Ty, which lyes between the
German Ocean and
Limfiord. Some Authors are of opinion, that the
Dutch have their name from the ancient inhabitants of this Tract; and to strengthen their argument, they put us in mind, that the
Germans are to this day
[Page][Page]Totius IVTIAE GENERALIS Accurata delineatio.Apud Janssonis-Waesbergios, et Mosem Pitt[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page]JUTIA SEPTENTRIONALIS in qua
Dioeceses ALBURGENSIS et VIBURGENSIS.
[Page]JUTIA AUSTRALIS, in qua
Dioeceses RIPENSIS et ARHUSIENSIS.
[Page][Page][Page 53]called
Tyscke by the
Danes. The chief Town in
Ty is
Tysted; where
Christian III. founded a Free-school, which is now grown up to a
Gymnasium or mungrel University. Not far from
Tysted stands the old Nunnery of
Westerwic; famous for the Tomb of a pious Maid of the Blood-Royal, of whom the Neighbours (who call her in their tongue
Liden Kirsten) report many miracles, and sing old Ballads made in commendation of her holy and chast life.
The Diocess of
Wiburg lies in the very middle of North
Jutland. Lyscander calls
Wiberg the Metropolis of
Jutland. It is indeed a place of the greatest concourse of people, who flock hither for justice in all causes Civil and Criminal. It was formerly called
Cimmersbeg, as being the chief City of the ancient
Cimbrians. Tacitus calls it
Civitatem parvam: but withall, that it had been a glorious and strong hold, and the Metropolis of a terrible and warlike Nation. Whence, and when, it got the name
Wiberg, is not easily determined. Some tell us, that after the many petty Principalities of the
Cimbrians were united into one Monarchy by
Wiglet, this City lost its ancient name, and was called (after the Prince)
Wigburg; corrupted by degrees into
Wiberg. Elnot, in the life of St.
Canutus, says, it had its new name from
Wig; an Idol worshipp'd in this place. I rather think it the seat of the
Danish Pyrats; called formerly
Wigs or
Wikenger. For it was the custom in the Northern Countries, where the inhabitants were more then the fruits of the Land could sustain, for young Noblemen to live of what they could catch abroad. As the
Lacedemonians thought Robbery, so these fancied Pyracy, lawful and glorious. Whence Princes of the blood would often turn Pyrats, and take upon them the title of Kings, tho they had not the least dominion at land: as the
Norwegian History reports of St.
Olaus. The most notorious Pyrats mention'd by the Northern Historians, are the
Jomswikinger, who dwelt in the City
Wollin, called anciently
Jomsberg, where they had established certain Laws, and were subject to Magistrates and Governors chosen out of the Royal Family.
Cambden tells us, that the
Danes are usually understood by the name
Viccingi in the Latin writers of our
English History; because, says he, they were professed Pyrats. In our Learned King
Aelfred's translation of
Bede's Ecclesiastical History, Pyrats are called Wicengas and Wicings: and Mr.
Cambden guesses probably, that the inhabitants of
Glocestershire, Worcestershire, &c. were formerly called
Wiccii, from the Sea-robberies committed daily by them upon the mouth of the
Severn. The
English-Saxons named a stout warriour Wiga; skill in war, Wig-chaept; a fort Wighus,
&c. In the old
Francic History of the life of St.
Anno Arch-Bishop of
Cologne, we read:
Ninus hiz der eristi mann,
De dir ie volc Wigis began, i. e.
Ninus is the first that ever made war.
And in
Willeramus's Paraphrase upon the Canticles
Wighuis is a Castle,
Wiigfimme the art of Combat,
&c. Nial's
Runic History says,
Gunnar var alra manna best Viigur deira sem de voru a Islande, i.e. Gunnar was the best Champion that lived in
Island in his days. From what has been said, it seems very probable, that
Wiberg signifies no more then
Wigton, the name of several great Towns in
England and
Scotland; and the
Scots still retain so much of the old
Saxon word Wig as to call souldiers and pillagers of the Country,
Wigs or
Wiganeers. There has been for some years a quarrel between the Bishops of
Alburg and
Wiburg about precedency; each pretending his Bishopric the more ancient. 'Tis very hard, if not impossible, to decide the controversie; except we date the first institution of the Bishoprick of
Alburg from the removal of the Bishops Palace to that City. For the Bishopricks of
Wiburg and
Borlum were both founded in one year by
Sueno Esthrith; who made
Heribert Bishop of
Wiburg the same time that he gave
Borlum to
Magnus. Witfield gives
Wiburg the precedency; but
Alburg is reckon'd the better and more honourable preferment by other
Danish writers. From the high Court of Judicature holden at
Wiburg, the
Jutlanders can make no appeal; save to the King himself. The most memorable Bays in this Diocess are
Sallingsundt, Virckesundt, Hualpsundt, Sebersundt, and
Othesundt. The last of which had its name from the Emperor
Otho the first; who making an incursion into
Jutland about the year 948, came as far as this Bay, into which he is said to have cast his Spear, and given it the name it retains to this day. The most considerable and fruitful part of this Diocess is
Salling, a Peninsula in the
Limfiord; whence are brought the best Horses that are to be met with in the King of
Denmark's Dominions. The name of this Province seems to point out the seat of the old
Sabalingi, whom
Ptolomey makes a people inhabiting some part of the
Cimbrian Chersonese, but more Southerly then
Salling. The chief River in the Bishoprick of
Wiburg is
Gudius, Gutalus, or
Guddenus; called by the Natives
Gudden Aa, and stored with plenty of Fish.
Arhuse is a neat and pleasant Sea-port Town on the coast of the
Baltic Sea:
Arhusen. whence Etymologists derive its name from
Aar-hus, i. e. the house of Oars. Which is a much more probable conjecture then is brought by
Pontanus; who fetches the word
Arhusen from
Ptolomy's Harudes. The greatest part of the
Danish Historians, are of opinion that it was first made a Bishops See about the year 1014. Tho, if it be true that
Poppo was made Bishop of this Diocess, its original must be fetcht as high as the year 992. The Cathedral at
Arhuse is a neat piece of Architecture; adorned with several rich monuments of Bishops, Noblemen,
&c. The Bishops Palace has lain many years in its ruins, which still retain marks of its antient splendour and grandeur. It is seated in the heart of
Jutland, and furnished with all manner of necessaries that the Country affords at a very reasonable rate: and what forreign Commodities either the need or luxury of its Citizens call for, are brought daily in by the Mariners. In this Diocess there are thirty one Judicatures, Seven Cities, three hundred and four Parishes and five Forts; the strongest of which is
Schanderborch or
Schonderborch (
i.e. the neat Castle) seated on the
Gudden. The rest of the Cities of note in the Bishopprick of
Arhusen are 1.
Horsen, on the South of
Arhusen. 2.
Randruse, a place famous for the best Salmon in
Jutland. 3.
Ebeltod, on the
Baltic Coast: a Town of considerable trade.
The Bishoprick of
Ripen,Ripen. bordering on the Southern
Jutland, contains in it seven Cities, two hundred eighty two Parishes, ten Castles and an hundred Noblemens houses. It is seated upon the clear and sweet river
Nipsaa, which parting it self into three streams, divides the Town into as many parts; and gave occasion to the City's Arms, which are three Lions. Here abouts
Ptolomy seems to place his
Cimbros phundusios. That this City should have its name from the
Latin word
Ripa, upon its being situate on the banks of the river, is no great wonder: if we consider that whilst the Natives of these parts busied
[Page 54]themselves chiefly in fortifying and peopling their great Ciities, 'twas ordinary for the
Germans, Romans, and other Foreigners, to give names to small Villages upon the Sea-Coasts; which after a revolution of some years, by the advantage of a brisk Sea-Trade, grew bulky, and were often advanced into large Corporations. The Cathedral is a stately Fabrick of hewen stone, beautified with a Tower of an incredible height; which serves for a good Land-mark to the Sea-men that sail along this dangerous shore. This Church was first built on the top of a hill by King
Eric Barn, whom St.
Ansgar had converted to Christianity, about the year 848. Near an hundred and fifty years after, upon the reclaiming of the
Danes from the Idolatry they were relaps'd into, this Church was turn'd into a Cathedral, and
Ripen made a Bishops See, as it hath continued ever since. There is a kind of an University at
Ripen; but comes far short of that at
Copenhagen. The rest of the Cities and great Towns of moment in this Diocess, are: 1.
Kolding, first built by
Eric Glipping about the year 1268, in the place of an old Castle of the same name, and fortified with such strong walls and good ditches, as made it a City able to defend the frontiers of the
Danish dominions; which in those days reached no further South then this place. But they that think
Kolding had its name from
Ptolomy's Chali, who seem to be placed in this part of
Jutland, make it a City much more ancient.
Christian III. was so much taken with the situation of it, and plenty of all things in the Country adjoining, that he removed his Court to the Castle
Arnsburgh, which hangs over the Town; which he repair'd, and in which he ended his days. On the South the City is washed by a River which divides the Northern
Jutland from the Southern; and separating it self into two branches, is emptied soon after into the
Baltic Sea. The Bridge over this River brings yearly a great treasure into the King of
Denmark's Coffers. For, besides the impost upon all other kinds of commodities, for every Ox or Horse that passes this Bridge towards
Holstein, or any of the
Hans Towns, the owners pay a Rixdollar; which, considering the infinite number of Horses and Kine which are yearly sent this way out of the Northern
Jutland, must needs amount to a vast revenue. 2.
Weel; a compact, neat, and well built City, on the
Baltic shore; but not very large. 3.
Ward. 4.
Rinkoping. Both seated near the Western-shore upon the same River. 5.
Holstebro. 6.
Lemwick; which is the outmost bounds of the Bishoprick of
Ripen Northward; seated on the
Limfiord, whence it has its name. At
Jelling (a small Village in this Bishoprick, not far from the City
Weel) is to be seen one of the most famons
Runic Monuments that the three Northern Kingdoms afford. This Village is said to have had its name from one
Elling, a General of the
Cimbrians, and fancied to have been the seat of several
Danish Kings. The inscription has been thought worthy the diligent enquiry of
Jos. Scaliger, Bonaventura Vulcanius, Lindenbrogius, Stephanius, and
Wormius; and may therefore justly challenge a place in our description of this Province. The words are these:
‘
Haralter Kunugr bad kaurva Kubl dausi eft Gurm fadur sin Aug eft Thiurni mudur sinasa. Haraltr Kesor van Tanmaurk Alla aug Nurvieg Aug tini folk Kristno, i. e.’‘
Harald the King commanded this Tomb to be built in remembrance of
Gormo his father and
Thyra his mother.
Harald the Emperor won
Denmark, and all
Norway; and Christ'ned the inhabitants of both Kingdoms.’
How worthy Queen
Thyra was of such a lasting monument as this, we shall shew hereafter; and shall in this place only take notice of King
Harald's styling himself
Kesor, or Emperor of
Denmark and
Norway. Which seems to be done in contempt of the Emperor
Otho the first; who, having conquer'd a great part of the Kingdom of
Denmark, annexed this to the rest of his dominions, and writ himself
Emperor of the North; till this King
[Harald Blaatand] forced him to retire, and made him part with (not only whatever he had taken in
Jutland, but) a great part of
Saxony. After so great a conquest and defeat of so mighty an Emperor, he had reason to assume a title as swelling as ever
Otho could pretend to, who came no further then
Othesundt with his Army. Especially, if it be true (what
Helmoldus reports of him), that he was so far King of
Saxony, as to be the Author of those Laws which are to this day observed in the upper and lower
Saxony; and contained in their
Saxon-Spiegel.
Southern
Jutland.
THE Southern
Jutland (which is often comprehended under the name of the Dutchy of
Sleswic) reaches from
Kolding and the River
Leewens Aa, as far as the
Dannewirk, which is reckon'd about eighteen
German miles. The breadth of it does not any-where exceed eight, seldom six, miles.
The chief City,
Sleswic. which sometimes gives name to the whole Province, is
Sleswic. It is seated on a River, or rather a small arm of the Sea, called by the inhabitants
De Slye. So that
Sleswic is no more then a Village (call'd anciently by the
Saxons Wic by the
Hollanders to this day
Wiick, and the
Latines Vicus) upon the
Slye. Hence the ancient people of these parts are called by
Ptolomy Sigulones, which some read
Sliev
[...]nes, i.e. Wooners (or dwellers) upon the banks of the
Slie. Adam Bremensis calls the Town
Slias-wig; and
Ethelwerd, an ancient
English-Saxon Historian, gives us this account of it:
Anglia vetus sita est inter Saxones & Giotos, habens oppidum Capitale quod sermone Saxonico Sleswic nuncupatur, secundum Danos vero Haithaby, i. e.‘Old
England lies between
Saxony and
Jutland; the Metropolis of which is called by the
Saxons Sleswic, but by the
Danes Haithaby.’ In an old History of the life of
Charles the Great it is called
Sliestorff. It had its
Danish name
Haitheby, saith
Pontanus, from
Hetha, a certain Queen of
Denmark. Which assertion seems confirm'd by a passage in the Preface to King
Aelfred's
English-Saxon translation of
Orosius: And of Scipinges heale he cƿaeþ ꝧ he seglode on fif dagan to þem porte þe mon haetaet Haeðh;um. se stent betƿuh Winedum & Seaxum & Angle. & hyrðh; in on Dene,
i.e. And from Sciringes-heal
he said, that he sailed in five days to the Port which is called Haethe,
which stands between the Vandals [Vinedi] Saxons
and the Angles,
to whom it is subject. 'Twas questionless heretofore a City much frequented by Merchants from
Britain, France, Spain, Flanders, and all other parts of the trading world.
Adam Bremensis (who lived about the year 1100) calls it
Civitatem opulentissimam ac populosissimam, i.e. a City exceeding rich and populous. And so it must needs have been. For, before Mariners
[Page 55]learnt perfectly the way of shunning the dangerous Sands upon the coasts of
Jutland, and at the entrance into the
Baltic, carriages were usually brought up the
Eidor and
Threan as far as
Hollingsted by Ship, and thence conveyed by Land to
Sleswic: where they were again shipped and so transported into
Zeeland, Sweden, &c. The Citizens here were first converted to Christianity, and the great Church built, by King
Eric Barn, assisted by St.
Anchar, about the year 800. Not long after (in the year 1064) the
Slavonians, making incursions into this part of the Country, took
Sleswic, destroyed the Church, rooting out Christianity and replanting Paganism. This relapse is sufficiently confirm'd by the many
Runic monuments, found daily in and about this City: whose inscriptions shew them to be Heathenish reliques, tho of too late a date to have been erected before the first appearance of Christianity in these parts. But the
Slavonians kept not long footing here. For, within a short while, the
Danes, weary of the tyranny and Idolaty of strangers, forced them to quit their Conquets and retire. Whereupon, paganism was once more rooted out, Christianity reestablisht, and the Cathedral rebuilt. Soon after this the
Angles, that maintain'd a trade in
Sleswic, built the Church of the Holy Ghost near the market-place with the adjoyning Hospital. The Dukedome of
Sleswic was first given by
Christopher King of
Denmark, about the year 1253, by way of pension to the children of King
Abel; upon condition the Duke of
Pomeren, and some other petit Princes of
Vandalia, would engage they should always acknowledg a dependance upon, and never pretend any title to the
Danish Crown. After a revolution of some years it became the inheritance of
Christiern of
Oldenburg King of
Denmark, who annexed it to the
Danish Realm; a part of which it has continued ever since. Assign'd indeed it hath been often as a portion to some of the younger Princes of the blood: but never quitted its dependance upon the Crown. This City, as appears by their records, was first made a Bishops See by the Emperor
Otho the first: who, upon his conquest of
Jutland, first sent ministers hither to instruct the ignorant Heathens in the principles of the Christian religion, and afterwards set a Bishop over the new Converts; whom the records call
Mark.
Upon the South of
Sleswic lies
Ekelfort: [...] called so from the abundance of Squirrels in the adjoyning woods; as the Arms of the Town still show. It is a Town of good Trade, and one of the safest parts in the
Baltic shore.
Flensburch, takes its name from
Flen a small bay of the
Baltic Sea, upon which it is seated.
Mhier (in his accurate History of the affairs of
Flanders, speaking of
Henry Duke of
Sleswic who died at the siege of this City
A. D. 1427) says it ought to be called
Vlensburg not
Flensburg; from
Vlens, which in the language of the Inhabitants signifies the flux and reflux of the Sea. Some fetch its name from one
Fleno, a
Danish Nobleman, who had the Custom of the fishing trade in this place, and was Lord of the Mannor. It is situated in a low and pleasant valley, begirt with several hills of great height. It consists chiefly of one continued street of magnificent and noble buildings; the length of which is said to be near two
English miles. All along this street the Ships are brought up in a port so commodious, that the Citizens can lade and unlade their Vessels at their doors. On the top of an hill in the Suburbs stands the Castle; which easily commands the Town and Haven. Betwixt this City and
Sleswic is the undoubted seat of the antient
Angles; the ancestours and first Founders of our
English Nation in
Britain. Which is not only proved by the assertion of our famous Historian
Ethelwerd, quoted before; but from a small village in this tract, which to this day is called
Anglen. Ptolomey indeed and
Tacitus place the antient
Angli furrher southward, as far as the banks of the
Elb: and they were doubtless a more populous nation then can reasonably be imagined to be confin'd to so narrow a piece of ground as at this day goes under the name of
Anglen, in the maps of our modern Geographers. For we cannot otherwise conceive they should so far overpower the
Saxons and
Jutes, who came with them into
Britain, as to call so great a part of our Land after their own names; without any notice taken of their Allyes.
Hadersleve, seven
German miles distant from
Flensburg Northward,
Hadersleve. was first made a City and had its Charter confirm'd by
Waldemar Duke of
Jutland about the year 1292. It was formerly defended by a strong Castle built on the top of an hill which overlooks the Town. This
John Earl of
Holstein pull'd down, and instead thereof begun to build a new one call'd from him
Hansburg, or
John's-Castle; for
Hans in the High
Dutch and
Danish tongues is the same with
John) which was finished by King
Frideric the Second. The most of the streets in
Hadersleve are of a good breadth and very uniform. In the Great Church is to be seen a stately monument erected by King
Eric the Eighth to the memory of
Rombold Duke of
Silesia, who was sent Ambassador hither from the Emperor
Sigismund, to compose the differences between the King of
Denmark and the Earls of
Holstein about the claim laid by both parties to the Dukedom of
Sleswic: and died before the work was finished.
On the Western Coasts of
South-Jutland live the
Srond-Frisians;Srond-Frisians. mention'd often by
Saxo Grammaticus as men of great strength and agility of body. This Historian reckons
Eyderstede a part of his
Frisia minor; but now a days there are none go under the name of
Strand-Frisians except a small remnant of people who inhabit the
Strant (an inconsiderable Island in the
German Ocean) and a little narrow tract of land between
Husem and
Langenhorn. In the middle of this petit Province they have a market-place: where they maintain a small traffick and commerce amongst themselves. Their country is defended from the rage of the Sea (like
Holland and other parts of the
Netherlands) by great Earthen banks, which preserve their meadows and corn fields, lying all on one level, from the waves. They have a great art of making the whitest and best salt in
Europe, of earth soked in the Sea-water, dried and boil'd.
Saxo says these people are a Colony of
Frislanders in the low Countries, who, being a laborious nation, and destitute of habitations in their own Country, came hither to seek their fortunes, and by draining the fenns, made this piece of marshy ground habitable. What time this transplantation hapned is not mention'd in the
Danish Chronicles: but that it was so, will be manifest to any one that will compare the language, habit, and manners, of this people with those of the
Frisians in the
Netherlands.
The rest of the Towns of note in the Southern
Jutland are 1.
Husem; a rich and neat port-Town on the Western Shore. 2. The two
Tunderens, Greater and Less, both places of considerable traffick upon the same coast. 3.
Gottorp, the ancient seat of the Earls and Dukes of
Holstein. It is seated on the top of the
Slie; exceedingly well fortifyed; and very remarkable
[Page 56]for the
Tol-booth, or Custom-house, which one year with another brings in Toll for at least 50000 Oxen which are brought out of
Jutland into
Germany. 4.
Appenrade, seated on a small bay of the
Baltic Sea, and much frequented by the
Danish Fishermen.
Of the ancient wall of Partition, which divided formerly the Dukedom of
Holstein from the Kingdom of
Denmark.
BEfore the invention of Guns, and other terrible Engines of war, now used by all the
Europeans, and the greatest part of the known world, the only fortifications and ramparts were strong walls and ditches; which the ancients fancied, as indeed they were, sufficient to defend them from the arrows and battle-axes (the only weapons then in use) of their barbarous neighbours. Hence it was, that the
Chinois thought their Empire secured from the incursions of their bloody neighbours the
Tartars, when their famous King
Tzinzow had hedged them in with a wall of some hundreds of miles in length. Thus the best expedient the
Romans could find of putting the borders of their
Brittish dominions in a posture of defence against the daily revolt of the Natives, whom they had driven into
Scotland, was the building of
Picts Wall, and
Severus's rampire, which reach'd from Sea to Sea. For the same reasons the Kings of
Denmark, having their Territories continually infested by the daily inroads of the
Germans, thought it highly requisite to block up their passage, by walling up that neck of Land which lies between
Hollingsted and
Gottorp.
It is hard to determine, from the account given by Historians when this work was first begun.
Paulus Aemilius, a curious
French Historian, says,
Gothofred King of
Denmark (whom the
Danish writers call
Gothric) was the first that made use of this stratagem, to exclude the Armies of the Emperor
Charles the Great, about the year 808. The same story is told us by
Aimoinus and
Christianus Cilicius. But
Saxo Grammaticus, Crantzius, and the whole Class of the Northern Historians, tell us unanimously, That Queen
Thyra (daughter of
Ethelred King of
England, and wife to
Gormo Gamle King of
Denmark) was the Authoress of this fortification; and that thence she had the surname of
Danebode (
i.e. the Mistress builder of the
Danish Nation) bestowed on her. I can scarce allow the latter part of the story to to be truth; since we find that this surname was given her long before she had done any thing either towards the building or repairing of the
Danewirk (as they call'd this Fort.) For upon a monument erected by King
Gormo Gamle in honour of his Queen
Thyra we find the following Inscription:
‘Gurmr Kunugr gerdi kubl dusi eft Turui
Kunu sina Tanmarkur-bat, i.e.’‘Gormo
the King erected this Tomb for Thyra
his Queen Danebode (
or repairer of the Kingdom of Denmark).’
This inscription cannot be an Epitaph writ after Queen
Thyra's death; seeing all the
Danish writers assert positively that she outliv'd her husband
Gormo many years, and after his death took the
Danewirk in hand. So that its more then probable the surname of
Danebode was given her for the many good offices she had done the Nation in repairing several old decayed Castles and Forts, and building a great many new ones. King
Eric the Eighth, in his
Danish Chronicle, says
Thyra built the Fort of wood. Which
Witfield understands of the fencing the rampire with Stakes; as bulwarks are guarded in our modern fortifications. Others make
Harald Blaatand, Queen
Thyra's son, the first Author of this work; after he had driven the Emperor
Otho out of
Jutland. Which
Erasmus Laetus, the
Danish Virgil, alludes to; when, speaking of this King
Harald, he says,
Hic ille est solido primns qui Cimbrica vallo
Munijt arva, solique ingens e corpore dorsum
Eruit, immani quod se curvamine longos
Incitat in tractus, medium
(que) perambulat Isthmum,
Et maris Eoi ripas cum littore jungit
Hesperio, ac tenuem Sleswici respicit urbem.
King
Eric decides this controversy by telling us, That
Thyra built a wooden fortification; and afterwards advised her son to strengthen the work by Trenches and Rampires of earth. Notwithstanding all these relations of other Historians, both
Pontanus and
Wormius agree, that 'tis most likely the rude draught of this Fort was first drawn by King
Gothric; and only repair'd and improv'd by Queen
Thyra, King
Harald and other succeeding Princes.
Waldemar the first built a wall of brick, seven foot broad and eighteen high, to strengthen it. After so many improvements the fort was reckon'd impregnable. For soon after King
Waldemar's reparation, when
Henry Duke of
Saxony (surnamed the
Lion) intended to have endeavoured a breach through this fort into the King of
Denmark's dominions, he was disswaded from the enterprise by his chief Counsellor
Bernhard Razburg, who represented the undertaking as a thing impossible to be effected; assuring him
Danewirkae custodium Danorum sexaginta millibus mandatum esse. i.e. That
Danewirk was defended by a Garrison of sixty thousand
Danes. Hence King
Sueno, finding himself unable to force his way through so strong and so well man'd a Rampire, endeavour'd to work his passage by corrupting the Keeper of
Wiglesdor, the only Gate leading through this wall into
Jutland.
At this day there remain but sleight marks of so great a work. At
Schubuge and
Hesbuge, two small Villages upon the ruins of the wall, the Inhabitants find reliques of old furnaces and brickkilns; whence the
Danish Antiquaries conclude that King
Waldemar had his bricks burn'd here, tho he was forced to fetch mortar as far as
Gothland. Joh. Cypraeus tells us, at
Dennenwirch, an inconsiderable Village in these parts, may still be seen the ruins of an old Castle where Queen
Thyra lodged. The same Author says,
Wiglesdor was antiently called
Kaelgate; because placed in an open and plain part of the Country, where the Enemy could have no shelter, nor be in any probability of suprizing the Defendants.
HOLSTEIN.
ANtiently the whole Territories of the Dukedom of
Holstein (contained at present in the Provinces of
Holstein properly so called,
Ditmarss, Wagerland, and
Stormar) went under the general name of
Nortablingia; or the country beyond the
Elb Northwards.
Adam Bremensis and
Helmoldus are the first that mention
Holsatia: which the former derives from
Holts-geseten i.e. seated in a wood or forrest.
The
Holsteiners are taken notice of generally
[Page][Page]DUCATUS HOLSATIAE DESCRIPTIO NOVISSIMA.Excudebant Janss
[...]io-Waesbergii: et Moses Pitt.
[Page][Page 57]as men of great strength and courage, and very observant of oaths and promises. Whence
Holstein glaub (or, the faith of an
Holsteiner) is a thing they are very tender of, and a proverbial speech in which they pride themselves.
The fruitfulness of the soil, convenience of trading in the
Baltic and
Brittish seas, and industry of the Inhabitants render
Holstein the richest Country in the King of
Denmarks dominions: and make the incomes of some of the Nobility exceed the treasure of many Princes in
Germany.
The chief Cities and great Towns in
Holstein are, 1.
Kyel (Chilonium;) seated on the
Baltic shore in a corner of land, shut in betwixt the mouths of two rivers. Whence some have fetcht its name from the
German word
Kiel; which signifies a wedge. It is furnished with a large and commodious haven, which is continually throng'd with Merchant-Ships from
Germany, Liefland, Sweden, and all the Isles on the
Baltic Sea. There is yearly in this Town a meeting of the greatest part of the Nobility of
Holstein; who come hither to consult about the affairs of the Dukedom, especially the concerns of the mint and value of money. The Castle (which is seated on the top of an hill, commanding the Town and haven) was first built by
Adolph of
Schaumburg the first Earl of
Holstein. Earl
Adolph IV. founded a monastery of Franciscan Minorites in this City; which upon the bringing in of the
Augsburg confession into this Country with the rest of the
Danish Territories, was changed into an
Hospital. 2.
Rensborg or
Reinholsburg; founded by one
Reinold, of whom we have no further account then that he was either a Prince of the Blood, or some Great Nobleman. This is the best fortifyed Town in the Dukedom; environed with the
Byder, and defended by a strong Castle built by Earl
Gerhard the Great. 3.
Wilster, a neat and well built City: seated on a River of the same name, which soon after empties it self into the
Stor. 4.
Nieumunster, seated on the North-West of the
Stor, not far from the head of it.
The Earldom of
Holstein was only a Province of the Great Dukedom of
Saxony; until
Lotharius Great Duke of
Saxony, afterwards Emperor of
Germany, bestowed it upon
Adolph Earl of
Schaumburg or
Schouwanburg about the year 1114. Since which time we have the following account of the Earls of
Holstein.
1.
Adolph of
Schouwenburg;1114 the first absolute prince of
Holstein. On whom the Earldom was bestowed as a recompence for the services he had done the Duke of
Saxony in his
German and
Danish wars.
2.
Adolph II. son to
Adolph the
I. having obtained his fathers Earldom,
1137 cast out the
Slavonians, who a little before his time had overrun all this part of
Saxony; and planted in their rooms Colonies of
Germans, Frisians, and Nether
Saxons. In the quarrel among the three pretenders to the Crown of
Denmark (
Sueno, Canutus, and
Waldemar) he sided with
Canutus; and had setled him in the throne, had not King
Sueno by fair means and promises prevailed with him to lay down his Arms. He left the Earldom to his son
3.
Adolph III. who after many skirmishes and battles with
Waldemar II. King of
Denmark,1164 was at last vanquished and kept close prisoner by that King; who, by the intercession of
Andrew Bishop of
Lunden and some others, granted him his liberty upon condition, That he should disclaim all right and Title which he and his predecessors had hitherto pretended to the Earldom of
Holstein or any other place formerly subject to
Henry, surnamed the
Lion, Duke of
Saxony; and quietly retire to the inheritance of his Ancestors at
Schouwenburg. But these Articles (tho at the first secured by Hostages) were not long observed by his son
4.
Adolph IV. who,
1232 associating to himself
Henry Earl of
Zurin, Gerhard Bishop of
Bremen, and some other petit Princes, begun a rebellion against King
Waldemar; and succeeded so well in the undertaking, that within a very short time he made himself master of all the Territories his father had been beaten out of and renounced. His son
5.
Gerhard,1261 enjoy'd peaceably the dominions left him by his Father. He was for some time kept prisoner at
Imsburg by the
Folchungs, a noble family in
Sweden, for being in company with one
Ingemar, an upstart Gentleman but great favourite of their King
Magnus; whom they slew in a rage, and cast his companions into prison.
6.
Henry,1281Gerhards son, was the first that set up a Custom-house in
Hamburg; which brought in no small portion of the revenue of his successors.
7.
Gerhard the second,
1310 son of
Henry, upon the death of
Christopher the second King of
Denmark, was made Protector of the
Danish Kingdom, and Tutor to the young King
Waldemar the third. By these advantages his power grew so great that he ventur'd to stile himself Duke of
Jutland; and by degrees would in all probability have aspired to the Crown of
Denmark, if not timely taken off by one
Ebbo, a
Danish Nobleman, who murdered him in his bed at
Randerhusen.
8.
Henry the second,
1340 son to
Gerhard II. refused the Crown of
Sweden, when it was offered him by Ambassadors sent from that Court
A. D. 1363. He is said to have been a Prince of great courage and candor, courteous in his behaviour, and exceedingly chast and temperate in the whole course of his life. In short, a man that had in him all the Royal vertues that might deserve a Kingdom; and the modesty to refuse one when offer'd.
9.
Gerhard the third,
1381Henry the second's son, after he had got the Dukedom of
Sleswic annexed to the Earldom of
Holstein by
Margaret Queen of
Denmark, was slain by the men of
Dithmarss, whom he had required to do him homage. His son
10.
Henry the third,
1404 being denied that right to the Dukedom of
Sleswic which his father had enjoy'd, made war against
Eric the Eighth King of
Denmark; in which, at the siege of
Flensburg, he was slain.
11.
Adolph V. (commonly called the twelfth,
1427 by those that reckon all the Earls of younger houses) succeeded his brother
Henry, and was the last Earl of this house. In the year 1440, he received the Dukedom of
Sleswic at the hands of
Christopher the third King of
Denmark; swearing fealty to that Crown.
Christian Earl of
Oldenburg (son of
Hedvigis sister to
Henry and
Adolph the two last Earls of
Holstein) succeeded his Uncle
Adolph in the Earldom of
Holstein. Which in his time was enlarged by the addition of
Dithmarss,1459 and changed into a Dukedom by the Emperor
Frideric the third,
A. D. 1474.
[Page 58] When this
Christian was advanced to the throne of
Denmark, the Dukedom of
Holstein became a part of that Kingdom. Yet so, that the Kings of
Denmark (as the Kings of
Sweden upon the late accessions in
Germany to their Crown) were reckoned Princes of the Empire as Dukes of
Holstein, tho not obliged to repair to any Diet. Afterwards, the title of Duke of
Holstein, (together with a considerable part of the Country) was given to
Adolph, Christian the Third's brother (created Knight of the Garter by our Queen
Elizabeth A. D. 1562) who governed it interchangeably with the King his brother by turns. Upon the decease of this Duke and his issue male, the title was conferr'd on
Ʋlric King
Christian the fourth's brother. Since his days there have been several houses of the Dukes of
Holstein, as
Sunderburg, Norburg, Gluckburg, Arnsbeck, Gottorp and
Ottingen. Amongst whom the Duke of
Holstein Gottorp is chief, and challenges the same power in governing and administration of justice which was at first conferred upon Duke
Adolph King
Christian the third's brother. In the late wars between the two Northern Crowns, the King of
Denmark (jealous of the great power of the present Duke of
Gottorp) forced this Prince to quit his Dukedom and leave his Majesty in full possession of the whole Country of
Holstein. But at the signing of the Treaty between the Kings of
France, Sweden, and
Denmark at
Fountenblaeu on the second of
September 1679, the
Danish Ministers promised their Master should, at the desire of his most Christian Majesty, restore to the said Duke all his Countries, Towns, and places, in the state they were, and the soveraignty thereof; all which he claim'd by vertue of the Treatyes of
Roschild, Copenhagen, and
Westphalia, which by this Treaty were confirm'd. The Duke expected, besides being restored to his Countries, some recompence for the damages he had sustained during the war; and at least to have had back the Canon (being an hundred excellent Brass pieces) which were taken out of
Tunningen, when it was seized and dismantled by
Denmark. But his expectation in this point were not answered. One of the Articles of the same Treaty was,
That the Country of Rixingen,
belonging to Count Alefelt,
Chancellor of Denmark (made Governour of
Holstein in the year 1663, upon the death of
Christian Earl of
Rantzaw, chief Minister of State to the late King
Frideric III.),
confiscated during the war, should be restored to him.
DITMARS.
THE inhabitants of this Province are a remnant of the ancient
Saxons; and retain much of the prowess and heroic spirits of their ancestors. Some will have the word writ
Deutsch or
Teutschmarsh, i. e. the
German or
Dutch Marsh; because the people are reliques of the
German-Saxons, and the Country plain and fenny. The
Ditmarssians were never (like the
Wagrians and
Stormarians) brought under subjection to the Earls of
Holstein, till that whole Earldom was annexed to the Crown of
Denmark. And tho they were given by the Emperor
Frideric III. to
Christian Earl of
Oldenburgh, the first
Danish King of that House; yet soon after they threw off this yoke, and refused to acknowledg themselves subject to him or his successors, till (by the valour and good fortune of King
Frideric II.) they were vanquished and forced to submit in the year 1559. In this expedition the King of
Denmark was assisted by
John and
Adolph, Dukes of
Holstein, his Cousin-Germans. Whereupon, they sharing the conquest with him,
Ditmars was divided into two parts; whereof the Southern fell to the King of
Denmark, and the Northern to the Dukes of
Holstein.
The only places of note in
Ditmars, are, 1.
Meldorp, the chief Town in the Province, seated on the
German Ocean, and a place of good trade. 2.
Heyde, which is a large, but poor City, on the borders of the great barren Sands, of the same name, which overspread the middle of the Country. 3.
Lunden, opposite to
Tonningen, near the mouth of the
Eyder.
STORMAR.
STormar (
Stormars or
Stormarsh) signifies no more then the Marshy ground lying along the banks of the river
Stoer. For 'tis observable, that the inhabitants of the Great Dukedom of
Holstein are distinguished by names taken from the nature of the soil in that part of the Country they inhabit. And the ancient
Marsi were nothing else then a people that liv'd in these bogs and fens; and thence took their name.
Hamburgh (of which City we shall have occasion to give a large description elsewhere) stands in
Stormar;Hamburgh. and upon that score the Earls and Dukes of
Holstein have always pretended a right to this City, and demanded homage of the Citizens. These pretensions were judged legal, and the right and title of the said Dukes ratified, by the Emperor
Charles IV. in the year 1374. Whereupon the
Hamburghers swore allegiance to
Christian I. King of
Denmark; acknowledging him and his successors their lawful Lords. But not long after they endeavoured to throw off that yoke; presuming much upon their own strength, and the assistance they promise themselves upon all occasions, from the rest of the
Hans Towns. This last year (1679) the present King of
Denmark renewed his claim, and came before this City with an Army of sixteen or seventeen thousand men, to demand homage; entring the
Elb with fourteen men of war, and seizing several Merchant-ships,
English and others, at
Gluckstadt. On the ninth of
November an agreement was signed between the King and this City; the Articles of which were:
I. That his Majesty and this City shall remain unprejudiced in their several rights and pretentions; and that the point of homage shall be amicably determined by Treaty, or by an ordinary process before the Chamber of
Spire; and that in the mean time this City shall enjoy a Neutrality, and free commerce, as formerly.
II. That this City, with a thankful acknowledgment of his Majesties good will towards them, shall remain in an humble devotion towards him, and shall to the utmost of their power further his good, and prevent any evil they know likely to happen to him.
III. That, for the greater manifestation of this their devotion, this City shall send a formal Deputation to his Majesty.
IV. That this City, in consideration of his Majesties being graciously pleased to receive them again into his favour, shall pay him 220000 Crowns, at four Terms; the first payment to be made immediately after the ratifying the Recess; the second within six months after; and the third and last at the end of other six months.
V. That his Majesty shall quit all his pretentions to any Lands which this City at present holds, either in particular, or in common with the City of
Lubeck; shall release the Ships stopt
[Page][Page]DITHMARSIA, RENDESBURGUM, KIEL et BORDESHOLM, in Occidentali p
[...]rte HOLSATIAE.[Page]Tabula Geographica novissima DUCATUS STORMARIAE in Meriodionali parte HOLSATIAE.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, et Mosem Pitt.[Page]WAGRIA, quae est PARS ORIENTALID HOLSATIAE.Ex Officina Janssonio-Waesbergios, et Moses Pitt[Page][Page 59]at
Gluckstadt; and shall ratifie this Recess within eight days.
Five days after the signing of this
Interim Recess (so called, because it leaves both parties in the same rights they had before) the Deputies of
Hamburgh, according to the tenure of the third Article, waited on the King of
Denmark at his Quarters at
Pinneberg, and being admitted to Audience, spoke to him in the following words:
‘Most Serene and most Potent King, most Gracious Lord! Whereas your Royal Majesty is by the mercy of God happily arrived in this your Dukedom, and consequently in the neighbourhood of this City of
Hamburgh; and hath caused proposals consisting in three points, to be made to the said City, and hath desired their resolution thereupon: And whereas the first point, through the shortness of time, and for other reasons could not be determined at present; and that your Majesty hath therefore been graciously pleased to refer the same to an amicable agreement, or to a legal determination; and in the mean time to remove the displeasure you had taken against the said City; and by an
Interims Recess graciously to agree, That as well the rights and pretentions of your Majesty, as of the said City, shall remain unprejudiced: The Burgermasters and Raedts Deputies do, in the name of themselves and of all the Burghers, appear before your Majesty, and do promise faithfully to observe the said
Interims Recess in all its points and clauses; and particularly to bear your Majesty most humble and becoming devotion; That to the utmost of their power they will further your Majesties good, and hinder all ill and detriment from happening to your Majesty. Provided this City be left in a quiet and undisturbed enjoyment of their Neutrality and Commerce, and of all their Rights and Priviledges: And that the Rights of his Imperial Majesty and the Empire be maintain'd.’
To which the King returned them a kind answer; assuring them of his good will, and that he would punctually observe on his part this Agreement. Which done, within a few days after the
Danish Army decamped.
Other Cities and Towns of note in
Stormar, are, 1.
Gluckstadt, built and well fortified by King
Christian IV. (who much delighted in its pleasant situation) and much improved by his successors. It gave sufficient proof of its strength soon after the first building of it; when it withstood and beat back the Emperors Army, and held out a siege of almost two years continuance, without yeilding at last. It commands the passage of the
Elb: so that it highly concerns the
Hamburghers to be at peace with the King of
Denmark; except they could make themselves masters of this Fort, and so secure a free passage both for their Men of War and Merchant-Ships. 2.
Crempe, seated on a small river of the same name. This is reckoned one of the Keys of the Kingdom of
Denmark; and in the
German wars gave a good testimony of its so being; when in the years 1627 and 1628, it bravely resisted the fortunate
German General, Count
Wallenstein, for thirteen months together, and at last was yeilded upon honourable terms. It owes the chief of its strength to King
Christian IV. who fortified it with a wall and ditches. 3.
Itzehoa, seated on the navigable River
Stoer, which furnishes it with plenty of fish, and all manner of merchandise from abroad. 4.
Bredenberg, one of the neatest little Towns in all the King of
Denmark's Territories; the ancient seat of the most noble Family of the
Rantzows; very remarkable for the stout resistance it made Count
Wallenstein, who, having at last taken it by storm, put all the Garrison in it to the sword.
WAGRIA.
WAgria (or
Wagerland) is almost girt round with the
Baltic Sea and the two Rivers
Trave and
Suentin. The whole length of it, from
Odelslo as far as the Village
Grotenbro, amounts to near forty-eight
English miles; and the breadth about twenty. It is observable, that the Princes of
Holstein, tho they bear the Arms of every other Province in that Dukedom, have not the Arms of this Country (which are a Bulls-head) in their Coat. Perhaps, because the Arms of
Oldenburgh are thought sufficient to represent the whole Province.
Plutarch tells us, that the ancient
Cimbrians, who first made an inroad into
Italy, bore a Bull's-head Sable in a field Gules: which shews of how venerable an antiquity the Arms of
Wagerland are, and how justly they may claim some place (if not the best) in the Coat of the Dukes of
Holstein. It had its name from the
Wagrii, a people in
Slavonia, who made themselves masters of this Tract by conquest.
The chief Towns of
Wagerland, are, 1.
Lubeck.Lubeck, seated at the confluence of the Rivers
Trave and
Billew. From the pleasantness of its situation and stately buildings, some Etymologists have derived the name of this City; calling it
Lobeck (or
ein eck dess lobes)
i. e. an honourable Corner. Which agrees well with the account an ancient Poet gives us of it in these two verses:
Angulus haec laudis dicta est urbs nomine prisco,
Angulum in hunc fertur fluvius Travenna per aequor.
It was rebuilt by
Adolph II. Earl of
Holstein, about the year 1143. But within a short while after grew so headstrong (upon the daily accession of new Priviledges and Charters granted by this Prince and his successors) that it bid defiance to the Earls of
Holstein, and became a Dukedom of it self. By the Emperor
Frideric I. it was made a member of the
German Empire. Upon his death the
Lubeckers chose themselves another Duke; who, after he had govern'd them five years, was vqnquish'd by the
Danes; by whom the City was made tributary to their King. Out of this bondage it was rescued by the Emperor
Frideric the second, who made it an Imperial City; in which state it continues to this day; and therefore (as a branch of the Empire of
Germany) will be described elsewhere more at large. 2.
Segeberge, seated on the River
Trave, about sixteen
English miles from
Lubeck. It was anciently called
Aelberg; which name, upon the building of the Castle on the top of the adjoining craggy mountain, was changed into
Segeberg. The occasion of which (as
Helmoldus tells the story) was this: When the Emperor
Lotharius began to advise with some of his Counsellors, in the year 1134, about building some considerable fortification in these parts, which might check the growing power of the
Sclaves in this Province; and had at last pitcht upon this hill as the most convenient place. One of the
Sclavonian Princes is said to have spoken prophetically to his Companion these words:
Seest thou the fortification on the top of those mountains? Let me tell thee, it will in a short time prove the yoke of the whole Land, &c. Whence, say the
Danes, the place to this day retains the name of
Segeberg; which in
High Dutch signifies,
Behold the mountains. 3.
Odelso, a fair City on the River
[Page 60]Trave, in the middle way between
Segeberg and
Lubeck. In the year 1338,
John Earl of
Wagerland bought this City into his hands, at the rate of ten thousand Marks of Silver. After this it continued in a very flourishing condition till
Eric of
Pomeren (in his wars with the Dukes of
Sleswic and
Holstein) so defaced it, that it could never since recover its ancient glory. 4.
Ploen, an ancient City, seated in the middle of a Lake of the same name; by which (and a Castle built not many years since, by
Joachim Ernestus Duke of
Holstein, after the
Italian fashion) it is exceedingly well fortified.
In the furthest corner of
Wagerland lyes the ancient and famous County of
Oldenburgh;Oldenburgh. divided from the rest of this Province by the River
Brockaw. Tho 'tis generally agreed on by all the
Danish writers, that
Oldenburgh (the chief City in this County) was anciently the Metropolis of the
Wagrians and
Venedi (two warlike Nations, to whom the greatest part of
Mecklenburgh was subject), yet we find no mention made of this place before the reign of
Otho the Great; who after he had vanquished the
Venedi, founded here a Bishoprick (afterwards translated to
Lubec) and bestowed it on
Marcus his Chancellor. It was formerly a Town of great trade, and exceeding populous, having been beautified with four Churches, three Monasteries, and five Gates; but since the Port was stop'd up, at the command of Queen
Margaret, its glory has decreas'd daily, and (by the late dreadful fire, caus'd by thunder and lightning, which hath laid waste the best and greatest part of the City) 'tis now become much less considerable then it was before.
ORtelius, out of
Pliny, endeavours to prove, that
Xen. Lampsacenus mentions the
Baltic Sea; and thence concludes, that this name is much more ancient then most of the modern Geographers fancy, who make
Adam Bremensis and
Helmoldus the first Authors that call this Bay
Mare Balthicum. But he that shall take the pains to examine
Pliny's words upon this occasion, will find, that no mention is there made of the
Baltic Sea, but of an Island only in these parts called
Baltia; which is now named
Schonen: but is not, as the Ancients imagined, an Isle. From this
Baltia some think this Sea was called
Baltic; as the
Adriatic Sea had its name from the Island
Adria. Others, more happily, derive the word from the
Danish and
English word
Belt: because
Seeland and the greatest part of the King of
Denmark's dominions are girt round with this Bay. And to this day the inhabitants of
Seeland and
Funen call that small arm of the Sea which part these two Islands
die Belt.
Pomponius Mela, who is followed by many late writers of good note, calls the
Baltic Sea
Sinus Codanus: which signifies no more then the
Danish Bay. For
Codanus, Godanus, or
Gedanus, is the same with
Danus; and
Gedanum and
Dantiscum signifie the same thing. And indeed when we consider what a large portion of the
Danish Kingdom is encircled with the Sea; we shall find reason enough (notwithstanding the late surrender of several Islands to the
Swedes) to let it still retain this its ancient name. The most considerable Islands in the
Baltic, which at this day are subject to the Crown of
Denmark, are these that follow:
FIONIA.
FIonia or
Funen, is parted from
Jutland by a streight of the
Baltic, called by the inhabitants
Medelfarsund, about one
German mile in breadth; and separated from
Seeland by the
Beltis-sund, or
Baltic Bay.
The length of it, from East to West, is about ten
German miles; and the breadth eight.
Saxo Grammaticus, Lyscander, and most of the
Danish writers, make this the pleasantest piece of ground in the King of
Denmark's dominions. Whence they have fancied the Island had its name from
fine; which has the same signification in
Funen as in
England. Tho
Adam Bremensis may seem to favour this conceit, in calling the inhabitants of this Island
Finni, and their Country
Finningia; and
Pontanus allows the etymology; yet methinks
Stephanius guesses better at the derivation of the word, when he fetches it from
Fion, which in the old
Runic monuments signifies
a neck of land rent from the continent; and such any man will suppose
Funen to be, who shall have the opportunity of viewing that slender Frith which at this day separates that Island from
Jutland.
The Island abounds with all manner of Corn, especially Wheat and Rye, which is hence yearly transported in great quantities into other Nations. Besides, the Natives have generally great Herds of Cattle, and very good Breeds of Horses. The Woods, which overspread almost the whole Island, are exceedingly well stored with Deer, Hares, and Foxes.
The chief City in this Island is
Ottensee; which some will have to take its name from
Woden, the great God of the ancient
Danes, whom some of their Historians call
Othin or
Odin. Others, more probably, say, 'twas built by the Emperor
Otho the first, who overrun a great part of the
Danish Kingdom, and left his name in more places then one. This opinion seems to be confirmed by a Letter written by the Emperor
Otho the third, about the year 987, in which this City is named
Ʋrbs Othonesvigensis. Pontanus thinks, 'twas first built by King
Harald; who, to testifie his gratitude to the forementioned Emperor
Otho the first (by whose procurement he was converted to Christianity) called it
Ottonia or
Ottensche, and his son
Suenotto. This City is seated in the very center of the Island, and therefore in a fit place for the Sessions of the Nobility and Magistracy; which are yearly held in this place. As were likewise the General Assemblies of the Kingdom of
Denmark, before the year 1660. The buildings in this Town are generally well built, and the streets uniform. Besides other public buildings, there are in it two fair Churches; whereof one is dedicate to St.
Cnute, the other to St.
Francis. Not far from the former of these stands a stately Town-Hall, upon a very spacious Market-place; where King
Frideric II. renew'd the ancient League between the Crown of
Denmark and the Dukes of
Holstein and
Sleswic in the year 1575. When the Quire of St.
Cnute's Church was repair'd in the year 1582, the workmen found, in a Vault, a Copper Coffin gilded and adorn'd with precious stones; upon which was writ the following inscription in old Latin-Gothic characters:
Jam coelo tutus summo cum rege Canutus
Martyr, in aurata rex atque reconditur arca:
Et pro Justitiae factis Occisus inque;
Ʋt Christum vita sic morte fatetur in ipsa.
Traditur a proprio, sicut Deus ipse, ministro.
A.D. MLXXXVI.
Other Towns of note in
Funen, are 1.
Bowens, a Port-Town of good trade, seated on the Westside of the Island, at the North-end of
Medelfarsund. 2.
Middlefar, seated on the common passage from this Island to
Kolding in
Jutland. On the thirtieth of
January in the year 1658.
Carolus Gustavus, King of
Sweden, led his Army over the ice to this place; and having routed the
Danish Forces that opposed him, made himself absolute master of the whole Isle of
Funen. 3.
Ascens, not far from the mountains of
Ossenburgh, where
John de Hoy, Nicholas Fechlenburgh, and
Gustavus Troll, Bishop of
Ʋpsal, were slain; and their Army, commanded by
Christopher Earl of
Oldenburgh, totally routed by
John Rantzaw, King
Christian the third's General, who level'd this City to the ground. 4.
Foborg, upon the Southern coast of the Island. It was once burnt by the unruly soldiers of
Christian the third; whilst
Odensee (adhering to the captive Prince
Christian the second, who at that time was kept close prisoner at
Sunderburg) redeem'd it self from the like fate by a
[Page 62]large sum of money. 5.
Swynborg, over against the Island of
Langland. From this place
Carolus Gustavus, King of
Sweden, led his Army over the ice into
Seeland, in the year 1658. 6.
Nyborg the usual passage from
Funen into
Seeland. This City was first fortified with a Moat and Bulwarks by King
Christian the third. It is very memorable for the battel fought by the Confederates of the Empire
Brandenburgh, Poland, and the
Low Countries, in the year 1659, against the
Swedes; who in that engagement were overthrown, and utterly routed out of
Funen.
Besides the great Towns mentioned, there are in
Funen a great number of fair Villages; among which they reckon up no less then 264 Parish Churches.
SEELAND.
SEeland (the largest, fairest, and most fruitful Island in the
Baltic Sea) lies to the East of
Funen, from which 'tis separated (as we have said before) by the
Belt. On the other side it is parted from
Schonen by a small Frith, call'd by the inhabitants
Oresundt, thro which pass all the Merchant-ships which traffick in the
Baltic. The breadth of it is about twelve
German miles, and the length eighteen.
This Island is undoubtedly the ancient
Codanonia, mentioned by
Pomponius Mela; which signifies the same thing as the more modern words
Dania and
Denmark. Most of the
Danish Etymologists derive
Seeland from
Soedland or
Seedland, from the plenty of Corn which this Country affords. Others, with greater probability, make the word signifie no more then an Island, or piece of ground encompassed with the Sea. Whence
Saxo Grammaticus, and several other ancient Historians, call it
Seelandia, from the old
Danish word
Sia or
Sio, which is now turned into
Soe, and in our
English tongue corrupted into
Sea. In most, or all of the ancient
Runic Manuscripts it is called
Soelunder, or the Sea-Grove. The
Edda Islandorum calls it
Soelund; and gives us this account of the first original of the word:
‘There was formerly a certain King in
Sweden, named
Gylfi, who promised an
Asian Sorceress (call'd
Gesion, who had pleased him with her melody) as much land as four Oxen could plow up in one day and a night. Whereupon, the old Hag brings four of her sons out of North
Jutland; and turning them into as many Oxen, caused them to plow up a large and deep furrow round this piece of ground. Which when the Sea had fill'd up, the land became an Isle, and was call'd
Seelund.’Stephanius thinks
Ptolomy alluded to this fable when, speaking of some Islands in the
Baltic, he said,
[...], i.e.
Beyond the Cimbrian Chersonese ly three Islands called Alociae; from the
Greek word
[...], a
furrow.
Copenhagen (the Metropolis of this Island,
Copenhagen. and of the whole Kingdom of
Denmark) is seated on the East of
Seeland, upon the Sea-shore. The
Danes call it
Kiobenhaun, and the
Germans Copenhaven; both which words are corruptions of
Kiobmanshafen, i.e. Portus Mercatorum, as
Saxo somewhere calls it.
Mejerus, a learned
Frisian writer, derives the name of this City from
Coppen (which, says he, in the
Frisian language signifies
James) and
Haven, q.d. St.
James's Haven. But there is very little or no grounds for any such derivation. About the year 1168,
Axil Wide surnamed
Snare (
Saxo calls him
Absolon) Archbishop of
Denmark, built a considerable fortification in the Island in which now stands the Castle. This was call'd after his name
Axel-huys; and was a good defence to the whole Island against the daily incursions of Pyrats. Under the protection of this Fort several Fishermen, and others that traded this way, used to harbour their Ships in security. This caused a continual concourse of the Natives, who resorted hither to furnish the Vessels with such provisions as their Country afforded; and in a short time laid the first rude draughts of a City, which at this day (for strength, trade, beauty and bulk) is not surpass'd by many in
Europe. Most of the
Danish Kings, especially
Christian IV. have been very active in beautifying this City, with an University, Churches, Walls, Ditches,
&c. James Ecland Bishop of
Roschild, was the first that granted any priviledges to it, in the year 1254. These his successor
Ignatius confirm'd; and they were afterwards considerably enlarged by King
Waldemar in the year 1341; and
Eric of
Pomeren in the year 1371.
Christopher of
Bavaria endowed it with Municipal immunities, like the other Cities of
Denmark, in the year 1443. All which were confirm'd by the large Charters of
Christian the third and
Frideric the second. The Citizens houses till within these few years, were very mean and low, most of them patcht up of wood and mortar; but of late they are grown more curious and expensive in Architecture, and few of their streets are without a considerable number of fair brick buildings. The Cathedral Church, dedicate to St.
Mary, is beautified with a noble Copper Spire, built at the charges of King
Christian the fourth. The Advowsance of this Church belongs to the Professors in the University. The Market-place is exceeding spacious, and no small ornament to the Town. Besides these, the Kings Palace, the Arsenal (which perhaps excels any thing that
Europe affords in this kind), the Observatory, or
Runde taarn, and the adjoining University Church, and Library, the Exchange,
&c. are places richly worth the seeing, and deserve a larger description then the bounds of this short account of the whole Kingdom will permit. The City is governed by four Burgomasters, one whereof is Regent or President for his life. This honour is at present conferr'd on that worthy and learned person
P. John Resenius, Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University at
Copenhagen, and Counsellor to the present King of
Denmark. With him, most of the other Professors of note in this University (as
William Langius, formerly Tutor to this present King
Christian the fifth;
Erasmus Vindingius, Professor of History and Geography and Author of the
Academia Hafniensis, which gives us an exact account of all the famous men that have ever flourished in this University;
Thomas and
Erasmus Bartholini, both well known by their incomparable works,
&c.) are at this day Ministers of State in the Court of
Denmark, and keep only the title and pension of Professors, without being tyed to the performance of the duties.
Amaga or
Amagria (called by the
Danes Amager) is a small Island on the East of
Copenhagen,Am
[...] about six
English miles in length, and four in breadth. It is wonderfully well stock'd with all manner of Fowl and Venison, has in it plenty of Corn, and furnishes the Market at
Copenhagen with weekly supplies of Milk, Butter, Cheese,
&c. whence some think it had its name; for
Amaga, in the old
Teutonic dialect, signifies a Granary or Storehouse; and thence
Drusomagum, Borbetomagum, Duromagum, Neomagum, and other places in
Germany, had their name. And from hence the
French Magazin and
Italian Magasino have their original. There are two Parish Churches in this Isle. The one called by the inhabitants
Hollender Byes Kircke, i.e. the
Dutch Church; from a
[Page][Page]SELANDIAE in Regno Daniae Insulae Chorographica Descriptio.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios; et Mosem Pitt.
VIRO Illustri ac Generoso
DnoGEORGIO SEEFELDO Haereditario in REFFES Regni Daniae Senatori▪ ac Iudici provintiali Selandico▪ Domino ac Patrono plurimum honorando D. D. D. Johannes Janssonius.
[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page][Page 63]Colony of
Hollanders sent hither by
Margaret Archdutchess of
Austria, to be Overseers of the Kitchin-Garden to her Niece
Elizabeth King
Christian the second's Queen. These Gardners have since that time so far encreased their number, that they are not able to live in their first habitations (tho swoln into a Village of half an
English mile in length:) but are of late forced to build themselves a new Town not far from the Western Gate of
Copenhagen. The other Parish Church is called by the
Danes Torne Byes kircke; and belongs to the Natives. On the eight of
October in the year 1658, the
Swedish forces broke into this Island: and the next day burnt down every Village in it. But on the tenth of
December following
Charles Gustavus King of
Sweden, and his General
Wrangel, were forced to leave behind them their Army engaged, and fly hence in a small Fisherman's Catch.
The rest of the great Towns and places of note in this Island are:
Roschild. 1.
Roschild; which takes its name from a river running by the Town, which drives seven mills.
Roe in the antient
Danish Tongue, signifies a King, and
Kille a stream of water. 'Twas formerly the Metropolis of the whole Kingdom: but of late years this City has decayed (and
Copenhagen grown) so fast, that it is scarce remarkable for any thing at this day save the great old Cathedral, the burying place of the Kings of
Denmark; and some small trade. This City was first made a Bishop's See by
Suenotho, King of
England, Denmark, Sweden and
Norway about the year 1012. who gave the Bishoprick of
Roschild (which is now swallowed up of
Copenhagen) to
Gerebrand a Monk. Afterwards
Sueno Gratenhede fortifyed it with a wall, ditch and bulwark.
Lyscander tells us, there were once no less then twenty seven fair Churches in this Town. Among these, I suppose, he reckons the Chappel built by King
Harald, Svenotho's father, in which both he and his son (whose dead corps were carried out of
England to
Roschild to be buried) are entombed. In the old Cathedral, amongst many other rich monuments in honour of several of the
Danish Kings and Queens, stands a fair marble pillar, which
Margaret Queen of
Denmark erected on purpose to hang thereon the Whetstone (which is fastened to it with a chain) which
Albert King of
Sweden, in derision of her Sex, sent her to sharp her needles on. This scoff cost him seven years imprisonment, and a renunciation of all the right he pretended to the Kingdom of
Sweden: for the performance of which Articles the Hans-Towns were sureties.
2.
Elseneur.Elseneur (called otherwise
Helsenoer, Helschenoer, Helsingor, and
Halsingor; as the opposite Castle in
Schonen is by
Adam Bremensis Halsingburg) is so named
q. d. Halsen-ore i. e.
An ear in the neck; because at first a watchtower seated on that neck of the Sea (called by the
Danes Oresundt) which parts
Seeland from
Schonen. Here
Pontanus fancies
Ptolomy's
Hellevones, had their habitation. The chief ornament and strength of this Town laies in
Croneburg, a Royal and impregnable Castle, which commands this side of the
Oresundt with as much case as
Elsingburg secures the other. It is built of hewn Free-stone, brought hither out of
Gothland. This was for many years the seat of the
Danish Kings; who (as may appear from what we have said before touching the revenues of this Crown) had from hence one of the most pleasant and profitable prospects in the whole Kingdom. Every ship that passes this streight is obliged to strike sail to
Croneburg, and that done, the master is to come to a Composition in the City for Custom: upon pain of the confiscation of his vessel and loading.
Frideric the second built the Castle of
Croneburg at his own charges, without a penny Subsidy from his Subjects: and covered it with Copper.
3.
Fredericksburg: called formerly
Ebelholt,Fredericksburg. and only a Monastry dedicated to the Holy Ghost (of which
Johannes Parisiensis, who was afterwards put into the Popish Kalendar of Saints, is said to have been Abbot about the year 1201) till turned into a Castle by King
Frederic the second. The structure was first begun by one
Harlef a
Danish Noble man, who sold it to King
Frideric. After this King's death, his son
Christian the fourth spared no charges in compleating what his father left unfinish'd: but adorned it with a Collection of the richest Pictures, Statues, Hangings, &c. that
Europe could afford. Insomuch, that
Mounsieur l' Espine (a
French writer, who printed his History soon after the finishing of this Royal Palace) does not stick to say,
‘That the world can scarce parellel this piece. Adding further, that here the locks and bars in the windows were all of beaten Silver
&c.’ The foundation of the house is all Freestone; but the upper building brick. It is seated in a pleasant wood about the middle way betwixt
Elsineur and
Copenhagen. The adjoyning Park was first stock'd with fallow Deer sent thither out of
England in the 24. year of the reign of our Queen
Elizabeth.
4.
Ringstede:Ringstede. a Town of the greatest Antiquity of any (excepting
Roschild) in
Denmark: where ly buried many of the
Danish Kings, particularly King
Waldemar the first, and
Eric the Godly. It is seated in the very center of
Seeland, where, destitute of Trade, it decayes dayly.
5.
Sor, Soor or
Soer; seated in a pleasant woody Country between
Slagen and
Ringsiede. Absalon Hvide (Archbishop of
Lunden and Bishop of
Roschild) founded here a fair Monastry about the middle of the twelfth Century, and endowed it with large Revenues for the maintenance of several learned men, who were to be employed in writing and publishing the History of the Acts and Monuments of the Kings and other Heroes of
Denmark. Upon this encouragement,
Saxo Grammaticus first took the pains to collect a vast company of old Historical fragments, and afterwards digested them into a better Order then could rationally be expected from any man bred up in a Nation so unpardonably barbarous as
Denmark, in and before his dayes, is known to have been. Afterwards
Esbern, the said Archbishop's brother, augmented the Revenues by the addition of fourteen Villages; and enlarged the Monastery it self. He dyed within a year after his brother (
A. D. 1202.) and was buried at
Sor. Many years after this, King
Frideric the second removed the School which he had founded at
Fridericksburg (for the education of the young Nobility) to this place: where having encreased the number of both teachers and hearers, he thought it also requisite to enlarge the Income. Which done, of a rich Popish monastery, it became one of the best endowed Free-Schools in the reformed part of Christendome. His son,
Christian the fourth, turned the Free-School into a small University; by setling certain Salaries for the maintenance of a set number of Professors, who were to instruct young Noble men in the principles of several Arts and Sciences, and the rudiments of the
Latin, Greek, Hebrew, French, and
Italian Tongues. Besides, to to this
Gymnasium he annexed an
Academy furnished with fit Masters to teach perfectly all Gentile and Marshal Exercises; as, Dancing, Vaulting, Riding the great horse, &c. Whence some Authors call the University at
Sor, Academiam Equestrem: because at first principally intended for the Education of young Gentlemen in the Acts of
[Page 64]Chivalry, tho afterwards it grew to be the most famous University (for all manner of learning) in the King of
Denmark's Dominions. In the year 1621, the Nunnery of
Mariebo in
Laland was demolished; the Nuns thrown out, and the lands given to this University. But at this day these and all other the large Territories which have been heretofore settled upon the University at
Sor, are in the present King's hand: who threatens dayly to reestablish an University in this place, but without any show of performance. His resolutions I suppose, (if ever he had any such) are in a great measure stopped by the continual disswasion of the Professours at
Copenhagen; who think it very inconsistent with their Interest to have another University erected in their neighbourhood. For heretofore, when any Professor's place was vacant at
Copenhagen, 'twas odds but some brisk fellow from
Sor carried it.
6.
Anderskaw.Anderskaw or
Andersbouw, formerly a great Monastery, now a strong Castle about an
English mile from
Slagen. It is seated in a level Champagn Country, and delicately well built. Here
Frideric the second dyed
A. D. 1548.
7.
Kallenborg.Kallenborg (which
Saxo Grammaticus calls
Kallunda and
Meursius Callundeburgum) was formerly a small Village inhabited by none but Fishermen, and by them named
Herwig. But
Esbern Suare (brother to
Absalon Hvide, abovementioned) turned it into a City about the year 1158, or (as some) 1171, and beautified it with a Castle, Church and several other publique buildings. 'Tis at present a Town of good Trade, having the convenience of as safe an harbour for Ships as any haven in
Denmark.
8.
Kosor.Korsor, so called from the multitude of Crosses erected formerly in the place, out of the abundance of superstitious Zeal in the Inhabitants.
9.
Koge.Koge, Coagium: a small but very populous and rich City; about sixteen
English miles from
Copenhagen. It is a place much thronged with Corn-merchants and Fishmongers; the Commodities, pleasant situation, &c. of this City are expressed by
Westhow a
Danish Poet, in three Distichs thus:
Fluctibus Arctoi sat bella Coagia ponti
Alluor: hinc campus, subjacet, inde nemus.
Quae silvae utilitas, agri emolumenta, fretique
Commoda sunt, meus haec omnia civis habet.
Dat glandes & ligna nemus, dat pascua campus,
Piscibus & variis mercibus unda beat.
LALAND
LAland or
Lawland (so called from its low situation) is an Island about 32
English miles in length, and 20 in breadth. It is divided from
Seeland by the narrow bay
Gronesond, or (as some Maps call it)
Goldersond: and from
Falster by a bay much narrower then the former.
It is a very fruitful Country, and affords great quantities of Corn, and good store of rich pasturage.
Lyscander says of this Dukedome, That there are in it four several
Gentes (I suppose he means
Herrits or Lordships) and as many Cities. The great Towns, or Cities he speaks of, are: 1.
Naschaw or
Nachscouw; which (together with the adjoyning Monastery) was stormed, taken and burnt by the
Lubeckers in the year 1510. 2.
Sascoping. 3.
Newstadt; once famous for a noble Monastery built here
A. D. 1286. 4.
Lavinscoping. Besides these, the Nunnery of
Mariaebo (spoken of before in the Description of
Sor) was as considerable and remarkable a place as any in the whole Island.
Other Islands, less considerable, in the
Baltic Sea.
WHat Islands have been of late delivered up by the
Danes into the hands of the
Swedes upon the Ratification of Treaties and Leagues, may be seen in the description of
Swedeland. Of those that remain still in the hands of the King of
Denmark; these we have mentioned, are of most note: and 'twere irrational to expect a particular account of those millions of diminutive Islands that lay scattered along the Coasts of
Seeland, Schonen, Jutland, &c. Among them, these following are all that are worth the taking notice of.
1.
Falster:Falster. a considerable Island adjoyning to
Laland. It is not above 16
English miles in length, but so fruitful, that it furnishes not only its own Inhabitants, but a great part of the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg, and several other parts of
Germany, with Corn. Great Towns of note in this Island are: 1.
Nycoping; which Dr.
Heylin (for I cannot find that he borrowed the expression from any other writer) calls
the Naples of Denmark, from the pleasantness of its situation and uniformity in building. 2.
Stabecoping; a place of some Trade, upon the account of Passengers, who come daily this way betwixt
Seeland and
Germany.
2.
Mona or
Meun.Mona. A chalky Island to the Northeast of
Falster: which serves for a good Landmark to the
German Vessels that trade in these Seas.
Lyscander tells us, 'twas formerly annex'd to the stipend of the
Danish Admiral, as a place the fittest of any in the King of
Denmark's Dominions for such an Officer to reside in. The only Town of consequence in it is
Stege; which bravely withstood the
Lubeckers in the year 1510, and forced them at last to retreat.
3.
Langeland.Langeland. A narrow Island betwixt
Funen and
Laland; about 28
English miles in length and only 8 in breadth, whence it has its name. There are in it 16 Parish Churches, and a great number of Noblemens houses; besides the impregnable Castle of
Traneker, which is admirably well provided with all manner of Military ammunition.
Rutcoping may pass for (what the
Danish writers will needs have it to be) a City: but 'tis a miserably poor one, and in no great probability of being advanced by Traffic.
4.
Alsen.Alsen. A small Isle over against the Bay of
Flensburg in the Dukedom of
Sleswic; of which it is a part, and therefore only subject to the Kings of
Denmark as Dukes of
Sleswic. The learned and Noble
Danish Antiquary
Rantzow, thinks the
Elysii Arii and
Manimi mentioned by
Tacitus, were the antient Inhabitants of this Island,
Ar and
Meun; and that these three Isles have the same names at this day (saving only a small alteration, such as may easily happen in the revolution of a few years) which they had when that learned
Roman writ his Annals. This Isle is every where either exceeding fruitful or very pleasant: and so populous, that several thousands of stout fighting men have been raised in a very short time out of its four Towns and thirteen Parishes.
Sunderburg (heretofore the usual seat of the Dukes of
Sleswic, and to this day one of the strongest holds which the King of
Denmark has) is the chief Town in the Island.
5.
Femeren.Femeren or
Fimbria (which some curious Etymologists have ventured to derive from
Cimbria) is a small Island on the Coast of
Wagerland; from which it is separated by a very narrow channel. This piece of ground has always been lookt upon as one of the most considerable keys of
Denmark;
[Page][Page]LALANDIAE et FALSTRIAE Accurata Descriptio.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios▪ et Mosem Pitt.
[Page][Page 65]either to exclude or let in the Imperialists. And therefore
Christian IV. thought the
Germans would do him less harm in running over all
Jutland, then if they should make themselves masters of this Isle. Whereupon, in the year 1628, he took care to put strong Garrisons into every place of moment in it; and to fortifie the old Castles and Towns which his predecessors had suffer'd to decay, and sleighted.
On the coasts of
Jutland, between the Promontory of
Schaghen and the Isle
Funen, there are several little inconsiderable Islands, as
Anholt, Lasso, Niding, Helm, Tune, Kitholm, Jordholm, Samsoe, &c. Among these, the three first are notorious for the dangerous Sands which lye round them; whence 'tis an ordinary proverb, used by the inhabitants here,
Lassoe, Niding, und Anholt
Maecken dat menich stuerman niet werdt oldt,
i. e.
Lassoe, Niding,
and Anholt
Hinder shipmen to grow old.
Of the ancient Inhabitants of the Isles in the
Baltic Sea.
THat the
Dani Insulares (as
Saxo calls the inhabitants of these Isles) are all of one extraction, will be found a question very disputable, after a diligent enquiry into the different customs and languages used in several of the
Baltic Islands.
Ptolomy, we know, and most of the ancient Geographers, make
Scandinavia, or
Schonen, an Island; but of so large a bulk, that
Alter Terrarum Orbis, is one of the most usual names they give it. This,
Pliny tells us, was by some of the
Greek writers call'd
Baltia; which by
Pytheas is corrupted into
Basilia. Now, if we grant, that this Continent (which the ancients mistook for an Island) were named
Baltia [...], because the noblest Isle in this Sea (which seems the most probable conjecture), then it will not by any means be irrational to conclude, that in all probability the inhabitants of all these petit Islands were only so many small branches of the old warlike Nation of the
Goths, whom the most learned Historians place in
Schonen.
But then 'twill still be doubted, whether these
Goths were not a Nation wholly distinct from the
Getes mention'd in
Jutland; and consequently, whether those that inhabit the Isles upon the coasts of
Schonen, be not descended of another stock then they that live near
Jutland can reasonably pretend to.
Pontanus is exceeding angry at
Jornandes, Orosius, and others, for affirming, that the
Getes and
Goths are one and the same people; but, as I conceive, without any great reason. For if (as is prov'd in the description of
Jutland) the
Getes gave name to a great part of the
Cimbrian Chersonese; these two Nations are easilier brought together then he is aware of. And could we once perswade
Pontanus's admirers to grant, that the
Getae, Gutae, Vitae or
Witae, were the ancient inhabitants of
Jutland (as seems plain from the arguments and authorities of learned men before alledged), 'twill be no difficult matter to evince the truth of this assertion,
That the Getes
and Goths,
together with all the inhabitants of the Danish
Isles in the Baltic
Sea, are originally one and the same Nation. 'Tis true, in some small Islands in and near the
Finnic Gulph, the people use a language altogether unintelligible to a true
Dane or
Swede; but further westward, the languages spoken in all the
Baltic Islands, are so many dialects of the
Gothic tongue. And the old
Runic monuments, daily found in most Provinces of the
Danish and
Swedish dominions, prove manifestly the same words and characters to have been used in
Schonen, Jutland, and the intermediate Islands.
From the difference of manners, customs, habits,
&c. in these Isles; no more can be conclucluded then, that some, wanting the convenience of traffick and correspondence with other Nations, are forced to content themselves with the rude and ungentile ways of living, taught them by their homebred Ancestors; whilst others, who lay more in the road of Merchant-ships, must needs insensibly admit of a daily alteration both in manners and language.
WHat the
Edda,Name. and other Mythological writers, tell us of
Nor (son of their God
Thor, & Grandchild to
Woden) the first grand Captain of the
Norwegians, from whom that people, and their Country, fetch (say these men) their names; merits just as much credit as the
Danish stories of their King
Dan. The truth is,
Norway (or
Norweg, as the
Germans write it; whence the
Latin word
Norwegia) is only
via seu tractus septentrionalis, i. e.
a country situated towards the North. Hence in the
Danish, Swedish, &
Norvegian tongues, 'tis to this day called
Norrike, or the
Northern Kingdom (
Pliny's
Nerigon is only a corruption of this word); and we find, that anciently all the
Cimbrian Kingdoms were named
Regna Norica. By
Helmoldus the
Norwegians are called
Nordliudi; which word is not (as Dr.
Heylin guesses) derived from the
Dutch word
Nordt and the
French lieu; for
Nordliod or
Nordtleut, in the Northern languages, is no more then
the people of the North. In the Preface to our King
Aelfred's
Anglo-Saxonic Version of
Orosius, this Kingdom is stiled Norðh;manna land,
the Country of the Normans. Adam Bremensis calls it
Normannia. And we know
Rollo brought his
Normans out of these parts.
This Kingdom is bounded on the South with the
Baltic Straits,
Bounds. which separate it from
Jutland; on the North and West with the Northern Ocean; on the East with
Sweden and
Lapland. The whole length of it (from the
Baltic Sea as far as
Finmark) is reckoned to be about 210
German miles.
The Eastern part of
Norway is very thin peopled;
Soil. being a Country of nothing but inaccessible and craggy mountains. Towards the South there is greater store of inhabitants; who dwell in pleasant valleys, encircled with barren and rocky hills. The rest of the Country is overspread with woods; which furnish the greatest part of
Europe with Deal-boards, and Masts for Ships.
The long ridge of high mountains which divide this Kingdom from
Sweden (where
Pliny places his
Sevo) are continually covered with snow; whence intolerable sharp winds are sent down into the valleys beneath, which by this means become desolate and unfruitful. But more Southerly, and all along the Western coasts, the air is much more temperate; and would be healthful enough, if not corrupted by the putrefaction and stench of a certain kind of Rats (called by the inhabitants
Lemmer) which infect the whole Country with the Epidemical disease of the Jaundice and a giddiness in the head, which is most especially apt to seize on strangers, unacquainted with the danger, and unarm'd against the distemper.
In the valleys there are good breeds of Cattel;
Commodities. insomuch that the inhabitants export yearly great quantities of Butter, Tallow, Hides, and Cheese. Their chief Grain is Barley. The woods afford Timber, Pitch, Tar, rich Furs, and great store of Filberds. Besides these commodities, they have a good trade from their Stock-fish and Train-Oyl, which is vended all
Europe over.
Christian IV. King of
Denmark, employ'd several Artists in the search of some Silver and Gold Mines, in the year 1623. And 'tis said, some lumps of the Oar of both those mettals were here found and presented to the King. But this discovery never turned to any considerable account. For the Natives were utterly ignorant of the art of refining any kind of Minerals themselves; and altogether unwilling to admit into their Country any foreigners skill'd in that way.
The inhabitants are much of the same complexion and humour with the
Danes. [...] They are generally effeminate and lazy; not so much thro any fault of nature, as the want of employment. For the King of
Denmark seldom or never makes use of this Nation in his wars; as being loth to trust them with arms. The ancient
Norwegians (as well as their neighbours) are every where reported to have been notorious Pyrats; but at this day the Seas are scarce in any place in
Europe so secure from robbery as on the coasts of
Norway. The cause of this alteration can scarce be attributed to the modern honesty of this Kingdom, so far excelling that of former days; but rather to the general poverty and mean spiritedness of the inhabitants, into which the
Danish rigor has forc'd them. For they have little or no Shipping allow'd them; and are too low kept to pretend to hector and domineer.
Their diet is (what they furnish other Countries with) Stockfish,
[...] and a coarse kind of Butter and Cheese. Their usual drink,
Rostock Ale. In this they commonly drink three draughts; one in remembrance of God, the second to the Kings health, and the third to the Queens.
As
Norway is still reckon'd a distinct Kingdom from
Denmark; [...] so it had formerly its own independent Kings, who sometimes Lorded it over the Monarchs of
Sweden and
Denmark. Nevertheless, the account we have of these Princes (from the
Chronica Norvagica, published by
Johannes Slangerupensis in the year 1594, and
Olaus Wormius in the year 1633, and the relations of other Historians) is so imperfect and incredible, that 'twould but waste paper to give the Reader a catalogue of them. The last King that sway'd the Scepter in
Norway, was
Haquin; who in the year 1363 married
Margaret eldest daughter of
Waldemar III. King of
Denmark; thereupon uniting the two Kingdoms. Now, tho King
Haquin had only one son by Queen
Margaret (
Olaus, for some while King of
Denmark) who dyed without issue; yet the
Danes, having once got footing in this Kingdom, were resolved to keep their station; and therefore, to secure themselves from all future insurrection and rebellion, they immediately put strong Garrisons into all the Cities and Forts of consequence in the Nation.
Since it is manifest (from the language, manners,
&c. of the inhabitants) that the
Norwegians and
Islanders are both one people; what the Reader misses in the general description of
Norway, may possibly be met with in the following one of
Island.
THis Prefecture takes its name from the chief City in it; seated on a rocky Peninsula, and famous for its great trade in Herrings and other Sea-fish.
This City (with two more of less note,
Congel and
Oddawald) and the adjoining Country are commanded by the strong Castle of
Bahus, now in the hands of the King of
Sweden. It was first built by
Haquin IV. King of
Norway, about the year 1309, upon a steep rock on the bank of the river
Trollet; and was then look'd upon as the best Fort that King had in his dominions, and a sufficient Bulwark against the daily assaults and incursions of the
Swedes and
Westro-Goths.
The Bishopricks of
Anslo and
Staffenger, with the Province of
Aggerhuse.
ANslo (called by the inhabitants
Opslo, and by some
Latin writers
Asloa) was first built by King
Harold, cotemporary with
Sueno Esthritius King of
Denmark, who frequently kept his residence in this City. Here is held the chief Court of Judicature for all
Norway; wherein all causes and suits at Law are heard and determined before the Governor, who acts as Vice-Roy of the Kingdom. The Cathedral is dedicated to St.
Alward; who took great pains in preaching the Gospel to the
Norwegian Heathens. In this Church is to be shew'n the Sword of
Haquin, one of their ancientest Kings; a signal testimony (if the stories they tell of it be true) of the strength and admirable art of some
Norwegians of former ages. The hilt of it is made of Crystal, curiously wrought and polished; whence
Olaus Magnus will needs conclude, that the use of Crystal was anciently much more ordinary in
Norway then it is at this day in any part of
Europe.
Not far from
Opslo, on the other side of the Bay, stands the Castle of
Aggerhusen; memorable for the brave resistance it made the
Swedish Army in the year 1567, which besieg'd it hotly eighteen weeks together; but was at last beat off, and forced shamefully to retire.
About twenty
German miles Northward of
Opslo, lies the City
Hammar; formerly a Bishops See, but at present under the jurisdiction of the Bishop of
Opslo. Near this Town is the Island
Moos; where (if we believe
Olaus Magnus) a huge and monstrous Serpent appears constantly before any grand alteration in the State or Government of the Kingdom of
Norway.
In this Province, besides the places already mentioned, stand the Cities of
Tonsberg, Fridericstadt, Saltsburgh, and
Scheen; which have all a considerable trade from the Copper and Iron Mines, which hereabouts are in greater numbers then in any other part of the Kingdom. 'Twas in this Province that the Silver Mines (mention'd before) were first discover'd at the expence of
Christian IV. King of
Denmark; and some of the adjoining hills are by the neighbourhood to this day called
Silver-bergen, or
the mountains of Silver.
To these Mines, and the lofty woods of Pines and Fir-trees (with which this part of the Country is overspread) the Kingdom of
Norway owes the greatest part of, if not all, its trade.
The City of
Staffenger lies in 59 degrees (some reckon 60, and a great many odd minutes) of Latitude. It is seated in a Peninsuia, upon a great Bay of the Northern Ocean full of small Islands, and guarded by the strong Castle of
Doeswick, which lies about two
English miles from the Town. In Civil affairs this City is under the jurisdiction of the Governor of
Bergenhusen; tho it has its own peculiar Bishop constantly residing in the Town. The whole Bishopric is divided into the several Districts of
Stavangersteen, Dalarne, Jaren, Listerleen, Mandalsleen, Nedenesleen, and
Abygdelag. Thomas Conrad Hvegner (Bishop of this Diocess in the year 1641) took the pains to collect a great number of
Runic inscriptions, which lay scatter'd up and down his Diocess; some of which are published by
Wormius, who further informs us, that this
Conrad's predecessor (whose name he omits) writ a Topographical description of this City and Bishoprick.
Beyond the Bay appears the Island
Schutenes, three
German miles in length, but scarce half an one in breadth. Between this Island (which has in it several considerable Villages) and the Continent runs up a narrow Frith to
Bergen; which is called by the
Dutch Merchants,
T' Liedt van Berghen.
To the Bishopric of
Staffenger belongs the Province of
Tillemarch, or
Thylemarch; which gave
Procopius the first grounds for that assertion of his, which he defends with so great vehemency,
viz. that
Scandinavia (taken in its largest extent, of which
Thylemarch is a very inconsiderable part) is the ancient
Thule. The Parish of
Hollen in this Province is very remarkable for a Church-yard, or burying place, on the top of a Church, dedicated to St.
Michael, which is cut out of a great high rock, call'd by the Vicenage
Vear, upon the Lake
Nordsee, half a mile distant from
Scheen. Wormius thinks, 'twas formerly an Heathenish Temple; but converted to Christian uses upon the first planting of the Gospel in this Kingdom.
The Prefecture and Bishoprick of
Berghen.
THis Bishoprick (the most fruitful and pleasantest part of all
Norway) lies to the North of
Aggerhusen, in the middle or heart of the Kingdom. It derives its name from the fair and noble
Emporium or Mart-Town of
Berghen; or else from the strong Castle of
Berghenhusen, the usual seat of the Vice-Roy of
Norway, at a small distance from
Berghen Northward.
Berghen (an ancient and famous Sea-Port Town mentioned by
Pomponius Mela and
Pliny) is the Granary and Magazine of the whole Kingdom of
Norway. It lies distant from
Bahusen about an hundred
German miles by Sea, and sixty by land; from
Truntheim as many; from
Schagen, the outmost Promontory of
Jutland, almost eighty. Some have fetcht its name from the
Norwegian verb
Bergen, which signifies
to hide or
conceal; because the Haven being surrounded with hills, seems to be a kind of sculking-place for Ships, where Vesfels of two hundred Tun and upwards ride in a spatious and most secure Harbour, free from all danger of wind and weather. But we need not trouble our selves any further for the derivation of the name then to consider, that
Berghen in the
Norwegian language signifies
mountains; and
Berghen-husen, a company of houses among the hills. The buildings in this City, till within these few years, were exceeding mean and contemptible; most of them of wood, cover'd with green turf, and therefore frequently burnt down. But of late, the
Hamburghers, Lubeckers, Hollanders, and others that trade this way, have beautified the Town with an Exchange and a great many private houses of credit. The most peculiar trade of this City lies in a kind of
[Page 68]Stock-fish, catcht upon these coasts, and thence called usually by the
Norway Merchants
Berghenvisch. This the Fishermen take in winter, commonly in
January, for the conveniency of drying it in the cold and sharp air. Besides, hither Furs of all sorts, and vast quantities of dry'd Fish, Butter, Tallow, Hides,
&c. are brought from all parts of
Norway, to be shipt off into other Countries. The Townsmen, not many years ago (observing the daily encrease of their trade, and the great concourse of strangers which it drew from all parts; and fearing they themselves might at last be prejudiced by an unlimited and general admission of foreign Tradesmen and Merchants into their City) made an order, that whoever would, after such a time, be admitted a freeman of the Town, should either be whipt (at a Game instituted upon this occasion, and call'd by them
Gantenspill), or rowl'd in mud and dirt, or lastly hung in a basket over some intolerable and filthy smoak. This hard usage quickly diminished the number of foreigners, who fancied it scarce worth their while to purchase their freedom at so dear and scandalous a rate. But of late, the industry and skill, as well as number of the inhabitants encreasing, these barbarous customs are laid aside, and the Citizens themselves are now able to export what was formerly fetcht away from them. The Bishop of this Diocess was heretofore under the jurisdiction of the Bishop of
Truntheim.
To the Governor of
Berghen are subject the Prefectures of
Sudhornleen, Nordhornleen, Soghne, Sudfiord, Norfiord, and
Sundmerleen.
The Prefecture and Bishoprick of
Nidrosia or
Truntheim.
THE fourth Castle and Government in
Norway, is that of the City
Nidrosia (as it was anciently called from the river
Nider, on which 'tis seated) or
Truntheim; formerly the Metropolis of the Kingdom, and the seat of the King and Archbishop of
Norway. Pontanus somewhere calls this City
the Cabinet of all the Norwegian monuments; but
Wormius found no great reason to confer so honourable a title upon it, when (after a diligent search into the Antiquities, old monuments and reliques of the primitive inhabitants of this Kingdom) he met with no more then three
Runic inscriptions in this whole Diocess. The conveniency of the Haven makes this place resorted to by some Mariners and Merchants to this day; but the ruines are so great that it looks more like a Village then City; not having had any opportunity of recovering its former splendor since it was burnt down in the year 1522. Its houses are a company of old fashion'd and rotten buildings; and the Kings Palace is decay'd below the meanness of an
English Cottage. However, something of its ancient grandeur still appears in the Cathedral, dedicated to St.
Olaus; which (tho almost consumed by fire, yet) by the ruines shews it self to have been one of the most magnificent and largest structures in the world. In this Church the Huntsmen were wont to make a yearly offering of the skins of the largest and stoutest white Bears, which they kill'd, for the Priest to tread upon at Divine Service.
Groneland and
Iseland were formerly parts of the Diocess of
Truntheim, but now this Bishoprick is not of so large an extent. In the Castle resides the Governor of the whole Prefecture of
Truntheim; who has under him several other Governors of lesser Provinces.
In the Country a little beyond this City there grows no wood at all. But, instead thereof, the inhabitants make use of fish-bones, as well to build their houses and for several implements of housholdstuff as fuel; and with the fat of the same fish they feed their Lamps in winter.
The Prefecture of
Truntheim in the year 1658, was by the
Danes surrendred up to the
Swedes by a publick Treaty of Peace. The next year they wrested it again out of the hands of the
Swedish King; but resign'd it back at the Treaty of
Roschild.
Halgoland (the Country of
Ohther King
Aelfred's Geographer) is a part of this Prefecture. Of which that Author gave this account to the King his Master, ꝧ nan man ne bude be Nor ðh;an him.
i. e. That no inhabited Country lay further North then this. But the great fishing trade upon these Coasts have made the
English better acquainted with these parts, then this Gentleman was with his own Country.
The Prefecture of
Wardhus.
THE Castle of
Wardhus (the seat of the fifth and last great Governor in the Kingdom of
Norway) has its name from the Island
Warda, in which it stands. This Isle lyes about two
German miles from the main land of
Finmark; being near twelve
English miles in compass. The inhabitants of this and the two adjoining Isles (which in
Finmark go all under the general name of
Trunsolem) live only upon Stockfish; which they dry in the frost. They have no manner of Bread nor drink; but what is brought them from other places. Some small stock of Cattel they have; but only such as can make a shift to live of their masters diet, dryed fish.
Finmark or Norwegian Lapland.
ON the North of
Norway lies
Finmark, or (as the Natives use to call it)
Taakemark; which perhaps was the ancient habitation of the
Finni, mentioned by
Tacitus. For the character which that Historian gives us of those people is very applicable to the modern
Finmarkers. The Finni, says he,
are a people extraordinary savage, and miserably poor. They have neither Horses, Arms, House, nor Home; but feed upon roots, and such provision as their Bows and Arrows can procure, and are clothed with the skins of wild beasts. To this day
Finmark is not divided (as all other Countries generally are) into distinct Lordships and Inheritances; but, as in Mr.
Hobbes's state of nature, every private man pretends a right and title to every part of the Land, and the strength of the Arm is the only Judge of controversies. When fishing season comes in, they throng to the Seacoasts; and when that is over, retire again into the uplands. Only the
Islanders in
Heymeland keep their stations, and have their Churches in
Trom, Suro, Maggero, and other places.
The language, manners, and habits of the people, are the same as in the
Swedish Lapland; of which an account has been already given.
Of the ancient Commerce between the old
Britains, English, and
Norwegians.
THo the relations which our
English writers give us of the prowess and brave exploits of the valiant
British King
Arthur, savour too much of Romance; yet, in the main, our best Historians agree unanimously in this, that no Prince ever conquer'd more of the Northern
[Page 65]Kingdoms then this King.
W. Lambert, in his
[...], assures us, that all the Islands, Nations, and Kingdoms, in the North and East Seas, as far as
Russia, were tributary to him. And
Geoffry of
Monmouth says,
‘King
Arthur at one time summon'd no less then six Kings to appear before him at his Court in
Britain, viz. 1.
Guillaumur, King of
Ireland. 2.
Malvase, King of
Iseland. 3.
Doldaff, King of
Gothland. 4.
Gunnase, King of
Orkney. 5.
Lot, King of
Norway. And 6.
Aschile, King of
Denmark.’ Upon these conquests, the Kingdom of
Norway was annexed to the Crown of
England, and the
Norwegians incorporated into one Nation with the
Britains. But this amity was of no long continuance; for
Norway was at too great a distance, and its people too stiff-necked, to be kept in subjection.
In the days of our
Saxon Kings a continual and uninterrupted war between this Nation and the Northern Kingdoms, put a stop to all trade in the
British and
Norwegian Seas. But as soon as the
Danes had made themselves Masters of this Island, commerce was again renewed; which lasted till the
English took their opportunity to-shew the world, by rejecting the power of
Denmark and all manner of communication with that people, how highly they resented the tyrannical usurpation of foreign Princes.
Since the Conquest,
England has seldom or never wanted a considerable Fleet of
Norway Merchantmen.
William of
Malmesbury (who dyed in the year 1142) tells us, That in his time
Bristow was a place much frequented by the
Irish and
Norwegians. Hackluit gives an account of certain Treaties concerning the Northern trade between our King
Henry the third, and
Haquin King of
Norway. He that will take the pains to read over the agreement between
Henry IV. King of
England, and the Company of Merchants from the
Hans Towns (set down at large by Mr.
Hackluit in the first Volume of his
English Voyages,
p. 146.) will find a considerable Register of our Merchantmen taken on the Coasts, and out of the Havens of
Norway; and may thence be enabled to give a tolerable guess at the number of our
Norway Merchants in those days.
In the twenty-fifth year of the reign of our present Soveraign
Charles II. an Act pass'd for the encouragement of the
Greenland and
Eastland trades,
&c. In which 'twas order'd,
That it should be lawful to and for every person and persons, Native or Foreigner, from and after the first day of May, 1673,
at all times to have free liberty to trade into and from Sweden, Denmark,
and Norway. This, and several other clauses of the same Act, which take off a great part of the custom formerly paid upon the importation of any
East-land commodity, have encouraged great numbers of Merchants and others to traffick in these Northern Seas, and improv'd the trade of
Greenland, and
Norway, far beyond the example of former ages. For (tho the advantages that can be hoped for from these kind of Voyages be not answerable to what may be expected out of the
Levant and
American plantations, yet) the small danger and charges these men are exposed to are strong inducements to venture a voyage; wherein the hazard is not great, nor any way proportionable to the prospect of gain. Besides, in the Act before mention'd, 'tis provided,
That whatsoever person or persons, subjects of this Realm, shall desire to be admitted into the fellowship of Merchants of Eastland, shall be admitted into the said fellowship, paying for his admission the sum of forty shillings, and no more. Which is a sum exceedingly inconsiderable, if compared with the fees paid upon admission into some other companies.
THE
Fero Islands are only so many high and rocky mountains in the Northern Seas, divided from one another by narrow Friths and rapid Currents, and inclosing a larger or lesser circuit of stony valley, cover'd over with a turf of about two foot thick. They are so called from
Fare, which in the language of the Natives signifies a
Ferry; from the many Ferries or Crossings of the water from one Island to another.
They are sixteen in number: 1.
Fugloe, or
Fowl-Island, about three
English miles long, and two broad. 2.
Swino, in which is a pleasant valley of a mile in length. 3.
Videroe, six miles long, and three broad. 4.
Bordoe, six miles in length, and a mile broad; famous for a good harbour, call'd by the Natives
Vaag. 5.
Cunoe, of the same bigness. 6.
Kalsoe, something longer and broader then either of the former. 7.
Osteroe, twenty miles long, and in some places two, in others four miles broad. 8.
Stromoe, twenty-four miles long, and eight broad. In this Island stands
Thors-Haven, the Metropolis and Town of greatest Traffick in all the
Fero Islands. 9.
Wagoe, a round piece of ground, of about eight miles in Diameter. 10.
Migness. 11.
Rolter, a mile long, and half a mile broad. 12.
Sandoe, eight miles long, and four miles broad. 13.
Sknoe, three miles long, and one in breadth. 14.
Storetdiemen. 15.
Lille-Diemen. 16.
Sideroe, twenty miles long, and eight broad.
The air in these Islands is in summer temperately warm; not very hot at any time. In the coldest winter the frost is never so violent as to cause ice in any of the Bays; so that Horses and Sheep lye in the fields the whole winter long. They have never any Thunder in the Summer, but frequently in the Spring, Autumn, and Winter; which is then generally accompanied with a storm, and followed by showers of rain. The air, of it self, is wholesome; free from the Plague, Small-Pox, or any contagious disease, except brought in by foreigners; so that the inhabitants are commonly long-liv'd. However in some of the Islands the Natives are exceedingly subject to rheums, which cause violent coughs and headachs; both which diseases they cure by drinking soure Whey, as hot as they can endure it. Besides these, the Scurvy, Leprosie, and a kind of feaverish distemper (called by the Natives
Landfarsoet) are Epidemical illnesses which reign in several of the Isles; but seldom or never turn to mortal diseases.
The Southern Islands produce great store of Barley (tho hardly any other grain comes to maturity), insomuch that a Tun of seed will ordinarily yeild twenty or thirty Tun of grain. The pasture grounds afford great plenty of good and sweet grass. These the inhabitants call
Fiedelands; and take care commonly that they lye open to the North and North-East winds. In some of these fields they have stocks of as large and fat Oxen as any other part of
Europe affords.
The Islands are all of them plentifully stor'd with all manner of medicinal plants, requisite for the cure of those distempers to which the inhabitants are most inclined. Amongst the rest, you may every where meet with great quantities of Scurvy-grass, Water-cresses, Sorrel,
&c. They have great store of Angelica; which grows as well on the tops of high hills as in the open fields. This commonly makes one of their most delicate dishes at all entertainments. Besides, the
Radix Rhodia (call'd in their language
Hielpe-Rod) is no where met with in so great plenty as in these Islands, upon the banks of running streams and Lakes. The distilled water of this plant is here made use of upon all occasions, as Rosewater with us in
England.
Here are several sorts of Fowl; as Doves, Stares, Owls, Sparrow-Hawks, Crows, and Ravens (many of which are white), Grellings,
&c. Their chief Sea-fowl is a kind of Teal, about the bigness of a Crow, with a yellow, long, and round bill; a great enemy to, and persecutor of the Raven. The Eyder (a sort of Duck, which yeilds the Eyder-down) is a Fowl peculiar to these Islands. This Bird usually pulls the down from her own breast to build her nest withall. When her young ones are fledg'd and gone, the inhabitants take away the down and cleanse it for use. If the feathers be pull'd off by mens hands, they are good for nothing, but immediately rot away. Another notable sort of bird they have, which they call an Imbrim, with a long neck and beak, the back grey and checquer'd with white spots, with a white ring about the neck. This bird has two holes under her wings, each large enough to hold an egg; here 'tis thought she hatches two eggs at once, being never seen with above two young ones at a time, nor known to come ashore.
The adjoining Seas furnish the inhabitants with Cod, Whiting, large Flounders,
&c. besides Murts, a kind of Pilchards, so plentiful in these parts, that the Havens and Creeks are fill'd with them. Of these (with the Seals, Grind-whales, and Dogfish, which were formerly caught in great numbers upon their Coasts) the inhabitants of the
Fero-Islands made anciently a vast advantage; but of late years their fishing-trade is strangely decayed.
These Islands were first inhabited in the reign of
Harold (surnam'd the
fair-hair'd) King of
Norway, in the year 868. For that King, having taken a resolution to reduce all
Norway under the subjection of one Prince, fell foul upon all the petit Princes in that Kingdom; whose subjects (being by this means either undone by the wars, or dispossess'd of their inheritances) resolv'd to seek out other habitations, and (under the conduct of one
Grimar Camban, a Pyrate) at last seated themselves in these Islands.
The people are generally humble in conversation, civil in carriage, and courteous in speech, especially to strangers, whom they entertain with a great deal of hospitality and respect. They are obedient and liberal to their Magistrates, and very charitable to the poor. The more beggerly sort of them will filch for their bellies, but never lay their hands on Gold or Silver; insomuch that if one of these poor pilferers come into a rich mans house, 'tis ten to one but he pinches an horn
[Page][Page]REGNI NORVEGIAE Nova et Accurata descriptio.F. Lamb Sculp.
To the Worp.
ll Mark CottleEsqRegiste
r of the Prerogative Court this Map is Humbly Dedicated
[Page]EPISCOPATUS BERGENSIS.Sumptibus Janssonio-Waesbergiorum, et Mosis Pitt.
[Page]Nova et accurata Tabula EPISCOPATVVM STAVANGRIENSIS, BERGENSIS et ASLOIENSIS Vicinarumque aliquot territoriorumExcudebant Janssonio-Waesbergii, et Moses Pitt.[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page][Page 67]spoon, if laid in his way, but will be sure to leave a Silver one behind him.
Their diet is moderate and frugal; on milk, fish, gruel, and flesh. They dry both their fish and flesh in the wind, without salt; having windhouses built for this purpose. After the flesh is dry'd, they boil it in water, and thicken the broth with Barly-meal; which is reckoned one of their greatest delicacies.
The men wear woollen Shirts, flannel Trowces and Wastcoats, with short loose Coats of the same. The women, rich and poor, go all alike in strait Gowns without skirts. Their Stomachers are commonly large, and adorn'd with thin guilt gingling plates of Tin. Their Shoes (which have no soles, but are made of pieces of Leather drawn together at the heels and toes, and fasten'd with a string or ribband above the ancle) are of sheepskin for the women, and tann'd Neats-leather for the men. They lye on beds of Hay, overspread with pieces of Flannel.
The
Norwegian tongue was heretofore generally spoken in the
Fero-Islands; but of late years the
Danish dialect has much prevail'd. However in the Northern Islands their language is for the greatest part made up of
Norwegian words and phrases, tho the Southern inhabitants make use of a quite different dialect.
The whole dominion of these Islands is divided into the six districts of
Norderoe, Osteroe, Stromoe, Waagoe, Sandoe, and
Sanderoe. To each of these districts belongs a Sheriff, who, as Judge, determines all causes and controversies of less moment. These Sheriffs gather the Kings tythes; and put in execution all orders they receive from the Kings Commissary. The people are governed by the Laws of
Norway; having no peculiar Laws of their own. They have a general Sessions held once a year, in the spring time, at
Thorshaven, in which the Kings Commissary, or Bayliff, presides as Judge, being assisted by the six Sheriffs; who exhibit to the Court all Law-suits, either Civil or Criminal, which come not under the cognizance of their petit Commission. Besides these, there are thirty-six more (six for each district) chosen, like our Jury-men, to assist the Commissary in pronouncing of sentence; and a Recorder appointed to register the proceedings and sentence.
The Ecclesiastical affairs are governed by a Synod of the Priests or Ministers; who meet and sit once a year. Out of the whole Synod one is elected to preside over the rest, with the title of
Provost.
These people were first converted to Christianity in the fourth year of the reign of
Olaus Trygeson King of
Denmark in the year 1000, by
Sigismund Bresteson, a
Ferroyer born, and sent into his own Country by the said King for this purpose. After the
Augsburg Confession was embraced in
Denmark and
Norway, it soon reached these Islands. There are at this day thirty-nine Parishes in all the Islands; which are supplyed by so many Pastors of the
Lutheran Religion. Besides Sundays, Holidays, and the usual days of prayer, as in other places, these men observe yearly six peculiar days of Prayer,
viz. three in
Ascention-week, and three in
Michaelmas-week.
They have but one publick School among them; which was endowed by King
Christian IV. and
Nicolas Trolle, formerly Governor of
Roschild and Vice-Admiral of
Denmark. This furnishes the University of
Copenhagen oft times with as able Scholars as any other School in the King of
Denmarks dominions.
The chief Commodities of these Islands are Skins, Feathers, Tallow, Train-oyl, and Stockins; upon all which there is a particular price set. Stockins are the chief staple commodity they have; in making of which, all the inhabitants (rich and poor, Priests and Plowmen) are forced to employ themselves to help out the small incomes of their mean possessions and inconsiderable stipends.
Of the Isle of SCHETLAND.
SChetland (or
Hetland, as
Arngrim Jonas will have the word writ) is an Island lying between the
Fero-Islands and the Promontory of
Schagen in
Jutland.
It has been long a dispute amongst the best Geographers, whether this be not the ancient
Thule? Gasper Peucer tells us (and our learned
Cambden encourages us to believe him) that this Island is called by the Northern Mariners to this day
Thilensell. Pomponius Mela says of
Thule, that it was
Belgarum (which Mr.
Cambden reads
Bergarum; understanding thereby the City and Territory of
Berghen)
littori opposita; which account agrees well with the situation of this Island.
Besides, says Mr.
Cambden, Schetland
is about two days sail from Cathness
in Scotland;
which is the exact distance between Thule
and the Caledonian
Promontory in Solinus
's relation. Again, Schetland
lies in 63
degrees of Northern Latitude, as well as Ptolomy's Thule. Whether our learned Antiquary read
Solinus aright or no, I shall not venture to question; tho I know there are some that read the place quoted thus,
A Caledoniae promontorio Thulen petentes bidui navigatione excipiunt Haebudae Insulae, (and not as the vulgar Copies have it,
A Caledoniae promontorio Thulen petentibus bidui navigatio est); and the rather, because it follows,
Ab Orcadibus Thulen usque quinque dierum ac noctium navigatio est. However, I am afraid the Latitude of
Schetland will not be found to exceed sixty degrees, and a few odd minutes; and then the Parallel betwixt
Ptolomy's
Thule and this Island will fail.
The manners of the inhabitants, nature of the soil, temperature of the air,
&c. are the same in this Isle as in
Iseland.
ISeland is an Isle in the
Deucalidonian Seas,
Situation. situate 13 deg. and 30 min. of Longitude, and 65 deg. and 44 min. of Latitude; reckoning the situation of the whole Isle from
Skalholt, the chief City in it. It is bounded on the East with the Northern Ocean; on the South, with the
Deucalidonian Sea; on the North and West, with the frozen Sea of
Groenland.
The Isle was first discovered by one
Naddoc;Discovery. who sailing near the coasts of the
Fero Islands, was by an unexpected tempest driven upon the Northern parts of
Iseland; which, from the great quantities of snow that then overspread the country, he call'd
Sneeland. After him a
Swedish Mariner, nam'd
Gardar, made a second discovery of this Isle; and, after his own name, call'd it
Gardarsholm. This hapned in the year 864. Not long after this, one
Flocco (a
Norwegian Pyrate) made a third discovery of it; not casually, as the other two had done, but by design. He had heard some faint stories of the two former discoverers; and questioned not, but, if he could meet with this Newfound Land, to be better paid for his pains then his predecessors had been. Whereupon he resolves on the adventure; and (instead of the Mariners Compass, which at that time was never dream'd of) made use of the following expedient to direct him in his Voyage; he took with him, out of
Schetland, three Crows; and, having sail'd Northwards for some days, he let one of them fly, which he perceiv'd return'd to
Schetland. Soon after, he threw a second out of the Ship; which, finding no land to set her foot on, return'd weary into the Vessel. Within awhile after, he sent out the third Crow; which flew to this Isle.
Flocco following this leader, landed safe in the Northern parts of the Isle, and there winter'd. Finding this country, all the while he staid there, oppress'd with intolerable frosts and snow, he call'd the whole land
Iseland, or
Iceland; which name it retains to this day. The next winter he spent in the Southern parts. But meeting there with as cold entertainment as he had found in the North, he hoised up sail the spring following, and return'd to
Norway; where he was ever after call'd
Rafnafloke, or
Flocco the Crow.
The first inhabitants of
Iseland came into the Isle in the yeat 874;
First Inhabitants. brought hither by one
Ingulf, a
Norwegian Baron, who (with
Hiorlief, his brother in-law) fled, or was banish'd his own Country for murdering another Nobleman. The
Islandic Chronicle (which makes the said year its Epoch) tells us, that this
Ingulf found the Isle wholly desolate, and destitute of all manner of inhabitants. Nor is there in this work any mention of any former discovery whatsoever, made either by the
English or
Irish; tho some of our Historians have asserted, that
Iseland was well known to both these Nations long before
Ingulf brought in his
Norwegians. The
Irish Annals go further, and assure us, that the ancient
Iselanders call'd the
Irish Papas, and the Western part of their Isle, as most frequented by
Irish Merchants,
Papey. Arngrim Jonas follows the Chronicle of his Country, and is very passionate in asserting, that before
Ingulf no manner of inhabitants were heard of in this Island. And in his
specimen Islandicum, he is extremely enraged at
Pontanus, and the Authors he follows, for offering to assert, that
Iseland is the
ultima Thule of the ancients.
For, says he,
if our Isle be that Thule,
which Virgil
and other Roman
writes mention, it must needs have been inhabited in the days of Augustus
the Emperor; and then what credit, I pray, can be given to our Iselandic
Chronicle, which tells us in plain terms, that this Isle was never inhabited before Ingulf
's days? But if that learned Author would give us leave to argue the case, 'tis possible he may not find any reason at last to be in so great a rage. For, in the work quoted, he himself allows the story of the
Irish being first call'd
Papas by the ancient
Iselanders. If we enquire what those ancient inhabitants were, that gave the
Irish this name? 'Twill questionless be answer'd, they were Heathens. This
Arngrim takes for granted; and thinks the answer satisfactory enough. And it is plain, that the first inhabitants of
Iseland were Heathenish Idolaters, from one passage in the
Iselandic Chronicle, where we are told, that in the West of
Iseland there is a large piece of ground encircled with a ditch, in the midst of which stands a great stone, made use of formerly for an Altar, whereon they used, in the days of Idolatry and Paganism, to sacrifice men to their God
Woden. But then if we consult the ancient monuments of the Northern Kingdoms, we shall find the greatest part of
Denmark and
Norway converted to Christianity before
Ingulf's time: so that it will be found upon examination highly probable, that there were inhabitants in
Iseland before
Ingulf brought over his
Norwegians; and those perhaps known to the
English and
Irish.
The Isle is for the most part mountainous and rocky;
Soi
[...] tho some valleys afford good store of Corn and pasturage. Nothwithstanding there are so many and so vast mountains in this Isle, there is no manner of mines either of mettals or minerals in the whole land, except Sulphur.
The most notorious mountain in
Iseland is
Hecla;Mou
[...] Hec
[...] which stands on the South-East of the Isle, not far from the Sea-shore. This is one of the greatest Vulcanoes in
Europe or the world; belching out by fits such deluges of fire, as threaten a general conflagration of the whole Isle.
Blefkenius reports, that sometimes it vomits up not only flame and fiery coals, but large torrents of water, which burn like Brandy or
Aqua Vitae. At other times it throws up prodigious quantities of cinders and pumice stones. Its greatest outrages are caused by a West-wind; insomuch that when the wind blows moderately from that quarter, the inhabitants of the neighbouring valleys (who are acquainted with the securest passages to the mountain) march up in droves to the mouth of the furnace, where they recreate themselves by throwing great stones into the flames, which return them with as great a violence as a barrel of gunpowder blows up the slats of an house. So that 'tis exceeding dangerous for any one to approach the flames, who is not perfectly acquainted with every part of the mountain. For besides the danger of being knockt on the head with some of these stones, it often happens, that the ground unexpectedly opens, and the flames swallow men up alive. The silly Rustics believe verily,
[Page][Page]Novissima ISLANDIAE TABULASumptibus Janssonio-Waesbergiorum, Mosis Pitt et Stephani Swart.
[Page]DIOECESIS TRUNDHEMIENSIS PARS AUSTRALIS.Ex Officina Janssonio-Waesbergiona, et Moses Pitt.
[Page][Page][Page 69]that Hell is in the bowels of this mountain, and that the souls of the damn'd are tormented in these flames. Nay, some of them will confidently protest, that they have several times seen whole Herds of Devils enter the mouth of the furnace with their burthens of damn'd souls; and, having eased their shoulders, return for a new loading. Another place of torment the Natives fancy under the rocks on the Sea-coasts; and the clashing of the ice against the banks produces a noise which they take for the howling of the damn'd. If any battel be fought in any part of the world, the Natives will confidently pretend to know the very day, tho they are not able to assign the place of the fight; and that, by observing the more then usual importation of souls upon such days. But these and the like idle stories, collected by
Blefkenius and other Authors, wholly ignorant of the affairs of
Iseland, were never the opinions of the generality of the
Iselanders since their conversion to Christianity. Nor does the mountain continually (as they would have us believe) send out flames, since the
Iselandic Chronicle takes particular notice of the years 1104, 1157, 1222, 1300, 1341, 1362, and 1389, as very signal for such fiery eruptions as they speak of. Since the year 1558 (notwithstanding
Blefkenius's Romantick story to the contrary) we have no certain relation of any such accident.
Munster and
Frisius report, that the flames of
Hecla would not burn Tow; which story is near akin to what
Pliny tells us, of a mountain enflamed by Water and quenched with Hay.
Blefkenius speaks of a strange Lake (and
Arngrim says, he has heard as much of a Fountain near
Skalholt) which immediately petrifies whatever is thrown into it. Insomuch that if you take a long pole, and stick part of it into the bottom of the Lake, that part of the staff which sticks in the earth will in a short time be turned into iron, the middle into stone, and the uppermost part (which never came into the water) remain wood. He further adds, that the part of the staff which resembles iron will burn like a coal. Another Lake he mentions, which (like the
Grecian Aornon, spoke of by
Virgil) sends out such pestiferous exhalations as poyson the birds which fly that way. Several other strange stories he tells, which, because rejected by
Anrgrim, we omit. In most places of the Isle you may meet with hot Baths and scalding Fountains; the water of which, if set to cool, throws off a sulphureous scum.
Of all the affronts which
Blefkenius, [...] in his scurrilous description of
Iseland, has put upon that Country; none is highlier resented by
Arngrim then the sleight and false account he gives of the Laws, Manners, and Religion of the inhabitants of that Isle. Whoredom, Theft, Idolatry, Witchcraft, Sorcery,
&c. are vices he accuses the whole Nation of. We may rationally imagine, that the ancient
Iselanders were men of the same temper, manners, and religion with the
Norwegians, from whom they were descended,
i. e. men of vast stature, strong and valiant, great duellers and pyrats. But since Christianity was introduced into their Isle, none of those barbarous qualities which that
Dutch Satyrist lays to their charge, can justly be reckoned among the catholick enormities of the Island; 'tho 'tis possible some few may still be found among several thousands that to this day retain a small tincture of the old Idolatrous superstition, and ungentile demeanor of their ancestors. Their temperance in meat and drink, and the naturally strong constitution of their bodies, enable them to last out commonly to a good old age; tho I cannot but refer
Olaus Magnus and
Blefkenius to the Readers sentence; the former of which tells us, the
Iselanders live ordinarily three hundred years; the latter (with more modesty and caution, which in him are rare qualities) reports, that he saw a man in
Iseland who told him that he had then lived two hundred years.
By the account which
Blefkenius gives of the habitations of the
Iselanders,Habitations. it must needs be concluded, that either he never travell'd amongst them (whatever he pretends to), or else he mistook their houses (cover'd with turf and grown over with grass) for small hillocks and rampires. For he says, all their houses are underground; and they, their kine, horses, and sheep, have all one cave. Anciently the
Iselanders (like the
Germans in
Tacitus's days) dwelt far apart; according as every man took an affection, to this field, or that fountain; this wood side, or that plain. They used neither mortar nor tyles; but the whole fabrick of their houses consisted of timber and turf. Their windows were most commonly in the roof, seldom in the walls of their cottages. Some of their Nobility had more stately Palaces, built of large pieces of timber brought hither out of
Groneland and
Norway. At this day their houses are most of wood, cover'd over with turf; except in their Cities (
Hola and
Skalholt), where, instead of tyles, they make use of fir-boards. But since the trade between them and
Norway began to decrease, their buildings have lost much of their ancient splendour; and the neatest of their Villages run daily to ruine. Besides, their traffick with foreign Nations is much abated; and they seem to draw towards that degree of meanness which
Krantzius speaks of, when he tells us,
The Iselanders and their Cattel have the same lodging. Arngrim confesses, that upon the South-shore of the Isle, near
Skalholt, there are three small Parishes, in which the inhabitants are destitute both of wood and turf, the only fuel of the country. The poorer sort of these, being not able to purchase fuel from abroad, are constrained in the extremity of winter, to betake themselves to a corner of their Ox-stalls, and there borrow heat from their Cattel.
It is manifest from the ancient Laws of
Iseland (whatever
Munster, Frisius,Diet. and
Blefkenius say to the contrary) that upon the first inhabiting of this Isle, the ground was till'd, and several sorts of grain sowed and reap'd. 'Tis a malicious slander to say, as those Authors do,
That the Islanders feed upon carrion, and unsavoury meats, and want the use of bread. The best and happiest of Nations are now and then, upon some extraordinary occasions, driven to harsh extremities in meat and drink, and forced (in spight of former plenty) to submit to a famine. And it may reasonably be supposed, that the Seas about
Iseland, bound up by a long continued frost, may sometimes bring the like calamities upon this Isle; who have the greatest part of their food out of these waters. But (setting aside all such accidental casualties, and extraordinary dispensations of Gods providence)
Iseland is as well provided for all manner of necessaries in meats and drink, as any other Country whatever. For the
Iselanders have generally considerable stocks of Kine and Sheep, besides large piles of dry'd fish of several sorts. 'Tis true, a great part of the inhabitants want bread and salt, which are reckon'd two of the great requisites in furnishing out one of our Southern tables. But he that shall seriously consider, the vast strength and healthy constitutions which these usually enjoy, and the old age they ordinarily arrive at, will be apt to conclude, that dry'd fish would prove as trusty a staff of
[Page 70]life as bread, if we were used to it; and that salt may probably be convenient in an hot Country, to preserve our meat from corrupting, but needs not be made use of at the table. In short, the
Islanders have all manner of necessary and substantial food, as Beef, Mutton, Geese, Hens, Partridges, and all sorts of fowl. They want only the delicacies of sauces, which other Countries enjoy; and the sharpness of their air furnishes them with stomachs which easily supply that defect.
The most general drink used amongst them is Whey;
Drink. which is commonly so good that an ounce of it will very well bear half an ounce of water. Sometimes they drink a kind of Mead, made of a little Barley flower and an Honeycomb boiled in water. Another liquor they have, which is squeezed out of a certain reddish berry, peculiar to this Isle. The ancient
Iselanders used to import Beer from
Denmark, Scotland, Norway, England, and other foreign Countries: but for many years last past the inhabitants have not been able to maintain any considerable commerce with these Nations; and upon the decay of trade, are forc'd to content themselves with such liquors as their own Land affords. How poor and mean soever these liquors may seem to Southern palats, used to the juice of the Grape; yet with these the ancient
Iselanders could make merry; and keep banquets and revellings with the mean fare before-mentioned. What grandeur their public entertainments wanted in the delicacy of the viand and richness of the liquor, was made out in the length of their feasts and number of their guests. Thus we read, that
Theodore and
Thorwald (brethren, and Citizens of
Hialtaedat in North
Iseland) solcmnizing the funerals of their father
Hialta, entertained twelve hundred persons for fourteen days together, at a banquet; and at their departure presented the chief of their guests with gifts answerable to their qualities. After the same rate, and for as long a time,
Olaus Pa (a West
Islander) and his brethren entertained nine hundred men. But I know not whether this be an instance of the generosity and gallantry, or not rather prodigality of these people. For the Northern Nations are generally strangely lavish in their entertainments at Weddings and Burials; insomuch, that 'tis grown a proverb in some of those Countries,
Pay for thy fathers Coffin before thou thinkest of buying a Cradle: meaning, that the entertainments at the burial of a father and marriage of a new wife (if they come together) are sufficient to ruine a man in his estate, and make his heir a beggar.
Before the convenience of money was invented,
Money. the most natural method of buying and selling was by exchange of one commodity for another. This in the nonage of traffick, was the only expedient made use of in all Nations of the world; but continued, I think, longer in
Iseland then in any of the known Western Countries. One great reason of a later then ordinary use of money among the
Iselanders, was the want of mettals in their Country. Some Silver they had, brought in from foreign Countries; which if they chanced to make use of in commerce, they weighed it in a balance, but never coined or stamped any of it. Of late,
Danish money has been brought into this Isle; tho in very small quantities.
The chief comodities of the Country,
Commodities. are Brimstone, dry'd fish, and Whale-bone. Of this last they have so great plenty, that (according to
Blefkenius's relation) some of them make houses of it; and the only great Bridge in the Isle is made of the same matter. It seems, formerly great quantities of Beef, Mutton, Butter,
&c. were exported hence into other Countries. For
Arngrim Jonas concludes his Satyrical answer to
Blefkenius's abusive description of
Iseland, with these words,
Hoccine impune fierisinitis, O Senatus Populusque Hamburgensis? Hanccine statuistis gratiam deberi Islandiae, quae &c. i. e.
Can the Burgomasters and Raedtsherrn of Hamburg wink at such faults as these? Are these the thanks ye give our Isle for feeding your City these many years with Beef, Mutton, Butter, and Fish? England, Holland, Denmark, Bremen, and Lubec have all tasted the sweets of our Land; but never any returned their thanks in such a scurrilous Pasquil as your Libeller, &c.
Wormius tells us, that the old
Danish tongue,
Lang used in ancient inscriptions, and other monuments of
Runic learning, has been no where so clean and pure kept to this day as in
Iseland. And the reasons he assigns are, 1. The inhabitants of this Isle have not maintained so great commerce with other Nations as the rest of the Northern people; by which means they have exceedingly avoided the introducing of strange and uncouth words into their language. 2. The
Iselanders, from the first peopling of their Isle, have been wonderfully accurate and curious in committing all transactions of moment to writing, and thereby transmitting at once the glory of their actions and purity of their tongue to posterity.
Saxo Grammaticus confesses, he ow'd a great part of his
Danish History to the writings of the
Iselanders; whom he commends, above all other Northern Nations, for their curiosity in registring the famous deeds of their ancestors. No question,
Saxo met with many rarities in that language which have since perished.
Stephanius reckons up above twenty several tracts that he himself had seen; most of which, I suppose, are to be met with in the publick or private Libraries of
Denmark; and some may e're long be published by the learned
Resenius. Wormius collected his
Runic Dictionary as well out of the
Knitling-Saga, and other
Iselandic manuscripts, as the old
Runic inscriptions of his own Country. In the year 1651.
Runolph Jonas, an
Iselander, published a Grammer, teaching the rudiments and syntax of this tongue; and there is now in the hands of our Learned Dr.
Marshall (Rector of
Lincoln Colledge in
Oxford) a manuscript Copy of an
Iselandic Dictionary, never yet printed.
The
Edda Islandorum (published first by
Magnus Olai,Edda and afterwards by
J. Peter Resenius) is a piece of the greatest note of any old
Iselandic monument extant. It contains a collection of mythological stories about their ancient Heathenish Gods; out of which fables the old
Iselandian Rythmers borrowed the subjects of their Ballads. It has always annexed to it, as an inseparable companion, the
Skalda; or
Iselandic Prosodia; which teaches the art of their ancient Poetry, and gives rules for the composure of their several kinds of Verse. Out of these two
Saxo Grammaticus took all those monstrous stories of the first founders of the
Danish Kingdom, which have so far scandalized some Readers, as to make them (upon the sole account of these Romances) reject his whole History as fabulous and incredible. From several passages in
Saxo's work, it is evident, that this Historian had read a much perfecter Copy of the
Edda then the publishers of the printed Editions have followed; and there is at this day in the rich Library of the learned and pious Prince
Rodulph Augustus Duke of
Brunswick and
Lunenburg, at
Wulfenbuttel, a more perfect manuscript Copy then either
Magnus or
Resenius ever saw.
Anciently
Iseland was divided into four Provinces;
Government. named from the four quarters of the
[Page 71]world, East, West, North, and South-
Iseland. Each of these contained three lesser Districts, excepting North-
Iseland, (being larger then any of the other three) was subdivided into four of these Districts. Every District had in it three publick Courts of Judicature, and ten or more
Hreppar or Constable-Wards. The Government of the Isle was Aristocratical till the year 1261, when it was subdued and made tributary to the King of
Norway. Afterwards, when the Kingdoms of
Denmark and
Norway were linked together by Queen
Margaret, Iseland was also annexed to the
Danish Crown. Since that time, it has been governed by a Vice-Roy; who (when he is in the Isle, for he is not obliged to be always resident) keeps his Court at the Castle of
Besestat, near the Western shore. His office is to collect taxes for the King of
Denmark; as Butter, Sheep, Wool,
&c. for the provision of the Navy Royal.
What kind of Gods the idolatrous
Iselanders worshipped before they were converted to Christianity,
[...] will appear from a survey of the
Edda; which, as we have said, is nothing else but a register of those mock-Deities. The chief Gods mentioned in this and other ancient Northern monuments, are, 1.
Thor, whom the
Edda makes the son of
Woden. He is said to have come out of
Asia with his father; and for that reason is sometimes call'd
Asathor, or
Thor the Asian. Arngrim Jonas makes this God answerable to
Jupiter among the
Romans. And in an old
Anglo-Saxonic Homily, in the publick Library at
Cambridge, which treats of the Gods of the Gentiles, we meet with these words: Se Iovis is arðh;orðh;ost ealraðhaera Goda. ðh;e ðh;a Haeþenan haefdon on heora geddylde. & he hatte Ðor betƿux summum ðh;eodum. þon ðh;a Ðeniscan leoda lufiaþ sƿiðh;ost,
i.e. This Jove
is the most honourable of all the Gods mentioned in their verses. Some Nations call him Thor,
whom the Danes
reverence above all others. Hence the day which the
Latins call'd
dies Jovis, is in
Iseland named
Thorsdagh, and in
England Thursday, the
Germans call it
Donnersdag, dies Tonantis, i.e. the Thunderers day, which signifies the same thing. 2.
Woden, or
Oden; the Captain of the
Asians that first peopled these Northern Countries. He is sometimes call'd,
[...],
As, the
Asian. So in the ancient form of an oath taken in
Norway and
Iseland, we read,
Hialpi mier suo Fryer og Niordur og hin al matke As, i.e. So help me Frier,
and Niordur (a
Norwegian King, Deified for his noble exploits),
and the almighty Asian
(i.e. Woden). From him the
Iselanders call the fourth day of the week
Odensdagur; and we,
Wendesday. The Nobility of the ancient people of the North, were wonderfully ambitious of fetching their pedigree down in a streight line from this Patriarch and God of the Northern Nations. Hence possibly it comes, that in some Copies of our
Anglo-Saxonic Chronicle the Genealogy of our
English King
Cerdic (with several others) is run up to one who is said to be
[...] (or the son of
Woden) and there the pedegree breaks of. As if in so doing they had sufficiently imitated St.
Luke's Genealogy of our Saviour unto
Adam, which was the son of God. And hence, as may well be conjectured, the
Islanders do to this day call their Noblemen
Godar and
Hoffgodar, i.e. such as are of the lineage or family of the Gods. Besides these two, we sometimes read of
Freyer (as in the
Norwegian oath, before quoted) one of
Wodens companions; and
Friga, Wodens wife (whence our
Friday); with several others of less note.
Arngrim allows,
[...] that several Christians came out of
Norway into
Iseland with
Ingulf, in the year 874; but that the Isle was then converted to the Christian faith, he denies. A full and total conversion, he says, was never attempted, till about an hundred years after. The first that openly preached the Gospel was one
Frideric, a
Saxon born, who came over into this Isle in the year 981, and succeeded so well, that within three years after there were several Churches built. The
Iselandic Chronicle mentions one
Thangbrandt, another outlandish Bishop, who came into
Iseland, in the year 997. At last, in the year 1000, it was agreed on in a general Assembly of the whole Isle, That the worship of Heathenish Idols being abandoned, they would unanimously embrace the Christian Religion. In the year 1056
Isleif, an
Iselander, was consecrated Bishop of the whole Isle; and enter'd upon the See of
Schalholt the year following. It is very observable (what is recorded in the
Iselandic Chronicle) that this
Isleif married
Dalla, the daughter of one
Thorwald; and by her had three sons. The eldest of which (named
Gysser) succeeded his father in the Bishoprick of
Schalholt; altho he also is said to have married
Stenun, the daughter of
Thorgrin. Since that time the inhabitants of
Iseland have continued stedfast in the Christian faith.
Gudbrand Thorlac (who entred the Bishoprick of
Holen in the year 1571) abolished the Rites and Ceremonies of the Church of
Rome; and introduced the
Augustan Confession, which to this day is maintained all over the Isle. The same Bishop first procured a Printing-house to be set up in
Iseland; and afterwards caused the Bible, and several other godly books, to be translated into the
Iselandic tongue and printed.
Christian the third, King of
Denmark, founded two Free-schools in
Iseland (one at
Holen, and the other at
Skalholt) which by the munificence of his successors,
Frideric the second and
Christian the fourth, were improved into two considerable Colledges, where young men were instructed in the liberal Arts and principles of Religion, till they were thought fit for the ministry. Of late years many ingenious men, and learned
Iselanders, have been bred up in the University at
Copenhagen.
We have before taken a survey of the mean Cottages, or Burrows, of the Rusticks in
Iseland;Cities. and we cannot expect that their Citizens should live in much better fashion. There are only two Cities in the Isle (
Holen and
Skalholt), the one the seat of their Northern, the other of their Southern Bishop. In both of them, the houses are built of wood (rarely of stone), cover'd with either boards or turf. The Cathedral at
Holen, according to
Arngrim's description, either is, or at least has been a stately Fabrick. In his days, the Church-porch had on each side five pillars, which were fourteen ells high (I suppose he means
Norwegian ells, one of which is about three quarters of a yard
English), and five in thickness. The Quire and Body of the Church were proportionable to the Porch. This noble structure was blown down in the year 1584; but magnificently rebuilt at the charge of
Frideric II. King of
Denmark, within four years after. Neither of these Cities look any better then one of our ordinary Villages; for the houses are not contiguous, nor defended by any fortification or rampire.
Blefkenius tells us (how truly, I know not) of a pleasant plain in the middle of
Iseland,Judicature. where formerly stood an high flaming mountain, which by degrees burnt away. This plain, says he, is encompassed with huge rocks, which make it inaccessible, excepting only in one place; and there too you have room for no more then one passenger at once. From the tops of two of these rocks fall down two large rivers; which, with a terrible noise, are swallowed up by a whirlpool in the midst of the plain. Hither yearly (upon the twenty-ninth day of
June) repair all
[Page 72]such as have any suit at Law or other controversie to be determined. At the passage stands a guard of soldiers, who admit all in that desire the favour, but suffer none to go out without a pass from the Governor. As soon as all, who have any business, are come in; the Governor (or Lieutenant of the Isle) reads his Commission from the King of
Denmark. That done, he gives his charge; insisting much upon the good will and kindness which the King his Master and himself bear the
Iselanders, and advising them all to administer justice without respect of any manner of persons whatever. After this, he returns to his Tent; where in a godly Sermon, preach'd to him and the rest of the Assembly, the necessity of punishing offenders, and vindicating the injur'd, is declared. As soon as Sermon is ended, the twelve chosen Justices (whom they call
Lochmaders, i.e. men of the Law) sit down on the ground, with each a book of the
Iselandic Laws in his hand. After the Plaintiff and Defendant have both given in what they have to say; they all arise, and every man examines privately the verdict of his book in the case proposed. Returning, they consult awhile of the sentence, and then unanimously pronounce it. If any considerable doubt arise among them, which they themselves cannot easily solve, they consult the Lieutenant; but will not give him authority or leave to decide the controversie by pronouncing of sentence. These twelve Jurymen (of whom one always is Foreman) have great respect shew'n them, as long as these Assizes last. They have power to determine all Civil causes; and to pronounce condemnation, as they think convenient, against all Criminals. Those that are condemn'd to dye (as Adulterers, Murderers, and notorious Thieves) are beheaded; but smaller misdemeanors are marked in the forehead with an hot iron.
This account of the manner of proceeding in the
Iselandic Court of Judicature (the much different from the methods made use of in the days of their
Nomophylaces, mentioned by
Arngrim Jonas) I can the easilier credit, because I do not find it contradicted in
Arngrim's reply to
Blefkenius. Besides, the custom of deciding controversies by the verdict of twelve Jurymen here in
England, may perswade us to believe the same fashion may be observed in these
Danish dominions; from whence, probably, it was first brought into
Britain.
Of the new Accessions in
Pomeren and the Empire
Pag. 37.
The second Alphabet.
Poland Pag. 1.
Great
Poland Pag. 13.
Massovia Pag. 15.
Prussia Ibid.
Prussia Regia
Pag. 19.
Great Dukedome of
Lithuania Ibid.
Samogitia Pag. 22.
Livonia Ibid.
Volhinia, Podolia &c. Pag. 24.
Lesser
Poland Pag. 25.
Other Countreys formerly belonging to the King of
Poland Pag. 26.
Pretensions of forrain Princes to
Poland Pag. 27.
The third Alphabet.
Sweden Pag. 1.
The
Laplanders manner of living
Pag. 11.
Provinces of
Sweden Pag. 12.
Government and Manners of
Sweden Pag. 17.
Gothia and it's Provinces
Pag. 24.
Catalogue of the Kings of
Sweden and
Goth-Land Pag. 27.
Principality of
Finland Pag. 24.
Ingria or
Ingerman-Land Pag. 35.
Of the new Accessions in
Livonia Pag. 36.
Of the new Accessions in
Denmark Pag. 38.
Of the
Baltic Sea
Pag. 40.
Of
Denmark Pag. 41.
Of
Jutland Pag. 52.
North
Jutland Ibid.
South
Jutland 54.
Partition of
Holstein from
Denmark Pag. 56.
Holstein Ibid.
Dithmarse Pag. 58.
Stormar Ibid.
Wagria Pag 59.
Baltic Sea
Pag. 61.
Fionia Ibid.
Seland Pag. 62.
Laland Pag. 64.
Lesser
Islands Ibid.
The ancient Inhabitants of those Isles
Pag. 65.
Norway Pag. 66.
Masterland Pag. 67.
Bishopricks of
Anslo and Staffengar Ibid.
Prefecture of
Bergen Pag. 67.
Bishoprick of
Nidrosse Pag. 68.
Prefecture of
Wardhus Ibid.
Norwegian Lapland Ibid.
Of the Commerce of the ancient
Britans, English, and
Norwegians Ibid.
Islands of
Foero Pag. 70.
Islands of
Shetland Pag. 71.
Iseland Pag. 68.
Index from B to Mm Inclusively. In which is also a Catalogue of Books Printed at the
Theater in
Oxford, and sold by
Moses Pitt, at the Angel in St. Pauls Church-yard,
London.
Figures and Maps to be plac'd thus:
1. The Kings Picture.
2. A Copper Title.
3. A Map of both the Hemispheres.
4. A Map of the Earth in a plain Chart, both before the Introduction to Geography.
5. A Map of the North-pole,
pag. 1. of
Greenland.
6. A Map of
Europe, pag. 14.
7.
Laplanders manner of living in Summer and Winter, place in the Description of
Sweden pag. 11. in the third Alphabet.
The following Maps are markt or number'd on the Plates thus, answerable to the Index.
6. Novissima
Russiae Tabula
pag. 17.
7.
Russiae vulgo
Muscoviae pag. 18.
8.
Muscoviae pars Australis
pag. 21.
9.
Dwinae Fluvii Descriptio
pag. 22.
10. Nova & Acurata
Wolgae Fluminis olim
Rha dicti delineatio
pag. 41.
11.
Taurica Chersonesus hodie
Przecopsca &
Gazara dicitur
pag. 43.
12. Typus Generalis
Ʋkrainae pag. 49.
13. Tractatus
Borysthenis vulgo
Dniepr &
Niepr dicti
pag. 40.
Place these Maps in Poland, Alphabet the second.
14. Novissima
Poloniae Descriptio
pag. 1.
15. Palatinatus
Posnaniensis pag. 13.
16.
Prussia, pag. 15.
17. Tractuum
Borussiae pag. 16.
18. Magnus Ducatus
Lithuaniae pag. 19.
19. Nova Totius
Livoniae Descriptio
pag. 20.
Place these in Sweden, Alphabet the third.
20.
Suetiae, Norvegiae, &
Daniae, pag. 31.
21. Magnus Ducatus
Finlandiae pag. 34.
22.
Gothiae pag. 24.
23.
Ʋplandiae pag. 13.
24.
Dalecarliae &
Westermanniae pag. 12.
25. Regni
Norvegiae descript.
pag. 66.
26. Novissima
Islandiae Tabula
pag. 68.
27. Dioecesis
Trundhemiensis pars Australis
Pag. 68.
Containing the DESCRIPTION Of Part of the EMPIRE OF GERMANY.
VIZ. The Upper and Lower SAXONY: The Dukedoms of MECKLENBURG, BREMEN, MAGDEBURG,
&c. The Marquisates of BRANDENBURG, and MISNIA, with the Territories adjoining. The Palatinate of the RHINE: And the Kingdom of BOHEMIA.
By
WILLIAM NICOLSON, M. A. Fellow of QUEEN'S College,
OXON.
OXFORD, Printed at the THEATER, for MOSES PITT at the ANGEL in St. PAUL'S Church-yard, LONDON. MDCLXXXI.
GERMANY (as described by
Ptolemy, [...]cient
[...]unds. and other ancient Writers) was doubtless of a much larger extent then the vast Country which at this day bears that name.
Tacitus has given this account of it:
‘
Germany, says he, is separated from
Gallia, Rhetia, and
Pannonia, by the Rivers
Danow and the
Rhine. From the
Sarmatians and
Dacians it is divided and defended by a long Ridge of Mountains, and a mutual awe which obliges these fierce Nations and the
Germans to rest contented on each side with their ancient bounds and properties. The rest of it is encompassed with the Ocean; in some of whose Isles several considerable Kingdoms have of late years been discover'd.’ However (notwithstanding this assertion of
Tacitus, making the
Rhine the utmost bounds of
Germany on the borders of
Gallia), 'tis certain, That long before his time (in the days of the Emperors
Julius and
Augustus) several Colonies of the
Germans had seated themselves in the
Gallic Territories, and inhabited a large plat of ground on the South side of the
Rhine. And 'tis well known, that both
Germania Prima and
Secunda (so often mentioned by ancient and modern Geographers) lay on the same side of that River.
Wympheling (in his little Tract
De Rebus Germanicis) demonstrates that all those Cities which stand on the Southern bank of the
Rhine, did always belong to the
Germans; notwithstanding the pretensions of several
French Kings to the contrary. 'Tis true,
Lewis XI. King of
France (before he came to the Crown) made several incursions into
Alsatia, upon pretence
of recovering the ancient Rights which his Ancestors had challenged upon the Rhine. But this pretended jurisdiction never spred it self so wide as to reach beyond the banks of that River on either side. For, as
Freherus shews, the ancient
Gauls always claim'd a right to the River
Rhine; altho the
Germans were Lords of the Soil on both sides. Besides, the
Hermunduri, Marcomanni, and
Quadi (who were all of them
Germans) extended the bounds of their Nation beyond the
Danow; and seated themselves on the South side of that River. Whence in process of time the name of
Illyricum (which formerly was a word used to signifie a fifth part of the
Celtish Nation, containing the Territories of
Liburnia, Dalmatia, Noricum, Vindelicia, and
Pannonia) was by the
Roman writers limited to
Liburnia and
Dalmatia only; and the other three Provinces reckon'd parts of
Germany, as being almost quite overrun with the people of that Nation.
Aeneas Sylvius and his followers fancy, that
Germany is at this day a Country much larger then it was ever thought to be by the Ancients. But he that shall consider, that the three Northern Kingdoms of
Denmark, Norway, and
Sweden, with their several Dependences, and all
Belgium (as is still evident from the Languages of these people, which are only so many distinct Dialects of the
High-Dutch) were formerly branches of the
German Nation; will be apt to conclude with
Cluverius, that New
Germany is scarce a third part so big as the Old.
At present,
Germany is bounded on the South with the Mountains of
Italy, beyond the
Danow;Modern Bounds. on the East, with
Poland and
Hungary; on the West, with the
French Provinces of
Picardy and
Champagne; on the North, with the
Baltic Sea and
British Ocean. Monsieur
de Pibrac is of opinion, that
La Germanie est presque trois fois aussi
[Page 2]grande que la France, i. e. Germany is near three times as big as
France. And most Geographers make that Kingdom thrice as large as
Italy. So that, if we should (tho there is little reason for so doing) deny the
Netherlands to be any part of
Germany at this day; yet this Nation will still continue to be incomparably the largest in
Europe. The length of it, from East to West, amounts to 840
Italian miles; and the breadth, from North to South, to about 745; according to the computation of
Sansovine, in his Treatise
Del governo di diversi Regni. Which account (if we reckon, as is usual, five
Italian for one
German mile) comes near
Winthers relation, which tells us,
Germany is 686
English, or about 171
Dutch, miles long; measuring from the mountains of
Italy to the
British Ocean.
All this tract of Land (or so much of it at least as lies from the
Rhine Northwards) was by the Ancients look'd upon as a barren,
Nature of the Soil. uninhabited, and solitary Wilderness; destitute of Cities, Villages, Houses, Fruit, and all other things either requisite or convenient for the sustenance of any other kind of inhabitants, then (such as they fancied the
Germans to be) a sort of savage wood-men, little different from the beasts of the field, either in education or diet. But the improvements, or discoveries rather, of later Ages have exceedingly alter'd the case; and our modern Historians and Geographers, in spight of
Tacitus's cavils and envious Epithets, have been forc'd to confess, that the
Germans are a numerous and industrious people, and their Country both wonderfully pleasant and fruitful. A more signal instance of the plenty of Corn in this Country cannot be given, then we meet with in the stories which the
German writers tell us of the Emperor
Charles the Fifth; who maintain'd an Army for a considerable while against the
Turks, consisting of 90000 Footmen and 35000 Horse. Besides, the same Emperor, for some years together, waged a continual war with most of the Northern
German Princes; during which, the Armies on both sides are said to have consisted of above 150000 men. Now (altho
Germany alone provided all necessaries of food and provender for these vast multitudes of men and horses, yet) we do not read, that any the least famine or scarcity of bread ensued hereupon in any part of the
Dutch Territories.
The chief Rivers in
GERMANY.
THere is hardly any Nation in the World comparable to this for the multitude of its noble Rivers; several of which carry Vessels of a vast burthen for some hundreds of
English miles. The most principal of these are:
I.
Danubius,Danow. or the
Danow. Brietius says, that this River was anciently call'd
Matoas; which, in the old
Scythian language, signifies
harmless; because they fancied it was pretty secure sailing upon its waters. Afterwards, when a great company of strangers (unacquainted with this Torrent) had here unluckily suffer'd shipwrack and lost their lives, its name was changed into
[...], or
[...]; which word some Critics derive from the
Macedonian [...], signifying (as
Plutarch tells us) as much as
[...],
Death. Cato thinks 'twas first call'd
Danubius from the
Danes; whom he confounds with the
Dacians. Our modern Geographers embrace
Pliny's opinion; and derive the word, by a
Metathesis, a jugis Adnobiis; whence it has its first source. The
Hungarians call it
Duna; the
Polanders Donay; and the
Germans die Thonaw. The head of this great River is in
Swaben, near a small Village named, from the
Danow, Tone-Eschingen; which is situated in a part of the
Hercynian Wood, call'd by the inhabitants
Schwartz-wald, or
Black-forrest. Within a few furlongs of this Fountain it receives into it two more small Rivolets; soon after which, dividing it self into two branches, it encircles the City
Ʋlm with two fair streams; both admirably large, considering the short course of the River. Afterwards it passes by several brave Cities in
Germany and
Hungary; as,
Regensburg, Passaw, Vienna, Presburg, &c. being largely augmented in its passage by the accession of many Navigable Rivers. Insomuch, that it seems to challenge the character which
Ovid long since gave of it:
‘Cedere Danubius se tibi, Nile, negat.’ As soon as it comes into
Illyricum (near the City
Belgradum, which the
Germans call
Stuhlweissenburg) it looses it name, and is called
Isther. At last,
Qui centum populos & magnas alluit urbes,
Euxinum irrumpit bis terno flumine Pontum.
One of these six Currents runs with that violence into the
Euxine Sea, that it is said to pass, thro the midst of the salt waters, fresh and sweet for near forty
English miles together. 'Tis an admirable singularity in the
Danow; that it alone, of all the great Rivers in
Europe, runs with a strangely rapid current Eastward; whereas most others run either to the West or South, some few Northwards, but not one so directly East.
Salomon Schweigger (a
German traveller) reports, that sweet water is brought from the
Danow, by Aquaeducts, to
Constantinople; which is two days journey from any part of this River. Before the
Danow leaves
Germany (tho
Strabo asserts the contrary) it meets with these three notorious Cataracts: 1.
Der Saw-russel, or
The Swines-snout; so called from a sharp pointed Rock hanging into the River near
Lintz in
Austria; under which is a most dangerous and almost unavoidable whirlpool, which certainly sucks in all the Vessels which sail near it, except managed by more than ordinary care and discretion.
Ath. Kircher (in his
Mund. Subterr.) says, that whatever is swallow'd by this Whirlpool, is thrown up again in a Lake near
Canische in
Hungary. 2.
Der Strudel; so called from the noise which the water makes in its fall. This is a perilous Cataract, near
Greinon in
Austria, where the water falling with a great violence amongst the Rocks, distracts the watermen with its noise and smoke, and too often either overturns or splits their Vessels. So that few or none were formerly so fool-hardy as to pass this precipice without the assistance and conduct of some expert Boor in the Vicenage; who for many years had made it their business to understand all the little creeks and windings in this dangerous passage. But of late years it has not been reckon'd a matter of so great difficulty to shoot this Gulf. On the top of one of the highest Rocks stands the ruins of an old Castle; where formerly, as the report goes, some notorious Pyrats (who lived upon the pillage of such Boats as they could now and then hook into some of the neighbouring Cliffs) kept their residence. 3.
Der Wurbel, or Whirlpool; not much more then a furlong distant from the
Strudel. The Watermen that use this passage are of late grown so expert in shunning this Gulf,
[Page 3]that (except your Pilot be drunk, which is here no strange mishap) there is little danger of miscarriage. As soon as you have past the Whirlpool, you are sure to be waited on by a fellow bearing St.
Nicolas's picture (to whom an adjoining Chappel is dedicated) and an Alms-box; into which every man casts what he pleases, as an offering of thansgiving to that Saint for the late deliverance. On the top of the great Rock, which causes a great motion in the water, stand the reliques of an ancient Fort, which the
Germans call
Der Tuffels Thurn, or
The Devils Tower. The original of which name, according to
Aventinus's relation, was this:
‘On a time,
Bruno Bishop of
Wurtzburg accompanied the Emperor in his passage down the
Danow. When they came to this Tower, they were suddenly scar'd by a strange Apparition in the shape of a Blackamore; saying,
I am, Bruno, thine evil Genius; I shall do thee no mischief at present, but thou shalt be sure to meet with me again e're long. When they were come to
Bosenburg (a Village within ten
English miles of this
Wurbel, where passengers usually refresh themselves) it happen'd, that the Chamber, where the Emperor and the Bishop were a resting themselves, suddenly falling down, killed
Bruno.’
II. The next great River in
Germany, [...]. is the
Rhine. Some Etymologists derive this word from the
Greek word
[...],
to flow; because of its rapid Current. Others fetch it from an old
Celtish word
Rijen, which signified to
divide or
separate; alluding to the old story (before mentioned) of the separation of
France from
Germany by this River. But the generality of modern
Dutch writers are pleas'd to fancy, that it comes from the ordinary
German word
Rein, which signifies
pure or
clean. Because forsooth, 'twas a fashion amongst the ancient inhabitants of this Country, to try whether their children were legitimate or spurious by casting them into the
Rhine; which would never suffer those to sink who were lawfully begot, but usually drown'd the bastards. This story
Cesar tells us in his Commentaries. And hence, says
Schottelius, the
Germans to this day retain this proverbial saying of any notorious and scandalous crime:
‘Das weschet ihm der Rhein nicht ab,’ i. e.
‘The
Rhine can ne're wash this of.’Tacitus reports, that the old
Germans worshipp'd the
Rhine as a God.
Martial alludes to some such thing, when he says:
Nympharum Pater amniumque Rhenus, &c.
And the modern
Germans seem to be little less jealous of the repute of this noble River, when they give out, that
‘Die Thonau ist aller wasser ein Frau: aber der Rhein mag mit ehren wol ihr Mann Seyn,’ i. e.
‘The
Danow is indeed the Lady Paramount of Rivers: but the
Rhine may well seem to be her Husband.’ Where note, that the
Danow is (as most other names of Rivers in the
High Dutch tongue are) of the Feminine Gender, but the
Rhine of the Masculine.
There are two Springs in the
Rhaetian or
Celtic Alps (as some Authors call them) from which the
Rhine has its rise. The first not far from a small Village, call'd by the inhabitants
Tavetsch; out of a considerably high Mountain, which the
Germans call St.
Gottardes Geburg. The other Fountain is not far from
Reinwald in
Rhaetia. These two Fountains are about forty
English miles distant from each other; but their Currents meet in one about eight of the same miles from the City
Cur. Within three quarters of one of our miles from this confluence of the two streams, the River dilates it self into that vast Lake which is ordinarily (by a corruption of the name of
Poomen, a Town on the banks of this water) call'd
Der Boden-See.
The broadest part of this swift River is betwixt the City
Emeric and the strong Castle of
Schenckenschantz; where the breadth of it is judged (but I am afraid the story has out-stretch'd the measuring-chain some furlongs) to exceed two
English miles. Immediately after the union of the forementioned Currents, the depth of the
Rhine is so considerable, that Vessels of large bulk and burthen might easily (if not letted by several Cataracts and Rocks which block up their way) sail from
Stein to
Francsurt on the
Meyn, Collen, Mentz, and all other places of consequence upon this River.
The Cataracts of the
Rhine are reckon'd to be nine in all; whereof seven are but small ones, and come far short of those mentioned in the
Danow. The most terrible and dangerous one among the nine, is a little below the City of
Schafhuysen in
Switzerland; where the whole River falls from the top of a Rock seventy-five foot high (
Surius Carthusianus says, fifty cubits). The other great Cataract is near
Lauffenburg in
Switzerland; which Town has its name from
Lauffen (in the language of the inhabitants signifying a Cataract or water-fall) and
Burg, a Castle. This is not so dangerous as that at
Schafhuysen; for sometimes the Watermen venture their Vessels to slide down this precipice by ropes, which is utterly impossible at the former.
There is no small dispute among ancient and modern Geographers, about the several mouths of the
Rhine. Formerly there were two known Channels of the
Rhine; and every body could tell where each of them emptied it self into the Sea. For this great River being divided into two streams at
Schenckenschantz, that part of it which still retain'd the name of the
Rhine (passing by
Arnhem, Rhine, Ʋtrecht, and
Leyden) ran into the Sea at
Catwic; whilst the other branch, passing by
Nimeghen, under the borrowed name of the
Wahle, joining it self with the
Maes, was in the same Channel convey'd into the Ocean. But in the year 860 (or as some reckon 1170), amongst many other damages done to the
Hollanders by an extraordinary Spring-tide, the commodious Haven at
Catwic was quite stop'd up with Sand, and the current of the
Rhine obstructed. This River still runs, but with a very slow pace, towards
Catwic; but never reaches the ruins of that famous Town. What becomes of the water is not certainly known: but most probable it is, that it may be swallowed up by some undiscernable Abyss, and by a subterraneous channel convey'd at a considerable distance into the Sea. Another mouth of the
Rhine we owe to
Drusus, who cutting the neck of land between this River and the
Issel, brought a great Arm of the
Rhine (along the
Sluce, which to this day bears the name of
Drusus's Ditch) into one Channel with the
Issel, along with which it still continues its course into the
Zuyder-See.
III. The third great River of
Germany,Elb. is the
Elb, Albis; which
Bertius, and others, derive from the
Saxon word
Elve, which in upper
Saxony is used both for the name of this River and the number of Eleven. Now all Geographers agree, that the
Elb springs from Eleven currents. But
[Page 4]when I consider, that the
Bohemians name this River
Labe, I am apt to question the truth of this Etymology, tho I cannot assign a better; for to fetch the word
ab albis rupibus (as some do) is vain and impertinent.
Tacitus tells us, that the
Elb springs in the Country of the
Hermunduri (a
Schwabish people); but the learned Historian mistook his mark, and should have writ
Aegra instead of
Albis. Ptolemy's blunder was as great as this, when he named
Moldau (which runs thro
Prague, and is called by the inhabitants
Wltawa) the
Elb. Dubraw gives the truest account of the source of this River, when he tells us, that it springs out of the mountains near
Hirschberg in
Silesia, upon the confines of
Bohemia. These mountains are by
Latin writers called
Riphaei, Gygantarii, and
Niviferi montes; and by the
Bohemians and
Germans, Die Risengeburge; from the multitude of strange and monstrous apparitions which are seen here by the Rusticks, as themselves report. The names of the eleven Fountains out of which it springs (or rather small streams of which it is composed) are, 1.
Krumb-seyffen. 2.
Gross-seyffen. 3.
Nose. 4.
Granitz. 5.
Sperber-seyffen. 6.
Haubritz. 7.
Hinnerlein. 8.
Ganss. 9.
New-wasser. 10.
Heydelbach. 11.
Kalch-wasser.
The first course it steers is Southwards; in which it passes by the Cities of
Dwur, Jaromitz, and
Kralowy-Hradetz (or, the Queen's
Hradetz); at which last place it is augmented by the admission of
Warlitz and
Orlitz (two large streams flowing from the confines of
Bohemia and
Moravia) into its Channel. At
Melnick it meets with the
Moldau; and soon after with the
Aegra. Afterwards, it passes by the Cities of
Dresden, Misen, Torgow, Wittenburg, Magdeburg, and
Lawenburg; and at
Hamburg bears Merchant-ships of almost as large a bulk as any traffick on the Ocean; and that at the vastest distance from the Sea of any navigable River in
Europe. The City of
Hamburg is eighteen
German, or seventy-two
English miles distant from the Sea; and yet you shall ordinarily meet with Vessels of three hundred Tun riding in this Harbour. On the South side of this City it divides it self into a great many branches, which encircle an infinite number of small Islands. Lastly, a little below
Gluckstadt, it branches into two Arms (whereof one bears the name of
Die Zuyder Elb, the other
Die Noorder Elb) which empty into the
British Ocean.
German Rivers of less note, are: 1. The
Oder; which springs in
Moravia, and (after a current of about 300
English miles through some parts of
Brandenburgh and
Pomeren) falls into the
Baltic Sea. 2.
Visurgis, or the
Weser; which issuing out of the mountains of
Thuringia, runs through
Hessen and
Westphalia down to
Bremen; not far from which it empties it self into the
British Ocean.
But these, and some few more of the like bigness, are not so considerable as to merit a description in this place; but may well be reserv'd till we come to the description of particular Provinces. Whither also we refer the Reader for an account of the Forrests, Mountains, Mines, Baths, Mineral-waters, Cities, Universities, Money, and all sorts of Commodities peculiar to any of the Principalities. For
Germany ought to be look'd upon as a vast Collection of several different Nations, and not as one petit Kingdom, which may easily admit of one and the same General Description.
Of the Ancient Inhabitants of
Germany; together with an account of the different names of
Celts, Dutch, Germans, and
Almans.
CLuverius (in his incomparable Book
de Antiqua Germania) affirms, that
Ascenas,Ancient Inhabitants.Noah's Great-grandchild, was the first that peopled
Germany, Britain, Spain, Gallia, and
Illyricum; calling the people of all these five Nations after another of his own Names,
Celts. Nay, he is so positive in this assertion, as to set down the very year when this grand Plantation first began.
This, says he,
hapned in the year of the World, One thousand seven hundred ninety-two, and one hundred thirty-six years after the Flood. The authority of this great man has so far prevailed with his own Countrymen, that you shall hardly (if at all) meet with a modern
German writer who is not wholly of his opinion. Some of these
Dutch Antiquaries make use of this passage in
Josephus, [...] (
i. e. Ascanaxes, or
Ascenas, was the Founder of the Ascanaxi, or
Ascanites) to confirm their doctrine. But this argument is too idle and precarious; since to take for granted, that the
Ascanaxi mention'd by
Josephas are
Germans, is in effect to beg the Question. The original, I suppose, of this and the like mistakes, proceeded from a misunderstanding of some ancient traditions generally received among all the Northern Nations; which told them strange stories of the peopling of the Northern parts by one
As, and his retinue. Now these Critics (being resolved to find out, if possible, what this great man should be, and whence he derived his pedigree) after a long and diligent search, could pitch on no body whom they could fancy so well qualified, both in name and time, for the character they had met with of the Father of the
German Nation, as this
Ascenas. Whereas, 'tis much more probable, that the old
German or
Celtish Mythologists meant no more by
As, then some generous
Asian Captain, who had first brought their Ancestors out of
Asia into
Europe. That the
Spaniards, Gauls, Germans, and
Britains were formerly so many branches of one and the same Nation seems evident, from the terminations of the names of several Towns, Villages, Woods, Pasturegrounds,
&c. in
brig, fort, dun, ham, berg, and the like; which are a sufficient testimony of the identity of languages, and consequently of people, in all these Countries. And (from the fables of the
Edda Islandorum, and other ancient monuments found in some of the Northern Dominions; which all along give their Heroes the title of
Asians) it seems as rational to conclude, that the first inhabitants of the Northern parts of
Europe came out of
Asia. What else can be meant by the word
Asamal (
i. e. the language of
Asians) so often made use of in the old
Runic monuments to signifie the
Danish tongue? And why is
Woden (the grand Captain of the
Cimbrians) so many times, in the
Edda before-mentioned, styled
As, the
Asian? I am apt to believe, that from this
Woden the
Germans have first derived the proper name of
Asch (by the
Latins turned into
Ascanius) which is to this day in ordinary use among them. And that hence also the Town of
Aschburg (call'd by
Tacitus Asciburgum) and
Ascharic (a King of the
Gauls) had their names. So that 'twill not be so great a wonder (if we reflect seriously upon what has been said) as some would make it, to find several
German words in the
Persian language; and perhaps Monsieur
Bochart is not guilty of so great a Paradox as
[Page][Page]ALBIS, Fluvius Germaniae celebris, A FONTIBUS AD OSTIA Cum fluminibus ab utroque latere in illum fluentibus descriptus.Jo: Vanden Avele inventor et feecit.
[Page]NOBILIS FLUVIUS ALBIS maximà curà, ex variis famosis
(que) Auctoribus collectus, et in lucem editus.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.EMPORIUM HAMBURGUM
1. S. Gertraut
2. S. Iacob
3. Der Blauen toren
4. Det Tochthuys
5. Wenser Toren
6. S. Peter
7. Dome
8. S. Iohannis
9. S. Catharina
10. De Borse
11. 't Rathus
12. Maria Magdalena
13. S. Nicolai
14. H. Geist
15. Melder Dor
16. Den Bollen stal
17. S. Michel
18. Anschar Kirche unt Weisen haus
[blazon or coat of arms]
[Page][Page 5]many imagine, in asserting, that our Northern Kingdoms have borrow'd both men and manners from the
Phoenicians.
That
Celta was a general name for any Northern or Western
European among the aricient
Greek and
Latin writers,
Celts. is well known; but whence the word sprung, is not easily determin'd.
Cluverius (as was even now said) reports, that
Ascenas call'd his followers first
Celts, from one of his own Surnames; but what that was, neither he nor any other Historian I have yet met with, can inform me. Our Country-man
Verstegan fetches
Celtae from the
Greek word
[...],
Lighthorsemen; asserting (I suppose for the Etymology's sake) that the ancient
Celts were excellent Warriors on Horseback. But it is not necessary that we should go as far as
Greece to seek for the derivation of this word.
Cesar tells us, those men whom the
Latins call'd
Gauls, were used to name themselves
Celts. And
Pausanias confirms the story,
[...], says he,
[...],
i. e. At last it grew a fashion to name them Gauls (Galatas);
but formerly both they themselves and others call'd them Celts. It is from what has been said (and several other authorities, which might be produc'd to the same purpose) manifest, that the
Germans, and the rest of the ancient inhabitants of the Western parts of
Europe, call'd themselves
Celts; and did not borrow that name from the language of any foreign Nation. Some
Dutch Etymologists derive the name from the
German word
Gelten, i.e. Valere, to be worth (whence the ordinary
Dutch word
Gelt, money); grounding their opinion upon the authority of
Strabo, who tells them, that the
Celts were so called
[...]; which they interpret,
from the preeminence they had amongst other Nations. So that, with these men, a
Celt signifies as much as
a man of extraordinary worth and accomplishments. Cluverius, with a great deal of indignation, rejects this opinion; which nevertheless (if we consider the high value the
Celts used to set upon their own persons) has as great a shew of probability on its side, as his own, beforemention'd. I find, that in our old
British or
Welsh tongue (which is an undoubted Dialect of the ancient
Celtic language)
Celi signifies
God. And it seems to me as rational, to bring the derivative
Celtic from this Primitive, as to fetch the word
Gothic from
Gott, or
God, and
Teutsch from
Teut. Of the reasons of which Etymologies we have already given a hint in the Description of
Denmark; and shall have occasion to treat of the same subject more at large in the following Paragraph.
We see then,
Dutch. that the name
Celts was not appropriated to the
Germans only; who made up no more then one of the five Provinces into which the vast
Celtic Nation was divided. But other particular names we meet with in ancient and modern Historians, which are peculiarly ascrib'd to the
Germans. Amongst these, the name of
Teutones or
Teutonici (turn'd by the
High Dutch into
Die Deutschen or
Teutschen; by the
Netherlanders into
De Duytschen; by the
Danes and
Swedes into
De Tydsker; and lastly by the
English into
The Dutch) seems to be of the greatest antiquity. Some very unskilful Etymologists have endeavour'd to bring this word from the name
Aschanaxes (which they read
Ascanes) before-mention'd. For by prefixing the
German particle
thi, used formerly instead of
die, to this proper name, they presently turn it (by the help of an Apostrophy and a
German termination) into
Th' Ascanen; which they do not at all question but was afterwards corrupted into
Tuiscones, Teutones, Teutsch, Deutsch, &c. But (to pass by other impertinencies of this derivation) it must needs be allow'd a grand soloecism in any language, to prefix two Articles to one and the same Noun; which we must be forc'd to admit of by fetching
die Teutschen from
thi th' Ascanen. The most probable derivation of
Teutsch is from
Teut, the name of one of the ancient
Celtic Deities.
Lucan talking of the
Gaulish Gods, says,
‘Et quibus immitis placatur sanguine diro Teutates.’
And
Tacitus giving an account of the manners and customs of the
Germans in his days, tells us,
Celebrant carminibus antiquis Tuistonem (some Copies of good note read
Tuitonem)
Deum, terra editum & filium Mannum,
originem gentis, conditoresque, i.e. They sing Ballads in praise of their God
Tuit, and his son
Man, the first founders of their Nation. This
Teut, Theut, or
Tuit, seems to be the same with the
Phenician [...], the
Egyptian [...], and
Alexandrian [...], all mention'd by
Bochart. And I doubt not, but that the
Grecian [...], and
[...], as well as the
Latin word
Deus, are all sprung from the same original. From this Primitive, 'tis obvious to form the Derivative
Teutisch (which will signifie as much as
One descended from the stock or lineage of the God Teut), afterwards contracted into
Teutsch. And thus in short, to tell us the whole Nation is descended from
Man (which the old
Egyptians, as well as
Germans, used instead of the
Hebrew word
Adam) the son of
Teut; is to run up the pedigree of this people, as St.
Luke has done our Saviour's, unto
Adam, which was the son of God. Nor were the
Germans only heretofore guilty of this vanity and arrogance, but almost every Nation under Heaven.
Diodorus Siculus could long ago tells us,
[...],
&c. i. e.‘The
Barbarians, as well as
Greeks, cast about for the reputation of being thought descended from an ancient stock and lineage; and strive by all means to have themselves taken for the first inhabitants of their own Country.’ To compass these designs, 'twas usual with them to compose certain fabulous Rythms, which contain'd large and compleat Genealogies of particular Families as high as some great God or other, whom they fancied to spring up out of the Earth. And we find it was so ordinary a thing among the
Greeks to derive a mans pedigree from
Jupiter or
[...], that
Ʋlisses sleighted that piece of vanity in his Antagonist,
Nam genus, & proavos, & quae non fecimus ipsi,
Vix ea nostra voco. Sed enim quia retulit Ajax
Esse Jovis pronepos; Nostri quoque sanguinis auctor
Jupiter est, &c.
Where you see how hardly he is provok'd into an humour of bragging of his heavenly Ancestors.
The name of
German,Germans. tho of a much later date then either of the former, has met with a greater variety of derivations then both of them. Amongst the many curious Etymologists that have rack'd themselves to find out the true original of the word, some are too busie in looking abroad into foreign languages. One of these, reflecting upon the pristine barbarity of the
Dutch Nation, strains hard to fetch the word
German from the
Latin Immanitas. Another
[Page 6]fancies the
Germans were so call'd
a germinando; because they were observ'd to be a numerous and fruitful people. A third will have
Germani to signifie only
Brothers; and is of opinion, that the
Latins meant no more by the word then, that the
Dutch were Brothers to the
Gauls, whom they so exactly resembled in their complexion, humours, and manners. A fourth ransacks
Asia; and at last seizes upon the
Carmani as the undoubted Ancestors of the
Germans. The
German writers are as zealous on the other hand, in finding out the original of their own name at home; but most commonly meet with as little success as the former. Some will needs have
Gern, which signifies
freely or
willingly, to be the primitive of this, as well as several other proper names which they have still in use amongst them; such as,
Gerbert, Gerbrand, Adelgern, Fridegern, &c. But I cannot see what tolerable meaning or sense can be pick'd out of
Gern-mann; tho the foremention'd proper names, admitting of
gern for one principal word in the composition of them, are significant enough.
Verstegan laughs at the shortsightedness of any man that pretending to the least smattering of
High Dutch, cannot at the first glance perfectly discern the true Etymology of the word
German.‘
Ger, says he, or
Gar (for both are indifferently used) is as much in the
Tuitsch or
Teutonic tongue as
al; and we
English men have a phrase to say, Drink a
Garaus (tho some, not knowing what they say, instead of
Gar-aus, which signifies
all out, do say
Car-aus). Thus
gar and
all being shew'd to be equivalent, both
German and
Alman is as much as to say
All or
wholly a man. And this name the
Germans may well at some time, and upon some certain occasion have attributed or assum'd to themselves, in regard of their great manliness and valour; and other Nations, that had proof thereof might rightly afford them.’ The former part of this story (how dogmatical and positive soever he be in asserting it) I can no more allow of, then I can of
Becanus's conjecture,
viz. that
German is no more then
Gehrmann, einer der viel gehret, i. e. a covetous greedy fellow, that can hardly ever be satisfied. Which is a derivation as abusive as 'tis ridiculous and dull. I am altogether of
Verstegan's opinion, as to the reason of his Etymology,
viz. That the valour and prowess of this Nation gave the first occasion to the name of
Germans. Tacitus tells us,
Germaniae vocabulum recens & nuper additum; quoniam qui primi Rhenum transgressi Gallos expulerint, nunc Tungri nunc Germani vocati sunt. Ita nationis nomen non gentis evaluit paulatim, ut omnes primum a victore ob metum mox a seipsis invento nomine Germani vocarentur. In which words the learned Historian assures us, 1. That the
Dutch were not time out of mind call'd
Germans; but receiv'd that name from the
Gauls. 2. That their valour and the cowardise of their enemies first occasion'd this new name. If then the
Germans had this name given them for their valour, what can be the true meaning of the word?
Schottelius (who perhaps understood
High Dutch the best of any man that ever wrote in that language) assures us, that
Wehr, in the old
Teutonic tongue, signifies
War; and
Wehrman, a Warriour, or
Man of War. Now, 'tis easie to observe how ordinary it is for the
Latins, and other foreign Nations, to turn the
Dutch W into
G or
Gu. And thence proceeds that strange mangling of the
German proper names, when usurp'd by strangers, who are not able to pronounce a
W. For example, the
Dutch proper name
Wilhelm (for so it ought to be wrote, not
Guild-helm, as
Verstegan would have it) is by the
Latins turn'd into
Gulielmus; by the
French, into
Guillaume; by the
Italians, into
Guglielmo; by the
Spaniards, into
Guillermo. The
French, especially since they admitted into their tongue so much of the
Latin and its pronunciation, have both wrote and spoke several words, which in the original
High Dutch begin with a
W, after the
Latin mode with
Gu, which will sufficiently appear by comparing these and the like
German and
French words together: Such are,
ich winde, je guinde; windachs, guindal; wespe, guespe; wimpel, guimple; wise, guise, &c. And thus instead of the old
Dutch word
wehre, and our modern
English war, they say
guerre; whence
Guerrman, and at last
German, instead of
Wehr-mann.
That the name
Alemanni (which the
French,Almans.Spaniards, and
Italians continually use instead of
Germans) is derived from
all and
man, which two words have the same signification in
High Dutch and
English, is agreed on by every one; altho
Verstegan's reason, before-mention'd, be not by any means current and allowable. In the year 358, the
Germans mustur'd up a vast Army against the
Romans, amongst which were reckon'd up above 36000 of their Nobility out of
Thuringia, Saxony, Hassia, and most of the other Principalities of the Upper
Germany. This great concourse of people from all parts of so large a Country, gave the first occasion to the name of
Almanner, i. e. A mixt people of all sorts of men and nations. Which was renew'd upon the like occasion by the Emperor
Valentinian, in the year 368; and has ever since that time been made use of, by the Foreigners before-mention'd, to signifie the whole Nation of the
Germans.
Of the Humours, Manners, Religion, &c. of the Ancient Inhabitants of
Germany.
THE account we have from the old
Roman and
Greek Historians, of the affairs of this barbarous part of the world (as they had reason to stile it), tho now and then mixt with a little contempt and undervaluing expressions; yet, are much more exact then could reasonably be expected from the pens of such as usually employ'd themselves more in cultivating their own, then prying into the manners of foreign Nations.
Julius Cesar indeed had reason to be acquainted with their neighbours the
Gauls; who were a people of the same extraction with the
Germans themselves, and therefore (in all probability) differ'd but little from them in humours and manners. After his time,
Tacitus had the opportunity and advantage of residing in
Germany for some years; and was consequently better able (not to mention his vast parts and learning) to give a more accurate description of
Germany, and a fuller account of the manners of its inhabitants, then any of his Countrymen had done before him. Out of these two, and several other eminent writers in both languages,
Cluverius compiled his admirable Volume
De Antiqua Germania; which does not only furnish us with an exquisite Geographical description of old
Germany, but gives us likewise an exact and impartial account of the monstrous bulk and barbarous practices of his Ancestors, the ancient
Germans. Abraham Ortelius, an accurate and famous Geographer, publish'd a small Treatise at
Antorf in the year 1596, entituled
Aurei seculi imago; in which the learned Author endeavours to give us an exact pourtracture of the old
Germans in writing and cuts.
From these, and the Brass-cuts commonly prefix'd to
Cluverius's incomparable Work beforemention'd, it appears, That the first inhabitants of
Germany (or those at least whom the
Romans were first acquainted with) were men of a larger size then their neighbours; men generally of a vast and almost incredible stature. Insomuch, that if (as we have noted in the Description of
Denmark) the
Getes were so call'd, because in respect of the inhabitants of other
German Provinces, they were
Giants, it will be exceeding difficult for us Pigmies to conceive the unreasonable dimensions of some of our Northern forefathers.
We cannot imagine,
Stature. that such big bon'd fellows as these should be cocker'd in the Cradle, or nursed with that tenderness which the formal luxury of our Age requires. And accordingly the foremention'd Authors say, that their women seldom or never made use of a Midwife; but every one made shift to deliver her self, and as soon as her short travel was over, return'd unconcernedly to her employment. As soon as ever the child was born, the mother dip'd it all over in-cold water, to harden it. Some Commentators think
Virgil understood the
Germans in that Distich of his,
‘Durum a stirpe genus; Natos ad flumina primum Deferimus, saevoque gelu duramus & undis.’
Tho others fancy that he rather speaks of the
Spartans. But however
Sidonius speaks downright of the ancient
Dutch-men,
‘Excipit hic natos glacies, & matris ab alvo Artus infantum molles nec Cimbrica durat.’
Frideric Tileman, an ingenious
German writer, rejects the opinion of
Julian, Nonnus, and others, who report, that the reason of casting young children into the
Rhine (of which custom we have said something before) was to try, by their swimming or sinking, whether they were lawfully begotten or bastards. He allows of the story; but thinks the design was rather to inure their infants to cold, and to teach them courage.
Ortelius says, they used to place the infant on a Shield, and so commit it to the River.
Upon the first discovery of the innermost parts of
Germany to the
Romans,Clothes. the inhabitants wore little or no clothes; the young people used to go stark naked; the elder sort were all, men and women, alike habited: but both sexes so meanly clad, that their wild beasts skins (their Coats being seldom made of better stuff) reached no lower then their Navels, and never cover'd their nakedness. Some of the better sort wore little short Woollen Mantles; in which, such as were descended of a noble Family had their Coats of Arms wrought in colours, and sometimes in Gold or Silver. But such pieces of gallantry were, I suppose, first brought in amongst them upon their acquaintance with the
Romans. Others had a kind of Suit and Coat all of one piece, which reached as far as the middle of their legs, but wanted Sleeves. Such as to this day are worn in the Highlands of
Scotland, and some parts of
Schwaben. Those that wore Shoes (for the common people used no such thing, but went barefoot) had a kind of Sandals made of a Badgers-skin, or other rough untann'd Leather. The Nobility and rich Yeomanry had small Bracelets of Gold about their Arms, and Rings on their Fingers.
They had seldom any other Bed then the Earth,
Beds. which sometimes they strew'd with Hay, or the Leaves of Trees. The more fashionable sort lay upon the Skins of Dogs, Wolves, or Bears. And from this custom the
Germans still retain the word
Barenhauter (or
Bearskinner) as a nick-name of as great reproach and contumely as can be put upon any man; which seems at first to have signified as much as
a lazy loytering fellow that never stirr'd from off his Bears-skin.
Tho the
German Cookery be doubtless much different from what it was in former days;
Diet. yet their Victuals seems to have been almost the same in all Ages. We find the Ancients fed upon Bread, wild and tame Flesh of all sorts (especially Pork), Butter, Fruits,
&c. They drank Water, Milk, and Beer; which last,
Cluverius tells us, was a drink peculiar and almost natural to the
Germans. Some indeed that liv'd on the borders of
Gallia drank Wine; but this was only of late years. For they were utter strangers to that sort of liquor before the Emperor
Probus taught them to plant Vines.
Julius Cesar says of the ancient
Schwabes, Vinum ad se omnino importari non sinunt, quod ea re ad laborem ferendum remollescere homines atque effoeminari arbitrantur, i. e. They will not suffer any man to import Wine into their Country; looking upon that liquor as a thing which strangely weakens and effeminates those that drink it.
In their public Feasts and Entertainments they used a great deal of freedom and jollity.
Feasts. No man was to bring his Wife to any of these Revels; nor his Son, before the twentieth year of his age. They sat commonly on the ground in a semicircle, for the convenience of the Waiters. The chief Man, or Master of the Feast, sat in the middle; and the next honourable places were on his right and left hand. If any man wanted a stomach answerable to his allowance of victuals, 'twas ordinary to pouch his Commons till the morrow. They had never more then one Knife in a Family; which hung in a certain constant place, where any Guest could fetch it, when he had met with a morsel too tough for his teeth: for otherwise, if possible, they devour'd their meat without cutting.
The Commonalty seldom or never married more then one wife;
Marriages. but the Princes and Nobility (who were able to maintain more) had the liberty to marry as many as they pleased.
Tacitus gives this account of the Rites and Solemnities used in their Marriages,
Dotem non uxor marito; sed uxori maritus offert. Intersunt parentes & propinqui, & munera probant: munera non ad delicias muliebres quaesita, nec quibus nova nupta comatur; sed boves, & frenatum equum, & scutum cum framea gladioque. In haec munera uxor accipitur, atque invicem ipsa armorum aliquid viroaffert, &c. i. e.‘It is here a fashion for the man to give his wife, and not the woman her husband, a portion. The Relations of both parties are present, to examine and approve of the Dowry; which does not consist of such trinkets as young woers use to present to their Mistresses, or Brides make use of in their wedding-dress; but some Oxen, a bridled Horse, a Shield, Spear, and Sword. These the new married woman receives from her Bridegroom; to whom she again presents some sort of weapons,
&c.’ And how inviolably they kept their marriage-vows, the same Historian can inform us,
Septa pudicitia agunt; nullis spectaculorum illecebris, nullis conviviorum irritationibus corruptae. And in another place,
Severa illic matrimonia. And again,
Paucissima in tam numerosa gente adulteria. Where this
Italian seems strangely surprized with the admirable chastity of so populous a Nation; and wonders at the more then ordinary strait-lac'd modesty of their
[Page 8]Matrons, which would not suffer them to indulge themselves the pleasure of seeing a Play, or dancing with a friend at a Wake.
The very name of
Germans,War. as before explain'd, would testifie that they were a warlike people; tho nothing of their valiant exploits were to be met with upon record. But
Florus can tell us, in what a consternation the
Roman Soldiers were, when they first thought of giving Battel to the
Germans: insomuch that every man, who had any thing to dispose of, made his Will before he went to fight; as never expecting to return out of the field alive. And we do not find that
Germany was ever yet subdued by any foreign enemy. Nor can it be imagin'd, but those that from their Cradles (if ever they had any such thing) were accustom'd to lye on the ground, and go naked, should at last make good Soldiers. And accordingly, we find they spent the greatest part of their lives in Martial exercises. In time of any general invasion, every man (except infirm persons, and such as attended their Sacrifices) that exceeded the age of twenty years, was press'd to take up Arms. Otherwise, in case of a more inconsiderable quarrel, in which some few particular Provinces were only concern'd, every
Gow (or Village) sent out an hundred fighting men, with a Centurion to command them. The greatest mischief was, they understood but little Martial discipline; and therefore their chief confidence lay in the number and resolute humours of their Soldiers. Their armies used commonly to encamp in some large Wood or Forrest; and there ly skulking till they had an opportunity of making an advantageous Sally upon the enemy. Many of them fought naked; others wore some slender Armour over their Head and Shoulders made of the Hide of a Wolf, or some other wild Beast. Every man carried a Club on his Shoulder (such as
Hercules is ordinarily pictur'd with), and most of them had Spears in their hands. When the
Romans came amongst them they learned to be more methodical and orderly in their engagements. By degrees, they came to wear good substantial Helmets of Iron; which they adorn'd on the top with a tufft of Horse-hair, or sometimes a bunch of red Feathers. Whence, to this day, the
Germans reckon that an ancient Coat of Arms, which shews such a tufft in the Crest. As 'tis likewise accounted no small token of Nobility to bear in their Coat
Pallets of several colours: since the old
Germans used to wear Shields on their left sides, streaked with red, blew, white, and several other colours for distinction's sake. Some of their Commanders, and other great men in the Army, wore a long and broad Sword on their right side; which they used to manage with both hands. These are reported to have been so weighty, that (when well guided with the whole force of a lusty
German) they would cut off both the Head and Arm of a
Roman at a blow. Their Horsemen never used any Saddles; but, instead thereof, rid upon painted Clothes. He that had slain an enemy hand to hand, used to bring home his Head in triumph; which, if 'twas the Head of an Officer, could not be redeem'd at any rate; but was kept as the richest piece of furniture in the house, and shown at publick Entertainments.
Among the ancient Princes of
Germany,Inheritance. the eldest Son (or other Heir apparent of the Family) always inherited the whole and entire jurisdiction of his deceased Father; and the younger children had certain Villages and Lordships assign'd them for portions. The
Hermunduri are said to have been all of one Family; which had encreas'd so largely in the revolution of some years as to over-spread all that vast Province which they inhabited.
Out of the Nobility the Peasants chose themselves a King or Captain;
Government. who had supreme dominion over all the Province in which he presided.
Cluverius likens this Governor to him whom the
Lacedemonians and
Spartans were used to set over their Commonwealth; who was bound by his place to be their General in time of war. I am of opinion, that this great Leader of any Province had the same name which their Dukes retain to this day; each of them being, even in those days, call'd
ein Hertzog; which (as our word
Duke) signifies no more then
A Captain or General
of an Army. M. Luther makes this title as ancient as will serve my purpose; when he derives the word
Vercingentorix (which was the name of a
German Prince, encountred by
Julius Cesar; and
Florus fancies the repeating of it enough to frighten an Army) from
Hertzog Hinric, i. e. Duke
Henry.
Tho the
Germans,Religion. before
Charles the Great took care to have them converted to Christianity, were Idolatrous Heathens; yet we do not read that they were guilty of such horrid impieties and profaneness as their neighbours. They liv'd up to the rules of Morality as much as any Nation that never heard of God and the true Religion. What a great respect they had for Divine Service (as they ignorantly call'd their Idolatrous practices) is manifest from their chusing of Priests out of their Nobility: who, besides the knowledge of their profession, were commonly tolerably well vers'd in Moral Philosophy and Physicks; and ordinarily call'd to Council upon debate of any weighty State affair. They had Females too amongst them, who were sometimes admitted to the Priestly Office; and had as great respect paid them as the men. History makes mention of one of these She-
Druids, who prophesied of the Emperor
Severus's death; and another who foretold the coming of
Diocletian to the Empire. They all believ'd the immortality of the Soul, and rewards and punishments after this life. They were great worshippers of the Sun; whom,
Cluverius says, they look'd upon as the only true God. Some, in confirmation of this opinion, have made
Sonn in the old
Teutonic language, to signifie as much as the modern
Sonders, Sonderlich, i. e. Only. Thus probably the
Latin word
Sol is only a corruption of
Solus. And for the same reason both the
Romans and
Dutch (together with all other Nations who speak nothing but different Dialects of the
Latin or
German tongue) dedicate the first day of the week to the Sun. Another God they had, to whom they used to offer man's flesh; who is sometimes call'd
Woden, elsewhere
Godan, by some
Codan, by others
Dan (whence probably the name of
Danes and
Danish; as well as from
Teut, Teutisch, and from
Got, Gottish). From him we have our
Wednesday; which the
Westphalians call
Godensdach, or
Goensdach; the
Netherlanders write it
Woensdach; the
Danes, Onsdag; and the
Swedes, Odensdagk. But of this (and their God
Teut) we have spoken before; and shall only add, that the word
Godan was after some time contracted into
God or
Gott. Another God they worshipp'd, who is stiled by
Latin writers
Taranes (the same doubtless with the
Danish Thor, mention'd in the Description of
Denmark), and answers to the
Roman Jupiter, as
Woden to
Mercurius. They worshipp'd this
Taranes as the God of
Thunder; which in our old
British (or
Welsh) language is still called
Taran, but in the
Danish tongue
Torden. Whence it appears, that
Thor and
Taranes, as well as the
Dutch Donnersdag and our
Thursday, signifie
[Page 9]the same thing. 'Tis very probable, that this same God was by the ancient
Celts named
Pen or
Pin; which in their language, signified
High and
Chief. And hence 'tis, that the
Austrians do still call
Thursday Pfinstag, and St.
Bernard's Mountain, which the
Italians call
Monte Jove, was formerly named
Mons Peninus. And 'tis as likely, that from their
Pen or
Pin, the Feast of
Whitsuntide might first be called
Pfinstfest (which name it still retains); as that our
Easter, and the
Dutch
[...]ostern, should bear the name of
Ester or
Ostar, one of their ancient Goddesses. The Moon was worshipp'd by them under the name of
Frea or
Fria; whom they reported to have been the wife of
Woden, and whose name is still retained in our
Friday, and their
Freytag. Another God they worshipp'd, who resembled
Mars the God of the
Romans. Him some of them called
Eric or
Erich, others
Thies or
Ties; from whom the third day of the week got the name of
Erichtag and
Tiisday; which later was afterwards by our
English Saxons turn'd into Tiƿesdaeg (which we have made
Tuesday) and by the
Germans into
Dingsdag, Ziesdag, and
Zingsdag. Tho
Schottelius thinks
Dingsdag derived from the primitive
Ding, which signifies
Judgment; because on that day most Cases at Law used to be pleaded and determined. The learned
Grotius, in his elaborate History of the
Goths, &c. is of the same opinion, and expounds the word
Thinxtag or
Diensdag, Dies dicatus judiciis, i. e. a day set apart for the Trial of Lawsuits.
Cluverius fancies the old
Germans had some glimmering notions of a Trinity; and that they worshipp'd the Sun, Moon, and Fire (or
Vulcan) as three distinct persons in one and the same Godhead. He asserts further, that, besides the belief of the Souls Immortality, they acknowledged the world had a beginning; and affirm'd, that soon after the Creation of it, the Angels fell away from that state of glory in which God had at first placed them. Besides, they had heard that night was before the day, and that
the evening and the morning were the first day; and therefore they used to reckon their day from Sun-seting to Sun-set the next evening. And from this custom of our
German Ancestors, we
Englishmen have been used to reckon Seven nights to a week or Sev'n-night, and Fourteen nights (not days) to a Fortnight. They used to sacrifice and perform other their Divines Rites in Woods and Forests, and the Oak (above all other Trees) was peculiarly made choice of for an Altar. Instead of a Temple they usually resorted to a kind of Summer-house made of Oaken and Beech
[...]wigs, platted over head. They look'd upon it as the height of profaneness to offer to draw a picture or representation of any of their Gods; and therefore did not (like the
Egyptians and
Israelites) worship Images. I know not upon what grounds Mr.
Verstegan has given us the portraicture of several Images worshipped by the ancient
Germans. 'Tis certain they offer'd Sacrifice to
Woden, Thor, and several other Gods, whom
[...]e mentions: but I think we have only his word
[...]r't, that they carved out Images to represent
[...] them the Deities they adored. The Nether
[...]axons indeed erected a vast pillar, which they
[...]lled
Irmensul (or the
General Pillar), on the
[...]p of which (says
Meibomius, Professor of Phy
[...]k at
Helmstadt, who has writ a learned Trea
[...]e upon this subject) stood the image of an
[...]med man, which was worshipp'd as a God.
[...]is was destroy'd by
Charles the Great, after
[...] had conquer'd
Witikind, and converted the
[...]xons to Christianity.
J. G. Schottelius (whom
[...] shall have frequent occasion to mention in
[...] following sheets) has published a Tragedy called
Irmensul, which presents us with a lively account of the practices of the ancient Adorers of this Idol, and the abolishment of it by the aforesaid Emperor. This Play is still in great vogue among the
Germans; and is frequently acted, with a good applause, at
Vienna, Leipsic, and other great Cities of the Empire. Some fragments of the famous Pillar are still kept in the Cathedral Church at
Halberstadt.
When any Sacrifices were offer'd,
Sacrifices. not only the Priests themselves, but their Offerings also were crown'd with wreaths of Oak, or some other sacred Tree. At a more then ordinary solemn and publick Offering, they used to sacrifice Beasts of several sorts and colours; but at lesser solemnites, they offer'd only white Cattle. And in their Sacrifices to the infernal Gods, or Devils, they made use of none but black ones. Upon some occasions, they used to offer men in sacrifice; where most commonly their idle servants and notorious malefactors were brought to slaughter: but in some cases of extraordinary exigency, they would offer up their own children,
their sons and their daughters unto Devils. The Priests commonly shot the sacrifices dead with arrows; tho sometimes the men were crucified. When the Rites and Ceremonies were finished, they were wont to eat up the sacrifices (whether men or beasts), and from the inspection of the Entrails, prognosticate the event of a future war, or other enterprize, like the
Aruspices among the
Romans. These Feasts were held with all imaginable mirth and jollity; and after Dinner, the Priests always entertain'd their Guests with all manner of Musick and Dancing.
The opinion they had of man's Creation,
Funerals. and the Soul's eternity, made them more readily embrace death then 'twas usual for Idolaters and Pagans to do. For tho they had no thoughts of a Resurrection, or future judgment; yet they were verily perswaded, that the Souls of those that departed this life were received into other bodies, and lived again in another world. This made them generally of this opinion, that 'twas lawful for any man to dispatch himself as soon as he grew weary of the cares and trobles of this life. They used to lay their dead Corps upon a large heap of wood; and so, setting fire to the pile, burn them. When the fire was gone out, they gathered together the bones and ashes of the deceased, and buried them. 'Twas also the fashion to throw into the flames the dead mans Horse and Armour; nay, we read, that amongst the ancient
Celts it was the custom to burn their Wives, Servants, and Dogs with their dead Husbands or Masters. As it is usual in some parts of the
Indies to this day (where Polygamy is allow'd of) for such Wives as are resolv'd never to marry a second time, and are ambitious to be esteem'd chast, to leap into the fire after the Corps of their deceased Husbands. At the Funeral of any Nobleman they used to have Tilting and Turnaments; and had several Rhithms sung in commendation of the party deceased, containing a register of the brave actions of his life.
Tacitus gives this short account of the behaviour of the old
Germans, upon the death of any of their intimate Friends,
Lamenta ac lachrymas cito, dolorem & tristitiam tarde ponunt; foeminis lugere honestum est, viris meminisse, i. e. they can soon wipe of their tears, but not so easily conquer their sorrow. It is for women to bewail, but for men to remember only the loss of a friend.
Of the Humours, Manners,
&c. of the Modern
GERMANS.
SEneca long since observed,
Intellectuals. that men of extraordinary large Bodies had commonly narrow Souls. And he gives this reason for 't,
because, says he,
grand abilities of both Soul and Body are too great a happiness for one man to enjoy. 'Tis probable, the same considerations mov'd the Historians of old to represent the ancient
Germans (who, as we have told you, were a people of a larger growth then other men) as a Nation of a dull and phlegmatic constitution.
Tacitus tells us, they were generally ignorant of the use of letters. And other writers would perswade us to believe, that they were incapable of Learning. Some of our modern Satyrists endeavour to make the present
Germans answer the character which those men give of their Ancestors; and strive to make the world believe, that
Germany is to this day a Country of
Gothamites. It has for some years been a proverb in the mouth of several
French-men, Pour faire un bon temperament, il faut mesler le vif argent de France,
avec le plomb d' Allemagne.
i. e. That the Leaden temper of a
German, is to be helpt by mingling the
French Quicksilver with it.
Jos. Scaliger (in his posthumous piece entituled
Scaligerana) will not allow the best of the High
Dutch writers to be men of parts; but rails at them all as a pack of senseless Loggerheads. But we all know how much that great man was pufft up with the sense of his own merit; and how unapt he was to confess the least grain of scholarship in a foreigner. Our whole Island under went his censure, when Mr.
Lydiat ventur'd to contradict his dogmatical positions, and the incomparable Sir
Henry Savil to confute his gross errors in
Geometry. It is doubtless an unpardonable rudeness in any man to accuse a whole Nation of folly: And he that will take the pains to peruse several of the High
Dutch writers, and reflect upon the many ingenious inventions for which the world is beholding to this Nation (of which we shall have occasion to speak hereafter) will confess this.
But their Morals as well as Intellectuals,
Morals. undergo the sharp censure of our modern Scriblers, who accuse all
Germans of intemperance, and make drunkenness a vice proper to that Country. 'Tis grown an ordinary proverb,
Germanorum vivere est bibere. 'Tis hard to excuse them all of this fault; nor are they themselves able to deny the accusation, but commonly rack their brains to find out reasons why large draughts should be more pardonable in them then other men. The sharp air they live in, is (they tell us) of so parching a nature, that without a continual supply of new moisture, their bodies would shrink into nothing. Nothing more ordinary in this Country then
Trinck-bruder; men that have created a brotherhood, or intimacy of acquaintance, by being drunk together. It is the fashion to bring a stranger an unreasonable great vessel of drink to the Table; which they call your
welcome. And this you are obliged in civility to take off, at one or more draughts, in a health to the good man of the house; tho you run the hazard of being drunk in cancelling the obligation.
Ph. Melancthon was used to say,
Wir Teutschen essen uns kranck; wir essen uns in die Holle, i. e.
We Germans eat our selves sick; we eat our selves into Hell. Long meals might probably occasion distempers; but gluttony is not so ordinary a vice among them as drunkenness. It is indeed no extraordinary thing to sit at Dinner from twelve at noon till five in the evening, or at Supper from seven at night till two or three in the morning: but then the greatest part of that time is spent in drinking of healths. However, 'tis best to wave this accusation; least in arraigning them we condemn our selves. There are as sober and temperate men in
Germany as in any Nation of
Europe. For tho the Court of
Saxony (of which in its place) has been of late years eminent for this sort of exercise, 'tis unreasonable to bring the whole Empire into the Inditement.
I know no Dish of general use in
Germany,Diet. which is any great rarity in
England, except Snails. From
Michaelmas till almost
Easter these are eaten as a great delicacy. You shall scarce come at a Nobleman's Orchard or Garden, in which you shall not find a Snail-house, which furnishes his Table all the winter with this Dish. They boil them in the shells, and so serve them up. Their other food is Beef, Mutton, Fowl,
&c. none of which are ever brought to Table in such large quantities as in
England.
Tho the High
Dutch have a proverb,
Travel.Wer wol leben und wol Schlaffen wil, der bleib zu hauss, i. e.
He that has a mind to live and sleep well, stays at home; yet no Nation in the world is more given to travelling then they. Not a Court in
Europe but is full of them; and they are easier met with on the road then
Scotchmen. This general itch of seeing foreign Countries, does doubtless strangely impoverish their Nation; and carries out yearly more money then all their Silver Mines can afford them. For 'tis below the spirit of a
German Nobleman to appear in a foreign Court without a Retinue answerable to his Quality: which piece of state will quickly swallow up a larger sum then the rent of his small Lordship amounts to. There was, not many years ago, a small Book published under the title of
Itinerarium Germaniae Politicum; wherein the Author earnestly advises his Countrymen never to go beyond the bounds of the
German Empire, except on public occasions. And questionless, he that shall with circumspection view all the rarities and Princes Courts in
Dutchland (taking the
Netherlands into the circuit) will return sufficiently qualified for a States-man without making any further progress.
'Tis the peculiar commendation of the
Germans to be true and upright in their dealings with every man.
Integrity.Teutschhertziger (or
Dutch-hearted) is an Epithet which with them is usually apply'd to an honest and just man, that scorns flattery or dissimulation. A
Frenchman gives this character of them,
La parole d'un Alleman vaut un obligagacion, i. e. A
German's word is as good as another man's bond. Which is no more then what
Tacitus observed of their Ancestors,
That no Nation under Heaven went beyond them at keeping their word.
Another excellent quality they have,
Hospitality. which many of their neighbours want, To be exceeding obliging to strangers.
Julius Cesar gives this character of the ancient
Germans, Hospites violare fas non putant: qui quaque de causa ad eos venerunt, ab injuria prohibent sanctosque habent. Iisque omnium domus patent, victusque communicatur, i. e.‘They look upon it as a piece of injustice to affront a Traveller; and esteem it a part of their Religion to protect those that come under their Roof. Their Lodgings are open to all comers, who are welcome to such entertainment as the House affords.’Tacitus, and others, give the same account of them. Nor have the
German Noblemen to this day degenerated from the good nature and hospitality of their forefathers. The relation which a modern
Italian[Page 11]writer gives of
Sweden, is as applicable to
Germany; Per le strade non sono assassini, si che si va molto sicuramente. Pochissimo si spendi da viandanti, non usando di dimandar cosa alcuna per conto dell' Albergo o del cibo, i. e.‘There are here no murders nor robberies committed on the High-ways; but you may travel with all imaginable security. Besides, you travel cheaper in this Country; because you pay nothing (or very little) for your victuals and lodging.’ The only inconvenience you meet with on the Road is, the being condemn'd to ride night and day in a Post-Waggon (so they call it); which will carry you little faster then a foot-pace. If you chance to have the priviledge of resting two or three hours in the middle of a winter-night, the best bedding you are to expect is clean straw, upon which all that meet together (men and women, Nobles and Peasants) promiscuously tumble.
That the
Germans were anciently men of courage,
[...]alour. and took that name from their prowess, we have already shew'n.
Willichius gives this high character of the present
Germans, Vincuntur quidem Germani, sed non nisi a Germanis, i. e. 'Tis indeed possible the
Germans may be conquer'd, but it must be done by
Germans. We have a good proof of this in their late wars, wherein the King of
Sweden (Gustavus Adolphus) vanquish'd the Emperor with his own Subjects. That great Prince's Army had been quickly overthrown, and swallow'd up by the Imperialists, had not the
Saxons and
Brandenburgers helpt him out. The only instance of want of courage in a
German Army which we meet with in History, is that which we find recorded of the Count of
Mansfield's Army, consisting of fifty thousand men, who suffer'd a small body of ten thousand
Turks to pass by their Trenches without disturbance, and to relieve
Gran (a great Town in
Hungary) before their faces. But we are not to argue, from this one passage, that the High
Dutch Soldiers want valour. We may be sufficiently convinc'd of the contrary, when we consider, that the Imperial Crown never yet fell from their heads; notwithstanding the many vigorous assaults made by some of their potent neighbours.
Donatus Gianottus, a late
Italian Historian, confesses, that
Non e dubio, che, se le forze dell' Alemagna
fusseno unite, habberebbe l' Italia
a temer di loro molto piu, che di quelle del Turco,
i. e. 'Tis no question, but if the Princes of
Germany would amicably compose differences among themselves, and unite their forces,
Italy would have reason to fear them much more then the
Turks. And any man will find reason to believe him, that shall consider what vast numbers of fighting men most of their Electors, and some of their less potent Princes, can raise upon occasion (but of this more hereafter). Besides, the
German Soldiers are generally tough hardy fellows; who can scarce meet with harsher entertainment, and worse lodging, in any foreign Camp, then they have been bred up to at home. 'Tis a known Adage,
‘Germani duros possunt sufferre labores.’
They are a people used to hardship; and therefore can easily undergo the inconveniences of war. The
Croats and
Switzers (the former for Horsemen, and the later for Foot) are famous all
Europe over. The only blot in the Scutcheon of a
German Soldier is, that he is too mercenary. We have a remarkable instance of this in the Army commanded by
Frideric Elector Palatine of the
Rhine, at the battel of
Prague; where the greatest part of that brave General's Army threw down their weapons, crying out
Gelt, Gelt, i. e. Money, Money; intimating, that without better pay they were resolved to fight no longer. And the King of
France has found the truth of this in his late victories; many of which (even in
Germany) were obtained by the assistance of
German Forces, which deserted their Country, and fought under his Banner, in hopes of better pay then they could expect from the Confederates.
The High
Dutch Commanders have been branded with ignorance of Martial Discipline,
Martial Discipline. and want of conduct. But the many famous Generals which their Country has bred up within the compass of little more then this last Century, have taken off that scandal. Such were, 1.
Frideric the Second, Count Palatine of the
Rhine; who bravely defended
Vienna against the
Turks, and first introduced the Reformed Religion into the Palatinate. 2.
Albert, Elector of
Brandenburg; who in some of the
Dutch Histories is stiled the
Achilles of
Germany. 3.
Albert Wallenstein, Duke of
Frideland; who equall'd
Gustavus Adolphus in valour and prudent conduct, and wanted nothing but success to make him as renown'd a General. To these we may add the present Elector of
Brandenburg (of which excellent Prince we shall have occasion to give a character hereafter), with many others.
The great recreation amongst the Nobility,
Recreations. in Summer, is hunting the Deer and wild Boars; with both which kinds of Venison the Woods and Forests in
Germany abound. 'Tis the fashion in many of the Princes Courts to hang up the pictures of such huge Boars as have been taken by them; which is near a-kin to the custom practis'd by some of our
English Gentry, of hanging up the skins of Foxes and Badgers, and Antlers of Stags, in their Halls. In the winter (when the Snow lies thick on the ground) they have a custom in Cities and great Towns, to ride round the streets in Sledges, which are shaped much like the
Sella Curulis, or Triumphal Chariot among the
Romans (if the writers of the
Latin Antiquities have described it right) and drawn by a Horse richly trapped with a great number of little Bells, and Feathers of divers colours.
Tacitus reports of the ancient
Germans,Games. that they were immoderate players at Dice; insomuch, that they would game away their Money, Clothes, Estates, and last of all their Liberty; the loser being bound to resign himself up into perpetual slavery to the Conqueror. This unreasonable kind of gaming is long since laid aside; but they still retain among them a great respect for the play at Chess, at which they are generally expert Gamesters. This game in their tongue is call'd
Schachspiel; which signifies exactly the same thing with the
Latin Latrunculorum ludus. For, in the old
German Laws collected by
Lindenbrogius, and others,
Schacher or
Schachman signifies a Robber, and
Schach, Latrocinium, Theft. The Learned Prince
Augustus late Duke of
Brunswic-Wulfenbuttel (who published an accurate Explication of
Trithemius's Cryptography, under the feigned name of
Gustavus Selenus) wrote an incomparable Treatise concerning Chess-play in the
German tongue; wherein he gives a learned account of the original, progress, and laws of that Royal Game.
Their women are of a tolerable complexion:
Women. but commonly more corpulent then in any of their neighbouring Nations; excepting the
Netherlanders, who glory in their fat. They are much more obsequious to their Husbands, and have far less of the House at Command then the
English or
French Ladies; neither do they ever, as it is the custom with us, sit at the high end of
[Page 12]the Table. Which made
Caracalla (speaking of the
Germans) say,
That no Nation knew how to govern their wives, but they that make the Sun of the Feminine gender, and the Moon of the Masculine. For the
Germans say,
der Mond and
die Sonn; where
der is the Masculine Article, and
die the Feminine. Our
English Saxons brought over the same rule into
Britain; and for a while observ'd it. Whence in an
Anglo-Saxonic Manuscript (entituled
De Aequinoctio vernali) in Sir
John Cotton's Library, we find, under ðh;am ci&cule yrnðh; seo sunne & sc mona & ðh;a tƿelf tacna,
i. e. Ʋnder this Circle (speaking of the
Zodiac)
move the Sun, Moon, and twelve Signs. And again, Hegelympðh; geaegðh;er ge to þaere & unnan ge to þam monam,
i. e. 'Tis ordinary both for the Sun and Moon. Where (as hath been noted by the Reverend Dr.
Marshall, in his learned Observations upon his own Edition of the
Saxon Gospels) Se and þam are Masculines, but Seo and þaere are Feminines. The like has been observ'd in the
Arabic by our famous Dr.
Pocock. But, to return. 'Tis an insolent rudeness among the High
Dutch to salute any woman with a kiss; except she have been bred in
England, France, or some other foreign Nation, where that fashion is observed. The only formal greeting they have, is by a mutual touch of the hand.
Their Marriages and Burials are for the most part wonderfully expensive;
Marriages and Burials. and in some places so extravagantly costly, that an ordinary man will scarce recover the charges of his Fathers Funeral, or his own Marriage, in seven years after. They always keep a Marriage-Feast (or
Hochzeit) according to their quality. Some of these Entertainments last a month; all which time the new married Couple keep open house for all comers. They send the Bell-man, or common Cryer, round the Parish to invite in all their neighbours; who send in Wine, or some other part of the Entertainment before them.
They use no Chimneys,
Lodging. unless it be to dress their meat in the Kitchin; but live in Stoves, which are heated (to what degree they please) by an Oven in the corner, or other part of the Room. They ly commonly betwixt two Feather-beds, when they are at home; tho Straw be the best bedding you meet with on the Road.
Of the
GERMAN Tongue.
MOst foreigners that do not understand the
German tongue, are strangely prejudic'd against the learning of it; looking upon it as an ungentile, barbarous, and rough language. All which aspersions have been first cast upon it, by such as were too lazy to take the pains to study it; or else too dull, after all their labour, to apprehend it. The
French use to say,
Qu'il faille parler par la langue Francoise seulement aux grands Seigneurs, mais par la langue Alemande aux mechanicques et aux Rustiques, i. e. That a man should speak
French only to Noblemen, and great persons; but confer with Trades-men and Peasants in High
Dutch. When
John Lang, Ambassador from the Emperor
Ferdinand the First, resided in the Court of
Poland, an extraordinary intimacy hapned to be contracted betwixt him and
Peter Roysy, the King of
Spain's Minister; who hearing his own Servants muttering over some broken pieces of
Dutch, which some of
Lang's Retinue had taught them, told
Lang, The Germans
did not speak, but thunder; and he fancied 'twas in this language that God forbid our first Parents Paradise. To which
Lang is said to have reply'd,
But the Serpent had before that tempted Eve
in Spanish.
It must be confessed,
Pronunciation. that there is a vast difference betwixt the pronunciation of the High
Dutch, and that of other Languages deriv'd from the
Latin. This made
Pomponius Mela say long since, that the
German proper names were not fitted to a
Roman mouth. And from hence it comes, that in the
Latin Historians, which treat of the affairs of
Germany, we meet with such strange unintelligible monsters of words, when they endeavour to put a
Latin termination to a
Dutch word, learnt only by the ear. A great number of consonants meeting together in one word, are enough to choak an
Italian or
Frenchman; insomuch, that some of both those Nations, after they have spent the greatest part of their lives in
Germany, are scarce able to speak one intelligible sentence in High
Dutch. The
Germans tell a story of a
French-man, who had spent four and twenty years in the service of one of their Nobles; who one day, hearing him sputter his broken language, ask'd him,
If he was not ashamed, after so long time spent in Germany,
to speak Dutch
no better? To which
Monsieur replied,
I look upon't as a very unreasonable thing to expect that any man should in so small a time, as twenty-four years, understand so crabbed a tongue. There are thousands of words in the High
Dutch which can never possibly be pronounced by a man whose tongue has been accustomed to a soft and easie language. How would an
Italian, Spaniard, or
French-man, mangle and spoil these and the like compound words,
Herbstfruchte, Marcktfreyheit, Pfrundpflicht, Sturmstreich, Slupfloch, Dachsjacht, Kornschacherer, &c. which nevertheless a
Dutch boy of four or five years old, will run over without stammering. Pronunciation does exceedingly vary in different Climates; and the inhabitants of cold Countries have generally a much harsher tone then those who are bred up in a warmer air. But however, the
German tongue is far from any grating harshness. 'Tis a noble and manly language; which, as one has well observed of it, better becomes a General at the head of his Army, then a Gallant courting his Mistress. The excellency of a tongue cannot be better discern'd, then by resolving it into its first principles, and taking a strict survey of it in its Letters, Monosyllables, Compounds, Derivatives, and Syntax.
Tho
Tacitus be positive in asserting,
Letters. that neither men nor women understood the use of Letters amongst the ancient
Germans; yet we are since sufficiently convinced of the contrary. The Inscriptions of those many
Runic Monuments (some of which were erected many years before
Tacitus's days) which have been of late discover'd in the King of
Denmark's Dominions, will evidently demonstrate, that some part at least of this large Nation knew how to express their mind in characters. The word
Letter is of extremely ancient use in the Northern languages; since we find it in several of the oldest Inscriptions collected by
Wormius. But whence it should fetch its original, is not easily determined; for we meet with it in almost all the
European languages. The
Latins write it
Litera; the
French, Lettre; the
Spaniards, Letra; the
Italians, Letera; the
Germans sometimes (for
buchstab is the more usual word with them) write it, as we do,
Letter. The
Latin Critics are hard put to it to six upon a good Etymology of it in that tongue. One brings it
a lituris; another, from
lino; a third,
a lineando; a fourth,
quia legentibus iter praestat; and a fifth,
quod legendo iteretur. But these are all
[Page 13]alike ridiculous; and therefore it may perhaps be worth our search to enquire, whether an apter primitive then any of these, may not be found in the
German language? and consequently, whether the
Latins borrowed the word
litera, amongst many others, from the
Dutch? Schottelius derives it from an old
Teutonic monosyllable
Lett or
Litt (still used in
Saxony and the
Netherlands, tho the High
Dutch, instead thereof, say
Glid) signifying a
member or
part; which, in the plural number makes
Litter or
Letter. This is as probable a conjecture as any
Latin writer can pretend to; since letters are nothing else but the several parts and members of a word. And possibly the
Romans had their word
Scribere from the
Dutch Schreiben, or (as it was writ formerly)
Scrieven. The most usual word for a Letter, amongst the
Germans, is
Buchstab, i. e.
einer stab des buches, or
a staff made use of in a book. The reason of which name is thus given by
Wormius,‘The ancients, says he, were wont to make one long strait line (in fashion of a staff) as a foundation of whatever they were about to write.’ And indeed the
Runic Inscriptions seem to be nothing else then a company of such staves, cross'd and turn'd as occasion requir'd. The other member of this compound word,
Buch (whence our
Book), had the like original with the
Latin word
Liber; being so called from
Buche, which signifies a Beech-tree. Because, before the ancient use of paper, the old
Cimbrians wrote on this kind of wood, and stones, as the
Romans did on the bark of trees.
Lazius gives us a specimen of an Alphabet used by the
Normans, in their Sorceries and Incantations, before ever they came acquainted with the
Romans. Duret thinks,
que l' Alphabet des lettres des
Gots a este le premier Alphabet des premieres & plus anciennes lettres, i. e. That the
Gothic Alphabet is the most ancient one in the world; and a Copy of the first Letters that were ever invented. Where by
Gothic Letters he does not understand the Alphabet invented by
Wulphilas, Bishop of the
Goths, and by him employed in writing his Version of the four Evangelists (of which the
Codex Argenteus, published by the late famous
Franciscus Junius F. F. in the year 1665, is a noble transcript): but the old
Runic characters; which the Bishop would not make use of in this pious work, because they were used in Sorcery and Witchcraft. Upon the same consideration, all other ancient Alphabets, used in the other Provinces of
Germany, were laid aside, as soon as Christianity appear'd in this Country. Thus, upon the first conversion of the
Saxons by
Charles the Great, the
Latin Letters were introduced into those parts; and their old conjuring characters abolished. Mr.
Sheringham thinks (and 'tis more then probable) that our old
Anglo-Saxonic character was first made use of upon the like occasion. For that (before their conversion to Christianity) both they and the
Danes in
Britain used another sort of Letters, seems manifest from the several fragments of
Runic Monuments found at
Beaucastle, Papcastle, and other places in the North of
England. But when those that had employ'd themselves in the conversion of these poor Idolaters, saw how these characters had been made use of in their Incantations and idolatrous practices, and that (upon the sight of them) they were always ready to return to their Sorceries; they resolved to remove them, and give others in their stead.
It was formerly a grand question among the ancient Philosophers,
[...]ignifi
[...]ancy of
[...]ords. whether words have their significations
[...] or
[...]; from the natural import of the words themselves, or the will and pleasure of the first author of them?
Plato was of opinion, that a reason could at first have been given for the name of every thing in the world; because he that gave every particular being its distinct name, knew its particular nature; and was directed by divine providence in finding out a name answerable to that nature. In like manner as
Bibliander fancies
Adam was directed, when he named every thing
according to its nature. Many learned men have been curious in observing what an accurate analogy there is in the
Greek and
Latin tongues betwixt the voices of birds and beasts; and the words which in those languages are made to signifie such and such voices.
Julius Pollux brings these, and many more, examples out of the
Greek tongue,
[...],
&c. And
Jos. Scaliger has collected these, among many others, out of the
Latin, Boare, Mugire, Rudere, Latrare, Barrire, Blaterare, Tetrinnire, Glocitare, Fringulare, Trinsare, &c. But certainly there is no tongue more exact at this sort of
Onomatopoeia then the High
Dutch. For example, the
Germans say, the Ox
beelket, the Bear
brummet, the Sheep
bleeket, the Swine
gruntzet, the Dog
baffet, the Horse
wihelet, the Cat
mauet, the Goose
schnatteret, the Hen
kakkelt or
klukket, the Raven
kraket, &c. Besides, no language comes near this, in the aptness of expressing the sounds and noises of inanimate creatures by verbs active. Which is also an excellence observed in our own tongue by the learned and famous Dr.
Wallis in his
English Grammar.
No greater argument can be made use of for the antiquity of a language,
Monosyllables. then the multitude of monosyllables; which cannot be imagined to be derived from any primitive further off, nor hardly fancied to be a corruption of so many words in foreign languages.
Simon Stevin, an ingenious
Hollander, has reckoned up 2170 monasyllable primitives (and the number might have been advanced far higher) in the
Dutch tongue; whereas, in the
Latin he can find no more then 163; and only 265 in the
Greek. In our
English tongue a whole speech might be composed of monosyllables; which are all of them originally
Dutch. Indeed, in the High
Dutch Dialect many of these ancient primitives are turned into Dissyllables: but if we look back unto the old way of writing these words, we shall find that they consisted only of one syllable. Thus,
Vater, Muttel, Himmer, Leber, &c. were anciently written,
Vaer, Moer, Himl, Lefr, &c.
There are in the
German tongue twenty-three principal terminations;
Derivatives. which (tho they signifie nothing in themselves, yet) when added to another word, do very much alter its signification. Of which our
English tongue has retain'd a great many. As, 1.
Er in
Buyer, Seller, Waiter, &c. 2.
En in
Golden, Brazen, Silvern, &c. 3.
Hood (in
Dutch heit) in
Manhood, Priesthood, &c. 4.
Dom in
Kingdom, Dukedom, &c. with many others of the like nature. By the help of these, and the authority which every man has to make use of them as he shall see occasion, the
German tongue is made exceeding copious. For sometimes you may meet with a word of five or six syllables; of which one only is significant of it self, and the rest nothing but so many terminations hudled up together. For example,
Ʋnwiederaufloslich signifies
indissolvable; in which word the syllable
los is the primitive, and the rest (
un, wieder, auf, and
lich) only prepositions and terminations annexed to alter the signification.
The
Greek tongue has hitherto been thought,
Compounds. by most learned men, to be the richest of any
[Page 14]in admirable compounds.
A. Gellius says, he often endeavour'd to render several
Greek compounds into
Latin, but found many of them so exquisitely significant, that all the skill he had in the
Roman tongue, was too little to furnish him either with a single word or Periphrasis, which would fully express the signification of any one. The words he instances in are,
[...],
&c. But however the
Latin tongue may come short of the
Greek; yet questionless the High
Dutch equals, if not exceeds it. For in this language you have not only words compounded of Adjectives and Substantives (as in the
Greek words before mentioned) and Verbs or Participles with Prepositions (which is usual in all languages); but also innumerable ones which consist of two Substantives, or two Adjectives. We have still in our
English that great elegancy of compounding Substantives on many occasions; as in these words,
Huswife, Snowball, Football, Nightcap, &c. But the greatest excellency in this kind of composition, is in altering the signification of the word by transposition of the Substantives. As in
England we say
Horsemill, and
Millhorse; Shoecloth, and
Clothshoe, &c. Examples in this kind are infinitely more in High
Dutch then
English: but I shall not stay to trouble the Reader with any more then these,
1.
Feurschiff, signifies a Fire-ship: but
Schifffeuer, a Fire on Shipboard.
2.
Jagthund, any Dog that will hunt:
Hundjagt, an Hunting with Dogs.
3.
Schifflast, the Burthen of a Ship:
Lastschiff, a Ship that carries Burthens.
4.
Friedgeld, Money paid for Peace:
Geldfried, Peace procured by the payment of Money.
5.
Wassermuhl, a Watermill:
Muhlwasser, the Water which drives the Mill.
6.
Kaufmark, the Market-place:
Markkauf, the price given for any thing bought in the Market. Sometimes three or four Substantives may be elegantly compounded into one word. As,
Walfischfang, the catching of Whales;
Kernobsbaum, a Pippin-tree;
Erbkuchenmeisterampt, the Office of the chief Master of the Kitchin; with thousands more of the like.
The
Germans have of late, in some places, much corrupted their Language, by admitting into it a great number of
French, Italian, and
Latin words; which they have turned into
Dutch by giving them a
German termination. Hence
Parliren, Disputiren, Informiren, &c. have crept into their Language. However, they are still so tender of the reputation of their own tongue, that (tho they love the fashion of using foreign words, yet) they will never write nor print any
Latin, French, or
Italian word in
Dutch characters.
It will come near an impossibility to reckon up all the different Dialects in the
German tongue;
Dialects. if we consider, that the old
British, English, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Islandic, and
Flandrian tongues (with their inferior Dialects) are only so many branches of the same stock. Besides, the differences of Dialects in High
Germany it self are innumerable; and some of them so vastly different among themselves that a
Brandenburger will hardly understand a
Misnian, nor a
Schwabe either of them. The Citizens of
Leipsic observe three several Dialects within the narrow walls of that small Town.
Busbequius found a great deal of High
Dutch in the
Tauric Chersonese; and some have brought several fragments of it out of
Persia. But, passing over the petit inconsiderable dialects and small shreds of the Tongue, the whole
German Language (confin'd to the Empire and
Netherlands) is usually divided into the two dialects of
Saxon and
Francic. The
Saxon (of which our
English tongue is a branch) contains under it the Languages of the
Netherlands, Westphalia, Brunswic, Holstein, Mecklenburg, Pomeren, the
Marks, Prussia, and
Liefland. There are many reasons to induce us to believe, that this Dialect comes far nearer the ancient
German or
Celtic then any other whatever. The strongest argument we can make use of, may be taken from that infinite number of
German words mention'd by ancient
Latin Authors, which at this day are no-where made use of but in the Lower
Saxony only; or at least among such Nations as are issued thence. Thus,
Pliny tells us, the old
Gauls call'd a Whale
Phiseter, a Fish-eater. Our
English word
Mare (whence comes the title of
Marshal) is lost in the High
Dutch; but still in use among the Lower
Saxons, who write it
Mahre. Pausanias assures us, that this was a
Celtic word; and thence fetches the
Marpais Longobardorum, spoken of by
Paulus Diaconus. Duret says,
Les habitans de Saxe se sont de tout temps & d'anciennete vantez de parler entre tous les autres Alemands la plus entiere pure & diserte langue Allemande, i. e. The Inhabitants of
Saxony have always brag'd of, and pretended to the only pure unmix'd and ancient
German tongue. There was not many years since, an ingenious Poem published in the
Saxon dialect; wherein 'tis shew'n, how far, in many particulars, this surpasses the High
Dutch, as spoken in
Misnia and
Austria. But we are not to allow of this determination; since it matters not, what alterations are made in any dialect, provided it retain manifest and undeniable marks of the fountain whence it at first sprang. The
Greek tongue was no-where so spoke as we find it in the
Grecian writers. And tho women and boys were admitted into the
Roman Theaters, to hear speeches; yet none of their writers will allow, that these people could speak the true
Latin tongue. That is only the true language of any Nation, on which the learned men in it have thought fit to set their stamp. Now, seeing the
Germans have all along pitcht upon the High
Dutch dialect in all their writings, ever since they set pen to paper; 'tis highly reasonable that we should pronounce it the nobler Dialect, and esteem it the only true
German tongue. The
Netherlanders, 'tis true, write in their own Dialect; but it is, because they will not reckon themselves a part of the Empire; and fancy they must needs be esteem'd so, if they cannot shew a Language of their own. But however, there is not one man in an hundred, of all these, who will not readily allow, that the
German language far excels his Low
Dutch.
Aventinus tells us, that
Charles the Great composed a Grammar of the High
Dutch Tongue;
Grammars. the rules of which he collected out of a company of old genealogical Ballads, which he had picked up among the Country Rustics. But
Trithemius says, he found it an undertaking too great for him; and never liv'd to finish it. After his days, the Emperor
Rudolph the First, in the year 1273, published a Decree, ordering all Lawyers to draw up their instruments and pleadings in this Tongue. Which was afterwards confirm'd by
Maximilian the First at
Colen, in the year 1512. Upon this, the study and improvement of the High
Dutch came much in fashion; and by degrees that Dialect was advanced to the repute which it now has (not only in the Empire, but) in all parts of the Northern Kingdoms of
Europe. From thenceforwards, the best Scholars in
Germany have thought it worth their while to take some pains in trimming and beautifying their
[Page 15]mother-tongue. The
German Historians mention (besides that imperfect piece of
Charles the Great) several Grammars, writ by
Pierius, Wisens, Sunthem, Aventine, Luther, and
Meliss, which are now all lost.
Luther was undoubtedly a man that thorowly understood the
German Tongue; tho he never attain'd that knowledg and accuracy, which he shews in all his writings, without a great deal of pains and study.
Sleidan represents him as the greatest Master of the
German Tongue, and best Translator of any foreign Language into his mother-tongue, that ever wrote. His translation of the Bible (now commonly made use of all
Germany over, where the Commonalty are permitted to read the Scriptures) sufficiently confirms the Historians testimony. And he himself assures us, that he took such care to have this work exactly done, that sometimes (in the translation of
Job) he and his assistant would consult for a fortnight together about the rendring of one word. But of all that have hitherto undertaken to give an account of the High
Dutch Tongue, Mr.
Schottelius (formerly Counsellor to the late Duke of
Brunswic-Wulfenbuttel) has done the best. He had, at several times, published a great many little Tracts upon this subject (as his
Sprachkunst, Verskunst, &c.) which at last he collected into one entire work in five Books, printed at
Brunswic in Quarto,
A. D. 1663.
Duesius (in his preface to his
Dutch Grammar) complains,
[...]ctiona
[...]es. that few of the Nobility of
Germany are so good Masters of their own mother-tongue, as to be able to write it right. Tho this accusation is not altogether warrantable, yet certainly the
Germans are as liable to this grosness as any other Nation in
Europe. One great reason of which proceeds (I suppose) from the want of a compleat Dictionary in their own Tongue. For by this means the wits of
Italy and
France have reduc'd their Language to that purity, which at this day makes them so much admired by foreigners. But the
Germans have not (nor ever had) any such helps in their Tongue. In the year 1616,
George Henisch (an ingenious and learned
German) published a Book at
Augsburg, entituled,
Thesaurus linguae & sapientiae Germaniae. Which, if ever finish'd, would have prov'd a work of great learning and use; but the Author dying before 'twas finish'd, it went no further then the letter H. Besides, there has not that exactness been observed either in the transcribing or printing of it, as might be expected; for often the Primitives, Compounds, and Derivatives are misplaced, and sometimes a great many of the most considerable Compounds omitted. He that would compleat this work, and write an exact Dictionary of the High
Dutch Tongue, must necessarily be a man of indefatigable industry, and accurate observation. For, 1. It will be requisite, that he make a perfect collection of all the Primitive words in the ancient
German or
Celtic Language. Which he cannot be well supposed to do out of a particular Dialect made use of in
Meissen or
Austria; but must be forced to ransack all the several branches of that copious Tongue. For it cannot be expected, but that in the
Danish, Swedish, English, Welsh, and
Norwegian Tongues, there are thousands of words which (tho not now to be met with in the
German Language, yet nevertheless) are originally
Celtic: And therefore he that would publish to the world an absolute and accurate Dictionary of the High
Dutch, must gather up into one bundle these scatter'd remnants. Since in
Germany you shall observe a vast number of Derivatives, in ordinary use, whose Primitives must be fetcht out of other Languages.
Kilian had taken a great deal of pains in collecting the old
Saxon words into his
Teutonic Dictionary: but his elaborate work suffer'd no small injury by the ignorance and avarice of Booksellers, who in their later Editions have left out the greatest part of the old words, as obselete and out of use.
Schottelius has made a very considerable catalogue of these
stamm-worter (as he calls them) or radical words: but 'tis capable of a vast enlargement. 2. He must be exceeding punctual in setting down all the different Cases of Nouns, and the Moods and Tenses of Verbs: for hence proceeds no small variety in the
German Tongue. 3. He must of necessity converse with all manner of Tradesmen, and from them learn the names of their Tools,
&c. For it is hard to conceive, what a large portion of any Tongue is confin'd to Tradesmen's Shops and the Husbandman's Stall. The Miners in
Germany have almost a particular Language of their own; which cannot be understood by any
Dutchman never concern'd in that employment.
Joh. Matthesius (formerly Minister at
Jochimsthal, and an intimate acquaintance of
Philip Melancthon's) publish'd twenty Sermons in the year 1562, which were all preach'd before a congregation of Miners, and contain an explication of all the Texts of Scripture which mention either Mettals or Minerals. In which discourses the Author has industriously muster'd up the greatest part of the words and phrases peculiar to the Miners. About two years ago there was printed, at
Freyberg in
Meissen, an Alphabetical Dictionary consisting of nothing else but these kind of terms and phrases. If by these, and some other such-like means an accurate Dictionary of the
German Tongue were compleated and published, the generality of High
Dutch would be able to write, as well as speak, their own Language perfectly; and foreigners would not find it so hard a task to be Masters of that noble Tongue. And without doubt the profit would richly recompence the pains and cost. They only betray their own ignorance, who proclaim to the world, that there is nothing worth the reading writ in High
Dutch; since, 'tis well known, the
Germans are the best Mechanics in the world; and do still instruct the rest of
Europe in the Art of purging and refining all sorts of Mettals. Now most of those who are employ'd in this Art are men that have not had the opportunity of learning any language but their own; therefore we must expect, that the instructions we have from them be writ in High
Dutch. Another grand advantage which an
Englishman will reap from the perfect knowledge of this Tongue, will be an ability of understanding much more readily the Histories and Customs of his own Country. For there are in
England, and
English writers, innumerable names which will never be rightly explain'd by any man utterly ignorant of the
German Tongue. Nor is it enough to have breath'd in the
German air, and to return with a little smattering of the modern Language; but our
English Antiquary ought to be a man that has traced the
Dutch Language thro the several alterations it has met with, by the frequent change either of time or place.
The daily sensible corruption of our own Tongue,
Corruption of their Tongue. is sufficient to inform us what we are to expect in another, after a revolution of some Centuries. 'Tis true, the High
Dutch are not so much enamour'd of A-la-mode
French words and phrases as the
English; yet 'tis impossible but that every Age should produce some notable alteration in the best of Languages. What the Language was before
Charles the Great's days, we have no other way of guessing
[Page 16]then by consulting the proper names of men and places mention'd in
Latin Historians: for this Emperor was the first that by his own example taught them to write Books in the
German Tongue. By his appointment
Kaiban, Haimo, and
Strabo translated the Bible into High
Dutch; and
Otfrid, a Monk, turned the four Evangelists into
German Verse; of which later there are still many Copies to be seen, one of which was printed at
Basil in the year 1571. A little before the Emperor
Rudolph the First's public Edict for the Pleading and Registring all Lawcases in the
German Tongue, we find the life of
Anno, Archbishop of
Colen; a Copy of which was published by
Martin Opitz (the
Maro of the
German Nation, as he is usually stiled) at
Dantzic in the year 1639.
Melchior Goldastus has collected, and in the second Tome of his
German Antiquities, published a great many old
Francic (or High
Dutch) Edicts, Patents,
&c. besides several Glossaries, and other small fragments. An ancient Paraphrase on the Canticles written by
Willeramus Abbot of
Merseburg, was published (out of an old Manuscript in the Library at
Leyden) by
Raphelengius in the year 1598, and afterwards illustrated with learned observations written and published by
Franciscus Junius F. F. at
Amsterdam in the year 1655. The famous
P. Lambecius, in the account he has given of the Imperial Library at
Vienna, has published several fragments in the same ancient Dialect; which had been lost for many years. And the industrious
F. Junius (now mention'd) has collected a great company of
Francic Glossaries, never yet publish'd. Besides, we find among that learned man's papers (which by his Last Will and Testament, he bequeathed to our University of
Oxford)
Tatian's
Harmonia Evangelica in
Latin and
Francic; upon which he has writ Notes, and a large Commentary. All which (with many other of that incomparable Authors works) may, 'tis hop'd, e're long be published. How much these several pieces differ from one another, and how vastly all of them vary from the
Dutch found in
Luther's Translation of the Bible, will be best discern'd by those who (not without infinite pleasure and satisfaction) shall take the pains to compare them. Nay, as I am inform'd, there is no small difference (in spelling and dialect) between
M. Luther's own Manuscript Copy of the High
Dutch Bible (still kept in the Library at
Noremberg) and the printed Copies that bear his name, and have his very words, but alter'd according to the modish speaking of later years.
As no particular Age has hitherto given us the sight of an entire
German Tongue; so neither are we to expect to find it perfectly spoke at this day in any one Dukedom or Province in the whole Empire. The Citizens of
Vienna are thought to speak tolerable good High
Dutch; tho the rest of the
Austrians bestow too much breath upon their words, and speak far broader then any other
Germans, All agree, that the
Misnians talk most accurately; and in
Meissen the Citizens of
Leipsic have usually the preeminence.
Of Learning and Learned men amongst the
GERMANS.
'TWas questionless long before the
Germans arrived at any great stock of Learning: tho (what
Tacitus reports of them)
that they were all of them utter strangers to Letters, is notoriously false, as we have shewed before. The only care they took to preserve the memory of any great man, was by registring the famous actions of his life in Doggerel; which they used to sing among themselves, but never committed any part of it to writing. Their Letters, made use of chiefly (if not altogether) in their Idolatrous Ceremonies, were reckon'd too sacred to be employ'd in humane affairs. Some Schools they had, wherein the Priests, and others that serv'd at their Altars, were educated and instructed in the principles of their false Religion: but none of these mysteries were revealed to the Commonalty. For altho (as
Cluverius affirms) the Priests themselves had some knowledge of a true God, the Creation of the World, Eternity of the Soul,
&c. yet these secrets were deliver'd to the Rustics in dark Fables and mysterious Riddles. After the
Germans grew acquainted with the
Romans (especially in the Reign of
Hadrian the Emperor) several good Schools were erected in many places of
Germany; insomuch, that their young Noblemen were commonly taught to understand and write
Latin. Nay, they are said to have been so greedy of learning any thing that came from
Rome, that the
German Soldiers would ordinarily return out of the Camp perfect
Romans, both in Language and Manners. But most of these Schools were upon or near the banks of the
Rhine; and still the Northern
Germans were destitute of all opportunities of such good education. Yet afterwards, when the Kings of
France got footing in
Germany, they (especially
Dagobert and
Charles the Great) founded Schools wherever they came. One grand undertaking, which the Governors and Masters of these Schools enter'd upon, was, the reducing of the High
Dutch tongue to writing; which before that time had never been tyed up to any rules. This they found to be a difficult task, and it was long before they could compass their designs; insomuch, that for many years all manner of proceedings at Law (nay, the very rudiments which were taught to School-boys, and whatsoever else was committed to writing) were constantly drawn up in the
Latin tongue. But by degrees the
Germans got their Language regulated; and then apply'd themselves to the study of all the liberal Arts and Sciences.
And they went on with so much zeal,
Ʋniversities. that in a short time there were several Universities of good note. Histories report of
Charles the Great, that he built
Gymnasia (or great public Schools for the teaching of the Arts and Sciences) according to the number of the Letters in the Alphabet: many of which grew up in time to be Universities; which multiplied so exceedingly, that
Justus Lipsius affirms, that in his days there were more Universities in
Germany then in all Christendom besides. At this day, they reckon above thirty Universities, besides
Gymnasia, in the Empire; and most of these are as well stockt with Scholars as any University in
Europe. 'Tis reported, that when the Emperor
Charles the Fourth, King of
Bohemia, had founded the University at
Prague, and given equal priviledges to
Bohemians, Polanders, and
Germans, the City was overburthen'd with Scholars; insomuch, that he was resolved to retrench his favours. And within a week after this Decree was put in execution, no less then 24000 Scholars fled out of
Prague; and not long after, sixteen thousand more follow'd them. Whence it appears, that in that one University there were in those days more Students then almost any other Nation in
Europe could shew; and more Scholars in
Prague then inhabitants
[Page 17]in most great Cities. In the year 1409, there was reckon'd forty four thousand Scholars under the Rectorship of
John Huss; which are an incredible number, if we consider how vastly they surpass the slender multitudes which any of our modern Universities can brag of. The Princes of
Germany are still exceedingly zealous in keeping up the state and grandeur of their Universities; and there is nothing they so much pride themselves in, as the number of Scholars which their Dominions afford.
The
Germans are all of them exceedingly industrious in their several Callings and Professions;
[...]. and their Scholars study as hard as their Rustics drudge. The
Hebrew tongue is no-where so generally studied as among the
Germans; and few attain to so great a knowledg of it as they ordinarily do. This kind of study seems to have had its first original from a mutual exchange of Languages betwixt this Nation and the
Jews; since no
European tongue is so generally spoken by the
Jewish Merchants as High
Dutch. The greatest accusation which foreigners have hitherto laid to the charge of the High
Dutch, is, that they are generally troubled with too great an itch of printing; tho they have nothing to publish but the state of a Question, or a few Common-places collected out of the writings of their Cotemporaries. It were to be wished, that a little more moderation were made use of in publishing those millions of Suppositions and Disputations, which yearly overstock the Fairs at
Franckfurt, Leipsic, &c. But, I suppose, the greatest thing proposed in printing of these Philosophical Pamphlets is, first the hindering of every poor fellow from taking a degree (since no man can be a Graduate in
Germany who has not published one such Disputation at least): And secondly, the maintaining the many Presses which are in each University.
There has been in
Germany in all Ages (since Learning first flourish'd in the Western parts of
Europe), and still continues to be, a great number of famous men excellently skill'd in all Arts and Sciences. Of whom we shall not in this place trouble the Reader with a Catalogue; but refer him to the following Descriptions of the several Provinces; where he may expect to find most of them mention'd, when we come to treat of the particular Universities, in which they flourish'd.
Of the ingenious Inventions of the
GERMANS, and their skill in Mechanics.
NO man, however prejudic'd against the
German Nation, will deny, that they are incomparably excellent at the Mechanical part of Learning. They are admirable at Chymistry, Medicinal Compositions, and all sorts of Physico-Mathematical Experiments. But, besides the improvements of these, and many other parts of Natural Philosophy, they have had the repute of being accounted the first Inventors of the two great requisites of Scholars and Soldiers,
viz. Printing and Gunpowder.
Albertus Magnus, [...]. a
Dominican Frier, was the first that practis'd Chymistry in
Germany; and taught it publicly. After him, the greatest part of that, and several other Religious Orders, addicted themselves to this kind of study: for the carrying on of which there are as great conveniences here as in any other Country in
Europe. Amongst the rest, one
Barthold Schwartz (a
Franciscan Frier) had made a great proficiency in this Art; and had, at several times, communicated many rare experiments to his Fraternity. One time having mingled some dry'd Earth, Sulpher, and Saltpeter, with some other ingredients, in an Earthern Crusible, and plac'd them on a hot fire, in order to some preparation or other; on a sudden, the Vessel was broke into a thousand pieces, with a wonderful noise and violence. At first he was amazed at the unexpected event; but afterwards, having often repeated the experiment, he began to imagine there might be more in the business then he lookt for; and fancied, that this lucky hit might, if well improv'd, give occasion to an invention far beyond his first expectations. Whereupon, he caused a long Iron pipe to be made, with a touch-hole. This he cramm'd full of those ingredients which he had observed to contribute most to the foremention'd effect, and put some small stones above them; which were quickly, as soon as the combustible matter was fir'd, thrown out with a greater noise and violence then the first accident had produc'd. This was the first original of Guns; which hapned (says the Author of the
Vera inventa Germaniae) in the year 1380; but either that Author was grosly mistaken, or his Book is false printed. I suppose it ought to be read in the year 1330. for some time the invention was kept private, and communicated only to some private friends; but it was not long before the
Germans (as
Volaterran tells us) discovered the secret to the
Venetians, when they were besieged by the
Genoueses. And how gratefully they acknowledg'd the kindness, is manifest from the Cities of
Padua, Verona, &c. which the
Venetians soon after, by the help of Guns, took from the
Germans; and have not to this day restor'd them. If it had been possible to have confin'd the Art of making Gunpowder to Christendom only, the Christians might have been in a better posture of defence against the
Turks (in all parts of the known world) then now they are: And had the
Germans kept their own counsel, they might by this means have made themselves Masters not only of
Europe, but the whole world. So terrible and irresistible were great Guns and Mortar-pieces upon their first appearance. But within a short time, the
Jews (who always swarm'd in
Germany) had pryed into the secret; and immediately, out of spite to Christianity, and hopes of great gain to themselves, taught the
Turks the whole Art. For this reason the
Muscovites do still mortally hate the
Jews; and (as most pernicious Creatures in a Christian Commonwealth) forbid them to traffic in their Dominions. After the
Venetians, the Merchants on the
Baltic were the first that made use of Guns at Sea, In the the year 1347, the
English took
Calais by the help of Guns. The
French had the Art from the
English; whom they requited just as well as the
Venetians did the
Germans (tho not with so great success); for
English-men were the first they shot at. Soon after, the
Spaniards got the knack; and they quickly handed it over to the
Moors. Tho the common vogue has usually hitherto given the
Germans the credit of being the first inventors of Guns (and 'tis no great matter if we go with the stream, yet) many of our Countrymen are unwilling to give away the honour of inventing the Powder from our
English Nation.
Roger Bacon (a
Franciscan Frier, sometime Fellow of
Merton-Colledg in
Oxford), in one of his Epistles, inscribed
ad Parisiensem, has these words,
In omnem distantiam quam volumus possumus artificialiter componere ignem, comburentem ex sale Petrae, & aliis, (instead of
aliis a Manuscript Copy in the hands of our late
[Page 18]Learned Dr.
Gerard Langbaine, Provost of
Queen's Colledg in
Oxford, had
Sulphure & Carbonum pulvere). He adds,
Praeter haec, sunt alia stupenda Naturae, nam soni velut Tonitrus & coruscationes possunt fieri in aere, imo majore horrore, quam illa quae fiunt per naturam: Nam modica materia adapta, sc. ad quantitatem unius pollicis, sonum facit horribilem & coruscationem ostendit violentum, & hoc fit multis modis quibus Civitas aut Exercitus destruatur. —Igne exsiliente cum fragore inaestimabili. —Mira haec sunt, si quis sciret uti ad plenum, in debita quantitate & materia. In which words he tells us plainly,
‘That out of Saltpeter, Sulphur, and Coal-dust, he could make fire which should burn at what distance he pleased; that with the same matter he could cause Thunder and Lightning in the Air more terrible then that produc'd by Nature; that a City or Army might be destroy'd by this kind of fire; that the flame burst out with an unspeakable noise,
&c.’ Whence (says our ingenious Dr.
Plott, in his
Natural History of Oxfordshire) 'tis plain, he either invented or knew Gunpowder. Dr.
Dee, in his Annotations upon the Epistle now quoted, fancies he conceal'd the invention purposely in the word
aliis (for so all the Copies he had met with read the passage); as well knowing what a murdering thing Gunpowder would prove, if discover'd. But he had another reason sufficient to stop the discovery. For his Skill and Mathematics had given occasion to some of his ignorant acquaintance to take him for a Conjurer, and as such to commit him to prison. Which jealousies would questionless have been augmented by his raising these kind of Thunderings in the Air. He dyed in the year 1292; which was near an hundred years before ever any
German pretended to the invention of Guns. The relations we have of the
Spaniards first discoveries of
Mexico and
Peru will inform us, what strangers the
Americans were to the use of Guns. Those poor P
[...]gans concluded the
Spaniards must needs be Gods; when, after Lightning and Thunder, their Companions fell down dead before them. Hereupon, they began to sacrifice to them as solemnly as to any of their Idols; till the
Spanish cruelty had given them reason to change their opinion. They had no other argument to put a stop to their devotion, then a perswasion that 'twas impossible Heaven should be a Kennel of such Blood-hounds as they had experienc'd these men to be; and therefore they resolv'd to try whether these Thunderers were not mortal. The proposed experiment they managed thus: When a company of them had made a shift to catch a stragling
Spaniard, they dipp'd him over head in water; which they conitnued to do so long till by his being drown'd they discover'd his mortality. But it was not long before the
Americans themselves grew acquainted with these Engines of Thunder; and within a short time the
Spaniards Guns recoil'd upon their Masters. Both
Spaniards and
English have smarted in the West
Indies, for revealing this secret of war to the Pagan Natives.
Another invention the
Germans challenge which has been as great an advancement to learning,
Printing. as the former to war,
viz. PRINTING. The
Hollanders will not allow of this pretension; asserting obstinately, that this admirable invention was first hit upon at
Harlem, in that Province.
Bertius, Boxhornius, and
Scriverius (a Citizen of
Harlem) are stout maintainers of this their pretended right; and alledg many probable arguments in behalf of what they say. We shall give the Reader a short account of the arguments on both sides; and refer the determination of the controversie to himself. The
Germans tell their story thus: This noble Art was invented at
Strasburg in the year 1440, by
John Guttenburg (an Alderman, or
Schepin, of that City), and perfected at
Mentz by the same man. In the public Library at
Basil they shew several Books printed with the very first characters that were invented by
John Guttenburg; which were Cast Letters, such as are at this day used in Printing Presses, though not so exact. The most considerable argument the High
Dutch have for themselves, is taken from the character in which they find the first
Latin Books are printed: which is near (if it be not the same with) that black Letter which is to this day used by the
Germans in their ordinary writings. Now 'tis likely (say they) that if any other people had been the first inventors of Printing, they would have made use of the characters of their own Country. But the
Hollanders are not perswaded with any arguments from any of these kind of Topics, to resign their title, and quit all manner of pretensions: but are as zealous for
Harlem, as the former for
Mentz or
Strasburg. They tell us, Printing was first invented by one
John Lawrence Coster, a Citizen of good fashion in
Harlem. Who walking one night after Supper in the adjoining Wood with some of his little Grandchildren, he cut some pieces of the Bark of a Tree into Letters; and printing therewith some characters upon paper, taught the little Boys their Alphabet by this new contrivance. But observing that the invention was capable of a further improvement, he immediately advanced; and within a few days printed off several copies of sentences and fragments collected out of divers Authors.
Hadrian Junius says, he saw the first Book that
Lawrence printed; in which this was observable, that the Leaves were not printed on both sides; but two Leaves glued together, to avoid the deformity of vacant pages. Afterwards, he changed his Beechen Letters into Leaden ones; and those, not long after, into Tin. This done, he contriv'd that glutinous sort of Ink which to this day is made use of in all Printing-Presses. The House where he liv'd is still to be shew'n, near the Market-place in
Harlem; on the front of which was formerly engraven his Picture, with some Verses in commendation of him. But of late they were struck out, to take away the occasion of the Marketpeoples staring up at the windows. The Burgomaster and Raedtsherrn of the Town have in their custody a specimen of his first Essay; and
Junius reports, that in his time they had several drinking-cups (kept in his house beforemention'd) which were made of the first Letters he used.
Angelus Rocha (who published an account of the
Vatican Library, in the days of Pope
Sixtus the Fifth) tells us, that
Aldus Junior, a learned Antiquary, shew'd him a printed Copy of
Donatus's Grammar in Vellam; in the first page of which were these words,
Johannes Faustus civis Moguntinus, Avus maternus Joannis Schoeffer, primus excogitavit imprimendi artem typis aereis: Quos deinde plumbeos invenit, multaque ad poliendam artem addidit ejus filius Petrus Schoeffer. Impressus est autem hic Donatus & Confessionalia primo omnium A. D. MCCCCL. Admonitus certe fuit ex Donato Hollandiae prius impresso in tabula incisa. In which words
Mariangelus Accursius (for the same Author says 'twas his hand) assures us, that the first man that printed Books in
Germany with molten Letters had the first hint of his Trade out of
Holland. The old Chronicle of the City of
Colen (which was wrote in the year 1496) confirms this story in telling us,
wie wail die kunst is vonden tzo Mentz, als dan nu gemeynlich gebruicht wirt, so is doch die eyrste vurbyldung vonden in Hollant vuss den Donaten,
[Page 19]die dae selffst vur der tzyt gedruckt syn, i. e. Notwithstanding the common report of the first invention of this Art at
Mentz; yet the first hint was had from
Holland; where
Donatus was printed before that time, (speaking of
Guttenburg's first printing at
Mentz). And indeed most of the
German Historians seem very willing to grant, that the first printing with wooden Cuts was invented by this
Coster (before their Countryman found out the way of setting Letters, composing words out of the several different characters, and making lines up of words, and pages of lines); but this they look upon as an Art distinct from Typography, and no more then (in all probability) was some thousands of years since practis'd in
China (and perhaps
Mexico too) where they used thus to cypher out their Hieroglyphicks. But the
Hollanders have a second part of their story; which, if true, utterly confutes whatever the High
Dutch can pretend to bring against them. They tell us further, that after
Costor had improv'd this new-found Art so far as to print with Tin Letters, he began to take more Servants into his House, to enable him to carry on his work with greater vigour. Amongst these there was one
John (whom
Junius fancies to be
Joannes Faustus abovemention'd), to whom upon his taking an oath of secresie, the whole Art was communicated. After this fellow had for some time apply'd himself with all imaginable industry to his trade, and attained to as great skill as his Master, he resolv'd at the first opportunity to fly, and to take with him as many of his Masters Utensils as he and another (whom he had made privy to his design) could conveniently carry off. Accordingly, on Christmas-Eve (which was a night of as great solemnity in
Holland in those days, as it is still in the Popish dominions) whilst
Coster and his whole Family were attending the usual Processions, these two seized on as many Cases of Letter, and other printing instruments, as they were able to convey without the danger of being apprehended in their flight. With these carriages
John and his Companion got safe to
Amsterdam; where, for some short time, they privately printed small Books and Pamphlets. Thence they removed to
Strasburg, and there communicated their Art to
Guttenburg; who, carrying on the Press at his own charges, had the honour of being reckon'd the first Printer in the world. At last they setled at
Mentz; where (out of danger of being prosecuted by
Costor) they kept open shop, and made public profession of their Trade. The first Book they printed in this City was
Alexander Gallus's Grammar, with
Peter Hispanus's small Grammatical Tracts annex'd. There is in our public Library at
Oxford, a Copy of
Tully's Offices printed by this
Faustus on Vellam: which, by the irregular and unequal cut of the Letter, seems engraven in plates or cut in wood; as those Copies of
Coster's work which are in the custody of the Prince of
Orange, and the Citizens of
Harlem. At the end of it we read these words, in red Letters:
Praesens Marci Tulii clarissimum opus. Johannes Fust Moguntinus civis. non atramento. plumali canna ne
(que) aerea. Sed arte quadam perpulcra. Petri manu pueri mei feliciter effeci finitum Anno M. CCCC. LXV.
Junius says, that he often has heard his Master
(Nicolas Gale) tell of an old Bookseller in
Harlem, with whom he was acquainted in his younger days; who had been Servant to
Coster, and Chamber-fellow witht his Fellow that cheated him of this invention. The old man would tell the story with such vehemency of passion as commonly caus'd the tears to gush from his eyes; and he was resolv'd to undeceive the world, but liv'd not so long as to perform his promise. These are the reports we have from both parties, whereby each of them pretends a just title to the Invention: but whether has the surer grounds, I dare not venture to determine. Some
French Authors have engaged their Kingdom in the brawl; and assert, that
France has as good reason to lay claim to this point of Honour, as either
Germany or the
Low Countries. The grounds they have for this conjecture, are exceedingly mean and inconsiderable. The first original of their mistake (as
Wimpheling assures us) was this: About the year 1471 the Art of Printing was first carried to
Rome by one
Ʋldaric Hahn, a
German. Now,
Hahn (in the High
Dutch) signifies as much as the
Latin appellative
Gallus, a Cock; whence the
Latin writers call'd him
Ʋldaricus Gallus, which
Campanus, and others, interpret
Ʋlderic a Frenchman. And when those Historians had represented him as the first Founder of Printing in
Italy; these men, very illogically, concluded he was the first Inventor of that Art which the world ever heard of. Notwithstanding these brags, Printing was not only us'd in
Holland and
Germany, but in
England also, before ever the
French were acquainted with it.
Stow tells us, the
Hollanders first taught our Nation this Art; being brought over into
England by
William Caxton about the year 1471; and adds, that the first printing in this Isle was in
Westminster-Abbey. But it appears the Art was sooner brought hither then he speaks of: For there is in the Archives of our University of
Oxford, a Copy of St.
Jerome's Exposition of the Apostles Creed (given by Mr.
Moses Pitt, the Publisher of this ATLAS), printed on Paper, which ends thus:
Explicit exposicio sancti Jeronimi in simbolo apostolorum ad papam laurencium. Impressa Oxonie et finita Anno domini. M. cccc. lxviii. xvii die decembris. Mr.
Wood (in his learned Account of the Antiquities of our University at
Oxford) tells us, that
Robert Tourner (Master of the Wardrobe to King
Henry the Sixth) was the first that brought from
Harlem into
England the Art of Printing. The King furnish'd him with seven hundred Marks; and
Thomas Boucher (Arch-Bishop of
Canterbury, and Chancellor of
Oxford, who put the King upon this business) contributed three hundred more, to carry on the design. For some time,
Tourner did nothing but travel up and down with
Caxton, who traded at
Amsterdam and
Leyden: and could never come at
Harlem; because the Citizens were cautious of admitting any stranger, that might cheat them of the Monopoly of this new Art. At last (after the King had sent him a new supply of five hundred Marks) he agreed with
Frideric Corsellis (one that wrought at the Press) to steal away from his Trade, and come over with him into
England. Which, according to contract, he did; and set up a public Print-house at
Oxford. Where a strong Guard continually attended him, till others had learned his Art; for fear he should make an escape before he had perform'd his promise. Not long after this, there was a Print-house set up at
Westminster, another at St.
Albans, a third at
Worcester, and many others in several Monasteries. The oldest Book we find printed at
Westminster, is
Caxton's Chronicle of the Kings of
England; which was published in the year 1480.
Boterus (who is follow'd by some late Authors that rely too much upon his authority) affirms, that the
Chinois had the use of Printing amongst them above a thousand years before 'twas known in
Europe; and that the
Europeans are not beholden to their own ingenuity for the discovery, but the good nature of these strangers who imparted the secret
[Page 20]to them. But if this be true, why then did not
Marcus Venetus bring over the Art with him to
Venice, Rome, or
Naples; that so the
Italians might have had the credit of being the first Teachers (or Restorers at least, for
Boter hardly allows the
Germans any better title) of the Art of Printing in
Europe? When this question is press'd home to
Boter, he is forc'd to confess (tho unwillingly),
I Tedeschi sono stati Inventori della stampa, dell'artigliaria, et dell' horologio a mota, cose Nobilissime. i. e. The
Germans have been Authors of three noble Inventions; Printing, Guns, and Clocks.
I do not find any great reason to believe the
Germans to have been the first Inventors of Clockwork;
Clockwork. (tho they are as likely men, if Histories would allow us to fix our conjectures upon them, as any in the world). But, I am afraid,
Boter injures his own Country in ascribing this to the High
Dutch. The first man whom the
Latin Historians mention as the contriver of an Engine in this kind, is
Severinus Boetius, a famous Philosopher and Nobleman of
Rome. We meet with a Letter from
Theodoric King of the
Goths to this
Boetius, to beg a Clock of him to present to his Brother-in-law
Gundibald King of
Burgundy; in which Letter he calls this Engine,
Machinam mundo gravidam, coelum gestabile, rerum compendium, i. e. A Machine that encircled the world, a portable Heaven, an abstract of the Universe. But however, none have more improved the Art of making Clocks and Watches then the
Germans. The Emperor
Charles the Fifth had a Watch in the Jewel of his Ring; and our King
James had the like: both which were made in
Germany. In the Town-hall of
Prague there is a Clock that shews the annual and periodical motions of the Sun and Moon; the names and numbers of the Months, Days, and Festivals of the whole Year; the time of the Sun's rising and setting; the rising of the Twelve Signs in the
Zodiac; and lastly, the Age of the Moon, with its several Aspects. In the Elector of
Saxony's Stable at
Dresden there is a Saddle, which in the pommel hath a gilded head, with eyes continually moving, and in the hinder part of it a Clock; which shews exactly the hour of the day. These and the like knacks are ordinary in every part of
Germany: but the most famous, in its kind, is the great Clock at
Strasburg; of which a full account shall be given when we come to treat of that City.
Tycho Brahe tells us, that
William Lantgrave of
Hassia, had spent much study in contriving a way to regulate Clocks and Watches (that the former should not gain, nor the latter lose any thing, in their motion): but what success he met with, that great Astronomer does not inform us. This in great measure is now perform'd by the regulation which is given to motion by the Pendulum; and farther emprovements are projected by some ingenious members of our Royal Society at
London; and, 'tis hoped, they will be shortly able to give the world a good and satisfactory account how they have sped in the enterprize.
The High
Dutch have far outgone the rest of the
European Artificers at the
[...], or ingenious knacks and extravagances of Art: then which nothing more demonstrates the excellency and curious skill of a workman. One of these (not many years) presented the
Landtgrave of
Hassia with a Bear and Lion of pure Gold; which were hollow within, and each of them about the length of a man's middle finger. Every part and lineament in them was proportionable to their length; and both together weighed no more then a
French Crown. The most curious man in this kind, which ever the
German Nation bred, was
Johannes Regiomontanus; who, as
Keckerman tells the story, when the Emperor
Maximilian came to the City of
Noremberg, made a wooden Eagle which flew an
English mile out of Town to meet him, and return'd back with him to his Lodgings.
Peter Ramus reports of the same man, that having invited some friends to a Feast, to divert them, he threw an iron Fly from his hand, which flew round the Room and return'd to him again. Engraving, Painting, Cutting of Seals,
&c. are Arts which the High
Dutch are almost generally well skill'd in.
Of the Religion of the Modern
GERMANS.
WE have before given the Reader a view of the Idolatrous practices, Ceremonies, and Sacrifices of the Pagan
Germans; and shew'n how zealous they were in defending the Rites and Customs of their false Religion; and how much honour and respect they paid their Priests, and indeed all others who attended upon their Altars. Nor shall we find them less zealous in maintaining the true Religion after their Conversion to Christianity. A sufficient testimony of which we may have from the multitude of Monasteries, Nunneries, Bishoprics, and Collegiate Churches which are every-where to be met with in
Germany.
This great Country cannot be suppos'd to have been all converted at once, but piecemeal; and hardly one Province in it but had its different Apostle.
Theodoret mentions
Germany, as well as
Britain, amongst the Nations converted by the Apostles. And the Historian who (under the name of
Dorotheus Bishop of
Tyre) publish'd a Synopsis of the Twelve Apostles and Seventy Disciples, reports, that St.
Thomas the Apostle preach'd in
Germany. But these and the like stories have little of certainty in them; and therefore we shall not insist much upon the credit and authority of the Relators. However, the testimonies we have from
Irenaeus and
Tertullian are unquestionable; and both of them mention the
German Church. So that we are sure, that so much at least of
Germany as was made subject to the
Romans, was a part of the true Church within the compass of the second Century; since
Irenaeus commends the orthodox opinions of the
German Nation. The Fable of St.
Ʋrsula, and her 11000 companions, is ridiculous; and was first contriv'd in the twelfth Century. The
Roman Martyrologers begin now to be asham'd of the story; and therefore in their red letter'd Calendar, instead of
Ʋndecem mille Virgines, they write
Ʋrsula cum Sociis: being loath to defraud the Church of an Holiday, yet unwilling to impose such a palpable and incredible lye upon the Commonalty. 'Tis certain, there were two
German Bishops present at a Council held by
Constantine the Great, in the year 314. But all this proves no more then that
Germania Prima and
Secunda (which were in those days two
Roman Provinces) were converted to Christianity. In the eighth Century many of our
English Divines were sent over into
Germany by
Egbert Archbishop of
York, to convert the Infidels in that Country: among whom the chief were,
Willibrod Bishop of
Ʋtrecht, Willibald Bishop of
Aichstat, Swibert of
Verdin, Willibald of
Bremen, and
Winifrid (who for his good deeds got the surname of
Boniface) Archbishop of
Mentz. The last of these prov'd most fortunate in the undertaking, and converted the greatest part of the Country between the
Rhine and
Weser. The
German writers acknowledg this man
[Page 21]for the great Apostle of their Nation. His Epistles, published by
Serrarius, shew him to have been a very zealous man in his enterprize. After him,
Charles the Great brought over the
Saxons (tho not without much bloodshed) to Christianity; and utterly extirpated Idolatry in most parts of his Empire. The
Bohemians and
Moravians were not brought into the Church till some years after. But of the Religion of these Countries (with the Doctrines of
John Huss and
Jerom of
Prague) we shall speak elsewhere.
But the first beginning of the Reformation is that which will for ever magnifie the
German Church.
Reformation.M. Maier reckons this great work amongst the
vera inventa Germaniae; as if the Religion cried up by
Luther had been a new thing, and not a restoring of the ancient Doctrines of the Church. This alteration in Religion was thus occasion'd: In the year 1517, the Archbishop of
Mentz, being to pay to the Court of
Rome a greater sum of money then he could conveniently raise in his own Territories, got leave of the Pope to stock all the Markets in
Germany with Indulgences and Pardons for all manner of sins past, present, and future. Whereupon he dispatches one Frier
Tekel his Agent with orders to cry these commodities in all the Mart-Towns in the Empire; and to expose them to sale, if Customers came in. The Frier had serv'd an Apprenticeship to this trade; and therefore knew how to make a good market, if
Luther had not appear'd against him. But he, upon the first noise of this business, first protested against these proceedings, and afterwards publicly oppos'd them. This was a strange surprize to the Popish Agent; who warn'd him (under the penalty of being otherwise for ever excommunicated and condemn'd for an Heretic) to reclaim his errors, and suffer his Holiness's work to go on. But
Martin was too stout to be discouraged with threats or great words; nay, they serv'd only to provoke him the more. In
Wittemberg and
Leipsic he immediately proclaimed war against all that should pretend to assert the Pope's power of granting Pardons and Indulgences. Several disputes were held by him and his Converts in the University at
Leipsic against the Popish party; who, when their arguments would not reclaim him, branded him with the name of Heretic; and forbad any to hear him under the pain of Excommunication. But the Elector of
Saxony's protection counterpois'd these rants; and how successful
Luther prov'd, upon this encouragement, is well enough known to the world. This Elector was quickly follow'd by the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Lunenberg, Wirtenberg, Mecklenberg, and
Pomeren; with the Marquess of
Brandenburg, Landtgrave of
Hassia, and most of the Imperial Cities. These all jointly gave in a Protestation (containing certain points, in which they had dissented from the ordinary tenents of the Church of
Rome) to the Imperial Chamber at
Spire, in the year 1529; from which time they had the name of
Protestants. The year following they deliver'd in a Confession (subscribed by them all unanimously) at
Augsburg; thence call'd
Augustana Confessio. After this, upon their refusal to recede from the opinions they had profess'd, the Emperor
Charles the Fifth thought to force a recantation with his Sword. But after a long war, and great slaughter on both sides, the Emperor was glad to grant them at last a Toleration, and authorize their Confession; which was done at
Passaw in the year 1552, and afterwards confirm'd to them at
Augsburg in the year 1555. In the first beginning of the Reformation,
Luther took care to have the Bible translated into High
Dutch, and published all over
Germany. He compiled also new Catechisms, to teach the children.
About the year 1519,
Zuinglius (a Canon of the Church at
Zurich in
Switzerland) began first in those parts to dissent from the Church of
Rome, and declare against the fopperies of the Mass, Images,
&c. The good success which
M. Luther had met with in the Western parts of
Germany, encouraged him in the undertaking; and it was not long after, that his Tenents spread themselves as wide as
Luther's had done before. For in the year 1526, the Mass was put down by an Order of the Senate in
Zurich; and within two years after, Images were destroy'd at
Bern. The clashing between him and
Luther about the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper (the later asserting Consubstantiation; and the former denying the Elements to be any more then bare Signs of Christs Body and Blood) did not a little hinder the progress of
Zuinglius's Doctrines; and the Popish party were well pleased to see the Reformers jar among themselves. They met at
Marpurg in
Hessen, to try if they could possibly determine the controversies betwixt them; but broke of without any agreement. Upon this, open war was proclaimed between them, by the names of
Sacramentarians and
Ʋbiquitarians. However,
Luther's credit still encreased in
Saxony, and the Territories of the Dukes before mention'd; and
Zuinglius was in as great request in
Switzerland. John Calvin succeeded
Zuinglius in his place at
Zurich, adding several new opinions (touching Predestination, Free-will, final Perseverance,
&c.) of his own to the Doctrines preach'd by his predecessor. This enlarged the breach between the
Lutherans and
Calvinists (for so the
Zuinglians were now call'd), and made them irreconcilable enemies. But notwithstanding the bad language which
Calvin's followers had from the
Lutherans, the authority of
Calvin prevail'd so exceedingly as to be entertain'd in
France, Scotland, the
Netherlands, a great part of
Poland, and many Provinces of
Germany. Whereas
Lutheranism never reach'd much further then it was at first spread by
Luther himself. The Kingdoms of
Denmark and
Sweden embraced
Luther's Doctrine very early; and the generality of the inhabitants of both those Nations profess it to this day. But in the Dominions of the Electors of
Saxony and
Brandenburg, Luther's credit decays daily, and is thrust out by
Calvinism. The present Elector of
Brandenburg is a
Calvinist; and encourages men of his own perswasion in the Universities of
Francfurt upon the
Oder, Konigsberg, and
Rostoc. This makes the Scholars of
Leipsic (who are strict
Lutherans) dread his coming into their neighbourhood when he comes to take possession of
Holie; which falls into his hands upon the death of the present Administrator,
Augustus Duke of
Saxony. For the
Lutherans hate a
Calvinist as much as a
Turk; insomuch, that in the Great Church at
Leipsic they have the pictures of the
Devil, Ignatius Loyola, and
John Calvin, hung in one frame with this subscription,
The three great enemies of Christ and the Christian Religion. At
Wittemberg, the only support which
Luthers Doctrine has left is
Abraham Calovius, an old Gentleman, that has taken great pains to run down all opposers of his opinions. But the greatest part of the University begin to close with
Calixtus Junior (one of the present Professors in the University of
Helmstadt) and his followers, who are stout pleaders for Comprehension.
In the Kingdom of
Bohemia, Arch-Dukedoms of
Bavaria and
Lorain, the Territories of the three Spiritual Electors, and other Bishoprics which still remain in the hands of the Clergy, the Popish Religion is still profess'd.
THat the vast tract of Land which to the Ancients was known by the general name of
Germany, was subject to several Princes, and never acknowledged the Supremacy of any one Governor (except perhaps in the time of war, in which all the particular Provinces were mutually concern'd to unite and defend themselves from the assaults of some potent foreign enemy) before the coming of
Charles the Great to the Imperial Crown; seems plain from the whole History of that Nation. From this great Prince we must therefore begin to reckon the
German Emperors.
A. D. 800.
Charles (son of
Pepin King of
France) was Anointed and Crown'd Emperor by Pope
Leo the Third upon
Christmass-day. He had before this rescued
Italy, and a great part of
Germany from the tyranny of the
Lombards; and annex'd the whole Dominions of their King
Desiderius (whom he took prisoner) to the Kingdom of the
Franks. In the year 772 he began to make war upon the
Saxons (at that time the most potent people in
Germany) in hopes to reduce them, which he at last effected, to Christianity. Wherever he conquer'd he establish'd the Christian Religion, and erected Schools for the education of young children in the same Doctrine. He was a great Benefactor to the University at
Paris; where he would himself frequent Disputations, and reward the industry of those he found to be deserving men. Besides, he was the Founder of an incredible number of great Schools, and petit Universities in
Germany; insomuch, that we shall scarce, in the following Description, mention a Town of considerable note in the Empire, which has not receiv'd some signal kindness from him. I know not whether it were his Acts of Piety or Prowess got him the title of
Great: but doubtless both deserv'd it. After he had been Emperor fourteen years, he died at seventy-two years of Age, in the year 814, and was buried at
Aix la Chapelle, where he had built a Church; and design'd also to have establish'd the chief Residence of the
German Emperors. All his Epitaph was,
Magni Caroli Regis Christianissimi, Romanorum Imperatoris corpus hoc Sepulchro conditum jacet. He bequeath'd his Empire to his Son
Ludowic, then King of
Aquitain.
814.
Ludowic, or
Lewis (for his piety, and zeal in promoting the Christian Religion, surnam'd the
Godly) succeeded his Father. He was Crown'd Emperor by Pope
Stephen IV. at
Rheims in
France. Soon after his entrance upon the Empire, he procur'd a translation of the Bible into the
Saxon tongue; Copies of which he caused to be distributed among the Commonalty. The greatest exploit of war which he is reported to have done, was the expulsion of the
Saracens out of
Italy. Besides this, he took his Nephew
Bernhard (King of
Lombardy, who had endeavour'd to make himself Master of
Italy) prisoner; and putting out the eyes of him and his followers, condemned them all to a Monastery. By his first wife
Irmengarde he had three Sons,
Lotharius, Ludowic, and
Pipin; who, overpower'd with the perswasions of some bad companions, rebelled against their Father; whom they took prisoner, and shut up in a Monastery. Some say his Son
Ludowic released him willingly; but the most generally receiv'd story is, that most of his Subjects rose up in Arms, resolving to rescue their Emperor. Which
Ludowic seeing, he submitted himself to his Father, and begg'd pardon. After he was set at liberty, he march'd with his own, and his Son
Ludowic's Forces against
Lotharius, who had raised the strongest rebellion; but dyed on the way, at
Mentz, in the twenty-seventh year of his Reign, and sixty-fourth of his Age.
840.
Lotharius, the Emperor
Ludowic's eldest Son, succeeded his Father in the whole Empire; having thrown out his two Brethren, who were left partners with him. He was the first that annex'd
Austrasia (which was from him call'd by the High
Dutch Loth-reich, by the
French Lot-regne, now
Lorreign, i. e. Lotharius's Kingdom) to the
German Empire. After he had ruled fifteen years, he retired into a Monastery at
Treves; where he lived some time after. In his days Pope
Joan, under the covert name of
John VIII. (as the Historians of that time generally relate) was Head of the Church of
Rome.
855.
Ludowic II. (a Prince of wonderful Piety and Learning) succeeded in the Empire upon his Fathers resignation. He conquer'd the
Sclavonians, and converted them to Christianity; defended
Italy from the incursions of the
Saracens; and made provision in most parts of his Empire for poor Widows and Orphans. He had a great quarrel with the Court of
Rome for electing a Pope without acquainting him. But the Popish writers tell the story otherwise, and say, That when the Emperor heard how that Court had elected Pope
Adrian II. into the room of
Nicolas I. without staying for his voice, he commended them highly for so doing. Nay, they make him give this reason for his approbation of their proceedings,
Qui enim fieri posset ut peregrinus & hospes dignoscere posset in aliena republica, quis potissimum caeteris praeferendus sit? i. e. How is it possible that a stranger should be so well skill'd in a foreign Commonwealth, as to be able to pitch upon a man fittest for promotion? Which, says
Wimpheling, was a saying that became so great an Emperor. He Reign'd nineteen years and ten months.
875.
Charles the
Bald (a base mean-spirited man,
Ludowic the First's Son) succeeded his Nephew. Pope
John IX. perswaded him with fair words and money to come to
Rome for his Coronation, and there to receive the Imperial Scepter from his hands. He Reign'd only two years; being poyson'd, as was supposed, by one
Sedechias a
Jewish Physitian.
878.
Ludowic, surnam'd
Balbus, succeeded his Father
Charles; but never enjoy'd the Crown (if it was, which many question, ever set upon his head). When he had linger'd out a year and an half, he dyed; leaving his Throne to
879.
Charles III. surnam'd the
Gross, from his bulk and fatness. He might have been stiled a second
Charles the Great, if he had been as successful in managing as obtaining of Kingdoms. For, by the death of his two Brothers, all
Germany, France, and
Italy came into his hands. He was the first that added the year of our Lord to the year of his Reign, in the dating of any public Proclamations, Grants,
&c. At last (when by several base actions, especially in concluding a dishonourable peace betwixt himself and the
Normans, in which he gave them that part of
France which is still called
Normandy, he had contracted the hatred of the whole Empire) he was deposed by his Nobles; and dyed miserably in a poor beggarly Village in
Schwaben.
888.
Arnolph (Natural Son of
Caroloman Duke of
Carinthia, and King of
Bavaria) was elected into the room of
Charles, thus deposed; and rul'd the Empire with a strong arm for twelve years. He quell'd the Rebels in
Moravia and
Normandy; and defeated
Guido and
Berengarius, who had made head against him in
Italy. He storm'd
Rome, and took it; but soon after was poyson'd there, by the procurement of
Guido's wife, and dyed in great misery; being eaten up of Lice, which the poyson bred in his body.
900.
Ludowic IV.
Arnolph's Son, was elected by the Nobles into his Father's stead. The
Hungarians were continually at war with this Emperor; who had seldom the good fortune to come off the field a Conqueror. In these skirmishes a great part of the
German Nobility was cut off; which shortned his life, and brought him to his grave before he had got a Son to inherit his Throne. He dyed an unfortunate Prince; and with him the Family of
Charles the Great was wholly extinct. During his Reign there was another
Ludowic set up for Emperor by the Pope in
Italy; who was taken prisoner, and had his eyes put out, by
Berengarius King of
Lombardy.
912. After the death of the Emperor
Ludowic, the Princes of
Germany proffer'd the Imperial Crown to
Otto Duke of
Saxony; who had the name of the wisest man and best Soldier of his time. But old Age had render'd him (at least in his own conceit) unfit for Government. Whereupon, he made over the proffer'd Empire to
Conrad Duke of
Franconia; who, upon
Otto's recommendation, was immediately declared Emperor. He was no sooner stept into the Throne, but his carriage disobliged a great many of the Princes of the Empire; who made war upon him, and put him hard to 't to keep the reins in his hand.
Henry (Duke of
Saxony, Duke
Otto's Son) engag'd him the oftest, and with greatest courage and success. However,
Conrad by his last Will and Testament (notwithstanding the frequent quarrels between him and that Duke) bequeathed his Empire to
Henry; whom he had experienced to be a Prince that for his valour and conduct deserv'd an Empire.
919.
Henry (surnamed
Auceps, from the great delight he took in Hawking) was by the
German Princes, according to the tenour of the Emperor
Conrad's Will, proclaim'd King of the
Romans at
Fritzlar. Soon after, the Pope fent to proffer his service in consecrating and anointing him Emperor: but it was not accepted. For
Henry return'd his Holiness this answer, that
'twas enough for him, that Gods providence, and the voices of his Nobility, had made him King of the Romans.
They that fancied this Title too mean, might (in Gods name) go to Rome
for Consecration and Ʋnction: but, for his own part, he was satisfied with the honour already conferr'd on him. He was a valiant and prudent Prince; one that composed most of the animosities and quarrels of his own people, and bravely defended them from the incursions of the
Hungarians, and other foreign Enemies. He was the first that instituted the sports of Tilts and Turnaments; and fortified the great Towns in
Germany. Ordering, that every ninth Bore should remove his Family into a City; and that the Citizens should be maintain'd by a Contribution of the third part of the Corn and Hay round about the Country. Having overthrown the
Hungarians at a memorable Battel near
Mersburg, he had the title of
Pater Patriae, rerum Dominus & Imperator conferr'd upon him. Afterwards, going into
Italy, he was taken with an Apoplexy; of which, to the great grief of the whole
German Nation, he dyed, after he had reign'd seven years and six months.
936.
Otto, the Emperor
Henry's Son, succeeded his Father in the Empire, and equall'd him in all his acts of piety, wisdom, and prowess; whence he was surnamed the Great. He compell'd
Harald, King of
Denmark, to acknowledg the Emperor of
Germany's Supremacy, and embrace Christianity; subdued the
Bohemians, and forc'd their Prince
Boleslaus to turn Christian; deposed Pope
John XII. and put
Leo VIII. in his place; making a Decree, that for the future the power of chusing Popes should be in the Emperor alone. The fashion of Christening of Bells was first brought up in his Reign.
973.
Otho II. succeeded his Father
Otho the Great. He found the Empire in peace, and (excepting some small skirmishes betwixt him and his Cousin
Henry Duke of
Bavaria, whom some malecontent Bishops had proclaimed Emperor) never met with any opposition in his own Dominions. He overthrew the
Turks in
Apulia; and was thence stiled
Pallida Saracenorum mors. He reign'd eleven years; and at his death left the Empire, as he found it, in perfect peace.
984.
Otho III. surnamed the Child, was advanc'd to his Father's Throne at ten years of age; but quickly grew up to be a Prince of wonderful sagacity and prudence. Some say, he was the first that instituted the manner of Electing an Emperor by the majority of the Voices of Seven Electors (of which more hereafter). He reign'd eighteen years, and dyed in
Italy; being poyson'd with a pair of Gloves presented to him by the wife of
Crescentius, a Rebel whom he had caus'd to be hang'd. The woman had been his Concubine for some time after her husbands death; and was in hopes of being married to him, and so made an Empress. But when she saw him ready to leave
Italy without taking notice of any former contract betwixt them, and preparing for a return to
Germany, she was resolv'd by this expedient to satisfie her revenge, tho she could not provide for her lust and ambition.
1002. Upon
Otto's death,
Henry Duke of
Bavaria was chosen Emperor by the Electors. His piety got him the Title of
Holy; and a mischance in his Childhood surnam'd him the
Lame. Willegise Archbishop of
Mentz (a Wagoner's Son, whence that City got a Wheel for its Arms) Crown'd him. He fought many great Battels, and from most of them came off Conqueror. The
Saracens were by him driven out of
Apulia and
Calabria; and the
Wendish Armies, which had over-run a great part of
Germany, he utterly vanquish'd. He is by some Historians stiled the
Apostle of Hungary; because he was the first that thorowly converted that Nation. Upon his death-bed (after he had reigned twenty and three years) he is said to have return'd his Empress
Cunigunda to her friends for a pure Virgin; in which state, by mutual consent, they both had continued from the first day of their marriage. Tho we read, that once he so far question'd his Wife's chastity, and the performance of her Vow, as to make her purge her self by a fiery Ordeal. Which she perform'd by going barefoot over a red-hot iron grate, without the least shrink or sense of pain.
1024.
Conrad, a Prince descended from
Charles[Page 24]the Great, succeeded
Henry; and was Crown'd Emperor at
Aix la Chappel by the Archbishop of
Colen. Amongst Historians we find this high character of him, that he was
Acer consilio manuque strenuus, charus Principibus, Populo acceptior, Reipublicae salutaris, i. e. Quick at Council-board, and valiant in the field; one on whom the Princes of the Empire doted; the People's Darling; the strength of the Empire. One of the good Laws which he established was,
That it should be death for any Prince to offer to disturb the peace of the Empire by making an offensive war upon any particular Province in it. He died suddenly in his return from an expedition against the
Hungarians; and was buried at
Spire, after he had reigned fifteen years.
1039.
Henry (surnam'd the Black,
Conrad's Son) succeeded his Father in the Empire. He reign'd seventeen years and seven months. The first war he engag'd himself in, was against the
Bohemians; upon their refusal to pay tribute to the Emperor. Afterwards, he turn'd his Forces against the
Hungarians; and restored their King
Peter, who had been deposed by his own Subjects for Tyranny. In the year 1046, he march'd into
Italy to compose differences among the three Popes, who were set up by contrary factions. But he depos'd them all, and made a fourth,
viz. Clement II. renewing the old Law, wherein it was enacted,
That no Pope should be created without the consent of the Emperor.
1056.
Henry IV. succeeded his Father at six years of age. He is said (during his reign, which lasted fifty years) to have fought sixty-two great battels: which are more then either
Marcus Marcellus, Julius Caesar, or any other
Roman General could ever brag of. Pope
Hildebrand (who went under the name of
Gregory VII.) cast off this Emperors yoke; and, after some skirmishes, got
Rudolph Duke of
Schwaben proclaim'd Emperor in his stead; to whom the Pope presented an Imperial Crown with this Inscription:
‘Petra dedit Petro, Petrus diadema Rudolpho.’ But this Emperor, of the Pope's making, was soon vanquish'd and slain. However, within a while, the Empire was taken from him in good earnest; and that by his own Subjects, who deposed him, and elected his Son into his room. This Emperor is reported to have been brought to those extremities before his death, as to be forc'd to beg a Prebendary of the Bishop of
Spire (some say
Wormes) in the Church which he himself had built; which was nevertheless denied him.
1106.
Henry V. was admitted into his Father's Throne by his rebellious Subjects, and crown'd Emperor at
Goslar. At his Coronation part of his Sword was melted with Lightning; but the Scabbard was untouch'd, and himself escap'd without harm. He was forc'd to acknowledg the Pope's Supremacy; and to quit all pretensions to the power of Investiture, which his Ancestors challeng'd as their right. He reigned nineteen years; dyed without issue; and was buried at
Spire.
1125.
Lotharius, Duke of
Saxony, was elected to succeed
Henry V. and receiv'd his Crown from the Pope at
Rome, in the year 1133. The greatest thing this Emperor did, was the reviving the practice of the Civil Law in the
German Empire; after it had been banish'd thence for the space of five hundred years.
1138.
Conrad (Duke of
Schwaben, and
Lotharius's Sister's Son) succeeded his Uncle; carrying the Empire against
Henry Duke of
Bavaria, who for some time opposed him. In his days a Body of the Canon Laws was first set forth by
Gratian a
Benedictine Monk; and publicly taught in the Universities of
Germany. He reign'd fourteen years.
1152.
Frideric Duke of
Schwaben (surnam'd
Barbarossa, from his red beard) was elected Emperor, upon the death of
Conrad; and was Crown'd at
Rome by Pope
Adrian IV. He was a wise, valiant, and pious Prince; and commonly fortunate in all his undertakings. Pope
Alexander the third excommunicated him for his obstinacy; but afterwards was reconciled, when the Emperor threw himself at the Pope's feet, and suffer'd him to tread on his neck. In the year 1187 (accompanied with our King
Richard I. and
Philip II. King of
France) he went to fight against the
Saracens in the Holy Land. Here he was drown'd in a river, wherein he intended only to have bathed himself; and was buried at
Tyre, after he had reign'd thirty-eight years.
1190.
Henry (
Frideric Barbarossa's Son), tho short of his Father in deserts, was-elected into his place. He took
Tancred prisoner in
Sicily (who thought to have supplanted him in that Kingdom), and having put out his eyes, sent him bound into
Germany. Pope
Celestine (who Crown'd him Emperor) perswaded him to engage himself in the Holy-war; but he never reach'd
Palestine; dying upon his journey thither, when he had reigned almost eight years.
1198. Upon the death of the Emperor
Henry, his Brother
Philip was at first elected. But (because he refused to submit himself to the Pope, as his Ancestors had done) he was shortly after excommunicated; and
Otto Duke of
Brunswic, by the Electors, and the Pope's authority, declared Emperor. Whereupon, the two Emperors engaged the whole Empire in a long and bloody war; each asserting a legal title, and refusing to quit his pretensions, to the Crown. At last,
Philip was treacherously slain in his bed; after he had ruled the Empire (at least the greatest part of it) ten years.
1208.
Otto (Son of
Henry, surnam'd the Lion, Duke of
Brunswic) got possession of the Empire, as soon as
Philip was taken of. He had not reign'd four years e're he met with his Predecessor's fate; having the Imperial Crown taken from his head, by the Pope of
Rome and the Electors, and given to
Frideric King of
Sicily. Otto got some succours from the Kings of
England and
Poland; but was never able to make any considerable resistance. One battel decided the controversie; establishing
Frideric in the Imperial Throne;
Otto being deserted on all hands, and afterwards dyed miserably at
Brunswic in the year 1218.
1212.
Frideric II. King of
Sicily, being by these means advanced to the Empire, prov'd a wise, valiant, and learned Prince; in every respect like his Grandfather
Frideric Barbarossa, beforemention'd. He is said to have understood perfectly the
German, Greek, Italian, and
Turkish tongues; and to have been admirably apprehensive at learning all manner of Arts and Sciences. He was five several times excommunicated by three Popes: but could never be forced to submit. Pope
Gregory IX. was deposed by him; and had doubtless lost his head, if he had come into his hands alive. His continual quarrels with the Popes, gave the first occasion of heats and animosities (which afterwards burst out into a terrible combustion and flame) betwixt the
Guelphs and
Gibellines; whereof the former adher'd to the Pope's interest,
[Page 25]and the later to the Emperors. After he had reign'd thirty-eight years, he dyed (some say, was poyson'd) in
Italy.
After his death follow'd an
Interregnum of twenty-three years continuance; during which time the Empire was govern'd indeed by none, but claim'd by these seven following Princes: 1.
Henry, Landtgrave of
Hassia and
Thuringen, who was slain at the siege of
Ʋlm. 2.
Conrad IV.
Frideric the Second's Son, who was elected King of the
Romans, and (in the year 1254, after he had pretended to be Emperor for three years and five months) was poysoned by his Physitians. 4.
Manfred. 5.
William Earl of
Holland; who was first pronounced King of the
Romans by the Pope, in opposition to
Frideric II. He was slain treacherously by the
Frisians. 6.
Alphonsus, King of
Castile; the Author of the famous Astronomical Tables that still bear his name. 7.
Richard Earl of
Cornwal, Brother to our King
Henry III. He is supposed to have bought the voices of the Archbishop of
Colen and the Elector Palatine of the
Rhine; who proclaim'd him King of the
Romans in the year 1254. But the same men that set him up, deposed him afterwards; and he was forc'd within six years to return to
England, where he ended his days.
1273.
Rodolph Earl of
Habsburg (after a long and grievous
Interregnum) was by an unanimous consent of the Electors chosen at
Francfurt. His election was confirm'd by the Pope; but he refused to fetch his Crown from
Rome, alledging for an excuse that of
Horace,
—quia me vestigia terrent,
Omnia te adversum spectantia nulla retrorsum.
Whereupon, he was Crown'd at
Aix la Chapelle; and immediately after his Coronation, put out several Edicts for the suppressing of Robberies, Oppressions, and Tumults; which the late licentious Anarchy had produced. These Statutes and Proclamations he back'd with force of Arms; till he had at last reduc'd the Empire to its former peace and tranquillity. And 'twas no easie matter to effect this, since in the single Province of
Thuringen, he met with no fewer then sixty strong Castles, which the Robbers had made almost impregnable. He was the first that raised the
Austrian Family; creating his Son
Albert, who was afterwards Emperor, Arch-Duke of
Austria. He dyed in the year 1271, and was buried at
Spire, in the seventy-third year of his age.
1292.
Adolph, Earl of
Nassaw, was by the interest of the Elector of
Mentz, declared Emperor; contrary to the expectation of most of the
German Princes, who thought him a Prince no way qualified for so high an advancement. He serv'd in person, and took pay in the Army of our King
Edward I. who was at that time engaged in a war with
France. This was so highly disgusted by the Elector of
Mentz (his late promoter, who thought it an action highly infamous in an Emperor to make himself mercenary), that he prevail'd with the other Electors to depose him, and elect in his stead
Albert Arch-Duke of
Austria. Adolph, tho not able to manage the Empire, was unwilling to part with the power he had once got into his hands; and therefore (assisted by
Otto Duke of
Bavaria, Rudolph Count Palatine of the
Rhine, and several of the Imperial Cities) he was resolv'd to oppose
Albert and his party to the uttermost. But all the forces which he or his friends could raise, were not sufficient to secure him; so that (upon the first engagement, which happen'd near
Worms) his whole Army was routed; and he himself slain by Duke
Albert's own hand; after he had reign'd six years and six months. The
German Historians observe, that all the Officers who commanded
Albert's Army against the Emperor
Adolph, came to untimely ends.
1298.
Albert, having thus slain
Adolph, was Crown'd Emperor at
Aix la Chappelle; and receiv'd his Crown, tho he once refus'd to do it, at the hands of Pope
Boniface VIII. He is said to have been a Prince of quick parts and solid judgment; a munificent rewarder of men of great deserts, and as severe a punisher of delinquents: but withal, one that too greedily gap'd after the Territories and Dominions of neighbour Princes. He made his Son
Rudolph King of
Bohemia; and endeavour'd, tho in vain, to bring the Kingdom of
Hungary under his own subjection. At last, when he had reign'd ten years, he was treacherously slain by his Nephew, and three Ruffians more of his party; who, for this murder, were afterwards imprison'd and executed.
1308.
Henry, Earl of
Luxemburg, for his great wisdom and valour was elected into the room of
Albert. He rul'd the Empire four years and nine months; and is reported to have been a Prince of such an even temper, that no excess either of prosperity or adversity could move him; and so devout in the exercise of religious duties, that he would spend whole nights in prayer before a Crucifix, and constantly every day receive the Sacrament of the Lords Supper. This last piece of devotion cost him his life; for he was poyson'd by a
Franciscan Minorite with a Consecrated Wafer. The Emperor was immediately sensible of the Friar's villany, and therefore advised him to withdraw speedily, lest he should be apprehended. But the Priest neglecting his counsel, was seized on; first flay'd alive, and afterwards put to death.
After the murder of this Emperor, ensued a great famine in most parts of
Germany; which was so terrible in
Bohemia and
Poland, that in some Families Parents and Children fed upon one another. Nay, in many Provinces the Malefactors that were in the day time executed for Murder and Robbery, were in the night stoln from the Gallows or Gibbet; and carried by the half-starved Bores to their Cottages, and there eaten up. Those that escaped the Gallows abroad, and the jaws of hungry friends at home, had much ado to secure themselves from the ravenous Wolves, which could hardly be kept off with the best weapons the inhabitants were able to provide. The
German Chronologers have made use of the word
Cucullum to bring to their remembrance the remarkable year when this famine first begun (for it lasted three years in all), whence the Verse,
‘Ʋt lateat nullum tempus famis ecce
CUCULLUM.’
In which last word we have as many Numeral Letters as will give us the year 1315.
1318.
Ludowic, Duke of
Bavaria (after an
Interregnum of some years) was Elected and Crowned Emperor by a majority of the Electors; but was oppos'd by
Frideric Duke of
Austria, the Emperor
Albert's Son, who was set up by another faction, and Crown'd at
Bonna a small
[Page 26]Town in the Territories of the Archbishop of
Colen. For some time the dispute was managed with equal success betwixt the two Emperors; but at the last the victory went on
Ludowic's side, who (having utterly routed
Frideric's Army) got the whole Empire into his own hands. He was a great opposer of the Pope's authority; insomuch, that in a public Oration, spoken by him at
Francfurt, he declared openly,
Quod nihil Juris Pontifici Romano
sit in Imperium, i. e. That the Bishop of
Rome had no reason to pretend to any Jurisdiction over the Empire. He deposed Pope
John XXII. and set up
Nicolas V. in his stead. He sleighted the Popes Excommunications, which were daily denounc'd against him; being encouraged thereto by
Occam (and some others), who came in with him for a share in the Curse.
Occam's continual advice to him was,
O mi Imperator, Tu me gladio defende, ego Te verbis & scriptis defendam, i. e. Do you, my Liege, guard me with your Sword, and I'll protect you with words and writing.
1346. Upon the death of
Ludowic, Charles IV. (Son of
John King of
Bohemia) was elected and proclaim'd Emperor, by a Gang which he had corrupted with large sums of money. He is blam'd by some Historians for taking much more care of the public affairs of
France and
Bohemia then those of the Empire; for being more solicitous in promoting the interest of his own private Family then the good of the Commonwealth; and lastly, they represent him as a miserable penurious wretch, that minded more the scraping together an Estate and great Portions for his Children, rather then the administring of Justice, and the grand concerns of his Empire and people. However, 'tis commendation enough to say, that he was the first contriver and establisher of the
Aurea Bulla; which contains a register of all the Rites and Ceremonies, which for ever are to be observ'd by the
German Princes in the Election of their Emperors (of which more hereafter). He was doubtless a prudent and learned Prince; one that took great delight in the reading of Books, and enjoying the company of Scholars. There were three more Emperors elected against him at several times; but none of them contended with him for the Crown. The first of these was
Edward III. King of
England, whose brave exploits in
France had made him famous all
Europe over. But he, finding employment enough in the management of his own Dominions at home, very generously refus'd the Imperial Diadem when it was offer'd to him. The second was
Frideric Landtgrave of
Thuringen; who for a good sum of money very willingly quitted his pretensions.
Gunther Earl of
Schwartzburgh, was the third; who was Crown'd at
Aix la Chappelle, and drew up his Forces near
Francfurt, intending to have given his Rival battel. But
Charles was loath to encounter so great a Soldier; and hazard an Empire at one engagement, which had cost him such large sums as he was obliged to pay to some of his Votaries. He still fancied his Gold was the best weapon he had to trust to; and so indeed it prov'd. For therewith he hired a Physitian to poyson
Gunther's body; which made him unfit for government. That done, he compounded with his Children; and a small piece of money bought off their Title. He reign'd thirty-two years.
1378.
Wenceslaus, Charles the Fourth's Son, succeeded his Father, upon his earnest entreaty; for there was nothing in himself that could deserve a Crown. In the beginning of his reign he gave himself up to all manner of vicious practices; and towards the later end proved a cruel, but unfortunate Tyrant. He was twice taken prisoner; but made his escape. At last, the Electors (weary of so sordid an Emperor) deposed him; after he had reign'd twenty-two years.
Frideric, Duke of
Brunswic, was elected into the room of
Wenceslaus; but never liv'd to enjoy the Imperial Crown. For, returning from the Election, he was barbarously slain by
Henry Count
Waldeck; who, with a company of Ruffians, lay in ambush for him near
Fritzlar. Whereupon, the Electors immediately return'd to
Francfurt, and chose
1400.
Rupert, Elector Palatine of the
Rhine. A Prince of great valour, tho never engag'd in any war but by constraint. The greatest enterprize he ever set upon, was the recovery of the Dukedom of
Millain; which his predecessor
Wenceslaus had sold. But
John Galeazzes (at that time Duke of
Millain) quickly routed his Army; and forc'd him to retire back into
Germany. He dyed in peace, after he had reign'd nine years and ten months, and was buried at
Spire.
1410.
Jodocus Barbatus (Marquess of
Moravia, and the Emperor
Charles the Fourth's Nephew) succeeded
Rupert. He reign'd no longer then five months; being no way qualified for an Emperor; and having nothing remarkable in him but his beard, which surnam'd him
Barbatus.
1411.
Sigismund (
Wenceslaus's brother, King of
Hungary and
Bohemia) was chosen into
Jodocus's place, by an unanimous consent of all the Electors. Historians represent this Emperor as a Prince of incomparable piety, learning, and valour; who wanted nothing but success in his undertakings, to make him compleatly happy. He was a great promoter of the Council of
Constance, held in the year 1415, wherein
John Huss and
Jerom of
Prague (notwithstanding the Emperors Pass, and promise that they should return safe to
Bohemia) were condemn'd to be burnt alive for Heretics. This so incensed the
Hussites, that they immediately rebell'd against
Sigismund, under the command of their General
Zysca, who had been bred up in the Emperors Court. This
Zysca prov'd so fortunate in the field, that he vanquish'd the Emperors Army fourteen several times. He was a Captain of that courage, that (after his death) his Soldiers cover'd a Drum with his skin; imagining, that the noise thereof would strike terror into the hearts of the stoutest of their enemies.
Sigismund having reign'd twenty-seven years (most of which time was spent in a continual war with the
Hussites) dyed, and left his Empire to his Son-in-law
1440.
Frideric III. (or IV. if we reckon the Duke of
Brunswic, who was slain at
Fritzlar, for one) Duke of
Austria, was unanimously elected into the Imperial Throne, upon the decease of the Emperor
Albert; and was Crown'd Emperor at
Rome by Pope
Nicolas V. He made it his whole business to procure and establish an universal peace in Christendom; and to that end procured the calling of the Council of
Basil. He married
Leonora daughter of
Alphonsus King of
Portugal; whence the Houses of
Spain and
Austria were united into one Family. He reign'd fifty and three years (the longest of any of
[Page 27]the
German Emperors), and dyed, as some say, of a Surfet by eating too much of a Melon; tho he was never tax'd for being guilty of any manner of intemperance in meat or drink, but always esteem'd a severe punisher of drunkenness and gluttony.
1493.
Maximilian succeeded his Father
Frideric; having been, before his Fathers death, Crown'd King of the
Romans, in the year 1486. From his birth till he was almost nine years old, he is said to have been utterly speechless; but afterwards he gain'd the use of his tongue, and prov'd one of the most eloquent and learned Emperors that
Germany ever bred. He married
Mary the only Daughter and Heiress of
Charles Duke of
Burgundy; upon which marriage, all the Dukedoms, Marquisats, Earldoms, and other Dominions of which the said
Charles had been Lord, were for ever annex'd to the Territories of the House of
Austria. The wars he was engag'd in against his neighbours on all hands (especially the
Venetians) were almost innumerable; tho for the most part he was forc'd to take up Arms in his own defence. 'Tis reported of him, that he would never pass by a Gallows or Gibbet without a reverent salute, in these words,
Salve sancta Justitia. For five years before his death (which happen'd in the twenty-fifth year of his reign) he had his Coffin always by him, and carried after him in every expedition he undertook; which gave some of his retinue occasion to conjecture that he had some great treasure in it, and that the pretence of its putting him in mind of mortality, was only a false veil to blind the vulgar.
1519.
Charles V. (Son to
Philip King of
Spain) was elected Emperor, and Crown'd with the greatest pomp imaginable at
Aix la Chappel. A puissant and brave Prince; who well deserv'd the surname of
Great, conferr'd on him by Pope
Paul III. The whole History of his Life seems to be nothing else but a Catalogue of his Conquests. The writers of those times mention forty great victories obtain'd by him; and seventy battels from which he came off the field a Conqueror. The Pope of
Rome and the
French King were at the same time his prisoners. He quash'd the League made by the Protestants at
Schmalcade, and took the Elector of
Saxony and Landtgrave of
Hassia prisoners. He forced the Great
Turk to relinquish
Vienna; and afterwards won the Kingdom of
Tunis. At last (having reign'd thirty-eight years), loaded with victories and honour, he resign'd the Empire, and betook himself to a Monastery; where he was used to say,
That he had more pleasure and satisfaction in the retired and solitary enjoyment of one day in a Monk's Cell, then ever he could perceive in all the fortunate Triumphs that attended the rest of his life.
1558.
Ferdinand I. (upon the voluntary resignation of his Brother
Charles V.) was by an unanimous consent of the Electors declared Emperor; tho Pope
Pius IV. refused to pronounce the Election valid, because
Ferdinand had granted the
Lutherans a toleration. But, some say, the same Pope was afterwards so far reconciled to him, as to grant him the priviledg of receiving the Sacrament of the Lords Supper in both kinds. He was a mild, peaceful, and temperate Prince; a hard student, and perfect Master of the
Latin tongue. He was exceeding courteous to all (even the meanest of) his Subjects; and had a certain hour in every day, in which he attended the suits and complaints of poor men. When some of his Courtiers objected to him the inconveniences that would follow upon the permission of so easie an access to all manner of supplicants, he answer'd,
That himself could expect but harsh usage at Gods Throne, if beggars were hinder'd from approaching his. He dyed of a Catarrh in the sixty-first year of his age; after he had reign'd six years.
1564.
Maximilian II. (
Ferdinand's Son, and King of
Bohemia) was elected into his Fathers room; being first proclaim'd King of the
Romans at
Francfurt, and afterwards Crown'd King of
Hungary. This Emperor prov'd as great a favourer of the Protestants as his Father; insomuch that some
Roman Catholics have not stuck to call him the
Lutheran Emperor. He renewed the Articles of Peace agreed upon between the Protestant and Popish parties at
Passaw; and granted some of his Nobility (and branches of the
Austrian Family) a free exercise of the
Lutheran Religion.
Qui in conscientiis Imperium sibi sumunt, conantur coeli arcem invadere, is a saying which Historians know not whether to attribute to this Emperor, or
Maximilian I. but 'tis most probable it was the former's, since he is known to have been the greatest favourer of the Protestant perswasion that ever rul'd the
German Empire. He dyed at
Ratisbon in the year 1576, having reign'd twelve years.
1576.
Rudolph, Maximilian's Son, was elected Emperor immediately upon his Father's death. Some curious Chronologers have fancied his coming to the Imperial Crown in this year something ominous; since the Numeral letters in
RƲdoLphƲs IMperator AƲgƲstƲs make up the number 1576. He was a Prince exceedingly addicted to the studies of all manner of Arts and Sciences; especially the Mathematics and Mechanics. In both which he receiv'd great assistance from the famous Astronomer
Tycho Brahe; who dyed in his Court, where he had spent the greatest part of his banishment. Several Cities and Provinces in
Germany, at his request, began to make use of the
Gregorian account; tho many Ambassadors, sent from the Electors to
Rotenburg to treat of this particular, rejected it. The greatest war he engaged himself in was against the
Turks; with whom at last he concluded a Peace, in the year 1600. But the truth is, he minded his book more then Arts of Chivalry; and was a greater Scholar then Soldier. Which gave his Brother
Matthias opportunity of undermining and cheating him of the Kingdoms of
Hungary and
Bohemia; and forcing him to content himself with the Arch-Dukedom of
Austria and the Empire.
1612.
Matthias, upon his Brother's death, was Elected and Crown'd Emperor at
Francfurt. The Protestant Religion was as much persecuted by this Emperor, as it was encouraged by his predecessor. Which harshness and severity gave occasion to that bloody Civil-war which broke out first in
Bohemia, and had afterwards like to have set the whole Empire in a flame. When the oppression, which the Protestants lay under, had occasioned some dangerous seditions in a great many considerable Cities and Market-Towns in the Kingdom of
Bohemia, the Emperor order'd a Synod to be call'd at
Prague; designing to allow the dissenting party (as they term'd the
Lutherans) some small priviledges, but such as should be far short of the large Charter given and confirm'd to them by his Brother
Rudolph. At this meeting the Emperors Ambassadors (
William Slabate and
Jurislaw Bazius) where thrown out
[Page 28]of the window for their domineering carriage, and so perished. This mightily incensed the Emperor; who, endeavouring to be reveng'd, had like to have ruin'd himself and his Empire. He dyed without issue; having reign'd seven years.
1619.
Ferdinand of
Gratz (Arch-Duke of
Austria, and Grandson to
Ferdinand I. by his Son
Charles) succeeded
Matthias in all his Titles and Dominions. The
Bohemians, fearing he might prove as severe a persecutor of the Protestants in that Kingdom as his predecessor had been, refus'd to acknowledg him their King; but immediately upon his being proclaim'd Emperor, proffer'd the Crown of
Bohemia to
Frideric V. Count Palatine of the
Rhine; who, accepted their kindness. Which so highly enraged the Emperor, that he resolved to use his utmost endeavours wholly to ruin and overthrow the Protestant party. Whereupon ensued that bloody
German war, of almost thirty years continuance; which was at last happily concluded by the
Westphalian Treaty of Peace in the year 1648. After a troublesom reign of seventeen years (spent in a continual Civil war, which had ruined and laid waste the greatest part of the Empire) he dyed at
Vienna; leaving his distracted Empire to his Son
1637.
Ferdinand III. who the year before his Fathers death was elected King of the
Romans. He carried on the war, which his Father had begun, with variety of success. He obtain'd a great victory over the Protestant party at
Ratisbon; and broke the vast power of the
Swedes at the battel of
Norlingen. But afterwards, being forsaken by most of the Princes of the Empire, he was forc'd to think of procuring a peace by fair means and Treaty. Accordingly, the Articles of Peace between the Emperor and the other Princes and Estates of the Empire, were sealed at
Munster and
Osnaburg (the Popish Agents keeping their residence at the former of these Cities, and the Protestants in the latter)
A. D. 1648. In the year 1653,
Ferdinand IV. (this Emperors eldest Son) was elected King of the
Romans at
Augsburg, by an unanimous consent of all the Electors; and within a month after, solemnly Crown'd at
Ratisbon. But dying within a year after his Coronation, he never liv'd to inherit the Throne of his Father; who surviv'd till the third of
April in the year 1657.
1658.
Leopold (the present Emperor of
Germany, and Son of
Ferdinand III.) was elected on the eighth day of
July, after a vacancy of fifteen months, into his Fathers Throne; and Crowned at
Francfurt the twenty-second day of the same month. He is a mild, peaceful, and religious Prince; a great lover and encourager of Learning; and more conversant in the study of Books then Arms. Whether his young Son now living (who is not yet full three years old) will be elected King of the
Romans, or the growing Interest of the
French King may engage a party strong enough for the
Dauphin? is a question that time only can resolve.
Of the Power of the
GERMAN Emperors.
THO the words
Imperator and
Rex seem to signifie the same thing; yet the general consent of all Nations hath for many years distinguish'd between an Emperor and a King, and given the former the preeminence. All the
European Monarchs, that write themselves Kings, do willingly and readily give place to the Emperor of
Germany; whose Ambassadors, in foreign Courts, are always first admitted to Audience.
David Ʋngnade (the Emperor of
Germany's Ambassador at the Court of
Constantinople) having design'd to take formal leave of the
Sultan, was admitted to Audience for that purpose; but observing the most honourable place in the Presence-Chamber taken up by the
Persian Ambassador, and not like to be resign'd, he flung away; and had left the
Sultan and Court in a huff, if the
Persian had not (which he afterwards was forc'd to do) given him the place and seated himself below him.
'Tis well known, that from
Julius Caesar the
Roman Emperors got the name of
Caesares; and every one of them, after
Octavian, got the trick of surnaming himself
Augustus. In
Germany the Emperor is to this day stiled
Der Keyser, or
Caesar; and he always writes himself
zur aller zeit Mehrer des reichs; which the
Germans make to signifie the same with
semper Augustus. Further, it is the generally receiv'd opinion amongst the Commonalty (and the tradition is stifly asserted and maintain'd by many of their most famous writers) that the
German Empire is the same with that which the
Romans anciently pretended to; and hence it is, that they call their Emperor
Der Romischer Kayser, that is,
The Roman Cesar; and the
German Empire
Das heilige Romische Reich, that is,
The holy Roman Empire. I shall not here stay to enquire after the large extent of the old
Roman Empire, or the power and authority of their Emperors. 'Tis sufficient to know, that
Petronius's Verse
Orbem jam totum Victor Romanus habebat.
was only an hyperbolical rant. And when St.
Luke tell sus,
there went out a decree from Cesar Augustus that all the world should be taxed, he means no more by the word
[...] then the several Provinces and Territories of which the
Romans had then made themselves Masters. So that tho we should grant (which we shall find but little reason to do) that the whole power and authority of the
Roman Cesars descended upon the
German Emperors; it will not thence follow (what some of the High
Dutch writers endeavour to make out), that all the Princes of
Europe, to go no further, ought to pay some homage or acknowledgment to the Emperor of
Germany. But we cannot indeed allow them so much as this, that the
German Emperors have any right or title to the ancient
Roman Empire. The original of this conceit sprung hence:
Charles the Great, in the year 800, coming to
Rome (upon some religious account or other, and not to lay claim to that City) was unexpectedly saluted by Pope
Leo III. and the Citizens, by the title of ROMANORUM IMPERATOR AUGUSTUS. But what a sorry kind of Empire the
Romans could then pretend to, is well known. The Western parts of their ancient Empire,
Germany and
France, were already in
Charles's possession; and the Soveraignty which that City once challenged in
Spain, and other parts of
Europe, was quite lost. Nay, in
Italy it self the Pope and Citizens of
Rome had nothing left to dispose of, except that City and some few small Towns which this
Charles the Great and his Father had taken from the
Lombards by force of Arms, and annex'd to the Dominions of the Bishop of
Rome. Whence it will appear, that
Charles the Great got little more then a bare Title at
Rome; and that some other
[Page 29]considerations (as the vast extent of the
German Empire, beyond the narrow compass of any
European Kingdom) has moved all the Western Monarchs to give place to the Emperor. Besides, the crafty Bishops of
Rome have always made it their business to diminish the Emperor's power and grandeur; lest it should eclipse their own. By which means the Authority which the Emperors do still retain, is scarce sufficient to secure them from contempt; and the Imperial Crown brings little more dominion along with it, tho much more honourable, then that of an inferior Monarch.
It is an undoubted prerogative of every great Monarch in the world, to confer Titles of Honour (as Dukes, Marquisses, Earls, Lords,
&c.) on whom they please; and to grant the priviledges of the most ancient Families, of what Ordersoever, within the bounds of their own Kingdoms, to any who they fancy deserves their favour. But in this the Emperor surpasses them all, in that he challenges a power of creating Kings; which is a piece of Authority never pretended to by any other Potentate. Thus the Emperor
Otho III. made
Poland a Kingdom, in the year 1001; which before that time was govern'd by a Duke.
Henry IV. did the like for
Bohemia, in the year 1086; and
Charles the Brave, Duke of
Burgundy, desired the same kindness of the Emperor
Frideric III. but could not obtain it. The Popes of
Rome have for a long time laid claim to this Prerogative; as appears from their frequent excommunicating and deposing of Kings in every Country in Christendom. Nay, they go further, and challenge a power of deposing the Emperor himself at their pleasure, and creating a new one in his place; as has been sufficiently shew'n in the foregoing Chapter. But how empty and vain these pretensions are, may be learned from the single example of Pope
Pius V. who endeavoured to create
Cosmo di Medices Great Duke of
Tuscany. For the Emperor
Maximilian II. opposed the design; and first made
Cosmo receive the Title from him, and afterwards forced the Pope to confess, that he had exceeded and transgress'd the bounds of his power.
If any Prince in
Germany chance to be a notorious delinquent, and disturber of the common peace of the Empire; it is not in the power of the Emperor alone to divest such an offendor of his Honour and Dignity, or to banish him the Empire. Such punishments cannot be inflicted without the consent of the Electors; who are to judge of the nature of the misdemeanor, and give in their opinions to the Imperial Chamber. Where the States of the Empire view the determination, and take care the sentence be executed according to Law.
The Emperor, at his Coronation, is sworn not to infringe or violate the Priviledges and Properties of any free State in the Empire; and therefore cannot mitigate or augment any Tax or Subsidy which either a Prince Regent of the Empire, or an Imperial City thinks fit to levy amongst their own Subjects. Besides, he has no authority to punish a malefactor, or raise money in the Territories of these Free States: Nor is it lawful for him to advance a Subject of any of these States to any Honour but what shall be consistent with the Allegiance he owes to that particular Prince or City whose more immediate Subject he is.
In time of War, he cannot command any Free State or Prince to assist him with men or money; but must be forc'd to undergo the whole burthen thereof himself; except it be the private interest of some peculiar Prince to stand by him. However, (tho they are not very ready to take his part in every offensive quarrel he engages himself in, yet) most of them stick close to him when invaded by a foreign enemy, and the common interest of the Empire lies at stake. And indeed it nearly concerns the Free States of the Empire, to be cautious of assisting and encourageing the Emperor's engaging himself in any other then a Defensive war. For, if he should by conquest enlarge his Dominions, they were in danger of being curb'd and brought under: but if, on the contrary, the victory should go on the enemies side, they would all certainly suffer as his Accomplices.
The overgrown Authority of the Popes of
Rome has (amongst other encroachments upon the Imperial Prerogative) rob'd the Emperor of his ancient Right of conferring Ecclesiastical Benefices and Bishoprics on whom he pleases. 'Tis well known in what subjection the Bishops of
Rome liv'd under the Government of their ancient Emperors; however they have Lorded it for these late years. As soon as the Emperor
Constantine the Great removed the Empire from
Rome to
Constantinople, the Popes began to have more elbow-room; and taking hold of the opportunity, laid the first foundation of their own greatness upon the ruins of the decaying power of the Emperor in
Italy. Another advantage they made of the blind zeal of the neighbouring Princes; who were exceeding fervent in carrying on the Catholic cause, till they had enabled the Popes to arrogate to themselves the Title of
Ʋniversal Bishops. But still the
Lombards, who had overrun the greatest part of
Italy, kept these Usurpers under; until
Pepin and his Son
Charlemaigne undertook their protection, and added to their Riches the Revenue of several Towns and Provinces taken from the
Lombards. These good offices obliged the
Roman Bishops to a return of gratitude; which they express'd by doing homage to the said Princes for the Territories of
Ravenna and
Pentapolis, or
Romagnia (which
Pepin had liberally bestowed on them) and making over to
Charles the Great for ever, the Right and Prerogative of chusing Popes. After this Emperor's death, some of the ambitious Clergy, who found they had not interest enough in the Emperor's Court to compass their ends, went to
Rome; where they got themselves chosen Popes, and prevail'd with the easie Emperors of
Germany to confirm the Election. From these beginnings they arose by degrees to that height, as to take upon them the power of electing and degrading of Emperors at their pleasure; nay, of trampling the Majesty of the Emperors under their feet, as Pope
Alexander III. serv'd
Frideric Barbarossa. And we cannot imagine, that they who had thus magnified themselves above all Temporal Monarchs (as they were pleased to distinguish) should stick to the old Decree of accepting the Popedom at the Emperors hands. Accordingly,
Leo IX. having receiv'd the Bishopric of
Rome from the hands of
Henry IV. repented of his so doing; and divesting himself of his Papal Robes, march'd to
Rome as a private person; where he was elected anew by the Clergy. After which time the Popes begun to invert
Charles the Great's Statute; ordering, that none should be honour'd and obey'd as lawful Emperor of
Germany, but those who receiv'd the Imperial Crown at their hands. And some of them were so insolent as to affirm, that there was as much difference between Popes and Emperors as betwixt the Sun and Moon: intending from thence to infer, that as the Moon has no light but what she borrows from the Sun, so the Emperor has no power or Majesty but what
[Page 30]the Pope bestows on him. But they did ont always meet with such tame Emperors as would undergo their yoke; and since
Charles the Fifth's time (who took the Pope of
Rome prisoner) there has not been one Emperor that has fetch'd his Crown from
Rome. The house of
Austria have in a great measure recover'd the ancient power and priviledges of the
German Emperors; and probably the Pope's Authority would have decayed a great deal more in this time, had not the
Jesuites (who swarm in the Court of
Vienna) been diligent in working the mild temper of their present religious Emperor into a compliance with whatever they buz into his ears. How the Emperors lost the power of Investiture,
&c. we shall shew more at large when we come to treat of the Ecclesiastical Estate of the Empire.
In all Proclamations, Patents, Decrees,
&c. the Titles of their present Emperor run as follows:
Leopold I. by the Grace of God, Emperor
(Kayser) of the
Romans, always
Augustus (Mehrer des Reichs), &c. King of
Germany, Hungary, Bohemia, Dalmatia, Croatia, Slavonia, Bulgaria, Bosnia, Servia, and
Rescia; Arch-Duke of
Austria; Duke of
Burgundy, Brabant, Styria, Carinthia, Carniola, Luxemburg, Wittenberg, together with the higher and lower
Silesia; Marquess of the Holy Empire,
Burgaw, Moravia, with the higher and farther
Lusace; Earl of
Habsburg, Tyrole, Ferrete, Kiburg, Goritia, &c. Landtgrave of
Alsace; Lord of
Windischamrck, Portnaw, and
Salins.
For what more peculiarly relates to the Emperor as Arch-Duke of
Austria, we refer the Reader to the Description of that Country; where he may also expect an account of the grandeur of the Emperors Court, Retinue, Servants,
&c.
Of the Election and Coronation of the
GERMAN EMPERORS.
THE principal Members of the
German Empire, next to the Emperor himself, are the Eight Electors,
viz. the Archbishops of
Mentz, Triers, Colen (who are also Arch-Chancellors of the Empire; the first in
Germany, the second in
France and the Kingdom of
Arles, and the third in
Italy), the King of
Bohemia (Cup-bearer to the Emperor), the Duke of
Bavaria (Great Steward of the Empire), the Duke of
Saxony (Grand Marshal or Constable), the Marquess of
Brandenburgh (Great Chamberlain), and lasty, the Prince Palatine of the
Rhine (Cheif Treasurer of the Empire). These Eight (for so many they have been since the
Westphalian Treaty, tho heretofore only Seven) have Right and Authority to Elect the Emperor; and also to Depose him, when by his enormous crimes, or unmanly idleness, he neglects the Honour of the Empire, the public good, and the duty of his place. Thus they serv'd
Wenceslaus; tho advanc'd to the Imperial Throne at the request of his Father
Charles the Fourth, who had deserv'd far better things at their hands for composing the
Aurea Bulla, of which more hereaster. The Archbishop of
Mentz has several times taken upon him to remind such Emperors as have not suited with his humour, of this grand power of the Electors; and to threaten them with the execution of it, if they should not alter their courses.
At what time the power of chusing the Emperors, was first committed to those Princes, who to this day bear the Title of Electors, is not easily determin'd. It is certain, that
Charles the Great transmitted the Imperial Dignity to his posterity by way of Succession. And the same Right continued for some ages in his Family; until some of his Successors, falling far short of this incomparable Emperor, were thought unfit to Govern. Whereupon, the Empire was offer'd to
Otho Duke of
Saxony; and upon his refusal, given to
Conrad Duke of
Franconia. After his death,
Henry, Duke
Otho's Son, was Elected Emperor by a general consent of all the Princes and Estates of the Empire; and was succeeded afterwards by his Son
Otho I. who obtain'd the Crown by the same means. This way of Succession from Father to Son, was observ'd till
Henry IV. who coming to the Crown when he was a Child, and managing it very ill when he was of years to have govern'd better, was contemn'd and sleighted by the Lords of the Empire. And Pope
Gregory VII. (taking this opportunity of magnifying his own Authority in the
German Empire) excommunicated him, and declaring him unfit to sway the Imperial Scepter, order'd him to be deposed; which was a thing before that time never heard of in the Empire. Whereupon the Rebel Princes thinking themselves absolv'd from their Allegiance, Elected
Rudolph Duke of
Schwaben into the Emperor
Henry's place; and made a Law,
That the Right of Succession should be therein abolished, and the Power of chusing Emperors committed to the people. What Anarchy and confusion follow'd upon this Decree, the
German Histories will sufficiently inform us. But in process of time the less considerable part of the Rabble of Electors were depriv'd of their late gain'd right and priviledge of chusing Emperors; the whole power being usurp'd by a few of the chief Officers in the Imperial Court.
From the year 1250 till 1500, it was the general opinion of all Historians, that the Emperor
Otho III. and Pope
Gregory V. reduc'd the number of Electors to Seven; only in this the Authors of those times cannot agree, Whether the Emperor or Pope had the greater Authority in settling the Affair? But this opinion has of later years been strongly oppos'd by most learned writers; and 'tis highly probable, that more then Seven had voices in the Election of Emperors until the time of
Frideric II. For
Otho Frisingensis assures us, that
Henry II. was chosen by all the Lords of the Empire; and after his death,
Conrad Duke of
Franconia was advanced into his place by the consent of the same Electors.
Henry III.
Conrad's Son, was likewise Elected; tho we are not told by whom. The Abbot of
Ʋrsperg tells us, that
Henry IV. was raised to the Imperial Dignity by the Bishops of
Germany; that
Henry V. was chosen by an unanimous consent of all the members of the
German Empire; that
Lotharius II. was made Emperor by two Archbishops, eight Bishops, with several Abbots and Lords of the Imperial Court; that
Conrad III. was admitted into the Throne, the Duke of
Saxony not being call'd to the Election, and the See of
Mentz being then vacant; that
Frideric Barbarossa was chosen by all the
German Princes; that
Philip was Elected Emperor by the
Suevians, Bavarians, and
Saxons; that
Otho IV. had the Scepter from the Citizens of
Colen, Strasburg, and some other Imperial Cities. This
Otho was afterwards excommunicated by the Pope of
Rome, and
Frideric King of
Sicily Elected into his room by the voices of the King of
Bohemia, the Dukes of
Austria and
Bohemia, the Landtgrave of
Thuringen, and several other Princes of the Empire. Hitherto we see the Emperors were not chosen by any set number of Electors; tho it is likely, that those Princes who have now got the sole power into
[Page 31]their hands, had even in those times the greatest share of authority in all Elections; as being the most potent members of the Empire. But when, after the death of
Frideric II. no man for many years took care of the supreme Government; in this deplorable condition of the
German Empire, Seven of the chief Princes (by taking upon them, as is probable, the management of all public affairs) laid the first foundation of the Electoral dignity; which was afterwards confirm'd to them by the Emperor
Charles the Fourth's
Aurea Bulla.
The reasons why the number of Electors was reduced to Seven was this, because that if in any Election six of the voices chanc'd to be equally divided, the seventh Elector might cast the ballance to that side where he could rationally suppose there was the most merit. And 'twas prudently order'd, that three of the Electors should be Churchmen, that they (having no prospect of being themselves Elected into the Imperial Throne) might curb the ambition of any secular Elector, who without desert should pretend to the Crown.
Amongst the many acts of absolute Soveraignty whereby the Emperor
Ferdinand II. disobliged a great part of the States of the Empire, the transferring the Electoral Dignity from
Frideric V. Count Palatine of the
Rhine to
Maximilian Duke of
Bavaria, was the highliest resented. And at the
Westphalian Treaty the Ambassadors found it no small difficulty to reconcile the differences which hereby were occasion'd between the two Princes. The Duke of
Bavaria utterly refus'd to consent to the Peace, except he might be suffer'd quietly to enjoy the Electorate; which he fancied his deserts might justly challenge, and the Emperor as lawfully confer on him. On the other side, the Prince Palatine as obstinately demanded a restitution of the Dignity taken from him; alledging the just Title his Ancestors always had to this Honour. Both their pretensions were thought plausible; and both of them met with resolute Assertors in the Treaty. At last it was agreed, that the Duke of
Bavaria should have an Electorship confirm'd to him and his posterity, and an Eighth should be new Erected for
Charles Ludowic Prince Palatine of the
Rhine; provided, that if the
Wilhelmine branch happen'd to fail before the
Rodolphine, the Princes Palatine should re-enter upon their ancient Electorate, and the Title of the Dukes of
Bavaria to any such Dignity be wholly abolished.
The Right of Electing is not conferr'd on the person of any of the Electors, but annex'd to their Electoral Principalities and Estates; insomuch, that if the King of
Bohemia can make out his Title to that Kingdom, the Prince Palatine to the Palatinate, the Duke of
Saxony to his Dukedom, and the Marquess of
Brandenburgh to his Marquisate, they may all justly lay claim to the Title and Dignity of Electors. So that as long as there is any male issue in any of the Electoral Families, the power of giving a voice in the Election of an Emperor cannot be taken away from that House.
The Electoral Dignity is so great, that some have thought it equal to Regal Authority; and in this indeed the Electors excel Kings, in that they have power to create Emperors; which no other Potentates in Christendom can pretend to. The King of
Bohemia (except when in a Diet for the Election of an Emperor) used to give place to several of them. And there were hot disputes heretofore between the Elector of
Brandenburgh and
Rodolph II. King of
Hungary about precedency. But certainly there is little reason that any Elector (excepting the King of
Bohemia) should pretend to stand upon equal terms with a Monarch. The last Duke of
Burgundy, of the Blood Royal of
France, demanded and obtain'd precedence of all the Electors at the Council of
Basil. And 'tis observable, that so long as the Elector of
Bohemia was only a Duke, he had the lowest place in every Election; but having once obtain'd the Title of King, he took place of all his Collegues; because it was not thought fit that a Royal person, Crown'd and Anointed, should give place to those that were but barely Electors.
The order of precedency which the Electoral Princes observe amongst themselves, is as follows: 1. The Archbishop of
Mentz, Arch-Chancellor of
Germany, takes place of all the rest. As soon as the Imperial Throne is vacant, 'tis his Office to warn his Collegues to repair (either in their own persons or by their Deputies) within three months after the date of his Letters Patents to
Francfurt upon the
Mein, in order to the Election of a new Emperor. 2. The Archbishop of
Triers, Arch-Chancellor of the Kingdoms of
France and
Arles (where by
France we are not to understand all the Territories subject at this day to the
French King; but such only as were formerly parts of the Kingdom of
Burgundy, and came into the hands of the
Germans in the Eleventh Century). He has the first vote in the Election. 3. The Archbishop of
Colen, Arch-Chancellor of
Italy; that is, of the Kingdom of the
Lombards, and the small remains of the ancient
Roman Empire. He has the second vote; and usually puts the first (or
German) Crown upon the head of the new chosen Emperor. 4. The King of
Bohemia; to whom the
Sachsenspiegel (or Body of the old
Saxon Laws) denies a vote in any Election, tho the
Aurea Bulla says expresly, he has the third vote in the Diet. Whence it appears, that the manner of Elections was alter'd in
Charles the Fourth's time from what it was in the Thirteenth Century, when the
Sachsenspiegel was first published. 5. The Count Palatine of the
Rhine, who has the fourth vote at Elections. 'Tis his peculiar prerogative to sit Judge (at the Imperial Court) when any Suit is commenc'd against the Emperor. 6. The Duke of
Saxony, Arch-Marshal of the Empire. He is Sword-bearer to the Emperor, and has the fifth voice at an Election. 7. The Marquess of
Brandenburgh, Lord Chamberlain of the Empire; who, in any solemn procession, bears the Scepter before the Emperor, and has the sixth vote at his Election.
Note: This account is to be understood of the State of the Electors before the quarrel between the Prince Palatine and the Duke of
Bavaria, upon the Emperor
Ferdinand's suspension of the former in the year 1623. Tho the case be now alter'd upon the Duke of
Bavaria's Right confirm'd to him by the
Westphalian Treaty before-mention'd; yet (since the Elector of
Bavaria pretends to no other Title then what anciently belong'd to the Princes Palatine, and the Dignity may possibly return again to that House) these rules of precedency may still hold good.
Notwithstanding the account already given of the Order and Rank of the Electors, the Duke of
Saxony and Prince Palatine may seem to have the preeminence before any others. For these two (the former in all parts of the Empire govern'd by the
Saxon Law; the latter in
Schwaben, and all places where the
Francic Laws are observ'd) rule the Empire in time of an
Interregnum. Many late writers of the
Roman Church have been zealous in attributing this Prerogative to the Pope; whom they would have to be the Emperor's Vicar, as well as Christ's. But this assertion is contrary to the fundamental Laws of the
[Page 32]German Empire; and we cannot hear of any Record of Antiquity which will testifie for them, that ever any such power was granted by the Emperor. The said Electors have power (during the vacancy of the Imperial Throne) to determine all manner of Law-suits; to gather the revenues and incomes of the Crown; and in the name of the whole Empire, to tender and require an Oath of Allegiance. Only they may not dispose of the Lands of any Prince of the Empire, or others of the Nobility that have their Lands confirm'd to them by the Ceremony of the Banner
(fahnenlehnen); nor alienate any parcel of the Crown-lands or revenue of the Empire. In short, whatever they do is to undergo the censure and approbation of the next Emperor. In the late
Interregnum, upon the death of the Emperor
Ferdinand III. there was no small quarrel between the Duke of
Bavaria and the Prince Palatine about the Right of Protectorship; the former pretending, that this Dignity was annex'd to the Office of Chief Sewer, which had been transferr'd from the Prince Palatine to himself. Whereupon, as soon as the Emperor was dead, he immediately gives notice to all the neighbouring Princes and States of the Empire, of his assuming the Title of Vicar. On the contrary, the Prince Palatine laid claim to the same Authority; and complain'd of
Bavaria's encroachment upon his priviledges. Each asserted his right in public Remonstrances; and printed Pamphlets flew thick on either hand. In this juncture, most unprejudic'd persons were of opinion, that the Palatinate writers had the greatest share of reason on their side; and very many were loath to approve of the Duke of
Bavaria's proceedings, tho unwilling or afraid to appear in public against him. At last, the quarrel was stop'd (tho not finally determin'd) by the present Emperor
Leopold's succession to his Fathers Throne.
The
Aurea Bulla orders, that the Election should be had at
Francfurt; which is commonly observ'd. But however the Ceremony has not been confin'd to any particular place. For
Henry II. was chosen at
Mentz, Henry III. at
Aix la Chappel, Henry V. at
Colen, Lotharius II. at
Mentz, and after him
Maximilian, Rodolph II. and
Ferdinand III. receiv'd that honour at
Ratisbon. But afterwards, the Elector of
Saxony question'd the Election of
Ferdinand I. because 'twas at
Colen, in the year 1530.
The whole Ceremony of the Election is perform'd in this method: The Elector of
Mentz, within a month after he has notice given him of the Emperors death, signifies the same to his Collegues, and summons them to a new Election. Immediately (upon warning receiv'd, or at the day appointed in the Archbishops Letters) the Electors repair to
Francfurt, or send their Ambassadors, who have full power to act as their DeputiesFormerly it was a custom for the City to send out a Body of two hundred Horse to meet the Electors, and conduct them in at the Gates: but this fashion has not of late years been so punctually observ'd. During the Election, all strangers and foreigners are commanded to withdraw and leave the City. That done, the Electors proceed to Election; which is always had in the Quire of St.
Bartholomew's Church. After Mass is said, they come up to the Altar, where they severally take an Oath to Elect the fittest man, that stands, to be Emperor. The Elector of
Mentz takes the votes in the order before-mention'd; and last of all gives his own voice. Every Elector gives his vote under his Hand and Seal; and the majority of voices creates the new Emperor. If the number of votes should be equal (which may easily happen, now there are Eight Electors) the controversie would be hard to determine; since no provision has been made for any such occurrences. As soon as the votes are examin'd, the Electors return to the High Altar; where the Archbishop of
Mentz pronounces the Election, and tells the Congregation whom they have made choice of for their Emperor.
The Temporal Electors have power to name themselves; tho the Ecclesiastics have no such passive or reflexive voice. Yet none of them have so absolute a power of giving any secular man their voices, without some restraint. For it is necessary, that he who is by their votes rais'd to the Imperial Dignity be 1. Of an Illustrious Family; because it cannot reasonably be supposed, that so many great Princes, as are his Subjects, would willingly pay homage and yeild obedience to a person of low and mean extraction. 2. A Prince of good Estate, and large Revenue; that his incomes may maintain him (without oppressing his Subjects) in that splendor which becoes his Imperial Majesty. 3. A
German; lest being a stranger, he should transfer the Seat of the Empire to some other place; and either wholly deprive
Germany of that Prerogative, or put it upon a necessity of defending it by force of Arms. Indeed before the Emperor
Charles IV. had published the
Aurea Bulla, it was not necessary that the Emperor should be a natural
German (and we know many of the ancient Emperors were foreigners); but since that time it has become a Law, That whoever is admitted into the Imperial Throne be a
German, at lest by extraction. And no other plea could be pretended by
Charles and
Ferdinand I. since the former was born in the County of
Flanders, and the later at
Medina in
Castile. And when
Francis I. King of
France alledg'd, that he was a
German; he did not intend the Electors should believe that
Angoulesme was in
Germany, but that his predecessors were originally
Germans.
Immediately after the Election is over, the new chosen Emperor takes upon him the Titles of
Cesar and
Augustus; and, if he pleases, confers Honours and Priviledges, and executes all other acts of Soveraignty. If he be prefent, he Dines in public; and then the Ecclesiastical Electors say Grace and hold the Seals; the Elector of
Brandenburg gives him water to wash; the Elector of
Saxony executes the office of Marshal; the Prince Palatine presents him the first Dish of Meat, and the King of
Bohemia the first Glass of Wine. If any of the Electors be absent, his office is perform'd by his Lieutenant; and not by his Ambassador, who is only his Deputy in the Election. The three Ecclesiastical Electors are suppos'd always to be personally present; and therefore have no Lieutenants. But the Vicars of the four ancient Secular Electors are the Lords and Counts of
Limburg, Walpurg, Papenheim, and
Hohenzolleren.
After the Reign of
Charles the Great, none of the
German Kings would for many ages take upon them the Title of Emperor, till they had receiv'd the Crown of the
Roman Empire at the Pope's hands; and of later years several of them have been very critical in distinguishing between the Titles of
Kayser and
King of Germany. Whence immediately after the ceremony of the Election was finish'd, they would stile themselves only Emperors of
Rome Elect, but actual Kings of
Germany. Whereupon, some Authors tell us, that every one of them used to be Crown'd at
Aix la Chappel with an iron Crown, as King of
Germany; at
Milan with a Silver one, as King of
Lombardy; and at
Rome with a Golden one, as Emperor. What grounds there might be for any such tradition I know not; but 'tis certain,
[Page 33]that
Charlemagne's Crown, which is now a days set on the Emperors head at
Aix la Chappel, is of pure Gold; and the Emperors do not use to seek a Crown at
Rome or
Milan. The
Aurea Bulla calls the Crown used at the Emperors Coronation
Infula; and anciently all the Diadem made use of at such a solemnity was a wreath of white Scarffs, wherewith they bound the heads of their Kings. The Elector of
Colen for a long time perform'd the Ceremony of Coronation; but because the Archbishops of that See have not been Priests for many years, the Archbishop of
Mentz has executed the office for this last Century. At the Coronation of the Emperor
Ferdinand III. there arose a grand dispute betwixt the Elector of
Colen (who at that time was a Priest) and the Archbishop of
Mentz; the former demanding a restitution of the Honour which did formerly belong to his See, and the later asserting his right from the example of his Predecessors, who had long enjoy'd it. However, the Archbishop of
Colen was overthrown, and the Archbishop of
Mentz perform'd the office; and in so doing (some say) only preserv'd a right which many ages before had belong'd to his predecessors. At the Coronation the King of
Bohemia carries the Crown; the Elector of
Bavaria bears the Globe; the Duke of
Saxony the Sword; and the Marquess of
Brandenburgh the Scepter.
Of the King of the
ROMANS.
THat there may be a King of the
Romans chosen while the Emperor is living, is a matter of fact which none can be ignorant of, who are conversant in the writings of the modern
German Historians. Thus
Charles IV.
Wenceslaus, Maximilian I. & II.
Rodolph II.
Ferdinand III. & IV. were all elected in the life-time of their Predecessors. However, many of their Civilians question the lawfulness of the Election; fancying, that by this means the Electors may disturb the peace of the Empire, by setting up two Princes at once who by Election have a just Title to the Imperial Crown. The consequence indeed may be dangerous; but there is no disputing the Authority of those who doubtless have as great power in appointing the Emperor a Successor when they please, as they have in deposing him.
'Tis ordinary in some of the High
Dutch writers, to mean the Emperor when they speak of the King of the
Romans; and till of late years there was no difference between them. But now there are many marks of distinction: As, 1. The King of the
Romans bears for his Arms the Eagle with one head; the Emperor with two. 2. The former is only stiled
Augustus; but the later
Semper Augustus. 3. The Emperor in his Letters Patents directed to the King of the
Romans, begins his Compellation with
Ʋnsern Liebten, i. e. To our Beloved &c. but the King in his Answers complements the Emperor with the Title of
Ihre Majestaet, i. e. Tour Majesty. Lastly, the King of the
Romans always acknowledges the Emperor his Superior; and has no authority of his own during the Emperors life. When the Emperor is absent, or employed in other affairs, he usually takes upon him the administration of the Empire; and after the Emperors death succeeds without any further Election.
The first occasion of Electing a King of the
Romans, proceeded from a politic contrivance of the Emperors; who by this means got the Imperial Crown secured to their own Family. For making use of their power and authority while themselves sat in the Throne, they could easily obtain the favour of the Electors to chuse a Son, Nephew, or other Relation, to be King of the
Romans; which at last being grown customary prov'd almost as considerable kindness to the House of
Austria, as if they had entail'd the Empire upon that Family. For
das Heilige Romische Reich (or the
Holy Roman Kingdom) signifies the same thing in the
German Tongue as the
Sacred Empire; and 'tis all one to chuse any Prince King of the
Romans, as to Elect him Emperor.
Of Dukes, Counts, and other Orders of Nobility in the
GERMAN Empire.
THo the ancient
Germans had litle or no Magistracy amongst them in time of peace;
Dukes. yet both
Julius Cesar and
Tacitus agree in this, that whenever they were engag'd in war they had one supreme Governor, who ruled the Armies and gave laws to the multitude. This superintendant of their forces they call'd
Heertog or
Heerzog (a name which their Dukes to this day retain) which signifies as much as the
Latin word
Dux, or our
Duke, i. e. A Leader or Commander of an Army. He was usually chosen in a general Assembly of the whole Country by a majority of voices; and as soon as he was elected they set him upon a Banner, and bore him upon their shoulders. Which ceremony, as
Cluverius proves, was afterwards observ'd by later
Germans in the Election of their Kings, and by the
Roman Soldiers at the Coronation of their Emperors.
Julius Cesar tells us, that these Dukes had power of life and death; but
Tacitus, who was better acquainted with the state of
Germany, assures us, they had no such authority. They could indeed give counsel and orders to the Soldiers; but had no power to punish offenders, or correct the obstinate. For, in all probability, there was not any manner of Judges in the Land that had the power of sentencing any offender to death.
When any controversie arose amongst the Commonalty,
Counts or Graven. they were wont to chuse a Judg out of the Nobility of the Village where the quarrel begun. These kind of Judges they call'd
Grafen or
Graven; and their office was to determine all trifling disputes in their neighbourhood.
Meibomius (in his learned Tract of
Irmensul) tells us, that all
Germany was anciently divided into Villages, call'd by the inhabitants
Gouwen; and that each of these had their peculiar Judges, thence nam'd
Gowgraven. Ein Graff (says the Author of the Glossary upon the
Saxon Spiegel) bedeut nach altem Sachsischen Deutschen ein Richter, i. e. Graf signifies a Judg in the old
Saxon language.
Die Graven signifies properly the
grey headed or
elders of the people; whence our King
Edward the Confessor (in the thirty-fifth Chapter of his Laws, afterwards confirm'd by
William the Conqueror) tells us, that the Low
Dutch Greve is in effect the same with the
English Eoldenmen now
Aldermen.
This was the ancient state of the Dukes and Earls in
Germany, before the
Romans overran some parts of that Land; but whatever came into their hands was immediately divided into Provinces, and govern'd as they themselves pleased. Whence
Duces and
Comites were created by them in several places; but such as had another kind of power committed to them then the aforesaid
Hertzogen and
Graven could pretend to. In
Roman Historians
[Page 34]we meet with a great many of this sort; such as
Dux Germaniae primae, Dux Moguntiacensis, Dux Sequanicae, Dux Rhetiae primae & secundae, Dux Belgicae secundae, &c. And
Ammianus Marcellinus speaks of one
Carietto, whom he calls
Comes per utramque Germaniam. These had authority to raise Taxes; and were invested with many other priviledges in the administration of justice which the others wanted.
But the
Romans having never got any considerable footing on the East-side of the
Rhine, could not fix any of their fashions of Government in the Northern parts of
Germany. So that these still retain'd their ancient forms; until the
Franks, having made themselves Masters of all, introduc'd new modes, and establish'd a new sort of Government every-where. For these Conquerors, imitating the
Romans, reduc'd all
Germany into Provinces; over which they appointed so many Dukes, who had authority to govern, and to administer justice according to the tenure of their respective Commissions. To these Dukes they sometimes added Assistants; who were from their office (which was to aid the Dukes in the management of great and weighty affairs) call'd Counts, or
Comites. The Dukes were always elected by the King and Nobility out of some illustrious Family; yet so, that if the deceased Duke's Son were capable and worthy of his Father's honour, he was seldom rejected. At last the power of these Dukes grew exceedingly great and terrible; insomuch, that 'twas ordinary for several of them to deny to pay homage to the Emperors. Which when
Charles the Great observ'd, he destroy'd the two great Dukedoms of the
Francic Kingdom (
Aquitane and
Bavaria), by dividing them into several smaller Counties. But not long after
Charles's death, the Emperors created new Dukes in most places where he had chang'd them into Counts. Whereupon the Empire was quickly reduc'd to the former straits; every Duke pretending to, and exercising Regal authority in his own Province. The first of these that grew formidably potent was
Otho Duke of
Saxony, afterwards elected Emperor; who (tho he refus'd the Imperial Diadem, and got it conferr'd on
Conrad Duke of
Franconia) was always look'd upon as the most powerful Prince of the
German Empire in his time. After
Otho's death, the Emperor
Conrad used all means possible to reduce the overgrown power of the Duke of
Saxony to some tolerable mediocrity; but his endeavours prov'd unsuccessful, and Duke
Henry stoutly maintain'd the Honours and Priviledges which his Father
Otho had enjoy'd without disturbance. From that time forward the Emperors lay under an obligation of creating new Dukes; who, getting into their hands the government of several potent Cities, set up for almost absolute Princes.
Our Learned Antiquary Mr.
Selden, reckons up six several sorts of
Graves or Counts; which are these: 1.
Schlecht-Graven, or simple Counts. 2. Counts Palatine; which (as will be shew'n anon) are subdivided into several other branches. 3. Counts of the Empire. 4.
Marck-Graves, or Counts of the Frontiers. 5.
Landt-Graves, or Counts of Provinces. 6.
Burg-Graves, or Counts of Cities and great Towns. There was anciently a seventh sort
(Here-Graven) who answer'd exactly to the primitive Dukes or
Her-tzogen; for as the office of these was to conduct and govern the Soldiers; so the others were to determine all controversies as Field-Judges. The
Gefurstete Graven do not make a distinct species; being nothing else then such Counts as, besides their ordinary Title, may challenge that of
Furst, or Prince. In the old Laws and Constitutions of the Empire, we meet with almost an innumerable company of inferior Officers who have the title of
Graven bestow'd on them. Such are, 1.
Cent-Grave; he that had the government of an Hundred. We may
English the word High-Constable. 2.
Holtz-Grave, or
Wald-Grave; Overseers of the Woods and Forests. 3.
Gograf; of which before. 4.
Spiel-Grave; the Master of the Revels. 5.
Hans-Grave; a Title formerly given to the Chief Judg in all matters relating to Trade debated in the Diet at
Ratisbon. But we shall not weary the Reader with insisting upon these obsolete Titles of Honour; contenting our selves with a short account of the six first kinds, which are all our famous Antiquary beforemention'd has thought worthy his taking notice of.
The first are such as are stiled barely Counts,
Schlechtgraven. without the addition of any more then the place which gives them that Title. As
Der Graf von Eissenburg, Der Graf von Ortenberg, &c. There were formerly only four of this kind in the whole Empire, who were ordinarily called
Die vier Graven dess Heiligen Romischen Reichs, i. e. The four
Graves (or Counts) of the Holy
Roman Empire. These were the Counts of
Cleve, Schwartzenburg, Ciley, and
Savoy. But (since the Counts of
Cleve and
Savoy were advanced to Dukes, and the Family of the ancient Counts of
Ciley was extinct, which happen'd about two hundred years ago) the Count of
Schwartzenburg in
Thuringen is the only Prince that bears that Title; stiling himself usually to this day,
der vier Graven dess Reichs Grave zu Schwartzenburg, i. e. of the four Counts of the Empire, Count of
Schwartzenburg. Besides him, there are now-a-days several other
German Counts who may justly be referr'd to this head; tho they have no Investiture into any
Graffschaft or County, but are only stiled Counts of some small Castle or inconsiderable Territories of which they are Lords. Such are the Counts of
Ottingen and
Zollern; who are supposed to be of the posterity of some of the ancient Counts of the Empire, and thence retain the title, tho not the grandeur and power of their Ancestors.
Counts Palatine (call'd by the
Germans Pfaltz-Graven,Counts Palatine. or
Dess Heiligen Romischen Reichs Hoffe-Graven) are such as have in their Title a certain eminence of their Dignity from a relation (as their name denotes) to the Emperors Court or Palace. For
Palatinus is but the possessive of
Palatium; and signifies no more then
an Officer of the Houshold with us in
England. But this Title is twofold: 1. Originally Feudal, and annex'd to the name of some Territory or
Grafschaft, with such
jura Imperii & Majestatis as other ordinary Princes of the Empire have not; as we see in the Title of the Counts Palatine of the
Rhine. 2. Meerly Personal, without the addition of any particular Territory proper to him that hath the Dignity. Both the Title and Nature of this later kind are originally to be fetcht from the Examples of the old
Roman Empire: but the former (tho the Nature of it may be found in the ancient Constitutions of the
Roman Empire, under the name of
Praefectus Praetorio, yet) was in ordinary use, as to the Name and Title, only in the
Francic Kingdom. For there was in the Court of the
Francic Kings (long before their Kingdom was chang'd into an Empire) a chief Officer known by the name of
Comes Palatii, or Count Palatine, who had a Vice-Regency under the King, in like sort as the
Praefecti Praetorio in the elder Empire, or the old Chief Justice of
England under our ancient Kings; that is, he had the exercise of supreme Jurisdiction (in the name of the King) in all causes that came to the Kings
[Page 35]immediate audience. I suppose the Office of
Hofmeister, used to this day in every
German Prince's Court, is a relique of this Palatinate. And that
Comes Palatii might easily signifie the same thing with
Praefectus Praetorio or
Hofmeister, will not be difficult for any man to imagine that shall consider the signification which the word
Comes had amongst the ancient
Romans in the usual compellation of
Comites and
Amici, used by their Emperors to the greatest Officers in the Court and State; whence afterwards in the Eastern Empire we meet with
Comites sacrarum largitionum, Comites metallorum, Comites rerum privatarum, Comites Patrimonii, &c. in all which expressions
Comes manifestly signifies the same thing as
Praefectus or
Magister. The reason why the name of Palatine (which, as we have said, denotes only such as are members of the King's or Emperor's Houshold) should afterwards be join'd with a Province remote from the Court, seems plain enough. For, whereas other ordinary Counts had only a power subordinate to that of the Counts Palatine, who exercis'd supreme Jurisdiction in the Emperors name; these had all the Royalties and
Jura Imperii in their respective Provinces, which the Counts Palatine enjoy'd at Court. And the like forms of speaking we meet with (among the old
Romans) in the Officiary Dignities of
Praefectus Praetorio Orientis, Praefectus Praetorio Illyrici, Praefectus Praetorio Italiae, and
Praefectus Praetorio Galliarum. Where we see the Title of the Houshold, or Emperors Palace, transferr'd to these several Provinces; to denote, that they who bore those Offices (being as so many Vice-Roys in their peculiar Territories) should enjoy like Power, Jurisdiction, and Dignity in their respective Dominions, as if by the name of
Praefecti Praetorio they had always liv'd with the Emperor in his Court. The additional Title of Palatine hath been conferr'd upon the Counts of
Habspurg, Tubing, Witelenspach, Schiern, Ortenberg, and several other Princes of the Empire. In some old lists of the
German Princes we find mention made of four
Ertz-Pfaltz-Graven, or
Archi-Palatini, viz. Rheni, Saxoniae, Franciae (or
Franconiae),
& Hungariae. But at this day the Counts Palatine of the
Rhine are so singularly eminent Princes by this Title, that commonly no other place is understood by the general name of the
Palatinate but only their Territories. However
Saxony is still a
Pfaltzgraffschaft or Palatinate, and the Duke thereof hath the Soveraignty of a Count Palatine; tho he be not so stiled, because the Title of Duke is rarely join'd with
Palatinus. Of the Authority and Power of the Counts Palatine of the
Rhine, we shall speak more at large hereafter, when we come to a particular Description of their Territories.
What the Dignity of a
Count of the Empire is,
[...]nts of
[...] Em
[...]. may be learn'd from the Patent granted by the Emperor
Rudolph II. to
Thomas Arundel of
Wardour in
Wiltshire (afterwards made Lord
Arundel of
Wardour by King
James) for the creating of him a
Count of the Empire; which Title his Heirs have kept to this day. That the Title is hereditary appears from this passage in the Patent,
Te supradictum Thomam Arundelium qui jam ante Comitum consanguinitatem a majoribus acceptam in Anglia obtines, omnesque & singulos liberos haeredes, posteros & descendentes tuos legitimos utriusque Sexus natos aeternaque serie nascituros, etiam veros sacros Romani Imperii Comites & Comitissas creavimus, fecimus, & nominavimus, &c. The learned Mr.
Cambden (in his History of the Reign of Queen
Elizabeth) speaking of this Patent, tells us, that whoever hath the Title of
Count of the Empire conferr'd on him, has withall a Seat assign'd him, and may give his voice, in the Imperial Diets; he may purchase an Estate in any part of the Emperor's Dominions; may list Volunteers, and cannot be su'd in any Court of Judicature save only the Imperial Chamber. By vertue of the aforesaid Patent the Title of
Count of the Sacred Empire, is at present enjoy'd by the Right Honourable
Henry Lord
Arundell of
Warder.
Those of the Nobility whom the ancient
Francic Kings made Governors of such Provinces as were of the Frontiers of the Empire,
Mark-graven. were stiled
Mark-Graven, from the old word
Marken, which signifies the outmost Marks or Limits of the Empire; in the same sence as we use the word Marshes, speaking of the bounds betwixt
England and
Scotland, or
Wales. From the High
Dutch Mark-Grave the
Latins borrow'd their
Marchio and
Marggravius; the
Italians, Marchese; and the later
Greeks their
[...] and
[...], instead of our
French Marquis and
Marchioness. Some Etymologists have endeavour'd to bring the Title of
Mark-Grave from the old
Francic word
Mare (sometimes written
March) signifying an Horse; and these fancy there was no great difference formerly between the Titles and Offices of
Marschal and
Mark-Grave, or
Mar-Grave (as they write it). In the Feuds we read,
Qui de Marchia investitur Marchio dicitur. Dicitur autem Marchia quia Marcha & ut plurimum juxta mare sit posita. Where what is said of the derivation of the word
Marchio from
Marcha is true; but if by
ut plurimum juxta Mare the Author means, that the word
Mare bears a part in the original of
Mark-Grave or
Marquise, he is manifestly mistaken. For altho the
Marca Anconitana and
Trevigiana in
Italy, as also the Marquisate of the Holy Empire in
Brabant, and the
Marca Normanica and
Britannica in
France, be adjoining to the Sea; yet the Marquisates of
Misnia, Lusatia, Brandenburg, Moravia, Austria, Mountferrat, and
Susa in
Savoy are inland Countries, but had the name of
Margrafchaften fixt on them; because they were such Provinces as were the Limits or Frontiers of the
German Kingdom. When Marquises, as well as Dukes and Counts, began to multiply in the
German Empire, there were four of them who had the Title of
Die vier hohen Mark-Graffen, i. e. The four High (or Chief) Marquises. These were they of
Brandenburg, Merhern (or
Moravia),
Meissen, and
Baden; whose Territories are thence call'd
die vier hohen Markgrafchaften, i. e. The four Chief Marquisates.
In the Titles of
Landtgrave and
Burggrave, the termination
grave signifies the same thing as in
Markgrave.Landtgraven.Landt in the
German tongue signifies no more then a Province or Territory: so that the word
Landtgrave, if literally translated, must be render'd
Comes Provincialis, a Count that has supreme Government in some particular Province.
Landtherr was anciently a Title of the same signification, and conferr'd upon the Lords of
Verona (who were of the Family
de la Scala, or the
Scaligers), of
Mirandula, Padua, and
Millain; who were lookt upon as Princes equal in power and dignity to as many Counts Palatine. The
Germans usually reckon up four
Landtgraves (as well as four Dukes, four Counts, four Marquises, and four of most other Dignities) as most eminent in the Empire; these are, the
Landtgraves of
Thuringen, Hessen, Alsace, and
Luchtenburg; of which the
Landtgrave of
Hessen is at this day a Prince of the greatest note. The most ancient Creation of a
Landtgrave which we meet with in History, is that of
Ludowic III. Count of
Thuringen; who, by the Emperor
Lotharius his Father-in-Law, had his Title alter'd into
Landtgrave[Page 36]of the same place, in the year 1126. Sometimes we meet with the word
Landtgrave made use of to signifie a petty Judg of any small Province or Territory; and such an interpretation the word will bear, tho it be not so usual as the former. For
Grave, as we have shew'n before, signifies a Judg as well as Count; and
Landt may as well denote a small Province as large Territory.
Burg,Burgrave. in the
Teutonic tongue, signifies a Castle or Fort; whence
Burggrave is no more then
Praefectus Castellanus, a Grave or Count
[...] a Castle or any other fortified place. The four chief
Burgraveschafts of the
German Empire, are those of
Stromberg, Noremberg, Magdeburg, and
Rheineck; besides which there are several of less note. The Territories which anciently belong'd to the Bishoprick, are now (since the late death of
Augustus Administrator of
Halle and
Magdeburg) come into the hands of the Elector of
Brandenburg. But the Title remains still with the Dukes of
Saxony, to whom both Title and Territory were heretofore given by the Emperor
Rodulph I. who at the same time annex'd the
Burggrafschaft of
Noremberg to the
Graves von Zollern, which is since made a part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg. How great the power of these
Marggraves was formerly, the Author of the
Saxon-Spiegel informs us, when he says,
Palatinus seu Palansgravius Imperatoris Judex est; Burggravius vero, id est perpetuus Castellanus, Judex Marchionis, i. e. a Count Palatine may sit Judg in a Case wherein the Emperor is a Party; and a Burggrave has the priviledg of passing sentence upon a Marquiss. And
Besoldus assures us, that the Bishops also were under the Jurisdiction of a
Burggraf. Aliquando etiam (says he, speaking of this Title of Honour)
in Episcopatibus exercebant Jurisdictionem; unde Peucerus lib. 5.
Chronic. eos illarum terrarum Judices esse censet, quae Imperatorum donatione Ecclesiis accesserunt. But all this is to be understood of the four chief
Burggraves before-mention'd; and not of others of an inferior rank, who had little more then the name of
Burggrave; or at most never had any Jurisdiction more then the bare and naked signification of their Title would allow them, which was only to be the Governors of some Castle or Fort. Such I fancy were the Ancestors of the Noble Family of the
Wassenaers in
Holland; who, as
Grotius tells us, were formerly
Burggraves of a great Castle erected in the place where
Leyden now stands, which City had been before destroy'd by the
Normans. For tho those men were Lords of the
Rhine, and as such demanded Toll of all Vessels that traded upon that River as far as their Territories reach'd (which priviledg their Successors always afterwards challeng'd); yet they never advanc'd to that heigth as to have any inspection over Marquisses. In old Memorials, and other papers of State registred by the High
Dutch Antiquaries, we shall often meet with the words
Burggraf and
Landtgrave in a literal signification; and not as Titles of Honour, in which sense we have hitherto spoke of them. For tho
Burggrave in the ordinary acception of the word (and as a Title of Honour) denotes one that hath the command of some eminent Fort in the Empire; yet it may be also (and is often in ancient
Dutch writers) used to signifie one that hath the command of any obscure and inconsiderable Castle; whereby the Governor obtains the name of
Burggrave, tho he cannot reach the Dignity. And because
Landt signifies a small as well as larger Territory, and
Grave may properly enough be used to denote any man invested with any sort of Jurisdiction; therefore the word
Landtgrave is sometimes applied to ordinary Barons.
Next after these several sorts of Counts or Earls the
Freyherrn, or Barons,
Freyherrn. take place in the Catalogue of the
German Nobility. The word signifies as much as
Domini liberi, free Lords or Barons; such as are not Tenants to, nor have any dependance upon any superior Landlord. So that sometimes we find
Freyen and
Freyherrn used synonymously by some of the
German writers; and then an High
Dutch Freyherr is no more then a
Scotch Laird; which is a Title any
Scotch man will pretend to, who has got but as much free-land as will yeild him twenty shillings a year. But ordinarily the Title is only given to such as hold considerable Territories and Jurisdictions from the Emperor; and are
Proceres proximo post Comites gradu ornati, as
Paurmeister defines
Barones. And the most considerable Heraulds and Lawyers of the
German Nation have maintain'd the assertion, That a
Freyherr differs only from a
Grave in Name and Title, but is the same thing in Dignity and Jurisdiction.
Besoldus determines the difference thus,
Ex moribus nostris Comiti Baro aequiparatur, nullumque inter eos censetur esse discrimen; nisi quod Baro non est investitus de Comitatu; qui tamen aliis in rebus suscipiendis honoribusque administrandis haudquaquam Comite inferior censetur, i. e. By our
(German) Customs a Baron is equal to a Count; only the former is ceremoniously Invested into his Territories, but in no other thing (as conferring of Honours, and the like) is he inferior to the later. Some reckon up six kinds of Barons in the
German Empire, and give them their several names thus: 1. Such as are stiled simply
Freyen (without the additional Title of
Herr), that is, Free-men; of whom before. 2.
Freyherrn, or Free Lords; such are the
Freyherrn zu Walpurg, zu Aulendorff, and the like. 3.
Semper-Freyen, or
Semper Liberi; which is a Title given to the four chief Barons of the Empire, who are sometimes otherwise stiled simply
Freyherrn zu Limburg, Dussis, Weysterburg, und Alwalden. 4.
Herrn, or Lords; such are the
Herrn zu Plauwen, Herrn zu Krannichfelt, &c. 5.
Edle Herrn, or Noble Lords; as the Counts of
Mansfelt write themselves
Edle Herrn zu Heldrungen, &c. 6. Such as are stiled barely
Edlen, or Noblemen; as the Baron of
Overfurst is usually stiled
Edle van Overfurst. Sometimes the word
Edle is put after the mention of the Barony. Thus in an old Charter granted by
Magnus Duke of
Brunswic in the year 1360 (as 'tis cited by
Paurmeister) we read
Evert von Werberge de Edle, for
Everard Baron of Werberg. But 'tis doubtless true, what some of the
German Lawyers affirm, that
Freyen, Freyherrn, Edlen Herrn, and
Herrn are only so many different words which signifie one and the same Order and Dignity; and may each of them be
English'd Barons.
Whether the Title of
Semper-Freyen be a word which distinguishes the rank of the four abovemention'd chief Barons of the Empire from all others, is a question disputable enough.
Semper-Freyen. Some draw the original of that Title from the solemn words of
semper ingenuus existat; which, as they pretend, may be met with in some Copies of old Manumissions. And hence they conclude, that such as to this day retain the name of
Freyherrn, are descended from such Ancestors as were ancient Barons in the Empire. Others more probably guess, that the word
Semper was only superadded to the Title of
Freyherr to denote the antiquity of those four (who bear this name) in the rank of Barons.
Paurmeister gives his opinion of the case proposed in these words:
Ego Baronum genera nulla esse arbitror; & quocunque nomine Semper-Freyen, Freyherrn, Edle Herrn, vel singulariter Freyen, Herrn, Edle vel Die Edle, appellantur, Nobilitate
[Page 37]ac Dignitate pares esse. Omnes enim generali vocabulo Herrn comprehenduntur; ut perpetuo habet Decretorum Comitiorum subscriptio, Von der Graven und Herrn wegen, i. e. I do not think there are any different kinds of Barons; but that whatever Title they may have (whether
Semper-Freyen, Freyherrn, Edle Herrn, Freyen Herrn, or
Edle), they are all of them notwithstanding of equal Nobility and Dignity; since they all agree in the general Title of
Herrn; as we find the Decrees anciently pass'd in the Diets subscribed,
Von der Graven und Herrn wegen, i. e. by assent and authority of the Counts and Barons. And as
Herrn is a common name for all sorts of
German Barons, so is
Herrschaft a general name for a Barony; which two words the High
Dutch use in the same sense as we do
Lord and
Lordship.
We see then what the Title of
Frey-herr signifies:
[...]on. And in the modern writings of the
Germans we seldom or never meet with the word Baron; tho this is as ordinary in
Spain, Italy, France, and
England, as the former is in
Germany. However,
Schottelius (who made as diligent enquiry into the ancient monuments and records of the
German Nation as any man whatever) assures us, that
Bar or
Baar, in old
Teutonic manuscripts, signifies a Baron; and is commonly there used instead of the more modern word
Frey-herr. And possibly there may be as just grounds for deriving
Baro from the High
Dutch as either the
Latin or
Greek. For the
Latin word
Vir (signifying a man separate and distinct from the vulgar by his virtue, whence the generality of Critics derive
Baro) has in all probability been borrowed of the High
Dutch; in whose ancient Laws
Baro, or
Barus, and
Foemina, do usually occur for a man or woman. The
English Saxons call'd a man ƿer or ƿar; which the old
Franks turn'd into
Ber, and afterwards
Paro. In
Junius's Edition of the
Codex Argenteus the
Gothic word
Wair is used for man, and
Waire in the plural for men.
Sometimes instead of
Baron the
Germans use the Title of
Banner-herr, [...]nner-herr. or
Panner-herr; which may be render'd
Dominus vexillifer, and signifies the same thing with
Banneret. I cannot certainly affirm that the word
Banner-herr (tho ordinarily met with in
German writers) is ever made use of to denote any High
Dutch Title of Honour; but only to express the Honorary Titles of other Nations. What a
Chivalier Banneret, or Knight Banneret, (which the
Germans usually render
Banner-herr) does signifie, may be learn'd from the account which the Author of
La division du mond gives of it.
Pour faire, says he,
un Chevalier Banneret, cest quant il a longement suyvy les guerres et que il a assez terres et revenue tant que il peult tenir et soudoyer cinquants gentils homes, pour accompagnier sa Banniere. Lors il peult licitement lever ladit Banniere et non autrement, car nul autre home ne puit porter Banniere en Battaile sil n'a cinquant homes prestz pour battailler. Which story of maintaining fifty men under him to accompany his Banner, is in the end of the old printed Copy of
Gesta Romanorum in
French; notwithstanding the assertion of some late Authors, that a Banneret need have no more then twenty-five (some say ten) men under him.
The
Germans call a Knight
Ritter, [...]tter. for the same reason as the
Latins stiled him
Eques: because this Title was formerly never conferr'd upon any man that had not perform'd some gallant exploit in the field; and who was dubb'd Knight by being accouter'd with a Sword and pair of Spurs. One of our ancient
English Poets,
Dan. Lydgate, gives us a full explication of the Title of
Ritter, in these words:
Eques ab Equo is said of very right,
And
Chevalier is said of Chevalry,
In which a
Rider called is a
Knight.
Arragoners done also specifie
Caballiero through all that party
Is name of worship and so took his 'ginning
Of spores of Gold, and chiefly
Riding.
The first original of dubbing of Knights with a Sword, came probably from the ancient custom of the Northern Nations of girding their young men with a Sword as soon as they were able to bear Arms.
Nihil (says
Tacitus speaking of the ancient
Germans)
neque publicae neque privatae rei nisi armati agunt. Sed arma sumere non ante cuiquam moris, quam Civitas suffecturum probaverit. Tum in ipso concilio vel Principum aliquis, vel Pater vel Propinquus, scuto frameaque Juvenem ornant. Haec apud illos Toga, hic
primus Juventae honos. Ante hoc Domus pars videntur; mox Reipublicae. Besides this Ceremony of giving a Lance or Target to such as were admitted members of the Empire, they had another way of adopting Sons
per arma. Thus
Theodoric King of the Eastern
Goths in
Italy, adopted the King of the
Heruli; by a Charter still extant in
Cassiodorus's Northern History. And hence
Justin the Elder being about to adopt
Cosroes the King of
Persia's Son, was advised by
Proclus his Chancellor
[...] (as
Procopius speaks)
[...],
i. e. That it should be done according to the custom of the barbarous Nations, who did not adopt Sons by Writing but by Arms.
There are not so many several Orders of Knighthood in
Germany as in most other
European Nations;
Orders of Knighthood. if we except those who have any Honour and Title of some particular Order sent them from the Kings of
Spain, England, and
Denmark. For from these Princes several Dukes, Counts, and other Grandees of the Empire, receive the honorary Titles of Knights of the Golden Fleece, the Garter, and the Elephant. The
Teutonic Order of Knighthood (of which we have spoken something before in the Description of
Prussia) was first instituted under the walls of
Acon, or
Ptolemais in the Holy Land; altho
Jacob de Vitriaco, Polydore Vergilius, Gretser, and several other Historians of good note make the Order much more ancient. After the City was taken by the Christians, these new Knights (who were most of them Citizens of
Lubec and
Bremen) fix'd themselves at a Church dedicated to the Virgin
Mary; from whence they are sometimes stiled
Equites Mariani. Here they were setled under
Henry Walpot (von Passenheim) their first Great Master, in the year 1190. Afterwards, when the Christians were beaten out of
Syria, they remov'd to
Venice, and thence to
Marpurg in
Hassia; where, as in several other parts of
Germany, their Convent was endow'd with fair revenues. Whence some fancy they first got the name of
Equites Teutonici, or the
Dutch Knights; tho in all likelihood the Order had this name before it was brought into these parts, consisting at its first institution chiefly of
Germans. Being call'd into
Prussia, say some, by the
Muscovite (or, as others, sent thither by the Emperor
Frideric II.) they seated themselves at
Marienberg, about the year 1340 (after a long engagement in a bloody war against the Natives), under the thirteenth Great Master of their Order
Sigefrid de Feuchtwangen. In the year 1450 they were forc'd to submit to
Casimir IV. King of
Poland; and at last the Order was surrender'd by
Albert Marquise of
Brandenburg (the thirty-fifth and last Great Master of the
[Page 38]Order) to
Sigismund King of
Poland, who thereupon created him Duke of
Prussia. Such of the Knights as disrelished this action of their Master
Albert, retir'd into
Germany; where they chose one
Walter Croneberg Master of their Order. Afterwards the Title was conferr'd upon
Maximilian, one of the younger Sons of the Emperor
Maximilian II. But the Order never flourish'd, but decay'd daily, since the days of
Albert beforemention'd; and is at this day an obscure honour of little or no repute in the world. The only Order of Knighthood at this day known in
Germany, or taken notice of for Knights of the Empire, are the
geschlagenen Rittern, or dubb'd Knights; on whom the Emperor confers that honour by touching them lightly upon the shoulder with a naked Sword, and saying to each of them
Esto Miles Dei & Sancti Stephani.
The Title of
Armiger,Esquires. or Esquire (as we and the
French use the word), is wholly out of use in the Empire. Yet in ancient
Dutch Records we read of
Skiltknaben and
Wapeneren; both which words have one and the same signification, and are properly render'd
Armigeri. And these had their Title and Dignity conferr'd on them by delivery of a Sword only (without girding it on) with a blow on the cheek or ear; which gave them the liberty of bearing a Sword, or other Arms, in attendance on a Knight or
Ritter geschlagen, but not of wearing it girded on as the Knight himself did. For it was not lawful formerly for any subject whatever in the Empire to bear Arms; excepting such as had the Emperors more especial licence so to do.
The Gentry in the Empire are express'd by the general name of
Edel-lute;Gentlemen. which (as our
Gentleman) is an universal name for all such as either from the blood of their Ancestors, the favour of their Soveraign, or their own virtue, are raised to an eminency above the multitude. Hence
Edel-dom and
Edel-heit are used to signifie
Nobility; and
Veredelen and
Edel-machen, to
Enoble. Some singularly eminent Gentlemen in
Francken, Schwaben, and
Rhein-land, who are free from Taxes, and subject to no other Court but the Emperor's, have the Title of
die freye vom Adel, or
die freye Adeliche Reichs Ritterschaft, i. e. the free Gentlemen, or
Ordo Equestris of the Empire. Our
English Saxons used the word Aedel in the same signification; whence, in
Aelfric's Glossary,
Generositas is interpreted AEdelborynnesse,
Noble Birth; and
generosa is render'd by
þ AEðele, or
a Noble Woman. Indeed
Aetheling, Etheling, or
Adeling, was commonly used by our
Saxon Ancestors to denote the Kings eldest Son, or Heir apparent to the Crown; who afterwards got the Title of
Prince of Wales. Hence
Edgar Etheling, so often nam'd in our
English Historians, had his Surname; which
Robert of
Glocester in his Poem upon King
Harold (a manuscript Copy of which may be seen in Sir
John Cotton's Library) explains thus:
The Gode tryewemen of the Lond wolde aabbe ymade King,
The kind Eir, the young child
Edgar Atheling.
Wo so were next King by kunde me cluped him
Atheling.
Thervore me cluped him so; vor by kunde he was King.
But, if we search into the Etymology of the word, we shall find that AEðeling is only a patronymic from the primitive AEðel; and signifies no more then
Nobilis ortu, or
Generosus, i. e. one descended from him that was AEðel, or a Nobleman. Thus in King
Aelfred's
Saxon Version of
Bede's Ecclesiastical History, we read mid eallum AEðelingum his ðeode, that is,
with all the Ethelings of his Nation; instead of the
Latin, Cum cunctis Gentis suae Nobilibus.
Of the Present State of the
German Church; with a view of the Power and Dignity of the Archbishops, Bishops, Abbots, and other Ecclesiastical Orders therein contain'd.
HOW much several of the Provinces and Principalities of the
German Empire differ among themselves in points of Religion (since the first beginning of the Reformation by
Martin Luther) we have shew'n before; and it cannot be expected, that where the Doctrines are so dissonant there should be an Uniformity in Church Discipline. The intolerable greatness which the
Roman Church had usurp'd in all parts of the Emperor's Dominions was the first thing which render'd it uneasie; and therefore 'twas no unexpected change (when
Luther's opinions had prevail'd with so many of the great Princes of the Empire) to see Bishoprics converted into secular Principalities, and a new form of Church-Government set up instead of Episcopal Dignity which had been so much abused.
The Archbishops and Bishops of the
Roman Church,
Prelates of the
Roman Church. who to this day bear rule in such parts of
Germany as have not embraced either
Luther or
Calvin's Doctrine, have more power, and exercise a greater authority in their several Bishoprics then any other Prelates in Christendom. Most of them are great Princes, and challenge as absolute a dominion over the Temporality of their Diocesses as any Secular Elector can pretend to over his own Lands and Inheritance. Heretofore, besides the three Ecclesiastical Electors, there were five Archbishops and thirty Bishops that had Seats and Voices in the Assemblies and Diets of the Empire. But their number has exceedingly decreased of late; since the Archbishoprics of
Magdeburg, Bremen, and
Riga, together with the Bishoprics of
Halberstadt, Minden, and
Werden have been chang'd into Secular Principalities; those also of
Besanson, Verdun, Mets, and
Toul cut off from the Empire, and inseparably united to the Territories of
Spain and
France; and lastly, those of
Valesia, Losanna, and
Chur abolished by the
Suisses. Insomuch, that at present, in the Colledge of Princes of the Empire, only the Archbishop of
Saltzburg (besides the Ecclesiastical Electors) and about twenty Bishops have Votes. By this secularizing three Archbishoprics and six Bishoprics, the Protestant Princes (some of them at least) have lost the opportunities of providing for their younger Brethren in as plentiful a manner as they could have done before the Treaty of
Munster. For whilst the Archbishopric of
Magdeburg was in the hands of the Elector of
Saxony; that of
Bremen in the possession of the King of
Denmark; and the rest of the Spiritual Dignities, which are now cut off from the Church, were in the gift of other Princes of the Empire; considerable maintenance was provided for many young Dukes and Counts, who at this time can get nothing but the bare Title of their Elder Brethren, and are not permitted to have the least share in the Inheritance and Temporal Estate of their Ancestors. The Bishopric of
Lubec remains still an Ecclesiastical preferment, tho in the hands of the
Lutherans; and ever since the death of
Balthazar of
Rantzau (which hapned in the year
[Page 39]1547) has been in the gift of the Dukes of
Sleswic and
Holstein. The present Bishop is a younger Brother of the Duke of
Holstein; and keeps his residence at
Eutin, a fair Palace situate on a Lake about two
German miles from
Lubec.
Among the
Roman Prelates, the Archbishop of
Saltzburg is chief; being born Legate of the Papal See, and giving place to none but the Electors in the public Diets of the Empire. How fair and strong a City
Saltzburg is, and what riches it brings in yearly to this Prelate by the abundance of Salt here vended; we shall have occasion to shew hereafter.
Bishops of the
Roman Church, who still enjoy a Seat and Suffrage in the Assemblies of the Empire, are,
Bamberg, Wirsburg, Wormes, Spire, Eichstedt, Augsburg, Constance, Hildesheim, Paderborn, Munster, Osnabrug, Passau, Strasburg, Frisinguen, Liege, Trent, Brix, and
Basil. Amongst which
Osnabrug belongs to the
Lutheran Princes by turns; and since the death of
Francis Count of
Wirtemberg, the Bishopric came into the hands of the present Bishop
Ernest Augustus, Duke of
Lunenburg, youngest Brother of the House of
Zell. And since the late decayed power of the Elector of
Colen (who challenges the Bishopric of
Hildesheim) the last Duke of
Hanover took possession of the Diocess of
Hildesheim, and kept it by a strong hand: And whether his Brother
Ernest Augustus (Bishop of
Osnabrug, who has lately succeeded him in the Dukedom of
Hanover) will restore it to the Archbishop of
Colen, I cannot determine.
There had long been a quarrel between the Emperors of
Germany and the Bishops of
Rome about the Right of Election and Investiture of Bishops in the Empire;
[...]sti
[...] of
[...]ops. before the Council of
Trent determined the controversie, and gave the sole power of conferring of Dignities and Prelacies (not only in the
German Empire, but in all other parts of Christendom) to the Pope. How unjust an usurpation this was, the Pope's own Canons will inform us; where we meet with Pope
Leo begging leave of the Emperors
Ludowic and
Lotharius to consecrate one
Colonus Bishop of
Riete; with several other the like examples. And an infinite number of Historians, and other ancient Authors (many of which the Reader may find quoted by the learned Author of the
Review of the Council of Trent) assure us, that the Emperors always peaceably enjoy'd this Right of investing Bishops and Abbots, till the days of Pope
Gregory VII. who (altho himself had receiv'd Confirmation from the Emperor
Henry IV. yet) thunder'd out an Excommunication against all Emperors, Kings, Dukes, Marquises, Earls, and all other secular powers that should lay claim to the Right of Investiture into Bishoprics or any other Ecclesiastical Dignities; and against all those that should receive any such preferment at their hands. This Decree has been observ'd by
Gregory's Successors as an inviolable Statute of the Apostolic See; and enroll'd in their Books of Decretals. After many irreconcilable broils and bickerings betwixt the Pope and Emperor (after this Excommunication was issued out), the one endeavouring to keep, the other to regain the said Right; at last,
Henry V. was forced to yeild to Pope
Calixtus, and divest himself of that Right which his Ancestors had always challeng'd, and to which most of them made good their title and plea. This poor Emperor, I say, (abandon'd almost by all the world, and combated by his own Subjects, those especially of the Clergy) was constrain'd to quit his claim to all manner of Investiture by this formal Declaration:
‘I
Henry by the Grace of God Emperor of
Rome, for the Love of God and of the Holy
Roman Church, and of Pope
Calixtus, and for the benefit of my own Soul, do restore unto God, and to his blessed Apostles St.
Peter and St.
Paul, and to the Holy Catholic Church all kind of Investiture made by the Ring and Staff, and permit that Elections and free Consecrations be made in all Churches.’ Now (tho the terms of this renunciation shew that it was only personal, and that it laid no obligation on his Successors to follow his example, yet) by virtue of this surrender, the Popes of
Rome have for more then five hundred years pretended to an unquestionable Right of Investiture of all sorts of Eclesiastical Dignified persons. And that Emperor's Successors have always wanted either courage or strength enough to regain their lost prerogative.
There are two ways of advancing these Prelates in the
German Church; whereof the one is term'd
Election, and the other
Postulation. When the Chapter of any Cathedral, being Canonically assembled, chuses any particular member of their own body to be head thereof (which is supposed to be lawfully done, when two thirds of the Canons give him their voices) he is said to be Archbishop or Bishop by
Election: But if the same Canons think fit to promote to that Dignity some Prince or Prelate who is not of their own body, they call that kind of proceeding
Postulation.
Besides the Archbishops and Bishops there are several other Ecclesiastical Princes of the Empire,
Abbots. who have Seats and Voices in the Diets. The chief of these is the Master of the
Teutonic Order (tho he has nothing but a bare Title from his Order); who keeps usually his Residence at
Manenchal or
Morkenthal, and has a Vote in all Assemblies immediately after the Archbishop of
Saltzburg. The rest are the Abbots of
Fulda, Hirsesfeld, Murbach, Kempten, Corbay, Prum, Stabel, and
Ludors, the Grand Prior of
Malta, the Provosts of
Elvang and
Beressolagaden; who have Voices after the Bishops.
There are three and twenty other Prelates,
Abbesses. and fourteen Abbesses that come after the Secular Princes; who (tho they have Seats in the Diets, yet) have no voices but in a full body, no more then the Counts. The Abbesses are they of
Quedlimburg, Essen, Hermord, Nidez, and
Obermunster at
Ratisbon, Lindau, Herenroda, Buchau upon the Lake,
Federsic, Rottemmuster near
Rottevil, Hagbaen, Guttenzel, Beind, Dandelau, and
Gunderthem. These Ladies are obliged to send in their Deputies to all public Assemblies of the Empire; being excus'd a personal presence because of their Sex. However they have as good a right to challenge Seats in the Diets as any Prince whatever. The three and twenty Prelates have each of them the Title of Abbot, Provost, or Bayliff of some particular place; and have commonly so large revenues annex'd to their Titles and Dignities, that if their riches were employ'd to the best advantage, they would be able to strike terror into any secular power that should dare to affront them.
All the reform'd members of the
German Empire (both
Lutherans and
Calvinists) agree in this,
Reformed Church. That they make all their Clergy acknowledg the Supremacy of that Prince under whom they live; who is appeal'd to, by an unanimous consent of both parties, as supreme Judg over Spiritual as well as Temporal Delinquents. But in inferior Orders, and points of Church Discipline there is some small difference betwixt the followers of these two different opinions. Where the
Calvinists have got the power into their own hands, we find no mention made of Archbishops or
[Page 40]Bishops; altho in some parts of
Germany they are in subjection to Superintendants. The few
Lutheran Princes that take the Title of Bishops upon them, are as absolute in their Dioceses as secular Monarchs; and have as great command over their Lay-Subjects as Clergy-men. The other Princes, who are purely secular, have in their Dominions general Superintendents; to whom all the Deacons, Priests, and particular Superintendents, are obliged to give an account of their Lives and Doctrines. The particular Superintendents (who represent our Bishops, as the General ones do Archbishops) visit their Dioceses once a year, and make an exact enquiry into the Doctrine and Manners of all the Pastors under their Inspection. Under every Prince there is a Consistory, answerable to our Convocation of the Clergy; in which the ancientest and most worthy Prelate in the Principality (who is commonly the Superintendent General) does usually preside. This Consistory, fortified by the power and authority of the Prince, ordains what is just and reasonable for the maintenance of the professed Religion; and has power to degrade, imprison, or otherwise punish any offender in holy Orders.
This difference of opinions must needs create different interests in the
German Church;
Interest of the Romanists. and make several of its members (who ought all to be equally concern'd for the common peace) drive contrary ways. The interest of those that have sworn Allegiance to the See of
Rome, lies chiefly in crying up and maintaining the Supremacy of the Pope; and adhering to the Emperor only so long as he shall acknowledg himself the Popes Vassal. For tho they will grant themselves to be Subjects to the
German Emperor; yet the bond of Religion tyes them stronger than any other obligation whatever. So that, should there ever arise another Emperor so brave as to dare to undervalue the thunderings of the
Vatican, and demand a restitution of those many Prerogatives of which the Pope hath rob'd his Ancestors; it is to be fear'd, there would not be found one Clergy-man in ten, who would forsake the Pope's interest, and close with the Emperor in the controversie.
'Tis true,
Interest of the Reformed Clergy. the
Lutherans are a great share of the Empire; who, if close united, might be able to make head against a very potent Assailant. For the greatest part of the Principalities of the Houses of
Saxony, Brandenburg, Brunswic, Lunenburg, Holstein, Meklenburg, Wirtemberg, Darmstadt, Dourlach, Lawenburg, and
East-Friesland profess the
Lutheran Religion; besides a great number of Counts, and the most considerable of the Imperial Cities, as
Hamburgh, Lubec, Strasburg, Ʋlme, Noremberg, and many others. All which being back'd with
Denmark and
Sweden (both which Kingdoms embrace the same opinions) might seem strong enough to secure themselves against any future attempts of the
Roman party. But indeed there is such a mixture of
Calvinists in most of the Territories now mention'd, that with these Dissenters they are obliged at least to be at unity; tho otherwise a
Lutheran hates the name of
John Calvin as bad as he does that of
Ignatius Loyala, as hath been before shew'n in the Chapter treating of the
Modern Religion of the Germans. On the other hand, the
Calvinists will be sure to stick by the
Lutherans whenever they are persecuted by the Popish party; well knowing, that these two opposite props of the Reformed Religion mutually support each other. In some parts of the Elector of
Saxony's Dominions there has of late sprung up some small jealousies and discontents between the Professors of the
Lutheran and
Calvinist doctrines, upon the terrible apprehensions which the
Lutherans harbour of the Elector of
Brandenburgh's arrival in their neighbourhood; whom they know to be a strict
Calvinist, and to have encourag'd the assertors of his own Tenents in most parts of his Electorate. But there is no fear of these petty animosities breaking into a general flame; since, even in the Marquisate of
Brandenburgh, the
Lutheran party is still much more numerous then the
Calvinist.
Of the Laws establish'd and observ'd in the Empire.
SInce there are so many different forms of Government in the Empire (which must needs besuppos'd where there are so many Princes that exercise absolute dominion over their own Subjects), we must necessarily expect a great variety in the Bodies of Municipal Laws practis'd and made Statutable in the several Principalities. The Civil Law (strictly so call'd) is indeed the
Jus Publicum Romanum; and generally observ'd in every Court of Judicature throughout the whole Empire. But because the four Tomes of these Statutes have not made provision for every particular case, there have since been compiled several Bodies of Decrees, which are receiv'd with as great veneration and esteem, and made as inviolable, as
Justinian's Pandects. The chief of which are these:
I.
Aurea Bulla; which is, in the original,
Aurea Bulla. a small Book in Parchment, containing twenty-four Leaves and thirty Chapters; whereof the twenty-three first were published at
Noremberg the tenth of
January in the year 1356, and the other seven at
Mets on
Christmas-day following, by the Authority of the Emperor
Charles IV. (the first composer of the Decrees therein contain'd) together with the approbation and consent of the greatest part of the Princes, Counts, Barons, and other Estates of the Empire. This Imperial Act of Parliament is call'd
Bulla for the same reason that all Letters Patents of Emperors, Popes, and several other great Princes have that name given,
viz. from the Seal which gives it its whole strength and validity. For it is the fashion to hang great Seals at the bottom of Letters and Edicts of State, which have for many years had the name of
Bullae, because they resemble those guilt pictures which children in the old
Roman Commonwealth used to hang upon their breasts till they arriv'd at fourteen years of age, and then consecrated them (as holy reliques) to their
Lares. These Seals are not always of the same matter nor bigness; but different in bulk and value, according to the importance of the Letters to which they are fix'd. Ordinary Letters of State (such as contain Commissions or Instructions for Ambassadors, or the like) are usually seal'd with an impression made upon Wax; but such as contain publick Statutes or Edicts of Princes, bear Seals of Lead, Silver, or Gold, answerable to the worth and weight of the Laws therein ratified or publish'd. Hence this irrevocable and most important Edict of the Emperor (containing all the fundamental Laws of the Empire touching the time, place, and persons necessarily requir'd to the due Election of an Emperor; the number, immunities, and preeminences of the Electors; the order and decorum they ought to observe in all public Assemblies and Solemnities; the appointing of Vicars in the time of an
Interregnum, &c.) was judged fit to
[Page 41]be sealed with the Great Seal of the Empire, and that upon Gold; to shew that (as that metal is the most excellent and incorruptible of all others, so) the matters contain'd in that Bull were indeed the principal Laws of the Empire, and such as should be always inviolably observ'd, without the least alteration. On one side of this Golden Seal (which is fast'ned to small Cords of yellow and red Silk) is shewn the protraicture of the Emperor
Charles IV. seated upon his Throne, with his Imperial Crown on his head, the Scepter in one hand, and the Ball in the other; having on his right hand the Arms of the Empire, and those of
Bohemia on the left, with this Inscription writ round him,
Carolus quartus, Divina favente clementia, Romanorum Imperator, semper Augustus, & Bohemiae Rex. On the other side you have a Castle with two Towers, thus subscribed,
Aurea Roma; and these words in the circumference,
Roma caput mundi regit Orbis fraena rotundi. Some of the Statutes herein contain'd (notwithstanding the pretended immutability) have, since the promulgation of them, been violated and broken. For example, 1. The
Aurea Bulla says positively, that the Election of a King of the
Romans ought to be had at
Francfurt; and yet
Ferdinand I. was Elected at
Wormes, and
Ferdinand III. at
Ratisbon. 2. The
Bull orders, that the number of Electors should not exceed Seven; and yet the Treaty of
Munster has alter'd this Decree, and given Eight several Princes Voices in the Election of an Emperor. 3. 'Tis order'd in the
Bull, that all the Electors should be present at saying of
Mass, before they proceed to the Election; whereas, since the Reformation overspread so large a part of the Empire, several Protestant Princes are exempted from their attendance at Church until the Ceremony of the
Mass be over.
II. The next considerable part of the Municipal Laws of the Empire is contain'd in the
Capitulatio Caesarea; [...]tula
[...]aesa
[...]. which is a Collection of forty-one Articles of Agreement between the Electors and Emperor Elect, to which the later is bound to subscribe (after his having first taken an Oath to observe punctually every thing therein contain'd) before his Coronation. When these are so often transcribed as that each Elector may have one Copy, sign'd and seal'd by the Emperor's own hand, they are deliver'd to, and kept by the Eight several Princes that have voices in the Election, as Sureties for the new chosen Emperor's good behaviour, and faithful administration of the affairs of the Empire; before which Ceremony is over, the Election is not held valid and irrevocable. The chief things which the Emperor promises upon Oath, and subscribes to in these Articles, are: To maintain and preserve all the Priviledges and Royalties of the Electors, Princes, and other inferior Estates of the Empire: That he will not act any thing contrary to the Decrees contain'd in the Golden Bull, but suffer the Electors to assemble at what times, and upon what occasion they shall think fit: That he will not waste or diminish any part of the Revenues of the Imperial Crown; nor bring in any foreign forces into the Empire without the consent of the Electors and the other Estates: That no stranger shall be by him admitted into any public Office; but that, on the contrary, all great places at Court, and in the Field or Country, shall be supplied by true
Germans, descended from some Noble Family in the Emprie,
&c. These, and some other Articles of the like importance, being by the new chosen Emperor subscribed and sworn to, the Election is confirm'd, and the Emperor solemnly Crown'd and admitted to the Imperial Throne.
III. The third Class of the Laws of the Empire,
Recessus Imperii. are such Acts of Parliament (so we may properly enough call them) as are established by Authority of the Emperor and Estates of the Empire assembled in public Diets. These the
Germans call
Abschiedte, which is commonly render'd by
Latin Authors
Recessus Imperii; because they are Enacted at the breaking up (or upon the retirement) of the Assemblies of the Estates General of the Empire. These kind of Statutes are Enacted in the following manner: First, the Electors and other chief Princes, who have particular Votes in the Diet, take the Bill proposed into consideration; and, after some consultation and debate, put it to the vote. If it be not rejected by a majority, the Deputies from the several Cities are called in; to whom the Decree of the Princes is communicated. If these think they have any thing to say which may reasonably be objected against the sentence of the Electors, they may be heard as Counsellors; but have no vote in altering or establishing any Decree whatever. This done, the Archbishop of
Mentz (in the name of all the Electors, and other Princes) proposes the matter to the Emperor, as he had done before to the Deputies. If his Imperial Majesty approves of the sentence, the Bill is pass'd and becomes a Statute; but if he rejects it, the reasons on both sides are scann'd betwixt him and the Princes, till one party yeild. When they are agreed upon the thing debated, the Acts of that Session are drawn up in form of Laws, and read to the whole Diet. Afterwards (as soon as they are sign'd by the Emperor, two Spiritual and two Temporal Princes, one Abbot, one Count, and the Common Council-men of the City where the Diet is held) they are publish'd, and become Statutes obligatory through the whole Empire. When they are thus Enacted, two authentic Copies are made; whereof one remains in the custody of the Emperor, the other of the Archbishop of
Mentz. The rest of the Estates have only the priviledg of transcribing the original Copies.
IV. To the three former may be added a fourth sort of Decrees in the Empire,
Sanctio Pragmatica. call'd usually by the
German writers
Sanctio Pragmatica de Pace publica; which contains all the Statutes (confirm'd by many of the Emperors in several Diets) to be put in execution against all disturbers of the public peace of the Empire. Herein 'tis decreed, that whatever Prince, or any other member of the Empire, shall endeavour by open hostility to disturb the public peace of the whole body; he shall be cut off from the other members, and look'd upon as an Out-law. But 'tis hard to imagine, that this should be put in execution against any offender; if the interpretation which some High
Dutch Lawyers have put upon it be allowable. For they tell us, that to qualifie a man for the proscription herein mention'd, it is necessary, 1. That the forces he raises be
atroces & majores quam quibus resisti queat, i.e. such as the whole Militia of the Empire is not able to withstand. 2. That his Army consist not of Volunteers, but Soldiers press'd to Rebellion. 3. That the person thus offending have evil designs in his head (as 'tis indeed a thousand to one but he has), and an intention of overthrowing the establish'd Government. Any one of these accomplishments is not enough, they say, to make a compleat disturber of the peace; but 'tis necessary that they all concur, before the Law can take hold of any man as a delinquent.
To these four heads may be referr'd all the Laws and Decrees in force at this day over the
[Page 42]whole Empire; excepting what is contain'd in the Emperor
Justinian's Collections of the
Roman Laws. However in particular Provinces and Principalities we must expect to find other Bodies of Statutes; such are the
Sachsen-Spiegel, Schwaben-Spiegel, Das Sachsische Weichbild, &c. of which more at large when we come to treat of the several Princes Dominions where they are observed.
Because it is not possible we should in this place give the Reader an exact account of the Laws peculiar to
Germany, and others common to the Empire with other Nations; therefore we shall refer him, for the satisfaction of his curiosity in this particular, to the works of those many learned Lawyers which have treated at large of this subject. Among whom
Hermannus Conringius (late Professor of Physick at
Helmstadt) is usually reckoned the most eminent;
Arumaeus, Besoldus, Speidelius, Hippolytus a Lapide, Paurmeister, Lampadius, and others, have done their Country great service in collecting together, and commenting upon, the Municipal Laws of the
German Empire. The
Recessus Imperii (or Statute-Laws of the States assembled in the public Diets) are collected into one body, and sometimes illustrated with accurate notes by the Author of the
Comitiologia, Panvinius, Gotlieb von Hagen, and most especially by the industrious and learned Author of a small book entituled
Grundfeste des Heiligen Romischen Reiches. Monsieur
Rachel (Plenipotentiary from the Duke of
Holstein-Gottorp in the late Treaty of Peace at
Nimeguen) published a small Treatise this present year 1680, entituled
Introductio ad Jus Publicum Germanicum; wherein he gives a concise, but learned account of the Historical, Chronological, and Georgraphical parts of the whole Common-Law practis'd in the
German Empire.
Of the
DIETS of the Empire, and the matters therein transacted.
THE Supreme Court of Judicature in the
German Empire is the Diet; which is nothing else but a General Assembly of all the Estates of the Empire. It answers in all things to our High Court of Parliament; whether we respect the Persons that constitute it, or the Affairs usually therein transacted.
When the Emperor,
Summons. by advice of the Electors (who are of his Council) has a mind the Estates should assemble, he issues out his Summons by Letters to the several Princes and other Estates of the Empire, who have Seats and Votes in the Diet, acquainting them with the time and place appointed for their sitting. Every member of the Diet is bound by his Allegiance to appear at the day appointed, either in person or by proxy. In the old
Francic Kingdom, the several Princes of the Empire were bound to make their personal appearance, and never permitted to send Deputies in their places; except upon a just and lawful pretence, to be approv'd of by the Emperor and Electors. Whence it happen'd, that in those days there would not appear above two or three Deputies at most in a Diet: whereas now the better half consists usually of such Substitutes as have no voices of their own, but come there to vote for their Masters. The chief reason for such an alteration sprung from the growing luxury of later Ages; which oblig'd some poor Princes to keep away, for fear of being constrain'd to live at a rate beyond what their Purse would bear, tho no more then what their Quality required. Hence proceedings in the Diet come to be so slow pac'd, and every matter in debate is held much longer in agitation (before any thing be finally resolv'd on) then it would be, if every Prince were obliged to personal appearance. For it must needs often happen, that in several particular cases brought before the Diet the Deputies want full instructions; and so, not daring to act beyond their Commission, are forc'd to expect new Orders from their Masters before they will venture to proceed. Nay, since the days of
Maximilian the Emperor (and for some short time before) many of the Estates have taken the liberty of neither appearing in person, nor by their Ambassadors. However, in such cases all matters transacted in the absence of these Estates or their Deputies, have as much force as if they were present; as appears from the
Reichs absciede zu Trier und Colln A. D. 1512.
§. Es solln auch, &c. But when some grand and important affairs of the Empire require the personal appearance of the Members themselves, the Emperor commonly urges them by his Summons to repair in person to the place appointed. Thus
Ferdinand King of the
Romans (in the year 1555) not only by his Letters Patents, but by Ambassadors requested of the particular Estates, that they would give their personal attendance, and not leave matters of so great importance (as were then like to be brought before them) to be taken into consideration by Deputies only, who could not make so ready a dispatch as the weight of the affairs before them would require. After such a pressing Summons as this, the Estates (that absent themselves) either send in no Deputies at all, or else make their Ambassadors Plenipotentiaries, by giving them as full power and authority to vote and act in the Assembly as if they themselves were present.
The old
Roman Emperors used to call Assemblies of their Estates at
Roncale (a pleasant place upon the River
Padus); where the Princes,
Place. and others, gave their votes in the open fields. Afterwards they removed their meetings into great Towns and Cities; which was a custom before
Charles the Great pitcht upon
Mentz as a place most convenient for the setting of the Diet. The
Aurea Bulla orders, that whoever is chosen King of the
Romans, should hold his first Diet at
Noremberg; but with this proviso,
Nisi legitimum obsteterit impedimentum, i. e. Except a lawful reason may be given for the contrary. Hence
Charles V. gives this reason why he did not observe the Statute of the Bull,
Dieweil er der Sterblichen lufft halber den Reichstag zu Nurnberg nicht habe halten wollen, habe er solchen gen Wormbs angesetzet, i. e. Since he could not conveniently hold a
Reichstag (or Diet) at
Noremberg, because of the bad and unwholsome air; therefore he thought good to remove it to
Worms. The like reasons were given by the Emperor
Maximilian for removing the Diet to
Augsburg, and by
Ferdinand III. for calling one at
Regenspurg. By
Charles the Fifth's Capitulation 'twas order'd, that it should be lawful for the Emperor to call a Diet at what place he pleased; provided it were not without the bounds of the
German Empire. But because there ought to be had a respect to the convenience of the several Princes and Estates as well as the Emperor himself; therefore in the Capitulation sworn to by the present Emperor
Leopold, 'tis expresly said,
Ʋnd sunderlich keinen Reichstag ausserhalb des Reichs Teutscher Nation,
auch ehe und bevor wir darzu umb der sieben Churfursten consens
und verwilligung durch sonderbahre
[Page 43]schickung angehalten, und uns mit denselben so wohl der zeit als mahlstat vergleichen, oder sie von selbsten des Reichs anliegen halber uns darumb unterthanig angelanget und erinnert, vornehmen oder ausschreiben, i. e. And especially no Diet without the bounds of the
German Empire, nor before by an express Ambassador we have obtain'd the consents of the seven Electors, and consulted with them about the time as well as place of the Diet's sitting; or they themselves, taking the public good of the Empire into consideration, shall humbly desire Us to call such an Assembly. At present the Diet is usually held at
Ratisbon; as a place of a convenient distance from the Courts of most of the Princes, and other Estates, of the Emprie.
As soon as any of the Estates,
[...]ing Em
[...] or their Ambassadors, are come to the place appointed, the first thing they do is to beg audience of the Emperor, to whom they shew their Summons, thank his Imperial Majesty for his gracious calling a Diet, and promise their utmost endeavours in promoting the general good of the Empire in the following Assembly. The Ambassadors are bound to give the Emperor an account of the reasons of their Masters absence; according to an Order of the Diet to that purpose, as appears from the
Reichs Ascheide zu Trier und Colln, A. D. 1621.
§. Es sollen auch die Churfursten, &c. This done, they are to acquaint the Marshal of the Empire (Count
Papenheim) with their arrival, that he may be the better able to execute his Office; which is, to provide each man a lodging sutable to his Quality, and to write down the names of every particular member. Lastly, they are to give in their names to the Chancellor's (or Archbishop of
Mentz's) Office; and there to shew their Credentials.
The proposal of every thing to be discussed in the Assembly belongs to the Emperor alone,
[...]osals. and not to the Estates or Members of the Diet. And altho in his Summons a particular day be always nominated for their Session, yet 'tis in the power of his Imperial Majesty to defer the proposal of any business for some time longer. Insomuch that oftentimes the Estates (to save charges) have made a later appearance then was appointed in their Summons. When the late Emperor
Ferdinand III. had call'd a Diet at
Ratisbon in the year 1654, three months were almost slipt over, after the day appointed, before any thing was proposed to the Assembled Members. When, at last, the Emperor is pleased to make the States acquainted with their business, the Vice-Marshal gives warning to every particular Member to attend his Imperial Majesty at such a set time. At which time appointed, the Electors, and the rest, give their attendance, and wait on the Emperor to Church; where public prayers are had for the happy success of all their consultations in settling the Affairs of the Empire. Which done, they all return to the grand Council Chamber; where the Emperor in his Robes declares to the Estates the reasons why they are assembled, and proposes to them the heads they are to treat of in the following Diet.
The controversie about taking place in the Diets has been long since determined amongst the Electors by the Golden Bull;
[...]eceden
[...] but the other Princes, and Deputies for the Imperial Cities, have continual quarrels at every meeting; insomuch that sometimes the Diet is ready to break up in confusion; and would doubtless often do it, if some milder spirits then the rest did not compose the strife by yeilding their places to their Antagonists with a reserved protestation against making use of this single instance as a president for the future. The order observed by the Electors in the Assembly, is somewhat different from what it was before the Treaty of
Munster; upon the account of the Duke of
Bavaria's being made one of the number. At this day they seat themselves thus: First, the Elector of
Mentz challenges the chief place, and sits always in the middle. On his right hand are placed the Electors of
Treves and
Colen, by turns; and, after one of them, the
Bavarian and
Brandenburgher. On the left (after one of the abovenamed Spiritual Electors) the Duke of
Saxony and Prince Palatine of the
Rhine. The Ambassadors of the Electors take the same place among themselves as if their Masters were personally present; but if any one Elector appear in his own person, the Ambassadors of all the rest yeild him the place, tho perhaps he should have sat below all their Masters.
The Princes of the Empire divide themselves into two Benches;
Princes of the Empire.Die Geistliche und Weltliche (as they call them, or) the Spiritual and Secular. In the Diets of the old
Francic Kingdom, the Bishops, or Prelates, and Secular Princes made two distinct and separate Bodies; as they do to this day in Provincial Courts. And the reason was the same; because the Prelates used not to intermeddle with matters of State, but concern'd themselves only in setling the affairs of the Church, with which the Secular Princes were never concern'd. But afterwards, when the Bishops of
Rome had removed the debate of all Ecclesiastical affairs from the
German Assemblies to their own Courts, the Prelates of the Empire appear'd no more in the public Diets as Bishops, but as Temporal Princes; such as had no Secular Jurisdiction being shut out of the Court. On the Spiritual Bench sit the Arch-Dukes of
Austria, and the Dukes of
Burgundy (who were permitted this honour because Princes, tho Secular, yet of a more then ordinary eminence in the Empire); the Archbishops and Bishops, that are not Electors; several Abbots (some of which had Princely Dignities conferr'd on them by
Charles the Great); and lastly, the Master of the
Teutonic Order. The
Lutheran Prelates were formerly wholly excluded from all appearance at any General Assembly of the Estates of the Empire; against which hard usage their often repeated Protestations prov'd unsuccessful. At last, matters were so order'd in the
Westphalian Treaty of Peace, that they obtain'd a Seat in the Diets; but not amongst the
Roman Prelates, nor the Secular Princes, but on a Bench by themselves, betwixt both the other. But because the Archbishopric of
Magdeburg (by vertue of the said Treaty) is turn'd into a Dukedom; and the Bishoprics of
Lubeck and
Osnabrug into Secular Principalities by turns; therefore at this day all the Reformed Princes (excepting those that are Electors) sit on the Secular Bench, which is appointed for all Princes, Counts, and Barons of the Empire, who have votes in the Diets.
All the Ecclesiastical Members of the Diet have not equal votes;
Prelates. as neither have the secular ones. The Ecclesiastical as well as Secular Princes of the Empire (as also all other Prelates that have Princely Dignities annex'd to their Sacred Functions, together with the Master of the
Teutonic Order) have single voices; and give in their votes to the Vice-Marshal by turns. But others, that can lay no claim to any Temporal Principality, give their voices by companies. Of this last sort there are at this day two Benches,
die Schwabische and
Rheinische. Formerly, the Counts and Barons of the Empire had no more then two voices; and were therefore (as the Prelates are now) divided into two Benches, call'd by the
[Page 44]Germans in those days
die Wetterawische und Schwabische Bank. Afterwards, in the Diet held in the year 1641, the Counts of
Franconia had a peculiar voice allow'd them; and not long after (in the year 1654) another vote was given to the Counts of
Saxony and
Westphalia. So that at present there are four Benches of Counts (the
Schwabish, Wetterawish, Francic, and
Westphalian) who have votes in the public Diets of the Empire.
The Deputies or Delegates of the Imperial Cities make up the third and last rank of the Members of a General Diet or Assembly of the Estates of the Empire.
Imperial Cities. What time the Cities that have now votes, and go under the known name of
Imperial Cities, came to have that priviledg, cannot certainly be learn'd from the
German Historians. The Author of the Chronicle of
Spire endeavours to prove, that several of these Cities were invested with this honour in the twelfth Century. The Oath taken by the Emperor
Ferdinand I. may seem to countenance this relation,
In Christi Nomine Juro, non solum Principum, sed Civitatum ccnsilio, negotia, confoederationes & Collegia Ʋniversitatis tractanda esse. But this passage is not to be understood of the Cities of
Germany (which in this Emperor's days were in too mean a condition to offer to concern themselves in the Government of the Empire), but of those in
Italy; which many years before had been call'd to public Assemblies in the
Italian Kingdom. The most probable opinion is, that the Imperial Cities (those I mean in
Germany which at this day bear that name) were not admitted to the Diet before the fourteenth Century; not long before they were reckon'd up by the Emperor
Charles IV. (in his Golden Bull) amongst the other Estates of the Empire. Their Deputies at present are divided into two Benches; whereof the one is called
Die Rheinische, and the other
Die Schwabische Bank. On the former, sit the Deputies of
Lubec, the free Cities upon the
Rhine, in
Witteraw, Alsace, Saxony, and
Thuringen. On the latter, the Delegates from the free Cities in
Schwaben and
Franconia. The Deputies of the City where the Diet is held, sit at a Table by themselves, and there take an account of the voices of other Delegates; which are brought to them, and register'd by the two Registers of
Ʋlm and
Spire; whereof the former represents the Cities in the
Rheinish Circle, and the latter those of
Schwaben.
Some Historians will tell us,
Debates. that the greatest disputes which happen at a
German Diet, are about precedency; and that more time is spent in ranking the Members in their due places, then in debating the Emperor's Proposals when they are set down. Another fourth part of their time (or rather more) they will have to be spent in set drinking matches. Whence the Emperor
Ferdinand is said sharply to have reprehended the intemperance of the greatest part of the Ambassadors sent to the Diet from the several Princes and Imperial Cities. A third quarter of their time is employ'd in disputing the Priviledges and Prerogatives of a Diet; and shewing in what cases it may, or may not be curb'd or controll'd by the Emperor. The fourth and last part they spend upon the business proposed by the Emperor; which is commonly concerning some Articles of Peace with some foreign Nation; the making or renewing some Laws of the Empire; the regulating of Coinage; raising of Taxes; or some such State affair.
Of the Imperial Chamber, and other General Courts of Judicature.
IN the days of
Charles the Great, and some of his Successors,
Imperial Chamber the Bishops and Officers of the Crown jointly with the Emperor decided all Ecclesiastical causes. The Prelates, Counts, and other persons of Quality, who had any Suits of Law to commence, were heard at the first instance in the Emperor's Court; but the Secular Princes could not be judged but in the General Diets of the Empire. Afterwards when Lawsuits began to multiply in proportion to the growing malice and wickedness of men, the infinite numbers of Clients that overstockt the Court became burthensom to the Emperor, who could not possibly attend and hear all Causes brought before him. Besides, the Emperor's Court being not always kept in one place, both parties concern'd in any controversie were forced to follow the Emperor for a decision into the remotest parts of
Germany. Upon these considerations,
Maximilian I. (taking compassion upon his quarrelsom Subjects, and desiring as much as possibly he could to save both their labour and money) setled a Sedentary Parliament at
Worms or
Francfurt in the year 1495, which was soon after brought to
Spire; whence it cannot be removed without a consent of all the Estates of the Empire, except in time of Plague or War.
At first the Assessors,
Assessors. appointed as Judges in this Court, were only sixteen; but their number has since been encreased to fifty, who are all nominated by the Head and principal Members of the Empire. The Emperor names the supreme Judg (who is always a Count or Baron, and well skill'd in the Civil and Municipal Laws of the Empire) and four of the principal Officers. Each Elector names one Assessor; and the rest are promoted to that employment by the several Circles or Benches of Voters in the Diets. Now, as those Princes and Estates of the Empire who have power to nominate the Assessors in this Court, are of different Religions (some adhering to the Doctrines of the Church of
Rome, and others professing the Reform'd Religion, and embracing the opinions either of
Luther or
Calvin), so are also the Assessors themselves.
Tho there lies no appeal from the Imperial Chamber to any other Court of Judicature;
Visiters. yet if the Judg and Assessors of this Court be accused of any unjust proceedings in the determination of any controversie, execution of the sentence pronounced is deferr'd till the Visiters of the Chamber examine the reasonableness of the complaint, and redress the grievance if justly alledg'd. Whence it appears, that the Assessors themselves that sit at this Tribunal are not the supreme Judges of the Empire; but that their Visiters may more justly claim that Title. For some time before the conclusion of the
Westphalian Treaty of Peace, it was almost impossible to procure any such Visitation, because of the continual quarrels between the Princes of the
Roman and
Lutheran perswasion; the former of whom denied the later the power and authority of Visiting the Imperial Chamber, which by the Fundamental Laws of the Empire was conferr'd upon them.
All Appeals from other inferior Provincial Courts of Judicature are made hither;
Appeals. tho few trouble this Court but such as are very quarrelsom themselves, or forc'd to give their attendance by others that are so. For Justice is here but slowly administred, by reason (chiefly) of the vast number of old Suits, commenced many years ago between several great Princes of the
[Page 45]Empire, which are still depending. At the
Westphalian Treaty, the Evangelical (as they stile themselves) or
Lutheran Estates of the Empire made a general complaint of the abuses put upon them by the Assessors of the Imperial Chamber; in which, amongst other things, they tell the Protestant Princes and Ambassadors assembled at that Treaty,
Dass es mit der Administration der Justitz zu Speyer dermassen langsahm und verzuglich zugehet, dass die gerichtliche Process bey eines Menschen ja offtermals kindes und kindes kinder gantzen lebenzeiten kaum zu ihrem endlichem beschluss, i. e. That the administration of Justice at
Spire is so intolerable slow-pac'd, that sometimes a Law-suit cannot be finish'd in a man's whole life-time; but must be left to be manag'd by his Grandchildren. But since in the forementioned Treaty matters were in part composed between the Protestant and Popish party, the
Lutherans are not so much abused as formerly; nor are they forc'd to attend any longer for the administration of Justice then others Members of the Empire. Those that are immediately subject to the Emperor, have all their simple Law-cases tried at this Court; but others that are only mediately his Subjects, make no appearance, save only upon appeal from some lower Court.
Another High Court of Judicature is in the Emperor's Palace,
[...]ichs
[...]. wherever he keeps his residence; call'd by the
Germans Der Reichs Hoffrat, which we may
English, The Dutch King's Bench. The Emperor
Ferdinand I. published the Laws and Ordinances to be observed in the Trial of all Law-Cases in this Court, in the year 1549. Which orders were afterwards enlarged by
Maximilian II. 1596. And lastly revised and amended by the Emperor
Matthias in the fourteenth year of this Century. In this Court the Emperor himself is supreme Judg; being assisted by a certain company of Assessors, whereof some are Protestants and others Papists. The Emperor's place is usually supplied by his Representative or President of the Court; who is always a Count, or Baron at least, of the Empire.
'Tis a point much controverted by the
German Lawyers, Whether the Authority of this Court or the Imperial Chamber at
Spire be the greater? Most of them appear vigorously for the later; and tell us, That even the Emperor himself falls under the cognisance of this Court, tho he be Judg in the other. For proof of this they produce several authentic Records, whereby it appears, that the
German Emperors have been summoned to appear as Defendants before the Assessors at
Spire. But let them consider, that the Imperial Chamber is under the inspection of Visitors, who have power to correct all errors and misdemeanours in the proceedings of the Assessors; whereas the
Reichs Hoffrat is not subject to any such Supervisors. Again the
Hoffrat takes immediate notice of all manner of Cases in the Empire; many of which the Imperial Chamber cannot take into consideration, except they are legally removed from some inferior Court. Lastly, by whom was an Emperor ever summon'd to appear at the Imperial Chamber in
Spire? Questionless not by the Judg and Assessors of that Court; who could never pretend that their borrowed power was greater then their Master's that lent it them. No. But whenever the Emperor was summon'd to appear, 'twas done by his own permission; and the summons always run in his name. For example, one of these papers begins thus:
Wir Maximilian, erwehlter Romischer Kayser, entbieten dir Maximilian Ertz-Hertzogen zu Oesterreich, &c. Where
Maximilian Elect Emperor of the
Romans summons
Maximilian Arch-Duke of
Austria (the same man) to make his appearance. And I cannot see how from hence any man can rationally conclude, that the power of the Judg and Assessors in the Imperial Chamber at
Spire reaches further then the Emperor's.
What is remarkable in the proceedings in the several Provincial Courts of Judicature, shall be taken notice of when we come to the Descriptions of the particular Provinces wherein they are held.
Of the present State and Interest of the
GERMAN Empire.
THat the whole Empire of
Germany (if the Members thereof were firmly united) would be the most potent and invincible Nation in
Europe, is without controversie, and asserted by the unanimous consent of all modern Polititians. But as long as the Princes and Counts (who by their carriage declare themselves no more then nominal Subjects to the Emperor, but real and absolute Lords in their own Territories) are at a continual enmity amongst themselves,
Ephraim against
Manasses and
Manasses against
Ephraim; they cease to become a terror, and are made a prey to their neighbours.
Hippolitus a Lapide's grand rule for fixing the Empire in a flourishing condition (by healing up its breaches, and uniting its disjointed members) was questionless a soveraign receipt; which would infallibly have cured all the diseases of the then miserable Empire, if it could have been made practicable with as much ease as 'twas proposed. But (as the learned
Pufendorf, under the covert name of
Monzambanus, has observ'd) 'tis in vain to preach up such doctrines in the Empire, till we are assured that all the Princes of
Germany are wise men, and know how to govern their passions according to the exactest rules of morality and true policy.
What miseries their own animosities and quarrels brought upon them, all Historians (who give us an account of the brave exploits of
Gustavus Adolphus) will acquaint us. Different opinions in Religion first bred jealousies between the Emperor and the chief Princes of his Empire; which afterwards broke out into a flame, and set all
Germany on fire; nay, and brought the whole Nation into so miserable a condition that there was not a Province in it which had not (by fire and sword, by plague and famine) lost half its inhabitants. The
Swedes had Garrisons in one hundred twenty and five several places in
Germany; the
French in forty-six; and the
Hessians in thirty-nine; and all these forces brought against the Emperor at the request of his own discontented Subjects.
It will not be amiss in this place to take a short abstract of the Articles signed in the Treaty of
Munster;Treaty of Munster. as far as they relate to the new Accessions obtain'd by other Kingdoms and Principalities, and the losses sustain'd by the Emperor in the late Civil wars. Since from hence we shall not only perceive what the miseries were which their own dissentions brought upon them; but also learn in what condition the Empire was after the Ratification of the said
Westphalian Treaty. First then, it was agreed, That the
Imperialists should pay to the Crown of
Sweden five millions of Gold to defray the charges of the War,
[Page 46](one third part whereof was afterwards laid out in paying off and disbanding some of the
Swedish Forces, another was given away in rewards to such Officers as had shew'n their gallantry in the Wars, and the third was disposed of in liberalities by the Queen). Besides this money, the Empire quitted, and annex'd to the Kingdom of
Sweden, all the hither
Pomeren, with the Island and Principality of
Rugen, the Cities of
Stetin, Garts, Dam, Holnau, the Isle of
Wollin, the River
Oder, and the part of
Frischehaff; the Collation of all the Ecclesiastical Benefices which the Dukes of
Pomeren challeng'd before the Treaty in the Bishopric of
Camin, with the Reversion of that Bishopric, nay of the rest of
Pomerania, and the new Marquisate of
Brandenburgh, in case the Heirs male of that Family should happen to fail. Add to these
Wismar, a strong Port-Town on the
Baltic Sea; the Fortress of
Walfisch, the Bailiwic of
Poel and
Neucloster; and lastly, the Archbishopric of
Bremen, and Bishopric of
Werden, both converted into Dukedoms; together with the City and Bailiwic of
Wilshausen. So that by that Treaty the King of
Sweden got the Titles of Duke of
Bremen, Werden, and
Pomeren, Prince of
Rugen, and Lord of
Wismar. And in all these Lands and Territories had supreme power and authority to Erect Universities, set Imposts upon all Commodities, either exported or imported, and the like; paying only to the Emperor a small homage, as is done by other great Princes of the Empire. II. To the King of
France, and his Successors for ever, were given (by the same Treaty) the Cities and Bishoprics of
Metz, Toul, and
Verdun, with
Moyenvic, Pignerol, Brisac, the Landtgravedom of
Alsatia, the Bailiwic of
Haguenau, and the Fortress of
Philipsburg. By this bargain the
French were great gainers; and the Emperor lost not much. The former, besides the considerable enlargement of their Territories, cut off all possibility of the
Spaniards uniting his
Italian Forces with those in the
Low Countries; which might easily be done as long as
Alsace and
Lorain were in the hands of the Arch-Dukes of
Austria. The later, by giving up his right in
Alsace, made the Kingdom of
Bohemia hereditary to his House; and therefore catcht as much with one hand as he lost on the other. What the acquisitions or losses of particular Princes were, we shall take occasion to shew in the Descriptions of the several Principalities which they now possess.
We see into what condition the Emperor of
Germany was brought by engaging himself in a Civil war with the Princes of his Empire;
Present Estate. how much of his Dominions were snatcht away by the
Swedes on the one hand, and the
French on the other. This was the posture of the
German affairs, till the late wars with
France and
Sweden alter'd the scene; for the
French enlarg'd their conquests in the
German Territories, and the
Swedes lost a great part of the Dominions which the
Westphalian Treaty had made them Masters of; and more they had parted with, if the overgrown power and authority of the
French King had not forc'd the Elector of
Brandenburgh to resign a great many places which he had bravely won. How matters will at last be adjusted between
France and the Empire, is hard to determine; since the
French King lays claim daily to some new Rights or Priviledges in the Emperor's Dominions. However,
Strasburg is still reckon'd the Imperial Bulwark against the
French fury (as it has always been esteem'd), notwithstanding the pretensions of their King to several Rights of this City.
And as the Empire seems secured from any sudden incursion of the
French by
Strasburgh; so it is from all invasions of the
Turk by
Vienna; of the
Polander by
Ʋvratislaw; of the
Dane by
Hamburgh and
Lubeck; and of the
Hollanders by
Colln. So that there is no great fear of being injur'd by a foreign enemy, if all the
German Princes would unanimously join hands in defending the strong Holds, and securing the bounds of that Empire whereof they pretend to be Members. But as long as each petty Prince is only solicitous about the enlargement of his own small Demesne, and the strongest permitted to annex as much of their neighbour's Territories to their own as they can lay their hands on, the
German Empire is in great danger of being destroy'd by its own Members. The Electors indeed, and all the other great Princes of the Empire pay some small Homage and Acknowledgment to the Emperor; but all the while exercise as absolute a Monarchical Dominion in their several Principalities as the Emperor himself does in
Austria or
Bohemia. So that
Germany is not really a Nation subject to one supreme Head and Governor, but a combination of several little Commonwealths and Kingdoms; whose general inteterest consists in maintaining an inviolable confefederacy amongst themselves, and an unanimous desire to secure rather then enlarge their Dominions. In a word,
‘The Foreign Interests of the Empire (to speak in the language of the incomparable Sir
William Temple) are the defence of the Eastern parts against the
Turk, and the preservation of the Western Circles against the growth of
France; the Domestic, are the limited Constitution of the Imperial power, and the balance of the several free Princes and States of the Empire.’
Of the
HANS-Towns.
BEfore we come to a particular Description of
Hamburgh, and other great Cities on the Northern and Western parts of the Empire, 'twill be convenient to premise something of the
Hans-Towns in general; that the Reader may the better understand what we mean by that word, when he shall meet with it in the following sheets.
By
Hans-Towns then the
German writers understand a certain number of great Cities all along the Sea-shore, from the
Finnic Bay down as far as the mouth of the
Rhine; which several ages ago enter'd into a solemn confederacy for the advancement of Trade, and the better security of their Territories against the incursions of any foreign Enemy.
In what year this League was made,
When fo
[...] Confederate. is not certainly known; and
Chytreus (who was as diligent and curious in enquiring after these kind of Antiquities as any Historian of the
German Nation) tells us, that very few of the old Records he had met with in any of the
Hans-Towns, could give him the least hint of the year when they were admitted into that number. However, he guesses the Society was first instituted a little before the reign of the Emperor
Ferdinand II. about the year 1200. And the noble Historian
Thuanus embraces his opinion in this as well as most other particulars of the
German History which he meddles with.
John Angelius Werdenhagen (an impertinent Author, who has scribled four large Tomes
De Rebus publ. Anseaticis) gives no positive account of the first original of this Confederacy; but seems to bring it down from
[Page 47]the time of
Henry Duke of
Brunswic, surnamed the
Lion. Henry Suderman (who was sometime Counsellor to the
Hans-Towns) fetches its Institution far further then the beginning of the thirteenth Century, or later end of the twelfth; which is the time usually pitcht upon by other Historians. With how little probability these opinions are back'd, is easie to observe; tho perhaps, after the most diligent enquiry, we shall not be able to guess right our selves. For
Lubeck has been always look'd upon as the chief of all the
Hans-Towns, and for that reason their High Court of Judicature was kept there. Therefore 'tis very likely that this City was one of the first that enter'd into that solemn League and Covenant. Now 'tis certain, that
Lubeck was only built towards the later end of the twelfth Century; and it is hard to imagine, that this Town and
Hamburg would enter into any such League as long as they were under the yoke of the then inconsiderable King of
Denmark; which they did not shake off before the year 1226. Besides, if
Lubeck were then one of the
Hans-Towns we should meet with an account of some succour sent her when she was engaged in war against
Waldemar and his two Sons,
Eric Abel and
Christopher, Kings of
Denmark (which was ended about the year 1259); and yet no Historian of those times mentions any such thing. We may therefore probably enough conclude, that the said Cities enter'd not into any Confederacy till after the sixtieth year of the thirteenth Century; at which time Peace was first concluded with the
Danes, and Trade began to be improv'd in these parts of the
German Empire. What
Angelius reports of his having seen some Charters and Priviledges granted to the united
Hans-Towns, which are dated in the year 1194, is as little to be credited as the stories which others of the
German Historians relate of our King
Henry the Third's granting of large Priviledges to the same Cities in the 1206; whereas 'tis well known, that this Prince was not advanced to his Fathers Throne before the year 1216, and was then only nine years of age.
Polydor Virgil (to whom we know what credit to give, in those particulars especially wherein he dissents from the rest of our
English Historians) witnesses indeed for these men, that
Henry the Third did grant some such kind of priviledges to the
Hans-Towns as they mention; but the same Author will tell them, that this King reign'd till the year 1273. And
Angelius, when he comes to ransack old
Norwegian papers for testimonies of the Antiquity of this Society, can produce nothing of unquestionable authority (as he phrases it) written before the year 1278. Afterwards, when he comes to give us a short Compendium of their Laws (which he has transcribed out of
Domannus); the oldest amongst them does not bear date beyond the year 1312. So that possibly this Company was no proper Body Politic before that time.
But the
German Historians differ as much in assigning the derivation of the word
Hans, [...]ne. and the reasons why these Confederate Cities should call themselves by that name; as they do in pitching upon the time of the first Institution of their Confederacy. We shall give the Reader a short catalogue of the most probable opinions; and leave it to his judgment to embrace or reject any of them as he shall see cause. First then, some derive the word
Hanse, or
Anse (for in
Latin Authors we meet with
Ʋrbes Anseaticae and
Ansaticae, as well as
Hansaticae) from the
Dutch am zee or
am see, signifying
near unto, or
upon the Sea-shore; because, say they, the
Hans-Towns were at first only a company of Cities which (lying upon the Sea-shore) enter'd into a Confederacy meerly for the advancement of Trade by Navigation. And that this was the sole end of their entring into a League (and not the securing of their Territories, which was the thing which some Cities upon the
Rhine proposed to themselves upon their entring into the like Confederacy) they prove from the testimonies of
Chytraeus and
Crantzius; who are Authors of good credit and authority. 2. Others bring the word from
Hansa, which in the old High
Dutch tongue signifies a Common Council. Thence the
Greek word
[...] (
Mat. xxvi. 4.), which our
English Interpreters have render'd
they consulted, is in some ancient
Dutch Versions translated
sie haben ein Hansa
gemacht. 3.
Wehner tells us, that in old Charters of some of these Cities instead of
Hanse-Stadte (as the
Germans now-a-days usually write the word) he has met with
Hayn-Stadte; which signifies, in the ancient
Saxon Dialect,
a City situate in a Wood (such as are a great many of the
Hans-Towns in
Saxony), and not, as some explain it,
a Town in a pleasant Valley or plain Field. 4. The fourth opinion (and last, that looks like a probable conjecture) is, That they had the name of
Hans-Towns from that preeminence and precedency which they justly challeng'd amongst the rest of the
German Cities; for the same reason as great Lords and Princes of the Empire are sometimes stiled
Grosse Hansen, Gewaltige Hansen, &c. And hence several old
German proper names fetch their original; as
Anselmus (Hanshelm), a man famous for his Helmet;
Ansbrechtus (Hanswert), one that deserves to be made a Lord;
Ansfridus (Hansfried), a Prince of a peaceable temper; and the like. And the ordinary name of
Hans (used at this day all
Germany over) is not, as many think, a contraction of
Johannes; but a part of those others abovemention'd. But at present
Hans is not so honourable a Title as formerly; for the
Germans call an impertinent medling fellow (such as the old
Latins would have named
Ardelio, and the
Greeks [...])
Hans in allen gassen; and
Hans unmuht, Hans filtzmaul, Hans sparmund, Praal Hans, Bauer-Hans, and the like, are lookt upon as Nicknames of the highest ignominy and disgrace. It would be worth a critical Etymologist's while to enquire, whether the word
Hans (amongst other of its significations) did not denote something relating to trade and merchandise; since to this day he that determines (as Judg) all controversies amongst the Merchants and Tradesmen of
Ratisbon, is call'd
Hans-Graff.
The
Hans-Towns of
Germany are usually divided into four Circles,
Number. distinguished by the names of the four principal Cities amongst them,
viz. Lubeck, Colln, Brunswic, and
Dantzig. To the Circle of
Lubeck belong the Cities of
Hamburg, Rostock, Wismar, Stralsund, Lunenburg, Stetin, Anclam, Golnau, Gripswald, Colberg, Stargard, Stolpe, &c. To that of
Colln, Wesel, Duissburg, Emmerick, Warburg, Ʋnna, Hammen, Munster, Minden, Osnabrug, Dortmund, Sost, Herford, Paderborn, Limgow, Billefeld, Warberg, Lippstadt, Cossfeld, Nimwegen, Sutphen, Rurnmund, Arnheim, Venloh, Elburg, Harderwic, Thiela, Bommel, Deventer, Campen, Swol, Groningen, Bolsswerder, Gorcum, Hinlopen, Staveren, Embden, Briel, Wieringen, Middelburg, and some more of less note. To
Brunswic belong
Magdeburg, Gosslar, Einbeck, Gottingen, Hildesheim, Hannover, Ʋlsen, Buxtehude, Staden, Bremen, Hammel, and
Minden. In the Circle of
Dantzig are reckon'd
Konigsberg, Colmar, Torn, Elbingen, Brunsberg, Riga, Derpt, Revel, &c. In each of the four chief Cities was held an High Court of Judicature; where all cases were pleaded that concern'd
[Page 48]any of the particular members of that Circle.
Lubeck was reckon'd the Head and Metropolis of all the
Hans-Towns;
Metropolis. as lying the most convenient for Trade, and being best fortified and most populous, amongst them. Hence all the rest of the Cities mentioned made use of the Seal of
Lubeck in all their public Letters; and that City kept an Advocate in the Imperial Chamber at
Spire, to plead all manner of Causes in which any of the
Hans-Towns (in matters of Trade) were concern'd. This City had also the sole power of calling, by her Letters Patents, an Assembly of the Estates of the whole Society; in case of any extraordinary exigence that concern'd their whole Body in general. These kind of Assemblies were commonly held at
Lubeck; but if the
Radts-herrn of that City thought fit, they might (and sometimes did) appoint such another place of meeting, as lay more conveniently for the generality of the members concern'd.
This Society in short time became so considerable as to obtain large priviledges in most places of Trade in
Europe;Priviledges and Grandeur. nay, they were sometime grown so formidable as to be able to wage war with the most potent Monarchs in Christendom, and to come off honourably. The chief Mart-Towns they resorted to in foreign Nations (in each of which they had extraordinary priviledges and immunities granted to them, and kept their Storehouses and Exchanges) were these four,
London here in
England, where their Storehouse was call'd
Stael-hof, because the greatest commodity they traded in with the
English was Steel;
Novogrod (and afterwards
Narva) in
Russia; Bergen in
Norway; and
Bruges in
Flanders, whence (after some time) they removed to
Antwerp in
Brabant.
But after the year 1500,
Dissolution. their Trade began to fail daily, and the Society to dwindle into nothing; insomuch, that in the year 1570 there was scarce a City to be found that would offer to challenge the ancient priviledges formerly allow'd to
Hans-Towns. Afterwards, there were some who appear'd very zealous in endeavouring to renew the decay'd Confederacy; but all their endeavours prov'd successless and vain. For many of the lesser Cities found themselves impoverish'd rather then enrich'd by continuing the League; since they were obliged to contribute to all public charges of the Society, tho they gain'd little or nothing by the bargain. Besides, within a while the great current of Trade was turn'd from
Germany into
England and
Holland; and the
Hans-Towns render'd thereby unable to maintain so great a Fleet as formerly. So that, by degrees, the Society fell in pieces; and there nothing remains of it at present but the bare name in the memory of the
Germans and their neighbours.
THE Territories, Name, Manners, &c. OF THE ANCIENT SAXONS.
ALtho at this day the Upper and Lower
Saxony take up but a very small share of the
German Empire; yet 'tis manifest, from the writings of the best Antiquaries, that formerly the better part of the inhabitants of that Nation were known by the general name of
Saxons. Gens Saxonum saith
Ethelwerd (an ancient
English-Saxon Historian, who flourish'd about the year of Christ 950)
in toto erat maritima, a Rheno flumine usque ad Doniam urbem quae nunc vulgo Dan-marc nuncupatur. Since Mr.
Cambden could not find out what City this Author, and the men of his time, call'd
Donia or
Dan-marck; I shall not pretend to enquire. But we may from hence safely conclude, that all the ancient inhabitants of
Jutland, Sleswic, Holstein, the Bishopric of
Bremen, County of
Oldenburg, both
Frislands, and a great part of
Holland, were comprehended under the common name of
Saxons. This assertion is confirm'd by a notable passage in the old
Belgic Chronicle, written in rythm near four hundred years ago; wherein the Author tells us,
Oude bocken hoor ick gewagen,
Dat al't land beneden Nyemagen,
Willen neder Sassen hiet.
Alsoo als die stroom vershiet,
Van der Maze ende van den Rhyn,
Die Schelt was dat west ende Syn.
‘I hear, says he, that old Books report, that all the Country below
Nimmeguen was formerly call'd Nether
Saxony; which was bounded on the west with the
Skelt (a River on the coasts of
Flanders), that issues out of the
Maes and
Rhyne.’ The
German Antiquaries give
Westphalia the name of Old
Saxony; and out of this Country, 'tis probable, some of our
English-Saxons came; as we shall shew anon. Mr.
Sheringham (in his learned Treatise
De Anglorum Gentis origine) makes
Alsace a part of the ancient
Saxon Territories; telling us, that the name which to this day it retains was borrow'd from its
Saxon inhabitants. For these men call'd their own Country
Sassen, as well as themselves
Die Sassen; and thence named this part of their Dominions (which was the pleasantest and richest piece they were Masters of)
Edel-Sassen, or Noble
Saxony. Which name was easily turn'd (by changing the High
Dutch termination into a
Latin one) into
Edelsassia; and at last contracted into
Elsatia, or
Alsatia.
'Tis a difficult task to pick up a true and rational account of the name of
Saxon out of the frivolous conjectures of ignorant Monks,
Name. or the equal impertinencies of illiterate Etymologists.
Isidore Hispalensis will needs have the
Saxons to fetch their name from the
Latin word
Saxum; and he gives this reason for his fancy,
quod sit durum & validissimum genus hominum & praestans caeteris piraticis, i. e. because they were always a strong and hardy people, and archer pyrats than any of their neighbours. But why should the
Saxons be beholden to the
Romans for their name; since they inhabited the same Country, whereof their own offspring are still Masters, long before
Rome was built? Besides, we do not find that the
Romans gave any new names to the Nations they conquer'd; any otherwise then by giving them a
Latin, instead of their barbarous, termination.
Crantzius tells us of some (and himself seems not altogether to dislike their opinion) who derived the word
Saxon from
Askenas, the great Leader of the
Asians, who first peopled
Germany. But why these people should any more retain the name of that grand General of the
Asian Army, then the
Goths, Franks, or any other branch of the ancient
Dutch Nation, he cannot inform us.
Goropius (who is follow'd by
Cisner, Cambden, and several other learned men) brings the
Saxons from
Sacae a
Scythian people; from whom they were first call'd
Sacasons, or the Sons of the
Sacae, and by contraction
Saxons.[Page 50]These
Scythians (he tells us, and alledges the Authority of
Strabo to confirm his story) leaving their ancient Seats, conquer'd
Bactriana, and a good part of
Armenia; thence they pass'd into
Capadocia, and for some time inhabited that part of it which bordereth on the
Euxin Sea; at last they pass'd thro the
Hercynian woods into
Germany, and gave the name of
Sacasena (afterwards turn'd into
Saxonia) to the Country that here, by their Conquests, they had made themselves Masters of.
Strabo indeed says (and we may believe him) that the
Sacae did leave their ancient
Scythian Seats; and Mr.
Cambden observes well, that
Ptolomy places his
[...] near that part of
Scythia whence these men are said to have sallied out. But that they ever pass'd the
Hercynean woods, is one of
Goropius's Forgeries; and a story not to be met with in
Strabo, or any other Author of credit. I wonder most, that Mr.
Cambden (who was so great a Master of our old
English-Saxon tongue) should not discern the absurdity of this etymology. For in that language saex in the singular number signifies a
Saxon, as well as
Sachs to this day in the High-
Dutch dialect; and seax, seaxna, and seaxena (as also the modern
Dutch words
Sachsen and
Sassen) are plurals. Now if seax and seaxen be only broken remnants of sacson and sacsones, we should in all probability meet with the entire words in some of our ancient
Saxon Monuments; which could never yet be produced by the best of Antiquaries. Wherefore (to omit other impertinences of this kind) the most probable opinion is, that the
Saxons had their name from a short kind of weapon (call'd in their language
Seax) different from what any other
Germans wore, and peculiar only to their own Nation. In confirmation of this conjecture, some of our
English Historians give us a relation of a treacherous parly betwixt
Hengist (the first
Saxon that landed in
Britain) and King
Vortigern. It was agreed, that both parties should meet on
Salisbury-Plain unarm'd; but the
Saxons, intending nothing but treachery, carried privately under their Coats short Daggers, which upon the watch-word (
nem eowr Seaxes, or
take your Seaxes) they immediately drew out these weapons, and slew no less then three hundred of the
British Nobility. The like story (and as equally true) some of the
German writers relate of a treacherous massacre committed by the ancient
Saxons in
Thuringen. Pontanus urges the reasonableness of this Etymology more home when he tells us, that
Saxony in its ancient Arms bears two
Seaxes, or Hangers, cross-ways; which, says he, is an undoubted proof of their first denomination. And 'tis said, that
Erkenwyn, King of the East
Saxons, gave for his Arms three short Daggers
Argent in a Field
Gules. A Sythe is still call'd
Saisen in the
Netherlands; and
Scher-Sax in the High
Dutch signifies as much as
(ein messer damit man scheret) a Razor.
Wormius tells us, that
Sags or
Saks in the
Runic Dialect, signifies a Sword or Dagger, whose Hilt and Blade were almost of equal length. Nor is it at all extraordinary for people to take their names from the several sorts of weapons used by them in battel. Thus most learned men agree, that the
Scythians had their name from the
Teutonic word
Scytan, to shoot; because they were excellent Bow-men. The
Picards are thought to have been first called by that name from Pikes, a sort of weapon they best understood. We may therefore venture to conclude with the
Latin Rythm of the Learned
Engelhus,
Quippe brevis gladius apud illos Saxa vocatur,
Inde sibi Saxo nomen traxisse putatur.
From the account which is given us of this people by
Zosimus, Marcellinus, Diaconus,Manned and other ancient writers, we may learn, that they were men of a vast bulk of body, and proportionable strength; the most renown'd Warriors in
Germany, and the most terrible enemies which the
Romans ever encounter'd. Mr.
Cambden says, they were such notorious Pyrats; and most of them so accustom'd to live at Sea, that they were afraid to appear on dry land. Which agrees with the relation which
Isidorus gives of them,
Gens Saxonum, says he,
Myoparonibus non viribus nituntur, fugae potius quam bello parati. Hence it was, that all along the coasts of
Britain and
France, as far as the borders of
Spain, the
Romans maintain'd continual standing Regiments under the command of several Generals; who (from their Commission and Office, which was to secure the Inhabitants from the sudden and frequent incursions of the
Saxon Pyrats) were stiled
Comites litoris Saxonici per Britanniam & Galliam. Sidonius, in one of his Epistles, gives this character of a
Saxon Pyrat,
‘That he is an enemy formidable beyond comparison; one whom frequent Shipwracks recreate rather then terrifie, as being not only acquainted, but grown familiar, with the perils of the Ocean,
&c.’
Their whole Nation was govern'd by Twelve of the chief Nobles in the Land;
Government. who were Elected to that Dignity by the Commonalty. In time of war, they chuse a King out of these Twelve chief Commanders; who executed Regal authority over the rest as long as the war lasted; but as soon as peace was concluded, was degraded into his former quality. This custom continued amongst them until the conclusion of their wars with the Emperor
Charles the Great; at which time
Wittikind (a Nobleman of
Angria in
Westphalia, and one of their Twelve Rulers) had the name and authority of a King conferr'd on him. But when he was afterwards conquer'd and converted to Christianity by that Emperor, this fading Title was turn'd into the more durable one of Duke; and his Eleven Companions were advanc'd to the Honourable Titles and Dignities of Earls and Lords, from whom the greatest Princes at this day in the
German Empire derive their pedigrees.
Some have imagined, that from this Duodecemviral Government of the ancient
Saxons our modern way of Judicature by the Verdict of Twelve Jury-men, had its first original. Whether this opinion be wholly allowable, I shall not stand to dispute (having said something of this matter in the Description of
Island). But 'tis certain, that under the Reigns of some of our
English-Saxon Kings, this way of proceeding was practis'd in the decision of most Causes both Civil and Criminal. For proof hereof, I shall only quote an old Law made in King
Ethelred's time, wherein (
cap. 3.
de Pignore ablato) 'tis enacted, that
‘tƿelf lahmen scylon rehte taecean Ƿealan and AEnglan. syx England & syx Ƿylisce. þlien calles þaes hy agon gif hi ƿoh taecen. oþþe geladian hi ꝧ hi bet ne cuþon,’i. e. All controversies betwixt the
English and
Welch should be determin'd by Twelve men skill'd in the Law, six of each Nation; who if they pass'd sentence contrary to the Law, should forfeit their whole Estates; except they should excuse themselves by acknowledging their error, and bewailing their want of judgment in the case proposed. Which penalty is near akin to the attainder to which our modern Juries are liable when they bring in a false and corrupt Verdict.
Tho we have spoken before of the Heathenish Gods worshipped in all parts of
Germany,Irmenseul and amongst the rest of
Irmenseul, the great Idol of
[Page 51]Saxony; yet a more accurate description of that Image, so long worshipp'd by our
Saxon Ancestors, and peculiar to that branch of the
German Nation, was purposely reserved for this place. Mr.
Verstegan writes the word
Ermensewl; and will needs have the Idol so named,
q. d. Die seul deren armen, i. e. the pillar or support of the poor. Others tell us, that
Hermes, or
Mercury, was worshipp'd under one and the same name both in
Germany and
Greece; and thence conclude, that
Ermensewl is only a corruption of
Ermes-sewl. Some again (observing how the Image, according to the relation of Historians, represented the God
Mars rather then
Mercury) reject this Etymology; and derive
Ermensewl from
Arms-sewl, and that from
[...]-
sewl, the Pillar of
Mars the God of War. But such Etymologists as these take too great pains to make the ancient
Germans speak
Greek. The learned
Schedius, with a great deal of reason and probability on his side, guesses it was the Image of
Harminius Captain of the
Cherusci, a
Saxon Nation in the days of
Augustus Cesar; who having by strategem overthrown the forces of
Quintilius Varus, got the Title of
Deliverer of Germany conferr'd on him by the
Roman Historians, who all confess, that from him the
Roman Empire (tho then in its full strength) receiv'd such a blow as made its foundations tremble. And indeed the Image might well seem to be the pourtraicture of so noble and brave an Hero. For it represented an armed man in his full proportion; carrying in his right hand a Banner display'd, and in his left a pair of Scales. On his head was engraven the effigies of a Cock; on his breast a Bear; and upon his Scutcheon a Lion. And let the Reader judg how exactly this Idol answers the character which
Tacitus gives of
Harminius, in these words,
In single engagements his success was various; in war he was invincible; and is still worshipp'd by the Barbarous Nations. From which last words of the Historian we may rationally conclude, that
Irmenseul is only a corruption of
Harmins-seul; which is further confirm'd by
Schedius's story, that the
Saxons used in a kind of Martial Dance (arm'd
Cap-a-pee with the spoils of their enemies) to surround the pillar, and at every turn, falling on their knees, to kiss and adore it.
Dithmar says, that this Statue was in his days (tho now nothing remains of the monument but the pillar at
Hildesheim) to be seen at
Mersburg with this Inscription,
‘DUX EGO GENTIS SAXONUM VICTORIAM CERTAM POLLICEOR ME VENERANTIBUS.’ From the
Latin words in this Inscription some have concluded, that the
Saxons, in the days of Heathenism, had a great acquaintance with the
Romans, and were perfect Masters of their language. I am much apter to fancy, that the whole Inscription is fictitious, and contriv'd only by some Monk at
Mersburg. Since we do not read, that the
Saxons e're maintain'd any tolerable friendship and correspondence betwixt themselves and the
Romans; at least, not so much as to turn such admirers of their tongue as to use it in an Inscription, which ought to have been understood by all the worshippers of this Idol, and consequently the whole
Saxon Nation. Whereas, on the contrary, the best Historians will inform us, that before the coming of
Charles the Great into these parts, the
Saxons were a very rude and illiterate people; wholly ignorant of all manner of Learning and Letters, excepting only a few barbarous
Runic scrawls; and those too but very rarely used in this Country. Some of the less considerable
Saxon Idols are mention'd before in the account we have already given of the Religion practis'd amongst the ancient
Germans and
Danes; and for the rest we refer the Reader to
Schedius's learned Treatise
De Diis Germanicis.
The
Anglo-Saxonic version of
Bede's Ecclesiastical History,
Saxons first coming into England. and a Manuscript
Saxon Chronicle in our public Library (a great part of which seems to be an Epitome of the said History) tell us, that the
Saxons were first brought over into
Britain in the year 449, under the command of
Hengist and
Horsa, two Brothers, the great Grandchildren of
Woden; from whom most of the Northern Princes endeavour to fetch their pedigree. And they further add, that these
Saxon Ancestors of ours were a people made of three of the stoutest Nations in all
Germany, viz. from the
Saxons, Angles, and
Jutes. From
Jutland came the inhabitants of
Kent and the Isle of
Wight. From
Saxony (
I mean, says
Bede, that Country which we now call Old-Saxony; which is the same, as shall be shew'n hereafter, with
Westphalia) came the East, South, and West
Saxons. From the
Angles (who, they tell us, were a people that inhabited the Country betwixt
Saxony and
Jutland) were descended the East
Angles, Middle
Angles, Mercians, and
North-humbrians.
Where by the way we may take notice, that all the manuscript Copies of the
Saxon Chronicle which are to be met with, tell us, that the inhabitants of
Kent and the Isle of
Wight came of iotum, instead of which
Bede's Interpreter writes of geatum. And the best manuscript
Latin Copies of the same History have
De Jutarum origine; and not
Vitarum, as most printed Copies (and amongst others, the
Colen Edition) read the word. So that it appears those Antiquaries have but little grounds for their opinion, who (upon Venerable
Bede's authority) have had the confidence to assert, that there was anciently a people in
Saxony call'd
Vitae, from whom the Isle of
Wight had its name. Whereas Mr.
Cambden assures us, that the old
Britains nam'd this Island
Guith (which in the
British tongue signifies a separation or divorce) for the same reason that the
Romans gave
Sicily its name,
quod ab Italia esset Secta, i.e. because it had been formerly cut off from the Continent of
Italy. As some ingenious men have fancied that
Kent and
Picardy were heretofore join'd by a narrow Isthmus; which in time was wash'd asunder by the waves of that rough Sea which at this day runs through the Channel betwixt
Dover and
Calais, or else cut at the charge of some of the
British Kings.
The main of this story seems credible enough;
Hengist and Horsa. and is back'd with the authority of most of the famous
English and
German Historians. But that the names of the two first
Saxon Commanders were
Hengist and
Horsa, I see very little reason to believe; tho I find this part of the narrative pass uncontradicted in all Authors that have given us an account of the first landing of the
Saxons in this Island. And in the Elector of
Saxony's Gallery at
Dresden (among other pourtraictures of that Princes Ancestors) are shew'n the pictures of these two famous Champions. 'Tis strange,
[Page 50] [...][Page 51] [...][Page 52]that such grand Warriors (whom we have reason to believe descended from one of the best Families in
Saxony) should have names peculiar to themselves; and such as were not known to be given to any men, either before or since their time. The first occasion, I suppose, of the general mistake, came from the
Saxon Army's bearing a young black Horse (which was afterwards, upon the conversion of
Witikind to the Christian Faith, changed into a white one, the Crest of the House of
Brunswic's Arms to this day) in their Flags. Now,
Hengist or
Hengst (in the old
Saxon dialect) signifies a
Stallion; and that
Horsa is a word of the same signification, I need not tell the
English Reader. So that the Captains of the ancient
Saxon Troops seem to have had the names of
Hengist and
Horsa given them, for the same reason that some writers have enigmatically called the Emperor the
Eagle, the King of
France the
Lilly, &c. i.e. from the Arms they bear.
The excellency of the Municipal Laws observed in
Saxony,Laws. even in the times of Heathenism, appears from
Charles the Great's confirming a great part of them; and that at the same time when he alter'd the Laws as well as Government of most other Provinces in
Germany. His example has been follow'd by the succeeding Emperor's down to our days. Insomuch, that the
Saxons are still govern'd by the Laws of their Ancestors; whereof a great part are comprehended in those two famous Digests of their Laws entituled
Der Sachsen-Spiegel and
Das Sachsische Weichbild. Of which more hereafter.
For an account of the
Ordeal (their famous way of determining controversies, soon after their being converted to the Christian faith) we refer the Reader to what we have already said on that subject in the general Description of
Denmark. Tho I am apt to believe that this piece of Judicature was never practis'd by any other
Saxons then the
English; and 'tis certain, they were not acquainted with it till some time after they had setled themselves in this Island.
THE general name of the
Lower Saxony (by some late Geographers) has been made to comprehend the Archbishoprics of
Magdeburg and
Bremen; the Bishoprics of
Halberstadt, Hildesheim, Lubeck, Swerin, and
Ratzeburg; the Territories of the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg, Holstein, Mecklenburg, and
Saxon-Lawenburg. Amongst these, an account of the Dukedom of
Holstein has been already given in the Description of
Denmark; and nothing within the precincts of his Dominions (excepting
Hamburg in
Stormaria, and
Lubeck in
Wagerland) is at present reckon'd a part of the
German Empire. Of the commodities, present state,
&c. of the rest we shall endeavour to give the Reader an account in the following sheets. Beginning with a Description
Of the famous City of
HAMBURG, and the Country adjacent.
WHence this great City should have its name,
Name. is not easily agreed on by the
German Historians. Some derive the word from the Hams of Bacon brought hither from all parts of
Saxony, and here sold to foreign Mariners. Others again fetch it from
Jupiter Ammon, whose Image (they tell us) was worshipp'd in these parts until
Charles the Great had extirpated Idolatry, and planted Christianity in this and the neighbouring Provinces.
Crantzius says, 'twas first call'd
Hamburg from one
Hama, a stout
Saxon Champion, who was here slain by
Starcater, a
Danish Giant.
Dresserus brings it from
Hain, which signifies a pleasant Grove. The most probable opinion is, that this City first had its name from the Forest
Hamme, which formerly lay between the Rivers
Bille and
Alster, and gave the Title to the ancient Lords of
Ham; who, about the time of
Charles the Great's leading his Army into these parts, built themselves here a Castle, which (from their own names) they call'd
Hamburg. This conjecture is embraced by
Sylvius Hamburgensis, Andreas Angelus, P. Bertius, Isac. Pontanus, and most other Authors of repute who have given us any historical account of this City.
Pontanus tells us, that
Ham in the old
Saxon Dialect signifies a Forest or Chase; and proves it from
Suderham and
Norderham, two large Forests in
Dithmars.
But Authors are as hardly reconcil'd about the situation as name of the place.
Situation. The greatest part of Writers tell us, the City stands in
Stormaria, a Province in the Duke of
Holstein's Dominions. But some
German Historians are very zealous in asserting, that it is a true
Saxon City, and the outmost bounds of
Saxony and
Stormaria; adding further, that to a diligent observer it will evidently appear, that the greatest share of the Town (even at this day) is separated from the Continent of
Stormaria by some small arms of the River
Elb.
Some Antiquaries have endeavour'd to shew,
Antiquity. that this noble
Hans-Town was in the days of
Albion (the grand Captain of the
Albingi, who was afterwards Christen'd at
Minden with
Witekind) a considerable Village. After the death
[Page 54]of this
Albion (about the year 785)
Charles the Great gave this part of the Country to
Ʋtho, one of his Noblemen and Attendants; who (to secure himself from the frequent incursions of the
Vandals, and others his Heathenish neighbours) began first to fortifie the place in the year 787 (or as some say 789). But these first foundations were quickly shaken, and
Ʋtho's rude draught of a strong City was utterly defac'd. For the
Vandals pouring in upon him and his small retinue, sack'd the Town and laid it wast in the year 810. This, says
Conringius, is that which the Author of an ancient Chronicle means when he tells us,
Anno 810
Castellum nomine Hochbuci Albi flumini contiguum, in quo Odo Legatus Imperatoris & Orientalium Saxonum erat Praesidium, a Wilsis captum. From hence we must conclude, that the
Saxons had no place that deserv'd the name of a City before
Charles the Great's time; and that
Hamburg was one of the first, tho in great danger of perishing in its infancy. The year following the Emperor regain'd this Country from the insulting and barbarous
Vandals, and rebuilt the Town; which was afterwards, by his Son
Ludovicus Pius, advanced into a considerable City.
The same Emperor made it an Archbishop's See about the year 833,
An Archbishoprick. bestowing it upon
Ansgar (the great Saint of the City of
Hamburg, call'd by some of their Writers
Anscharius, by others
Ansagrius or
Ansearius) who first converted the inhabitants to Christianity. Within a while after, the whole Province round about embrac'd the Christian Faith; and several Evangelical Preachers subjected themselves to the Archbishop of
Hamburg. Afterwards the Archbishopric was translated from this City to
Bremen (as we shall have occasion to shew hereafter); and for several Ages last past there has been neither Archbishop nor Bishop of
Hamburg.
After the
Hamburgers were established in the Christian Religion,
To whom subject. and began to trade, they had daily large and ample priviledges conferr'd on them by most succeeding Emperors; to whom they paid homage. But we must needs conclude, that they were sometimes obliged to change their Masters, according as contrary interests of their neighbours prevail'd. Whether the Earls of
Schawenburg had not formerly a more then ordinary Jurisdiction over this City, is a point which to this day the
Hamburgers do not care to dispute.
Crantzius, Chytraeus, and other Historians can inform us, that
Woldemar Duke of
Sleswic (by the assistance of his Brother
Canutus VI. King of
Denmark) took
Hamburg out of the hands of the Emperor
Otho IV. which City (when himself was afterwards advanc'd to the
Danish Throne) he setled upon
Albrecht Earl of
Orlemund and his Heirs for ever. But the same
Albrecht, as
Chytraeus reports, sold his whole Right and Title to the Citizens for fifteen hundred Marks of good Silver; and so made the City a free and independant State of it self. Afterwards,
Adolph IV. Earl of
Holstein confirm'd the said Liberties and Priviledges to this City; which example of his was follow'd by his Successors down to
Adolph XIV. (and last Earl of
Holstein and
Schawenburg of that Family) who dyed in the year 1459. Upon his death the Province of
Holstein subjected themselves, by a formal Capitulation, to
Christian I. King of
Denmark; whom they freely Elected their Prince, and paid him homage under the Title of Duke of
Holstein. At the same time the Citizens of
Hamburg enter'd into an agreement with the said King, promising that (as long as the Kings of
Denmark should continue their priviledges to them, which King
Christian upon the signing of this Compact confirm'd to them) they would always be ready to maintain the like friendship and correspondence between the Crown of
Denmark and themselves, as had been formerly preserv'd betwixt them and the Earls of
Schawenburg. To these conditions the King assented without demanding any manner of homage or token of subjection. However, his Successors have always had an itching desire to get
Hamburg wholly into their own clutches; and therefore have endeavour'd by all means imaginable to perswade the Citizens to submit themselves to the protection of their Crown. But all their artifices have hitherto prov'd unsuccessful; and every one of their Treaties and Capitulations brought to an end
Salvo jure Caesaris & Imperii, & salvis libertatibus Civitatis ab Imperiali culmine obtentis. In a Diet held at
Augsburg in the year 1510, the Emperor
Maximilian I. (together with the Estates of the Empire then and there assembled) declar'd
Hamburg a free Imperial City; and summon'd the Duke of
Holstein to make his appearance before the Imperial Chamber at
Spire, and there to make good or renounce all pretensions to the said City. What success the late quarrels of the present King of
Denmark (
Christian V.) had in the year 1679, we have already told the Reader in the Description of
Denmark; where a particular account is given of the
Interim's Recess, signed at
Pinneberg between the said King and the Deputies of the City of
Hamburg.
The continual jealousies betwixt the two Northern Crowns are a considerable security to the Citizens of
Hamburg;Their Security by the Jealousies
[...] the two Northern Crowns. who would be in great danger of being utterly overthrown and enslav'd, if both those Kings should conspire to ruine them. But when the King of
Denmark endeavours to annoy and incommode that City by the opportunity of the Fort at
Gluckstadt (which commands the River
Elb, and can easily stop the Merchant Ships which sail that way) the
Swedish Garrison at
Stade oppose him and protect the Merchants from the mischief design'd them. Another grand Bulwark of this great City consists in the prodigious riches of its inhabitants; which are reckon'd by some so inexhaustible, that should both the Northern Kings join their Forces, the Senate of
Hamburg would be able to oppose them, and to preserve their own Liberties by the expence of their Treasure.
Hamburg is ten good
German (or betwixt forty and fifty
English) miles distant from
Lubeck;Description. being for the most part of it an Island, naturally well fenc'd in the middle of the River
Elb, which runs in many little arms and streams thro several of its streets. It consists of two parts, the old and new Town, separated from each other by a Wall; both which are well fortified, and so close united that they may well pass for one City. From the tops of Towers and the City-walls you have a curious and pleasant prospect every way. There are only four great Gates that lead into the City: 1.
Altenaver Thor, or the Gate which leads towards
Altenaw, on the western side of the old Town; call'd commonly by the Citizens the
Millers Gate. 2.
Das Dam-Thor, or the Gate which leads to the great Trenches on the North-side of the Town. 3. The Stone-Gate, leading Eastward. 4. The South-Gate, which leads to the Islands in the
Elb; call'd by the inhabitants (for what reason I have not yet learn'd)
das Dihiane Thor. The streets are generally crooked; or would otherwise vye with (if not outstrip) any in
Germany. The Buildings are most of Brick; and exceeding high and stately. On the North the
Alster drives all the Mills which supply the whole Town with Meal.
The great Bulwarks of the City were not thrown up till within these few years;
Fortifications. and very much mended upon the late fright the Citizens were put into by the King of
Denmark's near approach to
Penneberg. The better part of those vast Rampires and outworks, which now so securely guard the Town from the fury of any that shall venture to besiege it, was finish'd in the space of four years; and remains to this day a sufficient testimony of the inexhaustible treasure of the inhabitants.
The Town is every-where exceeding populous.
Multitude of inhabitants. Those that have seen an ordinary
Jahr-Markt (or Fair) at
Francfurt or
Leipsic, will admire where those little Cities can find lodgings for so many guests as commonly resort thither: but at
Hamburg each Street is daily as much throng'd as those other two trading Towns are twice or thrice a year; and you are here continually as in a Fair. He that shall at noon or in the evening take a view of their public Exchange (a neat piece of Building, but inferior to ours at
London), may possibly meet with a greater number of people in one hour then at
Leipsic in a whole
Michael's-Mess.
The whole Town consists of a great many little Islands in the
Elb and
Alster;Bridges. out of one into another you are led by a great number of Bridges, which are almost as plentiful here as at
Amsterdam. The Sea flows up these small Channels; and sometimes (when a tempest is rais'd, about the change of the Moon, or in a Springtide) does much harm in several parts of the City, often hurrying along with it whole Houses and Families. Such a mishap as this befell the Town in the Spring of the year 1651, which ruin'd some considerable Families, and endamaged a great many more.
The most famous Home Commodity which the
Hamburgers have,
Commodities. is Beer; in Brewing of which there are a vast number of men employ'd in most parts of the Town. This is reckon'd one of the best tasted Liquors which the
German Nation affords; and is ordinarily exported into most of the neighbouring Towns and Villages. The Bores in
Holstein are so great admirers of this sort of Drink, that some whole Villages are fully perswaded 'twould be present death to change their Liquor. At
Lubec it is esteem'd one of the choicest commodities which their City has from
Hamburg; and indeed the
Germans have generally so good an opinion of it, that it is sometimes brought as far as
Francfurt upon the
Main; and there sold at an higher rate then their best
Rhenish Wine.
Besides, the
Hamburgers have good store of all other necessaries for the furnishing out a good and commendable Table. The
Hollanders have taught them to stock their Gardens (which ly without the Gates of the City) with all manner of fruits and potherbs. With these, and all sorts of fresh-water and Sea-fish their Markets are daily stored from morning till night.
'Twould be needless to inform the Reader, that few (or no) places in
Europe have greater opportunity of providing themselves with the choicest commodities of foreign Countries then the Citizens of
Hamburg; since every man knows what swarms of Merchant Ships, from the most considerable parts of the known world, daily resort to this City. This is the great (I might say, only) Mart-Town in
Germany; which furnishes the other Cities and chief Towns of the Empire with the richest Merchandise of all other Nations.
The Haven is so commodious,
Haven. and the River (even up to the walls) of that depth, that the largest Merchant-men that trade on the main Ocean may with great ease be brought up to the Town; excepting only some few of more then ordinary bulk and carriage, which are forc'd to strike anchor at the New Mills (about four
English miles from the Town) and there to unlade their Cargo into smaller Vessels.
Notwithstanding the many heavy burthens which are continually brought up the River to this Town, the mouth of the
Elb is reckon'd to be eighteen
Dutch (or seventy-two
English) miles distant from
Hamburg; and yet the Tide comes ordinarily sixteen
English miles beyond the Town, as high as the common Ford betwixt this City and
Lunenburg. So that the whole race of the Flood up the River
Elb will amount to eighty-eight of our miles, at least; a much larger course then any other navigable River in
Europe (not excepting our
Thames, which only pretends to a second place) can brag of.
The Trade which our
English Merchants have,
English Trade. for many years last past, brought to this City seems more considerable then any commerce they have hitherto enter'd upon with other foreign Nations. And therefore there is good reason that our
Hamburg Company should be treated with that civility and respect which has of late been shew'n them in this place. Our Merchants have the priviledg granted them (which is denied to most other foreigners) of pleading and trying all kind of Suits, wherein they themselves are more immediately concern'd, before their own Resident; who determines all causes in a public and stately Hall, built at the charges of the Company. They are also permitted the free exercise of their Religion; whilst men of other Nations and Confessions are forc'd to go as far as
Altenaw to say Mass or hear a Sermon.
The chief Church in
Hamburg is dedicated to St.
Peter. It was formerly a Cathedral,
Churches. as long as the Town continued an Archbishoprick; and there is still kept a kind of Dean and Chapter, who keep here an Ecclesiastical Court from which an Appeal lies only to the Imperial Chamber at
Spire. In this Church (which some say was first built in the year 801, others in the years 830) ly buried a great many of the Earls of
Schawenburg and
Holstein; whose names are writ in a fair Catalogue (next after
Charles the Great and his Son
Ludowic) of their Benefactors, which hangs up in the Body of the Church. This, amongst other things, may be thought an argument sufficient to perswade any unprejudic'd man to believe, that the Princes of
Holstein and
Schawenburg had formerly a power more then titular over this City, whatever the
Hamburgers may now-a-days pretend to the contrary. The other Churches of note are, St.
Nicholas's, St.
Jacob's, St.
Catharine's, the greater and less St.
Michael's, and the New Church in the New Town. In each of these they keep a Register of poor and distressed people in the several Parishes; who have money weekly distributed amongst them, and a competent yearly allowance for clothes and fuel. The lesser Churches are, St.
Gertrude's, St.
Mary Magdalen's, and that of the
Holy Ghost. Near the last of these is the oldest Hospital in the Town; which is endow'd with yearly maintenance for one hundred and fourteen poor people, such as are old, blind, dumb,
&c.
But this is not all the provision which the
Hamburgers have made for such of their own body as are poor and needy.
Hospitals. For hardly any great City in
Europe (excepting
Paris, and some few others, where an Epidemic conceit of the more then ordinary merit of good works have over-aw'd some Misers into an humour of bounty and munificence)
[Page 56]can shew more public Hospitals, and larger allowances for the maintenance of the miserable, then this Town. For example, 1. For such as live in any part of the Territories belonging to this City, and not in the Town, they have an Hospital in the Suburbs; into which are readily admitted all such distemper'd or decay'd persons as are not able to maintain themselves any longer in the Villages adjacent. This Hospital (dedicated to St.
George) was founded about the year 1250; and endow'd with a sufficient salary for the maintenance of a vast number of poor people, with servants, and a Priest to attend them. 2. For such as are disabled with the
French Pox, and not able to pay for their own cure, they have a kind of Pest-house; where such as are troubled with that disease are provided with Diet and Medicines convenient for their recovery. This was built in the year 1509, and named St.
Job (for this reason without doubt, because design'd for such as were smitten with Boils, as
Job was). 3. For poor fatherless and motherless Orphans they have their
Waysen-hauss (as they call it) or
Orphanotrophium; where such Citizens children as are left by their deceas'd Parents unprovided for, and incapable of procuring for themselves any competent maintenance, are carefully lookt after, and furnish'd with all manner of necessaries. They that are too young to be instructed in the School, are attended on by Nurses; and the rest are kept close to constant prayer, reading, writing, casting accounts,
&c. Sometimes near three hundred Infants are at the charge of the Hospital (the whole yearly revenue of which is said to amount to 21000 Rix-dollars) put to nurse abroad; and taken into the House as soon as they are well able to dress themselves. Such Boys as the Schoolmasters (who are five in number) observe to have parts, are fitted for, and sent to the Universities; and there maintain'd upon the public stock of the Hospital, till they may be well suppos'd to be in a condition of providing for themselves. The rest of them are put out to such Trades as the Trustees think them most qualified for; and the Girls (as soon as they have learn'd to read, write, spin, knit,
&c.) are sent to credible Services to earn their living and make their fortunes. 4. They have a common Pest-house for such as are sick of the Plague, or any other infectious disease; whither not only poor people, but others of the best rank and quality are brought to be cured of their virulent distempers. For the good and skilful attendants which all manner of diseas'd persons are sure to meet with in this place, renders it exceedingly preferable to any conveniences they could expect at home. 5. They have a large and sumptuous Hospital for sick strangers
(Das Gast. und Krancken-hauss) first built in the year 1632, where a Physitian, Chirurgion, and all sorts of necessary Medicines and Salves are provided for such poor Travellers as are fall'n sick upon their road, and are not in a condition to provide for themselves. 6. For distressed, aged, and decay'd Sea-men, the Burgers built and liberally endow'd a fair Hospital in the year 1556, which since that time has been very much augmented both in its buildings and revenues. In this Hospital there is not only a considerable maintenance allotted for a great number of maimed, aged, and feeble Mariners of all sorts; but also an ample provision is made for all such poor Widows and Orphans as have lost their Husbands or Parents at Sea, and are hereby reduc'd to want and beggery. In which particular the
Hamburgers may seem to have outdone the munificence of the present King of
France in his sumptuous Hospital
(Hostel des Invalides) built lately near
Paris for maim'd and decay'd Soldiers. For tho this noble and brave structure may justly challenge a preeminence beyond any in its kind that (perhaps)
Europe or the world could ever shew; yet there wants in it a provision for the poor Wives and Children of such as have lost their limbs or lives in His Majesty's service; which would in all probability prove as effectual a motive and encouragement to all his Subjects to venture their lives and fortunes in his Army, as any expedient hitherto thought on; since some men are not so soon deterr'd from venturing into the Camp upon a prospect of the danger of losing their own lives, as a foresight of an inevitable ruin to their Families at Home, if they should chance to be taken off or maim'd in the Field. Besides these, there are a great many more less and inconsiderable Hospitals for set numbers of poor Widowers, Widows, Orphans,
&c. together with a large number of Free-Schools, endow'd with competent stipends, for the education of the Children of poor Burgers; who are in these places commonly furnish'd with Clothes and Books out of the public revenues of the Schools where they are instructed, till fitted for a Trade or the University, as their Friends are able or willing to dispose of them.
To these Hospitals I think I may add their Bridewell,
Bridewel. or House of Correction
(Das Werckund Zucht-Hauss); since to reclaim lazy vagabonds from their ill courses by hard labour and severe punishments, is as great a piece of charity as to cloth the naked or feed the hungry. This House was set on fire, and burnt down, by some of the wicked Varlets that had been committed to this Prison, in the year 1666; but soon after nobly rebuilt at the public charge of the City. This structure consists of two parts; whereof the first is appointed for such poor and needy people (whether foreigners or domestics) as are willing to earn their livings with the sweat of their brows, but are at a loss for masters to set them at work. Here they may be sure to find employment, and have an opportunity of procuring bread by their labour; according to the motto written over the door of their Workhouse,
LABORE NƲTRIOR. The other part of the House is reserv'd for Thieves, Whores, Vagabonds, and such kind of licentious persons as are disobedient to the Magistrates of the City, or regardless of the commands of their Parents or Masters. The motto or inscription over the door of this partition is,
LABORE PLECTOR.
That the City of
Hamburg is a Free Imperial State of it self,
A Free State. and wholly independant upon any supreme power whatever, except the Emperor (who only challenges a small acknowledgment or homage from this as well as other Imperial Cities), will appear from the following priviledges the
Hamburgers have for many years enjoy'd: 1. The Burgomasters and Common-Council-men of the City have power to abrogate or enact what Laws they please; and to pass sentence, and proceed to execution in all causes Criminal or Civil; without acquainting the Duke of
Holstein, or any other neighbouring Prince, with their intentions. 2. They have power to raise Soldiers, grant out Commissions to Commanders, and levy what Taxes and Contributions they judg necessary for the security of their own Commonwealth. 3. They can enter into a League (Offensive or Defensive) with whatever Prince or Potentate they please. 'Tis true, it has for many years been a custom for the City of
Hamburg to present yearly the Dukes of
Segeberg
[Page][Page]Ducatus: olim Episcopatus BREMENSIS et ostiorum ALBIS et VISURGIS Fluviorum novissima Descriptio.To the WORP
full S
rHENRY CALVERLEY of Eriholme in the Countij of Torcke knt this Map is Humbly D. D. by M: Pitt
Notarum Explicatio
[...] Grosse Stätte.
[...] Kleine Stätte.
[...] Kirch dorffer.
[...] Adel: häusser.
[...] Dorffer.
[...] Häuser.
[Page][Page 57]and
Gottorp with a Pipe of Wine, an Hogshead of
Serbst Beer, an hundred weight of Rice, and half an hundred of Almonds; but this is no more a sign of Tribute or Homage paid to either of these Princes, then their ordinary returning of the Complement with a Present of Venison is an argument of their dependance upon the
Hamburgers. By a Statute made by the Emperor
Frideric I. (and confirm'd by
Ferdinand II.) the Citizens of
Hamburg are exempted from all manner of Tolls and Custom-money due to the Emperor as Lord of the
Elb, betwixt their own City and the Ocean; but by the same Decree, they are bound to secure and defend the River from the outrages of all Pirats and Freebooters. Whereupon, in the year 1402, no less then seventy Pirats were brought prisoners into the City at one time, and not long after (in the same year) eighty more. But
Christian IV. King of
Denmark, by force of Arms robb'd the
Hamburgers for some time of the priviledges the Emperors had granted them; compelling their Merchant-men to pay Custom to the Crown of
Denmark as they pass'd the Castle of
Gluckstadt. This infringement of their Liberties gave occasion to a great and durable rupture betwixt the
Danish King and the Citizens of
Hamburg; which was at last made up by a Treaty of Peace in the year 1645, whereby it was agreed, that the
Hamburgers (upon payment of 120000 Rix-dollars to the said King's Officers) should reassume their ancient Rights and Priviledges. And the 220000 Rix-dollars which (as appears from the fourth Article in the
Interim's Recess, set down at large in the Description of
Denmark) where paid the last year (1679) by the City of
Hamburg to the present King of
Denmark, was, as 'tis there phras'd,
in consideration of His Majesty's being graciously pleased to receive the Burgers of that City again into his favour. Nay, and in all probability, the like sums will be ready, whensoever the King shall (at the front of as great an Army as he lately brought before this City) demand them.
The Magistracy of the City consists of four Burgomasters and twenty
Schepins or Aldermen;
Magistrates. who were formerly all of them Civilians or other learned men, but are now chosen out of the Merchants and rich Tradesmen in the Town. Besides these they have twelve Common-Council-men (call'd in their language
Die Oberalten, or chief Elders) who consult together and order the public affairs of the whole City. If any matter of more then ordinary moment be brought before them, they join with sixty more grave Citizens (whom they call
Die Burger-alten, or Elders of the City); and if these dare not venture to give a final determination in the matter propos'd, the whole business is referr'd to a general Assembly of all the Freemen of the Town.
The
Hamburgers have one notable custom amongst them for the speedy reparation of any losses by fire. In most great Streets, and other parts of the Town, 'tis the fashion for such a number of the Citizens to enter into a solemn Covenant and Agreement; whereby they unanimously engage themselves to contribute a certain sum of money towards the rebuilding of any house which shall be burnt down within the circle of that Company to which they belong. Now any man has the liberty to engage himself in as many Companies as he pleases. So that sometimes it happens a considerable improvement of a Burger's Estate to have his House burnt down, when the contributions he receives from the several Companies, of which he has made himself a member, amount (as often they do) to more then his House was worth at the first.
The Territories belonging to this City contain a small circle of
Stormaria;Territories. wherein nevertheless are several fair Villages, and some Noblemen's Palaces of good note.
A great many of the little Islands in the Islands in the
Elb, formerly subject to the Dukes of
Lunenburg or
Lawenburg, are now under the Dominion of the
Hamburgers. To whom also belongs the strong Castle of
Ritzenbuttel; the best Fort in
Hadderland, or the Country betwixt the mouths of the two great Rivers
Elb and
Weser. A little below this, to the North-West, they have another considerable Fortress call'd
Das newe Werck; built for the convenient harbouring of such Merchant-men as sail that way. But the greatest Royalty the Citizens of
Hamburg can pretend to without the limits of their own City is from the Custom-house at
Tollenspicker, not far from
Winsen; where all passengers pay a certain Toll for themselves and their carriages. There are other places of less note that are equally subject to this City and
Lubeck; and pay an acknowledgment to both Corporations.
The moneys currant in
Hamburg,Money. and the adjacent parts, are the same as in the Empire (those especially of the Emperor's coining) and the Kingdom of
Denmark. Some small pieces are coin'd by the authority of the Burgo-masters and
Radtsherrn of the City; and the Coins of all trading Nations in
Europe will pass here at a good value.
THE Dukedom of
Bremen is bounded on the East with the Territories of the Duke of
Lunenburg;Bounds. on the South with the
Weser; on the West with the
German, or
British, Ocean; and on the North with the
Elb. Which large plot of ground was anciently inhabited by the
Cauci; a valiant and warlike people, and (probably) the ancestors of those who to this day inherit this part of
Germany.
The whole Dukedom is subdivided into several lesser Provinces;
Division. amongst which the chief is the Bishopric of
Verhden, on the borders of the Dukedom of
Lunenburg. The next in order and greatness is the Land of
Bremen (strictly so call'd) containing a Circle of some miles round that large and famous City. The third considerable Province is
Wursterland, on the Sea-coast, from the
Weser down to the mouth of the
Elb. The inhabitants of this Province are reckon'd men of as good spirits and as brave Soldiers as any Subjects of the Empire whatever. Their frequent rebellions under the Archbishops of
Bremen first inur'd them to war; and they have ever since delighted in following the Camp. 'Tis reported of them, that in the height of their obstinacy (for which they were often severely lash'd by many of the Archbishops), they never built themselves any Cities, or Forts of defence; but relied wholly upon the strength and courage of their Companions, which they fancied a sufficient bulwark against the sturdiest enemy that should dare to assault them. And they have still this character given them,
That the Wursterlanders will fight and drink with the best men in Dutchland. After these come the inhabitants of
Hadelia, or
Hadeliria (das landt Hadelen); a proud and ignorant people; so strangely enamour'd of gayclothes, that their neighbours (alluding to this piece of vanity) say proverbially of them,
There are no Pesants in Hadeland. Some part of this Province (upon the mouth of the
Elb, where stand the Forts of
Ritzenbuttel and
New-Werck) was, as we have said, formerly in the hands of the Dukes of
Saxon-Lawenburg; and is now subject to the Citizens of
Hamburg. Another considerable portion of it (in which is seated the Castle and Town of
Atterndorff, which commands the greatest part of the Province) is still under the dominion of the said Dukes, and no part of the Dukedom of
Bremen; to which no place of any consequence in
Hadelland is subject, except the Village and Castle of
Nyen-huss, on the mouth of the
Oste. Next after
Hadel-land comes
Kedingerland, in which is seated the City of
Stade; and beyond that
Alt-land, or Old-land; a pleasant and fruitful Country of about fourteen
English miles in length.
He that shall travel the road betwixt
Bremen and
Stade,Soil. will be apt to have a very mean opinion of the whole Dukedom of
Bremen; meeting with nothing but barren Sands and Heaths, a wast and uninhabited Country. And yet elsewhere there is not any Country on the Northern parts of the
German Empire fuller of pleasant Fields and Meadows, fruitful Orchards, and all other necessaries or delights. Whence some witty Geographers have pleased themselves in fancying the Dukedom of
Bremen to be mighty like a spred Cloak; the two flaps of which (containing the Countries along the banks of the
Elb and
Weser) are lined with Velvet or Plush, but the middle part (which reaches from
Vehrden up as far as the mouth of the
Oste) is nothing but course Canvas or Buckram.
Before the
Westphalian Treaty, in the year 1648,
Bishops and Archbishops. this Tract of Land went under the name of an Archbishopric; and all the Princes, under whose subjection it was, were stiled Archbishops of
Bremen. Of whom (with their three Bishops) the
[Page 57]account we have left us is, in short, as follows:
1.
Wilhad (or, as some of the
German Historians call him,
Willibald) an
English Priest, was at the request of
Charles the Great sent over into
Germany by
Egbert Archbishop of
York, about the year 788, where he was employ'd in converting the Infidels of that Country to Christianity; and for his meritorious performances at last advanc'd to the Bishopric of
Bremen. After he had spent several years in a vigilant execution of his Office, he died in the year 790, and was buried in the Cathedral at
Bremen; where to this day they pretend to shew his Tomb. 2.
Willeric, another
English man, is said to have succeeded
Wilhad; tho many of their ancient Chronologers do not mention any such Bishop. And indeed the whole account we have of him, is only, That having for some unknown time (some, upon what grounds I know not, say till the year 840) enjoy'd this Jurisdiction, he left his See to 3.
Luderic, a
German. The old
Saxon Chronicle calls him
Lenderic; and tells us, that for his intolerable pride and arrogance he was deposed by the Emperor
Ludowic the Godly,
Charles the Great's Son; who chang'd the Bishopric of
Bremen into an Archbishopric, by setting up into this man's place 4.
Ansgar (of whom we have said something before) the first Archbishop of
Bremen and
Hamburg; who was remov'd to
Bremen upon the sacking of
Hamburg by the
Vandals in the year 850, from which time till his death (in the year 865) he kept both the Titles. The Archbishop of
Colen stoutly oppos'd this union; alledging, that the Bishops of
Bremen had always been Suffragans to his See, and that therefore 'twas an encroachment upon his Jurisdiction to convert that place into an Archbishopric. But the Emperor took no notice of these murmurings; proceeding to confirm this newly conferr'd dignity to
Ansgar and his Successors; ordering (as by his
Diploma, still extant, does appear), that within the Province of the Archbishop of
Bremen and
Hamburg should be reckon'd all the Bishops in
Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Groneland, Halsingland, Island, and the rest of the Northern Countries. 5.
Rembert (St.
Ansgar's Scholar, and adopted Son) was, immediately upon his predecessor's death, advanc'd to the Archbishop's Seat; which he kept tweny-three years, and died in the year 888.
Wilhad, Ansgar, and this
Rembert are reckon'd the three great Apostles of the
Saxons; many of which Nation have taken the pains to write their lives. But the stories they tell us of them contain as many incredible things as the most Romantic Popish Legends. However, the
Saxon Commonalty have still their memories and names in great veneration; and would as soon part with Christmas-day as St.
Ansgar's (which is the eighth of
February) out of their Almanacks. St.
Wilhad's day is kept on the eighth of
November; and St.
Rembert's on the fourth of
February. 6.
Rembert was succeeded by one
Adelgar, a Monk of
Corbey (of whom nothing is recorded worth the taking notice of). 7.
Hoyer, who was elected into the Archbishop's See in the year 909, and dyed the year following. The
Bremen Chronicle reports, that about an hundred and twenty years after his death his Grave was open'd; where nothing was found but a Pillow which had been laid under his head, and a Cross, both fresh and uncorrupted. Whereupon the Monks of
Bremen concluded, that his body was immediately after his death snatch'd up into Heaven. 8.
Reginward. 9.
Ʋnni, who (going to convert the Infidels in
Sweden) died at
Birca in
Gothland. 10.
Adaldag. 11.
Libentius an
Italian. 12.
Ʋnwan, call'd by some
Wimar. 13.
Libentius II. 14.
Hermannus. 15.
Bezeline. 16.
Albert, Son of one of the Dukes of
Bavaria. 17.
Liemar or
Leimar, a
Bavarian Nobleman; the fourteenth and last Arch-Bishop of
Hamburg. For, when at the request of
Eric King of
Denmark the Pope had erected an Archbishops See at
Lunden in
Schonen, the Bishops of
Denmark, Sweden, and
Norway were subjected to the Archbishop of
Lunden; and only
Lubec, Schwerin, Lebus, and
Ratzenburg remain'd Suffragans to the Archbishop of
Bremen, who thereupon for ever quitted the Title of Archbishop of
Hamburg. 18.
Humbert, the first that ever stiled himself barely Archbishop of
Bremen. 19.
Frideric. 20.
Adalbar. 21.
Hartwic. 22.
Baldwin, whose successor some have made one
Barthold, but without any good authority. 23.
Sifrid, Son to
Albrecht Marquise of
Brandenburg. 24.
Hartwic II. 25.
Woldemar, Duke and Bishop of
Sleswic. 26.
Gerhard, formerly Bishop of
Osnabrug. 27.
Gerhard II. Earl of
Lippe. 28.
Hildebold or
Hildebrand, Earl of
Broch-hausen. 29.
Giselbert. 30.
Henry I. 31.
Florentius de Brunchorst, against whom appear'd
Bernherd Earl of
Wolpe (whom some Historians make Archbishop instead of
Florentius),
[...]at lost the day. 32.
John, Bishop of
Lunden and Provost of
Roschild in
Denmark. 33.
Burchard. 34.
Otto, Earl of
Oldenburg and
Delmenhorst. 35.
Gotfrid, Earl of
Arnsberg. He had great quarrels with
Maurice Earl of
Oldenburg for the See; which when he could not peaceably enjoy, he resign'd to 36.
Albrecht Duke of
Brunswic; chosen Archbishop in the life-time of his predecessor, in the year 1359. 37.
Otto II. 38.
John II. 39.
Nicolas, Earl of
Delmenhorst. 40.
Baldwin. 41.
Gerhard III. Earl of
Hoga. 42.
Henry III. Earl of
Schwartzburg. 43.
John III. 44.
Christopher, Duke of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg. 45.
Henry IV. Duke of
Saxony, Engeren, Westphalia, &c. 46.
John Adolph, Duke of
Holstein, &c. who after the death of his Father was Regent Duke of
Holstein; and thereupon quitted the See of
Bremen in the year 1596, leaving the place to his Brother 47.
John Frideric, who was at the same time Bishop of
Lubec, and (having enjoy'd the Archbishopric of
Bremen for the space of thirty-eight years) died in the Monastery near
Buxtehude in the year 1634, and was buried in the Cathedral at
Sleswic. 48. The last Archbishop of
Bremen was
Frideric Duke of
Holstein, Son to
Christian IV. King of
Denmark, and Father to the present
Danish King
Christian V. But before this
Frideric came to the Crown of
Denmark, he had nothing left but the bare Title of an Archbishop. For, in the year 1644, the prevailing Forces of the
Swedish King overran the Archbishopric of
Bremen and Bishopric of
Vehrden; as they had before many other Provinces of the
German Empire. Afterwards, in the Treaty of
Munster, it was agreed upon, that (
ut satis fieret Serenissimae Reginae Sueciae pro locorum hoc bello captorum restitutione, Pacique Publicae in Imperio restanrandae condignè prospiceretur, as 'tis worded in the Tenth Article of that Treaty) amongst other places there mention'd, the Archbishopric of
Bremen and Bishopric of
Vehrden should be for ever subject to the Kings of
Sweden, and annex'd to their own Territories and Dominions,
[Page 60]sub solitis quidem Insigniis sed titulo Ducatus. And thus the Archbishopric was turn'd into a Dukedom; which Title it still retains.
Whence the City of
Bremen (which gives name to the whole Dukedom) is so call'd,
City of Bremen. there are several different opinions amongst the
Germans Writers; some of which, for the Reader's diversion, I shall hear repeat, leaving it to himself to embrace any one, or reject all, as he shall see cause. One tells us, there was formerly a Ferry cross the
Weser in the place where the great Bridg at
Bremen now stands; and therefore will have the City so call'd from the flat bottom'd Boats (in the tongue of the
Neder-Saxons nam'd
Pramen) wherewith they us'd to ferry over passengers. Another fancies
Bremen may be fetch'd from the abundance of Broom (in their tongue
Brame) which grows in this Country.
M. Martinius (a man of no contemptible parts and learning) guesses, that because the Land of
Bremen is the outmost bounds of the
German Empire towards the Ocean, therefore the City was call'd
ein Brame; which word signifies properly the outmost seam or selvidge of a Garment. To omit the impertinences of other Etymologists, all agree in this, that
Ptolomy's
[...] (whence ever that word had its original) is the same with
Bremen. Cluverius allowing of this opinion, adds further,
Nec nomen omnino abhorret; nam dempta priore syllaba reliquum BIRANƲM satis aperta vestigia gerit vocabuli BREMEN. Et quid scio annon apud Ptolomaeum M corruptum sit in N, integrumque vocabulum fuerit FABIRAMƲM?
Amongst the old rubbish of ancient
German writers,
Antiquity. and the small fragments of Antiquity which are at this day to be met with in that Country, 'twill be a difficult task to find out the first original of this City. 'Tis certain, one great part of it (which is known by the name of
S. Stephani Statt) is of a later foundation then the main body of the Town; and another grand accession (call'd
Die New Statt, or the
New City) has been added within these hundred years. What time this City was first fortified we have no other account then in the general, that the Cities of
Saxony (and in all probability
Bremen amongst the rest) were first wall'd round by the orders of
Henry Duke of
Saxony, surnam'd
Auceps, or the
Fowler, about the year 1000. For this Prince had found by experience, that his naked Towns were not able to withstand the fury and outrages of the
Vandals; who in those days miserably infested the Northern parts of the Empire. All the modern Historians will inform us, that the Suburbs of St.
Nicolas (which at this day make up a considerable part of the City of
Bremen) were first fenc'd round in the year 1623, and the
a-la modern fortifications of the
Newe-Statt, on the other side of the
Weser, cannot pretend to any greater age.
At this day
Bremen is a large and well-built Town.
Description. The Streets generally strait and even, excepting only near the Cathedral, which stands upon a small rising. The great Trade brought to this City by the Shipping, and the fruitfulness of the neighbouring plain (which is continually stockt with vast droves of Cattle) has strangely enrich'd the inhabitants of late years, and render'd the place exceeding populous. Nature, as well as art, has made this City very strong; and were the walls beat down, 'twould be a difficult task to take it, if resolutely defended. For, being situate on a level, the Citizens can immediately drown the neighbouring plain with the
Weser; which usually once a year, like another
Nile, overflows its banks, and thereby mightily improves the adjacent sandy fields.
The Haven at
Bremen is not so convenient for Ships to harbour in as that at
Hamburg;Haven. and sometimes a great flood casts up such banks and ridges of sand, as makes the
Weser for some miles unnavigable for Merchant Ships of any great burthen. So that oftentimes the Citizens of
Bremen are at vast charges to cleanse the passage; and yet can scarce clear the River so far as that Vessels of greater bulk then ordinary can be brought within six
English miles of their Bridge. At this distance from the Town the
Rahts-herrn and Magistracy of
Bremen have a Custom-house; where all foreign Commodities are unladed and brought up to the City in flat-bottom'd Boats, or small Vessels.
By the
Weser the Citizens of
Bremen transport all their own commodities (as Timber,
Commodities. Wool, Corn, and Minerals) into other Nations; and by the same stream convey the commodities of foreign Countries into
Westphalia, the Dukedom of
Brunswic, Hassia, Thuringen, and other parts of the
German Empire. They have here an excellent art of dressing of Leather and Cloth; vast quantities of both which are sometimes brought hither out of other Countries, and remitted to the great gain of the inhabitants. Another considerable commodity of this City is their Fish; which is caught in the Sea and
Weser, and hence transported into most neighbouring Countries. Every month they have a several sort of Fish in season; and within the very walls of the Town many thousands of Salmons and Lampreys are caught yearly, and (after they are pickled up, or dry'd in the smoak) shipp'd off.
Soon after the Reformation (which was first begun at
Bremen in the year 1522),
Gymnasium. the Burgers built a Free-School, and endow'd it with a fair revenue. This was afterwards advanc'd into a
Schola Illustris (as they term it) or a College, wherein were profess'd and taught the four superior faculties, of Divinity, Law, Physic, and Philosophy. At last it became a
Gymnasium (or little University); and is at this day the most noted one in
Germany; famous for the education of
Nat. Chytraeus, Chr. Pezelius, Ʋrban Pierius, Matthias Martinius, Joh. Lampadius, Lud. Crocius, Joh. Combachius, Joh. Coccejus, and several other learned men.
The Magistracy of the Town consists of four Burgomasters, and four and twenty
Raths-herrn,Magistrates. or Common-Council-men; who are divided into four Classes. So that one Burgomaster and six Rahtsherrn may be allotted for each quarter of the City. If any of the Burgomasters or Rahtsherrn dy, or be brought so low in the world as not to be able to bear his office any longer, they are bound to chuse another into his place within four and twenty-hours after his burial or resignation. The election is carried on in this manner: Out of each Class one Elector is pitcht upon by lot; and the four that are at last set out for that office take an oath to chuse a person (out of the most considerable freemen of the Town) whom in their conscience they think the fittest for the place vacant. This done, they are shut up together in a Chamber by themselves; and not suffer'd to speak to any man before they have finish'd the Election. All manner of Law-Suits
(tam Civiles quam Criminales, Fiscales ac Consistoriales) are tried before these Magistrates; from whose Court no Citizen can appeal to the Imperial Chamber at
Spire, without being liable to pay a fine of fifty Gold-gulders to the common Treasury.
[Page 61] This is one of the most considerable Imperial Cities in the Empire; and was always reckon'd the third
Hans-Town, after
Lubec and
Colen. Its first great priviledges were granted to it by the Emperor
Henry V. in the year 1111, in remembrance of the valiant performances of the Citizens of
Bremen in the Holy War. For thus the words of their Charter run,
Ob obsequiorum promptitudinem, multasque Deificas virtutes, viriles actus & non modicos labores & expensas, quos & quas Bremenses per mare suis navibus & per terram fecerunt, in passagio ultra mare ad terram sanctam, quando Civitas Hierosolymitana capta est, &c.
But before this Emperor's time, 'twas certainly a free City; as appears from the
Statua Rolandina, which is still to be seen in the Market-place, bearing the Arms of the Empire (a spread-Eagle) with this inscription, in the old
Neder-Saxon language,
Vryheitt do ick ju openbahr,
De Carll und manig Forst vorwahr
Deeser Stadtt ghegheuen hatt.
Dess dancket Gode iss min Rath, i.e.
I am a testimony of the Liberty which
Charles (the Great) and many other Emperor's have granted to this City. For which I advise you to return God thanks.
'Twill not be amiss in this place to give the Reader a short account of the reasons which moved the ancient
Germans (especially the inhabitants of the Upper and Lower
Saxony) to erect these kind of monstrous Statues in their Cities and great Towns. The tradition usually receiv'd amongst the
Saxons is, That
Charles the Great overran their Country by the help of one
Roland, a Gigantic General in his Army; and that thereupon the Emperor order'd his Image to be set up in all the Cities of note which he conquer'd; with this priviledg, That so long as they kept up such Statues they should have a right to several
Regalia, not allow'd to other Cities in the Empire. But the truth or probability of this story depends wholly upon the credit and authority of the common people; for from them some of the
German Historians have borrow'd the relation, and afterwards (without any further enquiry) impos'd it upon the world for a piece of authentic History. How ridiculous and absurd would it be for a triumphant Emperor to erect Trophees to the honour of Commanders in his Army, where himself is acknowledg'd to be the Conqueror? Besides, it appears (from the unquestionable testimony of the best
Dutch Records) that several of those Cities which shew such kind of Statues as these, were built many years after the death of the Emperor
Charles the Great. Nor can the most accurate
German Antiquary prove, that there was any such thing as a
Statua Rolandina ever heard of in the Empire before
A.D. 1000. Again, what could perswade the Emperor to bestow such signal kindnesses upon mean and contemptible Villages in
Saxony (as some to this day are; which nevertheless dare still pretend to shew one of these ancient Statues); whereas we do not find, that any of the brave Cities upon the
Rhine had such priviledges and immunities granted to them? If there be any probable account to be given of this custom,
Goldastus's conjecture is the most likely to hit the mark. Now he fancies, that
Roland, or
Ruland, is not a proper name, but an appellative, deriv'd from the old
Dutch word
Rugen, signifying to judg or pass sentence in any Law-Case. So that by
Ruland, or
Rugeland, nothing else (as he thinks) can be meant, then
ein Mahlstadt da man frey Kayserlich Gericht helt, i. e. a City or great Town on the utmost borders of the Empire, where the Emperor has been pleas'd to appoint a Session of Judges and Advocates to try and determine, in his name, all Law-Suits and Controversies. And this power and authority committed to the Burgers of such certain Cities was represented (as it is still at
Bremen, Magdeburg, and many other great Towns in
Saxony) by the portraicture of a great Giant (mistaken for one
Roland, whom they make Sister's Son to
Charles the Great) representing the Emperor, and bearing the Arms of the Empire. And they were anciently so superstitious in erecting or pulling down these Statues, according as they had the right of Judicature conferr'd on, or taken from them, that when the Emperor
Charles the IV. had obliged the
Hamburgers to submit themselves to the Dukes of
Holstein, they broke their Statue in pieces,
Quam (says
Crantzius)
pro signo libertatis olim erectam habuerant. To conclude, 'tis a sufficient argument that these Statues were not first set up in
Saxony (nor ever appropriated to that Country) in remembrance of General
Roland their Conqueror, that we meet with the like monuments in
Kinsberg, Prinslaw, and some other places in the Marquisate of
Brandenburg; where we never read that
Roland commanded an Army.
The money currant in
Bremen,Money. is chiefly the Emperor's own Coin. Some pieces they have out of
Sweden; tho there cannot be any great treasure exported out of so poor a Kingdom. I have not seen any notable coin of their own, except their
Bremischer Grot, or
Vier-pfenninger; which is worth little more then an
English halfpenny. From this
Nether-Saxon word
Grot, used instead of the
High-Dutch Grosch, our
English Groat had probably its first original; for their
Grot, as well as ours, is valued at four Pence; altho a Penny at
Bremen, as well as in
Scotland, be not worth above a sixth part of one of ours.
The Arms of
Bremen are a Key
Argent in a Field
Gules;Arms. to denote the power of the Citizens to open or shut (at their pleasure) the passage of any Ships which traffic upon the
Weser.
Other Places of Note in the Dukedom of
BREMEN.
I.
VEHRDEN,
Vehrden. formerly a Bishop's See, and no part of the Archbishopric of
Bremen; but may now reasonably enough be accounted a part of the Dukedom, as having been given up into the hands of the
Swedes, together with the Archbishopric (under the name of one entire Dukedom) at the Treaty of
Munster. Bruschius (in his History of the
German Bishops) tells us, that
Charles the Great founded this Bishopric at
Konende upon the
Weser; others say
Bardewic, about the year 776; whence not long after it was remov'd to
Vehrden, which even in those days was (if the
Saxons had any such) a strong and populous City.
Crantzius reports, that the first Bishop of this Diocess was one
Suibert an
English man, who died in the year 708 (near seventy years before the first foundation of the Bishopric, according to
Bruschius's calculation) and was succeeded by one
Patto a
Scot. But
Emmius (in his accurate
Frisian History) shews,
[Page 62]that this Historian mistook
Suidbert the
Frislander, who was indeed the first Bishop of
Vehrden, for one of the same name who came over into
Germany with
Wilhad the first Bishop of
Bremen, And yet this correction of
Crantzius's relation is not to be approv'd, unless we read 788 or 798 instead of 708; since, as we have before inform'd the Reader, one of our
English Archbishops first furnish'd
Bremen with a Bishop, at the request of the Emperor
Charles the Great, in the year 788.
We may from these contradictions easily gather what credit is to be given to the account which
German writers are able to give us of the ancient State of this City; and the present is not worthy of a large description, having nothing in it extraordinary or remarkable. The River
Aller (upon which 'tis seated) brings in all the Trade of the Town; since up the
Weser, into which River the
Aller emties it self, not far from
Vehrden, are brought flat bottom'd Barges of a considerable bulk, laden with all foreign and domestic commodities which the Market of
Bremen will afford. Count
Tilly took this Town at the first assault in the year 1626; and afterwards (in the year 1631) the Imperial Army gave it a second blow, which it has felt ever since.
II.
Ottersberg. OTTERSBERG. A small fortified Town, not far from
Bremen; beautified and defended by a strong Castle, the ancient residence of some of their Archbishops.
Chytraeus tells us, that the Castle of
Ottenberg bore a part for many years with the Citizens of
Bremen in a rebellion against their Archbishops; to whom they were at last upon some condition agreed to by both parties, forc'd to submit themselves in the year 1547. In the last Civil Wars of
Germany this Castle was twice taken and plunder'd by the Imperialists; and once by Count
Coningsmark the
Swedish General.
III.
Rotterberg. ROTTERBERG. A small City seated on the River
Wein, at about four
English miles distance from
Ottersberg. In the place where this City now stands,
Nicolas the thirty-seventh Bishop of
Vehrden built a Palace for himself and successors; which was afterwards fortified with strong Walls and a deep Ditch, about the year 1500, by
Barthold the forty-ninth Bishop of that Diocess. At the same time the adjoining Village, or Suburbs, were Wall'd in, and made a small City; which by degrees is grown to be a place of some trade, and is considerably populous.
IV.
Buxtehude. BUXTEHUDE. Seated on the River
Essa, not far from the
Elb, in as pleasant and fruitful a Country as any in the whole Empire. This is one of the Granaries of
Hamburg; and furnishes that great City with a large portion of their provision both for man and horse.
V.
Stade. STADE. The second City of note, next after
Bremen, in the whole Dukedom; seated on the mouth of the River
Zwinga and banks of the
Elb. Bertius, and other writers skill'd in the ancient Geography of these parts, would have this City look'd upon as a place of the greatest antiquity of any in
Saxony; esteeming it the same with
Ptolomy's
[...]. Tho I think the Longitude and Latitude which
Ptolomy assigns to that old Town (being 29 deg. of Long. and 51 deg. 20 min. of Lat.) will scarce come near this City.
This large and ancient City was formerly subject to Earls and Marquises of its own; and thence we find the inhabitants in and about the City named by the
Latin Historians
Stadenses, Stadingi or
Stedingii, as a people distinct of themselves and independant upon any of the neighbouring Princes. Of these Earls and Marc-Graves the Reader may meet with a Catalogue in
Crantzius, or
Angelius a Werdenhagen.
In the year 1234, the
Stadenses were the occasion of a bloody and terrible war in the Archbishopric of
Bremen; which happening in the very infancy of Christianity in these parts, had like to have stifled Religion in its Cradle. This bloodshed was occasion'd by a revolt of the Citizens of
Stade from their obedience to the See of
Bremen. Whereupon the Clergy of that City (being resolv'd to keep by a strong arm what their enemies had endeavour'd to wrest from them) took up arms, and engaged several of their neighbours in the broil. But this expedient did not meet with the expected success; having, after a long quarrel, only weaken'd both parties, and in no wise vindicated the Archbishop's Title. At last, a volley of curses and excommunications from the Bishop of
Rome frighted the Citizens of
Stade into submission, and obliged them to yield obedience (as formerly) to the Archbishop's of
Bremen.
Hereupon
Philip, Duke of
Schwaben and Earl of
Stade, annex'd the whole County to the Archbishopric; reserving only to himself the City with its ancient priviledges and immunities. In which state it continued till (in the Civil wars of
Germany) it fell into the hands of the
Swedes; and was confirm'd to that Crown, as a part of the Dukedom of
Bremen, by the Treaty of
Munster. And possibly, we may have some reason to call this the Metropolis of the whole Country which is now subject to the King of
Sweden as Duke of
Bremen; since the City of
Bremen it self was exemted from the Homage payable to that Monarch from the Archbishopric by vertue of that Treaty, and is to this day a free Imperial City, immediately subject to the Emperor, and to him only.
Notwithstanding the vast Rampires and Bulwarks wherewith this City is fortified, and the natural strength of the place, it was besieg'd and taken in one day (
April 13, 1645) by the
Swedish General Count
Coningsmark; who having at the first assault taken the Fortress on the mouth of the
Zwinge, betwixt the City and the
Elb, press'd forward with his whole Army to the Gates of
Stade, and forc'd his way into the City. Whereupon the Burgers were glad to surrender up the Castle and other strong Forts upon any conditions the Conqueror was pleas'd to propose.
The Town is at present in a flourishing condition; being seated in a wholesom Air, and a pleasant rich Country. The Burgers (who have the character of the most civil and courteous people in this part of the Empire) have commonly Orchards and Gardens of pleasure without the walls of the City, well stockt with all manner of Fruits and Flowers. Their Haven is large and commodious; and Ships of larger carriage and burthen come up to
Stade then are able to reach
Hamburg. The Market-place,
Rahthauss (or Town-Hall), Exchange, and several of their Churches, are Buildings worthy a Traveller's sight.
Many and great have been the priviledges by several Emperors granted to this City. It was always reckon'd a Sanctuary for fugitives; insomuch, that all manner of malefactors (whether
Germans or Foreigners) that could reach
Stade before vengeance overtook them, were sure to find shelter here, and be secure from the hand of justice. Besides the priviledg of coining money, authority to hunt in the neighbouring Forests (and the like prerogatives challeng'd
[Page 63]by all Imperial Cities), they have power to demand a certain Toll or Custom of every Merchant-man that passes up the
Elb to
Hamburg; every such Vessel being oblig'd to strike anchor at the mouth of the
Zwinge, and there to tarry till dismiss'd by the Masters of the Custom-House. These pretensions occasion'd (not many years ago) a quarrel between the Citizens of
Stade and the
Hamburgers; the later pretending, that 'twas an infringement of their prerogative (who were absolute Masters of the
Elb below their own City) for
Stade to lay claim to any such priviledg. But the controversie soon after was amicably compos'd; and each City has since peaceably enjoy'd its own peculiar Regality.
This ancient
Hans-Town (being one of the first that was enroll'd into that noble society) was once reduc'd to a mean and beggarly condition by the overgrown trade and riches of the
Hamburgers; insomuch, that it was forc'd to sell (almost for bread, the public stock not amounting to ninety pounds sterling a year) to these upstart thriving Merchants its ancient priviledges, and put it self under the protection of the Archbishops of
Bremen. But in this low condition it did not long continue, before the
English Merchants (upon some affront the
Hamburgers had offer'd them) remov'd their commerce to
Stade. By which means this City, in a short time, recover'd its former grandeur; and grew on a sudden rich and populous.
VI. BREMER-VERDEN. A wall'd Town,
Bremer-Verden. on the road betwixt
Bremen and
Stade; distant from the later about twelve
English miles, and from the former near twenty-eight. It was first built by
Luder Duke of
Saxony; and afterwards made a Palace for the Archbishops of
Bremen, who had here their usual residence. In the Castle (which commands a great part of the adjacent plain) the
Swedes have commonly a strong Garrison. The Town would otherwise be of little note; not having the convenience of any trade, except what is brought by the resort of passengers that travel this way to
Bremen or
Stade.
THE Dukedom of
Luneburg,Bounds. or
Lunenburg, is bounded on the South with the Dukedom of
Brunswic; on the South-East with
Magdeburg; on the East with
Brandenburg; on the North with
Lauwenburg and
Holstein; on the North-West with
Bremen; and on the West with some part of
Westphalia.
The Metropolis (which gives name to the whole Dukedom) is thought by some to have had its name from the Moon (
Lunus or
Luna) worshipp'd by the ancient Idolatrous Inhabitants of this Land. Others derive the word from the name of the River
Elmena, or
Ilmenow, on which the City of
Luneburg is seated, which (they tell us) was formerly call'd
Luno from
Isis the
Egyptian Goddess; who coming into
Germany to visit her Kinsman
Gambrivius (who was in those days Lord of that part of the Country where
Hamburg now stands), was here Deified and worshipp'd under the Image of an Half-Moon. Several of the
Saxon Chronologers report, that this Idol was first brought hither by
Julius Cesar; who questionless (if we believe the more credible
Roman Historians) never saw this Country. However, that the story in the main is true, and that the inhabitants of these parts did indeed worship an Image of the Moon, is agreed on by all the
Dutch Antiquaries; altho they are at a loss to find out how their Ancestors came came by the
Latin names of
Lunus or
Luna. There are to this day several Rivers and Towns in this Dukedom, and the Marquisate of
Brandenburg, which still retain the name of
Lune. The old Annals of the Cathedral Church at
Vehrden say, that this Idol (which stood on the top of a mountain far from
Luneburg, call'd at this day
Kalk-Berg, from the abundance of Lime found there) was first destroy'd by
Egistus, one of the seventy Disciples that first planted Christianity in the
German Empire. Yet afterwards, when the inhabitants of these, as well as many other parts of the Empire relaps'd into their ancient Idolatry, the Image was again set up and worship'd; until at last it was finally remov'd by
Suibert (not
Wibert, as some of their Historians write the word) the first Bishop of
Vehrden; who, in the same place where this Goddess's Temple stood, built a splendid Monastery about the year 780, which was by him dedicated to St.
Mary.
Cluverius tells us, that the whole Country about
Luneburg and
Ʋltzen (which is a City about twenty
English miles distant from
Luneburg, towards the South) was first inhabited by the
Cathulci; whom he guesses to have been a Province of the
Cherusci, whose Territories reach'd much farther up into the Empire.
The Dukedom of
Luneburg is every-where full of large Woods and Forests (many of which are noted in the Map) abounding with all sorts of Deer, wild Swine, and other kinds of Venison.
Nature of the S
[...]il. The most noted Forests (wherein the Duke of
Zell usually spends the hunting season of the year, accompanied with several of the neighbouring Princes, Counts, and other Nobles of the Empire) are
Raarbroock, die Roffkammer, Grode, Bergerwald, Kralingerbroeck, im Ringelow, im Lewen, and
im Dromeling. Another great part of the Country is taken up with vast Heaths and Wasts; the largest of which (known by the name of
Die Lunenburgurgische Heyde) lies on the West of the City
Luneburg, being a great share of the Dukedom (for several
German miles together) wholly desart and uninhabited.
The inhabitants of this Country are look'd upon by the rest of the
Germans,Manners of the Inhabitants. as the most rustical, both in language and behaviour, of any in the Empire.
Tacitus can inform us, what stout Warriours the
Dagublini (who were of the Nation of the
Cherusci, and as he guesses, ancient inhabitants of these parts) were in the days of the Emperor
Augustus. For having rebell'd against
Quintilius Varus (the Emperor's proud Lieutenant in the room of
Drusus) under the command of their Captain
Arminius, they put the
Roman General and his whole Army, consisting of three Legions, to the Sword. Which sudden and shameful overthrow so far distracted
[Page][Page][Page 65]the Emperor, as that he was afterwards often observed to beat his head against the posts, and (in the bitterness of his passion and anguish) to cry out,
Redde mihi Legiones, Quantili Vare. The
Luneburgers have not indeed of late given any such Heroic testimony of their valour as this; but are however esteem'd good and hardy Soldiers, being from their Cradles accustom'd to a cold Climate and slender fare.
What kind of Government the ancient
Saxons (of which great Nation the present inhabitants of the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Luneburg are only two small branches) were subject to,
[...]. we have already given the Reader an account. And in the same state of Anarchy and confusion they had probably to this day continued, if the Emperor
Charles the Great had not new modell'd their Government, and made them sensible of the convenience of being constantly subject and obedient to some supreme Rulers and Magistrates. But this he could never effect by Conquest or the Sword; only Religion by degrees reduc'd them into a formal Commonwealth, and the precepts of Christianity first taught them how to obey the Laws of Temporal as well as Spiritual Princes. For the foremention'd Emperor (having won over the greatest part of the Nation to the profession of the Christian Faith) got several Bishoprics erected in many parts of the Land; and perswaded the neighbourhood to pay Tithes and other Church duties to the Prelates he had set over these new Diocesses. And this was the only Government known for some ages after in the Territories which now are known by the names of the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Luneburg. For altho we read, that the Emperor
Lotharius made
Ludolf) great Grandchild to the famous
Wittikind that encountred
Charles the Great) Duke of
Saxony; yet
Crantzius is of opinion, that neither this
Ludolf nor his Successor
Otho had any thing to do with the Lower
Saxony; but were only made Princes of
Thuringen, Meissen, and some other Provinces of the Upper
Saxony. Indeed
Wittikind (an Author of great credit) seems to assert the contrary; telling us, in the first Book of his History, that
Otho (the first
German Emperor of that name) being advanced to the Imperial Throne, left behind him one
Herman, a Baron's Son (so the learned
Meibomius proves him to have been, tho most of the
Dutch Historians say he was descended from much meaner Parentage) whom he made his Lieutenant in these parts; and to encourage him faithfully to discharge his Office, settled several Lands and Tenements upon him and his Heirs for ever. Soon after, the said Emperor returning out of
Italy, (where for some considerable time he had, for weighty reasons, been forc'd to keep his Residence) was so well pleas'd with
Herman's acquitting himself bravely of the Trust reposed in him, that immediately he made him Duke of North-
Saxony, containing all the Territories now subject to the Dukes of
Luneburg and
Lawenburg, together with a great part of the Duke of
Holstein's Dominions. This hap'ned in the year of our Lord 966.
By this means the great Dukedom came to be divided;
[...]kedoms and a new Dukedom (the Princes whereof however stiled themselves Dukes of
Saxony) erected out of it, which was governed by
Herman and his Successors
Bruno, Bernhard, Artolf, and
Magnus. The last of these died without any Heirs male (tho not in the Emperor's Prison, as some Historians have confidently reported, but at home in his own House) in the year 1106. Whereupon the Dukedom of the Lower
Saxony was given by the Emperor
Henry V. to
Lotharius Baron of
Querfurt. After
Lotharius's death
Henry Duke of
Bavaria (surnam'd the
Proud) got possession of this Dukedom; which he challeng'd upon a double account, as having married
Lotharius's Daughter, and being himself the son of
Wolfbilde Daughter to Duke
Magnus, Lotharius's predecessor. But
Albert (surnam'd
Ʋrsus) Marquise of
Brandenburg, oppos'd him with so good success at first, that he was forc'd to quit the City of
Lunenburg, and a great part of the adjoining Territories; out of which nevertheless he made a shift to beat back
Albert at last, and so made himself Master of the whole Dukedom. The pretensions which
Albert had to this Dukedom, were grounded upon his being Son to Duke
Magnus's eldest Daughter
Elicke; whereas
Henry was only descended from the younger, and therefore had the worse Title, if his Father-in-Law
Lotharius's Right had prov'd insignificant.
This
Henry left behind him one only Son,
Henry surnam'd
the Lion; a Prince of so great and fortunate undertakings in war, that the
German Chronicles are full of his exploits. Some of the
Dutch Historians tell us, he extended his Dominions from the
Rhine to the
Elb; others say, from the
Adriatic to the
Baltic Sea; a third sort go yet further, and make him Lord of
Holstein and a great part of
Denmark. Certain it is, he was a victorious Prince, and Ruler over more Provinces then any of his Successors could lay claim to. But his large Dukedom was broken in pieces by the Emperor (as we had occasion to tell the Reader before), and himself reduc'd from a great Duke of
Saxony, and Lord of all the neighbouring Territories, to a mean and inconsiderable Duke of
Brunswic and
Luneburg.
Hitherto we have found the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Luneburg united and subject to one Prince.
Dukes of Lunenburg. But upon the death of this
Henry (which hapned in the year 1195) they were divided. For
Henry the Lion had three Sons,
viz. Duke
Henry, who was afterwards made Prince Palatine of the
Rhine; Duke
Otho, who was advanced to the Imperial Throne; and Duke
William, who succeeded his Father in the Territories of
Luneburg; but only stiled himself
Dominus de Luneburg. And indeed he had but little reason to take upon him any greater Title; since his two Brothers were sharers with him in the Estate of his deceased Father. For
Otho took possession of the City and Country of
Brunswic, and Duke
Henry seized upon
Zell, Bremen, and
Stade.
About the year 1213, Duke
William dy'd, and was succeeded by his only Son
Otho, who afterwards (in the year 1235) was made Duke of
Brunswic by the Emperor
Frideric the Second's
Diploma, which is at this day to be seen in the Duke of
Zell's Archives.
Duke
William dying in the year 1252, left behind him two Sons,
Albert and
John; Albert kept all his Fathers Dominions in his own hands, but at last resign'd the Dukedom of
Luneburg to his Brother
John. Since that time the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Luneburg have been always reckon'd two distinct Principalities, and usually subject to two different Princes.
After this division of the two Dukedoms, Duke
John governed the Dukedom of
Luneburg about eight years; and then (dying in the year 1276) left his Estate to his Son
Otho. By the way we may take notice of a notorious Parachronism in Dr.
Heylin's Cosmography, wherein (reckoning only the eight years Government of Duke
John, without mentioning any power enjoy'd by his Brother
Albert in the Dukedom of
Luneburg)
[Page 66]he brings
Otho II. to the Dukedom in the year 1261, which is fifteen years (exactly the time that Duke
Albert kept possession of both his Father's Dukedoms) before his Father's death.
Otho having reign'd 53 years, and dying in the year 1330, left behind him two Sons,
Otho and
William, who were joint-Governors of the Dukedom of
Luneburg for the space of four and twenty years. After which (upon the death of Duke
Otho without any Heirs male)
William was the sole Governor for some small term of years.
But considering, that upon the failure of issue from himself and his Brother, the Line of
Luneburg was like to be extinct; he resolv'd (during his life-time) to chose himself a Successor. Whereupon, at first, he pitcht upon
Albert Duke of
Saxony, his Brother's Daughter's Son; but afterwards changing his resolution, he resign'd the Dukedom to
Ludowic Duke of
Brunswic, who had married his eldest Daughter
Mechtild.
Duke
Ludowic having govern'd three years, and dying without issue, in the year 1358, was succeeded by
Magnus (surnam'd
mit der ketten, or
Torquatus); to whom the
Luneburgers submitted themselves upon condition, that he should protect them against all injuries offer'd them either by the Emperor
Charles IV. or any of the Dukes of
Saxony. Soon after
Torquatus, upon his Father's death, got possession of the Territories of
Brunswic; and so both Dukedoms were once more united.
But notwithstanding the great confidence they repos'd in their new Prince, and the vast pormises he made them;
Albert Duke of
Saxony (assisted by the foremention'd Emperor
Charles the fourth, in pursuance of his Right as being descended from the elder Brother's Daughter) by force recover'd the Dukedom of
Luneburg in the year 1372, and enjoy'd it fourteen years.
After his death there were great wars betwixt the Houses of
Brunswic and
Saxony; each of them laying claim to, and contending for this Dukedom. At last, in the year 1388
Bernhard Duke
Magnus's Son obtain'd the Government. But soon after
Frideric Duke of
Brunswic being slain in his return from
Francfurt (where he was newly chosen Emperor)
Bernhard was remov'd to
Brunswic, and the Dukedom of
Luneburg given to his Nephew
Henry; who before had some share with him in the Government.
Henry, having been sole Duke of
Luneburg for the space of sixteen years, dyed
A. D. 1416. and was succeeded by his Son
William; who, within a while after, falling out with his Cousin
Otho, Duke
Bernhard's Son, made several incursions into the Dukedom of
Brunswic, many of the most considerable Cities whereof he laid siege to, and took.
Some while after, the quarrels betwixt the two Dukes were composed upon this condition, that they should change Dukedoms; which was accordingly done in the year 1428; and so
Otho was made Duke of
Luneburg, and
William removed to
Brunswic.
Otho's Brother, Duke
Frideric, succeeded him (tho Dr.
Heylin makes him his Predecessor) in the Dukedom of
Luneburg; and having govern'd about fourteen years, quitted the Dukedom, and shut himself up in a Monastery at
Zell in the year 1459.
Hereupon the Government was committed to his two Sons
Bernhard and
Otho; the former of which dyed within five years, and the latter (surving about seven years) left behind him only one young Son, about three years old.
This forced the old Duke
Frideric, in his extreme dotage, to reassume the Government till his Grandchild should come to maturity; he mannaged the Affairs of his Dukedom for seven years longer, dying in the year 1478.
The young Duke
Henry, being not above ten years of age at his Grandfather's death, was assisted in the Government by his mother for some years. Ten years before his death, which hapned in the year 1532, he setled the Dukedom upon his three Sons,
Otho, Ernest, and
Francis.
The first of these, preferring a retired life to the state and grandeur of a Dukedom, resign'd his Right to his Brother
Ernestus during his Father's life; demanding only a certain annual stipend, sufficient for the maintenance of himself and a small family.
This
Ernest (together with his Brother
Francis, who shared with him in the Government till the year 1539, but was afterwards put off with the Lordship of
Giffhorn and Monastery of
Isenhagen) brought in the Reform'd Religion in the year 1530. He died in the year 1546, and was succeeded by his Son
Francis Otho; who, having govern'd about thirteen years, dyed without Issue male, and left the Dukedom to his two Brothers
Henry and
William. These two rul'd peaceably together for the space of ten years; but afterwards they separated themselves, and agreed, that
William should have the sole government of the Dukedom of
Luneburg, and Duke
Henry be content with the Revenues of the Lordship of
Dannenberg and Monastery of
Scharnebeck; to which were afterwards added, the Lordships of
Hitzaker, Luchau, and
Warbke.
In the year 1592, Duke
William died; and was succeeded by his Son
Ernest; who kept the Dukedom of
Luneburg till the year 1611. In which he left it to his Brother
Christian; Elect Bishop of the Diocess of
Minden. This brave Prince govern'd the Dukedom in great peace and prosperity two and twenty years; and enlarg'd it with the Principality of
Grubenhagen.
After his decease, in the year 1633, the Dukedome of
Luneburg fell to his Brother
Augustus, Elect Bishop of
Ratzeburg; upon which incomparable Prince (of whom the Reader may expect a larger account in the description of the Dukedom of
Brunswic) descended not long after, by the death of
Frideric Ʋlric, the Dukedom of
Brunswic.
Whereupon the Dukedom of
Luneburg was given to Duke
George, Lieutenant General of all the forces of the Lower
Saxony, in the year 1636. He left four Sons, whereof the eldest
Christian Ludowic, for some years, govern'd the
Luneburgers; paying each of his younger Brethren an annual stipend of 12000 Ric-dollars. Upon his death the second Brother
George William succeeded in the Government, and kept (as he doth to this day) his Residence in his Brothers Palace at
Zell
By the Treaty of
Hildesheim the Dukedoms of
Calenberg and
Grubenhage were assign'd over to the third Brother
John Frideric; who kept his Residence at
Hannover in much greater state then his Brother at
Zell.
These, and all other Territories subject to the late Duke of
Hannover, are now in the possession of the youngest Brother
Ernest Augustus; who, by the Treaty of
Munster, was made Bishop of
Osnabrug, and is now (upon the death of his Brother
John Frideric this last year 1680) Duke of
Hannover. He married the Lady
Sophia, youngest Sister to our Prince
Rupert,[Page 67]of whom this character is usually given, that she is the most accomplish'd Princess in
Europe; by whom he hath three Sons and a Daughter.
Chief Cities, and other places of greatest note in this Dukedom, are
FIrst,
Luneburg. LUNEBURG. We have already given the Reader an account of the most probable opinion about the original of the name of this City; and but little more can be sai concerning its first Founders, and those that fortified it. The story of
Julius Cesar's laying the first foundation of a City in this place, is (at best) incredible and groundless. There's hardly an ancient City in
Europe which does not pretend to some venerable piece or other of
Julius's Architecture; which tho ordinarily admir'd by the vulgar, yet is contemn'd and laugh'd at by men of sence and knowing Antiquaries. The best testimony of its age I can meet with is
Dithmarus Mersburgensis's mentioning
Luinberg, by the name of
Civitas, in speaking of an Earthquake which hapned in the days of the Emperor
Henry II. But 'tis easie to observe, how the Historians of those times were wont to compliment any mean Village with the title of
Civitas. Yet
Lambertus Schafnaburgensis (an Author of almost as great antiquity as the former) in his account of the transactions of the year 1073. gives this character of
Luneburg, that 'twas then
Oppidum maximum Ottonis Ducis Saxoniae, situm in confinio Saxonum & Luticiorum.
At present the Town contains about two
English miles in circumference; being not built in exact square, but rather an oblong figure. The Streets are broad; and most of the Houses tolerably well built. Over against the Town-hall (which is a neat and compact piece of building) stands the Duke's Palace; where the Duke of
Zell and his Family are lodg'd when he has a mind to reside at
Luneburg.
The chief Trade of the Town is in Salt; which the Citizens make in great abundance, out of certain pits of salt water, which spring within the walls. Their Salt-houses are fenc'd round and continually guarded; as being the main support of the City. These bring in the Duke a considerable yearly Revenue; and besides provision is hereby made for a great number of poor labouring men, who might otherwise starve for want of employment.
II.
Bardewic. BARDEWICK. At this day a Village within a mile of
Luneburg; but anciently a strong and populous City. Some Authors fancy it to have been the first City in
Saxony. And so questionless it was, if it be true (as they pretend to be able to demonstrate) that it was built 990 years before Christ. Over the door of the Cathedral (which is now the only Church left of nine) are wrote in an old
Gothic character these hobling verses:
Abram dum natus mox
Treveris incipit ortus
Hinc annis
Barduic mille sex X quo
(que) quinque
Post
Barduic Roma duo C cum quinque triginta
M C post Nat. junctis octaginta novemque
Dum
Brunsvicensis Henricus Leo dictus
Simonis in festo
Barduic subvertit ab alto.
Meibomius (a learned Antiquary, whom we have already had occasion often to mention) has taken great pains to pick up, out of these Rithms and all other Monuments of note about this Town, a large account of the Antiquity of the place. The name he imagines, (contrary to the humour of some other Historians, who speak of
Bardo a Knight Errant of old, and Founder of
Bardewic) derived from the
Bardi, a Northern people, who wandring a great many years up and down
Saxony and the neighbouring Countries, at last fix'd themselves in this place. Whether these
Bardi may not have been a Tribe of such Poets as Mr.
Cambden, and some other of our Antiquaries, says gave name to
Bardsey, one of our
British Islands, I shall leave to the Reader's judgment; since every Historian that mentions the
Bards, will tell us, that they were the Genealogists amongst the
Gauls (an undoubted branch of the
German Nation) as well as the
Britains.
The Verses before-mention'd will inform us, that this great City was destroy'd by Duke
Henry (surnam'd the
Lion) on St.
Simon and
Jude's day in the year 1189. Since that time it has never been able to recover its glory; and is now remarkable for nothing but a College of Eight Residentiary Canons and some few Vicars.
III. ULTZEN. A neat uniform little Town,
Ʋltren. about the middle way betwixt
Lunenburg and
Zell. 'Twas anciently call'd
Lawenwald, i. e. Lion-Forest; as appears from several of its old Records, and an inscription to this day legible on the North-side of the Town-hall. And from this its old name the Arms (or
Rebus rather) of the Town are still, a Lion Passant
Azure, in a Field
Verd, betwixt Three Trees of the
Second. The modern name
Ʋltzen it had from the neighbouring Monastery of
Olden-Stadt; which, as is evident from several ancient Writings, bearing date
A. D. 1255 and 1338, was formerly call'd
Old-Ʋlssen. On the twentieth of
September in the year 1646, this City was miserably destroy'd by a fire which in a very short time burnt down the fairest and richest part of it. This blow it has hardly yet so well recover'd as to be entirely rebuilt; but however the most considerable streets and places of consequence are very much advanc'd by it, and the new buildings are everywhere more regular and splendid then the former.
The Citizens have a Tradition among them, that the first
English Saxons that came over into
Britain were sent from hence; and they tell us farther, that in remembrance of the good success they had met with in our Island, some of them returning, hung up a gilt Ship of Tin in the Market-place; which was to be seen here before the fire above mention'd.
IV. ZELL.
Zell. This City (famous for the usual Residence of the Dukes of
Luneburg) on a sandy level, at the confluence of two small Rivers, the
Aller and
Fuhse; about ten
German miles distant from
Luneburg, six from
Brunswic, ten from
Bremen, and thirteen from
Hamburg. The word
Zell in the language of some of the Lower
Saxons, signifies the same with the High
Dutch Kellar, or our
English word
Cellar; but for what reason the Town should have this name given it, I cannot determine. In an old Parchment Deed (bearing date
A. D. 1236, which to this day may be seen in the Duke of
Zell's Archives) whereby
Sigefride Count of
Osterburg, makes over a great part of this Country to
Otho Duke of
Brunswic and
Luneburg, we read
ministeriales suos Tselle
usque Breman. And another Indenture made between
Henry's (surnam'd the
Lion) Sons (dated
A. D. 1203, and still to be seen in the same place) mentions this Town
[Page 68]by the aforesaid name. Higher then these times its Antiquity cannot be traced; and whether 'twas in those days a City, wall'd Town, or only a bare Castle, we know not.
The Duke's Palace (as it now stands, being a square piece of building, moted round, and beautified with a great many pleasant Gardens, Orchards, Grotto's,
&c.) was first built by
Henry Duke of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg and
Ann (born Countess of
Nassaw) his mother in the year 1485. In this Palace are held the chief Courts of Judicature for the Dukedom of
Luneburg.
V.
Walstrode. WALSTRODE, or
Walo's-Cross. At first only a Monastery built by one
Walo, a Prince of
Anhalt, in the year 986, but afterwards advanc'd into a considerable Town.
Walo's Statue is still to be seen in the Church with this inscription on its pedestal,
Illustris Princeps Walo
de Anholt
Comes in Aschania,
&c Dominus in Berneborch
est fundator hujus Monasterii. It is situate in a very pleasant Valley, encompass'd on every side with Mountains and Woods. The chief trade of of the inhabitants consists in Honey, Wax, Wool, and Beer.
Harborch, Winsen, Gifhorn, notable for a strong Palace belonging to the Duke of
Lunenburg, with some other places of the like value, are only just considerable enough to merit a distinct character in the Map from poor Villages; but have nothing in them so remarkable as to deserve a a particular description. The truth is, the greatest part of the Dukedom of
Luneburg is a poor and barren Country; and its inhabitants are scarce any where so rich as that they need to wall in their Towns, or be afraid of the invasion of an Enemy.
The most notable places in the Counties of
Diepholt, Hoye, and
Schawenburg, subject to the Dukes of
Luneburg, the Reader will find describ'd in the next Volume; when we come to treat of all the little Provinces which are usually comprehended under the general name of
Westphalia.
ALTHO at this day Geographers can hardly meet with any such place as
Mecklenburg, from whence this Dukedom should have its name; yet the
German Historians will inform us, that the small Village (not far from
Wismar) which still bears that name, was anciently a large and populous City. And some of their Antiquaries pretend to be able to shew us its
Rudera near this place, for some miles in compass.
J. Peters (in his Chronicle of the Dukes of
Holstein) tells us, that this Village is the ruins of a very ancient City; which, says he, was built above three hundred years before Christ by
Anthyrius the first Duke of the
Heruli, or
Mecklenburgers. But we know, what kind of credit to give to such Romantic Chronologers as this; who impertinently pretends to trace the Annals of his Country thro those dark days of ignorance wherein he must necessarily lose himself and truth.
Cluverius and
Bertius are exceedingly displeas'd with that universal humour of
Latin (who mention this Country) of rendring
Mecklenburg by
Megalopolis or
Megapolis, and the
Mecklenburgers by
Megapolitani. Such Etymologists as these, says
Cluver, are but Novices in the
German tongue. For the word
Mecklenburg is not (as they imagin) deriv'd from the old
Saxon word
Micle or
Mickel (ordinarily met with in our ancient
English-Saxon Monuments, and still used in some parts of
England); but from the
Dutch Verb
Mecklen, whence
Meckler, which (in the language of all the Northern
Germans that inhabit the Sea-Coasts) signifies as much as
Proxineta, Pararius, a Broker; so that
Mecklenburg had not its name, as
Megalopolis in
Arcadia, from the vastness of its extent (altho
Lindebergius reports it to have been above eight
English miles in length and twenty in circumference); but from the great resort of Merchants to this place. For being the Metropolis of these parts, and the Seat (as 'tis suppos'd) of
Bilunaus, Misilaus, Mistevus, Pribislaus, and several other Kings and Princes of the
Vandals; we may reasonably conclude, that all foreign Merchants (who probably were not very numerous) that traded in this part of
Germany, kept their Factors and Brokers at this City.
The whole Dukedom of
Mecklenburg (subject to the two Dukes of
Gustrow and
Swerin) is bounded on the East with the Dukedom of
Pomeren; on the North with the
Baltic Sea;
Bounds. on the West with some part of the Dukedoms of
Holstein and
Saxon-Lauwenburg; and on the South with the Marquisate of
Brandenburg.
The Country has more in it of profit then pleasure;
Commodities. being plentifully stock'd with all sorts of Corn and Fruits (especially Apples), and well stor'd with Fowl and Fish; but situate in an air very unwholsom in the Summer, and intolerably sharp and cold in the Winter. Besides the advantage of the
Baltic Sea, and a great number of Rivers every-where to be met with in this Dukedom, their Lakes (many of which are very large) afford them good store of all manner of fresh Fish. Insomuch, that at the Marriage-feast of
Henry Duke of
Mecklenburg-Swerin with
Helen Daughter to the Elector Palatine, were serv'd up to the Table five thousand Breams; all of which were fresh, and newly taken out of the great Lake near
Swerin.
Some Romantic Genealogists have endeavour'd to bring down the Line of the Dukes of
Mecklenburg from some of
Alexander the Great's Generals.
Government. The first original of which fancy sprung from the Duke of
Mecklenburg's bearing an Horse's Head (which these Heralds are pleas'd to call the Head of
Bucephalus) in their Eschutceons. And indeed the generality of
German Antiquaries fetth their pedigree from
Anthyrius (the foremention'd Founder of the City of
Mecklenburg); whom they unanimously report to have liv'd in the days of that great Conqueror. From his Loins (after several generations) descended
Billiengus, a potent King of the
Vandals; whose Mother, say some, was
Charles the Great's Sister. He was the first that (after his own conversion)
[Page 70]brought in the profession of Christianity into
Mecklenburg; tho afterwards, at the instigation of his Son
Micislaus, both himself and all his Subjects turn'd Apostates. The next famous Prince of
Mecklenburg was
Gottschalck (surnam'd the
Godly), who would often himself take the pains to preach Christianity to his Subjects; by whom he was at last, for his Religion, murder'd in the year 1066. From him descended (amongst many others)
Henry II. who dying in the year 1228, left behind him two Sons
Nicolot and
John. From the former of these sprang all the succeeding Princes of the
Vandals until
William the last Prince of that Line, who died in the year 1430. From the later (surnam'd
Knese Janko, or
John the Divine; because he had taken a Doctor of Divinity's degree in the University at
Paris) are descended the present Dukes of
Mecklenburg. This
John left behind him
Henry (who was six and twenty years kept prisoner by the
Turks) Father to
Henry surnam'd the
Lion; whose two Sons,
Albert and
John, Dukes of
Mecklenburg, were by the Emperor
Charles IV. created Princes of the Empire in the year 1349. Which is not to be understood (tho I find this construction put upon it by several of the modern
German Historians) as if these two Princes, before
Charles's creation, had been only ordinary Lords or Barons of
Mecklenburg, and by the Emperor advanc'd to the dignity of Princes or Dukes. For from him they receiv'd no more than an admission into the number of the Estates of the Empire; under whose protection they were brougth by making themselves members thereof, upon condition they should be subject to its Laws, and contribute to its necessities.
Albert's eldest Son (
Albert II.) was chosen King of
Sweden, and not long after taken prisoner by
Margaret Queen of
Denmark; by whom, after several years imprisonment, he was at last releas'd upon the payment of a vast ransom. So that the management of the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg was committed to his Brother
Magnus; a Prince that (if we believe
Chytraeus, who in his first Book of the
Saxon Chronicle has given him a noble character) was
nomine & re Magnus, endow'd with all the excellent qualities that are requisite to make a brave Prince. His Son
John, who succeeded his Father in the Dukedom, founded the University at
Rostock in the year 1419. This Duke's Successors
Henry the
Fat, and
Magnus II. (Founder of the Cathedral Church at
Rostock) upon the death of
William the last Prince of the
Vandals, made themselves Masters of the whole Land of
Mecklenburg. After the death of this
Magnus, and his Son
Albert II. the Dukedom came to his Grandchild
John Albert in the year 1547, who first brought in the
Lutheran Confession into his Dominions, by demolishing Popish Abbeys, and converting their Revenues to the use of the University at
Rostock. His Son
John III. (who died in the year 1592) left two Sons; the eldest was
Adolph Frideric, who married
Ann-Mary Countess of East
Frisland; by whom, amongst other children, he had
Christian-Ludowic the present Duke of
Mecklenburg-Swerin. His youngest Son was
Gustavus Adolphus; who seated himself at
Gustrow. In the late Civil Wars in
Germany, the whole Land of
Mecklenburg was overrun by the Imperial Army; and the Dukedom conferr'd upon their ambitious (and at last unfortunate) General
Albrecht, Duke of
Friedland. However, within a little while after, the two Dukes (
Adolph Frideric and
John Albrecht) were reinstated in their Dominions by
Gustavus Adolphus, the victorious King of
Sweden, their Kinsman. For a character of the present Dukes of
Mecklenburg the Reader may have recourse to the following descriptions of
Swerin and
Gustrow, the places of their residence.
The strength of these Princes would be considerable enough,
Milit
[...] strength. sufficient to secure their own Territories, and keep their neighbours in awe, if firmly united. Their equal pretensions to the sole government of the City and University at
Rostock, did formerly occasion some animosities between the two Houses; but this quarrel has for some years last past been quite laid aside; and now a difference in Religion (the Duke of
Swerin being a
Romanist, and he of
Gustrow a
Lutheran) is the greatest cause of their mutual fears and jealousies. Heretofore they thought it their chief interest to adhere to the
Swedes, and secure themselves under the wings of the potent Kings of that Nations; but when after the many conquests of the brave
Gustavus Adolphus the power of those Princes grew so formidable as to threaten an universal slavery to their neighbours round about them, rather then the defence of any of their Liberties, the Dukes of
Mecklenburg thought it high time to relinquish that party, and join with the
Dane and
Branburger in opposing their common enemy, the King of
Sweden. They saw
Wismar rent out of their hands, without any probability of being ever recover'd; and they had reason to fear, that a great part of the adjoining Country would follow it, if their ruin were not timely prevented by the strength of their new Allies.
The whole Land of
Mecklenburg (so much I mean as is now subject to the two Dukes which bear that Title) is usually divided into these six parts:
Territries. The Dukedomes of
Mecklenburg (strictly so call'd) and
Vandalia; the Earldom of
Swerin; the Baronies of
Rostock and
Stargard; and the Bishopric of
Butzow. In the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg are reckon'd the Cities of
Wismar (to which is the neighbouring Island
Poel)
Tempsin, Gades, Rhena, and
Bucow. In the Dukedom of
Vandalia, Gustrow, Sterneberg, Malchin, Stavenhagen, Ivenack, Neu-Calven, Warin, Pentzlin, Rebell, Wredenhagen, Malchau, Tetrou, Goltberg, Parchum, Plage, Lupsian, Grabou, Domitz, Neu-Statt, Eldenau, and
Gorlosen. In the Barony of
Rostock, the City of
Rostock, Ribnitz, Gnoien, Tessin, Laga, Schwan, Salines, and
Morlou. In the Barony of
Stargard, Brandeburg, Stargard, Furstenburg, Strelitz, Mirow, Fredland, and
Wesenberg. And lastly in the Bishopric of
Butzow, the City of
Butzow and the Peninsula of
Swerin.
The most considerable Cities in the Dukedom of
MECKLENBURG.
I.
LUBEC.
Lubec. This City is indeed situate in
Wagerland, and (for that reason) we have already given the Reader some short account of it in the Description of
Denmark; but because it is of it self an Imperial City, wholly independant upon the Crown of
Denmark, and immediately subject to the Emperor of
Germany, we have reserv'd a more particular survey of it for this place. And it cannot so properly be referr'd to any particular Province of the Empire as the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg. For (altho the Citizens of
Lubec do not pay any manner of tribute or homage to the Princes of
Mecklenburg, yet) it may perhaps as justly be reckon'd part of that
[Page 71]Dukedom, as
Bremen (which never yet acknowledg'd any subjection to the Kings of
Sweden) may be esteem'd part of that Principality which now bears the name of the Dukedom of
Bremen.
The name of this City is fetcht by some from one
Luba, a famous Fisherman that heretofore pitcht his Tents upon the Sea-shore in the same place where afterwards the great City of
Lubec was built. But this fiction is of the same stamp with the frivolous Etymologies, with which some of our
English Historians have furnish'd us, of
Britain from
Brutus, and
London from King
Lud. Others tell us, that
Lubec, in the old
Wendish tongue, signifies a Crown; and therefore would perswade us, that this Town had its name from the preeminence which (immediately after its first foundation) it might justly challenge amongst the other Cities of
Germany. Whence
Lindebergius (alluding to this Etymology) concludes his
Elogium in the praise of
Lubec with this Distich,
Et decus Europae, & lumen sit totius Ansae,
Et sit Vandalici pulchra
Corona soli.
But the most probable opinion is (what we have before mention'd) that the name is truly
High-Dutch; and signifies no more than (
Lob-eck or
ein eck des lobes) a corner of Land, for upon such a plot of ground 'tis situate, commendable for something or other in it extraordinary and notable.
The
Polish Historians (particularly
J. Ludowic Decius in his History of
Sigismund II. King of
Poland) are very zealous in asserting, that this great City owes its birth to the Princes of their Country; who having made themselves Masters of all this part of
Germany, built a Fort and (in some short time after) a wall'd Town in that neck of land upon which
Lubec stands. But the
Germans as vigorously oppose this assertion; affirming, that
Godschalck (a certain King of the
Vandals) laid the first foundation of the Town
A. D. 1040, which small beginnings were enlarg'd into the bulk of a considerable City by
Crito, a Prince of
Rugen, in the year 1104, or (as others) 1087. But however this is certain, that it was never a City, nor had any Charter confirm'd to it, before it had been once utterly ruin'd and laid desolate by
Ratzo Prince of
Rugen, in the year 1134, and rebuilt by
Adolph II. Earl of
Holstein A. D. 1140; who, being unable to defend any part of his Territories against the victorious Duke of
Saxony and
Bavaria (
Henry II. surnam'd the
Lion) was forc'd to yeild up to him
Lubec amongst the other conquer'd parts of his Dominions. Afterwards, when success and pride had swell'd
Henry to that height as to make him neglect his duty and allegiance to the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa, and to side with the Pope in a quarrel against him; he was by the said Emperor publicly proscrib'd, and devour'd by the joint forces of his neighbour Princes, every one laying hold of that part of his Estates which lay next him. In this confusion
Lubec was besieg'd and taken by the Emperor himself; but after his death restor'd to the foremention'd Duke
Henry. Afterwards it was conquer'd by
Waldemar Duke of
Sleswic, and Brother to
Canutus King of
Denmark. But not long after the Citizens (finding themselves too severely treated by their
Danish Lords) put their City under the protection of the Emperor
Frideric II. who granted them several priviledges and immunities, and restor'd them to the ancient Liberties which they had enjoy'd under their first Masters. Since that time
Lubec has continued an Imperial City, being always reckon'd one of the chief in the Empire, and the Metropolis of the
Hans-Towns.
The Bishopric of
Lubec (which since
John Adolph Duke of
Holstein was elected Bishop of that See in the year 1596, has always been in the possession of some of the younger Brothers of that House) was first founded by the Emperor
Otho I. at
Oldenburg in
Wagerland, and afterwards removed hither (with the permission of the Emperor
Frideric I.) by
Henry the
Lion; Duke of
Saxony, in the year 1163.
There is not any City in the Northern parts of the
German Empire which at this day excels (or perhaps can equalize)
Lubec either in beauty or uniformity of its Buildings, or pleasantness of its Gardens and Groves. The Streets are generally strait and even; the Houses being all built with Brick, and cover'd with Tyles. In the year 1238, a great fire hap'ning in the City burnt down many of their Streets, which at that time consisted of Houses made of Timber, and cover'd with Thatch; whereupon the Senators of the City made an Order, that thenceforward no such Houses should be built within the walls of the Town. From the public Conduit they have water convey'd by pipes into every Citizen's private House; according to which pattern the Conduits in
London, and other great Cities in
Europe, were first contrived. The Streets are in several places graced with rows of Linden Trees planted on each side. The Churches (about twenty in number) are generally well built and adorn'd with high Steeples or Spires; especially the Cathedral, dedicate to St.
Mary, which is a piece of as curious Architecture as most in
Germany.
The River
Trave (on which
Lubec is seated, about eight or ten
English miles from the Sea) is large and deep enough to carry the largest Vessels that sail upon the
Baltic. So that daily Merchant-men of the greatest bulk, as well as flat bottom'd Barges, are brought up to the Walls of the City; which, with its neighbour
Hamburg, is thought to maintain near six hundred Vessels in continual traffick.
The City is govern'd by twelve Burgo-masters; who are all of them either Doctors of Civil Law, or some of the grave and experienc'd Nobility of the City. The Common Council is made up of half Lawyers and Nobles, and the other half Merchants. Their Laws will not permit any Handicrafts-man, two Brothers, nor Father and Son, to be of this great Council of the City; supposing that illiterate Mechanics can hardly have so much skill in State-affairs as will render them fit for Government, and that near Relations will be apt to side with one another, and not act with such unbyass'd judgments as others that are nothing akin.
II. WISMAR.
Wismar. Seated in the way betwixt
Lubec and
Rostoc, at an equal distance (namely seven
German, or one and twenty
English miles) from both those Cities.
Cromer and
Vapovius, zealous assertors of the honour of their Country, derive the name of this City from one
Wissimir its founder; who, they tell us, was a
Polish Prince descended from their Great Duke
Lechus. The grounds of their story they borrow from
Saxo Grammaticus and
Crantzius; who report, that
Wissimirus, a Prince of the
Vandals, march'd with a good Army into
Denmark, and there slew
Siward King of the
Danes, and at his return built
Wismar. Now, these men imagining, that
Princeps Vandalicus and
[Page 72]Vendicus signifie the same thing, conclude presently, that this
Wissimir must certainly have been a
Pole; and then the greatest honour they can do him is to bring him from the Loins of
Lechus. Whereas, granting the main part of
Crantzius's story (which nevertheless is undoubtedly false) that
Wismar was indeed built by such a Prince as he mentions; yet upon examination we shall find, that this
Wisimir, if ever there was any such man, must have slain
Siward about the year of Christ 340, and we never hear of Duke
Lechus in
Poland before the year 550, nay some say he began his Government in the year 644. Wherefore, omitting these impertinent contradictions and anticronisms, it is certain, that
Wismar had its name from the convenience of its situation;
Wis-meer signifying no more then a safe and secure part of the Ocean, such an one as that is upon which this City is now seated. Nor is the Town so ancient as they would make it; but first built (or at least made a City) out of the ruins of
Mecklenburg which (as hath been already said) was once the Metropolis of this whole Dukedom, about the year 1250, or as some will have it 1238, by
Gunceline II. Earl of
Swerin.
Afterwards
Henry Duke of
Mecklenburg (for his great performances in the Holy Land surnam'd
Hierosolymitanus) brought hither the Statutes and Ordinances observed in the Government of the City of
Lubec, and new modell'd
Wismar about the year 1266. From which time it grew so extravagantly great and populous, that within a very short time it was reckon'd one of the chief
Hans-Towns; and was made the Harbour for all the Men of War belonging to that Society. This engaged the whole Community to contribute towards its fortification; insomuch, that within the compass of a very few years, it became almost impregnable. By the Treaty of
Munster the City and Haven of
Wismar, with the Castle of
Wallfrisch, and the Peninsula of
Pole (excepting the Villages of
Schedorff, Weitendorff, Brandenhusen, and
Wangeren, which belong to the Hospital of the Holy Ghost in
Lubec), as also
Newen-Closter, were given up to the
Swedes; since which time the King of
Sweden has always stiled himself Lord of
Wismar. But in these late Wars between the two Northern Crowns, the City of
Wismar (amongst many others) was taken by the present victorious King of
Denmark, Christian V.
Altho it was agreed by the Eighth Article of the Treaty of Peace signed at
Fountainblaeu on the second day of
September in the year 1679, by the
French and
Danish Ministers, that
Wismar and
Rugen should be restor'd to the
Swedes within three weeks after the ratification of the said Treaty; yet in a second Treaty sign'd on the twenty-sixth day of the same month at
Lunden in
Schonen, it was agreed, that
Wismar should remain in the hands of the King of
Denmark, as a surety for the arrears of certain Contributions due from that King to the Crown of
Sweden.
This obligation it seems is not yet cancell'd; for the
Danes to this day keep possession of this great Town, and are not like to be forc'd in any short time to yeild it up.
III.
Rostock. ROSTOCK. A City of great antiquity; if we believe the stories which some of the
German Antiquaries report of it. For they tell us, that this is the very place which several of the ancient
Roman Writers point at when they report great things of
Lacinium, Rhodopolis, and
Laciburgium; all which names the modern Historians appropriate to
Rostock. But how its name came at last to be chang'd (for there seems to be but little affinity betwixt
Lacinium or
Laciburgium and
Rostock, altho
Rhodopolis come something nearer to the modern name) they cannot so easily determine. Some think the word
Rostock, or
Rostzogz a compound of two old
Wendish Monosyllables, signifying as much as a confluence of two Rivers. So that this City, according to this derivation, had its name at first for the same reason that several great Towns in
France are at this day nam'd
Confluent. The
Polish writers say, the name was first given it by some of their Country-men; in whose language
Rostock signifies a moist or boggy place.
P. Lindebergius (in his Chronocle of
Rostoch) proves from inscriptions upon the Seal of the City, and other ancient Monuments, that the true name of the Town is
Rotzstock; and he guesses, that this name was first given it from a great Red Pillar (
von einem rothen
saul oder stock) which in the days of Paganism and Idolatry was worshipp'd by the Inhabitants of these parts. And this conjecture seems most agreeable to the name of
Rhodopolis before-mention'd; not to mention its being back'd with the authority of a learn'd man and great Antiquary.
But whatever grand conceit the
Mecklenburgers may have of the antiquity of this City; 'tis certain, that in the year 329, 'twas only a small inconsiderable Village built by some poor Fishermen on the banks of the
Warna, and consisting of a few slender Tents rather then Houses. Afterwards it was advanc'd into a small City by
Gotheschalk King of the
Heruli; and by his successor
Primislaus the Second, notably enlarged about the year 1160. At last
Burevinus (
Primislaus's Son) made it a compleat City; having been at the charges of walling it about, and new modelling it according to the Laws and Constitutions of the City of
Lubeck. Burevinus's Charter (which the Citizens of
Rostock shew to this day amongst other records of their Corporation) is signed in the year 1218.
At this Day it consists of three parts; the Old, New, and Middle City; in all which are reckoned 140 Streets, and many thousands of high and stately Citizens Houses. The most memorable things in
Rostock, are usually by the
Mecklenburgers (in their
Saxon Dialect) reckoned up in the following Rithms.
Seven doren tho St. Marien-karcke.
Seven Straten van den grooten Marckle.
Seven thore so der gahn tho lande.
Seven kopmans bruggen by dem strande.
Seven torne so up den Radthuss staan.
Seven Klocken die daar daglycken slaan.
Seven linden op den Rosen-garden.
Dat syn die Rostocker kennewarten.
i. e.
There are seven times seven remarkable things in
Rostock. 1. Seven great doors to the Cathedral Church of St.
Mary. 2. Seven large Streets leading to the chief Market-place. 3. Seven Gates of the City, towards the Land. Seven Bridges over the
Warna; (which runs through several places of the Town.) 5. Seven Towers on the top of the Town Hall. 6. Seven great Bells which chime at certain hours in the Town Clock. 7. Seven vast Linden trees in the Common Garden. But of late years one of their Bridges (being decayed with age) fell down, and because of no great use, has not since been repaired: so that one of their Septenaries is fail'd.
The most notable Commodity of the Town is Beer: which is here brewed and carryed into several parts of
Germany and other Nations. A
[Page 73]Rostocker will tell us, that yearly by the 250 priviledged Brewers in this City, there are at least so many thousand Tun of Beer brewed; besides the vast quantities which many of the Private Citizens (men especially of the chiefest rank and repute) must be supposed to brew for their own use.
The University at
Rostock (which is now one of the largest and best stockt in the
German Empire) was first founded by
John and
Albert Dukes of
Mecklenburg (two Cousin Germans) in the year 1419. The Corporation of the City bore it seems half the charges of the foundation: and therefore 'twas then ordered (by a Decree still in force) that half of the Professors should be chosen by the Dukes of
Mecklenburg, and the other half by the Burgomasters and Radtshern of the Town. The
Rector Magnificus (as they are pleased to intitle the chief Magistrate of their University) is chosen every half year, as in most other
German Universities, by turns, out of the two Companies of Professors. He has power to call Convocations, and appoint times for meeting of the other Professors on all extraordinary occasions; as collecting or disbursing any part of their common-Treasure, or the like. In matters of greater weight and moment then are usually debated, he has an Assistant (whom they call
Promotor) chosen out of the Seniors of the eighteen Professors. The University was at first stocked with Professors from
Leipsic and
Erfurt; who all of them received their Licences to teach and read in publick, together with a Charter of priviledges and body of Statutes, from Pope
Martin V. The Bishop of
Swerin is their perpetual Chancellor; who commonly deputes one of the Senior Professors his Vice-Chancellor at any public Promotion or taking of Degrees, when he himself is not at leisure to give a personal attendance. Amongst many other learned men that have been bred in this University
Albert Crantzius, John Posselius and
Nathan Chytraeus (three famous Historians) have got themselves and the place of their education great credit by their elaborate writings.
The Citizens are subject to a kind of mixt government; made up of Aristocracy and Democracy. The Democratical part consists of twenty four Aldermen, chosen out of the Nobility, Scholars and rich Merchants of the Town; whereof four are Burgomasters, two Chamberlains, two Stewards for the River, and two Judges. The Chamberlains collect and distribute all manner of Assesments for the reparations of public buildings in and about the City. The two Stewards are overseers of the Haven at
Warnemund; and look to the cleansing of the Channel from that Port up to the City. The Judges determine and pass sentence in all causes Civil and Criminal. These twenty four Magistrates of the upper House decide all ordinary Controversies, and have the sole power of coining money, chusing Officers,
&c. But besides them there are in the Town a hundred more Common-Councilmen elected out of the inferior Tradesmen of the Town; who are summon'd to appear and give their opinions upon debate of any matter of more then ordinary concernment to the common welfare.
Though the River
Warna be navigable up to the Walls of the City of
Rostock; yet it is not deep enough to carry Ships of the largest bulk, but such Vessels are forced to take harbour at
Warnemund (so called, because situate on the mouth of the River) a small Town, about seven
English miles distant from
Rostock. Since the Treaty of
Munster the
Swedes built a Fort on the mouth of this River; by the strength of which, and a good Garison always kept in it, they exacted a toll or custom of all Merchantmen that pass'd this way from or towards
Rostock, to the great decay of trade in this City, and impoverishing of its inhabitants. This Castle was in the late wars between the Northern Crowns demolished; and thereby a stop put to the
Swedish encroachments. Whereupon the Ministers for the Dukes of
Mecklenburg in the last general Treaty at
Nimeguen were very diligent in soliciting the Mediators for a redress of this grievance: which they represented as a violation of an express Article in the
Westphalian Treaty. With Memorials and Petitions to this purpose our
English Mediatours by the Duke of
Gustrow's Minister, and the Popes Nuncio on the other hand by the Duke of
Swerin's, were continually wearied in the latter end of the year 1678; and beginning of 1679. Their importunity prevailed so far at last as to have the following clause inserted into the first Proposal of a Treaty betwixt the Emperor and King of
Sweden. Omni casu salva sint Dominis Ducibus Mecklenburgicis
sine turbatione competentia jura, & sublatum maneat vectigal seu telonium Warnemundense,
cum omnimoda aliarum quae ibi motae sunt, pretensionum abolitione, & portus Warnmundensis
relinquatur in pristina, & qua nunc gaudet, commerciorum libertate. But the
Swedish Plenipotentaries in all their conferences with the Imperial Ambassadours upon this Subject constantly denied that they had instructions to meddle with it; and the Imperialists were willing to omit the insertion of this point rather then delay the signing of the other Articles till new Instructions could be procured from the
Swedish Court. So that all the satisfaction the Princes of
Mecklenburg had, was a compliment from the Emperour's Plempotentiaries, shewing the great care their Master would be always ready to take in asserting their Rights and Priviledges, as well as those of any other member of the
German Empire, against the encroachments of any Foreign Enemy whatever, and a Certificate under their hands that their Ministers had used all imaginable diligence in the discharge of their duty.
Neque defuerunt, say they,
durante hoc congressu officio suo praedictorum Dominorum Ducum (
i. e. Mecklenburgicorum)
Ablegati, Dominus Antonius Bessel
& Dominus Joannes Reuter,
sed omnes partes impleverunt, quae a Ministrorum fide, dexteritate, & vigilantia expectari possunt In quorum omnium fidem, Legatio Caesarea praesentes hasce a se subscriptas sigillis suis munivit. Dabantur Neomagi
duodecima Februarii Anno 1679.
IV. SWERIN.
Swerin. Situate (at about fifty
English miles distance from
Rostock) upon a great Lake; which from the name of this City, is usually by the Neighbourhood called
Der Swerinsche See. It was built and fortfied by
Henry, surnamed the
Lion, Duke of
Saxony; who (soon after its first foundation which is said to have been in the year 1163.) bestowed this City with all the Territories and Lordships thereunto belonging upon
Guntzel or
Gunceline, one of the Generals in his Army, whom he made Earl of
Swerin. His son
Henry who succeeded his father in the Earldom, was a great favourite of the Emperour
Otho IV, and well deserved all the honour his master could confer on him. He took
Woldemar King of
Denmark, prisoner in his own Kingdom; brought him bound into
Saxony in triumph; and kept him in close custody in the Castle at
Danneberg, till his Subjects had almost reduced themselves to beggary by paying ransome. The last Earl of this Family was
Otho; who died in the year 1355. His only daughter (and child)
Richardis was married to
Albrecht Duke of
Mecklenburg: for which reason the Earldom of
Swerin, after
Otho's death was annexed to the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg.
The Bishoprick of
Swerin was removed from
[Page 74]Mecklenburg to this City. The first Bishop of this Diocess was one
Johannes Scotus; who (in the fourth year of his Prelacy,
A. D. 1066) was martyred by the
Wendish Apostates in these parts. After his cruel and inhumane death (for his murderers are reported to have cut of his hands and feet, and in that miserable condition to have left him alive for some days) the Seat was vacant for 83 or 84 years: until
Eberhard was sent hither by the Emperour
Conrad III, in the year 1260. This mans successour (
Bruno, Berno or
Benno, was removed from
Mecklenburg to
Swerin; when
Henry the Lion, by the permission of the Emperor
Frederick the First, had built a new Cathedral and endowed it with considerable revenues. Some of the
Mecklenburgish Historians report that much about the time of the foundation of this new Cathedral, the said Duke
Henry caused the Infidel
Mecklenburgers to be driven by thousands into the
Swerin-Sea at a place not far from
Fichel (which from so remarkable a passage to this day retains the name of
Die Dope or the
Font) where they were all baptized by Bishop
Benno. From this
Benno there continued an uninterrupted succession of Bishops of
Swerin (who nevertheless kept their usual residence at
Butzow, a Fort and considerable Town not far from
Gustrow) until, in the Treaty of
Munster, the Bishoprick was converted into a Temporal Principality; and given up to
Adolph Frideric Duke of
Mecklenburg; as before hath been said.
In this City is kept the Residence of
Christian-Lewis Duke of
Mecklenburg Swerin; who was born the first of
December 1623, and by being educated in
France and under the protection of Romanists, was brought up in the faith of the Church of
Rome: which he still professes. He married at first his Cousin German
Christina-Margaret, daughter of
John Albert Duke of
Mecklenburg and widow of
Francis Albert Duke of
Saxen-Lawenburg. But having upon some discontent got himself divorced from her, he was the second time married in
France A. D. 1653,) to
Elizabeth de Montmorency, widow of
Gaspard de Coligny Duke of
Chastillon and Sister to
Francis-Henry de Montmorency Duke of
Luxemburg Piney.
V. GUSTROW. A well fortified Town,
Gustrow. about eighteen or twenty
English miles distant from
Rostock; but remarkable for little or nothing save the residence of
Gustave-Adolph Duke of
Mecklenburg-Gustrow, only son of
John Albert Duke of
Mecklenburg and
Eleonor-Mary Princess of
Anhalt. He was born the six and twentieth of
February A. D. 1633, and bred up a
Lutheran; of which perswasion he still continues a zealous assertor; being a Prince of as great Learning as Gallantry, and equally able to maintain his Religion in the Schools and Field.
IT matters not much whether we fetch the word
Pomeren out of the
High-Dutch or
Slavonian Language: since
Pomeer in the former signifies the same thing as
Pomercze in the latter
i. e. A Country situate upon the Sea-shore; such as the Dukedom of
Pomeren is known to be. That the
Slavonian tongue was once commonly spoken in this Country, appears from the termination of several names of great Towns in this Dukedom: as
Bugslaw, Wratislaw, Witslaw, &c. And Historians will inform us that the whole land was many years subject to the Princes of
Poland, and first annexed to the Empire of
Germany by the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa.
The whole Tract of Land which was antiently comprised under the general name of
Pomeren or
Pomerland was of a much larger extent then the present Dukedom;
[...]. taking in (Eastward) all
Casubia and
Pomerellia. But afterwards this vast Countrey was by the Princes of
Back-Pomerland (for by this name 'twas antiently distinguished from the present Dukedom of
Pomeren; which in those days was called
Fore-Pomerland) was given up into the hands of the Princes of
Poland; in whose possession it has ever since continued. Towards the South, a great part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg was formerly subject to the Dukes of
Pomeren. For first (in the
Ʋcker Marck) not only
Prentzlow, Angermund, Aderberg, Schweet and
Vierraden; but also
Stargard and
Friedland were both subject to that Duke; until the whole
Ʋcker-Marck was given to
John I, Elector of
Brandenburg by
Barminus I, Duke of
Pomeren for a portion with his Daughter. And tho
Prentzlow with the adjoyning Territories was afterwards wrested out of the hands of the
Brandenburgers; yet they could not long keep their hold but were forced to resign back their Conquests. The
Mecklenburgers made themselves masters of
Friedland; and having once taken possession could never be beaten out. Again (on the other side of the
Oder) the greatest share of the
New-Marck was under the Duke of
Pomeren's Dominion; as part of the Dukedom of
Stetin. Westward,
Pomeren reached as far as the
Warna; and
Rostock was almost the outmost bounds of the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg. Lastly, the Territories of the Dukes of
Pomeren reached much farther Northwards into the
Baltic Sea: which by degrees swallowed up a good part of their Dominions. The Isle of
Rugen (as we shall have occasion to shew anon) is thought to be scarce half so large as it was formerly; and some whole Islands in the
Baltic are at this day covered with the Waves, which antient Historians mention as habitable Countreys. So that
Pomeren (though at this day only a small Dukedom; nay, indeed no more then an inconsiderable part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg, yet) might antiently have passed for a Kingdom; and its Dukes have vyed Territories with most of the great Monarchs of
Europe.
At present the Countrey which bears the name of the Dukedom of
Pomeren is a long and narrow tract of Land,
Division. extending it self from East to West along the
Baltic Shore: which is usually divided into the Provinces of
Stetin and
Wolgast and the Bishopric of
Cosslin. In the Province of
Stetin are reckoned the Cities of Old
Stetin, Stargard, Stolpe, Greiffenberg, Treptow upon the
Rega, Rugenwald, Pyritz, Schlawe, Golnow. Gartz, Wollin, Camin, Belgarten, New Stetin, Sam, Zanew and
Pohlitz; together with the forts of
Sazigk, Zachan, Jacobs-hagen, Fridrichwald, &c. To which were fomerly added the Lordships of
Lauenburg and
Butou: both which, upon the death of
Bugislaus the last Duke of
Pomeren, were annexed to the Crown of
Poland. The Province of
Wolgast contains in it the Cities of
Stralsund, Gripswald, Anklam, Demin, Pasewalk, Greiffenhagen, Wolgast, Barth, Trubsees, Grimmon, Damgarten, Ʋckermvnd, Loytz, Gutzkow, Franckenburg, Richtenberg, Lassen and New
Warp; with the forts of
Weissen, Klempenau, Lindenberg and
Torgelou. Within the compass of the same Province are usually comprised the Isles of
Rugen, Ʋsedom and some others upon these Coasts.
There are every where almost large and navigable Rivers in
Pomeren:Rivers and Lakes. by the advantage of which the Inhabitants are not only enabled to export the
[Page 76]Commodities of their own Countrey and furnish themselves with the fruits and good things of their Neighbours, but also have a great convenience of fortifying their Cities and securing them against the Incursions of any foreign Enemy. Such as these are, 1. The
Rekenitz, which separates this Countrey from the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg, making a kind of Ocean near
Damgarten, and emptying it self into the
Baltic at
Dars. 2. The
Barte, which springs near
Stralsund, spreads into the sea at
Bardt (a City borrowing its name from this River) and soon after is lost in the
Baltic. 3. The famous
Oder which (as soon as it hath pass'd
Gartz and
Grieffenhagen, and is come into
Pomeren) divides it self into several branches or Arms, embracing therein many large and fair Meadows; whereof some are above two
English miles in breadth. After it has pass'd by
Stetin it dilates it self first into the
Dammish Sea or Lake, then into the
Damantzke and
Pfaffenwasser (as the Natives call it) and at last, having passed betwixt
Zegenorth and
Schwantevitz, spreads it self into a vast fresh-water Ocean (known to the Neighbourhood by the name of
Das grosse Frische Haff) extending it self above sixteen
English miles in breadth and as many in length. This huge Lake afterwards disembogues it self into the
Baltic Sea in three Currents; which make as many safe harbours (the
Divenow, Swyne and
Penemunde) for Ships that pass this way to
Stetin. Betwixt the
Peene and
Swyne ly the Island of
Ʋsedom; and the Liberties of the City of
Wollin lye enclosed by the
Swyne and
Divenow. Besides these, and an innumerable Company of other Rivers which are lost in the
Baltic Sea on the Coasts of
Pomeren, this Dukedom affords a vast number of standing Lakes, as at New
Stetin, Lukow, Sukow, Verschem, Dersenten, Penckun, with many others.
From what has been said the Reader will easily conclude,
Fish. that the Dukedom of
Pomeren is in all probability a Countrey as rich in all sorts of fish as any Principality of an equal extent in
Europe; but yet the strange Stories which some of their Historians relate of the extravagant plenty in this kind will a little stagger his faith. They tell us, That within the compass of one year above five thousand Rixdollars, (which allowing four Shillings and six Pence
English for each Rixdollar, will I am afraid amount to a greater sum then the whole yearly revenue which the Elector of
Brandenburg has out of
Pomeren) was brought into the Duke of
Pomeren's Treasury out of a six penny Custom demanded upon all fish caught in the Great
Haff below
Stetin, and a three penny one upon those taken in the Lake at
Lassan. They add, That although yearly out of the Lakes last mentioned, above thirty thousand Rixdollars worth of fish be taken and vended, yet there is never found any sensible decay of their stock. The most usual sorts of Fish taken in the
Haff are Salmon and Lampreys; of both which kinds are sometimes caught Fishes of an incredible bulk and weight. In the spring the Inhabitants of
Gripswald, Bardt, Rugen and
Wollin drive a good Herring-Trade: but in other parts of
Pomeren this sort of fish is never, or rarely caught. In the Lake
Madduje near
Colbatz the fishermen catch a large and broad Fish (call'd in their language
Musenen), which, like
Charrs in some Lakes in the North of
England, is peculiar to this water, and not to be met with in any other Province of the
German Empire.
The Soil of the Country is in most places exceeding sandy and barren;
Nature of the Soil. insomuch that sometimes the little crops which the inhabitants have sown in the fields near
Damme, Golnow, Ʋckermund, and several other parts of the Dukedom are suddenly overwhelm'd and stifled by huge drifts of Sand from the shore. Howbeit you may here and there meet with a fruitful field (especially near the City
Pyritz, which is seated in a rich Valley), which supplies the wants of the neighbourhood so plentifully, that seldom any Corn is brought into
Pomeren out of foreign Nations; but on the contrary, great quantities in some fruitful years are exported thence. They have very few Mountains of any considerable height; but a vast number of large Woods and Forests, well stock'd with all manner of Game, as Deer, wild Boars, Hares, Foxes, Wolves, wild Horses, Bulls, and Bevers. Besides, the Lakes and Forests furnish the inhabitants with all sorts of Water and Land-Fowl; the former of which are so numerous, that they pretend to reckon up no less then twenty-two different kinds of wild Ducks.
Besides the conveniencies and pleasures already mention'd,
Commodities. the inhabitants are provided for almost with all other necessaries (within the compass of their own Territories) that Nature requires; and the Ships of
Stetin, Stralsund, and other Towns of Trade, bring in the delicacies of foreign Nations to satisfie the demands of Luxury. No Province in
Germany affords greater quanties, nor more different sorts of Fruit then
Pomeren.
The inhabitants of
Pomeren do not at all apply themselves to the planting of Vineyards;
Beer. and if they should, their Wine would prove but very mean and contemptible, such as the Marquisate of
Brandenburg affords, of which hereafter. However, this want is sufficiently supplied by those vast numbers of Merchant-Ships which come hither laden with the Wines of other Countries. Besides, should the inhabitants (which can now hardly be hoped for) grow so temperate as to put a stop to the importing the luxurious Liquors of foreign Countries, and content themselves with the drinks of their own Land, they would quickly experience (as many of their neighbours have done) the delicacies of the many sorts of Beer in
Pomeren. Such are the bitter Beer of
Stetin, the Mum of
Gripswald, the
Buckhenger, as they term it, (we may
English it Knock-down) of
Wollin, with many others; which are by the Mariners transported into other Nations, and therefore look'd upon (as questionless they are) preferable to most Wines.
They have no kind of Mettals in any of their Mountains;
Minerals. except only some few Mines of Iron in the Upper
Pomeren. In some places the Sea casts up Amber, but not in such quantities as in
Prussia. So that here any man has the privilege of picking up and selling as much Amber as he can find, which the Nobility and Magistracy in
Preussen will by no means permit.
The inhabitants are generally commended for men of quick and brisk parts,
Manners of the Inhabitants. and people of as stout and hardy constitutions as any in the whole Empire of
Germany. But on the contrary, they are charg'd with some vices and imperfections which seem scarce consistent with the former accomplishments. For most of them are branded with a foolish credulity and lavish prodigality; and usually upbraided as men more then ordinarily given up to intemperance in drinking, the Epidemical vice of the
Dutch Nation.
Cromer, in his Ecclesiastical History of
Pomeren, gives us a large account of the superstitious Ceremonies of the inhabitants of this Country in the times of Paganism; and the like pains has been taken by
Friedborn in his Chronicle of
Stetin. But because most of the Idolatrous practices there mention'd are agreeable to the relation we have before given the Reader of the Religion of the
[Page][Page]NOVA ILLVSTRISSIMI DVCATVS POMERANIAE TABVLA antea à Viro Cl. D. D. Eilhardo Lubino edita, nunc iterum correcta per Frid. Palbitzke Pomer. L. L. StudiosumSumptibus Janssonio-Waesbergiorum, Mosis Pitt, et Stephani Swart.BVGISLAVS IVNIOR XIV. POMERANIAE DVX.[blazon or coat of arms]
Notarum explicatio
[...] Urbes
[...] Urbes cum arcibus Ducalibus
[...] Pagi
[...]
[Page][Page 77]ancient
Germans, we shall only in this place say, that at present these
Pomeraners (almost unanimously) adhere to the
Augsburg Confession. As to the manners and humours of the ancient
Pomeraners, how much they varied from those of the modern inhabitants,
Cromer (in the Work but now cited) will acquaint us. They were, says he, utter strangers to all manner of deceit, theft, and robbery; and therefore knew not so much as the use of a Lock or Bolt, but continually kept open their Houses and Coffers. Hospitality and good House-keeping was natural to them; every man having his Table constantly furnish'd with such provisions as his Estate would afford, for all guests. So that a beggar in
Pomeren was a soloecism; since 'twas impossible (where victuals, clothes, and all other necessaries lay thus in common) to starve for want of provision either for the back or belly. But one black piece of cruelty they were guilty of, which stain'd and defac'd their other good qualities; they allow'd any Father to murder his own Daughters, if at any time he fancied he had begot more children then he was able conveniently to provide for. Over the male children they were more tender; and would not permit the slaying of a Son upon any pretence whatever.
Tho the ancient inhabitants of
Pomeren (the
Rugii, [...].Reudigni, Longididuni, &c.) were for many Centuries govern'd by Princes of their own; yet the ignorance of the times wherein they liv'd has left us in the dark as to any satisfactory register of their names and actions. The first Prince of
Pomeren whom we meet with upon good record is
Barnimus (one of the ancient and noble Family of the
Gryphones; often mention'd in their Annals, and so call'd probably from the
Gryphin their Arms to this day) who is said to have govern'd in the year 933. His Grandson
Suantiberus divided his principality betwixt his two Sons
Bugislaus and
Wartislaus. The former seated himself in
Pomerellia, and retain'd the language and manners of his Countrymen the
Slavonians; the later was made Lord of the Lower
Pomeren (bordering upon the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg) and shortly after conform'd himself to the Laws and Language of the
Saxons his neighbours. Whereupon this part of his Father's Territories began to be reckon'd a part of the
German Empire; and
Bugislaus and
Casimir, Wartislaus's Sons, receiv'd the Title of Dukes of
Pomeren, and Princes of the
Roman Empire from the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa. This Dukedom was afterwards (in the year 1217) parted betwixt
Bugislaus and
Otho, two Brothers; from whom sprang the two Houses of
Wolgast and
Stetin, which continued near two hundred years. But the House of
Stetin failing (
A.D. 1464) upon the death of
Otho the third, that part of the Estate was conferr'd upon
Frideric the second, Marquise and Elector of
Brandenburg, by the Emperor
Frideric the third. This the Dukes of
Pomeren-Wolgast look'd upon as a notorious piece of injustice to their Family; and therefore were resolv'd to oppose with all imaginable vigor the Elector's pretensions. At last the Quarrel was composed between the two Houses of
Pomeren and
Brandenburg upon these conditions; That both of them should retain the Arms and Title of Dukes of
Pomeren: But the Possession and Revenues of all Territories comprised under that name, should be yeilded up to the Dukes of
Wolgast: And that upon the failing of their Issue male, it should descend upon the Heirs of the House of
Brandenburg. Accordingly, upon the death of
Bugislaus the fourteenth (who dyed without issue in the year 1637) the late Elector of
Brandenburg George-William put in his claim to the Estate. But the
Swedes having (under pretence of assisting Duke
Bugislaus against the Imperialists, in the Civil Wars of
Germany) made themselves Masters of all the strong places in the Country, could not be perswaded to part with a Maritime Province which lay so convenient for them. And therefore (as Conquerors use to prescribe Laws with far less regard to justice then their own interests) they would not yeild to the conclusion of any Peace at the Treaty of
Munster, before it was agreed, That all the Lower
Pomeren, with the Isles of
Rugen and
Wollin, and the Town of
Stetin, should from thenceforward be annex'd to the Crown of
Sweden; and the Upper
Pomeren only be enjoy'd by the House of
Brandenburg, and that no longer then the male issue of that Family lasted; upon the failure whereof it also was to be added to the King of
Sweden's Dominions, and in the mean time both Princes were to enjoy the Titles, and bear the Arms of the Dukes of
Pomeren. But because (for the common peace of the Empire, and in compliance to the peremptory demands of the Queen of
Sweden's Ministers) the Elector had in this Agreement quitted the Title to a good part of his Inheritance, 'twas further concluded, That his losses should be recompenc'd by the addition of the Bishopricks of
Halberstadt and
Minden (converted into Temporal Principalities) to the Marquisate of
Brandenburg; to which was also added the Reversion of the Archbishopric of
Magdeburg, which (after the death of the then Incumbent Administrator
Augustus Duke of
Saxony) was to descend upon him and his Heirs. Now, altho the Elector may seem to have gain'd by this bargain (since the Lower
Pomeren, which he has quitted to the
Swedes, will not doubtless yeild so good a Revenue as the Principalities of
Magdeburg, Halberstadt, and
Minden, yet) there is no question but upon examination we shall find reason to believe, that he had rather have the entire Dukedom of
Pomeren restored, then three more such inland Provinces bestow'd on him. Since by this means he would have the opportunity of making himself considerable at Sea; and be freed from the inconveniences of having a potent neighbour, who keeps him in perpetual Jealousies. Upon these considerations the States of the Empire have thought fit to make a further reparation of his damages, by allowing him Voices in their Assemblies as Duke of
Pomeren and
Magdeburg, and as Prince of
Halberstadt and
Minden. And because formerly the Archbishops of
Magdeburg and
Bremen took their turns in the Direction of the Circle of the Lower
Saxony, they have agreed, that the Elector of
Brandenburg should alternate with the King of
Sweden (who enjoys the ancient Archbishoprick of
Bremen under the same Title as the said Duke does that of
Magdeburg) in the same quality. After the Ratification of this Treaty at
Munster, the
Swedes quietly enjoy'd the Lower
Pomeren, according to the tenure of the Articles aforesaid; until in these late wars the united forces of the
Danes and
Brandenburgers, not without great difficulty and much bloodshed, over-powred them, and siezed on all the Lower
Pomeren together with the Isle of
Rugen and the City of
Stetin. But of this we shall have occasion to say more in the following Descriptions of particular Cities.
I.
Stetin.STETIN. This has ever been reckon'd the Metropolis of all
Pomeren; and
Stralsund only the chief Town in the Principality of
Rugen.
By whom, or when it was first built, cannot easily be determin'd; and 'tis to no purpose to trouble the Reader with the idle conjectures of illiterate Historians, who pretend to fetch its genealogy from a warlike Nation (whom they call
Sidini) that before the building of Towns or Houses came in fashion in these parts of the world, kept their usual Rendezvous in the place where
Stetin now stands.
However, 'tis more commendable for the improvements it has receiv'd in the beauty of its buildings, and number of inhabitants, within the memory of its own Records, then any Antiquity it can boast of; altho, as we have said, it is beyond the skill of the ablest Antiquary to find out its original. About four hundred years ago
Stetin was built of a quite different figure from what it has at this day; the Church of St.
Peter (which now stands without the walls) being plac'd in the very middle of the Town. The convenient and pleasant situation it now has (on the rising of a small hill) its regular fortifications, beauty, and strength it owes to the
Saxons; who, by permission of some of the Dukes of
Stetin, came hither to reform the barbarous manners and language of their then
Wendish Subjects. By this means trading was advanc'd, and the number of the inhabitants multiplied so exceedingly, that some Writers who give us a description of this City in its modern condition, represent it as a place where more people inhabit under ground then above it; intimating, that the Town is so populous, that a great number of its Citizens are forc'd to live in Cellars and Vaults.
The Castle (formerly the Palace of the Dukes of
Stetin, and now the usual Residence of the
Swedish Governor) is a Pile of building which excels perhaps any piece of Architecture in these parts of
Europe, and may vy with most of its kind in
Italy it self.
Besides these ornaments, the City is eminent for the great Exchange in it of all manner of merchandise; the plenty it has of all sorts of fresh and salt Fish; Wood, either for fuel or timber; Corn, and many other rich Commodities.
The Citizens have been always commended for their great civility to strangers; and no less praised for their undoubted valour and resolution in opposing the violences of any foreign enemies. A more sufficient demonstration of their courage cannot be expected then they gave in defending their Town so bravely as they did against the forces of the Elector of
Brandenburg in the year 1677. Which famous siege having possibly been one of the most memorable pieces of Gallantry (if we consider the resolution and courage of both parties) that these later Ages have produc'd, will in this place merit a more particular relation then ordinary.
The Elector had the year before made an attempt upon this City; but was in too weak a condition (considering the posture of the place and the strength of the Garrison that defended it) to pursue his intentions any further. Whereupon he resolved for that time to withdraw his forces; and to provide himself better before he would venture upon a second onset. Accordingly that winter was spent in raising new Regiments, and providing all manner of ammunition requisite for the carrying on of this design the Summer following. All things thus in readiness, on the fifth of
July in the year 1677. His Highness parted from
Berlin at the Head of an Army consisting of Twenty-four Regiments (whereof Nine of Horse, Ten of Foot, and Five of Dragoons), besides-Foot Guards, and the assistance of Four Thousand
Lunenburgers under the command of Major General
Enten. By these Forces the City was closely besieged from the seventh of
July to the twenty-sixth of
December following; on which day the Town was surrendred upon the conditions following:
1. That all the
Swedish Soldiers should march out with Drums beating and Colours flying, and have safe conduct for themselves with their bag and baggage as far as
Liefland; but all the
Germans, whether Officers or common Soldiers, quitting the service of the King of
Sweden, should be listed under the Elector.
II. If any of the
Swedish goods could not at present be carried off, it should be lawful for the owner to leave them behind him, to be restored upon demand, as soon as the Frost was over and the River navigable.
III. A general pardon should be granted to all Partisans and Forragers, excepting such as are known to have committed some notorious murder, or other misdemeanour contrary to the Law of Arms, in their Sally.
IV. All the wounded and sick Soldiers should have leave to ly in the City till they were cured.
V. All the prisoners on both sides should be set at liberty.
VI. That at the request of the
Swedish Lieutenant General, all Fugitives should be pardon'd, and receiv'd back to their respective Regiments.
VII. His Electoral Highness should grant to the said Lieutenant General
Wulfzen, the liberty to carry off any two pieces of Cannon which he should chuse.
VIII. The Wives, Widows, and Children of the
Swedish Officers should be permitted to tarry in
Stetin (if they thought fit) till Easter; and at their departure have pass-ports granted them.
IX. All Officers of the King of
Sweden, whether Civil or Military, should remain full Proprietors of all their goods, movable and immovable; paying the same homage to the Elector as they had formerly done to the aforesaid King.
X. Provided always, that if any of the said Officers were willing to part with any such goods, he should have a just price paid him, and licence to carry of the same whither himself should please.
XI. The Elector should not make any alteration in Religion.
XII. The University, and Church of St.
Mary, should enjoy their ancient Priviledges and Revenues.
XIII. His Electoral Highness should take into his own protection all the Priests and Schoolmasters in the Town; defending them from all the insolencies and injuries of his Soldiers.
These, with some few more less considerable Articles being signed by both parties, the Elector enter'd the Town; a great part whereof lay miserably buried in its ruins, the effects of the valour and prowess of its inhabitants. During this siege the
Brandenburgers are said to have spent thirty thousand Granadoes, 24000 Hand-Granadoes, an hundred and fifty thousand
[Page 79]Cannon-shot, and ninety-eight thousand pound of powder. By the late Treaty of
Nimeguen, this Town was again restor'd to the King of
Sweden.
II.
[...]min. CAMMIN. Formerly a Bishop's See, whose Prelates had the priviledge of being invested and confirm'd immediately by the Pope himself. In the Treaty of
Munster 'twas order'd, that after the death of the then incumbent Canons, the Bishopric of
Cammin should be turn'd into a small Principality, and descend upon the Elector of
Brandenburg.
III.
[...]g. COLBERG. A strong Town on the mouth of the
Persant; annex'd formerly to the Bishopric of
Cammin by
Barnimus I. Duke of
Pomeren, and therefore given to the Elector of
Brandenburg by the
Westphalian Treaty. The convenience of the Haven and plenty of good Salt made here and sent into other Countries has invited a considerable number of Merchants to traffick and enrich the Town.
IV.
[...] WOLLIN. At this day a poor Town, but the reliques of one of the greatest Cities that these parts afforded.
Adam Bremensis asserts positively, that
Julinum (which was the ancient name of this Town, turn'd afterwards into
Wollin) was once the largest City in
Europe. And no doubt it was a place extraordinary strong and populous that was alone able to maintain a war against the whole Kingdom of
Denmark, and to bring home its Monarch
Suenotto three several times prisoner. In those days 'twas by all Nations resorted to as the greatest Mart-Town (excepting perhaps
Constantinople) in
Europe; and the
Danes, Swedes, Russians, Jews, and several other people had here their peculiar Streets and Houses of Exchange. But within a while their Apostacy from the Christian Religion brought Gods heavy wrath and vengeance upon them; which destroy'd a great part of their City by Lightning and Fire from Heaven, and the rest by the hands of
Waldemar King of
Denmark, who falling upon it unawares (in the year 1170) with a great Army, destroy'd the very ruins of the Town, and burnt up (what was only left) its Ashes. Never since has this place been any thing considerable, scarcely deserving the name of a City or great Town, being remarkable for nothing save that it gives name to the whole Isle where 'tis situate, which from it is call'd
Das Wollinsche Werder.
V.
[...]. USEDOM. This was once (after the destruction of its neighbour
Julinum) a Town of good traffick; which was chiefly occasion'd by the resort of the
Danes and
Poles, who remov'd their trade hither. In the year 1473, the whole Town, with the Town-Hall, and all the Shops and Goods of the Merchants was burnt down; after which time it hardly recover'd any of its ancient riches and grandeur, and is now moulder'd into a Sea-Port Town of less note (if possible) then
Wollin.
Cities and great Towns of Note in the Lower
POMEREN.
FIrst,
[...]. STRALSUND. When this City (now the largest and wealthiest in
Pomeren) was first built is not certainly known. The most credible Historians tell us, it owes its first original to
Sunno II. King of the
Franks; who laid the first foundation of this Town in the year 145 or 146, calling it from his own name
Sunnonia; which was afterwards corrupted into
Sunda, and by the addition of
Strala (an Island situate no man knows where) turn'd at last into
Stralsund. But I had rather believe it had the name
Sund (as 'tis still sometimes call'd) from the narrow Sea upon which it stands; since this, as well as the
Baltic Straits betwixt
Helsingore and
Helsingborg, would be properly nam'd in the
Danish or
Gottish tongue
de Sund. The other part of its modern name seems afterwards added (
von den Stralen
oder flussen) from the interchangable portions of Sea and Land in this place.
The first undoubted truth we find related of this City is that (after some great spoiling or utter destruction) it was magnificently rebuilt, enlarged and peopled with
Germans, by
Jaromar Prince of
Rugen, about the year 1209. By this Prince's Son its fortifications were first begun in the year 1230, and the City removed a little out of the place where its first foundations had been laid by his Father. For before
Jaromar had quite encompass'd his new built Town with a slender Wall (which he fancied would have been sufficient to have defended it against the incursions of the
Danes on the one hand, and the
Pomeranians on the other), the Dukes of
Pomeren broke in upon him, and overpowering his small Garrison, burnt up the greatest part of the intended City. So that the
Stralsunders have good reason to reckon the Age of their City no farther then from the year 1230, as they intimate from the following distich, engraven in several places of the Town in Golden Letters:
Annis Ducentis, ter denis mille retentis,
Fit
Stralsundensis Civitas, cui nomen ab undis.
Since that time it has had almost as many fair priviledges and immunities conferr'd upon it as any City in the Empire of its age. As 1. The Magistrates of the Town have power to determine all controversies as well in Criminal as Civil causes within their own Courts; from whence lies no appeal to any superior Judge or Prince whatever. 2. They have power to coin money; and raise forces either for Sea or Land. 3. In case of an engagement of the whole
German Empire with some foreign Nation in a Sea-Fight, the
Stralsunders are not obliged to venture any further abroad then is convenient for the defence of their own City. 4. They have had power to make Leagues and Confederacies for the advancement of their own trade; and to chuse their own Patrons and Protectors out of all the Princes of the Empire.
At this day the City is in a flourishing and splendid condition; the Houses generally stone, and very uniform. This last year (1680) some part of the Town was burnt down by an unhappy accident; but the plentiful purses of the inhabitants will be able quickly to repair the damages of that fire. The Sea betwixt this Town and the Isle of
Rugen is about an
English mile in breadth; down to which from the Walls there are six great Gates, and as many Bridges leading thither. To these Bridges the Merchantships (of 150 or 200 Tun) which ride in the Harbour are fasten'd. Towards the Land it is fortified with regular Bulwarks, and Fishponds of twice a Musket's shot in bredth; over which there are four Dams and Bridges, leading from the four Land-Gates of the Town.
The chief Commodity of the Town is Corn; which the Merchants transport in great quantities into the
Low-Countries, Scotland, Norway, and
[Page 80]many other parts of
Europe. In some of the Northern Nations the
Stralsund beer is reckoned a choise Commodity; and for that reason many tun of that Liquor is here yearly ship'd off.
Stralsund has always so bravely maintain'd its priviledges and Liberties, that it would be a voluminous History to give an account of the many several Proofs its Inhabitants have given of their valour in this kind. Historians will acquaint us that at once it withstood the United Forces of two Kings (of
Denmark and
Sweden) and ten Princes; against the assaults of all which it bravely defended it self, and in the engagement took
Eric Duke of
Saxony Prisoner. After this exploit the City began to be as terrible as before it had been impregnable; and none of the Neighbouring Princes durst offer either violence or any affront to the Citizens of
Stralsund. In the Civil Wars of
Germany, Count
Walstein (trusting to Fortune that had always favour'd his former enterprises) lay close siege to the Town; but after a furious onset and a long but vain expectance of success, was at last forced shamefully to retire. Within a while after the
Stralsunders put themselves under the protection of
Gustavus Adolphus the triumphant King of
Sweden; who though at first designed only for a titular Patron, prov'd in the end their real Lord and Master. However, the present Elector of
Brandenburg is the only Prince that can justly brag of having fairly conquered the City of
Stralsund: which (after he had taken
Stetin and the greatest part of the upper
Pomeren) was by him besieged and taken in the year 1678; though afterwards (as he stood obliged by the Fifth Article of the Treaty of peace signed by the Ministers of the Kings of
France and
Sweden and the said Elector at St.
Germain's en Laye the
29th of
July in the year 1679) he resign'd it back into the hands of the
Swedish King.
II.
Bardt. BARTH or BARDT. This Town, not many ages agoe, was the Metropolis of the upper
Pomeren, and gave name to all that part of the Countrey wherein are now situate
Stralsund, Grimmen, Tribsees, with many other Cities and great Towns of good note.
Some fancy it derived its name from the
Longobardi, whom they make the undoubtedly antient Inhabitants of these parts: and in confirmation of this their conjecture produce the old Arms of the Town, wherein it bears a mans head with a long beard. But the more probable opinion is, That 'tis so called from the River
Barte or
Bartze; on the mouth of which it is seated.
The Fields about this City are exceeding fruitful, and abound with all manner of grain; whence (were the Haven here as deep and fit to harbour Ships of a considerable burthen as that at
Stralsund)
Bardt would be capable of being as much advanced by Merchandise as any of its Neighbouring Cities. But that small Arm of the Sea upon which this City stands is so shallow, that neither Merchantmen nor almost any other Vessels (save only such as serve to convey Passengers from hence into
Denmark or
Sweden) can be brought up to the Walls of the Town.
III. GRIPSWALD.
Gripswald. Which was questionless a large and populous Town before it was wall'd round in the year 1233; and turn'd into a strong City. After which time it was daily enlarged and enriched by the great resort of
Hollanders and other foreign Merchants; who had here the convenience of lading their Ships with as good Salt as any that
Lunenburg or the other famous Salt-Markets of
Germany will at this day afford. But upon the decay of wood (the small Forests near
Gripswald being quickly burnt up in supplying their furnaces with fewel) this trade vanished; and the Town has much ado to keep up to the riches and splendour it hath long since attained. The only commendation of the Town at present is, that it is a regularly and well fortified place; and considerable for an University, which has bred up, and continues so to do, many brave men singularly eminent for their parts and learning.
In the Fields and Meadows near
Gripswald there grows a kind of wild Garlick (which the Neighbourhood call
Ramess) in such quantities, that each year for near a month about Whitsontide, when the herb flowers, it smells so intolerable strong, that a stranger would hardly be able to struggle with the offensive stench of a walk for a quarter of a mile without the Gates of the City. All the Butter sold in the Town savours strong of this nauseous herb; and the very flesh of Cattel that graze in these pastures, tasts as if it were stuff'd with Garlick.
There are besides these Cities mention'd,
Other
[...]. many other great Towns of note in
Pomeren; though not so considerable as to merit a particular Description in this place. Such are, 1.
Damgarten, and 2.
Tribsees; both situate on the Coasts of the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg; and remarkable for a Toll or Impost exacted upon Travellers by the
Swedish Officers. The Dukes of
Mecklenburg lay claim to all Rights and Priviledges in these two Towns: but the Memorials exhibited to that purpose to the Mediators in the late Treaty at
Nimeguen, did not meet with the expected success. 3.
Loytz. 4.
Lassen. 5.
Treptow; with several others.
RUGEN is one of the chief Islands in the
Baltic Sea; and famous for the courage of its ancient inhabitants mention'd in most Historians of note by the name of
Rugi or
Rugii. Sidonius gives them the constant Epithet of
pugnaces; and none mention their names without some grand Elogium or other. Their chief Forts were
Arcona and
Camerentz; both which they fancied impregnable, till
Waldemar King of
Denmark shew'd them the vanity of that conceit by storming those two Bulwarks of their Country, and taking the whole Island in the year 1368. And indeed
Arcona (if we believe the stories which some
German Historians tell of it) was a place sufficiently fortified by Nature against all the batteries which the Martial men of former ages were able to invent. For 'twas seated on the top of a vast rock by the Seashore, which was so high that no arrow (shot from the strongest Bow) could possibly reach the Castle; so that the Fort was certainly tenable so long as the besieged were provided with victuals and ammunition.
The Isle was formerly of a much larger extent then 'tis at this day;
[...]. reaching out to the South-East as far as
Ruden, which is now an Island of it self distant about three Leagues from
Rugen, whereof 'twas anciently a part. This separation was occasion'd by a great tempest in the year 1303 (some say 1309), at which time the Sea, breaking its banks, drown'd a great part of
Rugen, and made by this breach so deep a Channel (call'd by the Shipmen
Das new Tieff oder Schiffart, i. e. the new Channel) that the greatest Ships that sail on the
Baltic can pass this way to
Stralsund; a great advancement to the trade of that City. Whereas, before this accident, there was no passage this way; excepting only a narrow Road for Hulks, or small Hoys (call'd by the Mariners
Dan Bellen) which the
Danish Merchantment had almost stopt up with continual throwing into it the ballast of their Ships. At the present whole Isle is about thirty
English miles in bredth, and as much in length; so that the whole circumference amounts to ninety miles (were it exactly round), or thereabouts. But
Rugen has so many Creeks, Promontories, Peninsuls, windings and turnings, that he who goes about to take an exact survey of its whole circumference will find it much larger. For 'tis observable, that so many branches of the Sea break into the Island, that no part of the land is above two or three
English miles from the shore. And yet every small Province in the Isle (as the Peninsuls
Wittaw, and
Jasmunt, the Country of
Bergen, the Isle of
Ʋmmantz, Viddensee, Zuder, &c.) is so well secured by Nature from the most tempestuous rage of the waters that the inhabitants need not fear a deluge.
Rugen is so rich a Corn-Country,
Commodities. that it is usually call'd the
Barn of
Stralsund; as
Sicily was of
Rome. Besides, 'tis well stock'd with good breeds of Horses, Kine, Sheep,
&c. and especially with Geese, which are the largest in
Europe. It was anciently commended for a Country where neither Wolf nor Rat was to be seen; but now the
Rugians have as great store of these Vermine as their neighbours.
Jasmunt furnishes the whole Island with Wood for Timber and Fewel out of a Forest call'd in their tongue
de Stubbunitza, which exactly answers to our
English word Copses. The Sea and multitude of small Lakes afford them plenty of Fish; enough to supply the wants of themselves and their neighbours. Amongst other Lakes in the Isle, there is one (not far from
Burchwall, the ruins of an old Fort in
Jasmunt) which the neighbourhood, upon the authority of Tradition, superstitiously believe to be of that Nature, that it will not bear a Boat, nor suffer a Net to catch a Fish of the many shoals they daily see in it.
Near this Lake is a Promontory of a wonderful height, which hangs over the Sea;
Stubbenkamer. and was anciently a notable shelter for Pirats, who used to cruise upon these Coasts. This Den is call'd by the Natives
de Stubbenkamer or Bedchamber.
[Page 82] There are no Mart-Towns of any consequence in the Island;
Strength. nor have the Inhabitants the oppertunity of trading with any Merchants save their Neighbours of
Stralsund, who buy up all the Corn and other Commodities in the Country. So that we cannot expect to meet with such multitudes of people here as in the other Isles of the
Baltic. However
Rugen is everywhere so populous that tis able (upon a very small warning) to bring seven thousand stout fighting men into the field; which, if resolute and unanimous, are sufficient to defend the whole Island against a potent enemy.
The Language anciently spoken in
Rugen was a Dialect of the
Slavonian or
Wendish tongue.
Language. But after the Dukes of
Pomeren (assisted by the Citizens of
Stralsund, as shall be shew'n hereafter) had possession of the Island; the
Wendish manners and language were utterly abolished, insomuch that 'tis recorded in the Annals of
Rugen as a memorable thing, that (in the year 1404) there was one old woman left in the Isle that understood perfectly, and could speak the
Slavonian tongue. At this day the greatest part of the inhabitants speak the language of the Lower
Saxons; and some few, especially where the King of
Sweden's Officers keep their residence, speak
Swedish.
The ancient inhabitants of this Isle were the last of all the Northern Nations that were converted from their Idolatry and Paganism,
Religion. and embrac'd the Christian Religion.
Helmondus seems to point more especially at the
Rugians when he says,
Inter omnes autem Borealium populos sola Slavorum
Provincia remansit caeteris durior, atque ad credendum tardior. However (about the year 813) a company of hardy Monks ventur'd to preach up Christianity to these stubborn people; and succeeded so well in the undertaking as in a very short time to bring over a great many of them to the true faith. But they as quickly abandon'd Christianity, and relaps'd into their former Idolatry. For (as upon the first preaching of the Gospel in
Lycaonia the inhabitants of that Country were ready to do sacrifice to St.
Barnabas and St.
Paul under the names of
Jupiter and
Mercury, so) these poor people mistaking God's Ministers for God himself, idoliz'd St.
Vite (a poor Monk that had undertaken their conversion) by the name of
Swant; which name was afterwards given to a monstrous four headed Image, which they worshipp'd in a sumptuous Temple. To this Idol all the
Rugians repair'd, as to an Oracle, for advice; and the foreign Merchants that had made a safe Voyage, were obliged to offer up some of their best Merchandises as a tribute of thanksgiving to this grand tutelary God of the Island. Three hundred Horses were kept constantly for the service of
Swant; one whereof was white, and never rid but by the chief Priest. This Horse was now and then shew'n to the people in a morning all over besmear'd with dirt and sweat, the Priest in the mean time protesting to the multitude, that
Swant himself had brought the beast into that pickle by engaging with, and pursuing the Enemies of
Rugen the night before.
The manner of worshipping this Idol (which stood in
Arcona, the famous City in old
Rugen before mention'd) was thus: The chief Priest looking into a Horn which the Image held in its right hand (and which had been fill'd the year before with a precious liquor) prognosticated, from the good quantity or scarcity of the liquor therein contain'd, the plenty or dearth of the year following. That done (with his lips shut, for fear of harming the Idol with his breath) he very solemnly poured out the remaining liquor at the feet of the Image, and having replenish'd it afresh, plac'd it again with a great deal of reverence in the God's right hand, whence he had taken it down. These Ceremonies being ended, the rest of that day was spent in anniversary feasting and jollity. In this miserable condition the
Rugians continued for some ages; until by a continual conversation with their neighbours the
Pomeranians, they were almost insensibly turn'd Christians, and (about five hundred years ago) at last wholly quitted their Idolatrous practices; and at this day the inhabitants of
Rugen are as zealous assertors and maintainers of the
Augsburg Confession as any
Germans whatever.
The Isle was anciently govern'd by Princes of its own,
G
[...] mers. whose Dominions reach'd beyond the narrow boundaries the Sea had set them, a great way into
Pomeren; taking in all the Territories near
Stralsund, Gripswald, and other places now subject to the King of
Sweden. Antiquity will afford us a Register of Eleven Princes of
Rugen, and those in the following order:
1.
Wislaus, who is said to have been Prince of
Rugen in the days of the Emperor
Otho I. about the year of Christ 938.
2.
Grimus. Remarkable for nothing but his filling up a space in the Catalogue of these Princes.
3.
Cruco, or
Crito. At the same time Prince of
Rugen, and petty King of the
Obatriti in the year 1100; who after he had for some years exercis'd Idolatry and Tyranny in his Dominions, was deposed and slain by
Henry Son of
Gothscalc) another inconsiderable King of the said
Obitriti) at the entreaty of his wife
Schlavine, Daughter to
Swantibor I. Prince of
Pomeren.
4.
Raze. A great Warriour, who besieged
Lubec, and took it. He died in the year 1141.
5.
Teslaus. A Prince who had continual wars with the Kings of
Denmark; two whereof (
Eric VI. and
Sueno III.) he as often overcame as he was beaten by them; but at last was utterly vanquish'd and made tributary by King
Waldemar.
6.
Jarimar, Teslaus's Brother. The first Prince of
Rugen that embraced Christianity.
7.
Barmita, arimar's Son. He died in the year 1241.
8.
Witzlaus II.
Barmita's Brother; and Founder of the Monastery at
Campen. He died in the year 1247.
9.
Jarimar II.
Witzlaus the second's Son; who immediately after his admittance to the Government rebell'd against the King of
Denmark, and at last (after many Engagements) got himself and his successors eas'd from that yoke, in the year 1259.
10.
Witzlaus III. Jarimar the second's Son. A great promoter of the Christian Religion in
Liefland; where himself sometimes took upon him the office of a Priest, preaching Christianity to the poor Infidels of those parts.
11.
Witzlaus IV. The last Prince of
Rugen of this Family. Upon the unruly growth of the great City of
Stralsund, the Merchants and Burgers finding themselves able enough to grapple with this Prince, were resolv'd to be no longer subject to him or any of his Successors; if by violence or otherwise they could procure their liberty; whereupon they openly proclaim'd themselves a free City; declaring that neither the Princes of
Rugen, nor any of their neighbours could lawfully pretend
[Page 83]to exact any Tribute or Homage from the Citizens of
Stralsund. Upon the noise of this revolt, Prince
Witzlaus (assisted by some of the neighbouring Kings and Princes) besieged
Stralsund; demanding submission, together with an humble acknowledgment of their unpardonable crime in daring to make so traiterous a revolt; but in vain. For the
Stralsunders not only persisted in the resolution of asserting their Liberty to the last; but bravely withstood the assaults of
Witzlaus and his Associates, and (after many hot disputes) slew this Prince in a sally; thereby putting an end to the controversie and whole Lineage of the Princes of
Rugen, in the year 1325.
After this the Island of
Rugen (with other parts of that Principality upon the Continent) came into the hands of the Dukes of
Pomeren; with which Dukedom, after the failure of that Line, it should have been annex'd to the Marquisate of
Brandenburg; but (as hath been before noted) in consideration of the signal favours the King of
Sweden had done the Protestant party in the Civil Wars of
Germany, the Princes concern'd in the
Westphalian Treaty thought fit to annex the Lower
Pomeren to the Dominions of that King; and as a part of this Dukedom the Isle of
Rugen was thrown into the bargain. Afterwards the King of
Denmark (
Frideric III.) began to revive some ancient pretensions of some of his Ancestors to the Principality of
Rugen; but the ensuing wars betwixt him and the Crown of
Sweden (of which we have given the Reader some account in the Description of
Denmark) put an end, as 'twas thought, to these pretensions. For the said
Frideric (in the Treaty of
Roschild, made between the two Northern Crowns in the year 1658) disclaim'd all right and title to the Isle of
Rugen. However (notwithstanding the promises and protestations made in that Treaty) the present King of
Denmark shew'd, that Contracts made between great Princes and Commonwealths are no longer obligatory then consistent with the intrigues of State. For hearing that the Elector of
Brandenburg had besieged
Stetin, and that Count
Koningsmarck (the valiant
Swedish Governor of
Rugen) had thereupon drawn the greatest part of his forces into
Pomeren, leaving the Island of
Rugen to be defended by a small company of about fifty Horse; he immediately ship'd six thousand Soldiers, intending with them to surprize the deserted Island, and regain it into his own possession. But the weather not favouring this design, the
Danish Forces were kept off at Sea by contrary winds till that small Garrison which kept the Isle was alarm'd, and had time to give notice to the General; who nevertheless could not arrive with the rest of his Army before the enemy had made themselves Masters of
Jasmund. However, after one brisk engagement with the Count's left Wing, the
Danes were forc'd to fly in great disorder; leaving six hundred of their Companions dead in the field, and two thousand five hundred more taken prisoners. The rest retreated confused into
Wittow; where they were beset with the
Swedes who slew, took prisoners, and plunder'd as many of them as they pleased. In this Victory the
Swedes are said to have taken from the
Danes (besides an incredible number of prisoners) six and twenty Standards, sixteen Field-pieces, five Mortar-pieces, and thirty thousand Rixdollars in money. Yet this unhappy overthrow was not sufficient to discourage the brave King
Christian from a second adventure; and the drawing back his Arm after this defeat, seem'd only intended to fetch the greater blow. For having doubled his Forces in the year following (1678) he fell upon the
Rugians with that irresistable strength and courage, which obliged them to resign up the whole Island upon his own terms. And it might to this day have been at his devotion, had not the
French King struck in as Mediator betwixt the Northern Crowns, in the alte Treaty signed by the
Danish and
Swedish Ministers at
Lunden in
Schonen, Sept. 26.
A. D. 1679; by the seventh Article of which Treaty 'twas agreed (because
Lewis the Great was pleas'd to have it so), that
Rugen should be deliver'd up to the
Swede on or before the sixth of
December following. Accordingly the King of
Sweden is now repossess'd of that Island; and has sent in new Garrisons to fortifie and defend it against all future assaults of its formidable neighbours the
Danes and
Brandenburgers.
The only Town of note in the whole Isle of
Rugen is
Bergen;Towns. situate about the middle of the Island. It had the name of a City given it in the year 1190, but so little deserv'd that title, that it had not the advantage of being fortified or wall'd round. All the account which modern Travellers give of it is, that 'tis one of the better sort of Villages, consisting of about four hundred Houses.
Stralsund indeed seems the Metropolis of
Rugen; and (as it was formerly) may still be so accounted, if we consider the many and great priviledges which the Burgers of that City still pretend to in that Island. For 1. The High Court of Admiralty in
Stralsund determines all causes and contests arising in any of the Port-Towns in
Rugen; and therefore (because the
Stralsunders will not assign over this Jurisdiction to any Delegates residing in the Island) the
Rugians are obliged, upon debate of all such quarrels, to repair to
Stralsund for judgment. 2. Without the consent of the Senate and Citizens of
Stralsund, no definitive sentence can be given (nor no Court of Equity or Judicature whatever erected) in any part of the Isle. 3. The
Rugians may not, without leave first obtain'd from the Common Council of
Stralsund, export any manner of Grain, or other Commodities; or brew Beer for sale. In short, this City is the Key of the Island, and the only Fortress upon which depends its security or ruine. So that had
Rugen been kept by the King of
Denmark, and
Stralsund by the Elector of
Brandenburg (according to the Rights of Conquest in the late Wars) 'tis probable, that those new accessions would in a short time have occasion'd quarrels and animosities between the two Princes. The Elector would questionless have been loth to have disclaim'd all Right and Title to the Priviledges which the City of
Stralsund now challenges in
Rugen; and on the other hand, His Majesty of
Denmark would (in all probability) have been as unwilling to have suffered any Prince of the Empire to Lord it in his Dominions. 'Tis almost necessary (considering the present State of
Stralsund and the Isle of
Rugen) that both these places should be subject to the same Master; though not impossible to make the Island (at least independant upon, if not) a Terror to that City. For (since all the Merchant Ships, which come from the
Danish Sund to the City of
Stralsund, are obliged to sail round the Isle of
Rugen) 'twould not possibly be so expensive as profitable to build three or four good Port-Towns in
Wittow, Jasmumd and other parts of the Island; and thereby (not only command all Ships that sailed this road, but also) divert the grand
[Page 84]current of trade from
Stralsund to
Rugen, the Storehouse of that City. But, as long as the City of
Stralsund wants Provision for its Inhabitants and the Isle of
Rugen vent for its great abundance of Corn and other Commodities, there seems to be such a mutual dependance between the two places, that to subject them to different Masters manifestly threatens the destruction of their Common Interest.
Tho never poor Island has been more miserably mangled and afflicted with war (witness the Civil wars in
Germany and the late Northern Broils,
Nobility. in both which
Rugen was several times taken and retaken) yet you shall meet with a great many noble Families that pretend to derive their pedigree from the true antient
Rugii or
Runi. Helmondus I think first taught them to call themselves by this latter name, fancying that the antient
Insula Runorum (whom
Adam Bremensis calls
fortissimam slavorum gentem) must needs be
Rugen. Whereas 'tis more probable that the
Runi (as the Learned
Ol. Wormius conjectures) liv'd further Eastward, near the Coasts of
Liefland; where to this day there is a small Island called by the Neighbourhood
Die Rune. However (let the Ancestours of the modern
Rugian Noblemen be what they will) they have this good mark of Antiquity, that they pay Tithes duelier (of all manner of Grain, Fruits, Wool,
&c.) then any people in
Germany; and give larger allowances and more respect to their Clergy Men. The Rusticks pay easier Rents then is usual in other places; and therefore have reason to give (as they commonly do) that respect and honour to their Landlords which all the antiquity they brag of can challenge.
DIE Marck (which is now a word commonly used in
Germany to express all the Territories subject to the Elector of
Brandenburg, as he is only Marquise of the Empire) signifies no more then the outmost Borders or Limits of a Country. So that
Markgraf (instead of which we use the
French word
Marquis) is properly
Judex or
Comes Limitaneus; which we may
English, Lord Lieutenant of the Marches. And this Title seems reasonably enough appropriated to the Marquises of
Brandenburg; who, being seated on the outmost bounds of the Empire, might possibly heretofore supply the places of the Emperor's Delegates in hearing and determining Causes as well as opposing all violent incursions of foreigners. The City of
Brandenburg (which lends the Marquis his Title, and was once the Metropolis of these parts) is now decay'd into a despicable Village; of which the Reader may expect a larger account anon, when we come to the Description of the
Middle Marck.
The whole Marquisate (which
Dresser tells us is seven great days journey either in length or breadth) is bounded on the North with the Dukedomes of
Mecklenburg and
Pomeren; [...] on the North-West with
Lunenburg; on the West with
Brunswic; on the South-West with
Magdeburg; on the South with
Anhalt, the Upper
Saxony, and
Lusatia; on the South-East with
Silesia; on the East with
Poland; and lastly, on the North-East with
Prussia.
The Country is generally Sandy, and full of Woods and Forests; affording good store of Corn, but small quantities of any other provisions. In some parts of the Marquisate you may meet with good Flocks of Sheep, but rarely find any considerable Herds of Kine. The Bores near
Francfurt, Brandenburg, and
Berlin, brag of their Vineyards, and think the Vintage they have yearly, worth the toil of planting and looking after their Vines; but their neighbours have not so good an opinion of the mean Liquor which these poor men boast of; for in the Upper
Saxony 'tis usual to frighten young children to School by threatning to make them drink
Brandenburg Wine. And this Proverb is ordinary among them:
Vinum auss den Alten Marck
Calefacit ut Quarck.
Now the word
Quarck, in their Dialect, properly signifies
a squeez'd handful of new Cheese; but is commonly used in a metaphorical sense, to denote any sort of insipid stuff whatever. Their Salt is brought to them up the
Elb, Havel, and
Spree, from other Countries; to whom they return Corn and Fish, the two chief Commodities of this Province.
The Elector of
Brandenburg's Territories do not afford such Mines of Silver as several Countries subject to the Duke of
Saxony,Mines. and some other Princes of the Empire. Which is one main reason why the money coin'd in this Marquisate is much baser mettal then what we find currant in
Saxony and the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg. In some places they make a shift to dig up small parcels of Brass, Iron, and Copper; but scarce any-where enough to supply the necessary occasions of the neighbourhood.
The ancient inhabitants of this Country were the
Varini and
Naithones,Inhabitants. two branches of the vast Nation of the
Suevians; who were succeeded by the
Helvoldi, Wilini, Beirani, and some other Tribes of the
Slavonians. But the Emperor
Henry I. (having in the year 620 conquer'd and thrown out the greatest part of these people) bestow'd these Territories upon
Sigefride Earl of
Rengelheim; who, with some of his successors, new peopled the desolate Country with Golonies out of
Holland, Zealand, Westphalia, Saxony, and
Franconid: So that the present
Brandenburgers are a mixt medly of several different
German Nations; as may easily be observ'd from the confusion of Dialects which make up the Language of this people. The generality of
[Page 86]them are so lamentably poor and miserable, that to ly on a Bed of clean Straw is esteem'd the character of one of better fashion then his neighbours.
Soon after the Emperor
Henry the First's conquest of
Brandenburg,Religion. the inhabitants were converted to Christianity; and under the government of the Elector
Joachim the First, embrac'd the tenents of
M. Luther. In this state they continued undisturbed until the breach betwixt
George William (Father of the present Elector) and the Duke of
Neuburg. For the latter, having married a Daughter of the Duke of
Bavaria (at that time the most potent Prince of the Popish party), embraced the tenents of the Church of
Rome; fancying (as 'tis conjectur'd) that this expedient might be a means to secure the aid and assistance of the King of
Spain, if his occasions should require it; on the other hand, the Elector (marrying a Sister of
Frideric the Fifth, Prince Elector Palatine of the
Rhine, and grand Protector of the
Calvinists) adhered to the opinions of
Calvin; hoping thereby to engage the
Netherlands to befriend him upon occasion. But when afterwards he was perswaded by his Wife to put out an Edict for suppressing the
Lutheran Discipline and Doctrine, and authorizing the
Calvinian, throughout his Dominions (which was done in the year 1615) all the inhabitants of the Marquisate unanimously rebell'd against him; and had probably put an end to his Line and Government, if they had not met with a speedy redress of their grievances. Hereupon the Elector was forc'd to compose the business by revoking this Edict, and setting forth a new one in its place; whereby 'twas order'd, that the Forms of Divine Service should be used in all public Churches within the Marquisat of
Brandenburg according to the Institution of
Luther only, and that the Elector) with his Marchioness, and those few more that were of their opinion) should not be permitted to hear a
Calvinist Preacher in any other place then a private Chappel. However, these means were found insufficient to secure the people from all innovations in Church-Discipline. For upon the increase of the Electors Family, and daily conflux of new Favourites to the Court (who were easily won over to the Elector's opinions), they could not but observe a continual advancement of
Calvinism, and as constant decay of the
Lutheran party. Whereupon they resolved the foremention'd Decree for the establishment of the
Augsburg confession should be renew'd, and confirm'd (if possible) beyond all fear of a future violation. In pursuance of this resolution, they procur'd the said Decree to be inserted (as the seventh Article) into the
Westphalian Treaty; which they look'd upon as an eternal and immutable Law to the whole
German Empire. Yet notwithstanding these assurances, the present Elector of
Brandenburg (a zealous assertor of his Fathers Tenents) has in many parts of his Dominions, especially his two Universities of
Francfurt upon the
Oder, and
Koningsberg, discouraged the
Lutherans and countenanc'd
Calvinism. The hot-spur Professors at
Wittemberg (
Abraham Calovius and his Brethren) first provok'd him with daily Curses and Anathema's vented against
Calvin and his followers, to publish an Edict commanding all his Subjects to withdraw their Sons from that University within the space of three months after the publishing of the said Edict. Upon the death of his first Marchioness (
Louis-Henrietta, Daughter to the Prince of
Orange, and a zealous
Calvinist) the
Brandenburgers had some hopes their Elector would have been brought over to their party, or at least (upon his second marriage with
Dorothy, Daughter to
Philip Duke of
Holstein and Relict of
Christian-Lewis Duke of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg, as resolute an assertor of
Luther's Doctrine as the former of
Calvin's) have a little abated his rigorous persecution. But hitherto their hopes have been blasted, without the Elector's care to redress their grievances any further then to wink at the ordinary exercise of the
Lutheran Religion. And indeed 'tis almost impossible for him to be truly reconciled, as long as
Strauchius (at present a noted Preacher in
Dantzic, not long since committed to the Goal for railery) with some other hot-headed
Lutheran Pulpiters take upon them to represent (not only
Calvinists in general, but) the Elector himself as one of the Devil's chief instruments for perverting the true Christian Religion.
Mutavit Dominos Marchia
saepe suos,Goverment. is a saying we often meet with in the Historians that treat of this Marquisate. But the first time that we hear of any Marquise of
Brandenburg is after the year 927. For
Henry I. Emperor of
Germany, having overcome this part of the Country, bestow'd it on
Sigefride Earl of
Rengelheim, on condition that he should defend these Marches (or outmost limits of the Empire) against the
Sclaves; thereupon giving him the Title of
Marckgraf or Marquise. From this time we may reckon up three several Catalogues, or Classes, of the Marquises of
Brandenburg; beginning first with such as were not Hereditary Marquises; but had that Title confer'd on them by the Emperor, and enjoy'd it during his pleasure. These were
1.
Sigefride, Earl of
Rengelheim; who was (as we have said) created the first Marquis of
Brandenburg by the Emperor
Henry the first in the year 927. Besides his exploits in several expeditions against the
Slavonians, he might justly lay claim to some more then ordinary preferment as being Brother to the Empress. After his death
2.
Gero, Count of
Altenburg and
Mersburg, was made Marquis by
Otho the first. He built the Monastery of
Gerenrood; which still retains his name. Having govern'd a few years he left the Marquisate to
3.
Bruno, or
Brumito (Earl of
Within and
Burgraf of
Zorbeck) created Marquise by the same Emperor. And, by the permission of
Otho the third, his Son
4.
Hugh succeeded; who, having been the Founder of Seven stately Monasteries in
Italy, died in the year 1001, and was succeeded by his Brother
5.
Sigebart, whom
Otho the third made the first Marquise Elector. His Son
6.
Theodoric proved a great persecutor of the
Heneti (two of whose Princes he perswaded the Emperor
Henry II. to hang up), and all other Tribes of the neighbouring
Slaves and
Vandals. But was at last overpower'd by them; and being beaten out of all his Territories by
Mistivoius Prince of the
Obotriti, was forced to end his days miserably in a Monastery at
Magdeburg.
7.
Ʋdo, Earl of
Soltwedel, within some years after (encouraged with the assistance of the Emperor
Conrad II. and the Archbishop of
Magdeburg) gave battel to the
Slaves, and having forc'd them out of their new Conquests, was himself made Marquise of
Brandenburg.
8.
Ʋdo II. succeeded his Father. But joining afterwards
[Page 87]wards with
Rodolph Duke of
Schwaben in a Rebellion against the Emperor
Henry IV. he was by the same Emperor proscribed; and his Marquisate given to
9.
Primislaus, King of the
Obotriti, and Ancestor to the Dukes of
Mecklenburg. After whose death the Marquisate was made Hereditary by the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa; who conferr'd it upon
Albert (surnam'd
Ʋrsus) Prince of
Anhalt and Marquise of
Soltwedel. From whom we may reckon the second Catalogue of Marquises, in the order following:
1.
Albert, created Elector and Duke of
Saxony, Brunswic, &c. in the place of
Henry surnam'd the Lion.
2.
Otho, Albert's Son; succeeded by his Son
3.
Otho II. who died without issue in the Holy War; leaving the Marquisate to his Brother
4.
Albert II. He died in the year 1221, and left his Dominions to his Son
5.
John, a great Benefactor to
Francfurt upon the
Oder. His Son
6.
Otho III. built
Brandenburg in
Prussia, and liv'd (all his reign, which lasted about fifteen years) in a continual warfare with the Archbishop of
Magdeburg and Bishop of
Halberstadt. This man's Brother
7.
John II. has left nothing memorable recorded of him, save that he kept possession for some years of the Dukedom of
Crossen, which was pawn'd to him by
Henry Duke of
Vratislaw. John the First's third Son
8.
Conrad, obtain'd the Marquisate after the death of his two eldest Brothers, and died (very old and decrepit) in the year 1303. His Son
9.
John III. did not long outlive his Father; but (dying in the year 1305) left the Marquisate to his Brother
10.
Waldemar; who annex'd a good part of
Lusatia (which he won from the Marquise of
Misnia) to the Marquisate of
Brandenburg. His Nephew
11.
Waldemar II. died within four years of his Uncle (in the year 1323) having acted nothing worth the relating. And yet shorter was the Government of his Brother
12.
John IV. the last Marquise of the House of
Anhalt. After whose death (which hapned within forty days after he was advanc'd to the Government) the Marquisate, escheating to the Empire for want of Heirs, was given to
13.
Lewis of
Bavaria by his Father
Lewis the Emperor. He resigned to his Brother
14.
Lewis II. (surnamed the
Roman, because born at
Rome) who was succeeded by the Emperor's third Son
15.
Otho, Count Palatine of the
Rhine. He afterwards sold the Marquisate to the Emperor
Charles IV. who gave it to his Son
16.
Winceslaus. But he had not enjoy'd it quite five years before he was (upon his Father's death) Elected Emperor. Whereupon he conferr'd the Marquisate of
Brandenburg upon his Brother
17.
Sigismund, King of
Hungary and
Bohemia; who (succeeding his Brother in the Empire) sold the Marquisate to
Jodocus Duke of
Moravia; but afterwards (having redeem'd it out of the hand of
William Marquise of
Misnia, to whom
Jodicus had mortgaged it) conferr'd it upon
Frideric Burggraf of
Noremberg at the Council of
Constance in the year 1417. From which time we may begin to reckon up the third and last Catalogue of the Marquises of
Brandenburg, as follows:
1.
Frideric Burggraf of
Noremberg, was (in consideration of his good services done against the Rebels in
Hungary and
Bohemia) created, as before said, Marquise of
Brandenburg; paying only for his Investiture 400000 Crowns. His Son
2.
Frideric II. succeeded his Father. Surnamed (for his peevish and cruel temper)
the Marquise with the Iron teeth. He was made Duke of
Pomeren by the Emperor
Frideric III. but his Brother
3.
Albert relinquished all (but the bare Title) in
Pomeren; leaving nothing to his Successors but the name (which they have hitherto kept) of
Dukes of Pomeren. However, he is said to have been so remarkable at some acts of Chivalry, that the usual Titles conferr'd on him by Pope
Pius II. were
Achilles Germanicus and
Ʋlisses Teutonicus. He died at
Francfurt at the Election of the Emperor
Maximilian in the year 1494. His Son
4.
John is reported to have been a Prince as eloquent as his Father was valiant; and therefore he is commonly stiled
Cicero Germanicus. He left the Marquisate (in the year 1499) to his Son
5.
Joachim. As great a Lover, as his Father was a Master, of Eloquence: Founder of the University at
Francfurt, and first authorizer of the Reform'd Religion in
Brandenburg.
6.
Joachim II. succeeded his Father; and (in the year 1534) got himself and his followers no small credit in a brave Expedition against the
Turks; at that time the common Enemy of the
German Empire. His Son and Successor
7.
John George govern'd a long time in peace and prosperity. During his life, his Son
8.
Joachim Frideric was Administrator of the Archbishopric of
Magdeburg; and (after his Father's death) govern'd the Marquisate of
Brandenburg with the same peaceable meekness and piety. He had (the usual blessing of good and religious men) the happiness to be a Father of many Children; whereof the eldest
9.
John Sigismund succeeded him. He married
Ann Daughter of
Albert-Frideric Duke of
Prussia and
Mary Eleanor his Wife, Daughter of
William I. Duke of
Cleve; who married his Daughter to the said Duke (as he did all the rest to other Princes) with promise, that upon the decease of her Brethren without issue, she and her Heirs should succeed to all his Territories. Upon this Title the present Elector of
Brandenburg lays claim to the Dukedoms of
Cleve, Juliers, and
Bergen (or the Mountains) with the County of
Ravensburg.
10.
George-William, Son to
John Sigismund and the Lady
Ann beforemention'd, claim'd (in his Mother's right) the Dukedoms aforesaid, together with the Barony of
Ravenstein. All which were parted betwixt him and his Cousin-German
Wolfgangus Palatine of
Newburg, and Son of
Magdalen younger Sister to
Mary-Eleanor. But falling out at last about the division of their Territories, they engaged their Friends and Allies in the broil. the Palatine having call'd in to his assistance the Forces of
Spain, and the Elector
John Sigismund (in behalf of his Son) the Confederate States of the
Netherlands. After the death of
Bugislaus Duke of
Pomeren, 'twas hoped he might succeed into that Dukedom also; but how the
Swede balk'd those expectations, in the Treaty of
Munster, we have already inform'd the Reader. This Marquise's Son
11.
Frideric William is at present Elector of
Brandenburg; a Prince wise, valiant, religious, temperate,
[Page 88]chast, and (in a word) master of all the noble virtues (without the least mixture of vices) of his Countryand Family. He was born in the year 1620, and upon his Father's death declared Elector, in the year 1656. He has several Children by both his Wives (before mention'd); whereof the eldest Son, or Electoral Prince
(Charles Emile) was born the sixth of
February in the year 1655.
Tho the Elector of
Saxony was formerly look'd upon as a much more potent Prince then the Marquise of
Brandenburg;Strength. and for that reason has always taken place of him at the Elections of the Emperors: yet certainly the case is much alter'd at present; and the many accessions to the Elector of
Brandenburg's Dominions, whereof the present Marquise and his predecessors have made themselves Masters in these last ages, have render'd him the most powerful and formidable Prince (next to the
Austrian Family) in the
German Empire. Besides the Marquisate of
Brandenburg, he challenges the Dukedoms of
Magdeburg, Preussen, Juliers, Cleves, Bergen, Stetin, Pomeren, Casubia, Vandalia, Silesia, Crossen, and
Jagerndorff. Again, he writes himself Duke of
Rugen, Prince of
Halberstadt and
Minden, Earl of the
Marck and
Ravensberg, and lastly Baron of
Ravenstein.
The Marquise of
Brandenburg's chief interest seems to consist in a firm adherence to the King of
Denmark,Interest. who (possibly) is the only Prince can secure him from the encroachments of his neighbour the
Swede. Next to the
Swedes he is most jealous of the Dukes of
Saxony; as having observed them more favoured by the House of
Austria, in the controversie about the Dukedoms of
Juliers and
Cleves, then himself. This obliged him to compose the differences betwixt himself and the Duke of
Newburg upon easier terms then otherwise he would have been willing to have done. The King of
Poland is another terrible neighbour on the coasts of
Prussia; and therefore the Elector (not daring to repose too great a confidence in a Prince who pretends a right to the Ducal as well as Regal
Prussia) is obliged to keep a constant and strong Army upon those coasts. In the year 1657, this question was moved, Whether the Elector of
Brandenburg might lawfully be deprived of all the Territories which he held in
Prussia as Dependances on the Crown of
Poland, upon his having enter'd into a League with the King of
Sweden; at that time declared Enemy to
Poland? The
Polish Lawyers urged in the affirmative, that the Elector was the King of
Poland's Vassal, and therefore forfeited his Lands by entering into a Confederacy with his Master's Enemies. But certainly (when we consider in what a miserable condition poor King
Casimir was, and how unable to defend either himself or his Subjects; and again, how probable 'twas, that in this conjuncture the
Swedish Army would have swallow'd up the whole Dukedom of
Prussia, as it had already the greatest part of the Kingdom of
Poland, without being obliged to quit the field by such a Treaty) the
Poles had greater reason to thank the Elector for preserving, by this expedient, some part of their King's Dominions from the common destruction; then to condemn him for wisely shunning the ruin which King
Casimir had brought upon this Kingdom.
There are six chief Courts of Judicature,
Courts of Judicature. for the examination and trial of Cases Civil and Ecclesiastical, in the Elector's Dominions. 1. At
Coen on the
Spree; or in the Elector's Palace at
Berlin. 2. At
Colberg in
Pomeren. 3.
Cleve. 4.
Halberstadt. 5.
Petershagh; where all Causes depending between any of the Elector's Subjects in the Dukedom of
Minden are brought to trial. 6.
Konigsberg in
Prussia. To these may be added, the Court of
Magdeburg; since that Archbishopric is now fall'n into the Elector's hands. But of this more hereafter.
The whole Marquisate of
Brandenburg (strictly so call'd) is commonly divided into the
Alt, Mittel, Neue, and
Ʋcker-Marck, with the Territories of
Prignitz and
Sternberg. But (taking
Prignitz and
Ʋcker-Marck into the Middle, and
Sternberg into the New) we may include them all under the three following heads:
ALT-MARCK.
FIrst, ALT-MARCK, or the old Marquisate, is bounded on the North with the Dukedom of
Mecklenburg; on the West with
Saxon-Lawenburg, and some part of the Duke of
Lunenburg's Territories; on the South with the Dukedom of
Magdeburg; and on the East with the
Middle Marck; containing about thirty
English miles in length or bredth. Some Authors, for the plenty it affords of all manner of Herbs and Fruits, have been pleased to call it the
Galilee of
Germany. It is commonly subdivided into four petty Provinces, whereof that on the East (called
Das Balsamerland or
Ostland) contains
Stendal, Arneburg, the City and County of
Osterburg, with some other Towns of note: On the South lies
Die Langer, or
Das Angerland; taking its name from the River
Anger: Towards the West
Das land zu Zermund, in which is situate the ancient City
Soltwedel: And lastly,
Das Senland on the North; supposed to have its name from the
Senones, who are thought to have been the ancient inhabitants of these parts. The most considerable Cities and great Towns in the
Old Marck are:
1.
Stendal, the Metropolis of this Province,
Stendal. seated upon the River
Ʋcht, about five
English miles distant from the
Elb and
Angermund, in a pleasant plain, and at the side of a large Forest. It was built by the Emperor
Henry the First in the year of Christ 920, and afterwards fortified with strong Walls and Bulwarks by Marquise
Albert (surnam'd
Ʋrsus) in the year 1150. In this neat and well-built
Hans-Town are kept the ordinary Quarter-Sessions for decision of all Law-Suits in the
Old Marck. The chief trade of the Citizens is in Corn and Linnen Cloth; with which (and the daily opportunity of entertaining Passengers that travel this road from
Hamburg and
Lubec towards
Magdeburg, Erfurt, &c.) they make a shift to live handsomly.
2.
Soltwedel (which some call
Soltquedel,Soltwedel. others
Soltquel), a great Town on the banks of the River
Jetze, in the middle way betwixt
Lunenburg and
Stendal. Angelius a Wardenhagen (an ingenious Author, who has published a large and learned Treatise
De Rebus publicis Hanseaticis) tell us, that
Well and
Hues (whence our word
House) are words of the same signification in the ancient
Saxon Dialect. And
Besoldus (a man rarely well skill'd in the Etymologies of his mother tongue) notes, that
Well (instead of which the Rustics corruptly say
Wedel) may as rationally be derived from the
Latin word
Vella, used by ancient
Roman Writers instead of the more
[Page][Page]MARCHIA VETUS Vulgo ALTE MARCK in
March Brandenburgico
To the R.
t Wor.
ll Ralph Macro M. D.
r this Plate is Humbly Dedicated by Moses Pitt.
[Page]MARCHIA MEDIA Vulgo MIDLE MARCK in Brandenburg‘IE NE SERCH QV
[...]’
To the R.
t Hon.
t Iames Earle of Northampton▪ This Mapp is humbly Dedicated by M. Pitt.
[Page][Page 89]modern
Villa, as the
Saxon Wic is usually fetcht from
Vicus. So that
Solwell, corrupted into
Soltwedel, signifies (as these men will have it) an House, or Temple, dedicate to the Sun
(Sol) the great God of the
Romans. But how came the Pagan
Germans to borrow an Idol from
Rome, and to retain the
Latin name? In answer to this scruple, the
German Antiquaries tell us, that in the days of
Augustus Cesar, Claudius Drusus being sent into these parts to fight against the
Longobardi, built for himself and his followers a kind of Village on the banks of
Jetze, in the very place where the Natives had worshipp'd an image of the Sun.
Drusus, bred up in the like Idolatrous practices, joyn'd in the ceremonies of Adoration with these Infidels, and taught them to call upon their mock Deity by the
Latine name
Sol. Hence the Town, say they, got the name of
Solwedel or
Solwel. i. e. The House or Temple of the God
Sol. Formerly this City, with the adjoyning Countrey, was subject to its own Marquises; who are oftentimes mentioned by the
German Historians (as particularly in the account they give us of the expedition against the
Huns under the Emperor
Henry I.) as Princes of extraordinary valour and gallantry. Afterwards the two Marquisates of
Brandenburg and
Soltwedel (or
Zermund) were united and enjoy'd by the Princes of
Anhalt, until (in the days of the Emperor
Sigismund) they descended upon the Ancestors of the present Elector of
Brandenburg. The Town consists of two parts, the Old and New; whereof the former is fancied to be that which the foremention'd Historians report to have been built by
Claudius Drusus, and the latter is said to be the work of the Emperor
Henry I. The chief commodity of the Town is Beer; which (tho not so good as we meet with at
Gardleben) is hence exported into several parts of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg and Dukedom of
Lunenburg.
3.
Gardleben. GARDLEBEN. Some Authors tell us, that the ancient name of this Town was
Isoburgum from the Image of
Isis here worshipp'd. Others believe 'twas
Isernburg; and so called from its impregnable strength, that name signifying properly
a City of Iron. The neighbouring old Fort (call'd still, by its ancient
Wendish name
Iseren Schnippe, i. e. Iron Jaws) gave occasion to both these opinions; which are purely conjectural, and are neither countenanc'd by Antiquity nor Probability. But (omitting these fancies with that of other Authors, equally impertinent, who write the
Gardelegia, and fetch its Etymology from
Gardalegionum, or
Custodia Legionum; because forsooth
Claudius Drusus quarter'd some of his Soldiers here as well as at
Soltwedel) 'tis most likely this City had its name from the multitude of pleasant Gardens among which 'tis seated. The Beer brewed in this Town is famous all
Germany over; and reckon'd amongst the greatest Blessings of the
Old Marck. Henry Meibonius (a Professor in
Helmstadt, whither great quantities of this Liquor is ordinarily convey'd) has writ a Panegyrick in commendation of it. Another great commodity of the Town is Hops, which are preferr'd by the
Danish Merchants, and others, before the best in
Germany, and bought up at a higher rate. The Arms of the City are three Hop-poles laden with Hops.
IV.
Angermund. ANGERMUND, or
Tangermund. Seated, as the name intimates, on the mouth of the River
Anger or
Tanger, about thirty
English miles from
Magdeburg. The Emperor
Charles IV. (having bought the whole Marquisate of
Brandenburg) built the Castle of
Angermund in the year 1376, making this the usual place of his residence for some years after. The Citizens have a considerable trade from the advantage of the
Elb; by which their Corn and other Commodities of the Country are convey'd in Vessels down to
Hamburg, and thence into foreign Nations.
Other places of less note are, 1.
Seehusen, or
Senheusen, as some write it; seated on the River
Alant, and falsely suppos'd to have been built by the
Senones; who were indeed a
Gaulish people, and never inhabited these parts. 2.
Osterburg, a great Corn-Market. 3.
Werben, seated at the confluence of the Rivers
Elb and
Havel; built by
Henry, surnamed the Fowler, out of the ruins of the old
Castellum Vari. Gustavus Adolphus fancied this place capable of being made the strongest Fort in
Germany; and himself contributed so far towards its fortification, as to cause that Castle to be built which now commands the whole Town. 4.
Havelberg, anciently a Bishop's See. 5.
Perleberg, the chief Town in
Prignitz, seated in a pleasant and fruitful plain.
Arneburg, Wittemberg, Bismarcht, Schnakenburg, with some others, are Villages rather then great Towns.
II. MIDDLE-MARCK.
MIDDLE-MARCK, as its name intimates, is situate in the very midst of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg. 'Tis the largest of the three; and reaches from the banks of the
Elb to the
Oder, about an hundred
English miles. The chief Towns in it are:
I. BRANDENBURG; which,
Brandenburg. tho at present far inferior to many of the neighbouring Cities, well merits the preeminence; as having been formerly the Metropolis of the whole Land, and to this day giving name to the Marquisate. Some of the
German Historians endeavour to perswade us, that 'twas built 416 years before the birth of our Saviour by one
Brenno, a famous Captain of the
Semnones. Others, more modestly, fetch its original and name from one
Brando; who, as they tell the story, first built this City about the year 230. At present the Town is considerable for little but its age; and the inhabitants would be put to a hard shift to pick up a livelihood, if the neighbouring Lake (about ten
English miles in length) did not supply them with good store of Fish. In the great Church there are a great many Monuments and Sepulchers of Princes and Bishops, and in the Marketplace a
Statua Rolandina; of which last we have already given the Reader a short account.
II. BERLIN.
Berlin.Angelius a Werdenhagen (an Author of good credit, to whom the world is indebted for the most accurate descriptions of the
Hans-Towns hitherto published) tells us, this small City had its name (as well as
Bernau, Beerwald, Bernstein, with some other places in the Marquisate of
Brandenburg) from its first Founder Marquise
Albert, surnamed
Ʋrsus, or
der Beer. It is seated on a pleasant plot of ground upon the bank of the River
Spree; which
Prickheimer, Dresser, Willichius, Maginus, Bertius, with some other noted Geographers, have mistaken for
Ptolomy's
Svevus. Whereas that great man makes his
Svevus to empty it self into the
Baltic Sea; and 'tis well known, that the
Spree joins it self with the
Havel at
Spandau, with which it is swallow'd up by the
Elb near
Werben, which carries it into the
German Ocean.
[Page 90] On the other side of the River stands
Coln on the
Spree (as 'tis nam'd for distinction sake), famous for the Palace and usual residence of the Marquises of
Brandenburg. The Castle here was built by Marquise
Joachim the second; but much enlarged and beautified by his Successors. Things most worth the seeing here are the Armory, Chambers of Rarities, Galleries (in some of which, among multitudes of other rare Pictures, there are a great many pieces of the famous
Luke Kranach's work), Gardens, Waterworks,
&c. In the year 1628, the Citizens of
Berlin and
Coln were strangely alarm'd with the sight of an Apparition or Spirit which many of them pretended to have seen in the shape of a woman, and to have heard it pronounce these words,
VenI, IVDICA VIVos & MortVos. Now because the curious men about the Court had observed the said year 1628, mystically pointed at in the numeral Letters of those words, they presently concluded that the Day of Judgment was not far off.
III.
Francfurt. FRANCFURT upon the
Oder; which is said to have been built, about the year of Christ 146, by
Sunno a Prince of the
Franks; who pursuing the
Vandals to this place with an Army of eighteen (some say twenty-eight) thousand of his Countrymen, placed here a Colony of his Soldiers, calling the Town he had built for them
Trajectum Francorum, or
Francfurt. Afterwards (in the year 1253)
John I. Marquise of
Brandenburg, with his Brother
Otho rebuilt the decayed Town, and enlarged it above a third part. In the year 1379, Marquise
Sigismund granted many and great priviledges to the Citizens; upon their entring into the Society of the
Hans-Towns. Lastly, the University of
Francfurt was founded by Marquise
Joachim I. and his Brother
Albert (afterwards Archbishop of
Mentz and
Magdeburg) in the year 1506, at which time the Schools here were stock'd with Professors from
Leipsic. Professors of best note in this University of late years (and probably some of them may be still alive) were
Raetius, Strickius, Becman, and
Schultz; who have pleased their Countrymen with the Edition of some few disputations and small pamphlets of good credit. The Streets are generally large and well built, the Market-place spatious and stately; in which are yearly kept three great Fairs. Without the Gates of the City are to be seen the ruins of an ancient
Carthusian Monastery; of which
Johannes ab Indagine (who, as
Dresser reports, was Author of above three hundred Treatises upon different Subjects) was sometimes Prior.
To these may be added some few more of less note, as 1.
Spandau, a strong Town on the mouth of the
Spree; but mean and inconsiderable for its buildings. 2.
Oranienburg (called formerly
Botzaw) about sixteen or twenty
English miles distant from
Berlin; a Village and Palace that affords the greatest variety of pleasures of any in the Marquise of
Brandenburg's Dominions, encompass'd on every side with most delicate and pleasant Parks, and Forests well stock'd with all manner of Game.
Bisental, Angermund, Liebenwald, Kremme, Nieustadt, &c. have nothing remarkable in them.
Prenslow (a Town well furnish'd with Fish from the adjoining
Ʋcker See),
Strasburg and
Templin are three well fortified Towns (and the only three worth the mentioning in the
Ʋcker-Marck.
III. NEW-MARCK.
NEW-MARCK lies betwixt the River
Warta and
Pomeren; being separated from the
Middle-Marck by the
Oder; containing in circuit about an hundred
English miles. It belong'd anciently to the Knights of the
Teutonic Order, who (in the year 290) sold it to
Otho Marquise of
Brandenburg. Sigismund pawn'd it to the King of
Poland; but redeem'd it again as soon as he was advanc'd to the Imperial Throne.
The Country is every-where sufficiently fruitful;
Soil. and abounds with Corn-fields and Pasturegrounds more then any other parts of the Marquisate. Upon the banks of the
Oder the inhabitants plant Vineyards; which sometimes (tho rarely) turn to good account. In some places the Bores find now and then considerable quantities of red Coral; and several sorts of precious Stones, which (as Mr.
Cambden speaks of the like Treasures in
Cumberland)
Gemmarii minimo ab egenis emunt & maximo revendunt.
The only Town in the
New-Marck which merits a particular Description in this place is
Custrin, seated upon the
Oder. And this too,
Custrin. not many ages ago, was only a poor despicable Village inhabited by a few beggarly Fishermen; until
John Marquise of
Brandenburg, returning from his following the wars under
Charles V. fortified the place with Rampires and Bulwarks of Earth, about the year 1537. But finding that (whatever security he might promise himself from these Fortresses against the invasion of a foreign enemy) such banks as he had cast up were easily wash'd away with a Flood, he soon after wall'd it round with stone; and 'tis now become the Key of the
New-Marck. The invincible King of
Sweden, Gustavus Adolphus, was baffled at this Town in the year 1631, being forced to raise his designed siege and withdraw his Army, which before that time knew not how to leave a Town unplunder'd. So that this City may possibly deserve that high character which
Angelius a Werdenhagen (or his Author) has given of it in the three following Distichs:
Ipsa licet cunctas adducat
Thracia vires,
Germanis certam saepe minata necem;
Ipsa licet cunctas ducat terra
Itala vires,
Teutonibus magnum saepe minata malum;
Nec tamen humana poteris delerier arte,
Nec vi, nec vigili fraude, dolove capi.
The Burgers have generally neat and well furnish'd Houses; and the Market-place excells any in the whole Marquisate.
Sternberg is memorable for nothing but its giving name to a small Territory adjoining. And
Dam, Konigsberg, Morin, Banen, Soldin, Landsberg, with some others, may be reckon'd (without any great injury done them) amongst the Villages rather then Cities of the Marquisate.
The places subject to the Elector of
Brandenburg in
Crossen, and some other parts of
Silesia and
Lusatia shall be described hereafter; when we come to give an account of the Countries to which they more immediately belong.
MAGDEBURG is acknowledged by all Historians to be a City of as great Antiquity as most in
Germany. [...]. Some are of opinion, that 'twas first built by
Drusus and his Son
Germanicus in the days of
Augustus Cesar; but
Pyrckamer thinks 'tis yet older, and the same with
Ptolomy's
Vesovium. They that fetch its original no higher then the
Roman Captain
Drusus's time, tell us, it had its name from an Image of
Venus (called in their language
die Magde, i. e. the Maid) which, say they, the old Records of
Magdeburg report to have been worshipp'd in the neighbouring banks of the
Elb. Hence we meet with the names of
Parthenope, Parthenopolis, and sometimes
Parthenopyrga (the
Greek word
[...], signifying the same with the High
Dutch Burg) in
Latin Historians instead of
Magdeburgum. This Image, as the report goes, was destroyed, and its Temple utterly demolished by the Emperor
Charles the Great's Officers; who converted the great Treasure they had seized to better uses, in building St.
Stephens Church in the Town. An ancient Chronicle of the City of
Brunswic gives this description of the foremention'd Image, That it represented a naked woman with bright shining eyes and long yellow hair; seated in a guilt Chariot, drawn by two white Swans and as many white Turtles. Upon her head was placed a Garland of Myrtle, and on her breast a burning Torch flaming every way. In her right hand she held a Globe of the world; and in her left three Golden Apples. She was attended by three Graces, who cover'd each others eyes with a Veil. What credit may be given to these stories I know not; nor will it probably be worth the while to enquire. However certain it is, that whatever Antiquity the Town of
Magdeburg may pretend to, it was never wall'd round before the year 940, nor could ever challenge the name of a City till some time after. For
Edgitha (wife to the Emperor
Otho I. and Daughter to our
English-Saxon King
Edmund) having the Land about
Magdeburg setled on her for a Jointure, prevailed with her Husband to give her leave to build a City in this place and to wall it in. This Grant the Emperor seconded with large Contributions out of his own Treasury; and translated the Bishopric of
Vallersleben to this new City. So that
Magdeburg had (if not its name) at least its glory from an
English Princess.
Soon after the said Emperor
Otho prevailed with the Pope of
Rome to make
Magdeburg an Archbishopric; and to order that several of the neighbouring Bishops (particularly the Bishops of
Mersburg, Zeitz, Havelberg, and
Brandenburg) should be subject to the Archbishop of this Diocess as to their lawful Metropolitan, who should acknowledg no man's supremacy (in Spirituals) but the Pope's. From thenceforward the Archbishop of
Magdeburg had the Title of
Primate of Germany conferr'd on him; tho (as
Krantius shews) the three Spiritual Electors and the Archbishop of
Saltzburg always refused to pay him that respect. In this State the Church of
Magdeburg continued till the year 1566, when the whole Chapter (having abandoned the innovations and fopperies of the Church of
Rome, and embraced the tenents of
M. Luther) elected
Joachim Frideric, at that time the only Son of
John George Elector of
Brandenburg, to be the Administrator of their Archbishopric; having before his admission bound him by oath to the observation of certain Articles, approved on by himself and his Father. After whose death he was advanced to the Electorate of
Brandenburg; and his Son
Christian-William chosen Administrator in his place. Who faithfully discharged his trust till the year 1631, in which the Town (after a long siege) was taken by the cruel Count
Tilly; who destroyed the lives and fortunes of no less then thirty thousand Citizens with Fire and Sword, and carried the Administrator prisoner to
Newstatt in
Austria, where he chang'd his Religion and turn'd Papist. Into his place the Chapter elected
Augustus, second Son to
John George the First Elector of
Saxony; who had had the
[Page 92]Title of
Coadjutor from the year 1625. In the
Westphalian Treaty it was order'd, that upon the death of the said
Augustus, the Archbishopric of
Magdeburg should again return to the House of
Brandenburg; and be for ever annex'd to that Elector's Dominions under the name of a Dukedom. In pursuance of this agreement the present Elector of
Brandenburg has (upon the death of the said Administrator, which hapned this last year, 1680) taken possession of
Magdeburg and the adjoining Territories; which ('tis thought) will advance his yearly Revenues the sum of 600000 Rixdollars.
The siege of
Magdeburg in the year 1631 (which we have already mention'd) is so famous for the valour of the Defendants,
Siege. and notorious for the unparallel'd cruelty of the Besiegers, that it well merits a more particular account then we have yet given of it. The tenth of
May (old stile) was the bloody day whereon this horrid and tragical Massacre was committed. The Burgers had long withstood the threats and force of the Imperial General Count
Tilly, endeavouring to secure their Religion from the outrages of a Popish Army. But after a long and vain resistance, the bloody Count forced his way into the Town; and commanded his men to spare neither man, woman, nor child, but put all to the Sword; to fire all their Churches and private Houses; and to extirpate, if possible, their very name. In obedience to his command women in travail were ript up, and the sucking children snatcht from their mothers breasts and hew'n in pieces before their eyes. The young Virgins were first ravish'd in the open street, and then murder'd; two whereof are said to have prevented their shame by hast'ning their death, the one throwing her self (before
Tilly's face) into a Well, and the other into the Fire. Sixteen Churches and Chappels (whereof many cover'd with Lead, and one with Copper) were burnt down; and not an House in the Town left standing, save a few Fishermen's Cottages, which the Imperialists would not vouchsafe to fire. Of near forty thousand Citizens scarce four hundred were left alive; and those destitute of Houses and other conveniences requisite for the preservation of the miserable lives they had spared them. This bloody exploit Count
Tilly was used to brag of afterwards in his jollity; calling it merrily
The Marriage-feast of Magdeburg.
Since this desolation the Town has not to this day been able to recover its former grandeur;
Present condition. but is every-where checquer'd with new buildings and the ruins of the old. They have rebuilt one stately Church; but most of the rest ly still buried in their ashes.
Tilly, in the heat of his rage, was perswaded to spare the Cathedral; which is indeed a stately structure, and enough to recommend the whole Town to a stranger's eye. In one of the Chappels in this Church is shew'n the Tomb of the Emperor
Otho the Great with his Wife
Edgitha (beforementioned) holding in her hand nineteen small Globes within a Golden circle; which denote so many Tun of Gold given by the Emperor, at her request, towards the building of this Cathedral. There are in this Church forty-nine Altars; whereof the High Altar in the Quire is of one piece of stone, curiously wrought, and of various colours. It is nine
Hamburg Ells (each of which makes one foot and ten inches) in length, four in bredth, and one in thickness; and valued at above two Tun of Gold.
Magdeburg had once the supreme Jurisdiction in Civil Cases as well as Ecclesiastical over all the other Cities in
Saxony;Judicature. and the Archbishop of this Diocess was (like our Bishops of
Durham) a Count Palatine, who had the sole power of determining all Causes brought before him. But that grand Authority was lost by degrees; and now the Citizens of
Magdeburg have no other Courts of Judicature then such as are kept by the Burgomasters and Raedtsherrn of other Cities as well as this.
That part of this Dukedom which lies on the Western banks of the
Elb, is exceedingly fruitful in Corn, but wants Wood, and other fuel; and on the contrary, that part of it which lies beyond the River has plenty of Wood, but wants Corn. There are contain'd in the whole Circle twenty-eight Towns, which anciently paid homage to the Archbishops of
Magdeburg; and are now subject to the Elector of
Brandenburg as their Duke.
ANHALT.
BEtwixt the
Sala and the
Elb lies the greatest part of this Principality; the whole being environ'd by the County of
Mansfeldt, the Upper
Saxony, the Bishopric of
Halle, the Dukedom of
Magdeburg and the Bishopric of
Halberstadt.
The Princes of
Anhalt pretend to as ancient an extraction as any Family in the
German Empire,
Princes. or in
Europe, ever did.
Limneus, and some other
Dutch Genealogists have a list of their Ancestors (whom they make a continual succession of Princes) from
Ascenas Noah's Grandchild; and 'tis easie to run up their pedigree from thence to
Adam. I suppose the Title of
Principes Ascanii gave the first occasion to this conjecture; which has been always exploded and laugh'd at by men of sense. 'Twill do these generous Princes credit enongh to give the most certain account of their Family that Antiquity will furnish us with; which if we mix with fabulous Legends of
Ascenas and
Gomer, the whole story will grow questionable, and our intended flattery be turned into a downright defamation. A Genealogical Table of great Antiquity in the Prince's Palace at
Pleskau affirms, that the Princes of this Family were Kings, Dukes, and Generals of the
Saxons long before the coming of Christ; but however sets down for Head of the Family
Berenthobald, who in the quality of King led the
Saxons to the wars against
Hermanford King of
Thuringen in the year 524, and was rewarded with the Towns of
Ascandt, Ballenstede, and the Lands adjoining. Again, we are assured from the testimony of most credible Historians, that above a thousand years ago
Berenthobald II. and III. (both Princes of the House of
Anhalt) were Generals of the
Saxons against
Clovis II. and
Dagobert Kings of
France; and that
Clovis III. King of
France, married
Batildis a Princess of this House. From the Loins of these Princes, by an uninterrupted succession, was descended
Albert Ʋrsus, who (by the favour of the Emperor
Conrad III.) was made Marquise and Elector of
Brandenburg. And not long after
Henry, surnam'd the
Lion, Duke of
Saxony and
Brunswic having disobliged the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa was degraded, and his Dignities conferr'd on
Bernard the said
Albert's Son, in the year 1169. So that
Otho and
Bernard, Marquis
Albert's Sons, divided the
Ascanian Family into two branches; whence
[Page][Page]MARCHIA NOVA Vulgo NEW MARK in
March Brandenburg
[Page]PRINCIPATUS ANHALDINUS ET MAGDEBURGENSIS Archiepiscopatus.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page][Page 93]proceeded two of the greatest Houses (
Saxony and
Brandenburg) in the
German Empire. But
Henry Bernard's son (notwithstanding the great promotion of his Father and Uncle) was the first Prince of
Anhalt; having that Title conferr'd on him, together with several of
Henry the
Lion's Territories, by the foremention'd Emperour
Frideric. And in his race, both the Lands and Title are continued to this day; tho the two
Electorates are translated into other
Families. Nor is is
Henry's Family like to fail in hast; being at this Day the most numerous of any in the Empire. In the last Century
Joachim Ernest was the only person left of the Family; but he (dying in the year 1566) left behind him a numerous offspring of sixteen children. Whereof the eldest Daughter,
Ann Mary, was married to
Joachim Frideric Duke of
Lignitz; Elizabeth to
Joachim George Elector of
Brandenburg; Sibil to
Frideric Duke of
Wirtenburg; Agnes Hedwig, to
Augustus Elector of
Saxony, and after his death to
John Duke of
Holstein; Dorothy Mary to
John Duke of
Saxon-Weimar; and
Ann Sophia to
Gunther Albert Count of
Schurtzeburg. His five Sons divided the Principality into four equal shares at first; because
Augustus had told them he would be content with a pension for his life, not intending to marry. But afterwards marrying
Sibil Countess of
Solms; his Brethren chose rather to assign him a fifth share in the Land then to allow him a pension sufficient for the maintenance of him and his Family. Whereupon,
John George had
Dissau; Christian resided at
Bernburg; Augustus at
Pleskau; Rodolph at
Zerbst; and
Lewis at
Cotheim. Now all of these having children, and being of equal authority, the Family would necessarily be much weak'ned, if they did not agree to submit themselves unanimously to the Eldest of their Family; who has the supreme Government conferr'd on him, and the sole power of calling together the other Princes, when there is need of their advice in matters of more then ordinary consequence. All these Princes, thus united, have only one vote in the Diets; and therefore one of them is constantly deputed by the rest to be their representative in any such Session.
'Twill not in this place be amiss to inform the the Reader, that Prince
Lewis beforemention'd (to the great credit of himself and Family) was the first Founder of the
Frucht-Barende Geselschaft, as the
Germans call it, or
Fructifying Society. The story of which is as follows: This Prince having travell'd over all
Europe, and observed the great advantages which the Nobility in
France, Italy, and other Nations had, in being furnish'd with store of excellent Books in their own Languages, was resolved to try whether he could perswade any of his own Countrymen to set upon the Translation of the best
Latin and
Greek Authors into a more easie and intelligible stile then was ordinarily used among them. In pursuance of this design he instituted the Society aforesaid, whereof himself was the first President, and succeeded so well herein, that in a very short time after there were above twenty Princes, and at least six hundred Lords and Noblemen who enter'd and enroll'd themselves in this College of Wits. And how much the
German Nation is beholden to the endeavours of these
Virtuosi, there is no intelligent man but what is abundantly sensible. For besides the opportunity which every man has of reading the writings of foreign Authors in his own Language, the
Germans are able to spell their own tongue aright; which before the Institution of this Society, so few of them could do, that
Duesius tells us, one main design of his publishing a
German Grammar, was to teach the Nobility of that Nation to put their words into writing.
The most considerable Towns in this small Principality are,
1.
Zerbst. Seated on a small River about an
English mile distant from the banks of the
Elb. Dresserus fancies this a Town of great Antiquity,
Zerbst.] and had its name from the
Servetii (or
Cervetii, as he reads it) an old
Wendish people. But
Werdenhagen (a better Antiquary) rejects this frivolous assertion, and proves, that
Zerbst in the
Wendish Dialect signifies a strong Fort. 'Tis, at this day, remarkable for nothing but a sort of strong heady Beer; which the Citizens brew in Summer, and send abroad into all the neighbouring Towns and Provinces.
2.
Bernburg.Bernburg. Another Residence of the Princes of
Anhalt; separated from the Palace by the River
Sala. On the eleventh of
March, in the year 1636, this Town was taken by the Elector of
Saxony's Forces; who put the whole Garrison that defended it, with all the inhabitants (excepting only those few that belong'd to the Prince's Court) to the Sword, and plunder'd the City.
3.
Dessau. A well fortified Town on the
Elb;Dessau. seated in a pleasant and fruitful part of the Country. It had its name given (as most of the
German Etymologists imagine) by the
Jews; who in their mungrel
Dutch-Jewish Dialect, call a fat soil (such as this Town stands on)
Desse. The Prince's Palace in
Dessau was first built (as appears by an old Inscription over one of the Gates) by
Albert and
Waldemar two Brothers, Princes of
Anhalt, in the year 1341. In one of the Chappels of this Town is to be seen the Tomb of
Jeckel Rehebock (whom some
German Historians name
Meniken von Belitz) an old Miller; who having for some time attended
Waldemar, Marquise of
Brandenburg, in the Wars, took upon him to counterfeit his slain Master; and carried on the design so cunningly, that a great many believ'd him to be the very Marquise, and follow'd him with as great respect as they had done his Master before. He dyed in the year 1350.
4.
Aschersleben, or
Ascania;Ascania. whence the Princes of
Anhalt got the name of
Principes Ascanii. 'Tis an old Town on the confines of the Bishopric of
Halberstadt; and for that reason seized on by Canons of that Church upon the death of Prince
Otho's Widow, in the year 1315. Since which time the Princes of
Anhalt have often complain'd of the injustice of this action; and hoped for a redress at the Treaty of
Munster; but in vain: for the Bishopric of
Halberstadt was by that Treaty granted to the Elector of
Brandenburg; who is too potent a Prince to be frighted into a resignation of any of the dependances upon that Diocess.
THE Dukedom of
Brunswic (strictly so call'd) comprehends only the Territories subject to the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Hannover, or
Calenberg. The Principality of
Grubenhagen, with the Counties of
Blanckenburg and
Reinstein, are indeed usually comprised under the same name, because subject to the Dukes of
Zell and
Wolfenbuttel (who are both entituled Dukes of
Brunswic as well
Luneburg); but are however in themselves distinct Dominions, and shall accordingly be separately described.
The Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Hannever are exceeding populous and fruitful.
Soil. The Wheat and Rye in this Country grows sometimes to that prodigious height, that their ordinary Ears of Corn are higher then the tallest man on Horseback.
But yet we must not expect to meet with such pleasant and profitable Cornfields as these in every part of the Country. A great share of the
Hercynean Forest ran thro this Land; tho that be now parcell'd out into smaller Woods and Parks. In these the Inhabitants have (besides the provision of Timber and Fuel) great store of Deer, wild Swine, Hares,
&c. with Fowl of all sorts. Not to mention their rich Mines of Iron, Salt, and Coal-pits; of which in their due place.
The chief Rivers are the
Weser (by which all manner of Merchandise are convey'd from
Bremen up as far as
Brunswic),
Rivers.Leina, Innerste, Ocker; with some more of less note, which supply the neighbourhood with Fish.
It is observable,
Forts. that every-where in the Dukedom of
Brunswic (as well as in the County of
Blackenburg) you may meet with the Ruins of old Forts and Castles on the tops of high Hills and ragged Mountains; which, by most Antiquaries, are conjectur'd to be the Reliques and
Rudera of so many
Roman Fortifications, and an evident argument, that the Seat of the war betwixt the
Romans and the
Germans was for some time (at least) in this part of the Empire. I had rather think them the work of some
Saxon Commanders, when engaged in the defence of their Country and Paganism against the Assaults of
Charles the Great; or, perhaps, built by that mighty Emperor to secure his Conquests.
However, thus much we may venture to conclude from these venerable Tents of
Mars, [...] of the
[...] that the Lower
Saxons (those especially that inhabited these parts) were anciently a stout and warlike people; men that were hardly conquer'd, and afterwards with more difficulty kept in subjection. And such their progeny are still reckon'd. They are men of a larger size then most others of the
German Nation; and withall inur'd to a coarse fare and cold lodging. Their ordinary diet is dry'd Swine's flesh and Sawsedges; which they digest with as much ease as any of their neighbour Nations do their choicest delicacies. From their great greediness in devouring this sort of diet, they are usually call'd (by the
Hollanders and other
Germans)
Speckmuffen, or
Bacon-guts. With these meats they eat a black and harsh tasted bread made of the coarsest Wheat or Rye-meal. This in their barbarous and rustic dialect, they call
Pumpernickell; a compound that has no manner of affinity with any primitive in the High
Dutch tongue. Some of their learned men give this account of the word, that a
French Gentleman travelling this Country, and being ask'd what he thought of this kind of bread, made answer, that it was
bon pour cheval, i. e. good diet for a Horse; which words being not rightly proportion'd to the mouths of the
Brunswic Bores that heard him, were by them miserably corrupted into the word beforemention'd. Their Land affords no Wine; but they think that defect abundantly recompensed by the great quantities of Beer brew'd in most places of note. The
Brunswickers are not, 'tis true, so complaisant in their behaviour and carriage as some other
Germans which a Traveller may meet with; but their unfeign'd humanity and hospitality will sufficiently atone for their want of Courtship. They know how to
[Page 91]be civil to a stranger without flattery; and in in their entertainment of Travellers their performances are commonly as large as a
French man's promise.
We have already (in the description of the Dukedom of
Luneburg) acquainted the Reader, that the whole Dukedom of the Lower
Saxony, which was afterwards subdivided into those of
Brunswic and
Luneburg, was formerly subject to one Prince; and we have there also given him an account of the first original of this Dominion, with the continuance of it under several Princes during the union of its members. The first division of these Territories hapned in the year 1264; at which time Duke
Otho's two Sons,
Albert and
John, not liking to be copartners in the Government of the Lower
Saxony, divided the Land; assigning to the former the City and Dukedom of
Brunswic, and to the later the other of
Luneburg. However, upon the death of
William Duke of
Luneburg, Grandchild to the foremention'd Duke
John, without issue male, in the year 1368, the two Dukedoms were again jointly subject to Duke
Magnus, surnam'd
Torquatus. But in this they could not long continue; for
Torquatus's Sons, as ambitious of independant and absolute Government as their predecessors, again separated Courts;
Bernbard, the elder Brother, claiming this Dukedom to himself, and assigning
Luneburg to
Henry his younger Brother. After whose death, his Son
William (surnam'd
Victoriosus for his valorous exploits) fell upon his Uncle
Bernhard; whom he reduc'd to those straits at last, that he made him and his two Sons change Dukedoms with him. From that time the Dukedom of
Brunswic was enjoy'd by
William and his Successors, until the extirpation of that Line in
Frideric Ʋlrich, who died without issue
A. D. 1634. In the year 1491, this Dukedom was divided (by
Henry the elder and his Brother
Eric) into two equal shares; whereof all the Country betwixt the Rivers
Deister and
Leina, together with the Territories of
Gottingen, (and known by the name of the Dukedom of
Brunswic-Wolfenbuttel) remained in the possession of
Henry. But soon after,
Eric's Line (upon the death of his Son
Eric II. in
Italy A. D. 1584.) was extinct; and these two Dukedoms again united in the House of
Wolfenbuttel. In which condition they remain'd till the death of
Frideric Ʋlric beforemention'd. After which the Dukedoms of
Wolfenbuttel and
Calenberg descended upon some younger Brothers of the House of
Luneburg. The famous and learned Prince
Augustus was advanc'd to
Wolfenbuttel; where he is now succeeded by his Son
Rodulphus Augustus. Of these two Dukes the Reader may expect a larger character in the following description of the Palace at
Wolfenbuttel.
'Twill not be impertinent in this place to relate for the Reader's diversion, the Romantic History of the first original of the ancient
Guelphian Family;
[...] which formerly afforded Dukes, at the same time, of
Bavaria and
Saxony; and of which the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Luneburg are now the sole Relicts. The story goes thus:
Jermintrudis, Countess of
Altorf in
Schwaben, having accused a poor woman of Adultery, and caused several severe punishments to be inflicted on her for having had twelve children at a birth, was within a while after delivered of the same number her self, and all of them Sons. Her Husband, Count
Isenberd, being absent at the time of her delivery, she commanded the Midwife to kill eleven of them; fearing possibly she her self might undergo the same punishment or scandal, at least, which the poor beggar woman had done upon her instigation. The Midwife going to execute her Ladies barbarous commands, was met by the Count returning home; who enquiring what she carried in her Apron, was answer'd,
Woelpen, i. e. Whelps. But suspecting the truth of what she said, upon her refusal to shew them, examining farther into the matter, forc'd her to confess the whole story. Upon which, enjoining the old womans secresie, and concealing the knowledg of the fact from his Countess, he put out all the children to Nurse; taking care their education should be answerable to their quality. At the end of six years the Count invited to a great feast most of his own and his Lady's Relations, to whom, in the midst of their jollity, he presented his eleven Sons (all attired alike) to their Mother; who immediately, suspecting by their number the whole matter, confess'd her design, and was pardon'd by her Husband. From the eldest of these
Whelps or
Guelps (for so the old Count order'd them to be nam'd, in remembrance of the Midwife's answer) was descended that
Henry Guelph, Earl of
Altorf, whom the Emperor
Conrad II. made afterwards Duke of
Bavaria. How this Family came afterwards to encrease their Dominions by the accession of the Lower
Saxony, is already shew'n in the Catalogue of the Dukes of
Luneburg, and needs not here be repeated.
The Reform'd Religion,
Religion. according to the Doctrine of
Luther and the
Augsburg Confession, was first brought into this Country by Duke
Julius; who died in the year 1589. Since which time the greatest part of the Duke of
Brunswic's Subjects have been rigid assertors of
Lutheranism, and as vehement opposers of
Popery and
Calvinism. Indeed of late years, the great authority and respect which the
Calixti, and other Latitudinarians have got at
Helmstadt has won over some multitudes to their perswasion; but the generality are of their Prince's Religion, and zealously pursue the footsteps of their
Megalander (as they are pleas'd to call him)
Martin Luther.
Each particular Dukedom has its distinct supremacy in Ecclesiastical as well as Civil affairs;
Churchgovernment. which are administred in this Manner: Under each Dukedom there is one
Superintendens Generalissimus, who has supreme inspection over all the Church, and resembles one of our Archbishops. To him are subject the several
Superintendentes Generales, or Bishops; and to these the
Superintendentes Speciales, which are the same thing in effect with our Arch-deacons. In some Provinces, they have no other distinction of Superintendents then into
Generales and
Speciales; to wit, where the whole Province is of so small extent as not to require more then one single Bishop. So that we see how willing the
Lutherans are to admit of the Office and Dignity of Archbishops and Bishops in their Church; altho they have got a trick of bawling out against their names as Popish and Anti-Christian.
Cities and Great Towns in the Dukedom of
BRUNSWIC.
BRUNSWIC.
Brunswic.
I. In the Cathedral at
Brunswic, among many other Monuments, there is an old Parchment writen in
Plat-Dutch containing a short account of the most considerable persons which ly buried in that Church, which begins thus,
Alse man Schreff na Goddes gebordt 861,
hefft Hertogg Danckquarth tho Sassen erstlik dusse Borch bemuhret unde Danckquarderode geheten unde nomen laten, i. e. In the year of Christ 861,
Danckquarth, Duke of
Saxony, first walled in this Castle, and called it
Danckquarderode or
Tanquard's-Cross. Which agrees with the story we find in most
German Chronologers of note, who treat of the Antiquities of this place. For they tell us, that
Bruno and
Tanquard (Sons of
Ludolph Duke of
Saxony) were the first Founders of this Town, which from the former was called
Brunswic; the latter only giving name to the Castle. Since that time this City has been continually augmented by the succeeding Dukes of
Saxony and
Brunswic; and is now become one of the most considerable
Hans-Towns in the Empire. Insomuch, that the Citizens divide themselves into five distinct Corporations; who are govern'd by several Magistrates of their own, and have so many different Courts of Judicature. These Companies never unite, but upon some extraordinary occasion; wherein the common interest of the whole Town seems concern'd.
Whether
Brunswic be a free Imperial City, or subject to the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Luneburg, has been a question often controverted betwixt both parties concern'd; each of whom have endeavour'd to assert their pretensions by dint of Sword, and have come off with various success; witness the Sieges in the years 1492, 1550, 1553, 1605, 1606, 1614, 1616,
&c. 'Twas last of all besieged by the present Duke
Rudolphus Augustus; who took it in the year 1671. Since which time he has taken care to be very often resident in the Town, and always (at his departure) to leave behind him a strong Guard.
The chief Trade of this City is in Hides and Mum.
Trade. The Tanners have Skins out of
England, Denmark, and other Nations; which they return dress'd. Their Mum is of two sorts; one whereof is of a thin and weak body, the ordinary drink of the Citizens and neighbouring Rustics; the other, which they call
Ship-Mum, is a much clammier and grosser liquor, brew'd on purpose to be transported into foreign Nations. This kind of drink (which is scarce potable before it has been putrified by working at Sea) is made of Barley and Hops, with a small mixture of Wheat. There are a set number of Brewers who have the sole power of making it; and their appointed time of brewing, is from the beginning of
October to the latter end of
March, Here, by the way, I cannot but wonder, that
Meibomius, writing a Commentary
de Cerevisiis potibusque & ebriaminibus extra vinum aliis, should omit (the two most famous liquors of his own Nation)
Mum and
Breuhane.
II. WOLFENBUTTEL.
Wolfenbuttel. This is the ancient Seat of the Dukes of
Brunswic. Famous for its strong and impregnable fortifications. It confists of two parts: 1.
Arx Guelpica, or the Duke's Palace; which is properly call'd
Wolfenbuttel. Which name it has from its first Founder Duke
Ekbert, who was of the
Guelphian Family. The termination of the word in this, as many other names of Cities and great Towns in
Germany, denotes a moist and watery situation; such as this Town has, and which contributes very much to its strength and security. 2. The City, or
Henrich-Stadt: so called from Duke
Henry the younger, its founder. The only remarkable thing in this part of the Town is the new Church: which some
Italians, and many other Foreigners (if we believe the Citizens) have look'd upon as a most admirable piece of Architecture. In a vault under the Quire lie buried one and twenty Dukes and Dutchesses of
Brunswic; wrapt up in Coffins of Lead with Inscriptions. In the Duke's Palace the most remarkable thing is
The Library founded at the sole cost and charges of the late Famous Duke of
Brunswic-Wolfenbuttel, Augustus: who, under the Covert name of
Gustavus Selenus (soon after the edition of his learned Treatise, decipher'd into
Augustus Lunaeburgensis) publish'd a most ingenious Commentary upon
Trithemius's Cryptography, with some other works upon the like Subject. A Prince who infinitely surpass'd all his Predecessours in Learning and Knowledge; and came not behind the bravest of them in Acts of Chivalry. This monument of his learning, which we are now speaking of, is judged by all travellers the richest Collection of printed Books that
Germany affords: and by many (who have not at all, or with prejudice, viewed Sir
Thomas Bodley's at
Oxford, the Emperour's at
Vienna, the
Vatican at
Rome, &c.) thought the best furnish'd Library in
Europe. The Duke's Library-keeper, Mr.
Hanisius, brags of 124000 Volums: but let the Reader judge how a couple of small Chambers (which are not both so large as a third part of
Bodley's Library) should possibly contain so great a multitude of books. Besides there is extant a small Pamphlet (published in the year 1660, and supposed to be written by the Learned
Conringius) entituled,
Bibliothecae Augustae &c. Sciagraphia generalis; wherein the Author gives a short account of the first foundation of this Library, in the year, 1604, together with its daily increase till the said year 1660, by the accessions of the Libraries of
Marq. Freherus, the two
Curiones, &c. and at last concludes with
summa Voluminum 27666,
tractatuum 115504,
Autorum 56393. Now (tho I am willing to believe that the encrease of books has been very considerable since this account was given, yet) I cannot imagine the Collection within these last twenty years (whereof Duke
Augustus liv'd only six) has so monstruously outstript that of the other fifty six, as to swell the number from 27666 to 124000. Amongst the Manuscripts (which amount to about 2000) the books of greatest rarity are 1. The
French Embassyes in 438 Volums in
Folio: transcribed in a very fair hand out of the
French King's Library, at the charges of the munificent Founder. 2. A
Latin Psalter;
in notis Ciceronianis. 3. The four Evangelists in
Syriack, given by
A. Kircher A. D. 1666. 4. An antient Copy of the
Edda Islandorum; with the
Skialdi annex'd. Much more complete then that publish'd by the Learned
Resenius A. D. 1665. Besides these, and the like works of other men, there are one and forty Volums written by the hand of the Founder: whereof twelve
(in Folio) are Musick-Books. In four large Volums he has given a short account of the most considerable Authors in his Library: to which he added a fifth containing an Alphabetical Catalogue of the Authors, and serving as an Index to the other four. These and the other monuments of Duke
Augustus already extant in print (such as, his Commentary
[Page][Page]BRAVNSWICK & MEYDBVRG com ceteris adiacentibusApud Janssonio Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page]DUCATUS BRUNSVICENSIS. Accuratissime discriptio.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios▪ Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page][Page 100]mentary upon
Trithemius before-mention'd; His
Schach-Spiel, containing a most learn'd account of the antiquity and mystery of Chess-play,
&c.) are sufficient testimonies how well he deserv'd the character which a Gentleman gave of him in the following distich, written under his Picture in the Library:
Tota tuos Europa Duces Regesque recense:
Hic senio cunctos vicit & ingenio.
He died
A. D. 1666, in the 88th year of his Age.
His Son and Successor, Duke
Rudolphus Augustus, keeps now his residence at
Wulfenbuttel; a mild, learned, and religious Prince, following the steps of his Father rather in his Study then in Acts of Chivalry. He has no male issue; but is like to be succeeded by some of the Sons of his Brother
Antony Ʋlric; the eldest whereof was slain at the late siege of
Maestricht.
III. HELMSTADT. Which City is reckon'd the oldest in
Saxony, next
Bardewic. It was built by the Emperor
Charles the Great, about
A. D. 782, and so nam'd from the abundance of Elmtrees that encompass it. Here St.
Ludger (who was sent into these parts by the foremention'd Emperor to convert the Infidel
Saxons) preach'd; and the Citizens pretend to show Travellers the very Church (now almost nine hundred years old) wherein his first Sermons were deliver'd.
But the great ornament of this Town is the
Academia Julia; or University, founded by
Julius Duke of
Brunswic-Wolfenbuttel, in the year 1576. Amongst other grand priviledges granted to this University by the Emperor
Maximilian II. 'twas order'd, that its Rectors should for ever be honour'd with the Title and Dignity of Counts Palatine. Whereupon,
Henry Julius (Duke
Julius's eldest Son, and Bishop of
Halberstadt) was by his Father made the first Rector; and before his succession to the Dukedom of
Brunswic upon his Father's death, founded the fair College which is still call'd
Juleum novum. These two Dukes procured for the use of the Professors and Students in this University, a considerable Library of Books; which since has been well augmented, but comes far short of that at
Wolfenbuttel. Amongst some hundreds of
Hebrew, Greek, Latin, and
Dutch Manuscripts (of little value) they have two old Volumes containing the Pentateuch in
Hebrew; written on Vellam in a fair and legible character. For these two Books, they tell us, several
Jewish Rabbies (who pretend to more then ordinary skill in discerning the true Antiquity of such kind of Monuments in their own language) have offer'd some hundred of Rix-dollars.
After the death of Duke
Frideric Ʋlric (the last Prince of the ancient House of
Wolfenbuttel) the Dukes of
Lunenburg divided the Rectory of this University amongst them; agreeing, that each of the Dukes Regent should, in his course, supply that Office for one year, and no more. And in state it has ever since continued.
There is not any University in the
German Empire that has bred up more eminent and learned men, within the compass of one Century, then
Helmstadt. Witness
Joh. Caselius, Jac. Horstius, Val. Forsterius, Reinerus Reineccius, Hen. Meibomius, Joh. Stukius, Jac. Lampadius, Conr. Hornejus, &c. and of late years, the ingenious
Calixti, and incomparable
Conringius.
IV.
[...]. HANNOVER. The Metropolis of the Dukedom of
Calenberg; whence the Duke's Palace was removed hither by
George Duke of
Brunswic-Calenberg upon the decease of the abovemention'd
Frideric Ʋlric. The Town was anciently call'd
Lawenroda, from the neighbouring Castle which was subject to Counts of that name. About
Henry the
Lion's time it got the name of
Hanover, from a Ferry at this place over the River
Leina (as some imagine);
Han over, in the old Dialect of the Lower
Saxons, signifying the same as the more modern High-Dutch
haben uber, i.e. to have or carry over.
There are yearly kept in this Town four Fairs; during which there is always a vast concourse of Foreigners as well as
Germans from all parts of the Empire. These contribute exceedingly to the enriching of the Citizens; but however a more considerable share of their wealth arises from their
Breuhane (a sweet and muddy sort of Beer), which is hence exported in great quantities into the neighbouring Towns and Villages.
V. HAMELEN.
Hamelen. An ancient City on the outmost confines of the Dukedom of
Brunswic-Calenberg, seated on the mouth of the River
Hamel (whence it has its name) and the banks of the
Weser. This place is look'd upon as the Key to the whole Dukedom, and is therefore better fortified and garrison'd then almost any other City in the Duke of
Brunsic's Dominions.
The Records of this City relate a notable accident which hapned amongst the Burgers on the 26th day of
June in the year 1284. The story is as follows: The Citizens being strangely infested with Rats, and having tried all imaginable expedients (but in vain) to rid themselves of these troublesom guests, at last met with a stranger who undertook, for a certain reward, to do the feat. The Burgers agreed to his proposals; and the strange Gentleman immediately with his Tabret and Pipe draws after him all the Rats in the Town (like so many Maurice-dancers) to the River, and there drowned them. Returning for his reward, it was denied him; as being judg'd to great a recompense for so small a performance. However, less he could not be perswaded to take, but left the Town in a rage, threatning in a short time to be reveng'd. Accordingly, about a year after, he came again, and play'd the second part of the same Tune; but with another Train after him: For now he went attended with a great number of Children, who follow'd him in at the mouth of a great Cave on the top of a neighbouring Hill, call'd by the Burgers
Koppel-berg, and were never after heard of. In remembrance of this sad accident, the Citizens were wont for many year after (as appears by several old Deeds and other Records in that City) to date all their Indentures and Contracts such a year
von unser kinder aussgang, i.e. since the departure of our Children. The street thro which they pass'd is to this day call'd
Bungloese Strass, or
Tabret-street; and on the top of the Mountain, near the Cave's mouth, is still to be seen a mounment of stone with this inscription:
‘Post duo CC mille, post octoginta quaterque,
Annus hic est ille quo languet annus uterque.
Orbantur pueros centum etque triginta Johannis,
Et Pauli caros Hamelenses non sine damnis.
Fatur ut omnes eos vivos calvaria sorpsit.
Christe tuere reos, ne tam mala res quibus obsit.’
Which sorry piece of dogg'rel is there translated into two Distichs in the Nether-
Saxon Dialect; much of the same strain.
GRUBENHAGEN,
Name. in the
Dutch language, signifies properly a Grove or Forest belonging to the ancient Family of the
Grubes; tho afterwards that word was appropriated to a Castle built by some of the said Family, which in process of time communicated its name to the whole Principality. Thus the
Hague in
Holland (called by the Low
Dutch s'Gravenhaghe, which is ordinarily render'd in
Latin by
Haga Comitis) had its name from the neighbouring Forest; where, it seems, the Earls of that Province were anciently used to hunt.
And indeed this whole Principality is nothing else but a large Forest;
Hercynian Wood. most of it being a part of the
Hartz, or
Sylva Hercynia, mention'd by
Roman Writers.
Julius Cesar, in his Commentaries, says, that this Wood is at least nine days journey in bredth; and of an unaccountable length. Several men, he tells us, have travell'd forty days together strait forward in it; but that no man durst ever yet boast that he had seen both ends of it. The
German word
Hartz (out of which, without all question, the
Latins form'd their
Hercynia) signifies properly Rosin or Pitch; which is nothing else but the liquor distill'd out of the Pine and Fir-trees, the only Timber wherewith this Forest abounds. Since the Empire began to be cultivated, and the inhabitants understood the advantage of uniting themselves into Cities and Corporations, the
Hercynian Wood has in many places been converted into great Towns and large Corn-fields; but yet, passing over these, 'tis still easie to track it quite cross the Country.
In this Principality are most of the Mines of Silver,
Mines. Copper, Lead,
&c. belonging to the Duke of
Brunswic and
Lunenburg. The chief of which are at
Rammelsberg, Wildeman, and
Zellerfeld. Rammelsberg is an high Mountain not far from the City
Goslar; on one side shaded with part of the
Hercynian Forest, but on the other cover'd with nothing but moss. The
German Historians tell us, that the Mines on this Mounttain were first discover'd in the year 972, by a Hunter; who having tied his Horse to a bush, and gone some distance from him, at his return found a great piece of Ore beat out of the ground with his Horse's hoof. This Hunter, they say, was surnamed
Ramme; and thence the Mountain got the name of
Rammelsberg. Upon the bruit of this Discovery, the Emperor
Otho I. immediately procured a company of
Franks that well understood the art of melting and refining all sorts of Minerals; and sent them hither to teach the
Saxons their mystery; to which, before that time, they were utter strangers. From these
Franks the Town of
Frankenburg, not far from the Mines of
Rammelsberg, had its name.
Not long after the riches of this mountain had been thus discover'd, the Miners were grown so numerous, that this one place could neither find work nor food enough for such vast multitudes as daily resorted thither. Whereupon they began to seek for new treasures in the neighbouring Hills; and met with so good success, that in the year 1045 (as
Albinus testifies) another great vein of Ore was discover'd in the place where
Wildeman now stands; and a third at
Zellerfeld in the year 1070. This last Town is now the chief of all the Mine-Cities belonging to the Princes of
Brunswic. Here the chief Overseer of the Mines keeps his Court every Saturday, and orders every workman his pay for the week past.
The chief Metals which are found in these Mines, are Silver, Lethargy, Lead,
[...] and two sorts of Copper; one whereof is melted out of the Ore, like other Metals, the other is made by the Vitriol water upon great plates of Iron, which they steep in troughs made for this purpose.
Besides these Metals, they find a great many sorts of Minerals; which abundantly recompense the workman's labour, tho not sufficient to atone for the loss of his life, which is too often taken away by their nauseous and deadly smells. The richest of these are: 1.
Gray Vitriol. 2.
Atramentstein, or Ink-stone; a Mineral of many various colours. Out of these two, bray'd and boil'd together, is made the ordinary green Vitriol. 3.
Gedien Vitriol; which grows like Isicles out of the Rocks; and may be used without any further cleansing or purifying. 4.
Blew Vitriol; commonly made out of the Copper Ore. 5.
White Vitriol; made of Lead Ore. 6.
Misy; a Mineral much of the same colour and nature with the ordinary yellow Brimstone. 7.
Brimstone; made out of a peculiar sort of Ore, found here in great quantities; out of which drop the
stores Sulphuris, which usually coagulate like Icesicles.
The several ways of discovering of Mines, ordering of Minerals, Ore,
&c. are the same here as at
Friberg, and other Mine-Towns in the
German Empire. So that for an account of these and the like rarities, we refer the Reader to the following Description of
Misnia.
The Metropolis or chief Town in the Principality of
Grubenhagen is
Eimbeck or
Ein-beck; [...] which (says
Letzner) has its name from the confluence of a great many small Rivulets in this place into one common stream. For
Beck (in the dialect of the Lower
Saxons, as well as that of the Northern
English) signifies the same with the High
Dutch word
Bache, a Rivulet or small torrent.
The only Trade of the Town was formerly in
Breuhane, which was here brewed and exported into many of the neighbouring parts; but of late years the Citizens have addicted themselves exceedingly to Husbandry and Tillage, and enrich'd the City mightily with their Comtrade. Which would doubtless be daily advanc'd, if they had the advantage of a good River to take off their vast stocks of all manner of grain.
Clausthal, Altenau, Andreasberg, Osterrode, and the other great Towns of this Principality are wholly inhabited by Miners; who being a sort of people bred in Caves and the bowels of the Earth, do not trouble themselves with the erecting of fair structures above ground.
The County of BLANCKENBƲRG and REINSTEIN.
THis County, as appears from many ancient Charters,
[...] and other Instruments sign'd by several of the
German Emperors, was formerly call'd
Hartingow, or
Hartgow; which name the
Dutch Writers explain by
das Gow an Hartz; and we may
English it, the
Hercynian County. For as the ancient
Romans divided their whole Land
[Page 103]into so many Provinces, which were again subdivided into certain
Praefecturas, Praesidiatus, Colenias, or
Municipia; so old
Germany consisted of a set number of
Gowen or
Pflegen, and these were made up of inferior
Voigteyen or
Dingstule, that is, Hundreds or Bailiwicks. For altho the words
Gowe and
Pflege (now
fleck) signified
Pagus, a Town; yet the old
Saxons, and other people of
Germany, had not formerly above one of these in a whole County: so that
Gow-graff (or
Judex Paganus) was in effect the same thing as
Comes, an Earl or Count.
But when about the year of Christ 1100, the name of
Gowen began to be antiquated and laid aside,
Hartingow (once the largest County in the Lower
Saxony) was forgot, and the County (or
Grassschaft, a new word instead of
Gowe) took its name from the two chief Forts in it,
Blackenburg and
Reinstein.
Together with its name it lost its ancient boundaries, and was contracted into a much narrower compass then formerly. For the Counties of
Stolberg, Schwartzburg, and
Hohenstein, with the Bishopric of
Quedlinburg, and County of
Wernigerode were cut off from this Province. However, because the County of
Wernigerode is still subject to the same Master with
Blackenburg, we shall at present comprise both Provinces under one name; and give a description of them together.
Tacitus, speaking of these parts, tells us, the inhabitants live in an intolerable sharp air; and
Seneca says, they have a continual Winter. And certainly, if this character may be justly appropriated to any Province in
Germany, 'tis to this; which is continually exposed to the North-wind, and endures the cold blasts from the top of
Bructerus and the neighbouring Mountains, which are usually cover'd with Snow till Midsummer. But this sharp air is not destructive to the healthy and vigorous constitutions of the inhabitants; who more commonly then any other
Germans arrive at the age of 100 or 110 years.
But however, were there such an
intemperies Coeli, as these Authors mention, constantly hovering over the heads of the
Blackenburgers; yet that inconvenience would in a great measure be recompens'd by those other ways whereby Nature has enrich'd this Country. For the Valleys, tho they afford but little Corn, yet are as plentifully stock'd with Kine and Sheep as the Forests with all manner of Venison. The Mountains indeed are not so rich in Silver as some in the Principality of
Grubenhagen and County of
Stolberg; but this defect is supplied by the abundance of Iron Ore, which is almost peculiar to this Province.
The four chief Rivers in this Country (1.
Die kalte Bode. 2.
Die warme Bode. 3.
Die Rapbode. 4.
Die Lubbode) had their names, as
Luther in his
Onomasticon tell us, from one
Bodo, Bode, or
Vode, a Prince of these parts. For the ancient
Germans had a peculiar fancy of eternizing their names by bestowing them upon the most notable Rivers in their Country; which they knew would outlast the strongest Forts and Castles they could build.
The highest Mountain in these parts,
[...]. perhaps in
Germany, is
der Brocken, Blockberg, or
Brocksberg; call'd by
Latin Authors
Melibocus and
Bructerus:‘
Bructerus Hercyniae montes supereminet omnes.’
And indeed it may well be call'd the tallest Mountain not only in the
Hercynian Wood, but in all
Europe, if what some of the High
Dutch Geographers relate of it be true. For they endeavour to perswade us, that the top of it comes near the uppermost Region of the air; in which they had questionless placed it, had not their Philosophers acquainted them, that Ice and Snow (wherewith they observe the tops of this and the adjoining Mountains almost continually cover'd) are products of the middle Region. They tell us further, that from hence, in a clear day, may be discern'd (not only the Cities of
Brunswic, Magdeburg, Luneburg, &c. but) the
German Ocean and
Baltic Sea. Which is a story just as credible as (what some of our Northern Rustics will not stick to affirm) that from the top of some of our high Mountains on the outmost borders of
England, a view may be taken of all the Seas round the Isle of Great
Britain.
Amongst the many wonders of Nature,
Buman's hole. wherewith this County abounds, the most remarkable is a great Cave betwixt
Blackenburg and
Elbingerode; call'd by the neighbourhood (from its first discoverer)
Buman's hole. The mouth of this Cave is so narrow, that a man is forc'd to creep in at it; but soon after your entrance, you pass thro a dark and dismal Gallery, as high as the stateliest House. No man could ever yet affirm, that he met with the end of it; tho some Miners have confidently asserted, that they have gone as far as
Goslar, which is about twenty
English miles from the Cave's mouth. This story is confidently reported among the neighbourhood, that about 80 years ago, a venturous young fellow, who look'd after an herd of Kine in the neighbouring Woods, going alone to find out new discoveries in this Cave, lost his way, and (having by chance had his light put out) wander'd for eight days together before he found his way back. At his return his hair was perfectly grey; and the account he gave of his journey strange and terrible. He gave a relation of a great many odd kinds of Spirits and Appartions, wherewith he had encounter'd; some whereof seized on him as a Thief, judg'd and condemn'd him, but at last (having first put an halter about his neck) granted him a Reprieve. Many others, that have had the curiosity to view the inside of this strange Cave, pretend to meet with the like Faries; but withall affirm them to be better company then they were represented by the poor Cow-herd. In this Cave are often found a great many large bones of strange creatures; some whereof are kept as rarities by the neighbouring Gentlemen. And not many years ago the Skeleton of a man, of a prodigious bulk, was brought out amongst other rarities of the like sort.
Near the old Monastery of
Michaelstein,Monkcrags. not far from
Blackenburg, two huge craggy Rocks are to be seen, confronting each other; which naturally (but as exactly as if cut by the most curious workman) represent two Monks in their proper Habits. The one of these is still (and has been possibly ever since the first planting of Christianity in these parts) call'd
Hans Much, and the other
Henning Munch.
But, not to continue too long on this subject,
Old Forts. the works of Art, in many places of this County, are as admirable as the foremention'd extravagancies of Nature. For you shall scarce observe any high cragged hill in the whole Province, but on the top thereof may still be seen the ruins of an old Fort. 'Tis admirable to behold so many strong Castles hewen out of such high and inaccessible Rocks as most of these are; and no casie matter to guess what should be the design of these bulwarks in so barren and desert a place as the
Hercynean Forest. Of all these, the
[Page 104]Duke's Palace at
Blaekenburg (where the Duke of
Wulfenbuttel usually spends the hunting part of the year) is almost the only habitable Fort in the Country; the rest, for the most part, being nothing else but so many venerable monuments of Antiquity. Such are the old Castles of
Reinstein (so call'd from its being hew'n out of one entire Rock or stone),
Heimburg, Hartingow, Gerssdorf, Lawenburg, Homburg, with many more.
The most noteble of the utterly demolish'd Forts is
Hartzburg;Hartzburg. the ruins of an old Castle of that name, not far from the Mountain
Bructerus. Some Historians assert, that this Fort was built about three hundred years before Christ, by the
Chauci; a branch of the
Saxon Nation, who in those days inhabited these Countries. Adding further, that these same
Chauci erected in this place a Temple to the Honour of
Saturn; from whom the Castle was in those days nam'd
Saturburg. This
Satur (or
Crodo, for that name also is given him by the
German Antiquaries) was represented by the Image of an old man standing barefoot on the prickled back of a Ruff; to denote (says
Pomarius) the security of his Adorers in the most difficult undertakings. In his right hand he held a Bucker of water, strow'd over with all sorts of flowers and fruits; thereby promising to send rain on the Earth for the production of such flowers and fruits. In his left hand he carried a wheel; the emblem of that unity and concord which all his worshippers were thereby advis'd to embrace.
Mechtilde (Daughter to the Emperor
Henry, surnam'd the Fowler) writ the whole History of this Idol in a rich Silken Coat of Needlework; which (in the late Civil wars of
Germany) was taken by the
Swedish General
Bannier out of the Cathedral Church at
Goslar, and carried into
Sweden. Upon the conversion of
Wittekind and his
Saxons to the Christian Faith, this Idol and its Temple were both destroy'd together, by the express command of the Emperor
Charles the Great; who chang'd the name of the place into
Hartzburg, because situated in the
Hercynian Wood. In the days of Duke
Julius, a Salt-Well was discover'd at the bottom of this Hill, which occasion'd the building of a small Town for workmen (call'd to this day
Julius-Halle); which is since by the great Trade of its inhabitants in Salt, Copper Kettles, Pots, Wire,
&c. considerably enriched and augmented.
Tho the Imperial City
Goslar be wholly independant upon the Dukes of
Brunswic, [...] and therefore cannot properly be reckon'd amongst the Cities and great Towns subject to those Princes; yet because 'tis situate in this Country, and wholly environ'd with the Territories of the said Dukes, 'twill not be amiss in this place to give the Reader some short account of it. This City is said to have been founded by the Emperor
Henry I. and to have had its name from the River
Gose, upon which 'tis seated. Here the Emperor built himself a Palace; in which he was wont to keep his usual residence. This Palace, say the High
Dutch Antiquaries, was properly nam'd
Goslar; which name afterwards communicated to the Town built round about it. For the termination
lar, laer, lager signifies no more, say they, then a dwelling House; and consequently
Goslar must denote such a single apartment on the banks of the River
Gose. The Citizens of
Goslar enjoy as many and large priviledges almost as any other immediate Subjects of the Emperor. In all Imperial Writs and Letters directed to them, they are stiled
Nobile Membrum Imperii; and they are exempt from paying Toll in any Market in the Empire, except three. All the Houses in this City are cover'd with a glittering kind of Slat; which is a great ornament to the Town, but enough (on a clear day) to dazle the eyes of a Traveller at a great distance. The inhabitants are all Miners; and the only Trade of the Town is in digging, cleansing, tempering, and vending all manner of mettals, except Gold, and a great many sorts of choice Minerals of the Country; such as, Vitriol, Brimtone, Quicksilver, Copperas,
&c.
EPISCOPATVS HILDESIENSIS DESCRIPTIO NOVISSIMAAuthore
Ioanne Gigante D. Med. et Math.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanū Swart.‘AVITA FIDE’
WHENCE the City of
Hildesheim (which gives name to this Bishopric) came to be so called, is not unanimously agreed on by their own Etymologists. Some of them read the word
Bildesheim, and fetch its original from the Virgin
Mary's Picture (in their language
bilde) with some other reliques; which they tell us the Emperor
Ludowic the Godly, at the first foundation of this Diocess, had hung upon a tree near this place, and returning could not pull them off again. Others would have us believe, that the ancient name of this Town was
Hildeschnee, i.e. the Lord's Snow; and that it was so call'd from a great Snow which fell the night that the foremention'd Emperor lodged in this place; covering all the Earth for some miles round, a foot deep, excepting only the place where the Cathedral now stands, which remain'd dry and untouch'd. But these and the like stories are only to be look'd on as scraps of old Legends; and the ridiculous and idle fancies of illiterate Monks. 'Tis much more likely (what some Historians of note have recorded) that the said Emperor nam'd this City after his Mother
Hildegard. For
Hilda or
Hille (in the dialect of the Lower
Saxons) is no more then an abbreviation of
Hildegard; as well as
Sander of
Alexander, Fritze of
Frideric, Metta of
Mechtildis, Ilse of
Elizabeth, &c. And instead of
Hildesheim (in the language of the neighbouring Gentry) the Rustics say
Hillsem.
When
Gunther, a poor Priest of
Eltze, was first advanc'd to the Bishopric of
Hildesheim (which hapned in the year 822) this Diocese was but of a small extent. But in after ages the Counties of
Wintzenburg, Schladen, Poppenburg, Peine, Woldenberg, Hundsrucken, and
Lewenstein were annex'd to it. The last is now in the possession of the Dukes of
Brunswic; as the whole Bishopric may probably be in a short time.
For altho the Citixens at present (as well as the Dean and Chapter of their Church) pay Homage to
Maximilian-Henry,Government. Elector of
Collen, as their Bishop; yet the last Duke of
Hannover quarter'd his great Army, during the late broils betwixt the King of
France and the Empire, in this Diocess; without the leave (and doubtless against the will) of the said Elector. And 'tis easie for the present Duke to enter upon this whole Diocess when he shall see occasion; nor needs he be at a loss for such a pretence in so doing. We know into what straits
Eric, Duke of
Brunswic, brought
John IV. (and forty-sixth Bishop of
Hildesheim) in the year 1523, when he left him only the bare City of
Hildesheim, with the three inconsiderable Forts of
Peyne, Steurwald, and
Marienborg; and that, for several years after, these Territories (which are surrounded with the Dominions of the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Luneburg) were subject to Duke
Eric's Successor. So that all that hinders the potent Duke
Ernestus from re-entring upon these rich possessions of some of his Ancestors, is, either his exemplary fidelity in a strict observance of the Treaty of
Brunswic in the year 1653, wherein 'twas agreed, that this Diocess should be restored to the Elector of
Collen, as Administrator of
Hildesheim; or else we must ascribe the reasons of his delay to his generous temper, in scorning to take advantage of the present calamitous estate of the said Elector.
The Town of
Hildesheim (tho usually divided into the Old and New City) looks all of it very ancient and venerable;
Hildesheim. but otherwise has nothing in it that's great or splendid. In the Cathedral may be seen the reliques of the famous
Saxon Idol
Irmensewl; of which we have already given the Reader a large account. The great Corn-trade of this Country was the first thing that rais'd the Burgers of
Hildesheim to that pitch as to obtain so honourable a place in the Catalogue of
Hans-Towns; and 'tis the same sort of traffic which still maintains their grandeur.
The greatest part of the Burgers of this and the neighbouring Towns (and indeed almost all
[Page 106]the inhabitants of this Diocess) are
Lutherans. The Reformation was first begun upon a quarrel betwixt the Citizens and Canons of the Church in the year 1552, whereupon the former call'd in
John Bugenhagen. Ant. Corvin, and
Henry Winkel, three
Lutheran Preachers; who in a short time drew after them the most considerable part of the Town. At the Treaty of
Brunswic abovemention'd, it was agreed, that the
Augsburg Confession should not be openly taught or profess'd in this Bishopric beyond such a set number of years; but that Article was repealed and made invalid by a clause in the general Treaty of
Westphalia 648.
The best Catalogue of the Bishops of
Hildesheim which can be pick'd out of the many different (some imperfect, and most false) accounts given of them by the
German Historians is as follows:
Elshops.
1.
Gunther; Founder of the Cathedral, and St.
Cecil's Church. He died
A. D. 835. 2.
Frembert; who liv'd but a few months after his instalment 3.
Ebc, a
Frenchman; who having been suspended from the Archbishopric of
Rhemes, fied to
Ansgar Archbishop of
Hamburg; by whom he was made Bishop of
Hildesheim. He govern'd the Church twelve years. 4.
Alfred, Founder of the Monasteries of
Asvelde and
Seligensted. He was Bishop eighteen years. 5.
Marquard; slain by the
Normans and
Danes A. D. 880. who in his days overran
Saxony, Westphalia, and the greatest part of the
Netherlands. 6.
Wigbert; a better Physitian then Divine; who left no monument behind him but a small Book of Medicinal Receipts. He died in the year 884. 7.
Walbert; of whom little more is recorded then that he was Bishop, and died
A. D. 903. 8.
Sehard; who was two and twenty years Bishop. 9.
Deuthard; he gave the Communion-Table of Gold, still kept in the Cathedral; and died in the year 936. 10.
Ochwin, Abbot of
Perge; who is said to have presented to this Church (as an holy relique) the body of
Epiphanius. He govern'd 28 years. 11.
Osdach. 12.
Gerhard; who annex'd the two Villages of
Algermissen and
Silbrechthusen to the Diocess. 13.
Bernhard, Count of
Sommerschenburg; Founder of St.
Michael's Monastery. 14.
Gothard; Founder of St.
Bartholomew's Church and Monastery. 15.
Dithmar. 16.
Aziline, or
Anselm. 17.
Heziline; whom some Historians call
Echilo, others
Hezel or
Wezel. 18.
Ʋdo. 19.
Bruning. 20.
Berthold. 21.
Bernhard, Count of
Rotenburg; Founder of St.
Gotthard's Monastery, in remembrance of his predecessor of that name. He annex'd the County of
Wintzenburg to this Bishopric. 22.
Bruno. 23.
Herman. 24.
Adelgad. 25.
Berno. 26.
Conrad I. 27.
Heribert. 28.
Sigefride. 29.
Conrad II. Founder of six Monasteries and Nunneries; whereof three were built in
Hildesheim, and the rest at
Franckberg near
Goslar, Wulfinghausen, and
Wintzhausen. 30.
Henry. 31.
John, who annex'd to his Bishopric the County and City of
Peine. 32.
Otto, Duke of
Brunswic and
Lune. burg; who threw the Counts of
Woldenberg out or their Estates, annexing them to his own Diocess. 33.
Sigefride, Count of
Quernford; Founder of the City of
Gruncw, and a great Benefactor to
Sarstede and
Levenburg. 34.
Henry Duke of
Waldenberge; who enlarg'd the Diocess with the addition of the County of
Da
[...]sel. 35.
Otto II. by whom was added
Bockelem, Latter, Barenberg, and the County of
Pfaffenburg (now
Poppenburg) to the Bishopric. 36.
Henry the third, Duke of
Brunswic, who gave to the Diocess the County of
Schladen with the Castles of
Widenlage and
Woldenstein. 37.
John Schadeband. 38.
Gerhard, Baron of
Berge near
Minden; of whom
Buntingus reports, that he cover'd the Tower of the Cathedral at
Hildesheim with beaten Gold instead of Lead. 39.
John the third, Earl of
Hoya. 40.
Magnus, Duke of
Saxon-Lawenburg; who gave the Towns of
Grune and
Hamelen with the County of
Homburg. 41.
Bernhard, Duke of
Luneburg. 42.
Ernest, Count of
Schauenburg. 43.
Henning. 44.
Barthold. 45.
Eric, Duke of
Saxon-Lawenburg. 46.
John, Brother to his predecessor
Eric. This Bishop lost more to the Dukes of
Brunswic then all his predecessors had bestowed on the Bishopric. 47.
Balthasar Merklin, a Doctor of Laws, and Deputy-Chancellor to the Emperor
Charles V. 48.
Otto III. Count of
Schowenburg. 49.
Valentine von Thereleben, a Doctor of the Canon Law; who sued the Dukes of
Brunswic in the Emperor's Court, and recover'd back a great part of his lost Bishopric. 50.
Frideric, Duke of
Holstein. 51.
Burchard (some say
Nicolas)
Von Oberg 52.
Ernest, Duke of
Bavaria. 53.
Ferdinand, Duke of
Bavaria, Archbishop and Elector of
Collen. 54.
Maximilian-Henry, the present Elector of
Collen, and Bishop of
Hildesheim; born Duke of
Bavaria the eighth day of
October in the year 1621.
Other Towns and places of note in the Diocess of
Hildesheim, are: 1.
Peina, [...]. a small City on the River
Fuse, about twelve
English miles from
Brunswic. The Town it self stands in a plain; but the Castle (mention'd by
Latin Authors under the name of
Castrum Poynum, and represented as the chief Bulwark of this Bishopric) is mounted on an hill. Not far from
Peina was fought a famous battel in the year 1553, betwixt
Maurice Elector of
Saxony and
Albrecht Marquise of
Brandenburg; wherein the latter was Conqueror, and the former slain. 2.
Marienborg; a Fort not not far distant from
Hildesheim; and situate on the banks of the
Innerste. 'Twas first built by Bishop
Henry III. when he was brought to the utmost extremities by the too powerful Dukes of
Brunswic. 3.
Poppenburg. 4.
Dassel. 5.
Bokenem. 6.
Woldenburg; with some others; all of them chief Towns in so many Counties of the same name: but of little other consequence.
IRENICƲS is opinion, that the City of
Halberstad (which gives name to this Principapality) is the same place with the
[...], mention'd by
Ptolomy; this conjecture, tho never confirm'd by the least shadow of reason, is embraced by
Appian, an Author not much given to mistakes. But whence it got the new name of
Halberstadt, is not agreed on.
Bertius (a learned Geographer, but one that in this particular relied too much upon the Authority of
Bruschius and
Schopper) derives the word from a confluence of the two Rivers
Elb and
Ora; neither of which come near this City.
Dresser reads the word
Albertistatt; and
Werdenhagen (with the most probability on his side) guesses from the imperfect foundations of as much building as is now standing (still to be seen on the East side of the Town) and was never finished, that its name was rightly at first given it,
Halbe-statt, or half a City.
This Principality is for the most part as fruitful in Corn as any of its neighbour-Provinces; and excels the most of them for pleasant Forests, and plenty of all sorts of Venison. The largest Park in it is the
Hackel; lying in the midst of the Country, and giving name to the ancient Barony of
Hackelborn in that neighbourhood. On the North-West there is nothing but fenny Bogs and Marshes for some miles; over which they have damms thrown up, and upon them high-ways leading to
Helmstadt, Brunswic, &c.
The Bishopric
Halberstadt (which was only turn'd into a Principality by the
Westphalian Treaty in the year 1648.) was first founded by the Emperour
Charles the Great at
Salingstatt (call'd afterwards
Ostrowick in the year 780. But soon after, with permission of the same Emperour, was removed to this place by its first Bishop
Hildegrine; who was succeeded in his Diocese by the following Prelates: 2.
Dietgrine. 3.
Haymo, who died in the year 827, leaving behind him large Commentaries on the Prophets and Apostles, some whereof are still extant. 4.
Hildegrine the second. 5.
Evelp. 6.
Sigismund, Monk of
Hirsaug. 7.
Bernhard, Burggrave of
Magdeburg, and Founder of the Monastery at
Hadmersheim. 8.
Hildeward, Count of
Warlow. 9.
Arnold. 10.
Brantho. 11.
Burcard, Count of
Woburg. Bernard Bucho. 13.
Dietmar. 14.
Harrand; whom some Authors call
Stephen. 15.
Reinhard; who fought against the Emperor
Henry the Fifth in the Woods of
Welpho, and routed his whole Army. 16.
Otto; deposed by
Honorius for
Simony. 17.
Rudolf; Founder of St.
Mary's Church in
Halberstadt. 18.
Ʋlric; who engaged himself in a war against
Henry, surnam'd the
Lion, Duke of
Brunswic, to the almost utter destruction of himself and his successors. For the City was taken by the said Dukes Army, and burnt down to the ground; the Citizens also and Clergy-men taking Sanctuary in the Cathedral, perish'd in the same flames with their Church. 19.
Theodoric; who rebuilt the Cathedral, which his predecessor had so unfortunately destroy'd 20.
Barthold. 21.
Conrad. 22.
Frideric, Burggrave of
Kirchberg. 23.
Ludolf, Count of
Schladem. 24.
Meinhard. 25.
Ludolf the second Count of
Schladem. 26.
Wolrad, Count
Kranichfeld. 27.
Herman, Count of
Blanckenburg. 28.
Albert, Count of
Anhalt. 29.
Albert, Duke of
Brunswic; a great Warriour, who fought above twenty pitcht battels (as the Chronicles of
Brunswic inform us); and came off most commonly a Conqueror. 30.
Ludowic, Landgraf of
Thuringen and Marquise of
Misnia. 31.
Albert, a great Philosopher, but unfortunate Soldier; overcome in battel by
Gerhard Bishop of
Hildesheim, an eloquent Prelate. In remembrance of which overthrow the Burgers of
Halberstadt have to this day a proverbial saying among them,
Klanck uberwand den Ranck, that is,
Rhetoric prov'd too hard for
Logic. 32.
Ernest, Count of
Honstein. 33.
Rudolf, Count of
Anhalt. 34.
Henry, Baron of
Werberge. 35.
Albert, Count of
Werningenrode. 36.
John von Hoym. 37.
Burcard, Baron of
Werberg. 38.
Gerhard von Hoym. 39.
Ernest, Duke of
Saxony. 40.
Albert, Marquise of
Brandenburg.[Page 108]41.
John Albert, Marquise of
Brandenburg. 42.
Frideric, Elector of
Brandenburg. 43.
Sigismund, Brother to his predecessor
Frideric. 44.
Henry Julius, Son of
Julius Duke of
Brunswic; elected Bishop when he was a child of two years old, upon condition that the Dean and Chapter should have the whole government in their hands for twelve years, paying only (during the said term) a certain yearly stipend of the Revenues of the Church to their Infant-Prelate. In the year 1591, this Bishop abolish'd Popish Ceremonies, and establish'd the Reform'd Religion in the Cathedral at
Halberstadt. 45.
Henry Charles, Son of the foremention'd
Henry Julius; he died at six years of age, and was succeeded by his Brother 46.
Rudolf, who also died the year following; and so the Diocess came to his Brother 47.
Christian, a great Champion in the Civil wars of
Germany; but not very fortunate. 48.
Leopold William, Archduke of
Austria; the last Bishop of this place. In his time the Reform'd Religion was laid aside, and Popery once more establish'd in
Halberstadt. But not long after the
Swedish Army, having taken the Town, restored the
Augsburg Confession; and kept possession of the City and Diocess until the ratification of the Treaty of
Munster; by which (as we have said) it was given to the Elector of
Brandenburg, under the Title of a Principality. In which estate it continues unto this day.
The Town of
Halberstadt is tolerably well built;
Halberstadt. the streets are strait and uniform; and many of the buildings fair and stately. The most remarkable thing in the Town is the
Commiss; a vast Inn, built by
Henry Julius Duke of
Brunswic and
Luneburg, and Bishop of
Halberstadt. This is thought to contain more and better accommodation for strangers then any other House of its kind in
Europe. Albert Count of
Wallenstein and Duke of
Friedland (General of the Emperor's Forces in the Civil wars of
Germany) kept his Court for some months in this Inn; and found lodgings in it for all his Attendants and Guards.
Other Towns of note in this Principality are:
Gruningen.
1.
Gruningen. Where was anciently kept the residence of the Bishops of
Halberstadt. In the year 1593, the old Castle was demolish'd, and a new one built at the charges of
Henry Julius before mention'd. The only remarkable things in this place at present are the great Organ in the new Chappel, and Wine-Fat in the outer Court. The later of these was made (as the inscription shews) by one
Michael Werner of
Landau upon the
Rhine; possibly in imitation of that much larger one at
Heydelberg, of which the Reader may expect a description in its place. This at
Gruningen will hold 161 Waggon loads of Wine; reckoning six Hogsheads to each load.
2.
Oschersleben.
Oschersleben; a small Town on the borders of the Dukedom of
Magdeburg. Not far from which lies
Hornhausen; now a despicable Village, but once the larger Town on the two.
3.
Osterwic; a strong little Town on the banks of the River
Ilse. It ancient name was
Salingstede; in which place (as we have said) the Emperor
Charles the Great first founded the Bishopric, which was afterwards (by its first Bishop
Hildegrine) removed to
Halberstadt. Upon this removal, says
Werdenhagen, the Town got the new name of
Osterwic; which signifies as much as
am osten wieken oder weichen, i.e. to move towards the East.
To these I think we might add, the City of
Quedlingburg; a considerable and well situate Town on the River
Bode; but because it is subject at present to the Elector of
Saxony, we shall reserve a more particular description of it till we come to treat of some of that Prince's Dominions.
THURINGIA LANTGRAVIATUS.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
Serenissimo Fortissimoque Principi ac Domino D BERNARDO Duci Saxoniae Iuliae Clivorum Montium
(que) Lantgravio THURINGIAE, March Misniae, Comiti Marcae et Ravensbergae Domino Ravestini etc. Hanc accuratissimam totius Thuringiae tabulam lubens consecrat dedicatque Henricus Hondius
D ƲRINGEN or
Thuringen (in
Latin Authors
Duringia and
Thuringia) had its name from the old
Deuringi, Toringi, Turingi or
Thuringi; who were a branch of the
Vandalii, mention'd by
Tacitus, and the ancient inhabitants of these parts.
Cluverius (in his incomparable Description of old
Germany) gives us a large account of the manners, religion,
&c. of these people; together with a learned account of their first passing over the
Elb out of the
Mark, and fixing themselves in this place.
Micraelius guesses (from the names of several Towns in
Thuringen; such as
Gotha, Gotleben, Altengothen, &c.) that the
Thuringi were a
Gothic people, and no branch of the
Vandals as
Cluverius would make them. But his argument will only prove, that some part of the
Gothic Nation has formerly intermix'd it self with the inhabitants of this Country; and not that the
Goths were once sole masters of the whole Province, any more then the meeting with a few
English names of Towns in
Pembrokeshire, and other parts of
Wales, will demonstrate the
Welch men to be of an
Anglo-Saxonic extraction.
This Province is bounded on the East with the River
Sala; on the North with the
Hercynean Wood; on the West with the River
Werra; on the South its utmost bounds are those vast Woods which separate it from
Franconia; and are usually known by the name of the
Thuringian Forest.
The Country abounds almost every-where with Corn; and in some places you may meet large Vineyards, plentifully stock'd with Grapes; out of which is press'd a much more palatable sort of Wine then can be had in any part of
Saxony or the Marquisate of
Brandenburg. Amongst the many kinds of plants and herbs wherewith the Fields and Forests as well as Gardens of
Thuringen abound, the chief and most peculiar to this Province are
wild Saffron and
Woad; the later of which is used by our Dyers in their best blews and sky-colours, and with which the old
Britains, as
Cesar informs us, were us'd to paint themselves. Near
Sangerhausen and
Salfeld has sometimes been dug up considerable quantities of Copper and Silver Ore; and at
Franckenhausen, Saltzungen, and
Sultza, they have still rich Salt-pits.
The chief Rivers of the Country are the
Sala,Rivers.Werra, Ʋnstrut, Hiera, Ilm, Leina, Schwertze, Wipper, Helbe, Rahna, Helme, Lossa, and
Giessel. Besides these there are several great Lakes at the bottom of some of their Mountains; the most considerable of which are the
Weissensee and
Schwansee.
The Bores of
Thuringen are a rough and unhew'n sort of people; downright Clowns;
Inhabitants. and so far strangers to Courtship and breeding, that they are with much difficulty brought acquainted with the common principles of humanity. They hardly admit of any manner of government or order among them; and are (possibly) the only
Germans that are uncivil to Travellers.
The
Thuringers upon their first appearance in these parts,
Government. subjected themselves to a King of their own chusing; and continued in this estate till their whole land was overrun and conquer'd by the
Francks in the year 1522. In the days of the Emperor
Charles the Great and his Father King
Pepin (who first rooted out Paganism and planted Christianity in this Province) the greatest part of it was subject to the Archbishop of
Mentz; who govern'd it by several Deputies and Lieutenants. By this means the Kingdom of
Thuringen came to be divided into a great many Counties and Baronies, or Lordships, such were the Counties of
Schwartzburg, Kirchberg, Kefernburg, Schoneberg, Gleichen, Sangerhausen, &c. the Lordships of
Franckenstein, Saltza, Heldrungen, Dreffert, Apolda, Vargila, &c. After the death of the Emperor
Otho, Ludowic Count of
Schoneberg got the Title of Count of
Thuringen conferr'd on him by the Emperor
Conrad II. and his Grandchild prevail'd with
Lotharius II. to change the Title of Count into Landtgrave. In this Line the honour continued till the death of
Herman, Landtgrave of
Thuringen and
Hessen, in the year 1226. Whereupon
Henry Duke of
Brabant got
[Page 110]possession of
Hessen; and
Thuringen fell to
Henry Marquise of
Misnia, and has ever since been subject to the House of
Saxony.
Erfurt (the Metropolis of
Thuringen,Erfurt. and one of the largest Cities in
Germany) is thought, by
Bertius, and other learned Geographers, to have had its name from
Erfa, an old ruinous Castle near thirty
English miles distant from the Town. I had rather believe its ancient name to have been
Ierafurt; which signifies no more then a Ferry over the River
Iera, on the banks of which this City now stands. There are three Baronies and seventy-two fair Villages subject to the Citizens of
Erfurt; so that the Country Rustics have some reason for that proverbial saying in ordinary use amongst them;
Erfurt is not a City, but a Country. When this great City (which is about as large as
Coln, and as beautiful) was first built, is not easily determin'd. 'Tis certain, that in the days of
Boniface Archbishop of
Mentz it was reckon'd an ancient City. For there is still extant an Epistle written by that Prelate to Pope
Zachary; wherein we meet with these words,
Ʋnam esse sedem Episcopatus decrevimus in Castello quod dicitur Wurtzburg,
& alteram in oppido quod nominatur Buriburg (perhaps
Nuriburg),
tertiam in loco qui dicitur Erphesfurt,
qui fuit olim Paganorum. The Town is situate in a pleasant and fruitful plain, abundantly stock'd with all manner of grain, and affording great plenty of good Wine. Vast multitudes of the Citizens are maintain'd by gathering and dressing the Herb
Woad before mention'd; which grows in great abundance in most fields near
Erfurt. This and the other Commodities of the Town (Corn, Wine,
&c.) are carried off at two great Fairs in the year; whereof one is held the week after Trinity Sunday, and the other at Martinmass.
Weimar (a neat and well built City,
Weimar. in the middle way betwixt
Erfurt and
Iena) is thought to have been anciently call'd
Weinmarckt, from the great quantities of Wine sold daily at this Town. It is questionless a place of great antiquity; since, as the old Chronicle of
Thuringen witnesses, the Emperor
Otho II. held a general Diet of all the Estates of the Empire in this City in the year 975. The only remarkable thing in the Town is the Landgrave's Palace; a regular and stately piece of building.
The City of
Iena (seated on the banks of the
Sala,Iena. and famous for an Univesity and great concourse of learned men) may justly be reckon'd the third in
Thuringen, Some
German Etymologists would have this Town as well as the former fetch its name from the Grapes or Vineyards about it. They tell us
Jain signifies Wine in the
Hebrew tongue; and therefore too 'tis probable, say they, that the
Jews were first founders of this City. But this conjecture has as little of probability in it as that fancy of some others, who endeavour to derive the name of this Town from the old
Roman God
Janus; since it does not appear, that there grew any Vines near this place fome Centuries ago; or that ever the
Jews were Masters of it. The Town is at present a well compact piece; and tolerably well fortified with Walls and Turrets. The foundation of the University was first begun by
John Frideric Elector of
Saxony; who procured for it many brave and large priviledges from the Emperor
Charles the Fifth. But this good Prince never liv'd to finish the work he had begun; but, upon his deathbed, committed that charge to his Sons; who got the foremention'd priviledges confirm'd by the Emperor
Ferdinand in the year 1558. Since that time there has never wanted a considerable number of eminent Professors and learned men in all Faculties in this University; among whom the great
J. Lipsius was one; a man sufficient of himself (not to mention any of his learned Collegues) to eternize the credit of the place. They have here a Library given them by some of the Dukes of
Saxony, and daily augmented; but not so considerable as to merit a particular Description.
Gotha (the fifth great Town in
Thuringen,Gotha seated on the
Leina) is thought to have been built by some of the old
Gothic Troops on their march through this Country towards
Italy; and by them to have had the name of
Gotha given it. However, 'tis certain, it was only a mean Village (such as might just serve for the Tents of a company of hardy Soldiers) before
William Archbishop of
Mentz wall'd it in the year 964. The whole trade of the Citizens is in sowing, gathering, and dressing
Woad. They have three sorts of this herb; the first of which they sow about Christmas; the next (call'd Summer
Woad) is sown in the Spring, Summer, or Harvest, and of this they have usually three crops; the third is not sow'n at all, but grows wild. Besides the good quality of this Herb, it is reckon'd a very Soveraign Balsamic; and cures wounds, if taken in time, almost with a touch. It something resembles Plantain; but shoots out a longer leaf. The roots of it exceedingly fatten and improve barren ground; and for that reason it has been of late years brought over into
England, with Clover-grass, Cinque-foil, and other herbs of the like nature; and in many parts of this Kingdom (particularly in
Northamptonshire) is now sow'n with good success.
Towns of less note are, 1.
Eysennach or
Isenach, on the borders of
Hessen; the Seat of a great branch of the House of
Saxony. 2.
Mulhausen, an Imperial City; but of no great consequence. 3.
Hahn. 4.
Arnstadt, &c.
SOME of the
German Historians tell us, that
Heger Count of
Mansfeld was one of the Commoners at our
British King
Arthur's round Table; and hence they endeavor to prove the Antiquity of this County. For King
Arthur is suppos'd to have reign'd about the year of Christ 540; and
Mansfeld in
Notinghamshire (which these men say was built by the foremention'd
Heger) is thought of age enough to justifie this story. But others trace its Antiquities much higher, and derive the name of
Mansfeld from
Mannus Tuisco's Son, and Father of the
Germans. And this fancy is back'd with the name of
Ascania, a neighbouring Town in the Principality of
Anhalt; which, say they, must needs have been so call'd from
Ascenas the Father of
Tuisco and the
German Nation.
This is one of the four
Hercynian Counties; the other three being those of
Stolberg, Hohenstein and
Regenstein. It is bounded on the East with the River
Sala, which separates it from the Bishopric of
Mersburg and other parts of the Elector of
Saxony's Dominions; on the North with some part of the Principality of
Anhalt; on the West with the Counties of
Schwartzburg, Stolberg, and some other lesser Principalities; on the South with
Thuringen.
In this County there are great store of Mines, which afford several sorts of Metals and Minerals to the no small profit of the Inhabitants. Amongst the rest, the
Scheiffersteyn (a kind of Mineral peculiar to this and the neighbouring Provinces) is here found in great abundance. 'Tis a blackish glistering sort of Slat; which being bray'd and melted down, yeilds a vast quantity of Copper, and a considerable deal of Silver.
John Hubensak (a
German Commentator on some part of
Munster's Cosmography) gives the following account of this Mineral:
‘The Counts of
Mansfeld, says he, have in their Dominions several Mines of
Scheifferstein; the like whereof the whole world can scarce pretend to. For out of this stone the inhabitants melt a Copper; each hundred weight whereof contains betwixt ten and twelve ounces of pure silver. Nor are the Mines like to fail in hast; since in what part soever of the whole County you dig for this Mineral, you are sure to speed. I my self have been an eye-witness of a strangely extravagant curiosity of Nature in the composure of this stone. There is in the neighbourhood (not far from
Eisleben) a Lake of several miles in length and breadth, abounding with several sorts of Fish, and other living Creatures, as Frogs, Water-Rats,
&c. all which are lively represented in many of these
Scheiffer stones by fair Copper-strokes thro the very body of the Slat.’ So far
Hubensak. Now, what credit may be given to the later part of his story, I shall not determine; but leave it to the Reader's discretion to believe or reject it. Many of
Hubensak's Countrymen are forward enough to second him in the assertion; and
Petrus Albinus (in his Chronicle of the Mines of
Misnia) not questioning the truth of the story, endeavours to lay down the true and natural reasons of these appearances. And possibly Nature has wrought no greater miracles in these then in other stones daily found in many parts of our own Island. We may here, in one County, meet with lively pourtraictures of Plants, Insects, Fishes, Birds, Beasts (nay and several parts of man's body) delineated by Nature her self in the bodies of hard and flinty stones. For a testimony of this truth, I shall only refet the Reader to the fifth Chapter of our ingenious Dr.
Plot's Natural History of
Oxfordshire; where he may find a faithful register of almost innumerable Instances in this kind; together with a learned conjecture at the reasons of such variety of shapes.
They that attempt the running up the pedigree of the Counts of
Mansfeld as high as
Heger or
Mannus are too Romantic to be credited,
Counts. or taken notice of in this place. The more sober Genealogists are content to fetch the original of this Family from
Burchard, the fifth Count of
Quernfort; on whom the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa[Page 112]bestow'd this County, in requital of the many signal services done by him, both in the wars against the foremention'd Duke
Henry, and in the Holy Land. His grandchild
Burchard, by a Son of the same name, was the first that assum'd the Title of Count of
Mansfeld; about the year 1250. Since which time that Honour has been continued down to several Princes of the same Line; who have nevertheless always paid some small acknowledgment of Homage to the Electors of
Saxony. Amongst these Counts, the most eminent have been: 1.
Walerad, Privy-Counsellor to the Emperor
Sigismund; a faithful Servant to the Empire, and a notable Improver of his own Estate. 2.
John George; for some time Deputy-Governor of
Saxony, under Duke
Augustus. 3.
Peter Ernest, Governor of
Luxemburg under the Emperors
Charles the Fifth and
Philip the Second; by both of whom he was employ'd in their wars with
France, and against the Rebels in the
Netherlands. 4.
Albert, a constant Friend to
Martin Luther, and a faithful follower of
John Frideric the deposed Elector; in whose quarrel he lost his Estate, and was forc'd to retire to
Magdeburg; which City was afterwards by him bravely defended against the Emperor's forces. 5.
Ernest (Grandchild to the foremention'd
Albert, by his Son
John famous for his couragious and gallant behaviour in managing and carrying on the war against the Emperor
Ferdinand the second; in behalf of
Frideric Prince Elector Palatine of the
Rhine, and the States of
Bohemia. At this day the Family of the Counts of
Mansfeld is branch'd out into four or five distinct Houses; which division has render'd them much more inconsiderable then formerly they have been.
The Metropolis of this County,
Eisleben. and chief place of residence of the Counts Regent is
Eisleben; which has its name (as well as
Eysenach, Eissfeld, Eysenberg, and other neighbouring Towns) from the abundance of Iron-Ore, which the Natives call
Eysen, found in these parts; and not from the
Egyptian Goddess
Isis, who (as some Legendary Historians tell us) upon the death of her Husband
Osiris, being in a melancholy humour, wander'd into this Country, and gave her own name to several of the Towns in which she sojourn'd. The most notable thing which the
German Historians have recorded of this City is, that their
Megalander Martin Luther was born in this Town in the year 1483, and here ended his days in the year 1564. Over the door of the House wherein he was born the Citizens took care to set up his picture in stone with this inscription:
Hostis eram Papae, Sociorum pestis & hujus:
Vox mea, cum scriptis, nil nisi Christus erat.
John Forster (a Professor of Divinity at
Wittenberg, and Superintendant of the Church at
Eisleben) tells us, that there hapned a great fire in this City in the year 1601, wherein the Counts Palace, and 250 Citizens-Houses perish'd; but yet 'twas observed, that the Church wherein this blessed Saint
Luther (as he calls him) was Christned, the house wherein he was born, and another in which he dyed, were sav'd from the flames; tho all about them were laid in ashes. But however, this great man's sanctity (tho able, it seems, to protect whole Houses from the rage and violence of the flames) was not sufficient to secure his monument from the fury of the Imperialists; who, in the late Civil wars of
Germany, broke down his Image, and defaced the Inscription above mention'd.
The old and ruinous City of
Mansfeld (which gives name to the County) lies about five
English miles from
Eisleben. [...] It is defended by a strong Castle on the top of an high hill; which for many years had laid desolate, but was repair'd and fortified in the year 1547.
Wippra, Arnstein, Quernfurt, with some others, are remarkable for nothing else but giving names to so many petty Counties; into which the the whole County of
Mansfeld (to provide Titles for its many Earls) is usually divided.
ALTHO 'tis usual with every Historian that treats of the affairs of
Germany, to make frequent mention of the
Saxons; yet in such different senses is that word used by them, that we shall scarce meet with two of them that mean the same thing by
Saxony. Now the the reason of this disagreement is to be ascribed to the uncertain bounds and limits of the Dominions of that ancient and warlike people; and the division of their Land into so many petty Tribes and Provinces, who were all ambitious of appropriating the name of
Saxons to themselves.
Albinus says, the ancient Limits of
Saxony were, on the East, the
Elb; on the West the
Embs; on the South,
Bohemia and
Franconia; and on the South,
Bohemia and
Franconia; and on the North,
Denmark; but
Ptolomey confines that Nation within much narrower bounds.
Henry the Lion's Territories reach'd from the
Elb to the
Rhine; and from the
Baltic down as far as the utmost bounds of the
Hercynian Wood.
This whole Tract was more immediately divided into the Lower and Upper
Saxony; of the former whereof we have already given the Reader an account. Under the name of the later are sometimes comprehended (besides the Dukedom of
Saxony, or
Chur-Sachsen, as the
Germans call it) the Marquisate of
Misnia, Voitlandia, Thuringen, the whole
Hercynian Forest, the Principality of
Anhalt, with some more of the neighbouring Provinces. But in this place we only understand the Upper
Saxony, strictly so call'd; or that small Province which gives the Elector the Title of Duke of
Saxony. Which is bounded on the East with the Lower
Lusatia and some part of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg; on the North, with the Principality of
Anhalt; on the West, with the County of
Mansfeld and Landgraviate of
Thuringen; and on the South, with the Marquisate of
Misnia.
This small Province came to retain the name of
Saxony upon this occasion: When the overgrown power of
Henry the Lion was grown so formidable as to oblige the Emperor to depose him, and to divide his Territories amongst the neighbouring Princes (many of whom, by their good services, had deserved large recompenses at his hands) the Dukedoms of
Brunswic and
Luneburg were the only Dominions continued to the posterity of the deposed Prince. The lower parts of
Westphalia were seized on by the Archbishop of
Coln; and another part of it (above the
Weser fell into the hands of the Bishop of
Paderbourn; and a third was given to
Herman Landgrave of
Thuringen. The Princes of
Anhalt and Counts of
Mansfeld were made Masters of another portion of this large Dukedom; and several of the
Hans-Towns were made Imperial, and subjected to a Government of their own. By this means there was nothing left to be setled upon
Bernhard Prince of
Anhalt (whom the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa had created Duke Elector in the room of
Henry the Lion) but the Territories betwixt the
Sala and the
Elb; and some of that too (as the City of
Wittenberg) was before assign'd him by the Emperor
Conrad the third. However, 'twas order'd that these narrow Dominions should have the name of
Ober-Sax, or the Upper
Saxony, given them; and that
Wittenberg should from thence forward be the Electoral City.
The County is tolerably well provided for with all manner of grain;
Soil. but comes far short of its neighbouring Provinces,
Misnia and
Thuringen. Tho the Hills here afford some Mines of Silver and other kind of Metals; yet the Country will scarce yeild so much Wood as is sufficient to cleanse, and purifie it.
The inhabitants of this Country are still strict observers of the ancient Municipal Laws of their Heathen Ancestors;
Laws. which were look'd upon by the Emperor
Charles the Great as so agreeable to the dictates of right reason, that he saw no necessity of abrogating these upon his introducing of Christianity, and the observation of Gospel precepts. The choicest of these old Statutes are collected into two Bodies or Digests; whereof the one is call'd
Der Sachsen-Spiegel, or
Speculum
[Page 114]Saxonicum; the other (which is only an abstract of the former)
das Sachsische Weichbild. The
Sachsen-Spiegel was at first (like
Justinian's Institutes) collected by a
German Nobleman,
Ecke von Repkau, out of a great many old Records and Laws publish'd in the days of Superstition and Idolatry. It contains in it three Books; whereof the first consists of 71 Articles, the second of 72, and the third of 91. This (with a Glossary annex'd, explaining all the difficult and antiquated Law-terms in it) was first publish'd by one
Burchard Lord of
Mangelfeld; but a more accurate Edition was afterwards set out in Print by
C. Zobelius, at
Leipsick in the year 1569.
Das Weichbild, or
Wickbild, signifies properly the
Cities Image or
Statute; and how applicable this name is to a draught or model of State-Government (such as is contain'd in this Book) let the Reader judg. There are several Editions of this
Code; which contains only 137 choice Articles out of the
Sachsen-Spiegel, with some notable observations thereupon.
Wittenberg,Wittenberg. as we have said, was once an Electoral City; and is still reckon'd the Metropolis of the Upper
Saxony. Some Etymologists fetch its name from King
Wittekind, whom they make the first Founder of this City; others will have it signifie no more then a
white Rock; such as may be ordinarily met with in the Vicenage, and upon which they imagine the Town to be built. And, from this later conceit, the Students in this City usually write its name in
Latin Leucoris. The University was founded (after a long deliberation of several Electors from the year. 1399) by Duke
Frideric, surnamed the
White, in the year 1502. There are in it at present three Colleges; whereof the eldest is appointed for disputations in Physicks and other Arts; the new one, for Divines; and the third for Lawyers.
Wittenberg has no great reason to brag of any eminent Scholars, which of late it has produced.
Abraham Calovius has indeed scribled over a great deal of paper; but to little purpose. Another of their Professors
(Teutschmannus) has taken vast pains to run down the
Calvinists, and establish the Doctrines of
Luther: but both his answers and arguments are so contemptibly weak and silly, that the reading over his Book may probably confirm his Adversary, but is in no danger of confuting him. The Town is only one long street, and has little or nothing in it observable; so that the account which one gave waggishly of it, may possibly be pertient enough,
viz.
Leucorin intranti tibi quae sunt obvia quaeris?
Sus, Miles, Meretrix, aut studiosus erit.
Halle (tho a dependant on the Archbishopric or Dukedom of
Magdeburg;Halle. and, for that reason, now subject to the Elector of
Brandenburg) may justly be referr'd to this place; as being situated on the banks of the
Sala, within the precincts of those Territories which were comprised at first under the general name of the Upper
Saxony. It is thought to borrow its name from the
Greek word
[...], or
[...], Salt; from the abundance of Salt-pits in this place. But this is only
Goropius Becanus's fancy; and therefore I shall not press it too hard upon the Reader. These Pits were first discover'd by the
Hermunduri, a branch of the
Suevian Nation, some years before the coming of our Saviour; and by them valued at as high a rate as if they had been so many Mines of Gold. Of what value they are now a days may easily be computed from the weekly toll paid out of them to the Administrator of
Magdeburg; which ordinarily amounts to five or six hundred Crowns. The Town is neatly built; on the side of a pleasant hill, cover'd with Vines. The inhabitants are a gentile sort of people; and by some fancied to be greater masters of the High
Dutch tongue then the Citizens of
Leipsick. This City is usually call'd
Halla Saxonum, to distinguish it from some others of the same name in
Schwaben, Brabant, &c. and not (as
Bertius and
Mercator would have it) because 'tis the Metropolis of the Lower
Saxony. For tho (as
Albinus rightly observes) the ancient Geographers have been accustom'd to reckon her among the Cities of the Lower
Saxony; yet her situation, together with the language and manners of her inhabitants, declare her rather
Misnian or High
Saxon.
To these we may add
Quedlinburg,Quedlinburg. a small City betwixt
Halberstad and
Ermesleben. For altho this Town be indeed situated within the Circle of the Lower
Saxony; yet of late years the
German Geographers have been pleased to reckon it a part of the Upper, as being subject to the Elector. 'Twas formerly guarded by a Castle on the top of an adjoining hill; which is now demolish'd. From this Castle the Town got the name of
Quedlinburg; which is a word of the same importance as
Scarborough in
English. For
Quaddelen (in the Dialect of the Lower
Saxons) signifies marks or scars got by blows or slashes on the face or other parts of the body. At this day 'tis remarkable for nothing but a
Lutheran Nunnery; the Abbess whereof (who is always either a Princess of the blood of
Saxony, or a Countess at least) is Lady Paramount of the whole City, and the Territories thereto belonging. It was once a
Hans-Town; but upon a rebellion of the Citizens against their Abbess in the year 1475, that privilege was lost, and the City enslaved (rather then subjected) to the Elector of
Saxony.
For a Catalogue of the Electors of
Saxony, we refer the Reader to the following Description of
Dresden in
Misnia; where their usual Residence is now kept.
Marchionatus MISNIAE una cum VOITLANDIA.Authore Olao Ioannis Gotho S. R. M. Sueciae Geographo.Excudebant Janssonio-Waesbergi
[...] Moses Pitt et Stephanus Swart.
To IAMES FRASER Esqr. this Map is humbly dedicated.
MEISSEN or
Misnia (which is so called from a City of the same name, formerly a Bishop's. See, and the Metropolis of this Country; but now dwindled into a Town of little note) is bounded on the East with
Lusatia or
Laussnitz; on the South with
Bohemia; on the West with
Thuringen; and on the North with the Upper
Saxony.
The whole Marquisate (which is a vastly large Country) is usually divided into four parts. 1.
Misnia, strictly so call'd; or
Osterland, containing
Dresden, Konigstein, Pirna, the old Fort of
Sonnenstein, &c. 2.
Der Ertzgebergische Creyss, a Mountainous Countrey; wherein are comprehended the Mine-Towns of
Friberg, Alteberg on the
Moglitz, Augustus-burg, Annenberg, Marienberg, with some others. 3. The Circle of
Leipsick; which (besides the depenances on that rich City) comprises the Counties of
Rochlitz, Waldheim, and
Geringswald; with some other places of note. 4.
Voitlandia; which was formerly reckon'd a distinct Principality of it self, but is now accounted by all a part of
Misnia.
Besides these Provinces, there are in this Marquisate three Bishopricks. 1.
Meissen. 2.
Naumburg. 3.
Mersburg. To each of these there are several Lands and Territories annex'd; some part of the Revenues whereof are disposed of towards the maintenance of a certain number of Canons in every Cathedral; but the greatest share is employed in raising Portions and Estates for the Elector's younger Children.
The Plains of
Misnia are wonderfully fruitful in all manner of grain; and the Hills as well stored with the richest Metals. In some places (especially on the banks of the
Elb, near
Dresden and
Meissen) you may meet with large Vineyards; but their Wine is none of the best. At
Libenau, Possern, Teuditz, and some other places in the Bishoprick of
Mersburg, there have been formerly Salt-pits; but these were so infinitely outdone by those at
Halle before mention'd, that the Salters were forc'd at last to relinquish the trade as an employment which would by no means quit labour and cost. The whole Land is sufficiently furnish'd with Wood; and in most places the Forests afford good store of Venison; tho only the Woods near
Tschopau shelter Bears.
The chief Rivers in this Province are the
Elb,Rivers.Mulda, Pleiss, white and black
Elster. The lesser are:
Moglitz, Weiseritz, Flohe, Meisse, &c. All which afford plenty of all manner of fresh water fish; especially Carp, which are as numerous and large here as in any part of
Europe.
'Tis agreed by most Historians, that the
Misnians had their original from the
Mysi,Inhabitants. a people of
Asia; of whom
Cicero (in his Oration
pro Flacco) gives this character, that they were a people so contemptibly mean, that to call a man
Mysorum ultimus was the most opprobious language you could give him. However, the modern
Mysi, or
Mysnii, have no part in this character, being a people of a singularly courteous and affable behaviour. Nor are they less commendable for their delicate shape and neatness in clothes; whence the
Germans have a proverb
(Meissner Gleissner), intimating, that a
Misnian makes the greatest shew of any
German, Albinus commends them highly for chastity; and probably the severity of their
Saxon Law (which punishes Adultery with death) may be one grand inducement to the practise of this vertue.
DRESDEN.Dresden. The usual Seat of the Elector; a neat and well fortified City on the River
Elb, which runs thro the midst of it, dividing the old Town from the the new. A Town which (as 'tis probably guess'd) had its name from the three Lakes
(von den dreyen Seen) not far from it; which etymology of the word seems the more rational, for that (as its ancient Records testifie) the name of this City was formerly written
Dresen. The new City (in which stands the Elector's Palace) is the much more beautiful of the two, and better fortified; a place perhaps as well worth a curious Traveller's view as any Town in
Germany.
Not to mention the Stone-bridge,
Rarities. which unites the two Towns, and for its largeness and length (consisting of seventeen fair Arches) is reckon'd one of the wonders of
Germany; nor other notable pieces of Architecture in and about the Duke's Palace; that which most delights a strangers eye is the Elector's
Kunst-Kamer, or Chamber of rarities, in which are to be seen a vast company of the wonders of Art and Nature. I had presented me by one of the late Elector's Courtiers a perfect Catalogue of all the rarities in this admirable Repository: but that being too large to insert in this place, I shall only at present give the Reader a short view of the choicest of them, in the words of the ingenuous and learned Dr.
Edw. Brown, in the account he has publish'd of his Travels in
Germany A. D. 1668.
‘In the first partition are to be seen all manner of well made Instruments belonging to most Trades, as Joiners, Turners, Barbers, Smiths, Chirurgeons, and other Artificers; instruments to force open doors, chests,
&c. In the other Chambers these and the like are observable: A Tube Glass four Ells long. A large blew
Turkish Glass. Variety of Coral, and artificial works of it. Fowls made of mother of Pearl. Drinking Cups in the shape of Dragons, Elephants,
&c. Castles of Gold and mother of Pearl. Several Fowls and Cups made out of
Nautili, and other shells. A fine Oestrich made out of its Egg, with feathers of Gold. A Cup made of the Ball taken out of an Oxe's stomach, richly set, about a foot long. A stone as big as a man's fist, like a
Bezoar's stone, taken out of an Horse. A Purse made out of the
Linum Incumbustibile. Silver Ore from the Mines of
Freyberg, almost pure, in strings and shoots. A natural Cross of Silver Ore. One hundred and twenty one heads carv'd on the outside of a Cherry-stone. A religious man, or Friar, of
Japan carv'd in Box. A Crystal Cabinet sold by
Oliver Cromwell; wherein is kept a Ring, with stones in it of the shape of a Castle. His present Majesty of
England, King
Charles the Second, on Horseback; carv'd in Iron. An Head of King
Charles the first. A Glass Organ. Topazes unpolish'd, ten inches in diameter. A Cup out of a Topaze. Emeraulds, an inch in diameter, as they grow in the rock, resembling the
vitriolum nativum. Thunder-stones, smelling of fire. Rocks made out of all sorts of Ore; and the names of the places where they were digg'd written upon them. The figures of Fishes in stones out of
Mansfeld; the stones are dark colour'd, but the Fishes of a Gold or Copper colour,’ (see more of these stones in the description we have given the Reader of the County of
Mansfeld).
‘All sorts of stones which are to be found in
Saxony and
Misnia, polish'd. Two large pieces of pure Virgin Gold out of the Mine. A Hart with a Cabinet in his side, containing all medicines taken from a Hart. A white Hart as big as the life, made out of the shavings and filings of Harts-Horn; looking like Plaister. Figures printed in Trees. A Spur in part of a tree. Horns in trees.’
Besides these,
Du
[...]. and some other rarities of less note, the foremention'd Author takes particular notice of the pictures of all the Dukes and Electors of
Saxony (both in their Military and Electoral Habits). Amongst whom he might have observ'd the lively portraictures of
Hengist and
Horsus; drawn questionless according to the descriptions given of them by some of our Romantic
English Historians. I shall not trouble the Reader with an historical account of the life and death of each particular Elector. We have already given a Catalogue of the Dukes of
Saxony down as far as
Henry the Lion, in the description of those Territories which are now subject to the Dukes of
Brunswic and
Luneburg. Upon the deposing of that Prince by the Emperor
Frideric Barbarossa, Bernhard Prince of
Anhalt (Son of
Albert Marquise of
Brandenburg) was made Elector; and was succeeded by, 2.
Albert his Son; from whom the Dukes of
Lawenburg derive their pedigree. After him came 3.
Albert the second, Son of his predecessor. 4.
Rodolph I.
Albert the second's Son. 5.
Rodolph II. Son of
Rodolph the first. 6.
Winceslaus, Son of
Rodolph the second. 7.
Rodolph III. Son of
Winceslaus. 8.
Albert III. Son of
Rodolph the third; the last Duke and Elector of
Saxony of that Family. Upon the failure of this Line (and the neglect of the Princes of
Lawenburg to lay claim to the Electorate)
Frideric, Landgrave of
Thuringen and Marquise of
Misnia, was created Duke of
Saxony and Elector by the Emperor
Sigismund. By which means the Title return'd again to the Family of
Wittikind King of the ancient
Saxons; from which it had been alienated for the space of two hundred years. From this
Frideric is derived the succession of the present Electors, down to this day, in the following order: 2.
Frideric II. Son to the First. 3.
Ernest, Frideric the second's Son. 4.
Frideric III.
Ernest's Son. 5.
John, Frideric the third's Brother. 6.
John-Frideric, the Son of
John; a great promoter of the Reform'd Religion. 7.
Maurice, Cousin-German to his predecessor
John; who drove
Charles the fifth out of
Germany, and was slain in the Battel of
Siffridhuse against
Albert Marquise of
Brandenburg. 8.
Augustus, Maurice's Brother. 9.
Christian, Augustus's Son. 10.
Christian II. Son of
Christian the first. 11.
John George, Christian the second's Son; who first sided with the Emperor
Ferdinand against the Elector Palatine, and afterwards with the King of
Sweden against the Emperor. 12.
John George II. Son to
John George the first. He spent the greatest part of his time in ease and quiet; and dying this last year (1680) in a good old age, left the Electorate to his Son 13.
John George III. This Elector is a Prince of low stature, but great Spirit; something fat and corpulent, but withall active and brisk. He was born the 20th day of
June A. D. 1647, and in the year 1663 married
Ann Sophia Princess of
Denmark, and Sister to the present King
Christian. By her he has several children, the eldest of whom
(John George) is the Electoral Prince.
The Revenues of this Elector are thought to be as great (at least) as any other Prince's in
Germany,Reve
[...]. excepting only the Imperial Family;
[Page 117]altho the circuit of his Dominions and number of his Subjects fall far short of what his neighbour, the Elector of
Brandenburg, is master of. They that reckon his yearly Revenue to amount to 400000 pound sterling, speak modestly enough; and he that shall carefully compute all the incomes of his Treasury from the Imposition upon Beer and all other Commidities, from Taxes, Mines,
&c. will (I presume) find it rise to a much larger sum. The profit which arises to him out of the silver Mines at
Freyberg and some other places in his Territories has been long since computed to amount yearly to 130000 pound; and certainly the daily encrease of labourers will rather augment that sum. The Excise or Impost upon Beer in
Leipsick only (a City consisting of no more then two Parishes) is usually farm'd at the rate of 20000 pound
per annum. Besides this, and the like Customs, he has Tenths of all the Corn, Fruit, Wine,
&c. in his Country. Add to these the great standing Tax laid upon his Subjects towards the maintenance of a war against the
Turk; granted at first in times of danger and hostility, but gather'd since in days of peace (at least, as to that Enemy) under pretence of being in a readiness to receive him, whensoever he shall attack this Country.
Answerable to these vast revenues is the pomp and splendour of his Court; his Attendants being usually more numerous then the Trains of any of his neighbour-Princes. 'Tis reported, that in the Elector
Christian the second's Court, at the same time, three Dukes, as many Earls, and five Barons (of foreign Nations, besides a great number of the Nobility of his own Country) were Pensioners to that Prince. Nor have the two late Electors abated much of this state and grandeur. Witness the Funeral of
John George the First, in the year 1657, at which were twenty-four Horses of State cover'd with black, and the Electoral Eschutcheon wrought thereon, each of them being led by two Gentlemen; after which follow'd three thousand five hundred persons in mourning.
The Court of
Saxony has been always more bronded with excessive intemperance in drinking then any other Prince's Palace in
Germany. Nor have the Electors themselves been able to shun the imputation; a red nose being, as is reported by some of their own Historians, the inseparable badg of that Family.
II.
Leipzig. LEIPZIG. This City is supposed to have been built by the
Vandals (who were ancient inhabitants of these parts) about the year of Christ 700; and to have had its name from the
Slavonian or
Wendish word
Lipzk, which signifies a Linden-tree (from the multitude of this sort of Timber, which formerly grew in this place). Whence in
Latin Authors we sometimes meet with
Phylurea instead of
Lipsia; from the
Greek word
[...],
tilia. 'Tis seated at the concourse of three small Rivers (the
Elster, Pleissa, and
Parda) in a pleasant and fruitful plain, abounding with all manner of necessaries and pleasures; as, large and rich meadows, which are mowed twice constantly (sometimes thrice) a year; pleasant Woods, and an infinite number of fine Orchards, plentifully stock'd with all sorts of fruit.
Within the walls there is no such thing as Orchard or Garden; but the whole plot of ground is cover'd with stately Fabricks.
Pleissenburg (or the Castle, seated on the
Pleissa, which defends the Town) is a strong Fort, and strictly guarded; and St.
Nicolas's Church is thought to be the fairest, on the inside, of any
Lutheran Church in
Germany. The Citizens have generally well-built houses; many whereof (especially near the market-place) are seven, some, nine, stories high.
Near this place was the chief seat of the late civil wars of
Germany: insomuch that this Town was five several times besieged and taken in the space of two years. At the last 'twas taken by the Imperialists on the 12th of
August 1633. but restored upon the ratification of the Treaty of peace betwixt the Emperour and Elector of
Saxony, sign'd at
Prague A. D. 1635.
At this day 'tis famous for (besides the purity of the high
Dutch tongue; which is thought to flourish here in a more refin'd strain then in any other part of
Misnia, and consequently of
Germany) the three things following: 1. The great Traffic and concourse of Merchants from all places of note in
Europe; especially dureing the three fairs which are here kept yearly, at Christmas, Easter and Michaelmas. 2. The high Court of Judicature: before which the Elector himself is bound to appear upon summons. The manner of proceding in this Court is at large deliver'd by
Zobelius in his book entituled
Differentiae Juris Saxonici & Civilis; and by the Author of the
Chronicon Lipsiense, written not many years since in High-
Dutch. 3. The University; which was founded here A. D. 1408 upon the quarrel betwixt the
Hussites and
Papists at
Prague, whereby the former were forced to leave the town and to settle themselves at
Leipsig; to which City two thousand of them are said to have flock'd in one day. There are in it at this day four Colleges and twenty four public professors: amongst whom the chief professor of Divinity is Dr.
John Adam Schertzer, a person of wonderful humanity and as great learning. The several books he has publish'd (especially his
Collegium Anti-socinianum; wherein he has bravely confuted those knotty arguments of the
Cracovian party, which few of his Countreymen before him were able to understand) sufficiently demonstrate to the world the quickness of his parts and foundness of his judgement. His Scholar
J. Carpzovius (son to the famous lawyer of that name, who was formerly professor in this University) has got himself great credit by his skill in the Eastern languages and his apprehensive quickness in unfolding the mysteries of the antient and modern
Jewish Rabbies: the greatest part of which accomplishment he had (as himself confesses) from the good Instructions of his Master
Schertzer. Besides these old Mr.
Thomasius (Schoolmaster near
St. Nicholas's) is look'd upon as a man singularly well skill'd in all manner of philological writings.
Amongst the old Manuscripts in their Library (which amount to some thousands; but are only the despicable plunder of a few demolish'd Monaseries) the onely rarity is
Tzetzes's
Greek Commentary upon
Homer's Iliads: a book perhaps hardly to be met with elswhere, and written in a fair and legible character.
III. FREYBERG.
Freyberg. A famous and pleasant Mine-Town not far from the bank of the River
Mulda. The Citizens have so grand a conceit of the delicacy of this Town's situation, that this is an ordinary proverb amongst them,
Were I Lord of Leipsic,
I would spend my Income at Freyberg It derives its name from the rich hills upon which 'tis seated:
Fribergam Indigenae claro de nomine dicunt,
Libera de fossis quasi ferres munera terris.
In St.
Peter's Church at
Freyberg is the usual burying place of the Electors, many whereof ly
[Page 118]here entomb'd in fair Monuments; especially Elector
Maurice, whose Monument of black Marble is rais'd three piles high, and adorn'd with many rich statues in Alabaster and white Marble. This is reckoned one of the noblest, and perhaps may pass for the very best, of its kind in
Germany. When this City was surrendred into the hands of the Duke of
Friedland's Soldiers in the year 1632, the Elector of
Saxony paid 80000 Ricx-dollars to save these Sepulchers of his Fathers from being ransack'd and defac'd. And this large sum was the more willingly given because 'tis the fashion to bury the
German Princes in their Robes and Ensigns of Honour, Rings, Jewels,
&c. which would have been rich plunder for the Soldiers, if not compounded for.
The Mines are said to have been found out accidentally in the year 1180,
Mines. by a fellow carrying Salt; who in a Cart-road first discover'd a piece of Ore, which was found to be as rich in Silver as the best in
Germany. Since that time the multitudes of Miners who have swarm'd hither, have made so great progress in their work as to undermine the whole Town; which stands (at least the greatest part of it) upon Vaults and Caverns. Besides these Mines within the walls, there are a great many more within a mile or two of the City; the most remarkable of which is that on the top of the high hill
(Auff dem hohem berg); which is above seventy seven of their fathoms in depth. Now each of these fathoms contains twelve of their Ells, three of which make an
English fathom; so that this Mine is (in all probability) the deepest in
Europe.
The Miners have a peculiar habit of their own, which cannot so well be describ'd as represented, in a figure, to the eye.
They dig several sorts of Metals and Minerals out of these Mines;
Metals and Minerals. tho the only thing they labour for, is Silver. One of the Overseers of these Mines gave me thirty-two several kinds of Ore; all of which would yeild some Silver, but in a proportion different from the rest. The most ordinary sorts of Ore contain either Silver and Copper, Silver and Lead, or all three; but the Lead and Copper are not much regarded. They have here great quantity of Sulpher or Brimstone Ore; which is hard and stony, and usually speckled (which the Miners look upon as a sign of the richest Ore) with red spots. Some of this Ore contains Silver, some Copper, and some both; but in a small and inconsiderable proportion. An hundred weight of Ore yeilds commonly three pounds and an half of Sulphur; which runs out of a Furnace (made for that purpose) into water, and is afterwards melted over again and purified. The reliques of the Ore, out of which the Silver is already melted, serves for two uses; first, to melt down Silver; which, when too hard, it makes fluid. But the more consideral use of it, is in the making of Vitriol or Copperas, after this manner: They burn the Brimstone-Ore again, and then, putting it into a large Fat, pour water thereon; which having stood a competent while, is boil'd to a considerable height, and then let out into Coolers. In these there are a great many sticks set up (as in the making of Sugar Candy), to which the purest Vitriol cleaves; as the worse sort does to the sides and bottoms of the Vessels.
They have several ways of discovering Mines;
Virgula divina. the chief of which is with the
virgula divina, the use whereof some of them look upon as a piece of Conjuration, rather then an experiment drawn from the principles of Natural Philosophy. 'Tis a forked piece of Hazel; the two horns of which the discoverer holds in his hands, with the forks upright. In this posture he traverses the ground, muttering a set form of unintelligible words to himself. When the fork'd stick (mov'd by an occult impulse) turns in his hand, and points to the ground, 'tis taken for an infallible argument of some rich veins of Silver in the place it points at. Upon this sign given, they immediately fall a digging; and seldom miss of the expected success.
Sometimes they meet with damps in the deep Mines; which are always dangerous,
[...]. and often prove mortal to the labourers. But the greatest inconvenience, and which constantly attends their labour, is the dust; which grates upon and frets their Skins, Lungs, and Stomachs; and too often shortens their days, by bringing them into irrecoverable Consumptions. To secure themselves against these two evils, they sometimes use large Vizards with glass-eyes; under which they have room enough to breath for some considerable while.
At
Freyberg there is a yearly Coinage of Ricx-dollars,
[...]. and other money; which is most commonly true sterling, and look'd upon generally as the best Cash in
Germany. For whereas the Emperor's Coin is usually a base and mixt mertal; the Elector's is pure and true Silver, currant in all parts of the Empire.
IV. MEISSEN. Once the Metropolis and chief City in this Marquisate;
[...]. but at this time so inconsiderable, as that it hardly merits the fourth place in this Catalogue. It has its name from the River
Meisse; on the banks of which 'tis seated. Before the Civil Wars of
Germany, 'twas famous for a great wooden Bridge cross the
Elb near this place; which
Dresser is pleas'd to call the bravest sight of its kind in
Germany; and
Bertius ventures to name it the wonder of
Europe. But some of the unruly Soldiers rob'd the Town of this piece of credit; and it has now nothing to brag of, but the Elector's Palace, which would be fit enough to entertain a Prince if it stood at
Dresden, or any such pleasant part of
Misnia.
V. MERSEBURG. Formerly a Bishop's See,
[...]. but now usually assign'd as a portion to some of the Elector's younger Brother's; and upon that account enjoy'd by Duke
Christian, youngest Brother to the late Elector of
Saxony. Some Antiquaries affirm, that in this place stood formerly the famous
Saxon Idol
Irmensewl (of which the Reader has already had an account) which they take to be the same with
Mars among the
Romans; and thence conclude the true etymology of the word to be
Marsburg, or the City of the God
Mars. The Town at present consists of a great number of old fashion'd and ruinous houses; amongst which there is hardly any thing worth the taking notice of, save the Cathedral. Near this Church they have a Library, wherein are a great company of venerable Manuscripts, but very ill kept. Amongst which I took notice of the Books of
Sammuel and the
Kings in
Latin; written in a fair and ancient
Anglo-Saxonic character.
Torgau (falsly plac'd by
Mercator in the Upper
Saxony),
Ilenburg, Naumburg, with some others, are Towns of some note and traffick; but not by much so considerable as those already described.
L ƲSATIA (or
Laussnitz, as the
Germanes call it) is bounded on the South with the Kingdom of
Bohemia; on the West with
Misnia and
Saxony; on the North with the Marquisate of
Brandenburg; and on the East with the Lower
Silesia.
Not many years since this Province was part of the Kingdom of
Bohemia; and is usually describ'd as such by most Geographers. But when (in the year 1620) the
Lusatians had joined themselves in an open Rebellion with other confederate Traytors of that Kingdom, the Emperor issued out his Commission to
John George Elector of
Saxony, to quell these Revolters, and reduce them (if possible) to their ancient obedience. This he did effectually; and for his reward, and encouragement to proceed in these good services) had the whole Province pawn'd to him till further satisfaction should be made. At last (by the Treaty of
Prague, in the year 1635) the Emperor setled this Marquisate upon the Elector and his Heirs for ever; in which State (excepting only some few places in the Lower
Lusatia, which are subject to the Elector of
Brandenburg) it continues to this day.
This great Marquisate is usually divided into the Upper and Lower
Laussnitz; the former whereof is sometimes, by Geographers, named
Hexapolis; because it has in it six Cities (
Lobau, Budissin, Camentz, Gorlitz, Lauben, and
Zittau) all confederate. In the Lower
Lusatia, the Cities subject to the Elector of
Saxouy are:
Lubben on the
Spree, Guben, Lucken, and
Calow. The rest (as
Cotbus, Peytze, Sommerfeld, with some others of less note) pay homage to the Marquise of
Brandenburg.
We cannot much commend this Country for its fruitfulness; the greatest part of it being a dry sandy and barren soil, and the rest made up of Fens and Bogs. However the inhabitants make a hard shift to grow so much Corn as is sufficient for their own relief; tho they never have so great plenty as to be able to export any of it into foreign Countries. They have no want of Wood. Venison, nor Fish; nay, they have such plenty of these Commodities as is sufficient (had they the convenience of trafficking with other Nations) to enrich the Country, and bring in all the Rarities of other places.
The two chief Rivers of the Country are the
Spree and
Nei
[...]e;Rivers. both of them exceedingly well stock'd with all manner of fresh fish. The
EElster too springs in this Marquisate; but is a rivulet of no consequence 'till it has pass'd thorough some parts of the neighbouring Provinces.
It appears,
Inhabitants. from the mixture of an abundance of
Wendish words with the High-
Dutch spoken in these parts, that the ancient inhabitants of
Lusatia were a branch of the
Slov
[...]nian Nation. Hence in the Villages and most barbarous places of the Marquisate (especially in the Lower
Lusatia) you meet with a strange kind of unintelligible gibbrish; tho the Citizens every where speak good
Dutch. Some of these people. Geographers say, have their original from the
Ilingi, Elysii, or
Lygii; others from the
Semn
[...]nes; a third sort from the
Scrabi; and a fourth from the
Lusici or
Lutitii. But from what Nation or Kindred the
Polanders named this Marquisate
Ditivonia (as
Cromer, Newgebawer, and others tell cannot yet learn.
The modern
Lusatians are thought to be men of as apprehensive and quick natural parts as any of their neighbours; but exceedingly addicted to covetousness and penury. Their Country breeds neither Horses nor Horsemen; but (if we believe
Joh. Boter, in the account he has given us of the Military power of all the great Princes and Potentates of the world) they are able, upon a very short warning, to raise twentythousand hardy foot Soldiers, who will endure a shock better then twice that number of delicate and well-bred Western Warriours. They are (in all Cases, Civil and Criminal) strict observers of the
Saxon Laws; to the harsh tenure of which they pay a better obedience then ever they were known to do formerly to any Statutes of the Kings of
Bohemia.
BAUTZEN,
Bautzen. or
Budissina. Seated on the River
Spree; and first built by a
Bohemian Duke of this name, about the year 800. In the year 1634 this City was so warmly besieged by the the Elector of
Saxony's forces, that the Emperor's Soldiers (who kept the Town) were forc'd to fire the Suburbs, for fear of sheltering the Enemy. This fire was unhappily driven over, by a strong wind, into the City; and in a few hours laid it in ashes. In this miserable condition (having nothing standing but the walls and Castle) it was soon after surrender'd by the Imperialists. But not long after, even the small remainders of this large Town were demolish'd by some of the
Swedish Generals. Since which time it has not been able to recover its glory; but is still something inferior to
II.
Gorlitz. GORLITZ. Which City, seated on the Western banks of the River
Neisse, is said to have been built and fortified by
Boleslaus III. Duke of
Poland; who died in the year 1139. Others say, 'twas founded by Duke
Sobieslaus about the year 1131. However all agree in this, that after its first foundation 'twas burnt down to the ground, and that thence it got the name of
Gorlitz; which in the
Slavonian language (as well as
Brandstat in the High
Dutch, a name given it by most
Germans) signifies a burnt City. For
Gorlitz is a corruption of
Tzschorlitz, the ancient name of this Town; and that of
Ischorelik. There are at present several neat Churches in the Town; and a great many stately dwelling houses. The chief trade of the Citizens is in Beer-brewing, and making, colouring, and dressing several sorts of Linnen (and some Woollen) Cloth.
ZITTAU,
Zittau. or
Sittau; which some will have to signifie as much as
Susse aw; and to have had its name from the fresh and sweet waters on which 'tis seated. But we need enquire no further after the etymology of the word, if what
Dresser reports be true, that on a Grave-stone in this City was to be seen in his time the following Inscription:
Anno Christi 1021,
Idibus Julii, obiit pia & illustris Foemina Zittavia,
Christianissimo Principi Manfredo
nupta, fundatrix & dotatrix hujus oppidi, de ejusdem nomine dicti. There is hardly any thing at present remarkable in the Town, except the old
Franciscan Monastery which, since the Reformation, has been converted into an Hospital.
IV. LEIBA,
[...]Lobau, Liben, Loben, or
Lubben, (for all these names I find given it by
Mercator and other noted Geographers) is look'd upon as one of the oldest Towns in these parts. And for that reason the other five confederate Cities of
Lusatia used always to send their Deputies to consult at this place, in time of any common calamity or danger. It is seated on the bank of a small Rivulet, about an equal distance betwixt
Bautzen and
Gorlitz, girt round with a delicate plain and pleasant meadows. We may judg of the riches of this little Town by the vast plunder which the
Swedish Army confess'd they got out of it in the year 1639, which amounted to a sum of seventy thousand Ricxdollars in ready Cash, besides other rich booties.
V. LUBEN on the
Spree; [...] the chief Town in the Lower
Lusatia. In this place the Elector of
Saxony has a Palace; in which (sometimes in a progress for pleasure) he keeps his residence for some short while. What alterations were here in the late Civil wars of
Germany, may perhaps be remembred by some of the ancient Burgers of the Town; but is not, I think, recorded by any Historian of note.
VI. GUBEN.
[...] A well fortified little Town in the Lower
Lusatia; seated on the River
Neisse, which contributes very much to its strength and security. In the year 1631, immediately after the great battel of
Leipsick, the Imperialists fell in upon this City and took it; but towards the later end of
October were driven out again by Marquise
Hamilton (at that time a Commander in the
Swedish Army), who coming suddenly upon them, put the greatest part of them to the Sword, and routed the rest. But the poor Citizens were harder put to it in the year 1642, when the
Swedish General
Stallhanss lay before it for three weeks together, and the poor besieged
Saxons lay block'd up, and destitute of all manner of provisions and amunition, being at last forc'd to surrender themselves upon what terms their merciless enemies would propose to them.
Camentz, Lucken, Calow, with many others, may pass for fair Villages; but will hardly deserve the name of Cities.
MANY and various are the opinions of Geographers touching the original of the word
Silesia, or
Schlesien, to speak in the
German language. It is the opinion of some, that it is deriv'd from
Schless, a small River which falls into the
Oder; but others are content to fetch it from the
Elysii, the ancient inhabitants of this Country; not troubling themselves to dive any further into the original of that name.
Within the compass of that vast Tract of Land which now is comprehended under the common name of
Silesia were contain'd anciently a great number of people of different names and government.
[...]Pirckheimer tells us, that the Country about
Bresslaw was inhabited by the
Lutiburi; the Principality of
Sagan by the
Batini; the Dukedom of
Oppelen by the
Sidones, and that of
Teschen by the
Cogni. To these
Simon Grisbecius adds several others in the following distich:
Elysiam veteres Ligii, Quadique, Manimi,
Marsigni clari quam tenuere Luij.
And to these the learned
Cluverius will have us to add the
Semnones, Osi, Burii, &c. which, I suppose, are no more then so many distinct names taken from the different Villages these men inhabited; or, it may be, from the names of the Rivers, as was the peculiar fancy of these
German people. Now these names of places, Rivers,
&c. were (as
Cureus, in his Chronicle of
Silesia, assures us) quite lost and forgotten upon the admission of the
Polish language into this Country.
Lignitz, Libus, and some few places more, retain their primitive names; but all the rest are, as appears from their termination, of a
Polish extraction.
Pliny calls the
Oder (the chief River of this Country)
Guttalus; and others think that River which has now the name of the
Spree, was by the ancients named
Suevus. From whence some Geographers (not improbably) have concluded, that first the
Goths, and afterwards the
Suevi, or
Swabes, were formerly inhabitants of these parts.
That
Silesia was a part of the
Polish Dominions in the days of their first Prince
Lechus (or at least a good large share of it,
Ancient Government. down as far as the banks of the River
Oder) seems probable enough from the testimonies of
Adam Bremensis and
Helmoldus; the former whereof begins the
Polish Nation from the Eastern banks of that River, which the later makes the utmost bounds (Eastward) of his
Slavi. However 'tis as manifest, that the ancient Princes of
Germany often invaded this Land; and probable enough, that 'twas sometimes tributary to them. Before
Charles the Great's days we have but little of History (concerning these parts of the world) which we may rely on. But
Cureus proves to us, that this Emperor (amongst many other his noble exploits) subjected
Silesia to himself. And
Eginhard means the same thing, when he tells us, that
Charles the Great overran the whole Country betwixt the
Rhine and the
Vistula; where by the
Vistula, 'tis evident, he understands the first original source or head of that River. After
Charles the Great's days we have yet clearer testimonies of the
Silesians paying homage to the
Germans. Adam Bremensis (an Historian of unquestionable authority) speaking of the Emperor
Ludowic the Godly, says,
Ipse Boemanos, Sarabos, Susos (where, by the way, we are to take notice, that instead of
Silesii some of the ancient writers have
Slesii, others
Sliusii, many
Sileucii, and not a few
Susi),
& caeteros Slavorum
populos ita perdomuit ut tributarios efficeret. Whence it appears, that they quickly threw of
Charles the Great's yoke; as they did, not long afterwards, his Son's too. For
Helmoldus tells us,
post mortem Ludovici Regis, Bohemi, Sorabi, SƲSI & Slavi, quos ipse tributis subjecerat, tunc servitutis jugum excusserunt. Another Rebellion the
Annales Fuldenses mention in the year 874;
Slavi qui vocantur Linones & Sliusi eorumque vicini defectionem molientes solitum dare censum renuunt. Quos Hludovicus Rex, missis quibusdam fidelibus suis, sine bello compressit, acceptisque
[Page 122]obsidibus nonnullis & muneribus non paucis eos sub pristinum redegit servitium. I have been the more punctual in alledging these Authorities, because I find the
Polish writers obstinately deny, that the
Silesians had in these days any other Lords then the Princes of
Poland. Only
Vincentius Kadlubko, in the second Book of his
Polish Chronicle, seems to allow of the foremention'd
German Relations, when he says, that
Boleslaus I. annex'd
Seleucia, Prussia, Russia, Moravia, and
Bohemia to the Territories of his predecessors; which intimates thus much, that formerly
Seleucia, or
Silesia, was under the dominion of some other Prince. In the year 1042, the Emperor
Henry III. gave a grant of
Silesia to
Bretislaus Duke of
Bohemia; who resign'd it up to the
Polanders, on condition they should for ever pay out of it a yearly tribute to the Princes of
Bohemia. Afterterwards
Henry IV. (at a Diet held at
Mentz A. D. 1086) gave power to
Ʋrati-slaus King of
Bohemia to invade
Silesia, Lusatia, and the whole Kingdom of
Poland, and to subject them to his own Government; as is testified by
Cosmas Pragensis, who was himself present at the Diet. This
Cromer cannot deny; but only, in the height of his passion, asserts, that neither the Emperor
Henry nor King
Ʋratislaus had ever any thing to do with a foot of Land in any of these Territories. This Assignment of
Silesia occasion'd wars betwixt the
Bohemians and
Polanders; the later whereof we have reason to believe were Conquerors, since we read, that the
Silesians remain'd still subject to
Boleslaus III. King of
Poland. This King's Son (
Ʋladislaus II.) being banish'd by his Brothers, whom his Father had left Coheirs with him of the Kingdom, out of
Poland, fled to the Emperor
Conrad III. whose Successor,
Frideric I. forced King
Boleslaus IV. to resign all
Silesia to this exil'd Brother and his Heirs for ever.
Ʋladislaus left behind him three Sons,
Boleslaus, Mieczislaus, and
Conrad; who were joint-Dukes of
Silesia, but paid some small homage and acknowledgment to the Kings of
Poland. The flocking in of the
Germans into
Silesia with
Ʋladislaus and his Sons, and their setling themselves in this Dukedom, bred a great deal of bad blood betwixt this Nation and the
Polanders. Insomuch that the Kings of
Poland would seldom call any of the Dukes of
Silesia to the General Assemblies or the Princes and Nobility of that Kingdom; nor were they ever admitted to succeed to the Crown, tho (before the Kingdom came to be Elective) they had often the justest Title to it.
John King of
Bohemia, and Son to the Emperor
Henry VII. was a zealous promoter of these dissentions; managing them so well to his own advantage, that at last he became Lord of
Silesia, by an agreement made with
Casimir the Great King of
Poland. However, by this Treaty the whole Dukedom was not made over to him; for
Bernhard Duke of
Sweidnitz still acknowledg'd the Supremacy of the
Polish Kings, as
Stanislaus Lubienski proves out of several ancient Records of that Nation. Afterwards
Casimir the Great recover'd by force of Arms the Town and Territories of
Wschovia, contrary (says
Curaeus) to the Articles of the Treaty sign'd by him and the foremention'd
John King of
Bohemia; and by vertue of this Conquest, or rather outrage (committed by the said
Casimir's Soldiers in the year 1343) the Kings of
Poland have kept actual possession of
Wschovia to this day. In the reign of
Casimir Jagellonides IV.
John Duke of
Oswiecieme ventur'd, upon an affront given him, to invade
Poland, and to lay waste several Towns and Villages in that Kingdom. The
Polanders, to make themselves satisfaction for this injury, march'd into this Duke's Territories, and laid in ashes the whole Country before them; until Duke
John was forc'd to compound the business, upon condition that he should, for a certain sum of money, resign to the King of
Poland his whole Right and Title to the Town and Fort of
Oswieciem. By which means that City was cut off from the King of
Bohemia's Dominions in the year 1454. About the same time the Dukes of
Ratibor and
Sessine made over the Dukedom of
Sever to the Bishop of
Cracow; whose Successors are Lords of it to this day. Some other small Tracts of Land in the Dukedom of
Silesia do still belong to certain Abbies and other Religious Houses in the Kingdom of
Poland; but all the most noted Provinces (except the Dukedom of
Crossen, of which in its place) are reckon'd Dependances on the Crown of
Bohemia; upon which score the Emperor of
Germany stiles himself Duke of
Silesia.
This Great Dukedom is commonly divided into the Upper and Lower
Silesia;Divi
[...]. in the former whereof are contain'd the Cities and Territories of
Jagerndorf, Troppau, Teschen, Ratibor, and
Oppelen; and in the later the Towns and Dukedoms of
Grotkau and
Neisse, Brieg, Bresslau, Oelss, Munsterberg, Schweidnitz, Javer, Lignitz, Glogau, Sagan, and
Crossen. Another division of it is into the
Polish and
German Silesia; whereof the first contains all the Tract of Land beyond the Northern banks of the
Oder; and the later that on the Southern.
All along the Coasts of
Bohemia there are vastly high Mountains which separate that Kingdom from the Dukedom of
Bohemia;Soil. the most remarkable of which are the
Montes Sudetes or
Risen-bergen, whereof the Reader may expect a larger account in the description of
Bohemia. Within the limits of
Silesia the four chief Mountains are: 1.
Zottenberg or
Zobtenberg, call'd by
Latin Authors
Mons Zotensis, Zabothus, and sometimes
Silensis or
Silentius. 'Tis usually, by the neighbourhood (being about two
German miles distant from
Schweidnitz) call'd the
Silesian Wethercock; for by the top of this Mountain they pretend to guess what weather they are to expect the next morning. On the top are still to be seen the ruins of an old Castle, storm'd and demolish'd by the Citizens of
Breslaw in the year 1471, because it had been for several years the Harbour and Refuge of a great company of Robbers, who here kept their Rendezvous, and daily infested the Vicenage. Out of this hill the
Silesians dig a delicate dark-green Marble. 2.
Gratsberg or
Grodisberg, in the Dukedom of
Lignitz; on the top whereof Duke
Frideric the first built a fair Castle, which is since turn'd into a Watch-Tower. 3.
Spitsberg; another Beacon-hill not far from the former. 4.
Georgenberg, in the Dukedom of
Schweidnitz; famous for the
Strigische Erde, or
Terra Sigillata, which is a sort of hard Earth with several white, yellow, and red strokes or veins in it. 'Twas first discover'd by an excellent Chymist (
John Montanus, Physitian at
Strigaw), and by him made use of as an antidote against all manner of poison, and a soveraign medicine for a great many diseases, which he cured with a great deal of facility. The secret he kept for some years to himself; but at last (for the benefit of his Country and all mankind) publish'd a Tract in
Latin, containing its description and vertues.
The
Oder is the chief of all the Rivers in
Silesia.Rivers. It springs near the Town
Oder, not far from
Teschen on the borders of
Moravia; and passes by
Ratibor, Cossel, Oppelen, Brieg, Brieslaw,
[Page 123]Glogaw, Beuthen, and
Crossen (with some more Cities of less note) before it leaves this Dukedom. Other remarkable Rivers are the
Bober, Neisse, Ohla, and
Queiss. Besides these, 'tis the honour of
Silesia, that the
Vistula (the best River in
Poland) and the
Elb spring out of its mountains.
There are also in this Country good store of Ponds and Lakes; which yeild plenty of all manner of fresh water fish; especially Lampreys, which are caught in prodigious quantities in the
Neisslish Sea, and some other waters.
Other Commodities of the Land are Madder,
[...]mo
[...]ies. Flax, sweet Cane or Galengal, Wine (especially in the Dukedoms of
Sagan and
Crossen), Silver, Copper, Lead, Iron, and Chalk. They have plenty of Salt-peter, and some good Salt; tho not so much as to be sufficient for their own use; so that daily great quantities of this Commodity are brought in from
Poland and other neighbouring Countries. They have all the sorts of wild and tame Beasts that any other part of the
German Empire affords. Butter, Cheese (particularly, a kind of pitiful stuff made of Ewe's milk), Bacon, Honey,
&c. But the greatest trading Commodities they have, are Wool and Flax.
Silesia has bred several good Scholars and brisk Wits;
[...]abi
[...]ts. tho the ordinary Rustics are look'd upon as a people of a shallow understanding and small sence. They are commonly, in way of derision, stil'd by their neighbour Nations
Eselsfresser, or Ass-Eaters. The occasion of which nick-name, some say, was this: A blunt Country Rustic travelling from near
Breslaw into the Dukedom of
Crossen, 'spy'd in a field an Ass feeding; which the poor fellow (having never before seen the like Creature) mistook unhappily for an overgrown Hare. Whereupon, discharging his Blunderbuss, he shot the strange beast, and brought it home to his friends and acquaintance, who (being a pack of Bumpkins, of no longer heads then himself) roasted and eat up the outlandish Puss. This is the relation which the common people of
Silesia give of their Title. Another story is, that the Miners at
Reichenstein (not far from
Glatz) having discover'd a vein of Gold-Ore, which they nam'd
der guldener Esel, lay at it continually; being resolv'd, that no strangers or foreigners should share with them in the Treasure. And hence they got the name of Ass-eaters; from stuffing their purses and not their carcases. But this later narrative may possibly have been contriv'd by some of the
Silesian Wits; who, by this means, were in hopes to wear off the disgrace and ignominy of the former. Some of them (like the Bores of
Italy and
Bohemia) have a custom of reckoning the hours of the day from the Snnsetting; but few of the Nobility observe that method.
The Lieutenantship of
Silesia was for some time committed to
Matthias Corvinus King of
Hungary; but afterwards was conferr'd upon the Bishops of
Breslaw; until the Emperor
Rudolf II. decreed, that this charge should be committed to some of the Temporal Princes of that Nation, who were to be nominated (as well as the subordinate Lieutenants of the several petty Dukedoms or Counties) by the Council Chamber at
Prague; to whom was also committed at the the same time the supreme inspection into all Law-Cases and the different administration of Justice in all Courts of Judicature in each particular Province.
Christianity was first planted in
Poland (and at the same time in
Silesia,Religion. which was then a part of that great Dukedom) about the later end of the ninth, and beginning of the tenth, Century. In the infancy of Religion in these parts, the
Polanders and
Silesians were wont to assemble themselves in Woods, and other desert places of the Land; for fear of laying themselves too open to the cruelty of their Magistrates, who were men of another perswasion. But at last Christianity was admitted to Court; for
Mieceslaus, Duke of
Poland, having married
Drambronica Daughter of
Boleslaus Duke of
Bohemia (a Christian) was himself baptized at
Gnesna, in the year 965. Whereupon he caused nine Bishopricks to be erected in his Dominions; amongst which one was founded at
Schmogra in
Silesia; which was afterwards removed to
Bitschen, and at length fix'd at
Breslaw. Soon after the Reformation begun by
Luther, the
Augsburg Confession was brought hither; and at last confirm'd by the Emperor
Rudolph II. in the year 1609. But
Ferdinand II. (a bloody persecutor of the Protestants) repeal'd that Charter; allowing the public profession of the
Lutheran Religion to the Citizens of
Breslaw, and some few Towns more, and that too with several limitations and restrictions. However, that Emperor was sensible (before his death) how vain 'twas to endeavour the extirpation of Protestants; and the whole Empire, some years after, groaned under the dismal effects of his misguided zeal for the Church of
Rome. The
Silesians are at this day generally
Lutherans; only some few of the Nobility, with their Dependants, adhere still to the Superstitions and Fopperies of the
Romanists.
We have hitherto given the Reader a general account of the vast Dukedom of
Silesia; and proceed in the next place to a more particular survey of the several petty Provinces which make up this large Territory, beginning with
I. The Dukedom of
CROSSEN.
IN the time that the
Silesian Princes were,
Dukedom. by the subtilty of
John King of
Bohemia, set at variance and enmity amongst themselves (of which stratagem we have already taken notice), this Dukedom was first separated from the other parts of the Great Duke of
Silesia's Dominions. For, in the year 1272, the City of
Crossen was pawn'd to the Archbishop of
Magdeburg; but redeem'd within two years after by
Henry Duke of
Breslaw. Four years after this, the Citizens of
Breslaw pawn'd it a second time to
John Marquise of
Brandenburg for four thousand Crowns towards the ransom of their Duke; but with this proviso, that the Marquise should not give assistance to
Boleslaus Duke of
Lignitz in his wars against their City. Not long after,
Crossen was again redeem'd out of the Marquise's hands. But
John the Great (commonly known by the name of
Cicero Germanicus) got possession of it a second time, in lieu of fifty thousand ducats owing him for his wife's portion. Again,
John Duke of
Sagan deliver'd up this Dukedom into the hands of
John the third, Elector of
Brandenburg, with the consent of
Ʋladislaus King of
Hungary and
Bohemia, in the year 1391. Lastly,
Joachim II. and his Brother
John, Marquises of
Brandenburg, had the sole and entire possession of this Dukedom granted them by the Emperor
Ferdinand the first, King of
Bohemia. Since which time the Electors have always enjoy'd it; and stiled themselves Dukes of
Crossen in
Silesia.
[Page 124]Crossen,City. in the language of some of the Natives of this Country, signifies the outmost seam or selvidge of a piece of Cloth; an apt name for a City which (being seated on the frontiers of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg) is the furthest Boundary and Bulwark of the Dukedom of
Silesia. 'Tis a comly old City; seated in a pleasant plain and in a good air. The Duke's Palace, Town-Hall, and some Citizens Houses, are built with a neat and well polish'd stone. The neighbouring Hills are cover'd with Apples, Pears, and other sorts of Fruit. Some Wine they have growing; but exactly such trash as
Altmarck, and some other parts of the Elector's Dominions are wont to produce.
II. The City and Dukedom of
GLOGAW.
THIS City is usually known by name of Great
Glogau;City. to distinguish it from a much more inconsiderable Town of the same name, in the Dukedom of
Oppelen. Cureus fancies it to be the same place with
Ptolomy's
Lugidunum; which (as he probably enough conjectures) had its name from the
Lugii, the ancient inhabitants of this part of the Country. Its present name is of
Wendish extraction, and signifies properly a Thorn-bush; so call'd from its situation amongst Thickets, or in a Copse.
Glogaw was made a true City by
Conrad, Duke of the place, about the year 1260, at which time the City and Cathedral (the only strength and ornament of the Town) were built, and the City stock'd with
Germans; who establish'd here the Laws and Customs of their own Country. The Palsie is an epidemical disease in this Town; which is thought to proceed from the extraordinary intemperance of the Burgers, in drinking a sort of bitter and muddy (but withal wonderful strong and heady) Beer. They are also commonly tormented with the Stone and Gravel in the Kidneys; a distemper partly ascribed (by their Physitians) to the same cause with the former, and partly to their feeding chiefly on Pork, Cheese,
&c.
To this Dukedom belong the petty Towns of
Guhrau,Dukedom.Sprottau, Grunberg, Schwibussen, Beuthen, Pulkwitz, Koben, Newstatt, Warienberg, and
Primnikaw. The people of this Province have this peculiar Anti-Salic Law amongst them, that (upon failure of Issue male) a Daughter inherits the Estate of her Father before any of the nearest of his male Relations.
III. The City and Dukedom of
SAGAN.
SAGAN (once one of the best and most populous,
City. and still) one of the largest Cities in
Silesia. 'Twas, in the Civil Wars of
Germany, several times taken by the
Swedish forces, and retaken by the Imperialists. There is now little remarkable to be seen upon that large spot of ground, whereon this City is placed, except only the Castle, St.
Mary's Church, and two Monasteries; and these are rather venerable for age, then commendable for any thing of rarity that's in them.
The Dukedom (called by the
Polish writers
Ducatus Zeganensis) is of no large extent in length or bredth.
Du
[...]. 'Tis bounded on the West with
Lusatia and the Barony of
Sora, which is reckon'd a part of rhe Marquisate of
Brandenburg; on the South with the Dukedom of
Javer; on the East with the Dukedom of the greater
Glogaw; and on the North with
Crossen. 'Twas once a part of the Dukedom of
Glogaw; but afterwards it was subjected to Princes of its own, sometimes three or four at once; whence we read of the Dukedoms of
Sagan, in the plural number. There are some large and rich Cornfields in this Province; which are well water'd with the Rivers
Bober, Queiss, Tschirn, and
Neisse. Pribus, Naumburg, and
Freywald (three small Cities) are all subject to the Dukes of
Sagan.
IV. The Town and Dukedom of
WOLAW.
NOtwithstanding that
Wolaw was anciently accounted a part of the Dukedom of
Lignitz,Du
[...]. and has always been subject to the same Laws and Government; yet the petty Princes of
Silesia (whether it be to multiply their Titles, or for what other reason, I shall not determine) have of late years made it a Dukedom of it self. And (because thus separated from
Lignitz, 'tis still too large to be guided and govern'd by one man; being near as big as either of our
English Counties of
Huntingdon or
Rutland) they have subdivided it into six larger Circles or Hundreds, which have their names from the chief Towns in them,
viz. Wolau, Hernstadt, Winzing, Ruten, Raude, and
Steinaw; none of which are worth the describing. To these they add two more Enclosures (no bigger then one of our small Parishes in
England) whereof the one goes by the name of
Koben, and the other
Breubawischer hald; both which the Reader may see in the Map, and thence be able to take an estimate of their true bulk and value.
Wolau it self, which in this Country makes a shift to give Title to a Duke,
City. might pass for a Market-Town in
England; but would never merit, as here it does, the name of a City. 'Tis every way mean and inconsiderable. The buildings in it are contemptible; and the Citizens (for so they will needs stile themselves) hardly able to provide bread for their Families out of the little or no trade of the place. The neighbouring Lake
(der Gross Teich) furnishes them indeed with Fish enough for the support both of themselves and their children; or otherwise they would not, I think, have any possibility of subsisting. And yet this mean place was for some time the seat of the
German Civil Wars; nay, the
Swedish Lieutenant
Gortzke thought it no small piece of honour, that he bravely maintain'd himself, and a Garrison in the Town, for some months; when (God knows) no Commander of note would so far undervalue himself as to attack it.
OELSSE is seated in the Lower
Silesia, about sixteen miles distant from
Breslaw; first made a City (out of a poor Village) by the Emperor
Henry I. in the year 936. The Country round this Town is pleasant enough, and the air wholesom. The Gates, Walls, Turrets, and other Fortifications of the City were handsom and noble before the late Wars; but the
Swedish General
Wittenberg's Troops demolish'd the greatest part of them in the year 1648, which have not since been rebuilt. However the place is still beautified with a fair Church, College, and Town-Hall; and the Streets (especially the Marketplace, which is in an exact square) are generally neat and uniform.
Oelsse had anciently its own Duke, who kept his residence in that City; but upon the death of Duke
Conrad the Eighth, in the year 1492. the Dukedom was given to the Dukes of
Munsterberg, who have ever since been Lords of it. In this Principality are reckon'd the small Cities of
Bernstatt, Festenberg, Kunstatt, Stroppen, Mosebahr, Hundsfeld, and
Trebnitz.
VI. The City and Dukedom of
BRESLAW.
BRESLAW, or
Wratislavia (the Metropolis of
Silesia) has its name from
Wratislaus a
Bohemian Prince, its first Founder; whence the Citizens bear a great W in their Coat of Arms to this day. 'Tis seated at the confluence of the two Rivers
Oder and
Ohla, in a rich and pleasant Country. Towards the North indeed there are some Marshes and moist fields, whence are now and then some unwholesome gales sent into the Town; and the whole City is reported to have been built in the place of a great Pond dried up. The Citizens (who are exceedingly numerous, by reason of their great Traffick with the
Hungarians, Bohemians, Polanders, and other foreign Merchants who resort hither) are said to be as neat and gentile in their Clothes and Cookery as any other of the Emperor's Subjects whatever.
Breslawers love to be esteem'd immediate members of the
German Empire; and cannot endure to be reckon'd a part of the Kingdom of
Bohemia. Hence 'tis that they have obtain'd leave of the Emperors to bear the spred Eagle in their Escutcheon; and that they petitioned
Charles V. to confirm their priviledges. For this reason
M. Boregius (a
Breslawer, who wrote a Chronicle of the Kings of
Bohemia) ranks
Breslaw among the Imperial Cities; but ne're mention it with the King of
Bohemia's Towns; altho it be certain, that 'twas formerly subject to that Prince. This
Goldastus, in his learned Treatise of the Kingdom of
Bchemia, evidently proves; notwithstanding (what is usually alledg'd as an argument to the contrary by some ignorant and silly Historians) that it was once one of the
Hans-Towns. The generality of the buildings in this City are fair and stately; only on the banks of the
Oder stand four old fashion'd Fabricks, with Turrets on the top, which the Antiquaries of this place fancy to have been the ancient Palaces of so many
Schwabish Princes, who in former days were Lords of this City. Besides the vast traffick of the Citizens, the Town is famous for a Bishop's See and an University; wherein have been bred many learn'd men, and some great Writers. The Bishops of this Diocese (who had anciently the Epiphet or Title of
Golden given them, from their vast revenues) are put in by the King of
Bohemia; whom they acknowledg their supreme Head, at least, in Temporals. 'Tis a receiv'd Tradition in these parts, that the Kings of
Bohemia have no power to promote a stranger to any Bishopric in
Silesia; so that a
Bohemian is no more capable of being advanced to one of their Dioceses then a
Silesian is of being preferr'd to the Archbishopric of
Prague. But how false this report is, Historians will sufficiently inform us.
Boleslaus,Dukedom. surnam'd the
Long (a
Polish Prince) was created the first Duke of
Breslaw and
Lignitz by the Emperor
Frideric in the year 1163. But these kind of petty Princes not being able to secure their Territories (and especially this large and rich City, which was a bait sufficient to tempt the most potent Prince of the neighbourhood) from the incursions of the
Tartars, Polanders, and other foreign Enemies, the Citizens of
Breslaw were forced to put themselves under the protection of the Kings of
Bohemia (or, as they will have it, Emperors of
Germany) to whom they are now immediately subject.
VII. The Town and Dukedom of
LIGNITZ.
LIGNITZ (a fair City on the banks of a small Rivulet call'd
Katsbach) is thought to have its name from the
Lygii,City. a
German people, the ancient inhabitants of this part of
Silesia. About the year of Christ 1170, this Town was much enlarg'd beautified and fortified by
Boleslaus the
Long, the first Duke of
Lignitz. After him Duke
Frideric the second so far improv'd his predecessor
Boleslaus's undertakings, that in the year 1532 it became one of the best fortified Cities, next to
Breslaw, in all
Silesia. Things best worth seeing in the Town are, the Hospital, the Town-Hall and Castle.
The Dukedom of
Lignitz is reckon'd one of the best Corn-Countries in
Silesia;Dukedom. and affords near as great plenty of the
Terra Sigillata as the Dukedom of
Schweidnitz; especially the white sort, which is here more plentiful then in any other Province. The whole is commonly subdivided into seven Circles; whereof four have names from the four Cities of
Luben, Parchwitz, Hayn, and
Goldberg; and the other three are the division of the barren or desert part of the Dukedom.
VIII.
The Ducal Cities of JAWER, SCHWEIDNITZ, BRIEG, MONSTERBERG, and OPPELEN.
THE City of
Jawer is seated in a pleasant Valley;
Jawer. tho not far distant from the rugged Crags and Mountains which separate
Silesia from the Kingdom of
Bohemia. It has not the advantage of any River near it; so that all the fortifications it has are high Rampires and deep Ditches. There is little of note in the Town but the Church, burnt down in the late Civil Wars
A. D. 1648. but rebuilt more stately then before; and the Castle, wherein resides the Lieutenant of the two Dukedoms of
Jawer and
Schweidnitz. The Emperor
Charles IV. King of
Bohemia, married
Ann Daughter of
Henry II. Duke of
Javer; who, with his Brother
Bolco Duke of
Schweidnitz, died without issue; whereupon these two Dukedoms were more immediately subjected to the Kings of
Bohemia, in whose hands they still remain. To the Dukedom of
Javer belong the Towns of
Buntzlau, Lemberg, Schonau, Greiffenberg, Lahn, Fridberg, Lubenthal, Schmideberg, Naumburg upon the
Queiss, Kupfferberg, and
Hirschberg.
2. SCHWEIDNITZ, or
Schweinnitz,Schweidnitz. has its name from the great Herds of wild Swine which were harbour'd in this place, before the Forest was cut down in the year 1070. Whence the Arms of the Town are a wild Boar. It was afterwards much enlarged by
Boleslaus I. who fortified it with Walls and Rampires, and beautified it with several fair buildings; so that 'tis now one of the finest Cities in
Silesia. The most remarkable sight in the Town (next to the Churches and other publick buildings) is the great Gun in the Armory, which carries a Bullet of three hundred and twenty pound weight. This is by
Schickfusius (in his Preface to
Curaeus's Chronicle of
Silesia) very improperly reckon'd amongst the great and extraordinary blessings which the Almighty has been pleased to bestow on some of the Cities in
Silesia. In the Dukedom of
Schweidnitz are the Towns of
Strigau (memorable, as we have already acquainted the Reader, for the
Terra Sigillata found here in great quantities),
Reichenbach, Polckenhahn, Landeshut, Freyberg, Friedberg, Fridland, Zobten, Waldberg, and
Gottesberg.
3.
Brieg. BRIEG, or
Brig, has its name from the
Polish word
Berega; which signifies an exceeding high bank of a River, such as this City is seated on. The streets here are uniform enough; and the houses generally built of stone. St.
Nicholas's Church is an high and stately old Fabrick; beautified with two Towers, and built after the ancient
Franckish mode. This whole City (excepting only some few publick buildings) was laid in ashes by the
Hussites; who overran a great part of
Bohemia and
Silesia in the year 1428. In the Dukedom of
Brieg are reckon'd the Towns of
Strelen, Olau, Nimptsch, Pitschen, Creutzburg, Loben, Michelau, and little
Oelsse. The two Mine-Towns of
Reichenstein and
Silberberg are jointly subject to the Dukes of
Brieg and
Lignitz; who are both of the same Family, and descended from the ancient Hereditary Kings of
Poland.
4.
Monsterberg. MONSTERBERG, or
Munsterberg, (so called from the Monastery built in this place by the Emperor
Henry the first, the Founder of this City) is seated not far from the head of the River
Ola, in a pleasant and fruitful plain. The Town is neither large nor strong; and has nothing in it of note but the School, an old Castle, and a fair Town-Hall. In this Dukedom are the Towns of
Franckenstein and
Warta; to which some Historians and Geographers are pleased to add
Hainrichau, Tepliwoda, and
Kamentz.
5. OPPELEN is seated in a sandy and dry,
Oppelen. but fruitful, Country. 'Tis subject to the King of
Poland; who prevail'd with the Emperor to withdraw all his Forces and Subjects hence in the year 1647. Since which time the Citizens of
Oppelen, and all the Rusticks in the Villages near it, speak the
Polish language. If strong Gates and thick Walls were proof against modern sieges, this Town were sufficiently provided against the assaults of an Enemy; but otherwise its fortifications are very mean and inconsiderable. Among the many Towns and Villages in this Dukedom, the most remarkable are little
Glogaw, Neustat, Kosel, Beudten, Gleibitz, Tost, Strehlitz, Falckenberg, Zultz, Rosenberg, Lublinitz, and
Schurgast.
IX.
The Cities and Dukedoms of GROTKAW, JEGERNDORF, TROPPAU, RATIBOR, and TESCHEN.
CROTKAW is a City of no great
[...] bulk, as its name seems to intimate; but so well seated that 'tis a proverb in this Country,
'Tis as impossible as for a Grotkawer to starve or freeze. The reason of which expression is grounded upon each Burger's having a plentiful share in the adjacent Cornfields and neighbouring Woods. Most of the Houses in the Town are Wood-buildings; only the Church, Bishop's Palace, and the Town-Hall are of stone. The Dukedom of
Grotkaw is subject to the King of
Bohemia, tho sometimes its Lieutenant is a
Polander, and contains in it the Cities of
Neisse (a place of great traffick)
Otmachau, Wansen, Ziegenhals, Freywald, Hozenplotz, Jawernick, Kaltenstein, Patschkau, Oyest, Weidau, and
Zackmantel. The great trade of this Country (especially the Citizens of
Neisse) is in making, and selling to the Merchants of
Bohemia and
Poland, a sort of strong and durable Linnen-Cloth for Beds and Bolsters.
2. JAGERNDORF.
Jagerndorf. Which signifies in the
German language, a Village inhabited by Huntsmen; and had its name probably from the abundance of all manner of Game in the neighbouring Woods. The
Moravians call this Town
Carnowf (whence the Dukedom is ordinarily, by
Latin Authors, nam'd
Ducatus Carnoviensis) and a Citizen of this place
Carnowfsky; from the ancient Arms of the City, which are a pair of Horns between two great Stones. This City (with the small Dukedom which bears its name) was given by
Ludowic King of
Hungary and
Bohemia, to
George Marquise of
Brandenburg; who was at the charges of building the Castle and erecting the other little fortifications that defend the Town.
3. TROPPAU has its name from the River
Oppa, on which 'tis seated.
[...] For it was anciently (as appears from the old Records of the Town) call'd
zu der Oppa; which name was in process of time corrupted into
Troppau; instead whereof some still call it
Opawa, and most
Latin Historians, that treat of these parts, call the Dukedom
Ducatus Oppaviensis. In the year 1405, this
[Page][Page]DUCATUS SILESIAE GROTGANUS cum Districtu Episcopali NISSENSI
To John NichollsEsq of Trewane in Cornwall this Mapp is Humbly Dedicated.
[Page][Page 127]whole City was swallow'd up by a Deluge of waters, occasion'd by a sudden thaw of the Snow on the top of the Mountains. The Citizens have plenty enough of all necessaries, and are especially noted for brewing of good Beer; but they can never hope to grow rich by any manner of Trade. Other chief Towns in this Dukedom are,
Lassau, Oder, Kranowitz, Holdschin, Wagstatt, Kunssberg, Wigstatt, and
Freundenthal,
The inhabitants of these and all other Towns and Villages in the Dukedom observe the same Laws with the
Moravians. For which reason the greatest part of them have often endeavour'd to associate themselves to the Marquisate of
Moravia, and renounce all dependance upon the great Dukedom of
Silesia; but have always been opposed by the Citizens of
Troppau, who have still been zealous to continue members of their ancient Body.
4. RATIBOR is seated in a pleasant plain, about six
German miles from
Oppelen. We have no account of it before the year of Christ 1164; so that most Geographers venture to say, that 'twas built about that time. The private dwelling Houses of the Citizens are, as in most parts of
Silesia, generally wooden buildings; but the Duke's Palace, Cathedral, and some other publick buildings, are of stone. There is still in the City one Popish Monastery; and formerly the Jesuits had a great footing in it, but since the Reformation that sort of Cattel were driven out of their Harbors. The Dukedom of
Ratibor (which contains the Towns of
Oderberg, Sora, Ribenick, Pilzowitz, and
Mieslowitz) was formerly governed by a Duke of its own; but upon the death of Duke
Valentinus (its last Prince, who died without issue in the year 1516) it became more immediately subject to the King of
Bohemia.
5.
[...] TESCHEN, or
Tessin, is one of the oldest Cities in
Silesia; said to have been built by
Cessimir or
Gessimir, Son of
Lescus III. Duke of
Poland, A. D. 810, and from him to have had its first name, which has since been corrupted into
Tessin. It is seated on the confines of
Silesia, Moravia, Poland, and
Hungary; whence it comes to pass, that its Citizens speak a medly of languages, hardly intelligible to any but themselves. They have here great store of all sorts of Venison and wild Fowl; the
Vistula and
Elsa afford them plenty of Fish, and the
Hungarian Merchants bring them in daily vast quantities of Wine, Fruit, and other Commodities of that Country. At one of their Churches they have weekly Divine Service and a Sermon in the
Bohemian language, and at another the like in High
Dutch; for of these two Nations the Burgers chiefly consist. Here is brew'd Beer, of two sorts, the one with Wheat, and the other with ordinary Barly Malt; the latter of these they call
Matznotz; a sort of drink pleasant enough, but mighty strong and heady; which too often, on their Marketdays, makes the poor Rusticks commit several outrages and disorders in the height of their jollity.
In this Dukedom there are several high mountains; whereof two Rows are more especially remarkable, and taken notice of by Geographers and Historians. The first of these are those on the East of the Dukedom, dividing it from the Kingdoms of
Hungary and
Poland; mention'd usually in
Latin writers by the name of
Montes Carpatii; or
Hungarici; but by the Natives of this Country call'd commonly
Jablunka. Amongst these Hills the
Silesians find the chief treasure of their Great Dukedom; having here a great many Mines of Silver and Lead. The Miners that inhabit these parts are call'd by their neighbours
Die Walachen, and are a sort of people much more rough and rustical then the rest of the
Silesians. A vast company of these Bores, in the year 1643, revolted from the Imperialists, and fled to the
Swedish Army, but were not long after reclaim'd. The other row of mountains are on the South, and divide the Dukedom of
Teschen from the Marquisate of
Moravia. These Hills the Natives call
Gesencke; but
Latin Authors make them a part of the
Sudetes, and name them
Montes Moravici. These latter do not afford that plenty of Ore which is found in the former; but are tolerably well stock'd with Minerals and some Metals, and supply what they fall short of the other in this kind with huge flocks of Sheep, which are here pastur'd.
Other Towns of note in the Dukedom of
Teschen are
Bielitz, Freystattlein, Friedick, Jablunke (which has its name from the Eastern row of mountains abovemention'd),
Nistkow, Strummen, Skotschau, and
Schwartzwasser. Some add
Lassla, with whom agrees
J. Scultetus's Map of
Silesia; but this Town ought rather to be referr'd to the Dukedom of
Troppau.
X. The County and City of
GLATZ.
AMongst the
Montes Sudetes lies the County of
Glatz;County. being bounded on the South with
Moravia, on the West with
Bohemia, and on the East and North with the Great Dukedom of
Silesia. For which reason modern Geographers have been at a stand to determine which of the three Nations they should refer it to; some of them making it a part of the Kingdom of
Bohehemia, others esteeming it a petty Province of the Marquisate of
Moravia, and a third sort (who seem to have most probability on their side) call it a
Silesian County. Its ancient inhabitants are thought to have been the
Marsigni; in whose days the City of
Glatz was call'd
Luca. After them the
Hungarians got possession of this and the neighbouring Provinces; and kept it till the Emperor
Henry I. routed them, and hang'd up their chief Commander in one of the Forests of this County. From this great
Hungarian Warriour (whose name is said to have been
Glozar) the City of
Glatz or
Glotz was first named; tho other Etymologists think its ancient name to be
Klotz, which signifies properly the root and trunk of a Tree, but is sometimes taken for a large Forest, or Copse of Shrubs, such as they tell us once grew in the place where
Glatz now stands. The Nobility of this County have a tradition amongst them, that before their Land was conquer'd by
Henry the First, and made Christian, this County was immediately subject to the Emperors of
Germany; by whom 'twas afterwards bestow'd on the Kings of
Bohemia. M. George Aelurius (in his Chronicle of the City and County of
Glatz, printed in the year 1625) says, that 'twas, as his Countrymen affirm, subject at first to the Emperors; but afterwards won and enjoy'd for some time by the Princes of
Poland, from whom the
Bohemians took it, and (as appears from the Records of that Kingdom) were Masters of it in the years 1074 and 1114. After this the Dukes of
Silesia made themselves Lords of the County of
Glatz; which within a while return'd to the Kings of
Bohemia, and then back again to the foresaid Dukes. In this state it
[Page 128]continued till the days of the Emperor
Charles the Fourth; in whose reign it was once more subjected to the King of
Bohemia. And thus it continued till King
George (about the year 1460) bestow'd the Cities of
Glatz, Munsterberg, and
Franckenstein upon his own Sons; who thereupon had the Titles of Dukes of
Munsterberg and Earls of
Glatz conferr'd on them by the Emperor
Frideric IV. In the year 1500, the Dukes of
Munsterberg sold this Country to
Ʋlric Earl of
Hardegg; whose successors, within less then forty years after, sold it again to the Emperor
Ferdinand I. who bestow'd it on the Lords of
Bernstein. From them it descended (
A. D. 1549) upon
Ernest Duke of
Bavaria; after whose death it return'd again to the Kings of
Bohemia, in whose possession it continues to this day.
The Commodities of this Country are Iron, Coal, Silver-Ore, Timber, all sorts of Venison and tame Cattel, Butter, Cheese,
&c. How rich the Country is, may hence easily be gather'd, that not many years ago, the King of
Bohemia's Stewards and Rent-gatherers have been known to bring into their Master's Coffers near forty thousand Ricxdollars yearly out of this one County.
The City of
Glatz is a neat and compact Town,
[...] seated in a pleasant plain on the banks of the
Neisse; but fortified with a strong Castle on the top of a neighbouring Hill, which overlooks and commands the Town. The great Church is said to have been formerly the Temple of an Idol worshipp'd by the ancient inhabitants of these parts; in which as
Aelurius tells us, the young maids of the Country used to nail up their hair against the walls, as was the custom amongst the ancient
Romans; and that, not many years ago, several of these kind of
Tabulae Votivae were still to be seen. The Charter of their City permits their Magistrates to coin money in their own names; but they seldom make use of the priviledg any further then to give abroad a kind of small coin little better then the farthings and half-pence lately currant (by the authority of no better man then an ordinary Grocer or Chandler) in most of our Market-Towns in
England.
Besides
Glatz there are the following nine great Towns in this County,
Havelswerd, Neurode, Winschelburg, Mitselwald, Reinertz, Lewin, Landeck, Beurath, and
Wilhelmsthal or
Neustatl; besides an hundred fair Villages and upwards.
MORAVIA is commonly, in the
Bohemian writers, preferr'd before
Silesia; altho this later be a Dukedom, and the other no more then a Marquisate. The reason of which preeminence must be ascrib'd either to this Marquisate's having been anciently a Kingdom; or else to its being made subject to the Kings of
Bohemia before ever the
Silesians embraced their yoke.
The
Germans call this Country
Mahren, and some of their writers would have it nam'd
Mehrhenland, or
Equarum Regio; imagining the true Etymology of the word to come from the multitude of Horses or Mares bred in this Marquisate. But certainly the word
Moravia (which is undoubtedly of the same offspring with the
German Mahren) is derived from the great River
Mahr, Marck, or
March, which passes thro the midst of the Province, and is in some of the Manuscript Copies of
Pliny's Works nam'd
Morus. Now the word
March, or
Marck, signifies (as we have acquainted the Reader in the description of the Marquisate of
Brandenburg) the utmost bounds or limits of a Country; such as, in all probability, this River was of the ancient
German Nation. Hence the inhabitants of these parts got the name of the
Marcomanni (for so the word ought to be written, with a double n, notwithstanding the
Greek Authors write it
[...]), because they were Borderers.
'Tis bounded on the East with the
Silesian County of
Teschen, and some parts of the Kingdom of
Hungary; on the West with
Bohemia; on the South with the Arch-Dukedom of
Austria; and on the North with the
Silesian Dukedoms of
Grotkau, Troppau, and the County of
Glatz. Its whole length is thought to be about one hundred and ten
English miles; and the bredth of it above fourscore.
The better half of the Country, which lies towards the North and West, is hardly any thing else but a continued Wilderness; consisting of nothing but huge mountains and uninhabitable Woods and Forests. But towards
Austria and
Hungary the case is much alter'd; you may here meet with as fair Fields, and as many Towns and Villages, as in most parts of the
German Empire.
The waters (especially such as are found in several pits up and down the Country) are in many places poysonnous and pestilential.
Waters. Which is thought to proceed from a sort of Tartar (or mixt Mineral, made up chiefly of Lime and Niter) which infects not only the waters that pass thro it, but gives a tincture to the Corn, Vines, Fruit-trees, and all other Vegetables that grow near it. Hence come the Epidemical distempers of this Marquisate; which are reckon'd up by one of its own Poets in the following Verses:
His sunt
Moraviae Capitales Corporis hostes;
Calculus, Arthridis, Colicus dolor, atque Caducus;
His Hypochondriacum quintum annumerare licebit.
But Nature may seem to have made recompense for these inconveniences, in providing (in other parts of the Marquisate) several rich Medicinal Fountains, which bring present relief not only to all persons griev'd with the foremention'd diseases, but readily cure almost all other distempers and maladies incident to man's body. Of these Fountains, and their incomparable vertues there has a very good account been given by
Thomas Jordan (a
Moravian Physitian) in his
Commentarius de Aquis Medicatis Moraviae; printed at
Francfurt in the year 1586. Since which time there has been some other Medicinal Waters and Baths discover'd in
Moravia, and learnedly treated on by
Johannes Ferdinand Herdot (another famous Physitian of that Country) in a Book of his lately publish'd, and entituled
Tartaro-Mastix Moraviae. Other Fountains there are (especially near
Nezdanicz, Zahorawitz, and
Zucholacz; three Villages not far from
Hunnobrod) which have a kind of salt and acid taste; the waters whereof are exceeding pleasant and wholesome.
[Page 130] The two chief Rivers of the Country are:
Rivers. 1.
Moraw, which (as we have said) gives name to the whole Marquisate. It springs in the County of
Glatz, not above a measured
English mile beyond the utmost bounds of
Moravia; within the compass of which
Comenius, in his Map of this Country, has ventur'd to bring it. Upon the banks of this River, which runs thro the very midst of the Marquisate, most of the chief Cities in
Moravia are seated. 2.
Teya; which springs out of two Fountains, the one in
Austria, the other upon the borders of
Bohemia; it receives into its Channel
Igla, Schwarta, and a great many other petty Rivulets, and is at last swallow'd up it self by the
Moraw upon the borders of
Austria. These Rivers afford great store of Trouts, Crevises, Barbels, Eels, Jack, Perch, and many other sorts of fresh Fish.
All the Nations round about
Moravia will witness,
Commodities. that it affords plenty enough, and to spare, of Wheat, Rye, Barley, and all manner of grain. They have store of red and white Wine; which grows as plentifully in some places of this Marquisate as in
Austria. They have good breeds of Horses, Oxen, Sheep, and Goats; but the Land (which some attribute to the extraordinary sharpness of the air) breeds neither Ass, Camel, nor Mule. The Woods abound with all sorts of wild Beasts that bear Furs, as Wolves, Hares, Foxes, Marts, Beavers,
&c. They have one kind of Beast almost peculiar to the
Moravian Forest which they call
Rysowe, and we may
English it a Panther or Leopard. 'Tis about the heighth of an ordinary Cur-dog; but much thicker in the body. Its belly and feet are spotted; and it preys upon Deer and other Beasts of the Forest, whom it catches by a sudden pitching upon them from the top of some rock or tree.
Daubravius,Moravian Myrrh. in the fourth Book of his History of
Bohemia, tells us, there is a strange kind of Frankincense and Myrrh in
Moravia; which grows not here (as in
Arabia) upon Trees; but is dug out of the bowels of the Earth. For my own part I should have been apt to have call'd this Myrrh Mummy, if it answer the description he gives of it. Which, because 'tis something extraordinary and uncouth, I shall give it the Reader in his own words;
Hoc vero, says he,
jam mirabitur aliquis, & est profecto admiratione dignum, inveniri in Moravia, Thus & Myrrham, non ex arbore desudante, ut alibi lectam, sed e solo terrae erutam, uno tantum diu in loco, cui Gradisco nomen; in quo ad hunc diem Thus, non solum id quod masculum vocant a similitudine testium, sed quod alia praeterea virorum mulierumque membra ostentat, effoditur. Nay, for fear this should be thought too strange and incredible a story to be believ'd, he tells us yet further upon his certain knowledg,
Nuper autem Wenceslaus
vetere procerum familia eorum, qui a Quercu cognominantur, clarus, dum in agro suo Sternbergensi
fundamenta aggeri Piscinario moliretur, Corpus hominis integrum invenit, quod nihil nisi Myrrha erat; quam ille per amicos distributam, nostri quoque etiam tum privati memor, nos plus media parte lacerti humani donavit, quo aliquoties pro suffitu usi sumus. This latter account which he gives us of his
Moravian Myrrh, agrees something with the description given by several Botanists of the Mandrake; but the learned
Hertod (whom we mention'd before) in the first part of his
Tartaro-Mastix Moraviae, removes this scruple by telling us,
Sic infans ante annos quadraginta a fossoribus, in fodinis Aluminis prope Czernam Horam, inventus totus Myrrhatus. Hunc fossores Patribus Carthusianis prope Brunam, triginta aliquot taleris vendidisse, & hi postea eundum ad magnam suam Carthusiam in Galliam
remississe, tandemque eodem dono Regem honorasse dicuntur. From all which it apears, that there is something extraordinary in this Myrrh (or call it what else you please) which well merits the view and study of a curious Physiologist. The Country Rusticks believe there is this strange vertue in this Mineral (for so I think I may venture to name it) that it puts to flight all manner of Serpents, and amongst the rest (that old Serpent) the Devil.
Aeneas Sylvius (who for having penn'd so many true stories was at last judg'd fit to sit in St.
Peter's Chair,
[...] of
[...] and become an infallible Pope) calls the
Moravians, Gentem ferocem & rapinarum avidam; ut quae tum iter non nisi armato potentiorique praebeat. And most Travellors brand their barbarous inhumanity, or at least incivility to strangers. The
Hanaks especially (or Bores that live along the banks of the River
Hana) are said to be notoriously guilty of this crime; but these are, by the gentiler sort of
Moravians themselves, contemn'd and scouted as a pack of barbarous and ill bred Lowts. The true character of the
Moravians in general is, that they are men of exemplary obedience and fidelity to their Governors; free and open in conversation, and therefore apter to be deceiv'd then to impose upon; they are not easily provok'd to be angry, but, when once enraged, hardly appeas'd; not guilty of too much wit in discourse, but rational enough; hardy in the Camp, and valiant in fight; faithful observers of their promises and compacts, and abhorrers of baseness and meanness of spirit. They are indeed too apt to give credit to old Prophesies (a folly observ'd in the inhabitants of our own Island), and a little given to drinking and carousing: but are not so superstitious, nor so great drunkards, as they are represented to be, by the satyrical pens of some Geographers.
Their language (I mean that which is ordinarily spoken by the Country-Rusticks;
Lang
[...] for the Nobility and Citizens speak generally High-
Dutch) is a Dialect of
Slavonian and little different from the
Bohemian; of which more anon.
The
Moravians are said to have been first converted to Christianity by St.
Cyril and
Meludius,Relig
[...] assisted by some other pious Doctors and Fathers of the Church. Soon after the Reformation had been set on foot in
Bohemia by
John Huss, a good part of
Moravia began to throw off the Pope's yoke; and to profess the purer and undefiled Religion of the primitive Christians and Apostles. But
John de Praga (at that time Bishop of
Olmitz, and afterwards Cardinal of the Church of
Rome) so vigorously oppos'd the endeavours of all that labour'd to carry on the Reformation in this Marquisate, that during his time it never got any deep rooting. Afterwards (during the Reigns of
George, Ʋladislaus, and
Ludowic Kings of
Bohemia) Popish Idolatry and Superstition was wholly extirpated; and the Reform'd Religion unanimously profess'd in all the Cities and great Towns of
Moravia. But (to see the unhappy consequents of Toleration and Liberty of Conscience!) as soon as the Synod at
S. Brinn (which met in the year 1608, to settle the affairs of Religion) had made this Edict,
Ʋt liceret omnibus credere, prout cuique Deus dat cognoscere, i.e.
That every man should have power and license to regulate his Faith according to the measure of knowledg which God had given him; each Cobler set up for a Preacher of the Word, and an Expounder of Scriptures. Whereupon, the Church was immediately confounded, and broken into an irreconcilable medly and hotchpotch of Sects and Schismaticks,
Hussites, Picards, Anabaptists, Arrians, Flaccians, Trinitarians, Photinians, Lutherans, Calvinists,
[Page 131]Dulcians, Lugentians, &c. So that no less then fourteen several Conventicles had assembled themselves in one City; each of them asserting peculiar Doctrines and Tenets of their own, and denying all manner of Communion (in Church-Ordinances) with the other thirteen. Now what could be expected from this Anarchy in the Reformation, but the reestablishment of Popery? which accordingly hapned. For (soon after
Frideric the King of
Bohemia's Forces were overthrown by the Emperor
Ferdinand II. at
Prague in the year 1620)
Francis, Cardinal of
Districhstein and Bishop of
Olmitz, found it a very easie matter to root out the divided and mutinous members of the Reform'd Church, and to replant his own Doctrines and Church-Discipline. After which some scatter'd parcels of the Reformed party lay skulking amongst the Rocks and Mountains on the borders of
Silesia, for some years; but durst never appear in publick, and within a while after dwindled into nothing.
The Kings of
Moravia (for 'twas anciently a Kingdom) were once the greatest Potentates in this part of
Europe; having for some time under their subjection the Kingdoms of
Bohemia and
Poland. About the year of Christ 700,
Zuantacop King of
Moravia (being at the same time Lord of the Dukedoms of
Bohemia, Poland, and
Silesia) refused to pay Tribute or Homage to the Emperor of
Rome; who falling in upon his Country, to demand satisfaction for this insolence, was forced to make a dishonourable retreat. But, resolving not to endure this disgrace, he rallies up his scatter'd forces, and calls in to his assistance the
Hungarians; an infidel people, who before that time were aw'd by the
Moravians, and kept from committing any outrages upon the Christian-Countries. By the help of these Heathens the Emperor routed
Zuantacop's Army; forcing him to fly for shelter into the neighbouring Woods; where he associated himself to an Hermite, with whom he spent the residue of his days. By this means
Bohemia, Moravia, and
Silesia, came to be disunited and parcell'd into four different Dukedoms; which were reckon'd so many Provinces of the
Roman or
German Empire. Some ages after, the Dukedom of
Moravia degenerated into a Marquisate; which name it still retains, altho a great part of it be at this day immediately fubject to the Crown of
Bohemia, and the rest broken into a few petty Baronies and Lordships.
The chief Cities and great Towns in
MORAVIA.
OLMITZ, [...] or
Olomutium, (which
Ortelius, with whom agree
Stephanus and
Bertius, fancies to be the same place with
Ptolomy's
Eburum) is the Metropolis of
Moravia; and the only Bishop's See in the Marquisate. 'Tis not very large, but neatly and well built; and seated in a convenient place (on the banks of the River
Morawa) to maintain a Trade with the Merchants of
Bohemia, Hungary, Poland, Silesia, and
Austria. The Antiquaries of this Country are of opinion, that
Olmitz, or
Olmutz, is nothing but a corruption of
Juliomontium; and thence conclude, that the Town was first built (and so it was, as sure as either the Tower at
London or Castle at
Leyden) by
Julius Cesar. But how then came it to be call'd
Velgrad (as
Boregius proves 'twas) when King
Suatopluck built himself a Palace here: St.
Cyril (the great Apostle of this Country, who liv'd about the year 880) was the first Bishop of this Diocess. He was the Author (as
Aventinus affirms) of the old
Wendish or
Crcation Alphabet; made use of in writing out the Bible, by him translated into his own mother-tongue. What became of this Translation I know not; except (as some late Antiquaries have ventur'd to say) the ancient
Moscovian Bible, printed in the year 1581, be a Transcript of it. In the year 1346, the Bishopric of
Olmutz was remov'd from under the jurisdiction of the Elector of
Mentz, and subjected to the new Archbishop of
Prague; tho some of the late Bishops of
Olmutz have denied to pay homage to any Prelate under the Pope.
2. BRINN, call'd in the
Bohemian language
Brno, and by
Latin writers
Bruna;Brinn. is the second City in
Moravia; and a Town of so great repute, that it seems to share with
Olmitz in the Title of Metropolis; since in these two Cities, by turns, the chief Courts of Judicature or Assizes for the whole Marquisate are held. 'Tis seated at the confluence of two small Rivers,
Schwarta and
Zwitta; and defended by the
Spilberg, a strong Castle on the top of the adjoining Hill. The
Moravian Philosophers make a great noise with the
Ʋnicornu Minerale, which (amongst the other
fossilia of their Country) is said to be found near this City. Of which
Osv. Grollius (in his book entituled
de Signaturis) gives this account;
Ʋnicornu Minerale nobis quoque Deus largitus est; in Moravia
tribus milliaribus Bruna
(ubi eram ante Medicus) non longe a territorio Abbatis Zabrdovicensis,
sub altissima rupe duorum inusitatae magnitudinis animalium incognitorum ossa, una cum duobus junioribus efossa sunt, quae absque dubio tempore Diluvii aquarum impetu perierunt in illa solitudine, &c. Another Author of the same Tribe (
Anselm Boetius de Boodt, Physitian to the Emperor
Rudolf II.) gives a far different account of it;
Cornu fossile, says he,
prope Brunam Moraviae
urbem inventum, ita exacte figuram trunci Juglandis intrinsecus & extrinsecus refert, ut nemo nisi Caecus negare possit, truncum illius Arboris fuisse, ac in Terra transmutationem accepisse. Hertod (in his ingenious Book beforementioned) says, there have been several fragments of this Mineral found in the Quarries near
Niclsburg; one whereof exactly resembled a man's thigh. I know not what more to make of all these relations, then that there are now and then in the fields near
Brinn found several rare petrifications (for that I think is as fit a name for them as
Ʋnicornu fossile) representing the parts of certain Animals and Plants. Which is no greater miracle then may be daily met with in the fields here about
Oxford; as may be seen at large in the learn'd account given of such Rarities in the fifth Chapter of the Natural History of this County.
3. IGLAW, call'd by the
Bohemians Gihlawa,Iglaw. seated on the borders of
Bohemia, upon a River of the same name, is said to have been built in the year 799, and to have had its name from an Urchin or Hedghog (which in the
German language is call'd
Igle, but by the
Moravians Gehlak); because that upon the laying the first foundation of this City, a great company of these kind of Creatures were found amongst the shrubs and thickets which grew in this place. The Town is large, well built, and strongly fortified. 'Tis a great thorow-fair, frequented by multitudes of Travellers that pass this way out of
Bohemia towards
Hungary. And for this reason the Citizens (as being daily accustom'd to converse with strangers) are more obliging in their carriage
[Page 132]then the rest of their Country-men. In the
Hussites-wars this City stedfastly opposed the introducing of the Reform'd Religion, and (with a great deal of resolute obstinacy and malepert zeal) maintain'd the superstitious Discipline of the Church of
Rome; but as soon as
Luther's Doctrine began to peep abroad in the world, the heat was over with them; and the Citizens of
Iglaw (of all the Cities of
Moravia, subject to the Kings of
Bohemia) were the first who embraced the
Augsburg Confession, and turn'd Rebels, as themselves before had term'd other Protestants,
to the Pope's Interest. In the late Civil wars of
Germany (immediately after the Imperial Forces were routed at
Jankow, in the year 1645) this Town was given up into the hands of the then triumphant
Swedes; who, to make the City more tenable, burnt down the large Suburbs on every side; and having so done, defended the Town with so much gallantry and manhood, that all the forces the Emperor could bring against it were beaten off for a twelve-month after. The Jesuits College, with the
Gymnasium annex'd (founded by
Adolph Michael Earl of
Altham) is a great ornament to the Town; and the two Monasteries, of
Dominicans and
Franciscans, are well worth the seeing. The chief trade of the Town (besides the entertainment of passengers, which brings in the greatest part of their riches) is in selling Beer, and a sort of course woollen Cloth, which is made and dress'd after their fashion.
4.
Znaim. ZNAIM, in the
Bohemian language
Znoymo, and in
Latin writers
Znogma; stands on the
Teya, in a pleasant soil and wholesom air. The learned
Cluverius is of opinion, that this place is the same with
Ptolomy's
Medoslanium. But I do not find, that his Latitude will agree at all to
Znaim, tho his Longitude comes near it. The Annals of
Moravia tell us, this City was first built in the place where it now stands by
Primislaus Ottacar about the year 1222, having before that time lain buried in its ashes from the year 1145, when
Ʋladislaus King of
Bohemia, upon a provocation given him by his Kinsman
Cunrad Marquise of
Moravia, wholly destroy'd it and its inhabitants with fire and sword. The Town is defended by a Castle sufficiently fortified both by Nature and Art; but in great danger of being damag'd in time of siege, from the top of the
Peldtenberg, an adjacent mountain, which overlooks it, and stands within Canon-shot of it. It lies upon the coasts of
Austria; and therefore is sure to be the first place attack'd by the Imperial forces in case of any rebellious uproar in either
Bohemia or
Moravia, as it has often already found by woful experience. There are a great many Vineyards round the City, which yeild commonly good store of an indifferently palatable Wine; but the chief income of the Citizens arises from the harbouring of passengers which travel this road betwixt
Vienna and
Prague.
5.
Cremsir. CREMSIR, or
Kremsier, call'd by the
Bohemians Kromeritz, seated on the River
Morawa, about the middle way betwixt
Olmitz and
Hradisch, was not many ages ago a poor Village; but is now become one of the fairest Cities in
Moravia. The occasion of which alteration was this;
John Bishop of
Olmitz bought the Lordship of this Village for himself and his successors, of
Otto Marquise of
Moravia. After his death,
Bruno Bishop of the same Diocess, observing the convenient and pleasant situation of the place, built in it a fair Palace (call'd to this day from its first Founder's name
Brunsberg); which drawing together some considerable numbers of people, obliged him soon after to wall the place round, and turn it into a City.
6. EWANCZITZ,
[...] seated at the confluence of the two Rivers
Iglaw and
Oslaw; both which here lose their names, and are afterwards call'd
Schwartza. This City was once notorious for harbouring more different Sects in Religion then almost any other Town in
Europe. The Parish Church was divided by the two prevailing parties of
Hussites and
Lutherans; both of which had here the exercise of their inconsistent forms of Divine Worship at the same time. One of their streets was wholly inhabited by
Jews; who had erected in it a Synagogue and School for themselves and children. Without the Gates of the City the
Calvinists had two Churches; the one for the
Bohemians, the other for the
Germans; and these shar'd with the
Hussites and
Lutherans in the Magistracy and Government of the City. Another part of the Suburbs was taken up by the Holy Brethren of
Switzerland; a pack of nominal Christians, who never were baptized, thought it a damnable sin to wear a Sword, and celebrated the Lord's Supper only at Whitsuntide. The
Photinians, Atheists, and Quakers (for such kind of creatures I take the
Schwenckfelder to have been, who denied the resurrection of the dead) met at their devotions on the banks of a Fountain in the field. At a small Village, nam'd
Olekowitz, about half an
English mile out of the Town, dwelt the Anabaptists, who were about four hundred in number. But this ridiculous toleration and distraction in Religion came to this issue at last; that now all those various parties of people, who all of them pretended to be true Protestants, are cashier'd, and none permitted the free exercise of their Religion but Jews and Papists.
To these we might add a great many more Cities, if (what
Caspar Laudisman, in his Directions for the speedy understanding of foreign Languages, affirms) it be true, that there are in this Marquisate 100 Cities, 410 Towns, 500 Castles, and 30360 Villages. Which prodigious number of buildings would go near to cover almost all the habitable part of this Country. But I think there are few more then we have already mention'd, which deserve to be taken notice of any further then to give them room for their names in the Map.
BOHEMIA is bounded on the East with
Moravia and
Silesia; on the West with
Voitland, the Upper Palatinate, and the Dukedom of
Bavaria; on the South with the Arch-Dukedom of
Austria; and on the North with the Marquisates of
Misnia and
Lusatia. Whence the learned
Godalstus (in that excellent Treatise of his entituled
Commentarii de Bohemiae Regni, incorporatarumque Provinciarum Juribus ac Privilegiis, &c.) well argues, that this Kingdom must needs have been anciently a branch of the
German Nation (and ought still to be so accounted) since all the people that encompass it speak the High-
Dutch language.
The whole Kingdom is encompass'd round with Mountains; the chief of which are the
Montes Riphaei, or Hills of Giants, which part this Land from
Silesia. Out of these spring the great River
Elb; issuing out of two of them, famous heretofore for the enchantments and apparitions of evil Spirits that used to haunt them. One of these two is now adays named by the
Silesian Germans that live near it
Schneekippe, from the continual Snow on the top of it; and the other
Knieholtz, from the short shrubs or brush wood that grows there.
The other Rivers of note are, the
Eger, Muldau, Satzawa, Orliecze, Lusinitz, Gyzera, and
Mise; all which spring within the Kingdom, and are at last emptied into the
Elb at
Dietzin. Most of these run in a clear Channel; and afford great plenty of fish. In some of them the Natives find a sort of shell-fish (much like a Horse-Muscle) with a Pearl in it of good value; such as those are which Mr.
Cambden tells us, ly gaping at the mouth of the River
Irt in
Cumberland.
In several parts of
Bohemia (especially at
Teplitz and
Wary, both which have their names from the hot Baths there found) spring Mineral and Medicinal waters; which exceedingly refresh the body, and cure many distempers. The acid waters at
Oegran and
Comorzan are accounted mighty soveraign against many diseases; and there was, not many years ago, a Fountain of as great credit at
Stechowicz near
Prague. The like is still to be met with at
Benessow near
Caplicze; which, for the cures it has perform'd, has got the name of
Dobra Woda, or good water.
There are no Lakes in the Kingdom;
Ponds. excepting only one or two near the Towns of
Mosta and
Tepla, of little or no moment. But the Fish-ponds in many places seem to equal the Lakes in foreign Countries. Witness those petty fresh water Seas at
Pardubicz, Clumecz, Trzebon, Rozdialowicz, and
Copydlan; where the Ponds (abounding with Perch, Jack, Carp, and other fish) bring their Masters in as large Revenues as so many good Lordships.
The Soil of the Country is generally fat and arable; in few places barren or sandy.
Commodities. You have here also fine Woods and Forests intermix'd; but none so large as to render any considerable part of the Kingdom uninhabitable. The Orchards and Gardens are so well stock'd with fruit, that yearly great quantities of Apples, Pears,
&c. are hence exported into
Misnia and other neighbouring Countries. The inhabitants have Wine enough (if the luxury of the present age did not want greater supplies then nature) in their own Vineyards; which is reckon'd a better bodied liquor then
Moravian Wine, and equals the
Austrian in taste, but is not capable of being kept to so good an age.
The Fields and Meadows are richly stock'd with all manner of Cattel; especially Horses of more then ordinary courage and bulk. Their Hopgardens afford them a better and more plentiful crop then is usual in other Countries. For which reason their Beer (whereof they have two sorts, white and brown) is highly valued, and exported into the neighbouring parts of
Germany.
There have been some Salt-pits discover'd in
Bohemia; but so inconsiderable, that they found the profit would not answer the cost of digging. And therefore the
Bohemians have their Salt out of
Misnia, and other Provinces of
Germany. But this want is sufficiently recompens'd by their
[Page 134]rich Mines of Silver, Copper, Tin, Iron, Lead, Sulphur, Niter,
&c. as also by their Glass and Allum, made here in great quantities.
They pretend to have Carbuncles, Ametheists, and other precious stones in their Land; which they say are often found in the Mines and amongst the Rocks of the Hill Countries.
Anselm Boetius Boodt (whom we had occasion to mention in the description of
Moravia) has written a particular Treatise entituled
Historia Lapidum & Gemmarum Bohemiae; to which we refer the Reader for a further account of these Rarities. Jaspers and Saphires, they tell us, are found near the source of the
Elb; in the mountains before mention'd, call'd by the
Bohemians Krakonosse.
Goldastus thinks the
Hermiones were the ancient inhabitants of this Country;
Ancient Inhabitants. a branch whereof he makes the
Hermunduri, who at first dwelt among the
Riphaean mountains, but afterwards descended lower. These people were driven out of the Land by the
Boii, who made an inroad into this Country under the command of their General
Sigovesus, Nephew to
Ambigatus an ancient King of the
Celts. Micraelius, a learned
Pomeranish Historiographer, believes these men were not a branch of the
Galli Senones (as most modern Antiquaries imagine); but rather of the
Semnones, the old inhabitants of
Pomeren. This people, whensoever they came, having about the year 600, setled themselves in these parts, extirpated the Nation of the
Hermiones so far as to call the Land (after their own names)
Boien heimat, or the dwelling-place of the
Boii; which was in time corrupted into the modern
German name
Boheim or
Boheimb. About the birth of our Saviour the
Marcomanni, or ancient
Moravians, rush'd in upon the
Boii; and so far overpower'd them as to make them quit their quarters, and seek out a new habitation; which they nam'd
Boioaria, and is now call'd
Bavaria. However, they were not so totally routed but that a great many of them kept their old station, and mix'd themselves with their Conquerors; as no question vast numbers of the
Hermiones and
Hermunduri had done with them before.
The modern
Bohemians call their Country
Czechowe, and themselves
Czechowsky; and these words the
Hungarians and new
Greeks make use of, being utter strangers to the
German names of
Boheimb and
Bohmische. Those amongst them that do allow of this latter name, derive it from
Boy, signifying in their language War; or
Buch, that is, God; and
Muz, i. e. Man. Intimating that they are a valiant and pious people. See the like fancy in the derivations of the words
Teutcsch and
German, p. 5, and 6.
Answerable to this Etymology of their name are the manners of the present inhabitants of this Kingdom,
Manners. if we may give credit to their own Historians, and some late Travellers who have for some time convers'd with them, and had the opportunity of observing their humours. They are represented to be men of great Hospitality and Courage; faithful observers of their promises and contracts. They are exceedingly given to ape the manners and fashions of Foreigners; according to the true character long since given of them:
Eosdem habet cum simia
Mores ferox
Bohemia.
Quae facta viderit facit,
Cultusque priscos abjicit.
And therefore 'twas an ingenuous fancy of the Painter, who having drawn the inhabitants of most Countries in
Europe, in their proper Habits, pictur'd a
Bohemian naked, with a web of Cloth at his feet, and all other requisites for the making up of a Suit. Intimating, that he could not tell what certain fashion to make his Clothes on; but left it to himself to make them after the next new mode he should fancy.
That small handful of men that
Zechus the
Slavonian Commander brought into
Bohemia, [...] some time (for Authors cannot agree upon the year nor age) in the fourth, fifth, or sixth Century (from whom the modern
Bohemians love to derive their pedigree) were a company of poor and honest people; folk that had nothing themselves, and wanted the knavery to rob those that had. Now as long as they continued in this state of innocence, they had no need of Magistrates nor Laws; but liv'd (
[...]) in a sociable community, and had their little All equally distributed among them. In this condition they remain'd for some years after
Zechus's death; till the
Moravians and
Pannonians disturbed their quiet, and taught them the first rudiments of Villany. As soon as they were once initiated in wickedness, they were forc'd to take new measures; and to think of constituting some chief Magistrate to punish offenders. Whereupon they pitch'd upon one
Crocus (an old Gentleman of a something longer head, as 'twas fancied, then the rest of his neighbours) to be their Governor. They had not yet any written Laws amongst them; but their Judg (for so
Crocus and some of his Successors are stiled by the
Bohemian writers) was to determine all controversies by the known Customs of the Land. In extraordinary cases, which would not easily be decided by this sort of Common Law, there sat on the Bench with the Judg (for fear of arbitrary and illegal proceedings, if one man should be invested with the sole power of pronouncing sentence) a certain number of Senators, or Aldermen, who had definitive Votes as well as himself.
With this kind of Pretorian Authority (
[...]) Justice was administred by
Crocus his Son of the same name, and his Grand-daughter
Libussa; until
Primislaus, whom
Libussa had married, took upon him a more absolute command, and got the Title of Duke, or Commander in chief. This man was (as
Florus says of
Lucins Quinctius)
Dictator ab arato, a poor Country-Farmer, whom
Libussa advanced out of the dirt to her own bed; and therefore (like the foremention'd
Roman General) knew better how to keep the headstrong
Bohemians, like so many Oxen, under the yoke.
Thus was the Land govern'd by the children and successors of
Primislaus and
Libussa about four hundred and fifty years; until the Emperor
Henry IV. having call'd a General Diet of the Estates of the Empire at
Mentz, created
Wratislaus Duke of
Bohemia King of the same Nation; by settling (with the Pope's permission) a Crown of Gold upon his head. This was done in the year 1082, tho some will have it 1072.
From that time forward the Emperors of
Germany always lay claim to the Right of Investing the Kings of
Bohemia, as their Vassals; and made it their business to perswade the poor people of that Kingdom to rebel against any Monarch (tho never so duly Elected into the Throne) who had not receiv'd the
Regalia, as they call them, or Badges of Majesty at the Emperor's hands. So that
Frideric V. (Grandfather to the present Elector Palatine of the
Rhine, and Father to our Prince
Rupert) was never like quietly to enjoy the Crown of
Bohemia, however just his pretensions to it might be, so long as the Emperor
[Page 135]Ferdinand, his Competitor, refus'd to confirm him.
Most of the Catalogues of the Kings of
Bohemia are so contradictory one to another;
[...] that 'twill be a difficult task to pick out of them a true Register of the names of these Princes. The best account, I know of, which has been given of them, is the ingenious
Paul Stransky's, in his
Respublica Bojema, printed at
Leyden 1643. The present King is
Leopold I. Emperor of
Germany; whose character must be reserv'd for another place.
The Heathen
Slavonians, [...] at their first coming into this Country, brought with them a great many Idol Gods; whom they worshipp'd as the only Protectors and Saviours of their Nation.
The chief of these they call
Pron or
Peron; which, in their language, signifies the same thing as
[...], or
Jupiter Intonans. This was their God of Gods,
Divum Pater atque Hominum Rex; and worshipp'd with the same reverence as
Thor amongst the ancient
Saxons. But this God was at last, for some misdemeanour or other, thrown out of favour; and the honour conferr'd on
Swanto-Wit, an Idol whose Temple stood at
Julinum (or
Wollin) in
Pomeren, in those days the largest City in
Europe. Some small remembrances of this God they retain to this day; it being usual for friends, shaking hands, to use this mutual compellation
Witeg, Witeg, or
Witam te; in which they still seem to own the Idol
Wit for their God. Christianity began first to be profess'd in the Kingdom about the year 894, in which, 'tis said, Duke
Borsivogius was baptiz'd by
Methodius the Saint of
Bohemia. This
Methodius was a Prelate of the
Greek Church; so that the Clergy of
Bohemia did not for some ages acknowledge the Bishop of
Rome's Supremacy. The Reformation was first begun here upon this occasion: A young Gentleman of this Country travelling into
England, and visiting our Universities, had (here at
Oxford) the opportunity of transcribing several Tracts written by our
Brittish Authors. Amongst other things he chanc'd to light upon some of
John Wicliff's works; Copies of which he carried home with him, and shew'd to
Jahn Huss and
Jerome of
Prague. Upon the reading of these Books, those two great men began immediately to reform Errors in the Church; which good work they prosecuted with great vigor and zeal, till they were summon'd to the Council of
Constance, and there (contrary to the promises and protestations of the Popish Prelates then assembled) condemn'd for Hereticks, and burnt in the year 1415. But so firmly were their Doctrines rooted in most of the hearts of their hearers, that 'twas impossible for the Church of
Rome, by this expedient, to hinder the progress of the Reformation, which soon after was more firmly establish'd by the industry of
Luther, Melancthon, Calvin, &c. It had been well if (after the fopperies of
Rome were thus abolish'd) the
Bohemians had contented themselves with the free exercise of their Religion, granted them by their Kings. But growing infolent as their number encreas'd, they began first to mutiny against the Emperors Ministers of State in that Kingdom; and afterward, in the reign of the Emperor
Matthias, fell into an open rebellion. This prov'd at last the ruine of the Reform'd Religion; which is now nowhere profess'd but in some by-corners and holes of the Kingdom. So unprosperous a thing is Rebellion for the sake of Religion.
The
Bohemian Language (as well as the
Russian, Polonian, Croatian, and
Wendish) is a dialect of the ancient
Slavonian. A Tongue so copious and sweet, that the old Lawgivers of this Country (as appears from several of their Municipal Laws) were zealous in commanding the true and primitive pronunciation and orthography of it to be kept up. But this unhappiness attended the endeavours of these well-wishers to their Country, that they had not the use of any Letters but the
Ruthenian character; an Alphabet exceedingly imperfect, and wholly unfit for the polishing of a Language. Afterwards, when the Princes of
Bohemia began to maintain a correspondence with their neighbours in
Germany, the
Roman Letters were brought in; and by this means their Tongue was refin'd with better success. However, the modern
Bohemians are as negligent in this particular as their Ancestors were careful. Nay, most men of fashion in the Kingdom look upon't as scandalous to speak their own mother-tongue in its purity; and therefore talk ordinarily either the
German Language entire, or else the
Bohemian mixt and mangled with a great many outlandish words and bombast.
The Chief Cities in the Kingdom of
BOHEMIA.
PRAGUE is the Merropolis of this Kingdom;
Prague. seated in a pleasant place on the great River
Moldau. What name it had before the
Bohemians came into this Country is not to be learnt out of any of their Records. But they, it seems, call'd it
Boioheim, or the chief Residence of the
Bohemian Princes. Its modern name was given it long after, upon the coming in of the
Slavonians with
Zechus. Boregius gives this blind account of the original of this name: Some of the
Slavonians coming to this Town, and finding them busie in building, enquired of one of the workmen (who as it chanc'd was making a threshold, which in his language was call'd
Prah) what they were a making, receiv'd answer
Prah; as the Town was afterwards nam'd. 'Tis divided into three parts, the Old, New, and Little City; which latter is separated from the two former by the
Moldau. This great City is compared by
Aeneas Sylvius to
Florence in
Italy; and our Countryman Dr.
Brown (who has seen both, and is curious enough in his observations) tells us, that this is much larger and more populous then
Florence; that the River
Arno, which runs thro
Florence, is not comparable to the
Moldau at
Prague. But then, he tells us, the paving of the streets at
Florence, the Cathedral, St.
Laurence's Chappel, and the Duke's Palace outstrip any thing that
Prague can boast of. Because the three partitions of the Town, before mention'd, are distinct Corporations, we shall describe them separately; beginning with
1. The Old Town; which lies on the Eastern banks of the River
Moldau; is very populous and full of fair Houses, built after an old fashion. In this part of the Town stands the University; which has nothing stately in it but the Jesuits College. The Historians of
Bohemia report strange things of the vast numbers of Scholars which have been resident at once in this University.
Lewis du May, Counsellor to the Duke of
Wirtenberg (in his incomparable Dialogue concerning the State of the
German Empire) says, there are hardly at this day so many Students to be found in all
Germany as were here in the year 1409, when
J. Huss himself is said to have had forty thousand Scholars. 'Twas founded by the Emperor
Charles IV.
[Page 136]and is still the only University in
Bohemia. 'Twill be worth observation to take notice, that (as is reported) no Fly will touch any flesh exposed to sale in the Shambles here, let the weather be ne're so hot. The
Jews inhabit a good share of this old Town; which from them is called
Die Juden-Statt, or the City of the
Jews. They are very rich; trading in all manner of Commodities; but especially in Jewels, and several sorts of precious stones found in the Mines of
Bohemia.
2. The New Town was formerly separated from the Old by a Wall or Ditch; but now there is nothing that parts them but a Trench, into which they can let in the
Moldau at pleasure. In this part are to be seen the ruins of the ancient Palace of the Dukes and Kings of
Bohemia. There is still standing a great part of the walls round this Palace; the cement whereof is so good, that hardly any Engine can be invented which will pull them down. The Jesuits of late years have built here a new College for themselves, which goes beyond the other they had before in the Old Town.
3. The Little Town, or
Kleine Seiten (as they sometimes call it) lies on the West side of the
Muldau, over which you pass by a stately Stonebridg of sixteen Arches. In this place stands
Winceslaus's Palace; wherein the Emperor, when he comes to
Prague, keeps his Court. Some have ventur'd to affirm, that as good High-
Dutch is spoken in this Palace, and by the neighbouring Burgers, as in any City of
Germany. But he that shall curiously and critically enquire into the truth of this assertion, will find, that the Language here spoken, falls as far short of the pure
Misnian Dialect, as this Palace does of the Elector's Court at
Dresden. Not far from hence is the Cathedral of this Archbishopric, dedicated to St.
Vite; from the top of which you have the best prospect of the City of
Prague.
At
Weissenberg, or the white Hill, near
Prague, was fought the fatal battel between the Duke of
Bavaria and Count
Bucquoy, Lieutenant of the Emperor
Ferdinand the Second's Forces, and
Frideric Count Palatine of the
Rhine, and elected King of
Bohemia; in which the new King was conquer'd, his Forces totally routed, his Ordnance seized on, and himself and his Queen (our King
Charles the Martyr's Sister) forced to fly into
Silesia. Prague was forced to resign it self up immediately into the hands of the Emperor; who soon after rooted out all maintainers of the Protestant Religion throughout the Kingdom. Some Historians have taken notice, that of the Gospel appointed to be read on the day whereon was fought this Battel (which was the twenty-third Sunday after
Trinity, A. D. 1620) this Text,
Render to Cesar the things that are Cesars, is a part. Which is as observable as the Church of
England's appointing the 27th Chapter of
Matthew to be read the second Lesson on the thirtieth of
January; whereon our late King suffer'd Martyrdom.
II. EGRA,
Egra
[...] a great City on the borders of the Palatinate, is call'd by the
Bohemians Chebbe; but by the
Germans that inhabit it,
Egra, from the River upon which 'tis seated. It was made an Imperial City by the Emperor
Frideric I. in the year 1179, in remembrance of the fidelity of the Burgers to that Emperor in opposing
Henry Duke of
Bavaria, who had overrun the greatest part of this Country. It is walld with a double, sometimes with a tripple, wall; and defended by an almost impregnable Castle. The Market-place is surrounded with very fair buildings; and some of their Churches make a good show.
Bertius and
Ens speak of strange cures perform'd by the waters issuing out of a Fountain in the Suburbs of this City. The Well they mention is not in the Suburbs; but about two
English miles from the Town. Its waters are something salt and brinish; but very cool and clear. They are said to cure all infirmities in the Eyes, Ears, or other parts of the head; and many other cures are wrought by their purging and cleansing the body.
Jac. Theodorus Tabernaemontanus gives us an account of some strange feats wrought by them in his Book entituled
Wasser-Schatz, printed at
Frantfurt A. D. 1584. And
Paul Macasius publish'd a whole Treatise about the nature and vertues of these
Egrish waters, in the year 1616. Some Antiquaries pretend to prove, that the old name of this City was
Sourstad; from these bitter waters. But we can expect no great faithfulness in the account of its Antiquities; since the City, with all its Records, perish'd in the flames
A. D. 1270.
Other Cities of note are: 1.
Budweiss, a fair and large Town, not far from the borders of
Austria. 2.
Kuttenberg; a Mine-Town on the
Elb. Elnbogen; a strong Town on the borders of
Misnia, call'd usually the
Bohemian Key to the
German Empire. 4.
Thabor, in the way betwixt
Prague and
Budweiss; whence the
Picarts got the name of
Thaborites. Leimiritz, Augst, Bern, Bruck, Gretz, Maut, Hoff, Jaromir, Pilsen, &c. are no better then ordinary Market-Towns.
FRANCONIAE Nova Descriptio.Sumptibus Jansonio-Waesbergiorum, Mosis Pitt et Stephani Swart.
Reverendissim
o & Illustrission Principi ac Domino Dnō FRANCISCO, Episcopo Bambergensi & Wirceburgensi, Franciae Orientalis Duci, Domino suo clementissimo, humillime offert Nicolaus Rittershusius U. I. D.
FRANCONIA is the chief of the Ten great Circles or Districts into which the
German Empire is usually divided. This District sends to the Diets the Bishops of
Wurtsburg, Eichstadt, and
Bamberg; the Counts of
Henneberg, Wertheim, &c. with several other Princes Spiritual and Temporal; besides the Deputies of the Imperial Cities of
Noremberg, Rottenburg, Winsheim, and
Schwinfurt. 'Tis bounded on the South with
Schwaben and
Bavaria; on the West with the
Rhine and the Lower Palatinate; on the North with the Landgraviate of
Thuringen; and on the East with the Kingdom of
Bohemia.
The Country has undoubtedly its name from the
Franks, its ancient inhabitants; whom some Historians make a remnant of the old
Trojans, who at first (being expell'd their own Country by the
Grecians) seated themselves upon the Seashore near the mouth of the
Danubius. These
Sicambri (for so they were then call'd) being beaten from their hold by the
Goths, were forc'd to seek out new habitations; and at last (about 430 years before Christ) fix'd themselves, under the command of their General
Marcomir, on the banks of the
Rhine in
Westphalia, Frisland, and
Gelderland; all which Countries were afterwards compris'd under the General name of
Sicambria. About four hundred years after, they named themselves
Franci, after the name of their great Commander
Francus; who led them beyond the
Rhine, and subdued for them the greatest part of
Gallia, which they nam'd
Franckric (the
Germans call it still
Franckreich) or the Kingdom of the
Franks. Others say, that the
Franks were not one particular people; but that the
Ʋbii, Mattiaci, Juhones, Sicambri, Tencteri, Ʋsipetes, Marsi, Marsaci, Tubantes, Bructeri, Chamavi, Angrivarii, Dulgibini, Chassuarii, Ansibarii, Frisii, Chanci, Cherusci, Gambrivii, and some other branches of the
German Nation united themselves into one Body by a solemn League and Covenant, as the only means to secure themselves against the growing power of the
Roman Emperors. Having thus link'd themselves together, they took (as the
Almans had done before them) one common name; calling themselves
Francken, which in their language signified (as
Freyen in the modern High
Dutch) a free people; as we find in our ancient Law-books
Francisia for freedom,
Franciscare to set at liberty, and
Franchises is a word still commonly used for liberties. About three hundred and sixteen years after Christ, there was great contest between the
Thuringians and
Schwabes; which the former thought to put an end to, by calling in the King of the
Francks to their assistance, and desiring him to plant a Colony of his Soldiers betwixt them and their enemies. These proposals
Clodomir, then King of
France readily assented to; and immediately dispatch'd his Brother
Genebald with a great Army to take possession of their promised Dominions. Accordingly
Genebald and his men fix'd themselves in
Maingow (the ancient name of the Territories round
Wartsburg); and in a short time made themselves masters of all that Country, which from them retains to this day the name of
Franconia.
The two chief Rivers of this Land are the
Mayn and the
Sala;Rivers. whereof the former springs out of two Fountains amongst the Hills on the borders of
Bohemia, and (passing by
Bamberg, Hassfurt, Schweinfurt, Kitzingen, Wurtzburg, Wertheim, and
Francfurt) is swallow'd by the
Rhine at
Mentz. The
German Geographers give this account of these Rivers;
Maenus Pater dicitur quia rubrum & album Maenum generat & Maritus Salae; baec autem Ʋxor dicitur Maeni, & Mater quoniam octo liberos habet fluvios minores.
This Country is encompass'd with Woods and Mountains;
Soil. but has not in it any Hills of extraordinary height. There are in it several Forests and Parks well stockt with Deer, wild Boares, and other sorts of Game. Most of the Hills (especially along the banks of the Rivers
Mayn and
Tauber) are cover'd with Vines; which yeild as delicate and rich a Wine as the best Vineyards upon the
Rhine. The fields about
Bamberg are
[Page 138]wonderfully fruitful in all manner of grain; besides their great plenty of Grapes, Apples, and other fruit. Licorise grows so plentifully hereabouts, that 'tis ordinarily carried off the field in Waggon-loads. The
Bambergers have also great store of Saffron and Melons; and hardly want any thing that's pleasant or necessary.
The Circle of
Franconia is usually divided into six lesser Principalities;
Division. whereof four are subject to Spiritual and two to Temporal Princes. The four Spiritual Princes are the Bishops of
Bamberg, Wurtzburg, and
Eeichstad, and the Master of the
Teutonic Order. The first of these hath the preeminence, and challenges a kind of Archiepiscopal Jurisdiction over the rest. The Bishop of
Wurtzburg is a more potent Prince then any of the rest; tho inferior in place to
Bamberg. The Bishop of
Eichstad has no large Dominions in
Franconia; the most of his Territories lying within the bounds of
Bavaria and
Schwaben. The great Master of the
Teutonic Order, has now little left but the bare Title to a few Bailiwicks; which seldom or never take notice of him for their Governour. The two Temporal Princes are the Burggraves of
Noremberg; who are two Princes of the House of
Brandenburg. Besides these, there are some more petty Counties and Lordships subject to other Princes of the Empire. As,
Hennenberg is under the Government of the Elector of
Saxony and the Duke of
Weimar; and several others places swear fealty to the Elector of
Mentz.
The old
Francick Dialect,
Language or
Lingua Theotisca, is the true mother of the modern High
Dutch; the word
Theotisca being nothing else then a corruption of
Die hogh Deutsch, in opposition to
Die nieder Deutsch, spoken in
Westphalia and the Lower
Saxony. M. Goldastus has taken care to preserve several fragments of Records,
Diplomata, &c. written many ages ago in this tongue; and
Martin Opitz (the
Virgil of
Germany, as he is usually stil'd) publish'd the life of
Anno Archbishop of
Coln, in the same Dialect,
A. D. 1639.
Otfrid's Historia Evangelica (written in old
Francic near 900 years ago) was published at
Basil in the year 1571; and
Willeramus the Abbot of
Mersburg's Paraphrase upon the Canticles at
Leyden A. D. 1598. Upon which the learn'd
Fr. Junius F. F. published his incomparable notes at
Amsterdam 1655. Since which time Mr.
Lambecius (the Emperor's Library-keeper at
Vienna) has made public several scraps in his curious History of some Rarities in the Imperial Library. And Mr.
Junius (before mention'd) has lately bequeath'd a noble Collection of the like monuments of Antiquity to our public Library at
Oxford. Amongst which the choicest is
Tatian's Harmonia Evangelica; illustrated with Mr.
Junius's Notes, and design'd for the Press.
WURTZBURG (call'd by
Bede, Wirceburg;Wurtzburg. by
Sigebert, Wirtiburgum and
Wirtziburgum; by
Trithemius, Paepolis, and
Marcopolis; but by most of the modern
Latin Historians and Geographers
Herbipolis) is the Metropolis of
Franconia; and has its name, as most imagine, from the variety of all manner of Herbs
(Wurtzen) growing in this place.
Conradus Celtes (the first Poet Laureat in
Germany) calls this City
Erebipolis; which word some derive from a certain Pagan God named
Erebus, never heard of by any
Francic Antiquary. I rather think that Poet's Works corrupted; and
Erebipolis carelesly written for
Herbipolis. I cannot but here take notice of
Champerius's mistake, who (tho a learned man) tells us, in his Treatise
de Mirabilibus Mundi, that there are two Bishoprics in
Germany subject to the Archbishop of
Mentz; to wit,
Wirceburgensis and
Herbipogenensis. Which is something akin to the blunder of a late Geographer who made two distinct Cities of
Strasburg and
Argentina.
'Tis by some fancy'd, that the Palace at
Wurtzburg was built long before the City; because, in the life of St,
Burchard, the Palace is call'd Old
Wurtzburg, and the Town New
Wurtzburg. Andrew Goldmayer, a whimsical Astrologer in this Town, has given us this punctual account of its age;
Wurtzburg, says he, was built
A. M. 3782, three years before the birth of our Saviour, in the two and fortieth year of the reign of the Emperor
Augustus, in the twenty-sixth year of the reign of King
Francus, on the twenty-seventh of
February, about thirty-three minutes past eleven a clock in the forenoon. But men less skill'd in calculation, tho of better understanding, then this Gentleman, say 'twas built by
Genebald, about the year of Christ 236.
Bede calls it
Pagus; but by that word questionless intends to render the
German word
Gow, which signifies a Province or County, as well as a Village.
The Bishop has supreme Jurisdiction over the whole Town, in Temporals as well as Spirituals; and sits, at his pleasure, Judg in all Causes Civil and Criminal. When he appears in public there is a Sword carried before him with this inscription,
‘Herbipolis sola judicat Ense & Stola.’ And when he says Mass, there lies before him, on the Altar, a drawn Sword; to put him in mind, that to him belongs the execution of Justice throughout the whole Principality of
Franconia.
The most remarkable sights in the Town (next to the Bishop's Palace, a stately structure on the top of an high hill beyond the River) the Hospital and great College in the
Gymnasium; both of which are mighty regular and uniform buildings, and equal most of our new built Colleges in
Oxford.
BAMBERG is said to have been at first nam'd
Babenberg,B
[...] from
Baba the Emperor
Henry the First's Sister; tho others think it rather a corruption of
Papenberg, or
Pfaffenberg; as having been anciently the Seat of the Priests or
Pfaffen.
We have already acquainted the Reader with the delicate situation of this City, abounding with all sorts of rich fruits and plants beyond any of its neighbouring Provinces; and shall here only take notice of what is observable within the Town. The old Earls of
Bamberg kept their residence at
Altenburg, about an
English mile from the Town; but the Bishops have now adays a Palace in the midst of the City on a small Island in the River
Regnitz. 'Tis a pile of building sufficiently magnificent and splendid; rarely beautified with large and fair Orchards and Gardens. The Jesuits College and Church make a good shew; and the four Spires at the Cathedral are noble.
SCHWEINFURT (or
Trajectus Svevorum) has its name from the
Swabes passing the River
Mayn in this place.
S
[...] f
[...]Goltmeyer says, this Town was built 217 years before Christ; but brings little proof for what he reports. The Town is at present neither very large nor populous; but tolerably well fortified with Walls and Rampires, and has the advantage of a good River running by. This City is by some reckon'd a part of the Principality of
Hennenberg; of which anon.
The City and Territory of
FRANCFURT upon the
MAYN.
THE Emperor
Charles the Great (King of the
Francks) having once made war against the
Saxons, and thoroughly incensed that bold and resolute people; he could get but little rest, till he had subdued them beyond all possibility of a Rebellion. For they were continually pressing in swarms upon the
Francks; whom (when they found themselves too numerous for their enemies) they would be sure to pursue to the very banks of the River
Mayn; where they had sometimes the misfortune to be cut in pieces by the
Francks, who (well acquainted with the Fords of that River) would suddenly rush in upon them, and put most of them either to flight or the sword. From these sallies 'tis thought the Town of
Francfurt had its name; it being seated upon one of these common Fords of the
Francks. This is the opinion of the ingenious
Gunther in his
Ligurinus; where he says,
quia
Carolus illic
Saxonas indomita nimium feritate rebelles
Oppugnans, rapidi latissima flumina
Maeni
Ignoto fregisse vado, mediumque per Amnem
Transmississe suas neglecto ponte cohortes
Creditur. &c.
But others say, tho without reason, that 'twas built by
Francus the first Captain of these people; and that from him it got its name. And some, as ridiculously, have call'd it
Helenopolis from the Emperor
Constantine's Mother.
The Town is divided into two parts, separated from each other by the
Mayn; whereof the greater is call'd
Francfurt, and the less
Sachsen-huss, or the House of the
Saxons. These two are united by a Stone-bridg cross the River, of thirteen or fourteen Arches; and subject to the same Magistrates. The City is strong and well fortified; and, which gives it more strength then Walls or Rampires can do, its inhabitants are unanimous professors of the
Lutheran Religion. The
Jews indeed have one street to themselves, and are allow'd a Synagogue, with the public profession of their Religion. But these are so inconsiderable an handful of men, that there is no fear of their disturbing the Government.
It is a place of great traffick, and well seated for that purpose. For the
Mayn, passing by the great Cities of
Bamberg, Schweinfurt, Wurtzburg, and
Guemund, gives it an opportunity of trading with the greatest part of
Franconia; and the same River running into the
Rhine, carries off, and brings in Commodities from the Remoter parts of the
German Empire and the
Netherlands. The greatest concourse of foreign Merchants is at the two great Fairs kept here yearly in
March and
September; at which times all sorts of Commodities, especially Books, are brought hither by the Factors of the
Germans, Hollanders, Italians, French, and
English. They have every year a Catalogue publish'd of such new Books, as are or will be brought into the Fair; and from them our
London Booksellers have of late years learn'd the trick of printing a Catalogue every Term. As long as this Mart lasts (which is usually three weeks) there is here as great variety and choice of Books as in any City in
Europe; but when that is over, the Booksellers shops are usually shut up. On the North-side of the City they have a spatious Horse-Fair; wherein yearly a vast number of good Horses are bought and sold.
Among the many Priviledges conferr'd on this City by several of the
German Emperors,
Priviledges. the chief is its being appointed the certain place for the Election of every new Emperor. This was a customary thing ever since
Arnulph the First's days; but confirm'd only by
Charles IV. Author of the
Aurea Bulla; of which we have already treated at large in the General Description of
Germany. After the Electors have given their voices in St.
Bartholomew's Church, if it does not appear (as, now there are Eight Electors, it may easily happen) which person has the most votes; it has been usual for the two Candidates to determine the quarrel by battel in the neighbouring Fields, wherein the Conqueror is carried off with great acclamations back to the City, and there proclaim'd King of the
Romans. Thus the controversie was decided betwixt
Henry Landgrave of
Thuringen and
Conrad Son to the Emperor
Frideric II. as also between
Ludowic Duke of
Bavaria and
Frideric Arch Duke of
Austria; and lastly, betwixt
Gunther Count of
Schwartzenburg and
Charles IV. These are the instances given by
Munster, and some other
German writers; all of whom
Martin Zeiller (relying on the Authority of
Chrst. Lehman, in his Chronicle of
Spire) fancies to be mistaken, and to report stories which none of the more ancient Historians (who flourish'd in the times when these things should have been transacted) ever mention.
St.
Bartholomew's Church in
Francfurt is a venerable and stately piece of Architecture; having been first built by King
Pepin, Charles the Great's Father. Some other public buildings (as the Town-Hall, several Monasteries,
&c.) are worth the seeing. But the Mineral Springs and Baths are most remarkable; which are daily visited by the Nobility and Gentry of the Town and neighbourhood. Amongst the rest, there is one Cold Bath: wherein, as
Zeiller reports, 'twas the custom in his days to wash women before they went to be married, or as soon as their month of childbed was over.
But that which gave
England the greatest cause to remember this City, was the entertainment of some of our Protestant Ministers; who, with their Congregations, fled hither in the days of Queen
Mary's bitter persecution. Yet I am sorry our Island is forced to own such a sett of Ecclesiastics; who went hence a pack of
Zuinglian Gospellers, and return'd promoters of Puritanism and rebellious Principles. They arriv'd at
Francfurt in
June A. D. 1554, where by the favour of
John Glauberge (an Alderman of the City) they were permitted the free exercise of their Religion in a Church formerly assign'd to the
French Protestants. Their chief Ring-leaders were
Whittingham, Williams, Goodman, Wood, and
Sutton; who, before they began to instruct their flocks, took upon them to reform the Liturgy and Discipline of the Church of
England. The Surplice and Litany were cashier'd as rags of the Whore of
Babylon; and the Responsals laid aside, as formal pieces of canting, which disturb'd the due course of Divine Worship. In short, the whole Liturgy (except the Lessons and Psalms) was rejected, as savouring too much of
Rome and Antichrist. Instead of the
Magnificat, Nunc dimittis, &c. they sung so many
Stanza's of
Sternhold's Rithms. After Sermon they had a prayer for all states and conditions of men (more particularly for the Church of
England, meaning their own Tribe) in imitation of our prayer for the Church Militant; and then concluded with
[Page 140]The Peace of God, &c. The noise of this upstart Church (wherewith Dr.
Scory, Bishop of
Chichester, now Superintendent at
Embden; Grindal, Sandys, and
Haddon, at
Strasburg; and
Horn, Chambers, and
Parkhurst at
Zurick; had refused to have communion) drew
Knox, the
Scotch Incendiary, from
Geneva; in hopes of making a better market here then he could do in
Switzerland. Here he arriv'd about the latter end of
September; and immediately took upon him the Superintendency of the Church;
Whittingham and the other Divines submitting themselves to his Apostleship and Government. This was highly resented by the Divines of
Strasburg and
Zurick, who were well acquainted with
Knox's principles, and knew of what dangerous consequence the promotion of such a Hotspur was like to prove. Whereupon,
Gryndal and
Chambers were sent to
Francfurt to endeavour a composure of differences, and a reunion of all the
English Protestants. But their endeavours prov'd successless and vain; tho they proposed, that the substance of the
English Liturgy being retain'd, there might be (by a general consent) an omission of some ceremonies and offices in it allow'd of. For
Knox and
Whittingham were as zealously bent against the substance as circumstantials of the Book. In the midst of these confusions Dr.
Cox (Dean of
Westminster, and a principal composer of the Liturgy in King
Edward the Sixth's days) comes to
Francfurt, attended with a great many more
English Exiles. Upon his first arrival he causes one of his company to read the Litany in the Pulpit; and not long after got
Knox expell'd the Town for publishing some treasonable expressions against the Emperor. Having thus worsted his adversary, he was resolv'd to follow the blow; which he did so effectually, as to procure an Order from the Common Council of the City, requiring all the
English Protestants to be conformable to the Discipline of their Church as contain'd in the Book of Common Prayer. But
Cox, tho at present Master of the Field, was not able to appease the dissatisfied Brethren; who follow'd
Knox to
Geneva, and there set up the profession of their former Schismatical Tenents. In short, these scandalous ruptures (first begun at
Francfurt, and afterwards carried on at
Geneva) occasion'd the irrecoverable discredit of our Church beyond Seas; and were the first seeds of those lamentable animosities which to this day threaten our destruction.
The Territory of
Francfurt (which is under the subjection of the Citizens and Magistrates of the Town) is bounded on the East with the County of
Hanaw;Territory. on the South with the Landgraviate of
Darmstat; on the West with the Archbishopric of
Mentz, and on the North with the County of
Wetteraw. The soil is generally cover'd with Woods or Vineyards; and there is little of arable or pasture ground in it.
The inhabitants of this Country are a laborious sort of people;
Inhabitants. applying themselves chiefly to the planting of Vineyards and making Wine. The poor people sell off their Wine, and drink water; having seldom the happiness to taste a draught of Beer. It was indeed anciently a proverb in
Germany:
Sachs, Bayr, Schwab, und Franck,
Die lieben all den Tranck, i. e.
The Saxons, Bavarians, Swabes,
and Francks
Are all inclin'd to excessive drinking.
But now adays that piece of debauchery is laid aside in
Franconia; and you shall seldomer meet with a drunkard here then in any other part of
Germany. The ancient
Francks were men exceedingly plain and careless in their habit; whence the
Germans to this day say of any thing that's plain and ordinary, 'tis
gut Alt Franckisch: but the case is alter'd, and the modern
Francfurters are rather foppish then slovenly in their Apparel. In this they are still imitators of their Ancestors, that they are a stout and hardy people; which is enough to keep up that honour and repute which their Ancestors have got in foreign Nations. The
Asians call all the
Europeans Francks, and the
Mahometans give the Western Christians the same name. The
Abyssines in
Africa (as
Vagetius witnesses) call the other part of the Christian World
Alfrangues; and the Country they inhabit (
i.e. Europe, and some parts of
Asia)
Francia.
The Principality of
HENNEBERG.
HENNEBERG was formerly no more then a bare County; the Earls whereof were first advanced to the honour of Princes of the Empire by the Emperor
Henry VII. in a public Convention or Diet of all the Estates of the Empire, in the year 1310. The first of these Princes was
Berthold, surnam'd the Wise; who was succeeded by
Henry. This Prince married his Daughter to
Frideric Marquise of
Misnia; bestowing on her for a Dowry the County of
Coburg. The last Prince of this Line was
George Ernest; after whose death, which hapned in the year 1583, the County of
Coburg, with the whole Principality of
Henneberg, fell into the hands of the Elector of
Saxony.
'Tis a populous and fruitful Country;
[...] bounded on the East with the Forests and Mountains of
Thuringen; on the South, with the Bishopric of
Bamberg; on the West, with the Diocess of
Wurtzburg; and on the North, with the Territories annex'd to the Abbey of
Fulda. The Castle or Palace of
Henneberg (whence the Principality has its name) is seated on the top of a Hill not far from the City
Meiningen; but has nothing in it remarkable.
SCHLEUSINGEN,
[...] which has its name from the River
Schleuss, on which 'tis seated, is accounted the chief City in the County, tho perhaps not in the Principality of
Henneberg. 'Tis famous for a
Gymnasium built here by the last Prince of
Henneberg George Ernest A. D. 1577. 'Twas for some time the chief Residence of the Earls and Princes of this Country; many of whose monuments are still to be seen in the great Church. Besides this, the Towns of
Romhilt, Meinungen, and
Koningshoven, challenge the name of Cities; but very ill deserve that character. We have already given a description of
Schweinfurt; which some Geographers bring within the bounds of this Principality.
Schmalcad was once a part of this Principality; but is not esteem'd so now.
COBURG indeed is reckon'd usually a part of the great Circle of the Upper
Saxony; [...] but lying nearer
Henneberg then any other considerable place of the Elector of
Saxony's Dominions, I think it may reasonably enough be described in this place. When, and by whom 'twas first built, is hard to determine; but in this all Geographers agree, that 'tis one of the most ancient Cities in the
German Empire. All are satisfied, that
Ptolomy means this Town by his
Melocavium, others read it
Melocabus; which in the
Greek tongue
[Page]COMITATVS WERTHEIMICI FINITIMARVMQVE REGIONVM NOVA ET EXACTA DESCRIPTIO.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page][Page 141]signifies the same with
Coburg in the
German. The City is at present tolerably large and well built; beautified and defended by a strong Castle on the top of a neighbouring Hill. In this Castle
Martin Luther was several times imprison'd, for speaking more sleightly then became him of his Superiors. During this confinement he compiled several spiritual Songs, which are sung to this day, with a great deal of devotion by his followers. In one whereof he seems more then ordinarily to commend the happiness of imprisonment. Several also of his Epistles we find dated from this place; to all which he has subscribed
Grubock instead of
Coburg, intending by this transposition of the Letters to dissemble his confinement. The
Gymnasium (wherein are maintain'd Eleven Professors, in all Faculties) was founded by
John Casimir Duke of
Saxony A.D. 1602: as was also the Duke's Palace in the City not many years before.
The City and County of
WERTHEIM.
IN the mouth of the
Tauber, on the banks of the
Mayn, is seated the City of
Wertheim; in a fruitful soil, and good air. The Citizens (whose chief trade is in making Wine) liv'd formerly in good credit; till (upon some disagreement between them and their Earls, who endeavour'd to reestablish Popery in the Town) they were brought to so great poverty and straits for the defence of their Religion, that they have scarce been able to recruit themselves to this day. However they still stick close to the
Augsburg Confession; and are zealous assertors of the honour of their Saint
Luther.
The County of
Wertheim (which is a part of the old
Francia Orientalis, as lying on the South side of the River
Mayn) is bounded on the East with the Bishoprick of
Wurtzburg; on the South with the County of
Hohenloe and the Palatinate; on the West with the
Silva Ottonica; and on the North with the large Forest of
Speshart.
This Province affords much more plenty of Corn then the Territories about
Francfurt; nor is it any way inferior to those for the goodness of its Wine. The inhabitants have here good store of Meadows and Pasture-ground for Cattel; which bring in yearly as great revenues as their best Vineyards. They have no want of wild Fowl; and are cloy'd with Venison.
Among the several Villages that have dependance upon the City of
Wertheim,Niclashausen. the most remarkable is
Niclashausen; famous for the birth and education of one
John Behaim, who was burnt for an Heretick at
Wurtzburg A. D. 1476. The occasion whereof was this: The poor Bore being melancholy and crack-brain'd, fancied daily that he saw, in his melancholy and dumpish fits, strange and terrible apparitions. One time the Virgin
Mary forsooth, amongst his other spiritual guests, gave him a visit; and grew so familiar as to communicate to him several deep intrigues and secrets. The choicest whereof was, that there lay no obligation at all upon the Burgers of
Wertheim to shew any manner of respect to their Earls or inferior Magistrates; but that they were all as free and boundless as the Rivers that water'd their Country. This was a plausible Doctrine in the ears of the Commonalty, and needed but little Divine Revelation to authorize it; so that
Behaim had presently more proselytes then all the Preachers in the Country; and would in a short time have perverted the greatest part of the County, had he not early been overpower'd and prevented by the Bishop's forces.
Erpach, Norimberg, Hanaw, &c. are purposely omitted in this place, tho parts of
Franconia; as being reserv'd for the second Volume of
Germany.
DIE Pfaltz (which is the ordinary
German word for this County) signifies no more then
Palatium,Name. whereof
Palatinus is only an Adjective Possessive. Now how
Palatium should be a name given to a County, or
Palatinus to an Earl, we have already acquainted the Reader; treating of the High
Dutch Nobility, in the General Description of
Germany. There are only at this day two Counties in the
German Empire which are usually known by the name of Counties Palatinate; whereof one (the Upper Palatinate) is part of the Dukedom of
Bavaria, and shall be treated of elsewhere.
About four or five hundred years ago,
Bounds. very little of the Country about
Huydelberg was reckon'd a part of the Lower Palatinate; but most of the Cities in this neighbourhood were either Imperial or subject to some other Prince then the Counts Palatine, who are now (by Marriage, Conquest, or Purchase) Masters of the Land. Before the
Bohemian Wars, betwixt the Emperor and
Frideric Count Palatine, and the Civil Wars of
Germany, the Territories and Revenues of this Prince were large enough to make him more formidable then any of the other Electors. But such were his misfortunes in those bloody Engagements, that he lost both the Kingdom of
Bohemia (which he contended for) and also all his own hereditary Dignities and Estates. The Upper Palatinate was seized on by the Duke of
Bavaria; and the Lower conquer'd and subdued by the King of
Spain. By the Treaty of
Munster the late Count
Charles-Ludowic, Son to the unfortunate King of
Bohemia, was restored to some part of his Father's Dominions in the Lower Palatinate; but these are of no great extent, and are still like to be lessen'd by the daily encroachments of the
French King.
This Country is much the pleasantest part of the
German Empire;
Soil. and therefore 'tis no great wonder, that the neighbouring Princes have in all ages watcht an opportunity of getting it into their clutches. The Hills are cover'd with Vines, which yeild that rich Liquor known all
Europe over by the name of
Rhenish Wine. The Plains and Valleys afford plenty of all manner of Grain and Fruit; and the Forests are plentifully stock'd with Deer and other Game. The
Rhine, passing thro the midst of the County, gives a fair advantage of exporting the commodities of this, and importing those of foreign Nations. The Rivers
Rhine and
Neccar have store of Fish; and the Hills want neither Mettals nor Minerals.
That part of the Lower Palatinate which lies on the Western banks of the
Rhine, [...], was first conquer'd by the
Romans, and afterwards by the
French; of whose Kingdom it was a part, but more immediately subject to the Earls of the
Moselle. Afterwards, when the Kingdom of
Lorrain came to be divided betwixt the Emperors of
Germany and the Kings of
France, this Territory became a share of the
German Empire; but was still possess'd by the Prince of
Moselle as before. Upon the failure of that Family it fell under the more immediate power of the Emperors; who, for many good offices done them, were pleased to bestow it on the Elector's Palatine. By the same means they became Masters of the other part of this Country, on the Eastern banks of the River; upon extirpation of the House of
Schwaben.
The present Elector Palatine is Count
Charles, [...] who was born on the last day of
May in the year 1651, and was advanc'd to the Electorate upon the late death of his Father
Charles-Ludowic A. D. 1680. He is a pious and learned Prince; and treads much in the steps of his Father, who possibly was (considering the troubles he had undergone) as learned a Prince as
Europe afforded in his time.
The Revenues of this Elector's Ancestors are said to have amounted to 100000 pounds sterling yearly. Nor can we well imagine them to have been less; when only the Silver Mines about
Amberg, in the Upper Palatinate, yeilded 60000 Crowns a year; and the passage over one Bridg cross the
Rhine brought in 20000 more. To
[Page 143]which, if we add the Revenue of all the Demesns immediately subject to these Princes, and the Church-lands, which after the Reformation were annex'd to the Electoral Estate; we may probably find the sum arise much higher. But now adays the case is alter'd; and the greatest share of the Riches as well as Honours, anciciently appropriated to this House, is enjoy'd by the Duke of
Bavaria.
The state of Religion,
[...]. both in the Upper and Lower Palatinate, has been exceedingly chang'd and varied since the first introducing of the
Augsburg Confession by Count
Frideric II. For
Frideric III. set up the Doctrine and Discipline of
John Calvin; which, soon after his death, was thrown out by
Ludowic V. a restorer of
Lutheranism. His Son,
Frideric IV. brought the
Calvinists once more in play, for the satisfaction (chiefly) of his beggarly Courtiers; who knew no readier way of raising their Fortunes, then by invading the Tythes and Glebe, with the other poor remainders of the Church's Patrimony. By which means the Clergy being reduc'd (says Dr.
Heylin) to miserable short stipends under the name of a Competency, became so contemptible, and neglected by all sorts of men, that at last the Church of the Palatinate was in the same condition with the Church of
Israel under the reign of
Jeroboam, when
Priests were made out of the meanest of the people. But a Church reduc'd to these straits was not like to be of any durable continuance, but to end ere long in misery. Accordingly, the
Bavarians and
Spaniards soon after this havock made of the Church, fell upon them, and took away their ill-gotten Estates and starv'd Religion; leaving in the place of the latter the Idolatry and Superstition of the Church of
Rome, which is to this day openly profess'd in most parts of the Elector Palatine's Dominions, notwithstanding his own firm adherence to the Doctrines of the
Calvinists.
The Chief Cities in the Lower
PALATINATE.
HEYDELBERG is the Metropolis of the Lower Palatinate, and (as some would have it) of all
Swaben. 'Tis seated on the
Neccar, which parts
Swaben and
Franconia. It has its name from a little sort of shrub resembling
Myrtle, the fruit whereof (growing plentifully on the Hills round this City) the
Germans call
Heidelbeeren; whence
Latin Authors write the name of this Town
Myrtillorum mons and
Myrtilletum. 'Tis compass'd round with Hills cover'd with Vines; except only towards the West, which way you have a good prospect over a large and pleasant plain.
The Town is neither large nor very populous; its chief beauty consisting in one fair street, set off with an uniform Market place. The Elector's Palace (on the ascent of the hill
Konigstul, which overlooks the whole Town) is a stately Fabrick; beautified with a great many delicate Gardens, Grottoes,
&c. Not far distant from which stands a strong Tower; which, for its fortifications and heighth, is hardly to be parallel'd in the
German Empire. 'Twas formerly call'd
Trutzkayser, or Defiance to the Emperor; but since the restauration of the late Elector, that disobliging name has been abolish'd; and 'tis now call'd (from some new Works made round it in form of a Star)
Stern-schantz, or Star-fort.
But the most remarkable thing in this Palace (and indeed in
Heydelberg) is the great Winefat;
Great Tun; mention'd by all that travel this Country under the name of the
Tun at Heydelberg. That which is now to be seen, in an outer building near the Palace, was built by the order of the last Elector
Charles-Ludowic; and far exceeds any of the former. It contains above 204 Fudder of Wine; which amounts to about 200 Tun of our
English measure. Instead of Hoops it is built with large Trees of knee Timber, like the ribs of a Ship; which have several Inscriptions painted and carv'd upon them, and are supported by carv'd pedestals. Upon one side of the Vessel you have a handsom Stair-case, leading to the top; where you meet with a Gallery set round with Ballisters, three and forty steps from the ground. Before the year 1664 (in which year this was built) the old Tun, tho one of the wonders of the
German Nation, was not comparable to this. 'Twas encircled with great Hoops of Iron, each of which are said to have weigh'd 12200 pound. It contain'd only 132 Fudder of Wine; and there were no more then seventeen steps to the stop.
The University was founded by Count
Rupert in the year 1387,
Ʋniversity. tho some will needs have it ten years older, and others near forty. It is still much frequented; and has given education to many eminent men in former days. Witness
R. Agricola, Munster, H. Buschius, Xylander, Paul Cisner, Pacius, Franciscus Junius P & F. Smetius, Freherus, and
Janus Gruterus.
In the great Church,
Library. dedicate to the Holy Ghost, was formerly kept the Elector's Library; of which the learned
Scaliger (in one of his Epistles to
Janus Gruterus) gives this account;
Indicem Bibliothecae vestrae sedulo legi. Locupletior est, & meliorum Librorum, quam Vaticana. One great part of this Collection was the Library of the Monastery of
Sponheim; to which (says
Trithemius, in a Letter to
Damius Curtensis A.D. 1507) no Library in the
German Empire is worthy to be compar'd, either for the rarity or multitude of Books; especially its Manuscripts in the
Hebrew, Greek, Latin, Chaldaean, Arabic, Indian, Russian, Tartarian, Italian, French, German, and
Bohemian languages. But this Treasure of Learning was siezed on, and plunder'd by the
Spanish forces; who took
Heydelberg in the year 1620. At which time a considerable number of choice Books were trodden to dirt; and the rest carried over the
Alps to the
Vatican, where they may still be seen in a long Gallery over against the Duke of
Ʋrbin's Library.
2. WORMES,
Wormes. tho more immediately subject to the Bishop of that place, is reckon'd the second Town in the Lower Palatinate.
Freher, a man admirably skill'd in the Antiquities of this Country, says, that 'twas anciently the Metropolis of the
Vangiones, the old inhabitants of these parts; and that within these few years was to be seen this Inscription in Capital Letters, over the Peacock-Gate, SPECULA VANGIONUM. But
Cluverius tells us, its old name was
Bormitomagus, or
Borbetomagus; corrupted afterwards into
Vorvetomagus, Vorvemagus, Vormagia, Guarmacia, and at last
Wormacia.
The Imperial Chamber was formerly kept here; and in those days
Worms was one of the most considerable Towns in the Empire.
Munster says, that in his time 200 Cities, Great Towns and Villages lay so near this City, that their inhabitants could daily bring into
Worms such provision as their Country afforded, and return home at night to their respective dwellings. But the many calamities which this place, and the neighbourhood,
[Page 144]underwent in the Civil Wars of
Germany, and by the late incursions of the
French forces (not to mention the miseries they have suffer'd by the often rebellion of the Citizens against their Bishop) have mightily alter'd the case; and there is now nothing of state, nor any thing truly great, in the City.
3.
Speyer. SPEYER is subject to the Elector Palatine at the same rate with
Wormes. It is thought to be the
Nemetum Civitas, or
Noviomagum mention'd by
Julius Cesar; altho
Freherus proves, that the whole Country near this place was anciently concluded under that name. 'Tis seated in a plain on the Western banks of the
Rhine; a large and populous City; which owes its security more to the number of its inhabitants then the strength of any fortifications near it. For
Gustavus Adolphus, the victorious King of
Sweden, demolish'd its Bulwarks and Rampires; being unwilling to spare so many men out of his Army as were requisite to Garrison it, and make it good against any future assault of the Imperialists. The Citizens of
Wormes and
Spire, tho
Lutherans, swear fealty to their Bishops; who are under the Jurisdiction of the Archbishop of
Mentz. There are in this Town many stately Houses and fair Churches; the chief of which is the Cathedral, beautified with four Towers.
But the great Glory of the Town is the Imperial Chamber; which was first placed at
Worms by the Emperor
Maximilian the First, and not long after fix'd at
Speyer; from whence it cannot be removed but by a general consent of the Estates of the Empire. This fills the City with a constant concourse of people from all parts of
Germany; who repair hither for the final determination of such Law-suits as they fancy have not been well decided by inferior Courts of Judicature in their own Country. For hither there lies an Appeal from any Prince's Court in the Empire. And the Electors themselves may, in some Trials at Law, be summon'd to appear before this Court.
4.
Zweybrucken. ZWEYBRUCKEN (call'd by the
French Deux-Ponts) has its name from the Bridges over two Rivers; at the confluence whereof 'tis seated. This City is signal for little more then its giving name to a small Principality in the neighbourhood; which is enjoy'd by a younger House of the Counts Palatine, who are commonly stiled
Principes Bipontini, or
Principes Gemini Pontis. These poor Princes have paid dear for some of the
French King's late victories; especially his Triumphs in the beginning of the year 1677, wherein their chief City
Zweybrucken was almost quite demolish'd. So near was it to an utter overthrow, that at this time there is hardly any thing more to be seen then the Skeleton of a City.
5.
Ʋdenheim,
or Philipsburg. UDENHEIM, a Town subject to the Bishop of
Spire; seated on the mouth of the
Saltza, and on the Eastern banks of the
Rhine. 'Twas anciently a Village; but was wall'd round by
Gerhard Bishop of
Spire, who first made it a City, and procured for it severallarge Priviledges. 'Tis conveniently seated for the command of the most considerable part of the adjacent Country; and for that reason well fortified by the Bishop of this Diocess a little before the breaking out of the Civil Wars of
Germany. These new Fortifications, begun in time of peace, gave ground to the neighbouring Princes to suspect that some more then ordinary designs were carrying on by this Prelate. Whereupon
Frederic V. (the then Elector Palatine, and Prince in chief of
Ʋdenheim) required him to desist from finishing what he had begun; which he refused to do, alledging the Emperor's Placaet for what he did. Upon this contempt, the Elector beat it down by force. For this affront to the Emperor's Authority, the Elector and his Confederates were cited to appear before the Imperial Chamber at
Speyer; wherein 'twas resolved, that they should be proceeded against with all imaginable severity. This hard usage was one of the chief motives which induced the unfortunate Elector to accept the Crown of
Bohemia; and consequently a chief cause of the Civil Wars of
Germany. In which unhappy juncture, Marquise
Spinola (the
Spanish General) thought this Town so capable of being improv'd into a strong Hold, that he repair'd the demolish'd Fortifications, and (having made the place almost impregnable) gave it the new name of
Philipsburg. By the Treaty of
Munster this Town and Castle were put into the hands of the
French; and by the late Treaty at
Nimeguen, resign'd up to the Imperialists in exchange for
Freyburg in
Brisgow. The present King of
France, before the breaking out of the late bloody Wars, caused this Inscription to be written over the great Gate at
Philipsburg:
Tuendis RHENI Finibus.
LUDOVICUS XIV. Francorum &
Navarrae Rex Christianissimus Confecto in utraque
Germania bello; restaurata ubique Pace; Munimentum
hoc suae virtutis, Assertaeque libertatis
Germaniae Monumentum firmari isthoc agere, muroque Regiis sumptibus extructo, fecit
Anno M. DC. LXVI.
Perfecit in terrorem hostium, Foederatorum Praesidium, Liliorum Subsidium, alterum
Galliae cis
Rhenum propugnaculum ac
Germaniam versus Ostium, in ferius situ non Robore.
Quod ille claudit, nemo aperit: Idem aperit, & nemo claudit.
But when afterwards, in the succeeding War, it had fall'n into the hands of the Imperialists, the Emperor raz'd out the former Inscription, and caused this following one to be written in its stead:
LEOPOLDƲS IMPERATOR CAESAR, Pius, Faelix, Augustus
VICTOR &
TRIUMPHATOR, Suscepto Juvandis Sociis, Tuendis civibus, Arcendis hostibus, necessario bello, restaurandae ubique Paci, Munimentum hoc, Vindicatae ab injectis
Gallicae servitutis compedibus Libertatis publicae, futurum ad Posteros monumentum expugnavit,
Germaniaeque postliminio restituit Anno Christianae salutis MDCLXXVI.
Terrori hostium, Tutelae Civium,
Germaniae Praesidio; alterum
Galliae cis
Rhenum receptaculum ac
Germaniam versus Ostium, Auspicato plura pari successu recuperandi augurio,
Gallis clausit,
Germanis reclusit.
Quod
Gallus claudit,
Germanus aperit.
There are some more well fortified Towns in the Lower Palatinate; such as
Manheim upon the confluence of the
Rhine and
Neccar; Coube, Franckenthal, Keysers-Lautern, Simmeren, &c. but none of so good note as those already described.
HelvetiiAlsatiaPal. RheniArch MogunArch. Trevir.Arch. Colon.CliviaGeldriaVltrajectūHollandiaApud J
[...]sso
[...]-Waesbergios Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.[Page]RHENVS Fluviorum Europae celeberrimus, cum MOSA, MOSELLA, et reliquis, in illum se exonerantibus fluminibus.Ap
[...] J
[...]ss
[...]-Waesbergios Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page]PALATINATVS AD RHENUMApud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page]Vera totius MARCHIONATUS BADENSIS, et HOCHBERGENSIS, ceterorumque Ducatum Landgravionatuum et Comitatuum ad Princeps huius nominis spectantium Geometr: Astro: Calcu: Delineatio.
Heic domus AEneae cunctis dominabitur oris.
Et gnati gnatorum, et qui nascentur ab illis.
Excudebant Janssonio-Waesbergii, Moses Pitt et Stephanus Swart.
Explicatio Notarum
•
[...] Vrbs , •
[...] Oppidum , •
[...] Pagus notabilis , •
[...] Pagus , •
[...] Arx , •
[...] Monasterium , •
[...] Pagꝰ. not. cum Arce , •
[...] Arx et Pagus , •
[...] Monast. cum Pago , •
[...] Balneum , •
[...] Acidus fons ,
and •
[...] Fodinae AErarum
BADEN (lying along the Eastern banks of the
Rhine) is a Province of no large extent, but exceedingly fruitful in Corn, Wine, and Hemp. The Country is everywhere very populous; and the Villages so thick that the whole Marquisate has been by some compared to one continued City, with fair Gardens interlac'd among the buildings.
Entz, [...]Wirmb, Phintz, and the other Rivers, afford plenty of Fish. And the Chases and Parks are so well stock'd with Venison and Fowl, that what the Nobility in other parts of the
German Empire covet as a delicacy, the Rustics of
Baden have for their ordinary food. The Merchants of
Amsterdam, Antwerp, and other great trading Towns in the
Netherlands, furnish themselves hence with those vast quantities of Flax and Hemp which they transport into foreign Nations; so that what passes for
Holland Flax here in
England, grows for the most part in the Marquisate of
Baden, and is brought thence down the
Rhine. There are in this Country whole Woods of Chesnut Trees; which feed their great Herds of Swine at a cheaper rate then the Hog-Merchants of
Whestphalia, who buy their Chesnuts at
Bremen, can afford to do.
The Quarries give the inhabitants an advantage of building fair Houses with a small cost;
[...] providing them with a good Free-stone and Marble of all colours. Amongst these (especially in the County of
Sponheim) they sometimes find Agat; which is here rarely polish'd, and sent into foreign Countries.
[...]
But this Marquisate is most peculiarly happy in the multitude and goodness of its hot Baths and Mineral-waters; especially at
Baden, of which more anon.
[...]
From the vast conflux of the Nobility from all parts of the Empire to these Baths, we may reasonably imagine, that the complaisant carriage towards strangers which we find every-where practis'd by the inhabitants of this Country, has in a great measure proceeded from their conversation with strangers, who flock hither upon the strong conceit they have of the more then ordinary virtues of these waters. They are generally a stout and hardy people; inur'd to labour and toil, or the severities of a Camp, from their their Cradle. Hence they come to be reckon'd as good Soldiers as any in the Emperor's Dominions. And 'tis not a little Honour the Country has got this last year (1681) in having their Marquise
Herman made choice of to succeed the late famous Commander
Montecuculi in the place of General of all the Imperial Forces.
No question, the Marquises of this Country are descended of an ancient stock of Princes;
Marquises. but of what old Family they are to be reputed a branch, the
German Heraulds can scarce determine. Some fetch them from the
Ʋrsins, and others from the House of
Della Scala, or the
Scaligers. Some again labour to prove, that
Baden and
Hochberg are different Families; and others, that they are but one. Other Genealogists tell us, that the Emperor
Frideric Barbaressa brought
Herman Marquise of
Verona out of
Italy, and made him the first Marquise of
Hochberg and
Baden A. D. 1155. Which will very ill agree with what the best High
Dutch Historians report of a Monastery being founded by
Herman Marquise of
Baden in his Village of
Backenau, A. D. 1116, which was confirm'd by
Bruno Bishop of
Spire in the year 1122. The most probable opinion is, that they are descended from the ancient Counts of
Vindonissa and
Altemburg in
Switzerland; from whom also the Dukes of
Zeringuen and
Tek, the Counts of
Habspurg, and the Arch-Dukes of
Austria derive their original.
At present there are two Families of the Marquises of
Baden; whereof one is a profess'd
Lutheran, and the other a zealous Papist. For this reason their interests seem different; the Marquise of
Durlach associating himself with the Count Palatine, the Marquise of
Brandenburg, the Duke of
Wirtenberg, and the Count of
Solms; and the Marquise of
Baden with the Dukes of
Bavaria, Savoy, and
Lorrain, and the Princes of
[Page 146]Hohernzollern. Each of these Princes stiles himself Marquise of
Baden and
Hochberg, Landgrave of
Sausenberg, Earl of
Sponheim and
Eberstein, Lord of
Rotel, Badenweiler, Lohr, and
Mahlberg.
The Chief Cities in the Marquisate of
BADEN.
BADEN is the Metropolis of this Marquisate;
Baden. and has its name from the vast number of Hot Baths in this place, which are said to be above three hundred. The Town stands amongst Hills, on a craggy and uneven spot of ground; so that there's hardly a strait and plain street in it. Some of the Baths are scalding hot; and all of them (running out of Rocks of Brimstone, Salt, and Allum) have the same tast. One of them is call'd the
Kettle; out of which the water boils at a wonderful rate, reeking as if set over a Furnace. These waters are reckon'd soveraign medicines for several diseases; especially the Cramp and Gout, both which distempers have been admirably cur'd by them. For this reason there is a continual resort of the
German Nobility and Gentry; who flock hither in as great companies during the whole Summer as our
English Gentry are wont to do to
Bath in
Somersetshire. See
Joh. Keiffer's description of the Baths of this Country.
2.
Durlach. DURLACH is seated on the bank of the River
Psintz, at the bottom of a high hill; on the top whereof stands a Tower, wherein contintial watch is kept for the security of the City. The streets in this Town are generally fair and strait; and the buildings stately and uniform. The Marquise's Palace far excells that at
Baden; and is large enough to receive the Court and Attendants of the greatest Monarch in
Europe. There is a
Gymnasium, kept up by some few Professors, who read public Lectures in the several Faculties. But that which is most worthy a Scholar's sight, is the rare Collection of ancient Coins and Meddals in the Marquise's Cabinet; and the Library adjoining, wherein are some pieces of good note.
3. PFORTZHEIM, says
Rhenanus,Pfortzheim. was anciently call'd
Orcynheim, and by
Latin Authors
Porta Hercyniae; because 'tis seated at the entrance into the
Schwartzwald (a part of the
Hercynian Forest) as you travel from
Spire. On one side of the Town you have fair Meadows, Pasture-grounds and Corn-fields; but the other side is nothing but Mountains and Woods. This Town was formerly subject to the Dukes of
Schwaben; but fell afterwards, upon the death of
Conradine the last Duke of that Country, into the hands of the Marquises of
Baden; who are now Lords of it.
4. GERSBACH is a Town of no great extent;
Gersbach. having in it only two Churches, whereof one is frequented by
Lutherans, and the other by Papists. The Marquises of
Baden (as Counts of
Eberstein, a Castle not far from this Town) have here a Palace, and Court of Judicature for the determining all Controversies and Law-suits arising within the bounds of this small County.
5. BADENWEILER, a City betwixt
Freyburg and
Basil,Badenweiler. is a part of the Marquisate of
Baden, tho seated in the Territories of
Brisach. The hot Baths of this place, sprung out of Hills of Allum, Brimstone, and Niter; but their Waters are not so hot here as at
Baden. Drunk inwardly, they have been known to cure Asthmaes, and all manner of stoppage and shortness of breath, as also old and inveterate Agues and Feavers. By washing and bathing, they cure the Itch, Scab, and Leprosie; and are an excellent remedy against old sores and bruises.
Rotel, Sponheim, Susenburg, and
Mahlberg,Badenweiler. are places which have been formerly of some note, by reason of the Castles or Palaces of some ancient Princes of the Empire, who have borrow'd their Titles from the ancient Seat of their Family. And hence the names of these old Towns are still registred in the Titles of the Marquises of
Baden; but otherwise they have nothing worthy of a description.
ALSATIA, or
Elsass, has its name, in all probability, from the River
Ell or
Ill, which runs thorow it. Whence
Elsassen (as the
Germans call the inhabitants of this Country) signifies no more then
die an der Elle Sassen oder wohnen, i.e. the people that dwell on the banks of the
Elle. Some I know would have the ancient name of the Country to be
Edel-Sassen, intimating a delicate and Noble Seat; our Countryman Mr.
Sheringham (as we have elsewhere observed) makes this a part of the Territories of the ancient
Saxons, and by them call'd
Edel-Sassen, or Noble; as a piece of the richest and pleasantest ground they were masters of.
The Country is certainly (as these later Etymologists would make it) as rich and noble a Province as any in the
German Empire; and as plentifully stock'd with all manner of necessaries, especially Corn and Wine. The Hills are commonly cover'd with Chesnut-Groves; and
Leberthal, with some other Valleys, afford good store of Copper, Lead, and other Mettals. In some places you meet with rich Meadows and fat Pasture-grounds; which furnish the inhabitants with good Butter, and a sort of Cheese equal if not preferable to the best in
Holland.
'Tis bounded on the East with
Schwaben and the Dukedom of
Wirtenberg; on the South with
Switzerland; on the West with the Dukedom of
Lorrain; and on the North with the County Palatinate of the
Rhine. The length of it is reckon'd at about twenty
German miles; tho the bredth scarce any where exceeds four.
This whole Land was formerly subject to the Kings of the
Francks; and by their King
Hilderic bestow'd, under the name of a Dukedom, on his Favorite
Etico, in the year 684.
Etico was succeeded by his Son
Adelprecht; who left his two Sons
Linfrid and
Eberhard Coheirs of the Dukedom. After this the Dukes of this Country were driven out of their Dominions by
Charles Martel, Hofmeister (or Lord Chamberlain of the Houshold) to the King of
France. But in the days of the Emperor
Otho I. the Counts of
Kiburg, the Emperor's Kinsmen, got possession of
Alsatia; and, as some will have it, were made the first Landgraves of this Country. Others say, that 'twas first divided into two Landgraviates in the reign of the Emperor
Otto III. In whose time the Upper
Alsace came first into the hands of the Counts of
Hapsburg; who from thenceforward were Lords of that part of the Country. The Lower
Alsace was afterwards by the Earls of
Ottingen (who got the possession of it after the decease of
Henry its Landgrave without issue) sold to the Bishop of
Strasburg; who is like to continue Master of it so long as the
French King will give him leave.
Alsatia is usually divided into the Upper and Lower
Alsace; besides the lesser Territories of
Ortenaw, Brisgow, Hagenaw, Sungaw, &c. But most of these petty Provinces may be referr'd to the Upper
Alsace, and coming within the bounds of the Upper Landgraviate; and the rest to the Lower.
The chief Cities and great Towns in the Lower
ALSACE.
NEXT to
Strasburg (of which anon) the chief Town in the Lower
Alsace is
Zabern,Zabern. or
Elsasszabern; as 'tis sometimes call'd, to distinguish it from the other two Cities of the same name, one in the Palatinate and the other in
Bergen. 'Tis thought to be the
Tabernae, mention'd by
Antonine and
Marcellinus, one of the old
Roman Garrisons; demolish'd by the ancient
Germans, but rebuilt by
Julian the Apostate. The City is defended by a strong Castle on the top of a high Rock; up to which you are led by a narrow and rugged way, cut out of the hard craggy
[Page 148]Mountain by
William III. Bishop of
Strasburg. This Prelate and his successors have usually kept their Residence at
Zabern, where they had also erected a Court of Judicature for the decision of all Controversies arising within the Precincts of their Diocess; but 'tis thought, that the
French King, who pretends to be Master of the place, will employ the Castle otherwise hereafter.
2.
Weissenburg. WEISSENBURG is an Imperial City; but reckon'd a part of the Lower
Alsace, as being incorporated into the Province of
Hagenaw. Beatus Rhenanus says, that 'twas the Seat of the ancient
Sebusii; and therefore 'tis call'd by
Latin Authors
Sebusium. Dagobert King of
France presented this City with a Crown of Silver, gilt with Gold, and adorn'd with a great many Turrets and other flourishes of Art; whose diameter was four and twenty foot. In remembrance of which noble present, the Citizens had a Crown of Copper of the same bigness hung up in their great Church; which continued there till, in the late Civil Wars of
Germany, 'twas broken in pieces by the Soldiery; who siezed on it for good plunder. The same King granted the Citizens of
Weissenburg priviledg to hunt and fish within the compass of a certain circle; which in some places reaches two
German miles from the Town, in others no more then one. This Circle is in their Charter stiled
Emunitas; which the modern inhabitants of the place have corrupted into
Mundat. The Emperor
Charles IV. made the Abbot of this place (as well as of the Monasteries at
Fulda, Kempten, and
Murbach) a Prelate of the Empire; bestowing on him the Title of a Prince, and allowing him to sit at his feet in all Diets and other public Assemblies of the States General of the Empire.
3.
Brisach. The Imperial City
Hagenaw is seated between the two Rivers
Motter and
Sorna; about four
German miles from
Strasburg. 'Tis encompassed round with a sandy Soil and thick Woods; but at some distance from the Town there are large and pleasant Corn-fields, with good store of Vineyards. It has anciently been reckon'd one of the four chief Villages of the
German Empire (and indeed it may now as properly as ever be term'd a Village, since 'twas burnt to the ground by the
French Forces
A. D. 1677); but had in it, even in those days, the supreme Court of Judicature for both the Upper and Lower
Alsace. Afterwards the Emperor
Frideric I. wall'd it round; beautifying it with a fair Palace, wherein himself for some time kept his Residence, and making it an Imperial City. At the Jesuits College was to be seen, before the Wars with
France, a large old
Roman Aries, or Battering-Ram; a piece of Antiquity of great value; but whether tis now to be met with, I know not.
To these we may add
Moltzheim, Hasle on the
Brusch, Seltz, and some few Towns more; places of no great note before they were visited by the
French Armies, and of much less since.
The chief Cities and great Towns in the Ʋpper
ALSACE.
THE City of
Brisach (call'd by
Antonine, in his Itenerary,
Mons Brisiacus) is the Metropolis of
Brisgow; the old inhabitants of which Province we find often mention'd in
Latin Historians by the name of
Brisigavi or
Brisigavii. B. Rhenanus, and some other High
Dutch Antiquaries, are of opinion, that
Brisach stood formerly on the Western banks of the
Rhine; because on that side the old
Romans used to build their Forts, and on the East of this Town there is still a great hollow valley which they take for the ancient Channel of the
Rhine. But
Cluverius is of a contrary opinion; and proves, that the Emperor
Valentinian (whom all allow to have been the first Founder of
Brisach) built Castles on both sides the River. The Town stands on the top of a round Hill, excellently well fortified both by nature and art. But they have only one deep Well, which supplies the whole City with water; the River being at some distance, and the passage troublesom. In the Civil Wars of
Germany this Town was besieged and taken by the Duke of
Saxon-Weimar; whose Forces were, with a great deal of courage and gallantry, resisted by the Imperialists for four months together. During which time the besieged were brought to those extremities, as to dig up the dead bodies of their Soldiers, after they had been some days buried, and to eat their flesh. In this siege 80000 men are said to have been slain, and about 1100000 Rixdollars spent in ammunition, on both sides. Since that time (
A. D. 1638) the
French, under whose Banners the foremention'd Duke of
Saxony then bore Arms, have remain'd masters of this City; wherein their present victorious King, having of late repair'd its Fortifications, keeps a strong Garrison and a Court of Judicature (in imitation of the Chamber at
Spire) which decides all Controversies in his new Conquests, levies Contributions, gives him right to all neighbouring Villages, as Dependancies on some great Towns yeilded up to him by the late Treaty at
Nimiguen, &c.
2. FREYBURG in
Brisgow was at first a Village built by a company of Miners; who wrought at the Silver and Copper Mines about a
German mile from
Brisach, and in a short time grew so rich as to purchase the Estates and Titles of Noblemen. By this means their Village grew up into a large City; which was able, upon a very short warning, to send into the field three thousand fighting men. This City fell into the hands of the House of
Austria A. D. 1386, and was by the present Emperor resign'd up to the
French (together with its Villages of
Lehn, Mezhausen, and
Kirchzart) in exchange for
Philipsburg. There are in the Town fourteen Religious Houses, and an University founded by
Albert Arch-Duke of
Austria in the year 1450. The Citizens are excellent Artists at polishing all manner of pretious stones; such especially as are found in
Lorrain and the neighbouring Countries.
3. Near the place where the Imperial City
Colmar is now seated, stood the ancient
Argentuaria; which was conquer'd by
Gratian the Emperor
A. D. 378, and afterwards destroy'd by the
Gothic General
Attila. Out of the ruins of this old Town,
Colmar (or
Cole-market) was first built. A City which stands in a plain and fruitful Country; and formerly so populous that in the great Church at an Easter-time 'twas usual to have near four thousand Communicants. But the Civil Wars of
Germany (wherein 'twas taken by the
Swedish forces, and by them resign'd to the
French) and the late engagements with the King of
France's Armies, have made it as desolate of inhabitants as houses.
4. MUMPELGART (call'd by
Latin Authors
Montisbeligardium, or
Mons jucundi aeris; from the sweet and wholesom air breath'd from the top of the Hills round this place) is the
[Page][Page]VTRIUSQUE ALSATIAE SUPERIORIS AC INFERIORIS NOVA TABVLAApud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page]TERRIROTIUM ARGENTORATENSEApud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Ptephanum Swart.
[Page][Page 149] chief Town in a County of the same name, subject to the Dukes of
Wirtenburg. 'Tis seated on the utmost bounds of the
German Empire towards
Burgundy; whence its inhabitants are a mixt people, consisting of
French, Dutch, Lorrainers, Sabaudians, Switzers, and
Burgundians; and the language they speak, a kind of mungrel
French-Dutch tongue. The Citizens Houses are generally stone buildings, three or four stories high; and the streets tolerably uniform and large. Without the Gates of the City you have delicate Groves and Gardens; among which the chief is the Count's Garden of pleasure, beautified with a costly Summer-House, and enrich'd with all manner of rare Plants and Herbs.
Mulnhausen (by most late Geographers placed in the Upper
Alsace.) is one of the Confederate Cities of
Switzerland. Keysersberg and
Turcheim are Imperial Cities; but of no great note.
The City and Bishopric of
STRASBURG.
ARGENTINA is a name of a Monkish invention, instead of
Argentoratum; as well as
Moguntia for
Moguntiacum. To omit other frivolous conjectures about the Etymology of the words
Argentoratum and
Strasburg, we shall satisfie ourselves with the fancy of the learned
Cluverius; who thinks the ancient name of this famous City to have been
Argen Straaten, or Bad-street; which might easily, by adding a
Latin termination, be turn'd into
Argentratum, or
Argentoratum; and afterwards (by omitting the two first syllables, and annexing
burg, to denote some new built Fort) with as much ease turn'd to
Straetburg, or
Straesburg.
This City (tho at first design'd only for a strong Fortification) is now one of the most populous and best trading Towns in
Germany. The Citizens are generally courteous and rich; most of their Merchants and Magistrates having Houses fit to entertain so many Princes of the Empire.
The Cathedral is one of the Wonders of
Germany; described at large by
Os. Schadaeus, in a particular Tract upon this subject by him publish'd at
Strasburg A. D. 1617. The Tower of this Church is the highest in the
German Empire, nay possibly in
Europe, or the whole world. Some have reckon'd it perpendicular, from the top of the Spire to the ground, at 574, others 575 geometrical feet; but
Schadaeus, who seems most accurate in his computation, says 'tis 489 feet and 8 inches.
Yet much more famous is this Cathedral for the great Clock in it; which (by the Honourable Mr.
Boyle, and some others of our ingenious
Virtuosi) has been mention'd as an instance of the late great improvements of Arts Mechanical. 'Twas finished in the year 1574, at the charge of the Magistracy of the Town, by one
Habrecht, a famous Artificer; of whose work they have many more pieces in the same kind. This workman has his Instructions from
D. Wolckenstein and
Conr. Dasypodius, two learn'd Mathematicians; the latter whereof has publish'd a Tract about this Clock. The first thing presented to your view is a Celestial Globe, with all the motions of Planets, fix'd Stars,
&c. Behind which there is a perpetual Almanack; wherein the day of the month is pointed at by a Statue standing by. The Hours are crow'd by a gilt Cock; and afterwards struck on a Bell by an Angel; not far from which stands another Angel with an Hour-glass in its hand, which it turns round as soon as the Clock has done striking. The first quarter is struck by a Child with an Apple; the second by a Youth with an Arrow; the third by a full aged man with a Tip-staff; and the fourth by an old man with his Cane. On the outside of the Church are shew'n the true increase and decrease of the Moon, with the motion of the Sun through all the Signs of the Zodiack. For a larger Description of this masterpiece of Art, I refer the Reader to the Treatises writ on this Subject by
Dasypodius, Schadaeus, Frischlin, &c.
The Bishopric of
Strasburg was founded by King
Dagobert; who made St.
Amandus the first Bishop of this Diocess. Of late years there have been several quarrels betwixt the Bishop and Citizens; who to this day are unwilling to allow their Prelate the Jurisdiction that he lays claim to.
The Armory of this Town is well worth the seeing. But their University makes more noise in the world then it ought to do.
The Reader may expect a more accurate account of the present state of some parts of
Alsace, when we come to treat of the
French King's Conquests, in the Volume of
France.
WIRTEMBERG is a Province of the great Circle of
Schwaben; a Country sufficiently provided for with all manner of profits and pleasures. The Mountains are full of Mines and Vineyards, and the Valleys are well stock'd with large Herds of Cattel.
'Tis of no great extent, but so populous that there is in it ('tis said) 63 Cities, 158 great Towns, 645 Villages, and 14 Abbeys. Before the Civil Wars of
Germany, the Duke of
Wirtemberg was able to raise an Army of 24000 men in 24 hours; but that calamitous War lessen'd the number of Soldiers in this as well as other Provinces of the Empire.
The Princes of this Country were anciently no more then Counts; but raised to the Dignity of Dukes by the general consent of all the Estates of the Empire, in a Diet held at
Worms A. D. 1495. The reason of which advancement was the great improvements they had made of their Estates; wherein was contain'd only the Castle of
Wirtemberg, with some few Villages depending thereon.
When Duke
Ʋlric was driven out of all his Territories in the year 1519, his whole Dukedom was sold to the Emperor
Charles V. Afterwards, in the year 1534, the Duke was restored to his Dominions by the assistance of
Francis I. King of
France, and
Philip Landgrave of
Hesse; the former whereof aided him with Moneys, and the latter with Men and Arms. Whereupon, he sent his Son
Christopher to
Ferdinand King of the
Romans; who agreed, that the House of
Wirtemberg should be again restor'd to their Dutchy, paying homage to the House of
Austria. This order was observ'd till the year 1599, wherein (by a Covenant made betwixt the Emperor
Rodolph II. and
Frideric I. Duke of
Wirtemberg) the Dukedom was reduc'd to its ancient state; the House of
Austria only reserving to it self the Title and Arms (which the Emperor now bears) of
Wirtemberg, and the right of Succession upon failure of Heirs male.
The Metropolis of this Province (and place of the Duke's residence) is
Stutgard; seated not far from the banks of the
Neccar, about the middle of the Country.
Stutgard signifies properly a Yard to train young Horses in; and such some Antiquaries tell us was formerly the place where this City now stands. This story they confirm by the Arms of the Town; which is a young Colt let loose. But I rather think this only a
Rebus taken from the name of the City; which may possibly have no more affinity with the true Etymology of the word then the
Ox in the Arms of our City of
Oxford has with the ancient name of this Town. The Duke's Palace is a noble Fabrick; adorn'd with most delicate Groves and Gardens of pleasure. In these you have as fair rows of Orange-trees, as well contriv'd Grottoes and Waterworks, and as stately a Pleasure-house as at any Prince's Palace in the Empire. But the Houses of private Citizens fall short of this pomp and grandeur. Most of them are wooden buildings; and of a very despicable height.
TUBINGEN is the second City in the Dukedom; not many years since govern'd by its own Counts, who kept their usual residence at
Leichteneck in
Alsace. This place is at present most remarkable for its University; of which
Duke May (Counsellor to the Duke of
Wirtemberg, and therefore probably as much a Courtier as an Historian upon this subject) gives the following character:
‘Altho the Duke of
Wirtemberg be exceedingly at his ease; tho he have whatever he can wish; tho every day present him some new delicacies made or growing upon his own Territories; yet he would b
[...] much less spoken of in foreign Countries,
[...]Eberhard the Wise had not founded the Uni
[...] versity at
Tubingen, if
Christopher the Prudence had not projected the College there, if
Lew
[...] the Pious had not built it, if
Frideric the Mag
[...] nanimous had not endow'd it, if
John Frider
[...] the Peaceable had not preserv'd, and if
Eberhard’
[Page][Page]WIRTENBERG DVCATVS.Apud Janssonio-Waesbergios, Mosem Pitt et Stephanum Swart.
[Page][Page 151]‘the Constant had not rais'd it to a higher degree for the good of the Princes, Lords, and Gentlemen of the Empire.’ None are permitted entrance into this Society, but such as are descended from some ancient Family, and have still the repute of good Gentlemen.
There is also at
Tubingen a supreme Court of Judicature; wherein all Controversies, in Cases Civil and Criminal, are determin'd by five of the Nobility, four Doctors in the University, and as many Burgers of the Town. Besides this, there is a Consistory of Divines and Civilians who take cognisance of all Ecclesiastical matters.
The first Rector of the University in this Town was
Joh. Nauclerus, whose Historical works
Philip Melancthon took great care to publish in the year 1500. A Book highly commended by the learned
Camerarius in his life of
Melancthon. The only famous men, I think, whom they can brag of for this last age, are
Martin Crufius, and
Will. Schickard; both singularly well skill'd in the Oriental Languages. Besides these, I fancy 'twill be as difficult to find a Scholar worth the mentioning bred at
Tubingen, as to meet with one City or great Town among the Hundreds of that name in the Dukedom of
Wirtemberg, which merits a particular description in this place.
FOR the literal faults which may have escap'd the Press there needs no Apology: because these are neither so numerous nor so gross as to interrupt the sense or disturb the Reader. And some of the more material
Errata may be excused, by considering the different times wherein several Paragraphs of the Book (seemingly contradictory) were pen'd. For Example: 'Twas true (in the year 1680, when the sixth sheet was printed) that
Augustus Duke of
Saxony was Administrator of
Magdeburg and
Halle; as is said
Pag. 21.
Col. 2. And as true that the present Elector of
Brandenburg was Duke of both those places at the penning of
Pag. 92. Some other considerable mistakes we have taken notice of, may be thus Corrected:
I. Instead of
Halberstadt, pag. 9.
col. 2.
lin. 9. Read,
Hildesheim, as in
pag. 51.
col. 1.
II. For
Charles IV.
Wenceslaus, &c.
pag. 33.
col. 1.
lin 35. Read,
Wenceslaus Charles the Fifth's Son, &c. Since, as the best
German Historians inform us,
Wence slaus was the first of their Emperour's that had the Title of King of the
Romans conferr'd on him.
Additional Subscribers since the Publishing of the first Volume of the
Atlas.
MICHAEL Lord Arch-Bishop of ARMAGH, Lord Primate, and Lord Chancellor of Ireland.
-Earl of ARRAN Eldest Son to D. Hamilton.
—Earl of ANNANDALL in Scotland.
Sir Joseph Ash of Twittenham, in Middlesex.
Richard Atkins of Newport-Pagnell
Esq
Sir Robert Atkins.
Tho. Allen M. D. and Fellow of the Colledge of Physitians, London. Ashburnham
Esq
Sir Thomas Allen of Sumirliton-Hall, Suff.
John Berkly,
Esq
Robert Berkly
Esq
Nich. Barbon M. D. London.
Roger Braddyl of London
Esq
Sir John Brownlow.
Tho. Buck of Westwick Cambridge sh.
Esq
David Bruce M. D. London.
Sir Will. Barkham of Norfolk Baronet.
Charles Cockaine
Esq Son and Heir to Obrian Vicount Cullen of Righton Northampton shire.
Sir Charles Caesar of Benington, Hartford sh.
Sir Robert Cotton of Hattly St. George in Bedford shire Baronet.
Sam. Craddock B. D. of Wickhambrook, Suff.
JAMES Lord Duffes of Scotland.
The Honourable MARGARET Danby Widdow.
Sir Will. Domvile his Majesties Attorney General in Ireland.
Duncan Dee of the Inner Temple,
Esq
—Davis M. D. of Exeter.
John Donelan of the County of Galaway in Ireland,
Esq
Peter Falaiseau
Esq
Fergus Faril of the County of Longford in Ireland,
Esq
—Ford
Esq
Andrew Forrester
Esq Secretary to the Duke of Lauderdale.
Henry Ferneley of Dublin in Ireland
Esq
Henry Goldwell,
Esq
Jo. Goodwin Rector of East Barnet, Harfordshire.
Sir Henry Gough of Pury-Hall, Stafford-sh.
LEWIS Gordon Marquis of Huntley.
James Griffin
Esq
Tho. Groundes
Esq
JOHN Lord Haughton eldest Son to the Earl of Clare.
Sir PHILIP Howard Coll. and Capt. of the Queens Troops of his Majesties Guards.
John Goven of Scotland
Esq
—Husbands
Esq in Barbados.
John Hillersden of the Inner Temple
Esq
Will. Hyde of Langtoft, Lincoln-shire
Esq
John Horne
Esq
Sir John Hobart of Norfolk Baronet.
—Holt of Brazen-nose Coll. Oxon.
Tho. Ibbot Rector of Beecham-wells, Norf.
JOHN Earl of Kildare, in Ireland.
Tho. Ken D. D. Chaplain to her Highness the Princess of Orange.
Sir Will. Litton of Harfordshire.
John Launce Merchant in Marseille.
Tho Lardners Citizen of London.
Oliver Long, Captain of a Company in his Majestie Foot-Guards in Ireland.
ALEX. Stuart Earl of Murray.
Sir Tho. Murray Lord Register of Scotland.
Christopher Merret M. D. of the Colledge of Physitians London.
Streynsham Master
Esq Agent for the East-India Company in the East Indies.
John Madden of Dublin Ireland,
Esq
Patrick Murray of Scotland
Esq
RODERICK Mackenzie of Scotland,
Esq
Mayor, Aldermen, and Common Council of the City of Norwich.
Jerome Neschu
Esq Secretary to her Royal Highness.
—EARL of Panmeur.
—Lord PITMEDEN of Scotland.
Will. Pincke of London.
John Parr Citizen of London.
Sir John Parsons Knight and Baronet.
Will. Prince
Esq Gentleman-Usher to her Royal Highness.
Richard Palfrey of Dublin Ireland,
Esq
Henry Parker
Esq Secretary to the Lord Bishop of London.
Will. Paynter, Fellow of Exeter Coll. Oxon.
Sir John Parker of Dublin in Ireland.
Francis Puy of Isham, Northamptonsh.
Esq
JOHN Earl of Rutland.
ALEX. Lord Bishop of Ross in Scotland.
Matthew Reeve Goldsmith in Bath.
Charles Roderick of Eaton.
Charles Rogers
Esq Gentleman-Usher to her Majesty.
Jo. Speccott
Esq of Penble Cornwal.
Jo. Stronge of Trinity Coll. Cambridge.
Jo. Staindbrook of Westminster.
Will. Stokeham M. D. London.
—Stephens Fellow of Exeter Coll. Oxon.
Sir Tho. Spencer of Yarnton Bar. Oxfordsh.
Sir Edward Smith of Hill-Hall Bar. Essex.
Sir Bryon Stapleton of Milton Bar. Yorkshire.
Ralph Stowell of Lawham
Esq Somersetshire.
Tho. Sampson Citizen of London.
James Scott
Esq in Bristol, Scotland.
Will. Strickland
Esq of Exon. Coll. Oxon.
Sir Jo. Topham one of the Masters in Chancery in Ireland.
Sigismund Trafford of Lincolnshire
Esq
—Trinity Coll. in Dublin, Ireland.
Charles Toriano of London, Merchant.
Sir Edward Villiers.
Peter Vande-Putt, Merchant in London.
—Usher
Esq of Ireland.
HENEAGE Earl of Winchelsea.
OTHER Windesser
Esq
Philip Ward
Esq
Sir George Walker of Bushy-Hall Harfordsh.
Savil Whittle Chyrurgion to his Majesty.
—Waterhouse M. D. of Exon. Devonsh.
Will. Warder of Westminster
Esq
Rob. Warden of Chester
Esq Dean and Chapter of Worcester.
Charles Willoughby M. D. of Dublin in Ireland.
Edw. Wright of Scotland
Esq
JOHN Lord Yester of Scotland.
Benj. Young Minister of Enfield Middlesex.
Books Printed at the Theatre in
Oxford, since the Publishing of the first Volume of the Atlas: And are to be sold by
Moses Pitt at the
Angel in St.
Paul's Church-Yard,
London,
A Short View of the late Troubles in
England, briefly setting forth their Rise, Growth, and Tragical Conclusion. As also, some Parallel thereof with the Barons Wars in the time of King
Henry the Third. But chiefly with that in
France, called the Holy League, in the Reign of
Henry the Third, and
Henry the Fourth, late Kings of that Realm. To which is added, a Narrative of the Treaties at
Uxbridge, An. 1644 by Sir
Will. Dugdale, Garter King at Arms,
fol. price bound 16
s.
The Book of Common-Prayer, and Administration of the Sacraments, and other Rites and Ceremonies of the Church, according to the Use of the Church of
England, with the
Psalter, or
Psalms of
David, in
folio, of a large
Roman Letter, both upon ordinary and fine Paper.
Plantarum Historiae Universalis Oxoniensis, Pars secunda, seu Herbarum distributio nova, per Tabulas cognationis & affinitatis ex Libro Naturae observata & detecta. Authore
Roberto Morison, Med. D. & Professore Botanico Regio.
folio.
Lactantius de mortibus persecutorum liber, accesserunt S. S. Perpetuae & Felicitatis S Maximiliani. S. Felicis.
Of the Unity of the Church, a Discourse. written 1430 years since, in the time of
Decius the persecuting Emperour. By
Cyprian, Bishop of
Carthage and
Martyr; most useful for allaying the present Heats, and reconciling the Differences among us.
quarto, price 6.
d.
Directions for the Book-binder to place the Maps of this second Volume of the
English Atlas.